Frenic-VG User Manual

High Performance, Vector Control Inverter
User's Manual
MEHT286
Copyright © 2012 Fuji Electric Co., Ltd.
All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced or copied without prior written permission from Fuji Electric
Co., Ltd.
All products and company names mentioned in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective holders.
The information contained herein is subject to change without prior notice for improvement.
Preface
This manual provides all the information on the FRENIC-VG series of inverters including its operating
procedure, operation modes, and selection of peripheral equipment. Carefully read this manual for proper use.
Incorrect handling of the inverter may prevent the inverter and/or related equipment from operating correctly,
shorten their lives, or cause problems.
The table below lists the other materials related to the use of the FRENIC-VG. Read them in conjunction with
this manual as necessary.
Name Material No. Description
Product scope, features, specifications, external

Catalog MEH659
drawings, and options of the product
Acceptance inspection, mounting & wiring of the
inverter, operation using the keypad, running the motor
Instruction Manual INR-SI47-1580-E for a test, troubleshooting, and maintenance and
inspection
The materials are subject to change without notice. Be sure to obtain the latest editions for use.
Guideline for Suppressing Harmonics in Home Electric and General-purpose

Appliances
Our three-phase, 200 V class series inverters of 3.7 kW or less (FRENIC-VG series) were the products of
which were restricted by the "Guideline for Suppressing Harmonics in Home Electric and General-purpose
Appliances" (established in September 1994 and revised in October 1999) issued by the Ministry of
Economy, Trade and Industry.
The above restriction, however, was lifted when the Guideline was revised in January 2004. Since then, the
inverter makers have individually imposed voluntary restrictions on the harmonics of their products.
We, as before, recommend that you connect a reactor (for suppressing harmonics) to your inverter. As a
reactor, select a "DC REACTOR" introduced in this manual. For use of the other reactor, please inquire of us
about detailed specifications.
Japanese Guideline for Suppressing Harmonics by Customers Receiving

High Voltage or Special High Voltage
Refer to this manual, Appendix B for details on this guideline.
i
How this manual is organized
This manual contains Chapters 1 through 13 and Appendices.
Chapter 1 OVERVIEW
This chapter describes the overview, features and the control system of the FRENIC-VG series and the
recommended configuration for the inverter and peripheral equipment.
Chapter 2 SPECIFICATIONS
This chapter describes specifications of the output ratings, control system, dedicated motor specifications,
and terminal functions for the FRENIC-VG series of inverters. It also provides descriptions of the external
dimensions, examples of basic connection diagrams, and details of the protective functions.
Chapter 3 PREPARATION AND TEST RUN

This chapter describes the operating and storage environments, installation and wiring, typical connection
diagram, names and functions of keypad components, keypad operation, and test run procedure.
Chapter 4 CONTROL AND OPERATION

This chapter provides the main block diagrams for the control logic of the FRENIC-VG series of inverters. It
also contains overview tables of function codes and details of function codes.
Chapter 5 USING STANDARD RS-485

This chapter describes the use of standard RS-485 communications ports and provides an overview of the
FRENIC-VG Loader.
Chapter 6 CONTROL OPTIONS

This chapter describes the FRENIC-VG's control options.
Chapter 7 APPLICATION EXAMPLES

This chapter gives application examples of the FRENIC-VG series of inverters.
Chapter 8 SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT

This chapter describes how to use a range of peripheral equipment and options, FRENIC-VG's configuration
with them, and requirements and precautions for selecting wires and crimp terminals.
Chapter 9 SELECTING OPTIMAL MOTOR AND INVERTER CAPACITIES

This chapter provides you with information about the inverter output torque characteristics, selection
procedure, and equations for calculating capacities to help you select optimal motor and inverter models. It
also helps you select braking resistors and inverter mode (HD, MD, or LD).
Chapter 10 ABOUT MOTORS

This chapter details vector motors that can be connected to the FRENIC-VG series of inverters.
Chapter 11 OPERATION DATA

This chapter provides the characteristics data of the FRENIC-VG series of inverters running.
ii
Chapter 12 REPLACEMENT DATA
When replacing the former inverters (VG, VG3, VG5) with FRENIC-VG, refer to this section.
Chapter 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
This chapter describes troubleshooting procedures to be followed when the inverter malfunctions or detects
an alarm or a light alarm condition. In this chapter, first check whether any alarm code or the "light alarm"
indication (l-al) is displayed or not, and then proceed to the troubleshooting items.
Appendices
iii
CONTENTS
Chapter 1 OVERVIEW
1.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................................. 1-1
1.1.1 Industry-best control performance ..................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1.2 System support................................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1.3 Extensive built-in functionality.......................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1.4 Broad capacity and application ranges............................................................................................... 1-1
1.1.5 Global support.................................................................................................................................... 1-2
1.2 Features..................................................................................................................................................... 1-3
1.2.1 Best-in-industry control performance ................................................................................................ 1-3
1.2.2 Support for various control methods (multi-drive function) .............................................................. 1-4
1.2.3 Broad capacity range/flexible application range ................................................................................ 1-4
1.2.4 User program functionality (option: UPAC)*1 .................................................................................. 1-4
1.2.5 Extensive network support................................................................................................................. 1-5
1.2.6 Available inverter support loader ....................................................................................................... 1-5
1.2.7 Extensive built-in functionality.......................................................................................................... 1-6
1.2.8 Extensive maintenance and protective functionality.......................................................................... 1-7
1.2.9 Environmental considerations............................................................................................................ 1-8
1.2.10 Simple, interactive keypad ............................................................................................................... 1-10
1.2.11 Compliance with overseas standards................................................................................................ 1-11
1.2.12 Compliance with functional safety standards................................................................................... 1-11
1.2.13 Compatibility with legacy models ................................................................................................... 1-11
1.3 Control Methods ..................................................................................................................................... 1-12
1.3.1 Control method features and applications........................................................................................ 1-12
1.3.1.1 Open-loop speed control .......................................................................................................... 1-12
1.3.1.2 Closed-loop speed control........................................................................................................ 1-14
Chapter 2 SPECIFICATIONS
2.1 Standard Model 1 (Basic Type)................................................................................................................. 2-1
2.1.1 HD (High Duty)-mode inverters for heavy load ................................................................................ 2-1
2.1.2 MD (Medium Duty)-mode inverters for medium load....................................................................... 2-3
2.1.3 LD (Low Duty)-mode inverters for light load.................................................................................... 2-4
2.1.4 Rated current derating........................................................................................................................ 2-6
2.2 Common Specifications.......................................................................................................................... 2-10
2.3 External Dimensions............................................................................................................................... 2-16
2.3.1 Standard models............................................................................................................................... 2-16
2.3.2 Keypad ............................................................................................................................................. 2-27
2.4 Dedicated Motor Specifications.............................................................................................................. 2-28
2.4.1 Induction motor (IM) with speed sensor .......................................................................................... 2-28
2.4.2 Permanent magnet synchronous motor (PMSM) with speed sensor................................................ 2-32
2.5 Protective Functions ............................................................................................................................... 2-38
2.6 Connection Diagrams and Terminal Functions....................................................................................... 2-42
2.6.1 Connection diagrams........................................................................................................................ 2-42
2.6.1.1 Running the MVK type of an induction motor (dedicated motor) ........................................... 2-42
2.6.1.2 Running the GNF2 type of a permanent magnet synchronous motor (dedicated motor)......... 2-44
2.6.2 List of terminal functions................................................................................................................. 2-46
Chapter 3 PREPARATION AND TEST RUN

3.1 Before Use ................................................................................................................................................ 3-1
3.1.1 Acceptance inspection (Nameplates and type of inverter) ................................................................. 3-1
3.1.2 External view and terminal blocks ..................................................................................................... 3-3
3.2 Precautions for Using Inverters ................................................................................................................ 3-5
3.2.1 Installation environment .................................................................................................................... 3-5
3.2.2 Storage environment .......................................................................................................................... 3-6
iv
3.2.3 Wiring precautions ............................................................................................................................. 3-7
3.2.4 Precautions for connection of peripheral equipment.......................................................................... 3-8
3.2.5 Noise reduction ................................................................................................................................ 3-12
3.2.6 Leakage current................................................................................................................................ 3-12
3.2.7 Precautions in driving a permanent magnet synchronous motor (PMSM)....................................... 3-12
3.3 Mounting and Wiring the Inverter .......................................................................................................... 3-13
3.3.1 Operating environment .................................................................................................................... 3-13
3.3.2 Installing the Inverter ....................................................................................................................... 3-14
3.3.3 Wiring .............................................................................................................................................. 3-16
3.3.3.1 Removing and mounting the front cover and the wiring guide ................................................ 3-16
3.3.3.2 Screw specifications and recommended wire sizes.................................................................. 3-17
3.3.3.3 Arrangement of terminals ........................................................................................................ 3-19
3.3.3.4 Wiring precautions ................................................................................................................... 3-22
3.3.3.5 Connection diagram ................................................................................................................. 3-25
3.3.3.6 Detailed functions of main circuit terminals and grounding terminals .................................... 3-27
3.3.3.7 Switching connectors ............................................................................................................... 3-31
3.3.3.8 Detailed functions of control circuit terminals......................................................................... 3-34
3.3.3.9 Setting up the slide switches .................................................................................................... 3-42
3.3.4 Mounting and connecting a keypad ................................................................................................. 3-44
3.3.4.1 Parts required for connection ................................................................................................... 3-44
3.3.4.2 Mounting procedure ................................................................................................................. 3-44
3.3.5 USB connectivity ............................................................................................................................. 3-48
3.4 Operation Using the Keypad................................................................................................................... 3-49
3.4.1 Names and functions of keypad components ................................................................................... 3-49
3.4.2 Overview of operation modes .......................................................................................................... 3-52
3.4.3 Running mode.................................................................................................................................. 3-53
3.4.3.1 Configuring the speed command.............................................................................................. 3-53
3.4.3.2 Running or stopping the motor................................................................................................. 3-54
3.4.3.3 Monitoring the running status on the LED monitor ................................................................. 3-56
3.4.3.4 Jogging (inching) the motor ..................................................................................................... 3-57
3.4.3.5 Monitoring light alarms............................................................................................................ 3-58
3.4.4 Programming mode.......................................................................................................................... 3-60
3.4.4.1 Selecting language -- Menu #0 "LANGUAGE" ...................................................................... 3-66
3.4.4.2 Configuring function codes -- Menu #1 "DATA SET"............................................................. 3-67
3.4.4.3 Checking function code data -- Menu #2 "DATA CHECK" .................................................... 3-69
3.4.4.4 Monitoring the running status -- Menu #3 "OPR MNTR"....................................................... 3-71
3.4.4.5 Checking I/O signal status -- Menu #4 "I/O CHECK"............................................................. 3-74
3.4.4.6 Reading maintenance information -- Menu #5 "MAINTENANCE" ....................................... 3-77
3.4.4.7 Measuring load factor -- Menu #6 "LOAD FCTR" ................................................................. 3-79
3.4.4.8 Reading alarm information -- Menu #7 "ALM INF" ............................................................... 3-80
3.4.4.9 Viewing causes of alarm -- Menu #8 "ALM CAUSE" ............................................................ 3-83
3.4.4.10 Copying data -- Menu #10 "DATA COPY" ............................................................................. 3-84
3.4.4.11 Checking changed function codes -- Menu #11 "CHANGES" ................................................ 3-86
3.4.4.12 Setting the calendar clock -- Menu #12 "DATE/TIME" .......................................................... 3-87
3.4.4.13 Limiting function codes to be displayed -- Menu #14 "LIMITED FC" ................................... 3-90
3.5 Test Run Procedure................................................................................................................................. 3-91
3.5.1 Checking prior to powering On........................................................................................................ 3-92
3.5.2 Powering ON and checking ............................................................................................................. 3-93
3.5.2.1 Checking the input state of PG (pulse generator) signals......................................................... 3-93
3.5.2.2 Mounting direction of a PG (pulse generator) and PG signals................................................. 3-94
3.5.3 Selecting a desired motor drive control............................................................................................ 3-95
3.5.3.1 Vector control for IM with speed sensor .................................................................................. 3-95
3.5.3.2 Vector control for IM without speed sensor ............................................................................. 3-97
3.5.3.3 Vector control for PMSM with speed sensor and magnetic pole position sensor..................... 3-99
3.5.3.4 V/f control for IM .................................................................................................................. 3-101
3.5.4 Running the inverter for operation check....................................................................................... 3-103
3.5.4.1 Test run procedure for induction motor (IM) ......................................................................... 3-103
3.5.4.2 Test run procedure for permanent magnet synchronous motor (PMSM) ............................... 3-104
v
3.5.5 Selecting a speed command source................................................................................................ 3-106
3.5.5.1 Setting up a speed command from the keypad....................................................................... 3-106
3.5.5.2 Setting up a speed command with an external potentiometer ................................................ 3-106
3.5.5.3 Setting up a speed command with multistep speed selection................................................. 3-107
3.5.6 Selecting a run command source.................................................................................................... 3-108
3.5.6.1 Setting up a run command from the keypad........................................................................... 3-108
3.5.6.2 Setting up a run command with digital input signals (terminals [FWD] and [REV]) ............ 3-108
Chapter 4 CONTROL AND OPERATION

4.1 Block Diagrams for Control Logic ........................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.1 Operation Command .......................................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.2 Speed Command Selection Section ................................................................................................... 4-2
4.1.3 Acceleration/deceleration Calculation, Speed Limiting, and Position Control Input Section............ 4-3
4.1.4 Motor Speed/Line Speed Detection ................................................................................................... 4-4
4.1.5 Pulse Train Command Input Section and Position Detection Section................................................ 4-5
4.1.6 Speed Control and Torque Command Section ................................................................................... 4-6
4.1.7 Torque Limit, Torque Current Command, and Magnetic-flux Command Section............................. 4-7
4.1.8 Current Control and Vector Control Section ...................................................................................... 4-8
4.1.9 PID Calculation Section..................................................................................................................... 4-9
4.1.10 Load Adaptive Control Section........................................................................................................ 4-10
4.1.11 Motor Temperature Detection Section ............................................................................................. 4-11
4.1.12 Function Selection Digital Input ...................................................................................................... 4-12
4.1.13 Function Selection Digital Output/Fault Output .............................................................................. 4-13
4.1.14 Function Selection Analog Input/Output.......................................................................................... 4-14
4.1.15 Link Command Function Selection ................................................................................................. 4-15
4.1.16 Enabling to Write to/Recording Function Codes ............................................................................. 4-16
4.2 Function Code Tables ............................................................................................................................. 4-17
4.2.1 Function Code Groups and Function Codes .................................................................................... 4-17
4.2.2 About the Contents of Column Headers in Function Code Tables................................................... 4-18
4.2.3 Function Code Tables....................................................................................................................... 4-19
4.2.4 Data Format List .............................................................................................................................. 4-61
4.2.4.1 Data Type 0 to 13 ..................................................................................................................... 4-61
4.2.4.2 Data Type 12 to 145 ................................................................................................................. 4-61
4.3 Details of Function Codes....................................................................................................................... 4-78
4.3.1 F codes (Fundamental Functions) .................................................................................................... 4-78
4.3.2 E codes (Extension Terminal Functions)........................................................................................ 4-120
4.3.3 C codes (Control Functions) .......................................................................................................... 4-193
4.3.4 P codes (Motor Parameter Functions) ............................................................................................ 4-199
4.3.5 H codes (High Performance Functions) ......................................................................................... 4-214
4.3.6 A codes (Alternative Motor Functions).......................................................................................... 4-266
4.3.7 o codes (Option Functions) ............................................................................................................ 4-269
4.3.8 L codes (Lift Functions)................................................................................................................. 4-277
Chapter 5 USING STANDARD RS-485

5.1 Standard RS-485 Communications Ports.................................................................................................. 5-1
5.1.1 RS-485 common specifications.......................................................................................................... 5-2
5.1.2 Terminal specifications for RS-485 communications ........................................................................ 5-3
5.1.3 Connection method ............................................................................................................................ 5-4
5.1.4 Communications support devices ...................................................................................................... 5-6
5.1.4.1 Converters .................................................................................................................................. 5-6
5.1.4.2 Cables......................................................................................................................................... 5-7
5.1.5 Link functions .................................................................................................................................... 5-7
5.1.5.1 Link command permission selection.......................................................................................... 5-7
5.1.5.2 Link edit permission selection.................................................................................................... 5-8
5.1.5.3 S range option priority ............................................................................................................... 5-8
5.1.6 Referencing and changing data .......................................................................................................... 5-9
5.1.6.1 Write restrictions for function codes .......................................................................................... 5-9
vi
5.1.6.2 Negative response and error response ...................................................................................... 5-10
5.1.6.3 No response.............................................................................................................................. 5-10
5.1.7 RS-485 function codes ..................................................................................................................... 5-11
5.1.7.1 Response interval time (H39)................................................................................................... 5-11
5.1.7.2 Disconnection detection time (H38) ........................................................................................ 5-12
5.1.7.3 Character timeouts ................................................................................................................... 5-12
5.1.7.4 Timeouts on the master side..................................................................................................... 5-12
5.1.8 Host side procedures ........................................................................................................................ 5-13
5.1.8.1 Read procedure ........................................................................................................................ 5-13
5.1.8.2 Write procedure........................................................................................................................ 5-14
5.1.9 RAS.................................................................................................................................................. 5-15
5.1.9.1 Communication errors.............................................................................................................. 5-15
5.1.10 Communication error measures ....................................................................................................... 5-18
5.2 Fuji General-purpose Communications .................................................................................................. 5-19
5.2.1 Message format................................................................................................................................ 5-19
5.2.2 Transmission frame .......................................................................................................................... 5-19
5.2.3 Standard frame ................................................................................................................................. 5-20
5.2.4 Option frame .................................................................................................................................... 5-23
5.2.5 Negative response frame .................................................................................................................. 5-27
5.2.6 Field descriptions ............................................................................................................................. 5-28
5.2.6.1 Data field.................................................................................................................................. 5-28
5.2.6.2 Sum-check field ....................................................................................................................... 5-29
5.2.7 Communication examples................................................................................................................ 5-29
5.2.7.1 Standard frame ......................................................................................................................... 5-29
5.2.7.2 Option frame ............................................................................................................................ 5-30
5.2.7.3 ASCII code table ...................................................................................................................... 5-31
5.2.7.4 Program example ..................................................................................................................... 5-32
5.3 Modbus RTU .......................................................................................................................................... 5-33
5.3.1 Message format................................................................................................................................ 5-33
5.3.2 Transmission frame .......................................................................................................................... 5-34
5.3.2.1 Reading function codes ............................................................................................................ 5-35
5.3.2.2 Writing single function codes................................................................................................... 5-36
5.3.2.3 Writing multiple function codes............................................................................................... 5-37
5.3.2.4 Maintenance code .................................................................................................................... 5-38
5.3.2.5 Error response .......................................................................................................................... 5-39
5.3.3 Error checking.................................................................................................................................. 5-40
5.3.3.1 CRC-16 .................................................................................................................................... 5-40
5.3.3.2 CRC-16 algorithm.................................................................................................................... 5-41
5.3.3.3 CRC-16 calculation example ................................................................................................... 5-42
5.3.3.4 Calculating frame length .......................................................................................................... 5-43
5.3.4 Communication examples................................................................................................................ 5-44
5.3.4.1 Reading .................................................................................................................................... 5-44
5.4 FRENIC-VG Loader Overview .............................................................................................................. 5-45
5.4.1 Specifications................................................................................................................................... 5-45
5.5 Connection.............................................................................................................................................. 5-46
5.5.1 USB connection ............................................................................................................................... 5-46
5.5.1.1 RS-485 connection ................................................................................................................... 5-46
5.5.2 Function overview ........................................................................................................................... 5-47
5.5.2.1 Setting function codes .............................................................................................................. 5-47
5.5.2.2 Trace back ................................................................................................................................ 5-47
Chapter 6 CONTROL OPTIONS

6.1 Common Specifications............................................................................................................................ 6-1
6.1.1 Specifications table ............................................................................................................................ 6-1
6.1.2 Inspecting options after delivery........................................................................................................ 6-3
6.1.2.1 Inspecting options ...................................................................................................................... 6-3
6.1.2.2 Operating environment............................................................................................................... 6-4
vii
6.1.3 Storing options ................................................................................................................................... 6-5
6.1.3.1 Temporary storage...................................................................................................................... 6-5
6.1.3.2 Long-term storage ...................................................................................................................... 6-5
6.1.4 Installing internal options (OPC-VG1-□□) ..................................................................................... 6-6
6.1.4.1 Removing the front cover........................................................................................................... 6-6
6.1.4.2 Installing a digital 8-bit communications option card................................................................ 6-7
6.1.4.3 Installing a digital 8-bit option card ........................................................................................... 6-9
6.1.4.4 Installing a digital 16-bit option card ....................................................................................... 6-11
6.2 PG Interface Expansion Card.................................................................................................................. 6-12
6.2.1 Product overview ............................................................................................................................. 6-12
6.2.2 Model and specifications ................................................................................................................. 6-13
6.2.2.1 Model ....................................................................................................................................... 6-13
6.2.2.2 Specifications ........................................................................................................................... 6-14
6.2.3 External dimension diagram ............................................................................................................ 6-18
6.2.4 Basic connection diagram ................................................................................................................ 6-19
6.2.4.1 Terminal connections ............................................................................................................... 6-19
6.2.4.2 Wiring ...................................................................................................................................... 6-20
6.2.4.3 Speed control............................................................................................................................ 6-21
6.2.4.4 Line speed control.................................................................................................................... 6-22
6.2.4.5 Pulse train operation and synchronized operation.................................................................... 6-23
6.2.5 Synchronized operation.................................................................................................................... 6-25
6.2.5.1 Synchronized operation system architecture ............................................................................ 6-25
6.2.5.2 Synchronized operation method............................................................................................... 6-27
6.2.5.3 Function codes ......................................................................................................................... 6-29
6.2.6 Check functions ............................................................................................................................... 6-34
6.2.6.1 Optional equipment check........................................................................................................ 6-34
6.2.6.2 I/O check .................................................................................................................................. 6-34
6.2.7 Protective functionality .................................................................................................................... 6-34
6.3 Synchronous Motor Drive PG Interface Card......................................................................................... 6-35
6.3.2.1 Model ....................................................................................................................................... 6-36
6.3.2.2 Specifications ........................................................................................................................... 6-37
6.3.2.3 Using the card in combination with a Fuji motor..................................................................... 6-38
6.3.3 External dimension diagram ............................................................................................................ 6-39
6.3.4.1 Line driver type........................................................................................................................ 6-41
6.3.4.2 Open collector output type ....................................................................................................... 6-42
6.3.4.3 Connection Diagram for Fuji servos ........................................................................................ 6-43
6.3.5 Function codes ................................................................................................................................. 6-44
6.3.5.1 Synchronous motor drive PG interface card function codes .................................................... 6-44
6.3.5.2 Motor parameters ..................................................................................................................... 6-44
6.3.6 Check functions ............................................................................................................................... 6-45
6.3.7 Protective functionality .................................................................................................................... 6-45
6.4 T-Link Interface Card ............................................................................................................................. 6-46
6.4.2.1 Inverter type ............................................................................................................................. 6-47
6.4.2.2 Specifications ........................................................................................................................... 6-47
6.4.3 External dimensions......................................................................................................................... 6-49
6.4.3.1 Terminal function ..................................................................................................................... 6-49
6.4.5 Function code................................................................................................................................... 6-52
6.4.6 Protective operation ......................................................................................................................... 6-54
6.4.6.1 Light and heavy alarms ............................................................................................................ 6-54
6.4.6.2 Protective operation function code........................................................................................... 6-55
6.4.7 Data allocation addresses ................................................................................................................. 6-57
viii
6.4.7.1 Transmission format................................................................................................................. 6-57
6.4.7.2 Occupied area........................................................................................................................... 6-57
6.4.7.3 Allocated Address .................................................................................................................... 6-57
6.4.8 Transmission format......................................................................................................................... 6-59
6.4.8.1 Data format (FRENIC-VG ⇒ MICREX) ................................................................................ 6-59
6.4.8.2 Data format (MICREX ⇒ FRENIC-VG) ................................................................................ 6-60
6.4.9 Link function.................................................................................................................................... 6-62
6.4.9.1 Link command permission selection........................................................................................ 6-62
6.4.9.2 Link edit permission selection.................................................................................................. 6-63
6.4.9.3 Data transmission example ...................................................................................................... 6-63
6.5 SX Bus Interface Card ............................................................................................................................ 6-66
6.5.2.1 Inverter type ............................................................................................................................. 6-66
6.5.2.2 Specifications ........................................................................................................................... 6-67
6.5.3 External Dimensions ........................................................................................................................ 6-69
6.5.5 Function code................................................................................................................................... 6-73
6.5.5.1 Function code........................................................................................................................... 6-75
6.5.6 Protective operation ......................................................................................................................... 6-79
6.5.7 Data allocation addresses ................................................................................................................. 6-83
6.5.7.2 Area occupied and data allocation addresses ........................................................................... 6-83
6.5.8 Transmission format......................................................................................................................... 6-89
6.5.8.1 Data Format (FRENIC-VG MICREX-SX).......................................................................... 6-89
6.5.8.2 Data format (MICREX-SX FRENIC-VG)........................................................................... 6-95
6.5.9 Link function.................................................................................................................................. 6-103
6.5.10 Data transmission example ............................................................................................................ 6-103
6.5.11 System configuration definition..................................................................................................... 6-106
6.5.11.1 Programming support tool expert (D300win) ........................................................................ 6-106
6.5.11.2 Application program examples .............................................................................................. 6-110
6.5.12 Multiple option application examples ............................................................................................ 6-112
6.5.12.1 Installed with T-Link interface card ....................................................................................... 6-112
6.5.12.2 Installed with high-speed serial communication-capable terminal table................................ 6-113
6.6 High-Speed Serial Communication-Capable Terminal Table ............................................................... 6-114
6.6.1 Product overview ........................................................................................................................... 6-114
6.6.1.1 Multi-winding motor drive..................................................................................................... 6-114
6.6.2 Model and specifications ............................................................................................................... 6-115
6.6.2.1 Model ..................................................................................................................................... 6-115
6.6.2.2 Specifications ......................................................................................................................... 6-115
6.6.3 External dimensions....................................................................................................................... 6-118
6.6.4 Basic connection diagram .............................................................................................................. 6-119
6.6.4.1 Connecting optical fiber cable................................................................................................ 6-119
6.6.4.2 Basic connection diagram of entire system............................................................................ 6-121
6.6.5 Function code setting ..................................................................................................................... 6-122
6.6.5.1 Number of units setting.......................................................................................................... 6-122
6.6.5.2 Switching multi- and single-motor drive................................................................................ 6-123
6.6.6 Preparation for operation ............................................................................................................... 6-124
6.6.6.1 Operation................................................................................................................................ 6-124
6.6.7 Protective Function ........................................................................................................................ 6-131
6.6.7.1 Inter-inverter link error (erb ).............................................................................................. 6-131
6.6.7.2 Operation procedure error (er6 ) ......................................................................................... 6-132
6.6.7.3 Process in Protective Operation ............................................................................................. 6-132
6.7 CC-Link Interface Card ........................................................................................................................ 6-133
ix
6.7.2.1 Model ..................................................................................................................................... 6-134
6.7.2.2 Specifications ......................................................................................................................... 6-134
6.7.3 External dimension drawing .......................................................................................................... 6-138
6.7.5 Function code................................................................................................................................. 6-140
6.7.5.1 Standard function code........................................................................................................... 6-140
6.7.5.2 Communication dedicated function codes ............................................................................. 6-140
6.7.5.3 Option dedicated function codes ............................................................................................ 6-141
6.7.6 Protection operation ....................................................................................................................... 6-142
6.7.6.1 Light alarm and heavy alarm.................................................................................................. 6-142
6.7.6.2 Protection Operation Function Codes .................................................................................... 6-144
6.7.7 Applicable format list..................................................................................................................... 6-147
6.7.8 VG7 compatible mode with 1 station occupied (o32=0）............................................................. 6-148
6.7.8.1 Remote I/O signal in the VG7 compatible mode ................................................................... 6-148
6.7.8.2 Remote register in VG7 compatible mode (o32=0) ............................................................... 6-150
6.7.8.3 Monitor code/command code (o32=0) in VG7 compatible mode.......................................... 6-151
6.7.9 1 X mode with 1 station occupied (o32=0） ................................................................................. 6-153
6.7.9.1 Remote I/O signal in 1 X mode (o32=1)................................................................................ 6-153
6.7.9.2 Remote register signal in 1 X mode (o32=1) ......................................................................... 6-155
6.7.9.3 Monitor code/command code (o32=1 to 4)............................................................................ 6-156
6.7.12 8 X mode with 1 station occupied (o32=4) .................................................................................... 6-162
6.7.13 Link function.................................................................................................................................. 6-165
6.7.13.1 Link command permission selection...................................................................................... 6-165
6.7.13.2 Link edition permission selection .......................................................................................... 6-166
6.7.14 Setting-up procedure ...................................................................................................................... 6-167
6.7.15 Application program examples ...................................................................................................... 6-167
6.7.15.1 System configuration ............................................................................................................. 6-167
6.7.15.2 Master unit outline ................................................................................................................. 6-167
6.8 17-bit High Resolution ABS Interface Card ......................................................................................... 6-168
6.8.2.1 Model ..................................................................................................................................... 6-168
6.8.2.2 Specifications ......................................................................................................................... 6-169
6.8.4 Connection ..................................................................................................................................... 6-172
6.8.4.1 Connector and terminal specifications ................................................................................... 6-172
6.8.4.2 Basic connection diagram ...................................................................................................... 6-173
6.8.5 Function code................................................................................................................................. 6-175
6.8.5.1 Function codes related to motor control................................................................................. 6-175
6.8.6 Protective functions........................................................................................................................ 6-178
6.8.6.1 Alarm display list ................................................................................................................... 6-178
6.8.6.2 Actions to be taken for alarms................................................................................................ 6-178
6.8.7 Check function ............................................................................................................................... 6-178
6.8.7.1 Option mounting check .......................................................................................................... 6-178
6.8.8 Related option ................................................................................................................................ 6-179
6.9 F/V Converter (available soon)............................................................................................................. 6-183
6.9.2.1 Model ..................................................................................................................................... 6-183
6.9.2.2 Specifications ......................................................................................................................... 6-184
x
6.9.3 External dimensions....................................................................................................................... 6-185
6.9.4 Internal block diagram ................................................................................................................... 6-186
6.9.5 Adjustment method ........................................................................................................................ 6-187
6.10 Synchro Interface (available soon) ....................................................................................................... 6-191
6.10.2.1 Model ..................................................................................................................................... 6-191
6.10.2.2 Specifications ......................................................................................................................... 6-192
6.10.3 External dimension diagram .......................................................................................................... 6-193
6.10.4 Internal block diagram ................................................................................................................... 6-193
6.10.5 Adjustment method ........................................................................................................................ 6-194
6.10.5.1 Description of adjustment locations....................................................................................... 6-194
6.10.5.2 Installing and adjusting the synchro interface ........................................................................ 6-195
6.11 DI Interface Card .................................................................................................................................. 6-196
6.11.2.1 Model ..................................................................................................................................... 6-197
6.11.2.2 Specifications ......................................................................................................................... 6-198
6.11.5 Function codes ............................................................................................................................... 6-202
6.11.5.1 Data latch function ................................................................................................................. 6-202
6.11.5.2 Selecting binary or BCD input ............................................................................................... 6-203
6.11.5.3 Controlled variable input........................................................................................................ 6-204
6.11.6 Check functions ............................................................................................................................. 6-206
6.11.6.1 Option installation check........................................................................................................ 6-206
6.11.6.2 I/O check ................................................................................................................................ 6-206
6.12 DIO Expansion Card............................................................................................................................. 6-207
6.12.2 Models and specifications .............................................................................................................. 6-208
6.12.2.1 Models.................................................................................................................................... 6-208
6.12.2.2 Specifications ......................................................................................................................... 6-209
6.12.3 Dimensions .................................................................................................................................... 6-212
6.12.4 Basic schematic diagrams .............................................................................................................. 6-213
6.12.4.1 Basic schematic diagram (DIOA) .......................................................................................... 6-213
6.12.4.2 Basic schematic diagram (DIOB) .......................................................................................... 6-214
6.12.5 Function codes ............................................................................................................................... 6-215
6.12.5.1 DIOA selected ........................................................................................................................ 6-215
6.12.5.2 DIOB selected ........................................................................................................................ 6-217
6.12.6 Check function ............................................................................................................................... 6-218
6.12.6.1 Mounting check on optional cards ......................................................................................... 6-218
6.12.6.2 I/O check ................................................................................................................................ 6-218
6.13 AIO Expansion Card............................................................................................................................. 6-219
6.13.2 Models and specifications .............................................................................................................. 6-220
6.13.2.1 Models.................................................................................................................................... 6-220
6.13.2.2 Specifications ......................................................................................................................... 6-221
6.13.3 Dimensions .................................................................................................................................... 6-223
6.13.3.1 Specifications ......................................................................................................................... 6-224
6.13.4 Function codes ............................................................................................................................... 6-225
6.13.5 Check function ............................................................................................................................... 6-226
6.14 Optional PG Changeover Card (available soon)................................................................................... 6-227
6.14.2.1 Model ..................................................................................................................................... 6-227
6.14.2.2 Specifications ......................................................................................................................... 6-227
xi
6.14.3 Dimensions .................................................................................................................................... 6-228
6.14.4 Installation method......................................................................................................................... 6-228
6.14.5 Basic schematic diagram................................................................................................................ 6-229
6.14.6 Operation method........................................................................................................................... 6-231
6.15 E-SX Bus Interface Card ...................................................................................................................... 6-232
6.15.2.1 Model ..................................................................................................................................... 6-232
6.15.2.2 Specifications ......................................................................................................................... 6-233
6.15.3 External dimension drawings......................................................................................................... 6-235
6.15.4 Basic connections........................................................................................................................... 6-236
6.15.5 Related function codes ................................................................................................................... 6-238
6.15.6 Protective operations...................................................................................................................... 6-239
6.15.6.1 Light alarms and heavy alarms in E-SX bus communication (er4 ).................................... 6-239
6.15.6.2 E-SX related alarms (are, arf ) ........................................................................................ 6-242
6.15.6.3 Other inverter alarms.............................................................................................................. 6-242
6.15.7 Data addresses (IQ area) ................................................................................................................ 6-243
6.15.7.1 Supported formats .................................................................................................................. 6-243
6.15.7.2 Input/output data address assignments ................................................................................... 6-243
6.15.8 Format details................................................................................................................................. 6-244
6.15.8.1 I area (MICREX-SX ← FRENIC-VG) .................................................................................. 6-244
6.15.8.2 Q area (MICREX-SX → FRENIC-VG) ................................................................................ 6-246
6.15.9 Data transmission examples........................................................................................................... 6-247
6.15.10 Synchronization of E-SX bus tact cycle and inverter control cycle ............................................... 6-249
6.15.10.1 Conditions required for tact synchronization ......................................................................... 6-249
6.15.10.2 Checking the tact synchronization status ............................................................................... 6-249
6.15.10.3 Action when synchronization is lost (are ).......................................................................... 6-249
6.15.11 Support tool interface..................................................................................................................... 6-250
6.15.11.1 Configuration definition method............................................................................................ 6-250
6.15.11.2 Compatible versions of the SPH3000MM and support tool................................................... 6-250
Chapter 7 APPLICATION EXAMPLES

7.1 Large Crane and Overhead Crane............................................................................................................. 7-1
7.2 Application to Plants................................................................................................................................. 7-1
7.3 Servo Press: Large Size for Automobiles, Small Size for Machines such as Crimping Terminal
Processing Machines ................................................................................................................................ 7-2
7.4 Winding Equipment (Paper and Metal) .................................................................................................... 7-2
7.5 Feeding Part of Semiconductor Manufacturing Device, Wire Saw .......................................................... 7-3
7.6 Test Equipment for Automobiles .............................................................................................................. 7-3
7.7 Shipboard Winch ...................................................................................................................................... 7-4
7.8 Flying Shear.............................................................................................................................................. 7-4
Chapter 8 SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT

8.1 Configuring the FRENIC-VG................................................................................................................... 8-1
8.2 Selecting Wires and Crimp Terminals....................................................................................................... 8-2
8.3 Recommended Wires ................................................................................................................................ 8-6
8.4 Peripheral Equipment ............................................................................................................................. 8-18
8.4.1 Molded case circuit breaker or residual-current-operated protective device/earth leakage circuit
breaker/magnetic contactor .............................................................................................................. 8-18
8.4.1.1 Functional overview................................................................................................................. 8-18
8.4.1.2 Connection example and criteria for selection of circuit breakers ........................................... 8-20
8.4.2 Surge killer for L-load...................................................................................................................... 8-25
8.4.3 Arrester ............................................................................................................................................ 8-26
8.4.4 Surge absorber.................................................................................................................................. 8-27
8.4.5 Filter capacitor for radio noise reduction ......................................................................................... 8-28
8.5 Peripheral Equipment Options................................................................................................................ 8-29
xii
8.5.1 Braking resistors (DBRs) and braking units .................................................................................... 8-29
8.5.1.1 Braking resistors (DBRs) ......................................................................................................... 8-29
8.5.1.2 Braking units ............................................................................................................................ 8-29
8.5.1.3 Specifications and connection example ................................................................................... 8-30
8.5.1.4 External dimensions ................................................................................................................. 8-41
8.5.2 Power regenerative PWM converters (RHC series)......................................................................... 8-44
8.5.2.1 Features .................................................................................................................................... 8-44
8.5.2.2 Specifications ........................................................................................................................... 8-45
8.5.2.3 Function specifications............................................................................................................. 8-47
8.5.2.4 Converter configuration ........................................................................................................... 8-51
8.5.2.5 Basic connection diagrams....................................................................................................... 8-53
8.5.2.6 External dimensions ................................................................................................................. 8-55
8.5.2.7 Generated loss .......................................................................................................................... 8-63
8.5.3 DC reactor (DCR) ............................................................................................................................ 8-65
8.5.4 AC reactor (ACR) ............................................................................................................................ 8-70
8.5.5 Surge suppression unit (SSU) .......................................................................................................... 8-75
8.5.6 Output circuit filter (OFL) ............................................................................................................... 8-76
8.5.7 Radio noise reducing zero phase reactor (ACL) .............................................................................. 8-80
8.5.8 External cooling attachment............................................................................................................. 8-81
8.6 Battery .................................................................................................................................................... 8-83
8.6.1 Overview of battery ......................................................................................................................... 8-83
8.6.2 Installing battery .............................................................................................................................. 8-84
8.6.2.1 Installing battery (for 22 kW or lower) .................................................................................... 8-84
8.6.2.2 Installing battery (for 30 kW or higher) ................................................................................... 8-85
8.6.3 Replacing battery ............................................................................................................................. 8-86
8.6.4 Sending battery via air transport ...................................................................................................... 8-86
Chapter 9 SELECTING OPTIMAL MOTOR AND INVERTER CAPACITIES

9.1 Selecting Motor and Inverter Capacities................................................................................................... 9-1
9.1.1 Motor output torque characteristics.................................................................................................... 9-1
9.1.2 Selection procedure............................................................................................................................ 9-3
9.1.3 Equations for selections ..................................................................................................................... 9-7
9.1.3.1 Load torque during constant speed running ............................................................................... 9-7
9.1.3.2 Acceleration and deceleration time calculation.......................................................................... 9-9
9.1.3.3 Heat energy calculation of braking resistor.............................................................................. 9-14
9.1.3.4 Calculating the RMS rating of the motor ................................................................................. 9-15
9.2 Selecting a Braking Resistor................................................................................................................... 9-16
9.2.1 Selection procedure.......................................................................................................................... 9-16
9.2.2 Notes on selection ............................................................................................................................ 9-16
9.3 Selecting an Inverter Drive Mode (HD/MD/LD) ................................................................................... 9-17
9.3.1 Precaution in making the selection .................................................................................................. 9-17
9.3.2 Guideline for selecting inverter drive mode and capacity................................................................ 9-18
Chapter 10 ABOUT MOTORS

10.1 Vibration and Noise ................................................................................................................................ 10-1
10.2 Acceleration Vibration Value .................................................................................................................. 10-2
10.3 Allowable Radial Load at Motor Shaft Extension .................................................................................. 10-3
10.4 Allowable Thrust Load ........................................................................................................................... 10-5
10.5 List of Special Combinations.................................................................................................................. 10-6
10.5.1 Combination list of 380V series....................................................................................................... 10-6
10.5.2 Combination list of low base speed series ....................................................................................... 10-7
Chapter 11 OPERATION DATA

11.1 Frequency Response Characteristics....................................................................................................... 11-1
11.2 Rotational Fluctuation Measurement Sample ......................................................................................... 11-1
11.3 Current Distortion Characteristics .......................................................................................................... 11-2
xiii
11.4 Torque Ripple ......................................................................................................................................... 11-2
11.5 Impact Load Characteristics ................................................................................................................... 11-3
11.6 Speed-torque Characteristics (Vector control with speed sensor) ........................................................... 11-3
11.7 Torque Control Accuracy (Vector control with speed sensor) ................................................................ 11-4
11.8 Deceleration/Acceleration via Zero Speed (Vector control with speed sensor) ..................................... 11-4
Chapter 12 REPLACEMENT DATA

12.1 Classification of Replacement ................................................................................................................ 12-1
12.2 External Dimensions Comparison .......................................................................................................... 12-2
12.2.1 Replacing VG7S .............................................................................................................................. 12-2
12.2.2 Replacing VG5S .............................................................................................................................. 12-4
12.2.3 Replacing VG3................................................................................................................................. 12-5
12.3 Terminal Size .......................................................................................................................................... 12-6
12.3.1 Replacing VG7S .............................................................................................................................. 12-6
12.3.2 Replacing VG5S .............................................................................................................................. 12-8
12.3.3 Replacing VG3............................................................................................................................... 12-10
12.4 Terminal Symbol .................................................................................................................................. 12-12
12.4.1 Replacing VG7S ............................................................................................................................ 12-12
12.4.2 Replacing VG5S ............................................................................................................................ 12-13
12.4.3 Replacing VG3............................................................................................................................... 12-16
12.5 Function Codes ..................................................................................................................................... 12-19
12.5.1 Replacing VG7S ............................................................................................................................ 12-19
12.5.2 Replacing VG5S ............................................................................................................................ 12-20
12.5.3 Replacing VG3............................................................................................................................... 12-25
12.6 Motor Parameters.................................................................................................................................. 12-30
12.6.1 Replacing VG7S ............................................................................................................................ 12-30
12.6.2 Replacing VG5S ............................................................................................................................ 12-33
12.6.3 Replacing VG3............................................................................................................................... 12-35
12.7 Protective Functions ............................................................................................................................. 12-37
12.7.1 Replacing VG7S ............................................................................................................................ 12-37
12.7.2 Replacing VG5S ............................................................................................................................ 12-38
12.7.3 Replacing VG3............................................................................................................................... 12-39
12.8 Options.................................................................................................................................................. 12-40
12.8.1 Replacing VG7S ............................................................................................................................ 12-40
12.8.2 Replacing VG5S ............................................................................................................................ 12-41
12.8.3 Replacing VG3............................................................................................................................... 12-42
Chapter 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
13.1 Protective Functions ............................................................................................................................... 13-1
13.2 Before Proceeding with Troubleshooting ............................................................................................... 13-2
13.3 If an alarm code appears on the LED monitor ........................................................................................ 13-3
13.3.1 List of alarm codes........................................................................................................................... 13-3
13.3.2 Possible causes of alarms, checks and measures.............................................................................. 13-5
13.4 If the "Light Alarm" Indication (l-al) Appears on the LED Monitor............................................... 13-26
13.5 If Neither an Alarm Code Nor "Light Alarm" Indication (l-al) Appears on the LED Monitor........ 13-27
13.5.1 Abnormal motor operation............................................................................................................. 13-27
13.5.2 Problems with inverter settings...................................................................................................... 13-38
Appendices
App. A Advantageous Use of Inverters (Notes on electrical noise)................................................................... A-1
A.1 Effect of inverters on other devices ....................................................................................................... A-1
A.2 Noise...................................................................................................................................................... A-2
A.3 Noise prevention.................................................................................................................................... A-4
App. B Japanese Guideline for Suppressing Harmonics by Customers Receiving High Voltage or Special
High Voltage ........................................................................................................................................ A-12
xiv
B.1 Application to general-purpose inverters............................................................................................. A-12
B.2 Compliance to the harmonic suppression for customers receiving high voltage or special high
voltage ................................................................................................................................................. A-13
App. C Effect on Insulation of General-purpose Motors Driven with 400 V Class Inverters.......................... A-18
C.1 Generating mechanism of surge voltages ............................................................................................ A-18
C.2 Effect of surge voltages ....................................................................................................................... A-19
C.3 Countermeasures against surge voltages ............................................................................................. A-19
C.4 Regarding existing equipment ............................................................................................................. A-20
App. D Inverter Generating Loss ..................................................................................................................... A-21
App. E Conversion from SI Units.................................................................................................................... A-23
App. F Allowable Current of Insulated Wires ................................................................................................. A-25
xv
Safety precautions
Read this manual thoroughly before proceeding with installation, connections (wiring), operation, or
maintenance and inspection. Ensure you have sound knowledge of the device and familiarize yourself with
all safety information and precautions before proceeding to operate the inverter.
Safety precautions are classified into the following two categories in this manual.
Failure to heed the information indicated by this symbol may lead to

dangerous conditions, possibly resulting in death or serious bodily injuries.
Failure to heed the information indicated by this symbol may lead to

dangerous conditions, possibly resulting in minor or light bodily injuries
and/or substantial property damage.
Failure to heed the information contained under the CAUTION title can also result in serious consequences.
These safety precautions are of utmost importance and must be observed at all times.
Application
• The FRENIC-VG is designed to drive a three-phase induction motor. Do not use it for single-phase motors or for other
purposes.
Fire or an accident could occur.
• The FRENIC-VG may not be used for a life-support system or other purposes directly related to the human safety.
• Though the FRENIC-VG is manufactured under strict quality control, install safety devices for applications where
serious accidents or property damages are foreseen in relation to the failure of it.
An accident could occur.
Installation
• Install the inverter on a base made of metal or other non-flammable material.

Otherwise, a fire could occur.
• Do not place flammable object nearby.
Doing so could cause fire.
• Inverters with a capacity of 30 kW or above, whose protective structure is IP00, involve a possibility that a human body
may touch the live conductors of the main circuit terminal block. Inverters to which an optional DC reactor is connected
also involve the same. Install such inverters in an inaccessible place.
Otherwise, electric shock or injuries could occur.
• Do not support the inverter by its front cover during transportation.

Doing so could cause a drop of the inverter and injuries.
• Prevent lint, paper fibers, sawdust, dust, metallic chips, or other foreign materials from getting into the inverter or from
accumulating on the heat sink.
• When changing the positions of the top and bottom mounting bases, use only the specified screws.
Otherwise, a fire or an accident might result.
• Do not install or operate an inverter that is damaged or lacking parts.
Doing so could cause fire, an accident or injuries.
xvi
Wiring
• If no zero-phase current (earth leakage current) detective device such as a ground-fault relay is installed in the upstream
power supply line in order to avoid the entire power supply system's shutdown undesirable to factory operation, install
a residual-current-operated protective device (RCD)/earth leakage circuit breaker (ELCB) individually to inverters to
break the individual inverter power supply lines only.
• When wiring the inverter to the power source, insert a recommended molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) or
residual-current-operated protective device (RCD)/earth leakage circuit breaker (ELCB) (with overcurrent protection)
in the path of each pair of power lines to inverters. Use the recommended devices within the recommended current
capacity.
• Use wires in the specified size.
• Tighten terminals with specified torque.
• When there is more than one combination of an inverter and motor, do not use a multicore cable for the purpose of
handling their wirings together.
• Do not connect a surge killer to the inverter's output (secondary) circuit.
Doing so could cause a fire.
• Be sure to connect an optional DC reactor (DCR) when the capacity of the power supply transformer exceeds 500 kVA
and is 10 times or more the inverter rated capacity.
• Ground the inverter in compliance with the national or local electric code.
• Be sure to ground the inverter's grounding terminals G.
Otherwise, an electric shock or a fire could occur.
• Qualified electricians should carry out wiring.
• Be sure to perform wiring after turning the power OFF.
Otherwise, an electric shock could occur.
• Be sure to perform wiring after installing the inverter unit.
Otherwise, an electric shock or injuries could occur.
• Ensure that the number of input phases and the rated voltage of the product match the number of phases and the voltage
of the AC power supply to which the product is to be connected.
Otherwise, a fire or an accident could occur.
• Do not connect the power supply wires to output terminals (U, V, and W).
• When connecting a DC braking resistor (DBR), never connect it to terminals other than terminals P(+) and DB.
Doing so could cause fire or an accident.
• In general, sheaths of the control signal wires are not specifically designed to withstand a high voltage (i.e., reinforced
insulation is not applied). Therefore, if a control signal wire comes into direct contact with a live conductor of the main
circuit, the insulation of the sheath might break down, which would expose the signal wire to a high voltage of the main
circuit. Make sure that the control signal wires will not come into contact with live conductors of the main circuit.
Doing so could cause an accident or an electric shock.
• Before changing the switches or touching the control circuit terminal symbol plate, turn OFF the power and wait at
least five minutes for inverters with a capacity of 22 kW or below, or at least ten minutes for inverters with a
capacity of 30 kW or above. Make sure that the LED monitor and charging lamp are turned OFF. Further, make sure,
using a multimeter or a similar instrument, that the DC link bus voltage between the terminals P(+) and N(-) has
dropped to the safe level (+25 VDC or below).
• The inverter, motor and wiring generate electric noise. Be careful about malfunction of the nearby sensors and devices.
To prevent them from malfunctioning, implement noise control measures.
Otherwise an accident could occur.
xvii
Operation
• Be sure to mount the front cover before turning the power ON. Do not remove the cover when the inverter power is ON.
• Do not operate switches with wet hands.
Doing so could cause electric shock.
• If the auto-reset function has been selected, the inverter may automatically restart and drive the motor depending on the
cause of tripping. Design the machinery or equipment so that human safety is ensured at the time of restarting.
Otherwise, an accident could occur.
• If the stall prevention function (torque limiter) has been selected, the inverter may operate with
acceleration/deceleration or speed different from the commanded ones. Design the machine so that safety is ensured
even in such cases.
• The key on the keypad is effective only when the keypad operation is enabled with function code F02 (= 0, 2 or 3).
When the keypad operation is disabled, prepare an emergency stop switch separately for safe operations. Switching the
run command source from keypad (local) to external equipment (remote) by turning ON the "Enable communications
link" command LE disables the key.
To enable the key for an emergency stop, select the STOP key priority with function code H96 (= 1 or 3).
• If any of the protective functions have been activated, first remove the cause. Then, after checking that the all run
commands are set to OFF, release the alarm. If the alarm is released while any run commands are set to ON, the inverter
may supply the power to the motor, running the motor.
• If you enable the "Restart mode after momentary power failure" (Function code F14 = 3 to 5), then the inverter
automatically restarts running the motor when the power is recovered.
Design the machinery or equipment so that human safety is ensured after restarting.
• If the user configures the function codes wrongly without completely understanding this Instruction Manual and the
FRENIC-VG User's Manual, the motor may rotate with a torque or at a speed not permitted for the machine.
An accident or injuries could occur.
• Even if the inverter has interrupted power to the motor, if the voltage is applied to the main circuit input terminals L1/R,
L2/S and L3/T, voltage may be output to inverter output terminals U, V, and W.
• Even if the run command is set to OFF, voltage is output to inverter output terminals U, V, and W if the servo-lock
command is ON.
• Even if the motor is stopped due to DC braking or preliminary excitation, voltage is output to inverter output terminals
U, V, and W.
An electric shock may occur.
• The inverter can easily accept high-speed operation. When changing the speed setting, carefully check the
specifications of motors or equipment beforehand.
Otherwise, injuries could occur.
• Do not touch the heat sink and braking resistor because they become very hot.
Doing so could cause burns.
• The DC brake function of the inverter does not provide any holding mechanism.
Injuries could occur.
• Ensure safety before modifying the function code settings.
Run commands (e.g., "Run forward" FWD), stop commands (e.g., "Coast to a stop" BX), and speed change commands
can be assigned to digital input terminals. Depending upon the assignment states of those terminals, modifying the
function code setting may cause a sudden motor start or an abrupt change in speed.
• When the inverter is controlled with the digital input signals, switching run or speed command sources with the related
terminal commands (e.g., SS1, SS2, SS4, SS8, N2/N1, KP/PID, IVS, and LE) may cause a sudden motor start or an
abrupt change in speed.
xviii
Maintenance and inspection, and parts replacement
• Before proceeding to the maintenance/inspection jobs, turn OFF the power and wait at least five minutes for
inverters with a capacity of 22 kW or below, or at least ten minutes for inverters with a capacity of 30 kW or
above. Make sure that the LED monitor and charging lamp are turned OFF. Further, make sure, using a multimeter or a
similar instrument, that the DC link bus voltage between the terminals P(+) and N(-) has dropped to the safe level (+25
VDC or below).
• Maintenance, inspection, and parts replacement should be made only by qualified persons.
• Take off the watch, rings and other metallic objects before starting work.
• Use insulated tools.
Otherwise, an electric shock or injuries could occur.
• Never modify the inverter.
Doing so could cause an electric shock or injuries.
Disposal
• Treat the inverter as an industrial waste when disposing of it.

Otherwise injuries could occur.
Speed control mode
• If the control parameters of the automatic speed regulator (ASR) are not appropriately configured under speed control,
even turning the run command OFF may not decelerate the motor due to hunting caused by high gain setting.
Accordingly, the inverter may not reach the stop conditions so that it may continue running.
Even if the inverter starts deceleration, the detected speed deviates from the zero speed area before the zero speed
control duration (F39) elapses due to hunting caused by high response in low speed operation. Accordingly, the inverter
will not reach the stop conditions so that it enters the deceleration mode again and continues running.
If any of the above problems occurs, adjust the ASR control parameters to appropriate values and use the speed
mismatch alarm function in order to alarm-trip the inverter, switch the control parameters by speed, or judge the
detection of a stop speed by commanded values when the actual speed deviates from the commanded one.
Torque control mode
• When the motor is rotated by load-side torque exceeding the torque command under torque control, turning the run
command OFF may not bring the stop conditions so that the inverter may continue running.
To shut down the inverter output, switch from torque control to speed control and apply a decelerate-to-stop or
coast-to-stop command.
GENERAL PRECAUTIONS
Drawings in this manual may be illustrated without covers or safety shields for explanation of detail parts. Restore the
covers and shields in the original state and observe the description in the manual before starting operation.
xix
Icons
The following icons are used throughout this manual.
This icon indicates information which, if not heeded, can result in the inverter not operating to
full efficiency, as well as information concerning incorrect operations and settings which can
result in accidents.
This icon indicates information that can prove handy when performing certain settings or
operations.
This icon indicates a reference to more detailed information.
xx
FRENIC- VG
1
Chapter 1
OVERVIEW
This chapter describes the overview, features and the control system of the FRENIC-VG series and the
recommended configuration for the inverter and peripheral equipment.
Contents
1.1 Overview............................................................................................................................................. 1-1

1.1.1 Industry-best control performance .............................................................................................. 1-1
1.1.2 System support ............................................................................................................................ 1-1
1.1.3 Extensive built-in functionality ................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1.4 Broad capacity and application ranges ........................................................................................ 1-1
1.1.5 Global support............................................................................................................................. 1-2
1.2 Features ............................................................................................................................................... 1-3
1.2.1 Best-in-industry control performance.......................................................................................... 1-3
1.2.2 Support for various control methods (multi-drive function) ....................................................... 1-4
1.2.3 Broad capacity range/flexible application range ......................................................................... 1-4
1.2.4 User program functionality (option: UPAC)*1 ........................................................................... 1-4
1.2.5 Extensive network support .......................................................................................................... 1-5
1.2.6 Available inverter support loader ................................................................................................ 1-5
1.2.7 Extensive built-in functionality ................................................................................................... 1-6
1.2.8 Extensive maintenance and protective functionality ................................................................... 1-7
1.2.9 Environmental considerations ..................................................................................................... 1-8
1.2.10 Simple, interactive keypad ........................................................................................................ 1-10
1.2.11 Compliance with overseas standards......................................................................................... 1-11
1.2.12 Compliance with functional safety standards............................................................................ 1-11
1.2.13 Compatibility with legacy models............................................................................................. 1-11
1.3 Control Methods ............................................................................................................................... 1-12
1.3.1 Control method features and applications ................................................................................. 1-12
1.3.1.1 Open-loop speed control .......................................................................................................... 1-12
1.3.1.2 Closed-loop speed control........................................................................................................ 1-14
1.1 Overview
1.1 Overview
Chap. 1
1.1.1 Industry-best control performance
OVERVIEW
z The FRENIC-VG implements vector control with a speed sensor (induction and synchronous
motors), vector control without a speed sensor (induction and synchronous motors*1), V/f control
(induction motors), and multi-drive functionality.
z Vector control with a speed sensor (for FRENIC-VG induction motors) delivers best-in-industry
performance with a speed response of 600 Hz, current response of 2,000 Hz, speed control
accuracy of ±0.005%, and torque control accuracy of ±3%.
*1 Available soon.
1.1.2 System support

z The FRENIC-VG ships standard with RS-485 communications functionality and optional support
for T-Link, SX bus, and CC-Link interfaces.
z The UPAC optional card with user program functionality allows users to configure and develop
proprietary systems, and dedicated package software is also available*1.
z The FRENIC-VG Loader, which offers extensive functionality including traceback and real-time
trace capability, supports Windows XP, Vista, and 7.
*1 Available soon.
1.1.3 Extensive built-in functionality

z Extensive auto-tuning function for optimal control of all types of motors
z Built-in load oscillation suppression observer function and load compensation control function
z Extensive position control functionality, including zero-speed lock control
z Optional position synchronization control using pulse train input
z Optional orientation control*1
*1 Available soon.
1.1.4 Broad capacity and application ranges

z A single set of specifications supports a broad range of capacities—from 0.75 kW to 90 kW for
200 V circuits and 3.7 kW to 630 kW for 400 V circuits—simplifying the system development
process.
z Three sets of ratings are supported by HD mode (constant-torque), which offers an overload
rating of 150% for 1 min. and 200% for 3 sec.; LD mode (square deceleration torque), which
supports motors with rated currents one step larger than the inverter and offers an overload rating
of 120% for 1 min.; and MD mode, which supports motors with rated currents one step larger
than the inverter while limiting the inverter’s internal switching frequency and offers an overload
rating of 150% for 1 min.
1-1
1.1.5 Global support
z The standard model complies with UL/cUL*1 standards, CE Mark*1 requirements, and the RoHS
Directive, making it possible to standardize equipment and machinery specifications both inside
and outside Japan.
z The FRENIC-VG complies with the EN 61800-5-2 functional safety standard in its standard
configuration*1.
z The OPC-VG1-SAFE functional safety option allows safety functionality to be expanded.
z The keypad offers standard support for eight languages*1, ensuring peace of mind when
exporting devices or machinery that use the inverter.
z Optional support is available for various open networks.
*1 Available soon.
1-2
1.2 Features
1.2 Features
Chap. 1
The FRENIC-VG is a high-performance vector control inverter that provides a high degree of
freedom in adjusting speed and torque.
OVERVIEW
1.2.1 Best-in-industry control performance
z Speed response of 600 Hz (6× Fuji’s previous VG7 model when using vector control with a
speed sensor)
z Current response of 2,000 Hz (2× Fuji’s previous VG7 model when using vector control with a
speed sensor)
z Torque control accuracy (linear) of ±3% and speed control accuracy of ±0.005%
Speed response of 600 Hz Tracking characteristics with impact load
Reduction of rotational unevenness to 1/3 Speed and torque characteristics
1-3
1.2.2 Support for various control methods (multi-drive function)
z Supports vector control with a speed sensor, vector control without a speed sensor, and V/f
control for induction motors.
z Supports vector control with a speed sensor (requires optional card) and vector control without a
speed sensor*1 for synchronous motors.
*1 Available soon.
1.2.3 Broad capacity range/flexible application range

z A single model supports a broad range of capacities from 0.75 kW to 630 kW, simplifying the
system development process.
z The standard model supports three modes.
The operating mode is switched based on the motor’s load conditions. In medium-duty (MD) and
low-duty (LD) applications, the FRENIC-VG can drive motors one to two steps larger than the
inverter.
Mode Applied load Characteristics Applied overload rating
Current 150% for 1 min. / 200% for
HD High duty (standard) Powerful, low noise
3 sec.
Can drive a motor one step larger than Current 150% for 1 min., carrier 2
MD Medium duty
the inverter*1. to 4 kHz*2
Can drive a motor 1 to 2 steps larger
LD Low duty Current 120% for 1 min.
than the inverter*1.
*1 Varies with motor specifications and supply voltage.
*2 Produces a higher level of noise. Verify suitability of environment in which motor will be installed.
1.2.4 User program functionality (option: UPAC)*1

z The optional UPAC (User Programmable Application Card), which provides user program
functionality, allows certain aspects of inverter control and terminal functionality to be changed,
making it possible for users to configure and develop proprietary systems.
z Dedicated package software is also available for functionality such as tension control, dancer
control, and position control.
*1 Available soon.
UPAC system
Computer
Inverter link (optical communications) period as low as 2 ms Inverter support loader
when using optical transmission UPAC support loader
(equivalent to D300Win)
RS-485/RS-232C converter
RS-485 (38.4 kbps)
UPAC installed on FRENIC-VG master device only

Inverter link option installed on all devices
Dedicated FRENIC-VG motor or

general-purpose motor
1-4
1.2 Features
1.2.5 Extensive network support
Chap. 1
z The FRENIC-VG ships standard with RS-485 communications functionality and optional support
for T-Link, SX bus, and CC-Link interfaces.
OVERVIEW
z It also supports various open buses (PROFIBUS-DP, etc.)*1.
*1 Available soon.
RS-485 systems
A standard RS-485 terminal is provided as a control circuit terminal, making it simple to implement
multi-drop connections.
T-Link systems
MICREX-SX with T-Link module

Computer
T-Link (500 kbps)
RS-485 (38.4 kbps) RS-485/RS-232C

converter
FRENIC-VG with
T-Link option Use the dedicated SX bus option to
enable connections to an SX bus.
Use the dedicated field bus option to
enable connections to various open
buses (PROFIBUS-DP, etc.).
Dedicated FRENIC-VG motor
or general-purpose motor
1.2.6 Available inverter support loader

z An available inverter support loader (option) with Windows support simplifies the process of
setting function codes.
After being connected to a

computer via the standard
built-in USB interface, the
FRENIC-VG loader allows
function codes to be set.
The loader operates on

Windows XP, Vista, and 7 and
adds operation monitor,
real-time trace, historical
trace, and trace back
functionality.
1-5
1.2.7 Extensive built-in functionality
z Extensive auto-tuning functionality
The motor constant can be tuned while the motor is in the stopped state.
An online tuning function allows motor parameters to be revised while the motor continues to
operate.
z Built-in observer function for suppressing load oscillation
z Load compensation control function

Enables continuous speed control during low-duty operation.
z Extensive position control functionality

Zero-speed lock control
Optional position synchronization control using pulse train input
Optional orientation control*1
z Built-in braking unit

The FRENIC-VG incorporates a built-in braking unit for use with capacities of 55 kW or less
(for 200 V circuits) or 160 kW or less (for 400 V circuits), allowing a braking resistor to be
connected directly to the FRENIC-VG unit. This feature helps make machinery and devices
using the inverter more compact.
z Total of 23 I/O contacts

Input Output
Analog 3 contacts 3 contacts
Digital 11 contacts 6 contacts
z PG feedback interface
Standard built-in complementary PG interface (12 V, 15 V)
Optional line driver and resolver*1 support
Optional support for 4-bit signals, UVW, Z-phase, and EnDat*1 as magnetic position signals
for driving synchronous motors
*1 Available soon.
1-6
1.2 Features
1.2.8 Extensive maintenance and protective functionality
Chap. 1
z A traceback function automatically records operating state data (traceback data) such as the speed,
torque, current, and voltage immediately prior to a trip stop inside the inverter. The FRENIC-VG
Loader can be used to capture traceback data and display the operating state immediately prior to
OVERVIEW
a trip stop in chart form, making it easier to search for the causes of such events.
z A calendar and clock function records the time and date of trip stops, making it easier to search
for the causes of such events.
z The inverter’s operating state at the time of the most recent and three previous trip stops is stored
and can be monitored on the keypad.
z By setting a specific alarm as a light failure target in advance, it is possible to display data on the
keypad and generate “do” output without initiating a trip stop event.
z A psuedo-failure can be triggered by either keypad operation or the FRENIC-VG Loader. This
capability can be used to check the trip stop sequence.
z I/O terminal check function
z Main circuit capacitor service life detection
z Inverter load rate measurement
z Recording and display of cumulative run time
z Display of operating state data such as output voltage, cooler temperature, and torque command
value
z Configuration of the electronic thermal time constant, allowing the inverter to support a variety
of motors
z The design life of various consumable parts inside the inverter has been extended to 10 years,
which has allowed equipment maintenance cycles to be extended.
Consumable part Design life

Cooling fan 10 years
Main circuit capacitor 10 years
Electrolytic capacitor on PCB 10 years
Fuse (90 kW or above) 10 years
Calendar/clock backup battery 5 years
Service life figures are based on the following conditions:

- Ambient temperature: 40°C
- Load factor: 100% (HD mode), 80% (MD/LD mode)
*Design life figures are calculated values and are not intended to serve as a guarantee of hardware
performance.
1-7
z Extensive service life warnings
The inverter provides functionality designed to facilitate machinery maintenance.
Item Purpose
Cumulative run time (unit: 1 hour) Displays the total run time for the inverter.
The amount of time during which the main power supply is supplied
is indicated as a whole number of hours.
Cumulative motor run time (unit: 10 Displays the total run time for the motor.
hours) This figure is used to determine the service life of the machinery
(load).
Cumulative startup count Displays the number of motor startups.
This figure can be used as a guide for timing the replacement of
machinery parts (such as timing belts) that are placed under load
during normal operation.
Equipment maintenance warning The inverter can output a warning signal when the set value is
Cumulative motor run time (unit: 10 reached.
hours) This functionality makes it possible to manage the motor’s
Cumulative startup count cumulative run time and number of startups, which are useful in
planning maintenance.
Display of inverter service life alarm Displays the following:
x Current capacitance of DC link bus capacitor
x Total run time of the cooling fan (with on/off compensation)
x Total run time of the electrolytic capacitor on the PCB
1.2.9 Environmental considerations

z Enhanced environmental resistance
The inverter offers improved resistance to harsh operating environments compared to
conventional inverter models.
(1) Enhanced environmental resistance of the cooling fan
(2) Adoption of nickel and tin plating for copper bars
While the FRENIC-VG offers improved resistance to harsh operating environments compared to
conventional models, special consideration concerning the operating environment is necessary in
the following cases:
a. Environments where sulfide gas is present (some applications in tire manufacturing, paper
manufacturing, sewage treatment, and fiber manufacturing)
b. Environments where conductive dust or foreign matter is present (metalworking, extruding
machine or printing press operation, waste disposal, etc.)
c. Other: Where the inverter would be used in an environment that differs from the standard
specifications
If you are considering using the inverter under any of the above conditions, please contact Fuji in
advance.
1-8
1.2 Features
z Protection against micro-surges (optional)
Chap. 1
SSU surge suppression units (optional)
If the motor drive cable is too long, a very low surge voltage (micro-surge) may be generated at
the motor connection ends. This surge voltage can cause deterioration of the motor, dielectric
OVERVIEW
breakdown, and increased noise. A surge suppression unit can be used to suppress this surge
voltage.
(1) Simply connecting a surge suppression unit to the motor dramatically reduces the surge
voltage.
(2) Since no additional work is required, the units can be easily installed on existing equipment.
(3) The units can be used with motors with a capacity of 75 kW or less.
(4) The units require no power source or maintenance.
(5) Two types are available: one for 50 m motor cable and the other for 100 m motor cable.
(6) The units comply with environmental and safety standards (including the RoHS Directive).
z Compliance with the RoHS Directive

The FRENIC-VG complies with the Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS) Directive in its
standard configuration. It is an environmentally friendly inverter as use of the following six
hazardous substances has been restricted.
Six hazardous substances
Lead, mercury, cadmium, hexavalent chromium, polybrominated biphenyls (PBBs), and
polybrominated diphenyl ether (PBDE)
*Except certain parts on some models.
About the RoHS Directive
Directive 2002/96/EC, promulgated by the European Parliament and European Council, limits
the use of specific hazardous substances in electrical and electronic devices.
1-9
1.2.10 Simple, interactive keypad
z A large, easy-to-read LED consisting of five 7-segment digits allows users to visually check
monitor values with ease.
z A backlit dot matrix LCD allows users to set function codes and monitor multiple data points at
the same time while displaying guidance.
z Standard copy function

Function code data can be easily copied to another FRENIC-VG unit.
z Out-of-the-box remote operation

Simply connect the inverter and keypad with a 10Base-T LAN cable to enable remote operation
(at distances of up to 20 m).
z Standard support for eight languages (Japanese, English, German, French, Italian, Spanish,
Chinese, and Korean)*1
*1 German, French, Italian, and Spanish: Available soon.
z JOG (jogging) operation is possible with keypad key or terminal block input.
z A help key displays guidance on device operation.
z The calendar and clock function can display the time and date.
1-10
1.2 Features
1.2.11 Compliance with overseas standards
Chap. 1
z The FRENIC-VG complies with the following
overseas standards in its standard configuration,
allowing standardization of device and machinery
OVERVIEW
specifications in Japan and overseas:
EC directives: Low Voltage Directive*1, RoHS Directive,
Machinery Directive*1, UL standards, cUL standards*1
z The unit also complies with the EMC Directive when the standard model is combined with an
optional component (EMC filter)*1.
*1 Available soon.
1.2.12 Compliance with functional safety standards

z The FRENIC-VG incorporates an STO safety function that complies with the EN 61800-5-2
functional safety standard in its standard configuration*1.
z With the OPC-VG1-SAFE functional safety option, the unit provides STO, SS1, SLS, and SBC
safety functions that comply with the EN 61800-5-2 functional safety standard*1.
STO safety function: Safe torque off

Functionality for immediately turning motor torque off (by interrupting output).
SS1 safety function: Safe stop 1
Functionality for decelerating the motor and immediately turning motor torque off with the STO
function (by interrupting output) when a specified speed is reached or a specified time has
elapsed.
SLS safety function: Safely limited speed
Functionality for ensuring that the motor speed does not exceed a specified speed.
SBC safety function: Safe brake control
Functionality for outputting a signal to control motor braking
*1: Available soon.
1.2.13 Compatibility with legacy models

The FRENIC-VG is compatible with previous Fuji vector control inverters, making it easy to update
to the FRENIC-VG.
z Compatibility with the FRENIC5000VG5S*1
By changing FRENIC-VG VG5-compatible models to VG5 compatibility mode, the FRENIC-VG
can be configured with VG5 function code without any need to change function code numbers or
data definitions. A compatible adapter is available to allow mounting of the unit.
*1: Available soon.
z Compatibility with the FRENIC5000VG7S

Since the FRENIC-VG’s function codes are compatible with the VG7’s function codes, the
FRENIC-VG can be configured with VG7 function codes without modification (except M3
function codes). Additionally, function codes can be captured from a VG7 unit with the
FRENIC-VG Loader and copied to the FRENIC-VG without modification.
1-11
1.3 Control Methods
1.3.1 Control method features and applications
Inverter-based devices for varying AC motor speed are most commonly used to control the rotational
speed of a load. This section describes the basic architecture of various speed control methods, their
characteristics, and important information to consider when using them in various applications.
Speaking broadly, speed control systems can be classified as either open-loop or closed-loop control
systems (see Figure 1.3.1).
Speed Control Open-loop control V/f control
Slip compensation control
Closed-loop control Slip frequency control
Vector control
Vector control without

speed sensor
Figure 1.3.1 Classification of Speed Control Methods
1.3.1.1 Open-loop speed control
Main circuit
Converter Inverter
+ M
3-
Control circuit |V*|: Voltage command

f*: Frequency command
Acceleration/ |V*|
deceleration V/f
computational 3-phase
unit pattern voltage
command
PWM
f* calculation
Frequency
setting
Figure 1.3.2 Open-loop Speed Control: Basic Architecture
1-12
1.3 Control Methods
As is illustrated in Figure 1.3.2, “Open-loop
Chap. 1
f f f 1
f f f 6 5 4 3 2
Speed Control: Basic Architecture,” this approach

attempts to control the load’s rotational speed by
Load
Torque
means of the frequency of inverter output, without torque
OVERVIEW
generating feedback in the form of speed
information for the control target. As shown in
Figure 1.3.3, induction motors’ speed versus
torque characteristics are characterized by a slight
0 N N N N N N 6 5 4 3 2 1
slope across frequencies f1 to f6. If the frequency Speed

of the voltage supplied to the motor remains
Figure 1.3.3 Speed Versus Torque
constant, then there is little variation in rotational Characteristics
speed in response to variations in load; for
example, slip at the rated torque is on the order of several percent. In other words, when controlling
the motor’s speed by changing the inverter’s output frequency, V/f control, which controls the ratio
between the motor’s terminal voltage and the applied frequency, is generally used.
Since open-loop control does not require a speed sensor, it is primarily used by general-purpose
inverters in applications where fast response is not particularly important, for example to enable
variable-speed operation of existing motors or with squared-deceleration torque loads such as fans or
pumps.
Main circuit
Converter Inverter
+ M
3-
Control circuit
Acceleration/ + |V*|
deceleration V/f |V*|: Voltage command
computational 3-phase f*: Frequency command
unit + pattern voltage t : Torque calculated value
command PWM v: Detected voltage value
ωｓｌ f* i: Detected current value
Frequency calculation ωｓｌ: Amount of slip
compensation
setting K
v
t Torque
calculation i
Figure 1.3.4 Speed Control Using the Slip Compensation Method
Factors determining the accuracy of the rotational speed in open-loop speed control include load
torque fluctuations, accuracy of the output frequency, and supply voltage fluctuations. The slip
compensation control method addresses load torque fluctuations by calculating the output torque
from the motor’s terminal voltage and primary current and compensating the inverter’s output
frequency accordingly in an attempt to maintain a constant rotational speed, as illustrated in Figure
1.3.4.
1-13
1.3.1.2 Closed-loop speed control
Closed-loop speed control compensates for speed fluctuations by generating feedback in the form of
speed information.
Since highly accurate speed control is possible by generating feedback in the form of the control
target’s rotational speed, closed-loop speed control can be used in applications such as paper
machines and machine tools.
Main circuit
Converter Inverter
Speed
detector
+ M
PG
3-
Control circuit
N* : Speed command
value
N* + Speed Torque N: Detected speed value
- control control
N
Speed
setting
Figure 1.3.5 Closed-loop Speed Control: Basic Architecture
Figure 1.3.5 illustrates the basic architecture of the closed-loop speed control method. Speed
information from a speed detection sensor such as a pulse generator (PG) is fed back to the system
and compared to the speed command, and the inverter’s output frequency is controlled so that the
speed command and the detected speed value match.
Speed control methods include slip frequency control, vector control with a speed sensor, and vector
control without a speed sensor. An overview of each of these control methods follows.
The FRENIC-VG series of high-performance vector control inverters uses closed-loop vector control
to implement speed control.
1-14
1.3 Control Methods
(a) Slip frequency control
Chap. 1
Main circuit
Converter Inverter
OVERVIEW
Speed
detector
+ M
PG
3-
N* : Speed command value

Control circuit N : Detected speed value
iT* : Torque current
iT* command value
＋ Current
iM* : Excitation current
Ｎ＊
Vector calculation
command value
controller iT : Detected torque current
Vector
rotator
＋ Speed － value
PWM iM : Detected excitation
－ controller iM * current value
＋ Current
Ｎ controller
i: Motor current
(instantaneous value)
－
Speed
setting
iM
Vector
rotator
i
iT
Figure 1.3.6 Slip Frequency Control Architecture
Figure 1.3.6 illustrates the architecture of the slip frequency control method. Output from the speed
controller becomes the slip frequency based on the torque, and the inverter compensates for speed
fluctuations by adding the slip frequency to the actual speed. Because this method is comparatively
simple, it is used in applications such as speed control in general-purpose inverters. However, since
basic control is performed using V/f control, this method is used in applications that do not require
fast response.
1-15
(b) Vector control with a speed sensor
Vector control is used to implement fast response for AC motors. By controlling an AC motor’s
primary current, magnetic flux current, and torque current separately, vector control attempts to
achieve a similar level of control performance as that for DC motors.
Vector control achieves performance that differs from the V/f control method in the following ways,
making it well suited for use in applications that require fast response and high accuracy:
(1) Good acceleration and deceleration characteristics
(2) Broad speed control range
(3) Torque control capability
(4) Fast control response
Main circuit
Converter Inverter
+ M
3-
Control circuit
ω2* iT* *
Speed VT
calculation circuit
Torque
Voltage vector
controller current
iT controller PWM
ω
＾2 V1
pulse
generation
iM* *
iM* Magnetizing VM circuit
iM current
controller
iM ia
2-phase
iT VD iß /
3-phase
*
ωSL ω1
Slip Integration
frequency circuit
calculation ω
＾2
Magnetic EM Ea
circuit flux angle Inductive
controller voltage
VD calculation
circuit
ET
Eß
Figure 1.3.7 Example Vector Control Architecture
Figure 1.3.7 illustrates an example vector control architecture. Since the vector calculation unit uses
the motor constant, performance varies greatly with the accuracy with which that constant is
understood. Performance is also significantly affected by changes to the constant caused by
temperature conditions. Since the control method is complex, this method is primarily used with
combinations of dedicated inverters and dedicated motors.
1-16
1.3 Control Methods
(c) Vector control without a speed sensor
Chap. 1
Vector control with a speed sensor offers exceptional performance in terms of fast response and high
accuracy but suffers from issues such as the need to install a speed sensor and route wiring from the
sensor to the inverter. By contrast, vector control without a speed sensor estimates the rotational
OVERVIEW
speed based on the motor’s terminal voltage and primary current without relying on sensor input and
uses the estimated value as the speed feedback signal. Vector control without a speed sensor delivers
performance that is slightly inferior to vector control with a speed sensor.
Figure 1.3.8 illustrates an example of vector control without a speed sensor.
Main circuit
Converter Inverter
+
M
Control circuit
ω2* *
Speed iT*
VT
calculation circuit
Torque
Voltage vector
controller current
iT controller PWM
ω
＾2 V1 pulse
* generation
iM*
iM* Magnetizing VM circuit
iM current
controller
iM ia
2-phase
iT VD iß /
3-phase
Slip ω*SL ω1 Integration

frequency circuit
calculation ω
＾2 Magnetic EM Ea
circuit flux angle Inductive
controller voltage
VD calculation
circuit
ET
Eß
Figure 1.3.8 Example Architecture for Vector Control without a Speed Sensor
The FRENIC-VG can use this type of control when utilized in combination with a general-purpose
motor. However, control performance and other specifications are slightly inferior to those of
applications where the inverter is used in combination with a dedicated motor.
1-17
FRENIC- VG
2
Chapter 2
SPECIFICATIONS
This chapter describes specifications of the output ratings, control system, dedicated motor specifications,
and terminal functions for the FRENIC-VG series of inverters. It also provides descriptions of the external
dimensions, examples of basic connection diagrams, and details of the protective functions.
Contents
2.1 Standard Model 1 (Basic Type)................................................................................................................... 2-1

2.1.1 HD (High Duty)-mode inverters for heavy load ................................................................................. 2-1
2.1.2 MD (Medium Duty)-mode inverters for medium load........................................................................ 2-3
2.1.3 LD (Low Duty)-mode inverters for light load..................................................................................... 2-4
2.1.4 Rated current derating ......................................................................................................................... 2-6
2.2 Common Specifications ............................................................................................................................ 2-10
2.3 External Dimensions ................................................................................................................................. 2-16
2.3.1 Standard models ................................................................................................................................ 2-16
2.3.2 Keypad .............................................................................................................................................. 2-27
2.4 Dedicated Motor Specifications................................................................................................................ 2-28
2.4.1 Induction motor (IM) with speed sensor ........................................................................................... 2-28
2.4.2 Permanent magnet synchronous motor (PMSM) with speed sensor ................................................. 2-32
2.5 Protective Functions.................................................................................................................................. 2-38
2.6 Connection Diagrams and Terminal Functions ......................................................................................... 2-42
2.6.1 Connection diagrams......................................................................................................................... 2-42
2.6.1.1 Running the MVK type of an induction motor (dedicated motor) ............................................ 2-42
2.6.1.2 Running the GNF2 type of a permanent magnet synchronous motor (dedicated motor) .......... 2-44
2.6.2 List of terminal functions .................................................................................................................. 2-46
2.1 Standard Model 1 (Basic Type)

2.1.1 HD (High Duty)-mode inverters for heavy load
Chap. 2
Three-phase 200 V class series
Type (FRN_ _ _VG1S-2) 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90
SPECIFICATIONS
Nominal applied motor (kW) 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90
Rated capacity (kVA) *1 1.9 3.0 4.1 6.8 10 14 18 24 28 34 45 55 68 81 107 131
Rated current (A) 5 8 11 18 27 37 49 63 76 90 119 146 180 215 283 346
150% of the rated current for 1 minute *2
Overload capability
200% of the rated current for 3 seconds *3
Main power input: Three-phase,
Phase, voltage, Three-phase, 200 to 230 V, 50/60 Hz 200 to 220 V/50 Hz,
frequency 200 to 230 V/60 Hz *4
Auxiliary control power
input: Phase, voltage, Single-phase, 200 to 230V, 50/60 Hz
frequency
Auxiliary fan power Single-phase
Input power
input: Phase, voltage, - 200 to 220 V/50 Hz,

frequency *5 200 to 230 V/60 Hz *4
Allowable
Voltage: +10 to -15% (Interphase voltage unbalance: 2% or less *6), Frequency: +5 to -5%
voltage/frequency
Rated current (A) *7 3.2 6.1 8.9 15.0 21.1 28.8 42.2 57.6 71.0 84.4 114 138 167 203 282 334
(with DCR)
(without DCR) 5.3 9.5 13.2 22.2 31.5 42.7 60.7 80.1 97.0 112 151 185 225 270 －－
Required capacity (kVA)
1.2 2.2 3.1 5.2 7.4 10 15 20 25 30 40 48 58 71 98 116
*8
Braking resistor discharge control: 150% braking torque,
Braking system,
Separately mounted braking resistor (option),
Braking torque
Separately mounted braking unit (option for FRN75VG1S-2J or higher type)
Carrier frequency (kHz) *9 2 to 15 2 to 10
Approx. mass (kg) 6.2 6.2 6.2 6.2 6.2 6.2 11 11 11 12 25 32 42 43 62 105
IP00, UL open type
Enclosure IP20, UL open type
(IP20 is optionally available.)
Note: A box () replaces an alphabetic letter depending on the shipping destination.
Note: The above specifications apply when Function code F80 = 0 (HD mode).
A DC reactor (DCR) is provided as standard for HD-mode inverters of 75 kW or above.
*1 This specification applies when the rated output voltage is 220 V.

*2 When the inverter output frequency converted is less than 10 Hz, the inverter may trip earlier due to overload depending on the surrounding
temperature and other conditions.
*4 Inverters of 200 to 230 V/50 Hz are available on request.
*5 Use this input as an AC fan power in a power system using a power regenerative PWM converter. (Usually, there is no need to use this
input.)
Max. voltage (V) - Min. voltage (V)
*6 Voltage unbalance (%) = × 67
Three - phase average voltage (V)
If this value exceeds 2%, use an AC reactor (ACR).
*7 This specification is an estimate to be applied when the power supply capacity is 500 kVA (Inverter capacity x 10 when the capacity
exceeds 50 kVA) and the power supply with %X = 5% is connected.
*8 This specification applies when a DC reactor (DCR) is used. (A DCR is optionally available for inverters of 55 kW or below.)
If the power source uses an electrical generator, it may burn due to the inverter harmonic current. To avoid such an accident, about three or
four times the required capacity should be ensured. (About four times when no DCR is connected; about three times when a DCR is
connected.)
*9 The inverter may automatically reduce the carrier frequency in accordance with the surrounding temperature or output current in order to
protect itself.
Canceling the automatic lowering of the carrier frequency (H104, hundreds digit) lowers the inverter's continuous rated current according
to the carrier frequency setting. (For the details about the rated current lowering characteristics, refer to Chapter 2, Section 2.1.4.)
2-1
Type (FRN_ _ _VG1S-4) 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 280 315 355 400 500 630
Nominal applied motor (kW) 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 280 315 355 400 500 630
Rated capacity (kVA) *1 6.8 10 14 18 24 29 34 45 57 69 85 114 134 160 192 231 287 316 396 445 495 563 731 891
Rated current (A) 9.0 13.5 18.5 24.5 32.0 39.0 45.0 60.0 75.0 91.0 112 150 176 210 253 304 377 415 520 585 650 740 960 1170
150% of the rated current for 1
minute *2
Overload capability
200% of the rated current for 3
seconds *3
Phase, voltage, Three-phase, 380 to 480 V, 50/60 Hz 380 to 440 V/50 Hz,
input: Phase, voltage, Single-phase, 380 to 480 V, 50/60 Hz
frequency
Auxiliary fan power Single-phase,
Input power

Allowable
voltage/frequency
Rated current (A) *7 7.5 10.6 14.4 21.1 28.8 35.5 42.2 57.0 68.5 83.2 102 138 164 210 238 286 357 390 500 559 628 705 881 1115
(with DCR)
(without DCR) 13.0 17.3 23.2 33 43.8 52.3 60.6 77.9 94.3 114 140 -
5.2 7.4 10 15 20 25 30 40 48 58 71 96 114 140 165 199 248 271 347 388 436 489 610 773
*8
Braking system,
Braking torque
Carrier frequency (kHz) *9 2 to 15 2 to 10 2 to 5
Approx. mass (kg) 6.2 6.2 6.2 11 11 11 11 25 26 31 33 42 62 64 94 98 129 140 245 245 330 330 555 555
Enclosure IP20, UL open type IP00, UL open type (IP20 is optionally available.)
Note: The above specifications apply when Function code F80 = 0 (HD mode).
A DC reactor (DCR) is provided as standard for HD-mode inverters of 75 kW or above.

*4 For 380 to 398 V/50 Hz or 380 to 430 V/60 Hz, connector switching is required inside the inverter.
If the input voltage is 380 V, the output may be reduced. For details, refer to the User's Manual.
input.)
*8 This specification applies when a DC reactor (DCR) is used. (A DCR is optionally available for inverters of 55 kW or below.)
connected.)
protect itself.
2-2
2.1.2 MD (Medium Duty)-mode inverters for medium load

Chap. 2
Type (FRN_ _ _VG1S-4) 90 110 132 160 200 220 280 315 355 400
Nominal applied motor (kW)
110 132 160 200 220 250 315 355 400 450
*7
Rated capacity (kVA) *1 160 192 231 287 316 356 445 495 563 640
SPECIFICATIONS
Rated current (A) 210 253 304 377 415 468 585 650 740 840
Overload capability 150% of the rated current for 1 minute
Phase, voltage, 380 to 440 V/50 Hz,
frequency
Input power
input: Phase, voltage, 380 to 440 V/50 Hz,

Allowable
voltage/frequency
Rated current (A) *5 210 238 286 357 390 443 559 628 705 789
(with DCR)
(without DCR) -
140 165 199 248 271 312 388 436 489 547
*6
Braking system,
Braking torque
Carrier frequency (kHz) *8 2 to 4
Approx. mass (kg) 62 64 94 98 129 140 245 245 330 330
Enclosure IP00, UL open type (IP20 is optionally available.)
Note: The above specifications apply when Function code F80 = 3 (MD mode).
To use the inverter in the MD mode, inform your Fuji Electric representative of the MD-mode use when placing an order. The inverter
comes with a DC reactor (DCR) suitable for the nominal applied motor as standard.

input.)
*5 This specification is an estimate to be applied when the power supply capacity is equal to "Inverter capacity x 10" and the power supply
with %X = 5% is connected.
*6 This specification applies when a DC reactor (DCR) is used.
connected.)
*7 Depending on the load conditions, motor heating may increase due to the low carrier frequency. When placing an order for motors,
therefore, specify the MD-mode use.
*8 Running the PMSM at low carrier frequency may overheat the permanent magnet due to the output current harmonics, resulting in
demagnetization. The carrier frequency specification of the inverter is low (2 to 4 kHz), so be sure to check the allowable carrier frequency
of the motor. If the MD-mode inverter is not applicable due to the low carrier frequency (2 to 4 kHz), consider the HD mode (H80 = 0).
2-3
2.1.3 LD (Low Duty)-mode inverters for light load
Type (FRN_ _ _VG1S-2) 30 37 45 55 75 90
Nominal applied motor (kW) 37 45 55 75 90 110
Rated capacity (kVA) *1 55 68 81 107 131 158
Rated current (A) 146 180 215 283 346 415
frequency
Input power

Allowable
voltage/frequency
Rated current (A) *5 138 167 203 282 334 410
(with DCR)
(without DCR) 185 225 270 - －－
48 58 71 98 116 143
*6
Braking system,
Braking torque
Carrier frequency (kHz) *7 2 to 10 2 to 5
Approx. mass (kg) 25 32 42 43 62 105
Note: The above specifications apply when Function code F80 = 1 (LD mode).
To use the inverter of 55 kW or above in the LD mode, inform your Fuji Electric representative of the LD-mode use when placing an
order. The inverter comes with a DC reactor (DCR) suitable for the nominal applied motor as standard.

*2 Inverters of 200 to 230 V/50 Hz are available on request.
input.)
*6 This specification applies when a DC reactor (DCR) is used. (A DCR is optionally available for the FRN45VG1S-2J or lower type.)
connected.)
protect itself.
2-4

Type (FRN_ _ _VG1S-4) 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 280 315 355 400 500 630
Nominal applied motor (kW) 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 280 355 400 450 500 630 710
Chap. 2
Rated capacity (kVA) *1 57 69 85 114 134 160 192 231 287 316 396 495 563 640 731 891 1044
Rated current (A) 75 91 112 150 176 210 253 304 377 415 520 650 740 840 960 1170 1370
SPECIFICATIONS
Three-phase,
380 to 480 V, 50/60 Hz
frequency
Input power

Allowable
voltage/frequency
Rated current (A) *5 68.5 83.2 102 138 164 210 238 286 357 390 500 628 705 789 881 1115 1256
(with DCR)
(without DCR) 94.3 114 140 - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Required capacity
48 58 71 96 114 140 165 199 248 271 347 436 489 547 611 773 871
(kVA) *6
Braking system,
Braking torque
Carrier frequency (kHz) *7 2 to 10 2 to 5 2
Approx. mass (kg) 25 26 31 33 42 62 64 94 98 129 140 245 245 330 330 555 555
Note: The above specifications apply when Function code F80 = 1 (LD mode).
To use the inverter of 55 kW or above in the LD mode, inform your Fuji Electric representative of the LD-mode use when placing an
order. The inverter comes with a DC reactor (DCR) suitable for the nominal applied motor as standard.

input.)
*6 This specification applies when a DC reactor (DCR) is used. (A DCR is optionally available for the FRN45VG1S-4J or lower type.)
connected.)
protect itself.
2-5
2.1.4 Rated current derating
Canceling the automatic lowering of the carrier frequency (H104, Hundreds digit) when the inverter drives a
permanent magnet synchronous motor (PMSM) derates the continuous rated current of the inverter according
to the carrier frequency setting (F26). Select the inverter capacity and the carrier frequency (F26) which
match the motor specifications, referring to the tables given below.
HD (High Duty)-mode inverters for heavy load

Derated current (A)
Nominal Rated (Derating rate (%))
applied Inverter type current
Carrier frequency setting made with F26 (kHz)
motor (kW) (A)
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
5.00 4.50 3.80 5.00 4.55 4.15 3.50
0.75 FRN0.75VG1S-2 5
(100%) (90%) (76%) (100%) (91%) (83%) (70%)
8.00 7.20 6.08 8.00 7.28 6.64 5.60
1.5 FRN1.5VG1S-2 8
(100%) (90%) (76%) (100%) (91%) (83%) (70%)
11.0 9.90 8.36 11.0 10.0 9.13 7.70
2.2 FRN2.2VG1S-2 11
(100%) (90%) (76%) (100%) (91%) (83%) (70%)
18.0 16.2 13.6 18.0 16.3 14.9 12.6
3.7 FRN3.7VG1S-2 18
(100%) (90%) (76%) (100%) (91%) (83%) (70%)
27.0 24.3 20.5 27.0 24.5 22.4 18.9
5.5 FRN5.5VG1S-2 27
(100%) (90%) (76%) (100%) (91%) (83%) (70%)
37.0 33.3 28.1 37.0 33.6 30.7 25.9
7.5 FRN7.5VG1S-2 37
(100%) (90%) (76%) (100%) (91%) (83%) (70%)
49.0 44.1 37.2 49.0 44.5 40.6 34.3
11 FRN11VG1S-2 49
(100%) (90%) (76%) (100%) (91%) (83%) (70%)
63.0 56.7 47.8 63.0 57.3 52.2 44.1
15 FRN15VG1S-2 63
(100%) (90%) (76%) (100%) (91%) (83%) (70%)
76.0 72.2 66.8 76.0 69.9 60
18.5 FRN18.5VG1S-2 76
(100%) (95%) (88%) (100%) (92%) (79%)
90.0 85.5 79.2 90.0 82.8 71.1
22 FRN22VG1S-2 90
(100%) (95%) (88%) (100%) (92%) (79%)
119 117 109 119 113 103
30 FRN30VG1S-2 119
(100%) (99%) (92%) (100%) (95%) (87%)
146 144 134 146 138 127
37 FRN37VG1S-2 146
(100%) (99%) (92%) (100%) (95%) (87%)
180 178 165 180 171 156
45 FRN45VG1S-2 180
(100%) (99%) (92%) (100%) (95%) (87%)
215 212 197 215 204 187
55 FRN55VG1S-2 215
(100%) (99%) (92%) (100%) (95%) (87%)
283 274 263 283 271 268 254 *1
75 FRN75VG1S-2 283
(100%) (97%) (93%) (100%) (96%) (95%) (90%)
346 335 321 346 332 328 311 *1
90 FRN90VG1S-2 346
(100%) (97%) (93%) (100%) (96%) (95%) (90%)
*1 The internal carrier frequency is 10 kHz independent of the F26 setting.
2-6

Derated current (A)
Nominal (Derating rate (%))
Rated
applied motor Inverter type
Chap. 2
current (A) Carrier frequency setting made with F26 (kHz)
(kW)
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
9.00 8.55 7.65 9.00 8.10 6.84
3.7 FRN3.7VG1S-4 9
(100%) (95%) (85%) (100%) (90%) (76%)
SPECIFICATIONS
13.5 12.8 11.4 13.5 12.1 10.2
5.5 FRN5.5VG1S-4 13.5
(100%) (95%) (85%) (100%) (90%) (76%)
18.5 17.5 15.7 18.5 16.6 14.0
7.5 FRN7.5VG1S-4 18.5
(100%) (95%) (85%) (100%) (90%) (76%)
24.5 21.8 17.6 24.5 22.2 19.8 16.4
11 FRN11VG1S-4 24.5
(100%) (89%) (72%) (100%) (91%) (81%) (67%)
32.0 28.4 23.0 32.0 29.1 25.9 21.4
15 FRN15VG1S-4 32
(100%) (89%) (72%) (100%) (91%) (81%) (67%)
39.0 36.2 32.3 39.0 34.7 28.4
18.5 FRN18.5VG1S-4 39
(100%) (93%) (83%) (100%) (89%) (73%)
45.0 41.8 37.3 45.0 40.0 32.8
22 FRN22VG1S-4 45
(100%) (93%) (83%) (100%) (89%) (73%)
60.0 54.0 45.0 60.0 51.0 41.4
30 FRN30VG1S-4 60
(100%) (90%) (75%) (100%) (85%) (69%)
75.0 67.5 56.2 75.0 63.7 51.7
37 FRN37VG1S-4 75
(100%) (90%) (75%) (100%) (85%) (69%)
91.0 81.9 68.2 91.0 77.3 62.7
45 FRN45VG1S-4 91
(100%) (90%) (75%) (100%) (85%) (69%)
112 100 84.0 112 95.0 77.2
55 FRN55VG1S-4 112
(100%) (90%) (75%) (100%) (85%) (69%)
150 141 115 150 130 126 111 *1
75 FRN75VG1S-4 150
(100%) (94%) (77%) (100%) (87%) (84%) (74%)
176 165 135 176 153 147 130 *1
90 FRN90VG1S-4 176
(100%) (94%) (77%) (100%) (87%) (84%) (74%)
210 197 161 210 182 176 155 *1
110 FRN110VG1S-4 210
(100%) (94%) (77%) (100%) (87%) (84%) (74%)
253 237 194 253 220 212 187 *1
132 FRN132VG1S-4 253
(100%) (94%) (77%) (100%) (87%) (84%) (74%)
304 285 234 304 264 255 224 *1
160 FRN160VG1S-4 304
(100%) (94%) (77%) (100%) (87%) (84%) (74%)
377 354 290 377 327 316 278 *1
200 FRN200VG1S-4 377
(100%) (94%) (77%) (100%) (87%) (84%) (74%)
415 390 319 415 361 348 307 *1
220 FRN220VG1S-4 415
(100%) (94%) (77%) (100%) (87%) (84%) (74%)
520 488 400 520 452 436 384 *1
280 FRN280VG1S-4 520
(100%) (94%) (77%) (100%) (87%) (84%) (74%)
585 549 450 585 509 491 432 *1
315 FRN315VG1S-4 585
(100%) (94%) (77%) (100%) (87%) (84%) (74%)
650 611 500 650 565 546 481 *1
355 FRN355VG1S-4 650
(100%) (94%) (77%) (100%) (87%) (84%) (74%)
740 695 569 740 643 621 547 *1
400 FRN400VG1S-4 740
(100%) (94%) (77%) (100%) (87%) (84%) (74%)
960 960 *2
500 FRN500VG1S-4 960
(100%) (100%)
1170 1170 *2
630 FRN630VG1S-4 1170
(100%) (100%)
2-7
MD (Medium Duty)-mode inverters for medium load
Derated current (A)
Rated
(kW)
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
210 210 *1
110 FRN90VG1S-4 210
(100%) (100%)
253 253 *1
132 FRN110VG1S-4 253
(100%) (100%)
304 304 *1
160 FRN132VG1S-4 304
(100%) (100%)
377 377 *1
200 FRN160VG1S-4 377
(100%) (100%)
415 415 *1
220 FRN200VG1S-4 415
(100%) (100%)
468 468 *1
280 FRN220VG1S-4 468
(100%) (100%)
585.0 585.0 *1
315 FRN280VG1S-4 585
(100%) (100%)
650 650 *1
355 FRN315VG1S-4 650
(100%) (100%)
740 740 *1
400 FRN355VG1S-4 740
(100%) (100%)
840 840 *1
450 FRN400VG1S-4 840
(100%) (100%)
2-8
LD (Low Duty)-mode inverters for light load

Derated current (A)
Chap. 2
Rated
(kW)
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
146 140 138 131 *1
SPECIFICATIONS
37 FRN30VG1S-2 146
(100%) (96%) (95%) (90%)
180 172 171 162 *1
45 FRN37VG1S-2 180
(100%) (96%) (95%) (90%)
215 206 204 193 *1
55 FRN45VG1S-2 215
(100%) (96%) (95%) (90%)
283 271 268 254 *1
75 FRN55VG1S-2 283
(100%) (96%) (95%) (90%)
342 335 346 335 *2
90 FRN75VG1S-2 346
(99%) (97%) (100%) (97%)
410 402 415 402 *2
110 FRN90VG1S-2 415
(99%) (97%) (100%) (97%)

Derated current (A)
Rated
(kW)
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
75.0 66.0 63.0 54.0 *1
37 FRN30VG1S-4 75
(100%) (88%) (84%) (72%)
91.0 80.0 76.4 65.5 *1
45 FRN37VG1S-4 91
(100%) (88%) (84%) (72%)
112 99.0 94.0 80.6 *1
55 FRN45VG1S-4 112
(100%) (88%) (84%) (72%)
150 132 126 108 *1
75 FRN55VG1S-4 150
(100%) (88%) (84%) (72%)
161 151 176 153 *2
90 FRN75VG1S-4 176
(92%) (86%) (100%) (87%)
193 180 210 182 *2
110 FRN90VG1S-4 210
(92%) (86%) (100%) (87%)
232 217 253 220 *2
132 FRN110VG1S-4 253
(92%) (86%) (100%) (87%)
279 261 304 264 *2
160 FRN132VG1S-4 304
(92%) (86%) (100%) (87%)
346 324 377 327 *2
200 FRN160VG1S-4 377
(92%) (86%) (100%) (87%)
481 356 415 361 *2
220 FRN200VG1S-4 415
(92%) (86%) (100%) (87%)
478 447 520 452 *2
280 FRN220VG1S-4 520
(92%) (86%) (100%) (87%)
538 503 585 508 *2
355 FRN280VG1S-4 585
(92%) (86%) (100%) (87%)
598 559 650 565 *2
400 FRN315VG1S-4 650
(92%) (86%) (100%) (87%)
680 636 740 643 *2
450 FRN355VG1S-4 740
(92%) (86%) (100%) (87%)
883 825 960 835 *2
500 FRN400VG1S-4 960
(92%) (86%) (100%) (87%)
1076 1006 1170 1017 *2
630 FRN500VG1S-4 1170
(92%) (86%) (100%) (87%)
1287 1219 1370 1287 *2
710 FRN630VG1S-4 1370
(94%) (89%) (100%) (94%)
2-9
2.2 Common Specifications
Item Explanation
• Vector control with speed sensor
Control method
For induction motor (IM) • Vector control without speed sensor

Control
• V/f control
For permanent magnet
Vector control with speed sensor & magnetic pole position sensor
synchronous motor (PMSM)
Test mode Simulation mode
Analog setting: 0.005% of maximum speed
Speed command
Digital setting: 0.005% of maximum speed
Setting
resolution Torque command,
Vector control with speed sensor
Torque current 0.01% of the rated torque

command
Analog setting: ±0.1% of maximum speed (at 25 ±10°C)
Control Speed
Digital setting: ±0.005% of maximum speed (at -10 to +50°C)
accuracy
Torque ±3% of the rated torque (when a dedicated motor is in use)
Control
Speed 600 Hz *1
response
Maximum speed 800 Hz (when converted to the inverter output frequency) *1 *2
1 : 1500
When the base speed is 1500 r/min: 1 to 1500 r/min to maximum speed (in the case
Speed control range of the PG pulse resolution 1024 P/R)
1 : 6 (Constant torque range : Constant output range)
Speed command
Driving IM
Setting
Vector control without speed sensor
resolution Torque command,

command
Control Speed
accuracy
Torque ±5% of the rated torque
Control
Speed 40 Hz *1
response
1 : 250
Speed control range When the base speed is 1500 r/min: 6 to 1500 r/min to maximum speed
Analog setting: 0.005% of maximum frequency
Setting resolution
Digital setting: 0.005% of maximum frequency
V/f control
Output frequency control Analog setting: ±0.2% of maximum frequency (at 25 ±10°C)
accuracy Digital setting: ±0.01% of maximum frequency (at -10 to +50°C)
Maximum frequency 500 Hz
0.2 to 500 Hz
Control range
*1 The specified value denotes the maximum value. It may not be reached depending on the carrier frequency setting and other conditions.
*2 Under vector control with speed sensor: 400 Hz when the carrier frequency is 5 kHz, 150 Hz when it is 2 kHz.
*3 Under vector control without speed sensor: 250 Hz when the carrier frequency is 5 kHz, 120 Hz when it is 2 kHz.
2-10
Item Explanation
Speed command
Setting
Chap. 2
Torque command,
Vector control with speed sensor
resolution
command
Driving PMSM

Control Speed
SPECIFICATIONS
accuracy
Torque ±3% of the rated torque (when a dedicated motor is in use)
Control
Speed 600 Hz *1
response
1 : 1500
Speed control range When the base speed is 1500 r/min: 1 to 1500 r/min to maximum speed (in the case
of the PG pulse resolution 1024 P/R)
Keypad: and keys (for forward/reverse rotation), key (for stop)
Start/stop operation Digital input signals: "Switch normal/inverse operation," "Coast to a stop," "Reset
alarm," "Select multistep speed," etc.
Keypad: and keys
External potentiometer: Three-terminal variable resistor (1 to 5kΩ)
Analog input signals: 0 to ±10 V, 4-20 mA
UP/DOWN control: When the digital input signal UP or DOWN is ON, the
speed increases or decreases, respectively.
Multistep speed: The combination of the four digital input signals SS1, SS2,
Speed setting SS4 and SS8 enables 15 different speeds to be selected.
Digital signal: Using an option card enables speed setting with "16-bit
parallel signals."
Serial link operation: RS-485 (provided as standard).
Various communication options are available.
Jogging operation: and keys or digital input on [FWD] and [REV]
terminals in jogging mode.
Control functions
IM: +15 V, +12 V complementary output PG (insulation type),

Maximum frequency receivable: 100 kHz
+5 V line driver output PG:
when the communications option OPC-VG1-PG (insulation type) is
mounted.
PMSM: +5 V line driver output PG (insulation type):
ABS type:
Speed detection Maximum frequency receivable: 100 kHz
when the communications option OPC-VG1-PMPG is mounted.
ABZ type:
when the communications option OPC-VG1-PG is mounted.
High-resolution serial transmission system (TS5667N253: TAMAGAWA
SEIKI, Co., Ltd.)
17 bits (one rotation) + 16 bits (multi-rotation)
when the option card OPC-VG1-SPGT is mounted.
PI calculation with feed-forward terms.
Speed control
Control parameters switchable by external signals.
Transistor output signals: "Inverter running," "Speed arrival," "Speed detected,"
"Inverter overload early warning," "Torque limiting," etc.
Running status signal
Analog output signals: "Motor speed," "Output voltage," "Torque," "Load
factor," etc.
*1 The specified value denotes the maximum value. It may not be reached depending on the carrier frequency setting and other conditions.
*2 Under vector control with speed sensor: 400 Hz when the carrier frequency is 5 kHz, 150 Hz when it is 2 kHz.
2-11
Item Explanation
0.01 to 3600 s
Acceleration/ (Four independent settings can be made for each of acceleration and deceleration. They are
deceleration time selectable with external signals.)
(S-curve acceleration/deceleration in addition to linear acceleration/deceleration)
Proportional relationship between analog speed setting and motor speed can be specified in
Speed setting gain
the range of 0 to 200%.
Jump speed Jump speed (3 points) and jump hysteresis width (1 point) can be specified.
Auto search for idling motor Automatically searches for the idling motor speed to be harmonized and starts to drive it
speed without stopping it. (Available under vector control with/without speed sensor)
Auto-restart after momentary Possible to restart the inverter after a momentary power failure without stopping the motor
power failure depending on the restart mode setting.
Compensates for decrease in speed according to the load for stabilized operation.
Slip compensation
(Available for IM under V/f control.)
Droop control The motor speed droops in proportion to output torque. (Not available under V/f control.)
Limits the torque to the predetermined values (selectable from "common to 4 quadrants",
Torque limit "independent driving and braking", etc.)
Analog and external signal (2 steps) settings are available.
Analog setting: 0 to ±10V/0 to ±150% (Up to 300% by gain adjustment)
Torque control
Digital setting: Using an option card enables torque control with "16-bit parallel signals."
PID control with analog input
PID control Possible to select whether to use the PID output as speed setting or auxiliary setting to be
added or subtracted to/from the main setting.
Stops cooling fans when the motor is stopped and the temperature is low for lifetime
Control functions
Cooling fan ON/OFF control

extension and noise reduction of the cooling fans.
Monitors communication between the host equipment (PLC) and the inverter to see
Toggle monitor control
whether the communication is normal.
The combination of the fixed value (one step, with the polarity switching function by the
motor rotation direction) and digital input signals TB1 and TB2 provides three steps of
Torque bias torque bias internal setting.
Analog setting (with Hold function) is available.
Selectable from the three types of motors, by Function code F79.
Motor selection
Switchable between the three types of motors by the combination of digital input signals.
NTC thermistor (Equivalent to Fuji Electric specifications)
Temperature detection PTC thermistor exclusively used for protection from motor overheat (The trip level is
specified by parameters.)
Self-diagnostic function for
Self-diagnoses the detection circuit of pulse encoder input signals (PA and PB).
PG detection circuit
Calculates the maximum allowable elevating speed (e.g., vertical carrier machine)
Load adaptive control
according to the load to improve the operation efficiency of the equipment.
Multiwinding
motor drive
Multiplex The option OPC-VG1-TBSI is required.
system Reactor joint Available only under vector control with/without speed sensor (available soon).
drive
(Available soon)
Speed setting by the combination of digital input signals UP, DOWN, and CLR ("Clear
UP/DOWN control
ACC/DEC to zero")
Stop function Three types of the stop functions by digital input signals STOP1, STOP2, and STOP3.
Outputs pulse generator signals (input pulses) with frequency divided to 1/n (where, n is
programmable with Function code E29).
PG pulse output
Switchable between open collector and complementary (equivalent to the voltage on the
[PGP] terminal) transistor outputs, by the slide switch in the inverter unit.
2-12
Item Explanation
Observer Suppresses load disturbances and vibrations.
Tunes the motor while the motor is stopped or running, for setting up motor
Chap. 2
Offline tuning
parameters.
Control functions
Online tuning Tunes the motor parameters to compensate for the temperature change.
Standard function: Position control by servo-lock and integrated oscillation circuit
SPECIFICATIONS
Option: OPC-VG1-PG (PR): For pulse command input of line driver type
Position control OPC-VG1-PGo (PR): For pulse command input of open collector type
OPC-VG7-SPGT: 17-bit high resolution ABS encoder (available
soon)
Option: OPC-VG1-PG (PR): For pulse command input of line driver type
Pulse train, synchronous operation
OPC-VG1-PGo (PR): For pulse command input of open collector type
Display 7-segment LED monitor and backlit LCD
Japanese, English, Chinese, and Korean
Multilingual display
(French, Spanish, German, and Italian are available soon.)
• Detected speed • Speed command
• Output frequency • Reference torque current value
• Torque command value • Torque calculation value
• Power consumption (Motor output) • Output current
• Output voltage • DC link circuit voltage
• Magnetic-flux command value • Magnetic-flux calculation value
• Load shaft speed • PID command value
When the inverter is running or
stopped • PID feedback value • PID output value
• Ai adjusted value (12) • Ai adjusted value (Ai1)
• Ai adjusted value (Ai2) • Optional monitor 1 to 6
• Presence of digital input/output signal • Motor temperature
• Heat sink temperature • Load factor
• Input power • Input watt-hour
• Operation time
• Cumulative run time of the motor/Number of startups (for each motor), etc.
When function codes are
Function code names and data are displayed.
configured
Alarm factors that appear:
Indication/Setting
• dbh (Braking resistor overheated) • dcf (DC fuse blown)

Keypad
• ef (Ground fault) • er1 (Memory error)

• er2 (Keypad communications error) • er3 (CPU error)
• er4 (Communications error) • er5 (RS-485 communications error)
• er6 (Operation error) • er7 (Output wire fault)
• er8 (A/D converter error) • er9 (Speed mismatch)
• lin (Input phase loss) • lu (Undervoltage)
• nrb (NTC wire break error) • 0c (Overcurrent)
• 0h1 (Heat sink overheat) • 0h2 (External alarm)
• 0h3 (Inverter internal overheat) • 0h4 (Motor protection)
• 0l1 (Overload of motor 1) • 0l2 (Overload of motor 2)
When an alarm occurs
• 0l3 (Overload of motor 3) • 0lu (Inverter overload)
• 0s (Overspeed) • 0u (Overvoltage)
• p9 (PG wire break) • pbf (Charger circuit fault)
• dba (Braking transistor broken) • err (Mock alarm)
• 0pl (Output phase loss) • dfa (DC fan locked)
• erh (Hardware error) • ec (Encoder communications error)
• era (UPAC error) (Available soon) • et1 (Encoder error)
• erb (Inter-inverter communications link error)
• ecf (ENABLE circuit (safety stop circuit) failure) (Available soon)
• d0 (Excessive positioning deviation)
• loc (Start delay) • are (E-SX error)
• arf (Toggle abnormality error)
2-13
Item Explanation
The light-alarm display l-al appears.
When a light alarm occurs
The inverter retains the cause of the light alarm to display it.
The inverter retains the latest and the last 10 alarm codes and the latest and the last
three pieces of alarm information to display them.
It also retains the detailed contents of the latest and the last 3 alarms (including light
Keypad
alarms) to display them.

When the inverter is running or
The calendar clock function retains the date and time when an alarm occurred to
an alarm occurs
display them. (Precision: ±27 seconds/month (Ta = 25°C))
Data retention period: At least 5 years (at the surrounding temperature 25°C)
*Backup battery: 30 kW or above (Battery integrated as standard)
Up to 22 kW (Optional battery)
Reads out the sampling data held in the inverter and shows it graphically.
Historical trace *1
Indication/Setting
Sampling interval: 50 μs to 1 s
Reads out the current data of the running inverter and shows it graphically in
Real-time trace *1 real-time.
Sampling interval: 1 ms to 1 s
FRENIC-VG Loader
Reads out the sampling data held in the inverter and shows it graphically when an
alarm has occurred.
Sampling interval: 50 μs to 1s (400 μs for sampling data except current)
Traceback The sampling data is retained in the memory by the backup battery.
Data retention period: At least 5 years (at the surrounding temperature 25°C)
*Backup battery: 30 kW or above (Battery integrated as standard)
Up to 22 kW (Optional battery)
Operation monitor *1 I/O monitor, system monitor, alarm history monitor, etc.
Shows the configuration of the function codes, as well as enabling editing,
Configuration of function code
transmitting, comparing, and initialization.
Lights when power is applied to the inverter unit. (Lights when power is applied to
Charge lamp
the control circuit only.)
Main circuit capacitor life Life judgment function installed
Maintenance
• Retains and displays the cumulative run time of the main circuit capacitor and the
cumulative run time of cooling fans.
Common functions • Retains and displays the inverter operation time.
• Retains and displays the maximum output current and the maximum internal
temperature for the past one hour.
I/O terminals for RS-485 communication.
Communications
RS-485 Up to 31 inverter units can be connected in multi-drop connection.

Half-duplex system
Accessible from the front, A connector type: mini B
USB
USB 2.0 Full Speed
Compatible with the VG7 function codes, except function codes for the 3rd motor.
(Using the VG7 function codes as is produces the same operation on the
Function code data FRENIC-VG.)
Compatibility
VG7 Possible to read out VG7 function code data using the FRENIC-VG Loader and
write it as is into the FRENIC-VG. (Except special inverter versions)
Various Fully compatible with T-Link, SX-bus, and CC-Link.
communications tools (Software in the host equipment PLC is available as is. Except special software.)
Mounting adapters are provided for matching the FRENIC-VG with conventional
Mounting adapter
models in mounting dimensions.
*1 Available in the paid-for version of FRENIC-VG Loader (WPS-VG1-PCL).
2-14
Item Explanation
Safe Torque Off (STO) (Available soon)
function
Safety
Provided as Opening the circuit between terminals [EN1] and [PS] or [EN2] and [PS] by the
Chap. 2
Stop function
standard external digital input signal turns off the inverter's output transistor so that the motor
coasts to a stop.
UL Standards and Canadian Standards
UL, cUL (UL508C, C22.2 No.14) (during authentication)
SPECIFICATIONS
European Standards
EN 61800-5-2: SIL2 (during authentication)
EN 62061: SIL2 (during authentication)
Product standards
Machinery Directive
ISO13849-1: PL-d (during authentication)
Conformity with standards EN 60204-1: Stop category 0 (during authentication)
Low Voltage Directive
EN 61800-5-1 (Overvoltage category: 3) (during authentication)
EMC Standards
EN 61800-3 (during authentication), EN 61326-3-1 (during authentication)
(Emission) EMC-filter (optional): Category C2
(Immunity) 2nd Env.
Shall be free from corrosive gases, flammable gases, oil mist, dusts, and direct
Installation location
sunlight. (Pollution degree 2 (IEC60664-1)). Indoor use only.
-10 to +50°C (-10 to +40°C when installed side-by-side without clearance (22 kW or
Surrounding temperature
below))
Relative humidity 5 to 95% RH (without condensation)
Environment
Altitude Lower than 1,000 m

200 V 55 kW, 400 V 75 kW or below 200V 75 kW, 400 V 90 kW or above
3 mm: 2 to less than 9 Hz, 3 mm: 2 to less than 9 Hz
Vibration 9.8m/s2: 9 to less than 20 Hz 2 m/s2: 9 to less than 55 Hz
2 m/ s2: 20 to less than 55 Hz 1 m/s2: 55 to less than 200 Hz
1 m/ s2: 55 to less than 200 Hz
Storage temperature -25 to +70°C
Storage humidity 5 to 95% RH (without condensation)
2-15
2.3 External Dimensions
2.3.1 Standard models
The diagrams below show external dimensions of the FRENIC-VG series of inverters according to the
inverter capacity. (Three-phase 200 V/400 V class series)
A figure given in the lower right-hand corner of each set of drawings shows the dimension of panel cutting
required for external cooling. To employ external cooling for inverters of 22 kW or below, the optional
mounting adapter for external cooling is necessary. For the external dimensions of the mounting adapter,
refer to Chapter 8, Section 8.5.8 "Mounting adapter for external cooling."
(Unit: mm)
FRN0.75 to 7.5VG1S-2
FRN3.7 to 7.5VG1S-4
FRN11 to 22VG1S-2
FRN11 to 22VG1S-4
2-16
A figure given in the lower right-hand corner of each set of drawings shows the dimension of panel cutting
required for employing external cooling. To employ external cooling for inverters of 30 kW or above, change
the positions of the mounting bases. For details, refer to Chapter 3, Section 3.3.2 "Installing the Inverter,
When employing external cooling."
Chap. 2
(Unit: mm)
FRN30VG1S-2
FRN30/37VG1S-4
SPECIFICATIONS
FRN37VG1S-2
FRN45VG1S-4
2-17
(Unit: mm)
FRN45VG1S-2
FRN55VG1S-2
2 terminal
holes
4
(for screw J)
mounting
holes
(for screw G)
Figure C
2 terminal holes
(for screw J)
4 mounting
holes
(for screw G)
Figure D
Approx. mass
Reactor Figure W W1 D D1 D2 G H H1 J
(kg)
DCR2-55B *1 D 190 160 131 90 100 M6 (φ8) 210 250 M12 16
HD mode
DCR2-55C *1 C 255 225 96 76 140 M6 (7*13) 145 - M12 11
LD mode DCR2-75C C 255 225 106 86 145 M6 (7*13) 145 - M12 12
*1 The DCR2-55B and DCR2-55C are optionally available.
2-18
(Unit: mm)
FRN75VG1S-2
Chap. 2
SPECIFICATIONS
2 terminal
holes
4
(for screw J)
mounting
holes
(for screw G)
Figure C
Approx. mass
(kg)
HD mode DCR2-75C 255 225 106 86 145 M6 (7*13) 145 - M12 12
C
LD mode DCR2-90C 255 225 116 96 155 M6 (7*13) 145 - M12 14
FRN90VG1S-2
2 terminal
holes
4
(for screw J)
mounting
holes
(for screw G)
Figure C
Approx. mass
(kg)
HD mode DCR2-90C 255 225 116 96 155 M6 (7*13) 145 - M12 14
C
LD mode DCR2-110C 300 265 116 90 185 M8 (10*18) 160 - M12 17
2-19
(Unit: mm)
FRN55VG1S-4
2 terminal holes
(for screw J)
4 mounting
holes
(for screw G)
Figure B
2 terminal
holes
4
(for screw J)
mounting
holes
(for screw G)
Figure C
Approx. mass
(kg)
DCR4-55B *1 B 171 110 170 130 110 M6 (φ8) 150 210 M8 20
HD mode
DCR4-55C *1 C 255 225 96 76 120 M6 (7*13) 145 - M10 11
LD mode DCR4-75C C 255 225 106 86 125 M6 (7*13) 145 - M10 13
*1 The DCR4-55B and DCR4-55C are optionally available.
FRN75VG1S-4
2 terminal
holes
4
(for screw J)
mounting
holes
(for screw G)
Figure C
Approx. mass
(kg)
HD mode DCR4-75C 255 225 106 86 125 M6 (7*13) 145 - M10 13
C
LD mode DCR4-90C 255 225 116 96 140 M6 (7*13) 145 - M12 15
2-20
(Unit: mm)
FRN90VG1S-4
Chap. 2
SPECIFICATIONS
2 terminal
holes
4
(for screw J)
mounting
holes
(for screw G)
Figure C
Approx. mass
(kg)
HD mode DCR4-90C 255 225 116 96 140 M6 (7*13) 145 - M12 15
MD mode C
DCR4-110C 300 265 116 90 175 M8 (10*18) 155 - M12 19
LD mode
FRN110VG1S-4
2 terminal
holes
4
(for screw J)
mounting
holes
(for screw G)
Figure C
Approx. mass
(kg)
HD mode DCR4-110C 300 265 116 90 175 M8 (10*18) 155 - M12 19
MD mode C
DCR4-132C 300 265 126 100 180 M8 (10*18) 160 - M12 22
LD mode
2-21
(Unit: mm)
FRN132VG1S-4
2 terminal
holes
4
(for screw J)
mounting
holes
(for screw G)
Figure C
Approx. mass
(kg)
HD mode DCR4-132C 300 265 126 100 180 M8 (10*18) 160 - M12 22
MD mode C
DCR4-160C 350 310 131 103 180 M10 (12*22) 190 - M12 26
LD mode
FRN160VG1S-4
2 terminal
holes
4
(for screw J)
mounting
holes
(for screw G)
Figure C
Approx. mass
(kg)
HD mode DCR4-160C 350 310 131 103 180 M10 (12*22) 190 - M12 26
MD mode C
DCR4-200C 350 310 141 113 185 M10 (12*22) 190 - M12 30
LD mode
2-22
(Unit: mm)
FRN200VG1S-4
Chap. 2
SPECIFICATIONS
2 terminal
holes
4
(for screw J)
mounting
holes
(for screw G)
Figure C
Approx. mass
(kg)
HD mode DCR4-200C 350 310 141 113 185 M10 (12*22) 190 - M12 30
MD mode C
DCR4-220C 350 310 146 118 200 M10 (12*22) 190 - M12 33
LD mode
FRN220VG1S-4
2 terminal
holes
4
(for screw J)
mounting
holes
(for screw G)
Figure C
Approx. mass
(kg)
HD mode DCR4-220C 350 310 146 118 200 M10 (12*22) 190 - M12 33
MD mode DCR4-250C C 350 310 161 133 210 M10 (12*22) 190 - M12 35
LD mode DCR4-280C 350 310 161 133 210 M10 (12*22) 190 - M16 37
2-23
(Unit: mm)
FRN280VG1S-4
2 terminal
holes
4
(for screw J)
mounting
holes
(for screw G)
Figure C
4 mounting
holes
(for screw G)
Figure E
Approx. mass
(kg)
HD mode DCR4-280C 350 310 161 133 210 M10 (12*22) 190 - M16 37
C
MD mode DCR4-315C 400 345 146 118 200 M10 (12*22) 225 - M16 40
LD mode DCR4-355C E 400 345 156 128 200 M10 (12*22) 225 - 4*M12 49
FRN315VG1S-4
2 terminal
4 holes
mounting (for screw J)
holes
(for screw G)
Figure C
4 mounting
holes
(for screw G)
Figure E
Approx. mass
(kg)
HD mode DCR4-315C C 400 345 146 118 200 M10 (12*22) 225 - M16 40
MD mode DCR4-355C 400 345 156 128 200 M10 (12*22) 225 - 4*M12 49
E
LD mode DCR4-400C 445 385 145 117 213 M10 (12*22) 245 - 4*M12 52
2-24
(Unit: mm)
FRN355VG1S-4
Chap. 2
SPECIFICATIONS
2 terminal
holes
(for screw J)
4 mounting
holes
(for screw G)
Figure E
Approx. mass
(kg)
HD mode DCR4-355C 400 345 156 128 200 M10(12*22) 225 - 4*M12 49
MD mode DCR4-400C E 445 385 145 117 213 M10(12*22) 245 - 4*M12 52
LD mode DCR4-450C 440 385 150 122 215 M10(12*22) 245 - 4*M12 62
FRN400VG1S-4
2 terminal
holes
(for screw J)
4 mounting
holes
(for screw G)
Figure E
Approx. mass
(kg)
HD mode DCR4-400C 445 385 145 117 213 M10(12*22) 245 - 4*M12 52
MD mode DCR4-450C E 440 385 150 122 215 M10(12*22) 245 - 4*M12 62
LD mode DCR4-500C 445 390 165 137 220 M10(12*22) 245 - 4*M12 72
2-25
(Unit: mm)
FRN500VG1S-4 2 terminal
holes
(for screw J)
4 mounting
holes
(for screw G)
Figure E
4 mounting holes
(for screw G)
2 terminal holes
(for screw J)
Figure F
Approx. mass
(kg)
HD mode DCR4-500C E 445 390 165 137 220 M10(12*22) 245 - 4*M12 72
LD mode DCR4-630C F 285 145 203 170 195 M12(14*20) 480 - 2*M12 75
FRN630VG1S-4
4 mounting holes
(for screw G)
2 terminal holes
(for screw J)
Figure F
Approx. mass
(kg)
HD mode DCR4-630C 285 145 203 170 195 M12 (14*20) 480 - 2*M12 75
F
LD mode DCR4-710C 340 160 295 255 225 M12 (φ15) 480 - 4*M12 95
2-26
2.3.2 Keypad
Chap. 2
SPECIFICATIONS
2-27
2.4 Dedicated Motor Specifications
2.4.1 Induction motor (IM) with speed sensor
● Standard specifications for three-phase 200 V series
Item Specifications
Dedicated
motor rated 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90
output (kW)
Applicable
motor type 8095A 8097A 8107A 8115A 8133A 8135A 8165A 8167A 8184A 8185A 8187A 8207A 8208A 9224A 9254A 9256A
(MVK_)
Moment of
inertia of rotor 0.009 0.009 0.009 0.016 0.030 0.037 0.085 0.11 0.21 0.23 0.34 0.41 0.47 0.53 0.88 1.03
(kg•m2)
Rotor GD2
0.036 0.036 0.036 0.065 0.12 0.15 0.34 0.47 0.83 0.92 1.34 1.65 1.87 2.12 3.52 4.12
(kg•m2)
Rated speed/
1500/
Max. speed 1500/3600 1500/3000 1500/2400
2000
(r/min)
Vibration V10 or less V15 or less
Voltage 200/50 Hz,
200 to 210 V/50 Hz, 200 to 230 V/60 Hz
(V) 200, 220 V/60 Hz
Number
of
- Single-phase, 4P Three-phase, 4P
phases/
Cooling poles
fan
Input
power - 40/50 90/120 150/210 80/120 270/390
(W)
Current 0.76/
- 0.29/0.27 to 0.31 0.49/0.44 to 0.48 0.75/0.77 to 0.8 1.9/2.0, 2.0
(A) 0.8, 0.8
Approx. mass
28 29 32 46 63 73 111 133 190 197 235 280 296 380 510 570
(kg)
2-28

Item Specifications
Dedicated
Chap. 2
motor rated 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 220
output (kW)
Applicable
motor type 8115A 8133A 8135A 8165A 8167A 8184A 8185A 8187A 8207A 8208A 9224A 9254A 9256A 9284A 9286A 528KA 528LA 531FA
(MVK_)
SPECIFICATIONS
Moment of
inertia of rotor 0.016 0.030 0.037 0.085 0.11 0.21 0.23 0.34 0.41 0.47 0.53 0.88 1.03 1.54 1.77 1.72 1.83 2.33
(kg•m2)
Rotor GD2
0.065 0.12 0.15 0.34 0.47 0.83 0.92 1.34 1.65 1.87 2.12 3.52 4.12 6.16 7.08 6.88 7.32 9.32
(kg•m2)
Rated speed /
Max. speed 1500/3600 1500/3000 1500/2400 1500/2000
(r/min)
Vibration V10 or less V15 or less
Voltage 200 to 210 V/50 Hz, 380, 400, 415 V/50 Hz,
400 to 420 V/50 Hz, 400 to 440 V/60 Hz 400 V/50 Hz, 400, 440 V/60 Hz
(V) 200 to 230 V/60 Hz 400, 440 V/ 60 Hz
Number
of
Single-phase, 4P Three-phase, 4P
phases/
Cooling poles
fan
Input
80/
power 40/50 90/120 150/210 270/390 2200 3700
120
(W)
Current 0.27/ 0.39/ 7.8/
0.29/0.27 to 0.31 0.38/0.39 to 0.4 1.0/1.0, 1.0 4.6/4.3,4.1
(A) 0.24 to 0.25 0.4, 0.4 7.1, 7.6
Approx. mass
46 63 73 111 133 190 197 235 280 296 380 510 570 710 760 1270 1310 1630
(kg)
Item Specifications
Dedicated
motor rated 250 280 300 315 355 400
output (kW)
Applicable
motor type 531GA 531HA 535GA 535GA 535HA 535JA
(MVK_)
Moment of
inertia of rotor 2.52 2.76 5.99 5.99 6.53 7.18
(kg•m2)
Rotor GD2
10.08 12.34 23.96 23.96 26.12 28.72
(kg•m2)
Rated speed /
Max. speed 1500/2000
(r/min)
Vibration V15 or less
Voltage
400 V/50 Hz, 400, 440 V/60 Hz
(V)
Number
of
Three-phase, 4P
phases/
Cooling poles
fan
Input
power 3700
(W)
Current
7.8/7.1, 7.6
(A)
Approx. mass
1685 1745 2230 2230 2310 2420
(kg)
2-29
● Common specifications
Item Specifications
Insulation class,
Class F, 4P
Number of poles
Main terminal box (lug type):
Three or six main circuit terminals,
Two NTC thermistor terminals (MVK8 series),
Terminal structure Three NTC thermistor terminals (MVK9 or MVK5 series. One terminal is reserved.)
Auxiliary terminal box (terminal block):
Pulse generator (PGP, PGM, PA, PB, SS), cooling fan (FU, FV or FU, FV, FW)
Foot mounted with bracket (IMB3),
Mounting method
Note: Contact your Fuji Electric representative for other mounting.
IP44, Totally enclosed forced-ventilation system with cooling fan motor. A cooling fan blows air over the motor
Degree of protection, toward the drive-end.
Cooling method
*Only MVK8095A (0.75 kW): Self-cooling
Installation location Indoors, 1000 m or less in altitude.
Ambient temperature,
-10 to +40°C, 90% RH or less (no condensation)
humidity
Finishing color Munsell N5
MVK8 series: JEM1466 or JEC-2137-2000
Standard conformity
MVK9 or MVK5 series: JEC-2137-2000
Pulse generator (1024 P/R, +15V, complementary output), NTC thermistor(s) (1 or 2), and
Standard accessories
cooling fan (except MVK8095A)
Note 1: For applicable motors of 55 kW or above, the torque accuracy is ±5%. When higher accuracy is required, contact your Fuji Electric
representative.
Note 2: For dedicated motors other than 4-pole ones with the base speed of 1500 r/min, contact your Fuji Electric representative.
2-30
● External dimensions of dedicated motors

● Figure A ● Figure B
Shaft extension
Chap. 2
Main Main
Aux terminal box terminal box Aux terminal box terminal box
SPECIFICATIONS
(L & R)
(L & R)
● Figure C ● Figure D ● Figure E

Aux terminal box Main terminal box
for fan
Aux terminal box
Main terminal box
Aux terminal for PG
box for fan
Aux terminal box Main

terminal box
(L & R)
Aux terminal box

for PG
● Dimensions common to 200V and 400V series

Motor Dimensions (mm) Shaft extension (mm)
Approx
rated
Motor type Fig. .mass
output A C D E F G I J K K1 K2 KD KL L M N R XB Z Q QR S T U W (kg)
(kW)
0.75 MVK8095A 201.5 204 370 28
90 70 62.5 10 195 35.5 35.5 189 170 150 168.5 56 10 50 24j6
1.5 MVK8097A 277.5 446 29
A 203 27 7 4 8
2.2 MVK8107A 292 100 80 12.5 238 40 190 485 195 170 193 63 32
40 60 0.5 28j6
3.7 MVK8115A 299 112 236 95 70 14 270 205 499 224 175 200 70 46
12
5.5 MVK8113A 309 50 548 180 239 63
B 132 273 108 17 311 45 34 223 250 89 80 38k6 10
7.5 MVK8135A 328 89 586 212 258 73
8 5
11 MVK8165A 400 105 723 250 323 111
160 321 127 18 376 50 63 272 300 108 1 42k6 12
15 MVK8167A 422 127 767 300 345 133
48
18.5 MVK8184A A 14.5 110 190
435 120.5 - - 786.5 292 351.5 48k6 9 5.5 14
22 MVK8185A 180 376 139.5 20 428 75 75 305 350 121 1.5 197
30 MVK8187A 454 139.5 60 824.5 330 370.5 55m6 10 6 16 235
37 MVK8207A 280
490 200 411 159 152.5 466 85 364 915.5 390 360 425.5 133 60m6
45 MVK8208A C 25 80 18.5 11 7 18 296
55 MVK9224A 723 225 445 178 143 515 95 391 1155 436 366 432 149 140 65m6 380
75 MVK9254A 693.5 155.5 80 1157 411 463.5 2 510
250 545 203 30 743 106 506 168 75m6 12 7.5 20
90 MVK9256A 711.5 174.5 1194 449 483.5 570
D 100 120
110 MVK9284A 764 184 1308 468 544 710
605 35 798 203 557 24
132 MVK9286A 789.5 209.5 1359 519 569.5 760
280 228.5 190 85m6 22
160 MVK528JA 1230
1015.5 628 228.5 30 1234 125 120 210 1604 560 557 588.5 1
200 MVK528LA 170 14 9 1350
220 MVK531FA 1690
250 MVK531GA 1073 315 689 254 254 1425 150 140 240 1713 630 648 640 216 95m6 25 1750
280 MVK531HA E - 102 413 1820
300 36 28 2
MVK535GA 2230
315 100m
1111 355 778 305 355 1510 160 180 330 1956 730 890 845 280 210 16 10 28
355 MVK535HA 6 2310
400 MVK535JA 2420
Note 1: The MVK8095A (0.75 kW) has a shaft-driven fan (Cooling system: IC410).
Note 2: The MVK8095A (0.75 kW) has a single cable lead-in hole of φ22.
Note 3: The MVK9224A (55 kW) has an auxiliary terminal box for fan, in addition to the configuration shown in Figure C.
Note 4: Dimensional tolerance of rotary shaft height C
C ≤ 250 mm: 0 to -0.5 mm, C > 250 mm: 0 to 1.0 mm
2-31
2.4.2 Permanent magnet synchronous motor (PMSM) with speed
sensor
Item Specifications
Dedicated motor rated output (kW) 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90
Dedicated motor type (GNF_) 2114A 2115A 2117A 2118A 2136A 2137A 2139A 2165A 2167A 2185A 2187A 2207A
Moment of inertia of rotor (kg•m2) 0.018 0.021 0.027 0.036 0.065 0.070 0.090 0.153 0.191 0.350 0.467 0.805
Rotor GD2 (kg•m2) 0.072 0.084 0.107 0.143 0.259 0.281 0.360 0.610 0.763 1.401 1.868 3.220
Base speed/Max. speed (r/min) 1500/2000
Rated current (A) 20/20 29/29 42/42 57/57 71/70 82/81 113/108 144/144 165/165 200/200 270/270 316/316
Voltage (V), Frequency (Hz) 200 to 240, 50/60 200 to 210/50, 200 to 230/60
Number of phases/poles Three-phase, 2P Three-phase, 4P
Cooling
fan Input power (W) 38 to 44/56 to 58 54 to 58/70 to 78 90/120 150/210
0.49/
Current (A) 0.13 to 0.16/0.18 to 0.16 0.18 to 0.18/0.22 to 0.21 0.75/0.77 to 0.8
0.44 to 0.48
Approx. mass (kg) 51 55 69 78 100 106 127 170 192 247 325 420

Item Specifications
Dedicated motor rated output (kW) 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90
Dedicated motor type (GNF_) 2114A 2115A 2117A 2118A 2136A 2137A 2139A 2165A 2167A 2185A 2187A 2207A
Moment of inertia of rotor (kg•m2) 0.018 0.021 0.027 0.036 0.065 0.070 0.090 0.153 0.191 0.350 0.467 0.805
Rotor GD2 (kg•m2) 0.072 0.084 0.107 0.143 0.259 0.281 0.360 0.610 0.763 1.401 1.868 3.220
Rated current (A) 10/10 15/15 21/21 29/29 36/35 41/41 57/54 72/72 83/83 100/100 135/135 158/158
Voltage (V), Frequency (Hz) 200 to 240, 50/60 400 to 420/50, 400 to 440/60
Number of phases/poles Three-phase, 2P Three-phase, 4P
Cooling
fan Input power (W) 38 to 44/56 to 58 54 to 58/70 to 78 90/120 150/210
0.27/
Current (A) 0.13 to 0.16/0.18 to 0.16 0.18 to 0.18/0.22 to 0.21 0.38/0.39 to 0.4
0.24 to 0.25
Approx. mass (kg) 51 55 69 78 100 106 127 170 192 247 325 420
Item Specifications
Dedicated motor rated output (kW) 110 132 160 200 220 250 280 300
Dedicated motor type (GNF_) 2224B 2226B 2254B 2256B 2284B 2286B
Moment of inertia of rotor (kg•m2) 0.882 0.994 1.96 2.22 2.89 3.24
Rotor GD2 (kg•m2) 3.53 3.98 7.84 8.88 11.6 13.0
Rated current (A) 198 232 273 340 369 420 480 520
Voltage (V) 380, 400, 415/400, 415, 440, 460
Number of phases/poles Three-phase, 4P
Cooling Power frequency (Hz) 50/60
fan
Input power (W) 80/120 270/390
0.36, 0.38, 0.41/0.4,
Current (A) 0.95, 0.95, 1/1, 1, 1, 1
0.4, 0.4, 0.4
Approx. mass (kg) 520 580 760 810 1020 1080
2-32
● Common specifications
Item Specifications
Insulation class,
Class F, 6P
Chap. 2
Number of poles
Main terminal box (lug type):
Three or six main circuit terminals,
Two NTC thermistor terminals (Three for 110 kW or above. One terminal is reserved.)
Terminal structure
SPECIFICATIONS
Auxiliary terminal box (terminal block):
Cooling fan (FU, FV, FW)
Pulse encoder (connector type), Cooling fan (FU, FV, FW)
Rotation direction CCW when viewed from the drive side
Legs mounted (IMB3)
Mounting method
Note: Contact your Fuji Electric representative for other mounting.
Overload resistance 150% for 1 minute
Time rating S1
Degree of protection, IP44, Totally enclosed forced-ventilation system with cooling fan motor. A cooling fan blows air over the motor
Cooling method toward the drive-end.
Installation location Indoors, 1000 m or less in altitude.
Ambient temperature,
-10 to +40°C, 90% RH or less (no condensation)
humidity
5.5 to 90 kW: 80 dB (A) or less at 1 m,
Noise
110 to 300 kW: 90 dB(A) or less at 1 m
Vibration resistance 6.86 m/s2 (0.7 G)
Finishing color Munsell N1.2
Standard conformity JEM1487: 2005
Pulse encoder (1024 P/R, +5VDC, A, B, Z, U, V, W line driver output),
Standard built-in parts One NTC thermistor (Two for 110 kW or above) and
Cooling fan
2-33
● External dimensions of dedicated motors
Shaft extension
● Figure A ● Figure B ● Figure C

Encoder connector Encoder connector Encoder connector
Aux terminal Main terminal Aux terminal Main terminal Aux terminal Main terminal
box box box box box box
(L & R) (L & R)
(L & R)
● Figure D ● Figure E ● Figure F
Aux terminal box

Aux terminal box Main terminal box Aux terminal Main terminal box
(L & R) for fan box for fan
Encoder Main terminal Encoder
connector box connector Encoder
connector
● Dimensions common to 200V and 400V series

Motor Dimensions (mm) Shaft extension (mm)
Approx.
rated Flame
Motor type Fig. mass
output no. A C D E F G I J K KD KL L M N R XB Z Q QR S T U W Y (kg)
(kW)
5.5 GNF2114A 51
112Mh 335.5 70 14 40 34 200 555.5 224 175 220 70 12 80 0.5 38k6 10
7.5 GNF2115A 55
112 235 95 270 8 5
11 GNF2117A 69
112Jh 380.5 100 18 55 235 698.5 228 318 1 42k6 12
15 GNF2118A A 50 M10X20 78
48 238
18.5 GNF2136A 14.5 110 100
132Lh 386 101.5 705.5 319.5 48k6 9 5.5 14
22 GNF2137A 132 272 108 311 45 247 250 108 1.5 106
30 GNF2139A 132Hh 424.5 140 20 60 782.5 313 358 55m6 10 6 16 127
37 GNF2165A 160Lg 470.5 127 845.5 300 375 170
160 319 139.5 376 75 75 320 350 60m6
45 GNF2167A 160Jg B 501 157.5 906.5 370 405.5 18.5 11 7 18 192
55 GNF2185A 180Lg 510 139.5 80 85 910.5 390 330 400.5 121 140 2 65m6 M12X25 247
180 375 159 428 356
75 GNF2187A 180Jg C 576 177.5 25 1061.5 420 450 485.5 325
100 75m6 12 7.5 20
90 GNF2207A 200Jg 618.5 200 410 178 549 80 107 1126.5 450 479 508 420
200 168
110 GNF2224B 225Kg D 711 1249 526 538 520
225 446 203 28 628 100 142 506 24 85m6 22
132 GNF2226B 225Hg 761 250 1349 626 588 580
160 GNF2254B 508 760
250Hg E 829 250 228.5 32 763 203 1469 557 677
200 GNF2256B 505 810
120 170 1 14 9 M20×35
220 1020
GNF2284B 280 640 190 95m6 25
250 1020
280Jf F 881 280 570 254 35 878 120 102 303 1521 628 680 28
280 1080
GNF2286B
300 1080
Note 1: Models of 110 kW output or above are exclusive to direct connection. For indirect connection, contact your Fuji Electric
representative.
Note 2: Dimensional tolerance of rotary shaft height C
C ≤ 250 mm: 0 to -0.5 mm, C > 250 mm: 0 to 1.0 mm
2-34
● Exclusive cables to inverter connection

Name Specifications (Structure)
Overview
Chap. 2
Plug
Terminal
Inverter side Sumitomo 3M Co., Ltd.

Motor side
SPECIFICATIONS
The shield layer of the cable is connect-
ed to CN15 only at the motor side. White marking position
• Wiring • Pin assignment

Connector # at the Connector # at At the motor side
Function
motor side the inverter side White marking position
1 9 or 20 Power +5V
2 10 or 19 0V common
3 3 A phase
4 2 A phase reversed
5 5 B phase
6 4 B phase reversed
Exclusive cables to 7 - Z phase (*1)
inverter connection 8 - Z phase reversed
(*1) Viewed from P in the above figure
9 8 Magnetic pole
position F0
10 7 Magnetic pole Optional OPC-VG1-PMPG connector
position *F0
11 13 Magnetic pole
position F1
12 12 Magnetic pole
position *F1
13 15 Magnetic pole
position F2
14 14 Magnetic pole
position *F2
Inside the connector
15 - Shield layer
(*1) For the PG card (OPC-VG1-PMPG), no Z
phase or Z phase reversed are required.
Models of cables
Wiring length Model L dimension
Max. 5 m CB-VG1-PMPG-05S 5m
Max. 10 m CB-VG1-PMPG-10S 10 m
Max. 30 m CB-VG1-PMPG-30S 30 m
2-35
Name Specifications (Structure)
Three-phase (U, V, W) interface

Main power supply MOTOR
Three-phase power supply FRENIC-VG
50/60 Hz
U U
L1/R
V V
L2/S SM
W W
L3/T
9 or 20 +5 VDC 1
PGP
10 or 19 0V 2
PGM
3 A 3
PA
2 Anot 4
*PA
5 B 5
PB
4 Bnot 6
OPC-VG1-PMPG
*PB
8 U 9 PG
Connection example F0
7 Unot 10
*F0
13 V 11
F1
12 Vnot 12
*F1
15 W 13
F2
14 Wnot 14
*F2
15
F3 SS E
No connection
*F3 (*2)
E E
(*2) When the customer produces the inverter connection cable, the shield (SS) of the PG shield layer should be connected
to CN15 at the motor side. No connection is required at the inverter side.
2-36
● Reference: Connectors and contact terminals recommended

The following specifications are recommended for customers who produce inverter connection cables.
At the inverter side: Connector (10320-52F0-008) At the motor side: Connector contact terminal
Chap. 2
Sumitomo 3M Co., Ltd. (JN1-22-22F-PKG100)
Japan Aviation Electronics Industry, Limited
SPECIFICATIONS
Logo position
Max. applicable wire size:

AWG20 (Outer dia. of coated cable: φ1.5 mm or less)
At the motor side: Straight plug connector (JN2DW15SL) At the motor side: Angle plug connector (JN2FW15SL1)
Japan Aviation Electronics Industry, Limited Japan Aviation Electronics Industry, Limited
Note 1: The following specifications are recommended for PG shield layers.

Type Braided, shielded wires
(Twisted-pair cable (Outer dia.: Approx. φ10))
Number of cores 14 or more
Dia. of lead 0.2 to 0.3 mm2
Outer dia. of coated cable Max. φ1.5 mm
Note 2: The PKG in contact terminal models denotes that 100 terminals are packed in bulk.
Note 3: Joint with contact terminals should be presoldered.
2-37
2.5 Protective Functions
The table below lists the name of the protective functions, description, alarm codes on the LED monitor, and
presence of alarm output at terminals [30A/B/C]. If an alarm code appears on the LED monitor, remove the
cause of activation of the alarm function referring to Chapter 13 "TROUBLESHOOTING."
LED Related
Class
Name Description monitor function

displays code
If a breakdown of the braking transistor is detected, this protective
function stops the inverter output. (Available for braking transistor
Braking transistor built-in inverters) dba H103
broken
If this alarm is detected, be sure to shut down the power on the primary
side of the inverter.
This function estimates the temperature of the braking resistor and
Braking resistor stops the inverter output if the temperature exceeds the allowable value.
dbh E35 to E37
overheated It is necessary to configure Function codes E35 to E37 depending on
the resistor (integrated or externally mounted).
If a fuse in the main DC circuit blows due to a short circuit in the IGBT
circuit, this protective function displays the error to prevent the
secondary damage. The inverter could be broken, so immediately
DC fuse blown contact your Fuji Electric representative. dcf
(For models of 75 kW or above in 200 V class series and 90 kW or
above in 400 V class series)
Excessive This function is activated when the positioning deviation between the
positioning command and the detected values exceeds "Setting of function code
o18 (Excessive deviation value) x 10" in synchronous operation. d0 o18
deviation
Mounting an option makes 018 effective and displays it on the keypad.
PG
This function is activated if a PG communication error occurs when the
communications ec
17-bit high resolution ABS interface (OPC-VG1-SPGT) is used.
error
This function is activated when the input to either one of EN1 and EN2
ENABLE circuit
Protective functions
is OFF for the duration exceeding 50 ms (which is regarded as a

(safety stop mismatch). The alarm state can be reset only by restarting the inverter. ecf
circuit) failure
(Available soon.)
This function is activated when a ground fault is detected in the inverter
output circuit. If the ground-fault current is large, the overcurrent
protection may be activated.
Ground fault This protective function is to protect the inverter. For the sake of ef H103
prevention of accidents such as human damage and fire, connect a
separate earth-leakage protective relay or an earth-leakage circuit
breaker (ELCB).
This function is activated when a memory error such as a data write
error occurs.
Note: The inverter memory uses a nonvolatile memory that has a
Memory error limited number of rewritable times (100,000 to 1,000,000 times). er1
Saving data with the full save function into the memory so many times
unnecessarily will no longer allow the memory to save data, causing a
memory error.
This function is activated if a communications error occurs between the
keypad and the inverter control circuit when the start/stop command
Keypad given from the keypad is valid (Function code F02=0).
communications Note: Even if a keypad communications error occurs when the inverter er2 F02
error is being driven via the control circuit terminals or the communications
link, the inverter continues running without displaying any alarm or
issuing an alarm output (for any alarm).
CPU error This function is activated if a CPU error occurs. er3
This function is activated: o30, o31,
- if a communications error occurs due to noise when the inverter is H107
Network error being driven via the T-Link, SX-bus, E-SX bus, or CC-Link. er4
E01 to E14
E15 to E28
2-38
Class LED Related

displays code
Chap. 2
This function is activated:
- if an RS-485 communications error occurs when the inverter is H32, H33,
RS-485
being driven via the RS-485 and Function code H32 is set to any of H38
communications er5
"0" through "2."
error H107
SPECIFICATIONS
- if Function code H38 is set within the range of 0.1 to 60.0 (s) and the
communications link breaks for the specified period or longer.
This function is activated:
- if two or more network options (T-Link, SX-bus, E-SX bus, and
CC-Link) are mounted.
- if the SW configuration is the same on two or more PG options.
Operation error (More than one PG option can be mounted.) er6 H01
- if auto tuning (Function code H01) is attempted when any of the
digital input signals BX, STOP1, STOP2 and STOP3 is ON.
- if auto tuning is selected with Function code H01 but the key on
the keypad is not pressed within 20 seconds.
Output wiring This function is activated if the wires in the inverter output circuit are
er7 H01
fault not connected during auto-tuning.
A/D converter This function is activated if an error occurs in the A/D converter circuit.
er8
error
This function is activated if the deviation between the speed command
E43, E44,
(reference speed) and the motor speed (detected or estimated speed)
E45
Speed not agreed becomes excessive. er9
H108,
The detection level and detection time can be specified with function
H149
codes.
UPAC error Available soon era
Inter-inverter This function is activated if a communications error occurs in the
communications inverter-to-inverter communications link using a high-speed serial erb H107

link error communication terminal block (option).
Upon detection of an LSI failure on the printed circuit board, this
Hardware error erh
function stops the inverter output.
H108,
Mock alarm This can be caused with keypad operation or FRENIC-VG Loader. err
H142
This function is activated if a PG data error or PG failure is detected
PG failure when the 17-bit high resolution ABS interface (OPC-VG1-SPGT) is et1
used.
This function protects the inverter when an input phase loss is detected.
Input phase loss If the connected load is light or a DC reactor is connected to the lin E45
inverter, this function may not detect input phase loss if any.
This function is activated when the reference torque current (F44, F45)
H108,
exceeds the specified level (H140) and the actual speed drops below the
Start delay loc H140,
specified stop speed (F37), and then the state is kept for the specified
H141
duration (H141).
This function is activated when the DC link bus voltage drops below
the undervoltage detection level (180 VDC for 200 V series, 360 VDC
for 400 V series).
Undervoltage lu F14
Note that, if the restart mode after momentary power failure is selected
(F14 = 3, ,4 or 5), no alarm is output even if the DC link bus voltage
drops.
This function is activated if the thermistor wire breaks when the NTC
thermistor is selected with Function code P30/A31/A131 for motor P30, A31,
NTC wire break M1/M2/M3. nrb A131
error
This function works even at extremely low temperatures (approx. H106
-30°C or below).
This function stops the inverter output when the output current to the
Overcurrent 0c
motor exceeds the overcurrent level of the inverter.
This function is activated if the temperature surrounding the heat sink
Heat sink overheat (that cools down the rectifier diodes and the IGBTs) increases due to 0h1
stopped cooling fans.
2-39
Class LED Related
displays code
This function is activated by digital input signal THR ("Enable external
alarm trip").
Connecting an alarm contact of external equipment such as a braking E01-E14
External alarm 0h2
unit or braking resistor to the control circuit terminal (to which the H106
THR is assigned) activates this function according to the contact signal
status.
This function is activated if the temperature surrounding the control
Inverter internal
printed circuit board increases due to poor ventilation inside the 0h3
overheat
inverter.
This function is activated if the temperature detected by the NTC
Motor overheat thermistor integrated in a dedicated motor for motor temperature 0h4 E30, H106
detection exceeds the motor overheat protection level (E30).
This function is activated by the electronic thermal overload protection
Motor 1 overload if the motor 1 current (inverter output current) exceeds the operation 0l1 F11, H106
level specified by Function code F11.
Motor 2 overload if the motor 2 current (inverter output current) exceeds the operation 0l2 A33, H106
level specified by Function code A33.
A133,
Motor 3 overload if the motor 3 current (inverter output current) exceeds the operation 0l3
H106
level specified by Function code A133.
This function is activated if the output current exceeds the overload
characteristic of the inverse time characteristic.
Inverter overload 0lu F80
It stops the inverter output depending upon the heat sink temperature
and switching element temperature calculated from the output current.
This function detects a break in inverter output wiring during running
H103, P01
Output phase loss and stops the inverter output. 0pl
A01, A101
(Available under vector control for IM with speed sensor.)

This function
Stops the inverter output if the detected speed is 120% or over of the
maximum frequency.
Overspeed 0s H90
This function is activated if the motor speed (detected or estimated
speed) exceeds 120% (adjustable with Function code H90) of the
maximum speed (F03/A06/A106).
This function is activated if the DC link bus voltage exceeds the
overvoltage detection level (405 VDC for 200 V series, 820 VDC for
400 V series) due to an increase of supply voltage or regenerative
Overvoltage braking current from the motor. 0u
Note that the inverter cannot be protected from excessive voltage (high
voltage, for example) supplied by mistake.
This function is activated if a wire breaks in the PA/PB circuit on the
PG terminal or in the power supply circuit.
PG wire break p9 H104
It does not work under vector control without speed sensor or under V/f
control.
This function is activated if the bypass circuit of the DC link bus is not
configured (that is, the magnetic contactor for bypass of the charging
Charger circuit circuit is not closed) even after the main power is applied. pbf
fault
(For models of 37 kW or above in 200 V class series and 75 kW or
This function is activated if the DC fan is stopped.
DC fan locked (For models of 45 kW or above in 200 V class series and 75 kW or dfa H108
E-SX bus tact
This error occurs when the E-SX tact cycle and inverter control cycle
synchronization are H108
are out of synchronization with each other.
error
The inverter monitors 2-bit signals of toggle signal 1 TGL1 and toggle
Toggle abnormality signal 2 TGL2 which are sent from the PLC.
arf H107
error When the inverter receives no prescribed change pattern within the
time specified by H144, this error occurs.
2-40
Class LED Related

displays code
Chap. 2
This function displays l-al on the LED monitor if a failure or
warning registered as a light alarm occurs. It outputs the L-ALM signal
on the Y terminal but it does not issue an alarm relay output ([30A],
[30B], [30C]), so the inverter continues to run.
SPECIFICATIONS
Light alarm objects (selectable)
Motor overheat (0h4 ), Motor overload (0l1 to 0l3 ),
NTC wire break error (nrb ), External failure (0h2 ),
RS-485 communications error (er5 ), Network error (er4 ),
Light alarm Toggle abnormality error (arf ), Mock alarm (err ), l-al H106-H111
(warning) DC fan locked (dfa ), Speed mismatch (er9 ),
E-SX bus tact synchronization error (are ), Motor overheat early
warning (m0h ),
Motor overload early warning (m0l ), Lifetime alarm (lif ),

Heat sink overheat early warning (0h ),
Inverter overload early warning (0l ),
Battery life expired (bat ), Start delay (loc ),
Safety PCB light alarm (snf ) (Available soon)
Light alarm objects can be checked on the keypad.
This function protects the inverter against surge voltages which might
appear between one of the power lines, using surge absorbers
Surge protection -
connected to the main circuit power terminals (L1/R, L2/S, L3/T) and
control power terminals (R0, T0).
This function monitors the AC input power to the inverter and judges
whether the AC input power (main power) is established.
When the main power is not established, whether to run the inverter or
Main power shut
not can be selected. - H76
down
(When the power is supplied via a PWM converter or the DC link bus,
there is no AC input. In this case, do not change the data of Function
code H76 from the default (H76 = 0).
Notes • All protective functions are automatically reset if the control power voltage decreases until the inverter control circuit no longer
operates.
• The inverter retains the latest and the last 10 alarm codes and the latest and the last three pieces of alarm information.
• Stoppage due to a protective function can be reset by the RST key on the keypad or turning OFF and then ON between the X terminal
(to which RST is assigned) and the CM. This action is invalid if the cause of an alarm is not removed.
• The inverter cannot reset until the causes of all alarms are removed. (The causes of alarms not removed can be checked on the
keypad.)
• If an abnormal state is categorized as a light alarm, the 30A/B/C does not operate.
2-41
2.6 Connection Diagrams and Terminal Functions
2.6.1 Connection diagrams
2.6.1.1 Running the MVK type of an induction motor (dedicated motor)
Signal input section
Signal output section
2-42
(Note 1) Install a recommended molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) or residual-current-operated protective device
(RCD)/earth leakage circuit breaker (ELCB) (with overcurrent protection function) in the primary circuit of the
inverter to protect wiring. Ensure that the circuit breaker capacity is equivalent to or lower than the recommended
capacity.
Chap. 2
(Note 2) Install a magnetic contactor (MC) for each inverter to separate the inverter from the power supply, apart from the
MCCB or RCD/ELCB, when necessary.
Connect a surge absorber in parallel when installing a coil such as the MC or solenoid near the inverter.
(Note 3) To retain an alarm output signal ALM issued on inverter's programmable output terminals by the protective function
SPECIFICATIONS
or to keep the keypad alive even if the main power has shut down, connect these terminals to the power supply lines.
Without power supply to these terminals, the inverter can run.
(Note 4) Normally no need to be connected. Use these terminals when the inverter is equipped with a high power-factor,
regenerative PWM converter (RHC series).
(Note 5) When connecting an optional DC reactor (DCR), remove the jumper bar from the main circuit terminals P1 and P(+).
Inverters of 75 kW or above and LD-mode inverters of 55 kW come with a DCR as standard. Be sure to connect the
DCR.
Use a DCR when the capacity of the power supply transformer exceeds 500 kVA and is 10 times or more the inverter
rated capacity, or when there are thyristor-driven loads in the same power supply line.
(Note 6) Inverters of 55 kW or below (200 V class series) and those of 160 kW or below (400 V class series) have a built-in
braking transistor, allowing a braking resistor (DBR) to be directly connected between terminals P(+) and DB.
(Note 7) When connecting an optional braking resistor (DBR) to inverters of 75 kW or above (200 V class series) or those of
200 kW or above (400 V class series), be sure to use an optional braking unit (BU) together.
Connect the BU between terminals P(+) and N(-). Auxiliary terminals [1] and [2] have polarity, so make connection
as shown in the connection diagram.
(Note 8) A grounding terminal for a motor. It is recommended that the motor be grounded via this terminal for suppressing
inverter noise.
(Note 9) For wiring enclosed with , use twisted or shielded wires.
In principle, the shielded sheath of wires should be connected to ground. If the inverter is significantly affected by
external induction noise, however, connection to 0V ([M], [11], [THC]) or 0V ([CM], (PGM)) may be effective to
suppress the influence of noise.
Keep the control circuit wiring away from the main circuit wiring as far as possible (recommended: 10 cm or more).
Never install them in the same wire duct. When crossing the control circuit wiring with the main circuit wiring, set
them at right angles.
(Note 10) The connection diagram shows factory default functions assigned to digital input terminals [X1] to [X9], transistor
output terminals [Y1] to [Y4], and relay contact output terminals [Y5A/C].
(Note 11) Switching connectors in the main circuits. For details, refer to Chapter 3, Section 3.3.3.7 "Switching connectors."
(Note 12) Slide switches on the control printed circuit board (control PCB). Use these switches to customize the inverter
operations. For details, refer to Chapter 3, Section 3.3.3.9 "Setting up the slide switches."
(Note 13) The cooling fan power supply for motors of 7.5 kW or less is single-phase. Connect terminals [FU] and [FV].
For motors of 7.5 kW or less (400 V class series), the power voltage/frequency rating of the cooling fan is 200 V/50
Hz or 200-230 V/60 Hz. For motors of 11 kW or above (400 V class series), it is 400-420 V/50 Hz or 400-440 V/60
Hz. To use the fan with power voltage other than the above specifications, a transformer is necessary.
(Note 14) 0V ([M], [11], [THC]) and 0V ([CM], (PGM)) are insulated inside the inverter unit.
(Note 15) Use the auxiliary contact (manual reset) of the thermal relay to trip the MCCB or MC.
(Note 16) Jumper bars are mounted between safety terminals [EN1]/[EN2] and [PS] by factory default. To use the safety
function, remove the jumper bars before connection of safety devices.
2-43
2.6.1.2 Running the GNF2 type of a permanent magnet synchronous motor
(dedicated motor)
OPC-VG1-PMPG
Signal input section
Signal output section
2-44
capacity.
Chap. 2
SPECIFICATIONS
DCR.
inverter noise.
(Note 11) Switching connectors in the main circuits. For details, refer to Chapter 3, Section 3.3.3.7 "Switching connectors."
operations. For details, refer to Chapter 3, Section 3.3.3.9 "Setting up the slide switches."
(Note 17) If the activation of the inverter protective function may result in a high-speed motor rotation due to the load, be sure
to insert an MC.
(Note 18) A single inverter cannot drive two or more PMSMs.
(Note 19) A PMSM (GNF2 type) cannot be driven by commercial power. Driving the PMSM may result in a motor burnout.
(Note 20) Driving a PMSM requires setting the inverter carrier frequency high in order to prevent permanent magnet overheat
and demagnetization due to the output current harmonics (except Fuji GNF2 type). Be sure to check the allowable
carrier frequency of the motor and determine the settings of the carrier frequency (F26) and automatic lowering of the
carrier frequency (H104, Hundreds digit).
When canceling the automatic lowering of the carrier frequency, take care since it derates the continuous rated
current of the inverter according to the carrier frequency setting (F26). (For the rated current derating, refer to Section
2.1.4.)
2-45
2.6.2 List of terminal functions
Main Circuit Terminals and Analog Input Terminals
Classifi-
cation
Symbol Name Functions
L1/R, L2/S, Main circuit power Connect the three-phase input power lines.
L3/T inputs
U, V, W Inverter outputs Connect a three-phase motor.
P (+), P1 DC reactor Connect a DC reactor (DCR) for correcting power factor.
connection HD- and MD-mode inverters: A DCR is provided as an option for inverters of 55 kW or
below, and as standard for those of 75 kW or above.
LD-mode inverters: A DCR is provided as an option for inverters of 45 kW or below, and
as standard for those of 55 kW or above.
P (+), N (-) Braking unit Connect a braking resistor (DBR) via a braking unit.
Main circuit
connection For connection to the DC link bus.

P (+), DB External braking Connect an optional external braking resistor.
resistor connection
G Grounding for Grounding terminals of the inverter.
inverter
R0, T0 Auxiliary power For a backup of the control circuit power supply, connect AC power lines same as that of
input for the control the main power input.
circuit
R1, T1 Auxiliary power For use in combination with a power regenerative PWM converter (RHC series), use
input for the fans these terminals for an auxiliary power input of the AC fans inside the inverter. (For 200 V
class series of inverters with 37 kW or above and 400 V class series with 75 kW or above)
Normally, no need to use these terminals.
[13] Power supply for the Power supply (+10 VDC, 10 mA max.) for a speed command potentiometer (Variable
potentiometer resistor: 1 to 5kΩ).
Speed setting
[12] Setting voltage input The speed is commanded according to the external analog voltage input.
Reversed operation with ± signals: 0 to ±10V DC/0 to maximum speed
[11] Analog input Common for analog input signals.
common
[Ai1] Analog input 1 Selectable from the following functions to assign. Possible to make setting according to
analog input voltage specified from the external equipment.
0: Input signal off (OFF) 1: Auxiliary speed setting 1 (AUX-N1)
2: Auxiliary speed setting 2 (AUX-N2) 3: Torque limiter (level 1) (TL-REF1)
4: Torque limiter (level 2) (TL-REF2) 5: Torque bias command (TB-REF)
[Ai2] Analog input 2 6: Torque command (T-REF) 7: Torque current command (IT-REF)
8: Creep speed 1 under UP/DOWN control (CRP-N1)
9: Creep speed 2 under UP/DOWN control (CRP-N2)
Analog input
10: Magnetic-flux reference (MF-REF) 11: Line speed detected (LINE-N)

12: Motor temperature (M-TMP) 13: Speed override (N-OR)
14: Universal Ai (U-AI) 15: PID feedback value 1 (PID-FB1)
16: PID command (PID-REF) 17: PID correction gain (PID-G)
18-24: Custom Ai1 to 7 (C-AI 1 to 7)
25: Main speed reference (N-REFV)
26: Current input speed reference (N-REFC)
27: PID feedback value 2 (PID-FB2)
* Ai2 is switchable between voltage input and current input by using the internal switch.
Note that current input supports "speed setting" only.
[M] Analog input Common for analog input signals.
common
2-46
Digital Input Terminals

Classifi-
cation
Chap. 2
[FWD] Run forward FWD-CM: ON
command Run the motor in the forward direction.
Stop command FWD-CM: OFF
Decelerate the motor to stop.
SPECIFICATIONS
[REV] Run reverse REV-CM: ON
command Run the motor in the reverse direction.
Stop command REV-CM: OFF
Decelerate the motor to stop.
[X1] Digital input 1 0, 1, 2, 3: Select multistep speed (1 to 15 steps) (0: SS1, 1: SS2, 2: SS4, 3: SS8)
4, 5: Select ASR and ACC/DEC time (4 steps) (4: RT1, 5: RT2)
6: Enable 3-wire operation (HLD) 7: Coast to a stop (BX)
[X2] Digital input 2 8: Reset alarm (RST) 9: Enable external alarm trip (THR)
10: Ready for jogging (JOG) 11: Select speed command N2/N1 (N2/N1)
12: Select motor 2 (M-CH2) 13: Select motor 3 (M-CH3)
[X3] Digital input 3 14: Enable DC braking (DCBRK) 15: Clear ACC/DEC to zero (CLR)
16: Switch creep speed under UP/DOWN control (CRP-N2/N1)
17: UP (Increase speed under UP/DOWN control) (UP)
18: DOWN (Decrease speed under UP/DOWN control) (DOWN)
[X4] Digital input 4 19: Enable data change with keypad (WE-KP)
20: Cancel PID control (KP/PID) 21: Switch normal/inverse operation (IVS)
22: Interlock (52-2) (IL)
[X5] Digital input 5 23: Enable data change via communications link (WE-LK)
24: Enable communications link (LE)
25: Universal DI (U-DI)
26: Enable auto search for idling motor speed at starting (STM)
[X6] Digital input 6 27: Synchronous operation command (SYC)
28: Lock at zero speed (LOCK) 29: Pre-excitation (EXITE)
30: Cancel speed limiter (N-LIM)
Digital input (Sink/source switchable)
[X7] Digital input 7 31: Cancel H41 (Torque command) (H41-CCL)

32: Cancel H42 (Torque current command) (H42-CCL)
33: Cancel H43 (Magnetic flux command) (H43-CCL)
34: Cancel F40 (Torque limiter mode 1) (F40-CCL)
[X8] Digital input 8
35: Select torque limiter level 2/1 (TL2/TL1)
36: Bypass ACC/DEC processor (BPS)
37, 38: Select torque bias command 1/2 (37: TB1, 38: TB2)
[X9] Digital input 9 39: Select droop control (DROOP) 40: Zero-hold Ai1 (ZH-AI1)
41: Zero-hold Ai2 (ZH-AI2) 42: Zero-hold Ai3 (ZH-AI3)
43: Zero-hold Ai4 (ZH-AI4) 44: Reverse Ai1 polarity (REV-AI1)
45: Reverse Ai2 polarity (REV-AI2) 46: Reverse Ai3 polarity (REV-AI3)
47: Reverse Ai4 polarity (REV-AI4)
48: Inverse PID output (PID-INV)
49: Cancel PG alarm (PG-CCL) 50: Cancel undervoltage alarm (LU-CCL)
51: Hold Ai torque bias (H-TB)
52: STOP1 (Decelerate to stop with normal deceleration time) (STOP1)
53: STOP2 (Decelerate to stop with deceleration time 4) (STOP2)
54: STOP3 (Decelerate to stop with max. braking torque) (STOP3)
55: Latch DIA data (DIA) 56: Latch DIB data (DIB)
57: Cancel multiplex system (MT-CCL)
58-67: Custom Di1-Di10 (C-DI1 to C-DI10)
68: Select load adaptive parameters 2/1 (AN-P1/2) *1
69: Cancel PID components (PID-CCL)
70: Enable PID FF component (PID-FF)
71: Reset completion of speed limit calculation (NL-RST) *1
72: Toggle signal 1 (TGL1) 73: Toggle signal 2 (TGL2)
74: Cause external mock alarm (FTB)
75: Cancel NTC thermistor alarm (NTC-CCL)
76: Cancel lifetime alarm signal (LF-CCL)
77: Request for reading in serial PG absolute position (SPG-AP) *1
78: Switch PID feedback signals (PID-1/2)
79: Select PID torque bias (TB-PID)
80: Tune magnetic position (MP-TUN) *1
81: External electrical conditions (RD) *1
82: Startup conditions (STRD) *1
83: Continue to run at the time of communications link error (LK-D) *1
[PLC] PLC signal power Connect the PLC output signal power supply.
This terminal also supplies power to the load connected to the transistor output terminals.
+24 V (22 to 27 V), 100 mA max.
[CM] Digital input Common terminal for digital input signals.
common
*1 Available soon
2-47
Classifi-
(Safety function) cation Symbol Name Functions
[EN1], [EN2] Safety function input Opening the circuit between [EN1] and [PS] or [EN2] and [PS] turns off the switching
terminals element of the inverter main circuit, shutting down output.
Digital input
(during authentication)
[PS]
Analog Output Terminals and Transistor Output Terminals

Classifi-
cation
[Ao1] Analog output 1 Selectable from the following functions to assign. Possible to output monitor signals of 0
to ±10 VDC.
[Ao2] Analog output 2
0: Detected speed (Speedometer, one-way deflection) (N-FB1+)
[Ao3] Analog output 3 1: Detected speed (Speedometer, two-way deflection) (N-FB1±)
2: Speed setting 2 (Before acceleration/deceleration calculation) (N-REF2)
3: Speed setting 4 (ASR input) (N-REF4)
4: Detected speed (N-FB2±) 5: Detected line speed (LINE-N±)
6: Torque current command (Torque ammeter, two-way deflection) (IT-REF±)
Analog output
7: Torque current command (Torque ammeter, one-way deflection) (IT-REF+)

8: Torque command (Torque meter, two-way deflection) (T-REF±)
9: Torque command (Torque meter, one-way deflection) (T-REF+)
10: Motor current rms value (I-AC) 11: Motor voltage rms value (V-AC)
12: Input power (PWR) 13: DC link circuit voltage (V-DC)
14: +10V output test (P10) 15: -10V output test (N10)
30: Universal AO (U-AO)
31-37: Custom Ao1 to Ao7 (C-AO1 to C-AO7)
38: Input power (PWR-IN) 39: Magnetic pole position signal (SMP)
40: PID output value (PID-OUT)
[M] Analog output Common terminal for analog output signals.
common
[Y1] Transistor Possible to output a signal selected from the following functions.
output 1 0: Inverter running (RUN) 1: Speed existence (N-EX)
[Y2] Transistor 2: Speed agreement (N-AG1) 3: Speed arrival signal (N-AR)
output 2 4, 5, 6: Detected speed 1/2/3 (4: N-DT1 5: N-DT2 6: N-DT3)
7: Undervoltage detected (Inverter stopped) (LU)
[Y3] Transistor 8: Torque polarity detected (B/D)
output 3 9: Torque limiting (TL)
[Y4] Transistor 10, 11: Detected torque 1/2 (10: T-DT1, 11: T-DT2)
output 4 12: Keypad operation enabled (KP) 13: Inverter stopped (STOP)
14: Inverter ready to run (RDY) 15: Magnetic-flux detected (MF-DT)
16: Motor M2 selected (SW-M2) 17: Motor M3 selected (SW-M3)
18: Brake release signal (BRK) 19: Alarm content 1 (AL1)
20: Alarm content 2 (AL2) 21: Alarm content 3 (AL4)
22: Alarm content 4 (AL8) 23: Cooling fan in operation (FAN)
24: Resetting (TRY) 25: Universal DO (U-DO)
26: Heat sink overheat early warning (INV-OH)
Transistor output
27: Synchronization completion signal (SY-C)

28: Lifetime alarm (LIFE)
29: Under acceleration (U-ACC)
30: Under deceleration (U-DEC)
31: Inverter overload early warring (INV-OL)
32: Motor overheat early warring (M-OH)
33: Motor overload early warring (M-OL)
34: DB overload early warring (DB-OL)
35: Link transmission error (LK-ERR)
36: In limiting under load adaptive control (ANL)
37: In calculation under load adaptive control (ANC)
38: Analog torque bias being held (TBH)
39-48: Custom Do1-Do10 (C-DO1 to C-DO10)
50: Z-phase detection completed (Z-RDY) *1
51: Multiplex system communications link being established (MTS)
52: Answerback to cancellation of multiplex system (MEC-AB)
53: Multiplex system master selected (MSS)
54: Multiplex system local station failure (AL-SF)
55: Stopped due to communications link error (LES) *1
56: Alarm output (for any alarm) (ALM)
57: Light alarm (L-ALM) 58: Maintenance timer (MNT)
59: Braking transistor broken (DBAL) 60: DC fan locked (DCFL)
*1 Available soon
2-48
Classifi-
cation Symbol Name Functions
[Y4] Transistor 61: Speed agreement 2 (N-AG2) 62: Speed agreement 3 (N-AG3)
Chap. 2
output 4 63: Axial fan stopped (MFAN)
64: Answerback to toggle signal 1 (TGL1-AB)
65: Answerback to toggle signal 2 (TGL2-AB)
66: Answerback to droop control enabled (DSAB)
67: Answerback to cancellation of torque command/torque current command (TCL-C)
SPECIFICATIONS
68: Answerback to cancellation of torque limiter mode 1 (F40-AB)
71: 73 ON command (PRT-73)
72: Turn ON Y-terminal test output (Y-ON)
Transistor output
73: Turn OFF Y-terminal test output (Y-OFF)

74: Reading absolute position of serial PG in progress (SPG-RD) *1
75: System clock battery lifetime expired (BATT)
76: Magnetic position tuning in progress (TUN-MG) *1
77: SPGT battery warning (SPGT-B) *1
78: Electrical conditions ready (ERD) *1
79: IT detected in operation (TCA) *1
80: EN terminal detection circuit failure (DECF) *1
81: EN terminal OFF (ENOFF) *1
82: Safety function in progress (SF-RUN) *1
83: Motor stopped by safety function (SF-STP) *1
84: STO under testing by safety function (SF-TST) *1
[CMY] Transistor output Common terminal for transistor output signals.
common
[Y5A], Relay output Same signals as listed in [Y1] to [Y4] are selectable.
Relay output
[Y5C]
[30A], [30B], Alarm relay output Outputs a no-voltage contact signal (1C) when the protective function has been activated
[30C] to stop the motor.
Switchable whether excitation or non-excitation outputs an alarm.
[DX＋], RS-485 Input/output terminals for RS-485 communication.
Communication
[DX-] communication Multi-drop connection enables up to 31 inverters to connect to one host equipment.
input/output
Half-duplex mode.
USB USB port Accessible from the front of the inverter.
connector USB connector: mini B, USB 2.0 Full Speed
[PA], [PB] Pulse generator Connection of 2-phase signals sent from a pulse generator.
2-phase signal input
[PGP], Pulse generator Power supply (+15 VDC, switchable to +12 VDC) to a PG.
Speed detection
[PGM] power supply

[FA], [FB] Pulse generator Outputs frequency-divided (programmable with Function code E29), pulse generator
output signals.
Switchable between open collector and complementary (equivalent to the voltage on the
[PGP] terminal) transistor outputs.
[CM] Pulse generator A common terminal for [FA] and [FB].
output common
[TH1], NTC/PTC thermistor Monitor of the motor temperature with NTC or PTC thermistor.
Temperature
[THC] connection For a PTC thermistor, the motor overheat protection level can be specified with Function
detection
code E32.
*1 Available soon
2-49
FRENIC- VG
3
Chapter 3
PREPARATION AND TEST RUN
This chapter describes the operating and storage environments, installation and wiring, typical connection
diagram, names and functions of keypad components, keypad operation, and test run procedure.
Contents
3.1 Before Use .................................................................................................................................................. 3-1

3.1.1 Acceptance inspection (Nameplates and type of inverter) .................................................................. 3-1
3.1.2 External view and terminal blocks ...................................................................................................... 3-3
3.2 Precautions for Using Inverters................................................................................................................... 3-5
3.2.1 Installation environment...................................................................................................................... 3-5
3.2.2 Storage environment ........................................................................................................................... 3-6
3.2.3 Wiring precautions .............................................................................................................................. 3-7
3.2.4 Precautions for connection of peripheral equipment........................................................................... 3-8
3.2.5 Noise reduction ................................................................................................................................. 3-12
3.2.6 Leakage current................................................................................................................................. 3-12
3.2.7 Precautions in driving a permanent magnet synchronous motor (PMSM)........................................ 3-12
3.3 Mounting and Wiring the Inverter............................................................................................................. 3-13
3.3.1 Operating environment...................................................................................................................... 3-13
3.3.2 Installing the Inverter ........................................................................................................................ 3-14
3.3.3 Wiring ............................................................................................................................................... 3-16
3.3.3.1 Removing and mounting the front cover and the wiring guide ................................................. 3-16
3.3.3.2 Screw specifications and recommended wire sizes ................................................................... 3-17
3.3.3.3 Arrangement of terminals.......................................................................................................... 3-19
3.3.3.4 Wiring precautions .................................................................................................................... 3-22
3.3.3.5 Connection diagram .................................................................................................................. 3-25
3.3.3.6 Detailed functions of main circuit terminals and grounding terminals...................................... 3-27
3.3.3.7 Switching connectors ................................................................................................................ 3-31
3.3.3.8 Detailed functions of control circuit terminals .......................................................................... 3-34
3.3.3.9 Setting up the slide switches ..................................................................................................... 3-42
3.3.4 Mounting and connecting a keypad................................................................................................... 3-44
3.3.4.1 Parts required for connection .................................................................................................... 3-44
3.3.4.2 Mounting procedure .................................................................................................................. 3-44
3.3.5 USB connectivity .............................................................................................................................. 3-48
3.4 Operation Using the Keypad..................................................................................................................... 3-49
3.4.1 Names and functions of keypad components .................................................................................... 3-49
3.4.2 Overview of operation modes ........................................................................................................... 3-52
3.4.3 Running mode ................................................................................................................................... 3-53
3.4.3.1 Configuring the speed command............................................................................................... 3-53
3.4.3.2 Running or stopping the motor.................................................................................................. 3-54
3.4.3.3 Monitoring the running status on the LED monitor .................................................................. 3-56
3.4.3.4 Jogging (inching) the motor ...................................................................................................... 3-57
3.4.3.5 Monitoring light alarms............................................................................................................. 3-58
3.4.4 Programming mode........................................................................................................................... 3-60
3.4.4.1 Selecting language -- Menu #0 "LANGUAGE" ....................................................................... 3-66
3.4.4.2 Configuring function codes -- Menu #1 "DATA SET".............................................................. 3-67
3.4.4.3 Checking function code data -- Menu #2 "DATA CHECK"...................................................... 3-69
3.4.4.4 Monitoring the running status -- Menu #3 "OPR MNTR" ........................................................ 3-71
3.4.4.5 Checking I/O signal status -- Menu #4 "I/O CHECK".............................................................. 3-74
3.4.4.6 Reading maintenance information -- Menu #5 "MAINTENANCE" ........................................ 3-77
3.4.4.7 Measuring load factor -- Menu #6 "LOAD FCTR"................................................................... 3-79
3.4.4.8 Reading alarm information -- Menu #7 "ALM INF" ................................................................ 3-80
3.4.4.9 Viewing causes of alarm -- Menu #8 "ALM CAUSE".............................................................. 3-83
3.4.4.10 Copying data -- Menu #10 "DATA COPY"............................................................................... 3-84
3.4.4.11 Checking changed function codes -- Menu #11 "CHANGES" ................................................. 3-86
3.4.4.12 Setting the calendar clock -- Menu #12 "DATE/TIME"............................................................ 3-87
3.4.4.13 Limiting function codes to be displayed -- Menu #14 "LIMITED FC" .................................... 3-90
3.5 Test Run Procedure ................................................................................................................................... 3-91
3.5.1 Checking prior to powering On......................................................................................................... 3-92
3.5.2 Powering ON and checking............................................................................................................... 3-93
3.5.2.1 Checking the input state of PG (pulse generator) signals.......................................................... 3-93
3.5.2.2 Mounting direction of a PG (pulse generator) and PG signals .................................................. 3-94
3.5.3 Selecting a desired motor drive control............................................................................................. 3-95
3.5.3.1 Vector control for IM with speed sensor ................................................................................... 3-95
3.5.3.2 Vector control for IM without speed sensor .............................................................................. 3-97
3.5.3.3 Vector control for PMSM with speed sensor and magnetic pole position sensor...................... 3-99
3.5.3.4 V/f control for IM.................................................................................................................... 3-101
3.5.4 Running the inverter for operation check........................................................................................ 3-103
3.5.4.1 Test run procedure for induction motor (IM) .......................................................................... 3-103
3.5.4.2 Test run procedure for permanent magnet synchronous motor (PMSM) ................................ 3-104
3.5.5 Selecting a speed command source ................................................................................................. 3-106
3.5.5.1 Setting up a speed command from the keypad ........................................................................ 3-106
3.5.5.2 Setting up a speed command with an external potentiometer ................................................. 3-106
3.5.5.3 Setting up a speed command with multistep speed selection .................................................. 3-107
3.5.6 Selecting a run command source..................................................................................................... 3-108
3.5.6.1 Setting up a run command from the keypad............................................................................ 3-108
3.5.6.2 Setting up a run command with digital input signals (terminals [FWD] and [REV]) ............. 3-108
3.1 Before Use
3.1 Before Use

3.1.1 Acceptance inspection (Nameplates and type of inverter)
Unpack the package and check the following:
(1) An inverter and the following accessories are contained.
Chap. 3
Accessories - DC reactor (DCR)
(for inverters of 75 kW or above and LD-mode inverters of 55 kW)
- Instruction manual

- CD-ROM (containing the FRENIC-VG User's Manual, FRENIC-VG Loader
software (free version), and FRENIC-VG Loader Instruction Manual)
(2) The inverter has not been damaged during transportation—there should be no dents or parts
missing.
(3) The inverter is the type you ordered. You can check the type and specifications on the main and
sub nameplates. (The main and sub nameplates are attached to the inverter as shown in Figure
3.1-2.) For inverters of 30 kW or above, the mass is printed on the main nameplate.
(a) Main Nameplate (b) Sub Nameplate
Figure 3.1-1 Nameplates
TYPE: Type of inverter
In this manual, inverter types are denoted as "FRN_ _ _VG1-2/4."
3-1
The FRENIC-VG is available in two or three drive modes depending upon the inverter capacity: High
Duty (HD) and Low Duty (LD) modes or High Duty (HD), Medium Duty (MD) and Low Duty (LD)
modes. One of these modes should be selected to match the load property of your system.
Specifications in each mode are printed on the main nameplate.
High Duty: HD mode designed for heavy duty load applications.
Overload capability: 150% for 1 min, 200% for 3 s. Continuous ratings = Inverter
ratings
Medium Duty: MD mode designed for medium duty load applications.
Overload capability: 150% for 1 min. Continuous ratings = One rank higher capacity
of inverters
Low Duty: LD mode designed for light duty load applications.
Overload capability: 120% for 1 min. Continuous ratings = One rank or two ranks
higher capacity of inverters
SOURCE: Number of input phases (three-phase: 3PH), input voltage, input frequency, input
current
OUTPUT: Number of output phases, rated output voltage, output frequency range, rated output
capacity, rated output current, and overload capability
SCCR: Short-circuit capacity
MASS: Mass of the inverter in kilogram (for 30 kW or above)
SER. No.: Product number
28A123A0579E
Serial number of production lot
Production month
1 to 9: January to September
X, Y, or Z: October, November, or December
Production year: Last digit of year
If you suspect the product is not working properly or if you have any questions about your product,
contact your Fuji Electric representative.
3-2
3.1 Before Use
3.1.2 External view and terminal blocks

(1) Outside and inside views
Control circuit terminal block
Chap. 3
Wiring guide

Main circuit terminal
block
Sub nameplate
Front cover Front cover
mounting screw
(a) FRN7.5VG1-2
(b) FRN220VG1-4
Figure 3.1-2 Outside and Inside Views of Inverters
3-3
(2) Warning plates and label
(a) FRN7.5VG1-2 (b) FRN220VG1-4
Figure 3.1-3 Warning Plates and Label
3-4
3.2 Precautions for Using Inverters

This section provides precautions in introducing inverters, e.g. precautions for installation
environment, power supply lines, wiring, and connection to peripheral equipment. Be sure to observe
those precautions.
Chap. 3
3.2.1 Installation environment
Install the inverter in an environment that satisfies the requirements listed in Chapter 2, Section 2.2
"Common Specifications."

Fuji Electric strongly recommends installing inverters in a panel for safety reasons, in particular, when
installing the ones whose enclosure rating is IP00.
When installing the inverter in a place out of the specified environmental requirements, it is necessary
to derate the inverter or consider the panel engineering design suitable for the special environment or
the panel installation location. For details, refer to the Fuji Electric technical information "Engineering
Design of Panels" or consult your Fuji Electric representative.
The special environments listed below require using the specially designed panel or considering the
panel installation location.
Environments Possible problems Sample measures Applications
Highly concentrated Corrosive gases cause parts Any of the following measures may Paper manufacturing,
sulfidizing gas or inside the inverter to corrode, be necessary. sewage disposal, sludge
other corrosive gases resulting in an inverter - Mount the inverter in a sealed treatment, tire
malfunction. panel with IP6X or air-purge manufacturing, gypsum
mechanism. manufacturing, metal
processing, and a
- Place the panel in a room free from particular process in textile
influence of the gases. factories.
A lot of conductive Entry of conductive dust into Any of the following measures may Wiredrawing machines,
dust or foreign the inverter causes a short be necessary. metal processing,
material (e.g., metal circuit. - Mount the inverter in a sealed extruding machines,
powders or shavings, panel. printing presses,
carbon fibers, or combustors, and industrial
carbon dust) - Place the panel in a room free from waste treatment.
influence of the conductive dust.
A lot of fibrous or Fibrous or paper dust Any of the following measures may Textile manufacturing and
paper dust accumulated on the heat sink be necessary. paper manufacturing.
lowers the cooing effect. - Mount the inverter in a sealed
Entry of dust into the inverter panel that shuts out dust.
causes the electronic circuitry - Ensure a maintenance space for
to malfunction. periodical cleaning of the heat sink
in panel engineering design.
- Employ external cooling when
mounting the inverter in a panel for
easy maintenance and perform
periodical maintenance.
High humidity or In an environment where a - Put a heating module such as a Outdoor installation.
dew condensation humidifier is used or where space heater in the panel. Film manufacturing line,
the air conditioner is not pumps and food
equipped with a dehumidifier, processing.
high humidity or dew
condensation results, which
causes a short-circuiting or
malfunction of electronic
circuitry inside the inverter.
Vibration or shock If a large vibration or shock - Insert shock-absorbing materials Installation of an inverter
exceeding the exceeding the specified level between the mounting base of the panel on a carrier or
specified level is applied to the inverter, for inverter and the panel for safe self-propelled machine.
example, due to a carrier mounting. Ventilating fan at a
running on seam joints of rails construction site or a press
or blasting at a construction machine.
site, the inverter structure gets
damaged.
Fumigation for Halogen compounds such as - When exporting an inverter built in Exporting.
export packaging methyl bromide used in a panel or equipment, pack them in
fumigation corrodes some a previously fumigated wooden
parts inside the inverter. crate.
- When packing an inverter alone for
export, use a laminated veneer
lumber (LVL).
3-5
3.2.2 Storage environment
The storage environment in which the inverter should be stored after purchase differs from the
installation environment. Store the inverter in an environment that satisfies the requirements listed
below.
[ 1 ] Temporary storage
Table 3.2-1 Storage and Transport Environments
Item Specifications
Storage temperature *1 -25 to +70°C Places not subjected to abrupt temperature changes or
Relative humidity 5 to 95% *2 condensation or freezing
Atmosphere The inverter must not be exposed to dust, direct sunlight, corrosive or flammable gases, oil mist,
vapor, water drops or vibration. The atmosphere must contain only a low level of salt. (0.01
mg/cm2 or less per year)
Atmospheric pressure 86 to 106 kPa (during storage)
70 to 106 kPa (during transportation)
*1 Assuming comparatively short time storage, e.g., during transportation or the like.
*2 Even if the humidity is within the specified requirements, avoid such places where the inverter will be subjected to
sudden changes in temperature that will cause condensation to form.
Precautions for temporary storage

(1) Do not leave the inverter directly on the floor.
(2) If the environment does not satisfy the specified requirements listed in Table 3.2-1, wrap the
inverter in an airtight vinyl sheet or the like for storage.
(3) If the inverter is to be stored in a high-humidity environment, put a drying agent (such as silica
gel) in the airtight package described in (2) above.
[ 2 ] Long-term storage
The long-term storage method of the inverter varies largely according to the environment of the
storage site. General storage methods are described below.
(1) The storage site must satisfy the requirements specified for temporary storage.
However, for storage exceeding three months, the surrounding temperature range should be
within the range from -10 to 30°C. This is to prevent electrolytic capacitors in the inverter from
deterioration.
(2) The package must be airtight to protect the inverter from moisture. Add a drying agent inside the
package to maintain the relative humidity inside the package within 70%.
(3) If the inverter has been installed to the equipment or panel at construction sites where it may be
subjected to humidity, dust or dirt, then temporarily remove the inverter and store it in the
environment specified in Table 3.2-1.
Precautions for storage over 1 year

If the inverter has not been powered on for a long time, the property of the electrolytic capacitors may
deteriorate. Power the inverters on once a year and keep the inverters powering on for 30 to 60 minutes.
Do not connect the inverters to the load circuit (secondary side) or run the inverter.
3-6
3.2.3 Wiring precautions

(1) Route the wiring of the control circuit terminals as far from the wiring of the main circuit as
possible. Otherwise electric noise may cause malfunctions.
(2) Fix the control circuit wires inside the inverter to keep them away from the live parts of the main
circuit (such as the terminal block of the main circuit).
Chap. 3
(3) If more than one motor is to be connected to a single inverter, the wiring length should be the
sum of the length of the wires to the motors.
(4) Precautions for high frequency leakage currents

If the wiring distance between an inverter and a motor is long, high frequency currents flowing
through stray capacitance across wires of phases may cause an inverter overheat, overcurrent trip,
increase of leakage current, or it may not assure the accuracy in measuring leakage current.
Depending on the operating condition, an excessive leakage current may damage the inverter.
To avoid the above problems when directly connecting an inverter to a motor, keep the wiring
distance 50 m or less for inverters with a capacity of 3.7 kW or below, and 100 m or less for
inverters with a higher capacity.
If the wiring distance longer than the specified above is required, lower the carrier frequency or
insert an output circuit filter (OFL--A) as shown below.
When a single inverter drives two or more motors connected in parallel (group drive), in
particular, using shielded wires, the stray capacitance to the earth is large, so lower the carrier
frequency or insert an output circuit filter (OFL--A).
No output circuit filter installed Output circuit filter installed
Power Power Max. 5 m

input input Output circuit filter
Inverter Motor Inverter Motor
Max. 50 m
Max. 100 m Max. 400 m
For an inverter with an output circuit filter installed, the total secondary wiring length should be
100 m or less (400 m or less under the V/f control).
If further longer secondary wiring is required, consult your Fuji Electric representative.
(5) Precautions for surge voltage in driving a motor by an inverter (especially for 400 V class
motors)
If the motor is driven by a PWM-type inverter, surge voltage generated by switching the inverter
component may be superimposed on the output voltage and may be applied to the motor
terminals. Particularly if the wiring length is long, the surge voltage may deteriorate the
insulation resistance of the motor. Implement any of the following measures.
- Use a motor with insulation that withstands the surge voltage. (All Fuji standard motors feature
reinforced insulation.)
- Connect a surge suppressor unit (SSU50/100TA-NS) at the motor terminal.
- Connect an output circuit filter (OFL--A) to the output terminals (secondary circuits)
of the inverter.
- Minimize the wiring length between the inverter and motor (10 to 20 m or less).
(6) When an output circuit filter is inserted in the secondary circuit or the wiring between the
inverter and the motor is long, a voltage loss occurs due to reactance of the filter or wiring so that
the insufficient voltage may cause output current oscillation or a lack of motor output torque.
3-7
3.2.4 Precautions for connection of peripheral equipment
(1) Phase-advancing capacitors for power factor correction
Do not mount a phase-advancing capacitor for power factor correction in the inverter's input
(primary) or output (secondary) circuit. Mounting it in the input (primary) circuit takes no effect.
To correct the inverter power factor, use an optional DC reactor (DCR). Mounting it in the output
(secondary) circuit causes an overcurrent trip, disabling operation.
An overvoltage trip that occurs when the inverter is stopped or running with a light load is
assumed to be due to surge current generated by open/close of phase-advancing capacitors in the
power system. An optional DC/AC reactor (DCR/ACR) is recommended as a measure to be
taken at the inverter side.
Input current to an inverter contains a harmonic component that may affect other motors and
phase-advancing capacitors on the same power supply line. If the harmonic component causes
any problems, connect an optional DCR/ACR to the inverter. In some cases, it is necessary to
insert a reactor in series with the phase-advancing capacitors.
(2) Power supply lines (Application of a DC/AC reactor)
Use an optional DC reactor (DCR) when the capacity of the power supply transformer is 500
kVA or more and is 10 times or more the inverter rated capacity or when there are
thyristor-driven loads. If no DCR is used, the percentage-reactance of the power supply
decreases, and harmonic components and their peak levels increase. These factors may break
rectifiers or capacitors in the converter section of the inverter, or decrease the capacitance of the
capacitors.
If the input voltage unbalance rate is 2% to 3%, use an optional DCR/ACR.
Max voltage (V) - Min voltage (V)
Voltage unbalance (%) = × 67 (IEC 61800- 3)
(3) Optional DCR for correcting the inverter input power factor (for suppressing harmonics)
To correct the inverter input power factor (to suppress harmonics), use an optional DCR. Using a
DCR increases the reactance of inverter’s power source so as to decrease harmonic components
on the power source lines and correct the power factor of the inverter.
DCR models Input power factor Remarks

The last letter identifies the capacitance.
These DCR models comply with "Standard Specifications for
Public Building Construction" (Electric Equipment, 2010
version) supervised by the Ministry of Land, Infrastructure,
DCR2/4-/A/B Approx. 90% to 95%
Transport and Tourism.
(The input power factor is 94% or above when the power
factor of the fundamental harmonic is assumed as "1"
according to the 2010 version.)
Exclusively designed for nominal applied motor of 37 kW or
DCR2/4-C Approx. 86% to 90%
above.
• Select a DCR matching not the inverter capacity but the nominal applied motor capacity.
Applicable reactor models differ depending upon the selected HD, MD, or LD mode even
on the same type of inverters.
• Inverters of 75 kW or above and LD-mode inverters of 55 kW are provided together with a
DCR as standard. Be sure to connect the DCR to the inverter.
(4) PWM converter for correcting the inverter input power factor
Using a PWM converter (High power-factor, regenerative PWM converter, RHC series) corrects
the inverter power factor up to nearly "1." When combining an inverter with a PWM converter,
disable the main power down detection by setting the function code H76 to "0" (default). If the
main power down detection is enabled (H76 = 1), the inverter interprets the main power as being
shut down, ignoring an entry of a run command.
3-8
(5) Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) or residual-current-operated protective device (RCD)/earth
leakage circuit breaker (ELCB)
Install a recommended MCCB or RCD/ELCB (with overcurrent protection) in the primary
circuit of the inverter to protect the wiring. Since using an MCCB or RCD/ELCB with a lager
capacity than recommended ones breaks the protective coordination of the power supply system,
be sure to select recommended ones. Also select ones with short-circuit breaking capacity
suitable for the power source impedance.
Chap. 3
Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB) and
Residual-Current-Operated Protective Device (RCD)/Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker (ELCB)

Nominal Rated current of MCCB and
Power supply HD/MD/LD RCD/ELCB (A)
voltage mode
(kW) w/ DCR w/o DCR
0.75 FRN0.75VG1-2 HD 5 10
1.5 FRN1.5VG1-2 HD 15
10
2.2 FRN2.2VG1-2 HD 20
3.7 FRN3.7VG1-2 HD 20 30
5.5 FRN5.5VG1-2 HD 30 50
7.5 FRN7.5VG1-2 HD 40 75
11 FRN11VG1-2 HD 50 100
15 FRN15VG1-2 HD 75 125
18.5 FRN18.5VG1-2 HD 150
100
22 FRN22VG1-2 HD 175
Three-phase 30 HD 150 200
FRN30VG1-2
200 V LD
37 175 250
HD
FRN37VG1-2
LD
45 200 300
HD
FRN45VG1-2
LD
55 250 350
HD
FRN55VG1-2
LD
75 350
HD
FRN75VG1-2
LD -
90 400
HD
FRN90VG1-2
110 LD 350
3-9
Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB) and
Residual-Current-Operated Protective Device (RCD)/Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker (ELCB) (continued)
Nominal Rated current of MCCB and

Power supply HD/MD/LD RCD/ELCB (A)
voltage mode
(kW) w/ DCR w/o DCR
3.7 FRN3.7VG1-4 HD 10 20
5.5 FRN5.5VG1-4 HD 15 30
7.5 FRN7.5VG1-4 HD 20 40
11 FRN11VG1-4 HD 30 50
15 FRN15VG1-4 HD 60
40
18.5 FRN18.5VG1-4 HD 75
22 FRN22VG1-4 HD 50 100
30 HD 75
FRN30VG1-4
LD 125
37
HD
FRN37VG1-4 100
LD
45 150
HD
FRN45VG1-4
LD
55 125 200
HD
FRN55VG1-4
LD
75 175
HD
FRN75VG1-4
LD
90 200
HD
FRN90VG1-4
MD/LD
110 250
HD
FRN110VG1-4
MD/LD
132 300
HD
FRN132VG1-4
Three-phase MD/LD
160 350
400 V HD
FRN160VG1-4
MD/LD
200
HD
FRN200VG1-4 500
MD/LD
220
HD
250 FRN220VG1-4 MD
LD 600
280 -
HD
FRN280VG1-4
MD
315
FRN315VG1-4 HD
FRN280VG1-4 LD 800
355 FRN315VG1-4 MD
FRN355VG1-4 HD
FRN315VG1-4 LD
400 FRN355VG1-4 MD
FRN400VG1-4 HD
FRN355VG1-4 LD 1200
450
MD
FRN400VG1-4
LD
500
HD
FRN500VG1-4
LD
630 1400
HD
FRN630VG1-4
710 LD 1600
3-10
If no zero-phase current (earth leakage current) detective device such as a ground-fault relay is installed in the
upstream power supply line in order to avoid the entire power supply system's shutdown undesirable to
factory operation, install a residual-current-operated protective device (RCD)/earth leakage circuit breaker
(ELCB) individually to inverters to break the individual inverter power supply lines only.
Chap. 3
(6) Magnetic contactor (MC) in the inverter input (primary) circuit
Avoid frequent ON/OFF operation of the magnetic contactor (MC) in the input circuit; otherwise,

the inverter failure may result. If frequent start/stop of the motor is required, use FWD/REV
terminal signals or the / / keys on the inverter's keypad.
The frequency of the MC's ON/OFF should not be more than once per 30 minutes. To assure
10-year or longer service life of the inverter, it should not be more than once per hour.
• From the system's safety point of view, it is recommended to employ such a sequence that
shuts down the magnetic contactor (MC) in the inverter input circuit with an alarm output
signal ALM issued on inverter's programmable output terminals. The sequence minimizes
the secondary damage even if the inverter breaks.
When the sequence is employed, connecting the MC's primary power line to the inverter's
auxiliary control power input makes it possible to monitor the inverter's alarm status on the
keypad.
• The breakdown of a braking unit or misconnection of an external braking resistor may
trigger that of the inverter's internal parts (e.g., charging resistor). To avoid such a
breakdown linkage, introduce an MC and configure a sequence that shuts down the MC if
a DC link voltage establishment signal is not issued within three seconds after the MC is
switched on.
For the braking transistor built-in type of inverters, assign a transistor error output signal
DBAL on inverter's programmable output terminals to switch off the MC in the input
circuit.
(7) Magnetic contactor (MC) in the inverter output (secondary) circuit

If a magnetic contactor (MC) is inserted in the inverter's output (secondary) circuit for switching
the motor to a commercial power or for any other purposes, it should be switched on and off
when both the inverter and motor are completely stopped. This prevents the contact point from
getting rough due to a switching arc of the MC. The MC should not be equipped with any main
circuit surge killer.
Applying a commercial power to the inverter's output circuit breaks the inverter. To avoid it,
interlock the MC on the motor's commercial power line with the one in the inverter output circuit
so that they are not switched ON at the same time.
(8) Surge absorber/surge killer
Do not install any surge absorber or surge killer in the inverter's output (secondary) lines.
3-11
3.2.5 Noise reduction
If noise generated from the inverter affects other devices, or that generated from peripheral equipment
causes the inverter to malfunction, follow the basic measures outlined below.
(1) If noise generated from the inverter affects the other devices through power wires or grounding
wires:
- Isolate the grounding terminals of the inverter from those of the other devices.
- Connect a noise filter to the inverter power wires.
- Isolate the power system of the other devices from that of the inverter with an insulated
transformer.
- Decrease the inverter's carrier frequency (F26). (See Note below.)
(2) If induction or radio noise generated from the inverter affects other devices:
- Isolate the main circuit wires from the control circuit wires and other device wires.
- Put the main circuit wires through a metal conduit pipe, and connect the pipe to the ground
near the inverter.
- Install the inverter into the metal panel and connect the whole panel to the ground.
- Connect a noise filter to the inverter's power wires.
- Decrease the inverter's carrier frequency (F26). (See Note below.)
(3) When implementing measures against noise generated from peripheral equipment:
- For inverter's control signal wires, use twisted or shielded-twisted wires. When using
shielded-twisted wires, connect the shield of the shielded wires to the common terminals of
the control circuit.
- Connect a surge absorber in parallel with magnetic contactor's coils or other solenoids (if any).
Note Running a permanent magnet synchronous motor (PMSM) at a low carrier frequency may heat
the permanent magnet due to the output current harmonics, resulting in demagnetization. When
decreasing the carrier frequency setting, be sure to check the allowable carrier frequency of the motor.
3.2.6 Leakage current

A high frequency current component generated by insulated gate bipolar transistors (IGBTs)
switching on/off inside the inverter becomes leakage current through stray capacitance of inverter
input and output wires or a motor. If any of the problems listed below occurs, take an appropriate
measure against them.
Problem Measures
An earth leakage circuit 1) Decrease the carrier frequency. (See Note given in Section 3.2.5 above.)
breaker* that is connected to 2) Make the wires between the inverter and motor shorter.
the input (primary) side has 3) Use an earth leakage circuit breaker with lower sensitivity than the one currently used.
tripped.
4) Use an earth leakage circuit breaker that features measures against the high frequency
*With overcurrent protection current component (Fuji SG and EG series).
An external thermal relay was 1) Decrease the carrier frequency. (See Note given in Section 3.2.5 above.)
falsely activated. 2) Increase the current setting of the thermal relay.
3) Use the electronic thermal overload protection built in the inverter, instead of the external
thermal relay.
3.2.7 Precautions in driving a permanent magnet synchronous

motor (PMSM)
When using a PMSM, note the following.
• When using a PMSM other than the Fuji standard synchronous motor (GNF2), consult your Fuji
Electric representative.
• A single inverter cannot drive two or more PMSMs.
• A PMSM cannot be driven by commercial power.
3-12
3.3 Mounting and Wiring the Inverter

3.3.1 Operating environment
Install the inverter in an environment that satisfies the requirements listed in Table 3.3-1.
Table 3.3-1 Environmental Requirements
Chap. 3
Item Specifications
Site location Indoors
Surrounding temperature -10 to +50°C (Note 1)

Relative humidity 5 to 95% (No condensation)
Atmosphere The inverter must not be exposed to dust, direct sunlight, corrosive gases, flammable gases, oil
mist, vapor or water drops.
Pollution degree 2 (IEC60664-1) (Note 2)
The atmosphere can contain a small amount of salt. (0.01 mg/cm2 or less per year)
The inverter must not be subjected to sudden changes in temperature that will cause condensation
to form.
Altitude 1,000 m max. (Note 3)
Atmospheric pressure 86 to 106 kPa
Vibration 55 kW or below (200 V class series) 75 kW or above (200 V class series)
75 kW or below (400 V class series) 90 kW or above (400 V class series)
3 mm (Max. amplitude) 2 to less than 9 Hz 3 mm (Max. amplitude) 2 to less than 9 Hz
9.8 m/s2 9 to less than 20 Hz 2 m/s2 9 to less than 55 Hz
2 m/s2 20 to less than 55 Hz 1 m/s2 55 to less than 200 Hz
1 m/s2 55 to less than 200 Hz
(Note 1) When inverters are mounted side-by-side without any clearance between them (22 kW or below), the surrounding
temperature should be within the range from -10 to +40°C.
(Note 2) Do not install the inverter in an environment where it may be exposed to lint, cotton waste or moist dust or dirt which
will clog the heat sink of the inverter. If the inverter is to be used in such an environment, install it in a dustproof
panel of your system.
(Note 3) If you use the inverter in an altitude above 1000 m, you should apply an output current derating factor as listed in
Table 3.3-2.
Table 3.3-2 Output Current Derating Factor in Relation to Altitude
Altitude Output current derating factor

1000 m or lower 1.00
1000 to 1500 m 0.97
1500 to 2000 m 0.95
2000 to 2500 m 0.91
2500 to 3000 m 0.88
3-13
3.3.2 Installing the Inverter
(1) Mounting base
Install the inverter on a base made of metal or other non-flammable material.
Do not mount the inverter upside down or horizontally.
Install the inverter on a base made of metal or other non-flammable material.

(2) Clearances
Ensure that the minimum clearances indicated in Figure 3.3-1 and Table 3.3-3
are maintained at all times. When mounting the inverter in the panel of your
system, take extra care with ventilation inside the panel as the surrounding
temperature easily rises. Do not mount the inverter in a small panel with poor
ventilation.
When mounting two or more inverters

When mounting two or more inverters in the same unit or panel, basically lay
them out side by side. When mounting them necessarily one above the other,
be sure to separate them with a partition plate or the like so that any heat Figure 3.3-1
radiating from an inverter will not affect the one/s above. Mounting Direction and
Required Clearances
As long as the surrounding temperature is 40°C or lower, inverters with a
capacity of 22 kW or below can be mounted side by side without any
clearance between them.
Table 3.3-3 Clearances (mm)
Inverter capacity A B C
0.75 to 22 kW 20 0
100
30 to 220 kW 100
50
280 to 630 kW 150 150
C: Space required in front of the inverter unit
When employing external cooling

In external cooling, the heat sink, which dissipates about 70% of the total heat
(total loss) generated into air, is situated outside the equipment or the panel.
The external cooling, therefore, significantly reduces heat radiating inside the
equipment or panel.
To employ external cooling for inverters with a capacity of 22 kW or below,
use the mounting adapter for external cooling (option); for those with a
capacity of 30 kW or above, simply change the positions of the mounting
bases.
For the dimensional outline drawing of the mounting adapter (option), refer to
Chapter 8, Section 8.5.8. Figure 3.3-2 External Cooling
Prevent lint, paper fibers, sawdust, dust, metallic chips, or other foreign
materials from getting into the inverter or from accumulating on the heat sink.
Otherwise, a fire or accident could occur.
3-14
To utilize external cooling for inverters with a capacity of 30 kW or above, change the positions of the
top and bottom mounting bases from the edge to the center of the inverter as shown below (Figure
3.3-3).
Screws differ in size and count for each inverter. Refer to the table below.
For the panel cutting size, refer to Chapter 2, Section 2.3 "External Dimensions."
Table 3.3-4 Screw Size, Count and Tightening Torque
Chap. 3
Tightening
Base fixing screw Case fixing screw
Inverter type torque
(Screw size and q'ty) (Screw size and q'ty)
(N·m)
M6 × 20

FRN30VG1-2/FRN37VG1-2 M6 × 20
5 pcs for upper side, 5.8
FRN30VG1-4 to FRN55VG1-4 2 pcs for upper side
3 pcs for lower side
FRN45VG1-2/FRN55VG1-2 M6 × 20 M6 × 12
FRN75VG1-4 3 pcs each for upper and lower sides 3 pcs for upper side 5.8
FRN75VG1-2 M5 ×12 M5 × 12
FRN90VG1-4/FRN110VG1-4 7 pcs each for upper and lower sides 7 pcs for upper side 3.5
M5 × 16 M5 × 16
FRN132VG1-4/FRN160VG1-4 3.5
7 pcs each for upper and lower sides 7 pcs for upper side
FRN90VG1-2 M5 × 16 M5 × 16
FRN200VG1-4/FRN220VG1-4 8 pcs each for upper and lower sides 8 pcs for upper side 3.5
M5 × 16 M5 × 16
FRN280VG1-4/FRN315VG1-4 2 pcs each for upper and lower sides 2 pcs each for upper and lower sides 3.5
FRN355VG1-4/FRN400VG1-4 M6 × 20 M6 × 20
6 pcs each for upper and lower sides 6 pcs each for upper and lower sides 5.8
M8 × 20 M8 × 20
FRN500VG1-4/FRN630VG1-4 13.5
8 pcs each for upper and lower sides 8 pcs each for upper and lower sides
1) Remove all of the base fixing screws and the case fixing screws from the top of the inverter.
2) Move the top mounting base to the center of the inverter and secure it to the case fixing screw holes
with the base fixing screws. (After changing the position of the top mounting base, some screws
may be left unused.)
3) Remove the base fixing screws from the bottom of the inverter, move the bottom mounting base to
the center of the inverter, and secure it with the base fixing screws, just as in step 2). (Inverters with
a capacity of 220 kW or below have no case fixing screws on the bottom.)
Figure 3.3-3 Changing the Positions of the Top and Bottom Mounting Bases
When changing the positions of the top and bottom mounting bases, use only the specified screws.
3-15
3.3.3 Wiring
Follow the procedure below. (In the following description, the inverter has already been installed.)
In tables given in this manual, inverter types are denoted as "FRN_ _ _VG1-2/4.
3.3.3.1 Removing and mounting the front cover and the wiring guide
Be sure to disconnect the USB cable from the USB connector before removing the front cover.
(1) For inverters with a capacity of 22 kW or below

First loosen the front cover fixing screw, hold the cover with both hands, slide it downward, tilt it
toward you, and then pull it upward, as shown below.
While pressing the wiring guide upward, pull it out toward you.
After carrying out wiring, put the wiring guide and the front cover back into place in the reverse
order of removal.
Figure 3.3-4 Removing the Front Cover and the Wiring Guide (FRN11VG1-2)
(2) For inverters with a capacity of 30 to 630 kW

Loosen the four front cover fixing screws, hold the cover with both hands, slide it upward slightly,
and pull it toward you, as shown below.
After carrying out wiring, align the screw holes provided in the front cover with the screws on the
inverter case, then put the front cover back into place in the reverse order of removal.
To expose the control printed circuit board (control PCB), open the keypad enclosure.
Tightening torque: 1.8 N•m (M4)

3.5 N•m (M5)
Figure 3.3-5 Removing the Front Cover (FRN30VG1-2)
3-16
3.3.3.2 Screw specifications and recommended wire sizes

(1) Main circuit terminals
The tables and figures given below show the screw specifications and wire sizes. Note that the
terminal arrangements differ depending on the inverter types. In each of the figures, two grounding
terminals ( G) are not exclusive to the power supply wiring (primary circuit) or motor wiring
(secondary circuit).
Chap. 3
Use crimp terminals covered with an insulation sheath or with an insulation tube. The recommended
wire sizes for the main circuits are examples of using a single HIV wire (for 75°C) at a surrounding
temperature of 50°C.

Table 3.3-5 Screw Specifications
Inverter type Screw specifications
Auxiliary control Auxiliary fan
Main circuit power input power input
Grounding terminals terminals terminals
Refer to terminals
[R0, T0] [R1, T1]
Three-phase Three-phase Section
200 V 400 V 3.3.3.3. Screw Screw
size Tightening size Tightening Tightening Tightening
Screw Screw
(Screw- torque (Screw- torque torque torque
size size
driver (N·m) driver (N·m) (N·m) (N·m)
size) size)
FRN0.75VG1-2 FRN0.75VG1-4
FRN2.2VG1-2 FRN2.2VG1-4 M5 M5
Figure A 3.5 3.5
FRN3.7VG1-2 FRN3.7VG1-4 (No. 2) (No. 2)
FRN7.5G1-2 FRN7.5VG1-4
FRN11VG1-2 FRN11VG1-4
-- --
FRN15VG1-2 FRN15VG1-4 M6 M6
Figure B 5.8 5.8
FRN18.5VG1-2 FRN18.5VG14 (No. 3) (No. 3)
FRN22VG1-2 FRN22VG1-4
FRN30VG1-4
FRN37VG1-4
FRN30VG1-2 Figure C M8 13.5
FRN45VG1-4
FRN55VG1-4
FRN37VG1-2 M8 13.5
M3.5 1.2
FRN45VG1-2 FRN75VG1-4 Figure D
FRN55VG1-2 M10 27
-- FRN90VG1-4
Figure E
-- FRN110VG1-4
FRN75VG1-2 -- Figure F
-- FRN132VG1-4
Figure G
-- FRN160VG1-4
M3.5 1.2
FRN200VG1-4
FRN90VG1-2 Figure H
FRN220VG1-4
-- FRN280VG1-4 M12 48 M10 27
Figure I
-- FRN315VG1-4
-- FRN355VG1-4
Figure J
-- FRN400VG1-4
-- FRN500VG1-4
Figure K
-- FRN630VG1-4
When the inverter power is ON, a high voltage is applied to the following terminals.
Main circuit terminals: L1/R, L2/S, L3/T, P1, P(+), N(-), DB, U, V, W, R0, T0, R1, T1, AUX-contact (30A, 30B, 30C,
Y5A, Y5C)
Insulation level
Main circuit ― Enclosure : Basic insulation (Overvoltage category III, Pollution degree 2)
Main circuit ― Control circuit : Reinforced insulation (Overvoltage category III, Pollution degree 2)
Relay output ― Control circuit : Reinforced insulation (Overvoltage category II, Pollution degree 2)
An electric shock may occur.
3-17
Table 3.3-6 Recommended Wire Sizes
Recommended wire size (mm2 )
Power supply
Nominal
Inverter type
voltage
applied Main circuit power input Inverter

motor (L1/R, L2/S, L3/T) Grounding output
DCR
(kW) [ G] [P1, P(+)]
HD mode LD mode MD mode w/ DCR w/o DCR [U, V, W]
0.75 FRN0.75VG1-2 -- --
1.5 FRN1.5VG1-2 -- --
2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0
2.2 FRN2.2VG1-2 -- -- 2.0
3.7 FRN3.7VG1-2 -- --
5.5 FRN5.5VG1-2 -- -- 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
7.5 FRN7.5VG1-2 -- -- 3.5 5.5 5.5 5.5
Three-phase 200 V
5.5
11 FRN11VG1-2 -- -- 5.5 14 8.0 8.0
15 FRN15VG1-2 -- -- 14
14 22 8.0 14
18.5 FRN18.5VG1-2 -- --
22
22 FRN22VG1-2 -- -- 22 38 *1 22
14
30 FRN30VG1-2 -- -- 38
38 60 38
37 FRN37VG1-2 FRN30VG1-2 -- 60
45 FRN45VG1-2 FRN37VG1-2 -- 60 60
100 100
55 FRN55VG1-2 FRN45VG1-2 -- 100 22 100
75 FRN75VG1-2 FRN55VG1-2 -- 150 *2 150 *2 150
90 FRN90VG1-2 FRN75VG1-2 -- 150 -- 150 200
110 -- FRN90VG1-2 -- 200 38 200 250
3.7 FRN3.7VG1-4 -- --
2.0
5.5 FRN5.5VG1-4 -- -- 2.0 2.0 2.0
2.0
7.5 FRN7.5VG1-4 -- --
11 FRN11VG1-4 -- -- 3.5 3.5 3.5
3.5
15 FRN15VG1-4 -- -- 3.5 5.5
5.5
18.5 FRN18.5VG1-4 -- -- 8.0 *3 5.5
5.5 5.5
22 FRN22VG1-4 -- -- 14 8.0 *3 8.0 *3
30 FRN30VG1-4 -- -- 14
14 22 14
37 FRN37VG1-4 FRN30VG1-4 -- 8.0
22
45 FRN45VG1-4 FRN37VG1-4 -- 22
22 38
55 FRN55VG1-4 FRN45VG1-4 -- 38 38
Three-phase 400 V
75 FRN75VG1-4 FRN55VG1-4 -- 38 14 60
60
90 FRN90VG1-4 FRN75VG1-4 -- 60
100
110 FRN110VG1-4 FRN90VG1-4 FRN90VG1-4
100 100
132 FRN132VG1-4 FRN110VG1-4 FRN110VG1-4 22
150
150
200 250
250 -- -- FRN220VG1-4 38 250 325
-- FRN220VG1-4 -- 250 -- 150x2
280
FRN280VG1-4 -- -- 200x2
325
315 FRN315VG1-4 -- FRN280VG1-4 150x2
60
355 FRN355VG1-4 FRN280VG1-4 FRN315VG1-4 200x2 250x2
200x2
250x2 325x2
450 -- FRN355VG1-4 FRN400VG1-4 250x2
500 FRN500VG1-4 FRN400VG1-4 -- 325x2 100 325x2
325x3
630 FRN630VG1-4 FRN500VG1-4 -- 325x3 325x3
710 -- FRN630VG1-4 -- 250x4 325x4 325x4
*1 Use the crimp terminal model No. 38-6 manufactured by JST Mfg. Co., Ltd., or equivalent.
*2 When using 150 mm2 wires for main circuit terminals of FRN55VG1-2 (LD mode), use CB150-10 crimp terminals
designed for low voltage appliances in JEM1399.
*3 Use the crimp terminal model No. 8-L6 manufactured by JST Mfg. Co., Ltd., or equivalent.
Terminals common to all inverters Recommended wire size (mm2) Remarks

Auxiliary control power input terminals R0 and T0 2.0 --
200 V class series with 37 kW or above and
Auxiliary fan power input terminals R1 and T1 2.0
400 V class series with 75 kW or above
3-18
(2) Control circuit terminals (common to all inverter types)

Table 3.3-7 lists the screw specifications and recommended wire size for wiring of the control circuit
terminals. The control circuit terminals are common to all inverter types regardless of their capacities.
Table 3.3-7 Screw Specifications and Recommended Wire Size
Screw specifications
Terminals common to all inverter types Recommended wire size (mm2)
Chap. 3
Screw size Tightening torque (N·m)
Control circuit terminals M3 0.7 1.25 *
* Using wires exceeding the recommended sizes may lift the front cover depending upon the number of wires used,

impeding keypad's normal operation.
3.3.3.3 Arrangement of terminals

(1) Control circuit terminals (common to all inverter types)
3-19
(2) Main circuit terminals
3-20
Chap. 3
3-21
3.3.3.4 Wiring precautions
Follow the rules below when performing wiring for the inverter.
(1) Make sure that the source voltage is within the rated voltage range specified on the nameplate.
(2) Be sure to connect the three-phase power wires to the main circuit power input terminals L1/R,
L2/S and L3/T of the inverter. If the power wires are connected to other terminals, the inverter
will be damaged when the power is turned ON.
(3) Always connect the grounding terminal to prevent electric shock, fire or other disasters and to
reduce electric noise.
(4) Use crimp terminals covered with insulated sleeves for the main circuit terminal wiring to ensure
a reliable connection.
(5) Keep the power supply wiring (primary circuit) and motor wiring (secondary circuit) of the main
circuit, and control circuit wiring as far away as possible from each other.
(6) After removing a screw from the main circuit terminal block, be sure to restore the screw even if
no wire is connected.
(7) Use the wiring guide to separate wiring. For inverters with a capacity of 7.5 kW or below, the
wiring guide separates the main circuit wires and the control circuit wires. For inverters with a
capacity of 11 to 22 kW, it separates the upper and lower main circuit wires, and control circuit
wires. Be careful about the wiring order.
FRN7.5VG1-2 FRN22VG1-2
Preparing for the wiring guide

Inverters with a capacity of 22 kW or below are sometimes lacking in wiring space for main circuit
wires depending upon the wire materials used. To assure a sufficient wiring space, remove the clip-off
sections (see below) as required with a nipper. Note that the enclosure rating of IP20 is not ensured
when the wiring guide itself is removed to secure a space for thick main circuit wiring.
Clip-off sections
Before removal of clip-off sections After removal of clip-off sections
Wiring Guide (FRN7.5VG1-2)
3-22
Chap. 3
Clip-off sections
If the inverter output wire size is 22 mm2, remove clip-off section c; if it is 38 mm2,
remove clip-off section d before wiring.
Wiring Guide (FRN22VG1-2)
(8) In some types of inverters, the wires from the main circuit terminal block cannot be straight
routed. Route such wires as shown below so that the front cover is set into place.
(9) For inverters with a capacity of 500 kW or 630 kW, two L2/S input terminals are arranged
vertically to the terminal block. When connecting wires to these terminals, use the bolts, washers
and nuts that come with the inverter, as shown below.
3-23
• When wiring the inverter to the power source, insert a recommended molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) or
residual-current-operated protective device (RCD)/earth leakage circuit breaker (ELCB) (with overcurrent
protection) in the path of each pair of power lines to inverters. Use the recommended devices within the
recommended current capacity.
• Be sure to use wires in the specified size.
• Tighten terminals with specified torque.
• When there is more than one combination of an inverter and motor, do not use a multicore cable for the purpose of
handling their wirings together.
• Do not connect a surge killer to the inverter's output (secondary) circuit.
Doing so could cause a fire.
• Ground the inverter in compliance with the national or local electric code.
• Be sure to ground the inverter's grounding terminals G.
Otherwise, an electric shock or fire could occur.
• Qualified electricians should carry out wiring.
• Be sure to perform wiring after shutting down the power.
Otherwise, electric shock could occur.
• Be sure to perform wiring after installing the inverter unit.
Otherwise, electric shock or injuries could occur.
• Ensure that the number of input phases and the rated voltage of the product match the number of phases and the
voltage of the AC power supply to which the product is to be connected.
Otherwise, a fire or an accident could occur.
• Do not connect the power source wires to inverter output terminals (U, V, and W).
Doing so could cause fire or an accident.
3-24
3.3.3.5 Connection diagram
Thermal relay Dedicated motor

Transformer *13 (MVK)
*15
FU *13 FU
*7 DBR (option) FV FV
FM
2 FW FW
(CM)
1
(G) P DB
Chap. 3
P DB 2
1
(THR)
(G) P N
Braking unit DBR (option) *6
(option (G)
2
P(+) N(-) (CM)

1
P DB (THR)
DCR (option) *5
Main circuit
*1 G Grounding P1 P(+) DB N(-)
Grounding *8
Power supply MCCB or *2 terminal G
terminal
RCD/ELCB MC
200 V class series F
U
200 to 230 V L1/R U
R V M
50/60 Hz L2/S C V
W 3
400 V class series L3/T W
380 to 480 V
50/60 Hz
*11 Inverter unit
Auxiliary control power input - Power switching connector
*3
R0 FRENIC-VG
T0
(CN UX)
- Fan power supply switching connector
R1 (CN R)/(CN W)
Auxiliary fan power input
*4 T1
*9 Control circuit NTC

3 [13] *14 0
0 *14 V TH1 thermistor
2 [TH1]
V THC
Speed setting input [12] [THC]
1 *9
[11] SW6 15V 12V
*12
*9 [Ai1]
(+) *14 *9
Analog input 1 0V
Input signal off PGP
(PGP)
(-) PGM
*12 Voltage input for (PGM)
*9 frequency setting PA PG
[Ai2] (PA)
0 to +10 VDC
Analog input 2 (+) Current input for (PB) PB
Input signal off SS.E
[M] SW3 frequency setting
(-) 4 to 20 mA DC E
+24VDC 0V
(PS) *14
(EN1)
Open collector
(EN2)
output (FA)
*16 (FB)
SINK Complementary
Safety switch output SW7, SW8 (CM)
(PLC) *12
*14
*12 SW1 0V
30C *10
SOURCE
*9 30B Alarm output (for any alarm)

*10 (30A, 30B, 30C)
(FWD)
30 30A
Run forward command
(REV) Y5C Relay output
Run reverse command
Operation ready
Y5A
Digital input 1 (X1) *10
Select multistep speed <Y4>
Digital input 2 Transistor output 4
(X2)
Select multistep speed Detected speed 1
Digital input 3 (X3) <Y3> Transistor output 3
Select multistep speed
Speed arrival
Digital input 4 (X4)
Select multistep speed <Y2> Transistor output 2
Digital input 5 (X5) Speed agreement
ASR, Select ACC/DEC time
Digital input 6 (X6) <Y1> Transistor output 1
ASR, Select ACC/DEC time Speed existence
Digital input 7 (X7)
Coast to a stop
(X8) <CMY> Transistor output common
Digital input 8
Reset alarm
Digital input 9 (THR) (X9)
Enable external alarm trip Analog output 1
(CM) [Ao1] Detected speed 1
Digital input common
Analog output 2
[Ao2] Torque current command
[Ao3] Analog output 3
*14 Speed setting 4
0V [M] Analog output common
DX+
Data transmission
DX- (RS-485)
USB connector
SW4
*12
3-25
capacity.
DCR.
inverter noise.
(Note 11) Switching connectors in the main circuits. For details, refer to Section 3.3.3.7 "Switching connectors."
operations. For details, refer to Section 3.3.3.9 "Setting up the slide switches."
3-26
3.3.3.6 Detailed functions of main circuit terminals and grounding terminals

Primary grounding terminal ( G) for inverter enclosure
Two grounding terminals ( G) are not exclusive to the power supply wiring (primary circuit) or motor
wiring (secondary circuit). Be sure to ground either of the two grounding terminals for safety and
noise reduction. The inverter is designed for use with safety grounding to avoid electric shock, fire and
other disasters.
Chap. 3
The grounding terminal for inverter enclosure should be grounded as follows:
1) Ground the inverter in compliance with the national or local electric code.
2) Use a thick grounding wire with a large surface area and keep the wiring length as short as possible.

Inverter output terminals U, V, and W and secondary grounding terminals ( G) for motor
Inverter’s output terminals should be connected as follows:
1) Connect the three wires of the 3-phase motor to terminals U, V, and W, aligning the phases each
other.
2) Connect the secondary grounding wire to the grounding terminal ( G).
When there is more than one combination of an inverter and motor, do not use a multicore
cable for the purpose of handling their wirings together.
DC reactor terminals P1 and P(+)

Connect a DC reactor (DCR) to these terminals for power factor correction.
1) Remove the jumper bar from terminals P1 and P(+).
(Inverters of 75 kW or above and LD-mode inverters of 55 kW are not equipped with a jumper
bar.)
2) Connect an optional DCR to those terminals.
• The wiring length should be 10 m or below.
• Do not remove the jumper bar when a DCR is not used.
• For inverters of 75 kW or above and LD-mode inverters of 55 kW, a DCR is provided as standard. Be
sure to connect the DCR to the inverter.
• When a PWM converter is connected to the inverter, no DCR is required.
Be sure to connect an optional DC reactor (DCR) when the capacity of the power supply transformer exceeds
500 kVA and is 10 times or more the inverter rated capacity.
3-27
DC braking resistor terminals P(+) and DB (Inverters of 55 kW or below for 200 V class
series and those of 160 kW or below for 400 V class series)
1) Connect an optional DBR to terminals P(+) and DB.
2) Arrange the DBR and inverter so that the wiring length comes to 5 m or less and twist the two DBR
wires or route them together in parallel.
When connecting a DC braking resistor (DBR), never connect it to terminals other than terminals P(+) and
DB.
DC link bus terminals P(+) and N(-)

Braking Built-in DC braking
Capacity (kW) Optional devices Devices and terminals
transistor resistor (DBR)
75 to 90 (200 V) Braking unit Inverter–Braking unit: P(+) and

None None
200 to 630 (400 V) DC braking resistor (DBR) N(-)
1) Connecting an optional braking unit or DC braking resistor (DBR)

Inverters of 75 kW or above (200 V class series) and those of 200 kW or above (400 V class series)
require both a braking unit and DBR.
Connect the terminals P(+) and N(-) of a braking unit to those on the inverter. Arrange the inverter and
the braking unit so that the wiring length comes to 5 m or less and twist the two wires or route them
together in parallel.
Next, connect the terminals P(+) and DB of a DBR to those on the braking unit. Arrange the braking
unit and DBR so that the wiring length comes to 10 m or less and twist the two wires or route them
together in parallel.
For details about the wiring, refer to the Braking Unit Instruction Manual.
2) Connecting other external devices

A DC link bus of other inverter(s) or a PWM converter is connectable to these terminals.
For connection examples at the PWM converter side, refer to Chapter 8, Section 8.5.2 "Power
regenerative PWM converters, RHC series."
3-28
Main circuit power input terminals L1/R, L2/S, and L3/T (three-phase input)
The three-phase input power lines are connected to these terminals.
1) For safety, make sure that the molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) or magnetic contactor (MC) is
turned OFF before wiring the main circuit power input terminals.
2) Connect the main circuit power supply wires (L1/R, L2/S and L3/T) to the input terminals of the
inverter via an MCCB or residual-current-operated protective device (RCD)/earth leakage circuit
Chap. 3
breaker (ELCB)*, and an MC if necessary.
It is not necessary to align phases of the power supply wires and the input terminals of the inverter
with each other.

* With overcurrent protection
It is recommended to insert a manually operable magnetic contactor (MC) that allows you to
disconnect the inverter from the power supply in an emergency (e.g., when the protective
function is activated), preventing a failure or accident from causing secondary disasters.
Auxiliary control power input terminals R0 and T0

In general, the inverter runs normally without power supplied to the auxiliary control power input
terminals R0 and T0. If the inverter main power is shut down, however, no power is supplied to the
control circuit so that the inverter cannot issue a variety of output signals or display on the keypad.
To retain an alarm output signal ALM issued on inverter's programmable output terminals by the
protective function or to keep the keypad alive even if the main power has shut down, connect the
auxiliary control power input terminals R0 and T0 to the power supply lines. If a magnetic contactor
(MC) is installed in the inverter's primary circuit, connect the primary circuit of the MC to these
terminals R0 and T0.
Terminal rating:
200 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, Maximum current 1.0 A (200 V class series with 22 kW or below)
200 to 230 VAC, 50/60 Hz, Maximum current 1.0 A (200 V class series with 30 kW or above)
380 to 480 VAC, 50/60 Hz, Maximum current 0.5 A (400 V class series)
When introducing a residual-current-operated protective device (RCD)/earth leakage circuit

breaker (ELCB), connect its output (secondary) side to terminals R0 and T0. Connecting its
input (primary) side to those terminals causes the RCD/ELCB to malfunction since the input
power voltage to the inverter is three-phase but the one to terminals R0 and T0 is
single-phase. To avoid such problems, be sure to insert an insulation transformer or auxiliary
B contacts of a magnetic contactor in the location shown below.
Figure 3.3-6 Connection Example of Residual-current-operated Protective Device (RCD)/

Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker (ELCB)
3-29
When connecting a PWM converter with an inverter, do not connect the power supply line
directly to terminals R0 and T0. If a PWM is to be connected, insert an insulation transformer
or auxiliary B contacts of a magnetic contactor at the power supply side.
For connection examples at the PWM converter side, refer to Chapter 8, Section 8.5.2 "Power
regenerative PWM converters, RHC series."
Auxiliary fan power input terminals R1 and T1

The 200 V class series with 37 kW or above and 400 V class series with 75 kW or above are equipped
with terminals R1 and T1. Only if the inverter works with the DC-linked power input whose source is
a PWM converter, these terminals are used to feed AC power to the fans, while they are not used in
any power system of ordinary configuration.
In this case, set up the fan power supply switching connectors (CN R and CN W).
Terminal rating:
(200 V class series with 37 kW or above)
200-220 VAC/50 Hz, 200-230 VAC/60 Hz, Maximum current 1.0 A
(400 V class series with 75 kW to 400 kW)
(400 V class series with 500 kW and 630 kW)
3-30
3.3.3.7 Switching connectors

Power switching connectors (CN UX), for inverters of 75 kW or above (400 V class series)
Inverters of 75 kW or above (400 V class series) are equipped with a set of switching connectors
(male) which should be configured according to the power source voltage and frequency. By factory
default, a jumper (female connector) is set to U1. If the power supply to the main power inputs (L1/R,
L2/S, L3/T) or the auxiliary fan power input terminals (R1, T1) matches the conditions listed below,
Chap. 3
change the jumper to U2.
For the switching instructions, see Figures 3.3-7 and 3.3-8.

(a) FRN75VG1-4 to FRN110VG1-4
CN UX (red) CN UX (red)
Connector configuration
398 to 440 V/50 Hz, 430 to 480 V/60 Hz 380 to 398 V/50 Hz
Power source voltage
(Factory default) 380 to 430 V/60 Hz
(b) FRN132VG1-4 to FRN630VG1-4
CN UX (red)
CN UX (red)
398 to 440 V/50 Hz, 430 to 480 V/60 Hz 380 to 398 V/50 Hz,
Power source voltage
(Factory default) 380 to 430 V/60 Hz
The allowable power input voltage fluctuation is within -15% to +10% of the power source
voltage.
3-31
Fan power supply switching connectors (CN R and CN W), for inverters of 37 kW or above
(200 V class series) and those of 75 kW or above (400 V class series)
The standard FRENIC-VG series accepts DC-linked power input in combination with a PWM
converter. The 200 V class series with 37 kW or above and 400 V class series with 75 kW or above,
however, contain AC-driven components such as AC fans. To supply AC power to those components,
exchange the CN R and CN W connectors as shown below and connect the AC power line to the
auxiliary fan power input terminals (R1, T1).
For the switching instructions, see Figures 3.3-7 and 3.3-8.
(a) FRN37VG1-2 to FRN75VG1-2, FRN75VG1-4 to FRN110VG1-4
CN R (red) CN W (white) CN W (white)

CN R (red)
When using terminals R1 and T1

When not using terminal R1 or T1
Use conditions (Factory default) • Feeding the DC-linked power
• Combined with a PWM converter
(b) FRN90VG1-2, FRN132VG1-4 to FRN630VG1-4
CN R CN W
CN W (red) CN R (white)
(white) (red)
When using terminals R1 and T1
When not using terminal R1 or T1
Use conditions (Factory default) • Feeding the DC-linked power
• Combined with a PWM converter
By factory default, the fan power supply switching connectors CN R and CN W are set on
the FAN and NC positions, respectively. Do not exchange them unless you drive the
inverter with a DC-linked power supply.
Wrong configuration of these switching connectors cannot drive the cooling fans, causing a
heat sink overheat alarm 0h1 or a charger circuit alarm pbf.
3-32
Location of the switching connectors

The switching connectors are located on the power printed circuit board (power PCB) as shown below.
Power switching
connectors (CN UX)
Keypad enclosure
Fan power
supply switching
connectors
Chap. 3
(CN R and
CN W)
Auxiliary fan
power input
terminals

Power PCB
Auxiliary
Auxiliary
power input
power input
terminals
terminals
Fan power
supply
Auxiliary fan power input
switching
terminals
connectors
(CN R and
Power switching CN W)
connectors (CN UX)
(a) FRN37VG1-2 to FRN75VG1-2, (b) FRN90VG1-2,

FRN75VG1-4 to FRN110VG1-4 FRN132VG1-4 to FRN630VG1-4
Figure 3.3-7 Location of Switching Connectors and Auxiliary Power Input Terminals
To remove each of the jumpers, pinch its upper side

between your fingers, unlock its fastener, and pull it
up.
When mounting it, fit the jumper over the connector
until it snaps into place.
Figure 3.3-8 Inserting/Removing the Jumpers
3-33
3.3.3.8 Detailed functions of control circuit terminals
In general, the covers of the control signal wires are not specifically designed to withstand a high voltage (i.e.,
reinforced insulation is not applied). Therefore, if a control signal wire comes into direct contact with a live
conductor of the main circuit, the insulation of the cover might break down, which would expose the signal
wire to a high voltage of the main circuit. Make sure that the control signal wires will not come into contact
with live conductors of the main circuit.
Failure to observe these precautions could cause electric shock or an accident.
Noise may be emitted from the inverter, motor and wires. Take appropriate measures to prevent the nearby
sensors and devices from malfunctioning due to such noise.
It takes a maximum of 5 seconds to establish the input/output of the control circuit after the main power is
turned ON. Take appropriate measures, such as external timers.
Table 3.3-8 lists the symbols, names and functions of the control circuit terminals. The wiring to the
control circuit terminals differs depending upon the setting of the function codes, which reflects the
use of the inverter. Route wires properly to reduce the influence of noise.
Table 3.3-8 Symbols, Names and Functions of the Control Circuit Terminals
Classifi-
cation
[13] Power supply Power supply (+10 VDC) for an external speed command potentiometer.
for the (Variable resistor: 1 to 5kΩ)
potentiometer The potentiometer of 1/2 W rating or more should be connected.
[12] Analog setting (1) The speed is commanded according to the external voltage input.
voltage input • 0 to ±10 VDC/0 to maximum speed
(2) Hardware specifications
• Input impedance: 10kΩ
• The maximum input is ±15 VDC, however, the voltage higher than ±10
VDC is regarded as ±10 VDC.
[Ai1] Analog input 1 (1) Analog input voltage from external equipment.
[Ai2] Analog input 2 Possible to assign various signal functions (Input signal off, Auxiliary speed
setting 1, Torque limiter (level 1, etc.), selected with Function codes E49 and
E50 to these terminals. For details, refer to Chapter 4, Section 4.2 "Function
Codes."
Analog input

Only for terminal [Ai2], the input is switchable between voltage and current
with the SW3 configuration. (For details about slide switches, refer to Section
3.3.3.9.)
To use terminal [Ai2] for current input speed setting (N-REFC), turn SW3 to
the I position, set F01 or C25 to "9" and set E50 to "26." After that, check that
the current input is normal on the I./O check screen (given in Section 3.4.4.5).
Voltage input
• Input impedance: 10kΩ
• The maximum input is ±15 VDC, however, the voltage higher than ±10
VDC is regarded as ±10 VDC.
Current input (only on terminal [Ai2])
• Input impedance: 250Ω
• The maximum input is a maximum of 30 mADC; however, the current
higher than 20 mADC is regarded as 20 mADC.
[11] Analog input Common for analog input signals ([12], [Ai1] and [Ai2]).
[M] common Isolated from terminals [CM], [CMY] and [PGM].
3-34
Classifi- Table 3.3-8 Symbols, Names and Functions of the Control Circuit Terminals (Continued)
cation
- Since low level analog signals are handled, these signals are especially susceptible to the external noise
effects. Route the wiring as short as possible (within 20 m) and use shielded wires. In principle, ground
the shielded sheath of wires; if effects of external inductive noises are considerable, connection to
Chap. 3
terminal [11] may be effective. As shown in Figures 3.3-9 and 3.3-10, be sure to ground the single end of
the shield to enhance the shield effect.
- Use a twin-contact relay for low level signals if the relay is used in the control circuit. Do not connect the
relay's contact to terminal [11] or [M].

- When the inverter is connected to an external device outputting the analog signal, the external device
may malfunction due to electric noise generated by the inverter. If this happens, according to the
circumstances, connect a ferrite core (a toroidal core or equivalent) to the device outputting the analog
signal or connect a capacitor having the good cut-off characteristics for high frequency between control
signal wires as shown in Figures 3.3-9 and 3.3-10.
- Do not apply a voltage of +7.5 VDC or higher to terminal [C1]. Doing so could damage the internal
control circuit.
Figure 3.3-9 Connection of Shielded Wire Figure 3.3-10 Example of Electric Noise Reduction
[FWD] Run forward (1) When terminals [FWD] and [CM] are closed, the motor runs in the forward direction;
command when they are opened, the motor decelerates to a stop.
Digital input
(2) Input mode, i.e. SINK/SOURCE, is changeable by using the slide switch SW1. (Refer
to Section 3.3.3.9 "Setting up the slide switches."
[REV] Run reverse (1) When terminals [REV] and [CM] are closed, the motor runs in the reverse direction;
command when they are opened, the motor decelerates to a stop.
(2) Input mode, i.e. SINK/SOURCE, is changeable by using the slide switch SW1. (Refer
to Section 3.3.3.9 "Setting up the slide switches."
[X1] Digital input 1 (1) Various signals such as "Coast to a stop," "Enable external alarm trip," and "Select
multistep speed" can be assigned to these terminals by setting Function codes E01 to
E09. For details, refer to Chapter 4, Section 4.2 "Function Codes."
[X3] Digital input 3 (2) Input mode, i.e. SINK/SOURCE, is changeable by using the slide switch SW1. (Refer
[X4] Digital input 4 to Section 3.3.3.9 "Setting up the slide switches."
(3) Switches the logic value (1/0) for ON/OFF of the terminals [X1] to [X9]. If the logic
[X5] Digital input 5 value for ON of the terminal [X1] is 1 in the normal logic system, for example, OFF is
[X6] Digital input 6 1 in the negative logic system and vice versa.
(Digital input circuit specifications)
Item Min. Max.
Operating voltage ON level 0V 2V
(SINK) OFF level 22 V 27 V
Operating voltage ON level 22 V 27 V
(SOURCE) OFF level 0V 2V
Operating current at ON
− 4.5 mA
(Input voltage is at 0 V)
Allowable leakage current at
− 0.5 mA
OFF
Figure 3.3-11 Digital Input Circuit
3-35
cation
[EN1] Enable input (1) When [EN1]-[PS] or [EN2]-[PS] is opened (OFF), the inverter output transistor stops
its operation. (Safe Torque Off, STO)
[EN2]
To enable the STO function, remove the jumper bars.
(2) The input mode of terminals [EN1] and [EN2] is fixed at SOURCE. It cannot be
switched to SINK.
(3) When not using the Enable input function, short the circuit between [EN1]-[PS] and
[EN2]-[PS] with jumper bars (that is, keep the short bars connected).
(Terminal EN circuit specification)
<Control circuit>
Jumper bar PS +24 VDC Item Min. Max.

Operating voltage ON level 22 V 27 V
Photocoupler (SOURCE) OFF level 0V 2V
EN1
Operating current at ON
− 4.5 mA
6.6kW (Input voltage is at 0 V)
Allowable leakage current at
− 0.5 mA
OFF
EN2
6.6kW
CM
[PS] [EN] terminal Power terminal for terminals [EN1] and [EN2].
power This terminal outputs +24 VDC (Reference for terminal [CM]).
Digital input
[PLC] PLC signal (1) Connects to PLC output signal power supply.
power Rated voltage: +24 VDC (Allowable range: +22 to +27 VDC), Maximum 100 mA DC
(2) This terminal also supplies a power to the load connected to the transistor output
terminals. Refer to "Transistor output" described later in this table for more.
[CM] Digital input Two common terminals for digital input signals
common Electrically isolated from terminals [11], [M], and [CMY].
Using a relay contact to turn [FWD], [REV], or [X1] to [X9] ON or OFF
Figure 3.3-12 shows two examples of a circuit configuration that uses a relay contact to turn control signal
input [X1] to [X9], [FWD], or [REV] ON or OFF. In circuit (a), the slide switch is turned to SINK, whereas in
circuit (b) it is turned to SOURCE.
Note: To configure this kind of circuit, use a highly reliable relay.
(Recommended product: Fuji control relay Model HH54PW.)
<Control circuit> <Control circuit>
[PLC] SINK [PLC] SINK

+24 VDC
+24 VDC
SOURCE SOURCE
[X1] to [X9], [X1] to [X9],
[FWD], [REV] Photocoupler [FWD], [REV] Photocoupler
[CM] [CM]
(a) With the switch turned to SINK (b) With the switch turned to SOURCE
Figure 3.3-12 Circuit Configuration Using a Relay Contact
3-36
cation
Using a programmable logic controller (PLC) to turn [FWD], [REV], or [X1] to [X9] ON or OFF
Figure 3.3-13 shows two examples of a circuit configuration that uses a programmable logic controller
(PLC) to turn control signal input [X1] to [X9], [FWD], or [REV] ON or OFF. In circuit (a), the slide switch
Chap. 3
is turned to SINK, whereas in circuit (b) it is turned to SOURCE.
In circuit (a) below, short-circuiting or opening the transistor's open collector circuit in the PLC using an
external power supply turns ON or OFF control signal [FWD], [REV], or [X1] to [X9]. When using this type
of circuit, observe the following:

- Connect the + node of the external power supply (which should be isolated from the PLC's power) to
terminal [PLC] of the inverter.
- Do not connect terminal [CM] of the inverter to the common terminal of the PLC.
Digital input
Programmable Programmable
<Control circuit> logic controller <Control circuit>
logic controller
[PLC] SINK [PLC] SINK
+24 VDC
+24 VDC
SOURCE SOURCE
[X1] to [X9], [X1] to [X9],
[FWD], [REV] Photocoupler [FWD], [REV] Photocoupler
[CM] [CM]
(a) With the switch turned to SINK (b) With the switch turned to SOURCE
Figure 3.3-13 Circuit Configuration Using a PLC
For details about the slide switch setting, refer to Section 3.3.3.9 "Setting up the slide switches."
[Ao1] Analog (1) Output of monitor signals with analog voltage 0 to ±10 VDC.
output 1 Various signals such as "Detected speed," "Speed setting," and "Torque current
[Ao2] Analog command" can be assigned to these terminals by setting Function codes E67 to E71.
output 2 For details, refer to Chapter 4, Section 4.2 "Function Codes."
Analog output

[Ao3] Analog • Connectable impedance: Min. 3kΩ
output 3
• Gain adjustment range: 0.00 to ±100.00 times
Note: For these terminals, select devices having input terminals with a small capacitive
load. Large capacitive load may cause the output to oscillate.
[M] Analog Common for analog output signals ([Ao1], [Ao2] and [Ao3]).
common Electrically isolated from terminals [CM], [CMY] and [PGM].
3-37
cation
[Y1] Transistor (1) Various signals such as "Inverter running," "Speed valid," and "Speed agreement" can
output 1 be assigned to these terminals by setting Function codes E15 to E18. For details, refer
to Chapter 4, Section 4.2 "Function Codes."
[Y2] Transistor
output 2 (2) Switches the logic value (1/0) for ON/OFF of the terminals between [Y1] to [Y4], and
[CMY]. If the logic value for ON between [Y1] to [Y4] and [CMY] is 1 in the normal
[Y3] Transistor logic system, for example, OFF is 1 in the negative logic system and vice versa.
output 3
[Y4] Transistor (Transistor output circuit specification)
output 4
<Control circuit>
Photocoupler
Item Max.
Current
Operation ON level 2V
[Y1]
to voltage OFF level 27 V
[Y4]
Voltage
31 to 35 V Maximum current at ON 50 mA
[CMY]
Leakage current at OFF 0.1 mA
Figure 3.3-14 Transistor Output Circuit
- When a transistor output drives a control relay, connect a surge-absorbing diode

across relay’s coil terminals.
Transistor output
- When any equipment or device connected to the transistor output needs to be

supplied with DC power, feed the power (+24 VDC: allowable range: +22 to
+27 VDC, 100 mA max.) through the [PLC] terminal. Short-circuit between the
terminals [CMY] and [CM] in this case.
[CMY] Transistor Common terminal for transistor output signals
output Electrically isolated from terminals [CM], [11], [M], and [PGM].
common
Connecting programmable logic controller (PLC) to terminal [Y1], [Y2], [Y3] or [Y4]
Figure 3.3-15 shows two examples of circuit connection between the transistor output of the inverter’s
control circuit and a PLC. In example (a), the input circuit of the PLC serves as a SINK for the control
circuit output, whereas in example (b), it serves as a SOURCE for the output.
<Control circuit> Programmable <Control circuit> Programmable
logic controller
logic controller
Photocoupler Current C0
Photocoupler Current
+24 VDC
[Y1]
to SINK input [Y1]
[Y4] to
31 to [Y4]
35 V 31 to
+24 VDC
[CMY] 35 V
[CMY] SOURCE input
C0
(a) PLC serving as SINK (b) PLC serving as SOURCE

Figure 3.3-15 Connecting PLC to Control Circuit
3-38
cation
[Y5A/C] General purpose (1) A general-purpose relay contact output usable as well as the function of the
relay output transistor output terminal [Y1], [Y2], [Y3] or [Y4].
Contact rating: 250 VAC 0.3 A, cos φ = 0.3, 48 VDC, 0.5 A
Chap. 3
(2) Switching of the normal/negative logic output is applicable to the following two
contact output modes: "Active ON" (Terminals [Y5A] and [Y5C] are closed
Relay output
(excited) if the signal is active.) and "Active OFF" (Terminals [Y5A] and [Y5C]
are opened (non-excited) if the signal is active while they are normally closed.).

[30A/B/C] Alarm relay (1) Outputs a contact signal (SPDT) when a protective function has been activated to
output stop the motor.
(for any error) Contact rating: 250 VAC, 0.3A, cos φ = 0.3, 48 VDC, 0.5A
(2) Switching of the normal/negative logic output is applicable to the following two
contact output modes: "Active ON" (Terminals [30A] and [30C] are closed
(excited) if the signal is active.) and "Active OFF" (Terminals [30A] and [30C] are
opened (non-excited) if the signal is active while they are normally closed.).
RJ-45 RS-485 Connector to join the keypad to the inverter.
connector communications Power is supplied to the keypad from the inverter via a remote operation extension
for the port 1 cable.
keypad (Connector for
keypad)
[DX+]/ RS-485 Input/output terminals to transmit data through the RS-485 multipoint protocol
[DX-] communications between the inverter and a computer or other equipment such as a PLC.
Communication
port 2 (For setting of the terminating resistor, refer to Section 3.3.3.9 "Setting up the slide
(Terminals switches.")
on control PCB)
USB USB port A USB port connector (mini B) that connects an inverter to a computer. FRENIC-VG
connector (On the keypad) Loader (inverter support software*) running on the computer supports editing the
function codes, transferring them to the inverter, verifying them, test-running an
inverter and monitoring the inverter running status.
* FRENIC-VG Loader (free version) is available as an install from the CD-ROM (that
comes with the inverter as an accessory) or as a free download from our website at:
http://www.fujielectric.com/products/inverter/download/
The free version supports editing, transferring and verifying of function codes and
the traceback function.
[PA] Pulse generator The PG interface uses a complementary output mode.
2-phase signal [PA]: Input terminal for A phase of the pulse generator
[PB]
input [PB]: Input terminal B phase of the pulse generator
When 12V power supply is in use: H level ≥ 9V, L level ≤ 1.5V
When 15V power supply is in use: H level ≥ 12V, L level ≤ 1.5V
Input pulse frequency: 100 kHz or below, Duty: 50 ±10%
Wiring length (as a guide): 100 m or less
Speed detection
(Note) False detection may occur due to noise. Make the wiring length as short as
possible and take sufficient noise control measures.
[PGP] Pulse generator Power supply terminal for a pulse generator.
power supply Output: +12 VDC ±10% or +15 VDC ±10%
Maximum current: 270 mA
(For output voltage switch SW6, refer to Section 3.3.3.9 "Setting up the slide
switches.")
[PGM] Common Common terminal for pulse generator power/signal.
terminal Electrically isolated from terminals [11], [M] and [CMY].
Not electrically isolated from terminal [CM], but not equivalent voltage.
3-39
cation
[FA] Pulse generator (1) This outputs pulse generator signals with frequency divided to 1/n (where, n is
output programmable with Function code E29).
[FB]
(2) Switchable between open collector and complementary (equivalent to the voltage
on the [PGP] terminal) transistor outputs.
(For switching, refer to Section 3.3.3.9 "Setting up the slide switches.")
<Control circuit>
<Control circuit>
P
FA, FB PGP
15kΩ
FA, FB
CM
CM 10Ω
CM
CM
(a) Open collector output (b) Complementary output
Figure 3.3-16 Pulse Output Circuit
Items Min. Max. Remarks

Output voltage Output voltage - 2V
(Open collector output) Max. output current - 15 mA
Output voltage Hi level output PGP-3V -
(Complementary Low level output - 2V
output) Max. output current - 20 mA
[CM] Pulse generator Common terminal for [FA] and [FB].

output common
[TH1] NTC/PTC Monitors the motor temperature with NTC or PTC thermistor.
thermistor For a PTC thermistor, the motor overheat protection level can be specified with
Temperature
detection
connection Function code E32.

[THC] Common Common terminal for NTC and PTC thermistors.
Electrically isolated from terminals [CM], [PGM], and [CMY]
3-40
Wiring for control circuit terminals

For FRN75VG1-2, FRN90VG1-2 and FRN132VG1-4 to FRN630VG1-4
(1) As shown in Figure 3.3-17, route the control circuit wires along the left side panel to the outside of
the inverter.
(2) Secure those wires to the wiring support, using a cable tie (e.g., Insulok) with 3.8 mm or less in
width and 1.5 mm or less in thickness.
Chap. 3
Cable tie

Wiring support
Control circuit terminal block
Wiring for control

circuit terminals
Section A
Details of Section A
Left side panel
Wiring for control

circuit terminals
Figure 3.3-17 Wiring Route and Fixing Position for the Control Circuit Wires
- Route the wiring of the control circuit terminals as far from the wiring of the main circuit
as possible. Otherwise electric noise may cause malfunctions.
- Fix the control circuit wires with a cable tie inside the inverter to keep them away from the
live parts of the main circuit (such as the terminal block of the main circuit).
3-41
3.3.3.9 Setting up the slide switches
Before changing the switches or touching the control circuit terminal symbol plate, turn OFF the power and
wait at least five minutes for inverters of 22 kW or below, or at least ten minutes for those of 30 kW or
above. Make sure that the LED monitor and charging lamp are turned OFF. Further, make sure, using a
multimeter or a similar instrument, that the DC link bus voltage between the terminals P(+) and N(-) has
dropped to the safe level (+25 VDC or below).
An electric shock may result if this warning is not heeded as there may be some residual electric charge
in the DC bus capacitor even after the power has been turned OFF.
Switching the slide switches located on the control PCB allows you to customize the operation mode
of the analog output terminals, digital I/O terminals, and communications ports. The locations of those
switches are shown in Figure 3.3-18 "Location of the Slide Switches on the Control PCB."
To access the slide switches, remove the front cover so that you can see the control PCB. For inverters
with a capacity of 30 kW or above, open also the keypad enclosure.
For details on how to remove the front cover and how to open and close the keypad enclosure,
refer to Section 3.3.3.1 "Removing and mounting the front cover and the wiring guide."
Table 3.3-9 lists function of each slide switch.

Table 3.3-9 Function of Each Slide Switch
Switch Function
Switches the service mode of the digital input terminals between SINK and SOURCE.
SW1 ▪ This switches the input mode of digital input terminals [X1] to [X9], [FWD] and [REV] to be used as
the SINK or SOURCE mode.
▪ Factory default: SINK
SW2 Reserved for particular manufacturers.
Switches the input mode of the analog input terminal [Ai2] between voltage and current.
Input form SW3

SW3
Voltage input (Factory default) V position
Current input I position
Switches the terminating resistor of RS-485 communications port 2 on the terminal block ON and OFF.
(RS-485 communications port 2, for connecting the keypad)
SW4
▪ If the inverter is connected to the RS-485 communications network as a terminating device, turn SW3
to ON.
SW5 Reserved for particular manufacturers.
Switches the output voltage of terminal [PGP] between 12 V and 15 V.
Select the voltage level that matches the power voltage of the pulse generator to be connected.
SW6 Output voltage SW5

12 V 12 V
15 V (Factory default) 15 V
Switch the output mode of terminals [FA] and [FB] between open collector output and complementary
output.
SW7 SW7 SW8

Output form (Terminal [FA]) (Terminal [FB])
SW8
Open collector output (Factory default) 1 1
Complementary output 2 2
3-42
Figure 3.3-18 shows the location of slide switches on the control PCB for the input/output terminal
configuration.
Chap. 3
SW5

SW8 SW7
SW1
SW3
SW2 SW4
SW6
Figure 3.3-18 Location of the Slide Switches on the Control PCB
Switch Configuration and Factory Defaults
SW7
SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6
SW8
SINK
V OFF
Factory
default
15V 1
SOURCE 12V 2
I ON
---
To move a switch slider, use a tool with a narrow tip (e.g., a tip of tweezers). Be careful not to
touch other electronic parts, etc. If the slider is in an ambiguous position, the circuit is unclear
whether it is turned ON or OFF and the digital input remains in an undefined state. Be sure to
place the slider so that it contacts either side of the switch.
SW2 and SW5 are reserved for particular manufacturers. Do not access them.
3-43
3.3.4 Mounting and connecting a keypad
3.3.4.1 Parts required for connection
To mount a keypad on a place other than an inverter, the parts listed below are needed.
Parts name Model Remarks
Extension cable (Note 1) CB-5S, CB-3S and CB-1S 3 types available in length of 5 m, 3 m, and 1 m.
Fixing screw M3 × (Note 2) Two screws needed. (To be provided by the customer)
(Note 1) When using an off-the-shelf LAN cable, use a 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX straight type cable compliant with
US ANSI/TIA/EIA-568A Category 5. (20 m or less)
Recommended LAN cable
Manufacturer: Sanwa Supply Inc.
Model: KB-10T5-01K (1 m)
KB-STP-01K: (1 m) (Shielded LAN cable to make the inverter compliant with the EMC
Directive)
(Note 2) When mounting on a panel wall, use the screws with a length suitable for the wall thickness.
3.3.4.2 Mounting procedure

You can install and/or use the keypad in one of the following three ways:
Mounting it directly on the inverter (See Figure 3.3-19 (a), (b).)
Mounting it on the panel (See Figure 3.3-20.)
Using it remotely in your hand (See Figure 3.3-21.)
(a) FRN15VG1-2 (b) FRN37VG1-2

Figure 3.3-19 Mounting the Keypad Directly on the Inverter
Figure 3.3-20 Mounting the Keypad on the Panel Figure 3.3-21 Using the Keypad Remotely in
Your Hand
3-44
After completion of wiring, mount the keypad using the following procedure. Make sure that the
inverter power is shut down beforehand.
Removing and mounting the keypad from/onto the inverter
(1) Remove the keypad by pulling it toward you with the hook held down as directed by the arrows in
Figure 3.3-22.
Chap. 3
Figure 3.3-22 Removing a Keypad
(2) Put the keypad in the original slot while engaging its bottom latches with the holes (as shown
below), and push it onto the case of the inverter (arrow ) while holding it downward (against the
terminal block cover) (arrow ).
Figure 3.3-23 Mounting the Keypad
3-45
Mounting the keypad on the panel
(1) Cut the panel out for a single square area and perforate two screw holes on the panel wall as
shown in Figure 3.3-24.
Figure 3.3-24 Location of Screw Holes and Dimension of Panel Cutout
3-46
(2) Mount the keypad on the panel wall with 2 screws as shown below. (Recommended tightening
torque: 0.7 N•m)
Chap. 3
Figure 3.3-25 Mounting the Keypad
(3) Using a remote operation extension cable or a LAN cable, interconnect the keypad and the
inverter (insert one end of the cable into the RS-485 port with RJ-45 connector on the keypad and
the other end into that on the inverter) (See Figure 3.3-26).
Figure 3.3-26 Connecting the Keypad to the Inverter with Remote Operation Extension
Cable or an Off-the-shelf LAN Cable
• The RJ-45 connector on the inverter is exclusive to communication via a touch panel. With the RJ-45
connector, neither RS-485 communication nor connection with FRENIC-VG Loader is possible.
• Do not connect the inverter to a LAN port of a computer, Ethernet hub, or telephone line. Doing so may
damage the inverter or devices connected.
A fire or accident could occur.
Using the keypad remotely in hand

Follow step (3) of "Mounting the keypad on the panel" above.
3-47
3.3.5 USB connectivity
At the right side of the keypad mounting place, a USB port (mini B connector) is provided. To connect
a USB cable, open the USB port cover as shown below.
USB port cover
USB connector
Connector for
manufacturers
Figure 3.3-27 Connecting a USB Cable
Connecting the inverter to a PC with a USB cable enables remote control from FRENIC-VG Loader.
On the PC running FRENIC-VG Loader, it is possible to edit, check and manage the inverter's
function code data and monitor the real-time data and the running/alarm status of the inverter.
Connector located beneath the USB connector is provided for particular manufacturers. Do not access it.
3-48
3.4 Operation Using the Keypad

3.4.1 Names and functions of keypad components
The keypad allows you to start and stop the motor, view various data including maintenance
information and alarm information, configure function codes, monitor I/O signal status, copy data, and
Chap. 3
calculate the load factor.
7-segment LED monitor

LCD monitor Indicator indexes
RUN key
Program key (forward)
LED lamp
Shift key RUN key

(reverse)
Reset key STOP key
UP key HELP key Function/Data key
DOWN key
3-49
Table 3.4-1 Overview of Keypad Functions
Item Monitors and Keys Functions
Five-digit, 7-segment LED monitor which displays the following according to the
operation modes:
In Running mode: Running status information (e.g., detected speed, speed
command, and torque command)
In Programming mode: Same as above.
In Alarm mode: Alarm code, which identifies the cause of alarm when the
protective function is activated.
Monitors LCD monitor which displays the following according to the operation modes:
In Running mode: Running status information
In Programming mode: Menus, function codes and their data
In Alarm mode: Alarm information, which identifies the cause of an alarm
when the protective function is activated.
In Running mode, these indexes show the unit of the number displayed on the
Indicator indexes 7-segment LED monitor and the running status information on the LCD monitor. For
details, see the next page.
Switches the operation modes of the inverter.
Shifts the cursor to the right for entry of a numerical value.
Pressing this key after removing the cause of an alarm switches the inverter to
Running mode.
This key is used to reset settings or screen transition.
/ UP and DOWN keys, which are used to select the setting items or change function
code data.
Function/Data key, which switches the operation mode as follows:
In Running mode: Pressing this key switches the information to be displayed
concerning the status of the inverter (detected speed,
Programming speed command, torque command, etc.).
keys In Programming mode: Pressing this key displays the function code and
establishes the newly entered data.
In Alarm mode: Pressing this key displays the details of the problem
indicated by the alarm code that has come up on the LED
monitor.
This simultaneous keying toggles between the ordinary running mode and jogging
+ mode.
The current mode appears on the corresponding indicator.
This simultaneous keying toggles between the remote and local modes.
+
The current mode appears on the corresponding indicator.
This simultaneous keying jumps the cursor to the preceding/following function code
+ /
group (F to M) in selecting a function code.
Starts running the motor in the forward rotation.
Starts running the motor in the reverse rotation.

Operation
keys Stops the motor.
Switches the screen to the operation guide display prepared for each operation mode
or to the menu function guide display.
LED
Lights when the inverter is running.
lamp
3-50
Details of Indicator Indexes
Indicators for the unit of

number on the LED monitor
Chap. 3
Indicators for the running status
and run command source

Type Item Description (information, condition, status)
Hz Output frequency
A Output current
V Output voltage
% Torque command, calculated torque, and load factor
kW Input power and motor output
Unit of number
r/min Preset and actual (detected) motor speeds
on LED monitor
m/min Preset and actual line speeds
X10 Data exceeding 99,999
min Not used.
sec Not used.
VG5 Not used.
FWD Running in forward rotation
Running status REV Running in reverse rotation
STOP No output frequency
REM Remote mode (Run command and speed command sources selected by F02 and
F01)
(In the remote mode, a run command entered via the communications link takes
effect. This indicator goes off when H30 = 2 or 3.)
LOC Local mode (Run command and speed command sources from the keypad,
independent of the setting of F02 and F01.)
Run command
source COMM Via communications link
JOG Jogging mode
HAND Via keypad
This indicator lights also:
- in local mode or
- in remote mode and when H30 = 0 and F02 = 0
3-51
3.4.2 Overview of operation modes
The FRENIC-VG features the following three operation modes.
Table 3.4-2 Operation Modes
Mode Description
This mode allows you to specify run/stop commands in regular operation. It is also possible
Running Mode to monitor the running status in real time.
If a light alarm occurs, the l-al* appears on the LED monitor.
This mode allows you to configure function code data and check a variety of information
Programming Mode
relating to the inverter status and maintenance.
If an alarm condition arises, the inverter automatically enters the Alarm mode in which you
Alarm Mode can view the corresponding alarm code* and its related information on the LED and LCD
monitors.
* Alarm code that represents the cause(s) of the alarm(s) that has been triggered by the protective function. For details,
refer to Chapter 2, Section 2.5 "Protective Functions."
Figure 3.4-1 shows the status transition of the inverter between these three operation modes.
Power ON
Running mode
Programming mode
Run/Stop of motor Configuration of function
code data and monitor of
Monitor of running status maintenance/alarm info
or and various status
Detection of Release of
a light alarm a light alarm
Run/Stop of motor
Light alarm displayed
(Press this key if

an alarm has
occurred.)
Occurrence of Release of
an alarm an alarm
Alarm mode
Display of alarm status
Figure 3.4-1 Status Transition between Operation Modes
3-52
3.4.3 Running mode

When the inverter is turned ON, it automatically enters Running mode in which you can:
[1] Configure speed commands,
[2] Run or stop the motor,
[3] Monitor the running status,
Chap. 3
[4] Jog (inch) the motor, and
[5] Monitor light alarms.

3.4.3.1 Configuring the speed command
Using and keys (F01 = 0 (factory default))
(1) Set function code F01 at "0". This cannot be done when the keypad is in Programming mode or
Alarm mode. To enable speed setting using the and keys, first switch the keypad to Running
mode.
(2) Press the or key. The lowest digit on the LED monitor blinks. The 7-segment LED monitor
displays the speed command and the LCD monitor displays the related information including the
operation guide, as shown below.
(3) Press the or key again to change the frequency command. The new setting can be saved into
the inverter’s internal memory.
When the speed command source is other than digital setting, the LCD monitor displays the
following.
Means that the keypad is

not enabled.
Means that the setting on the

analog terminal [12] is effective.
Table 3.4-3 lists the available command sources and their symbols.
Table 3.4-3 Available Command Sources
Symbol Command source Symbol Command source Symbol Command source

HAND Keypad DIB DIB card PID-AI PID analog input command Ai
Voltage input Terminal command
12 ± on terminal [12] MULTI SS8, SS4, SS2, SS1 PID-HAND PID keypad command
(with polarity) ("Select multistep speed")
Terminal command LE
Voltage input ("Enable communications
12 on terminal [12] LINK link") JOG Jogging speed
(without polarity) H30: Communications Link
Function (Link operation)
UPAC SW1
UP/DOWN control (Speed command 1): Inverter support software
U/D1 UPAC LOADER
(Default = 0) Enable "FRENIC-VG Loader"
(Available soon)
Terminal command SYN
Voltage input
UP/DOWN control ("Synchronous operation
U/D2 PTI AI-V on analog input terminal
(Default = Previous value) command (pulse train)"):
N-REFV
Enable
UP/DOWN control Orientation
U/D3 ORT LOCAL Keypad in local mode
(Default = CRP1, 2) (Available soon)
Current input
Terminal command LOCK
DIA DIA card LOCK AI-C on analog input terminal
("Servo-lock command")
N-REFC
3-53
3.4.3.2 Running or stopping the motor
By factory default, pressing the key starts running the motor in the forward direction and pressing
the key, in the reverse direction. Pressing the key decelerates the motor to stop. The keypad
operation is possible only in Running and Programming modes.
Figure 3.4-2 Rotation Direction of Motor
Note) The rotation direction of IEC-compliant motors is opposite to the one shown above.
Displaying the running status on the LCD monitor

(1) When function code F57 (LCD monitor, Item selection) = 0
The LCD monitor displays the current running status, the run command, and the date & time
(calendar clock)*. (The upper indicators show the unit of values shown on the LED monitor, and
the lower indicators, the running status and run command source.)
* If no backup battery is loaded (option for inverters of 22 kW or below), turning the power OFF resets the
calendar clock.
Running status
Run command
Date
Time
Figure 3.4-3 Display of Running Status
The running status and the run command are displayed as listed below.
Table 3.4-4 Running Status and Run Commands
Running mode display items Meaning

RUN: The inverter is running.
Running status STOP: No run command is given and the inverter is stopped.
JOG: The inverter is jogging.
FWD: Run forward command entered.
Run commands REV: Run reverse command entered.
Blank: The inverter is stopped.
3-54
(2) When function code F57 (LCD monitor, Item selection) = 1

The LCD monitor displays the motor speed, output current, and torque command in a bar chart.
(The upper indicators show the unit of the value shown on the LED monitor, and the lower
indicators, the running status and run command source.)
Chap. 3
Motor speed
Bar chart
Output current
Torque command

The full scale (maximum value) for each parameter is as follows:
Motor speed: Maximum frequency
Output current: 200% of motor rating
Torque command: 200% of motor rating
Figure 3.4-4 Bar Chart
3-55
3.4.3.3 Monitoring the running status on the LED monitor
The items listed below can be monitored on the 7-segment LED monitor. Immediately after the power
is turned ON, the monitor item specified by function code F55 is displayed.
Pressing the key in Running mode switches between monitor items in the sequence shown in Table
3.4-5.
Table 3.4-5 Monitor Items
Page LED monitor Digital setting mode
Unit Resolution
# Running Stopped Digital speed setting PID command
0 MOTOR SPEED 1 *1 REFERENCE SPEED 4 *1 r/min 0 to 9999:
resolution 1
1 REFERENCE SPEED 4 *1 r/min 10000 to 30000:
10
0.1 to 400.0:
2 OUTPUT FREQUENCY Hz
resolution 0.1
3 REFERENCE TORQUE CURRENT % 1%
4 REFERENCE MOTOR TORQUE % 1%
5 CAL MOTOR TORQUE *2 % 1%
Speed command 0.01 to 99.99:
from keypad F60 = 0 (kW)
6 MOTOR OUTPUT POWER (kW) 0.01
F60 = 1 (HP)
100.0 to 999.9:
7 OUTPUT CURRENT A 0.1
1000 or above : 1
8 OUTPUT VOLTAGE V 1V
9 DC LINK VOLTAGE V 1V
10 REFERENCE MAGNETIC FLUX % 1%
11 CAL MAGNETIC FLUX % 1%
12 MOTOR TEMPERATURE *3 - 1
Load speed command
13 LOAD SHAFT SPEED *4 LOAD SHAFT SPEED *4 r/min 1
from keypad
14 LINE SPEED *4 LINE SPEED *4 m/min 1
15 Ai (12) ADJUSTMENT PID command % 0.1%
16 Ai (Ai1) ADJUSTMENT from keypad % 0.1%
17 Ai (Ai2) ADJUSTMENT % 0.1%
18 Ai (Ai3) ADJUSTMENT *5 % 0.1%
19 Ai (Ai4) ADJUSTMENT *5 % 0.1%
20 PID REFERENCE *6 0.00 to ±9.99:
21 PID FEEDBACK *6 0.01
-
10.0 to ±99.9: 0.1
22 PID OUTPUT *6
100 to ±999: 1
23 OPTION MONITOR 1 (hex.) *7 in hexadecimal 1
24 OPTION MONITOR 2 (hex.) *7 in hexadecimal 1
Speed command
25 OPTION MONITOR 3 (dec.) *7 from keypad in decimal 1, x 10
26 OPTION MONITOR 4 (dec.) *7 in decimal 1, x 10
29 - - -
30 LOAD FACTOR *1 % 1%
0.01 to 99.99:
0.01
F60 = 0 (kW)
31 INPUT POWER 100.0 to 999.9:
F60 = 1 (HP) 0.1
1000 or above : 1
WATT-HOUR
32 kWh 0.1
(Display value = Input watt-hour (kWh)/100)
*1 Shown as an absolute value.
*2 Under vector control, the inverter outputs the torque value to which the compensation for motor loss (iron loss) is added.
*3 "---" appears when no NTC thermistor is used.
*4 Limited to a maximum of 60,000 in display.
*5 Not shown when no AIO option is mounted.
*6 Not shown when the PID control is disabled.
*7 Shown or not shown, depending upon application. Option monitors 5 and 6 have a sign; option monitors 3 and 4 have not.
3-56
The LCD monitor (given below) shows information related to the item shown on the LED monitor.
The monitor item on the LED monitor can be switched by pressing the key.
Monitor page #
Item to be monitored
Chap. 3
Operation guide

Figure 3.4-5 LCD Monitor Sample Detailed for the LED Monitor Item
3.4.3.4 Jogging (inching) the motor

To start jogging operation, perform the following procedure.
(1) Make the inverter ready to jog with the steps below.
1) Switch the inverter to Running mode.
2) Press the " + keys" simultaneously. The lower indicator above the "JOG" index comes
ON.
(2) Jog the motor.
While the or key is held down, the motor continues jogging. Releasing the key decelerates
the motor to stop.
(3) Make the inverter exit from the ready-to-jog state and return to the normal operation state.
Press the " + keys" simultaneously. The lower indicator above the "JOG" index goes OFF.
Running status
Run forward command
Date
Time
Figure 3.4-6 Display of Jogging Mode
3-57
3.4.3.5 Monitoring light alarms
The inverter identifies abnormal states in two categories--Heavy alarm and Light alarm. If the former
occurs, the inverter immediately trips; if the latter occurs, the inverter shows the l-al on the LED
monitor and blinks the "L-ALARM" indication in the operation guide area on the LCD monitor but it
continues to run without tripping.
Which abnormal states are categorized as a light alarm ("Light alarm" object) should be defined with
function codes H106 to H111 beforehand.
Assigning the L-ALM signal to any one of the general-purpose, digital output terminals with any of
function codes E15 to E27 (data = 57) enables the inverter to output the L-ALM signal on that terminal
upon occurrence of a light alarm.
Means that a light alarm

has occurred.
Rotation direction
Running status
Indicator indexes
Date
Means that a light
alarm has occurred.
Figure 3.4-7 Display of Light Alarm
For details of the light alarm factors, refer to Chapter 13 "TROUBLESHOOTING."
How to check a light alarm factor

If a light alarm occurs, l-al appears on the LED monitor. To check the current light alarm factor,
switch to Programming mode by pressing the key and select LALM1 on Menu #5 "Maintenance
Information." For details of the menu transition of the maintenance information, refer to Section
3.4.4.6 "Reading maintenance information."
It is also possible to check the factors of the last three light alarms by selecting LALM2 (last) to
LALM4 (3rd last).
3-58
How to remove the current light alarm

After checking the current light alarm, to switch the LED monitor from the l-al indication back to
the running status display, press the key in Running mode. To reset a light alarm via the
communications link, use an alarm reset signal.
If the light alarm factor has been removed, the "L-ALARM" disappears and the L-ALM output signal
turns OFF. If not (e.g. DC fan lock), the l-al on the LED monitor disappears so that normal
monitoring becomes available, but the "L-ALARM" remains displayed on the LCD monitor (as shown
Chap. 3
below) and the L-ALM output signal remains ON.

The l-al has disappeared
and the normal LED monitor
is displayed.
Rotation direction
Running status
Indicator indexes
Date
The operation guide
remains displayed.
3-59
3.4.4 Programming mode
Programming mode allows you to set and check function code data and monitor maintenance
information and input/output (I/O) signal status. The functions can be easily selected with a
menu-driven system. Table 3.4-6 lists menus available in Programming mode.
Table 3.4-6 Menus Available in Programming Mode
Refer to
Menu # Menu Used to:
Section:
Selecting language Change the display language on the LCD monitor.
0 3.4.4.1
(LANGUAGE)
Configuring function codes Display and change the data of the function code selected.
1 3.4.4.2
(DATA SET)
Display a function code and its data on the same screen. Also
Checking function code data
2 this menu is used to change the function code data or check 3.4.4.3
(DATA CHECK)
whether the data has been changed from the factory default.
Monitoring the running status Display the running information required for maintenance or
3 3.4.4.4
(OPR MNTR) test running.
Checking I/O signal status Display external interface information.
4 3.4.4.5
(I/O CHECK)
Reading maintenance information Display maintenance information including cumulative run
5 3.4.4.6
(MAINTENANCE) time.
Measuring load factor Measure the maximum output current, average output current,
6 3.4.4.7
(LOAD FCTR) and average braking power.
Display recent four alarm codes. Also this menu is used to view
Reading alarm information
7 the information on the running status at the time the alarm 3.4.4.8
(ALM INF)
occurred.
Viewing causes of alarm Display the cause of the alarm.
8 3.4.4.9
(ALM CAUSE)
Reading communications (Available soon.)
9 information -
(COMM INFO)
Copying data Read or write function code data, as well as verifying it.
10 3.4.4.10
(DATA COPY)
Checking changed function codes Display only the function code data that has been changed from
11 3.4.4.11
(CHANGES) the factory default.
Setting the calendar clock Display/hide the date and time and adjust the display format and
12 3.4.4.12
(DATE/TIME) data.
Compatibility with conventional Not supported.
13 inverter models -
(FORMER INV)
Limiting function codes to be • Select whether to display all function codes or limited ones
14 displayed (selected in Loader). 3.4.4.13
(LIMITED FC) • Cancel the directory structure of function codes.
3-60
The screen transition and hierarchy structure in Running and Programming modes are shown below.
Programming mode
Digital speed setting
Chap. 3
＜ＤＩＧ．ＳＥＴ　ＳＰ＞
　　　　　　　　ＨＡＮＤ
０～１８００
Ｆ／Ｄ　ＳＴＯＲＥ
０．ＬＡＮＧＵＡＧＥ Refer to Section 3.4.4.1 for details.

／ or
１．ＤＡＴＡ　ＳＥＴ Refer to Section 3.4.4.2 for details.

Running mode
(Initial screen at startup)
When F57 = 0
Select menu
ＳＴＯＰ０．ＬＡＮＧＵＡＧＥ
２．ＤＡＴＡ　ＣＨＥＣＫ Refer to Section 3.4.4.3 for details.
２０１０／０１／１５
１６：２３：４５１．ＤＡＴＡ　ＳＥＴ
２．ＤＡＴＡ　ＣＨＥＣＫ
３．ＯＰＲ　ＭＮＴＲ
When F57 = 1 ∧∨→ＭＥＮＵ　ＳＨＩＦＴ３．ＯＰＲ　ＭＮＴＲ Refer to Section 3.4.4.4 for details.
ｒ
／ to select a menu
Ａ
％
ＳＰＤ／Ｉｏｕｔ／ＴＲＱ４．Ｉ／Ｏ　ＣＨＥＣＫ Refer to Section 3.4.4.5 for details.
Leave for 5 sec.

or
５．ＭＡＩＮＴＥＮＡＮＣ Refer to Section 3.4.4.6 for details.
Select LED monitor

６．ＬＯＡＤ　ＦＣＴＲ Refer to Section 3.4.4.7 for details.
＜ＬＥＤ　ＭＮＴＲ＞　　０
ＭＯＴＯＲ　ＳＰＥＥＤ
１６：２３：４５
７．ＡＬＭ　ＩＮＦ Refer to Section 3.4.4.8 for details.
８．ＡＬＭ　ＣＡＵＳＥ Refer to Section 3.4.4.9 for details.
０　ＭＯＴＯＲ　ＳＰＥＥＤ
／
to switch １　ＲＥＦＥＲＥＮＣＥ　ＳＰＥＥＤ
screens １０．ＤＡＴＡ　ＣＯＰＹ Refer to Section 3.4.4.10 for details.
２　ＯＵＴＰＵＴ　ＦＲＥＱ．（ＰＲＩＭＡＲＹ　Ｈｚ．）
３　ＭＯＴＯＲ　ＴＯＲＱＵＥ　ＣＵＲＲＥＮＴ
４　ＲＥＦＥＲＥＮＣＥ　ＭＯＴＯＲ　ＴＯＲＱＵＥ
１１．ＣＨＡＮＧＥＳ Refer to Section 3.4.4.11 for details.
５　ＣＡＬ　ＭＯＴＯＲ　ＴＯＲＱＵＥ
６　ＭＯＴＯＲ　ＯＵＴＰＵＴ　ＰＯＷＥＲ（ｋＷ）
７　ＯＵＴＰＵＴ　ＣＵＲＲＥＮＴ　Ｉ
１２．ＤＡＴＥ／ＴＩＭＥ Refer to Section 3.4.4.12 for details.
８　ＯＵＴＰＵＴ　ＶＯＬＴＡＧＥ　Ｖ
９　ＤＣ　ＬＩＮＫ　ＶＯＬＴＡＧＥ　Ｖ
１０　ＲＥＦＥＲＥＮＣＥ　ＭＡＧＮＥＴＩＣ　ＦＬＵＸ
１４．ＬＩＭＩＴＥＤ　ＦＣ Refer to Section 3.4.4.13 for details.
１１　ＣＡＬ　ＭＡＧＮＥＴＩＣ　ＦＬＵＸ
１２　ＭＯＴＯＲ　ＴＥＭＰＥＲＡＴＵＲＥ
１３　ＬＯＡＤ　ＳＨＡＦＴ　ＳＰＥＥＤ
１４　ＬＩＮＥ　ＳＰＥＥＤ
１５　Ａｉ（１２）ＡＤＪＵＳＴＭＥＮＴ
１６　Ａｉ（Ａｉ１）ＡＤＪＵＳＴＭＥＮＴ
１７　Ａｉ（Ａｉ２）ＡＤＪＵＳＴＭＥＮＴ
１８　Ａｉ（Ａｉ３）ＡＤＪＵＳＴＭＥＮＴ
１９　Ａｉ（Ａｉ４）ＡＤＪＵＳＴＭＥＮＴ
２０　ＰＩＤ　ＲＥＦＥＲＥＮＣＥ
２１　ＰＩＤ　ＦＥＥＤＢＡＣＫ
２２　ＰＩＤ　ＯＵＴＰＵＴ
２３　ＯＰＴＩＯＮ　ＭＯＮＩＴＯＲ　１
２４　ＯＰＴＩＯＮ　ＭＯＮＩＴＯＲ　２
２５　ＯＰＴＩＯＮ　ＭＯＮＩＴＯＲ　３
２６　ＯＰＴＩＯＮ　ＭＯＮＩＴＯＲ　４
２７　ＯＰＴＩＯＮ　ＭＯＮＩＴＯＲ　５
２８　ＯＰＴＩＯＮ　ＭＯＮＩＴＯＲ　６
３０　ＬＯＡＤ　ＦＡＣＴＯＲ
３１　ＩＮＰＵＴ　ＰＯＷＥＲ　
３２　ＷＡＴＴ－ＨＯＵＲ
* If the screen system is password-protected, no menu can be selected until you enter the password.
3-61
Menu screen
０．ＬＡＮＧＵＡＧＥ Pressing the key in Running mode calls up the menu
１．ＤＡＴＡＳＥＴ screen.
２．ＤＡＴＡＣＨＥＣＫ Select the target menu by moving the cursor (flashing
３．ＯＰＲＭＮＴＲ rectangle) with / key.
∧∨ÆＭＥＮＵＳＨＩＦＴ▼
Configuring function code data

Figure 3.4-8 shows the LCD screen transition for Menu #0 "DATA SET."
A hierarchy exists among those screens that are shifted in the order of "Menu screen," "List of function
code groups," and "List of function codes."
On the modification screen of the target function code, you can modify or check its data.
Menu screen List of function code groups List of function codes
Function code data

Figure 3.4-8 Configuration of Screens for "DATA SET" modification screens
Screen samples for changing function code data

The "list of function codes" shows function codes, their names, and operation guides.
Function Function code names
Ｆ００ＰＲＯＴＥＣＴ The function code currently selected blinks, indicating that the cursor has
Ｆ０１ＳＰＤＣＭＤ１ moved to this position (F03 blinks in this example).
Ｆ０２ＯＰＲＭＥＴＨＯＤ The arrow at the right end shows that the function code has a directory
Ｆ０３ＭＡＸＳＰＥＥＤÆ structure.
∧∨ÆＦＮＣＯＤＥ◆ Operation guide, scrolling horizontally to display the function of each key.
Operation guides
T: This page continues to the next page.
S: This page is continued from the previous page.
¡: This page is continued from the previous page and continues to the next page.
3-62
The "function code data modification screen" shows the function code, its name, its data (before and
after change), allowable entry range, and operation guides.
<Before change>
Ｆ０３ＭＡＸＳＰＥＥＤ Function code # and name
: Function code that has been changed from factory default
１５００ｒ／ｍ Data
５０～３００００ Allowable entry range
Chap. 3
∧∨ÆＤＡＴＡＡＤＪＵＳＴ Operation guide
<Changing data>

Ｆ０３ＭＡＸＳＰＥＥＤ
１５００ Data before change
１２００ｒ／ｍ Data being changed
５０～３００００
∧∨ÆＤＡＴＡＡＤＪＵＳＴ
Figure 3.4-9 Screen Samples for Changing Function Code Data
Simultaneous keying of " + keys" switches the lower portion of the screen from the allowable
entry range to the factory default. The same simultaneous keying switches it back to the allowable
entry range.
A function code consists of an alphabet denoting a function code group and numerals.
Table 3.4-7 Function Code List
Function Code Group Function Description

F codes Fundamental
Functions to be used for basic motor running
(Fundamental functions) functions
Functions concerning the selection of operation of the control
E codes
Terminal functions circuit terminals; Functions concerning the display on the LED
(Extension terminal functions)
monitor
C codes
(Control functions of Control functions Functions associated with speed settings
frequency)
P codes Functions for configuring characteristics parameters (such as
Motor 1 parameters
(Motor 1 parameters) capacity) of the 1st motor
H codes Highly added-value functions; Functions for sophisticated
High-level functions
(High performance functions) control
A codes Motor 2 parameters Functions for configuring characteristics parameters (such as
(Motor 2, 3 parameters) Motor 3 parameters capacity) of the 2nd or 3rd motor
Functions concerning optional features
o codes
Optional functions (The o codes are displayed only when the corresponding option
(Option functions)
is mounted on the inverter.)
L codes Vertical carrier
Functions to be used for vertical carrier machines
(Lift functions) machine functions
U codes User-defined
Functions to be used for UPAC option cards, etc.
(User functions) functions
SF code
Safety functions Functions concerning the safety card OPC-VG1-SAFE
(Safety functions)
S codes
Command data These function codes can be modified via the integrated RS-485
(Command functions)
interface or filedbus options (e.g., T-Link, SX-bus).
M codes The S fields are write-only and the M fields, read-only.
Monitor data
(Monitor functions)
3-63
Function codes requiring simultaneous keying
To modify the data for function code F00 (Data protection), H01 (Auto-tuning), H02 (Full save
function), H03 (Data initialization), H142 (Mock alarm), L01 (Password data 1) or L02 (Password
data 2), simultaneous keying of " + keys" or " + keys" is required.
Changing, validating, and saving function code data when the invert is running
Some function codes can be modified while the inverter is running, whereas others cannot. Further,
depending on the function code, modifications may or may not become effective immediately. For
details, refer to the "Change when running" column in Chapter 4, Section 4.2.3.
Keypad directory structure

The keypad has a directory structure that includes the related function codes in a directory to make it
easy to select a target function code from many function codes.
For example, function codes C01 to C04 are all related with the mechanical resonance point of the load
and treated as the same function so that C02 to C04 are not located in the parent directory. At the right
of C01, "Æ" appears indicating that C01 has a child directory. To access the child directory, move the
cursor to that function code using the and keys and then press the or key.
An example of selecting a function code with a child directory

Ｃ０１ＪＵＭＰＮ１ Æ or Ｃ０１ＪＵＭＰＮ１Ｃ０１ＪＵＭＰＮ１
Ｃ０５ＭＵＬＴＩＮ－１Æ Ｃ０２ＭＵＬＴＩＮ－２
Ｃ２５ＳＰＤＣＭＤ２Ｃ０３ＭＵＬＴＩＮ－３０ｒ／ｍ
Ｃ２９ＪＯＧＮＣ０４ＪＵＭＰＨＹＳＴＲ０～３００００
∧∨ÆＦＮＣＯＤＥ ◆ ∧∨ÆＦＮＣＯＤＥ ∧∨ÆＤＡＴＡＡＤＪＵＳＴ
Ｃ０１ＪＵＭＰＮ１ Æ Ｃ０１ＪＵＭＰＮ１
Ｃ０５ＭＵＬＴＩＮ－１Æ Ｃ０２ＭＵＬＴＩＮ－２
Ｃ２５ＳＰＤＣＭＤ２Ｃ０３ＭＵＬＴＩＮ－３ Save
Ｃ２９ＪＯＧＮＣ０４ＪＵＭＰＨＹＳＴＲ
∧∨ÆＦＮＣＯＤＥ ◆ ∧∨ÆＦＮＣＯＤＥ
Press three times. Press three times.
Ｃ０５ＭＵＬＴＩＮ－１Æ Ｃ０１ＪＵＭＰＮ１

Ｃ２５ＳＰＤＣＭＤ２Ｃ０２ＭＵＬＴＩＮ－２ Rotated back to C01.
Ｃ２９ＪＯＧＮＣ０３ＭＵＬＴＩＮ－３
Ｃ３０ＡＳＲ－ＪＯＧ－ＰÆ Ｃ０４ＪＵＭＰＨＹＳＴＲ
∧∨ÆＦＮＣＯＤＥ ◆ ∧∨ÆＦＮＣＯＤＥ
3-64
Jumping by function code group

To call up a function code in a different group (E to M), press the and keys or and keys
simultaneously to jump to the previous or next function code group.
In the case of a function code group having 100 or more function codes, this function jumps function
codes in units of 100. (For example, F00 ⇒ E01 ⇒ E101 ⇒ • • •)
Chap. 3
Ｆ００ＰＲＯＴＥＣＴＦ００ＰＲＯＴＥＣＴ Press Ｆ０２ＯＰＲＭＥＴＨＯＤ
Ｆ０１ＳＰＤＣＭＤ１Ｆ０１ＳＰＤＣＭＤ１ four times. Ｆ０３ＭＡＸＳＰＥＥＤÆ
Ｆ０２ＯＰＲＭＥＴＨＯＤＦ０２ＯＰＲＭＥＴＨＯＤＦ０７ＡＣＣＴＩＭＥ１
Ｆ０３ＭＡＸＳＰＥＥＤÆ Ｆ０３ＭＡＸＳＰＥＥＤÆ Ｆ０８ＤＥＣＴＩＭＥ１
∧∨ÆＦＮＣＯＤＥ ◆ ∧∨ÆＦＮＣＯＤＥ ◆ ∧∨ÆＦＮＣＯＤＥ ◆

+
Jump to the
next group.
Ｅ１１８Ｆ－ＳＴＰＴＭＰ + Ｅ９０ＬＮＫＦＮＣ１ Æ + Ｆ８５ＴＲＱＦＩＬＴＥＲＦ
ＣＯ１ＪＵＭＰＮ１ Æ Ｅ１０１Ａｉ１ＯＦＳＥＴÆ Ｅ０１Ｘ１ＦＵＮＣ Æ
Ｃ０５ＭＵＬＴＩＮ－１Æ Ｅ１０５Ａｉ１ＢＬＩＮＤÆ Ｅ１４ＸＮＯＲＭＡＬ
Ｃ２５ＳＰＤＣＭＤ２
Jump to Ｅ１０９ＰＬＳＮＵＭＥÆ
Jump to Ｅ１５Ｙ１ＦＵＮＣ Æ
∧∨ÆＦＮＣＯＤＥ ◆
the next ∧∨ÆＦＮＣＯＤＥ ◆
the next ∧∨ÆＦＮＣＯＤＥ ◆
group. group.
Press three times.
Ｃ０１ＪＵＭＰＮ１Æ + Ｅ１１８Ｆ－ＳＴＰＴＭＰ + Ｅ９０ＬＮＫＦＮＣ１ Æ

Ｃ０５ＭＵＬＴＩＮ－１Æ Ｃ０１ＪＵＭＰＮ１ Æ Ｅ１０１Ａｉ１ＯＦＳＥＴÆ
Ｃ２５ＳＰＤＣＭＤ２Ｃ０５ＭＵＬＴＩＮ－１Æ Ｅ１０５Ａｉ１ＢＬＩＮＤÆ
Jump back Jump back
Ｃ２９ＪＯＧＮＣ２５ＳＰＤＣＭＤ２Ｅ１０９ＰＬＳＮＵＭＥÆ
to the to the
∧∨ÆＦＮＣＯＤＥ ◆ ∧∨ÆＦＮＣＯＤＥ ◆ ∧∨ÆＦＮＣＯＤＥ ◆
previous previous
group. Jump back to the
+
previous group.
Ｍ２２１ＭＯＮＩＴＲ２２Æ + Ｆ８５ＴＲＱＦＩＬＴＥＲＦ
Ｆ００ＰＲＯＴＥＣＴＥ０１Æ
Ｆ０１ＳＰＤＣＭＤ１Ｅ１４ＸＮＯＲＭＡＬ
Ｆ０２ＯＰＲＭＥＴＨＯＤ Jump back Ｅ１５Ｙ１ＦＵＮＣ Æ
∧∨ÆＦＮＣＯＤＥ ◆ to the ∧∨ÆＦＮＣＯＤＥ ◆
previous
group.
3-65
3.4.4.1 Selecting language -- Menu #0 "LANGUAGE"
Menu #0 "LANGUAGE" in Programming mode is used to select the display language from a choice
of four languages (English, Japanese, Chinese and Korean) on the LCD monitor.
０．ＬＡＮＧＵＡＧＥ To display this menu screen, press the key in Running

１．ＤＡＴＡＳＥＴ
２．ＤＡＴＡＣＨＥＣＫ
mode to switch to Programming mode.
３．ＯＰＲＭＮＴＲ
Move the cursor at the left of the screen to "0. LANGUAGE"
∧∨ÆＭＥＮＵＳＨＩＦＴ▼
using the and keys. Then press the key to switch to
the language selection screen.
＜ＬＡＮＧＵＡＧＥ＞
ÆＪＡＰＡＮＥＳＥ ← Japanese
ＥＮＧＬＩＳＨ ← English
ＣＨＩＮＥＳＥ ← Chinese
∧∨ÆＳＨＩＦＴ ▼
/ Move the pointer Æ to the desired language using the and

keys.
ＪＡＰＡＮＥＳＥ ← Japanese
ÆＥＮＧＬＩＳＨ ← English
ＣＨＩＮＥＳＥ ← Chinese
Press key to establish the selected language.
ＪＡＰＡＮＥＳＥ
ÆＥＮＧＬＩＳＨ
ＣＨＩＮＥＳＥ
After a second, the screen automatically switches back to the
submenu.
ＪＡＰＡＮＥＳＥ
ÆＥＮＧＬＩＳＨ
ＣＨＩＮＥＳＥ
3-66
3.4.4.2 Configuring function codes -- Menu #1 "DATA SET"

Menu #1 "DATA SET" in Programming mode is used to configure function codes.
This section gives a description of the basic key operation, following the example of the data changing
flow shown below. This example shows how to change F03 data (M1 maximum speed) from 1500
r/min to 1200 r/min.
Chap. 3
０．ＬＡＮＧＵＡＧＥ To display this menu screen, press the key in Running mode
to switch to Programming mode. Move the cursor (flashing
３．ＯＰＲＭＮＴＲ rectangle) at the left of the screen to "1. DATA SET" using the

∧∨ÆＭＥＮＵＳＨＩＦＴ▼ and keys. Then press the key to switch to the function
code configuration screen.
Ｆ．ＦＵＮＤＡＭＥＮＴＡＬ Function code groups (F, E, C, P…) appear.
Ｅ．ＴＥＲＭＩＮＡＬ
Ｃ．ＦＲＱＣＯＮＴＲＯＬ
Move the cursor to the desired function code group using the
Ｐ．ＭＯＴＯＲ１ and keys.
∧∨ÆＳＨＩＦＴ ◆
Ｆ００ＰＲＯＴＥＣＴ
Ｆ０１ＮＳＥＴＴＩＮＧ１
Ｆ０２ＯＰＲＭＥＴＨＯＤ
Ｆ０３ＭＡＸＳＰＥＥＤÆ
∧∨ÆＦＮＣＯＤＥ◆
Move the cursor to the desired function code using the and
keys.
Ｆ００ＰＲＯＴＥＣＴ
Ｆ０１ＮＳＥＴＴＩＮＧ１
At the right of F03, "Æ" appears indicating that F03 has a child
Ｆ０２ＯＰＲＭＥＴＨＯＤ directory. To access the child directory, move the cursor to that
Ｆ０３ＭＡＸＳＰＥＥＤÆ function code using the and keys and then press the or
key.
Press the key to move to the lower directory.
Ｆ０４Ｍ１―Ｎｒ
Ｆ０５Ｍ１―Ｖｒ
∧∨ÆＦＮＣＯＤＥ
Press the key to establish the desired function code.
１５００ｒ／ｍ
５０～３００００
Press the key to move the cursor from the units place to the
ten-thousands place.
１５００ｒ／ｍ
５０～３００００
Press two times. Press the key to move the cursor from the ten-thousands
place to the hundreds place.
3-67
Press two
ti
１５００ｒ／ｍ
５０～３００００
/ Change the function code data using the and keys.

(In this example, change from 1500 r/min to 1200 r/min.)
１５００
１２００ｒ／ｍ
５０～３００００
Press the key to establish the function code data.
＊１２００ｒ／ｍ
ＳＴＯＲＩＮＧ
3-68
3.4.4.3 Checking function code data -- Menu #2 "DATA CHECK"

Menu #2 "DATA CHECK" in Programming mode is used to check function codes (together with their
data) that have been changed. The function codes whose data have been changed from factory defaults
are marked with .
This section gives a description of the basic key operation, following the example of the data checking
flow shown below. This example shows how to change F03 data (M1 maximum speed) from 1500
Chap. 3
r/min to 1200 r/min.
In any of the following cases, change of function code data will be saved only into the volatile memory
(RAM) and not be saved into the non-volatile memory. Such data is displayed with white letters on

black background.
- After tuning, the full save function is not performed (H02 ≠ 1).
- After changing function code data via the communications link, the full save function is not
specified (H02 ≠ 1).
- When terminal command LU-CCL ("Cancel undervoltage alarm") on any X terminal is enabled,
function code data is changed.
０．ＬＡＮＧＵＡＧＥ To display this menu screen, press the key in Running mode
to switch to Programming mode. Move the cursor (flashing
３．ＯＰＲＭＮＴＲ rectangle) at the left of the screen to "2. DATA CHECK" using
∧∨ÆＭＥＮＵＳＨＩＦＴ▼ the and keys. Then press the key to switch to the
function code configuration screen.
Ｆ．ＦＵＮＤＡＭＥＮＴＡＬ Function code groups (F, E, C, P…) appear.
Ｅ．ＴＥＲＭＩＮＡＬ
Ｃ．ＦＲＱＣＯＮＴＲＯＬ
Move the cursor to the desired function code group using the
Ｐ．ＭＯＴＯＲ１ and keys.
∧∨ÆＳＨＩＦＴ ◆
Ｆ０００：ＣＨＧＯＫ The function codes whose data has been changed from factory
Ｆ０１＊１：１２ＩＮＰＵＴ
Ｆ０２＊１：ＦＷＤ，ＲＥＶ
defaults are marked with an asterisk (*).
Ｆ０３１５００ｒ／ｍ Æ
/ Move the cursor to the desired function code using the and
keys.
Ｆ０００：ＣＨＧＯＫ
Ｆ０１＊１：１２ＩＮＰＵＴ
At the right of F03, Æ appears indicating that F03 has a child
Ｆ０２＊１：ＦＷＤ，ＲＥＶ directory. To access the child directory, move the cursor to that
Ｆ０３１５００ｒ／ｍ Æ function code using the and keys and then press the or
key.
Press the key to move to the lower directory.
Ｆ０３１５００ｒ／ｍ
Ｆ０４１５００ｒ／ｍ
Ｆ０５＊１８８Ｖ
∧∨ÆＦＮＣＯＤＥ
Press key to establish the desired function code.
１５００ｒ／ｍ
５０～３００００
Press the key to move the changeable digit place (blinking),
then change the function code data using the and keys.
１５００ｒ／ｍ
５０～３００００
Press two times.
3-69
Press two
１５００ｒ／ｍ
５０～３００００
１５００
１２００ｒ／ｍ
５０～３００００
Press key to establish the function code data.
＊１２００ｒ／ｍ
ＳＴＯＲＩＮＧ・・・
3-70
3.4.4.4 Monitoring the running status -- Menu #3 "OPR MNTR"

Menu #3 "OPR MNTR" in Programming mode is used to check the running status during maintenance
and test running.
０．ＬＡＮＧＵＡＧＥ To display this menu screen, press the key in Running mode to
Chap. 3
switch to Programming mode.
３．ＯＰＲＭＮＴＲ Move the cursor (flashing rectangle) at the left of the screen to "3.
∧∨ÆＭＥＮＵＳＨＩＦＴ▼ OPR MNTR" using the and keys. Then press the key.

Ｎ＊＝×××××．×ｒ／ｍ ← Reference speed
Ｎ＝×××××．×ｒ／ｍ ← Motor speed
ｆ＊＝××××．×Ｈｚ ← Output frequency
ＴＲＱ＝××××．×％ ← Reference motor torque
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥＳＨＩＦＴ１
ＴＭＰ＝ ±×××℃ ← Motor temperature ("---" appears when no NTC thermistor is used.)
Ｉｏｕｔ＝×××．××Ａ ← Output current
Ｖｏｕｔ＝ ×××Ｖ ← Output voltage
ＦＬＸ＊＝ ×××％ ← Reference magnetic flux
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥＳＨＩＦＴ２
（１）（２）（３） (1) Current rating (2) Speed command source (3) PID control
（４）（５） (4) Motor selected (5) Drive control
（６）（７）（８）（９） (6) Run command (7) Current limit (8) Undervoltage/Voltage limit (9) Torque limit
（１０）（１１） (10) Run command source (11) Cause of trip
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥＳＨＩＦＴ３
* For details, refer to Table 3.4-8.
/
Ｎ＝××××．×ｒ／ｍ ← Motor speed

ＬＯＤ＝××××．×ｒ／ｍ ← Load shaft speed
ＬＩＮ＝××××．×ｍ／ｍ ← Line speed detection value
ＳＹ－ｄ＝ ××× ← Deviation in SY synchronous operation (This page is available soon.)
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥＳＨＩＦＴ４
ＳＶ＝×××．× ← PID command value

ＰＶ＝×××．× ← PID feedback amount
ＭＶ＝×××．× ← PID output value
ＩＮＴＮＬＮ－ＲＥＦ ← (12) PID command source (13) PID output destination
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥＳＨＩＦＴ５ * For details, refer to Table 3.4-8.
Ｐ＝×××．×ｐ ← Current position pulse for position control (This page is available soon.)
Ｅ＝×××．×ｐ ← Target position pulse for position control
ｄＰ＝×××．×ｐ ← Current deviation pulse for position control
ＭＯＤＥ： ← Position control status
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥＳＨＩＦＴ６
3-71
/
Ｐ４＝×××××××ｐ ← 4-multiplied, current position pulse for position control (This page is available soon.)
Ｅ４＝×××××××ｐ ← 4-multiplied, target position pulse for position control
ｄｐ４＝×××××××ｐ ← 4-multiplied, current deviation pulse for position control
ＭＯＤＥ： ← Position control status
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥＳＨＩＦＴ７
ＥＴＩ１＝ ×××％ ← Remaining allowance for M1 motor overload (When it counts down to 0%, OL1 alarm is
ＥＴＩ２＝ ×××％ issued.)
ＥＴＩ３＝ ×××％ ← Remaining allowance for M2 motor overload (When it counts down to 0%, OL1 alarm is
issued.)
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥＳＨＩＦＴ８ ← Remaining allowance for M3 motor overload (When it counts down to 0%, OL1 alarm is
issued.)
3-72
Table 3.4-8 Running Status Items

Symbol Item Description
(1) HD Current rating HD (High Duty) mode selected (F80 = 0, 2)
MD MD (Medium Duty) mode selected (F80 = 3)
LD LD (Low Duty) mode selected (F80 = 1)
(2) HAND Speed command source Keypad
12± Voltage input on terminal [12] (with polarity)
Chap. 3
12 Voltage input on terminal [12] (without polarity)
U/D1 UP/DOWN control (Default = 0)
U/D2 UP/DOWN control (Default = Previous value)
U/D3 UP/DOWN control (Default = CPR1, 2)

MULTI Terminal command SS8, SS4, SS2, SS1 ("Select multistep speed")
LINK Terminal command LE ("Enable communications link via RS-485 or
fieldbus")
H30: Communications Link Function (Mode selection)
PTI Terminal command SYC ("Synchronization command") enabled
LOCK Terminal command LOCK ("Servo-lock command")
JOG Jogging speed
LDR "FRENIC-VG Loader"
AI-V Voltage input on analog input terminal AI-V
AI-C Current input on analog input terminal AI-C
LOCAL Keypad in local mode
(3) ---- PID control PID control disabled
PID PID control enabled
(4) M1 Motor selected Motor 1 selected
M2 Motor 2 selected
M3 Motor 3 selected
(5) PG_V Drive control Vector control with speed sensor
SENS_LES Vector control without speed sensor
EMU Simulation mode
PMPG Vector control for PMSM with speed sensor
V/F V/f control for IM
MW_PGV_M Vector control for IM with speed sensor (Multiwinding motor) (Master)
MW_PGV_S Vector control for IM with speed sensor (Multiwinding motor) (Slave)
MW_LES_M Vector control for IM without speed sensor (Multiwinding motor)(Master)
(6) ---- Run command Both Run forward and Run reverse commands being OFF or ON
FWD Run forward command
REV Run reverse command
(7) ---- Current limit No current limit
IL Current limiting
(8) ---- Undervoltage Neither undervoltage nor voltage limited
LU Voltage limit Undervoltage detected
VL Voltage limited
(9) ---- Torque limit No torque limit
TL Torque limiting
(10) HAND Run command source Keypad (F02 = 0)
TERM External signals to terminals [FWD] and [REV] (F02 = 1)
COMM Via communications link
LOCAL Keypad in Local mode
(11) ---- Cause of trip No cause of trip
STP1 Input on STOP1 terminal
BX Coast to a stop
(12) INTL PID command source Internal speed command
AI Analog input
LINK Communications link
KP-ON Terminal command KP/PID ON ("Cancel PID control")
(13) ---- PID output usage PID output disabled
T-LIM Torque limiter
T-REF Torque command
N-REF Speed command
N-AUX Auxiliary speed (e.g., dancer control)
3-73
3.4.4.5 Checking I/O signal status -- Menu #4 "I/O CHECK"
Menu #4 "I/O CHECK" in Programming mode is used to check the I/O states of digital and analog
signals during maintenance or test running.
１．ＤＡＴＡＳＥＴ To display this menu screen, press the key in Running mode to
４．Ｉ／ＯＣＨＥＣＫ Move the cursor (flashing rectangle) at the left of the screen to "4.
∧∨ÆＭＥＮＵＳＨＩＦＴ▼ I/O CHECK" using the and keys. Then press the key.
ＲＥＭ □×２ □×６ Digital input signals at the control circuit terminal block
□ＦＷＤ □×３ □×７ : Signal OFF, : Signal ON
□ＲＥＶ □×４ □×８
□Ｘ１ □×５ □×９ Normal open/close settings of X terminals specified by function code E14 are reflected
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥＳＨＩＦＴ１ to these signals.
/
ＲＥＭ Digital input signals at the control circuit terminal block

□ＥＮ１ : Signal OFF, : Signal ON
□ＥＮ２
ＣＯＭＭ □×２ □×６ Digital input signals via communications link

□ＦＷＤ □×３ □×７ : Signal OFF, : Signal ON
□ＲＥＶ □×４ □×８
□Ｘ１ □×５ □×９
□Ｙ１ □Ｙ５Ａ Output signals from transistors at the control circuit terminal block
□Ｙ２ : Signal OFF, : Signal ON
□Ｙ３
□Ｙ４
/ Analog input signals at the control circuit terminal block

１２＝±××．×Ｖ ← Analog input signal (12)
Ａｉ１＝±××．×Ｖ ← Analog input signal (Ai1)
Ａｉ２＝±××．×Ｖ ← Analog input signal (Ai2) (voltage/current)
The unit of Ai2 can be switched between V and mA by function code E50.
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥＳＨＩＦＴ５ When E50 ≠ 26, the unit is V and when E50 = 26, mA.
/ Analog output signals at the control circuit terminal block

ＡＯ１＝±××．×Ｖ ← Analog output signal (Ao1)
ＡＯ２＝±××．×Ｖ ← Analog output signal (Ao2)
ＡＯ３＝±××．×Ｖ ← Analog output signal (Ao3)
□ＦＷＤ□ＢＲＫ□ＩＬ ← This screen is FWD: Forward NUV: DC link bus ACC: Accelerating
□ＲＥＶ□ＮＵＶ□ＡＣＣ used to check the operation voltage DEC: Decelerating
□ＥＸＴ□ＴＬ □ＤＥＣ inverter running REV: Reverse established ALM: Alarm output
□ＩＮＴ□ＶＬ □ＡＬＭ status. operation TL: Torque limiting (for any fault)
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥＳＨＩＦＴ７ : Signal OFF, EXT: Pre-exciting VL: Voltage limiting
: Signal ON INT: Inverter shut IL: Current limiting
/ off
BRK: Braking
3-74
□ＰＡＲＡ１□Ｍ１□ＪＯＧ ← Indicates currently PARA1: ASR1 being selected M1: Motor 1 selected JOG: Jogging mode
□ＰＡＲＡ２□Ｍ２ effective sets. PARA2: ASR2 being selected M2: Motor 2 selected
□ＰＡＲＡ３□Ｍ３ : Signal OFF, : PARA3: ASR3 being selected M3: Motor 3 selected
□ＰＡＲＡ４ Signal ON PARA4: ASR4 being selected
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥＳＨＩＦＴ８
Chap. 3
/
ＯＰＴＩＯＮ ← Indicates the For the display content of (1) to (3), refer to the instruction manual of the
Ａ：（１） mounting status of corresponding option.
Ｂ：（２） the control options.

Ｃ：（３）
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥＳＨＩＦＴ９
ＯＰＴＩＯＮ ← Indicates the For the display content of (4) to (6), refer to the instruction manual of the
Ｄ：（４） mounting status of corresponding option.
Ｅ：（５） the control options.
Ｆ：（６）
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥＳＨＩＦＴ１０
Ａｉ３＝±××．×Ｖ ← Indicates the I/O AIO I/O status 1 (Ai3) "0.0" when no AIO is connected
Ａｉ４＝±××．×Ｖ status of the AIO AIO I/O status 2 (Ai4) "0.0" when no AIO is connected
ＡＯ４＝±××．×Ｖ option. AIO I/O status 3 (Ao4)
ＡＯ５＝±××．×Ｖ (This page appears AIO I/O status 4 (Ao5)
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥＳＨＩＦＴ１４ by mounting the
AIO option card
/ OPC-VG1-AIO.)
ＳＤ＝±×××××Ｐ／ｓ ← Indicates the PG [1] Input info of inverter PG signal: This appears when no PG (SD) is
ＬＤ＝±×××××Ｐ／ｓ signal input on the connected.
ＰＲ＝±×××××Ｐ／ｓ inverter. Input info of PG (SD) signal: This appears when a PG (SD) is
ＰＤ＝±×××××Ｐ／ｓ
mounted.
[2] Input info of PG (LD) signal: "---" appears when no PG (LD) is
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥＳＨＩＦＴ１５
connected.
/ [3] Input info of PG (PR) signal: "---" appears when no PG (PR) is
connected.
[4] Input info of PG (PD) signal: "---" appears when no PG (PD) is
Ｒ□×１１Ｃ□×１１ ← Indicates the input connected.
□×１２ □×１２ status of the DIOA
□×１３ □×１３ option.
□×１４ □×１４ : Signal OFF, :
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥＳＨＩＦＴ１６ Signal ON
(This page appears by mounting the DIO option card OPC-VG1-DIO and turning SW2 to the
/
DIOA position.)
□Ｙ１１ □Ｙ１５ ← Indicates the output status of the DIOA option.
□Ｙ１２ □Ｙ１６ : Signal OFF, : Signal ON
□Ｙ１３ □Ｙ１７ (This page appears by mounting the DIO option card OPC-VG1-DIO and turning SW2 to the
□Ｙ１４ □Ｙ１８ DIOA position.)
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥＳＨＩＦＴ１７
□ＤＩＡ □ＢＣＤ □ＢＩＮ ← Indicates the input status The input statuses of the DIA and DIB options are shown in
Ａ＝××××× of the DIA option. either of the following formats.
□ＤＩＢ □ＢＣＤ □ＢＩＮ : Signal OFF, : Signal Bin format: 0 to FFFF
Ｂ＝××××× ON BCD format: 0 to 65535
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥＳＨＩＦＴ１８
(This page appears by
/ mounting the DI option
card OPC-VG1-DI.)
3-75
/
Ｘ□２１□２５□２９□３３ ← Indicates the input status of the DIOB option.

□２２□２６□３０□３４ : Signal OFF, : Signal ON
□２３□２７□３１□３５ (This page appears by mounting the DIO option card OPC-VG1-DIO and turning SW2 to
□２４□２８□３２□３６ the DIOB position.)
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥＳＨＩＦＴ１９
□Ｙ２１ □Ｙ２５ □Ｙ２９ ←Indicates the output status of the DIOB option.
□Ｙ２２ □Ｙ２６ □Ｙ３０ : Signal OFF, : Signal ON
□Ｙ２３ □Ｙ２７ (This page appears by mounting the DIO option card OPC-VG1-DIO and turning SW2 to
□Ｙ２４ □Ｙ２８ the DIOB position.)
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥＳＨＩＦＴ２０
□ＳＴ１ □ＳＴ２ □ＲＥ ← Indicates the I/O status of the SAFE option.
□ＳＬ１ □ＳＬ２ : Signal OFF, : Signal ON
□ＳＢ＋ □ＳＢ－ (Available soon)
□ＢＦ１ □ＢＦ２ (This page appears by mounting the functional safety option card OPC-VG1-SAFE.
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥＳＨＩＦＴ２１
3-76
3.4.4.6 Reading maintenance information -- Menu #5 "MAINTENANCE"

Menu #5 "MAINTENANCE" in Programming mode shows information necessary for performing
maintenance on the inverter.
２．ＤＡＴＡＣＨＥＣＫ To display this menu screen, press the key in Running mode to
Chap. 3
４．Ｉ／ＯＣＨＥＣＫ
５．ＭＡＩＮＴＥＮＡＮＣＥ Move the cursor (flashing rectangle) at the left of the screen to "5.
∧∨ÆＭＥＮＵＳＨＩＦＴ◆ MAINTENANCE" using the and keys. Then press the key.

ＴＩＭＥ＝ ×××××ｈ ← Cumulative run time
ＥＤＣ＝ ×××Ｖ ← DC link bus voltage
ＴＭＰＩ＝ ×××℃ ← Max. temperature inside the inverter (Refreshed every one hour.)
ＴＭＰＦ＝ ×××℃ ← Max. temperature of heat sink (Refreshed every one hour.)
Ｉｍａｘ＝××．××Ａ ← Max. effective current (within an hour)

ＣＡＰ＝ ×××％ ← Main capacitor capacity
ＴＣＡＰ＝×××××ｈ ← Cumulative run time of capacitors on the printed circuit board (Refreshed every 10
（８７６００ｈ） hours)
ＴＦＡＮ＝×××××ｈ ← Estimated remaining life of the capacitor on the printed circuit board (fixed)
（８７６００ｈ） ← Cumulative run time of the cooling fan (Refreshed every 10 hours)
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥＳＨＩＦＴ３ ← Estimated remaining life of the cooling fan (fixed)
/
ＮＲＫ＝（１） ← (1) Number of communication retries for keypad

ＮＲＲ＝（２）（５） ← (2) Number of communication retries, (5) Latest error code for RS-485 (See Table 3.4-9.)
ＮＲＯ＝（３）（６） ← (3) Number of communication retries, (6) Latest error code for T-Link/CC-Link/SX-bus
ＮＲＬ＝（４）（７） ← (4) Number of communication retries, (See Table 3.4-10.)
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥＳＨＩＦＴ４ (7) Latest error code for high-speed serial communication dedicated terminal block
/ (Available soon)
ＭＡＩＮ＝Ｈ１×××× ← ROM version of main control CPU (MAIN)

ＭＴＲ＝Ｈ２×××× ← ROM version of motor control CPU (MTR)
ＫＰ＝Ｋ ×××× ← ROM version of keypad (KP)
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥＳＨＩＦＴ５
ＯＰ_Ａ＝Ｑ１×××× ← ROM version of 8-bit digital option CPU (OP1)

ＯＰ_Ｂ＝Ｑ１×××× ← ROM version of 8-bit digital option CPU (OP2)
ＯＰ_Ｄ＝Ｑ３×××× ← ROM version of 16-bit digital option CPU
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥＳＨＩＦＴ６ "----" when no option is mounted.

/
ＯＰ_Ｃ＝Ｑ２×××× ← ROM version (Not used.)

ＯＰ_Ｅ＝Ｑ４×××× ← ROM version of functional safety card option CPU-S1 (Available soon)
＝Ｑ５×××× ← ROM version of functional safety card option CPU-S2 (Available soon)
"----" when no option is mounted.
3-77
Ｗｈ＝××××××ｋＷｈ ← Input watt-hour
ＰＤ＝ ×××× ← Input watt-hour data
ＲＥＭＮ＝××××× ← Remaining startup times before the next maintenance
ＲＥＭＴ＝××××０ｈ ← Remaining time before the next maintenance
ＴＮＰＩＭ＝ ×××℃ ← Temperature inside the inverter (real-time value)

ＴＮＰＦＭ＝ ×××℃ ← Temperature of heat sink (real-time value)
ＣＡＰＥＨ＝××××０ｈ ← Lifetime of DC link bus capacitor (elapsed hours) (Refreshed every 10 hours)
ＣＡＰＲＨ＝××××０ｈ ← Lifetime of DC link bus capacitor (remaining hours) (Refreshed every 10 hours)
ＮＳＴ１＝××××× ← Number of startups 1 (1st motor) These counters work when H82 ≠ 0.
ＮＳＴ２＝××××× ← Number of startups 2 (2nd motor)
ＮＳＴ３＝××××× ← Number of startups 3 (3rd motor)
ＭＴＩＭ１＝××××０ｈ ← Cumulative run time (1st motor) (Refreshed every 10 hours)

ＭＴＩＭ２＝××××０ｈ ← Cumulative run time (2nd motor) (Refreshed every 10 hours)
ＭＴＩＭ３＝××××０ｈ ← Cumulative run time (3rd motor) (Refreshed every 10 hours)
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥＳＨＩＦＴ１１
ＬＡＬＭ１＝××× ← Light alarm (1) -- Latest

*Shutting down the power clears light alarm history.
ＬＡＬＭ２＝××× ← Light alarm (2) -- Last
ＬＡＬＭ３＝××× ← Light alarm (3) -- 2nd last
ＬＡＬＭ４＝××× ← Light alarm (4) -- 3rd last
Table 3.4-9 List of RS-485 Error Codes
Display # When function code M26 is: Error content

-- 0 No error
74 Format error
01
75 Command error
02 78 Function code error
03 80 Data error
04 71 Checksum error, CRC error
05 72 Parity error
06 73 Overrun error, framing error
76 Communications link priority error
07 79 Write-protected
81 Error during writing
Table 3.4-10 List of Bus Error Codes

The following display numbers are shown as a bus error code.
Display # Upper digits (T-Link) Upper digits (CC-Link) Lower digits (SX-bus)
-- No error No error No error
1 CRC check error Light alarm: Communications
Flag error data error
2 Transmission cycle timeout Light alarm (CC-Link error) Heavy alarm 1: Wire break
Frequent CRC errors
(16 time or more)
3 Overrun, underrun Heavy alarm (option error) Heavy alarm 2: Hardware
defective, Mounting failure
3-78
3.4.4.7 Measuring load factor -- Menu #6 "LOAD FCTR"

Menu #6 "LOAD FCTR" in Programming mode is used to measure the maximum output current, the
average output current, and the average braking power.
３．ＯＰＲＭＮＴＲ To display this menu screen, press the key in Running mode
４．Ｉ／ＯＣＨＥＣＫ
to switch to Programming mode.
Chap. 3
５．ＭＡＩＮＴＥＮＡＮＣ
６．ＬＯＡＤＦＣＴＲ Move the cursor (flashing rectangle) at the left of the screen to
∧∨ÆＭＥＮＵＳＨＩＦＴ◆ "6. LOAD FCTR" using the and keys. Then press the
key.

Ｔ＝３６００ｓ ← Measurement period
Ｉｍａｘ＝０．００Ａ
Ｉａｖｅ＝０．００Ａ
ＢＰａｖｅ＝０％
∧∨ÆＣＡＬＣＴＩＭＥ
Change the measurement period using the , and keys.
Ｔ＝３６００ｓ
Ｔ＝６００ｓ ← Measurement period (600 seconds)

Press the key to start measurement.
Ｔ＝１５０ｓ ← Indicates the remaining measurement period. When this value comes to zero,
Ｉｍａｘ＝０．００Ａ measurement is completed.
Ｔ＝３６００ｓ ← Reverts to the initial value.

Ｉｍａｘ＝５６．４Ａ ← Maximum current
Ｉａｖｅ＝２３．５Ａ ← Average current
ＢＰａｖｅ＝１０％ ← Average braking power (motor rated output/100%)
3-79
3.4.4.8 Reading alarm information -- Menu #7 "ALM INF"
Menu #7 "ALM INF" in Programming mode shows the past four alarm codes and the related alarm
information on the current inverter conditions detected when the alarm occurred.
４．Ｉ／ＯＣＨＥＣＫ To display this menu screen, press the key in Running mode
５．ＭＡＩＮＴＥＮＡＮＣＥ
６．ＬＯＡＤＦＣＴＲ
７．ＡＬＭＩＮＦ
Move the cursor (flashing rectangle) at the left of the screen to
∧∨ÆＭＥＮＵＳＨＩＦＴ◆
"7. ALM INF" using the and keys. Then press the key.
０／１＝（１）（５）（９） ← (1) Latest alarm code (5) Latest alarm, ID (9) Latest alarm, no. of occurrences (always 1)
－１＝（２）（６）（１０） ← (2) 1st last alarm code (6) 1st last alarm, ID (10) 1st last alarm, no. of occurrences
－２＝（３）（７）（１１） ← (3) 2nd last alarm code (7) 2nd last alarm, ID (11) 2nd last alarm, no. of occurrences
－３＝（４）（８）（１２） ← (4) 3rd last alarm code (8) 3rd last alarm, ID (12) 3rd last alarm, no. of occurrences
∧∨ÆＨＩＳＴＯＲＹＳＨＩＦ Alarm ID: Blank (Alarm caused by the inverter), Ｏ (Alarm caused by multiplex system or other inverters)
/ Use the and keys to select the desired alarm.

０／１＝（１）（５）（９）
－１＝（２）（６）（１０）
－２＝（３）（７）（１１）
－３＝（４）（８）（１２）
∧∨ÆＨＩＳＴＯＲＹＳＨＩＦ
Press the key to establish the selected alarm.
ＯＣＣＵＲＲＥＤＡＴ
２０１１／０１／０１ ← Date when an alarm occurred
００：００：００ ← Time when an alarm occurred
Note: To record accurate date and time, it is necessary to mount a memory backup battery
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥＳＨＩＦＴ１ (Option for inverters of up to 22 kW, Attached as standard for those of 30 kW or above)
and adjust the date and time.
/
ＲＥＳＥＴＡＴ
２０１１／０１／０１ ← Date when an alarm was removed
００：００：１０ ← Time when an alarm was removed
Note: To record accurate date and time, it is necessary to mount a memory backup battery
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥＳＨＩＦＴ２ (Option for inverters of up to 22 kW, Attached as standard for those of 30 kW or above)
and adjust the date and time.
/
Ｎ＊＝×××××．×ｒ／ｍ ← Speed setting 4 upon the occurrence of alarm The value is rounded to the
Ｎ＝×××××．×ｒ／ｍ ← Detected speed 1 upon the occurrence of alarm first decimal place.
ｆ＊＝ ×××．×Ｈｚ ← Reference output frequency upon the occurrence of alarm If the absolute value of the
ＴＲＱ＝ ×××％ ← Reference torque upon the occurrence of alarm detected speed is 10,000 or
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥＳＨＩＦＴ３ larger, the value is rounded to
an integer.
/
ＴＭＰ＝ ±×××℃ ← Motor temperature upon the occurrence of alarm ("---" appears when no NTC is mounted)
Ｉｏｕｔ＝×××．××Ａ ← Detected output current upon the occurrence of alarm
Ｖｏｕｔ＝ ×××Ｖ ← Detected output voltage upon the occurrence of alarm
ＦＬＸ＊＝ ×××％ ← Reference magnetic-flux value upon the occurrence of alarm
ＴＩＭＥ＝ ×××××ｈ ← Cumulative operation hours upon the occurrence of alarm

Ｍｏｕｔ＝ ×××．×ｋＷ ← Reference motor output (in kW or HP) upon the occurrence of alarm *
ＴＭＰＩＭ＝ ×××℃ ← Inverter inside air temperature upon the occurrence of alarm (real-time value)
ＴＭＰＦＭ＝ ×××℃ ← Heat sink temperature upon the occurrence of alarm (real-time value)
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥＳＨＩＦＴ５ * kW or HP can be selected with code F60.
/
3-80
ＥＤＣ＝ ×××Ｖ ← DC link bus voltage at the time of an alarm
Chap. 3
/
ＮＲＫ＝××××× ← No. of communication retries at the time of an alarm for keypad

ＮＲＲ＝××××× ← No. of communication retries at the time of an alarm for RS-485
ＮＲＯ＝××××× ← No. of communication retries at the time of an alarm for T-Link/CC-Link/SX-bus

ＮＲＬ＝××××× ← No. of communication retries at the time of an alarm for high-speed serial
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥＳＨＩＦＴ７ communication dedicated terminal block
ＲＥＭ □Ｘ２ □Ｘ６ (Terminal block)

□ＦＷＤ □Ｘ３ □Ｘ７ : Signal OFF, : Signal ON
□ＲＥＶ □Ｘ４ □Ｘ８
□Ｘ１ □Ｘ５ □Ｘ９
ＲＥＭ (Terminal block)

□ＥＮ１ : Signal OFF, : Signal ON
□ＥＮ２
ＣＯＭＭ □Ｘ２ □Ｘ６ (Via communications link)

□ＦＷＤ □Ｘ３ □Ｘ７ : Signal OFF, : Signal ON
□ＲＥＶ □Ｘ４ □Ｘ８
□Ｘ１ □Ｘ５ □Ｘ９
/
□Ｙ１ □Ｙ５Ａ : Signal OFF, : Signal ON
□Ｙ２
□Ｙ３
□Ｙ４
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥＳＨＩＦＴ１１
□ＦＷＤ□ＢＲＫ□ＩＬ : Signal OFF, : Signal ON

□ＲＥＶ□ＮＵＶ□ＡＣＣ FWD: Forward operation NUV: DC link bus voltage established (ready for operation)
□ＥＸＴ□ＴＬ □ＤＥＣ REV: Reverse operation TL: Torque limiting DEC: Decelerating
□ＩＮＴ□ＶＬ □ＡＬＭ EXT: Pre-exciting VL: Voltage limiting ALM: Alarm output (for any fault)
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥＳＨＩＦＴ１２ INT: Inverter shut off IL: Current limiting
BRK: Braking ACC: Accelerating
/
Ｒ□Ｘ１１Ｃ□Ｘ１１ (Shown only when DIO option is mounted)
□Ｘ１２ □Ｘ１２ : Signal OFF, : Signal ON
□Ｘ１３ □Ｘ１３ (R: Terminal block, C: Via communications link)
□Ｘ１４ □Ｘ１４
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥＳＨＩＦＴ１３
3-81
/
□Ｙ１１ □Ｙ１５ (Shown only when DIO option is mounted)

□Ｙ１２ □Ｙ１６ : Signal OFF, : Signal ON
□Ｙ１３ □Ｙ１７
□Ｙ１４ □Ｙ１８
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥＳＨＩＦＴ１４
５＝ (1) ← Multiple alarms 5 ((1) = Alarm code)

４＝ (2) ← Multiple alarms 4 ((2) = Alarm code)
３＝ (3) ← Multiple alarms 3 ((3) = Alarm code)
２＝ (4) ← Multiple alarms 2 ((4) = Alarm code)
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥＳＨＩＦＴ１６
/
（１）（２）（３） (1) Current rating (2) Speed command source (3) PID control
（４）（５） (4) Motor selected (5) Drive control
（６）（７）（８）（９） (6) Run command (7) Current limit (8) Undervoltage/Voltage limit (9) Torque limit
（１０）（１１） (10) Run command source (11) Cause of trip
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥＳＨＩＦＴ１９ * For details, refer to Table 3.4-8.
ＮＳＴ１＝ｘｘｘｘｘ ← Number of startups 1 (1st motor)

ＮＳＴ２＝ｘｘｘｘｘ ← Number of startups 2 (2nd motor)
ＮＳＴ３＝ｘｘｘｘｘ ← Number of startups 3 (3rd motor)
ＴＲＱＩ＝ｘｘ．ｘｘ％ ← Reference torque current at the time of an alarm

ＴＲＯ＝ｘｘ．ｘｘ％ ← Calculated torque at the time of an alarm
ＴＲＯＩ＝ｘｘ．ｘｘ％ ← Calculated torque current at the time of an alarm
Ｐ＝ｘｘｘｘｘｋＷ ← Input power at the time of an alarm
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥＳＨＩＦＴ２１
□ＳＴ１ □ＳＴ２ □ＲＥ ← Indicates the I/O status of the SAFE option.
□ＳＬ１ □ＳＬ２ : Signal OFF, : Signal ON
□ＳＢ＋ □ＳＢ－ (Available soon)
□ＢＦ１ □ＢＦ２
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥＳＨＩＦＴ２２
/
ＳＵＢ＝ｘｘｘｘ ← Alarm sub-code (for manufacturers)
ＡＬ＝××× ＡＬ＝××× ← Alarm whose cause is not removed yet (for the latest alarm only)
ＡＬ＝××× ＡＬ＝×××
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥＳＨＩＦＴ２３
3-82
3.4.4.9 Viewing causes of alarm -- Menu #8 "ALM CAUSE"

Menu #8 "ALM CAUSE" in Programming mode shows the past four alarm codes and the related
alarm information on the current inverter conditions detected when the alarm occurred.
５．ＭＡＩＮＴＥＮＡＮＣＥ To display this menu screen, press the key in Running mode
６．ＬＯＡＤＦＣＴＲ
Chap. 3
８．ＡＬＭＣＡＵＳＥ Move the cursor (flashing rectangle) at the left of the screen to
∧∨ÆＭＥＮＵＳＨＩＦＴ◆ "8. ALM CAUSE" using the and keys. Then press the
key.

５＝(37) ← (37) Multiple alarms, 4th
４＝(36) ← (36) Multiple alarms, 3rd
３＝(35) ← (35) Multiple alarms, 2nd
２＝(34) ← (34) Multiple alarms, 1st
０／１＝（１）（５）（９） ← (1) Latest alarm code (5) Latest alarm, ID (9) Latest alarm, no. of occurrences (always 1)
－１＝（２）（６）（１０） ← (2) 1st last alarm code (6) 1st last alarm, ID (10) 1st last alarm, no. of occurrences
－２＝（３）（７）（１１） ← (3) 2nd last alarm code (7) 2nd last alarm, ID (11) 2nd last alarm, no. of occurrences
－３＝（４）（８）（１２） ← (4) 3rd last alarm code (8) 3rd last alarm, ID (12) 3rd last alarm, no. of occurrences
－４＝(13) (20) (27) ← (13) 4th last alarm code (20) 4th last alarm, ID (27) 4th last alarm, no. of occurrences
－５＝(14) (21) (28) ← (14) 5th last alarm code (21) 5th last alarm, ID (28) 5th last alarm, no. of occurrences
－６＝(15) (22) (29) ← (15) 6th last alarm code (22) 6th last alarm, ID (29) 6th last alarm, no. of occurrences
－７＝(16) (23) (30) ← (16) 7th last alarm code (23) 7th last alarm, ID (30) 7th last alarm, no. of occurrences
－８＝(17) (24) (31) ← (17) 8th last alarm code (24) 8th last alarm, ID (31) 8th last alarm, no. of occurrences
－９＝(18) (25) (32) ← (18) 9th last alarm code (25) 9th last alarm, ID (32) 9th last alarm, no. of occurrences
－１０＝(19) (26) (33) ← (19) 10th last alarm code (26) 10th last alarm, ID (33) 10th last alarm, no. of occurrences
/ Use the and keys to select the desired alarm and press the
key to establish the selected alarm.
０／１＝××× ×× ××
－１＝××× ×× ××
－２＝××× ×× ××
－３＝××× ×× ××
ＴＨＲＯＰＥＮ ← Indicates cause of the alarm selected from alarm history
Shown at the left is the 0h2 alarm.
If all the information for the selected alarm is not shown on the
screen at a time, scroll over the descriptive information using
the and keys.
< Alarm ID Details >

Display Function
Blank Ordinary alarm
Ｏ Alarm caused by other inverters
3-83
3.4.4.10 Copying data -- Menu #10 "DATA COPY"
Menu #10 "DATA COPY" in Programming mode provides "Read," "Write," and "Verify" functions,
enabling the following applications. The keypad can hold three sets of function code data in its internal
memory to use for three different inverters.
(a) Reading function code data already configured in an inverter and then writing that function code
data altogether into another inverter.
(b) Copying the function code data saved in the inverter memory into the keypad memory for
backup.
(c) Saving function code data in the keypad as master data for data management; that is, saving more
than one set of function code data in the keypad and writing a set of data suited to the machinery
into the target inverter.
(a) Copy (b) Backup (c) Data management
Table 3.4-11 details the data copying functions.

Table 3.4-11 List of Data Copying Functions
Operation Description
Read: Read data Reads out function code data from the inverter memory and stores it into the keypad
memory.
Write: Write data Writes the data held in the selected area of the keypad memory into the target inverter
memory.
Verify: Verify data Verifies the data held in the keypad memory against that in the inverter memory.
3-84
To display this menu screen, press the key in Running mode to switch to Programming mode.
Move the cursor (flashing rectangle) at the left of the screen to "10. DATA COPY" using the and
keys. Then press the key.
Use the and keys to select ""Read," "Write," or "Verify."
Chap. 3
８．ＡＬＭＣＡＵＳＥ
９．ＣＯＭＭＩＮＦＯ
１０．ＤＡＴＡＣＯＰＹ

＜ＣＯＰＹ；ＫＰ－ＩＮＶ＞＜ＣＯＰＹ；ＫＰ－ＩＮＶ＞ / ＜ＣＯＰＹ；ＫＰ－ＩＮＶ＞
/
- - - ← ２２０－１－４ - - -← ２２０－１－４ - - -← ２２０－１－４
ＲＥＡＤＷＲＩＴＥＶＥＲＩＦＹ
∧∨ÆＳＨＩＦＴＦ／ＤÆ ∧∨ÆＳＨＩＦＴＦ／ＤÆ ∧∨ÆＳＨＩＦＴＦ／ＤÆ
＜ＲＥＡＤ；ＤＡＴＡ＞＜ＷＲＩＴＥ；ＤＡＴＡ＞＜ＶＥＲＩＦＹ；ＤＡＴＡ＞

ＫＰ１：- - - - - - - - ＫＰ１：２２０－１－４ＫＰ１：２２０－１－４
ＫＰ２：- - - - - - - - ＫＰ２：- - - - - - - - ＫＰ２：- - - - - - - -
ＫＰ３：- - - - - - - - ＫＰ３：- - - - - - - - ＫＰ３：- - - - - - - -
∧∨ÆＳＨＩＦＴＦ／ＤÆ ∧∨ÆＳＨＩＦＴＦ／ＤÆ ∧∨ÆＳＨＩＦＴＦ／ＤÆ
ＳＴＡＲＴＣＯＰＹ？ＭＯＴＰ（Ｐ，Ａ）ＡＲＥＭＯＴＰ（Ｐ，Ａ）ＡＲＥ

ＫＰ１←２２０－１－４ＷＲＩＴＴＥＮＴＯＯ？ＶＥＲＩＦＹＴＯＯ？
ＲＥＡＤ ÆＹＥＳ ÆＹＥＳ
ＮＯＮＯ
Ｆ／Ｄ→ＳＴＡＲＴ
＜ＣＯＰＹ；ＫＰ－ＩＮＶ＞ＳＴＡＲＴＣＯＰＹ？ＳＴＡＲＴＣＯＰＹ？

ＫＰ１←２２０－１－４ＫＰ１Æ２２０－１－４ＫＰ１＝２２０－１－４
１００％７０８／７０８Ｆ／ＤÆＳＴＡＲＴＦ／ＤÆＳＴＡＲＴ
＜ＣＯＰＹ；ＫＰ－ＩＮＶ＞＜ＣＯＰＹ；ＫＰ－ＩＮＶ＞＜ＣＯＰＹ；ＫＰ－ＩＮＶ＞

ＫＰ１←２２０－１－４ＫＰ１Æ２２０－１－４ＫＰ１＝２２０－１－４
ＣＯＭＰＬＥＴＥ
∧∨ÆＳＨＩＦＴＦ／ＤÆ １００％９９６／９９６１００％９９６／９９６
＜ＣＯＰＹ；ＫＰ－ＩＮＶ＞＜ＣＯＰＹ；ＫＰ－ＩＮＶ＞
ＫＰ１Æ２２０－１－４ＫＰ１＝２２０－１－４
ＷＲＩＴＥＶＥＲＩＦＹ
ＣＯＭＰＬＥＴＥＣＯＭＰＬＥＴＥ
∧∨ÆＳＨＩＦＴＦ／ＤÆ ∧∨ÆＳＨＩＦＴＦ／ＤÆ
3-85
3.4.4.11 Checking changed function codes -- Menu #11 "CHANGES"
Menu #11 "CHANGES" in Programming mode shows only the function codes whose data has been
changed from the factory defaults.
８．ＡＬＭＣＡＵＳＥ To display this menu screen, press the key in Running
９．ＣＯＭＭＩＮＦＯ
１１．ＣＨＡＮＧＥＳ Move the cursor (flashing rectangle) at the left of the screen to
∧∨ÆＭＥＮＵＳＨＩＦＴ◆ "11. CHANGES" using the and keys. Then press the
key.
Ｆ０１＊１：１２ＩＮＰＵＴ The function codes whose data has been changed from factory
Ｆ０３＊１２００ｒ／ｍ
defaults are marked with an asterisk (*).
Ｆ０５＊３７０Ｖ
Ｆ０１．ＮＳＥＴＴＩＮＧ１ Just as in Section 3.4.4.2, "Configuring function codes--Menu

＊
１：１２ＩＮＰＵＴ
#1 "DATA SET," the function code data can be modified.
０～９
/
Ｆ０１．ＮＳＥＴＴＩＮＧ１
＊１：１２ＩＮＰＵＴ
２：１２－ＡＢＳ
０～９
Ｆ０１．ＮＳＥＴＴＩＮＧ１
＊２：１２－ＡＢＳ
Ｆ０１＊２：１２－ＡＢＳ
Ｆ０３＊１２００ｒ／ｍ
Ｆ０５＊３７０Ｖ
3-86
3.4.4.12 Setting the calendar clock -- Menu #12 "DATE/TIME"

Menu #12 "DATE/TIME" in Programming mode is used to select the format of the calendar clock to
be displayed in the operation guide line in Running mode and set the date and time.
After mounting a memory backup battery (option for inverters of 22 kW or below, attached as standard for
Chap. 3
those of 33 kW or above), set the date and time. When a memory backup battery is not mounted, the calendar
clock does not work correctly.

1) Setting the date and time
９．ＣＯＭＭＩＮＦＯ To display this menu screen, press the key in Running
１１．ＣＨＡＮＧＥＳ
１２．ＤＡＴＥ／ＴＩＭＥ
Move the cursor (flashing rectangle) at the left of the screen to
"12. DATA/TIME" using the and keys. Then press the
key.
＜ＤＡＴＥ／ＴＩＭＥ＞
ÆＡＤＪＵＳＴ
ＦＯＲＭＡＴ
∧∨ÆＳＨＩＦＴＦ
Press key to establish the desired menu.
ＡＤＪＵＳＴ Use the key to move the cursor to the desired item.
２０１０／０１／０１
００：００：００
∧∨ÆＤＡＴＡＡＤＪＵＳＴ ∧
/ Change the date and time using the and keys.

ＡＤＪＵＳＴ
２０１１／０１／０１
０２：４３：１５
∧∨ÆＤＡＴＡＡＤＪＵＳＴ ∧
If the relationship between the changed year, month, day, and
time is invalid, "CANNOT SET" appears when the key is pressed.
ＡＤＪＵＳＴ
２０１１／０１／０１
ＰＭ０２：４３：１５
＜ＤＡＴＥ／ＴＩＭＥ＞ After a second, the screen automatically switches back to the

ＦＯＲＭＡＴ
submenu.
The calendar clock can also be set with FRENIC-VG Loader. For details, refer to the
FRENIC-VG Loader Instruction Manual.
3-87
2) Selecting the display format
９．ＣＯＭＭＩＮＦＯ To display this menu screen, press the key in Running mode to
１１．ＣＨＡＮＧＥＳ
１２．ＤＡＴＥ／ＴＩＭＥ Move the cursor (flashing rectangle) at the left of the screen to "12.
∧∨ÆＭＥＮＵＳＨＩＦＴ◆ DATA/TIME" using the and keys. Then press the key.
ＦＯＲＭＡＴ
/ Move the pointer Æ using the and keys to the desired menu.
ＡＤＪＵＳＴ
ÆＦＯＲＭＡＴ
＜ＦＯＲＭＡＴ＞
ｙｙｙｙ／ｍｍ／ｄｄ
ｈｈ：ｍｍ：ｓｓ
∧∨ÆＦＯＲＭＡＴＳＨＩＦＴ
/ Change the date format data using the and keys.

<List of date formats>
ｄｄ／ｍｍ／ｙｙｙｙｙｙｙｙ／ｍｍ／ｄｄ Year/Month/Date
ｈｈ：ｍｍ：ｓｓｄｄ／ｍｍ／ｙｙｙｙ Date/Month/Year
ｍｍ／ｄｄ／ｙｙｙｙ Month/Date/Year
∧∨ÆＦＯＲＭＡＴＳＨＩＦＴｍｍｍｄｄ，ｙｙｙｙ Month Date, Year
＜ＯＦＦ＞ No display
/
ｍｍ／ｄｄ／ｙｙｙｙ
ｍｍｍｄｄ，ｙｙｙｙ
Press key to establish the newly specified date format.
ＪＡＮ０１，２０１２
3-88
/ Change the time format data using the and keys.

<List of time formats>
ＪＡＮ０１，２０１２ｈｈ：ｍｍ：ｓｓ 0-24 hour: minutes: seconds
ＡＭｈｈ：ｍｍ：ｓｓｈｈ：ｍｍ：ｓｓＡＭ 0-12 hour: minutes: seconds AM/PM
ＡＭｈｈ：ｍｍ：ｓｓ AM/PM 0-12 hour: minutes: seconds
∧∨ÆＳＨＩＦＴＦ＜ＯＦＦ＞ No display
Chap. 3
Press key to establish the newly specified time format.
ＪＡＮ０１，２０１２
ＰＭ０２：４３：３７

After a second, the screen automatically switches back to the
submenu.
ＡＤＪＵＳＴ
ÆＦＯＲＭＡＴ
∧∨ÆＳＨＩＦＴ
3-89
3.4.4.13 Limiting function codes to be displayed -- Menu #14 "LIMITED FC"
Menu #14 "LIMITED FC" in Programming mode is used to display/hide the directory and select
whether to display all function codes or limited ones selected in Loader.
Shown below is an example of selecting limited ones.
１１．ＣＨＡＮＧＥＳ To display this menu screen, press the key in Running mode to
１３．ＦＯＲＭＥＲＩＮＶ
１４．ＬＩＭＩＴＥＤＦＣ Move the cursor (flashing rectangle) at the left of the screen to "14.
∧∨ÆＭＥＮＵＳＨＩＦＴ◆ LIMITED FC" using the and keys. Then press the key.
＜ＦＣＬＩＭＩＴ＞
ÆＤＩＲＥＣＴＯＲＹ
ＬＩＭＩＴＥＤ
ＡＬＬＦＣ
/ Move the pointer Æ using the and keys to the desired menu.
ＤＩＲＥＣＴＯＲＹ
ÆＬＩＭＩＴＥＤ
ＡＬＬＦＣ
Press key to select "LIMITED."
ＤＩＲＥＣＴＯＲＹ
ÆＬＩＭＩＴＥＤ
ＡＬＬＦＣ
１１．ＣＨＡＮＧＥＳ After a second, the screen automatically switches back to the

１３．ＦＯＲＭＥＲＩＮＶ
submenu.
１４．ＬＩＭＩＴＥＤＦＣ
∧∨ÆＭＥＮＵＳＨＩＦＴ▲
3-90
3.5 Test Run Procedure

Make a test run of the motor using the flowchart given below.
Start
Chap. 3
Check prior to powering on. → (See Section 3.5.1.)

Power ON and check. → (See Section 3.5.2.)
Select the motor drive control mode. → (See Section 3.5.3.)
Run the inverter for operation check. → (See Section 3.5.4.)
End
3-91
3.5.1 Checking prior to powering On
Check the following before powering on the inverter.
(1) Check the wiring to the inverter input terminals L1/R, L2/S and L3/T and output terminals U, V,
and W. Also check that the grounding wires are connected to the grounding terminals ( G)
correctly. (See Figure 3.5-1.)
• Never connect power supply wires to the inverter output terminals U, V, and W. Doing so and turning the
power ON breaks the inverter.
• Be sure to connect the grounding wires of the inverter and the motor to the ground electrodes.
(2) Check the control circuit terminals and main circuit terminals for short circuits or ground faults.
(3) Check for loose terminals, connectors and screws.
(4) Check that the motor is separated from mechanical equipment.
(5) Make sure that all switches of devices connected to the inverter are turned OFF. Powering on the
inverter with any of those switches being ON may cause an unexpected motor operation.
(6) Check that safety measures are taken against runaway of the equipment, e.g., a defense to prevent
people from access to the equipment.
(7) Check that a power factor correction DC reactor (DCR) is connected to terminals P1 and P(+).
(Inverters of 75 kW or above and LD-mode inverters of 55 kW are provided together with a DCR
as standard. Be sure to connect the DCR to the inverter.)
(8) Check that the PG (pulse generator) wiring is correct.
Wrong wiring may break the PG..

If the inverter is powered on with wrong wiring, disconnect the PG signal wires from the inverter, keep only
the PG powered on via the PGP and PGM, and then check that each signal is correctly output with an
oscilloscope or recorder.
Inverter
G L1/R L2/S L3/T P1 P(+) DB U V W G

PGP PGM PA PB TH1 THC
Jumper bar
PGP PGM PA PB
DCR not connected
～
～
M
PG
～ 3～
Inverter
G L1/R L2/S L3/T P1 P(+) DB U V W G

PGP PGM PA PB TH1 THC
PGP PGM PA PB
～
～
DCR connected M
PG
～ 3～
Note: In principle, the shielded sheath of wires should be connected to ground. If the inverter is
significantly affected by external induction noise, however, connection to 0V may be effective to
Figure 3.5-1 Connection of Main Circuit Terminals (Vector dedicated motor connected)
3-92
3.5.2 Powering ON and checking
• Be sure to mount the front cover before turning the power ON. Do not remove the cover when the inverter power is
ON.
• Do not operate switches with wet hands.
Chap. 3
Turn the power ON and check the following points. The

following is a case when no function code data is changed
from the factory defaults.
(1) Check that the LED monitor displays 0 (indicating
that the reference speed is 0 r/min) that is blinking.
(See Figure 3.5-2.)
If the LED monitor displays any number except 0,
press / key to set 0.
(2) Check that the built-in cooling fans rotate.
Figure 3.5-2 Display of the LED Monitor at

Power-on
3.5.2.1 Checking the input state of PG (pulse generator) signals

Before proceeding to a test run of the inverter, rotate the motor shaft and check the digital input state of
PG (pulse generator) signals on the screen shown below.
To call up the screen, switch the inverter operation mode from the Running mode to the Programming
mode, select Menu #4 "I/O CHECK" on the menu screen, and select page 15 (shown below) using the
/ keys.
For detailed operation procedure, refer to Section 3.4.4.5.
ＳＤ＝±×××××Ｐ／ｓ PG (SD) signal input info (inverter or option)*

ＬＤ＝±×××××Ｐ／ｓ PG (LD) signal input info (option)
ＰＲ＝±×××××Ｐ／ｓ PG (PR) signal input info (option)
ＰＤ＝±×××××Ｐ／ｓ PG (PD) signal input info (option)
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥＳＨＩＦ１５
* When a PG (SD) option is mounted, the PG (SD) signal input info appears; when it is not, the inverter PG signal input
info appears.
3-93
3.5.2.2 Mounting direction of a PG (pulse generator) and PG signals
The forward rotational direction of the dedicated motor (MVK type) is CCW when viewed from the
motor output shaft as shown in Figure 3.5-3.
During rotation in the forward direction, the PG output pulse forms a forward rotation signal (B phase
advanced by 90 degrees) shown in Figure 3.5-4, and during rotation in the reverse direction, a reverse
rotation signal (A phase advanced by 90 degrees).
When mounting an external PG on motors other than the dedicated one, directly connect it to the motor,
using a coupling, etc.
Forward
Figure 3.5-3 Forward Rotational Direction of Motor and PG
Forward Reverse
rotation signal rotation signal
A phase input
B phase input
Figure 3.5-4 PG (Pulse Generator) Signal
3-94
3.5.3 Selecting a desired motor drive control

The FRENIC-VG supports the following motor drive controls.
Data for P01 M1 drive control Speed feedback Speed control Refer to:
0 Vector control for IM with speed sensor Yes Section 3.5.3.1
1 Vector control for IM without speed sensor Estimated speed Speed control Section 3.5.3.2
Chap. 3
with automatic
speed regulator Chapter 4, Section 4.3.4
2 Simulation mode Yes
(ASR) "P codes"
3 Vector control for PMSM with speed sensor Yes Section 3.5.3.3

5 V/f control for IM No Frequency control Section 3.5.3.4
3.5.3.1 Vector control for IM with speed sensor

Under vector control, the inverter detects the motor's rotational position and speed according to PG
feedback signals and uses them for speed control. In addition, it decomposes the motor drive current
into the exciting and torque current components, and controls each of components in vector.
The desired response can be obtained by adjusting the control constants (PI constants) with the speed
regulator (PI controller).
This control enables the speed control with higher accuracy and quicker response than the vector
control without speed sensor.
(A recommended motor for this control is a Fuji VG motor exclusively designed for vector control.)
Vector control regulating the motor current requires some voltage margin between the
voltage that the inverter can output and the induced voltage of the motor. Usually a
general-purpose motor is so designed that the voltage matches the commercial power. Under
the control, therefore, it is necessary to suppress the motor terminal voltage to the lower level
in order to secure the voltage margin required.
However, driving the motor with the motor terminal voltage suppressed to the lower level
cannot generate the rated torque even if the rated current originally specified for the motor is
applied. To ensure the rated torque, it is necessary to review the rated current. (This also
applies to vector control without speed sensor.)
For Fuji VG motor exclusively designed for vector control

Configure the function codes as listed below. The machinery design values should match your
machinery ones.
For details on how to modify the function code data, see Section 3.4.4.2 "Configuring function
codes -- Menu #1 "DATA SET." For details, refer to Chapter 4, Section 4.3 "Details of Function
Codes."
Function Name Function code data Factory default
code
P01 M1 Drive Control 0: Vector control for IM
0: Vector control for IM
A01 M2 Drive Control with speed sensor
with speed sensor
A101 M3 Drive Control 5: V/f control for IM
P02 M1 Selection Motor to be applied Motor to be applied
P28 M1 PG Pulse Resolution
A30 M2 PG Pulse Resolution 1024 1024
A130 M3 PG Pulse Resolution
P30 M1 Thermistor Type
A31 M2 Thermistor Type 1: NTC thermistor 1: NTC thermistor
A131 M3 Thermistor Type
M1 Maximum Speed Machinery design values
F03 M2 Maximum Speed (Note) For a test-driving of the motor, increase 1500 r/min
M3 Maximum Speed values so that they are longer than your
machinery design values. If the specified time
F07 Acceleration Time 1 (Note) 5.00 s
is short, the inverter may not run the motor
F08 Deceleration Time 1 (Note) properly. 5.00 s
3-95
For motors except Fuji VG motor
To use motors except a Fuji VG motor when their motor parameters to be set to function codes are
known, perform auto-tuning to automatically configure them.
Configure the function codes as listed below according to the motor ratings and your machinery design
values. The motor ratings are printed on the motor's nameplate. For your machinery design values, ask
system designers about them.
After configuring the function codes, perform motor parameter auto-tuning (H01 = 3 or 4).
Codes."
Function
Name Function code data Factory default
code
0: Vector control for IM
A01 M2 Drive Control with speed sensor
with speed sensor
37: Others
P02 M1 Selection (No modification is required for M2 or Motor to be applied
M3.)
P28 M1 Pulse Resolution
Match the specifications of the PG to be
A30 M2 Pulse Resolution 1024
used.
A130 M3 Pulse Resolution
A31 M2 Thermistor Type 0: No thermistor 1: NTC thermistor
F04 M1 Rated Speed
A05 M2 Rated Speed 1500 r/min
A105 M3 Rated Speed
Rated voltage of nominal applied
F05 M1 Rated Voltage
motors
A04 M2 Rated Voltage
80 V
P03 M1 Rated Capacity Capacity of nominal applied motors
Motor ratings
A02 M2 Rated Capacity (printed on the nameplate of the motor)
0.00 kW
A102 M3 Rated Capacity
Rated current of nominal applied
P04 M1 Rated Current
motors
A03 M2 Rated Current
0.01 A
P05 M1 Poles
A07 M2 Poles 4 poles
A107 M3 Poles
F03 M1 Maximum Speed Machinery design values
A06 M2 Maximum Speed 1500 r/min
(Note) For a test-driving of the motor, increase
A106 M3 Maximum Speed values so that they are longer than your
F07 Acceleration Time 1 (Note) machinery design values. If the specified time 5.00 s
properly.
F08 Deceleration Time 1 (Note) 5.00 s
For the motor parameter auto-tuning procedure (H01 = 3 or 4), refer to Chapter 4, Section 4.3.5
"H Codes."
Function
code
3: Auto tuning with motor stopped
H01 Tuning Selection 0: Disable
4: Auto tuning with motor rotating
Performing motor parameter auto-tuning (H01 = 3 or 4) automatically changes the data of

function codes P06 through P11 and P15 through P21 for M1, A08 through A13 and A17
through A23 for M2, and A108 through A113 and A117 through A123 for M3. Be careful
with this data change.
After tuning, be sure to perform the full save function (H02 = 1) to save the tuned data into the
inverter.
3-96
3.5.3.2 Vector control for IM without speed sensor

Under this control, the inverter estimates the motor speed based on the inverter's output voltage and
current to use the estimated speed for speed control. In addition, it controls the motor current and
motor torque with quick response and high accuracy under vector control. No PG (pulse generator) is
required.
The desired response can be obtained by adjusting the control constants (PI constants) and using the
Chap. 3
speed regulator (PI controller).
Applying "vector control without speed sensor" requires auto-tuning regardless of the motor type.
(Even driving a Fuji VG motor exclusively designed for vector control requires auto-tuning.)


Configure the function codes as listed below and perform motor parameter auto-tuning (H01 = 2)
Codes."
Function
code
A01 M2 Drive Control 0: Vector control for IM
with speed sensor
with speed sensor
37: Others
M3.)
A31 M2 PG Pulse Resolution 1: NTC thermistor 1: NTC thermistor
F03 M1 Thermistor Type
A06 M2 Thermistor Type Machinery design values 1500 r/min
A106 M3 Thermistor Type (Note) For a test-driving of the motor, increase
F07 M2 Maximum Speed machinery design values. If the specified time 5.00 s
M3 Maximum Speed
properly.
F08 Acceleration Time 1 (Note) 5.00 s
For the motor parameter auto-tuning procedure (H01 = 2), refer to Chapter 4, Section 4.3.5 "H
Codes."
Function
code
H01 Tuning Selection 2: Auto-tuning (R1, Lσ) 0: Disable
Performing motor parameter auto-tuning (H01 = 2) automatically changes the data of

function codes P06 and P07 for M1, A08 and A09 for M2, and A108 and A109 for M3. Be
careful with this data change.
inverter.
3-97
Configure the function codes as listed below and perform motor parameter auto-tuning (H01 = 3 or 4)
Codes."
Function
code
A01 M2 Drive Control 0: Vector control for IM with speed sensor
with speed sensor
37: Others
M3.)
F04 M1 Rated Speed
A105 M3 Rated Speed
A04 Rated voltage of nominal applied
M2 Rated Voltage
A104 motors
M3 Rated Voltage
P03 M1 Rated Capacity Motor ratings
A02 M2 Rated Capacity Capacity of nominal applied motors
(printed on the nameplate of the motor)
A03 Rated current of nominal applied
M2 Rated Current
A103 motors
M3 Rated Current
P05 M1 Poles
A107 M3 Poles
F07 Acceleration Time 1 (Note) machinery design values. If the specified time 5.00 s
F08 Deceleration Time 1 (Note) properly. 5.00 s
For the motor parameter auto-tuning procedure (H01 = 3 or 4), refer to Chapter 4, Section 4.3.5
"H Codes."
Functio
n Name Function code data Factory default
code
3: Auto tuning with motor stopped
H01 Tuning Selection 0: Disable
4: Auto tuning with motor rotating
Performing motor parameter auto-tuning (H01 = 3 or 4) automatically changes the data of

function codes P06 through P11 and P15 through P21 for M1, A08 through A13 and A17
through A23 for M2, and A108 through A113 and A117 through A123 for M3. Be careful
with this data change.
inverter.
3-98
3.5.3.3 Vector control for PMSM with speed sensor and magnetic pole
position sensor
Under this control, the inverter detects the motor's rotational position, speed and magnetic pole
position according to feedback signals sent from the speed sensor and magnetic pole position sensor
for speed control. In addition, it decomposes the motor drive current into the exciting and torque
current components, and controls each of components in vector.
Chap. 3
The desired response can be obtained by adjusting the control constants (PI constants) with the speed
regulator (PI controller).
(A recommended motor for this control is Fuji GNF2 series exclusively designed for vector control.)

For Fuji GNF2 motor exclusively designed for vector control
machinery ones. For details, contact your Fuji Electric representative.
Codes."
Function
code
P01 M1 Drive Control 3: Vector control for PMSM 0: Vector control for IM
A01 M2 Drive Control with speed sensor and magnetic pole with speed sensor
A101 M3 Drive Control position sensor 5: V/f control for IM
37: Others
M3.)
A30 M2 PG Pulse Resolution 1024 1024
A31 M2 Thermistor Type 1: NTC thermistor 1: NTC thermistor
o09 M1 ABS Signal Input Definition Specify the absolute encoder signal
A59 M2 ABS Signal Input Definition interface according to the PG
A159 M3 ABS Signal Input Definition specifications.
For GNF2 motors, set the function code 0
data to "1."
1: 3 bits (terminals F0, F1 and F2)
U, V, W phase interface
o10 M1 Magnetic Pole Position Sensor
Offset 0.0 to 359.9
A60 M2 Magnetic Pole Position Sensor (0.0° to 359.9° CCW)
0000
Offset Use the function code to adjust the
A160 M3 Magnetic Pole Position Sensor magnetic pole position.
Offset
o11 M1 Saliency Ratio (%Xq/%Xd)
1.000 to 3.000
A61 M2 Saliency Ratio (%Xq/%Xd) 1.000
Specify the saliency ratio of PMSM.
A161 M3 Saliency Ratio (%Xq/%Xd)
M1 Maximum Speed Machinery design values
F03 M2 Maximum Speed (Note) For a test-driving of the motor, increase 1500 r/min
F07 Acceleration time 1 (Note) machinery design values. If the specified time is 5.00 s
short, the inverter may not run the motor
F08 Deceleration time 1 (Note) properly. 5.00 s
Since vector control for a Fuji GNF2 motor with speed sensor uses motor parameters, the
following conditions should be satisfied; otherwise, full control performance may not be
obtained.
- A single motor should be connected per inverter.
- Motor parameters are properly configured.
3-99
Be sure to adjust the magnetic pole position (see below for the adjustment procedure):
- when the inverter runs for the first time after purchase
- after replacement of a motor, PG or inverter
Running the inverter with the magnetic pole position (o10, A60, A160) not adjusted or with the position
deviated greatly from the true value could run the motor in the opposite direction or out of control in the worst
case.
■ Adjusting the magnetic pole position

When the magnetic pole position has been adjusted at the time of shipment as requested by the user, no
adjustment is required. When the inverter is shipped without adjustment (o10 = 0.0) or a PG is
mounted or replaced at the site, check and adjust the magnetic pole position using the procedure given
below.
Manual adjustment procedure

z Configure the following parameters beforehand.
- E69 (Terminal [Ao1] Function) : 26 (U phase voltage)
- E70 (Terminal [Ao2] Function) : 39 (Magnetic pole position signal SMP)
- E84 (Ao1-5 Filter Setting) : 0.000 s (Cancel filter)
z Rotate the motor shaft by hand to check that the positional relationship between the waveforms on
Ao1 and Ao2 is as shown below. If the waveforms are greatly misaligned, adjust the data of function
code o10 to align the waveforms as shown below.
Figure 3.5-5 Adjustment of Magnetic Pole Position
Wrong connection of motor power wires or encoder wires causes a PG alarm.
3-100
3.5.3.4 V/f control for IM

Under this control, the inverter drives a motor with the voltage and frequency according to the V/f
pattern specified by function codes.
Chap. 3
machinery ones.
codes -- Menu #1 "DATA SET."

Function
code
A01 M2 Drive Control 5: V/f control for IM with speed sensor
P02 M1 Selection Motor to be applied Motor to be applied
1: NTC thermistor
A31 M2 Thermistor Type 1: NTC thermistor
(Specify the thermistor as needed.)
F04 M1 Rated Speed
A105 M3 Rated Speed
F05 M1 Rated Voltage Rated voltage of nominal applied
motors
Motor ratings
A04 M2 Rated Voltage (printed on the nameplate of the motor) 80 V
P33 M1 Maximum Output Voltage Three-phase 200 V class series:
A53 M2 Maximum Output Voltage 200 (V)
A153 M3 Maximum Output Voltage Thee-phase 400 V class series:
400 (V)
F07 Acceleration time 1 (Note) machinery design values. If the specified time 5.00 s
F08 Deceleration time 1 (Note) properly. 5.00 s
P35 M1 Torque Boost 2.0 (For constant torque load)
A55 M2 Torque Boost (Note) In applications requiring a starting
A155 M3 Torque Boost 0.0 (Auto torque boost)
torque, adjust the torque boost (P35, A55,
A155) within the range from 2.0 to 20.0.)
3-101
In applications requiring a starting torque, adjust the torque boost (P35, A55, A155) within the range
from 2.0 to 20.0, or perform motor parameter auto-tuning (H01 = 2) and then set the torque boost (P31,
A55, A155) to 0.0 (auto torque boost).
Function
code
P01 M1 Drive Control
A01 M2 Drive Control 5: V/f control for IM 0: Vector control for IM
A101 M3 Drive Control
37: Others
P02 M1 Selection Motor to be applied
(No modification is required for M2 or M3.)
F04 M1 Rated Speed
A105 M3 Rated Speed
Rated voltage of nominal applied
motors
80 V
Three-phase 200 V class series:
P33 M1 Maximum Output Voltage
200 (V)
A53 M2 Maximum Output Voltage
Thee-phase 400 V class series:
A153 M3 Maximum Output Voltage
Motor ratings 400 (V)
(printed on the nameplate of the motor) Capacity of nominal applied
P03 M1 Rated Capacity
motors
0.00 kW
Rated current of nominal applied
motors
0.01 A
P05 M1 Poles
A107 M3 Poles
F03 M1 Maximum Speed
A06 M2 Maximum Speed Machinery design values 1500 r/min
A106 M3 Maximum Speed (Note) For a test-driving of the motor, increase
values so that they are longer than your machinery
F07 Acceleration time 1 (Note) design values. If the specified time is short, the 5.00 s
inverter may not run the motor properly.
F08 Deceleration time 1 (Note) 5.00 s
P35 M1 Torque Boost
A55 M2 Torque Boost 2.0 (For constant torque load) 0.0 (Auto torque boost)
A155 M3 Torque Boost
P06 M1 %R1 Depends on the rated capacity.
A08 M2 %R1
To use the auto torque boost function (P35, 0.00%
A108 M3 %R1
A55, A155 = 0.0), be sure to perform motor
P07 M1 %X parameter auto-tuning (H01 =2). Depends on the rated capacity.
A09 M2 %X
0.00%
A109 M3 %X
3-102
For the motor parameter auto-tuning procedure (H01 = 2), refer to Chapter 4, Section 4.3.5 "H
Codes."
Function
code
H01 Tuning Selection 2: Auto-tuning (R1, Lσ) 0: Disable
Chap. 3
Performing motor parameter auto-tuning (H01 = 2) automatically changes the data of
function codes P06 and P07 for M1, A08 and A09 for M2, and A108 and A109 for M3. Be
careful with this data change.

inverter.
3.5.4 Running the inverter for operation check
• If the user configures the function codes without completely understanding this Instruction Manual and the
FRENIC-VG User's Manual, the motor may rotate with a torque or at a speed not permitted for the machine.
• When making a test run with a permanent magnet synchronous motor (PMSM), be sure to observe the test
run procedure given in Section 3.5.4.2. If wiring between the inverter and motor or PG wiring is wrong, or
the magnetic pole position offset is improper, the motor may run out of control.
An accident or injuries may result.
After completion of preparations for a test run as described above, start running the inverter for motor
operation check using the following procedure.
If any abnormality is found in the inverter or motor, immediately stop operation and investigate the cause
referring to Chapter 13, "TROUBLESHOOTING."
3.5.4.1 Test run procedure for induction motor (IM)

(1) Turn the power ON and check that the reference speed is 0 r/min and it is blinking on the LED
monitor.
(2) Set a low reference speed such as 100 r/min, using / keys. (Check that the speed is
blinking on the LED monitor.)
(3) To run the motor in the forward direction, press the key; to run it in the reverse direction, press
the key. (Check that the speed is lit on the LED monitor.)
(4) Press the key to stop the motor.
< Check points during a test run >

• Check that the motor is running in the forward direction when it is driven with the key.
• Check that the motor is running in the reverse direction when it is driven with the key.
• Check for smooth rotation without motor humming or excessive vibration.
• Check for smooth acceleration and deceleration.
When no abnormality is found, press the or key again to start driving the motor, then increase
the reference speed using / keys. Check the above points again.
3-103
3.5.4.2 Test run procedure for permanent magnet synchronous motor
(PMSM)
[ 1 ] Before proceeding with a test run
This section provides a test run procedure for the configuration consisting of the FRENIC-VG, the
interface card for PMPG drive (OPC-VG1-PMPG), and a PMSM using a UVW phase detection PG
(including GNF2 motor).
For a test run using a PMSM, it is recommended that the motor be disconnected from the equipment
for testing it by itself. If it is impossible to drive the motor by itself due to the equipment, however,
make a test run under the conditions that cause no problems even if the motor runs continuously in one
direction (forward or reverse).
[ 2 ] Preparation for a test run

(1) Before turning the inverter power ON, make checking given in Section 3.5.1 "Checking Prior to
Powering On."
(2) Check that wiring of the encoder (PG) is correct.
(For the connection diagram, refer to Chapter 2, Section 2.3.1.2 "In combination with a dedicated
PMSM (GNF2 type).")
Wrong wiring may break the PG..

If the inverter is powered on with wrong wiring, disconnect the PG signal wires from the inverter, keep only
the PG powered on via the PGP and PGM, and then check that each signal is correctly output with an
oscilloscope or recorder.
(3) Turn the power ON, make a note of the current configuration of all function codes, and then
change the function code data as listed in Table 3.5-1.
(4) Check that the magnetic pole position offset (o10) is set to the previously specified value or
manually adjusted value.
Replacing the motor or encoder requires adjustment of the magnetic pole position offset again.
Table 3.5-1 Configuration for Test Run of PMSM
Current configuration before test run

Function
Name (Values given below are factory Configuration for test run
code
defaults)
F01 Speed 0 The current configuration 0 0: Enable the and keys on
Command N1 of function codes differs the keypad (Digital speed
depending upon the setting)
Operation equipment specifications. 0: Enable the , and keys
F02 0 0
Method Make a note of the on the keypad to run or stop the
current configuration and motor.
then change the function
F03 Maximum 1500 750 r/min Set about half of the current value
code data as shown at the
Speed M1 r/min (before test run).
right.
F40 Torque Limiter 0 3 3: Torque current limit
Mode 1 (Disable)
F44 Torque Limiter 150% 10% If motor power wires or encoder
Level 1 wires are wrongly connected, the
motor may run out of control,
breaking the equipment. To
suppress abrupt acceleration at the
time of runaway, decrease the
torque limiter level.
E45 Speed 00 01 Speed disagreement alarm: Enable
Disagreement (Disable) Power supply phase loss detection:
Alarm Disable
Note 1: If the moment of inertia of the coupled equipment is large, the motor may not run at a test run. If it happens,
adjust the torque limiter level 1 properly.
Note 2: After a test run, revert the function code data to the previous values.
3-104
[ 3 ] Test run
(1) Turn the power ON and check that the reference speed is 0
r/min and it is blinking on the LED monitor.
(2) Set a low reference speed such as 100 r/min, using / Ｎ＊＝×××××．×ｒ／ｍ
Ｎ＝×××××．×ｒ／ｍ
keys. (Check that the speed is blinking on the LED monitor.) ｆ＊＝××××．×Ｈｚ
(3) Set the maximum speed (F03) to 750 r/min. ＴＲＱ＝××××．×％
Chap. 3
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥＳＨＩＦT １
(4) Shift the LCD monitor to Menu #3 "OPR MNTR" to show the
speed (N*, N).
(5) To run the motor in the forward direction, press the key; to run it in the reverse direction, press

the key.
Check that:
• The speed on the LED monitor comes ON instead of blinking
• The motor accelerates up to the specified speed.
• There is no abnormal discrepancy between the reference speed (*N) and the detected speed (N)
shown on the LCD monitor.
(6) Press the key to stop the motor.
(7) If no alarm occurs or no problem is found in motor running, increase the speed with the /
keys.
(8) Turn the run command OFF.
< Check points during a test run >

• Check that the motor is running in the forward direction when it is driven with the key.
• Check that the motor is running in the reverse direction when it is driven with the key.
• Check for smooth rotation without motor humming or excessive vibration.
• Check for smooth acceleration and deceleration.
When no abnormality is found, press the or key again to start driving the motor, then increase
the reference speed using / keys. Check the above points during a test run.
[ 4 ] Troubleshooting for motor abnormality

If any of the following abnormalities is found during a test run, follow the troubleshooting procedure
in Table 3.5.-2.
• Turning the inverter ON triggers a p9 alarm.
• Entering a run command triggers a p9 or er9 alarm.
• Entering a run command does not run the motor or increase the speed.
Table 3.5-2 Troubleshooting for Motor Abnormality
Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures

(1) Setting of torque limiter level 1 Check the setting of the torque limiter level 1 (F44).
too small relative to the load. Î Increase the F44 data in increments of 5%.
(2) Wrong wiring between the Check the wiring between the inverter and motor.
inverter and motor. Î Correct the wiring.
(3) Wrong PG wiring. Check the wiring of the PG.
Î Correct the wiring.
(4) PMSM magnetic pole position Check the magnetic pole position.
not matched. Î Adjust the magnetic pole position (o10, A60, A160), referring to "
Adjusting the magnetic pole position" in Section 3.5.3.3.
3-105
3.5.5 Selecting a speed command source
A speed command source is the keypad ( / keys) by factory default. This section provides the
speed command setting procedures using the speed command sources of the keypad, external
potentiometer, and speed selection terminal commands.
3.5.5.1 Setting up a speed command from the keypad

Follow the procedure given below.
(1) Configure the function codes as listed below.
Function
code
F01 Speed Command Source N1 0: Keypad ( / keys) 0
• When the inverter is in Programming or Alarm mode, speed command setting with /
keys is disabled. To enable it, switch to Running mode.
• If any of higher priority speed command sources (multistep speed commands and speed
commands via communications link) is specified, the inverter may run at an unexpected
speed.
(2) Press the / key to display the current speed command on the LED monitor. The least
significant digit blinks.
(3) To change the speed command, press the / key again.
When you start specifying the speed command with the / key, the least significant digit on
the display blinks; that it, the cursor lies in the least significant digit. Holding down the /
key changes data in the least significant digit and generates a carry, while the cursor remains in
the least significant digit.
(4) To save the new setting into the inverter's memory, press the key.
3.5.5.2 Setting up a speed command with an external potentiometer

Function
code
1: Analog voltage input to terminal [12]
F01 Speed Command Source N1 0
(0 to ±10 V)
(2) Connect an external potentiometer to terminals [11] through [13] of the inverter.
(3) Rotate the external potentiometer to apply voltage to terminal [12] for a speed command input.
For precautions in wiring, refer to Section 3.3 "Mounting and Wiring the Inverter."
3-106
3.5.5.3 Setting up a speed command with multistep speed selection

Function
code
Chap. 3
0, 1, 2, 3: Multistep speed 1 to 15
E01 to E14 Terminal [X1] to [X14] Functions 0
(0: SS1, 1: SS2, 2: SS4, 3: SS8)
0 to 30000 r/min,
C05 to C19 Multistep speed 1 to 15 0.00 to 100.00%, or 0

0.0 to 999.9 m/m
Terminals [X11] to [X14] are available only when an optional OPC-VG1-DIOA is mounted.
Assign signals SS1, SS2, SS4 and SS8 to four out of digital input terminals [X1] to [X14] by four
out of function codes E01 to E14 (data = 0, 1, 2 and 3). Specify multistep speed commands with
C05 to C19.
Turning digital signals SS1, SS2, SS4 and SS8 ON/OFF selectively switches the multistep speed
commands specified beforehand.
Combination of input signals

3 2 1 0 Selected speed command
SS8 SS4 SS2 SS1
OFF OFF OFF ON C05 (Multistep speed 1)
OFF OFF ON OFF C06 (Multistep speed 2)
OFF OFF ON ON C07 (Multistep speed 3)
OFF ON OFF OFF C08 (Multistep speed 4)
Function codes
OFF ON OFF ON C09 (Multistep speed 5) C05 to C19
OFF ON ON OFF C10 (Multistep speed 6)
OFF ON ON ON C11 (Multistep speed 7) Data setting range:
0 to 30000 r/min
ON OFF OFF OFF C12 (Multistep speed 8)
or
ON OFF OFF ON C13 (Multistep speed 9)
0.00 to 100.00%
ON OFF ON OFF C14 (Multistep speed 10)
or
ON OFF ON ON C15 (Multistep speed 11)
0.0 to 999.9 m/m
ON ON OFF OFF C16 (Multistep speed 12)
ON ON OFF ON C17 (Multistep speed 13)
ON ON ON OFF C18 N-14/CREP1
ON ON ON ON C19 N-15/CREP2
(2) Connect a multistep speed switch to an X terminal and [CM].

(3) Turn the multistep speed switch ON (short-circuit). The combination of those input signals
switches a multistep speed command.
Enabling a multistep speed command with a multistep speed switch (ON between X terminal
and [CM]) disables the speed command source N1 specified by F01.
3-107
3.5.6 Selecting a run command source
A run command source is the keypad ( / / keys) by factory default.
3.5.6.1 Setting up a run command from the keypad

Function
code
F02 Operation Method 0: Keypad ( / / keys) 0: Keypad ( / / keys)
(2) Press the key to run the motor in the forward direction. Press the key to stop it.
(3) Press the key to run the motor in the reverse direction. Press the key to stop it.
3.5.6.2 Setting up a run command with digital input signals (terminals [FWD]
and [REV])
Function
code
F02 Operation Method 1: External digital input signal 0: Keypad ( / / keys)
If terminal [FWD] and [REV] are ON, the F02 data cannot be changed. First turn those
terminals OFF and then change the F02 data.
(2) Connect the run forward switch between terminals [FWD] and [CM] and the run reverse switch
between [REV] and [CM].
Make sure that the SINK/SOURCE slide switch (SW1) is turned to the SINK position. If
SW1 is in the SOURCE position, the inverter cannot run the motor.
(3) Turn the run forward switch or run reverse switch ON (short-circuit) to run the motor in the
forward or reverse direction, respectively.
3-108
FRENIC- VG
4
Chapter 4
CONTROL AND OPERATION
This chapter provides the main block diagrams for the control logic of the FRENIC-VG series of inverters. It
also contains overview tables of function codes and details of function codes.
Contents
4.1 Block Diagrams for Control Logic ............................................................................................................. 4-1

4.1.1 Operation Command ........................................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.2 Speed Command Selection Section..................................................................................................... 4-2
4.1.3 Acceleration/deceleration Calculation, Speed Limiting, and Position Control Input Section............. 4-3
4.1.4 Motor Speed/Line Speed Detection .................................................................................................... 4-4
4.1.5 Pulse Train Command Input Section and Position Detection Section................................................. 4-5
4.1.6 Speed Control and Torque Command Section .................................................................................... 4-6
4.1.7 Torque Limit, Torque Current Command, and Magnetic-flux Command Section .............................. 4-7
4.1.8 Current Control and Vector Control Section ....................................................................................... 4-8
4.1.9 PID Calculation Section...................................................................................................................... 4-9
4.1.10 Load Adaptive Control Section ......................................................................................................... 4-10
4.1.11 Motor Temperature Detection Section .............................................................................................. 4-11
4.1.12 Function Selection Digital Input ....................................................................................................... 4-12
4.1.13 Function Selection Digital Output/Fault Output ............................................................................... 4-13
4.1.14 Function Selection Analog Input/Output........................................................................................... 4-14
4.1.15 Link Command Function Selection................................................................................................... 4-15
4.1.16 Enabling to Write to/Recording Function Codes............................................................................... 4-16
4.2 Function Code Tables................................................................................................................................ 4-17
4.2.1 Function Code Groups and Function Codes...................................................................................... 4-17
4.2.2 About the Contents of Column Headers in Function Code Tables.................................................... 4-18
4.2.3 Function Code Tables........................................................................................................................ 4-19
4.2.4 Data Format List ............................................................................................................................... 4-61
4.2.4.1 Data Type 0 to 13 ...................................................................................................................... 4-61
4.2.4.2 Data Type 12 to 145 .................................................................................................................. 4-61
4.3 Details of Function Codes......................................................................................................................... 4-78
4.3.1 F codes (Fundamental Functions) ..................................................................................................... 4-78
4.3.2 E codes (Extension Terminal Functions)......................................................................................... 4-120
4.3.3 C codes (Control Functions) ........................................................................................................... 4-193
4.3.4 P codes (Motor Parameter Functions) ............................................................................................. 4-199
4.3.5 H codes (High Performance Functions) .......................................................................................... 4-214
4.3.6 A codes (Alternative Motor Functions)........................................................................................... 4-264
4.3.7 o codes (Option Functions) ............................................................................................................. 4-267
4.3.8 L codes (Lift Functions) .................................................................................................................. 4-275
4.1
LOCAL 4.1.1
6 HLD
communications
Enable
Enable 3-wire
24 LE
operation
STOP1 ,2, 3
54 STOP3
53 STOP2
52 STOP1
7 BX
link
Coast to a stop
Keypad
STOP
Monitor Operation method Link operation
I/O check F02 H30
REMOTE FWD Forward
Terminal command =1 =0,1 ON OFF AND Hold rotation
FWD command
=2,3 OFF ON
LOCAL Keypad FWD =0
Monitor
I/O check
COM (link) DX+ Integrated RS-485
S06 Commands are M13 Monitor
DX- 2 UPAC SW disconnected
Option cards (FWD) Monitor when turned on Keypad
1 simultaneously
Final run
OPC-VG1-TL command RUN/STOP
I/O check
OPC-VG1-SX I/O check
Operation Command
Fixed priority AND

Field bus M129 M14
Run command
(Via communi- Running status
cations link)
4-1
OPC-VG1-UPAC Forward rotation command from UPAC
OPC-VG1-SIU
Monitor Operation method
I/O check F02

REMOTE Reverse
REV
Terminal command =1 =0,1 ON OFF AND Hold rotation
REV command
Block Diagrams for Control Logic
=2,3 OFF ON
LOCAL Keypad =0
REV
COM (link) DX+ Integrated RS-485

S06 If you enter FWD and REV commands simultaneously, commands will be cancelled and the motor
DX- 2
will decelerate to stop.
Option cards (REV)
1 - If an X terminal does not assign the operation selection through link [LE], "ON" is assumed to it.
OPC-VG1-TL
OPC-VG1-SX Fixed priority - Commands related to link operation have the following priority.
Field bus Use function S06 for an operation command.
1. TL, SX, and field bus
2. Integrated RS-485
OPC-VG1-UPAC - Commands from the UPAC and SI option will be ANDed with other commands.
OPC-VG1-SIU Reverse rotation command from UPAC
States of all
switches indicate
factory setting.
4.1 Block Diagrams for Control Logic
CONTROL AND OPERATION Chap. 4

4.1.2 Speed Command Selection Section
Ready for jogging

10 JOG
KEYPAD
operation
Select speed
command N2/N1
11 N2/N1
Speed override Ai
13 N-OR ×
Auxiliary speed Ai
setting 1
1 AUX-N1
3 SS8
2 SS4
1 SS2
0 SS1
Select multistep
speed
24 LE
Enable
communications
link
Select speed
command N2/N1
11 N2/N1
4-2
4.1.3
Starting Speed
15 CLR
Clear ACC/DEC to zero
28 LOCK
36 BPS
processor
27 SYC
21 IVS
Bypass ACC/DEC
Lock at zero speed

2 AUX-N2
30 N-LIM
Cancel speed limiter
Synchronous operation
inverse operation
(UP/DOWN control, Enable)

Auxiliary speed setting 2
optional function)
54 STOP3
Switch normal/
command (PG (PR)

Operation command Holding time Load
block diagram (See p.4-5.)
Compensating
Speed Control Internal speed
Ai
F24
Value =0,3,4,5 reference
Forward Reverse [LD-NLIM]
rotation rotation Speed
command command F23 ON Ⅶ
S-curve ＋ OFF OFF 0
acceleration/ ＋＋＋ Speed
(See p.4-2.) Ⅰ Ⅱ
deceleration Limiter
calculation ＋ =1,2,6
＋ OFF To ASR
×-1 7,8,9
(See p.4-6.)
UPAC speed ON ON (×-1)
auxiliary setting F76 Mode
0 r/min Monitor
Reference speed 2 F77 Level 1 Ⅳ
(before ACC/DEC M50 Speed Command N1 F01
calculation) F78 Level 2 Linear position control
Reference Speed Command N2 C25 Synchronizing command Monitor
Speed 2 Speed limit in (See p.4-5.)
PID calculation output M51
[PIDOUT] speed control
2 N-REF2 =2 Reference
Speed 3
4-3
PID Control
Monitor (Speed command selection)
H27
I/O check States of all
PARA 1, 2, 3, 4
Gain
Acceleration/deceleration switches indicate
Position Control Input Section
Decelerate at JOG
and S-curve switching H55 factory setting.
deceleration time 4 Position - Position
53 STOP2 Ⅸ detection control
∧ Position +
KEYPAD operation detection Hold
STOP (See p.4-5.)
Jogging operation OR circuit
10 JOG
Speed reference = 0%
ASR, ACC/DEC Zero Speed Control AND Lock at zero speed

4 RT1 time selection
28 LOCK
5 RT2
Acceleration/
deceleration
through link - Position control function has the following priorities.
(a) Linear position control (pulse train synchronized control, optional for OPC-VG1-PG)
S08 F07 C46 C56 C66 C35
COM (link) (b) Simplified position control (zero speed locking control)
S09 Over F08 C47 C57 C67 C36
writing - You can use both the KEYPAD panel and the [JOG] on the terminal box to switch to the jogging mode.
F69 C48 C58 C68 C37 - The displayed value for the speed control is the one before the acceleration/deceleration calculation.
OPC-VG1-UPAC
F70 C49 C59 C69 C38 - The COM (link) system is displayed as COM (link) .
OPC-VG1-SIU
Acceleration/ Acceleration/ Acceleration/ Acceleration/
Writing into S08 and S09 does not depend on H30 and [LE].
Acceleration time/ F67 deceleration 2 deceleration 3 deceleration 4 deceleration They always overwrite F07 and F08.
deceleration time JOG
UPAC F68 When you use the link, set [RT1] and [RT2] to enable "Acceleration/deceleration 1".
SW Acceleration/
deceleration 1
Acceleration/deceleration Calculation, Speed Limiting, and

TG MCA,OPC-VG1-FV Vector control for
H53="0" Line speed
induction machine with H53
Line TG
4.1.4
PG (Line speed control) Feedback selection
Detect line speed =1
Ai 11 LINE-N UPAC, SI
Line PG (Line speed input) Ao
Speed detection =2 Detected line speed
×
PG OPC-VG1-PG (LD) calculation
Monitor Digital line speed detection Monitor Monitor

PG (LD) o06 o07 Detection pulse correction 1 KEYPAD panel LED
I/O check =3 monitor
Input Pulse PG pulses o08 Detection pulse correction 2 5 LINE-N±
LD Detected line speed
M178 M107
Vector control for induction M1 M2 M3 Drive Control

machine with PG External PG Correction Factor P29 A51 A151 M1 M2 M3
Monitor Pulse Resolution P28 A30 A130 P01 A01 A101
States of all
I/O check switches indicate
12 M-CH2 factory setting.
SD Select motor 2,motor 3
13 M-CH3
PG Pulse Output Selection
Motor selection
E29 =0 =1 =2 =0 =1 =2 (See p.4-6.)
(M1, M2, M3)
Digital speedometer Pulse output (See p.4-7.)
="0"-"6" F79
FA Divider (See p.4-8.)
1500 FB circuit
Standard Speed detection
4-4
integration =0 =0 ≠2
5V and 12V PA Speed detection
complementary PG calculation
Ⅲ
Ao
output PB
Monitor Detected speed 1
=2 (Speed indicator,
5V line driver SD SPGT KEYPAD panel
PG OPC-VG1-SPGT prioritization prioritization LED monitor one-way deflection)
output Detected Speed
Motor Speed/Line Speed Detection
0 N-FB1+
17-bit M06
OPC-VG1-PG (SD) 1 N-FB1±
serial =1 Speed setting 1
OPC-VG1-SPGT =4 Detected speed 1
Vector control for sensor less Speed estimation
UPAC, SIU (Speed indicator,
FA+ induction machine calculation
(Speed setting 1) two-way deflection)
FA- Divider Simulated operation Torque
Pulse output UPAC (SW)
FB+ circuit mode reference value
FB- OFF - You can select a switch on the OPC-VG1-PG card to switch between motor speed
M1 M2 M3 Machine =2
model detection and line speed detection.
Dividing Ratio for FA, FB Pulse Output H51 H52 H127
calculation (a) PG (SD): Controls speed by detecting pulse train to calculate speed.
(Numerator) E109
Load inertia (b) PG (LD): Controls line speed by detecting digital line speed.
UPAC (simulated speed)
(Denominator) E110 ON
- The speed detection and speed estimation are invalid for V/f control.
" = 0～2 " - When you apply an analog frequency such as TG output as line speed, use FUJI's
Speed detection =3
OPC-VG1-PMPG FV converter board to convert it into voltage for Ai [LINE-N] input.
calculation
- The pulse output (divider circuit) is equal magnification output.
" = 6" Vector control for synchro-
OPC-VG1-SPGT
nized machine with PG
o09
4.1.5 Pulse Train Command Input Section and Position Detection

Section
Chap. 4
4-5
4.1.6
command 2/1
Link
COM (link)
5 TB-REF
Torque bias level
communications link
Enable
Hold Ai torque bias
(Torque command)
Select PID torque bias
79 TB-PID
51 H-TB
24 LE
31 H41-CCL
Cancel H41
37 TB1
38 TB2
Select torque bias
DX+ Integrated RS-485 operation
DX- Option cards Fixed priority H30
OPC-VG1-TL Torque Command Source H41
2
OPC-VG1-SX =1,3 ON [PIDOUT]
Field bus 1 =5 Torque Bias
S02 PID calculation
output
=4 Ai F47 Torque Bias T1
Torque
=0,2 OFF bias hold F48 Torque Bias T2
=3
OPC-VG1-DIB
F49 Torque Bias T3
REMOTE =2
OPC-VG1-DIA 0%
Ai =1
6 T-REF ＋ -1
Torque current ＋
command [PIDOUT]
＋＋ F46
ASR； Speed control system F/F gain PID calculation
Select droop Droop Control output Mechanical Loss
control
Rotation
39 DROOP H28 Monitor direction Compensation
OPC-VG1-UPAC Speed setting 4 F50 Torque Bias
UPAC SW UPAC SW Torque Bias
Startup Timer
×
OPC-VG1-SIU ON M130
4-6
Speed ASR input filter
command - ＋ =0 OFF
＋＋＋＋＋
Ⅱ ASR ＋＋ Ⅴ
(See p.4-3.) OFF ＋ Torque
- UPAC, SIU
Reference speed 4 (ASR input) Proportional gain ON command
3 N-REF4 (Torque ON
M01 UPAC SW (See p.4-7.)
command 1)
Detected speed 2 (ASR input) Reference
4 N-FB2± OFF
Speed Speed 4
detection Monitor ASR Switching
Time UPAC, SIU
Ⅲ UPAC,SIU
(Reference
C70 (Torque bias)
(See p.4-4.)
KEYPAD ∧ ASR detection filter Speed 4)
panel H46 Observer
operation STOP - ASR (Automatic Speed Regulator) and S-curve
=1,2
acceleration/deceleration functions switch
OR Load disturbance/
10 JOG I- Feed Input Detection Observer simultaneously.
P-gain filter filter vibration suppressing
constant forward calculation - Torque control and torque current control hold the
Speed Control and Torque Command Section
Select ASR and ACC/ gain observer

4 RT1 DEC time C30 C31 C32 C33 ASR-JOG ASR output to zero.
F79 Motor Selection (M1, M2, M3) - The observer becomes ineffective when you set the
5 RT2 motor selection to M3 (V/f control).
F61 F62 F63 F64 F65 ASR1
C40 C41 C42 C43 C44 ASR2 =0 H47 H49 H51 M1
C50 C51 C52 C53 C54 ASR3 =1 H48 H50 H52 M2 States of all
switches indicate
C60 C61 C62 C63 C64 ASR4 =2 H125 H126 H127 M3 factory setting.
12 M-CH2 ASR Feedforward Gain Compensation Load
gain
I-time
Select motor 2, 3 H94 Magnification Setting inertia
13 M-CH3
States of all
switches indicate
factory setting.
4.1.7
panel
- The COM (link) system is abbreviated as COM (link) . Note that it depends on H30
KEYPAD
operation
and [LE] as described in 4.2.6.
4 RT1
5 RT2
Ready for jogging

10 JOG
32 H42-CCL
Select ASR and
ACC/DEC time
(4 steps)
∧
Speed limiter STOP
Torque Limiter Level 1 Source F42 F43 Torque Limiter Level 2 Source under torque
Torque Current control
H42
Command Source
[PIDOUT] [PIDOUT] F76 Mode
PID calculation =5 PID calculation OR ASR
output output F77 Level 1 Output filter
COM (link) S10 =4 S11 COMS03
(link) S03 =4 Level 2
F78 C65 ASR4
REMOTE =3 DIB =3 C55 ASR3

DIB
REMOTE Speed
C60
OPC-VG1-DIA,DIB =2 Limiter C45 ASR2
=2 DIA DIA
[DIB] [DIA]
ASR4-P
Ai =1 F66 ASR1
3 TL-REF1 =1 4 TL-REF2 Monitor 7 IT-REF
Torque KEYPAD panel LED
Cancel H42 (Torque current command)

Torque Limiter Level 1 F44 =0 F45 Limiter monitor
Torque command C34 ASR-JOG
Command Section
Level 2
OFF display
OPC-VG1-UPAC UPAC torque limiter value 1 ON ON UPAC torque limiter value 2
M02 Torque command Notch Notch
OPC-VG1-SIU UPAC SW Torque Filter 1 Filter 2
UPAC SW Torque Command (Torque meter, two-
Command UPAC, SIU
Monitor way deflection) (Torque current H322 H325
Select torque limiter level 2/1 OFF ON 8 T-REF± command)
F51 Polarity H323 H326
35 TL2/TL1 9 T-REF+
selection H324 H327 (See p.4-8.)
UPAC, SIU
4-7
Torque Limiter Mode 1 ON Torque command ON
F40 (Torque Torque current
(Torque meter, one-
(See p.4-6.) command 2) =0 + command
Torque Limiter Mode 2 F41 way deflection)
Torque +
Ⅴ ÷ Ⅵ
limiter
Torque OFF OFF (M1motor)
UPAC, SIU UPAC SW ASR output
command (Torque filter
Cancel F40 (Torque limiter mode 1) command 2) UPAC SW UPAC, SIU
34 F40-CCL (Torque current
command)
Magnetic Flux Magnetic Flux F51 Polarity
H43
Magnetic-flux command Command Source Level at Light Load Torque Command
=3 F73 Monitor
COM (link) S04
UPAC, SIU
(Magnetic-flux Torque current command
Magnetic Flux Command Value H44 =2 (Torque ammeter, one-
command)
way deflection)
Ai ON (See p.4-8.) 6 IT-REF±
10 MF-REF =1
Magnetic-flux
Fixed filter reference 7 IT-REF+
φ Torque current command
=0
Ⅲ Ⅷ (Torque ammeter, two-
N way deflection)
Speed OFF
detection Pre-
UPAC SW Pre-excitation excitation
(See p.4-4.) (Initial level) F75
UPAC, SIU initial level Monitor Monitor
(Magnetic-flux KEYPAD panel LED KEYPAD panel LED
Pre-excitation monitor
command) F72 monitor
Mode Magnetic-flux Torque current
command display command display
Pre-excitation
(Duration) F74 M04 M03
33 H43-CCL Magnetic-flux Torque Current
Cancel H43 (Magnetic flux command) Command Command
Torque Limit, Torque Current Command, and Magnetic-flux

4.1.8
DC link bus voltage

13 V-DC
Coast to a stop
7 BX
Alarm relay output
30X
M1 Iron Loss Factor 1 P12
F37 Speed
M1 Iron Loss Factor 2 P13 Alarm
M1-ACR (P-gain) P26 P06 M1-%R1 Detection mode
F38 occurrence
L3/T
L2/S
L1/R
M1 Iron Loss Factor 3 P14 M1-ACR (I-time) P27 P07 M1-%X Zero speed
F39 control holding
Monitor time
Current KEYPAD panel Base
Ir* LED monitor OR
control section Voltage Sequence cutoff cutoff
decrease DC Link Bus Voltage
compensa- M21 Simulated operation
(See p.4-7.)
Φ* tion for P01
Torque Voltage
currentreference + + Vdc
+ + ACR Current detection
control + Vq reference
Ⅵ q axis Vector Vu Trapezoidal 6
- conversion wave conversion PWM
Magnetic- (torque) / 2/3
Vv
(See p.4-7.) output
fluxreference Id* d axis phase Vw On-delay
+ + (magnetic- conversion compensation
Ⅷ flux) Vd reference
Input power +
calculation + - + arrierg
k Φ* Voltage drop
compensa- Carrier frequency F26 enerato Main circuit
Input power tion r
× Monitor section
38 PWR-IN M1-%R1 P06
M1 Magnetic Exciting
Input power Saturation Factor
P15 to
Current Monitor Monitor
1 to 5 P19 M1-%X P07
(Motor output) Command U V W
Detected KEYPAD panel
4-8
12 PWR × × M1 Magnetic H112 to M147 Exciting LED monitor
Saturation Extension H118
Current Magnetic-flux Magnetic- Eq Induced Vq Vu
Coefficient 6 to 12 3/2 Voltage
Monitor Calculation flux voltage
(M1 only) M148 calculation
phase detection
M149 Ed calculation Vd conversi Vw
KEYPAD panel
LED monitor on/
Motor Output Iq Vector Iu
conversi Current
M10 P20 M1 Secondary Time Constant detection
Id on Iw
Speed
detection (See p.4-4.) Primary angular
Integra-
Ⅲ frequency ω1 reference tion θ*
M1 Slip Frequency (ω1) calculation
×
For driving P10 R2 Tempera-
Monitor correction ture Ｍ
Monitor Monitor For braking P11 calculation detection
F84 NTC
Input Watt- P24 M1 R2 Correction Factor 3
Current Control and Vector Control Section
Input Input Watt- Display 2+ 2 V2+V 2

Power hour Coefficient hour Data Iq Id thermistor
q d P22
for Input
M103 M115 Watt-hour M116 PG
Data P23
(See p.4-4.)
M1 R2 Correction Factor 1
- This block diagram is only for the vector control for an induction motor with a PG. The sensorless vector control M1 R2 Correction Factor 2 To motor
speeddetectionblock
uses induced voltage to estimate the speed. The synchronous motor driving does not include magnetic-flux diagram
Monitor Monitor Monitor
calculation.
KEYPAD panel KEYPAD panel KEYPAD panel
- The block diagram is simplified to show the state where the motor M1 is selected. Refer to the function code list to LED monitor LED monitor LED monitor
replace M1 with M2 or M3. Effective Output Effective Output Motor 16 TMP-M
Current Voltage Temperature
- The vector control converts from the fixed coordinate (U, V, W) to the rotation coordinate (d: magnetic-flux, q: Motor voltage
torque) in an instant and splits magnetic-flux and torque as in a DC machine to control torque. M11 M12 M22
11 V-AC
10 I-AC
Motor current
4.1.9
setting
KEYPAD
panel speed
PID output value
∧
40 PID-OUT
Cancel PID
Cancel PID control
components
20 KP/PID
PID correction gain
Enable PID FF
69 PID-CCL
17 PID-G
70 PID-FF
component
∨ Ai Ao
PID output inverse FUNC
changeover DATA
48 PID-INV
PID Control OR
(Mode selection） H20
=2
PID Command 0% PID Control PID Control
PID Control F/F
Filter Time Upper limit
(Command selection) (Mode selection)
Constant
-1 0%
H21 H101 H25 H20
Internal speed 100% PID output
command ＋ value (%)
=0 ＋＋ =1,2
O PID × PIDOUT
PID reference value Ai - =3
- -1
16 PID-REF =1
PID Calculation Section
PID Control H26 ＋

H22 P-action =0
Lower limit 0%
4-9
PID feedback 1 Ai =OFF
15 PID-FB H23 I-action 100% 0%
=ON H24 D-action
PID feedback Ai
amount 2 Display coefficient A F52 Coeffi- Maximum value
27 PID-FB2 cient A
Display coefficient B F53
Switch PID
Coeffi- Minimum value
feedback signals
cient B
78 PID-1/2
0% 100%
Process amount
States of all - Setting H20 (PID control, action selection) to zero holds the PID calculation to zero.
switches indicate Monitor
factory setting. - [PIDOUT] of PID output is used for individual controls. See corresponding block diagrams for details.
KEYPAD panel LED
Speed command when H27 "PID control (speed command selection)" is set to 1.
PID Command Value (%)
Auxiliary speed command when H27 "PID control (speed command selection)" is set to 2.
M108
Torque command when H41 "Torque command selection" is set to 5.
PID Feedback Amount (%)
Torque limiting when F42 or F43 "Torque limiter value (level 1) or (level 2) selection" is set to 5. M109
PID Output (%)
M110

4.1.10
71
Load adaptive control
30
Definition 2
H61
Cancel speed limiter
speed limit calculation

Reset completion of
Load adaptive control Load Adaptive Control
=1 parameter switching Definition 1
-1 = 1, 2, 3 ON
N* 0 H201 H60
Reference speed Winding up
(N*) =0
Select load adaptive Multi-limit
parameters 2/1 =0 Multi-limit speed
H51 Travel Calculation under speed pattern
68 Winding up at rated speed pattern function
Reference torque torque load adaptive control
Load inertia for =1 M1 load inertia x 1.8
=OFF calculation H214
winding up 1 H202
=ON M221 Load Compensating
Load inertia for
winding up 2
H205 Speed Control Value
Multi-limit =0
Winding [LD-NLIM]
Load inertia for =OFF down speed pattern
winding down 1 H208 at rated speed =1
=ON x 2.0 Multi-limit speed
Load inertia for
winding down 2 H211 pattern calculation
M222
H64 =0
Winding up Safety coefficient KEYPAD panel
4-10
Safety coefficient =OFF =1 LED monitor
for winding up 1 H203
Option monitor 6
Safety coefficient =ON
for winding up 2
H206 M220
Load Adaptive Control Section
Winding Load Compensating

Safety coefficient
=OFF down Speed Control Value
for winding down 1 H209 Multi-limit speed
=ON calculation (r/m)
Safety coefficient
for winding down 2
H212 parameter *The load adaptive control output LD-
NLIM acts as a speed limiter. Refer to
H65 =0 the acceleration/deceleration
Winding up Load Adaptive Control calculation block diagram.
Mechanical efficiency Machine efficiency
=OFF =1
for winding up 1 H204 H215 (Multi-limit speed pattern at max. speed)
Mechanical efficiency =ON
for winding up 2 H207 H216 (Multi-limit speed pattern at rated speed)
Winding Winding-up speed H217 (Multi-limit speed pattern at rated speed x 1.1)
Mechanical efficiency =OFF down H62
for winding down 1 H210 H218 (Multi-limit speed pattern at rated speed x 1.2)
Mechanical efficiency =ON Counter weight
for winding down 2 H213 H63 H219 (Multi-limit speed pattern at rated speed x 1.4)
Rated load
H66 H220 (Multi-limit speed pattern at rated speed x 1.6
Limit speed discrimination zone (Start speed) H221 (Multi-limit speed pattern at rated speed x 1.8
H225
H222 (Multi-limit speed pattern at rated speed x 2.0
Limit speed discrimination zone (Completion speed)
H226 H223 (Multi-limit speed pattern at rated speed x 2.5
Function definition 3 H224 (Multi-limit speed pattern at rated speed x 3.0
H227
4.1.11 Motor Temperature Detection Section
Chap. 4
4-11
OPC-VG1-UPAC
OPC-VG1-SIU
States of all
4.1.12
Monitor COM (link) UPAC SW switches indicate

I/O check 【DX+】 Integrated RS-485 factory setting.
COM 【DX-】 OR S06
M129 OPC-VG1-TL
OPC-VG1-SX DIA BCD Input DIA Function
Field bus OR o03 Selection
Speed Setting
Monitor
o01
Binary I/O check
Monitor →BCD DIA, DIB
REMOTE =1
REMOTE Normal open/close E14
I/O check
REM E01 Terminal [X1] OPC-VG1-DIA [DIA]
-1 Function =0
M166 OR Selector
X1 Terminal [X2] OPC-VG1-DIB [DIB]
E02 =1
-1 Function Binary
OR Selector
X2 →BCD
E03 Terminal [X3]
-1 Function o02
OR Selector DIA BCD Input
X3 o04 DIB Function
E04 Terminal [X4] Speed Setting
-1 Function Selection
OR Selector [SS1]
X4 Terminal [X5]
E05
-1 Function
4-12
OR Selector
X5 Terminal [X6]
E06
-1 Function
OR Selector [O-DI6]
Function Selection Digital Input
X6 Terminal [X7]
E07
-1 Function
OR Selector - Control inputs are
X7 Terminal [X8] Integrated standard input: Nine points from X1 to X9
E08
-1 Function Optional OPC-VG1-DIOA: Four points from X11 to X14
OR Selector Optional OPC-VG1-DI: 16 bit data
X8 Terminal [X9]
E09 COM (link) system
-1 Function
OR Selector - The input (S06) from the COM (link) system does not replace the previous
X9 Terminal [X11] input, but is ORed with the previous input.
E10
OPC-VG1-DIOA Function - E14 "Normally open/normally closed" is applied only to standard input (X1
OR Selector
to X9) and ON/OFF state is applied to input after inverting with software.
X11 Terminal [X12]
E11 - If you use the Di data directly from the UPAC, select the universal DI [U-DI].
Function
OR Selector
X12 Terminal [X13]
E12
Function
OR Selector
X13 Terminal [X14]
E13
Function
OR Selector
X14
Monitor
I/O check
4.1.13
Terminal [Y11] OPC-VG1-DIOA

E20
UPAC SW Function
[RUN]
OPC-VG1-UPAC S07(Y11) Selector Y11
OPC-VG1-SIU
Monitor
Terminal [Y12]
COM (link) Normal open/close E28 E21
I/O check Function
DX+ Integrated RS-485 [RUN]
OR S07(Y12) Selector Y12
DX- OR S07
OPC-VG1-TL
OPC-VG1-SX Terminal [Y1] E15 Terminal [Y13] E22
Field bus Function -1 Function
[RUN] [RUN]
S07(Y1) Selector Y1 S07(Y13) Selector Y13
Terminal [Y2] E16 Terminal [Y14] E23

Function -1 Function
States of all [RUN] [RUN]
switches indicate S07(Y2) Selector Y2 S07(Y14) Selector Y14
factory setting.
4-13
Terminal [Y3] Terminal [Y15]
E17 E24
Function -1 Function
- Five integrated standard output terminals Y1 to [RUN] [RUN]
Y4 and Y5A (relay) and optional terminals
OPC-VG1-DIOA Y11 to Y18 are available for
control output. Terminal [Y4] Terminal [Y16]
E18 E25
- Select the universal DO [U-DO] for the function Function -1 Function
to apply the output from the UPAC, SIU and [RUN] [RUN]
the COM (link) system directly to the hardware
output (S07 is the corresponding function).
- E28 "Normally open/normally closed" is applied Terminal [Y5A] Terminal [Y17]
E19 E26
only to standard input (Y1 to Y4 and Y5A) and Function -1 Function
ON/OFF state is applied to output after [RUN] [RUN]
S07(Y5A) Selector Y5A S07(Y17) Selector Y17
inverting with software.
Function Selection Digital Output/Fault Output
Terminal [Y18]
E27
30RY Drive Mode F36 Function
[RUN]
30C S07(Y18) Selector Y18
-1
30X 30B
Alarm relay output 30A

4.1.14 Function Selection Analog Input/Output
OPC-VG1-AIO
× × × × ×
Ai1-4: Zero-hold
43 ZH-AI4
42 ZH-AI3
41 ZH-AI2
40 ZH-AI1
Ai1-4:Reverse polarity
47 REV-AI4
46 REV-AI3
45 REV-AI2
44 REV-AI1
× × × ×
OPC-VG1-AIO
4-14
Enable
4.1.15
communications link
24 LE
Monitor
M193
General-purpose
Setting 1 Monitor
E90
H30
[OFF] ON
Selector
=1,3 ≠0
COM (link) S16
[OBS-TFB] =0,2
OFF =0
[OFF]
[AUX-N1]
Ai
4-15
Monitor
M194
General-purpose
Link Command Function Selection
Setting 2 Monitor
E91
[OFF] ON
Selector
=1,3 ≠0
COM (link) S17
[OBS-TFB] =0,2
OFF =0
[OFF]
[AUX-N1]
Ai

4.1.16 Enabling to Write to/Recording Function Codes
Enable data change

via communications
link
23 WE-LK
Enable data
change with keypad
19 WE-KP
4-16
4.2 Function Code Tables

4.2.1 Function Code Groups and Function Codes
Ｆ＊＊＊
Code number
Function code group

Function code group Function codes Remarks
Chap. 4
Fundamental functions F codes F00 to F85
Extension terminal functions E codes E01 to E118
E51, E52

E55, E56
E59, E60
E63, E64
E67, E68 For the OPC-VG1-AIO option
E72, E73 (available soon).
E77, E78
E82, E83
E103, E104
E107, E108
Control functions C codes C01 to C73
Motor Parameter functions M1 P codes P01 to P51 For M1.
High performance function H codes H01 to H228
Alternative motor parameter A codes A01 to A171 For M2 and M3.

functions M2/M3
option functions o codes o05 to o197 o01 to o04 For the OPC-VG1-DIA, DIB option.
o05 For the OPC-VG1-PG (PD) option.
o06 to o08 For the OPC-VG1-PG (LD) option.
o09 to o11 For the OPC-VG1-PMPG option.
o12 to o19 For the OPC-VG1-PG (PR) option.
o29 to o32 For communications options
(e.g., OPC-VG1-TL, OPC-VG1-CCL).
o33, o34, o50 For the high-speed serial
communication terminal block
OPC-VG1-TBSI.
o35 and o36 For the OPC-VG1-SIU option (available
soon).
o122 to o197 For communications options.
Lift functions L codes L01 to L15

User functions U codes U01 to U64 For the UPAC option.
U101 to U150 For manufacturers.
SaFety functions SF codes SF00 to SF31 For functional safety.
For details, refer to the Functional Safety Option
Instruction Manual.
Serial communication functions S codes S01 to S17 Commands Accessible in local mode (keypad), via
Monitoring functions M codes M01 to M222 Data monitor the communications link (T-Link,
RS-485, SIU, SX-bus, and fieldbus),
and via the UPAC.
4-17
4.2.2 About the Contents of Column Headers in Function Code
Tables
Column Headers Description
Function code Function code group and code number
485 No. Address to be used to refer to or change function code data using a communications option.
Available for all communications options except OPC-VG1-TL.
Communications Link No. Address to be used to refer to or change function code data using a communications option
address (OPC-VG1-TL, OPC-VG1-SX, etc.).
Blank link number fields mean that the corresponding function codes cannot be accessed via
a field option.
Name Name assigned to a function code.
Number of subdirectories in the keypad directory structure.
0: Parent directory having no subdirectories
Dir.
1: Subdirectory
2 or more: Parent directory having the specified number of subdirectories
Data setting range Allowable data setting range and definition of each data.
Indicates whether the function code data can be changed or not when the inverter is running.
Change when running
Y: Possible, N: Impossible
Default setting Data preset by factory default.
If data is changed from the factory default, it is displayed with an asterisk (*) on the keypad.
Using function code H03 reverts changed function code data to the default values.
Data copying Indicates whether or not the function code data can be copied when you copy the data stored in
the keypad memory of a source inverter to other destination inverters.
Initialization Indicates whether or not the function code data can be initialized to the default value by
function code H03 (Data initialization).
Y: Possible, N: Impossible
Format type Indicates a format type to be used to refer to or change function code data via the
communications link.
Drive control (Availability) Indicates whether or not the function code is available to the individual drive controls.
Y: Available, N: Not available
Drive controls:
VC w/ PG: Vector control for induction motor (IM) with speed sensor
VC w/o PG: Vector control for induction motor (IM) without speed sensor
V/f: V/f control for induction motor (IM)
VC for PMSM: Vector control for permanent magnet synchronous motor (PMSM) with speed
sensor
4-18
4.2.3 Function Code Tables

F codes (Fundamental Functions)
Change when running

Communica- Drive
tions address control
Default setting
Function code
Data copying
Format type
Initialization
Remarks
VC for PMSM
VC w/o PG
VC w/ PG
Name Dir. Data setting range
485 Link
V/f
No. No.
F00 0h 50h Data Protection 0 0 or 1 N 0 N Y 40 Y Y Y Y

0: Enable data change
Chap. 4
1: Protect data
This write-protects data from the keypad.
H29 defines write-protect from the communications
link (T-link, RS-485, etc.)
F01 1h h Speed Command N1 0 0 to 9 N 0 Y Y 41 Y Y Y Y
0: Keypad ( / keys)

1: Analog input to terminal [12](0 to ±10V)
2: Analog input to terminal [12](0 to +10V)
3: UP/DOWN control (Initial speed = 0)
4: UP/DOWN control (Initial speed = Last value)
5: UP/DOWN control (Initial speed = Creep speed 1 or
2)
6: DIA card input
7: DIB card input
8: N-REFV input to terminal [Ai1]
9: N-REFC input to terminal [Ai2]
F01 defines the command source that specifies a
speed command.
F02 2h h Operation Method 0 0 or 1 N 0 Y Y 42 Y Y Y Y
0: Keypad ( / / keys) (Local mode)
1: External signals to terminals FWD/REV (Remote
mode)
F02 defines a run command source.
Switching between the Remote and Local modes is
also possible with the simultaneous depression of the
+ keys on the keypad, which changes the F02
data.
F03 3h 51h Maximum Speed M1 3 50 to 30000 r/min N 1500 Y N 0 Y Y Y Y
F04 4h 52h Rated Speed M1 1 50 to 30000 r/min N * Y N 0 Y Y Y Y
F05 5h 53h Rated Voltage M1 1 80 to 999 V N * Y N 0 Y Y Y Y
F07 7h 54h Acceleration Time 1 0 0.01 to 99.99 s Y 5.00 Y Y 13 Y Y Y Y
100.0 to 999.9 s
1000 to 3600 s
F08 8h 55h Deceleration Time 1 0 0.01 to 99.99 s Y 5.00 Y Y 13 Y Y Y Y
100.0 to 999.9 s
1000 to 3600 s
F10 Ah 56h M1 Electronic Thermal Overload 3 0 to 2 Y 0 Y N 85 Y Y Y Y
Protection 0: Disable (For a VG-dedicated motor)
(Select motor characteristics) 1: Enable (For a general-purpose motor with
shaft-driven cooling fan)
2: Enable (For an inverter-driven motor with
separately powered cooling fan)
F11 Bh 57h (Detection level) 1 0.01 to 99.99 A Y * Y N 13 Y Y Y Y
100.0 to 999.9 A
1000 to 2000 A
F12 Ch 58h (Thermal time constant) 1 0.5 to 75.0 min Y * Y N 2 Y Y Y Y
F14 Eh h Restart Mode after Momentary 0 0 to 5 Y 0 Y Y 0 Y Y Y Y
Power Failure 0: No restart (Trip immediately, with alarm lu )
(Mode selection) 1: No restart (Trip after recovery from power failure,
with alarm lu )
2: No restart (Trip after decelerate-to-stop, with alarm
lu )
3: Restart (Continue to run)
4: Restart at the frequency at which the power failure
occurred
5: Restart at the starting frequency
F17 11h h Gain (for terminal [12] input) 0 0.0 to 200.0% Y 100.0 Y Y 2 Y Y Y Y
Ratio to analog speed setting on terminal [12]. Limited
to ±110% of the maximum speed.
F18 12h h Bias (for terminal [12] input) 0 -30000 to 30000 r/min Y 0 Y Y 5 Y Y Y Y
Bias to analog speed setting on terminal [12].
Limited to ±110% of the maximum speed
F20 14h 59h DC Braking 3 0 to 3600 r/min Y 0 Y Y 0 Y Y Y N
(Braking starting speed)
F21 15h 5Ah (Braking level) 1 0 to 100% Y 0 Y Y 16 Y Y Y N
F22 16h 5Bh (Braking time) 1 0.0 to 30.0 s Y 0.0 Y Y 2 Y Y Y N
0.0: Disable
0.1 to 30.0 s
*Depending upon the inverter's capacity.
4-19
Change when running
Communica- Drive
Default setting
Function code
Data copying
Format type
Initialization
Remarks
VC for PMSM
VC w/o PG
VC w/ PG
485 Link
V/f
No. No.
F23 17h 5Ch Starting Speed 0 0.0 to 150.0 r/min N 0.0 Y Y 2 Y Y Y Y

(Speed) Limited in order not to lower to 0.1 Hz or below (under
vector control w/o speed sensor and V/f control).
Use F23 for assuring the torque at startup.
F24 18h 5Dh (Holding time) 0 0.00 to 10.00 s N 0.00 Y Y 3 Y Y Y Y
F26 1Ah 5Eh Motor Sound 0 2 to 15 kHz N 8 for 55 Y Y 10 Y Y Y Y
(Carrier frequency) 2: 2 kHz kW or
3: 3 kHz below
4: 4 kHz
5: 5 kHz 7 for 75
6: 6 kHz kW or
7: 7 kHz above
8, 9: 8 kHz
10, 11: 10 kHz
12, 13, 14: 12 kHz
15: 15 kHz
This controls the carrier frequency to reduce an
audible noise generated by the motor or
electromagnetic noise from the inverter itself, to
suppress the resonance with the machinery, and to
decrease a leakage current from the output circuit
wirings.
F36 24h h 30RY Drive Mode 0 0 or 1 N 0 Y Y 43 Y Y Y Y
0: Excite relay (30) when an alarm occurs
1: Excite relay (30) when the inverter power is
normally established
F37 25h 60h Stop Speed 3 0.0 to 150.0 r/min N 10.0 Y Y 2 Y Y Y Y
(Speed) Limited in order not to lower to 0.1 Hz or below (under
vector control w/o speed sensor and V/f control).
F38 26h 61h (Detection mode) 1 0 or 1 N 0 Y Y 90 Y N N Y
0: Detected speed
1: Reference speed
Fixed at "1" under V/f control
F39 27h 62h (Zero speed control holding time) 1 0.00 to 10.00 s N 0.50 Y Y 3 Y N N Y
Applies to when timing the application of the
mechanical brake.
F40 28h 63h Torque Limiter Mode 1 12 0 to 3 N 0 Y Y 44 Y Y N Y
0: Disable limiter
1: Enable torque limiter
2: Enable power limiter
3: Enable torque current limiter
F41 29h 64h Torque Limiter Mode 2 1 0 to 3 N 0 Y Y 45 Y Y Y Y
0: Level 1 to all four quadrants
1: Level 1 to driving, Level 2 to braking
2: Level 1 to upper limit, Level 2 to lower limit
3: Level 1/Level 2 (switchable) to all four quadrants
Levels 1 and 2 are specified by the source defined by
F42 and F43, respectively.
F42 2Ah 65h Torque Limiter Level 1 Source 1 0 to 5 N 0 Y Y 46 Y Y Y Y
0: Function code F44
1: TL-REF1 input to terminal [Ai]
2: DIA card
3: DIB card
4: Communications link
5: PID output
F43 2Bh 66h Torque Limiter Level 2 Source 1 0 to 5 N 0 Y Y 47 Y Y Y Y
0: Function code F45
1: TL-REF1 input to terminal [Ai]
2: DIA card
3: DIB card
5: PID output
F44 2Ch 67h Torque Limiter Level 1 1 -300 to 300% Y 150 Y Y 5 Y Y Y Y
F45 2Dh 68h Torque Limiter Level 2 1 -300 to 300% Y 10 Y Y 5 Y Y Y Y
F46 2Eh 69h Mechanical Loss Compensation 1 -300.00 to 300.00% Y 0.00 Y Y 7 Y Y N Y
F47 2Fh 6Ah Torque Bias T1 1 -300.00 to 300.00% Y 0.00 Y Y 7 Y Y N Y
Torque biases T1 to T3 are switchable with DI.
F48 30h h Torque Bias T2 1 -300.00 to 300.00% Y 0.00 Y Y 7 Y Y N Y
F49 31h h Torque Bias T3 1 -300.00 to 300.00% Y 0.00 Y Y 7 Y Y N Y
F50 32h h Torque Bias Startup Timer 1 0.00 to 1.00 s Y 0.00 Y Y 3 Y Y N Y
F50 specifies the time required for generating 300%
torque.
F51 33h FBh Torque Command Monitor 1 0 or 1 Y 0 Y Y 48 Y Y Y Y
(Polarity) 0: Torque polarity
1: + for driving, - for braking
F51 specifies the polarity of torque related data output
(e.g., Ao monitor, LED monitor, and LCD monitor).
4-20
Change when running

Communica- Drive
Default setting
Function code
Data copying
Format type
Initialization
Remarks
VC for PMSM
VC w/o PG
VC w/ PG
485 Link
V/f
No. No.
F52 34h h LED Monitor 8 -999.00 to 999.00 Y 1.00 Y Y 12 Y Y Y Y

(Display coefficient A) F52 specifies the conversion coefficient for displaying
the load shaft speed and line speed on the LED
monitor.
Display value = Motor speed x (0.01 to 200.00)
Only the setting range from 0.01 to 200.00 takes
effect. The specification out of the range is limited.
F53 35h h (Display coefficient B) 1 -999.00 to 999.00 Y 1.00 Y Y 12 Y Y Y Y
Chap. 4
Display coefficient A: Maximum value
Display coefficient B: Minimum value
F52 and F53 specify the conversion coefficients for
displaying the PID command, PID feedback amount,
and PID output (process command).
Display value = (Command or feedback value) x

(Display coefficient A - B) + B
F54 36h h LED Monitor 1 0.0 to 5.0 s Y 0.2 Y Y 2 Y Y Y Y
(Display filter)
F55 37h h (Item selection) 1 0 to 32 Y 0 Y Y 49
0: Detected speed 1 or Reference speed 4 (r/min) Y Y N Y
(switchable with F56)
1: Reference speed 4 (ASR input) (r/min) Y Y Y Y
2: Output frequency (after slip compensation) (Hz) Y Y Y Y
3: Reference torque current (%) Y Y N Y
4: Reference torque (%) Y Y N Y
5: Calculated torque (%) Y Y Y Y
6: Power consumption (Motor output) Y Y Y Y
(kW or HP, switchable with F60)
7: Output current (A) Y Y Y Y
8: Output voltage (V) Y Y Y Y
9: DC link bus voltage (V) Y Y Y Y
10: Magnetic flux command (%) Y Y N N
11: Calculated magnetic flux (%) Y Y N N
12: Motor temperature (℃) Y Y Y Y
(When no NTC thermistor is used, "---" appears.)
13: Load shaft speed (r/min) Y Y N Y
(Detected or commanded, switchable with F56)
14: Line speed (m/min) Y Y Y Y
(Detected or commanded, switchable with F56)
15: Ai adjustment value on [12] (%) Y Y Y Y
16: Ai adjustment value on [Ai1] (%) Y Y Y Y
The following data will be hidden depending upon the Y Y Y Y
mode or options.
20: PID command (%)
21: PID feedback amount (%) Y Y Y Y
22: PID output (%) Y Y Y Y
23: Option monitor 1 (HEX) Y Y Y Y
24: Option monitor 2 (HEX) Y Y Y Y
25: Option monitor 3 (DEC) Y Y Y Y
29: - Y Y Y Y
30: Load factor (%) Y Y Y Y
31: Input power (kW or HP, switchable with F60) Y Y Y Y
32: Input watt-hour (x 100 kWh) Y Y Y Y
F56 38h h (Display when stopped) 1 0 or 1 Y 0 Y Y 50 Y Y Y Y
0: Reference speed
1: Detected speed
F56 switches the display data between the reference
speed and detected one when the motor stops. It
applies to the speed (F55 = 0), the load shaft speed
(F55 = 13), and the line speed (F55 = 14).
4-21
Change when running
Communica- Drive
Default setting
Function code
Data copying
Format type
Initialization
Remarks
VC for PMSM
VC w/o PG
VC w/ PG
485 Link
V/f
No. No.
F57 39h h LCD Monitor 1 0 or 1 Y 0 Y Y 51 Y Y Y Y

(Item selection) 0: Running status, rotation direction and operation
guide
1: Bar charts for detected speed 1, current and
reference torque
F57 switches the Running mode screen.
F58 3Ah h (Language selection) 1 0 to 7 Y 0 Y Y 52 Y Y Y Y
0: Japanese
1: English
2: German (Available soon)
3: French (Available soon)
4: Spanish (Available soon)
5: Italian (Available soon)
6: Chinese
7: Korean
F59 3Bh (Contrast control) 1 0 (Low) to 10 (High) Y 5 Y Y 0 Y Y Y Y
F60 3Ch Output Unit (HP/kW) 0 0 or 1 Y 0 Y Y 53 Y Y Y Y
0: kW
1: HP
F60 switches the display unit between kW and HP on
the LED monitor and LCD monitor for the power
consumption (F55 = 6) and input power (F55 = 31). It
also switches the display table between kW and HP
for motor 1 selection (P02).
F61 3Dh 6Bh ASR1 (P-gain) 10 0.1 to 500.0 times Y 10.0 Y Y 2 Y Y N Y
F62 3Eh 6Ch (Integral constant) 1 0.000 to 10.000 s Y 0.200 Y Y 4 Y Y N Y
P control when F62 = 0.000
F63 3Fh 6Dh (Feedforward gain) 1 0.000 to 9.999 s Y 0.000 Y Y 4 Y Y N Y
F64 40h 6Eh (Input filter) 1 0.000 to 5.000 s Y 0.040 Y Y 4 Y Y Y Y
F65 41h 6Fh (Detection filter) 1 0.000 to 0.100 s Y 0.005 Y Y 4 Y Y N Y
F65 specifies a time constant of the first order delay
filter for detected speed.
F66 42h 70h (Output filter) 1 0.000 to 0.100 s N 0.002 Y Y 4 Y Y N Y
F66 specifies a time constant of the first order delay
filter for torque command.
F67 43h 71h S-curve Acceleration 1 1 0 to 50% Y 0 Y Y 0 Y Y Y Y
(Start)
F68 44h 72h (End) 1 0 to 50% Y 0 Y Y 0 Y Y Y Y
F69 45h 73h S-curve Deceleration 1 1 0 to 50% Y 0 Y Y 0 Y Y Y Y
(Start)
F70 46h 74h (End) 1 0 to 50% Y 0 Y Y 0 Y Y Y Y
F72 48h h Pre-excitation Mode 4 0 or 1 N 0 Y Y 230 Y Y N N
0: Cause pre-excitation at the time of startup
(Pre-excitation continues for the duration specified
by F74.)
1: Cause pre-excitation at the time of startup and
stop.
(Pre-excitation continues for the duration specified
by F74 or until the magnetic flux command reaches
the detection level specified by E48, whichever is
earlier.)
F73 49h h Magnetic Flux Level at Light Load 1 10 to 100% Y 100 Y Y 16 Y N N N
F74 4Ah 75h Pre-excitation (Duration) 1 0.0 to 10.0 s N 0.0 Y Y 2 Y Y N N
Turning a run command (FWD, REV) ON
automatically continues pre-excitation for the duration
specified by F74.
F75 4Bh 76h (Initial level) 1 100 to 400% N 100 Y Y 0 Y Y N N
F76 4Ch h Speed Limiter (Mode) 3 0 to 3 N 0 Y Y 91 Y Y Y Y
0: Level 1 for forward rotation, Level 2 for reverse
rotation
1: Level 1 for both forward and reverse rotations
2: Level 1 for upper limit, Level 2 for lower limit
3: Level 1 for forward rotation, Level 2 for reverse
rotation
(Terminal [12] input added as a bias)
F77 4Dh 4Fh (Level 1) 1 -110.0 to 110.0% Y 100.0 Y Y 6 Y Y Y Y
F78 4Eh FEh (Level 2) 1 -110.0 to 110.0% Y 100.0 Y Y 6 Y Y Y Y
F79 4Fh 77h Motor Selection (M1, M2, M3) 0 0 to 2 N 0 Y N 54 Y Y Y Y
0: Select M1
(Note that switching of contacts by X terminal
functions has priority over this function code
setting.)
1: Select M2 (X terminal functions disabled)
2: Select M3 (X terminal functions disabled)
Select a motor to be used from M1, M2 and M3.
4-22
Change when running

Communica- Drive
Default setting
Function code
Data copying
Format type
Initialization
Remarks
VC for PMSM
VC w/o PG
VC w/ PG
485 Link
V/f
No. No.
F80 50h h Switching between HD, MD and LD 0 0 to 3 N 0 Y N 56 Y Y Y Y

Drive Modes 0, 2: HD (High duty mode, overload capability
150%/200%)
1: LD (Low duty mode, overload capability 120%)
3: MD (Medium duty mode, overload capability
150%)
F80 switches the drive mode between the HD, MD and
LD.
Chap. 4
F81 51h h Offset for Speed Setting on 3 -30000 to 30000 r/min Y 0 Y Y 5 Y Y Y Y
Terminal [12] F81 specifies the offset for analog speed input on
terminal [12].
F82 52h h Dead Zone for Speed Setting on 1 0.0 to 150.0 r/min Y 0 Y Y 2 Y Y Y Y
Terminal [12] F82 specifies the dead zone speed for analog speed
input on terminal [12] to limit the speed setting value

within the range of ±F82 data to 0 r/min.
F83 53h h Filter for Speed Setting on Terminal 1 0.000 to 5.000 s Y 0.005 Y Y 4 Y Y Y Y
[12]
F84 54h h Display Coefficient for Input 0 0.000 to 9999 Y 0.010 Y Y 101 Y Y Y Y
Watt-hour Data F84 specifies a display coefficient for displaying the
input watt-hour data (M116).
M116 = F84 x M115 (Input watt-hour, kWh)
Specification of 0.000 clears the input watt-hour data.
F85 55h h Display Filter for Calculated Torque 0 0.000 to 1.000 s Y 0.100 Y Y 4 Y Y Y Y
F85 specifies a display filter for calculated torque
output for monitoring (LED monitor and LCD monitor).
4-23
E codes (Extension Terminal Functions)
Change when running

Communica- Drive
Default setting
Function code
Data copying
Format type
Initialization
Remarks
VC for PMSM
VC w/o PG
VC w/ PG
485 Link
V/f
No. No.
E01 101h 78h Terminal [X1] Function 13 0 to 79 N 0 Y Y 57

0, 1, 2, 3: Select multistep speed (1 to 15 steps) Y Y Y Y
0: SS1, 1: SS2, 2: SS4, 3: SS8
4,5: Select ASR and ACC/DEC time (4 steps) Y Y Y Y
4: RT1, 5: RT2
6: Enable 3-wire operation HLD Y Y Y Y
7: Coast to a stop BX Y Y Y Y
8: Reset alarm RST Y Y Y Y
9: Enable external alarm trip THR Y Y Y Y
10: Ready for jogging JOG Y Y Y Y
11: Select speed command N2/N1 N2/N1 Y Y Y Y
12: Select motor 2 M-CH2 Y Y Y Y
13: Select motor 3 M-CH3 Y Y Y Y
14: Enable DC braking DCBRK Y Y Y N
15: Clear ACC/DEC to zero CLR Y Y Y Y
16: Switch creep speed under UP/DOWN control Y Y Y Y
CRP-N2/N1
17: UP (Increase speed) UP Y Y Y Y
18: DOWN (Decrease speed) DOWN Y Y Y Y
19: Enable data change with keypad WE-KP Y Y Y Y
20: Cancel PID control KP/PID Y Y Y Y
21: Switch normal/inverse operation IVS Y Y Y Y
22: Interlock (52-2) IL Y Y Y Y
23: Enable data change via communications link WE-LK Y Y Y Y
24: Enable communications link LE Y Y Y Y
25: Universal DI U-DI Y Y Y Y
26: Enable auto search for idling motor speed at starting Y Y N Y
STM
27: Synchronous operation command (PG (PR) optional Y N N Y
function) SYC
28: Lock at zero speed LOCK Y N N Y
29: Pre-excitation EXITE Y Y N N
30: Cancel speed limiter N-LIM Y Y Y Y
(Related codes: F76, F77, F78)
31: Cancel H41 (Torque command) H41-CCL Y Y N Y
32: Cancel H42 (Torque current command) H42-CCL Y Y N Y
33: Cancel H43 (Magnetic flux command) H43-CCL Y N N N
34: Cancel F40 (Torque limiter mode 1) F40-CCL Y Y N Y
35: Select torque limiter level 2/1 TL2/TL1 Y Y N Y
36: Bypass ACC/DEC processor BPS Y Y Y Y
37, 38: Select torque bias command 37: TB1, 38: TB2 Y Y N Y
39: Select droop control DROOP Y Y N Y
40: Zero-hold Ai1 ZH-AI1 Y Y Y Y
41: Zero-hold Ai2 ZH-AI2 Y Y Y Y
42: Zero-hold Ai3 (AIO optional function) ZH-AI3 Y Y Y Y
43: Zero-hold Ai4 (AIO optional function) ZH-AI4 Y Y Y Y
44: Reverse Ai1 polarity REV-AI1 Y Y Y Y
45: Reverse Ai2 polarity REV-AI2 Y Y Y Y
46: Reverse Ai3 polarity (AIO optional function) REV-AI3 Y Y Y Y
47: Reverse Ai4 polarity (AIO optional function) REV-AI4 Y Y Y Y
48: Inverse PID output PID-INV Y Y Y Y
49: Cancel PG alarm PG-CCL Y N N Y
50: Cancel undervoltage alarm LU-CCL Y Y Y Y
51: Hold Ai torque bias H-TB Y Y N Y
52: STOP1 STOP1 Y Y Y Y

(Decelerate to stop with normal deceleration time)
(Decelerate to stop with deceleration time 4)
(Decelerate to stop with max. braking torque, ignoring
the deceleration time setting)
55: Latch DIA data (DIA optional function) DIA Y Y Y Y
56: Latch DIB data (DIB optional function) DIB Y Y Y Y
4-24
Change when running

Communica- Drive
Default setting
Function code
Data copying
Format type
Initialization
Remarks
VC for PMSM
VC w/o PG
VC w/ PG
485 Link
V/f
No. No.
E01 101h 78h Terminal [X1] Function 13 57: Cancel multiplex system MT-CCL Y N N N
58-67: Custom Di1-Di10 C-DI1 to C-DI10 Y Y Y Y
68: Select load adaptive parameters 2/1 AN-P2/1 Y N N Y
(Available soon)
69: Cancel PID components PID-CCL Y Y Y Y
70: Enable PID FF component PID-FF Y Y Y Y
71: Reset completion of speed limit calculation NL-RST Y Y Y Y
Chap. 4
(Available soon)
72: Toggle signal 1 TGL1 Y Y Y Y
73: Toggle signal 2 TGL2 Y Y Y Y
74: Cause external mock alarm FTB Y Y Y Y
75: Cancel NTC thermistor alarm NTC-CCL Y Y Y Y

76: Cancel lifetime alarm signal LF-CCL Y Y Y Y
77: Request for reading in serial port PG absolute N N N Y
position SPG-AP
(Available soon)
78: Switch PID feedback signals PID-1/2 Y Y Y Y
79: Select PID torque bias TB-PID Y Y Y Y
80: Tune magnetic pole position MP-TUN N N N Y
(Available soon)
81: External electrical conditions RD Y Y Y Y
(Available soon)
82: Startup conditions STRD Y Y Y Y
(Available soon)
83: Continue to run at the time of communications Y Y Y Y
link error LK-D
(Available soon)
E02 102h 79h Terminal [X2] Function 1 0 to 79 (See Terminal [X1] Function.) N 1 Y Y 57 Y Y Y Y
E03 103h 7Ah Terminal [X3] Function 1 0 to 79 (See Terminal [X1] Function.) N 2 Y Y 57 Y Y Y Y
E04 104h 7Bh Terminal [X4] Function 1 0 to 79 (See Terminal [X1] Function.) N 3 Y Y 57 Y Y Y Y
E05 105h 7Ch Terminal [X5] Function 1 0 to 79 (See Terminal [X1] Function.) N 4 Y Y 57 Y Y Y Y
E06 106h 7Dh Terminal [X6] Function 1 0 to 79 (See Terminal [X1] Function.) N 5 Y Y 57 Y Y Y Y
E07 107h 7Eh Terminal [X7] Function 1 0 to 79 (See Terminal [X1] Function.) N 7 Y Y 57 Y Y Y Y
E08 108h 7Fh Terminal [X8] Function 1 0 to 79 See Terminal [X1] Function.) N 8 Y Y 57 Y Y Y Y
E09 109h 80h Terminal [X9] Function 1 0 to 79 (See Terminal [X1] Function.) N 9 Y Y 57 Y Y Y Y
E10 10Ah 81h Terminal [X11] Function 1 0 to 79 (See Terminal [X1] Function.) N 25 Y Y 57 Y Y Y Y
E11 10Bh 82h Terminal [X12] Function 1 0 to 79 (See Terminal [X1] Function.) N 25 Y Y 57 Y Y Y Y
E12 10Ch 83h Terminal [X13] Function 1 0 to 79 (See Terminal [X1] Function.) N 25 Y Y 57 Y Y Y Y
E13 10Dh 84h Terminal [X14] Function 1 0 to 79 (See Terminal [X1] Function.) N 25 Y Y 57 Y Y Y Y
E14 10Eh h X Terminal Function 0 0000 to 01FF N 0000 Y Y 35 Y Y Y Y
(Normal open/close) 0: Normal open
1: Normal close
E14 specifies whether to open or close the contact for
terminals [X1] to [X9].
E15 10Fh 85h Terminal [Y1] Function 13 0 to 75 N 1 Y Y 58
0: Inverter running RUN Y Y Y Y
1: Speed valid N-EX Y Y Y Y
2: Speed agreement 1 N-AG1 Y Y N Y
3: Speed arrival signal N-AR Y Y Y Y
4: Speed detected 1 N-DT1 Y Y Y Y
7: Undervoltage detected (Inverter stopped) LU Y Y Y Y
8: Torque polarity detected (braking/driving) B/D Y Y N Y
9: Torque limiting TL Y Y Y Y
10: Torque detected 1 T-DT1 Y Y Y Y
11: Torque detected 2 T-DT2 Y Y Y Y
12: Keypad operation enabled KP Y Y Y Y
13: Inverter stopped STOP Y Y Y Y
14: Inverter ready to run RDY Y Y Y Y
15: Magnetic flux detected MF-DT Y Y N N
16: Motor M2 selected SW-M2 Y Y Y Y
17: Motor M3 selected SW-M3 Y Y Y Y
18: Brake release signal BRK Y Y N Y
19: Alarm content 1 AL1 Y Y Y Y
23: Cooling fan in operation FAN Y Y Y Y
24: Resetting TRY Y Y Y Y
25: Universal DO U-DO Y Y Y Y
4-25
Change when running
Communica- Drive
Default setting
Function code
Data copying
Format type
Initialization
Remarks
VC for PMSM
VC w/o PG
VC w/ PG
485 Link
V/f
No. No.
E15 10Fh 85h Terminal [Y1] Function 13 26: Heat sink overheat early warning INV-OH Y Y Y Y
27: Synchronization completion signal SY-C Y N N N
28: Lifetime alarm LIFE Y Y Y Y
29: Under acceleration U-ACC Y Y Y Y
30: Under deceleration U-DEC Y Y Y Y
31: Inverter overload early warning INV-OL Y Y Y Y
32: Motor overheat early warning M-OH Y Y Y Y
33: Motor overload early warning M-OL Y Y Y Y
34: DB overload early warning DB-OL Y Y N Y
35: Link transmission error LK-ERR Y Y Y Y
36: In limiting under load adaptive control ANL Y N N Y
37: In calculation under load adaptive control ANC Y N N Y
38: Analog torque bias being held TBH Y Y N Y
39 to 48: Custom Do1-Do10 C-DO1 to C-DO10 Y Y Y Y
49: - - - - -
50: Z-phase detection completed Z-RDY Y N N Y
51: Multiplex system communications link being Y N N N
established MTS
52: Answerback to cancellation of multiplex system Y N N N
MEC-AB
53: Multiplex system master selected MSS Y N N N
54: Multiplex system local station failure AL-SF Y N N N
55: Stopped due to communications link error LES Y Y Y Y
(Available soon)
56: Alarm output (for any alarm) ALM Y Y Y Y
57: Light alarm L-ALM Y Y Y Y
58: Maintenance timer MNT Y Y Y Y
59: Braking transistor broken DBAL Y Y Y Y
60: DC fan locked DCFL Y Y Y Y
63: Axial fan stopped MFAN Y Y Y Y
64: - - - - -
65: - - - - -
66: Answerback to droop control enabled DSAB Y Y N Y
67: Answerback to cancellation of torque Y Y N Y
command/torque current command
(H41-CCL/H42-CCL) TCL-C
68: Answerback to cancellation of torque limiter mode 1 Y Y Y Y
(F40-CCL) F40-AB
71: 73 ON command PRT-73 Y Y Y Y
72: Turn ON Y-terminal test output Y-ON Y Y Y Y
73: Turn OFF Y-terminal test output Y-OFF Y Y Y Y
74: Reading absolute position of serial PG in progress N N N Y
(Available soon) SPG-RD
75: System clock battery lifetime expired BATT Y Y Y Y
76: Magnetic pole position tuning in progress TUN-MG N N N Y
(Available soon)
77: SPGT battery warning SPGT-B Y Y Y Y
(Available soon)
78: Electrical conditions ready ERD Y Y Y Y
(Available soon)
79: IT detected in operation TCA Y Y Y Y
(Available soon)
80: EN terminal detection circuit failure DECF Y Y Y Y
(Available soon)
81: EN terminal OFF ENOFF Y Y Y Y
(Available soon)
82: Safety function in progress SF-RUN Y Y Y Y
(Available soon)
83: Motor stopped by safety function SF-STP Y Y Y Y
(Available soon)
84: STO under testing by safety function Y Y Y Y
(Available soon) SF-TST
E16 110h 86h Terminal [Y2] Function 1 0 to 75 (See Terminal [Y1] Function.) N 2 Y Y 58 Y Y Y Y
4-26
Change when running

Communica- Drive
Default setting
Function code
Data copying
Format type
Initialization
Remarks
VC for PMSM
VC w/o PG
VC w/ PG
485 Link
V/f
No. No.
E20 114h 8Ah Terminal [Y11] Function 1 0 to 75 (See Terminal [Y1] Function.) N 26 Y Y 58 Y Y Y Y
E21 115h 8Bh Terminal [Y12] Function 1 0 to 75 (See Terminal [Y1] Function.) N 26 Y Y 58 Y Y Y Y
E22 116h 8Ch Terminal [Y13] Function 1 0 to 75 (See Terminal [Y1] Function.) N 26 Y Y 58 Y Y Y Y
E23 117h 8Dh Terminal [Y14] Function 1 0 to 75 (See Terminal [Y1] Function.) N 26 Y Y 58 Y Y Y Y
E24 118h 8Eh Terminal [Y15] Function 1 0 to 75 (See Terminal [Y1] Function.) N 26 Y Y 58 Y Y Y Y
E25 119h 8Fh Terminal [Y16] Function 1 0 to 75 (See Terminal [Y1] Function.) N 26 Y Y 58 Y Y Y Y
E26 11Ah 90h Terminal [Y17] Function 1 0 to 75 (See Terminal [Y1] Function.) N 26 Y Y 58 Y Y Y Y
Chap. 4
E27 11Bh 91h Terminal [Y18] Function 1 0 to 75 (See Terminal [Y1] Function.) N 26 Y Y 58 Y Y Y Y
E28 11Ch h Y Terminal Function 0 0000 to 001F N 0000 Y Y 36 Y Y Y Y
(Normal open/close) 0: Normal open
1: Normal close
E29 11Dh 92h PG Pulse Output Selection 0 0 to 10 N 0 Y Y 92 Y N N Y
0: No dividing

1: 1/2
2: 1/4
3: 1/8
4: 1/16
5: 1/32
6: 1/64
0 to 6: Internal PG input is divided before output.
7: Internal speed command: Pulse oscillation mode
8: PG (PD): Detected pulse input oscillation mode
9: PG (PR): Pulse command input oscillation mode
10: Integrated PG, PG (SD): Detected speed pulse input
oscillation mode
7 to 10: Input pulse is arbitrarily divided before output.
(AB 90° phase difference signal)
E30 11Eh h Motor Overheat Protection 8 50 to 200°C Y 150 Y Y 0 Y Y Y Y
(Temperature)
E31 11Fh h Motor Overheat Early Warning 1 50 to 200°C Y 75 Y Y 0 Y Y Y Y
(Temperature)
E32 120h CDh M1-M3 PTC Activation Level 1 0.00 to 5.00 V N 1.60 Y Y 3 Y Y Y Y
The PTC is activated if the input voltage of the PTC
terminal exceeds this activation level when the PTC
thermistor is selected (P30/A31/A131 = 2).
E33 121h h Inverter Overload Early Warning 1 25 to 100% Y 90 Y Y 0 Y Y Y Y
E34 122h h Motor Overload Early Warning 1 25 to 100% Y 90 Y Y 0 Y Y Y Y
E35 123h h DB Overload Protection 1 0 to 100% Y 0 Y Y 0 Y Y N Y
E35 specifies %ED of the braking resistor relative to the
inverter capacity.
When E35 = 0, the overload protection function (dbh ) is
disabled.
E36 124h h DB Overload Early Warning 1 0 to 100% Y 80 Y Y 0 Y Y N Y
E37 125h h DB Thermal Time Constant 1 0 to 1000 s Y 300 Y Y 0 Y Y N Y
E38 126h 93h Speed Detection Mode 8 000 to 111 Y 000 Y Y 9 Y Y N Y
Detection mode of 0xE39/E40/E41
0: Detected speed
1: Reference speed
Under V/f control, only the specified reference speed is
valid.
E39 127h 94h Speed Detection Level 1 1 0 to 30000 r/min Y 1500 Y Y 0 Y Y Y Y
If N-FB1± (Detected speed 1) or N-REF4 (Reference
speed 4) exceeds this speed detection level 1, the
inverter issues the detection signal.
E40 128h 95h Speed Detection Level 2 1 -30000 to 30000 r/min Y 1500 Y Y 5 Y Y Y Y
E41 129h 96h Speed Detection Level 3 1 -30000 to 30000 r/min Y 1500 Y Y 5 Y Y Y Y
E42 12Ah 97h Speed Arrival 1 1.0 to 20.0% Y 3.0 Y Y 2 Y Y N Y
(Detection width) If the detected speed comes within the range of N-REF2
(Reference speed 2) ± this detection width, the inverter
issues the detection signal.
E43 12Bh 98h Speed Agreement 1 1.0 to 20.0% Y 3.0 Y Y 2 Y Y N Y
(Detection width) If N-FB2± (Detected speed 2) is within the range of
N-REF4 (Reference speed 4) ± this detection width, the
inverter issues the detection signal.
E44 12Ch 99h (Off-delay timer) 1 0.000 to 5.000 s Y 0.100 Y Y 4 Y Y N Y
E45 12Dh 9Ah Speed Disagreement Alarm 1 00 to 21 N 00 Y Y 9 Y Y N Y
Phase Loss Detection Level Units place: Speed disagreement alarm (er9 )
0: Disable
1: Enable
Tenths place: Power supply phase loss detection (lin )
0: Standard level
1: For particular manufacturers.
2: Cancel
E46 12Eh 9Bh Torque Detection Level 1 3 0 to 300% Y 30 Y Y 16 Y Y Y Y
Calculated value under V/f control.
If the torque command exceeds this setting, the inverter
issues the detection signal.
4-27
Change when running
Communica- Drive
Default setting
Function code
Data copying
Format type
Initialization
Remarks
VC for PMSM
VC w/o PG
VC w/ PG
485 Link
V/f
No. No.
E47 12Fh 9Ch Torque Detection Level 2 1 0 to 300% Y 30 Y Y 16 Y Y Y Y

E48 130h 9Dh Magnetic Flux Detection Level 1 10 to 100% N 100 Y Y 16 Y Y N N
If the magnetic flux value calculated exceeds this setting,
the inverter issues the detection signal.
E49 131h h Terminal [Ai1] Function 4 0 to 27 N 0 Y Y 59
0: Shut down input signal OFF - Y Y Y Y
1: Auxiliary speed setting 1 Y Y Y Y
AUX-N1 ±10V/±Nmax
2: Auxiliary speed setting 2 Y Y Y Y
AUX-N2 ±10V/±Nmax
3: Torque limiter level 1 Y Y N Y
TL-REF1 ±10V/±150%
4: Torque limiter level 2 Y Y N Y
TL-REF2 ±10V/±150%
5: Torque bias TB-REF ±10V/±150% Y Y N Y
6: Torque command T-REF ±10V/±150% Y Y N Y
7: Torque current command IT-REF ±10V/±150% Y Y N Y
8: Creep speed 1 for UP/DOWN control Y Y Y Y
CRP-N1 ±10V/±Nmax
9: Creep speed 2 for UP/DOWN control Y Y Y Y
CRP-N2 ±10V/±Nmax
10: Magnetic flux reference Y N N N
MF-REF ＋10V/＋100%
11: Detect line speed Y Y Y Y
LINE-N ±10V/±Nmax
12: Motor temperature M-TMP ＋10V/200°C Y Y Y Y
13: Speed override Y Y Y Y
N-OR ±10V/±50%
14: Universal Ai Y Y Y Y
U-AI ±10V/±4000(h)
15: PID feedback 1 Y Y Y Y
PID-FB1 ±10V/±20000(d)
16: PID reference value Y Y Y Y
PID-REF ±10V/±20000(d)
17: PID correction gain Y Y Y Y
PID-G ±10V/±4000(h)
18 to 24: Custom Ai1 to Ai7 Y Y Y Y
C-AI1 to C-AI7
25: Main speed setting N-REFV ±10V/±Nmax Y Y Y Y
26: Current input speed setting (4-20 mADC) Y Y Y Y
N-REFC ±10V/±Nmax
(Data 26 is available only on [Ai2].)
27: PID feedback amount 2 PID-FB2 ±10V/±20000 (d) Y Y Y Y
E50 132h h Terminal [Ai2] Function 1 0 to 27 (Refer to Terminal [Ai1] Function.) N 0 Y Y 59 Y Y Y Y
E53 135h h Ai1 Gain 4 -10.000 to 10.000 times Y 1.000 Y Y 8 Y Y Y Y
E57 139h h Ai1 Bias 4 -100.0 to 100.0% Y 0.0 Y Y 6 Y Y Y Y
E58 13Ah h Ai2 Bias 1 -100.0 to 100.0% Y 0.0 Y Y 6 Y Y Y Y
E59 13Bh h Ai3 Bias 1 -100.0 to 100.0% Y 0.0 Y Y 6 Y Y Y Y
E60 13Ch h Ai4 Bias 1 -100.0 to 100.0% Y 0.0 Y Y 6 Y Y Y Y
E61 13Dh h Ai1 Filter 4 0.000 to 0.500 s Y 0.010 Y Y 4 Y Y Y Y
E62 13Eh h Ai2 Filter 1 0.000 to 0.500 s Y 0.010 Y Y 4 Y Y Y Y
E63 13Fh h Ai3 Filter 1 0.000 to 0.500 s Y 0.010 Y Y 4 Y Y Y Y
E64 140h h Ai4 Filter 1 0.000 to 0.500 s Y 0.010 Y Y 4 Y Y Y Y
E65 141h h Up/Down Limiter (Ai1) 4 0.00 to 60.00 s Y 0.00 Y Y 3 Y Y Y Y
E65 specifies the duration required when the inverter
internal data changes from 0 V to 10 V if the voltage on
terminal [Ai1] changes from 0 V to 10 V.
4-28
Change when running

Communica- Drive
Default setting
Function code
Data copying
Format type
Initialization
Remarks
VC for PMSM
VC w/o PG
VC w/ PG
485 Link
V/f
No. No.
E69 145h h Terminal [Ao1] Function 5 0 to 40 Y 1 Y Y 60

0: Detected speed 1 (Speed indicator, one-way Y Y N Y
deflection) N-FB1+ ±Nmax/10V
1: Detected speed 1 (Speed indicator, two-way Y Y N Y
deflection) N-FB1± ±Nmax/±10V
2: Reference speed 2 (before ACC/DEC calculation) Y Y Y Y
N-REF2 ±Nmax/±10V
3: Reference speed 4 (ASR input) Y Y Y Y
Chap. 4
N-REF4 ±Nmax/±10V
4: Detected speed 2 (ASR input) Y Y N Y
N-FB2± ±Nmax/±10V
5: Detected line speed Y Y Y Y
LINE-N± ±Nmax/±10V

6: Torque current command (Torque ammeter, one-way Y Y N Y
deflection) IT-REF± ±150%/±10V
7: Torque current command (Torque ammeter, two-way Y Y N Y
deflection) IT-REF+ ±150%/10V
8: Torque command (Torque meter, two-way deflection) Y Y N Y
T-REF± ±150%/±10V
9: Torque command (Torque meter, one-way deflection) Y Y N Y
T-REF+ ±150%/10V
10: Motor current I-AC 200%/10V Y Y Y Y
11: Motor voltage V-AC 200%/10V Y Y Y Y
12: Input power (Motor output) Y Y Y Y
PWR 200%/10V
13: DC link bus voltage Y Y Y Y
V-DC 800V/10V
14: +10V test voltage output Y Y Y Y
P10 +10 VDC equivalent
15: -10V test voltage output Y Y Y Y
N10 -10 VDC equivalent
16: Motor temperature TMP-M ±200°C/±10V Y Y Y Y
28: Torque bias balance adjustment (Available soon) Y Y N Y
TBL ±150%/±10V
29: Torque bias gain adjustment (Available soon) Y Y N Y
TBG ±150%/±10V
30: Universal AO U-AO - Y Y Y Y
31-37: Custom Ao1-Ao7 Y Y Y Y
C-AO1 to C-AO7
38: Input power PWR-IN 200%/10V Y Y Y Y
39: Magnetic pole position signal SMP TOP/5V N N N Y
40: PID output value PID-OUT ±200%/±10V Y Y Y Y
E70 146h h Terminal [Ao2] Function 1 0 to 40 (Refer to Terminal [Ao1] function.) Y 6 Y Y 60 Y Y Y Y
E71 147h h Terminal [Ao3] Function 1 0 to 40 (Refer to Terminal [Ao1]1 function.) Y 3 Y Y 60 Y Y Y Y
E74 14Ah h Ao1 Gain 5 -100.00 to 100.00 times Y 1.00 Y Y 7 Y Y Y Y
E75 14Bh h Ao2 Gain 1 -100.00 to 100.00 times Y 1.00 Y Y 7 Y Y Y Y
E76 14Ch h Ao3 Gain 1 -100.00 to 100.00 times Y 1.00 Y Y 7 Y Y Y Y
E77 14Dh h Ao4 Gain 1 -100.00 to 100.00 times Y 1.00 Y Y 7 Y Y Y Y
E78 14Eh h Ao5 Gain 1 -100.00 to 100.00 times Y 1.00 Y Y 7 Y Y Y Y
E79 14Fh h Ao1 Bias 5 -100.0 to 100.0% Y 0.0 Y Y 6 Y Y Y Y
E80 150h h Ao2 Bias 1 -100.0 to 100.0% Y 0.0 Y Y 6 Y Y Y Y
E84 154h h Ao1-Ao5 Filter 0 0.000 to 0.500 s Y 0.010 Y Y 4 Y Y Y Y
E90 15Ah h Link Command Function 2 0 to 12 Y 0 Y Y 231
Selection 1 0: Shut down input signal OFF Y Y Y Y
(Available soon)
1: Auxiliary speed setting 1 AUX-N1 Y Y Y Y
2: Auxiliary speed setting 2 AUX-N2 Y Y Y Y
3: Torque bias level TB-REF Y Y N Y
4: Creep speed 1 for UP/DOWN control CRP-N1 Y Y Y Y
5: Creep speed 2 for UP/DOWN control CRP-N2 Y Y Y Y
6: Detect line speed LINE-N Y Y Y Y
7: Motor temperature M-TMP Y Y Y Y
8: Speed override N-OR Y Y Y Y
9: PID feedback amount 1 PID-FB1 Y Y Y Y
10: PID command amount PID-REF Y Y Y Y
11: PID correction gain PID-G Y Y Y Y
12: PID feedback amount 2 PID-FB2 Y Y Y Y
13: Observer torque FB (Available soon) OBS-TFB Y Y N Y
4-29
Change when running
Communica- Drive
Default setting
Function code
Data copying
Format type
Initialization
Remarks
VC for PMSM
VC w/o PG
VC w/ PG
485 Link
V/f
No. No.
E91 15Bh h Link Command Function 1 0 to 26 Y 0 Y Y 231 Y Y Y Y

Selection 2 When E91 ≠ 0 (OFF), analog setting via the
(Available soon) communications link (S17) has priority over Ai input
specified by Ai function selection.
(Refer to the Link Command Function Selection 1.)
E101 1E01h h Ai1 Offset 4 -100.00 to 100.00% Y 0.00 Y Y 7 Y Y Y Y
E105 1E05h h Ai1 Dead Zone 4 0.00 to 10.00% Y 0.00 Y Y 3 Y Y Y Y
Limits all command values except input values to 0 V.
E109 1E09h h Dividing Ratio for FA, FB Pulse 2 1 to 65535 N 1000 Y Y 0 Y Y N Y
Output Specifies the numerator of the dividing ratio for FA and
(Numerator) FB pulse output.
E110 1E0Ah h (Denominator) 1 1 to 65535 N 1000 Y Y 0 Y Y N Y
Specifies the denominator of the dividing ratio for FA and
FB pulse output.
E114 1E0Eh h Speed Agreement 2 4 1.0 to 20.0% Y 3.0 Y Y 2 Y Y N Y
inverter issues the speed agreement signal N-AG2.
E115 1E0Fh h (Off-delay timer) 1 0.000 to 5.000 s Y 0.100 Y Y 4 Y Y N Y
Specifies the off-delay timer of the speed agreement
signal N-AG2.
E116 1E10h h Speed Agreement 3 1 1.0 to 20.0% Y 3.0 Y Y 2 Y Y N Y
inverter issues the speed agreement signal N-AG3.
E117 1E11h h (Off-delay timer) 1 0.000 to 5.000 s Y 0.100 Y Y 4 Y Y N Y
Specifies the off-delay timer of the speed agreement
signal N-AG3.
E118 1E12h h Temperature for Axial Fan Stop 0 0 to 200°C Y 0 Y Y 0 Y Y Y Y
Signal If the NTC detection temperature of the motor having an
NTC thermistor drops below this setting, the inverter turns
ON the axial fan stopped signal MFAN.
4-30
C codes (Control Functions)
Change when running

Communica- Drive
Default setting
Function code
Data copying
Format type
Initialization
Remarks
VC for PMSM
VC w/o PG
VC w/ PG
485 Link
V/f
No. No.
C01 201h h Jump Speed 1 4 0 to 30000 r/min Y 0 Y Y 0 Y Y Y Y

Enables the inverter to jump over a point on the
reference speed in order to skip a resonance point of
the driven machinery (load) and the motor speed.
Up to three different jump points can be specified.
Chap. 4
C04 204h h Hysteresis Width for Jump Speed 1 0 to 1000 r/min Y 0 Y Y 0 Y Y Y Y
C05 205h 9Eh Multistep Speed 1 17 0 to 30000 r/min / 0.00 to 100.00% / Y 0/0.00/ Y Y 0 Y Y Y Y
0.0 to 999.9 m/min (Switchable by C21) 0.0
Multistep speeds 1 to 15 can be switched by turning

terminal commands SS1, SS2, SS4 and SS8
ON/OFF.
C06 206h 9Fh Multistep Speed 2 1 0 to 30000 r/min / 0.00 to 100.00% / Y 0/0.00/ Y Y 0 Y Y Y Y
C07 207h A0h Multistep Speed 3 1 0 to 30000 r/min / 0.00 to 100.00% / Y 0/0.00/ Y Y 0 Y Y Y Y
C10 20Ah A3h Multistep Speed 6 1 0 to 30000 r/min / 0.00 to 100.00% / Y 0/0.00/ Y Y 0 Y Y Y Y
C11 20Bh A4h Multistep Speed 7 1 0 to 30000 r/min / 0.00 to 100.00% / Y 0/0.00/ Y Y 0 Y Y Y Y
C12 20Ch h Multistep Speed 8 1 0 to 30000 r/min / 0.00 to 100.00% / Y 0/0.00/ Y Y 0 Y Y Y Y
C13 20Dh h Multistep Speed 9 1 0 to 30000 r/min / 0.00 to 100.00% / Y 0/0.00/ Y Y 0 Y Y Y Y
C14 20Eh h Multistep Speed 10 1 0 to 30000 r/min / 0.00 to 100.00% / Y 0/0.00/ Y Y 0 Y Y Y Y
C15 20Fh h Multistep Speed 11 1 0 to 30000 r/min / 0.00 to 100.00% / Y 0/0.00/ Y Y 0 Y Y Y Y
C16 210h h Multistep Speed 12 1 0 to 30000 r/min / 0.00 to 100.00% / Y 0/0.00/ Y Y 0 Y Y Y Y
C17 211h h Multistep Speed 13 1 0 to 30000 r/min / 0.00 to 100.00% / Y 0/0.00/ Y Y 0 Y Y Y Y
C18 212h h Multistep Speed 14/ 1 0 to 30000 r/min / 0.00 to 100.00% / Y 0/0.00/ Y Y 0 Y Y Y Y
Creeping Speed 1 0.0 to 999.9 m/min (Switchable by C21) 0.0
C18 and C19 apply also to the creep speed under
UP/DOWN control.
C19 213h h Multistep Speed 15/ 1 0 to 30000 r/min / 0.00 to 100.00% / Y 0/0.00/ Y Y 0 Y Y Y Y
Creeping Speed 2 0.0 to 999.9 m/min (Switchable by C21) 0.0
C20 214h h Multistep Speed Agreement Timer 1 0.000 to 0.100 s Y 0.000 Y Y 4 Y Y Y Y
When SS1, SS2, SS4 and SS8 are kept at the same
status for the duration specified by this function code,
the inverter switches the reference speed.
C21 215h h Multistep Speed Configuration 1 0 to 2 N 0 Y Y 93 Y Y Y Y
Definition 0: 0 to 30000 r/min
1: 0.00 to 100.00%
2: 0.0 to 999.9 m/min
Defines the unit of multistep speed specified by C05 to
C19. When C21 = 1, the percentage of the maximum
speed (F03/A06/A40) of the selected motor applies.
C25 219h h Speed Command N2 0 0 to 9 N 0 Y Y 41 Y Y Y Y
0: Keypad ( / keys)
1: Analog input to terminal [12](0 to ±10V)
2: Analog input to terminal [12](0 to ＋10V)
3: UP/DOWN control (Initial speed = 0)
4: UP/DOWN control (Initial speed = Last value)
5: UP/DOWN control (Initial speed = Creep speed 1 or
2)
6: DIA card input
7: DIB card input
8: N-REFV input to terminal [Ai1]
9: N-REFC input to terminal [Ai2]
The speed command specified by this function code
takes effect when X terminal command N2/N1 is
turned ON.
C29 21Dh h Jogging Speed 0 0 to 30000 r/min Y 50 Y Y 0 Y Y Y Y
Specifies the speed to be applied when the motor
jogs.
C30 21Eh h ASR-JOG (P-gain) 9 0.1 to 500.0 times Y 10.0 Y Y 2 Y Y N Y
C31 21Fh h (I-constant) 1 0.000 to 10.000 s Y 0.200 Y Y 4 Y Y N Y
P control when C31 = 0.000
4-31
Change when running
Communica- Drive
Default setting
Function code
Data copying
Format type
Initialization
Remarks
VC for PMSM
VC w/o PG
VC w/ PG
485 Link
V/f
No. No.
C32 220h h (Input filter) 1 0.000 to 5.000 s Y 0.040 Y Y 4 Y Y Y Y

C33 221h h (Detection filter) 1 0.000 to 0.100 s Y 0.005 Y Y 4 Y Y N Y
C34 222h h (Output filter) 1 0.000 to 0.100 s N 0.002 Y Y 4 Y Y N Y
C35 223h h Acceleration Time for Jogging 1 0.01 to 99.99 s Y 5.00 Y Y 13 Y Y Y Y
100.0 to 999.9 s
1000 to 3600 s
C36 224h h Deceleration Time for Jogging 1 0.01 to 99.99 s Y 5.00 Y Y 13 Y Y Y Y
100.0 to 999.9 s
1000 to 3600 s
C37 225h h S-curve JOG (Start side) 1 0 to 50% Y 0 Y Y 0 Y Y Y Y
C38 226h h S-curve JOG (End side) 1 0 to 50% Y 0 Y Y 0 Y Y Y Y
C40 228h h ASR2 (P-gain) 10 0.1 to 500.0 times Y 10.0 Y Y 2 Y Y N Y
C41 229h h (I-constant) 1 0.000 to 10.000 s Y 0.200 Y Y 4 Y Y N Y
C42 22Ah h (Feedforward gain) 1 0.000 to 9.999 s Y 0.000 Y Y 4 Y Y N Y
C43 22Bh h (Input filter) 1 0.000 to 5.000 s Y 0.040 Y Y 4 Y Y Y Y
C44 22Ch h (Detection filter) 1 0.000 to 0.100 s Y 0.005 Y Y 4 Y Y N Y
C45 22Dh h (Output filter) 1 0.000 to 0.100 s N 0.002 Y Y 4 Y Y N Y
C46 22Eh h Acceleration Time 2 1 0.01 to 99.99 s Y 5.00 Y Y 13 Y Y Y Y
100.0 to 999.9 s
1000 to 3600 s
C47 22Fh h Deceleration Time 2 1 0.01 to 99.99 s Y 5.00 Y Y 13 Y Y Y Y
100.0 to 999.9 s
1000 to 3600 s
C48 230h h S-curve 2 (Start side) 1 0 to 50% Y 0 Y Y 0 Y Y Y Y
C49 231h h S-curve 2 (End side) 1 0 to 50% Y 0 Y Y 0 Y Y Y Y
C50 232h h ASR3 (P-gain) 10 0.1 to 500.0 times Y 10.0 Y Y 2 Y Y N Y
C51 233h h (I-constant) 1 0.000 to 10.000 s Y 0.200 Y Y 4 Y Y N Y
C52 234h h (Feedforward gain) 1 0.000 to 9.999 s Y 0.000 Y Y 4 Y Y N Y
C53 235h h (Input filter) 1 0.000 to 5.000 s Y 0.040 Y Y 4 Y Y Y Y
C56 238h h Acceleration Time 3 1 0.01 to 99.99 s Y 5.00 Y Y 13 Y Y Y Y
100.0 to 999.9 s
1000 to 3600 s
C57 239h h Deceleration Time 3 1 0.01 to 99.99 s Y 5.00 Y Y 13 Y Y Y Y
100.0 to 999.9 s
1000 to 3600 s
C58 23Ah h S-curve 3 (Start side) 1 0 to 50% Y 0 Y Y 0 Y Y Y Y
C59 23Bh h S-curve 3 (End side) 1 0 to 50% Y 0 Y Y 0 Y Y Y Y
C60 23Ch h ASR4 (P-gain) 10 0.1 to 500.0 times Y 10.0 Y Y 2 Y Y N Y
C61 23Dh h (I-gain) 1 0.000 to 10.000 s Y 0.200 Y Y 4 Y Y N Y
C62 23Eh h (Feedforward gain) 1 0.000 to 9.999 s Y 0.000 Y Y 4 Y Y N Y
C63 23Fh h (Input filter) 1 0.000 to 5.000 s Y 0.040 Y Y 4 Y Y Y Y
C66 242h h Acceleration Time 4 1 0.01 to 99.99 s Y 5.00 Y Y 13 Y Y Y Y
100.0 to 999.9 s
1000 to 3600 s
C67 243h h Deceleration Time 4 1 0.01 to 99.99 s Y 5.00 Y Y 13 Y Y Y Y
100.0 to 999.9 s
1000 to 3600 s
C68 244h h S-curve 4 (Start side) 1 0 to 50% Y 0 Y Y 0 Y Y Y Y
C69 245h h S-curve 4 (End side) 1 0 to 50% Y 0 Y Y 0 Y Y Y Y
C70 246h h ASR Switching Time 0 0.00 to 2.55 s Y 1.00 Y Y 3 Y Y N Y
C71 247h A5h ACC/DEC Switching Speed 0 0.00 to 100.00% Y 0.00 Y Y 3 Y Y Y Y
C72 248h A6h ASR Switching Time 0 0.00 to 100.00% Y 0.00 Y Y 3 Y Y N Y
C73 249h h Creep Speed Switching (under 0 00 to 11 N 00 Y Y 9 Y Y Y Y
UP/DOWN control) (Creep Speed 1)(Creep Speed 2)
0: Function code setting (C18, C19)
1: Analog input (CRP1, CRP2)
4-32
P codes (Motor Parameter Functions M1)
Change when running

Communica- Drive
Default setting
Function code
Data copying
Format type
Initialization
Remarks
VC for PMSM
VC w/o PG
VC w/ PG
485 Link
V/f
No. No.
P01 301h h M1 Drive Control 0 0 to 5 N 0 Y N 55 Y Y Y Y

0: Vector control for IM with speed sensor
1: Vector control for IM without speed sensor
2: Simulation mode
3: Vector control for PMSM with speed sensor
4: --
Chap. 4
5: V/f control for IM
P02 302h h M1 Motor Selection 26 0 to 50 N * Y N 82 Y Y Y Y
Display (kW, HP) changes by setting F60.
0 to 35: Settings for VG-dedicated motors
Data at F04, F05, and P03 to P27 are
automatically set and write-protected.

36: P-OTHER (P-OTR on the keypad)
write-protected and cannot be overwritten.
37: OTHER
write-protected and cannot be overwritten.
38 to 50: Settings for the motor only for FRENIC-VG
(8-series)
automatically set and write-protected.
For the relationship between the setting data and the
motor type, refer to "List of Applicable Motors" in
Section 4.3.4, P02 codes.
P03 303h A7h M1 Rated Capacity 1 For inverters of 400 kW or below N * Y N 3 Y Y Y Y
0.00 to 500.00 kW when F60 = 0
0.00 to 600.00 HP when F60 = 1
For inverters of 500 kW or above 13
0.00 to 1200 kW when F60 = 0
0.00 to 1600 HP when F60 = 1
For multiwinding motors, set the motor capacity per
wiring.
P04 304h A8h M1 Rated Current 1 0.01 to 99.99 A N * Y N 13 Y Y Y Y
100.0 to 999.9 A
1000 to 2000 A
P05 305h A9h M1 Number of Poles 1 2 to 100 poles N 4 Y N 1 Y Y Y Y
P06 306h AAh M1 %R1 1 0.00 to 30.00% Y * Y N 3 Y Y Y Y
P07 307h ABh M1 %X 1 0.00 to 200.00% Y * Y N 3 Y Y Y Y
P08 308h ACh M1 Exciting Current/Magnetic Flux 1 0.01 to 99.99 A Y * Y N 13 Y Y Y Y
Weakening Current (-Id) 100.0 to 999.9 A
1000 to 2000 A
P09 309h ADh M1 Torque Current 1 0.01 to 99.99 A Y * Y N 13 Y Y N Y
100.0 to 999.9 A
1000 to 2000 A
P10 30Ah AEh M1 Slip Frequency (For driving) 1 0.001 to 10.000 Hz Y * Y N 4 Y Y N N
P11 30Bh AFh (For braking) 1 0.001 to 10.000 Hz Y * Y N 4 Y Y N N
P12 30Ch B0h M1 Iron Loss Factor 1 1 0.00 to 10.00% Y * Y N 3 Y Y N Y
P13 30Dh B1h M1 Iron Loss Factor 2 1 0.00 to 10.00% Y * Y N 3 Y Y N Y
P14 30Eh B2h M1 Iron Loss Factor 3 1 0.00 to 10.00% Y * Y N 3 Y Y N Y
P15 30Fh B3h M1 Magnetic Saturation Factor 1 1 0.0 to 100.0% Y * Y N 2 Y Y N N
Compensation factor for exciting current when the
magnetic flux command is 93.75%
P16 310h B4h M1 Magnetic Saturation Factor 2 1 0.0 to 100.0% Y * Y N 2 Y Y N N
magnetic flux command is 75%
magnetic flux command is 50%
P20 314h B8h M1 Secondary Time Constant 1 0.001 to 9.999 s Y * Y N 4 Y Y N N
P21 315h B9h M1 Induced Voltage Factor 1 0 to 999 V Y * Y N 0 Y Y N Y
P22 316h BAh M1 R2 Correction Factor 1 1 0.500 to 5.000 Y * Y N 4 Y Y N Y
P23 317h BBh M1 R2 Correction Factor 2 1 0.500 to 5.000 Y * Y N 4 Y Y N N
P24 318h BCh M1 R2 Correction Factor 3 1 0.010 to 5.000 Y * Y N 4 Y Y N N
P25 319h BDh M1 Exciting Current Correction 1 0.000 to 5.000 Y * Y N 4 Y Y N N
Factor
P26 31Ah BEh M1 ACR (P-gain) 1 0.1 to 20.0 Y 1.0 Y N 2 Y Y N Y
P27 31Bh BFh (I-time) 1 0.1 to 100.0 ms Y 1.0 Y N 2 Y Y N Y
4-33
Change when running
Communica- Drive
Default setting
Function code
Data copying
Format type
Initialization
Remarks
VC for PMSM
VC w/o PG
VC w/ PG
485 Link
V/f
No. No.
P28 31Ch C0h M1 Pulse Resolution 0 100 to 60000 N 1024 Y N 0 Y N N Y

P29 31Dh D6h M1 External PG Correction Factor 0 0000 to 4FFF N 4000 Y N 9 Y N N N
P30 31Eh C1h M1 Thermistor Selection 0 0 to 3 N 1 Y N 84 Y Y Y Y
0: No thermistor
1: NTC thermistor
2: PTC thermistor
3: Ai (M-TMP)
The protection level of the motor protective functions
should be specified by E30 to E32.
P32 320h h M1 Online Auto-tuning 0 0 or 1 Y 0 Y N 0 Y Y N N
0: Disable
1: Enable
Enabling this auto-tuning activates the compensation
function for the resistance change caused by the
temperature rise of the motor running.
P33 321h h M1 Maximum Output Voltage/ 0 80 to 999 V Y 220/ Y N 0 N N Y Y
Maximum Voltage Limit 440
P34 322h h M1 Slip Compensation 3 -20.000 to 5.000 Hz Y 0.000 Y N 8 N N Y N
P35 323h h M1 Torque Boost 1 0.0 to 20.0 Y 0.0 Y N 2 N N Y N
Exclusive to V/f control.
0.0: Auto torque boost
(for constant torque load)
0.1 to 0.9: For variable torque load
1.0 to 1.9: For proportional torque load
2.0 to 20.0: For constant torque load
P36 324h h M1 Output Current Fluctuation 1 0.00 to 1.00 Y 0.20 Y N 3 N N Y N
Damping Gain
P42 32Ah h M1 q-axis Inductance Magnetic 9 0 to 100% Y 100.0 Y N 0 N N N Y
Saturation Coefficient
P43 32Bh h M1 Magnetic Flux Limiting Value 1 50.0 to 150.0% Y * Y N 2 N N N Y
P44 32Ch h M1 Overcurrent Protection Level 1 0.00: Disable N 0.00 Y N 0 N N N Y
0.01 to 2000 A
Specifies the allowable current value to prevent the
permanent magnet of a PMSM from getting
demagnetized. If the current exceeding this setting
flows, an overcurrent alarm (0c ) occurs.
P45 32Dh h M1 Torque Correction Gain 1 1 0.00 to 10.00 Y * Y N 3 N N N Y
P46 32Eh h M1 Torque Correction Gain 2 1 0.00 to 10.00 Y * Y N 3 N N N Y
P47 32Fh h M1 Torque Correction Gain 3 1 -1.000 to 1.000 Y * Y N 8 N N N Y
P48 330h h M1 Torque Correction Gain 4 1 -1.000 to 1.000 Y * Y N 8 N N N Y
4-34
H codes (High Performance Functions)
Change when running

Communica- Drive
Default setting
Function code
Data copying
Format type
Initialization
Remarks
VC for PMSM
VC w/o PG
VC w/ PG
485 Link
V/f
No. No.
H01 401h h Auto-tuning 0 0 to 4 N 0 N N 61 Y Y Y Y

0: Disable
1: ASR auto-tuning (Available soon) Y Y N Y
2: Motor parameter auto-tuning (R1, Lσ) Y Y Y N
3: Auto-tuning with the motor stopped Y Y N N
Chap. 4
4: Auto-tuning with the motor running Y Y N N
Upon completion of auto-tuning, the H01 data
automatically reverts to "0."
To save the tuned data, perform the Full save function
(H02).
H02 402h Eh Full Save Function 0 0 or 1 Y 0 N N 11 Y Y Y Y

When tuning is executed at H01 and the internal data
is written, or when the data is written by way of the link
system (T-Link, field bus, and RS-458, etc.), the data
goes out when the power supply of the inverter is
turned off. This function must operate when
preservation is necessary. After writing the data, this
function's data code automatically returns to 0.
H03 403h h Data Initialization 0 0 or 1 N 0 N N 11 Y Y Y Y
Setting H03 to "1" reverts the function code data
modified by the customer to the factory defaults.
Initialization targets include all fields of F, E, C, H, o, L
and U codes except motor parameter fields (P, A) and
F04, F05, F10 to F12.
Upon completion of the initialization, the H03 data
automatically reverts to "0."
H04 404h h Auto-reset (Times) 0 0 to 10 N 0 Y Y 0 Y Y Y Y
0: Disable
1 to 10 times
The auto-resetting signal can be output to the output
terminal.
H05 405h H Auto-reset (Reset interval) 0 0.01 to 20.00 s N 5.00 Y Y 3 Y Y Y Y
H06 406h h Cooling Fan ON/OFF Control 0 0 or 1 N 0 Y Y 68 Y Y Y Y
0: Disable
1: Enable
This control detects the temperature of the heat sink in
the inverter unit and turns the cooling fan ON/OFF
automatically.
It is possible to output the FAN (Cooling fan in
operation) signal in conjunction with this function.
H08 408h h Rev. Phase Sequence Lock 0 0 or 1 Y 0 Y Y 68 Y N N Y
0: Disable
1: Enable
H09 409h C2h Starting Mode (Auto search) 0 0 to 2 Y 2 Y Y 0 Y Y N Y
0: Disable
1: Enable (At restart after momentary power failure)
2: Enable
Auto search detects the idling motor speed at starting
and drives the motor at the same speed without
stopping it.
H10 40Ah C3h Energy-saving Operation 0 0 or 1 N 0 Y Y 68 Y N N N
0: Disable
1: Enable
H11 40Bh h Automatic Operation OFF Function 0 0 to 4 Y 0 Y Y 0 Y Y Y Y
0: Decelerate to stop when FWD-CM or REV-CM is
opened
1: The inverter is turned off below the stop speed
even for ON between FWD-CM and REV-CM.
2: Coast to stop when FWD-CM or REV-CM is
opened
3: Decelerate to stop using ASR when FWD-CM or
REV-CM is opened (under torque control)
4: Coast to stop when FWD-CM or REV-CM is
opened (under torque control)
H13 40Dh C4h Restart Mode after Momentary 5 0.1 to 5.0 s N 0.5 Y Y 2 Y Y Y Y
Power Failure (Wait time)
H14 40Eh h (Decrease rate in speed) 1 1 to 3600 r/min/s Y 500 Y Y 0 N N Y N
H15 40Fh h (Continuous running level) 1 3-phase 200 V: 200 to 300 V Y 235/ Y Y 0 Y Y Y Y
3-phase 400 V: 400 to 600 V 470
This setting applies when F14 = 2 (Trip after recovery
from power failure) or F14 = 3 (Continue to run).
H16 410h h (Run command self-hold setting) 1 0 or 1 N 1 Y Y 94 Y Y Y Y
0: Setting made by H17
1: Maximum time (The inverter self-holds the run
command while the control power supply in the
inverter is established or until the DC link bus
voltage comes to almost "0.")
H17 411h h (Run command self-hold time) 1 0.0 to 30.0 s N 30.0 Y Y 2 Y Y Y Y
4-35
Change when running
Communica- Drive
Default setting
Function code
Data copying
Format type
Initialization
Remarks
VC for PMSM
VC w/o PG
VC w/ PG
485 Link
V/f
No. No.
H19 413h C5h Active Drive 0 0 or 1 N 0 Y Y 68 Y N Y Y

0: Disable
1: Enable
Under vector control, this function automatically limits
the output torque to avoid an overload trip, etc.
H20 414h C6h PID Control (Mode selection) 8 0 to 3 N 0 Y Y 69 Y Y Y Y
0: Inactive
1: Active
2: Inverse action 1
3: Inverse action 2
H21 415h C7h (Command selection) 1 0 or 1 Y 0 Y Y 70 Y Y Y Y
0: Keypad or input to terminal [12]
1: Analog input PID-REF
H22 416h C9h (P-action) 1 0.000 to 10.000 times Y 1.000 Y Y 4 Y Y Y Y
H23 417h CAh (I-action) 1 0.00 to 100.00 s Y 1.00 Y Y 3 Y Y Y Y
H24 418h CBh (D-action) 1 0.000 to 10.000 s Y 0.000 Y Y 4 Y Y Y Y
H25 419h C8h (Upper limit) 1 -300 to 300% N 100 Y Y 5 Y Y Y Y
H26 41Ah CCh (Lower limit) 1 -300 to 300% N -100 Y Y 5 Y Y Y Y
H27 41Bh CEh (Speed command selection) 1 0 to 2 N 0 Y Y 95 Y Y Y Y
0: Disable
1: Select PID
2: Select auxiliary speed
H28 41Ch CFh Droop Control 0 0.0 to 25.0% Y 0.0 Y Y 2 Y Y N Y
H29 41Dh h Communications Link Function 2 0 or 1 Y 0 Y Y 40 Y Y Y Y
(Data protection via link) 0: Writable to function code fields
1: Write-protect function code fields
Setting H29 to "1" protects function code data from
getting changed mistakenly via the link (T-Link,
RS-485, etc.).
Via the link, data can be written to the "function code
fields" (given above) or "command data fields" (S
fields). The S fields are defined by H30.
H30 41Eh D0h (Link operation) 1 0 to 3 Y 0 Y Y 72 Y Y Y Y
Monitor Command Run command
data (FWD, REV)
0: Y N N
1: Y Y N
2: Y N Y
3: Y Y Y
H31 41Fh h RS-485 Communication 10 0 to 255 N 1 Y N 0 Y Y Y Y
(Station address) Broadcast: (0: RTU), (99: Fuji)
Address: 1 to 255
Specify the station address of RS-485.
H32 420h h (Error processing) 1 0 to 3 Y 3 Y Y 73 Y Y Y Y
0: Immediately trip with er5
1: Trip with er5 after running for the period specified
by timer H33.
2: Trip with er5 if a communications error persists
exceeding the period specified by timer H33.
3: Continue to run
H33 421h h (Timer) 1 0.01 to 20.00 s Y 2.00 Y Y 3 Y Y Y Y
H34 422h h (Baud rate) 1 0 to 4 Y 0 Y N 74 Y Y Y Y
0: 38400 bps
1: 19200 bps
2: 9600 bps
3: 4800 bps
4: 2400 bps
H35 423h h (Data length) 1 0 or 1 Y 0 Y N 75 Y Y Y Y
0: 8 bits
1: 7 bits
H36 424h h (Parity check) 1 0 to 2 Y 1 Y N 76 Y Y Y Y
0: None
1: Even parity
2: Odd parity
H37 425h h (Stop bits) 1 0 or 1 Y 1 Y N 77 Y Y Y Y
0: 2 bits
1: 1 bit
H38 426h h (Communications line break time) 1 0.0 to 60.0 s Y 60.0 Y Y 2 Y Y Y Y
0.0: Disable detection
0.1 to 60.0: Enable detection
H39 427h h (Response interval) 1 0.00 to 1.00 s Y 0.01 Y Y 3 Y Y Y Y
H40 428h h (Protocol selection) 1 0 to 2 N 1 Y N 78 Y Y Y Y
0: Fuji general-purpose inverter protocol
1: SX protocol (Loader protocol)
2: Modbus RTU protocol
To use the FRENIC-VG Loader, set H40 to "1."
4-36
Change when running

Communica- Drive
Default setting
Function code
Data copying
Format type
Initialization
Remarks
VC for PMSM
VC w/o PG
VC w/ PG
485 Link
V/f
No. No.
H41 429h D1h Torque Command Source 4 0 to 5 N 0 Y Y 64 Y Y N Y

0: Internal ASR output
1: Ai terminal input T-REF
2: DIA card
3: DIB card
5: PID
H42 42Ah D2h Torque Current Command Source 1 0 to 4 N 0 Y Y 65 Y Y N Y
Chap. 4
0: Internal ASR output
1: Ai terminal input IT-REF
2: DIA card
3: DIB card
H43 42Bh D3h Magnetic Flux Command Source 1 0 to 3 N 0 Y Y 66 Y N N N

0: Internal calculation
1: Ai terminal input MF-REF
2: Function code H44
H44 42Ch D4h Magnetic Flux Command Value 1 10 to 100% N 100 Y Y 16 Y N N N
H46 42Eh D7h Observer (Mode selection) 7 0 to 2 N 0 Y Y 79 Y Y N Y
0: Disable
1: Enable (Load disturbance observer)
2: Enable (Oscillation suppressing observer)
H47 42Fh D8h (M1 compensation gain) 1 0.00 to 1.00 times Y 0.00 Y Y 3 Y Y N Y
H48 430h h (M2 compensation gain) 1 0.00 to 1.00 times Y 0.00 Y Y 3 Y Y N Y
H49 431h D9h (M1 I-time) 1 0.005 to 1.000 s Y 0.100 Y Y 4 Y Y N Y
H50 432h h (M2 I-time) 1 0.005 to 1.000 s Y 0.100 Y Y 4 Y Y N Y
H51 433h DAh (M1 load inertia) 1 0.001 to 50.000 kg•m2 Y * Y N 4 Y Y N Y
The magnification is switchable by H228.
2
H52 434h h (M2 load inertia) 1 0.001 to 50.000 kg•m Y 0.001 Y N 4 Y Y N Y
H53 435h D5h Line Speed Feedback Selection 0 0 to 3 Y 0 Y Y 67 Y Y Y Y
0: Disable line speed (Integrated PG enabled)
Note that Ai input or PG (LD) should be high
level-select in UPAC.
1: Detect analog line speed (AI-LINE)
2: Detect digital line speed (PG(LD))
3: High level selected signal (Select high level of motor
speed and line speed.)
H55 437h h Zero Speed Control (Gain) 2 0 to 100 times Y 5 Y Y 0 Y N N Y
For details, refer to X terminal command LOCK
assigned by any of E01 to E13.
H56 438h h (Completion range) 1 0 to 100 pulses Y 100 Y Y 0 Y N N Y
H57 439h h Overvoltage Suppression 2 0 or 1 N 0 Y Y 68 Y Y Y Y
0: Disable
1: Enable
H58 43Ah h Overcurrent Suppression 1 0 or 1 N 0 Y Y 68 Y Y Y Y
0: Disable
1: Enable
H60 43Ch h Load Adaptive Control 7 0 to 3 N 0 Y Y 80 Y N N Y
(Definition 1) 0: Disable
1: Method 1
2: Method 2
3: Method 3
H61 43Dh h (Definition 2) 1 0 or 1 N 0 Y Y 81 Y N N Y
0: Winding up in forward rotation
1: Winding down in forward rotation
H62 43Eh h (Winding-up speed) 1 0.0 to 999.9 m/min N 0.0 Y Y 2 Y N N Y
H63 43Fh h (Counter weight) 1 0.00 to 600.00 t N 0.00 Y Y 3 Y N N Y
H64 440h h (Safety coefficient) 1 0.50 to 1.20 N 1.00 Y Y 3 Y N N Y
H65 441h h (Machine efficiency) 1 0.500 to 1.000 N 0.500 Y Y 4 Y N N Y
H66 442h h (Rated load) 1 0.00 to 600.00 t N 0.00 Y Y 3 Y N N Y
H68 444h h Alarm Data Deletion 0 0 or 1 Y 0 N N 11 Y Y Y Y
Setting H68 to "1" deletes all of the alarm history,
alarm causes and alarm information held in the
inverter memory.
After that, the H68 data automatically reverts to "0."
H70 446h h Reserved 1 2 0 to 9999 N 0 Y N 0 Y Y N Y
Reserved. (Do not access this function code.)
H71 447h h Reserved 2 1 0 to 10 N 0 N N 62 Y Y Y Y
Reserved. (Do not access this function code.)
H74 44Ah h PG Detection Circuit Self-diagnosis 0 0 or 1 N 0 Y Y 225 Y Y N Y
Selection 0: Disable
1: Enable
This function performs self-diagnosis of the speed
detection circuit by pulse generator signals (PA, PB).
4-37
Change when running
Communica- Drive
Default setting
Function code
Data copying
Format type
Initialization
Remarks
VC for PMSM
VC w/o PG
VC w/ PG
485 Link
V/f
No. No.
H75 44Bh h Phase Sequence Configuration of 0 0 or 1 N 0 Y Y 197 Y Y Y Y

Main Circuit Output Wires 0: Normal phase U-V-W
1: Reverse phase U-W-V
Using this function allows the motor to run with the
phase sequence of the motor wires arbitrarily
changed.
H76 44Ch h Main Power Down Detection 0 0 or 1 Y 0 Y Y 0 Y Y Y Y
0: Disable
1: Enable
Enable this function to enable the AC power monitor.
Disable this function when DC power is supplied, e.g.,
connecting with a power regenerative converter.
H77 44Dh h Cooling Fan ON/OFF Control 0 0 to 600 s Y 600 Y Y 0 Y Y Y Y
Continuation Timer Specifies the condition of the cooling fan ON/OFF
control by H06.
H78 44Eh h Initialization of Startup Counter/ 6 0 to 6 N 0 N N 0 Y Y Y Y
Total Run Time 0: Disable
1: M1 number of startups
4: M1 cumulative run time
Initializes the number of startups and cumulative run
time.
H79 44Fh h Initialization of Cumulative Run Time 1 0 to 65535 (in units of 10 hours) N 0 N N 0 Y Y Y Y
of Cooling Fan Initializes the cumulative run time when the cooling fan
is replaced.
Usually, write "0" after replacement.
H80 450h h Capacitance Measurement of DC 1 0 to 32767 N 0 N N 0 Y Y Y Y
Link Bus Capacitor When the capacitance measurement is user mode
(H104), setting this function code at "0" and shutting
down the inverter power starts measuring the initial
value of the capacitance and sets the measurement
result to this function code.
H81 451h h Initialization of Service Life of DC 1 0 to 65535 (in units of 10 hours) N 0 N N 0 Y Y Y Y
Link Bus Capacitor Initializes the elapsed time of the DC link bus
capacitor.
H82 452h h Startup Count for Maintenance 1 0 to 65535 Y 0 N Y 0 Y Y Y Y
Specifies the number of startups for performing
maintenance of the machinery.
H83 453h h Maintenance Interval 1 0 to 65535 (in units of 10 hours) Y 8760 N Y 0 Y Y Y Y
Specifies the maintenance interval for performing
maintenance of the machinery.
H85 455h h Calendar Clock 4 0000 to FFFF Y 0001 N Y 143 Y Y Y Y
(Year/month) Upper two digits: Year, Lower two digits: Month
H86 456h h (Day/hour) 1 0000 to FFFF Y 0100 N Y 144 Y Y Y Y
Upper two digits: Date, Lower two digits: Time
H87 457h h (Minute/second) 1 0000 to FFFF Y 0000 N Y 145 Y Y Y Y
Upper two digits: Minute, Lower two digits: Second
H88 458h h (Setting up clock) 1 0 or 1 Y 0 N N 11 Y Y Y Y
0: Disable
1: Write the current date and time
Setting H88 to "1" sets up the calendar clock in
accordance with the settings of H85 to H87.
After that, the H88 data automatically reverts to "0."
H89 459h h Speed Detection Monitor Selection 0 0 or 1 N 0 Y Y 198 Y Y N Y
(under V/f control) 0: Estimated value / No display
(Available soon) 1: PG detected value / PG detected value
H90 45Ah h Overspeed Alarm Detection Level 0 100 to 160% Y 120 Y Y 0 Y Y N Y
H94 45Eh h ASR Feedforward Gain 0 0 to 2 Y 0 Y Y 193 Y Y N Y
Magnification Setting 0: 1 time
(Available soon) 1: 10 times
2: 100 times
Switches the magnification setting of ASR1 to ASR4
feedforward gain.
H99 463h h UP/DOWN S-curve Pattern 0 0 or 1 N 0 Y Y 0 Y N N Y
Selection 0: Disable (compatible with VG7)
(Available soon) 1: Enable (compatible with VG5)
H101 1F01h h PID Command Filter Time Constant 0 0 to 5000 ms Y 0 Y Y 0 Y Y Y Y
Specifies the time constant of the PID command filter
(after switched by H21).
H102 1F02h h Magnetic Pole Position Offset 0 0 or 1 Y 0 N Y 68 N N N Y
Writing Permission 0: Disable, 1: Enable
(Available soon)
4-38
Change when running

Communica- Drive
Default setting
Function code
Data copying
Format type
Initialization
Remarks
VC for PMSM
VC w/o PG
VC w/ PG
485 Link
V/f
No. No.
H103 1F03h h Protective/Maintenance Function 9 0000 to 1111 Y 0101 Y Y 9 Y Y Y Y

Selection 1 Selects the protective functions individually.
(0: Disable, 1: Enable)
Thousands digit: Start delay (l0c )
Hundreds digit: Ground fault (ef )
Tenths digit: Output phase loss (0pl)
Units digit: Braking transistor broken (dba )
Chap. 4
Selection 2 Selects the protective/maintenance functions
individually.
Thousands digit: PG wire break (p9 )
Hundreds digit: Lower the carrier frequency
Tenths digit: Judge the life of DC link bus

capacitor
Units digit: Select life judgment threshold of DC
link bus capacitor
(0: Factory default level, 1: User
setup level)
Selection 3 Selects the protective/maintenance functions
individually.
Thousands digit: --
Hundreds digit: --
Tenths digit: --
Units digit: --
H106 1F06h h Light Alarm Object Definition 1 1 0000 to 1111 N 0000 Y Y 9 Y Y Y Y
(0: Heavy alarm (err ), 1: Light alarm (l-al))
Thousands digit: OH4 "Motor overheat"
Hundreds digit: OL1-OL3 "Motor 1 to 3 overload"
Tenths digit: nrb "NTC thermistor wire break
error"
Units digit: OH2 "External alarm"
Thousands digit: Er5 "RS-485 communications error"
Hundreds digit: Er4 "Network error"
Tenths digit: Reserved
Units digit: ArF "Toggle data error"
(0: Heavy alarm (err ), 1: Light alarm (l-al ))
Thousands digit: Err "Mock alarm"
Hundreds digit: dFA "DC fan locked"
Tenths digit: Er9 "Speed mismatch"
LOC "Start delay"
Units digit: ArE "E-SX bus tact synchronization
error"
Thousands digit: Reserved
Hundreds digit: Reserved
Tenths digit: Reserved
Units digit: SnF "Safety printed circuit board light
alarm" (Available soon)
H110 1F0Ah h Light Alarm Object Definition 5 1 0000 to 1111 N 0000 Y Y 9 Y Y Y Y
(0: Not light alarm, 1: Light alarm (l-al ))
Thousands digit: MOH "Motor overheat early warning"
MOL "Motor overload early warning"
Hundreds digit: BaT "Battery life expired"
Tenths digit: LiF "Life time early warning"
Units digit: OH/OL "Heat sink overheat early
warning / overload early warning"
H111 1F0Bh h Light Alarm Object Definition 6 1 0 or 1 N 0 Y Y 68 Y Y Y Y
0: Disable (l-al not shown)
1: Enable (l-al shown)
Specified whether or not to display l-al on the LED
monitor when a light alarm occurs.
H112 1F0Ch h M1 Magnetic Saturation Extension 7 0.0 to 100.0% Y 43.8 Y N 2 Y N N N
Coefficient 6 Compensation factor for exciting current when the
magnetic flux command is 43.75%.
H113 1F0Dh h M1 Magnetic Saturation Extension 1 0.0 to 100.0% Y 37.5 Y N 2 Y N N N
H114 1F0Eh h M1 Magnetic Saturation Extension 1 0.0 to 100.0% Y 31.3 Y N 2 Y N N N
H115 1F0Fh h M1 Magnetic Saturation Extension 1 0.0 to 100.0% Y 25.0 Y N 2 Y N N N
magnetic flux command is 25%.
H116 1F10h h M1 Magnetic Saturation Extension 1 0.0 to 100.0% Y 18.8 Y N 2 Y N N N
4-39
Change when running
Communica- Drive
Default setting
Function code
Data copying
Format type
Initialization
Remarks
VC for PMSM
VC w/o PG
VC w/ PG
485 Link
V/f
No. No.

H125 1F19h h Observer (M3 compensation gain) 1 0.00 to 1.00 times Y 0.00 Y Y 3 Y Y N Y
H126 1F1Ah h (M3 integral time) 1 0.005 to 1.000 s Y 0.100 Y Y 4 Y Y N Y
H127 1F1Bh h (M3 load inertia) 1 0.001 to 50.000 kg•m2 Y 0.001 Y Y 4 Y Y N Y
H134 1F22h h Speed Drop Detection Delay Timer 5 0.000 to 10.000 s N 0.000 Y Y 4 N Y N N
H135 1F23h h Speed Command Detection Level 1 0.0 to 150.0 r/min N 0.0 Y Y 2 N Y N N
(FWD)
H136 1F24h h (REV) 1 0.0 to 150.0 r/min N 0.0 Y Y 2 N Y N N
H137 1F25h h Speed Drop Detection Level 1 0.0 to 150.0 r/min N 0.0 Y Y 2 N Y N N
H138 1F26h h Speed Command Detection Delay 1 0.000 to 10.000 s N 0.000 Y Y 4 N Y N N
Timer
H140 1F28h h Start Delay Detection 1 0.0 to 300.0% Y 150.0 Y Y 2 Y Y N Y
(Detection level)
H141 1F29h h (Detection timer) 1 0.000 to 10.000 s Y 1.000 Y Y 0 Y Y N Y
H142 1F2Ah h Mock Alarm 0 0 or 1 Y 0 N N 11 Y Y Y Y
0: Disable
1: Cause a mock alarm
When H108 does not define a mock alarm as a light
alarm, a heavy alarm (err) occurs; when it defines a
mock alarm as a light alarm, a light alarm (l-alL)
occurs.
Holding down the and keys simultaneously for
three seconds also causes a mock alarm.
H144 1F2Ch h Toggle Data Error Timer 0 0.01 to 20.00 s Y 0.10 Y Y 3 Y Y Y Y
H144 specifies the toggle data error detection time.
H145 1F2Dh h Reverse Run Prevention for Vector 4 0 to 3 N 0 Y Y 202 N Y N N
Control without Speed Sensor 0: Disable
(Lower limit frequency selection) 1: Enable for FWD unipolar operation
2: Enable for REV unipolar operation
3: Enable for FWD/REV bipolar operation
H146 1F2Eh h (Lower limit frequency, FWD) 1 0.000 to 10.000 Hz N 0.000 Y Y 4 N Y N N
H147 1F2Fh h (Lower limit frequency, REV) 1 0.000 to 10.000 Hz N 0.000 Y Y 4 N Y N N
H148 1F30h h (Estimated primary frequency filter) 1 0 to 100 ms N 0 Y Y 0 N Y N N
Increase this setting if the speed fluctuation is large
under vector control without speed sensor.
H149 1F31h h Machine Runaway Detection Speed 0 0.0 to 20.0% N 0.0 Y Y 2 Y Y N Y
Setting 0.0: Disable
0.1 to 20.0%
Assuming the maximum speed as 100%.
H160 1F3Ch h M1 Initial Magnetic Pole Position 3 0 to 3 N 0 Y N 0 N N N Y
Detection Mode 0: Pull-in by current for IPMSM (Interior Permanent
(Available soon) Magnet Synchronous Motor)
1: Pull-in by current for SPMSM (Surface Permanent
Magnet Synchronous Motor)
2: Alternate system for IPMSM (Available soon)
H161 1F3Dh h M1 Pull-in Current Command 1 10 to 200% N 80 Y N 0 N N N Y
(Available soon) 100%/Motor rated current
H162 1F3Eh h M1 Pull-in Frequency 1 0.1 to 10.0 Hz N 1.0 Y N 2 N N N Y
(Available soon)
H163 1F3Fh h M1 Reference Current for Polarity 1 0 to 200% N 80 Y N 0 N N N Y
Discrimination
(Available soon)
H164 1F40h h M1 Alternating Voltage 1 0 to 100% N 0 Y N 0 N N N Y
(Available soon)
H170 1F46h h M2 Initial Magnetic Pole Position 3 0 to 3 N 0 Y N 0 N N N Y
H171 1F47h h M2 Pull-in Current Command 1 10 to 200% N 80 Y N 0 N N N Y
H172 1F48h h M2 Pull-in Frequency 1 0.1 to 10.0 Hz N 1.0 Y N 2 N N N Y
(Available soon)
H173 1F49h h M2 Reference Current for Polarity 1 0 to 200% N 80 Y N 0 N N N Y
Discrimination
(Available soon)
H174 1F4Ah h M2 Alternating Voltage 1 0 to 100% N 0 Y N 0 N N N Y
(Available soon)
4-40
Change when running

Communica- Drive
Default setting
Function code
Data copying
Format type
Initialization
Remarks
VC for PMSM
VC w/o PG
VC w/ PG
485 Link
V/f
No. No.
H180 1F50h h M3 Initial Magnetic Pole Position 8 0 to 3 N 0 Y N 0 N N N Y

H181 1F51h h M3 Pull-in Current Command 1 10 to 200% N 80 Y N 0 N N N Y
Chap. 4
H182 1F52h h M3 Pull-in Frequency 1 0.1 to 10.0 Hz N 1.0 Y N 2 N N N Y
(Available soon)
H183 1F53h h M3 Reference Current for Polarity 1 0 to 200% N 80 Y N 0 N N N Y
Discrimination
(Available soon)

H184 1F54h h M3 Alternating Voltage 1 0 to 100% N 0 Y N 0 N N N Y
(Available soon)
H201 2001h h Load Adaptive Control 13 0 or 1 N 0 Y Y 0 Y N N Y
(Load adaptive control 0: Enable H51/H64/H65, Disable H202-H213
parameter switching) 1: Disable H51/H64/H65, Enable H202-H213
(Available soon)
H202 2002h h (Load inertia for winding up 1) 1 0.001 to 50.000 kg•m2 N 0.001 Y Y 4 Y N N Y
(Available soon) Applies to winding-up operation when AN-P2/1 is OFF.
H203 2003h h (Safety coefficient for winding up 1) 1 0.50 to 1.20 N 1.00 Y Y 3 Y N N Y
(Available soon) Applies to winding-up operation when AN-P2/1 is OFF.
H204 2004h h (Mechanical efficiency 1 0.500 to 1.000 N 0.500 Y Y 4 Y N N Y
for winding up 1) Applies to winding-up operation when AN-P2/1 is OFF.
(Available soon)
H205 2005h h (Load inertia for winding up 2) 1 0.001 to 50.000 kg•m2 N 0.001 Y Y 4 Y N N Y
(Available soon) Applies to winding-up operation when AN-P2/1 is ON.
H206 2006h h (Safety coefficient for winding up 2) 1 0.50 to 1.20 N 1.00 Y Y 3 Y N N Y
(Available soon) Applies to winding-up operation when AN-P2/1 is ON.
H207 2007h h (Mechanical efficiency 1 0.500 to 1.000 N 0.500 Y Y 4 Y N N Y
for winding up 2) Applies to winding-up operation when AN-P2/1 is ON.
(Available soon)
H208 2008h h (Load inertia for winding down 1) 1 0.001 to 50.000 kg•m2 N 0.001 Y Y 4 Y N N Y
(Available soon) Applies to winding-down operation when AN-P2/1 is
OFF.
H209 2009h h (Safety coefficient 1 0.50 to 1.20 N 1.00 Y Y 3 Y N N Y
for winding down 1) Applies to winding-down operation when AN-P2/1 is
(Available soon) OFF.
H210 200Ah h (Mechanical efficiency 1 0.500 to 1.000 N 0.500 Y Y 4 Y N N Y
(Available soon) OFF.
H211 200Bh h (Load inertia for winding down 2) 1 0.001 to 50.000 kg•m2 N 0.001 Y Y 4 Y N N Y
(Available soon) Applies to winding-down operation when AN-P2/1 is
ON.
H212 200Ch h (Safety coefficient 1 0.50 to 1.20 N 1.00 Y Y 3 Y N N Y
(Available soon) ON.
H213 200Dh h (Mechanical efficiency 1 0.500 to 1.000 N 0.500 Y Y 4 Y N N Y
(Available soon) ON.
H214 200Eh h (Multi-limit speed pattern function) 14 0 or 1 N 0 Y Y 0 Y N N Y
(Available soon) 0: Enable H60, Disable H215-H224
1: Disable H60, Enable H215-H224
H215 200Fh h (Multi-limit speed pattern 1 0.1 to 100.0% N 50.0 Y Y 2 Y N N Y
at max. speed) Specifies the torque level at the maximum speed.
(Available soon)
H216 2010h h (Multi-limit speed pattern 1 0.1 to 100.0% N 100.0 Y Y 2 Y N N Y
at rated speed) Specifies the torque level at the rated speed.
(Available soon)
at rated speed x 1.1) Specifies the torque level at the rated speed*1.1.
(Available soon)
(Available soon)
(Available soon)
(Available soon)
(Available soon)
(Available soon)
4-41
Change when running
Communica- Drive
Default setting
Function code
Data copying
Format type
Initialization
Remarks
VC for PMSM
VC w/o PG
VC w/ PG
485 Link
V/f
No. No.

(Available soon)
(Available soon)
H225 2019h h (Limit speed discrimination zone, 1 0.1 to 100.0% N 75.0 Y Y 2 Y N N Y
Start speed) Specifies the starting speed of the discrimination zone.
(Available soon) The rated speed is assumed as 100%.
H226 201Ah h (Limit speed discrimination zone, 1 0.1 to 100.0% N 93.7 Y Y 2 Y N N Y
Completion speed) Specifies the end speed of the discrimination zone.
(Available soon) The rated speed is assumed as 100%.
H227 201Bh h (Function definition 3) 1 0 to 2 N 0 Y Y 0 Y N N Y
(Available soon) 0: Calculate the limit speed for winding-up and
winding-down individually
1: Drive winding-down operation using the last limited
speed result
Enable the winding-down limit calculation under
specific conditions
2: Drive winding-down operation using the last limited
speed result
Limit the winding-down speed with the rated speed
under specific conditions
H228 201Ch h Load Inertia Magnification Setting 0 0 to 2 N 0 Y Y 193 Y N N Y
0: 1 time (0.001 to 50.000 kg•m2)
1: 10 times (0.01 to 500.00 kg•m2)
2: 100 times (0.1 to 5000.0 kg•m2)
Switches the magnification of the load inertia (H51,
H52, H202, H205, H208, H211).
H322 2116h Notch Filter 1 6 10 to 2000 Hz Y 1000 Y Y 0 Y Y N Y
(Resonance frequency)
H323 2117h (Attenuation level) 1 0 to 40 dB Y 0 Y Y 0 Y Y N Y
H324 2118h (Frequency range) 1 0 to 3 Y 2 Y Y 0 Y Y N Y
H325 2119h Notch Filter 2 1 10 to 2000 Hz Y 1000 Y Y 0 Y Y N Y
(Resonance frequency)
H326 211Ah (Attenuation level) 1 0 to 40 dB Y 0 Y Y 0 Y Y N Y
H327 211Bh (Frequency range) 1 0 to 3 Y 2 Y Y 0 Y Y N Y
4-42
A codes (Alternative Motor Parameter Functions M2/M3)
Change when running

Communica- Drive
Default setting
Function code
Data copying
Format type
Initialization
Remarks
VC for PMSM
VC w/o PG
VC w/ PG
485 Link
V/f
No. No.
A01 501h h M2 Drive Control 29 0 to 5 N 0 Y N 228 Y Y Y Y

2: -
4: -
Chap. 4
A02 502h h M2 Rated Capacity 1 For inverters of 400 kW or below N 0.00 Y N 3 Y Y Y Y
0.00 to 500.00 kW when F60 = 0
0.00 to 600.00 HP when F60 = 1
0.00 to 1200 kW when F60 = 0

0.00 to 1600 HP when F60 = 1
wiring.
A03 503h h M2 Rated Current 1 0.01 to 99.99 A N 0.01 Y N 13 Y Y Y Y
100.0 to 999.9 A
1000 to 2000 A
A04 504h h M2 Rated Voltage 1 80 to 999 V N 80 Y N 0 Y Y Y Y
A05 505h h M2 Rated Speed 1 50 to 30000 r/min N 1500 Y N 0 Y Y Y Y
A06 506h h M2 Max. Speed 1 50 to 30000 r/min N 1500 Y N 0 Y Y Y Y
A07 507h h M2 Number of Poles 1 2 to 100 poles N 4 Y N 1 Y Y Y Y
A08 508h h M2 %R1 1 0.00 to 30.00% Y 0.00 Y N 3 Y Y Y Y
A09 509h h M2 %X 1 0.00 to 200.00% Y 0.00 Y N 3 Y Y Y Y
A10 50Ah h M2 Exciting Current/Magnetic Flux 1 0.01 to 99.99 A Y 0.01 Y N 13 Y Y Y Y
1000 to 2000 A
A11 50Bh h M2 Torque Current 1 0.01 to 99.99 A Y 0.01 Y N 13 Y Y N Y
100.0 to 999.9 A
1000 to 2000 A
A12 50Ch h M2 Slip Frequency (For driving) 1 0.001 to 10.000 Hz Y 0.001 Y N 4 Y Y N N
A13 50Dh h (For braking) 1 0.001 to 10.000 Hz Y 0.001 Y N 4 Y Y N N
A14 50Eh h M2 Iron Loss Factor 1 1 0.00 to 10.00% Y 0.00 Y N 3 Y Y N Y
A15 50Fh h M2 Iron Loss Factor 2 1 0.00 to 10.00% Y 0.00 Y N 3 Y Y N Y
A16 510h h M2 Iron Loss Factor 3 1 0.00 to 10.00% Y 0.00 Y N 3 Y Y N Y
A17 511h h M2 Magnetic Saturation Factor 1 1 0.0 to 100.0% Y 93.8 Y N 2 Y Y N N
A22 516h h M2 Secondary Time Constant 1 0.001 to 9.999 s Y 0.001 Y N 4 Y Y N N
A23 517h h M2 Induced Voltage Factor 1 0 to 999 V Y 0 Y N 0 Y Y N Y
A24 518h h M2 R2 Correction Factor 1 1 0.000 to 5.000 Y 1.000 Y N 4 Y Y N Y
A25 519h h M2 R2 Correction Factor 2 1 0.000 to 5.000 Y 1.000 Y N 4 Y Y N N
A26 51Ah h M2 R2 Correction Factor 3 1 0.010 to 5.000 Y 1.000 Y N 4 Y Y N N
A27 51Bh h M2 Exciting Current Correction 1 0.000 to 5.000 Y 0.000 Y N 4 Y Y N N
Factor
A28 51Ch h M2 ACR (P-gain) 1 0.1 to 20.0 Y 1.0 Y N 2 Y Y N Y
A29 51Dh h (I-time) 1 0.1 to 100.0 ms Y 1.0 Y N 2 Y Y N Y
A30 51Eh h M2 Pulse Resolution 0 100 to 60000 N 1024 Y N 0 Y N N Y
A31 51Fh h M2 Thermistor Selection 0 0 to 3 N 1 Y N 84 Y Y Y Y
0: No thermistor
1: NTC thermistor
2: PTC thermistor
3: Ai (M-TMP)
A32 520h h M2 Electronic Thermal Overload 3 0 to 2 Y 0 Y N 85 Y Y Y Y
A33 521h h (Detection level) 1 0.01 to 99.99 A Y 0.01 Y N 13 Y Y Y Y
100.0 to 999.9 A
1000 to 2000 A
A34 522h h (Thermal time constant) 1 0.5 to 75.0 min Y 0.5 Y N 2 Y Y Y Y
A51 533h h M2 External PG Correction Factor 0 0000 to 4FFF N 4000 Y N 9 Y N N N
4-43
Change when running
Communica- Drive
Default setting
Function code
Data copying
Format type
Initialization
Remarks
VC for PMSM
VC w/o PG
VC w/ PG
485 Link
V/f
No. No.
A52 534h h M2 Online Auto-tuning 0 0 or 1 Y 0 Y N 0 Y Y N N

0: Disable
1: Enable
A53 535h h M2 Maximum Output Voltage/ 0 80 to 999 V Y 80 Y N 0 N N Y Y
Maximum Voltage Limit
A54 536h h M2 Slip Compensation 3 -20.000 to 5.000 Hz Y 0.000 Y N 8 N N Y N
A55 537h h M2 Torque Boost 1 0.0 to 20.0 Y 0.0 Y N 2 N N Y N
A56 538h h M2 Output Current Fluctuation 1 0.00 to 1.00 Y 0.20 Y N 3 N N Y N
Damping Gain
A59 53Bh h M2 ABS Signal Input Definition 12 0 to 16 N 0 Y N 0 N N N Y
Specifies the operation interface to detect the
magnetic pole position, in accordance with the
encoder specifications.
0: 1 bit (Terminal; F0) Z-phase interface
1: 3 bits (Terminal: F0/F1/F2) U-,V-,W-phase
interface
2: 4 bits (Terminal; F0/F1/F2/F3) Gray code interface
3-5: Reserved.
6: SPGT 17-bit serial interface
7-16: Reserved.
A60 53Ch h M2 Magnetic Pole Position Offset 1 0.0 to 359.9 Y 0.0 Y N 2 N N N Y
(0° to 359.9° CCW)
Specifies the offset value for the PG reference
position and the actual motor magnetic pole position.
A61 53Dh h M2 Salient Pole Ratio (%Xq/%Xd) 1 1.000 to 3.000 N 1.000 Y N 4 N N N Y
Specifies the saliency ratio of PMSM.
Setting = Lq/Ld
To drive a SPM motor, set 1.000.
A62 53Eh h M2 q-axis Inductance Magnetic 9 0.0 to 100.0% Y 100.0 Y N 2 N N N Y
A63 53Fh h M2 Magnetic Flux Limiting Value 1 50.0 to 150.0% Y * Y N 2 N N N Y
A64 540h h M2 Overcurrent Protection Level 1 0: Disable N * Y N 0 N N N Y
1: 1 to 200%
A65 541h h M2 Torque Correction Gain 1 1 0.00 to 10.00 Y 1.00 Y N 3 N N N Y
A67 543h h M2 Torque Correction Gain 3 1 -1000 to 1000 Y 0.000 Y N 8 N N N Y
A69 545h h M2 Torque Correction Gain 5 1 -50.0 to 50.0 Y 0.00 Y N 7 N N N Y
A101 2401h h M3 Drive Control 29 0 to 5 N 5 Y N 228 Y Y Y Y
2: -
4: -
A102 2402h E5h M3 Rated Capacity 1 For inverters of 400 kW or below N 0.00 Y N 3 Y Y Y Y
0.00 to 500.00 kW when F60 = 0
0.00 to 600.00 HP when F60 = 1
0.00 to 1200 kW when F60 = 0
0.00 to 1600 HP when F60 = 1
wiring.
A103 2403h E6h M3 Rated Current 1 0.01 to 99.99 A N 0.01 Y N 13 Y Y Y Y
100.0 to 999.9 A
1000 to 2000 A
A104 2404h E7h M3 Rated Voltage 1 80 to 999 V N 80 Y N 0 Y Y Y Y
4-44
Change when running

Communica- Drive
Default setting
Function code
Data copying
Format type
Initialization
Remarks
VC for PMSM
VC w/o PG
VC w/ PG
485 Link
V/f
No. No.
A105 2405h E9h M3 Rated Speed 1 50 to 30000 r/min N 1500 Y N 0 Y Y Y Y

A106 2406h EAh M3 Max. Speed 1 50 to 30000 r/min N 1500 Y N 0 Y Y Y Y
A107 2407h EBh M3 Number of Poles 1 2 to 100 poles N 4 Y N 1 Y Y Y Y
A108 2408h ECh M3 %R1 1 0.00 to 30.00% Y 0.00 Y N 3 Y Y Y Y
A109 2409h EDh M3 %X 1 0.00 to 200.00% Y 0.00 Y N 3 Y Y Y Y
A110 240Ah EEh M3 Exciting Current/Magnetic Flux 1 0.01 to 99.99 A Y 0.01 Y N 13 Y Y Y Y
Chap. 4
1000 to 2000 A
A111 240Bh h M3 Torque Current 1 0.01 to 99.99 A Y 0.01 Y N 13 Y Y N Y
100.0 to 999.9 A
1000 to 2000 A
A112 240Ch h M3 Slip Frequency (For driving) 1 0.001 to 10.000 Hz Y 0.001 Y N 4 Y Y N N

A113 240Dh h (For braking) 1 0.001 to 10.000 Hz Y 0.001 Y N 4 Y Y N N
A114 240Eh h M3 Iron Loss Factor 1 1 0.00 to 10.00% Y 0.00 Y N 3 Y Y N N
A115 240Fh h M3 Iron Loss Factor 2 1 0.00 to 10.00% Y 0.00 Y N 3 Y Y N Y
A116 2410h h M3 Iron Loss Factor 3 1 0.00 to 10.00% Y 0.00 Y N 3 Y Y N Y
A122 2416h h M3 Secondary Time constant 1 0.001 to 9.999 s Y 0.001 Y N 4 Y Y N N
A123 2417h h M3 Induced Voltage Factor 1 0 to 999 V Y 0 Y N 0 Y Y N Y
A124 2418h h M3 R2 Correction Factor 1 1 0.500 to 5.000 Y 1.000 Y N 4 Y Y N Y
A125 2419h h M3 R2 Correction Factor 2 1 0.500 to 5.000 Y 1.000 Y N 4 Y Y N N
A126 241Ah h M3 R2 Correction Factor 3 1 0.010 to 5.000 Y 1.000 Y N 4 Y Y N N
A127 241Bh h M3 Exciting Current Correction 1 0.000 to 5.000 Y 0.000 Y N 4 Y Y N N
Factor
A128 241Ch h M3 ACR P Gain 1 0.1 to 20.0 Y 1.0 Y N 2 Y Y N Y
A129 241Dh h M3 ACR I time Constant 1 0.1 to 100.0 ms Y 1.0 Y N 2 Y Y N Y
A130 241Eh h M3 Pulse Resolution 0 100 to 60000 N 1024 Y N 0 Y N N Y
A131 241Fh F1h M3 Thermistor Selection 0 0 to 3 N 1 Y N 84 Y Y Y Y
0: No thermistor
1: NTC thermistor
2: PTC thermistor
3: Ai (M-TMP)
A132 2420h F2h M3 Electronic Thermal Overload 3 0 to 2 Y 0 Y N 85 Y Y Y Y
Using an NTC thermistor of a VG-dedicated motor
activates the motor overheat protection. If it happens,
disable the electronic thermal overload protection.
A133 2421h F3h (Detection level) 1 0.01 to 99.99 A Y 0.01 Y N 13 Y Y Y Y
100.0 to 999.9 A
1000 to 2000 A
A134 2422h F4h (Thermal time constant) 1 0.5 to 75.0 min Y 0.5 Y N 2 Y Y Y Y
A151 2433h h M2 External PG Correction 0 0000 to 4FFF N 4000 Y N 9 Y N N N
Coefficient
A152 2434h h M3 Online Auto-tuning 0 0 to 1 Y 0 Y N 68 Y Y N N
0: Disable
1: Enable
A153 2435h E8h M3 Maximum Output Voltage (at V/f 0 80 to 999 V Y 80 Y N 0 N N Y Y
maximum speed)
A154 2436h EFh M3 Slip Compensation 3 -20.000 to 5.000 Hz Y 0.000 Y N 8 N N Y N
A155 2437h F0h M3 Torque Boost 1 0.0 to 20.0 Y 0.0 Y N 2 N N Y N
A156 2438h h M3 Output Current Fluctuation 1 0.00 to 1.00 Y 0.20 Y N 3 N N Y N
Damping Gain
4-45
Change when running
Communica- Drive
Default setting
Function code
Data copying
Format type
Initialization
Remarks
VC for PMSM
VC w/o PG
VC w/ PG
485 Link
V/f
No. No.
A159 243Bh h M3 ABS Signal Input Definition 0 0 to 16 N 0 Y N 0 N N N Y

interface
3-5: Reserved.
7-16: Reserved.
A160 243Ch h M3 Magnetic Pole Position Offset 0 0.0 to 359.9 Y 0.0 Y N 2 N N N Y
(0° to 359.9° CCW)
A161 243Dh h M3 Salient Pole Ratio (%Xq/%Xd) 1 1.000 to 3.000 N 1.000 Y N 4 N N N Y
Setting = Lq/Ld
To drive a SPM motor, set 1.000.
A162 243Ch h M3 q-axis Inductance Magnetic 9 0.0 to 100.0% Y 1.000 Y N 2 N N N Y
A163 243Dh h M3 Magnetic Flux Limiting Value 1 50.0 to 150.0% Y 1.000 Y N 2 N N N Y
A164 2440h h M3 Overcurrent Protection Level 1 0: Disable N 0.00 Y N 0 N N N Y
1: 1 to 200%
4-46
o codes (Option Functions)
Change when running

Communica- Drive
Default setting
Function code
Data copying
Format type
Initialization
Remarks
VC for PMSM
VC w/o PG
VC w/ PG
485 Link
V/f
No. No.
o01 601h F5h DIA Function Selection 4 0 or 1 N 0 Y Y 86 Y Y Y Y

0 : Binary
1 : BCD
o02 602h F6h DIB Function Selection 1 0 or 1 N 0 Y Y 86 Y Y Y Y
0 : Binary
1 : BCD
Chap. 4
o03 603h h DIA BCD Input Speed Setting 1 99 to 7999 N 1000 Y Y 0 Y Y Y Y
o04 604h h DIB BCD Input Speed Setting 1 99 to 7999 N 1000 Y Y 0 Y Y Y Y
o05 605h h PG (PD) Option Setting 0 0 to 2 N 0 Y Y 96 Y N N Y
(Feedback pulse) 0: Build-in PG
1: PG(PD) option

2: SPGT option (Available soon)
o06 606h h (Digital line speed detection definition, 3 100 to 60000 P/R Y 1024 Y Y 0 Y Y Y Y
PG pulses)
o07 607h h (Digital line speed detection definition, 1 1 to 9999 Y 1000 Y Y 0 Y Y Y Y
Detection pulse correction 1)
o08 608h h (Digital line speed detection definition, 1 1 to 9999 Y 1000 Y Y 0 Y Y Y Y
Detection pulse correction 2)
o09 609h h M1 Absolute Signal Input Definition 3 0 to 16 N 0 Y N 0 N N N Y
(Available soon)
interface
3-5: Reserved.
7-16: Reserved.
o10 60Ah h M1 Magnetic Pole Position Offset 1 0.0 to 359.9 Y 0.0 Y N 2 N N N Y
(0° to 359.9° CCW)
o11 60Bh h M1 Salient Pole Rate (%Xq/%Xd) 1 1.000 to 3.000 N 1.000 Y N 4 N N N Y
Setting = Lq/Ld
To drive an SPM motor, set 1.000.
o12 60Ch h PG (PR) Pulse-train Option Setting 8 0 or 1 N 0 Y Y 97 Y N N Y
(Command pulse) 0: PG(PD) option
1: Internal speed command
o13 60Dh h (Pulse train input form) 1 0 to 2 N 0 Y Y 98 Y N N Y
0: Phase difference 90° between A-phase and
B-phase
1: A-phase : Reference pulse, B-phase :Reference
sign
2: A-phase : Forward pulse, B-phase : Reverse pulse
o14 60Eh F7h (Command pulse correction 1) 1 1 to 9999 Y 1000 Y Y 0 Y N N Y
o15 60Fh F8h (Command pulse correction 2) 1 1 to 9999 Y 1000 Y Y 0 Y N N Y
o16 610h F9h (APR gain 1) 1 0.1 to 999.9 times Y 1.0 Y Y 2 Y N N Y
o17 611h FAh (Feedforward gain 1) 1 0.0 to 1.5 times Y 0.0 Y Y 2 Y N N Y
o18 612h h (Overdeviation width) 1 0 to 65535 pulses Y 65535 Y Y 0 Y N N Y
o19 613h h (Zero deviation width) 1 0 to 1000 pulses Y 20 Y Y 0 Y N N Y
o20 614h h APR Gain 2 (Available soon) 1 0.1 to 999.9 times Y 1.0 Y Y 2 Y N N Y
o21 615h h F/F Gain 2 (Available soon) 1 0.0 to 1.5 times Y 0.0 Y Y 2 Y N N Y
o22 616h h Position Control Gain Switching 3 0 to 3 Y 0 Y Y 229 Y N N Y
(Available soon) 0: Disable
1: Positional deviation (x 10)
2: Detected speed (10000/Maximum speed)
3: Speed command (10000/Maximum speed)
Select a trigger to switch between the 1st and 2nd
gains of the position control system.
Switching gains can reduce noise or vibration when
the inverter is stopped.
o23 617h h Position Control Gain Switching 1 0 to 10000 Y 0 Y Y 0 Y N N Y
Level
(Available soon)
o24 618h h Position Control Gain Switching 1 0 to 1000 ms Y 0 Y Y 0 Y N N Y
Time
(Available soon)
4-47
Change when running
Communica- Drive
Default setting
Function code
Data copying
Format type
Initialization
Remarks
VC for PMSM
VC w/o PG
VC w/ PG
485 Link
V/f
No. No.
o29 61Dh h Link Option Configuration 4 0 to 2 Y 0 Y Y 226 Y Y Y Y

(Continue-to-run signal processing 0: Disable
in case of alarm) 1: Signal operation 1 (A heavy alarm that occurs at
(Available soon) OFF immediately results in alarm er4. ) (A light
alarm that occurs at OFF follows the setting of
o30.)
2: Signal operation 2 (A heavy alarm or light alarm
that occurs at OFF follows the setting of o30.)
When o29 = 1 or 2 and the LK-D signal (Continue to

run for link error) is ON, a heavy alarm or light alarm
that occurs follows the setting (o30 = 3).
o30 61Eh h (Communications error processing) 3 0 to 3 N 0 Y Y 73 Y Y Y Y
0: Immediately trip with alarm er4
1: Trip with alarm er4 after running for the period
specified by timer o31
2: Trip with alarm (er4 ) if the communication error
remains exceeding the period specified by timer
o31.
3: Continue to run
Specifies the error processing to be performed if a
communications link error occurs.
For CC-Link, when o30 = 0 to 3, the inverter produces
different operation.
o31 61Fh h (Timer) 1 0.01 to 20.00 s N 0.10 Y Y 3 Y Y Y Y
Specifies the duration from an occurrence of
communications problem on the link until the inverter
cause a communications error.
o32 620h h (Link format selection) 1 0 to 4 N 0 Y N 87 Y Y Y Y
0: Link format 1
1: Link format 2
2: Link format 3
3: Link format 4
4: Link format 5
o33 621h h Multiplex System 2 0 to 5 N 0 Y Y 232 Y N N N
(Control mode) 0: Disable
1: Multiwinding system
2: Multiplex system 1 (Available soon)
3: Multiplex system 2 (Available soon)
4: Reserved 1
5: Reserved 2
Selects whether or not to use a high-speed serial
communications terminal block as a component of the
multiwinding system or multiplex system.
Refer to MT-CCL (Cancel multiplex system) in the
description of E01 to E13 (Terminal X Function).
o34 622h h (No. of slave stations) 1 1 to 5 N 1 Y Y 0 Y N N N
Specifies the numbers of slave units except a master
unit when the multiplex system is enabled.
o50 632h h (Station number assignment) 0 0 to 5 N 0 N Y 0 Y N N N
0: Master
1-5: Slave 1 to 5
o101 2501h h Bus Configuration Parameter 1 0 0000 to FFFF Y 0000 Y Y 9 Y Y Y Y
(Available soon)
(Available soon)
(Available soon)
(Available soon)
(Available soon)
(Available soon)
(Available soon)
(Available soon)
(Available soon)
o110 250Ah h Bus Configuration Parameter 10 0 0000 to FFFF Y 0000 Y Y 9 Y Y Y Y
(Available soon)
o111 250Bh h Bus Configuration Parameter 11 0 0000 to FFFF Y 0000 Y Y 9 Y Y Y Y
(Available soon)
o112 250Ch h Bus Configuration Parameter 12 0 0000 to FFFF Y 0000 Y Y 9 Y Y Y Y
(Available soon)
o113 250Dh h Bus Configuration Parameter 13 0 0000 to FFFF Y 0000 Y Y 9 Y Y Y Y
(Available soon)
o114 250Eh h Bus Configuration Parameter 14 0 0000 to FFFF Y 0000 Y Y 9 Y Y Y Y
(Available soon)
4-48
Change when running

Communica- Drive
Default setting
Function code
Data copying
Format type
Initialization
Remarks
VC for PMSM
VC w/o PG
VC w/ PG
485 Link
V/f
No. No.
o115 250Fh h Bus Configuration Parameter 15 0 0000 to FFFF Y 0000 Y Y 9 Y Y Y Y

(Available soon)
(Available soon)
(Available soon)
(Available soon)
Chap. 4
(Available soon)
(Available soon)
o121 2515h h Write/Read Function Code Setting 0 0000 to FFFF Y 0000 Y Y 9 Y Y Y Y

(Available soon)
o122 2516h h Write Function Code Assignment 1 0 0000 to FFFF Y 0000 Y Y 9 Y Y Y Y
(Available soon)
(Available soon)
(Available soon)
(Available soon)
o126 251Ah h Write Function Code Assignment 5 0 0000 to FFFF Y 0000 Y Y 9 Y Y Y Y
(Available soon)
o127 251Bh h Write Function Code Assignment 6 0 0000 to FFFF Y 0000 Y Y 9 Y Y Y Y
(Available soon)
o128 251Ch h Write Function Code Assignment 7 0 0000 to FFFF Y 0000 Y Y 9 Y Y Y Y
(Available soon)
o129 251Dh h Write Function Code Assignment 8 0 0000 to FFFF Y 0000 Y Y 9 Y Y Y Y
(Available soon)
o130 251Eh h Write Function Code Assignment 9 0 0000 to FFFF Y 0000 Y Y 9 Y Y Y Y
(Available soon)
o131 251Fh h Write Function Code Assignment 10 0 0000 to FFFF Y 0000 Y Y 9 Y Y Y Y
(Available soon)
(Available soon)
(Available soon)
(Available soon)
(Available soon)
(Available soon)
(Available soon)
(Available soon)
(Available soon)
(Available soon)
(Available soon)
(Available soon)
(Available soon)
o144 252Ch h Write Function Code Assignment 23 0 0000 to FFFF Y 0000 Y Y 9 Y Y Y Y
(Available soon)
o145 252Dh h Write Function Code Assignment 24 0 0000 to FFFF Y 0000 Y Y 9 Y Y Y Y
(Available soon)
o146 252Eh h Write Function Code Assignment 25 0 0000 to FFFF Y 0000 Y Y 9 Y Y Y Y
(Available soon)
o147 252Fh h Write Function Code Assignment 26 0 0000 to FFFF Y 0000 Y Y 9 Y Y Y Y
(Available soon)
(Available soon)
(Available soon)
(Available soon)
(Available soon)
(Available soon)
4-49
Change when running
Communica- Drive
Default setting
Function code
Data copying
Format type
Initialization
Remarks
VC for PMSM
VC w/o PG
VC w/ PG
485 Link
V/f
No. No.

(Available soon)
(Available soon)
(Available soon)
(Available soon)
(Available soon)
(Available soon)
(Available soon)
o160 253Ch h Read Function Code Assignment 1 0 0000 to FFFF Y 0000 Y Y 9 Y Y Y Y
o161 253Dh h Read Function Code Assignment 2 0 0000 to FFFF Y 0000 Y Y 9 Y Y Y Y
o162 253Eh h Read Function Code Assignment 3 0 0000 to FFFF Y 0000 Y Y 9 Y Y Y Y

(Available soon)
o163 253Fh h Read Function Code Assignment 4 0 0000 to FFFF Y 0000 Y Y 9 Y Y Y Y
(Available soon)
o164 2540h h Read Function Code Assignment 5 0 0000 to FFFF Y 0000 Y Y 9 Y Y Y Y
(Available soon)
o165 2541H h Read Function Code Assignment 6 0 0000 to FFFF Y 0000 Y Y 9 Y Y Y Y
(Available soon)
(Available soon)
(Available soon)
(Available soon)
(Available soon)
(Available soon)
(Available soon)
(Available soon)
(Available soon)
o174 254Ah h Read Function Code Assignment 15 0 0000 to FFFF Y 0000 Y Y 9 Y Y Y Y
(Available soon)
o175 254Bh h Read Function Code Assignment 16 0 0000 to FFFF Y 0000 Y Y 9 Y Y Y Y
(Available soon)
(Available soon)
(Available soon)
(Available soon)
(Available soon)
(Available soon)
(Available soon)
(Available soon)
(Available soon)
(Available soon)
(Available soon)
(Available soon)
(Available soon)
(Available soon)
(Available soon)
o190 255Ah h Read Function Code Assignment 31 0 0000 to FFFF Y 0000 Y Y 9 Y Y Y Y
(Available soon)
4-50
Change when running

Communica- Drive
Default setting
Function code
Data copying
Format type
Initialization
Remarks
VC for PMSM
VC w/o PG
VC w/ PG
485 Link
V/f
No. No.
o191 255Bh h Read Function Code Assignment 32 0 0000 to FFFF Y 0000 Y Y 9 Y Y Y Y

(Available soon)
(Available soon)
(Available soon)
(Available soon)
Chap. 4
(Available soon)
(Available soon)

(Available soon)
o218 2612h h Reserved 1 (Available soon) 0 0000 to FFFF Y 0000 Y Y 9 Y Y Y Y
4-51
L codes (Lift Functions)
Change when running

Communica- Drive
Default setting
Function code
Data copying
Format type
Initialization
Remarks
VC for PMSM
VC w/o PG
VC w/ PG
485 Link
V/f
No. No.
L01 901h h Password Data 1 0 to 9999 Y 0 N N 0 Y Y N Y

A maximum of 8-digit password can be specified with
L01 and L02 to restrict access to function code data or
check it.
Setting either one of L01 and L02 at any numeral
except "0" enables password protection.
L02 902h h Password Data 2 0 0 to 9999 Y 0 N N 0 Y Y N Y
L03 903h h Lift Rated Speed 0 0.0 to 999.9 m/min Y 100.0 Y Y 2 Y Y N Y
L04 904h h Preset S-curve Pattern 11 0 to 2 Y 0 Y Y 80 Y Y N Y
0: Disable
Normal accel/decel, S-curve (15 steps, S-curve 5)
1: Method 1
For VG3/VG5, accel/decel can be controlled via
terminal [12] with SS1, SS2, and SS4 all OFF.
2: Method 2
For VG7, zero speed is selected with SS1, SS2.
Select S-curve pattern and application of multistep
speed.
L05 905h h S-curve Pattern 1 1 0 to 50% Y 0 Y Y 0 Y Y N Y
L10 90Ah h S-curve Pattern 6 1 0 to 50% Y 0 Y Y 0 Y Y N Y
L11 90Bh h S-curve Pattern 7 1 0 to 50% Y 0 Y Y 0 Y Y N Y
L12 90Ch h S-curve Pattern 8 1 0 to 50% Y 0 Y Y 0 Y Y N Y
L13 90Dh h S-curve Pattern 9 1 0 to 50% Y 0 Y Y 0 Y Y N Y
L14 90Eh h S-curve Pattern 10 1 0 to 50% Y 0 Y Y 0 Y Y N Y
L15 90Fh h Reserved for Particular 0 0 or 1 Y 0 Y Y 80 Y Y N Y
Manufacturers 0: Not used.
1: Method 1
4-52
U codes (User Functions)
Change when running

Communica- Drive
Default setting
Function code
Data copying
Format type
Initialization
Remarks
VC for PMSM
VC w/o PG
VC w/ PG
485 Link
V/f
No. No.
U01 B01h DBh USER P1 0 -32768 to 32767 Y 0 Y Y 5 Y Y Y Y

U02 B02h DCh USER P2 0 -32768 to 32767 Y 0 Y Y 5 Y Y Y Y
U03 B03h DDh USER P3 0 -32768 to 32767 Y 0 Y Y 5 Y Y Y Y
U04 B04h Deh USER P4 0 -32768 to 32767 Y 0 Y Y 5 Y Y Y Y
U05 B05h DFh USER P5 0 -32768 to 32767 Y 0 Y Y 5 Y Y Y Y
Chap. 4
U06 B06h E0h USER P6 0 -32768 to 32767 Y 0 Y Y 5 Y Y Y Y
U10 B0Ah E4h USER P10 0 -32768 to 32767 Y 0 Y Y 5 Y Y Y Y

U11 B0Bh h USER P11 SX bus / E-SX Bus 0 -32768 to 32767 Y 0 Y Y 5 Y Y Y Y
Communications Format
U12 B0Ch h USER P12 0 -32768 to 32767 Y 0 Y Y 5 Y Y Y Y
U13 B0Dh h USER P13 0 -32768 to 32767 Y 0 Y Y 5 Y Y Y Y
SX Bus Station Number Monitor
U14 B0Eh h USER P14 0 -32768 to 32767 Y 0 Y Y 5 Y Y Y Y
U15 B0Fh h USER P15 0 -32768 to 32767 Y 0 Y Y 5 Y Y Y Y
U16 B10h h USER P16 0 -32768 to 32767 Y 0 Y Y 5 Y Y Y Y
U26 B1Ah h USER P26 0 -32768 to 32767 Y 0 Y Y 5 Y Y Y Y
U27 B1Bh h USER P27 0 -32768 to 32767 Y 0 Y Y 5 Y Y Y Y
U61 B3Dh 4Bh USER P61/U-Ai1 0 -32768 to 32767 Y 0 Y Y 5 Y Y Y Y
U62 B3Eh 4Ch USER P62/U-Ai2 0 -32768 to 32767 Y 0 Y Y 5 Y Y Y Y
U63 B3Fh 4Dh USER P63/U-Ai3 0 -32768 to 32767 Y 0 Y Y 5 Y Y Y Y
U64 B40h 4Eh USER P64/U-Ai4 0 -32768 to 32767 Y 0 Y Y 5 Y Y Y Y
4-53
Change when running
Communica- Drive
Default setting
Function code
Data copying
Format type
Initialization
Remarks
VC for PMSM
VC w/o PG
VC w/ PG
485 Link
V/f
No. No.
U101 2701h h USER P101 0 -32768 to 32767 Y 0 Y Y 5 Y Y Y Y

U110 270Ah h USER P110 0 -32768 to 32767 Y 0 Y Y 5 Y Y Y Y
U111 270Bh h USER P111 0 -32768 to 32767 Y 0 Y Y 5 Y Y Y Y
U112 270Ch h USER P112 0 -32768 to 32767 Y 0 Y Y 5 Y Y Y Y
U113 270Dh h USER P113 0 -32768 to 32767 Y 0 Y Y 5 Y Y Y Y
U114 270Eh h USER P114 0 -32768 to 32767 Y 0 Y Y 5 Y Y Y Y
U115 270Fh h USER P115 0 -32768 to 32767 Y 0 Y Y 5 Y Y Y Y
4-54
SF codes (Safety Functions)
Change when running

Communica- Drive
Default setting
Data copying
Function code
Format type
Initialization
Remarks
VC for PMSM
VC w/o PG
VC w/ PG
485 Link
V/f
No. No.
SF01 2801h h SS1 Level 0 0 to 30000 r/m N 150 N N 0 Y Y Y Y

SF02 2802h h SS1 Timer 0 0.01 to 3600 s N 10.00 N N 13 Y Y Y Y
SF03 2803h h SS1/SLS Deceleration Time 0 0.01 to 3600 s N 5.00 N N 13 Y Y Y Y
SF04 2804h h SLS Level 0 0 to 30000 r/m N 300 N N 0 Y Y Y Y
SF05 2805h h SLS Timer 0 0.01 to 3600 s N 10.00 N N 13 Y Y Y Y
Chap. 4
SF06 2806h h SLS Upper Limit 0 0 to 30000 r/m N 300 N N 0 Y Y Y Y
SF07 2807h h Maximum Speed 0 0 to 30000 r/m N 1500 N N 0 Y Y Y Y
SF08 2808h h Upper Limit Monitor Wait Time 0 0.00 to 3600 s N 0.00 N N 13 Y Y Y Y
SF09 2809h h PG Breakdown Detection 0 0 or 1 N 1 N N 68 Y Y Y Y
0: Disable

1: Enable
SF10 280Ah h PG Pulse Resolution 0 100 to 60000 N 1024 N N 0 Y N N Y
SF11 280Bh h Speed Detection Filter 0 0.000 to 0.100 s N 0.010 N N 4 Y Y N Y
SF20 2814h h Terminal [SL1]/[SL2] Function 0 0 to 2 N 0 N N 219 Y Y Y Y
0: No function
1: SS1 function
2: SLS function
SF21 2815h h SS1 Stop Mode 0 0 or 1 N 1 N N 220 Y Y Y Y
0: Speed monitor
1: Time monitor
SF22 2816h h Encoder Selection 0 0 to 2 N 0 N N 221 Y N N Y
0: Recommended 15V encoder
1: Recommended 12V encoder
2: Unrecommended PE or no PE
SF23 2817h h Fault Reaction Selection 0 0 or 1 N 0 N N 222 Y Y Y Y
0: STO
1: SS1
SF24 2818h h SBC Function Selection 0 0 to 2 N 0 N N 224 Y Y Y Y
0: Disable
1: Enable, Via magnetic contactor
2: Enable, Brake direct connection
SF25 2819h h SS1 Error Processing 0 0 to 1 N 0 N N 223 Y Y Y Y
0: Select fault reaction
1: Select notice
SF26 281Ah h SLS Deceleration Error Processing 0 0 to 1 N 0 N N 223 Y Y Y Y
1: Select notice
SF27 281Bh h SLS Upper Limit Error Processing 0 0 to 1 N 0 N N 223 Y Y Y Y
1: Select notice
SF28 281Ch h Full Save of Safety Parameters 0 0 or 1 N - N N 0 Y Y Y Y
SF30 281Eh h Password Authentication (1) 0 0000 to FFFF N 0 N N 9 Y Y Y Y
SF31 281Fh h Password Authentication (2) 0 0000 to FFFF N 0 N N 9 Y Y Y Y
4-55
S codes (Serial Communication Functions)
Change when running

Communica- Drive
Default setting
Function code
Data copying
Format type
Initialization
Remarks
VC for PMSM
VC w/o PG
VC w/ PG
485 Link
V/f
No. No.
S01 701h 1h Reference Frequency/Speed 1 7 -20000 to 20000 : (data)*Nmax/20000 r/min Y - N N 5 Y Y Y Y

S02 702h 2h Torque Command 1 -327.68 to 327.67% : 0.01%/1d Y - N N 7 Y Y N Y
S03 703h 3h Torque Current Command 1 -327.68 to 327.67% : 0.01%/1d Y - N N 7 Y Y N Y
S04 704h 4h Magnetic-flux Command 1 -327.68 to 327.67% : 0.01%/1d Y - N N 7 Y N N N
S05 705h 5h Orientation Position Command 1 0000 to FFFF Y - N N 9 Y N N Y
S06 706h 6h Run Command 1 1 0000 to FFFF Y - N N 32 Y Y Y Y
S07 707h 7h Universal Do 1 0000 to FFFF Y - N N 33 Y Y Y Y
S08 708h 8h Acceleration Time 2 0.0 to 3600.0 s Y - N N 2 Y Y Y Y
S09 709h 9h Deceleration Time 1 0.0 to 3600.0 s Y - N N 2 Y Y Y Y
S10 70Ah Ah Torque Limiter Level 1 2 -327.68 to 327.67% : 0.01%/1d Y - N N 7 Y Y N Y
S11 70Bh Bh Torque Limiter Level 2 1 -327.68 to 327.67% : 0.01%/1d Y - N N 7 Y Y N Y
S12 70Ch Ch Run Command 2 0 0000 to FFFF Y - N N 9 Y Y Y Y
S13 70Dh h Universal Ao 0 -16384 to 16384 (-10V to +10V) Y - N N 5 Y Y Y Y
S14 70Eh h Reference Speed (31 bits) Upper 0 0000 to FFFF r/min Y - N N 9 Y Y Y Y
(Available soon) ±Maximum speed / ±Upper 16 bits out of 31 bits
S15 70Fh h Reference Speed (31 bits) Lower 0 0000 to FFFF r/min Y - N N 9 Y Y Y Y
(Available soon) ±Maximum speed / ±Lower 16 bits out of 31 bits
S16 710h h General-purpose Setting 1 0 -32768 to 32767 Y - N N 5 Y Y Y Y
(Available soon) Assign functions using E90.
S17 711h h General-purpose Setting 2 0 -32768 to 32767 Y - N N 5 Y Y Y Y
(Available soon) Assign functions using E91.
4-56
M codes (Monitoring Functions)
Change when running

Communica- Drive
Default setting
Function code
Data copying
Format type
Initialization
Remarks
VC for PMSM
VC w/o PG
VC w/ PG
485 Link
V/f
No. No.
M01 801h Fh Reference Speed 4 (ASR input) 15 -32000 to 32000 : (data)*Nmax/20000 r/min N - N N 5 Y Y Y Y
M02 802h 10h Torque Command 1 0.01%/1d N - N N 7 Y Y N Y
M03 803h 11h Torque Current Command 1 0.01%/1d N - N N 7 Y Y N Y
M04 804h 12h Magnetic-flux Command 1 0.01%/1d N - N N 7 Y Y N N
M05 805h 13h Output Frequency Command 1 0.1 Hz/1d N - N N 2 Y Y Y Y
Chap. 4
M06 806h 14h Detected Speed 1 -32000 to 32000 : (data)*Nmax/20000 r/min N - N N 5 Y Y N Y
M07 807h 15h Calculated Torque 1 0.01%/1d N - N N 7 Y Y Y Y
M08 808h 16h Calculated Torque Current 1 0.01%/1d N - N N 7 Y Y Y Y
M09 809h 17h Output Frequency 1 0.1 Hz/1d N - N N 2 Y Y Y Y
M10 80Ah 18h Motor Output 1 0.1 kW/1d N - N N 2 Y Y Y Y

M11 80Bh 19h Effective Output Current 1 0.1 A/1d N - N N 2 Y Y Y Y
M12 80Ch 1Ah Effective Output Voltage 1 0.1 V/1d N - N N 2 Y Y Y Y
M13 80Dh 1Bh Final Run Command 1 0000 to FFFF N - N N 32 Y Y Y Y
M14 80Eh 1Ch Running Status 1 0000 to FFFF N - N N 21 Y Y Y Y
M15 80Fh 1Dh Output Terminals Y1-Y18 1 0000 to FFFF N - N N 33 Y Y Y Y
M16 810h 1Eh Latest Alarm Data 4 0000 to 552F N - N N 14 Y Y Y Y
(Multiple alarm, Trip cause)
M17 811h 1Fh Latest Alarm History 1 0000 to 552F N - N N 15 Y Y Y Y
M18 812h 20h 1st Last Alarm History 1 0000 to 552F N - N N 15 Y Y Y Y
M19 813h 21h 2nd Last Alarm History 1 0000 to 552F N - N N 15 Y Y Y Y
M20 814h 22h Cumulative Run Time 7 0 to 65535 h N - N N 0 Y Y Y Y
M21 815h 23h DC Link Bus Voltage 1 1 V/1d N - N N 0 Y Y Y Y
M22 816h 24h Motor Temperature 1 1℃/1d N - N N 5 Y Y Y Y
M23 817h 25h Model Code 1 0000 to FFFF N - N N 29 Y Y Y Y
200V class series : 1313h
400V class series : 1314h
M24 818h 26h Capacity Code 1 0 to 34 N - N N 28 Y Y Y Y
M25 819h 27h Inverter ROM (Main Control) Version 1 0000 to FFFF N - N N 9 Y Y Y Y
M26 81Ah 28h Communications Error Code 1 0 to 65535 N - N N 34 Y Y Y Y
M27 81Bh 29h Alarm (Latest) 19 -32000 to 32000 : (data)*Nmax/20000 r/min N - N N 5 Y Y Y Y
Speed Command
M28 81Ch 2Ah Alarm (Latest) 1 0.01%/1d N - N N 7 Y Y N Y
Torque Command
M29 81Dh 2Bh Alarm (Latest) 1 0.01%/1d N - N N 7 Y Y N Y
Torque Current Command
M30 81Eh 2Ch Alarm (Latest) 1 0.01%/1d N - N N 7 Y Y N N
Magnetic-flux command
M31 81Fh 2Dh Alarm (Latest) 1 0.1 Hz/1d N - N N 2 Y Y Y Y
Output Frequency Command
M32 820h 2Eh Alarm (Latest) 1 -32000 to 32000 : (data)*Nmax/20000 r/min N - N N 5 Y Y N Y
Detected Speed
M33 821h 2Fh Alarm (Latest) 1 0.01%/1d N - N N 7 Y Y Y Y
Calculated Torque
M34 822h 30h Alarm (Latest) 1 0.01%/1d N - N N 7 Y Y Y Y
Calculated Torque Current
M35 823h 31h Alarm (Latest) 1 0.1 Hz/1d N - N N 2 Y Y Y Y
Output Frequency
M36 824h 32h Alarm (Latest) 1 0.1 kW/1d N - N N 2 Y Y Y Y
Motor Output
M37 825h 33h Alarm (Latest) 1 0.1 A/1d N - N N 2 Y Y Y Y
Effective Output Current
M38 826h 34h Alarm (Latest) 1 0.1 V/1d N - N N 2 Y Y Y Y
Effective Output Voltage
M39 827h 35h Alarm (Latest) 1 0000 to FFFF N - N N 32 Y Y Y Y
Run Command
Running Status
Output Signal
M42 82Ah 38h Alarm (Latest) 1 0 to 65535 h N - N N 0 Y Y Y Y
Cumulative Run Time
M43 82Bh 39h Alarm (Latest) 1 1 V/1d N - N N 0 Y Y Y Y
DC Link Bus Voltage
M44 82Ch 3Ah Alarm (Latest) 1 1℃/1d N - N N 5 Y Y Y Y
Inverter Internal Temperature
M45 82Dh 3Bh Alarm (Latest) 1 1℃/1d N - N N 5 Y Y Y Y
Heat Sink Temperature
M46 82Eh 3Ch Capacity of Main Circuit Capacitor 3 0 to 100% N - N N 0 Y Y Y Y
M47 82Fh 3Dh Service Life of Electrolytic Capacitor 1 0 to 65535 (10h) N - N N 0 Y Y Y Y
on PCB
M48 830h 3Eh Cooling Fan Service Life 1 0 to 65535 (10h) N - N N 0 Y Y Y Y
4-57
Change when running
Communica- Drive
Default setting
Function code
Data copying
Format type
Initialization
Remarks
VC for PMSM
VC w/o PG
VC w/ PG
485 Link
V/f
No. No.
M49 831h 3Fh Reference Speed 1 3 -32000 to 32000 : (data)*Nmax/20000 r/min N - N N 5 Y Y Y Y

(before multistep speed command)
M50 832h 40h Reference Speed 2 1 -32000 to 32000 : (data)*Nmax/20000 r/min N - N N 5 Y Y Y Y
(before calculation of
acceleration/deceleration)
M51 833h 41h Reference Speed 3 1 -32000 to 32000 : (data)*Nmax/20000 r/min N - N N 5 Y Y Y Y
(after speed limiting)
M52 834h 42h Control Output 1 3 0000 to FFFF N - N N 125 Y Y Y Y
M55 837h 45h Option Monitor 1 6 0000 to FFFF N - N N 9 Y Y Y Y
M56 838h 46h Option Monitor 2 1 0000 to FFFF N - N N 9 Y Y Y Y
M57 839h 47h Option Monitor 3 1 0 to 65535 N - N N 0 Y Y Y Y
M58 83Ah 48h Option Monitor 4 1 0 to 65535 N - N N 0 Y Y Y Y
M59 83Bh 49h Option Monitor 5 1 -32768 to 32767 N - N N 5 Y Y Y Y
M60 83Ch 4Ah Option Monitor 6 1 -32768 to 32767 N - N N 5 Y Y Y Y
M61 83Dh h Current Date, Year/Month 3 0000 to FFFF N - N N 143 Y Y Y Y
Upper 2 digits: Year, Lower 2 digits: Month
M62 83Eh h Current Date, Day/Hour 1 0000 to FFFF N - N N 144 Y Y Y Y
Upper 2 digits: Day, Lower 2 digits: Hour
M63 83Fh h Current Date, Minute/Second 1 0000 to FFFF N - N N 145 Y Y Y Y
Upper 2 digits: Minute, Lower 2 digits: Second
M64 840h h Date of Occurrence of Latest Alarm, 3 0000 to FFFF N - N N 143 Y Y Y Y
Year/Month Upper 2 digits: Year, Lower 2 digits: Month
Day/Hour Upper 2 digits: Day, Lower 2 digits: Hour
Minute/Second Upper 2 digits: Minute, Lower 2 digits: Second
M67 843h h Date of Removal of Latest Alarm, 3 0000 to FFFF N - N N 143 Y Y Y Y
Year/Month Upper 2 digits: Year, Lower 2 digits: Month
Day/Hour Upper 2 digits: Day, Lower 2 digits: Hour
Minute/Second Upper 2 digits: Minute, Lower 2 digits: Second
M70 846h h Latest Alarm Extension ID 17 0 or 1 N - N N 212 Y Y Y Y
0: Alarm at the local station
1: Alarm at the remote station
M71 847h h Latest Multiple Alarm, 2nd 1 0000 to FFFF N - N N 14 Y Y Y Y
M72 848h h Latest Multiple Alarm, 3rd 1 0000 to FFFF N - N N 14 Y Y Y Y
M73 849h h Latest Multiple Alarm, 4th 1 0000 to FFFF N - N N 14 Y Y Y Y
M74 84Ah h Latest Multiple Alarm, 5th 1 0000 to FFFF N - N N 14 Y Y Y Y
M75 84Bh h Latest Alarm, Subcode 1 0000 to FFFF N - N N 9 Y Y Y Y
M76 84Ch h Latest Alarm, Maximum Speed 1 0 to 65535 r/min N - N N 0 Y Y Y Y
M77 84Dh h Latest Alarm, Input Power 1 0.0 to 6553.5 kW N - N N 2 Y Y Y Y
M78 84Eh h Latest Alarm, Motor Temperature 1 1℃/1d N - N N 5 Y Y Y Y
M79 84Fh h Latest Alarm, 1 0000 to FFFF N - N N 141 Y Y Y Y
Running Status 2 (a)
M80 850h h Latest Alarm, 1 0000 to FFFF N - N N 142 Y Y Y Y
Running Status 2 (b)
M81 851h h Latest Alarm, Run Command 1 0000 to FFFF N - N N 32 Y Y Y Y
(Communications Link)
M82 852h h Latest Alarm, Run Command 2 1 0000 to FFFF N - N N 9 Y Y Y Y
(Communications Link)
For Particular Manufacturers
M84 854h h Latest Alarm, 1 0 to 65535 times N - N N 0 Y Y Y Y
M1 Number of Startups
EN Terminal Input
M91 85Bh h Communications Error Flag 1 2 0000 to FFFF N - N N 9 Y Y Y Y
(Available soon)
M92 85Ch h Communications Error Flag 2 1 0000 to FFFF N - N N 9 Y Y Y Y
(Available soon)
M93 85Dh h Light Alarm (Latest) 4 0 to 255 N - N N 102 Y Y Y Y
M94 85Eh h Light Alarm (2nd last) 1 0 to 255 N - N N 102 Y Y Y Y
M95 85Fh h Light Alarm (3rd last) 1 0 to 255 N - N N 102 Y Y Y Y
M96 860h h Light Alarm (4th last) 1 0 to 255 N - N N 102 Y Y Y Y
M98 862h h EN Terminal Input 0 0000 to FFFF N - N N 100 Y Y Y Y
M100 2900h h Effective Parameter Set Condition 0 0000 to FFFF N - N N 9 Y Y Y Y
4-58
Change when running

Communica- Drive
Default setting
Function code
Data copying
Format type
Initialization
Remarks
VC for PMSM
VC w/o PG
VC w/ PG
485 Link
V/f
No. No.
M101 2901h h Run Command 2 (Communications 0 0000 to FFFF N - N N 32 Y Y Y Y

Link) Monitors X terminal functions to be used exclusively
via the communications link.
M102 2902h h Load Factor 0 -327.68 to 327.67% N - N N 7 Y Y Y Y
Motor load factor, Motor rated load/100%
M103 2903h h Input Power 0 0.0 to 6553.5 kW N - N N 2 Y Y Y Y
Input power to inverter
M104 2904h h Running Status 2(a) 0 0000 to FFFF N - N N 141 Y Y Y Y
Chap. 4
M105 2905h h Running Status 2(b) 0 0000 to FFFF N - N N 142 Y Y Y Y
M106 2906h h Detected Load Shaft Speed 0 -32000 to 32000 : (data)*Nmax/20000 r/min N - N N 5 Y Y Y Y
M107 2907h h Detected Line Speed 0 -32000 to 32000 : (data)*Nmax/20000 r/min N - N N 5 Y Y Y Y
M108 2908h h PID Command Value 0 -327.68 to 327.67% N - N N 7 Y Y Y Y

M109 2909h h PID Feedback Amount 0 -327.68 to 327.67% N - N N 7 Y Y Y Y
M110 290Ah h PID Output 0 -327.68 to 327.67% N - N N 7 Y Y Y Y
M112 290Ch h Remaining allowance for M1 motor 3 0 to 65535% N - N N 0 Y Y Y Y
overload When M112 = 0 (%), the inverter issues OL1 alarm.
M113 290Dh h Remaining allowance for M2 motor 1 0 to 65535% N - N N 0 Y Y Y Y
M114 290Eh h Remaining allowance for M3 motor 1 0 to 65535% N - N N 0 Y Y Y Y
M115 290Fh h Input Watt-hour 4 0.000 to 9999 N - N N 101 Y Y Y Y
100 kWh/1.000d
When this count exceeds 9999000 kWh, it
automatically returns to "0."
M116 2910h h Input Watt-hour Data 1 0000 to 9999 N - N N 101 Y Y Y Y
100 kWh/1.000d * Display coefficient
M116 = M115 (Input watt-hour) x F84 (Display
coefficient for input watt-hour data)
Specifying the electric rate per 100 kWh with F84
shows the electricity price.
M117 2911h h Input Watt-hour 1 (81920d/unit 100% rating)(kW) x Cumulative time (s) x N - N N 9 Y Y Y Y
(Lower 16 bits) 2^(-16)
M118 2912h h Input Watt-hour 1 (81920d/unit 100% rating)(kW) x Cumulative time (s) x N - N N 9 Y Y Y Y
(Upper 16 bits) 2^(-32)
M119 2913h h Inverter Internal Temperature 2 -32768 to 32767℃ N - N N 5 Y Y Y Y
(Real-time value)
M120 2914h h Heat Sink Temperature 1 -32768 to 32767℃ N - N N 5 Y Y Y Y
(Real-time value)
M121 2915h h Main Circuit Capacitor Service Life 0 0 to 65535 (10h) N - N N 0 Y Y Y Y
(Elapsed time)
M123 2917h h M1 Number of Startups 3 0 to 65535 times N - N N 0 Y Y Y Y
M126 291Ah h M1 Cumulative Motor Run Time 3 0 to 65535 (10h) N - N N 0 Y Y Y Y
M127 291Bh h M2 Cumulative Motor Run Time 1 0 to 65535 (10h) N - N N 0 Y Y Y Y
M128 291Ch h M3 Cumulative Motor Run Time 1 0 to 65535 (10h) N - N N 0 Y Y Y Y
M129 291Dh h Run Command (Via communications 0 0000 to FFFF N - N N 32 Y Y Y Y
link)
M130 291Eh h Torque Bias 0 -327.68 to 327.67% N - N N 7 Y Y N Y
M131 291Fh h Magnetic Pole Position Signal 0 -32768 to 32767 N - N N 5 N N N Y
M132 2920h h Universal AO1 0 0000 to FFFF N - N N 9 Y Y Y Y
M133 2921h h Option AO1 0 0000 to FFFF N - N N 9 Y Y Y Y
M134 2922h h Control Input 1 0 0000 to FFFF N - N N 133 Y Y Y Y
M142 292Ah h Control Output 4 0 0000 to FFFF N - N N 128 Y Y Y Y
(bit 0: E-SX bus tact synchronizing signal)
M143 292Bh h Control Output 5 0 0000 to FFFF N - N N 129 Y Y Y Y
M144 292Ch h Control Output 6 0 0000 to FFFF N - N N 130 Y Y Y Y
M146 292Eh h Detected Speed 2 0 -32000 to 32000 r/min N - N N 5 Y Y N Y
M147 292Fh h Exciting Current Command 0 -327.68 to 327.67% N - N N 7 Y Y N N
M148 2930h h Detected Exciting Current 0 -327.68 to 327.67% N - N N 7 Y Y N N
M149 2931h h Magnetic-flux Calculation 0 0.00 to 655.35% N - N N 3 Y Y N N
M161 293Dh h Ai Adjustment Value (12) 5 -32768 to 32767 N - N N 5 Y Y Y Y
M162 293Eh h Ai Adjustment Value (Ai1) 1 -32768 to 32767 N - N N 5 Y Y Y Y
M163 293Fh h Ai Adjustment Value (Ai2) 1 -32768 to 32767 N - N N 5 Y Y Y Y
M164 2940h h Ai Adjustment Value (Ai3) 1 -32768 to 32767 N - N N 5 Y Y Y Y
M165 2941h h Ai Adjustment Value (Ai4) 1 -32768 to 32767 N - N N 5 Y Y Y Y
4-59
Change when running
Communica- Drive
Default setting
Function code
Data copying
Format type
Initialization
Remarks
VC for PMSM
VC w/o PG
VC w/ PG
485 Link
V/f
No. No.
M166 2942h h Input Signal (Terminal) 0 0000 to FFFF N - N N 32 Y Y Y Y

M167 2943h h Analog Input Signal (12) 3 -32768 to 32767 (-16384 to 16384 : -10V to +10V) N - N N 5 Y Y Y Y
M168 2944h h Analog Input Signal (Ai1) 1 -32768 to 32767 (-16384 to 16384 : -10V to +10V) N - N N 5 Y Y Y Y
M169 2945h h Analog Input Signal (Ai2) 1 -32768 to 32767 (-16384 to 16384 : -10V to +10V) N - N N 5 Y Y Y Y
M170 2946h h Analog Output Signal (Ao1) 3 -32768 to 32767 (-16384 to 16384 : -10V to +10V) N - N N 5 Y Y Y Y
M173 2949h h AIO Input/Output Status 1(Ai3) 4 -32768 to 32767 N - N N 5 Y Y Y Y
M174 294Ah h AIO Input/Output Status 1(Ai4) 1 -32768 to 32767 N - N N 5 Y Y Y Y
M175 294Bh h AIO Input/Output Status 2(Ao4) 1 -32768 to 32767 N - N N 5 Y Y Y Y
M176 294Ch h AIO Input/Output Status 2(Ao5) 1 -32768 to 32767 N - N N 5 Y Y Y Y
M177 294Dh h PG(SD) Input Pulse 4 -32768 to 32767 N - N N 5 Y Y Y Y
M178 294Eh h PG(LD) Input Pulse 1 -32768 to 32767 N - N N 5 Y Y Y Y
M179 294Fh h PG(PR) Input Pulse 1 -32768 to 32767 N - N N 5 Y Y Y Y
M180 2950h h PG(PD) Input Pulse 1 -32768 to 32767 N - N N 5 Y Y Y Y
M181 2951h h DIOA Input Status (Terminal) 0 0000 to FFFF N - N N 146 Y Y Y Y
M182 2952h h DIOA Input Status (Via 0 0000 to FFFF N - N N 146 Y Y Y Y
communications link)
M183 2953h h DIOB Option Input Status 0 0000 to FFFF N - N N 26 Y Y Y Y
(Available soon)
M184 2954h h DIOB Option Output Status 0 0000 to FFFF N - N N 27 Y Y Y Y
(Available soon)
M193 295Dh h General-purpose Setting 1 Monitor 0 -32768 to 32767 N - N N 5 Y Y Y Y
(Available soon) Monitors the S16 setting.
M194 295Eh h General-purpose Setting 2 Monitor 0 -32768 to 32767 N - N N 5 Y Y Y Y
(Available soon) Monitors the S17 setting.
M220 2A14h h Load Compensating Speed Control 3 -32000 to 32000: (data)*Nmax/20000 r/min N - N N 5 Y Y N Y
Value
M221 2A15h h Hoisting Load Calculation Result 1 0 to 65535 kg N - N N 0 Y Y N Y
Monitor
M222 2A16h h Travel Torque Calculation Monitor 1 -327.68 to 327.67% N - N N 7 Y Y N Y
4-60
4.2.4 Data Format List

You can use the following formats to access function codes through the link and these formats are
common to the FRENIC-VG.
4.2.4.1 Data Type 0 to 13

You can basically exchange data in the data types from 0 to 13.
Code Description Display/setting Resolution Notes
Chap. 4
º0 Integer 0, 1, 2, 3, ...... 1
º1 Integer 0, 2, 4, 6, ...... 2 Only for pole number of motor
º2 0.0, 0.1, 0.2, ...... 0.1

º3 Fixed point 0.00, 0.01, 0.02, ...... 0.01
º4 0.001, 0.002, 0.003, ...... 0.001
º5 Integer (signed) -2, -1, 0, 1, 2, ...... 1
º6 -0.1, 0.0, 0.1, ...... 0.1
º7 Fixed point (signed) -0.01, 0.00, 0.01, ...... 0.01
º8 -0.001, 0.000, 0.001, ...... 0.001
Initial cursor position is left end.
º9 Hexadecimal 1A8E 1h Cursor does not move automatically. When setting

range is from 00 to 11, you should specify individual
digits to set only 00, 01, 10, or 11.
10 Special data 3 0.75,1,2, ... 14,15 Carrier frequency setting
11 Operation data 1 Reset to 0 after writing
12 Exponent/mantissa 1 0.01
13 Exponent/mantissa 2 0.01
4.2.4.2 Data Type 12 to 145

The following data have special formats.
Type [12]: Time, current, power, PID process values

15 14 11 9 0
Mantissa Exponent = 0: 0 to 999, Exponent = 1 to 3: 100 to 999

Exponent 0: 0.01 times (0.00 to 9.99)
1: 0.1 times (10.0 to 99.9)
2: 1 times (100 to 999)
3: 10 times (1000 to 9990)
Polarity 0: Positive (+), 1: Negative (-)
Type [13]: Current and others

15 13 0
Mantissa Exponent = 0: 0 to 9999, Exponent = 1, 2, 3: 1000 to 9999

1: 0.1 times (100.0 to 999.9)
2: 1 times (1000 to 9999)
3: 10 times (10000 to 99990)
4-61
Type [14]: Cause of alarm
15 12 8 7 0
Alarm code 0 to 64
Order of alarm occurrence 1 to 5th
Number of alarms 1 to 5
Alarm codes
Code Display Description Code Display Description Code Display Description
Error code C for specific
º0 --- No alarm 22 0h2 External alarm 44 arc
user application
Error code D for specific
º1 --- IPM error 23 0h3 Inverter internal overheat 45 ard
user application
Braking resistor Error code E for specific
º2 dbh 24 0h4 Motor overheat 46 are
overheated user application
Error code F for specific
º3 dcf DC fuse blown 25 0l1 Motor 1 overload 47 arf
user application
Excessive positioning
º4 d0 26 0l2 Motor 2 overload 48 dba Braking transistor broken
deviation
ENABLE circuit (safety
º5 ef Ground fault 27 0l3 Motor 3 overload 49 ecf
stop circuit) failure
º6 er1 Memory error 28 0lu Inverter overload 50 erh Hardware error
Keypad communications
º7 er2 29 0s Overspeed 51 err Mock alarm
error
º8 er3 CPU error 30 0u Overvoltage 52 loc Start delay
º9 er4 Network error 31 pbf Charger circuit fault 53 dfa DC fan locked
RS-485 communications
10 er5 32 p9 PG wire break 54 et1 PG failure
error
Error code 1 for specific
11 er6 Operation error 33 ar1 55 --- No alarm
user application
12 er7 Output wiring fault 34 ar2 56 ec PG communication error
user application
13 er8 A/D converter error 35 ar3 57 --- No alarm
user application
14 er9 Speed not agreed 36 ar4 58 --- No alarm
user application
15 era UPAC error 37 ar5 59 --- No alarm
user application
Inter-inverter
16 erb communications link 38 ar6 60 --- No alarm
user application
error
17 lin Power supply phase loss 39 ar7 61 0pl Output phase loss
user application
18 lu Undervoltage 40 ar8 62
user application
NTC thermistor wire Error code 9 for specific
19 nrb 41 ar9 63
break error user application
Error code A for specific
20 0c Overcurrent 42 ara 64 --- No alarm
user application
Error code B for specific
21 0h1 Heat sink overheat 43 arb
user application
4-62
Type [15]: Alarm history

15 8 7 0
Alarm code 0 to 64 (See "Type [14]")
Number of the occurrence of the same alarm 0 to 255
Chap. 4
Type [16]: Percentage

15 8 7 0
Percentage -300% to 300% (-30000 to 30000)

Decimal places are not displayed.
Type [21]: Operation status

15 8 7 0
0) FWD (forward operation)

1) REV (reverse operation)
2) EXT (DC braking, pre-exciting)
3) INT (Inverter shut off)
4) BRK (Braking)
5) NUV (DC link circuit voltage established) 0: OFF, 1: ON
6) TL (Torque limiting)
7) VL (Voltage limiting)
8) IL (Current limiting)
9) ACC (Accelerating)
10) DEC (Decelerating)
11) ALM (Alarm relay output)
12) 0: REM/LOC, 1: COM
13)
14) Not used.
15)
4-63
Type [26]: DIOB option input state
Type [27]: DIOB option output state

15 8 7 0
[26] Input state [27] Output state

0) X21, Y21
1) X22, Y22
2) X23, Y23
3) X24, Y24
4) X25, Y25
5) X26, Y26
6) X27, Y27
7) X28, Y28
8) X29, Y29
0: OFF, 1: ON
9) X30, Y30
10) X31
11) X32
12) X33
13) X34
14) X35
15) X36
Type [28]: Inverter capacity

Code Inverter capacity Code Inverter capacity Code Inverter capacity Code Inverter capacity Code Inverter capacity
0 0.05 8 5.5 16 45 24 220 32 630
1 0.1 9 7.5 17 55 25 250 33 710
2 0.2 10 11 18 75 26 280 34 800
3 0.4 11 15 19 90 27 315
4 0.75 12 18.5 20 110 28 355
5 1.5 13 22 21 132 29 400
6 2.2 14 30 22 160 30 OTHER
7 3.7 15 37 23 200 31 500
Type [29]: Inverter model (common to entire FUJI inverter system)
The number is fixed to 1313h or 1314h for the FRENIC-VG.
200 V system: fixed to 1313h

400 V system: fixed to 1314h
4-64
Type [31]: Speed

15 8 7 0
Data (0 to ±20,000) → (0 to ±24,000 × r/min): (Data) × Nmax/20,000 conversion
(Example) When the maximum speed is Nmax = 1,500 r/min,
• If you want to direct a speed command of 1,000 r/min,

1,000
Specify a data of × 20,000 → 13,333
1,500
• If the read out data is 3,500,
Chap. 4
1,500
You can determine the speed is × 3,500 → 262.5 r/min
20,000

Type [32]: Operation commands, [33]: Y1 to Y18
This type is the same as S06 and S07.
15 8 7 0
[32] [33]
0) FWD (forward operation command) Y1
1) REV (reverse operation command) Y2
2) X1 Y3
3) X2 Y4
4) X3 Y5A
5) X4 Not used.
6) X5 Not used.
7) X6 Not used.
8) X7 Y11 0: OFF, 1: ON
9) X8 Y12
10) X9 Y13
11) X11 Y14
12) X12 Y15
13) X13 Y16
14) X14 Y17
15) RST (RESET command) Y18
4-65
Type [34]: Communication error codes
15 8 7 0
Description of alarms in the communication through the link (RS-485, T-Link, SX-bus, E-SX bus). The following data is set to
the monitor data M26 according to the communication status. The codes listed in the column "KEYPAD panel display" is
displayed on the KEYPAD panel as a communication error .
KEYPAD
Code Communication error name Description
panel display
0 - No communication error Normal communication
A data is written to an unused address of the function code (writing to
address out of the specified range is defined separately).
Data is read from missing function code address in the middle of
continuous read. The data will be "0000".
Writing to the S area while link operation is disabled. The data will not
be reflected and cause no error.
A data out of range is written to the S area. The data is written after
adjusted to the upper or the lower limit.
Access from another link or the KEYPAD panel occurs during data
writing (EEPROM other than the S area is accessed).
Writing to operation data (such as tuning or initialization) during multiple
function codes are being written once through the link. The inverter
decides that the procedure is canceled and continues the writing.
Writing to/reading from option function codes that are not displayed on
the KEYPAD panel.
1 to 32 - - -
33 to - Not used
70
71 04 Checksum error, CRC error Software error Checksum value or CRC value does not match.
72 05 Parity error Hardware error Parity does not match.
73 06 Others (such as overrun, framing) Physical (reception) errors other than above.
74 01 Format error Incorrect format.
Characters requesting transmission are incorrect. Characters terminating
transmission are not in the specified order.
75 01 Command error Codes other than the specified commands are transmitted.
76 07 Link priority error Writing to the S area through RS-485 while a link option is installed.
Writing to the S area through a link with lower priority while multiple
link options are installed.
77 07 No right to write function code data Not used
78 02 Function code error Access to a data out of the address range of the function codes (such as
access to a data over F80).
Writing data over 16 words.
79 07 Error on writing to write-disabled data Write-disabled function codes (Read-only data or the M area).
Function codes write-disabled during operation.
Writing through the link to data out of the S area in "write-disabled
through link" mode. Note that F00 or "Write enable for KEYPAD"
cannot protect from writing through the link.
Function codes that cannot be written through the link (link function
codes: H31 to 40).
Writing to M1 function code (P) area when motor parameters are
protected.
Writing through the link in the copy mode operation of the KEYPAD
panel.
80 03 Data Written data is out of the setting range in the area other than the S area.
81 07 Error during writing Another writing request comes from the same source while writing
function code data (EEPROM other than the S area is accessed).
Note: The alarm codes 1 to 32 constitute a code system specific to the FRENIC-VG different from the assignment for the general-purpose
inverters.
The communication error codes 71 to 81 are common to the different models. Note that some causes of alarm are specific to models.
The KEYPAD panel does not display raw communication error codes but the values in the "KEYPAD panel display" column in the table
above.
The KEYPAD panel displays "∗ ∗ " when it receives data that does not have a corresponding "KEYPAD panel display" in the table
above.
4-66
Type [35]: X function normally open/closed
Type [36]: Y function normally open/closed

15 8 7 0
[35] X function [36] Y function

0) X1 Y1
1) X2 Y2
2) X3 Y3
Chap. 4
3) X4 Y4
4) X5 Y5 0: Normally open
5) X6 1: Normally closed

6) X7
7) X8
8) X9
Type [40 to 99]

These types are reserved for the manufacturer. Users can considers these types as type [0] to use.
Type [82]: M1 Motor selection

Code kW display HP display Code kW display HP display Code kW display HP display
0 00: 0.75-2 00: 1-2 17 17: 3.7-4 17: 5-4 34 34: 200-4 34: 250-4
1 01: 1.5-2 01: 2-2 18 18: 5.5-4 18: 7.5-4 35 35: 220-4 35: 300-4
2 02: 2.2-2 02: 3-2 19 19: 7.5-4 19: 10-4 36 36: P-OTR 36: P-OTR
3 03: 3.7-2 03: 5-2 20 20: 11-4 20: 15-4 37 37: OTHER 37: OTHER
4 04: 5.5-2 04: 7.5-2 21 21: 15-4 21: 20-4 38 38: 30-2A 38: 40-2A
5 05: 7.5-2 05: 10-2 22 22: 18.5-4 22: 25-4 39 39: 55-2A 39: 75-2A
6 06: 11-2 06: 15-2 23 23: 22-4 23: 30-4 40 40: 75-2A 40: 100-2A
7 07: 15-2 07: 20-2 24 24: 30-4 24: 40-4 41 41: 90-2A 41: 125-2A
8 08: 18.5-2 08: 25-2 25 25: 37-4 25: 50-4 42 42: 30-4A 42: 40-4A
9 09: 22-2 09: 30-2 26 26: 45-4Y 26: 60-4Y 43 43: 55-4A 43: 75-4A
10 10: 30-2 10: 40-2 27 27: 45-4S 27: 60-4S 44 44: 75-4A 44: 100-4A
11 11: 37-2 11: 50-2 28 28: 55-4 28: 75-4 45 45: 90-4A 45: 125-4A
12 12: 45-2Y 12: 60-2Y 29 29: 75-4 29: 100-4 46 46: 110-4A 46: 150-4A
13 13: 45-2S 13: 60-2S 30 30: 90-4 30: 125-4 47 47: 132-4A 47: 175-4A
14 14: 55-2 14: 75-2 31 31: 110-4 31: 150-4 48 48: 160-4A 48: 200-4A
15 15: 75-2 15: 100-2 32 32: 132-4 32: 175-4 49 49: 200-4A 49: 250-4A
16 16: 90-2 16: 125-2 33 33: 160-4 33: 200-4 50 50: 220-4A 50: 300-4A
Type [100]: EN Input terminals

15 8 7 0
0) EN1 terminal [EN1]

1) EN2 terminal [EN2]
4-67
Type [101]: (Power)
15 13 0
Mantissa Exponent 0: 0 to 9999, Exponent 1, 2, 3: 1000 to 9999

1: 0.01 times (10.00 to 99.99)
2: 0.1 times (100.0 to 999.9)
3: 1 times (1000 to 9999)
Type [102]: (Cause of alarm)
15 8 7 0
Light alarm code 0 to 64
Light alarm codes

Code Display Description Code Display Description Code Display Description
0 --- No alarm 30 --- No alarm 60 --- No alarm
9 Er4 Network error 39 --- No alarm 69 --- No alarm
RS-485 communications
10 Er5 40 --- No alarm 70 --- No alarm
error
14 Er9 Speed mismatch 44 --- No alarm 74 --- No alarm
E-SX bus tact
16 --- No alarm 46 ArE 76 --- No alarm
synchronization error
Error code F for particular
17 --- No alarm 47 ArF 77 --- No alarm
users
NTC thermistor wire break
19 nrb 49 --- No alarm 79 --- No alarm
error
21 --- No alarm 51 Err Mock alarm 81 LiF Life time early warning
Heat sink overheat early
22 OH2 External alarm 52 LOC Start delay 82 OH
warning
23 --- No alarm 53 dFA DC fan locked 83 OL Overload early warning
24 OH4 Motor overheat 54 --- No alarm 84 MOH No alarm
25 OL1 Motor 1 overload (M1) 55 --- No alarm 85 MOL No alarm
26 OL2 Motor 2 overload (M2) 56 --- No alarm 86 --- No alarm
27 OL3 Motor 3 overload (M3) 57 --- No alarm 87 BaT Battery life expired
Safety printed circuit board
28 --- No alarm 58 --- No alarm 88 SnF
light alarm (Available soon)
29 --- No alarm 59 --- No alarm
4-68
Type [125]: Control output 1

15 8 7 0
0) Inverter running RUN

1) Speed valid N-EX
2) Speed agreement 1 N-AG1
3) Speed arrival signal N-AR
Chap. 4
4) Speed detected 1 N-DT1
7) Undervoltage detected (Inverter stopped) LU

8) Torque polarity detected (braking/driving) B/D
9) Torque limiting TL
10) Torque detected 1 T-DT1
11) Torque detected 2 T-DT2
12) Keypad operation enabled KP
13) Inverter stopped STOP
14) Inverter ready to run RDY
15) Magnetic flux detected MF-DT

15 8 7 0
0) Motor M2 selected SW-M2

1) Motor M3 selected SW-M3
2) Brake release signal BRK
3) Alarm content 1 AL1
7) Cooling fan in operation FAN
8) Resetting TRY
9) Universal DO U-DO
10) Heat sink overheat early warning INV-OH
11) Synchronization completion signal SY-C
12) Lifetime alarm LIFE
13) Under acceleration U-ACC
14) Under deceleration U-DEC
15) Inverter overload early warning INV-OL
4-69
15 8 7 0
0) Motor overheat early warning M-OH

1) Motor overload early warning M-OL
2) DB overload early warning DB-OL
3) Link transmission error LK-ERR
4) In limiting under load adaptive control ANL
5) In calculation under load adaptive control ANC
6) Analog torque bias being held TBH
7) Custom Do1 C-Do1
8) Custom Do2 C-Do2
9) Custom Do3 C-Do3
10) Custom Do4 C-Do4

15 8 7 0

1) Not used.
2) Z-phase detection completed* Z-RDY
3) Multiplex system communications link being established MTS
4) Answerback to cancellation of multiplex system MEC-AB
5) Multiplex system master selected MSS
6) Multiplex system local station failure AL-SF
7) Stopped due to communications link error* LES
8) Alarm output (for any alarm) ALM
9) Light alarm L-ALM
10) Maintenance timer MNT
11) Braking transistor broken DBAL
12) DC fan locked DCFL
15) Axial fan stopped MFAN
* Available soon
4-70

15 8 7 0
0) Not used.
1) Not used.
2) Answerback to droop control enabled DSAB
3) Answerback to cancellation of torque command/torque current command TCL-C
Chap. 4
4) Answerback to cancellation of torque limiter mode 1 F40-AB
5) Not used. -
6) Not used. -
7) 73 ON command PRT-73F

8) Turn ON Y-terminal test output Y-ON
9) Turn OFF Y-terminal test output Y-OFF
10) Reading absolute position of serial PG in progress* SPG-RD
11) System clock battery lifetime expired BATT
12) Magnetic position tuning in progress* TUN-MG
13) SPGT battery warning* SPGT-B
14) Electrical conditions ready* ERD
15) IT detected in operation* TCA
* Available soon

15 8 7 0
0) EN terminal detection circuit failure* DECF

1) EN terminal OFF* ENOFF
2) Safety function in progress* SF-RUN
3) In preparation -
4) In preparation -
5) In preparation -
6) In preparation -
7) In preparation -
8) In preparation -
9) In preparation -
10) In preparation -
* Available soon
4-71
Type [133]: Control input 1
15 8 7 0
0) Select multistep speed 1 SS1

4) Select ASR and ACC/DEC time 1 RT1
5) Select ASR and ACC/DEC time 2 RT2
6) Enable 3-wire operation HLD
7) Coast to a stop BX
8) Reset alarm RST
9) Enable external alarm trip THR
10) Ready for jogging JOG
11) Select speed command N2/N1 N2/N1
12) Select motor 2 M-CH2
13) Select motor 3 M-CH3
14) Enable DC braking DCBRK
15) Clear ACC/DEC to zero CLR

15 8 7 0
0) Switch creep speed under UP/DOWN control CRP-N2/N1

1) UP (Increase speed) UP
2) DOWN (Decrease speed) DOWN
3) Enable data change with keypad WE-KP
4) Cancel PID control KP/PID
5) Switch normal/inverse operation IVS
6) Interlock (52-2) IL
7) Enable data change via communications link WE-LK
8) Enable communications link LE
9) Universal DI U-DI
10) Enable auto search for idling motor speed at starting STM
11) Synchronous operation command (PG (PR) optional function) SYC
12) Lock at zero speed LOCK
13) Pre-excitation EXITE
14) Cancel speed limiter N-LIM
15) Cancel H41 (Torque command) H41-CCL
4-72

15 8 7 0
0) Cancel H42 (Torque current command) H42-CCL

1) Cancel H43 (Magnetic flux command) H43-CCL
2) Cancel F40 (Torque limiter mode 1) F40-CCL
3) Select torque limiter level 2/1 TL2/TL1
Chap. 4
4) Bypass ACC/DEC processor BPS
5) Select torque bias command 1 TB1
6) Select torque bias command 2 TB2
7) Select droop control DROOP

8) Zero-hold Ai1 ZH-AI1
9) Zero-hold Ai2 ZH-AI2
10) Zero-hold Ai3 (AIO optional function) ZH-AI3
11) Zero-hold Ai4 (AIO optional function) ZH-AI4
12) Reverse Ai1 polarity REV-AI1
13) Reverse Ai2 polarity REV-AI2
14) Reverse Ai3 polarity (AIO optional function) REV-AI3
15) Reverse Ai4 polarity (AIO optional function) REV-AI4

15 8 7 0
0) Inverse PID output PID-INV

1) Cancel PG alarm PG-CCL
2) Cancel undervoltage alarm LU-CCL
3) Hold Ai torque bias H-TB
4) STOP1 STOP1
5) STOP2 STOP2
6) STOP3 STOP3
7) Latch DIA data (DIA optional function) DIA
8) Latch DIB data (DIB optional function) DIB
9) Cancel multiplex system MT-CCL
10) Custom Di1 C-DI1
4-73
15 8 7 0
0) Custom Di7 C-DI7

1) Custom Di8 C-DI8
2) Custom Di9 C-DI9
4) Select load adaptive parameters 2/1* AN-P2/1
5) Cancel PID components PID-CCL
6) Enable PID FF component PID-FF
7) Reset completion of speed limit calculation* NL-RST
8) Toggle signal 1 TGL1
9) Toggle signal 2 TGL2
10) Cause external mock alarm FTB
11) Cancel NTC thermistor alarm NTC-CCL
12) Cancel lifetime alarm signal LF-CCL
13) Request for reading in serial port PG absolute position* SPG-AP
14) Switch PID feedback signals PID-FB2
15) Select PID torque bias TB-PID
* Available soon

15 8 7 0
0) Tune magnetic pole position* MP-TUN

1) External electrical conditions* RD
2) Startup conditions* STRD
3) Continue to run at the time of communications link error LK-D
4) In preparation -
5) In preparation -
6) In preparation -
7) In preparation -
8) In preparation -
9) In preparation -
* Available soon
In preparation
4-74
Type [141]: Operation status 2(a)

15 8 7 0
00: HD (High duty mode, overload capability) (F80 = 0, 2)

0)
01: LD (Low duty mode, overload capability) (F80 = 1)
1) 10: MD (Medium duty mode, overload capability) (F80 = 3)
00000(0): Keypad [HAND]
Chap. 4
00001(1): Analog input to terminal [12](0 to ±10 V)
00010(2): Analog input to terminal [12](0 to +10 V)
00011(3): UP/DOWN control (Initial speed = 0)
00100(4): UP/DOWN control (Initial speed = Last value)
00101(5): UP/DOWN control (Initial speed = Creep speed 1 or 2)

2) 00110(6): DIA card input [DIA]
00111(7): DIB card input [DIB]
3)
01000(8): Select multistep speed (SS8, SS4, SS2, SS1)
4) 01001(9): Enable communications link (LE), H30:
5) Communications Link Function (Link operation)
6) 01010(10): UPAC SW1 (Speed command 1) enabled [UPAC]
01011(11): Synchronization operation command (PG (PR)
optional function) SYC
01100(12): Orientation[ORT]
01101(13): Lock at zero speed LOCK
01110(14): Not used.
01111(15): Not used.
10000(16): Ready for jogging (JOG)
10001(17): Not used.
10010(18): N-REFV input to terminal [Ai1]
10011(19): N-REFC input to terminal [Ai2]
10100(20): Local mode keypad [LOCAL]
7)
8) 00: Motor 1
01: Motor 2
10: Motor 3
0000(0): Vector control with speed sensor

0001(1): Vector control without speed sensor
9) 0010(2): Simulation mode
10) 0011(3): Vector control for PMSM with speed sensor
0100(4): V/f control for IM
11)
0101(5): Vector control with speed sensor (Multiwinding IM) (Master)
12) 0110(6): Vector control with speed sensor (Multiwinding IM) (Slave)
0111(7): Vector control without speed sensor (Multiwinding IM) (Master)
13) FWD input (0: OFF, 1: ON)

14) REV input (0: OFF, 1: ON)
15) Not used.
4-75
Type [142]: Operation status 2(b)
15 8 7 0
0) Current limit (0: No limit, 1: Under limiting)(*1)

1) Undervoltage (0: Normal, 1: Undervoltage)
2) Voltage limit (0: No limit, 1: Under limiting)(*1)
3) Torque limit (0: No limit, 1: Under limiting)(*1)
4) Not used.
5) Not used.
6) STOP1 input (0: OFF, 1: ON)
9) BX input (0: OFF, 1: ON)
10) 0000(0): Keypad (F02 = 0) [REM] [HAND]

11) 0001(1): FWD or REV (F02 = 1) [REM]
12) 0010(2): Run command via communications link [COMM]
13) 0011(3): Local mode keypad [LOC] [HAND]
14) Not used.

15) Not used.
(*1) Current limit, voltage limit and torque limit are the same as information in Type [21].
Type [143]: Calendar clock [Year/month]

15 8 7 0
Month
1 to 12 months: 0001(1) to 1100(12)
Year
2000 to 2099 years: 0000 0000(00) to 1001 1001(99)
Type [144]: Calendar clock [Day/hour]

15 8 7 0
Hour
0 to 23 hours: 0000 0000(0) to 0001 0111(23)
Day
1 to 31 days: 0000 0001(1) to 0001 1111(31)
Type [145]: Calendar clock [Minute/second]

15 8 7 0
Second
0 to 59 seconds: 0000 0000(0) to 0011 1011(59)
Minute 0 to 59 minites: 0000 0000(0) to 0011 1011(59)
4-76
Type [146]: DIOA Input/output status

15 8 7 0
0) X11
1) X12
2) X13
3) X14
Chap. 4
4) Y11
5) Y12
0: OFF, 1: ON
6) Y13
7) Y14

8) Y15
9) Y16
10) Y17
11) Y18
4-77
4.3 Details of Function Codes
4.3.1 F codes (Fundamental Functions)
F00 Data Protection
F00 specifies whether to protect setting data from accidentally getting changed from the keypad. When the
data protection is enabled, the "DATA PRTC" displays on the LCD monitor.
This data protection applies to access to data from the keypad. The data protection for access via the
communications link (RS-485, T-Link, SX-bus, fieldbus, etc.) can be defined with H29.
Ｆ００ＤＡＴＡＰＲＴＣ
Data = 0: Allow data change. 0: CHGOK

1: Protect data. 1: PROTECT
Setting procedure
0 → 1: Press the and keys simultaneously to change the value from 0 to 1, then press the key to
establish the change.
1 → 0: Press the and keys simultaneously to change the value from 1 to 0, then press the key to
establish the change.
F01 Speed Command N1
F01 sets a command source that specifies a reference speed.

Using the terminal command N2/N1 assigned to any digital input terminal switches a command source
between the Speed command N1 specified by F01 and Speed command N2 specified by C25. For details
about switching, refer to the N2/N1 in the descriptions of E01 through E13 (data = 11).
Ｆ０１ＳＰＤＣＭＤ１
Data = 0: Enable the and keys on the keypad. 0: KEYPAD

1: Enable the voltage input to terminal [12] (0 to ±10 VDC). 1: 12INPUT
2: Enable the voltage input to terminal [12] (0 to +10 VDC). 2: 12(ABS)
3: Enable UP and DOWN terminal commands.*1 (Initial value: 0) 3: U/D(0)
4: Enable UP and DOWN terminal commands.*1 (Initial value: Last value) 4: U/D(BEF)
5: Enable UP and DOWN terminal commands.*1 (Initial value: CRP1, CRP2) 5: U/D(CRP)
6: Enable a DIA card 6: DIA CARD
7: Enable a DIB card 7: DIB CARD
8: Enable the reference speed setting to terminal [Ai1] to [Ai4]. (0 to ±10 VDC).*2 8: N-REFV
9: Enable the current input to terminal [Ai2] (4 to 20 mADC).*3 9: N-REFC
*1 The UP and DOWN should be assigned to digital input terminals (X terminals) with E01 to E13 (data = 17 and 18) beforehand.
*2 The N-REFV (Main speed setting) should be assigned to one of analog input terminals ([Ai1] to [Ai4]) with E49 to E52 (data = 25)
beforehand.
*3 Exclusive to terminal [Ai2]. The N-REFC (Current input speed setting) should be assigned to analog input terminal [Ai2] with E50
(data = 26) beforehand.
Check the specified speed command with Menu #3 "Operation status

monitor" on the keypad.
１２００
Ｎ＊＝１２００．０ｒ／ｍ
Shown at the right is the OPR MTR screen that appears when the inverter is Ｎ＝１２００．０ｒ／ｍ
ｆ＊＝××××．×Ｈｚ
running at 1200 r/min.
ＴＲＱ＝××××．×％
4-78
F02 Operation Method
F02 selects a command source that specifies a run command.
Ｆ０２ＯＰＲＭＥＴＨＯＤ
Data = 0: Enable the , , and keys on the keypad (Local mode). 0: KEYPAD
1: Enable input terminal commands FWD and REV (Remote mode). 1: FWD, REV
The remote and local modes can be switched also by pressing the and keys simultaneously. This key
Chap. 4
operation changes the setting of F02.
When H30 (Communications link operation) = "2" or "3," link operation has priority over the setting of F02.
When F02 = 0, entering a run command from the keypad turns the green LED lamp ON. When F02 = 1, to

check the command status, use Menu #4 "I/O Checking" (REM screen) on the keypad and check that the box
of the current input (FWD or REV) appears black ().
Shown at the right is the I/O screen that appears when FWD is
externally turned ON. １５００
ＲＥＭ □×２ □×６
Note that the COMM screen in Menu #4 "I/O Checking" shows ■ＦＷＤ □×３ □×７
commands entered via the communications link. It has no relationship □ＲＥＶ □×４ □×８
with terminal block commands. □Ｘ１ □×５ □×９
F03 Maximum Speed M1
F03 specifies the maximum speed (r/min) for motor 1. Specifying the maximum speed exceeding the rating of
the equipment driven by the inverter may damage the motor or the machinery. Make sure that the maximum
speed setting matches the equipment rating.
The ratio between the inverter rated speed and the maximum speed should be 1 : 6 or below.
Ｆ０３Ｍ 1 ― M A X
Data setting range: 50 to 30000 (r/min)
Settings of some function codes (relating to the acceleration/deceleration time and the ASR P gain of analog speed
setting) are based on the maximum speed (F03). Changing the maximum speed in the already adjusted system in order
to decrease the top speed may cause the inverter to malfunction.
It is therefore necessary to change the ASR P gain (F61/C40/C50/C60) in proportion to the change of the F03 setting.
When F03 = 1500 and F61 = 10.0, for example, changing the F03 setting from 1500 to 150 will cause hunting. This
change means that the ASR P gain is multiplied by 10 (1500/150), so be sure to change the F61 setting from 10.0 to
1.0.
F04 Rated Speed M1
F04 specifies the rated speed in the constant torque range of motor 1. Set the rated speed printed on the
nameplate labeled on the motor.
Selecting a VG-dedicated motor with P02 automatically configures the F04 data and does not allow it to be
changed. Selecting the "P-OTR" with P02 does not allow the F04 data to be changed.
The ratio between the inverter rated speed and the maximum speed should be 1 : 6 or below.
Ｆ０４Ｍ１－Ｎｒ
Data setting range: 50 to 30000 (r/min)
4-79
F05 Rated Voltage M1
F05 specifies the rating of the output voltage to be supplied to motor 1. Set the rated voltage printed on the
nameplate labeled on the motor.
Selecting a VG-dedicated motor with P02 automatically configures the F05 data and does not allow it to be
changed. Selecting the "P-OTR" with P02 does not allow the F05 data to be changed.
Ｆ０５Ｍ１－Ｖｒ
Data setting range: 80 to 999 (V)
F07 Acceleration Time 1
F08 Deceleration Time 1
F07 specifies the acceleration time, the length of time required for the speed to increase from "0" to the
maximum speed. F08 specified the deceleration time, the length of time required for the speed to decrease
from the maximum speed down to "0."
The actual acceleration/deceleration time is calculated based on the maximum speed (F03, A06, A106). See
the expression given below.
Reference speed
Actual acceleration/deceleration time = F07/F08 setting x
Maximum speed (F03, A06, A106)
If the S-curve acceleration/deceleration is selected, the actual acceleration/deceleration time becomes longer
than the specified time. For details, refer to the description of F67.
Ｆ０７ＡＣＣＴＩＭＥ１
Ｆ０８ＤＥＣＴＩＭＥ１
Data setting range: 0.01 to 99.99 (s)

100.0 to 999.9 (s)
1000 to 3600 (s)
Actual speed
Actual speed
Maximum speed Maximum speed

Reference
speed
Reference speed
Time Time
Actual acc. Actual dec.
time time
Acc. time Dec. time
Acc. time Dec. time
Writing data to S08 (Acceleration time) or S09 (Deceleration time) via the communications link (RS-485,
T-Link, SX-bus, or fieldbus) automatically copies the data to F07 or F08 as is, respectively.
4-80
F10 M1 Electronic Thermal Overload Protection (Select motor characteristics)
F11 M1 Electronic Thermal Overload Protection (Detection level)
F12 M1 Electronic Thermal Overload Protection (Thermal time constant)
F10 through F12 specify the thermal characteristics of the motor (motor rotation, output current and running
time) for its electronic thermal overload protection that is used to detect overload conditions of the motor
inside the inverter. This function protects motor M1. When a dedicated motor for the FRENIC-VG is used,
disable this function (no setting is required).
Chap. 4
Ｆ１０Ｍ１ ― ＥＯＬ ― ＳＥＬ

- Select motor characteristics
When a dedicated motor for the FRENIC-VG is used, connecting an NTC thermistor built in the motor with
the FRENIC-VG activates the motor overheat protection so that no electronic thermal overload protection is
required. Disable this function.
If the motor overheat protection by an NTC thermistor is not available, use F10 to select the motor cooling
mechanisms (shaft-driven cooling fan or separately powered cooling fan) to specify its characteristics.
When 150% of the current specified by F11 flows for the time specified by F12, the inverter activates the
motor overload protection and issues an alarm 0l1 .
Data = 0: Disable (For a dedicated motor for the FRENIC-VG. Protected by an NTC thermistor)
1: Enable (For a general-purpose motor with shaft-driven cooling fan)
2: Enable (For a Fuji inverter-driven motor with separately powered cooling fan)
Ｆ１１Ｍ１ ― ＥＯＬ ― ＬＶＬ
- Detection level
F11 specifies the level (current value) at which the
electronic thermal overload protection becomes
activated.
In general, set the F11 data to 1.0 to 1.1 times of the M1
rated current specified by P04.
By factory default, F11 data is set to the rated current of
the Fuji general-purpose motor. To connect any other
motor, change the setting.
Data setting range: 0.01 to 99.99 (A)
100.0 to 999.9 (A)
1,000 to 2,000 (A)
4-81
Ｆ１２Ｍ１ ― E O L ― T C
- Thermal time constant

F12 specifies the thermal time constant of the motor. If
the current of 150% of the overload detection level
specified by F11 flows for the time specified by F12,
the electronic thermal overload protection becomes
activated to detect the motor overload.
The thermal time constant for general-purpose motors
including Fuji motors is approx. 5 minutes for motors of
22 kW or below and 10 minutes for motors of 30 kW or
above by factory default
Data setting range: 0.5 to 75.0 (min)
(Example) When the F12 data is set at 5 minutes
As shown at the right, the electronic thermal overload
protection is activated to detect an alarm condition
(alarm code 0l1 ) when the output current of 150% of
the overload detection level (specified by F11) flows for
5 minutes, and 120% for approx. 13 minutes.
Since the current flowing through a motor is not usually
constant, the average current in a certain period is used
to start the timer for the electronic thermal overload
protection.
Note: In the case of the load which is repeatedly and
very frequently driven by a motor, the motor current
fluctuates largely so that it may enter the short-time
rating (100% or more) range of the motor repeatedly. If
it happens, refer to Chapter 9, Section 9.1.3.4
"Calculating the RMS rating of the motor" to calculate
the equivalent effective current and limit this value
under the rated current of a motor (in the case of a
separately-powered cooling fan).
4-82
F14 Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure (Mode selection)
F14 specifies the action to be taken by the inverter such as trip and restart in the event of a momentary power
failure. You can select a function for detecting power failure and activating protective operation (alarm output,
alarm display, inverter output cutoff) for undervoltage or an automatic restart function without stopping a
coasting motor after the supply voltage recovery.
See the following table for more information on this function.
The restart mode related function codes include H13 to H17 (Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure,
Wait time, Decrease rate in speed, Continuous running level, Run command self-hold setting and Run
command self-hold time), H09 (Starting Mode, Auto search), and E01 (Terminal [X1] Function STM, data =
Chap. 4
26 "Enable auto search for idling motor speed at starting"). Also be familiar with these functions.
To restart the inverter after momentary power failure under V/f control, enable the overcurrent suppression
(H58 = 1).

Ｆ１４ＲＥＳＴＡＲＴ
Data
Function name Operation on power failure Operation on power recovery
for F14
Inactive (immediate If undervoltage is detected, the protective The inverter does Enter
0 inverter trip) function lu is activated and output is not restart. commands for
turned off. resetting the
protective
Inactive (inverter trip If undervoltage is detected, the protective The protective
function is not activated and output will be function lu is function and
on recovery)
activated, but the starting
1 turned off.
operation does operation.
not restart,
Inactive (inverter trip When the holding DC level (H15) "Restart The protective
after deceleration to a after momentary power failure" is reached, function is
stop on power failure) the inverter decelerates a motor to stop. activated, but the
The DC voltage of the main circuit operation does
sharpens the deceleration slope so that the not restart,
undervoltage protective function lu is not
activated. The inverter collects the inertia
2 energy of the load and controls the motor
until it stops, then the undervoltage
protective function lu is activated. If the
amount of inertia energy from the load is
small, and the undervoltage level is
achieved during deceleration, the
undervoltage protective function lu is
then activated.
Active (continuous When the holding DC level is reached, Operation restarts automatically.
operation) energy is collected from the inertia amount For a power recovery during a
of the load to extend the operation continued operation, the inverter
continuation time. If undervoltage is accelerates to the original speed. If
3
detected, the protective function is not the inverter detected an
activated, but the output is turned off. undervoltage, operation
automatically restarts at the speed
when the undervoltage is detected.
Active (restart at the If undervoltage is detected, the protective Vector control & H09 ≥ 1
speed on power failure) function is not activated and the output is The inverter performs auto search
turned off. for idling motor speed and restarts
running the motor at the same speed
4 as the motor.
V/f control or H09 = 0
The inverter restarts running the
motor at the speed at which the
power failure occurred.
Active (restart at the If undervoltage is detected, the protective Vector control & H09 ≥ 1
starting speed) function is not activated and the output is The inverter performs auto search
turned off. for idling motor speed and restarts
running the motor at the same speed
5 as the motor.
V/f control or H09 = 0
The automatically restarts running
the motor at 0 r/min.
4-83
Power failure Power recovery Power failure Power recovery
DC link bus Undervoltage DC link Undervoltage

voltage circuit
voltage
Time Output H13: Wait time Time

Motor speed frequency
(Motor speed)
Protective Protective Auto search for Acceleration

Action
function function idling motor speed
DC link bus DC link bus Undervoltage

Undervoltage
voltage voltage
Time H13: Wait time Time

Motor speed Motor speed
Protective Action Protective Synchronization Acceleration

function function
H15:
Continuous
running level
DC link bus DC link bus
Undervoltage
voltage voltage
Time Time
Motor speed Motor speed H13: Wait time
Protective Protective Auto search for

Action
function function idling motor speed
H15:
Continuous
running level
DC link bus DC link bus
Undervoltage
voltage voltage
Time Time
Motor speed
Motor speed H13: Wait time
Protective Protective
function function
4-84
F17 Gain (for terminal [12] input)
F17 specifies the proportion to the reference speed value (analog input) from control terminal [12]. The
reference speed is limited to 110% (1.1 times) of ±maximum speed (F03).
Note: The reference speed value is finally limited by the speed limiter (F76, F77, F78).
Ｆ１７ＧＡＩＮ ( 1 2 )
Data setting range: 0.0 to 200.0 (%)
Chap. 4
F18 Bias (for terminal [12] input)
F18 specifies a bias speed to be added to the reference speed value (analog input) from control terminal [12].
The bias speed is limited to ±maximum speed (F03). The reference speed is limited to 110% (1.1 times) of
±maximum speed (F03).
Note: The reference speed value is finally limited by the speed limiter (F76, F77, F78).
Ｆ１８ＢＩＡＳ（１２）
Data setting rage: 0 to 30,000 (r/min)
4-85
F20 DC Braking (Braking starting speed)
F21 DC Braking (Braking level)
F22 DC Braking (Braking time)
If you apply a DC voltage to an operating motor (set the output frequency to zero), the motor generates a
braking torque to decelerate to stop. This is referred as DC brake and these functions specify the setting. If a
motor does not stop within a DC braking time, the motor will coast. You can assign a digital signal input
[DCBRK] to start the DC brake.
Ｆ２０ＤＣＢＲＫＮ
- Starting speed
Set the starting speed of the DC brake during decelerating.
Setting range: 0 to 3,600 (r/min)
Ｆ２１ＤＣＢＲＫＬＶＬ
- Braking level
Sets the output current level of the DC braking. You can specify as a percentage of the inverter rated output
(100%) with a minimum unit of 1%.
Setting range: 0 to 100 (%)
Ｆ２２ＤＣＢＲＫｔ
- Braking time
Sets the operation time for the DC braking
Setting range: 0.0: Inactive
0.1 to 30.0 (s)
DC brake operation
The DC brake is applied for a specified time after
the speed reaches the starting speed level on
deceleration of a motor. The inverter running
(RUN) signal maintains ON during the DC
braking and the inverter stoppage (STOP) signal
turns on when the DC brake is activated.
Specify the slip frequency conversion speed level

at F20. If a very large value is specified, the
control becomes unstable, possibly causing
overvoltage protection being activated.
The brake function of the inverter does not provide a mechanical hold.
You may be injured.
4-86
F23 Starting Speed (Speed)
F24 Starting Speed (Holding time)
You can set a starting speed to assure a starting torque.

Under vector control
This function acts to release a mechanical brake. If you enter the operation command after setting the starting
speed to 0 r/min, the brake will be released after the magnetic-flux and the torque reach a certain level. See
E15 to E27 "Y function selection" for brake release signal.
Chap. 4
Under V/f control
You can accelerate a motor after operating the motor at a starting speed for a certain period to establish the
magnetic-flux on start.

Ｆ２３ＳＴＡＲＴＮ Motor speed
- Starting speed
Sets the rotation at start.
Setting range: 0.0 to 150.0 (r/min)
Holding time
Starting
Ｆ２４ＨＬＤＳＴＡＲＴｔ speed Time
0
- Holding time
Sets the period for maintaining the starting time. FWD
Setting range: 0.00 to 10.00 (s)
Note: The holding time is not activated when you switch between forward and reverse rotation. The
acceleration time does not include the holding time.
4-87
F26 Motor Sound (Carrier frequency)
F26 controls the carrier frequency to reduce an audible noise generated by the motor or electromagnetic noise
from the inverter itself, avoid resonance with the machinery, and reduce the leakage current from the output
(secondary) circuit.
Ｆ２６ＭＴＲＳＯＵＮＤ
Data setting range: 2 to 15 (kHz) (The upper limit differs depending upon the capacity and current rating
(HD/LD/MD).)
Carrier frequency 2 to 15 kHz

Motor sound noise emission High to low
Ripples in output current waveform Large to small
Leakage current Low to high
Electromagnetic noise emission Low to high
Note 1: Specifying a too low carrier frequency causes the output current waveform to have a large amount of
ripples (harmonics components). As a result, the motor loss increases, causing the motor temperature to rise.
Specifying a high carrier frequency increases the motor loss, causing the inverter temperature to rise.
Note 2: When F26 = 9, 8 kHz of the carrier frequency applies, when F26=11, 10 kHz, when F26 = 13 or 14,
12 kHz.
Note 3: Running a permanent magnet synchronous motor (PMSM) at a low carrier frequency may heat the
permanent magnet due to the output current harmonics, resulting in demagnetization. When decreasing the
carrier frequency setting, be sure to check the allowable carrier frequency of the motor.
4-88
F36 30RY Drive Mode
F36 selects whether to activate (excite) the alarm output relay (30RY) in a normal state or in an abnormal
state.
Ｆ３６ＲＹＭＯＤＥ
Data setting range: 0, 1 30A 30

Data for F36 Normal state Abnormal state
Chap. 4
0 30A-30C: OFF 30A-30C: ON 30B
30B-30C: ON 30B-30C: OFF
1 30A-30C: ON 30A-30C: OFF 30C
30B-30C: OFF 30B-30C: ON

When F36 = 1, the contacts between 30A and 30C are connected after the inverter control voltage is
established (about five seconds after turning on). Since the relay is excited in a normal state, the
relay can detect a wire break in the alarm output line.
F37 Stop Speed (Speed)
F38 Stop Speed (Detection mode)
F39 Stop Speed (Zero speed holding time)
Ｆ３７ S T O P N
- Stop speed
F37 specifies the stop speed.
Data setting range: 0.0 to 150.0 (r/min)
Ｆ３８ＤＥＴＳＩＧＮＡＬ
- Detection mode
F38 specifies whether to detect the stop speed with the reference speed (Reference speed 4 (ASR input)) or
detected speed (Detected speed 1).
Data setting range: 0: Detected speed
1: Reference speed
However, under V/f control or vector control without speed sensor, the reference speed only takes effect
irrespective of the F38 setting.
Under V/f control, the inverter stops its output when it detects the output frequency (M05), irrespective of the
F38 setting.
4-89
Ｆ３９ＨＬＤＳＴＯＰｔ
- Zero speed holding time

The RUN signal ("Inverter running") will turns off at
the end of the Zero speed holding time for continuing
operation after the motor speed reaches the stop speed
level.
This function is used to adjust the timing to apply a
mechanical brake.
Under V/f control or vector control without speed
sensor, however, this function is invalid. Even under
vector control, when H41 (Torque command source) ≠
0 or H42 (Torque current command source) ≠ 0, this
function is invalid.
F40 Torque Limiter Mode 1
F41 Torque Limiter Mode 2
F40 specifies torque limiter mode 1 in which the torque limiter, power limiter or torque current limiter can be
selected. In the mode, it is also possible to disable those limiters. Turning ON the terminal command
F40-CCL ("Cancel F40"), which is functionally equivalent to F40 set at "0," also disables those limiters.
Ｆ４０ＴＬＩＭＭＯＤＥ１
Data setting range: 0: Disable limiters

1: Enable torque limiter
2: Enable power limiter
3: Enable torque current limiter
Under V/f control, the torque current limiter is enabled irrespective of whether F40 is set at 1, 2 or 3.
Background information
The right graph shows a continuous permissible
torque (not short-time rating) for forward rotation
driving in the speed control range (0 to Rated speed
to 200%). The control generally reduces
magnetic-flux above the rated speed to extend the
speed control range. The reduced output current in
the right graph shows that the control reduces the
current corresponding to the amount of the reduced
magnetic-flux. This reduces the increase of the
induced motor voltage to restrain the increase of
the voltage output proportional to the speed.
Under the rated speed, the rated torque is effective.
Since the torque is proportional to the product of
the exciting current and the torque current, the
current is limited in practice.
Over the rated speed, since the inverter capacity
(output: power) restricts the torque, the output
torque decreases in inverse proportion to the speed.
The torque limiter condition switches depending
upon whether the speed is less than or exceeds the
rated speed.
4-90
You can use the "Operation monitor" of the "I/O check" of the KEYPAD panel to review the state of the
torque limiter, the power limiter and torque current limiter status
TL in the right figure shows the torque limiter is active. When the
torque limiter is not applied, the display turns to TL. You can also read １５００
the function code M14 "Operation status" through the link to confirm the ■ＦＷＤ□ＢＲＫ□ＩＬ
state. □ＲＥＶ■ＮＵＶ□ＡＣＣ
□ＥＸＴ■ＴＬ □ＤＥＣ
□ＩＮＴ□ＶＬ □ＡＬＭ
Chap. 4
F41 specifies torque limiter mode 2 in which the configuration of target quadrants can be selected.

Ｆ４１ＴＬＩＭＭＯＤＥ２
Data setting range: 0: Level 1 to all four quadrants

1: Level 1 to driving, Level 2 to braking
2: Level 1 to upper limit, Level 2 to lower limit
3: Level 1/Level 2 (switchable) to all four quadrants
The next section describes the actual limitations determined by the values set at F40 and F41. For level 1 and
level 2 of each limitation, see the descriptions of F42 and F43.
Under V/f control, setting F41 at "3" produces the same result as "0."
4-91
Description and application of the limiter mode 1
Limiter type Limiter description Application

Disable limiters Limits the torque by the maximum output current Use for the shortest
F40 = 0 (One-minute, ten-second ratings) in the entire acceleration/deceleration with the
or speed limiting range. inverter.
F40-CCL = ON Imax 2 − Im 2 − ( Ι T ×
Iron loss coefficient 2
) Note: Check the operation sequence to
τ (Torque %) = 100 × 100(%) avoid activating the protective function
ΙT
due to the inverter over load or the
motor overload. For braking, check if
(Ex.) In the case of HD-mode inverters of 30 kW,
disabled limiters do not cause any
200 V, with FRENIC-VG dedicated motor, the
problems when you select braking
maximum driving torque is 214%.
resistor capacity for the operation
Imax (Short-time rated current) = 238 (A) sequence if you use power regenerative
Im (Exciting current: P08) = 53.42 (A) devices (RHR or RHC series) or
It (Torque current: P09) = 108.18 (A) connect braking resistors.
Iron loss coefficient: P12 = 2.50%
108.18 × 2.50 2
2382 − 53.422 − ( )
τ (Torque %) = 100 × 100 (%)
108.18
≒214(%)
Enable torque limiter Limits the output of the speed control unit (ASR). Use for constant torque control
F41 = 1 Restrain the torque (N·m) in terms of the involving speed control and torque
percentage of the rated torque of a motor assumed limiting such as winding or tension
as 100%. control.
The maximum output current of the inverter may

limit the torque in the constant output range
depending on the set value for the limiter.
Enable power limiter Limits the torque by the power in the entire speed Use for limiting braking torque such as
F41 = 2 control range. Restrain the output capacity stopping by braking capacity (power).
(power: kW) in terms of the percentage of the Use for braking that uses the capacity
rated capacity of an inverter assumed as 100%. of a braking resistor.
The maximum output current of the inverter may Also use for stopping that uses only the
limit the torque in the constant torque range inverter loss (kW) when you do not use
depending on the set value for the limiter. an external braking resistor (DB).
Enable torque current Limits the torque in the constant torque range and Enables a limiter restricting below the
limiter limits the power in the constant output range. short-time rated torque.
F41 = 3 Restricts the torque current command in terms of Use when you limit the output torque
the percentage of the rated torque current for the motor temporarily.
assumed as 100%. Since this control limits the
torque current to a constant level, the control
reduces the magnetic-flux in the constant output
range, resulting in reducing torque accordingly.
See the following pages for detailed application examples.
4-92
(1) Disable limiters
Code Set value Description

F40 0 Disable limiters
F41 0, 1, 2, 3 Not effective
• Limits the torque by the maximum output current

(one-minute, three-second ratings) in the entire
speed limiting range. Use for the shortest
acceleration/deceleration with the inverter.
Chap. 4
• For driving, check the operation sequence to avoid
activating the protective function due to the
inverter overload or the motor overload.

• For braking, check if disabled limiters do not cause
any problems when you select braking resistor
capacity for the operation sequence if you use
power regenerative devices (RHC series) or
connect braking resistors.
(2) Enable torque limiter

(2)-1 Level 1 to all four quadrants

F40 1 Enable torque limiter
F41 0 Level 1 to all four quadrants
• The short-time rated torque limits the torque where

the Level 1 exceeds the short-time rated torque as
in the right figure.
• Though you can specify the Level 1 both in plus
and minus values, you do not have to use a minus
value, since it is interpreted as a plus value.
4-93
(2)-2 Level 1 to driving, Level 2 to braking
F41 1 Level 1 to driving, Level 2 to braking

the Level 1 or the Level 2 exceeds the short-time
rated torque as in the right figure.
• Though you can specify the Level 1 and the Level 2
both in plus and minus values, you do not have to use
a minus value, since it is interpreted as a plus value.
• You can use this specification to set the Level 1 as
the short-time rated torque for driving and to set the
Level 2 as the braking torque limiter due to the brake
capacity for braking.
• You cannot use the digital input [TL2/TL1] to switch
between the Level 1 and the Level 2.
(2)-3 Level 1 to upper limit, Level 2 to lower limit

F41 2 Level 1 to upper limit, Level 2 to lower limit
• Plus and minus values specify Level 1 and Level 2.

Make sure the setting polarity is correct. Usually
Level 1 is set to plus and Level 2 is set to minus.
rated torque as in the right figure.
• You cannot use the digital input [TL2/TL1] to
switch between the Level 1 and the Level 2.
• When you assign plus values both to the Level 1 and
the Level 2, the entire valid torque range stays in
plus (Level 1 > Level 2).
• When you assign minus values both to the Level 1
and the Level 2, the entire valid torque range stays in
minus (|Level 1| < |Level 2|. e.g. Level 1=−10 and
Level 2=−100).
• Use for applications such as winding control where
starting torque is required (right figure).
• In this setting, a torque more than the starting torque
is generated. The motor may accelerate up to the
hazard protective level (overspeed: OS, 120% of
the maximum speed) when the load is light. To
avoid this situation, use the Speed limiter (function
code: F76) as well.
If you set the Level 2 larger than Level 1, the output torque will be fixed to the Level 1. Unless you want this operation,
never use this setting. A motor may become out of control and dangerous.
Accidents or physical injuries may occur.
4-94
(2)-4 Level 1/Level 2 (switchable) to all four quadrants

F41 3 Level 1/Level 2 (switchable) to all four quadrants
• When you turn on with assigning the torque limiter (Level 1, Level 2 selection) [TL2/TL1] signal to a
digital input signal, you can switch between the Level 1 and the Level 2.
Short-time rated torque
Second quadrant: Output torque First quadrant:
Chap. 4
Reverse/Braking Forward/Driving
Level 1

0 Rated speed Motor speed
Level 1
Third quadrant: Fourth quadrant:

Reverse/Driving Forward/Braking
• The short-time rated torque limits the torque where the Level 1 or the Level 2 exceeds the short-time rated
torque.
• Though you can specify the Level 1 and the Level 2 both in plus and minus values, you do not have to use a
minus value, since it is interpreted as a plus value.
(3) Enable power limiter

F40 2 Enable power limiter
• Though this setting is possible, there is no such an application.

• The short-time rated torque limits the torque where Short-time rated torque
Output torque
rated torque as in the right figure. Second quadrant: First quadrant:
a minus value, since it is interpreted as a plus value. Level 1
• If you set the Level 1 as the short-time rated torque Level 2 Rated speed Motor speed
for driving and set a capacity corresponding to the 0 Level 2

inverter loss for braking, you can use the inverter Level 1
loss to enable the shortest stop without an external
braking resistor.
• Use this setting for an application such as applying Reverse/Driving Forward/Braking
brake with the capacity of a braking resistor.
4-95


F40 2 Torque limiter enabled
(4) Enable torque current limiter


F40 3 Enable torque current limiter
• Unless you set the Level 1 over the short-time rated

torque, the short-time rated torque does not limit the
torque.
• When protective actions (inverter overload 0lu or
motor overload 0l1, 0l2, 0l3 ) occur frequently,
you can lower the setting level to avoid this
phenomenon.
• Though you can specify the Level 1 both in plus and
minus values, you do not have to use a minus value,
since it is interpreted as a plus value.

• Unless you set the Level 1 and Level 2 over the

short-time rated torque, the short-time rated torque
does not limit the torque.
a minus value, since it is interpreted as a plus value.
• You can use this specification to set the Level 1 as
the short-time rated torque for driving and to set the
Level 2 as the braking torque limiter due to the brake
capacity for braking.
• You cannot use the digital input [TL2/TL1] to switch
between the Level 1 and the Level 2.
4-96

Chap. 4

• When you turn on with assigning the torque limiter [TL2/TL1] (Level 1, Level 2 selection) to a digital input
signal, you can switch between the Level 1 and the Level 2.
Short-time rated torque Short-time rated torque
Output torque Output torque

Second quadrant: First quadrant: Second quadrant: First quadrant:
Reverse/Braking Forward/Driving Reverse/Braking Forward/Driving
Level 1
Level 2
0 Rated speed 0 Rated speed Motor speed

Motor speed
Level 2
Level 1
Third quadrant: Fourth quadrant: Third quadrant: Fourth quadrant:

Reverse/Driving Forward/Braking Reverse/Driving Forward/Braking
• Unless you set the Level 1 and Level 2 over the short-time rated torque, the short-time rated torque does not
limit the torque.
• When protective actions (inverter overload 0lu or motor overload 0l1, 0l2, 0l3 ) occur frequently,
you can lower the setting level to avoid this phenomenon. Though you can specify the Level 1 and Level 2
with both in plus and minus values, you do not have to use a minus value, since it is interpreted as a plus
value.
4-97
F42 Torque Limiter Level 1 Source
F43 Torque Limiter Level 2 Source
Selects a mean that sets the torque limiter. These means are the function code, the analog input, the digital
input card (DIA, DIB), the link (RS-485, T-Link, SX, field bus) and the PID output (PIDOUT)
When this function is activated (the torque limiter takes effect), the acceleration and the deceleration become
longer than the set values.
Ｆ４２Ｔ－ＬＩＭ－ＬＶＬ１
Ｆ４３Ｔ－ＬＩＭ－ＬＶＬ２
- Level 1 - Level 2
Selects a mean that sets the Level 1 Selects a mean that sets the Level 2
Data setting range: 0 (Function code F44) Data setting range: 0 (Function code F45)
1 (Ai [TL-REF1]) 1 (Ai [TL-REF2])
2 (DIA card) 2 (DIA card)
3 (DIB card) 3 (DIB card)
4 (Communications link) 4 (Communications link)
5 (PID output) 5 (PID output)
< Setting example >

(1) Preparation
• Set 1, 2, or 3 to the function code F40 to enable the limiter.
• Use the function code F41 to set how to use the limiter Level 1 and Level 2.
• Use the function code F42 and F43 to assign inputs to the Level 1 and Level 2. If you want to set only the
Level 1, use F42 only. Go to one of the steps from the following (2) to (6) according to the setting thus far.
(2) When using the function code
• Set 0 to both of the function code F42 and F43.
• Set a data for the Level 1 to F44 and that for the Level 2 to F45.
(3) When using the analog input
• Set 1 to both of the function code F42 and F43.
• Use E49 to E52 to select which analog input terminals among Ai1 to 4 (Ai3 and Ai4 are optional AIO) are
used. Here we assume that Ai1 and Ai2 are assigned to the Level 1 and the Level 2 respectively.
• Connect the wires to the Ai1 and Ai2. An input of 10V corresponds to 150% (torque, power and torque
current).
• See the "I/O check" screen of the KEYPAD panel to check if the inverter correctly recognizes the input
while you are varying the voltage input from 0 to ±10V.
• See the description of the function codes E53 to E68 for voltage input setting (offset, dead zone, gain, bias,
filter, and increment/decrement limiter).
4-98
(4) When using the DIA or the DIB card

• Set the hardware switch on the digital input card either to DIA or DIB.
• Set the function code F42 and F43 to 2 or 3 to use the DIA or the DIB respectively.
• You can assign the DIA (F42=2) to the Level 1 and the DIB (F43=3) to the Level 2 when you use two
digital input cards and set one to DIA and the other to DIB.
• Connect the wires for the DIA and DIB cards. See the DI option section or the instruction manual supplied
with the product for more details.
• See the "I/O check" screen of the KEYPAD panel to check if the inverter correctly recognizes the digital
input.
Chap. 4
(5) When using the communications link
• Set the function codes F42 and F42 to 4.
• Determine which link to be used. Refer the individual sections of the function description to study the detail

of the links (RS-485, T-Link, SX, field bus).
• Set 1 or 3 to the function code H30 to enable the command data through the link. Note that setting 3 disables
the operation through the terminal block and the KEYPAD panel.
• Write data from a master device (such as PC or PLC) to S10 (Limiter level 1) and S11 (Limiter level 2). The
writing is complete when the normal response is sent back. You cannot confirm the writing on the inverter
side. Since writing to S area (command data) is performed on the RAM (volatile memory) and written data
disappear when your turn the inverter off, you should write necessary data every time when you turns on the
inverter.
(6) When using the PID output
• Set 5 to the function code F42. Also set 5 to F43 to assign the PID output. Usually set the PID output to the
upper limit and use the function code to set the lower limit.
• See the PID control block diagram (Section 4.1.9) or the PID description section to wire the system.
• You can display the PID output on the LED monitor of the KEYPAD panel.
F44 Torque Limiter Level 1
F45 Torque Limiter Level 2
Sets the torque limiter values (Level 1 and Level 2)
Ｆ４４Ｔ－ＬＩＭ－ＳＥＴ１
Ｆ４５Ｔ－ＬＩＭ－ＳＥＴ２
Data setting range: -300 to 300 (%)
4-99
F46 Mechanical Loss Compensation
Use to compensate the amount of the mechanical loss of a load.
Ｆ４６Ｔ－ＭＥＣ－ＬＯＳ
Data setting range: -300.00 to 300.00 (%)
F47 Torque Bias T1
F48 Torque Bias T2
F49 Torque Bias T3
You can add these setting values to the torque command

values. The addition is conducted on a stage before the
Torque bias command 1/2

torque limiter. You can use the function selection Di,
Torque bias command

the torque bias command 1 [TB1] and the torque bias
Ai torque bias hold
command 2 [TB2] to switch among three torque biases
(T1, T2, T3).
[TB-REF]
[H-TB]
[TB1]
[TB2]
Ｆ４７Ｔ－ＢＩＡＳ１
Ｆ４８Ｔ－ＢＩＡＳ２
Ｆ４９Ｔ－ＢＩＡＳ３
Data setting range: -300.00 to 300.00 (%) Ai F47 Torque bias T1

Torque
bias hold
F48 Torque bias T2
F49 Torque bias T3
0%
+ -1
+ F46
Rotation Mechanical loss
direction compensation
F50 Torque bias
startup timer
Torque
Speed + +
limiter
regulator
function
F50 Torque Bias Startup Timer
Sets the time to increase the torque by 300%.

If there is a shock at the start of operation with a torque bias added, adjust this timer.
Ｆ５０Ｔ－ＢＩＡＳ－ＴＩＭ
4-100
F51 Torque Command Monitor (Polarity)
Sets the polarity for data display related to torque. (AO monitor, KEYPAD panel LED monitor, KEYPAD
panel LCD monitor)
Ｆ５１Ｔ－ＲＥＦ－ＭＮＴＲ
Data setting range: 0 (Torque polarity)

1 (+ for driving, − for braking)
Chap. 4
The following table shows data related with torque. These values are displayed or transmitted with sign. Judge
the meaning of signs from the F51 set value.
Display and output Setting Related data

3 Torque current command value
KEYPAD panel LED monitor 4 Torque command value
5 Calculated torque value
Operation status
Torque command value
KEYPAD panel LCD monitor monitor
Alarm information Torque command value on alarm
Torque current command value (torque ammeter,
6
two-way deflection)
Analog output (AO1, 2, 3)
Torque command value (torque meter, two-way
8
deflection)
M02 Torque command value
M03 Torque current command value
M07 Calculated torque value
M08 Calculated torque current value
Function codes M (monitor codes)
M28 Torque command value on alarm
M29 Torque current command value on alarm
M33 Calculated torque value on alarm
M34 Calculated torque current value on alarm
Output torque
Second quadrant: First quadrant:
0
Motor speed

F51 = 0 (Torque polarity) F51 = 1 (+for driving, −for braking)
4-101
F52 LED Monitor (Display coefficient A)
F53 LED Monitor (Display coefficient B)
Use these coefficients as conversion coefficient to determine the display values (process amount) of the load
speed/line speed, the reference/feedback value of the PID regulator on the KEYPAD panel LED.
Data setting range: Display coefficient A: −999.00 to +999.00
Display coefficient B: −999.00 to +999.00
Load speed, line speed

Use the Display coefficient A of F52
Displayed value=Motor speed × (0.01 to 200.00)
The effective display range is 0.01 to 200.00 while the setting range is ±999.00. The minimum value 0.01 or
the maximum value 200.00 replaces a value out of the display range. Foe example, you should specify as
F52=0.02 when the motor speed is 1500 (r/min) and the line speed is 30 (m/min).
Reference and feedback values for the PID regulator

Use F52 Display coefficient A to set the maximum value for display data and use F53 Display coefficient B to
set the minimum value for display data.
Displayed value = (Reference or feedback value) ×
(Display coefficient A−B) + B
Ｆ５２ＣＯＥＦＡ
Ｆ５３ＣＯＥＦＢ
F54 LED Monitor (Display filter)
You do not have to display an instant value for some continuously changing data on the LED monitor of the
KEYPAD panel. You can apply a filter for those data to prevent the flicker due to the change of the value.
Specify the time constant of the primary filter.

Ｆ５４ＤＩＳＰＬＡＹＦＬ
4-102
F55 LED Monitor (Item selection)
F55 specifies the running status item (listed below) to be monitored and displayed on the LED monitor.
Ｆ５５ＬＥＤＭＮＴＲ
Data for F55 Function Unit Description

0 Detected speed 1 (r/min) Change display with F56 when motor is stopping
Chap. 4
1 Speed command 4 (r/min) Speed command 4 of ASR input
2 Output frequency (Hz) Slip included
3 Torque current command value (%)

4 Reference torque (%)
5 Calculated torque (%)
6 Input power (kW, HP) Switchable between kW and HP with F60.
7 Output current (A)
8 Output voltage (V)
9 DC link bus voltage (V)
10 Magnetic-flux command value (%)
11 Calculated magnetic-flux value (%)
12 Motor temperature (°C) Displays --- when NTC thermistor is not installed
13 Load shaft speed (r/min) Use F56 to change display when motor is stopping
14 Line speed (m/min)
15 Ai adjustment value (12) (%)
16 Ai adjustment value (Ai1) (%)
17 Ai adjustment value (Ai2) (%)
18 Ai adjustment value (Ai3) (%) Displayed when an option is used
19 Ai adjustment value (Ai4) (%) Displayed when an option is used
20 PID command value (%) Displayed in the PID mode
21 PID feedback value (%)
22 PID output value (%)
23 Option monitor 1 (HEX) Displayed when an option is used
(HEX: Hexadecimal data)
24 Option monitor 2 (HEX)
25 Option monitor 3 (DEC) Displayed when an option is used
(DEC: Decimal data)
26 Option monitor 4 (DEC)
Positive data.
27 Option monitor 5 (DEC) Displayed when an option is used
(DEC: Decimal data)
28 Option monitor 6 (DEC)
Positive and negative data.
30 Load factor (%)
31 Input power F60 = 0 (kW)
F61 = 1 (HP)
32 Input watt-hour (kWh) Input watt-hour x 100 (kWh)
• Values 20 to 22 display when H20 (PID Control, Mode selection) is set at "1" (Active), "2" (Inverse action
1) or "3" (Inverse action 2), respectively.
• Values 18, 19, 23 to 28 display when specific control options are mounted. See the corresponding option
section in Chapter 6 for more details.
4-103
F56 LED Monitor (Display when stopped)
F56 switches the F55 data display between the detected data and reference data when the motor is stopped
(No inverter output, STOP state).
Ｆ５６ＬＥＤＭＮＴＲ２
Data setting range: 0 (Display reference data)

1 (Display detected data (actual data))
F56 takes effect when F55 = 0 (Detected speed 1), = 13 (Load shaft speed), or = 14 (Line speed).
F57 LCD Monitor (Item selection)
F57 selects the display contents of the LCD monitor in the Running mode.
Ｆ５７ＬＣＤＭＮＴＲ
Data setting range: 0 (Running status, rotation direction, and date & time or operation guide)
1 (Bar graphs for motor speed, output current, and torque command value)
When F57 = 0
In running At a stop
１５００１５００
RUN ＦＷＤ STOP
ＰＲＧÆＰＲＧＭＥＮＵＰＲＧÆＰＲＧＭＥＮＵ
Ｆ／ＤÆＬＥＤＳＨＩＦＴＦ／ＤÆＬＥＤＳＨＩＦＴ
When F57 = 1
１５００
ｒ
Ａ
％
ＳＰＤ／Ｉｏｕｔ／ＴＲＱ
Full scale values for bar graphs

Display item Full scale value
Motor speed Maximum speed (F03, A06, and A106)
Output current Motor rated current × 200%
Torque command value Rated torque × 200%
Note: The scale is not adjustable.
4-104
F58 LCD Monitor (Language selection)
F58 selects a language to be displayed on the LCD monitor.
Ｆ５８ＬＡＮＧＵＡＧＥ
Data for F58 Displayed language Data for F58 Displayed language
0 Japanese 4 Spanish (Available soon)
Chap. 4
1 English 5 Italian (Available soon)
2 German (Available soon) 6 Chinese
3 French (Available soon) 7 Korean

Note 1: The language in the LCD screens shown in this manual is English.
Note 2: L codes are displayed in Japanese, English or Chinese, P, A and o codes in Japanese or English, and
U codes in English only.
Note 3: Even if Korean is selected, the function code names are shown in English.
Note 4: When F58 = 2 to 5, the LCD screens are shown in English.
F59 LCD Monitor (Contrast control)
F59 controls the contrast of the LCD monitor. Increasing the data value increases the contrast and decreasing
it decreases the contrast.
Ｆ５９ＣＯＮＴＲＡＳＴ
Data for F59 0, 1, 2 ………… 8, 9, 10

Screen Light Dark
F60 Output Unit (HP/kW)
F60 switches the display unit of the inverter output (input power) shown on the LED monitor and LCD
monitor and the display unit of M1 motor selection (P02) between kW and HP.
Ｆ６０ｋＷ／ＨＰ
Data setting range: 0 (kW)

1 (HP)
4-105
F61 ASR1 (P-gain)
F62 ASR1 (Integral constant)
F61 and F62 specifies the P-gain and integral constant of the ASR1.
Ｆ６１ＡＳＲ１－Ｐ
Ｆ６２ＡＳＲ１－Ｉ
Data setting range: F61 = 0.1 to 500.0 (times)

F62 = 0.000 to 10.000 (s) (Setting 0.000 disables the integral constant.)
P gain
Adjust according to the mechanical inertia (inertia and mechanical constant) connected to the motor shaft.
The factory default value 10.0 corresponds to the inertia of a single FRENIC-VG motor. The following table
provides a guideline for setting. If you drive a machine whose inertia is larger than that of the FRENIC-VG
motor when converted into a motor shaft inertia, set a value larger than 10.0. See Chapter 2 "Specifications"
for the inertia data of the standard motors.
Inertia Single VG standard motor to Medium to Large

P gain 10.0 to Medium to Large
P gain = 1.0 is defined such that the torque command is 100% (corresponding to the maximum speed setting)
when the speed deviation (speed command − observed speed) is 100%.
If you set a too large value to gain compared with the inertia, though you can get faster control response, the motor
may present an overshoot or a hunting. Also the motor or the machine may generate oscillation due to mechanical
resonance or over-amplified noise.
If you set a too small value to gain compared with the inertia, the control response slows down and it may take time to
settle down the speed fluctuation at low speed.
Constant of integration
Sets the constant of integration of the Automatic Speed Regulator (ASR). You can specify a value in the range
from 0.000 to 10.000 s to set the speed deviation (speed command-observed speed) at steady state to zero.
Setting 0.000 s disables the integration (P control only). The integration means to sum the deviation at a
specified interval. A smaller interval means a smaller summation interval that presents faster response. On the
other hand, larger interval extends summation interval to reduce the effect on the ASR. Set a small value to
reach the speed reference faster while allowing overshoots.
Integration action is a delay element. The constant of integration corresponds to the gain of a delay element. Increasing
the response of the integration action makes the delay element larger, destabilizing the control system including
motors and machines. The instability presents overshoots and oscillations. Thus, one measure to restrain the
mechanical resonance such as abnormal mechanical noises from motors and gears is to increase the constant of
integration.
However, if you do not want a slower response, the machine side may need measures such as reviewing machines
presenting mechanical resonance. You can also use F66 "ASR output filter".
4-106
F63 ASR1 (Feedforward gain)
F63 specifies the feedforward gain for a feedforward control that adds torque determined by the change of the
speed command to the torque command directly.
The PI control by the ASR is a feedback control adjusting the speed against the command according to its
control result (Actual speed). This control can adjust deviations due to what are not measurable such as
unexpected disturbances and uncertain characteristics of control subjects. However, known changes in
command value are followed after they appear in the deviation (Speed command - Actual speed). Since you
can obtain a control value (torque command) for a known factor, you can expect a faster control by adding it
to the torque command directly. This function is provided for this purpose.
Chap. 4
Ｆ６３ＡＳＲ１－ＦＦ

It is effective when the inertia is known. The differences in follow-up speed against the command value
between the feedforward and non-feedforward controls are conspicuous as shown in the figures below. Note
that it is necessary to balance the PI constants of the feedback control and this setting to obtain the maximum
effect.
FF control disabled (PI feedback control only) FF control enabled (PI feedback control also enabled)
Though increasing the P gain of the ASR realizes the effect described above, increased gain also increases
response resulting in negative effects (such as mechanical resonance or vibration).
4-107
F64 ASR1 (Input filter)
F64 specifies the time constant for the first-order lag filter applied to a reference speed. Usually do not change
the factory default.
Use this filter when you cannot stabilize the analog speed setting voltage at control terminal [12] after you
failed to eliminate the causes. If noise is the case, first try measures in hardware such as separating control
wiring, grounding, or connecting a capacitor to the terminal [12] and [11] in parallel before you use F64 as a
software measure.
Ｆ６４ＡＳＲ１－ＩＮ
F65 ASR1 (Detection filter)
F65 specifies the time constant for the first-order lag filter applied to the detected speed. Usually do not
change the factory default. In particular, it is not necessary to change the factory default when a pulse
generator (PG) is used for speed detection. Use an oscilloscope to check the waveform if the output of the PG
is unstable.
Use this filter when you use the line speed detection [LINE-N] signal for speed detection and the ripple
presents on the signal. Note that a large setting will reduce the response of the speed control loop. A too large
setting may destabilize the control.
Ｆ６５ＡＳＲ１－ＤＥＴ
4-108
F66 ASR1 (Output filter)
F66 specifies the time constant for the first-order lag filter applied to the torque command. Use this filter for a
mechanical resonance after you failed to adjust the ASR gain or the constant of integration to eliminate it.
Ｆ６６ＡＳＲ１－ＯＵＴ

Check the cause and the oscillation frequency of a mechanical resonance such as a vibration by gear backrush
Chap. 4
or a rope vibration in a vertical transfer. You should take measures in the inverter side after you failed to
investigate and fix machine devices to eliminate the resonance.
Measures to eliminate mechanical resonance

1) Reduce response speed
• Reduce the ASR P gain to reduce the amplitude of the resonance.
• Increase the ASR I constant to shift the resonance point to lower frequency to restrain the high frequency
resonance.
2) Use ASR output filter
• Though you can reduce the resonance amplitude, excessive filter elements may cause instability.
3) Use oscillation suppressing observer
• See H46 "Observer type selection" for more details.
F67 S-curve Acceleration 1 (Start)
F68 S-curve Acceleration 1 (End)
F69 S-curve Deceleration 1 (Start)
F70 S-curve Deceleration 1 (End)
These function codes arrange the speed reference value

F68: S-curve
to form a curve at the start and the end of acceleration acceleration 1 (end)
and deceleration. You can realize smooth acceleration F69: S-curve
and deceleration actions without shocks. deceleration 1 (start)
Motor F70: S-curve
speed deceleration 1 (end)
Ｆ６７Ｓ－ＡＣＣ－ＳＴ１ 0 Time
F67: S-curve
acceleration 1 (start)
Ｆ６８Ｓ－ＡＣＣ－ＡＲ１
t1 (s) t2 (s)
Ｆ６９Ｓ－ＤＥＣ－ＳＴ１
Ｆ７０Ｓ－ＤＥＣ－ＡＲ１
Data setting range: 0 to 50 (%)

Setting the S-curve extends acceleration time 1 (F07) and deceleration time 1 (F08) according to the following
expressions.
⎛ S - curve acceleration start side (%) S - curve acceleration end side (%) ⎞
t1 (s) = Acceleration time (s) × ⎜⎜1 + + ⎟⎟ (s)
⎝ 100 (%) 100 (%) ⎠
⎛ S - curve deceleration start side (%) S - curve deceleration end side (%) ⎞
t2 (s) = Deceleration time (s) × ⎜⎜1 + + ⎟⎟ (s)
⎝ 100 (%) 100 (%) ⎠
4-109
F72 Pre-excitation Mode
F72 specifies when pre-excitation should start. Pre-excitation flows exciting current through a motor
beforehand in order to make the response quicker at the start of motor driving.
Ｆ７２ＰＲＥＥＸＳＥＬ
Data setting range: 0

Cause pre-excitation at the time of a startup. Pre-excitation continues for the duration
specified by F74
1
Cause pre-excitation at the time of a startup and stop.
At the time of a startup, pre-excitation continues for the duration specified by F74 or until
the magnetic flux command reaches the detection level specified by E48, whichever is
earlier.
After a stop, pre-excitation continues until the duration specified by F74 elapses. It is
effective for starting the motor immediately following a stop (when pre-excitation is in
progress), e.g., for inching (intermittent running).
When F72 = 0 When F72 = 1
When F72 = 0, set the pre-excitation duration (F74) so that the motor starts rotating after the magnetic flux has
been saturated (100%), as shown in the above graph.
Note: The motor may rotate during pre-excitation, so be sure to use a mechanical brake to avoid unexpected
rotation.
Even if F72 = 1, under vector control without speed sensor or under torque control, pre-excitation after a
motor stop does not occur. When H09 ≠ 0 (Auto search is enabled) under vector control without speed sensor,
pre-excitation at a startup caused when H72 = 0 applies.
Whether a motor is during pre-excitation or in normal operation can be
checked with the running status page in Menu #4 "I/O CHECK." １５００
EXT indicates "during pre-excitation" and EXT, "in normal ■ＦＷＤ□ＢＲＫ□ＩＬ
operation." □ＲＥＶ■ＮＵＶ□ＡＣＣ
■ＥＸＴ□ＴＬ □ＤＥＣ
4-110
F73 Magnetic Flux Level at Light Load
You can specify a small value to reduce the

electromagnetic noise of a motor at light load. The Magnetic-flux command
magnetic-flux command decreases according to the 100%
torque current command to reduce the electromagnetic
noise.
Setting of F73
Torque current
Ｆ７３ＭＩＮＦＬＵＸ 0 command
50%
Chap. 4
Note: F73 is valid only under vector control with speed sensor.
You can view the level (%) of the magnetic-flux command on the "Operation monitor" of the KEYPAD

panel.
See "FLX*" (magnetic-flux command) on the operation monitor screen "Operation monitor".
The value is usually 100% and decreased in the low output range.
This function reduces the magnetic-flux according to the setting as shown
in the graph. The graph shows that the magnetic-flux decreases to 60%
１５００
ＴＭＰ＝３０℃
Under vector control without speed sensor, the magnetic flux level is Ｉｏｕｔ＝１４．３Ａ
Ｖｏｕｔ＝１８８Ｖ
fixed at 100%. ＦＬＸ＊＝６０％
F74 Pre-excitation (Duration)
F74 specifies the pre-excitation duration.
Ｆ７４ＰＲＥＥＸｔ
F75 Pre-excitation (Initial level)
Sets the initial level of the pre-excitation.

Speed
Motor speed
Ｆ７５ＦＬＵＸＦＯＲＣＥ

Time
When you want to reduce the pre-excitation time 0
(function code F74) to establish the magnetic-flux Magnetic-flux/
exciting current
quickly, set the exciting current high. F75: Pre-excitation (Initial level)
Exciting current
The transient response to the exciting current command 100%
until the magnetic-flux is established 100% depends on Magnetic-flux
the secondary time constant of a motor (exciting Time
inductance/resistor). This function applies more than 0
100% of the exciting current to establish the
magnetic-flux faster. The initial level ends when the FWD
magnetic-flux is established 100%, and the exciting
current returns 100%. F74: Pre-excitation (Duration)
Under vector control without speed sensor and when H09 = 1 or 2 (Auto search is enabled), the data setting
range is limited to 200 to 400%. Even if F75 is set at 100%, 200% applies.
If a trip occurs in auto search with 60 Hz or higher (1800 r/min in terms of 4-pole motor), increasing the F75
setting may improve the problem.
4-111
F76 Speed Limiter (Mode)
F77 Speed Limiter (Level 1)
F78 Speed Limiter (Level 2)
The speed control and the torque control (torque control, torque current control) differs in the usage of these
function codes.
Usage for speed control

Since the inverter usually (factory setting) controls speed (1) For speed control
(internal ASR enabled, motor controlled by speed
command), and the speed limiter is applied to the speed
command (See "(1) Speed control") You can use the
function code H41 "Torque command selection" and H42
"Torque current command selection" to select a
specification other than the "internal ASR enabled" to
operate the inverter to control the torque. This is the case, (2) For torque control
the speed control is applied to the motor speed (speed
detection/speed estimation). Since the inverter does not
control the speed, the control adds negative torque bias to
the torque command when the motor accelerates beyond
the limiter value. You can use the [I2] input as a bias for
the speed limiter instead of the speed command (see "(2)
Torque control").
You can set ON to the digital input signal [N-LIM] to
disable (cancel) the speed limiter function.
(1) Speed control

You can set the speed limit to the speed command value.
Ｆ７６Ｎ－ＬＩＭ－ＭＯＤＥ
- Method selection
Data setting range: 0 (Limit forward (Level 1) and reverse (Level 2) individually.)
1 (Limit forward and reverse in Level 1.)
2 (Limit upper limit by Level 1 and the lower limit by Level 2.)
3 (Reserved. (Equivalent to "0").
Ｆ７７Ｎ－ＬＩＭ－ＬＶＬ１
Ｆ７８Ｎ－ＬＩＭ－ＬＶＬ２
- Level 1, 2
4-112
When F76 = 0, the upper and lower limit levels during FWD and REV operations switch between Levels 1
and 2.
Motor speed
(after limiter applied)
｜Limiter Level 1｜
Motor speed
Chap. 4
-｜Limiter Level 2｜

When F76 = 0, FWD = ON
When F76 = 1 or 2, the speed limiter acts as shown below.

Motor speed
Limiter Level 1
Limiter Level 2
0
Motor speed
When F76 = 2
Specify such that the limiter Level 1 > the limiter Level 2 for F76 = 2 (Upper limit by the Level 1 and the lower limit
by the Level 2). If you specify as the limiter Level 1 < the limiter Level 2, the speed reference is fixed to the limiter
Level 2. In this state, turning off the operation does reduce the speed reference and the operation continues.
You may be injured.
< Example of a setting inhibiting reverse rotation >

When you want to inhibit reverse rotation (forward rotation directed by reverse rotation command) while
forward rotation command is directed, specify as F76 = 0, the limiter level 1 = 100.0% and the limiter level 2
= 0.0%.
4-113
(2) Torque control (torque command, torque current command)
Ｆ７６Ｎ－ＬＩＭ－ＭＯＤＥ
- Method selection
Data setting range: 0 (Limit forward and reverse individually. FWD and REV switch the levels.
1 (Level 1 limits forward and reverse.)
2 (Invalid (Even if specified, the setting is assumed to be "0."))
3 (Individual limiters for forward and reverse rotation. [12] input is added as a variable
part of limiters.)
Ｆ７７Ｎ－ＬＩＭ－ＬＶＬ１
Ｆ７８Ｎ－ＬＩＭ－ＬＶＬ２
- Level 1, 2
When F76 = 0, the upper and lower limit levels during FWD and REV operations switch between Levels 1
and 2.
Motor speed
Limiter Level 1
Motor speed
- Limiter Level 2
When F76 = 0, FWD = ON
When F76 = 1, the speed limiter acts as shown below.
4-114
When F76 = 3, input to [12] acts as a bias as shown below.

Motor speed
｜Limiter Level 1｜
Motor speed
0
Chap. 4
-｜Limiter Level 2｜+ [12]

When F76 = 3 and [12] < 0
Input voltage for [12] is ± 10V at the maximum motor speed ( ± 100% ).
Use C60 (ASR4-P) to adjust the speed stability under speed limit.
When the magnetic flux decreasing function (F73) is used, the factory default of the ASR4 P-gain (C60 = 10) causes
the response of the speed limiter to slower so that the speed may not be controlled. In particular, setting F73 data to an
extremely small value (10% or 20%) may cause large speed hunting. If it happens, increase the C60 setting (ASR4
P-gain) or increase the F73 setting to stabilize the speed.
The torque limit in accordance with the line speed (input at [12]) can be added if F76 is "3."
To perform mechanically coupled operation with torque command handover (see the figure below), enter a
slightly larger value (+5%) than that specified on the master as a speed limit level for the inverter (slave)
driven under torque control.
4-115
F79 Motor Selection (M1, M2, M3)
The FRENIC-VG can hold three sets of motor parameters (M1, M2 and M3) which can be selected by F79 or
X terminal functions (M-CH2 and M-CH3)
Ｆ７９Ｍ１－３ＳＥＬＥＣＴ
Data setting range: 0 (Select M1. Note that the terminal input has higher priority as shown below.)
When M-CH2 and M-CH3 = (OFF, OFF) or (ON, ON), or no M-CH2 or M-CH3 has
been assigned, M1 is selected.
When M-CH2 and M-CH3) = (ON, OFF), M2 is selected.
When M-CH2 and M-CH3) = (OFF, ON), M3 is selected.
1 (Select M2.)
2 (Select M3.)
Merits and restrictions for selecting M1, M2, or M3
When M1 (1st motor) is selected When M2 (2nd motor) is selected When M3 (3rd motor) is selected
Control type Set by P01 Set by A01 Set by A101
Vector control for IM with Vector control for IM with Vector control for IM with
speed sensor speed sensor speed sensor
Vector control for IM without Vector control for IM without Vector control for IM
speed sensor speed sensor without speed sensor
Vector control for PMSM with Vector control for PMSM Vector control for PMSM
speed sensor with speed sensor with speed sensor
V/f control V/f control V/f control
Simulation mode
Motor parameters Function codes Function codes Function codes
F03 to F05, F10 to F12, A02 to A71, H48, H50, H52, A102 to A171, H125 to
P03 to P51, H47, H49, H51, H170 to H174 H127, H180 to H184
H112 to H118, H160 to H164, To be set manually. To be set manually.
o09 to o11
When a FRENIC-VG motor is
selected, the inverter
automatically set data to the
above function codes.
Protective functions Provided. Not provided. Not provided.
specific to motor When a FRENIC-VG motor is
parameters selected with P02 (P02 = 0 to
35, 38 to 50) or P-OTHER is
selected (P02 = 36), the
write-protect function
becomes activated.
You can use the "Effective sets of motors/parameters" on the "I/O check" screen of the KEYPAD panel to
check the currently selected motor set (M1, M2, M3).
If the motor set 2 is selected, M2 is indicated.
Answer back signals are put on the DO output [SW-M2] and [SW-M3] to
１５００
□ＰＡＲＡ１□Ｍ１□ＪＯＧ
indicate whether the motor switch among motor set (M1, M2, M3) is □ＰＡＲＡ２■Ｍ２
completed in the inverter. See E15 to E27 for more information. We ■ＰＡＲＡ３□Ｍ３
recommend to prepare a sequence to check the DO for the answer back □ＰＡＲＡ４
when you use the terminal input signals [MCH2] and [MCH3] to switch
motors.
It is recommended to activate overcurrent suppression function (H58 = 1)
when M3 is selected (V/f control).
4-116
F80 Switching between HD, MD and LD Drive Modes
F80 specifies whether to drive the inverter in the high duty (HD), medium duty (MD) or low duty (LD) mode.
Ｆ８０ＩｒＳＥＬＥＣＴ
Data setting range: 0, 2 (High Duty, overload current 150%-1 min, 200%-3 sec.)
1 (Low Duty, overload current 120%-1 min)
2 (Middle Duty, overload torque 150%-1 min)
Chap. 4
Overload current means to apply overload limiter by torque current (corresponding armature current of a DC
motor), and the torque decreases in proportion to the decrease of the magnetic-flux above the rated speed
(100%).

- Torque characteristics for HD mode Second quadrant:
Reverse/Braking Output torque
First quadrant:
Forward/Driving
150 One-minute rating:
Application 150% overload current
Use for general constant torque applications 100
Continuous rating:
including speed control with torque limit for winding 100% overload current
machines, wire drawing machines, and test machines 100% (Rating)

Motor speed
0
and control by direct torque command.

- Torque characteristics for LD/MD mode

Application
Use for applications that do not require overload
capability for a short period such as extruding
machines and centrifugal separators. Also suitable for
applications where the operation cycle is short and
torque is limited to 100% or less since the
root-mean-square current exceeds the rated current of
an inverter (Large press machines).
You can choose an inverter by one or two ranks lower
than the HD-mode inverter. Note that the maximum
carrier frequency is smaller than that in the HD mode.
See Chapter 2, Section 2.1 "Standard Specifications"
for more details
4-117
(Note) Replacing the HT-rating VG7 with the FRENIC-VG
The FRENIC-VG does not support the HT rating equivalent of the VG7. When replacing the HT-rating VG7,
use the FRENIC-VG with one capacity rank higher.
Note that the 200 V class series inverters of 7.5 to 22 kW and 400 V class series ones of 18.5 to 22 kW can be
replaced with the FRENIC-VG with the same capacity as long as the carrier frequency is 10 kHz or below.
Inverter capacity Carrier frequency Applied motor

Drive mode Overload rating
(kW) (kHz) (relative to the inverter capacity)
0.75 to 45 (200V)
2 to 7 to 15
3.7 to 55 (400V)
HD Same capacity Current
"Heavy duty load" 55 to 90 (200V) 150% 1 min
(F80 = 0) 2 to 7 to 10 200% 3 s
75 to 400 (400V)
500 to 630 (400V) 2 to 5 Same capacity
MD
Current
"Medium duty load" 90 to 400 (400V) 2 to 4 One rank higher capacity
150% 1 min
(F80 = 3)
LD
30 to 90 (200V) Current
"Low duty load" 2 to 10/6/4 One rank higher capacity
30 to 630 (400V) 120% 1 min
(F80 = 1)
If the LD or MD mode is selected for the inverter capacity not available to the mode, the inverter runs in the
HD mode.
F81 Offset for Speed Setting on Terminal [12]
F81 specifies an offset for analog speed input on terminal [12]. Use this setting for adjustment of out-of-offset
signals sent from external equipment.
Ｆ８１１２ＯＦＦＳＥＴ
Data setting range: -30000 to 30000 (r/min)
F82 Dead Zone for Speed Setting on Terminal [12]
F82 specifies the dead zone speed for analog speed input on terminal [12] to limit the ±speed setting value
within the range of ±F82 data to 0 r/min.
Ｆ８２１２ＢＬＩＮＤ
Data setting range: 0.0 to 150.0 (r/min)
4-118
F83 Filter for Speed Setting on Terminal [12]
F83 specifies a time constant determining the first order delay of the analog speed input on terminal [12].
Ｆ８３１２ＦＩＬＴＥＲ
Chap. 4
F84 Display Coefficient for Input Watt-hour Data
F84 specifies a display coefficient for displaying the input watt-hour data (M116).

Input watt-hour data (M116) = F84 x M115 (Input watt-hour) (Unit: 100 kWh)
Ｆ８４ＰＷＲＣＯＥＦ
Data setting range: 0.000 to 9999

(Specification of "0.000" clears the input watt-hour data and stops counting.)
Setting the F84 data to 1/1000 of the electric rate per 100 kWh enables the total electricity price (in units of
¥1,000) to be displayed. If the electric rate is ¥18 per kWh, for example, setting the F84 data to "1.8" displays
18.00 (thousand yen) if the input watt-hour data is 10.00 (100 kWh).
F85 Display Filter for Calculated Torque
F85 specifies a display filter for outputting the calculated torque on the LED and LCD monitors.
Ｆ８５ＴＲＱＦＩＬＴＥＲ
4-119
4.3.2 E codes (Extension Terminal Functions)
E01 to E13 X Terminal Function
E01 to E13 assign commands (listed below) to general-purpose, programming digital input terminals, [X1] to
[X9] and [X11] to [X14].
([X11] to [X14] are available when the optional OPC-VG1-DIOA is mounted or a communications option
(e.g., RS-485, T-Link, SX-bus, and fieldbus) is mounted.)
Before using these terminal commands, see Chapter 4, Section 4.1 "Control Block Diagrams" and check the
switching positions of the control contacts.
The FRENIC-VG runs under four drive controls: "Vector control for IM with speed sensor," "Vector control
for IM without speed sensor," "V/f control for IM," and "Vector control for PMSM with speed sensor." Some
terminal commands apply exclusively to the specific drive control, which is indicated in the "Drive control"
column in the function code tables given in Section 4.2.
Using digital input terminals

A total of 13 digital inputs are available--nine on terminals [X1] to [X9] as standard and four on terminal
[X11] to [X14] as option (when a DIOA option is mounted). Using the communications link (RS-485, T-Link,
SX-bus and fieldbus) enables access to those 13 digital inputs.
Configuration procedure
- Select a desired function (BX ("Coast to a stop") in this example).
- Assign BX to any one of terminal [X1] to [X9] and [X11] to [X14]. To assign it to terminal [X3], for
example, set "7" to Function code E03.
- Turn [X3] ON from external equipment to activate BX ("Coast to a stop"). Turn it OFF to deactivate BX.
- To check the ON/OFF status of [X3], use Menu #4 "I/O Checking"
(REM screen) on the keypad and check that the box of the X3 appears １５００
black () as shown at the right. ＲＥＭ □×２ □×６
■ＦＷＤ ■×３ □×７
- When accessing to the digital inputs via the communications link, see
□ＲＥＶ □×４ □×８
the COMM screen in Menu #4 "I/O Checking." □Ｘ１ □×５ □×９
Configuring contacts ("normal open" or "normal close")

Terminals [X1] to [X9] can be configured individually as a "normal open" or "normal close" contact with
Function code E14. For details refer to the description of E14.
4-120
Ｅ０１Ｘ１ＦＵＮＣ
｜
Ｅ１３Ｘ１４ＦＵＮＣ
Data setting range: 0 to 83
Function Function
Terminal commands assigned Symbol Terminal commands assigned Symbol
code data code data
0, 1, 2, 3 Select multistep speed (1 to 15 steps) SS1, SS2, 27 Synchronization operation command SYC
Chap. 4
SS4, SS8 (PG (PR) optional function)
4,5 Select ASR and ACC/DEC time RT1, RT2 28 Lock at zero speed LOCK
(4 steps)
6 Enable 3-wire operation HLD 29 Pre-excitation EXITE

7 Coast to a stop BX 30 Cancel speed limiter N-LIM
8 Reset alarm RST 31 Cancel H41 (Torque command) H41-CCL
9 Enable external alarm trip THR 32 Cancel H42 (Torque current command) H42-CCL
10 Ready for jogging JOG 33 Cancel H43 (Magnetic flux command) H43-CCL
11 Select speed command N2/N1 N2/N1 34 Cancel F40 (Torque limiter mode 1) F40-CCL
12 Select motor 2 M-CH2 35 Select torque limiter level 2/1 TL2/TL1
13 Select motor 3 M-CH3 36 Bypass ACC/DEC processor BPS
14 Enable DC braking DCBRK 37, 38 Select torque bias command TB1,TB2
15 Clear ACC/DEC to zero CLR 39 Select droop control DROOP
16 Switch creep speed under UP/DOWN CRP-N2/N1 40 Zero-hold Ai1 ZH-AI1
control
17 UP (Increase speed) UP 41 Zero-hold Ai2 ZH-AI2
18 DOWN (Decrease speed) DOWN 42 Zero-hold Ai3 (AIO optional function) ZH-AI3
19 Enable data change with keypad WE-KP 43 Zero-hold Ai4 (AIO optional function) ZH-AI4
20 Cancel PID control KP/PID 44 Reverse Ai1 polarity REV-AI1
21 Switch normal/inverse operation IVS 45 Reverse Ai2 polarity REV-AI2
22 Interlock (52-2) IL 46 Reverse Ai3 polarity (AIO optional REV-AI3
function)
23 Enable data change via WE-LK 47 Reverse Ai4 polarity (AIO optional REV-AI4
communications link function)
24 Enable communications link LE 48 Inverse PID output PID-INV
25 Universal DI U-DI 49 Cancel PG alarm PG-CCL
26 Enable auto search for idling motor STM 50 Cancel undervoltage alarm LU-CCL
speed at starting
4-121
Function Function
code data code data
51 Hold Ai torque bias H-TB 72 Toggle signal 1 TGL1
52 STOP1 STOP1 73 Toggle signal 2 TGL2
(Decelerate to stop with normal
deceleration time)
53 STOP2 STOP2 74 Cause external mock alarm FTB
(Decelerate to stop with deceleration
time 4)
54 STOP3 STOP3 75 Cancel NTC thermistor alarm NTC-CCL
(Decelerate to stop with maximum
braking torque, ignoring the
deceleration time setting)
55 Latch DIA data DIA 76 Cancel lifetime alarm signal LF-CCL
(DIA optional function)
56 Latch DIB data DIB 77 Request for reading in serial port PG SPG-AP
(DIB optional function) absolute position
(Available soon)
57 Cancel multiplex system MT-CCL 78 Switch PID feedback signals PID-1/2
58-67 Custom Di1-Di10 C-DI1 to 79 Select PID torque bias TB-PID
C-DI10
68 Select load adaptive parameters 2/1 AN-P2/1 80 Tune magnetic pole position MP-TUN
(Available soon) (Available soon)
69 Cancel PID components PID-CCL 81 External electrical conditions RD
(Available soon)
70 Enable PID FF component PID-FF 82 Startup conditions STRD
(Available soon)
71 Reset completion of speed limit NL-RST 83 Continue to run at the time of LK-D
calculation communications link error
(Available soon) (Available soon)
Function code data = 0, 1, 2, 3 Select multistep speed (1 to 15 steps) -- SS1, SS2, SS4, SS8
You can use external digital input signals to switch predetermined speeds specified by function codes from
C05 to C19 "Multistep speed". Assign data 00 to 03 to digital terminals to select a speed by combining those
terminal inputs.
Input signal combination to select specified data
3 2 1 0 Speed to be selected
SS8 SS4 SS2 SS1
OFF OFF OFF ON C05 Multistep speed 1, N-1
OFF OFF ON OFF C06 Multistep speed 2, N-2
OFF OFF ON ON C07 Multistep speed 3, N-3
OFF ON OFF OFF C08 Multistep speed 4, N-4
OFF ON OFF ON C09 Multistep speed 5, N-5 Related function codes
OFF ON ON OFF C10 Multistep speed 6, N-6 C05 to C19
OFF ON ON ON C11 Multistep speed 7, N-7
ON OFF OFF OFF C12 Multistep speed 8, N-8 Setting range
ON OFF OFF ON C13 Multistep speed 9, N-9 0 to 30000 r/min
ON OFF ON OFF C14 Multistep speed 10, N-10 or
ON OFF ON ON C15 Multistep speed 11, N-11 0.00 to 100.00%
ON ON OFF OFF C16 Multistep speed 12, N-12 or
0.0 to 999.9 m/min
ON ON OFF ON C17 Multistep speed 13, N-13
C18 Multistep speed 14, N-14/
ON ON ON OFF
Creep speed 1, CREP1
C19 Multistep speed 15, N-15/
ON ON ON ON
Creep speed 2, CREP2
4-122
Function code data = 4, 5 Select ASR and ACC/DEC time (4 steps) -- RT1, RT2
You can switch predetermined acceleration/deceleration times, ASR constants and S-curve
accelerations/decelerations specified by function codes through external digital input signals. Assign data 04
to 05 to digital terminals to select acceleration/deceleration times, ASR constants and S-curve
accelerations/decelerations.
Input signal combination to

select specified data Acceleration/deceleration times to be
05 04 selected
RT2 RT1
F07 Acceleration Time 1
Chap. 4
F08 Deceleration Time 1
F61 to F66 ASR1 constants
OFF OFF F67 S-curve Acceleration 1 (Start)
F68 S-curve Acceleration 1 (End)

F69 S-curve Deceleration 1 (Start)
F70 S-curve Deceleration 1 (End)
C40 to C45 ASR 2 constants
C46 Acceleration Time 2
OFF ON C47 Deceleration Time 2 Related function codes
C48 S-curve 2 (Start side) F07, 08,
C49 S-curve 2 (End side) F61 to F70
C50 to C55 ASR 3 constants C40 to C69
ON OFF C57 Deceleration Time 3
C58 S-curve 3 (Start side)
C59 S-curve 3 (End side)
C60 to C65 ASR 4 constants
ON ON C67 Deceleration Time 4
C68 S-curve 4 (Start side)
C69 S-curve 4 (End side)
Example: Four and five are assigned to the terminals [X2] and [X3].
Deceleration
Deceleration
Deceleration
Deceleration
Acceleration
Acceleration
Acceleration
Acceleration
time 1
time 1
time 2
time 2
time 3
time 3
time 4
time 4
* If you switch the acceleration/deceleration times, the ASR constants

and S-curve actions are switched simultaneously. You can see which
１５００
□ＰＡＲＡ１□Ｍ１□ＪＯＧ
set is currently selected from (1, 2, 3, 4) on the "I/O check" screen of the □ＰＡＲＡ２■Ｍ２
KEYPAD panel. When the data set 3 is selected, "PARA3" is ■ＰＡＲＡ３□Ｍ３
□ＰＡＲＡ４
indicated on the display. ∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥＳＨＩＦＴ８
4-123
Function code data = 6
Enable 3-wire operation -- HLD
Use for 3-wire operation. When HLD-CM is ON, the
FWD or the REV signal is self-held, and is canceled
when HLD-CM is OFF.
When you want use this HLD function, you should
assign a data 06 to a desired digital input terminal.
Function code data = 7 Coast to a stop-- BX

The inverter output is turned off and the motor enters
into the coast-to-stop state, when BX-CM is ON.
The signal does not cause an alarm output. Also, this
signal is not self-held.
When you want use this BX function, you should assign
data a 07 to a desired digital input terminal.
Function code data = 8 Reset alarm -- RST

Switching the RST-CM from OFF to ON cancels the alarm relay output and the alarm display and restart
operation while the protective function is active.
When you want use this RST function, you should assign a data 08 to a desired digital input terminal.
Function code data = 9 Enable external alarm trip -- THR

The factory setting for the trip command is an "NO terminal" (normally open).
When you use the trip command as an "NC terminal" (normally closed), follow the procedure described
below.
When THR-CM is ON, the operation is assumed as normal. When THR-CM is turned OFF, the inverter
output is turned off (motor is in the coast-to-stop state) and the alarm "OH2" is issued. You can use the trip
command for the overheat protection of an external resistor.
<Application and notes>
• The THR function is assigned to the X9 terminal in the factory setting (function code E09=9, THR). Use the
X9 as an external alarm as it is.
• Use the function code E14 "X function normally open/normally closed" to set the X9 terminal to an "NC
terminal". To set as an "NC terminal", move the 9th (X9 terminal) from the OP side to the CL side and
use the key to write.
• When you turn on the inverter while X9 THR-CM is open, the "0h2 " alarm is issued. This is a normal
state.
• Connect X9 THR and [CM] to the overheat detection contact of the braking resistor or the like.
• If you do not connect a braking resistor, short-circuit the THR-CM or move the 9th (X9 terminal) from
the CL side to the OP side again and use the key to write.
4-124
Function code data = 10 Ready for jogging -- JOG

Use this function for an inching action such as work adjustment. You can operate at the jogging speed
specified by the function C29 "Jogging speed" by turning on the signal between JOG and CM while the
operation command (FWD-CM or REV-CM) is ON. You can also use the KEYPAD panel to switch to the
jogging mode.
When you want to use this JOG function, you should assign a data 10 to a desired digital input terminal.
The function codes related to the jogging operation are C29 to C38. A dedicated speed control setting (such as
gain) is available.
The indicator stays at the JOG position on the LCD monitor of the KEYPAD panel during the jogging
Chap. 4
operation.
Function code data = 11 Select speed command -- N2/N1

Use an external digital input signal to switch the speed setting method predetermined with function F01
"speed setting N1" and C25 "speed setting N2."
If you do not specify, F01 is selected.
Input signal to select specified data

Speed setting method to be selected
11
OFF F01 Speed Command N1
ON C25 Speed Command N2
Function code data = 12, 13 Select motor 2, 3 -- M-CH2, M-CH3

You can use the external digital input signals to switch the predetermined motor parameters. You can use the
terminal to switch only when F79 "Motor selection (M1, 2, 3)" is set to 0. If F79=1, the selection is fixed to the
M2. If F79=2, the selection is fixed to the M3.
The switching result becomes effective when the operation command to the inverter is ON and the motor is in
the stop state.
Input signal combination to select

specified data
Motor to be selected Related codes
13 12
M-CH3 M-CH2
F03 to F05, F10 to F12, P01 to P51,
OFF OFF First motor H47, H49, H51, H112 to H118, H160
to H164, o09 to o11
A01 to A71, H48, H50, H52,
OFF ON Second motor
H170 to H174
A101 to A171, H125 to H127,
ON OFF Third motor
H180 to H184
F03 to F05, F10 to F12, P01 to P51,
ON ON First motor H47, H49, H51, H112 to H118,
H160 to H164, o09 to o11
Note: Both M-CH2 and M-CH3 are ON, the first motor is selected. See also the description of the function
code F79.
Note: When inverter is stopped, if motor switch 1/2 is changed during rotation of the connected motor (during
naturally coasting or coasting with a load), the analog speed detection output, digital speed detection signal or
the like may cause unpredictable operation.
4-125
Function code data = 14 Enable DC braking -- DCBRK
When the external digital input signal is ON and the operation command is turned OFF (when you press the
key during the KEYPAD panel operation, or the both [FWD] and [REV] terminals are OFF during the
external signal operation), the DC braking starts after the motor speed decreases to the predetermined rotation
specified by the function code F20 "DC brake (Starting speed)", and the braking continues while the input
signal is ON.
The longer period between F22 "DC brake (Braking time)" or the ON duration of the input signal DCBRK is
selected.
Note that turning on the operation command will resume the operation. See also the description of the
function codes F20 to 22.

Action to be selected
14
OFF DC braking active
ON DC braking inactive
Function code data = 15 Clear ACC/DEC to zero -- CLR

The external digital input signal clears the calculated speed of the acceleration/deceleration calculation unit.
During the UP/DOWN operation in particular, this input signal clears the acceleration/deceleration and
operates the inverter at 0r/min, the previous speed, or the creep speed specified by the C18 and 19 "Multistep
speed".
Function code data = 16 Switch creep speed under UP/DOWN control -- CRP-N2/N1
The external digital input signal switches the creep speed at the UP/DOWN selector unit.

Specified speed to be selected
16
OFF C18 Multistep Speed 15, N-15/Creep Speed 1, CREP1
ON C19 Multistep Speed 16, N-16/Creep Speed 2, CREP2
Function code data = 17 UP (Increase speed) -- UP

The external digital input signal increase the speed during the signal is ON. The maximum speed restricts the
speed. The acceleration follows the specified acceleration time and S-curve acceleration.
Function code data = 18 DOWN (Decrease speed) -- DOWN

The external digital input signal decrease the speed during the signal is ON. The deceleration follows the
specified deceleration time and S-curve deceleration. The current speed is maintained when the UP and the
DOWN are pressed at the same time (no acceleration/deceleration).
There are three types of the UP/DOWN operations depending on the initial values. You can use the speed
setting function (function code F01 or C25) to select them.
4-126
(1) UP/DOWN, Initial value = 0 r/min, N1 (F01)/N2 (C25) = 3

The following graph shows an operation with this function (The S-curve specification is not active in this
example).
Speed
Maximum
speed
Chap. 4
Time
0

[FWD]
[REV]
[UP]
[DOWN]
[CLR]
A B C D E F G H I J K L MN O
A: Operates at 0 r/min speed command

B: Accelerates in forward direction
C: Fixed to the speed command value when [UP] is set to OFF
D: Restricted by the maximum speed after acceleration in forward direction
E: Decelerates in forward direction
F: Fixed to the speed command value when [DOWN] is set to OFF
G: Decelerates to stop
H: Operates at 0r/min speed command value
I: Accelerates in reverse direction
J: Fixed to the speed command value when [UP] is set to OFF
K: Resets to 0r/min when [CLR] is set to ON
L: Accelerates in forward direction
M: Simultaneous [UP] and [DOWN] are treated as OFF. Fixed to the speed command value when both [UP]
and [DOWN] are turned ON
N: Decelerates to stop
O: Continues operation at the speed just after [FWD] is set to ON.
4-127
(2) UP/DOWN, Initial value = Last value), N1 (F01)/N2 (C25) = 4
example).
The last value is defined as the speed command value adopted when the last operation command (FWD,
REV) is turned OFF. The last value is stored in the non-volatile memory (memory that retains data even when
the power has been switched OFF), and becomes effective when the power is supplied again.
A: Accelerates in forward direction up to "+Last speed command value (speed command value just before
the operation command is set to OFF)"
B: Accelerates in forward direction
C: Fixed to the speed command value when [UP] is set to OFF
E: Decelerates to stop. Fixed to the speed command value when [DOWN] is set to OFF
F: Stores the speed as a last value when the [FWD] is set to OFF. Accelerates in forward direction to the last
value when the [FWD] is set to ON. Decelerates to stop when the [FWD] is set to OFF.
G: Accelerates in reverse direction up to "−Last speed command value"
H: Accelerates in reverse direction
I: Fixed to the speed command value when [UP] is turned OFF
J: Resets to 0 r/min when [CLR] is turned ON
K: Accelerates in forward direction
L: Simultaneous [UP] and [DOWN] are treated as OFF. Fixed to the speed command value when both [UP]
M: Decelerates to stop. Stores the speed as a last value when the [FWD] is set to OFF.
N: Accelerates in forward direction up to "+Last speed command value".
4-128
(3) UP/DOWN, Initial value = Creep speed 1 or 2, N1 (F01)/N2 (C25) = 5

example).
• You can use the terminal inputs CRP-N2/N1 to select the creep speed 1 or the creep speed 2.
• You should specify the function code C73 "Creep speed switching (on UP/DOWN control)" to choose the
function codes C18 and C19 or the analog input signals (CRP-N1 and CRP-N2). See the description of the
C73 for more details.
• Because priority is given on the clearing process even if [FWD] or [REV] is turned off while [CLR] is
turned on, the motor speed remains the creeping speed.
Chap. 4
• The creeping speed continues even if the creeping speed is decreased after it is reached.
• A: Converted into an absolute value and processed into the input creep speed.
Speed

Maximum
speed
Creep speed
Time
0
-Creep speed
[FWD]
[REV]
[UP]
[DOWN]
[CLR]
A B C D E F G H I J K L MN O
A: Accelerates in forward direction up to "+creep speed"

B: Acceleration in forward direction
C: Fixed to the speed command value when [UP] is turned OFF
E: Decelerates in forward direction down to "+creep speed"
F: Deceleration to stop
G: Accelerates in reverse direction to "−creep speed"
H: Acceleration in reverse direction
I: Fixed to the speed command value when [UP] is turned OFF
J: Resets to creep speed when [CLR] is set to ON
K: Deceleration to stop
L: Acceleration in forward direction
M: Simultaneous [UP] and [DOWN] are treated as OFF. Fixed to the speed command value when both [UP]
N: Deceleration to stop
O: If [FWD] is turned off temporarily and restored again during deceleration, the speed at the timing of
activation of FWD is held if the speed is equal to or larger than the creeping speed. If the speed has
dropped below the creeping speed, the speed increases to the creeping speed upon activation of FWD.
4-129
Function code data = 19 Enable data change with keypad -- WE-KP
This function enables changes to the function codes through the KEYPAD panel only when the digital input
signal WE-KP is applied to prevent unauthorized changes. You can make changes when 19 is not assigned to
a terminal. This function enables/disables changes through the KEYPAD panel. Use "Write enable through
link" to enable/disable changes through the link.

Function to be selected
19
OFF Changes to data disabled
ON Changes to data enabled
Note: You cannot change the function codes if you set this data to a terminal by mistake. If this is a case, set
ON to the terminal, and then set a correct data.
Function code data = 20 Cancel PID control -- KP/PID

The external digital input signal disables the PID control.

20
OFF PID control enabled
ON PID control disabled
Function code data = 21 Switch normal/inverse operation -- IVS

The external digital input signal switches the direction of the motor rotation.
Input signal to select specified data Rotation direction to be selected

Normal/inverse
21 FWD command REV command
OFF Forward rotation Reverse rotation Normal operation
ON Reverse rotation Forward rotation Inverse operation
Function code data = 22 Interlock (52-2) -- IL

When a magnetic contactor is provided to the output of the inverter, this magnetic contactor (52-2) opens to
slow down the voltage drop in the DC circuit at a momentary power failure. As a result, the inverter may not
detect the power failure to recover from the momentary power failure smoothly.
In such a case, use an external device to give a digital signal for informing the inverter of the momentary
power failure.
The motor will restart smoothly after the power failure. Valid if the setting of F14 (restart after momentary
power failure (action selection)) is "3," "4" or "5."

22
Momentary power failure detection through digital
OFF
input disabled
Momentary power failure detection through digital
ON
input enabled
4-130
Function code data = 23 Enable data change via communications link -- WE-LK
This function enables changes to the function codes through RS-485, T-Link, SX, or field bus only when the
digital input signal is applied to prevent unauthorized changes. You can make changes when 23 is not
assigned to a terminal. Use aforementioned "Write enable for KEYPAD" to enable/disable changes through
the KEYPAD.

Function to be selected Applicable communication system
23
OFF Changes to data disabled Integrated RS-485
T-Link, SX-bus, Fieldbus
Chap. 4
ON Changes to data enabled
Note: This function does not restrict the writing to the function code S (such as operation command, speed
command) areas dedicated to the communication system. The next function "Operation selection through

link" enables/disables writing to the S area.
Function code data = 24 Enable communications link -- LE

The external digital input enables/disables the speed command and the operation command through the link
(communication system). Assign a data 24 to a desired digital input terminal and the input signal applied to it
switches between the enabled state and the disabled state.
When the operation selection is enabled or this function is not assigned, you can specify the sources of
commands.

24
OFF Link commands disabled (link disabled regardless of setting by H30)
ON Link commands enabled (setting by H30 enabled)
When the link is enabled, the following priority applies if speed commands and operation commands come
from multiple communication systems.
Priority Operation command (FWD, REV), speed command Description of source of commands
One option selected from T-Link, SX-bus, and
1 Field options
fieldbus can be installed at a time.
2 Integrated RS-485 Disabled when the option above is installed.
<Application example 1>

When you specify the operation command and the Link operation
selection
speed command from the KEYPAD panel and use the KEYPAD panel [LE]
terminal function [LE] to switch to the operation
command and the speed command from the PLC, the
KEYPAD panel will be enabled if the terminal [LE] is KEYPAD panel OFF
operation
OFF, and the PLC will be enabled if the terminal [LE]
Operation command/
is ON. speed command
The description "Not assigned (*)" in the following PLC operation ON

table on the next page indicates that a function 24 [LE]
is not assigned to an X function terminal. If this is a PLC
case, the setting by the function code H30 becomes
effective. The PLC operation requires option cards (If
you use RS-485, an integrated function is available).
See the descriptions of the option or RS-485 for more
details.
4-131
Terminal [LE]
Set value Description
OFF ON Not assigned (*)
F01 = 0 Operation command from KEYPAD panel
Function Enabled Disabled
F02 = 0 Speed command from KEYPAD panel
code
specification Initial setting enabling both speed command
H30 = 3 Disabled Enabled
and operation command through link (PLC)
<Application example 2>

Link operation
When you select the operation command from the selection
external signal ([FWD], [REV]) and the speed [LE]
command from the analog terminal [12] input
(0±10V) or the RS-485 communication (from master
device such as a personal computer) using [LE] Analog speed command OFF
function, the analog terminal [12] will be enabled if
the terminal [LE] is OFF, and the RS-485 will be Speed command
enabled if the terminal [LE] is ON.

RS485 speed command ON
If you use RS-485, an integrated function is available.
See the descriptions of RS-485 for more details.
Terminal [LE]
Set value Description
OFF ON Not assigned (*)
Enabled (External signal is always
F01 = 1 Operation command from [FWD] and [REV]
selected)
Function
Speed command from analog input at terminal
code F02 = 1 Enabled Disabled
[12]
specification
Initial setting enabling only speed command
H30 = 1 Disabled Enabled
from link (RS-485)
Function code data = 25 Universal DI -- U-DI

You can assign a data 25 to a digital terminal to designate it as a universal DI terminal. This function is
provided to check the existence of an input signal through communication and does not affect the inverter
operation.
There are following applications for this signal.
1) Check the ON/OFF state of the input signal through RS-485, T-Link, SX-bus, or fieldbus.
2) Use for an input to software created with the UPAC option without affecting the inverter operation.
4-132
<Application example>
You do not have enough numbers of I/O and want to PLC OFF
use inverter control terminals to switch the control of a
I/O
PLC program. If you choose [X1] as a control terminal:
ON
1) Set the function code E01 "X1 function selection" to
25. This specification makes this input neglected by [X1]
PLC program
the inverter. No surplus I/O
2) Use the PLC to read out (polling) the function code

M13 "Operation method (final command)" through Interface (optional or
integrated)
communication.
Chap. 4
3) Since the data type of M13 is 32 (type), refer to the [X1]
bit assignment under that data type to check the Neglected
[U-DI]
corresponding bit of X1 input. internally

[CM]
Note that you can read out input information of an input
terminal using the code M13 without assigning the FRENIC-VG
[U-DI] to the terminal. The significance of the
assignment is to avoid activating an assigned function
to the terminal unless you do not assign the [U-DI].
Function code data = 26 Enable auto search for idling motor speed at starting -- STM
The external digital input signal enables/disables the function H09 "Start mode (Rotating motor pick up)"
Assign a data 26 to a desired digital input terminal and the input signal applied to it switches between the
enabled state and the disabled state.

26
Follow the setting of H09 (startup characteristics (rotating motor pickup
OFF
mode)).
The startup characteristics function is valid irrespective of the setting of
ON
H09 (rotating motor startup characteristics (pickup mode)).
4-133
Function code data = 27 Synchronization operation command (PG (PR) optional function) -- SYC
This function switches between the speed command converted from a pulse train received as a position
command via the position control and other speed command. You can use this function for a synchronized
operation. You need an optional PG (PR).
Assign a data 27 to a desired digital input terminal and the state of the input signal applied to it selects the
function.

27
OFF Synchronized speed disabled (Other speed command enabled)
ON Synchronized speed enabled
Also see E29 "PG pulse output selection", o12 to 19 "PG (PR) options", and the description on the PG (PR)
options.
Note that the Zero speed locking command LOCK is disabled during the pulse train position control with
SYC.
<Application example 1> Synchronized operation by receiving pulse

Apply a pulse train signal from the external pulse generator to the PG (PR) options of multiple inverters to be
synchronized. The position command received by the option is converted into a synchronized speed
command and the SYC enables the speed command.
Pulse
FRENIC-VG generator FRENIC-VG
Slave Slave
Receiver PG (PR) PG (PR) Receiver

circuit option option circuit
Other speed Position Position Other speed

command control control command
Speed Speed
control control
Integrated PG Integrated PG
[PA] [PB] [PA] [PB]
Synchronized
PG IM IM PG
operation
4-134
<Application example 2> Synchronized operation by pulse generation

Pulse signal converted (oscillated) from an internal speed command (such as [12] input or multistep speed
command) is also converted into a speed command through the position control and the SYC enables the
resulting speed command. You can put the converted pulse signal to the output and apply it to the other
inverters to synchronize the inverter with other inverters.
The motor speed of the master and the PG pulse number determines the pulse frequency. When you use a PG
with 1024 P/R at 1500 r/min, the frequency is 1500×1024/60=25.6 kHz. The pulse compensation is available
on the slave side. See the function codes o14 and o15 or the PG (PR) option for more details.
Chap. 4
The complete synchronization (± 2 pulses or less) is possible both in the application example 1 and 2 during
both transient and steady states.
About differences in methods
Method Merits Demerits

<Application example 1> No position deviation One PG (PR) option necessary Pulse
Synchronized operation by generator necessary
receiving pulse
<Application example 2> No position deviation One PG (PR) None
Synchronized operation by option can be omitted. No pulse
pulse generation generator
Master-slave operation (Master None Position deviation
directly applies its PG signal to
slaves)
<Application example> Synchronized operation for three or more inverters

Set E29 "PG pulse output selection" to 9 to directly supply the position command applied to the PG (PR)
option to the [FA] and the [FB] of the integrated PG.
4-135
Function code data = 28 Lock at zero speed -- LOCK
The external digital input signal conducts servo lock. Assign data 28 LOCK to a terminal and set the input
signal ON.

28
OFF Normal state
ON Zero speed locking state
1) The inverter decelerates to stop (following an Speed

effective deceleration time setting) from the speed
just after the [LOCK] is set to ON. Deceleration
2) Position control (servo locking state) is applied with to stop
respect to the motor position (angle) when the speed Servo locking
command of the acceleration/deceleration
calculation unit reaches to zero. The acceleration/
Time
deceleration calculation unit declines a step speed 0
command directed by the user in a specified FWD
ON
acceleration/ deceleration time.
LOCK
3) You can supply a resistive torque up to the
short-time rating. The function code H55 "Zero SY-C
speed control (Gain)" and the speed control system

(ASR gain) control the magnitude of the torque in
relation to the position deviation (position error).
SY-C
4) Balance the speed control (ASR) gain (function Position deviation
(pulse)
codes F and C) and the position control gain (H55)
to adjust the gain. The system may become unstable
to present low frequency hunting when you increase Function
code Time
the setting of the H55 while leaving ASR gain H56
small. 0
5) A signal indicating completed servo locking appears on the DO as "Synchronization completion signal"
when the position deviation converges into the setting range of the H56 "Zero speed control (completion
range)".
When PG (PR) option is used for synchronization control by pulse train, the zero speed locking command
becomes invalid.
6) Because only one rotation is detected if the motor turns due to an external force after it is locked at zero
speed, the DO output (synchronous control complete SYC) may be turned on each time the predetermined
position passes.
4-136
Function code data = 29 Pre-excitation -- EXITE

The external digital input signal switches the inverter in pre-exciting state. Assign a data 29 to a desired digital
input terminal and the state of the input signal applied to it selects the function. When the operation command
(FWD, REV) is set to ON, the state changes from pre-exciting to normal.
29
OFF Normal state
ON Pre-exciting state
Chap. 4
You can also use the function codes F72, F74 and F75 to
start the pre-exciting. See also the description of these
functions.

You can use the "Operation status " of the "I/O check"
screen of the KEYPAD panel to see whether the inverter is
in the pre-exciting state or in the normal state. The EXT
indicates the pre-exciting state and the EXT indicates the
normal operation. You can also read out the function code
M14 "Operation status" through the link.
１５００
■ＦＷＤ□ＢＲＫ□ＩＬ
□ＲＥＶ■ＮＵＶ□ＡＣＣ
■ＥＸＴ□ＴＬ □ＤＥＣ
Function code data = 30 Cancel speed limiter -- N-LIM

The external digital input signal disables the speed command limiter. Assign a data 30 to a desired digital
input terminal and the state of the input signal applied to it selects the function. See the description of the
function code F76 for more information on the speed command limiter function.

30
OFF Speed limiter enabled
ON Speed limiter disabled
Function code data = 31 Cancel H41 (Torque command) -- H41-CCL

The external digital input signal cancels the setting specified by the H41 "Torque command selection" (0:
internal ASR enabled). Assign a data 31 to a desired digital input terminal and the state of the input signal
applied to it selects the function.

31
OFF H41 setting enabled
ON H41 setting disabled (internal ASR enabled)
Application
Use for applications that switch between speed control (internal ASR) and torque command control.
4-137
Function code data = 32 Cancel H42 (Torque current command) -- H42-CCL
The external digital input signal cancels the setting specified by the H42 "Torque current command" (0:
internal ASR enabled). Assign a data 32 to a desired digital input terminal and the state of the input signal
applied to it selects the function.

32
ON H42 setting disabled (internal ASR enabled)
Application
Use for applications that switch between speed control (internal ASR) and torque current command control.
Function code data = 33 Cancel H43 (Magnetic flux command) -- H43-CCL

The external digital input signal cancels the setting specified by the H43 "Magnetic-flux command selection"
(0: internal calculation enabled). Assign a data 33 to a desired digital input terminal and the state of the input
signal applied to it selects the function.

33
ON H43 setting disabled (internal calculation enabled)
Function code data = 34 Cancel F40 (Torque limiter mode 1) -- F40-CCL

The external digital input signal cancels the setting specified by F40 "Torque limiter mode 1" (0: limiter
disabled). Assign a data 34 to a desired digital input terminal and the state of the input signal applied to it
switches between the enabled state and the disabled state.

34
OFF F40 setting enabled
ON F40 setting disabled (limiter disabled)
Function code data = 35 Select torque limiter level 2/1 -- TL2/TL1

The external digital input signal switches the torque limiter value (level 1 or 2). Assign a data 35 to a desired
digital input terminal and the state of the input signal applied to it switches between the level 1 and the level 2.
This function is effective only when F41 "Torque limiter mode 2"=3.

35
OFF F42: Torque limiter value (level 1) selection
ON F43: Torque limiter value (level 2) selection
4-138
Function code data = 36 Bypass ACC/DEC processor -- BPS

The external digital input signal bypasses the acceleration/deceleration calculation unit to disable the
acceleration/deceleration time and the S-curve specifications. Assign a data 36 to a desired digital input
terminal and the state of the input signal applied to it switches between the enabled state and the disabled
state.
(The resultant setting is the same as the acceleration/deceleration time: 0.00s and the S-curve
acceleration/deceleration: 0%)

36
Chap. 4
OFF Acceleration/deceleration calculation unit enabled
ON Acceleration/deceleration calculation unit enabled

The speed command from the acceleration/deceleration
calculation unit follows the acceleration/deceleration
and S-curve settings as shown in the figure. Setting the
[BPS] to ON cancels these functions to control the
motor speed following a step-form speed command.
Use the dedicated jogging operation function codes
(C30 to C38), not the BPS, for jogging operation.
Restrictions
• When you use the BPS, control functions such as the UP/DOWN control and the active drive (when V/f
control is selected) are also disabled.
• The BPS does not affect the auxiliary speed setting 2 and the PID calculation output (speed command). For
details, refer to the control block diagrams.
Setting the BPS ON accelerates/decelerates the motor rapidly and the motor may accelerate at its maximum
permissible torque and decelerate down to the zero speed. Use the BPS after you confirm that these are permissible
actions of the mechanical system and the braking devices you use.
You may be injured.
Function code data = 37, 38 Select torque bias command -- TB1, TB2
The external input digital signals can be used to switch among three types of torque biases predetermined by
F47 to 49 "Torque bias T1, T2, and T3". See the function code F47 to 49 for more details.
Input signal combination to select specified data

Torque bias to be selected
38 TB2 37 TB1
OFF OFF Torque bias disabled
OFF ON F47 torque bias T1 enabled
ON OFF F48 torque bias T2 enabled
ON ON F49 torque bias T3 enabled
4-139
Function code data = 39 Select droop control -- DROOP
The external digital input signal switches between the droop control enabled state and the droop control
disabled state. Assign a data 39 to a desired digital input terminal and the state of the input signal applied to it
selects the function. See the function code H28 "Droop control" for more details.

39
OFF Droop control disabled
ON Droop control enabled
Function code data = 40 Zero-hold Ai1 -- ZH-AI1

Function code data = 41 Zero-hold Ai2 -- ZH-AI2
Function code data = 42 Zero-hold Ai3 (AIO optional function) -- ZH-AI3
Function code data = 43 Zero-hold Ai4 (AIO optional function) -- ZH-AI4
The external digital input signals fix the individual analog signals Ai1 to 4 to "0: input voltage invalid".
Assign a data to a desired digital input terminal and the state of the input signal applied to it selects the
function.
You need optional OPC-VG1-AIO for Ai3 and Ai4.

40 to 43
OFF Ai input enabled ON
ON Ai input held to zero
Function code data = 44 Reverse Ai1 polarity -- REV-AI1 Control internal data REV-AI1
REV-AI2
Function code data = 45 Reverse Ai2 polarity -- REV-AI2 REV-AI3
+4000H REV-AI4
Function code data = 46 = OFF
Reverse Ai3 polarity (AIO optional function) -- REV-AI3
Function code data = 47
Reverse Ai4 polarity (AIO optional function) -- REV-AI4 -10V
【Ai1,2,3,4】
The external digital input signals invert the polarity of the input 0
+10V
data from Ai1 to 4. Assign a data to a desired digital input

terminal and the state of the input signal applied to it selects the REV-AI1
function. -4000H REV-AI2
REV-AI3
You need optional OPC-VG1-AIO for Ai3 and Ai4. REV-AI4
= ON

44 to 47
OFF Normal operation
ON Inverted polarity
4-140
Function code data = 48 Inverse PID output -- PID-INV

The external digital input signal switches the PID Control internal data
PID-INV
output PIDOUT between the normal operation and the = OFF
inverse operation. Assign a data 48 to a desired digital +100%
input terminal and the state of the input signal applied to
it selects the function.
-100%
PIDOUT
+100%
0
Chap. 4
-100%
PID-INV

= ON

48
OFF Normal PID output operation
ON Inverse PID output operation
Function code data = 49 Cancel PG alarm -- PG-CCL

The external digital input signal cancels the PG alarm (p9 ). This function is available when you select
"vector control" for the function code P01, A01, or A101.
The inverter does not issue the alarm even when the PG wiring is disconnected during the input signal is ON.
Assign a data 49 to a desired digital input terminal and the existence of the input signal cancels the PG alarm.

49
ON PG alarm (p9 ) canceled
Actions on detecting PG disconnection

PG-CCL = OFF PG-CCL = ON
Alarm operation
Normal operation PG alarm (p9 ) canceled
KEYPAD panel Alarm mode Operation mode
Alarm history Recorded Not recorded
Alarm DO output PG disconnection output No output
30X relay output Alarm output No output
Inverter output Shut down Normal operation
4-141
Application
Since this is a special function, limit your application to the
following cases. When you use the function code E14 "X function
normally open/normally closed", you can set to "normally closed FRENIC-VG
(ON)" without actually short-circuiting terminals.
1) Use to apply the power to a system and test the system without
connecting the PG signal.
2) When you use two motors by switching them with one unit, a Switch
momentary disconnection will present and the PG alarm (p9 ) is
issued if the PGs are switched externally. Chancel the PG alarm
(p9 ) at the sequence timing when the PGs are switched. Note that
Switch
when you use FUJI's option (OPC-VG1-CPG) for PG switching,
you do not need this canceling function.
PG PG
3) Monitoring the current on the signal line detects the PG
disconnection. The false detection may occur when the PG wiring
has high impedance causing low current. Usually 0.6 mA or less is IM IM
considered as a disconnection. If this is the case, you can operate
with canceling the PG alarm as an emergency mean.
Operation with PG disconnected

A motor rotates at a slip frequency regardless of the speed command when the PG is disconnected (either PGP,
PGM, PA, or PB is disconnected) and the PG alarm is canceled (PG-CCL = ON).
Since the calculation of the speed control system (ASR) will saturate and increase the torque command and
the torque current command to the maximum, either the inverter overload (0lu ) or the motor overloads
(0l1, 0l2, 0l3 ) when you use an electronic thermal overload relay will enter the alarm mode (Note that
if you invert the A phase and the B phase of the PG signal, it will present the same phenomenon).
If you are sure that the PG wiring is disconnected, do not operate with canceling the PG alarm.
<Control mechanism>
The vector control of the FRENIC-VG is a slip frequency type vector control. The inverter obtains the motor
speed (ωr) from the PG signal and the slip frequency (ωs) from the current detection to determine the output
frequency to the motor (ω1 = ωr + ωs). In case of a PG disconnection, the motor speed is 0 (ωr = 0) and the
output frequency to the motor becomes the slip frequency ωs.
In the speed control system (ASR), since the motor speed (ωr) does not follow the speed command (ωr*), the
speed control system (ASR) conducts an integral operation (I constant of ASR) to increase the speed deviation
(ωr*−ωr) and the saturation is reached in a short period. The output of the ASR is the torque command and
this torque command is fixed to the maximum value resulting in an overload alarm (0lu ).
4-142
Function code data = 50 Cancel undervoltage alarm -- LU-CCL

The external digital input signal cancels the undervoltage alarm (lu ). When the input signal is ON, the alarm
is canceled.
Assign a data 50 to a desired digital input terminal and the existence of the input signal cancels the
undervoltage alarm (lu ).

50
Chap. 4
ON Undervoltage alarm (lu ) canceled
Actions on detecting undervoltage inside the inverter

LU-CCL = OFF LU-CCL = ON
Alarm operation
Normal operation Undervoltage alarm (lu ) canceled
KEYPAD panel Alarm mode Running mode
Alarm history Recorded Not recorded
Alarm DO output Output No output
DO output for Stopping on
Output No output
undervoltage [LU]
30X relay output Output No output
Inverter output Shut down Normal operation
Application
Since this is a special function, limit your application to the following cases.
1) When the control power is supplied via [R0] and [T0] separately, shutting down the main circuit power
causes the inverter to detect an undervoltage alarm (lu ) and enter the Alarm mode. To avoid the alarm,
use LU-CCL.
2) To drive a lifting unit or the like at the time of a power failure, use LU-CCL. Inverters of 30 kW or below
(200 V class series) or those of 55 kW or below (400 V class series) can run even on the voltage lower than
the undervoltage level (180 V for 200 V class series and 360 V for 400 V class series) as long as the
inverter runs at the low speed, so use LU-CCL when configuring a system using an uninterruptible power
supply (UPS), battery, stand-by generator and so on.
Note: To run inverters of 37 kW or above (200 V class series) or those of 75 kW or above (400 V class
series) on the voltage lower than the undervoltage level, a special type of inverters is needed. Contact your
Fuji Electric representative.
3) During cancellation of an undervoltage alarm, no parameter change is allowed from the keypad.
4-143
Function code data = 51 Hold Ai torque bias -- H-TB
The external digital input signal directs to preserve the torque bias data supplied via an analog input. Assign
data 51 to a desired digital input terminal and the existence of the input signal preserves the analog data.

51
OFF Torque bias hold disabled
ON Torque bias hold enabled
Function code data = 52 STOP1 (Decelerate to stop with normal deceleration time) -- STOP1
The external digital input signal directs to decelerate to stop with the currently specified/effective deceleration
time and S-curve decelerations on start/end sides.
Assign data 52 to a desired digital input terminal and the existence of the input signal activates the operation.

52
ON Deceleration to stop (effective deceleration time)
Function code data = 53 STOP2 (Decelerate to stop with deceleration time 4) -- STOP2
The external digital input signal directs to decelerate to stop with the C67 "Deceleration time 4" and C68 and
C69 "S-curve start/end side 4".

53
ON Deceleration to stop (Deceleration time 4)
4-144
Function code data = 54 STOP3 (Decelerate to stop with maximum braking torque) -- STOP3
Turning this external digital input signal ON causes the motor to decelerate to a stop with the maximum
braking torque (or the torque limiter value in terms of the inverter maximum current when the torque limiter is
disabled), ignoring the specified deceleration time. Note that, after the actual speed exceeds the rated speed
the braking torque will be reduced.
When a braking unit (150% maximum torque) of the same capacity as the inverter is used, an overvoltage
alarm (0u ) may occur during deceleration to a stop. To avoid the alarm, use a braking unit with one rank
higher or set the torque limiter value (braking) to 150%.
Chap. 4
54

ON Deceleration to stop (with maximum braking torque)
Motor speed Selected Maximum

deceleration time Deceleration time 4 braking torque
Time
0
Output torque
Time
Maximum
braking
torque
FWD ON
STOP1
STOP2
STOP3
Function code data = 55 Latch DIA data -- DIA

Function code data = 56 Latch DIB data -- DIB
The external digital input signal enables to read in a data through the DI option (OPC-VG1-DIA, DIB). The
data is read when the input signal DIA or DIB is ON and the data is held when the input signal [DIA] or
[DIB]is OFF. See the DI option section for more details.

55
OFF Hold DIA data
ON Read DIA data

56
OFF Hold DIB data
ON Read DIB data
4-145
Function code data = 57 Cancel multiplex system -- MT-CCL
The external digital input signal cancels the
multiwinding drive with SI (MWS) option
(OPC-VG1-TBSI) and switches to the standard
single wining motor drive. The function code to
switch to the multiwinding drive is o33
"Multiwinding system".
The right figure shows easy connection for
changing drives between 2-winding motor and
single-winding motor. In this circuit, the slave unit
does not need operation command or feedback of
PG, NTC signals. With change of motors, PG and
NTC signals must be changed as well as the 2nd
power circuit. To change PG and NTC signals, use
the DI option (OPC-VG1-CPG).
For details of the multiplex system, refer to the
description of Options.
Input signal to select specified data Function to be selected

57 when o33 = 1 (Multiwinding system)
OFF Multiwinding motor drive

Single winding motor drive
ON
(Multiwinding cancelled)
Function code data = 58 to 67 Custom Di1-Di10 -- C-DI1 to C-DI10

Di terminal for manufacturer. Do not assign.
Function code data = 68 Select load adaptive parameters 2/1 -- AN-P2/1 (Available soon)
Turning this signal ON or OFF selects the load adaptive parameter 2 or 1, respectively.

68
OFF Load adaptive parameter 1
ON Load adaptive parameter 2
Function code data = 69 Cancel PID components -- PID-CCL

When an integrated PID function is used, turning this signal ON zero-holds the PID output and clears the PID
integral component memory.

69
OFF Do not zero-hold the PID output.
Zero-hold the PID output.
ON
Clear the PID integral component memory.
4-146
Function code data = 70 Enable PID FF component -- PID-FF

When an integrated PID function is used, turning this signal ON enables the feedforward component.

70
OFF Disable PID feedforward component
ON Enable PID feedforward component
Function code data = 71 Reset completion of speed limit calculation -- NL-RST (Available soon)
Chap. 4
Turning this signal ON clears the load adaptive calculation result and calculates the limit speed again at the
next acceleration time in the same direction.

71
OFF Do not reset completion of speed limit calculation
ON Reset completion of speed limit calculation
For details, refer to H214 to H227 (Load adaptive control parameter setting 2).
Function code data = 72 Toggle signal 1 -- TGL1

Function code data = 73 Toggle signal 2 -- TGL2
Assigning toggle signals 1 and 2 to two X terminals enables the toggle monitor control. If either one of those
signals is not assigned, the toggle monitor control becomes disabled.
What is toggle monitor control
The toggle monitor control monitors whether the inverter and the host equipment mutually function normally.
The "function normally" means not "no alarm has occurred" but "CPUs and I/O devices of both the inverter
and the host equipment have not stopped."
(1) Toggle monitor method
- This monitor is available to operations via the T-link, SX bus(*1), E-SX bus(*2) communications link.
- Operations via digital input terminals are not assumed.
When H30 = 2 or 3, the target bit is operated via the communications link.
The toggle control uses digital inputs on X11 to X14 and does not use those on X1 to X9.
Toggle data (PLC ⇒ VG1) uses 2 bits out of bits 11 to 14 of function code S06 [Type 32].
The host equipment uses the above 2-bit data to transfer toggle data to the inverter in the sequence of
00→01→10→11→00 at the constant cycle.
The inverter checks that the transferred toggle data is incremented.
If the inverter detects a toggle data error during running and the error is not recovered within the detection
time specified by H144, then the inverter trips with an alarm (arf ).
*1 For SX bus communication, the bus tact cycle of applications that send a transmission toggle at the
MICREX-SX side should be 1 ms or more.
*2 As well, for E-SX but communication, the bus tact cycle should be 0.5 ms or more
4-147
(2) Toggle error detection alarm (arf )
The toggle error detection alarm (arf ) is treated as a heavy alarm.
H144 specifies the toggle signal error detection time.
No. Parameter name Data setting range Initial value Remarks
H144 Toggle data error timer 0.01 to 20.00 s 0.10 s Acts as a toggle signal error monitor timer.
A toggle error detection alarm (arf ) occurs upon detection of any of the following conditions when a run
command is given via the communications link or during running initiated by an auxiliary excitation
command or DC braking command.
z When a toggle signal has never been changed, a run command or EXITE ("Pre-excitation")/DCBRK
("Enable DC braking") is entered.
Note: When the power is turned ON, a run command is entered with the start of toggle signal monitor, an
alarm arf is issued. Therefore, enter a run command after at least one cycle of toggle signal like
00→01→10→11.
z During running, no change has occurred in a toggle signal for more than the detection time specified by
H144.
z During running, a toggle signal does not respond in the sequence of 00→01→10→11.
If a change in a toggle signal is abnormal, the inverter immediately trips as a PLC program error. After
detection of the error, normal sequence (00→01→10→11) of 2-bit signals is judged as a normal recovery.
Alarm occurrence example 1
4-148
Alarm occurrence example 2 (Normal recovery after detection of an alarm)
Chap. 4
Note: If a toggle error detection alarm (arf ) occurs during pre-excitation or DC braking, disable (turn
OFF) the EXCITE or DCBRK command, respectively. If the command remains enabled (ON), turning the
alarm reset signal ON causes repeating of instantaneous cancellation and recurrence of arf alarm
(chattering).
Function code data = 74 Cause external mock alarm -- FTB

This external digital input signal causes a mock alarm (err ) in the inverter.
The factory default of this signal is Normal open contact.
When terminals [FTB] and [CM] are opened, it is treated as normal. Closing those terminals shuts down the
inverter output so that the motor coasts to a stop.
For setting to use as Normal close contact, refer to the description of external alarm (0h2 ).
Function code data = 75 Cancel NTC thermistor alarm -- NTC-CCL

This external digital input signal cancels an NTC thermistor wire break alarm (nrb ).
Function code data = 76 Cancel lifetime alarm signal -- LF-CCL

This external digital input signal cancels a lifetime alarm signal LIFE.
4-149
Function code data = 77 Request for reading in serial port PG absolute position -- SPG-AP (Available
soon)
When the inverter is used in combination with a permanent magnet synchronous motor (PMSM) equipped
with a serial port PG, this external digital input signal causes the inverter to read in the absolute position of the
serial port PG immediately after the power is turned ON.
To use the SPG-AP function, the serial port PG option (OPC-VG1-SPG) should be mounted and the SPG-AP
should be assigned to any of the X terminals.
< Reading in the absolute position of a serial port PG >
- Immediately after the power is turned ON, the inverter automatically reads in the absolute position.
- Using this signal arbitrarily reads in the absolute position. As shown below, after checking that the
SPG-RD signal ("Reading absolute position of serial port PG in progress") on a Y terminal is turned OFF,
turn the SPG-AP OFF. Turning a run command ON at this moment does not allow inverter to run.
Function code data = 78 Switch PID feedback signals -- PID-1/2

This external digital input signal switches between the PID feedback 1 PID-FB1 and PID feedback 2
PID-FB2, which are assigned to analog input terminals.
Input signal to select specified data PID feedback to be selected

78 (Analog input terminal)
OFF 15: PID feedback 1 PID-FB1

ON 27: PID feedback 2 PID-FB2
Function code data = 79 Select PID torque bias -- TB-PID

This external digital input signal enables PID output to be used as a torque bias.

79
OFF Disable PID output as a torque bias
ON Enable PID output as a torque bias
4-150
Function code data = 80 Tune magnetic pole position -- MP-TUN (Available soon)
When the inverter is used in combination with a permanent magnet synchronous motor (PMSM) equipped
with an ABZ-phase encoder, it is necessary to tune the magnetic pole position before the initial operation after
the power is turned ON. This external digital input signal initiates the magnetic pole position tuning.
Note: No magnetic pole position tuning is required when a starting operation is performed until the Z-phase is
recognized after the power is turned ON or when the encoder of the PMSM is an absolute type of UVW
-phase interface.
Function code data = 81 External electrical conditions -- RD (Available soon)
Chap. 4
Function code data = 82 Startup conditions -- STRD (Available soon)
Function code data = 83 Continue to run at the time of communications link error -- LK-D (Available
soon)

Turning this external digital input signal ON cancels a network alarm (er4 ) caused by a communication
error detected by a communications option card such as T-link, SX bus and CC-Link to continue the inverter
running. For details, refer to o29 (Continue-to-run signal processing in case of alarm).

82
OFF Cause network alarm (er4 )
ON Cancel network alarm (er4 )
4-151
E14 X Terminal Function (Normal open/close)
E14 configures terminals [X1] to [X9] individually as a "normal open" or

"normal close" contact by software when they have no connections.
１５００
OP: Normal open ＣＬＯＳＥ／ＯＰＥＮ（Ｘ）
CL: Normal close ■■■■■■■■□ＯＰ
□□□□□□□□■ＣＬ
Use this function for configuring a "normal close" contact for terminal １２３４５６７８９
command THR ("Enable external alarm trip"), for example. ∧∨ÆＤＡＴＡＡＤＪＵＳＴ
Configuration change example via the RS-485 communications link

To configure terminal [X9] (THR) as a "normal close" contact and other X terminals, as a "normal open"
contact, use the following.
(1) Assign bits in accordance with format [35]. Refer to Chapter 4, Section 4.2.4.2 "Data type 12-145."
To configure terminal [X9] as a "normal close" contact, the bit assignment is 0000 0001 0000 0000 (in
binary).
(2) Convert the bit assignment from binary to hexadecimal format.
0000 0001 0000 0000 (binary) = 0100 (hexadecimal)
Set the hexadecimal data to E14 for configuring terminal [X9].
Ｅ１４ＸＮＯＲＭＡＬ
4-152
E15 to E27 Y Terminal Function
Part of control signals and monitor signals can be selected and output to the terminals [Y1] to [Y18] and
[Y5A]. The transistor signals are output to the terminals [Y1] to [Y18] and the relay contact signal to [Y5A].
Use of terminal functions from [Y11] to [Y18] requires the optional OPC-VG1-DIOA.
The valid and invalid functions vary according to the drive control (vector control for IM with/without speed
sensor, vector control without speed sensor, V/f control and vector control for PMSM with speed sensor). For
details, refer to the function code tables in Section 4.2.
Chap. 4
<Using digital output>
You can use a total of 13 terminals, which are five terminals from Y1 to Y4 and Y5A as standard and eight
terminals from Y11 to Y18 (when a DIOA option is used). Similarly to the link function (RS-485, T-Link, SX,
Field Bus), you can refer to the output of 13 points through the communications link.

You can use the function codes M52, M53, M54, M142, M143 and M144 (control output 1 to 6) to read all
information (48 bits in total) that are available for the DO outputs through the communications link (RS-485,
T-Link, SX bus, and fieldbus) and UPAC. For details, refer to M52 to M54 (data types 125 to 127) and M142
to M144 (data types 128 to 130) in the function code tables.
Setting procedure
• Select a function you want to use. We select the "Operation ready output" command as an example.
• Assign the "Operation ready output" command to one of the available terminals (Y1 to Y4, Y5A, Y11 to
Y18). If you want to assign it to Y3, write a data, "14:RDY", to the function code E17 "Y3 function
selection".
• Y3 terminal is set to ON after you turn on and the operation becomes
ready. １５００
□Ｙ１ □Ｙ５Ａ
• See the "I/O check" screen of the KEYPAD panel to confirm the □Ｙ２
ON/OFF status of the Y3. If you switch the Y3 from OFF to ON, Y3 ■Ｙ３
changes to Y3 on the screen shown on the right. □Ｙ４
<You can specify as "NO terminal" or "NC terminal">

You can use the function code E28 to specify the state of individual terminals (standard 5 terminals only) as
normally open ("NO terminal") or normally closed ("NC terminal"). See the function description of E28 for
more information.
4-153
Ｅ１５Ｙ１ＦＵＮＣ
Ｅ１６Ｙ２ＦＵＮＣ
Ｅ１７Ｙ３ＦＵＮＣ
Ｅ１８Ｙ４ＦＵＮＣ
Ｅ１９Ｙ５ＦＵＮＣ
Ｅ２０Ｙ１１ＦＵＮＣ
Ｅ２１Ｙ１２ＦＵＮＣ
Ｅ２２Ｙ１３ＦＵＮＣ
Ｅ２３Ｙ１４ＦＵＮＣ
Ｅ２４Ｙ１５ＦＵＮＣ
Ｅ２５Ｙ１６ＦＵＮＣ
Ｅ２６Ｙ１７ＦＵＮＣ
Ｅ２７Ｙ１８ＦＵＮＣ
Function Function
code data code data
0 Inverter running RUN 24 Resetting TRY
1 Speed valid N-EX 25 Universal DO U-DO
2 Speed agreement 1 N-AG1 26 Heat sink overheat early warning INV-OH
3 Speed arrival signal N-AR 27 Synchronization completion signal SY-C
4 Speed detected 1 N-DT1 28 Lifetime alarm LIFE
5 Speed detected 2 N-DT2 29 Under acceleration U-ACC
6 Speed detected 3 N-DT3 30 Under deceleration U-DEC
Undervoltage detected (Inverter
7 LU 31 Inverter overload early warning INV-OL
stopped)
Torque polarity detected
8 B/D 32 Motor overheat early warning M-OH
(braking/driving)
9 Torque limiting TL 33 Motor overload early warning M-OL
10 Torque detected 1 T-DT1 34 DB overload early warning DB-OL
11 Torque detected 2 T-DT2 35 Link transmission error LK-ERR
In limiting under load adaptive
12 Keypad operation enabled KP 36 ANL
control
In calculation under load adaptive
13 Inverter stopped STOP 37 ANC
control
14 Inverter ready to run RDY 38 Analog torque bias being held TBH
C-DO1 to
15 Magnetic flux detected MF-DT 39-48 Custom Do1 to Do10
C-DO10
16 Motor M2 selected SW-M2
17 Motor M3 selected SW-M3 49 - -
Z-phase detection completed
18 Brake release signal BRK 50 Z-RDY
(Available soon)
Multiplex system communications
19 Alarm content 1 AL1 51 MTS
link being established
Answerback to cancellation of
20 Alarm content 2 AL2 52 MEC-AB
multiplex system
21 Alarm content 4 AL4 53 Multiplex system master selected MSS
Multiplex system local station
22 Alarm content 8 AL8 54 AL-SF
failure
Stopped due to communications link
23 Cooling fan in operation FAN 55 LES
error
4-154
Function Function
code data code data
56 Alarm output (for any alarm) ALM 72 Turn ON Y-terminal test output Y-ON
57 Light alarm L-ALM 73 Turn OFF Y-terminal test output Y-OFF
Reading absolute position of serial
58 Maintenance timer MNT 74 SPG-AP
PG in progress (Available soon)
System clock battery lifetime
59 Braking transistor broken DBAL 75 BATT
expired
Magnetic position tuning in
60 DC fan locked DCFL 76 TUN-MG
progress (Available soon)
Chap. 4
SPGT battery warning (Available
61 Speed agreement 2 N-AG2 77 SPGT-B
soon)
Electrical conditions ready
62 Speed agreement 3 N-AG3 78 ERD
(Available soon)

IT detected in operation
63 Axial fan stopped MFAN 79 TCA
(Available soon)
EN terminal detection circuit failure
64 - - 80 DECF
(Available soon)
65 - - 81 EN terminal OFF (Available soon) ENOFF
Answerback to droop control Safety function in progress
66 DSAB 82 SF-RUN
enabled (Available soon)
67 torque command/torque current TCL-C 83 - -
command
68 F40-AB 84 - -
torque limiter mode 1
71 73 ON command PRT-73
0. Inverter running -- RUN

"Running" is defined as a state when the inverter supplies output. This signal is ON when the inverter is
running and OFF when the inverter is stopping.
The inverter does not stop when it is decelerating after you turn OFF the FWD or the REV signal. The inverter
shuts down the output and stops when the speed becomes less than the speed specified by F37 "Stop speed"
and the zero speed continues for the time specified by F39 "Zero speed holding time". The status is running
during DC braking, pre-exciting, and servo locking (synchronized control completed).
1. Speed valid -- N-EX

Turns ON when the absolute value of the speed N-EX
ON
command or the actual speed is more than the value
Speed command value or
specified by the function code F37 "Stop speed", and absolute speed detection
OFF when the value is less than the "Stop speed". (estimated) value
You can use the function code F38 "Stop speed OFF
(Detection method)" to select either the speed
command or the actual speed. 0 Hysteresis width =
0.5% of max. speed
Setting level
F37, F38
2. Speed agreement 1 -- N-AG1

Turns ON when motor M1 is selected and the actual speed value falls in the detection range specified by the
speed command value (Reference speed 4: ASR input).
See the function description of E44 "Speed agreement (Detection range) (Off delay timer)"and E45
"Enable/disable alarm for speed disagreement".
4-155
3. Speed arrival signal -- N-AR
Turns ON when the actual speed value reaches the speed command value (Speed command 1:
acceleration/deceleration calculation unit input). See the function description of E42.
4 to 6. Speed detected 1, 2, 3 -- N-DT1, N-DT2, N-DT3

Turns ON when the observed speed reaches the Speed detection level 1 (E39), level 2 (E40), or level 3 (E41).
See the function description of E39, 40, and 41.
7. Undervoltage detected (Inverter stopped) -- LU

Turns ON when the undervoltage protective function is active, or the DC link circuit voltage of the main
circuit decreases down below the undervoltage detection level. This function is not active when the
"undervoltage alarm cancel" signal is ON.
This signal turns OFF when the voltage recovers to exceed the undervoltage detection level.
Undervoltage detection level: 187.5 V for 200 V class series and 375 V for 400 V class series
8. Torque polarity detected (braking/driving) -- B/D

Provides a signal indicating whether the torque is for driving or for braking by detecting the polarity of the
calculated torque inside the inverter.
Turns OFF for the driving torque and turns ON for the braking torque.
9. Torque limiting -- TL
Turns on when the torque command is limited by the torque limiter 1 or 2.
10, 11. Torque detected 1, 2 -- T-DT1, T-DT2

Turns on when the torque command increases over the Torque detection level 1 or 2 (E46 or E47).
12. Keypad operation enabled -- KP

Turns ON when the operation command keys ( , , keys) directing running/stopping are effective (F02
"Operation method"=0).
13. Inverter stopped -- STOP

Supplies an inverted signal of the [RUN] signal indicating zero speed. Provides the ON signal during DC
braking, pre-exciting, and servo locking (synchronized control completed).
14. Inverter ready to run -- RDY

Turns ON when the inverter is ready for the operation, for example, the power supply to the main and the
control circuits are established or the inverter protective function is not active. Under a normal condition, the
inverter becomes ready in about one second after you turn on. During operation with the UPAC option (o38 ≠
0), [RDY] is turned on upon UPAC operation in addition to the above-mentioned condition. (It takes about 2
or 3s.)
This signal is turned off if the coast-to-stop command is turned on.
When the SX bus interface card (OPC-VG1-SX) or E-SX bus interface card (OPC-VG1-ESX) is mounted, the
ON-conditions of RDY are as follows.
When commands via the SX bus or E-SX bus are enabled (H30 = 2 or 3 and LE = ON), RDY comes ON the
moment the SX bus or E-SX bus becomes ready to communicate.
When commands via the SX bus or E-SX bus are disabled (H30 = 0 or 1 or LE = OFF), RDY comes ON as
usual.
15. Magnetic flux detected -- MF-DT

Turns ON when the calculated magnetic-flux value exceeds the magnetic-flux detection level (E48-5%).
4-156
16, 17. Motor M2, M3 selected -- SW-M2, SW-M3

Provides the motor switching signal to the magnetic contactor for a motor according to the selected motor M1,
M2, or M3 selected by the function code F79 or X control terminal.
Combination of the output signals

Motor to be selected
SW-M2 SW-M3
OFF OFF Motor 1
OFF ON Motor 2
ON OFF Motor 3
Chap. 4
ON ON Motor 1
18. Brake release signal -- BRK (Not available under V/f control)

Provides the mechanical brake apply/release signal.
There are the torque bias (F47 to F50), torque detection levels 1 and 2 (E46, E47), magnetic-flux detection
level (E48) and speed command detection level (H135, H136) as parameters (user-defined) for releasing
(opening) brake.
There are the speed detection level 1 (E38, E39), speed decrease detection delay timer (H134, H137, H138)
and speed command detection level (H135, H136) as parameter for applying brake.
Usually you should assign the brake releasing signal to the relay output (Y5A and Y5C) of the FRENIC-VG
standard DO. This signal is connected to the external mechanical brake (BRX relay). The action of the
mechanical brake is "NC contact".
Y5A-Y5C: Closing this releases brake and opening this applies brake.
Inverter running Operation ON when (speed reference) /

signal ON (detected speed) > E39
Torque bias
ready
Torque Speed command Speed command
detection (before detection (after
detection accel/decel) accel/decel)
FWD: H135 FWD: H135
Magnetic-flux REV: H136 REV: H136
detection
Failures of
Current
external
detection Inverter devices
Speed command running
detection (before
accel/decel)
FWD: H135
REV: H136
Y5A
TM On when Operation
H134) ready output [RDY]
Y5C
Speed decrease Inverterprotective
H137, H138) action
TM SD BRK BRX
Braking when ON
Servo locking function (braking not by a mechanical brake but by the inverter output torque) is also available.
See the zero speed locking command in E01 to E13 "X function selection" for more details. We recommend to
use the servo lock function not independently but together with a mechanical brake.
4-157
< Setting >
Brake release sequence
When all of the following conditions 1) to 6) are met, BRK ("Brake release signal") is turned ON to release the
mechanical brake.
1) RDY ("Inverter ready to run") ON
After main power ON → DC link bus voltage established → initialization completed, RDY comes ON.
2) Current detection
If the inverter detects current of 30% or more of the P08 (M1 exciting current) or A10 setting (M2 exciting
current) when M1 or M2 is selected, respectively, it judges the state as detection of current.
Note: When driving a permanent magnet synchronous motor (PMSM), the inverter judges 5% of the rated
current as detection of current.
3) Completion of torque bias startup
Torque bias can be added with F46 (Mechanical loss compensation), F47 to F49 (Torque bias T1 to T3)
and F50 (Torque bias startup timer). The inverter defines the elapse of the time specified by F50 as
completion of torque bias startup.
When no torque bias is added, the inverter judges RUN ("Inverter running") ON as completion of torque
bias startup.
4) Both FWD ("Run forward") and T-DT1 ("Torque detected 1") ON, or both REV ("Run reverse") ON and
T-DT2 ("Torque detected 2") ON
For FWD, specify the torque detection level 1 with E46; for REV, specify the torque detection level 2 with
E47. When the torque command comes to be the torque detection level 1/2 or above, T-DT1 or T-DT2 is
turned ON, respectively.
5) MF-DT ("Magnetic-flux detected") ON
This signal is turned ON when the calculated magnetic-flux value comes to be "Magnetic-flux detection
level (E48) - 5%" or above.
6) N-DT1 ("Speed detected 1"), N-DT2 ("Speed detected 2") or N-DT3 ("Speed detected 3") ON
For FWD or REV, the speed detection signal is turned ON when the reference speed (before
acceleration/deceleration) comes to be the speed command detection level (H135 or H136) or above.
Brake applying sequence

When any one of the following conditions 1) to 6) is met, BRK ("Brake release signal") is turned OFF to apply
the mechanical brake.
1) Both run command (FWD or REV) and N-DT1 ("Speed detected 1") OFF
Specify the speed detection mode with E38 and the speed detection level 1 with E39. When "N-FB1±
("Detected speed 1") / N-REF4 ("Reference speed 4") ≤ (Speed detection level (E39) - 1% of maximum
speed)," N-DT1 goes OFF.
If the speed detection level 1 (E39) is 1% or below of the maximum speed, N-DT1 goes OFF when
"N-FB1± ("Detected speed 1") / N-REF4 ("Reference speed 4") = 0 (r/min).
Note: Under vector control without speed sensor, select N-REF4 ("Reference speed 4"). (E39 = 1**).
2) RDY ("Inverter ready to run") OFF
3) RUN ("Inverter running") OFF
4) Inverter protective function (alarm) activated
5) N-DT1 ("Speed detected 1"), N-DT2 ("Speed detected 2") or N-DT3 ("Speed detected 3") ON
For FWD or REV, the speed detection signal is turned ON when both the reference speed (before
acceleration/deceleration) and the reference speed (after acceleration/deceleration) drops to "Speed
command detection level (H135 or H136) - 0.5%" or below.
(When H135 or H136 = 0.0 r/min, this condition is invalid.)
6) When the detected speed is kept at the speed decrease detection level (H137) or below during the time
specified by the speed command detection delay timer (H138), the brake is applied irrespective of the
presence of a run command.
(When H137 = 0.0 r/min, this condition is invalid.)
4-158
Starting speed/Stop speed

Brake application and release timings can be adjusted with the starting speed (F23, F24) and stop speed (F37
to F39).
(1) At the time of start
Starting speed without torque bias:
In order not to release brake during acceleration, set the starting speed (F23) to 0.1 r/min or above and set the
torque detection level 1, 2 (E46, E47) so that T-DT1 or T-DT2 ("Torque detected 1 or 2") comes ON within
the holding time (F24).
Starting speed with torque bias:
Chap. 4
Set the starting speed (F23) to 0.0 r/min and set the torque detection level 1, 2 (E46, E47) so that BRD ("Brake
release signal") comes ON within the holding time (F24).
(2) At the time of stop

Adjust the braking conditions to apply brake within the zero speed control holding time (F39).
Specifying the zero speed control (F37 = 0.0 r/min) and the speed detection level 1 (E39 = 0 r/min) enables
BRD ("Brake release signal") to go off after the motor (machine) stops completely.
Speed reference/speed detection

(motor speed)
F24 Starting speed F39 Stop speed (Zero speed

(Holding time) control holding time)
F23 Starting speed

> 0.0 r/min Time
0
Brake F37 "Stop speed"
Inverter ready to run Brake release = 0 r/min
application
RDY F39 "Speed detection level"
Operation command FWD = 0 r/min
Inverter running RUN

Current detection Inverter output shut off
Torque bias ready
Torque detected 1 T-DT1
Magnetic flux detected MF-DT
Speed detected 1 N-DT1
Brake release signal BRK
4-159
19-22. Alarm content -- AL1, AL2, AL4, AL8
Provides the operation status of the inverter protection function.
Output terminal
Alarm description (Inverter protective function)
AL1 AL2 AL4 AL8
No alarm OFF OFF OFF OFF
Overcurrent (ef, 0c ) ON OFF OFF OFF
Overvoltage (0u ) OFF ON OFF OFF
Undervoltage (lu ) ON ON OFF OFF
Main circuit error (dcf, pbf, dba , ecf ) OFF OFF ON OFF
CPU system error (er1,, er3, er8, era (*1)
ON OFF ON OFF
sif (*1) , srf (*1))
Overheat (dbh, 0h1, 0h3, 0h4, dfa ) OFF ON ON OFF
Overload (0l1, 0l2, 0l3, 0lu ) ON ON ON OFF
Speed error (d0, er9, 0s, l0c ) OFF OFF OFF ON
Input phase loss (lin, 0pl ) ON OFF OFF ON
Inverter output circuit error (er7 ) OFF ON OFF ON
Communication error (er2, er4, er5, erb ) ON ON OFF ON
Signal disconnection (nrb, p9 ) OFF OFF ON ON
Operation procedure error (er6 ) ON OFF ON ON
External fault (0h2, err ) OFF ON ON ON
Others (erh, a r1 to a rf ) ON ON ON ON
(*1) Available soon
23. Cooling fan in operation -- FAN

This signal is associated with H06 "Fan stop operation" and is present when the cooling fan is operating.
24. Resetting -- TRY

This signal is issued when the protective function is conducting the retry operation if you set one or more to
H04 "Auto reset (Times)".
4-160
25. Universal DO -- U-DO

You assign a data 25 to a digital output terminal to use it as a universal DO terminal. You can turn on/off
through RS-485, field bus, and UPAC. This function simply set ON and OFF to the transistor and relay
outputs without affecting the inverter functions.
The applications of this signal are:
1) To set ON/OFF to the control terminal directly through RS-485 or field bus.
2) To put the output which are assigned by the software created by the UPAC option on a DO of the control
terminals.
Chap. 4
<Application>
You do not have enough numbers of I/O and want to
use an inverter control terminal for a control output of

a PLC program.
If you use the control terminal [Y1]:
1) Set 25 [U-DO] to the function code E15 "Y1
function selection". Now the inverter does not use
the Y1 terminal internally and you can use the
terminal for the output of the communication.
2) Use the PLC to write "1" to the corresponding bit
(data type: 33) of the function code S07
"Universal DO". You will write "0001 [h] " for
[Y1].
26. Heat sink overheat early warning -- INV-OH

The heat sink overheat early warning will be issued
when the temperature of the heat sink reaches the
temperature five degrees less than the detection level
of "Heat sink overheat alarm" (0h1 ). This is an early
warning for the "Heat sink overheat alarm" which is
present when the ambient temperature of the heat sink
that cools the rectifier diode and the IGBT (PWM
switching device) due to the failure of the cooling fan.
The heat sink overheat level (X°C) is set within the
range of about 80 to 110°C based on the inverter
capacity and short-time rating (HD, LD, and MD), and
user cannot change it.
27. Synchronization completion signal -- SY-C

Turns ON when the synchronization completes within the pulse width specified by the function o19
"Deviation zero range" during the synchronizing operation with an option OPC-VG1-PG (PR). See the option
section for more details.
It also turns ON when the lock completes within the pulse width specified by the function H56 "Zero speed
control (completion range)". See the function description of the zero speed locking command (function code
E01 to E13).
4-161
28. Lifetime alarm -- LIFE
Turns ON when the accumulated operation time of main circuit smoothing capacitor, the electrolytic
capacitor on the control print circuit board, or the cooling fan.
The lifetime is determined by the following criteria and the lifetime is considered to be expired if either of
them is reached. You can see them in the maintenance information of the KEYPAD panel.
Part Life time determination level

Main circuit capacitor 85.0% or less of the initial value.
Life time expires when CAP=85.0%.
Electrolytic capacitor on Accumulated time: 87,600 hours
control print circuit board
Cooling fan 87,600 hours
Estimated life time in 45°C of inverter ambient temperature
This function indicates merely an approximate life span. Daily inspection and periodic inspection are
necessary to avoid failures and keep operating at high reliability over a long period of time. (Refer to Chapter
8 in Instruction manual INR-HF51306x.)
29. Under acceleration -- U-ACC

30. Under deceleration -- U-DEC
Turns ON during acceleration or deceleration.
Acceleration or deceleration is determined by comparing the input to the acceleration/deceleration calculation
unit (Speed reference 1) and the detected speed value. The Under-acceleration/ deceleration signal turns OFF
when the speed reaches to a level specified by the function code E42 "Speed equivalent (Detection range)".
31. Inverter overload early warning -- INV-OL

Provides the overload early warning signal at a level specified by the Inverter overload early warning (E33).
See the E33 "Inverter overload early warning" for more details.
32. Motor overheat early warning -- M-OH

Provides the overheat early warning signal at a level specified by the Motor overheat early warning (E31). See
the E31 "Motor overheat early warning" for more details.
33. Motor overload early warning -- M-OL

Provides the overload early warning signal at a level specified by the Inverter overload early warning (E34).
See the E34 "Inverter overload early warning" for more details.
34. DB overload early warning -- DB-OL

Provides the overload early warning signal at a level specified by the DB overload early warning (E36). See
the E36 "DB overload early warning" for more details.
4-162
35. Link transmission error -- LK-ERR (Available soon)

Turns ON when a communication error occurs in the transmission through the link (RS-485, T-Link, SX, field
bus). Turns OFF when the communication returns to normal.
36. In limiting under load adaptive control -- ANL

This signal comes ON when the reference speed is limited with the speed limiter value calculated under load
adaptive control. Once this signal comes ON, it does not goes OFF until the inverter stops.
37. In calculation under load adaptive control -- ANC
Chap. 4
This signal is turned ON during calculation of a movable load and speed limiter value under load adaptive
control. Upon completion of calculation, this signal goes OFF.
Refer to the description given for function codes H60 to H66 and H201 to H228 (Load adaptive control).

38. Analog torque bias being held -- TBH
This signal is turned ON when an analog torque bias hold command is entered.
39-48. Custom Do1 to Do10 C-DO1 to C-DO10

Do terminals for manufacturer.
50. Z-phase detection completed -- Z-RDY (Available soon)

When the inverter is used in combination with a PMSM equipped with an ABZ encoder, this signal comes ON
upon completion of Z-phase detection after the power is turned ON. Input of a run command before detection
of a Z-phase causes an alarm Er7.
51. Multiplex system communications link being established -- MTS

This signal comes ON when the communications link of the multiplex system has been established.
52. Answerback to cancellation of multiplex system -- MEC-AB

This is an answerback signal for switching the digital input MT-CCL ("Cancel multiplex system").
53. Multiplex system master selected -- MSS

This signal comes ON when the master unit is configured with the multiplex system selected.
54. Multiplex system local station failure -- AL-SF

If an alarm occurs in a multiplex system, only the inverter (local station) that detects failure outputs this
signal.
In the single-machine mode, this signal is functionally equivalent to "Alarm output (for any alarm)."
4-163
55. Stopped due to communications link error -- LES
This signal applies when the CC-Link interface card is mounted. It comes ON when the inverter switches to a
stop operation due to an occurrence of an alarm er4 or er5. Removing the alarm and restarting the inverter
turns this signal OFF.
56. Alarm output (for any alarm) -- ALM

The ALM can be output also via the Y terminal.
57. Light alarm -- L-ALM

This signal comes ON when a light alarm has occurred. Removing the alarm factor automatically turns this
signal OFF.
58. Maintenance timer -- MNT

This signal comes ON when the total of the M1, M2 and M3 startups (M123 to M125) exceeds the H82 setting
or the total of the M1, M2 and M3 cumulative motor run time (M126 to M128) exceeds the H83 setting.
Modifying either of the H82 or H83 setting that constitutes a forecasting factor turns this signal OFF.
59. Braking transistor broken -- DBAL

This signal comes ON when the error factor of a braking transistor alarm (dba ) arises. Even if the alarm is
defined as a light alarm, this signal comes ON.
60. DC fan locked -- DCFL

This signal comes ON when the DC fan for circulating air inside the inverter is stopped for one second.
The above inverter state also constitutes a heavy or light alarm factor. Alarms can be defined by H108 as a
heavy or light alarm.

This signal applies when motor M2 is selected. It comes ON when the deviation of the detected speed from
the speed command value (Reference speed 4: ASR input) is within the allowable range.
For details, refer to the descriptions of E114 and E115 (Speed Agreement 2, Detection width and Off-delay
timer) and E45 (Speed Disagreement Alarm).

This signal applies when motor M3 is selected. It comes ON when the deviation of the detected speed from
the speed command value (Reference speed 4: ASR input) is within the allowable range.
For details, refer to the descriptions of E116 and E117 (Speed Agreement 3, Detection width and Off-delay
timer) and E45 (Speed Disagreement Alarm).
63. Axial fan stopped -- MFAN

This signal comes ON when the NTC detection temperature of the motor having an NTC thermistor drops
below the setting specified by E118 and the inverter is stopped.
4-164
66. Answerback to droop control enabled -- DSAB

This signal is turned ON when the droop control is activated by turning ON the DROOP signal on an X
terminal.
When the inverter is stopped or under torque control, even turning ON the DROOP signal does not turn this
signal ON.
67. Answerback to cancellation of torque command/torque current command -- TCL-C

This is an answerback signal for switching between H41-CCL (Cancel H41 (Torque command)) and
H42-CCL (Cancel H42 (Torque current command)).
Chap. 4
68. Answerback to cancellation of torque limiter mode 1 -- F40-AB
This is an answerback signal for switching F40-CCL (Cancel F40 (Torque limiter mode 1)).

71. 73 ON command -- PRT-73
When a charger circuit is configured outside the inverter, use this signal as a 73 ON command for switching
the charger resistor bypass circuit. Turning this signal ON bypasses the charger resistor.
72. Turn ON Y-terminal test output -- Y-ON

This signal comes ON when it is assigned to the Y terminal function. Use this signal to check the connection
of Y terminals.
73. Turn OFF Y-terminal test output -- Y-OFF

This signal comes OFF when it is assigned to the Y terminal function. Use this signal to check the connection
of Y terminals.
74. Reading absolute position of serial PG in progress -- SPG-RD (Available soon)

When the inverter is used in combination of a PMSM equipped with a serial PG, this signal is turned ON
during reading of the serial PG absolute position. Refer to the SPG-AP on an X terminal (data = 77).
75. System clock battery lifetime expired -- BATT

This signal comes ON when the battery voltage level of the integrated battery (option for inverters of 22 kW
or below, standard for those of 30 kW or above) drops. If this signal comes ON, replace the integrated battery
as soon as possible.
76. Magnetic pole position tuning in progress -- TUN-MG (Available soon)

When the inverter is used in combination with a PMSM equipped with an ABZ-phase encoder, it is necessary
to tune the magnetic pole position before the initial operation after the power is turned ON. In a sequence of
tuning processes, during magnetic pole position tuning (approx. 0.8 s), this signal is turned ON.
For details, refer to the MP-TUN ("Tune magnetic pole position") on an X terminal (E01 to E13, data = 80).
4-165
77. SPGT battery warning -- SPGT-B (Available soon)
78. Electrical conditions ready -- ERD (Available soon)
79. IT detected in operation -- TCA (Available soon)
80. EN terminal detection circuit failure -- DECF (Available soon)

This signal comes ON when an Enable circuit failure is detected.
81. EN terminal OFF -- ENOFF (Available soon)

This signal comes ON when Enable input on the EN1 and EN2 terminals is OFF.
82. Safety function in progress -- SF-RUN (Available soon)
4-166
E28 Y Terminal Function (Normal open/close)
E28 specifies whether to open or close output terminals [Y1] to [Y5] by software.
OP: Open
CL: Close (short-circuit)
Ｅ２８ＹＮＯＲＭＡＬ
Example of configuration change through RS-485 or other communications links
Chap. 4
To configure Y2 and Y5 as normally closed contacts and configure other Y functions as normally open
contacts
1) Perform bit assignment in binary according to type [36] (refer to Section 4.2.3.2 Data Type).
2) Next, convert the bit-assigned binary data into a hexadecimal.

0000 0000 0001 0010 (binary) = 0012 (hexadecimal) Enter this hexadecimal data.
E29 PG Pulse Output Selection
Use this function to provide different applications with the PG pulse signal.
Ｅ２９ＰＧ－ＰＬＳ－ＯＵＴ
1) You can divide the pulse signal to supply. Set value: 0: 1/1, 1: 1/2, 2: 1/4, 3: 1/8, 4: 1/16, 5: 1/32, 6: 1/64
The input signal to the integrated PG is divided for output as presented above. You can use the divided
signal for digital speedometer.
2) You can convert the internal speed command (digital and analog) into pulse to supply. See the
<Application example 2> of Synchronization command [SYC] of the function codes E01 to E13 for more
details.
When E29 = 7: Pulse generation mode (A, B: Signals with 90° phase difference)
3) Converting the input via the PG interface card into arbitrary pulses to output
When E29 = 8: OPC-VG1-PG (PD), pulse train detection input is directly supplied to the pulse output.
When E29 = 9: OPC-VG1-PG (PR), pulse train command input is directly supplied to the pulse output.
See the <Application example 3> of Synchronization command [SYC] of the function codes E01 to E13
for more details.
4) Converting the speed detection pulse input into arbitrary pulses to output
When E29 = 10: Integrated PG, PG (SD), Detected speed pulse input oscillation mode
When E29 = 7 to 10, arbitrary pulses can be output. For details, refer to the description of E109 and E110.
E30 Motor Overheat Protection (Temperature)
Sets the temperature at which the motor overheat alarm (0h4 ) is issued. Specify the protection level
according to the isolation class of the motor.
Ｅ３０Ｍ－ＰＲＴ－Ｃ
Data setting range: 50 to 200 (°C)

Note: The E30 setting takes effect when the selected motor (M1, M2 or M3) uses an NTC thermistor or the
analog input signal M-TMP ("Motor temperature") is selected.
4-167
E31 Motor Overheat Early Warning (Temperature)
Sets the temperature at which the motor overheat early warning is issued before the overheat protection
becomes active. The early warning signal is put on the DO to which [M-OH] is assigned.
Ｅ３１Ｍ－ＷＡＲＮ－Ｔ
Data setting range: 50 to 200 (°C)

Note: This function is invalid if the PTC thermistor is used.
E32 M1-M3 PTC Activation Level
Activated when the input voltage from a PTC becomes higher than the specified voltage (activation level) if
you select to use a thermistor.
Ｅ３２Ｍ－ＰＴＣ－ＬＶＬ
Data setting range: 0.00 to 5.00 (V)

Connect a PTC thermistor as shown below.
The warning temperature depends on a PTC thermistor and the resistor of the PTC thermistor changes
drastically at the warning temperature. The activation (voltage) level is specified by this change of the
resistor.
The voltage level (activation level) can be calculated

with the following expression.
Voltage level (V) = 9 V/(Rp + 270000) x Rp
Set the Rp within the following range.
Rp1 < Rp < Rp2
To determine Rp easily, use the following expression.
Rp (Ω) = (Rp1 + Rp2)/2
When a PTC thermistor wire breaks, the inverter recognizes Rp = (Ω) and issues a motor overheat alarm
0h4.
4-168
E33 Inverter Overload Early Warning
Sets the level at which the overload early warning is issued before the Inverter overload protection becomes
active. When you set 100%, the early warning is simultaneously issued with the overload protection (0lu ).
The early warning signal is put on the DO to which [INV-OL] is assigned.
Ｅ３３ＩＮＶ－ＯＬＷＡＲＮ
Chap. 4
E34 Motor Overload Early Warning

Sets the level at which the overload early warning is issued before the Motor overload protection becomes
active. When you set 100%, the early warning is simultaneously issued with the overload protection (0l1 ).
The early warning signal is put on the DO to which [M-OL] is assigned. This function is valid only if the first
motor is selected. The motor overload early warning function does not operate if the second or third motor is
selected.
Ｅ３４Ｍ－ＯＬ－ＷＡＲＮ
E35 DB Overload Protection
Sets in %ED with respect to the inverter capacity. When you use a braking resistor with 10%ED, set as 10%.
When the set value is zero, the overload protection (dbh ) becomes disabled.
Ｅ３５ＤＢ－ＯＬ－ＰＲＴＣ
E36 DB Overload Early Warning
Sets the level at which the overload early warning is issued before the DB overload protection becomes active.
When you set 100%, the early warning is simultaneously issued with the overload protection (dbh ). The
early warning signal is put on the DO to which [DB-OL] is assigned.
Ｅ３６ＤＢ－ＯＬ－ＷＡＲＮ
E37 DB Thermal Time Constant
Sets the thermal time constant of a DB resistor to be used.
Ｅ３７ＤＢ－ＴＨ－ＴＣ
Data setting range: 0 to 1,000 (s)
4-169
E38 Speed Detection Mode
E39 Speed Detection Level 1
Provide signals when the Detected speed 1 [N-FB1±] /Speed reference 4 [N-REF4] exceeds the detection
level (1, 2, and 3). The detected signals are present on the DO's to which [N-DT1], [N-DT2], and [N-DT3] are
assigned. You can set the detection method (detection, speed reference) individually.
Ｅ３８ＮＤＴＭＥＴＨＯＤ
Ｅ３９ＮＤＴ１－ＬＶＬ
Ｅ４０ＮＤＴ２－ＬＶＬ
Ｅ４１ＮＤＴ３－ＬＶＬ
- Detection level
Three types of speed detection level can be specified
with E39 to E41.
If the specified speed detection level exceeds the
maximum speed, the inverter interprets the detection
level as the maximum speed. The hysteresis width is
1% of the maximum speed. If the specified speed
detection level is 1% or less of the maximum speed,
N-DT1, N-DT2 and N-DT3 go OFF when (Speed
detection level 1/Speed detection level 4) = 0 r/min.
E39: Level 1
Data setting range: 0 to 30,000 (r/min)
Note: The absolute value of the speed is used. When
E39, E40, E41 = 0 (r/min), the N-DT1 signal comes
ON when (Speed detection level 1/Reference speed
4) ≠ 0 (r/min).
E40, E41: Level 2 and 3
Data setting range: 0 to ±30,000 (r/min)
Note: When E39, E40, E41 = 0 (r/min), N-DT2 and N-DT3 are always turned ON.
- Detection method
The detection method of the speed detection function can be individually specified.
(0: speed detection (estimated).
1: speed reference)
E38 =
Definition of
E39
Definition of E41
Definition of E40
Speed detection is judged at speed detection 1 [N-FB1±].

Speed setting is judged at speed reference 4 (ASR input) [N-REF4].
4-170
Chap. 4
E42 Speed Arrival (Detection width)
Specifies the level (detection range) to

determine whether the Detected speed 2 (ASR
input) [N-FB2±] reaches the Speed reference 2
(before the acceleration/deceleration
calculation) [N-REF2]. The inverter provides
the detection signal when the detected speed is
between the Speed reference 2 plus the
hysteresis and the Speed reference 2 minus the
hysteresis. The 100% means the maximum
speed. The detection signal appears on the DO to
which the [N-AR] is assigned.
Ｅ４２ＮＡＲ－ＨＹＳＴＲ
4-171
E43 Speed Agreement (Detection width)
E44 Speed Agreement (Off-delay timer)
The N-AG1 (Speed agreement signal) takes effect when motor M1 is selected.
Set the agreement levels (agreement ranges) of the Speed reference 4 (ASR input) [N-REF4] and the Detected
speed 2 [N-FB2±]. The inverter provides the detection signal when the Detected speed 2 is between the Speed
reference 4 plus the Detection range and the Speed reference 4 minus the Detection range.
The 100% means the maximum speed. The detection signal appears on the DO to which the [N-AR] is
assigned. You can also set the off delay timer for the detection signal. If the Detected speed 2 goes out and
returns to the detection range in a period specified by the off delay time, the detection signal will not be set to
OFF.
For N-AG2 and N-AG3 (Speed agreement signals) to be applied when motor M2 and M3 are selected,
respectively, refer to the descriptions of E114 to E117.
Ｅ４３ＮＡＧＨＹＤＴＲ
Ｅ４４ＮＡＧＤＥＬＡＹ
Data setting range: E43 = 1.0 to 20.0 (%)

E44 = 0.000 to 5.000 (s)
E45 Speed Disagreement Alarm

Phase Loss Detection Level
E45 specifies whether the Speed disagreement alarm (er9 ) is issued or not when the deviation between the
Speed reference 4 (ASR input) and the Detected speed 2 remains for a certain period.
Ｅ４５Ｎ－ＵＥ－ＡＬＭ
Setting:
Speed disagreement alarm 0: Disable 1: Enable
Phase loss detection level 0: Standard level
1: Level for manufacturer
2: Cancel
Note: When BRK (Brake release signal) is assigned to a Y Detected value

terminal and H149 ≠ 0.0, the speed disagreement alarm (er9 )
takes effect and the speed agreement specified by E43 and E44
takes no effect. Command
Speed value
agreement
width
Hatched section indicates

the alarm domain
4-172
E46 Torque Detection Level 1
E47 Torque Detection Level 2
Provides a detection signal when the torque command exceeds a specified value. You can specify two levels
of detection level, level 1 and level 2. 100% means a torque command of the continuous rating. The detection
signals appear on the DO's to which the [T-DT1] and [T-DT2] are assigned.
Ｅ４６ＴＤＴ１－ＬＶＬ
Chap. 4
Ｅ４７ＴＤＴ２－ＬＶＬ
Data setting range: 0 to 300.0 (%)

Note: The calculated torque value is used for determination in V/f control.

E48 Magnetic Flux Detection Level
Provides a detection signal when the calculated magnetic-flux value exceeds a specified value. The detection
signal appears on the DO to which the [M-DT] is assigned.
Ｅ４８ＭＦＤＴ－ＬＶＬ
E49 to E52 Ai Terminal Function
E49 to E52 select functions to be assigned to analog input terminals [Ai1] to [Ai4], respectively.
Some functions are not available depending upon the drive control (vector control with/without speed sensor,
V/f control and synchronous motor drive). For details, refer to Section 4.2 "Function Code Tables."
Ｅ４９Ａｉ１ＦＵＮＣ
Ｅ５０Ａｉ２ＦＵＮＣ
Ｅ５１Ａｉ３ＦＵＮＣ
Ｅ５２Ａｉ４ＦＵＮＣ
4-173
Function
Terminal commands assigned Symbol Scale Remarks
code data
0 Shut down input signal OFF －－
1 Auxiliary speed setting 1 AUX-N1 ±10V/±Nmax Nmax: Maximum Speed (F03, A06, A106)
2 Auxiliary speed setting 2 AUX-N2 ±10V/±Nmax Nmax: Maximum Speed (F03, A06, A106)
3 Torque limiter level 1 TL-REF1 ±10V/±150% 100%: Motor rated torque
4 Torque limiter level 2 TL-REF2 ±10V/±150% 100%: Motor rated torque
5 Torque bias TB-REF ±10V/±150% 100%: Motor rated torque
6 Torque command T-REF ±10V/±150% 100%: Motor rated torque
7 Torque current command IT-REF ±10V/±150% 100%: Torque Current (P09, A11, A111)
Creep speed 1 for UP/DOWN

8 CRP-N1 ±10V/±Nmax Nmax: Maximum Speed (F03, A06, A106)
control
Creep speed 2 for UP/DOWN

9 CRP-N2 ±10V/±Nmax Nmax: Maximum Speed (F03, A06, A106)
control
10 Magnetic flux reference MF-REF +10V/+100% -
11 Detect line speed LINE-N ±10V/±Nmax Nmax: Maximum Speed (F03, A06, A106)
12 Motor temperature M-TMP +10V/200 -
13 Speed override N-OR ±10V/±50% -
14 Universal Ai U-AI ±10V/±4000 (h) -
15 PID feedback 1 PID-FB1 ±10V/±20000 (d) -
16 PID reference value PID-REF ±10V/±20000 (d) -
17 PID correction gain PID-G ±10V/±4000 (h) -
18-24 Custom Ai1 to Ai7 C-AI1-7 ±10V/±7FFF (h) -
25 Main speed setting N-REFV ±10V /±Nmax Nmax: Maximum Speed (F03, A06, A106)
26 Current input speed setting N-REFC 4-20 mADC/±Nmax Nmax: Maximum Speed (F03, A06, A106)
27 PID feedback amount 2 PID-FB2 ±10V/±20000 (d)
<Using analog input>

There are 19 types of analog input functions from 0 to 18 available. You cannot use all of these functions at
the same time. You can use total of four terminals, which are two terminals, [Ai1] and [Ai2], as standard and
two terminals, [Ai3] and [Ai4], using optional AIO. The maximum number you can use is four unless you
switch externally.
When you assign the same function to [Ai1] and [Ai2], the input to [Ai2] will become effective. When you
install the AIO option and assign the same function to [Ai1], [Ai2], [Ai3], and [Ai4], the input to [Ai4] will
become effective. (Priority order 1: [Ai1], 2: [Ai2], 3: [Ai3], 4: [Ai4])
Note that you should assign [U-AI] to all the analog input terminals at the same time.
Note: The current input function on terminal [Ai2] applies only to the N-REFC (Current input speed setting).
The function cannot be used on terminal [Ai1].
4-174
Setting procedure
• Select a function you want to use. We select the "Torque bias" as an example.
• Assign the "Torque bias" function to one of the available terminals ([Ai1] to [Ai4]). If you want to assign it
to [Ai2], write a data, "5:TB-REF", to the function code E50 "Ai2 function selection".
• Apply a voltage of ±10V/±150% to the analog terminal [Ai2]
considering the scale conversion of the torque bias in mind. If you need １５００
the torque bias of 15%, you should apply +1.0V. １２＝０．０Ｖ
• See the "I/O check" screen of the KEYPAD panel to confirm that +1.0V Ａｉ１＝０．２Ｖ
Ａｉ２＝１．０Ｖ
is applied to [Ai2]. The right figure shows the screen you must view.
Chap. 4
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥＳＨＩＦＴ５
• You can specify the bias, the gain, the filter and the increment/
decrement limiter applied to the analog input.

Function Application
Bias Sets the bias.
Gain Use to enlarge a small voltage range or to reduce a large voltage range.
Use a minus value to invert the polarity.
Filter Use to eliminate high frequency ripple and noise on the input voltage.
Since you apply a low-pass filter, excessive setting may slow down the response.
Increment/decrement Slants a step input voltage. The specified values work as rising and falling times.
limiter
See the description of the individual function codes for more details.
• You can use the DI terminal input to hold the analog input to zero or to invert the polarity of the analog input.
See Ai zero hold and Ai polarity change of E01 to E13 "X function selection" for more details.
See also the control block diagram to work with this function effectively.
0. Shut down input signal -- OFF

Select when you want assign no function to an analog input terminal.
Use when you do not use the analog input terminals.
1, 2. Auxiliary speed setting 1, 2 -- AUX-N1, AUX-N2

Assign a data 1 [AUX-N1] and a data 2 [AUX-N2], to desired analog input terminals to designate them as
Auxiliary speed setting 1 and Auxiliary speed setting 2 terminals. See the table below and the control diagram
for the points where the control inputs are applied. This function adds a speed (±10V corresponds ±maximum
speed) to main speed command values ([12] input and the multistep speed command). Two points are
available to add a speed.
Auxiliary speed setting Point of application Restrictions

1 AUX-N1 After multistep speed command Disabled when you use "0: KEYPAD panel" and
"3, 4, 5: UP/DOWN functions" of the function
2 AUX-N2 After acceleration/deceleration
codes F01 and C25.
calculation (acceleration/deceleration
calculation applied to input is
disabled)
If auxiliary speed setting 2 is larger than the stop speed level (F37), the motor keeps rotating at auxiliary speed
setting 2 even after the operation command (FWD, REV) is turned off. In this case, use the Ai zero hold
function with X function selection to zero-hold the Ai input simultaneously when the operation command is
turned off.
4-175
3, 4. Torque limiter level 1, 2 -- TL-REF1, TL-REF2
Assign a data 3 [TL-REF1] and a data 2 [TL-REF2] to desired analog input terminals to designate them as
Torque limiter (level 1) and Torque limiter (level 2) terminals. See the function codes F40 to 43 for torque
limiter.
5. Torque bias -- TB-REF

Assign a data 5 [TB-REF] to a desired analog input terminal to designate it as Torque bias command terminal.
See the function code F47 to 49 for more details.
6. Torque command -- T-REF

Assign a data 6 [T-REF] to a desired analog input terminal to designate it as Torque command terminal. See
the control block diagram and the function code H41 "Torque command selection" for more details.
7. Torque current command -- IT-REF

Assign a data 7 [IT-REF] to a desired analog input terminal to designate it as Torque current command
terminal. See the control block diagram and the function code H42 "Torque current command selection" for
more details.
8, 9. Creep speed 1, 2 for UP/DOWN control -- CRP-N1, CRP-N2

Assign a data 8 [CRP-N1] and a data 9 [CRP-N2] to desired analog input terminals to designate them as Creep
speed 1 and Creep speed 2 terminals. See the UP/DOWN functions of the function codes E01 to 13 for more
details.
The Ai input is processed as an absolute value.
10. Magnetic flux reference -- MF-REF

Assign a data 10 [MF-REF] to a desired analog input terminal to designate it as Magnetic-flux command
terminal. See the control block diagram and the function code H43 "Magnetic-flux command value" for more
details.
11. Detect line speed -- LINE-N

Assign a data 11 [LINE-N] to a desired analog input terminal to designate it as Detected line speed terminal.
See the control block diagram and the function code H53 "Line speed feedback selection" for more details.
4-176
12. Motor temperature -- M-TMP

Assign M-TMP (data = 12) to a desired analog input terminal to designate it as Motor temperature terminal.
When you use a FRENIC-VG dedicated motor, you can use the NTC thermistor supplied with a motor to
detect the motor temperature and to protect the motor from overheat (0h4 ). When you use a motor with a
PTC thermistor, you can use it for overheat protection. You can also use an electronic thermal relay for
protection against motor overload (0l1, 0l2, 0l3 ).
You can use this function to build your own motor overheat protection system detecting the motor
temperature directly without using method mentioned above.
You can use the function code E30 "Motor overheat protection" and E31 "Motor overheat early warning" to
specify the detection levels.
Chap. 4
13. Speed override -- N-OR
Assign a data 13 [N-OR] to a desired analog input

terminal to designate it as Speed override terminal.
You can supply +10V to override the speed with 150%
of the speed reference and supply −10V to override with
50% of the speed reference. See the control diagram for
a point of the control input.
Speed override Point of application Restrictions

13 N-OR Just after Auxiliary Disabled when you use "0: KEYPAD panel" and "3, 4, 5:
speed setting 1 UP/DOWN functions" of the function codes F01 and C25.
Used for acceleration/deceleration calculation. Restricted by the
maximum speed.
You can specify the coarse/fine adjustment of the speed.
Specified maximum speed value: 1,500 r/min
Specified speed reference value: 1,200 r/min (100%)
Input voltage applied to the terminal [N-OR]: ±10V
Coarse adjustment
As shown in the right graph, the overridden value is
600r/min for -10 V input and is restricted by the
maximum speed for +10 V input.
Applying voltage enables coarse speed adjustment
around the speed reference (1,200 r/min).
4-177
Fine adjustment Result of override
Set the gain of used [Ai] to 0,01 (function code E53 to 1206 r/min
56). Specified speed
reference value:
As shown in the right graph, the overridden value is 1200 r/min
1194r/min for -10V input and is 1206 r/min for +10V
1194 r/min
input. Applying voltage enables fine speed adjustment
around the speed reference (1,200 r/min). N-OR
0
Either the reference value of the maximum speed or the -10 V +10 V
precision of the analog input determines the resolution.
In this example, the resolution is determined by the
former one: 0.08 r/min.
The larger value between the following values determines the resolution.
Reference value of the maximum speed: 1,500 r/min ÷ internal data
20,000 = 0.075 r/min ≈ 0.08 r/min
Precision of the analog input: Unipolar scale (6 r/min) is divided into 15 bit.
Thus, 6 r/min ÷ 32767 (15 bits) × 100 (scaling) = 0.018 r/min
14. Universal Ai -- U-AI

Assign a data 14 [U-AI] to a desired analog input terminal to designate it as Universal Ai terminal.
You can use this function to check the existence of the input signal through communication and this function
does not affect the inverter operation.
You can use this signal to the following applications.
1) You can read out input signal as an analog data through RS-485 or optional field bus.
2) You can use Ai for an input to a software you create with the UPAC option or the PLC without affecting
the inverter operation.
The right figure shows a diagram of a winding control
utilizing dancer control.
The UPAC option uses PID control for dancer position
control. The line speed command generated by adding
the PID output to the line speed command for the
winding off side received from [12] is supplied to the
winding up side.
You can use an [Ai] terminal to read the dancer position
detected by a potentiometer. If you assign Universal Ai
[U-AI] to the AI input, the output of the potentiometer is
directly available to the UPAC. See the description of
the UPAC for more details on the UPAC.
You can also use [U-AI] to control in the same manner if
you replace the UPAC option and the bus connector
with the PLC and the communication line.
4-178
15. PID feedback 1 -- PID-FB1

16. PID reference value -- PID-REF
17. PID correction gain -- PID-G
Assign a data 15 [PID-FB], a data 16 [PID-REF] and a data 17 [PID-G] to desired analog input terminals to
designate them as PID feedback value, PID command value, and PID correction value terminals, respectively.
These terminals can be used as input terminals for feedback signals, command signals and correction signals
in the process under PID control. See the function codes H19 to H26 for more details on the PID functions.
18-24. Custom Ai1 to Ai7 -- C-AI1 to C-AI7
Chap. 4
Reserved for options and special applications.
25. Main speed setting -- N-REFV ±10 V/±Nmax (Nmax: Maximum speed F03, A06, A40)

The voltage (±10 VDC, Maximum speed/±10 V) applied to an analog input terminal makes analog speed
setting.
When using N-REFV on terminal [Ai2], set F01 data at "8" (N-REFV).
26. Current input speed setting (4-20 mADC) -- N-REFC 4-20 mADC/Nmax
This analog input is available only on terminal [Ai2].
The current (4 to 20 mADC, Maximum speed/20 mADC) applied to terminal [Ai2] makes analog speed
setting.
When using N-REFC on terminal [Ai2], set F01 data at "9" (N-REFC) and turn SW3 to the I position. (For
configuration of SW3, refer to Section 3.3.3.9.)
27. PID feedback amount 2 -- PID-FB2

This analog input is used to input feedback signals under PID process control.
Analog inputs PID-FB1 (PID feedback amount 1) and PID-FB2 (PID feedback amount 2) can be switched
by the digital input signal PID-1/2 (Switch PID feedback signals, data = 78).
For details about the PID control, refer to the descriptions of H20 to H26.
4-179
E53 to E56 Ai Gain
These function codes specify gains to be applied to analog input terminals [Ai1] to [Ai4].
Control internal data 2.500

Ｅ５３ＧＡＩＮＡｉ１
+10 V 1.000
Ｅ５４ＧＡＩＮＡｉ２
0.500
Ｅ５５ＧＡＩＮＡｉ３
Ｅ５６ＧＡＩＮＡｉ４
Data setting range: -10.000 to 10.000 (times) -10 V

Input voltage
0
Note: Terminals [Ai3] and [Ai4] are available only when +10 V
you install OPC-VG1-AIO.

-1.000
The data changed with the or key at the keypad
panel is valid. To save to the backup memory, press the -10 V
-2.500
key.
E57 to E60 Ai Bias
These function codes specify biases to be applied to analog input terminals [Ai1] to [Ai4]. A value of 100%
corresponds to a doubled offset value.
Control internal data 100.0%

Ｅ５７ＢＩＡＳＡｉ１
+10V 0.0%
Ｅ５８ＢＩＡＳＡｉ２
Ｅ５９ＢＩＡＳＡｉ３ -40.0%
Ｅ６０ＢＩＡＳＡｉ４
-10 V 0
Data setting range: -100.0 to 100.0 (%) Input voltage
+10 V
Note: Terminals [Ai3] and [Ai4] are available only when
you install OPC-VG1-AIO. -100.0%
The data changed with the or key at the keypad

panel is valid. To save to the backup memory, press the -10 V
key.
4-180
E61 to E64 Ai Filter
These function codes specify whether to apply a filter to analog input terminals [Ai1] to [Ai4], as well as
specifying a time constant of the filter individually. The filter used here is a low-pass filter. The time constant
means the time until the filter output data reaches 63% of the input data.
Since a large filter time constant decreases the response, consider the response of a mechanical system to
determine the time constant. If the input voltage fluctuates due to noise, first try hardware measures, and then
use this filter after you failed.
Use the function code (E65 to E68) to increase or decrease a command value gradually.
Chap. 4
Ｅ６１ＦＩＬＴＥＲＡｉ１
Ｅ６２ＦＩＬＴＥＲＡｉ２

Ｅ６３ＦＩＬＴＥＲＡｉ３
Ｅ６４ＦＩＬＴＥＲＡｉ４

Note: Terminals [Ai3] and [Ai4] are available only when you install OPC-VG1-AIO.
E65 to E68 Up/Down Limiter (Ai)
These function codes specify a time to increase a data inside the inverter from 0V to 10V when you change the
input from 0 to 10V applied to analog input terminals [Ai1] to [Ai4].
When you use the analog torque command or the analog torque bias, you may not use a command that
changes stepwise. A step-wise torque command may tear a paper in a paper rolling machine or present an
elastic vibration (damping) when a subject matter has a large elastic modulus.
To avoid this phenomenon, though you should change the command with an external volume, you can use this
Increment/decrement limiter to specify the automatic increase and decrease of an analog command value.
Ｅ６５Ａ／ＤＬ－Ａｉ１ +10 V
Input voltage
Ｅ６６Ａ／ＤＬ－Ａｉ２
Ｅ６７Ａ／ＤＬ－Ａｉ３ Time
0 t t t
Ｅ６８Ａ／ＤＬ－Ａｉ４
+10 V
Internal
Data setting range: 0.00 to 60.00 (s) control data
Note: Terminals [Ai3] and [Ai4] are available only when Time
the OPC-VG1-AIO is mounted. 0 t = Increment/decrement
limiter value (s)
4-181
Appendix
This section shows an example specifying the bias, the gain, and the increment/decrement limiter of [Ai1] and
assigning "Ai1 zero hold" to [X1] function and "Ai1 polarity change" to [X2] function. See also the control
block diagram for better understanding. The filter function is not included in this example, since you can use
this function to eliminate noise, but should not use actively.
Function code Set value

E01: Terminal [X1] Function 40: Zero-hold Ai1 ZH-AI1
E02: Terminal [X2] Function 44: Reverse Ai1 polarity REV-AI1
E53: Ai1 Gain 8.000 (magnification)
E57: Ai1 Bias -50.0 (%)
E65: Up/Down Limiter (Ai1) 2.00 s
• The increment/decrement limiter set the time for the change of an internal control data by 8 V (-4 V ↔ 4 V)
to 2.0 s × 8/10 = 1.6 s. Note that the increment/decrement limiter is applied not to the change of the input
voltage from 0 to 1 V, but to the change of the internal data scaled by the gain.
• The change of the internal control data to 0 V follows the increment/decrement limiter when the zero hold
signal [ZH-AI1]is applied.
• The change of the polarity of the internal control data follows the increment/decrement limiter when the
polarity change signal [REV-AI1] is applied.
4-182
E69 to E73 Ao Terminal Function
E69 to E73 select functions to be assigned to analog output terminals [Ao1] to [Ao5], respectively.
Some functions are not available depending upon the drive control (vector control with/without speed sensor,
V/f control and synchronous motor drive). For details, refer to Section 4.2 "Function Code Tables."
Ｅ６９ＡＯ１ＦＵＮＣ
Ｅ７０ＡＯ２ＦＵＮＣ
Ｅ７１ＡＯ３ＦＵＮＣ
Chap. 4
Ｅ７２ＡＯ４ＦＵＮＣ
Ｅ７３ＡＯ５ＦＵＮＣ

17 to 29 are reserved. Do not use them.
Function
Terminal commands assigned Symbol Scale Remarks
code data
Detected speed 1 (Speed
0 N-FB1+ +Nmax/10V Nmax: Maximum Speed (F03, A06, A106)
indicator, one-way deflection)
Detected speed 1 (Speed

1 N-FB1± ±Nmax/±10V Nmax: Maximum Speed (F03, A06, A106)
indicator, two-way deflection)
Reference speed 2 (before

2 N-REF2 ±Nmax/±10V Nmax: Maximum Speed (F03, A06, A106)
ACC/DEC calculation)
3 Reference speed 4 (ASR input) N-REF4 ±Nmax/±10V Nmax: Maximum Speed (F03, A06, A106)
4 Detected speed 2 (ASR input) N-FB2± ±Nmax/±10V Nmax: Maximum Speed (F03, A06, A106)
5 Detected line speed LINE-N± ±Nmax/±10V Nmax: Maximum Speed (F03, A06, A106)
Torque current command (Torque

6 IT-REF± ±150%/±10V 100%: Torque Current (P09, A11, A111)
ammeter, one-way deflection)
Torque current command (Torque

7 IT-REF+ +150%/10V 100%: Torque Current (P09, A11, A111)
ammeter, two-way deflection)
Torque command (Torque meter,

8 T-REF± ±150%/±10V 100%: Motor rated torque
two-way deflection)
Torque command (Torque meter,

9 T-REF+ +150%/10V 100%: Motor rated torque
one-way deflection)
10 Motor current I-AC 200%/10V 100%: Rated Current (P04, A03, A103)
11 Motor voltage V-AC 200%/10V 100%: Rated Voltage (F05, A04, A104)
12 Input power (Motor output) PWR 200%/10V 100%: Motor rated torque
13 DC link bus voltage V-DC 800V/10V Maximum value 820V/10.25V
14 +10V test voltage output P10 +10 VDC equivalent -
15 -10V test voltage output N10 -10 VDC equivalent -
16 Motor temperature TMP-M ±200°V/±10V -
30 Universal AO U-AO ±4000H/±10V -
31-37 Custom Ao1-Ao7 C-AO1-7 ±4000H/±10V -
38 Input power PWR-IN 200%/10V 100%: Inverter rated output
39 Magnetic pole position signal SMP TOP/5V
40 PID output value PID-OUT ±200%/±10V
Note: Terminals [Ao4] and [Ao5] are available only when the OPC-VG1-AIO is mounted.
4-183
<Using analog output>
There are 5 types of analog output functions--three terminals [AO1], [AO2] and [AO3] as standard and
additional two terminals [AO4] and [AO5] when an AIO option is mounted.
Setting procedure
• Check a device such as a meter including wires. Set data to 14 to check 10V output.
• Select a function you want to use. We select the "Detected Speed 1 (Speedometer, two-way deflection)" as
an example.
• Assign the "Detected Speed 1 (Speedometer, two-way deflection)" function to one of the available
terminals ([AO1] to [AO5]). If you want to assign it to [AO2], write a data, "1:N-FB1±", to the function
code E70 "AO2 function selection".
• See the "I/O check" screen of the KEYPAD panel to confirm that
[AO2] supplies +10.0V during operating a motor. The right figure １５００
ＡＯ１＝０．０Ｖ
shows the screen you must view. ＡＯ２＝１０．０Ｖ
• Connect a speedometer to the analog terminal [AO2]. ＡＯ３＝０．０Ｖ
• You can specify the bias, the gain, and the filter applied to the analog output.
Function Application
Bias Sets the bias.
Gain Use to enlarge a small voltage range or to reduce a large voltage range.
Use a minus value to invert the polarity.
Filter You do not need to change the factory set data 0.010 s (10 ms).
This filter does work for the noise affecting a device (such as a meter) and wires between the device
and [AO] terminal.
Take necessary measures against noise outside of the inverter.
See the description of the individual function codes for more details.
See also the control block diagram to work with this function effectively.
Output resolution
The AO converts 12-bit digital data into analog data for output. 11 bits are assigned to +12 V, thus binary data
corresponding to 10V is 1705 (2047 × 10/12).
When using +10 V to supply a speed reference corresponding to the maximum speed of 1500 r/min, for
example, the resolution is 1500/1700 = Approx. 0.88 r/min.
Output cycle
Output is supplied with a sampling cycle of approx. 1 ms.
4-184
0. Detected speed 1 (Speed indicator, one-way deflection) -- N-FB1+

1. Detected speed 1 (Speed indicator, two-way deflection) -- N-FB1±
Assign a data 0 [N-FB1+] and 1 [N-FB1±] to desired analog output terminals to designate them as
speedometer functions.
Use [N-FB1+] for a unipolar meter and use [N-FB1±] for a bipolar meter. This function detects encoded
motor speed and supplies a data after the speed detection calculation or the speed estimation calculation.
2. Reference speed 2 (before ACC/DEC calculation) -- N-REF2

3. Reference speed 4 (ASR input) -- N-REF4
Chap. 4
4. Detected speed 2 (ASR input) -- N-FB2±
Assign a data 2 [N-REF2], 3 [N-REF4] and 4 [N-FB1+] to
desired analog output terminals to output the speed reference
and detected speed of each of them. You can use these

functions to measure and observe the follow-up and the
deviation of the Detected speed 2 (ASR input) against
individual speed references externally. Note that the Speed
agreement (the comparison between [N-REF2] and [N-FB2±])
and the Speed equivalent ( [N-REF4] and [N-FB2±] ) of the
inverter DO output use these data for output.
The speed reference 3 in the right graph is not available for an
AO output.
5. Detected line speed -- LINE-N±

Assign a data 5 [LINE-N±] to a desired analog output terminal to designate it as line speed detection. The
highest data among the analog line speed [LINE-N], the digital line speed, detected speed by PG (LD) and a
data from integrated speed detection/estimation is provided to output.
6. Torque current command (Torque ammeter, one-way deflection) -- IT-REF±

7. Torque current command (Torque ammeter, two-way deflection) -- IT-REF+
Assign a data 6 [IT-REF±] and 7 [IT-REF+] to desired analog output terminals to designate them as torque
ammeters.
Use [IT-REF+] for a unipolar meter and use [IT-REF±] for a bipolar meter. You can use the function code
F51 "Torque command monitor (Polarity selection)" to select the output polarity.
4-185
8. Torque command (Torque meter, two-way deflection) -- T-REF±
9. Torque command (Torque meter, one-way deflection) -- T-REF+
Assign a data 8 [T-REF±] and 9 [T-REF+] to desired analog output terminals to designate them as torque
meters.
Use [T-REF+] for a unipolar meter and use [T-REF±] for a bipolar meter. You can use the function code F51
"Torque command monitor (Polarity selection)" to select the output polarity.
Torque meter and torque ammeter

A torque meter and a torque ammeter behave differently in constant
output range over the rated speed (100%).
You can use the torque ammeter as a load meter (equivalent to load
current).
You can use the torque meter as an output equivalent to actual torque
reflecting torque decrement.
Though both of them provide the command values, you can use them
as real torque and torque current since the FRENIC-VG controls the
current.
10. Motor current -- I-AC

11. Motor voltage -- V-AC
Provide effective values of the output current and voltage supplied to the motor.
"100%" indicates the rated current and voltage of the motor.
12. Input power (Motor output) -- PWR

This analog signal outputs the motor output power. The "motor rated power (kW) x 2" is output as ±10 V.
13. DC link bus voltage -- V-DC

See the control block diagram given in Section 4.1.8.
14. +10V test voltage output -- P10

This analog signal outputs +10 V for adjustment of an analog meter. (Use this signal for an analog meter
externally connected.)
15. -10V test voltage output -- N10

This analog signal outputs -10 V for adjustment of an analog meter. (Use this signal for an analog meter
externally connected.)
16. Motor temperature -- TMP-M

This analog signal outputs the motor temperature converted from input values selected by P30, A31 or A131
(M1, M2 or M3 thermistor selection).
4-186
30. Universal AO -- U-AO

This terminal is used to output analog data from the inverter via the communications link (RS-485).
Using an Ao terminal to output software made by a UPAC option or PLC makes the output free from the
inverter operation.
31-37. Custom-Ao1 to Ao7 -- C-Ao1 to C-Ao7

Ao terminals for manufacturers. Do not assign these signals.
Chap. 4
38. Input power -- PWR-IN
This terminal supplies power to the inverter. The "inverter rated power (kW) x 2" is output as +10 V.

39. Magnetic pole position signal -- SMP
This analog signal outputs the "pulse integrated value of the encoder attached to a PMSM" plus the magnetic
pole position offset (o10 when motor M1 is selected), as a magnetic pole position signal.
Depending upon the whether the motor rotation is normal or reverse, the inverter operates as shown below. A
single motor rotation outputs 1/2 cycle signal of the number of motor poles.
The SMP is used for adjustment of the magnetic pole position in Chapter 3, Section 3.5.3.3 "Vector control
for PMSM with speed sensor and magnetic pole position sensor."
40. PID output value -- PID-OUT

This signal is used to output PID output values under PID control.
4-187
E74 to E78 Ao Gain
These function codes specify gains to be applied to analog 2.50

Output voltage
output terminals [Ao1] to [Ao5]. +10 V 1.00
0.50
Ｅ７４ＧＡＩＮＡＯ１
Ｅ７５ＧＡＩＮＡＯ２
-10 V Control
Ｅ７６ＧＡＩＮＡＯ３ internal data
0
+10 V
Ｅ７７ＧＡＩＮＡＯ４
Ｅ７８ＧＡＩＮＡＯ５ -1.00
Data setting range: -100.00 to 100.00 (times) -10 V

-2.50
Note: [Ao4] and [Ao5] are available only when the
OPC-VG1-AIO is mounted.
E79 to E83 Ao Bias
These function codes specify the bias of analog output Ao1 to Ao5. Output voltage 100.0%
+ 10V 0.0%
Ｅ７９ＢＩＡＳＡＯ１ -40.0%
Ｅ８０ＢＩＡＳＡＯ２
Ｅ８１ＢＩＡＳＡＯ３ Control
-10 V 0
internal data
Ｅ８２ＢＩＡＳＡＯ４
+10V
Ｅ８３ＢＩＡＳＡＯ５
-100.0%
Note: [Ao4] and [Ao5] are available only when the -10 V
OPC-VG1-AIO is mounted.
E84 Ao1-Ao5 Filter
E84 specifies the time constant of the output filters for the analog output Ao1 to Ao5 simultaneously.
E ８４ＦＩＬＴＡｏ１－５

Note: [Ao4] and [Ao5] are available only when the OPC-VG1-AIO is mounted.
4-188
E90 Link Command Function Selection 1 (Available soon)
When E90 ≠ 0, it is possible to set Ai input data with digital data via the communications link (S16, S17).
The E90 setting has priority over Ai functions selected by E49 to E52.
Ｅ９０ＬＮＫＦＵＣ１
Scale
Chap. 4
Data for
Terminal commands assigned Symbol Internal definition
E90 S code setting
Internal range
0 Shut down input signal OFF －

(data)*Nmax/20000d
1 Auxiliary speed setting 1 AUX-N1 -20000d to 20000d
-Nmax to Nmax
(data)*Nmax/20000d
2 Auxiliary speed setting 2 AUX-N2 -20000d to 20000d
-Nmax to Nmax
0.01%/1d
3 Torque bias level TB-REF -32768d to 32767d
-327.68 to 327.67%
Creep speed 1 for UP/DOWN (data)*Nmax/20000d

4 CRP-N1 -20000d to 20000d
control -Nmax to Nmax
Creep speed 2 for UP/DOWN (data)*Nmax/20000d

5 CRP-N2 -20000d to 20000d
control -Nmax to Nmax
(data)*Nmax/20000d
6 Detect line speed LINE-N -20000d to 20000d
-Nmax to Nmax
1ºC/1d
7 Motor temperature M-TMP 0d to 200d
0 to 200ºC
0.01%/1d
8 Speed override N-OR -5000d to 5000d
-50.00 to +50.00%
0.005%/1d
9 PID feedback amount 1 PID-FB1 -22000d to 22000d
-110.000 to 110.000%
0.005%/1d
10 PID command amount PID-REF -22000d to 22000d
-110.000 to 110.000%
1 time/±16384d
11 PID correction gain PID-G -16384d to 16384d
-1.0000 time to 1.0000 time
0.005%/1d
12 PID feedback amount 2 PID-FB2 -22000d to 22000d
-110.000 to 110.000%
Observer torque FB
13 OBS-TFB －
(Available soon)
For details, refer to the Ai1 function selection.
4-189
E91 Link Command Function Selection 2 (Available soon)
When E91 ≠ 0 (OFF), it is possible to select analog data via the communications link (S17) in priority to Ai
input made by the Ai function selection.
Ｅ９１ＬＮＫＦＵＣ２

The setting contents are the same as for E90. Refer to the link command function selection 1.
E101 to Ai Offset
E104
These function codes specify Ai offsets. Only changing the

Offset Dead zone Gain Bias
function code data with the / keys makes the new data
E101 E105 E53 E57
effective. To save it into the backup memory, it is necessary
E102 E106 E54 E58
to press the key.
E103 E107 E55 E59
These function codes are functionally equivalent to E57 to E104 E108 E56 E60
E60.
+ +
Use these function codes for adjustment of out-of-offset Ai + +
×
0 to ±10V
signals sent from external equipment.
Ｅ１０１Ａｉ１ＯＦＳＥＴ
Ｅ１０２Ａｉ２ＯＦＳＥＴ
Ｅ１０３Ａｉ３ＯＦＳＥＴ
Ｅ１０４Ａｉ４ＯＦＳＥＴ

Note: [Ai3] and [Ai4] are available only when the OPC-VG1-AIO is mounted.
E105 to Ai Dead Zone

E108
These function codes specify Ai dead zones for analog

input entered via analog input terminals [AI1] to [AI4].
Command values below this input will be limited to 0 V.
Control internal data
Ｅ１０５Ａｉ１ＢＬＩＮＤ (%)
Ｅ１０６Ａｉ２ＢＬＩＮＤ
Ｅ１０７Ａｉ３ＢＬＩＮＤ
Ｅ１０８Ａｉ４ＢＬＩＮＤ
Data setting range: 0.00 to 10.00 (%) -10 Analog input

0 +10 terminal Ai
Note: [Ai3] and [Ai4] are available only when the (V)
OPC-VG1-AIO is mounted. Data setting range =

0.00 to 10.00%
4-190
E109 Dividing Ratio for FA, FB Pulse Output (Numerator)
E110 Dividing Ratio for FA, FB Pulse Output (Denominator)
E109 and E110 specify the numerator and denominator of the dividing ratio for FA and FB pulse output.
These settings are available when E29 = 7 to 10 or the SPGT option is mounted.
Ｅ１０９ＰＬＳＮＵＭＥ
Ｅ１１０ＰＬＳＤＥＮＯ
Chap. 4
Note: Specify E109 and E110 data so that E109 ≤ E110. Even when E109 > E110, the dividing ratio comes to
be "1."

E114 Speed Agreement 2 (Detection width)
E115 Speed Agreement 2 (Off-delay timer)
The N-AG2 signal (Speed agreement 2) is available when motor M2 is selected.

E114 specifies the detection width that is the agreement level between N-REF4 (Reference speed 4, ASR
input) and N-FB2± (Detected speed 2, ASR input).
If detected speed 2 is within the detection width (+ and -
polarity) from reference speed 4, the inverter issues N-AG2
(Speed agreement signal).
The off-delay timer of detected signals can be specified by ON
N-AG2
E115. If detected speed 2 comes back to the detection width N-AG3
from reference speed 4, the detection signal does not go OFF. N-REF4 - N-FB2±
OFF
Ｅ１１４Ｎ－ＡＧ２ＲＮＧ
Ｅ１１５Ｎ－ＡＧ２ＴＩＭ Setting level
Hysteresis width
E114, E116
Data setting range: E114 = 1.0 to 20.0 (%) = 1% of max. speed
E115 = 0.000 to 5.000 (s)
E116 Speed Agreement 3 (Detection width)
E117 Speed Agreement 3 (Off-delay timer)
The N-AG3 signal (Speed agreement 3) is available when motor M3 is selected.

These function codes are functionally equivalent to E114 and E115.
Ｅ１１６Ｎ－ＡＧ３ＲＮＧ
Ｅ１１７Ｎ－ＡＧ３ＴＩＭ
Data setting range: E116 = 1.0 to 20.0 (%)

E117 = 0.000 to 5.000 (s)
4-191
E118 Temperature for Axial Fan Stop Signal
When the NTC detection temperature of the motor equipped with an NTC thermistor drops below the setting
specified by E118, the inverter turns MFAN (Axial fan stop signal) ON.
The MFAN is used to stop the axial fan (cooling fan) of the motor when the motor is stopped.
Note that when the inverter is running, the MFAN signal is always OFF irrespective of the E118 setting.
Ｅ１１８Ｆ－ＳＴＰＴＭＰ
Data setting range: 0 to 200 (ºC)

Note: This function is available when the NTC thermistor is selected for the selected motor (M1, M2 or M3).
When any other thermistor setting is made, the MFAN is always OFF.
4-192
4.3.3 C codes (Control Functions)
C01 Jump Speed 1
C02 Jump Speed 2
C03 Jump Speed 3
C04 Hysteresis Width for Jump Speed
Chap. 4
Jumps the speed reference to avoid mechanical resonance points of a load.
You can set three jump points. When you set the Jump speed 1 to 3 to 0 r/min, this function is disabled. The
speed reference does not jump during acceleration/deceleration.

When specified ranges of jump speed overlap one another, the sum of them is considered as a jump range.
Ｃ０１ＪＵＭＰＮ１
Ｃ０２ＪＵＭＰＮ２
Ｃ０３ＪＵＭＰＮ３
Ｃ０４ＪＵＭＰＨＹＳＴＲ
Data setting range: C01 to C03 = 0 to 30,000 (r/min)

C04 = 0 to 1,000 (r/min)
If the jump width is larger than twice the jump speed setting, the downward jump is limited at 0 r/min.
(Example) Jump speed = 100 (r/min)
Jump width = 300 (r/min)
4-193
C05 to C17 Multistep Speed 1 to 13
You can set ON or OFF to the terminal function SS1,

SS2, SS4, and SS8 to switch among Multistep speed 1
to 15 (refer to E01 to E13 "X function selection" for
setting the terminal function).
When a terminal among SS1, SS2, SS4, and SS8 is not
defined, the terminal considered to be OFF. You can
select 1r/min or 0.01% for a unit of a setting range
according to the setting of C21 "Multistep setting
definition". When you choose 0.01% for a unit, 100%
is the maximum speed defined by the function code
(F03, A06, or A106).
Ｃ０５ＭＵＬＴＩＮ－１
-
Ｃ１７ＭＵＬＴＩＮ－１３
Data setting range: 0 to 30,000 (r/min), 0.00 to 100.00 (%) or 0.0 to 999.9 (m/min)
C18 Multistep Speed 14/Creeping Speed 1
C19 Multistep Speed 15/Creeping Speed 2
C18 and C19 also work as a creep speed function when you use the UP/DOWN function. See E01 to E09 "X
function selection" for more details.
Ｃ１８Ｎ－１４／ＣＲＥＰ１
Ｃ１９Ｎ－１５／ＣＲＥＰ２
Data setting range: 0 to 30,000 (r/min), 0.00 to 100.00 (%) or 0.0 to 999.9 (m/min)
4-194
C20 Multistep Speed Agreement Timer
When the terminal function SS1, SS2, SS4, and SS8 do not change simultaneously, a speed reference out of
the specification may be specified. When you use the Multistep speed reference agreement timer, the speed
reference changes after SS1, SS2, SS4, and SS8 maintain the same state for a time specified by the Multistep
speed reference agreement timer. Use this timer to use two or more terminals simultaneously among SS1, SS2,
SS4, and SS8 to switch the speed. If you switch only one terminal, leave the setting to 0.000s.
< Application example >
This section shows an example to use terminals SS1 and SS2 to switch the multistep speed. When you want to
Chap. 4
change from the Multistep speed 1 to the Multistep speed 2, you should switch two terminals simultaneously.
• When you set the timer to 0.00s, the difference in switching timing of SS1 and SS2 activates the Multistep
speed 3 for the delayed period and presents a operation pattern out of the specification as shown in the
upper right graph.

• When you set the time of this function code to a
period longer than the switching time, the switching
to Multistep speed 2 occurs just when a specified
time passes after SS1 is set to OFF. You can avoid
the Multistep speed 3 to be selected.
< Point >

The cycle sampling the terminal signals is about 500 µs (0.5 ms) in the FRENIC-VG. You do not have to set
this function if your switching period is shorter than the sampling cycle.
Ｃ２０ＭＬＴＮＴＩＭＥ
C21 Multistep Speed Configuration Definition
Sets the unit to specify the multistep speed.
Ｃ２１ＭＬＴＵＮＩＴ
Data setting range: 0 (Specify the multi-step speed in r/min.)

1 (Specify in increments of 0.01%.)
2 (Specify in m/min. (L03 lifter rated speed must be specified.))
If the C21 setting is changed, enter C05 through C19 again.
C25 Speed Command N2
Sets a method to specify the speed command. When the X terminal function [N2/N1] is set to ON, the speed
specified this function will be effective. See the description of F01 "Speed setting N1" for setting method you
can select.
Ｃ２５ＳＰＤＣＭＤ２
4-195
C29 Jogging Speed
Ｃ２９ＪＯＧＮ
Data setting range: 0 to 30,000 (r/min)

Sets a speed for inching a motor in addition to the normal operation. You can use this function for positioning
a work, for example.
You can choose the following two ways for the jogging operation.
• Turn on the X control terminal [JOG] to change to the jogging mode and set the operation command [FWD]
or [REV] to ON.
• Set the and keys on the KEYPAD panel to ON simultaneously to switch to the jogging mode and set
the operation command [FWD] or [REV] to ON.
C30 to C69 ASR S-curve Acceleration/Deceleration 2, 3 and 4,

and JOG Function Code Group
The function code group C30 to C38 becomes effective in the JOG mode.
The terminal input signal [RT1] and [RT2] set the function code group C40 to C69 to either enabled or
disabled. The speed limit function response gain in the torque control mode is adjusted with C60 (ASR4-P).
See E01 to E13 "X function selection" and the control block diagram for the details of switching.
Acceleration/deceleration time: See the description of the function code F07 and F08.
S-curve setting: See the description of the function codes F67 to F70. Note that you can set
only the two points, the start and end sides, for the S-curve
acceleration/deceleration 2,3, and 4 and the JOG.
ASR setting: See the description of the function codes F61 to F65. Note that you cannot
set the F/F gain to the ASR-JOG.
You can view the setting on the "I/O check" screen of the KEYPAD panel.
The right figure shows that the ASR2 and the S-curve deceleration (PARA
１５００
□ＰＡＲＡ１■Ｍ１□ＪＯＧ
2) are selected. ■ＰＡＲＡ２□Ｍ２
□ＰＡＲＡ３□Ｍ３
□ＰＡＲＡ４
4-196
C70 ASR Switching Time
This function specifies the duration of the switching,

when you use the X control terminals [RT1] and [RT2]
to switch the ASRs.
This function change the P (gain) gradually in a
specified time to reduce the mechanical shocks during
the switching. Specify the time necessary to change the
ASR gain 100 times.
Chap. 4
The right figure shows an example to set the [RT1] to
OFF, ON, then to ON to switch the gain between the
ASR1 and ASR2.

Ｃ７０ＡＳＲＣＨｔ
C71 ACC/DEC Switching Speed
C72 ASR Switching Time
Ｃ７１ＡＣＣ／ＤＥＣＣＨ
Ｃ７２ＡＳＲＣＨＳＰＤ

If both X control terminals [RT1] and [RT2] are off, use the speed setting of this parameter to automatically
switch the setting of acceleration/deceleration time ASR. (Deactivation of both [RT1] and [RT2] includes the
case where [RT1] and [RT2] are not assigned to X control terminals.) When the speed setting (ASR input)
exceeds the level specified at C71 and C72, changeover to acceleration/deceleration time 2 (ASR2) occurs.
The hysteresis width is 1% of the maximum speed.
If the setting is "0.00%," changeover does not occur. If the L04 (fixed S-curve pattern) is set at "1" or "2," the
C71 and C72 settings are invalid. "100.00%" indicates the maximum speed set at function codes F03, A06
and A106.
4-197
C73 Creep Speed Switching (under UP/DOWN control)
Specifies whether to use a function or an analog input to set the creep speeds used in the UP/DOWN setting
mode.
Ｃ７３ＣＲＰＳＷＩＴＣＨ

Description:
First digit: Creep speed 2 (0: function code C19, 1: analog input [CRP-N2])
Second digit: Creep speed 1 (0: function code C18, 1: analog input [CRP-N1])
See the description of the UP/DOWN in the E01 to E13 "X function selection".
4-198
4.3.4 P codes (Motor Parameter Functions)

P codes specify motor parameters available when motor 1 (M1) is selected. To use motor 2 (M2) or motor 3
(M3), specify motor parameters with A codes.
M1, M2 and M3 can be switched with Function code F79 and terminal commands M-CH2 and M-CH3
(which are assigned to digital input terminals with E01 to E13). Refer to the related function code and
terminal commands.
To check that M1 is selected, use Menu #4 "I/O Checking" on the keypad
and check that the box of the M1 appears black () as shown at the right. １５００
□ＰＡＲＡ１■Ｍ１□ＪＯＧ
Chap. 4
In addition to P codes, F03 to F05 and F10 to F12 are available when M1 □ＰＡＲＡ２□Ｍ２
is selected. □ＰＡＲＡ３□Ｍ３
□ＰＡＲＡ４
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥＳＨＩＦＴ 8

P01 M1 Drive Control
P01 specifies the drive control for motor 1, which can be selected from the following motor drive controls.
Refer to the description of P02 in conjunction with that of P01.
Ｐ０ 1 Ｍ１－ＣＴＬ－ＭＴＤ
Data = 0: Vector control for IM with speed sensor

2: Simulation mode
About vector control

The right figure shows a rotating coordinate (d-q axes) α
of a rotor on a coordinate (α-β axes) generated by q
two-phase conversion from a stator coordinate (U, V,
W). θ shows the rotation position and indicates the
position of the magnetic-flux (d axis=direction of Rotor coordinate
magnetic flux) observed on the fixed coordinate (α-β d
axes).
The alternating current (I) flowing through the stator
generates a rotating magnetic field. The rotor
coordinate (d-q axes) rotates at the frequency of this β
alternating current. If you observe the current (I) from Stator coordinate
the rotor coordinate (d-q axes), the current (I) seems
stationary. Thus, the alternating current (I) can be
considered direct current value on the rotor coordinate
(d-q axes). You can decompose the current into the d
axis element and the q axis element (I → Iq + Id). The
d axis current (Id) is defined as magnetic-flux current
(exciting current) denoting a current required to
generate a magnetic-flux. The q axis current (Iq) is
defined as torque current (load current).
When a load changes to require Iq' (indicated by a dotted arrow in the figure) as the torque current, you should
control the current by directing I' (indicated by a dotted arrow in the figure) as a current command while
maintaining the magnetic-flux current (Id). The control that maintains the magnetic-flux (Id = constant) and
changes the torque current (Iq) according to the load is referred as vector control. Since this control is similar
to the control for the direct current motor where the magnetic-flux is maintained constant by the magnet and
the rotor current is controlled according to the load, you can use the same control for a alternating current
motor as for a direct current motor.
4-199
About vector control without speed sensor
This control utilizes vector control (similar to DC motor control) for a motor without a pulse generator. This
control enables torque control, which is not available in V/f control. Use this control when you use existing
general-purpose motors or motors to which you cannot install a PG.
Note that the control capability (such as speed control range, speed control response, and speed control
accuracy) differs from that of control utilizing PG described in Chapter 2 "Specifications" when you select the
control. If you need this capability, select vector control with PG for a motor with a PG.
Tune the motor parameter to control properly. Use the function code H01 to conduct tuning (set value 3 and
4).
<Control mechanism>
Vector control without speed sensor calculates the motor speed and the magnetic pole position. This control
detects the output voltage and the output current and uses the motor parameters (R1, Lσ) identified through
tuning to calculate the induced voltage. The magnetic flux position is determined since the Ed element
obtained by decomposing this induced voltage into the d axis direction is 0. Since the Eq element on the q axis
direction corresponds to the induced motor voltage and is proportional to the motor speed, you can obtain the
motor speed. This control has the following restrictions compared with vector control with PG.
• Speed control range is limited at low speed due to the inferior accuracy of the induced motor voltage
compared with that at high speed.
• Speed control response is low due to the slow convergence of the internal calculation.
• Speed control accuracy is inferior due to the accuracy of the speed calculation based on the induced voltage.
About simulation mode

Selecting the simulation mode (P01 = 2) enables the inverter to internally run in a state similar to the actual
run without connecting a motor. Use the simulation mode for checking the system including I/Os or for
testing at the time of system startup.
When P01 = 2, the inverter shifts to the simulation mode irrespective of the current motor state.
As shown below, giving a torque command to a machine model (Load inertia: H51) accelerates the model to
a certain speed according to the load inertia. Since speed control is a type of feedback control, the machine
model rotates to follow the reference speed in the end.
The running state can be checked on the LED monitor and LCD monitor or with monitor codes (M field).
Note that neither current detection nor voltage detection is performed so that both the "output current" and
"output voltage" on the LCD monitor show "0."
Individual function codes and protective functions are available as long as they are not restricted.
During simulation mode, the inverter shuts off the base (its output) so that no voltage is developed in the
secondary side (U, V, W). For safety, however, cut off the secondary side or shut it off with a magnetic
contactor or the like.
L1 L2 L3
/R /S /T
Speed
reference
＋ Speed Current control
control Vector control
ー
Torque
reference
Speed
calculation Base
Machine cut off U V W
model
Control section Magnetic

duringsimulated operation H51 Load inertia M1
contactor
4-200
P02 M1 Motor Selection
P02 specifies the motor type to be used.

The configuration procedure of the related function codes differs between the use of the VG-dedicated motors
except Fuji VG1 5-series motors (Setting: "0.75-2" to "220-4" and "30-2A" to "220-4A") and that of other
motors (Setting: OTHER).
When the VG-dedicated motor is used, selecting the combination of "Capacity (kW)-Voltage (2, 4)" from a
choice of "0.75-2" to "220-4" and "30-2A" to "220-4A" automatically sets the optimum values of the standard
motors (see the table given on the next page) to F04, F05 and P03 to P27 and then write-protects those
Chap. 4
function codes.
When any other motor (Fuji VG1 5-series motors, Fuji motors, VG3, etc.) is used, select "OTHER."
Ｐ０２Ｍ１－ＳＥＬＥＣＴ

List of Applicable Motors
P02 data P02 data
Applicable Motor Models Applicable Motor Models
kW HP kW HP
00: 0.75-2 00: 1-2 MVK6096, MVK6095A 26: 45-4Y 26: 60-4Y MVK6208, MVK8208A
01: 1.5-2 01: 2-2 MVK6097, MVK8097A 27: 45-4S 27: 60-4S MVK6208, MVK8208A
02: 2.2-2 02: 3-2 MVK6107, MVK8107A 28: 55-4 28: 75-4 MVK9250
03: 3.7-2 03: 5-2 MVK6115, MVK8115A 29: 75-4 29: 100-4 MVK9252
04: 5.5-2 04: 7.5-2 MVK6133, MVK8133A 30: 90-4 30: 125-4 MVK9280
05: 7.5-2 05: 10-2 MVK6135, MVK8135A 31: 110-4 31: 150-4 MVK9282
06: 11-2 06: 15-2 MVK6165, MVK8165A 32: 132-4 32: 175-4 MVK9310
07: 15-2 07: 20-2 MVK6167, MVK8167A 33: 160-4 33: 200-4 MVK9312
08: 18.5-2 08: 25-2 MVK6184, MVK8184A 34: 200-4 34: 250-4 MVK9316
09: 22-2 09: 30-2 MVK6185, MVK8185A 35: 220-4 35: 300-4 MVK9318
10: 30-2 10: 40-2 MVK6206 36: P-OTR 36: P-OTR --
Fuji VG1 5-series motors
11: 37-2 11: 50-2 MVK6207,MVK8207A 37: OTHER 37: OTHER
Fuji motors, VG3, etc
12: 45-2Y 12: 60-2Y MVK6208,MVK8208A 38: 30-2A 38: 40-2A MVK8187A
13: 45-2S 13: 60-2S MVK6208,MVK8208A 39: 55-2A 39: 75-2A MVK9250
14: 55-2 14: 75-2 MVK9224A 40: 75-2A 40: 100-2A MVK9254A
15: 75-2 15: 100-2 MVK9252 41: 90-2A 41: 125-2A MVK9256A
16: 90-2 16: 125-2 MVK9280 42: 30-4A 42: 40-4A MVK8187A
17: 3.7-4 17: 5-4 MVK6115, MVK8115A 43: 55-4A 43: 75-4A MVK9224A
18: 5.5-4 18: 7.5-4 MVK6133, MVK8133A 44: 75-4A 44: 100-4A MVK9254A
19: 7.5-4 19: 10-4 MVK6135, MVK8135A 45: 90-4A 45: 125-4A MVK9256A
20: 11-4 20: 15-4 MVK6165, MVK8165A 46: 110-4A 46: 150-4A MVK9284A
21: 15-4 21: 20-4 MVK6167, MVK8167A 47: 132-4A 47: 175-4A MVK9286A
22: 18.5-4 22: 25-4 MVK6184, MVK8184A 48: 160-4A 48: 200-4A MVK931LA
23: 22-4 23: 30-4 MVK6185, MVK8185A 49: 200-4A 49: 250-4A MVK931MA
24: 30-4 24: 40-4 MVK6206 50: 220-4A 50: 300-4A MVK931NA
25: 37-4 25: 50-4 MVK6207, MVK6207A
Note: When using Fuji VG1 5-series motors, select "OTHER" for P02 and specify the motor parameters
given in the User's Manual, Chapter 12.
4-201
The table below lists the function codes to be configured for IM when vector control is selected. Configure
them sequentially from the top of the table.
Function codes to be configured for IM under vector control

Function codes Other motors
FRENIC-VG, VG7S, and VG3-dedicated motors and
Fuji special motors (incl. other manufacturers'
For M1 Name VG5-dedicated motors VG1 5-series motors
motors)
P01 Drive control 0: Vector control for IM with speed sensor Select either one of the following items depending
upon whether a sensor is mounted.
P02 Motor selection Select from a choice of Select "37: OTHER."
"0.75-2" to "220-4" and Selecting "36: P-OTR" automatically write-protects Function codes F04, F05,
"30-2A" to "220-4A." and P03 to P27. Make this choice if needed after completion of configuration
For the relationship of other function codes.
between the setting data
and the motor type, refer
to Format [82] in the
FRENIC-VG User's
Manual, Chapter 4,
Section 4.2.4.2, "Data
type 12-145."
F04 Rated speed Configuring P02 Manually enter data given For values to be set, Enter the motor
F05 Rated voltage automatically sets the in the FRENIC-VG consult your Fuji sales nameplate values
following function code User's Manual, Chapter representative. manually.
P03 Rated capacity
data and write-protects 12, "Replacement
P04 Rated current it. Information."
P05 No. of poles - Motor nameplate
P06 %R1 values Do not perform Perform auto-tuning of
P07 %X - Optimum motor auto-tuning of motor motor parameters,
parameter values parameters with H01. referring to the
P08 Exciting current
Turning the power OFF auto-tuning procedure
P09 Torque current given in the description
does not lose these
P10, Slip frequency of values. of H01.
P11 motor for driving Do not perform
and braking auto-tuning of motor
P12- Iron loss factors parameters with H01.
P14 1-3
P15- Magnetic
P19 saturation factors
1-5
P20 Secondary time
constant
P21 Induced voltage
factor
P22- R2 correction
P24 factors 1-3
P25 Exciting current
correction factor
P26, ACR P-gain, No change from the initial value is required.
P27 Integral constant
P28 Pulse resolution Specify the pulse resolution of the motor PG.
Not valid under vector control without speed sensor.
P29 External PG If the motor PG is incorporated in the machinery, specify the correction factor to convert the number of
correction factor pulses into the motor speed.
P30 Thermistor 1: NTC thermistor For details about motor protection, refer to the
selection description of F10 in the FRENIC-VG User's
F10 Electronic 0: Disable (For VG-dedicated motors) Manual, Chapter 4, Section 4.3.1.
thermal overload
protection
(Select motor
characteristics)
P32 Online Select whether to enable the compensation function for the resistance change due to the temperature rise
auto-tuning of the motor running.
(No tuning starts when the NTC thermistor is enabled.)
4-202

FRENIC-VG, VG7S, and VG3-dedicated motors and
Fuji special motors (incl. other manufacturers'
For M1 Name VG5-dedicated motors VG1 5-series motors
motors)
H01 Auto-tuning Not required since configuring P02 as described above Required.
automatically sets the optimum values to the related Be sure to perform auto-tuning with actual wiring.
function codes.
Refer to the auto-tuning procedure given in the
Note that, perform auto-tuning (H01 = 2) when the description of H01.
impedance at the output side is not negligible because
the wiring distance between the inverter and motor is
long (100 m or more) or an output circuit filter (OFL)
is connected.
H02 Full save After performing auto-tuning with H01, be sure to execute the full save function (H02 = 1) to write the
function tuning result into the non-volatile memory.
Chap. 4
Not required if no auto-tuning is performed.
Note: The VG-dedicated motors are the same as the VG7- and VG5-dedicated motors in shape and motor
parameters.
4-203
The table below lists the function codes to be configured for PMSM when vector control is selected.
Configure them sequentially from the top of the table.
When Fuji standard motors (GNF2 type) are used, the following function codes take effect. For other motors,
consult your Fuji sales representative.
Function codes to be configured for PMSM under vector control

FRENIC-VG dedicated motor
For M1 Name (incl. other manufacturers' motors)
P01 Drive control 3: Vector control for PMSM with speed sensor 3: Vector control for PMSM with speed sensor
"Vector control without speed sensor" not
supported.
P02 Motor selection Select "37: OTHER."
Selecting "36: P-OTR" automatically write-protects Function codes F04, F05, and P03 to P27.
Make this choice if needed after completion of configuration of other function codes.
P03 Rated capacity
P04 Rated current
F05 Rated voltage
F04 Rated speed
F03 Maximum speed
P05 No. of poles
P06 %R1 For values to be set, consult your Fuji sales representative.
P07 %X
P08 Magnetic flux
weakening current
P09 Torque current
P21 Induced voltage factor
P26, ACR P-gain,
P27 Integral constant
P28 Pulse resolution Specify the pulse resolution of the motor PG.
P30 Thermistor selection 1: NTC thermistor For details about motor protection, refer to the
F10 Electronic thermal 0: Disable (For VG-dedicated motors) description of F10 in the FRENIC-VG User's
overload protection Manual, Chapter 4, Section 4.3.1.
(Select motor
characteristics)
P33 Maximum voltage Specify the maximum voltage applicable to the motor.
Limit
o09 Absolute signal input Specify the data in accordance with the encoder specifications.
definition
o10 Magnetic pole position
offset
o11 Salient pole rate
(%Xq/%Xd)
P12-P14 Iron loss factors 1-3
P42 q-axis induction
magnetic saturation
For values to be set, consult your Fuji sales representative.
coefficient
P43 Magnetic flux limiting
value
P44 Overcurrent protection
level
P45-P51 Torque correction gain
1-7
H01 Auto-tuning For values to be set, consult your Fuji sales representative.
H02 Full save function After performing auto-tuning with H01, be sure to execute the full save function to write the
tuning data into the non-volatile memory.
4-204
The table below lists the function codes to be configured for IM when V/f control is selected. Configure them
sequentially from the top of the table.
Function codes to be configured for IM under V/f control

Function codes FRENIC-VG, VG3-dedicated motors, and Other motors
For M1 Name VG1 5-series motors (incl. other manufacturers' motors)
P01 Drive control 5: V/f control for IM
P02 Motor selection Select "37: OTHER."
Selecting "36: P-OTR" automatically write-protects Function codes F04, F05, and P03 to P27. Make
this choice if needed after completion of configuration of other function codes.
Chap. 4
P03 Rated capacity Manually enter data given in the FRENIC-VG User's Enter the motor nameplate values manually.
P04 Rated current Manual, Chapter 12, "Replacement Information."
F03 Maximum speed Do not perform auto-tuning of motor parameters
with H01.
F04 Rated speed

F05 Rated voltage
P05 No. of poles
P06 %R1 Refer to the calculation procedures given in the
P07 %X description of P06 and P07 in the FRENIC-VG
User's Manual, Chapter 4, Section 4.3.4.
P08 Exciting current Set the no-load current of the motor written on the
motor test report.
P33 Maximum output voltage Set the maximum voltage of the motor.
P34 Slip compensation Refer to the calculation procedure given in the description of P34 in the FRENIC-VG User's Manual,
Chapter 4, Section 4.3.4.
P35 Torque boost 0.0: Auto torque boost (factory default) If the motor constant is unknown, set P35 to "2.0"
If a starting torque is required, adjust the torque (Manual boost).
boost within the range of 0.1 to 20.0. If a starting torque is required, adjust the torque
boost within the range of 0.1 to 20.0.
P30 Thermistor selection 1: NTC thermistor For details about motor protection, refer to the
F10 Electronic thermal 0: Disable (For VG-dedicated motors) description of F10 in the FRENIC-VG User's
overload protection Manual, Chapter 4, Section 4.3.1.
(Select motor
characteristics)
H01 Tuning Not required since configuring P02 as described Required.
above automatically sets the optimum values to the Be sure to perform auto-tuning with actual wiring.
related function codes.
Refer to the auto-tuning procedure given in the
Note that, perform auto-tuning (H01 = 2) when the description of H01.
impedance at the output side is not negligible because
the wiring distance between the inverter and motor is
long (100 m or more) or an output circuit filter (OFL)
is connected.
H02 Full save function After performing auto-tuning with H01, be sure to execute the full save function to write the tuning
data into the non-volatile memory.
Note: The VG-dedicated motors are the same as the VG7- and VG5-dedicated motors in shape and motor
parameters.
4-205
P03 M1 Rated Capacity
P03 specifies the rated capacity of motor 1. Set the motor nameplate value.
For a multiwinding motor, set the motor capacity per winding.
Ｐ０３Ｍ１－ＣＡＰ
Data setting range: For inverters of 400 kW or below

0.00 to 500.00 (kW) when F60 = 0
0.00 to 600.00 (HP) when F60 = 1
For inverters of 500 kW or above
0.00 to 1200.00 (kW) when F60 = 0
0.00 to 1600.00 (HP) when F60 = 1
P04 specifies the rated current of motor 1. Set the motor nameplate value.
Ｐ０４Ｍ１－Ｉｒ

100.0 to 999.9 (A)
1000 to 2000 (A)
P05 M1 Number of Poles
P05 specifies the number of poles of motor 1. Set the motor nameplate value.
Ｐ０５Ｍ１－ＰＯＬＥＳ
4-206
P06 M1 %R1
Ｐ０６Ｍ１－％Ｒ１

(R1 (Ω) + Cable resistance (Ω) × P04 : Motor rated current (A)
%R1 = ×100 (%)
F05 : Motor rated voltage (V)/ 3
Chap. 4
Use a value corresponding to the Y connection for one phase to specify R1 (Ω).
Use a value corresponding to one winding of multiwinding motor.

P07 M1 %X
Ｐ０７Ｍ１－％Ｘ

(Lσ (H) + Cable L (H) × P04 : Motor rated current (A) P05： Pole numbers × F04： Rated speed (r/min)
%X = × 2π （） ×100 (%)
F05 : Motor rated voltage (V) / 3 120
Use a value corresponding to the Y connection to specify Lσ (H).

Use a value corresponding to one winding of multiwinding motor.
P08 M1 Exciting Current/Magnetic Flux Weakening Current (-Id)
Sets the effective current value of the motor 1 during no-load operation.
Ｐ０８Ｍ１－ＩＭ

100.0 to 999.9 (A)
1,000 to 2,000 (A)
P09 M1 Torque Current
Sets the current contributing torque.
Ｐ０９Ｍ１－ＩＴ

100.0 to 999.9 (A)
1,000 to 2,000 (A)
P09 : Torque current = (P04 : Rated current) 2 − (P08 : Exciting current) 2 (A)
4-207
P10 M1 Slip Frequency (For driving)
P11 M1 Slip Frequency (For braking)
Sets the slips of the motor at rated speed and under rated load.
Ｐ１０Ｍ１－ＳＬＩＰｄ
Ｐ１１Ｍ１－ＳＬＩＰｂ
Data setting range: 0.001 to 10.000 (Hz)
P05 : Pole numbers × (Synchronized speed) (r/min) - F04 : Rated speed (r/min)
Slip frequency (Hz) =
120
P12 M1 Iron Loss Factor 1
P12 to P14 specify iron loss factors to compensate the iron loss (hysteresis loss, eddy current loss) caused
inside the motor.
When using motors other than Fuji standard motors, set the iron loss compensation at 0.00%..
Ｐ１２Ｍ１－ＬＯＳＳ１
Ｐ１３Ｍ１－ＬＯＳＳ２
Ｐ１４Ｍ１－ＬＯＳＳ３
P15 M1 Magnetic Saturation Factor 1
P15 to P19 specify the magnetic saturation factors for the exciting current to apply when the magnetic-flux
command is 93.75%, 87.5%, 75%, 62.5% and 50%, respectively.
Since the relationship between the exciting current (that generates magnetic-flux in an IM) and the magnetic
flux is non-linear. To compensate it, specify the factors with these function codes.
Ｐ１５Ｍ１－ＳＡＴ１
Ｐ１６Ｍ１－ＳＡＴ２
Ｐ１７Ｍ１－ＳＡＴ３
Ｐ１８Ｍ１－ＳＡＴ４
Ｐ１９Ｍ１－ＳＡＴ５
4-208
P20 M1 Secondary Time Constant
The response of the magnetic-flux to the exciting current is a first-order lag. This time constant is defined as
secondary time constant and you should set a value determined by the motor parameters as in the following
equation. You can compensate the lag to lead.
Ｐ２０Ｍ１－ＮＤ－ＴＣ
Chap. 4
Set value: Secondary time constant [s]=Lm [H] / R2 [Ω]
Lm: Exciting inductance, R2: Resistance of secondary winding

P21 M1 Induced Voltage Factor
The rotating magnetic field generated by the stator (primary winding) sections the rotor vertically to induce
voltage on the secondary side in an induction machine. You can add voltage larger than this induced voltage
to accelerate a motor. This function sets a coefficient to compensate this induced voltage.
Ｐ２１Ｍ１－ＥＭＦ－ＣＯＦ

Set value: Effective induced voltage substituted by the voltage between the windings at the rated speed.
P22 M1 R2 Correction Factor 1
The resistance of the rotor (secondary resistor) is used to calculate the slip frequency in vector control of slip
frequency type. The change in secondary resistance due to the temperature increase caused by the frequent
operation or load may degrade the torque control accuracy. The inverter detect the temperature with an NTC
thermistor and use R2 correction coefficient 1, 2, and 3 to estimate the rotor temperature to prevent the
decrease of the torque control accuracy. Do not change these settings.
Ｐ２２Ｍ１－Ｒ２ＣＯＲＲ１
Ｐ２３Ｍ１－Ｒ２ＣＯＲＲ２
Ｐ２４Ｍ１－Ｒ２ＣＯＲＲ３
P25 M1 Exciting Current Correction Factor
Corrects the exciting inductance. Do not change these settings.
Ｐ２５Ｍ１－ＩＭＣＯＲＲ
4-209
P26 M1 ACR (P-gain)
P27 M1 ACR (I-time)
Vector control feeds back the motor output current to control a motor to follow the current command. These
functions specify the gain and the integration time for the current control (ACR). Usually you do not have to
change from the factory setting.
When a winding has a large inductance, you should set a large P gain to compensate it in general. When a
winding has a small inductance, you should set a small P gain to prevent OC (overcurrent) due to the
overshoot of the current.
You should specify the integration time to reduce the steady-state deviation between the current command
and the actual current to zero. Do not specify too small value otherwise a current hunting occurs.
Ｐ２６Ｍ１－ＡＣＲ－Ｐ
Ｐ２７Ｍ１－ＡＣＲ－Ｉ
P26 setting range: 0.1 to 20.0

P27 setting range: 0.1 to 100.0 (ms)
P28 M1 Pulse Resolution
P28 specifies the pulse resolution (P/R) of the speed detector PG of motor 1. Specification of a wrong value
unstabilizes the detection of the speed and magnetic pole position, disabling accurate speed control or vector
control.
Ｐ２８Ｍ１－ＰＧ－ＰＬＵＳ
Data setting range: 100 to 60,000
P29 M1 External PG Correction Factor
You need a correction coefficient to convert the output of a PG built in a machine system into the motor speed
to control the speed. Set the coefficient here. Speed control by PG requires parameter setting at both P28 and
P29.
Ｐ２９ＰＧ－ＣＯＭＰ
Data setting range: 0000 to 4FFF (h)

When you do not use an external PG, do not change from 4000h. The value of 4000h corresponds to a gear
ratio of 1:1, i.e., a PG directly coupled to a motor. When you use a PG directly coupled to a motor, if you set
a value other than 4000h, you cannot conduct speed and vector controls accurately.
Setting procedure
Suppose the gear ratio is A:B, specify the function code P28 and P29 as indicated below.
B
Function code P28 (M1 - PG pulse number) = Integer part of k (PG pulse number) ×
A
⎡ P28 ⎤
Function code P29 (M1 external PG correction coefficient) = ⎢ ⎥ × 214 (h)
⎢k × B ⎥ Gear
⎣ A⎦ A:B
FRENIC-
Ｍ PG pulse number: k
VG
PG
Speed detection
4-210
Setting example
If PG pulse number = 1,024 and the gear ratio A:B = 7:1, then:
1
Function code P28 (M1 - PG pulse number) = Integer part of 1024 (PG pulse number) × = 146
7
⎡ P28 ⎤ ⎡ 146 ⎤
Function code P29 (M1 external PG correction coefficient) = ⎢ ⎥ × 214 (d) = ⎢ ⎥ × 214 (d) = 16352(d) = 3FE0(h)
⎢k × B ⎥ ⎢1024 × 1 ⎥
⎣ A⎦ ⎣ 7⎦
P30 M1 Thermistor Selection
Chap. 4
P30 selects a thermistor type or an analog input (0 to 10 V) sent from the temperature sensor for motor
protection.
For FRENIC-VG motors (VG7S, VG5 and VG3), select an NTC thermistor. If the motor has a PTC

thermistor of overheat protection, select a PTC thermistor.
Ｐ３０Ｍ１－ＴＨＲ
Data setting range: 0 (No thermistor)

1 (NTC thermistor (for VG standard motors))
2 (PTC thermistor)
3 (Ai [M-TMP])
The protection level of the motor can be specified by E30 (Motor Overheat Protection, Temperature).
P32 M1 Online Auto-tuning
A52 M2 Online Auto-tuning
A152 M3 Online Auto-tuning
P32, A52 and A152 select whether or not to perform auto-tuning for compensating constants change due to
temperature rise.
• Perform auto-tuning of motor constants.
• Be sure to test-run the combination of the inverter and motor beforehand.
• Auto-tuning is not available when an NTC thermistor is used.
Ｐ３２Ｍ１－ＯＮＴＵＮＥ
Ａ５２Ｍ２－ＯＮＴＵＮＥ
Ａ１５２Ｍ３－ＯＮＴＵＮＥ
Data setting range: 0 (Disable)

1 (Enable)
P33 M1 Maximum Output Voltage/Maximum Voltage Limit
P33 is provided for V/f control and vector control for PMSM. Under V/f control, the P33 setting applies to the
maximum output voltage, so specify the output voltage of the inverter running at high speed. The voltage
higher than the source voltage cannot be output.
Under vector control for PMSM, the P33 setting applies to the maximum voltage limit value, so specify the
maximum voltage that the inverter can output. Do not specify the voltage less than the rated voltage.
Ｐ３３Ｍ１－Ｖｍ a x
4-211
P34 M1 Slip Compensation
P34 is exclusive to V/f control. A change in the load torque will change the motor slip, resulting in the motor
speed change. The slip compensation control adds a frequency proportional to the motor torque to the inverter
output frequency and reduces the fluctuation of the motor speed due to torque change.
Ｐ３４Ｍ１－ＳＬＩＰｄ
Data setting range: -20.000 to 5.000 (Hz)

The slip compensation value can be calculated with the following expression.
Slip (r/min)
Slip compensation value = Base frequency x (Hz)
Synchronous speed (r/min)
Where, Slip = Synchronous speed - Rated speed
When P34 = 0.000 (Hz), the slip compensation control is disabled.
P35 M1 Torque Boost
P35 is exclusive to V/f control. The following choices are available.
Ｐ３５Ｍ１－ＢＯＯＳＴ
- Load characteristics including automatic torque boost, variable torque load, proportional torque load, and
constant torque load.
- Compensating insufficient magnetic-flux of a motor due to the voltage drop in the low frequency range and
boosting torque at low speed operation (boosting V/f characteristic)
Data setting range Description

0.0 Automatic torque boost characteristics to adjust torque boost value automatically for constant
torque load changing linearly
0.1 to 0.9 Variable torque characteristics for fan/pump load
1.0 to 1.9 Linear torque characteristics for a load that has a middle characteristic between variable torque and
constant torque characteristics
2.0 to 20.0 Constant torque characteristics changing linearly
Torque characteristic
<Variable torque characteristics> <Proportional torque characteristics> <Constant torque characteristics>
A: 20% (22 kW or below)

10% (30 kW or above)
Note: When replacing the VG7 (22 kW or below) with the VG1, specify the torque boost according to the
torque boost conversion table in Chapter 12, Section 12.5.
4-212
Guide for setting the torque boost

When adjusting the starting torque with manual boost (Setting data: 2.0 to 20.0) since the motor
characteristics are unknown, use the following as a guide.
Motor capacity Torque boost 1 to 3

(kW) P35, A55, A155
0.4 5.2 to 8.4 to 11.6
0.75 to 2.2 5.1 to 8.1 to 11.2
3.7 4.5 to 7.0 to 9.4
Chap. 4
5.5 4.2 to 6.4 to 8.6
7.5 4.0 to 6.0 to 7.9
11 3.6 to 5.2 to 6.7

15 3.3 to 4.5 to 5.8
18.5 to 22 3.0 to 4.0 to 5.0
30 to 630 2.0 to 5.0
Note: Increasing the torque boost value results in overexcitation in the low-speed domain. Keeping the
inverter running with the overexcited state may cause the motor to overheat. Check the characteristics of the
motor to be driven.
P36 M1 Output Current Fluctuation Damping Gain
P36 is exclusive to V/f control. When the inverter output current fluctuates due to the motor characteristics or
backlash at the load side, adjust the damping gain. Do not change the factory default unless otherwise needed.
Ｐ３６Ｍ１－ＤＵＭＰＧ
Data setting range: 0.00 to 1.00
4-213
4.3.5 H codes (High Performance Functions)
H01 Auto-tuning
For inverters connected with a standard motor, no motor parameter tuning is required.
Perform auto-tuning correctly, referring to the tables and the flowcharts given on the following pages.
Tuning procedure
Change the H01 data to the desired value by pressing the + keys or + keys (simultaneous keying),
and then press the key to start auto-tuning. Upon completion of auto-tuning, the H01 data automatically
reverts to "0."
The tuning result is written to the volatile memory (RAM) that loses the data when the power is turned OFF.
After completion of tuning, therefore, be sure to use the full save function (H02) to write the data to the
non-volatile memory.
The ASR auto-tuning (H01 = 1) should be performed, if needed, after motor parameters have been established
(automatically, manually, or by tuning). (Available soon)
Tuning of a permanent magnet synchronous motor (PMSM) is available soon.
Tuning notes
Under any of the following conditions, no tuning is normally performed. Review the current settings.
(1) "NOT EXECUTE" appears on the LCD monitor.
In the case of M1, when H01 = any of 2 to 4, P02 ≠ 37 (OTHER).
⇒ Function codes to be tuned are write-protected. Set P02 to "37" (OTHER).
The JOG mode is selected. (The JOG indicator on the LCD monitor is lit.)
⇒ Cancel the JOG mode by pressing the + keys (simultaneous keying).
⇒ If digital input signal JOG is ON, turn it OFF.
Tuning is in progress from the FRENIC-VG Loader.
⇒ When tuning is in progress from the FRENIC-VG Loader, do not change function code data from the
keypad.
(2) Alarm er6 (Operation error) occurs.
The simulation mode is selected (P01 = 2).
⇒ No tuning is possible in the simulation mode.
The "V/f control for IM" is selected (P01/A01/A101 = 5).
⇒ Under V/f control, tuning by H01 = 1, 3 or 4 cannot be performed.
The "Vector control for PMSM with speed sensor" is selected (P01/A01/A101 = 3).
⇒ Under Vector control for PMSM, tuning by H01 = 3 cannot be performed.
Any of digital input signals BX, STOP1, STOP2 and STOP3 is ON.
Either one of safety function input terminals [EN1] and [EN2] is OFF.
⇒ When any of BX, STOP1, STOP2 and STOP3 is ON and either of [EN1] and [EN2] is OFF, no
tuning starts.
The multiwinding motor drive system is selected.
⇒ No tuning is possible in the multiwinding motor drive system.
(3) Alarm er7 (Output wiring fault) occurs.
A phase is missing in the connection between the inverter and the motor.
⇒ Connect the motor to the inverter correctly.
The brake is applied to the motor.
⇒ For auto-tuning with the motor running (H01 = 4), be sure to release the brake so that the motor can
rotate.
4-214
Ｈ０１ＴＵＮＭＯＤＥ
The tuning type, data to be tuned, and tuning content differ depending upon the motor drive control. Select the
tuning suitable for the drive control (P01).
When P01 = 0 or 1 (Vector control for IM with/without speed sensor) → go to [1] below.
When P01 = 3 (Vector control for PMSM with speed sensor) → (Available soon)
When P01 = 5 (V/f control for IM) → go to [2] below.
[1] Under vector control for IM with/without speed sensor
Chap. 4
Data
for Tuning type Data to be tuned Tuning content Usage
H01
1 ASR (Auto speed ASR-P (gain) The inverter measures the Perform this tuning for a motor
regulator) auto-tuning ASR-I (integral constant) motor-shaft converted load integrated in the machinery to

(To be performed after inertia (mechanical time tune the ASR.
Compensation gain
establishment of motor constant) of the connected Particularly, perform this tuning
Integral time machinery, calculates the
parameters) for using the observer (H46) if
Load inertia optimum gain and integral the motor-shaft converted load
(Available soon)
constant, and sets them to the inertia is unknown.
corresponding function codes.
2 Motor R1, Lσ P06, P07 The inverter measures the motor Perform this tuning for VG
parameter when M1 is selected primary resistance (%R1) and standard motors (VG3, VG5 and
tuning A08, A09 leakage reactance (Lσ) at the VG7) when the impedance at the
when M2 is selected rated speed and sets them to the output side is not negligible
corresponding motor parameters because the wiring distance
A108, A109
(M1, M2, or M3). between the inverter and motor is
when M3 is selected
long (100 m or more) or an output
circuit filter (OFL) is connected.
3 Tuning with P06 to P25 The inverter measures the %R1 Perform this tuning beforehand
the motor when M1 is selected and %X with the motor stopped, when driving a non-standard
stopped just as when H01 = 2. motor or a special-purpose
A08 to A27
when M2 is selected After that, the inverter measures motor whose motor parameters
the exciting current, rated load are unknown.
A108 to A123 slip, magnetic saturation factors, Perform this tuning when using
when M3 is selected induced voltage, secondary time the FRENIC-VG to drive a
constant, R2 compensation motor integrated in the existing
factors, exciting current machinery and not separated
compensation factors with the from it. Note that the tuning
motor stopped, tunes them, and accuracy is slightly lower than
sets them to the corresponding that obtained by tuning with the
motor parameters (M1, M2, or motor running (H01 = 4).
M3).
4 Tuning with The inverter measures the %R1 Perform this tuning beforehand
the motor and %X with the motor stopped, when driving a non-standard
running just as when H01 = 2. motor or a special-purpose
After that, the inverter measures motor whose motor parameters
the exciting current, rated load are unknown.
slip, magnetic saturation factors, Since this tuning involves motor
induced voltage, secondary time rotation, separate the motor from
constant, R2 compensation the machinery and make sure
factors, exciting current that there is no danger in rotating
compensation factors with the the motor before performing this
motor running, tunes them, and tuning. The motor runs in
sets them to the corresponding accordance with the specified
motor parameters (M1, M2, or acceleration/ deceleration time.
M3).
When motor parameters are configured at the time of shipment, use those parameter values as is.
4-215
[2] Under V/f control for IM
Data
for Tuning type Data to be tuned Tuning content Usage
H01
1 ASR (Auto speed -- -- --
regulator) auto-tuning
Not available under V/f
control.
2 Motor R1, Lσ P06, P07 The inverter measures the motor Perform this tuning when the
parameter when M1 is selected primary resistance (%R1) and impedance at the output side is not
tuning leakage reactance (Lσ) at the negligible because the wiring
A08, A09
rated speed and sets them to the distance between the inverter and
when M2 is selected
corresponding motor parameters motor is long (100 m or more) or
A108, A109 (M1, M2, or M3). an output circuit filter (OFL) is
when M3 is selected connected.
3 Tuning with -- -- --
the motor
stopped
Not
available
under V/f
control.
4 Tuning with -- -- --
the motor
running
Not
available
under V/f
control.
• At the time of shipment, the torque boost function is set to "Auto torque boost." T use the inverter in applications
requiring a starting torque, be sure to perform motor parameter auto-tuning.
4-216
ASR (Auto speed regulator) auto-tuning procedure (H01 = 1) (Available soon)
Start of ASR auto-tuning (H01 = 1)

Key points
Have motor parameters been established No Perform motor parameter auto-tuning

automatically, manually, or by tuning? (H01 = 2, 3 or 4).
Yes
Make wiring not temporarily but on the actual machinery
Connect the secondary wires (U, V and W) to the motor.
whose load inertia should be identified.
Make sure that there is no danger in rotating the motor since

ASR tuning starts and stops the motor repeatedly.
Chap. 4
For details about choice of ASR1 to ASR4, refer to the
Select the function code to which tuning result is to be set description of Function codes E01 to E13.
(ASR1, ASR2, ASR3 or ASR4) and the target motor For details about motor selection M1, M2 and M3, refer to
(M1, M2 or M3). the description of Function code F79.

Make sure that the function codes are not write-protected. Check the F00 setting.
Set the acceleration/deceleration time so that the acceleration Inertia cannot be identified without a certain amount of
torque comes to be 10% or more. acceleration torque.
To use the observer, set “1.00” to the observer compensation

gain (H47/H48/H125).
Set 0% to the selected S-curve acceleration/deceleration

pattern.
Set “0.0” to the droop control (H28).
A run command from the keypad is enabled
by factory default.
Enable a run command entered from the keypad. F02 (Operation method) = 0 and
H30 (Communications link function) = 0 or 1
Set the speed command to 50% or more of the maximum The user specifies the speed command via the currently
speed. available speed command source.
Starting tuning with a Coast-to-stop or Emergency stop

Make sure that terminal commands BX, STOP1, STOP2 and command being ON immediately results in an operation
STOP3 are OFF. error ( ).
Make sure that each of [EN1] and [EN2] is short-circuited with If the inverter is running, tuning cannot start since the data
[PS]. of H01 cannot be changed.
H01 = 1 (ASR auto-tuning)

Make sure that the inverter is not running.
Set “1” to H01.
To start tuning, press FUNC/DATA key; RESET key

to cancel tuning, press the RESET key. Tuning canceled
FUNC/DATA key
Is the data of H01 changed to “1”?
No
Yes
Press the FWD key on the keypad to rotate the motor in the Terminal command FWD or REV is not available.
forward direction.
If at least 20 seconds elapses from setting of H01 until the
FWD or REV key is pressed, an operation error ( )
Tuning starts. occurs.
The progress bar appears on the keypad. It takes a few minutes to complete tuning.
During tuning, the motor starts and stops ten times or more.
If the number of repetitions is abnormally large, press the
To cancel tuning halfway, press the STOP key on the keypad. STOP key to cancel tuning.
The acceleration torque may be less than 10%. Review the
acceleration/deceleration time.
In an emergency, If tuning is canceled halfway, incomplete measuring result

turn terminal command BX, STOP1, STOP2 or STOP3 ON to may have been set. To dispose of the measuring result,
cause the motor to coast to a stop.
shut down the power.
No The “100% Tuning completed” appears on the keypad,

Tuning completed?
indicating the end of tuning.
Yes
Execute the full save function (H02). The full save function writes the data to the non-volatile
memory.
End
Contact your Fuji Electric representative.
4-217
Motor parameter auto-tuning procedure (H01 = 2)
Start of motor parameter auto-tuning (H01 = 2)

Key points
Is your motor a VG standard motor No For any other type of motors, set “3” or “4” to
(VG, VG3, VG5 or VG7)? H01 and perform auto-tuning.
Yes Make wiring not temporarily but on the actual machinery

(OFL filter and long inverter-motor distance).
Turn ON the magnetic contactor on the secondary side.
Connect the secondary wires (U, V. and W) to the motor. Tuning with no connection results in an output wiring fault
( ).
Even if M1 is selcted and a VG5/VG7 standard motor is used, If P02 = “Capacity-Voltage,” some function codes are write-
set “37: OTHER” to P02 once. protected.
When function code data is write-protected (F00) and M1 is

Make sure that the function codes are not write-protected. selected, check the setting of P02.
Enable a run command entered from the keypad. by factory default.
F02 (Operation method) = 0 and
Make sure that terminal commands BX, STOP1, STOP2 and
STOP3 are OFF. Starting tuning with a Coast-to-stop or Emergency stop
command being ON immediately results in an operation
error ( ).
Make sure that each of [EN1] and [EN2] is short-circuited with
[PS]. If the inverter is running, tuning cannot start since the data of
H01 cannot be changed.
H01 = 2 (Motor parameter tuning, R1, Lσ)

Set “2” to H01.
To start tuning, press FUNC/DATA key; RESET key

Tuning canceled
to cancel tuning, press the RESET key.
No FUNC/DATA key
Is the data of H01 changed to “2”? Terminal command FWD or REV is not available.
Yes The REV key on the keypad is also not available.
Press the FWD key on the keypad.

Tuning starts. FWD key is pressed, an operation error ( ) occurs.
The progress bar appears on the keypad. It takes several tens of seconds to complete tuning.
To cancel tuning halfway, press the STOP key on the keypad.

If tuning is canceled halfway, incomplete measuring result
may have been set. To dispose of the measuring result, shut
In an emergency, down the power.
turn terminal command BX, STOP1, STOP2 or STOP3 ON to

Tuning completed?
Yes
Execute the full save function (H02). The full save function writes the data to the non-volatile
memory.
When M1 is selected, setting “36: P-OTR” to P02 write-protects

the motor parameters. Do not revert the setting of P02 to “Capacity-Voltage” even
if M1 is selected and a VG5/VG7 standard motor is used.
Doing so mistakenly overwrites the tuned %R1 and %X data
End with the values of the VG5/VG7 standard motor.
4-218
Auto-tuning (with the motor stopped/running) procedure (H01 = 3 or 4)
Start of motor parameter auto-tuning (H01 = 3 or 4)
Key points
Is your motor a VG standard motor Yes For VG standard motors, do not set “3”
(VG, VG3, VG5 or VG7)? or “4” to H01 for auto-tuning.
No
Connect the secondary wires (U, V. and W) to the motor. Make wiring not temporarily but on the actual machinery
(OFL filter and long inverter-motor distance).
Turn ON the magnetic contactor on the secondary side.
To select tuning with the motor running, make sure that there is
Tuning with no connection results in an output wiring fault
no danger in rotating the motor.
Chap. 4
( ).
Select one from M1, M2 and M3. For motor choice, refer to the description of F79.
Selecting V/f control and performing the following operation

Select the motor drive control except V/f control. results in an operation error ( ).

No
M1 selected?
Yes Selecting data except “37: OTHER” write-protects motor
parameters.
Set “37: OTHER” to P02.
When function code data is write-protected (F00) and M1 is

Make sure that the function codes are not write-protected.
selected, check the setting of P02.
Manually enter the motor nameplate values to the Nameplate values: Rated current, rated capacity, rated
corresponding motor parameters (M1, M2 or M3). speed, rated voltage, maximum speed and number of poles.
Exciting current (P08/A10/A110)

Enter the half of the rated current to the exciting current.
Rated current (P04/A03/A103)
Enable a run command entered from the keypad. by factory default.
F02 (Operation method) = 0 and
Make sure that terminal commands BX, STOP1, STOP2 and
Starting tuning with a Coast-to-stop or Emergency stop
STOP3 are OFF. command being ON immediately results in an operation
error ( ).
Make sure that each of [EN1] and [EN2] is short-circuited with
If the inverter is running, tuning cannot start since the data of
[PS]. H01 cannot be changed.
H01 = 3 (Tuning with the motor stopped)

H01 = 4 (Tuning with the motor running)
Set “3” or “4” to H01.

RESET key
To start tuning, press FUNC/DATA key;
Tuning canceled
to cancel tuning, press the RESET key.
No FUNC/DATA key
Is the data of H01 changed to “3” or “4”? Terminal command FWD or REV is not available.
The REV key on the keypad is also not available.
Yes
Press the FWD key on the keypad.
FWD key is pressed, an operation error ( ) occurs.
Tuning starts.
It takes a few minutes to complete tuning.

The progress bar appears on the keypad. In tuning with the motor running, the amount of tuning time
fluctuates according to the setting of
acceleration/deceleration.
To cancel tuning halfway, press the STOP key on the keypad.
If tuning is canceled halfway, incomplete measuring result
may have been set. To dispose of the measuring result, shut
In an emergency, down the power.
turn terminal command BX, STOP1, STOP2 or STOP3 ON to

Tuning completed?
Yes
Execute the full save function (H02).
The full save function writes the data to the non-volatile
memory.
When M1 is selected, setting “36: P-OTR” to P02 write-protects

the motor parameters. Setting “Capacity-Voltage” to P02 overwrites the tuned data
with the values of the VG standard motors.
END
When H01 = 1 or 4, the motor rotates during tuning. Make sure that there is no danger in rotating the motor.
Injuries could occur.
4-219
H02 Full Save Function
When you execute H01 "Tuning operation" to rewrite the internal data or you rewrite data through the link
(RS-485 or field bus), the data are written to the volatile memory (RAM) temporarily and the data are erased
when you turn off the power. Execute this function when you want to save these data (to write to the
non-volatile memory).
Ｈ０２ＡＬＬＳＡＶＥ
Set the value

1 and press and keys at the same time to execute.
When you use the All save, you may delete previous data.
H03 Data Initialization
Set the value 1 and press and keys at the same time to initialize set values to the factory setting. When
the initialization is complete, the set values return to zero automatically. Not all functions execute
initialization. See the function code list for more details.
Ｈ０３ＤＡＴＡＩＮＩＴ
Set the value

1 and press and keys at the same time to execute.
When you use the Data initializing, you may delete previous data.
H04 Auto-reset (Times)
H05 Auto-reset (Reset interval)
The Auto-reset function cancels the inverter protective function to restart the inverter automatically without
alarm and output shut-off after the inverter protective function is activated. These functions set the number of
canceling the protective function and the wait time between the activation and the cancellation of the
protective function.
Ｈ０４ＡＵＴＯ－ＲＥＳＥＴ
Ｈ０５ＲＥＳＥＴＩＮＴ
Setting range (number): 0: Auto-reset disabled

1 to 10 (times)
(Wait time): 0.01 to 20.00 (s)
Set H04 "Auto-reset (Number)" to 0 when you do not use the auto-reset function
4-220
Inverter protective functions you can reset to restart

0c: Overcurrent dbh: Braking resistor overheat
0u: Overvoltage 0l1, 0l2, 0l3: Motor 1,2, and 3 overload
0h1: Overheating at heat sink 0lu: Inverter overload
0h3: Inverter internal overheat
When you set 1 to 10 to H04 "Auto-reset (Number)", the auto-reset is activated and inverter start command is
automatically directed after a time specified by H05 "Auto-reset (Reset interval)" has passed. If the cause of
the alarm does not exist any more, the inverter starts without entering the alarm mode. Otherwise, the
protective function is activated again to wait for the time specified by H05 "Auto-reset (Reset interval)". If the
Chap. 4
cause of the alarm still exists after the inverter restarts specified times by H04 "Auto-reset (Number)", then
the inverter enters the alarm mode.
You can use the terminal [Y1] to [Y5] and [Y11] to [Y18] to monitor the retry operation. Note that if you want

to use [Y11] to [Y18], you need the option OPC-VG1-DIOA. You can also use the link to poll M15 to read out
the terminal information.
When you select the restart function, the inverter may restart automatically depending on the cause a trip after the
inverter stops due to the trip. You must design your machine such that the machine restarts without causing any danger
to persons.
Otherwise the restart may cause accidents.
Retry successful case
Retry failed case
4-221
H06 Cooling Fan ON/OFF Control
You can select whether to enable automatic ON/OFF operation of the cooling fan by detecting the
temperature of the heat sink inside the inverter when the power is supplied to the inverter.
Set value: 0: Fan ON/OFF operation disabled
1: Fan ON/OFF operation enabled
Ｈ０６ＦＡＮＳＴＯＰ
H08 Rev. Phase Sequence Lock
You can inhibit the reverse rotation of a mechanical devise that should not do so. This function is not
available when you use V/f control.
Ｈ０８ＰＲＴＤ－ＩＮＶＴ
Set value: 0: Disabled

1: Enable
Use the function code F76 to F78 "Speed limiter" to inhibit the reverse operation directed by negative [12]
input or [REV] input. This function uses torque control to inhibit the reverse operation due to an undershoot in
stopping operation.
H09 Starting Mode (Auto search)
Restarts a motor smoothly when the motor starts after a momentary power failure or an external force is
coasting the motor.
Detects the speed of a motor and supplies the same speed as that of the motor to start. Thus, the motor starts
smoothly without presenting any shocks.
Under UP/DOWN control, auto search mode is disabled.
When using the inverter under vector control without speed sensor, use auto search in 60 Hz (1800 r/min in
terms of 4-pole motors) or below.
If a trip occurs in auto search in 60 Hz (1800 r/min in terms of 4-pole motors) or higher, the following may
improve the problem.
(1) Change the carrier frequency (F26),
(2) Increase the initial level of pre-excitation (F75), and
(3) Perform motor tuning.
Under vector control without speed sensor, the property cannot be satisfied due to external factors such as
load conditions, motor parameters and wiring length, so make a sufficient operation check before actual
operation.
4-222
Ｈ０９ＳＴＡＲＴＣＨＡＲ

1: Enable
Setting range: 0, 1, and 2
Set value Normal start Start after momentary power failure
0 Disabled Disabled
1 Disabled Enabled
2 Enabled Enabled
Chap. 4
Description of the set values
1: Enabled when F14 "Restart mode after momentary power

failure (Select)" is set to 3, 4, or 5. Also starts the motor at the
coasting speed.
2: Starts the motor at the detected coasting speed after any start
situation including the ON operation command regardless of
the occurrence of a momentary power failure.
Assign a setting value 26 (Pick up start mode) to either of the
terminal from [X1] to [X9] to switch this function externally to
apply the function to a normal ON operation command.
H10 Energy-saving Operation
To reduces the output voltage automatically during constant speed operation with light load to operate at a
state where the product of voltage and current (power) is the smallest. This function is not available for V/f
control.
Ｈ１０ＡＵＴＯ－ＥＮＧＹ

1: Enable
H11 Automatic Operation OFF Function
Turns off the operation automatically when the motor speed decreases down under the F37 "Stop speed"
while the FWD or REV command is present, or coasts the motor instead of decelerating the motor to stop
when the input is set to OFF.
Ｈ１１ＡＵＴＯＯＦＦ
Set value: 0: The motor decelerates to stop when the FWD-CM and the REV-CM are OFF (normal).
1: The motor operation is set to OFF when the speed is F37 under the "Stop speed" while the
FWD-CM and the REV-CM are ON.
2: The motor coasts to stop when the FWD-CM and the REV-CM are OFF.
3: The motor decelerates to stop with ASR when the FWD-CM and the REV-CM are OFF (under
torque control).
4: The motor coasts to stop when the FWD-CM and the REV-CM are OFF (under torque control).
When H11 = 3 or 4 and under ASR control, the motor decelerates to stop (H11 = 0). When H11 = 0 to 2, the
operation is common to the ASR control and torque control.
When H11 = 0 or 3, turn OFF in accordance with F37 (Stop speed).
When H11 = 1 under vector control without speed sensor or V/f control, auto search is automatically disabled.
4-223
H13 Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure (Wait time)
Waits for a time specified this function after power recovery and restarts.
Ｈ１３ＲＥＳＴＡＲＴｔ
H14 Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure (Decrease rate in speed)
In restart mode after momentary power failure under V/f control, if the inverter output frequency and motor
rotation speed are not synchronized with each other, an overcurrent flows, activating the current limiter.
Upon detection of the current limiter operation, the inverter automatically increase the output frequency
(r/min) to synchronize with the motor rotation speed. H14 specifies the decrease rate in speed (r/min/s).
Ｈ１４ＦＡＬＬＲＡＴＥ
Setting range: 1 to 3,600 (r/min/s)

Note: Increasing the decrease rate may perform regenerative control the moment the inverter output
frequency (r/min) and the motor rotation speed are synchronized with each other, causing an overvoltage trip.
Decreasing it may lengthen the current limit operation duration until the synchronization, activating the
inverter overload protection.
H15 Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure (Continuous running level)
If you select setting 2 (deceleration to a stop on power failure) or 3 (continuous operation) in Restart mode
after momentary power failure (F14: Action selection), this function affects them. At both settings, control
operation starts when the main circuit DC voltage drops below this setting level.
Ｈ１５ＨＯＬＤＶ
Setting range: 200V: 200 to 300 (V)

400V: 400 to 600 (V)
H16 Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure (Run command self-hold setting)
Holds the operation command when the control power supply is maintained in the inverter or until the main
circuit DC power supply voltage decreases about to zero (recognized as "momentary power failure") when
you specifies 1.
Holds the operation command for a time specified by the H17 "Auto-restart (Operation command selfhold
time)" when you specifies 0.
Ｈ１６ＳＬＦＨＬＤＳＥＬ
Setting range: 0 or 1
0: Hold a run command for the time specified by H17
1: Hold a run command until the main circuit power comes to be almost zero
4-224
H17 Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure (Run command self-hold time)
When the power to the main power supply and the external control circuit (relay sequence) discontinues on
power failure, the operation command given to the inverter becomes OFF in general.
This function sets the time to hold the operation command. When the period of a power failure exceeds the
self-hold time, the inverter recognizes the power failure here cancels the "restart after momentary power
failure" mode and restarts normally on power recovery (you can consider this setting as permissible
momentary power failure time).
Chap. 4
Ｈ１７ＳＥＬＦＨＯＬＤｔ

H19 Active Drive
In the vector control mode, the output torque is automatically limited to avoid a trip caused by an overload or
the like.
If 60s or a longer acceleration time is selected under V/f control, the acceleration time is automatically
lengthened three-folded to avoid alarms.
Ｈ１９ＡＣＴ－ＤＲＩＶＥ
Setting range: 0: Disabled

1: Enabled
Before a trip is caused due to an inverter overload (OLU), heat sink overheat (OH1) or inverter inside
overheat (OH3), the torque command value is limited or the acceleration time is extended to avoid alarms.
H20 PID Control (Mode selection)
PID control uses a sensor attached to a subject of control to detect the controlled value (feedback value) and
compares it with the reference value (such as speed reference). When there is a deviation between them, the
control behaves to decrease the deviation to zero. This is a control to match the feedback value with the
reference value.
This control is applied to process control such as dancer control, tension control and extruders.
You can select normal or inverse operation for the output of the
PID regulator and set increase or decrease to the rotation of a
motor receiving the output of the PID regulator.
Ｈ２０ＰＩＤＣＯＭＮＤ
Setting range: 0: Disabled

1: Enabled (normal operation)
2: Enabled (inverse operation 1)
3: Enabled (inverse operation 2)
4-225
H21 PID Control (Command selection)
Select the source of the reference value applied to the PID regulator.
Set value: 0: KEYPAD panel or [12] terminal input
1: Analog input Ai [PID-REF]
You can assign [PID-FB] to an analog input Ai to specify the feed back value applied to the PID regulator.
You cannot specify a feed back value other than this voltage input.
You can view the process values of the reference value and the feedback value according to set values of the
F52 "Display coefficient A" and F53 "Display coefficient B". See the function description of F52 and F53 for
more details.
Ｈ２１ＰＩＤＲＥＦＥＲ
4-226
H22 PID Control (P-action)
H23 PID Control (I-action)
H24 PID Control (D-action)
Ｈ２２Ｐ－ＧＡＩＮ
Ｈ２３ｌ－ＧＡＩＮ
Chap. 4
Ｈ２４Ｄ－ＧＡＩＮ
H22 setting range: 0.000 to 10.000 (times)

H23 setting range: 0.00 to 100.00 (s)
H24 setting range: 0.000 to 10.000 (s)

You do not use P: Gain, I: Integral time, or D: Differential time individually, but use them by combining them
as P control, PI control, PD control, and PID control in general.
P control action
This action is referred to as P control action when a
manipulated value (Speed command, Auxiliary speed
command, and Torque limiter) and deviation has a linear
relation. Thus P control action provides a manipulated
value proportional to the deviation.
Note that you cannot use only P control action to decrease
the deviation to zero.
P: gain is a parameter to define a degree of the response to a

deviation. When you set a large gain, you will have a quick
response. Too large gain presents an oscillation. Too small
gain slows down the response.
I control action
This action is referred to as I control action when a
manipulated value (Speed command, Auxiliary speed
command, and Torque limiter) changes at a speed in
proportion to deviation. Thus, I control action provides an
integrated deviation as a manipulated value. I control
action behaves to conform the controlled value (feedback
value) to the reference value (such as speed command).
However I control cannot responds to a deviation changing
quickly.
You can use I: integral time as a parameter to determine the effect of I control action. If you set a large integral
time, you will have a slow response. A large integral time also decreases the repulsive force.
A small integral time quickens response. However, too small integral time will cause an oscillation.
4-227
D control action
This action is referred to as D control action when a manipulated value (Speed command, Auxiliary speed
command, and Torque limiter) is proportional to differential of deviation. Thus D control action provides a
differential of deviation as a manipulated value to respond a quick change.
You can use D: differential time as a parameter to determine the effect of D control action. A large differential
time attenuates an oscillation caused by P control action quickly when a deviation occurs.
Too large differential time may induce even a larger oscillation. A small differential time decreases
attenuation action applied to a deviation.
PI control action
When you use only P control action, the deviation still remains. PI control, P control action combined with I
control action, is used in general to eliminate this residual deviation. PI control always behaves to eliminate a
deviation due to a change of reference value or a continual disturbance. However if you increase I control
action, the control cannot respond a fast deviation.
You can use only P control action for a load including an integral element.
PD control action
PD control action generates a larger manipulated value than that of D control action to restrain the increase of
the deviation. When the deviation decreases, P control action is restrained.
If a subject of control contains an integral element, sole P control action will present an oscillating response
due to the integral element. If this is a case, you can use PD control to attenuate the oscillation caused by sole
P control action. You apply this control to a process that does not have selfdamping action.
PID control action

PID control action combines I control action, which acts to reduce deviation and D control action, which acts
to restrain oscillation with P control action. You can obtain a stable response with no deviation.
This control is effective when applied to a load which respond slowly.
4-228
Adjusting PID setting

We recommend you to use an oscilloscope to view a response waveform and adjust PID setting. Adjust
following the procedure described below.
- Increase H22 "PID control setting (P
control action)" (P gain) as long as it
does not present an oscillation.
- Decrease H23 "PID control setting (I
control action)" (I integral time) as long
as it does not present an oscillation.
Chap. 4
- Increase H24 "PID control setting (D
control action)" (D differential time) as
long as it does not present an
oscillation.

Follow the procedure below to adjust the response
waveform.
- To restrict overshoot
Increase H23 "PID control setting (I
control action)" (I integral time).
Decrease H24 "PID control setting (D
control action)" (D differential time).
- To stabilize fast (accepting some

overshoots.)
Decrease H23 "PID control setting (I
Increase H24 "PID control setting (D
- To restrain an oscillation whose cycle is

longer than H23 "PID control setting (I
Increase H23 "PID control setting (I
- To restrain a oscillation whose cycle is

about the same as the H24 PID control
setting (D control action)" (D
differential time)
Decrease H24 "PID control setting (D
Decrease H22 "PID control setting (P
control action)" (P gain) if you set 0.0
and the oscillation still exists
4-229
H25 PID Control (Upper limit)
H26 PID Control (Lower limit)
Set the upper and lower limiters applied to PID control.
Ｈ２５ＰＩＤＵＰＰＥＲ
Ｈ２６ＰＩＤＬＯＷＥＲ
Setting range: -300 to 300 (%)
H27 PID Control (Speed command selection)
Selects a destination of PID output to be used as a speed command.
Ｈ２７ＰＩＤＳＰＲＥＦ
Setting 0: Disabled
1: PID
2: Auxiliary speed setting range: -300 to 300 (%)
Usage Destination of connection Parameter setting

Parameter setting Speed command H27=1
Dancer control Auxiliary speed command H27=2
Torque command H27=0 & H41=5
Torque control (tension control)
Torque control value H27=0 & (F42 or F43=5)
H28 Droop Control
When you use multiple motors to drive a single machine, a motor whose speed is higher has to drive a larger
load. Droop operation balances load by adding a drooping characteristic to speed. This function is not
available for V/f control.
Ｈ２８ＤＲＯＯＰ
Setting range: 0.0 to 25.0 (%)

Set a drooping amount at 100% of torque command.
A value set to 100% corresponds to the maximum
speed. When the maximum speed is 1,500r/min and the
drooping is set to 10%, then the drooping speed is
-150.0 r/min at 100% of torque command (load).
The droop function becomes valid after the [DROOP]
contact input and ON “DROOP ON” are turned on.
If the droop gain is too large, the motor speed may
increase too much under a control load, causing an
excessive speed alarm (OS). If this happens, decrease
the gain.
4-230
H29 Communications Link Function (Data protection via link)
Protects code data from false writing through different types of communication systems (such as integrated
RS-485 and field bus).
Ｈ２９ＬＩＮＫＰＲＯＣＴ
Set value: 0: Write enabled

1: Write protected
Chap. 4
You should use H30 "Serial link" to define the write operation to the S area (function codes including
operation commands and speed commands) separately.
When you assign [WE-LINK] to a digital input, you can protect from writing by short-circuiting between
[WE-LINK] and [COM].

H30 Communications Link Function (Link operation)
Uses different types of communication systems (such as integrated RS-485 and field bus) to enable/disable
command data (such as speed command, position command, torque command) and operation commands
(FWD and REV), control inputs (X1-X9, X11-X14). Monitoring (access to M area) is always available. The
command data correspond to S01 to S05 and S08 to S12. The operation commands correspond to the lowest
two bits of S06.
When you assign [LE] to a digital input, you can connect between [LE] and [CM] to enable the setting by H30
and open to disable operations specified through the link (set to H30=0 regardless of the setting by H30).
Ｈ３０ＬＩＮＫＦＵＮＣ
Set value:
S06 Terminal block
Command data
Monitor （Speed commands, Run commands (FWD, REV) Reset command FWD, REV X1 to X9
torque commands, etc.) Control inputs (X1 to X9, (RST) (F02 = 1) (X11 to X14)
X11 to X14)
0 ○ × × ○ ○ ○
1 ○ ○ × ○ ○ ○
2 ○ × ○ ○ × ○
3 ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○
Note: If run commands and control inputs are enabled on both S06 and terminal block, they are ORed.
You can use the KEYPAD panel to check the operation commands from
１５００ the link, and I/O check of control input.
ＣＯＭＭ □×２ □×６
□ＦＷＤ □×３ □×７
□ＲＥＶ □×４ □×８
□Ｘ１ □×５ □×９
4-231
H31 to H40 RS-485 Communication
Protects code data from false writing through different types of communication systems (such as integrated
RS-485 and field bus).
Sets different types of specifications for RS-485 communication. Specify according to your host device.
See "Standard RS-485 interface" for the communication protocol.
H31 Station address

Sets the station address of RS-485
Setting range: 0 to 255 (Broad cast: (0: RTU), (99: FUJI)/address: 1 to 255)
H32 Action on error occurrence

Setting range: 0 to 3
Setting: 0: Immediate trip upon communication error
1: Trip upon communication error after continuation of operation for the time set at H33 "timer
interval"
2: Trip upon communication error if the error persists after the time set at H33 "timer action time"
has elapsed
3: Operation continues even if a communication error occurs. (The transmitted operation command
is automatically restored after the cause of the failure is removed.)
H33 Timer operation time

Specify a procedure when an error occurs and an error handling time.
Timer operation time: 0.01 to 20.00 (s)
H34 Transmission rate

Specifies transmission rate.
Set value: 0: 38,400 (bps)
1: 19,200 (bps)
2: 9,600 (bps)
3: 4,800 (bps)
4: 2,400 (bps)
H35 Data length

Specifies data length.
Set value: 0: 8 (bit)
1: 7 (bit)
(The SX protocol and Modbus RTU protocol are fixed at 8 bits irrespective of the H35 setting.)
H36 Parity bit

Specifies parity bit.
Set value: 0: None
1: Even parity
2: Odd parity
(The SX protocol is fixed at the even parity irrespective of the H36 setting.)
4-232
H37 Stop bit

Specifies stop bit.
Set value: 0: 2 (bit)
1: 1 (bit)
(With the Modbus RTU protocol, the stop bit is automatically selected according to the parity
bit selected at H36 irrespective of the H37 setting. See page 6-2.)
H38 Continued communication disconnected time

Specifies a time to wait to provide a trip signal (er5) after detecting discontinued access due to
Chap. 4
disconnection during operation through RS-485 in a system where the station is always accessed in a certain
period.
Setting range: 0: Detection disabled
0.1 to 60.0 (s)

H39 Interval time
Specifies a time between the completion of receiving a request from a host device (personal computer or
PLC) and the start of responding to the request.
H40 Protocol selection

Specifies a communication protocol.
Set value: 0: FUJI general-purpose inverter protocol
1: SX bus protocol (loader protocol)
2: Modbus RTU protocol
Set 1 to connect to VG1S support loader.
Set 0 to control FUJI general-purpose inverters and VG1S inverters connected through the common RS-485
communication.
Note: Modbus RTU is a communication protocol defined by Modicon company.
4-233
H41 Torque Command Source
Selects an element with which you provide the torque command. See the control block diagram for more
details.
Ｈ４１Ｔ－ＲＥＦＳＥＬ
Setting value: 0: Internal ASR data

1: Ai input [T-REF]
2: DIA card
3: DIB card
4: Link (S02)
5: PID output
Use also the speed limiter setting (F76 to F78) when you use the torque command
Make sure to use the speed limiter in cooperation with the torque command or the torque current command. You can
avoid the motor overrun.
• Under torque control, if the motor is rotated by the load with torque exceeding a torque command, even turning the
run command OFF may not stop the motor but keep it running.
To shut down the inverter output, take measures such as "Switch to speed control and decelerate to stop," "Shut
down with a coast-to-stop command (BX)," or "Use automatic operation OFF function (H11 = 2 to 4)."
• Under torque control, the inverter may not detect a power failure depending upon the load state. If it happens, input
a power failure signal to the BX terminal to stop the inverter.
4-234
H42 Torque Current Command Source
Selects an element with which you provide the torque command. See the control block diagram for more
details.
Ｈ４２ＩＴＲＥＦＳＥＬ
Setting value: 0: Internal ASR data

1: Ai input [T-REF]
2: DIA card
Chap. 4
3: DIB card
4: Link (S03)
Use also the speed limiter setting (F76 to F78) when you use the torque command

Make sure to use the speed limiter in cooperation with the torque command or the torque current command. You can
avoid the motor overrun.
• Under torque control, if the motor is rotated by the load with torque exceeding a torque command, even turning the
run command OFF may not stop the motor but keep it running.
To shut down the inverter output, take measures such as "Switch to speed control and decelerate to stop," "Shut
down with a coast-to-stop command (BX)," or "Use automatic operation OFF function (H11 = 2 to 4)."
• Under torque control, the inverter may not detect a power failure depending upon the load state. If it happens, input
a power failure signal to the BX terminal to stop the inverter.
H43 Magnetic Flux Command Source
Selects an element with which you provide the magnetic-flux command.

If the Ai input and link are selected, magnetic flux command inputs within 10% are fixed at 10%.
Ｈ４３ＭＲＥＦＳＥＬ
Setting value: 0: Internal calculated value

1: Ai input [MF-REF]
2: Function code H44
3: Link (S04)
4-235
H44 Magnetic Flux Command Value
Specifies magnetic-flux command value. This function becomes available when you set 2 to H43.
Ｈ４４ＭＲＥＦ
Setting value: 10 to 100 (%)
H46 Observer (Mode selection)
Specifies an inertia of a mechanical system or uses the ASR tuning to measure the inertia, operates an internal
machine model in the inverter, estimates a load torque that becomes a disturbance element or a oscillation
element, adds a value to the torque command to counteract the load torque to increase the speed response
against a load disturbance and to damp an oscillation generated by the mechanical resonance quickly.
Ｈ４６ＯＢＳＭＯＤＥ
Setting value: 0: Disabled

1: Load disturbance observer
2: Oscillation suppressing observer
Note: When a load inertia specified by H51 or H52 and H127 has a large error, you cannot obtain an expected
performance. Specify an accurate value.
H47, H48, Observer (M1, M2, M3 compensation gain)

H125
H49, H50, Observer (M1, M2, M3 I-time)

H126
H51, H52, Observer (M1, M2, M3 load inertia)

H127
Specifies the compensation gain, the integral time, and the load inertia for the observer function.
Ｈ４７Ｍ１－ＯＢＳ－Ｐ
Ｈ４８Ｍ２－ＯＢＳ－Ｐ
Ｈ１２５Ｍ３－ＯＢＳ－Ｐ
Ｈ４９Ｍ１－ＯＢＳ－Ｉ
Ｈ５０Ｍ２－ＯＢＳ－Ｉ
Ｈ１２６Ｍ３－ＯＢＳ－Ｉ
Ｈ５１Ｍ１－ＩＮＥＲＴＩＡ
Ｈ５２Ｍ２－ＩＮＥＲＴＩＡ
Ｈ１２７Ｍ３－ＩＮＥＲＴＩＡ
H47, 48, 125 setting range: 0.00 to 1.00 (times)

H49, 50, 126 setting range: 0.005 to 1.000 (s)
H51, 52, 127 setting range: 0.001 to 50.000 (kg•m2)
Specify a load inertia of motor shaft conversion in kg•m2. You can also use ASR tuning by H01 "Tuning
operation selection" to measure the inertia.
4-236
H53 Line Speed Feedback Selection
You can select an element for the speed feedback
Ｈ５３Ｎ－ＦＢＳＥＬ
Set value: 0: Line speed disabled (integrated PG enabled)

However, with UPAC, Ai input or PG(LD) high select
1: Analog line speed detection [LINE-N]
2: Digital line speed detection (optional OPC-VG1-PG (LD))
Chap. 4
3: High selector (select the higher speed between the motor speed or line speed)
About High selector

When you conduct a line speed control, and a line PG fails and presents a speed feedback of 0r/min, the
inverter provides a command corresponding the maximum torque (torque limiter value if you use it) to
accelerate the motor to the maximum speed to follow up the speed command. To change the feedback input
from the line PG to a motor PG to prevent overrun when the line PG is disconnected is referred as "High
selector". Make sure to use this High selector when you do not have a protective mean to detect the PG
disconnection for line speed control.
Note: When you use a motor PG and the optional OPC-VG1-PG (LD), a protective function of "PG
disconnection alarm" becomes available.
If P01 (M1 control method) is set at “2” (simulation mode), the line speed feedback automatically becomes
invalid.
<Application example of line speed control>

The right figure illustrates an example of line speed
FRENIC-VG
control with PG.
When the line PG output is analog frequency, then use
the FUJI FV card (MCA, OPC-VG1-FV) to convert
the analog frequency into voltage to supply the voltage
output to Ai [LINE-N]. Also specifies H53 as High
selector.
When the line PG output is digital pulse, then use FUJI
PG card (OPC-VG1-PG (LD)). See also the
description of o06, o07, and o08 and the control block
diagram.
4-237
H55 Zero Speed Control (Gain)
H56 Zero Speed Control (Completion range)
Specifies the gain of the servo locking command and the range of completion to provide the servo locking
completion signal. See the section of [LOCK] of the function code E01 to E13 "X function selection"
Ｈ５５ＺＥＲＯ－ＧＡＩＮ
Setting range: 0 to 100 (times)
Ｈ５６ＺＥＲＯ－ＨＩＳＳ
Setting range: 0 to 100 (pulse)
H57 Overvoltage Suppression
When the DC link circuit voltage exceeds the overvoltage protection level during braking operation, the
overvoltage (OV) trip occurs. This function limits the braking torque to zero before the overvoltage trip
during the braking operation. The link circuit voltage decreases after 0 limiting, and the brake torque recovers
automatically. This operation repeats to restrain the overvoltage trip.
You can use only inverter loss energy to apply brake without braking devices (braking resistor and PWM
converter). When you want to use this function, see also "Power limiter" of the function code F40 to F45
"Torque limiter"
Ｈ５７ＯＵＰＲＥＶＥＮＴ

1: Enabled
Note: The torque generated by the motor may decrease under a suppressed voltage state. Do not use this
function for vertical transportation applications.
In case of V/f control, too short a deceleration setting may disable overvoltage suppression. If overvoltage
suppression is disabled, extend the deceleration time.
4-238
H58 Overcurrent Suppression
The overcurrent trip occurs when the motor current changes suddenly to become more than the protection
level. The overcurrent suppressing function restrains the inverter from supplying a current more than the
protection level when the load changes.
Ｈ５８ＯＣＰＲＥＶＥＮＴ

1: Enabled
Chap. 4
Note: The torque generated by the motor may decrease under a suppressed voltage state. Do not use this
function for vertical transportation applications.

H60 to H66 Load Adaptive Control
This function is related with the load adaptive control (H201 to H227). Refer to Section 4.1 "Control Block
Diagrams."
Use this function to lift faster in case of small loads when compared with the speed at the rated load, thereby
improving the efficiency of operation of the equipment.
Internal calculation of the inverter estimates the load during acceleration up to the rated (base) motor speed to
calculate the maximum operable speed and perform speed limit control. Operation at the same speed in the
up- and down-winding cycles with the same load is a major feature. As well, the maximum speed calculation
correction function is added so that the up-/down-winding operation at the rated load is always at the rated
(base) motor speed. The function can be used for lifting equipment equipped with a counterweight.
Ｈ６０ＬＯＡＤＣＯＮ１
Ｈ６１ＬＯＡＤＣＯＮ２
Ｈ６２ＬＩＦＴＳＰＥＥＤ
Ｈ６３ＣＷＥＩＧＨＴ
Ｈ６４ＳＡＦＥＣＯＥＦ
Ｈ６５ＭＥＦＦＩＣＩＥＮ
Ｈ６６ＲＬＯＡＤ
Note: The load adaptive control is valid with the M1 motor only. Specify the same torque limit value for
driving and braking.
Use acceleration/deceleration time 1 during operation under load adaptive control. Do not change the
acceleration/deceleration time setting during load adaptive control operation.
This function is related with the multi-limit speed pattern function (H214 to H227). For load adaptive control
and multi-limit speed pattern, refer to Section 4.1 "Control Block Diagrams."
H51 Observer setting (load inertia of M1) 0.001 to 50.000 (kgm2)

H202, H205, H208, H211 load inertia 0.001 to 50.000 (kg•m2)
Specify the inertia without a load converted to the M1 motor shaft.
Note: In a multi-winding system, specify the quotient of the total inertia divided by the number of
windings. For example, for a motor with two windings, specify a half the total inertia.
4-239
H60 Load adaptive control definition 1
Select the control method.
Setting: 0: The load adaptive control is made invalid.
1: Speed limit at almost same speed in up- and down-winding cycles
2: Regular speed limit
3: Limit invalid during driving operation and speed limit during braking operation
H61 Load adaptive control definition 2

Define the relationship between the direction of rotation of motor and lifting direction.
Setting: 0: Winding up during forward rotation of motor
1: Winding down during forward rotation of motor
Note: Setting H201 data to "0" also reverses the torque polarity in travel torque calculation.
H62 Up-winding speed 0.0 to 999.9 [m/min]

Specify the lifting speed at the rated (base) motor speed. Note that this is not the maximum speed.
H63 Weight of counterweight 0 to 600.00 [t]

Specify for lifting equipment equipped with a counterweight. Specify the weight of the counterweight.
H64, H203, H206, H209, H212 Safety factor 0.50 to 1.20

H65, H204, H207, H210, H213 Machine efficiency 0.500 to 1.000
Specify the total efficiency of the equipment.
H66 Rated load 0 to 600.00 [t]

The parameter is necessary for the correction of the maximum speed calculation so that operation at the
rated (base) motor speed is assured during up-/down-winding cycles at the rated load.
Note: Include the mass of the spreader and head block, too, in the setting. For a multi-winding system,
specify the quotient of the total mass divided by the number of windings. For example, for a motor with
two windings, specify a half the total mass.
Specify H51, H202, H205, H208, H211 (observer setting (M1 load inertia)), H61 (load adaptive control
definition 2), H62 (winding-up speed), H63 (weight of counterweight), and H65, H204, H207, H210, H213
(machine efficiency) according to the specification of the machine. The speed limit is set in a constant-output
pattern according to the rated motor output. The rated motor output serving as a basis for the calculation of the
speed limit can be adjusted with H65, H203, H206, H209, H212 (safety factor).
To operate at almost the same speed in the winding-up and winding-down cycles of the same load, specify
setting “1” as H60 (load adaptive control definition 1).
To operate at the rated (basic) motor speed in the winding-up and winding-dowm cycles of the rated load,
specify H66 (rated load). If the estimated inverter load exceeds the rated load, limit the motor speed using the
rated speed (basic speed).
To determine the maximum speed under consideration for the machine efficiency, specify setting "2" as H60
(load adaptive control definition 1). The down-winding speed (during braking operation) becomes higher by
the machine efficiency when compared with the winding-up speed (driving operation).
To invalidate load adaptive control during driving operation and validate the control only during braking
operation, specify setting "3" as H60 (load adaptive control definition 1). The control becomes invalid in the
winding-up cycle (during driving operation) and the control becomes valid in the winding-down cycle.
4-240
To invalidate load adaptive control, specify setting "0" as H60 (load adaptive control definition 1). Or turn on
the speed command value limit cancellation [N-LIM] of function selection D1 (X terminal function). Only the
speed limit caused by load adaptive control becomes invalid. Because the estimated load is calculated and the
speed limit is calculated, the speed limit value calculation result obtained with the option monitor 6
mentioned later is effective, too.
Use option monitor 6 or M220 (Load compensating speed control value), M221 (Hoisting load calculation
result monitor (kg)) and M222 (Travel torque calculation monitor (%)) to check the limit value calculation
result. (Valid if H60 (load adaptive control definition 1) is set at "1," "2" or "3.")
Use function selection DO (Y terminal function) to check the activation state of load adaptive control.
Chap. 4
Under load adaptive control limitation [ANL]:
The function turns on when the speed setting is limited by the speed limit value calculated in
the load adaptive control mode. Once turned on, the function does not turn off until the
inverter is stopped.

During load adaptive control calculation [ANC]:
The signal is on during calculation of the load and speed limit in the load adaptive control
mode. Upon completion of calculation, the signal is turned off and the result of calculation of
limit value of option monitor 6 is updated to the latest data. The signal is turned off when the
inverter is stopped.
Speed limit pattern diagram

If setting of H60 load adaptive control definition 1 = 1
k1 indicates the motor torque determined from H66 (rated load) and H62 (rated lifting speed). The motor
speed is limited by the base speed with the loads exceeding the rated load. The rated motor torque can be
operated, using H64, H203, H206, H209, H212 (safety factor).
If setting of H60 load adaptive control definition 1 = 2 or 3
The limit speed is obtained from the relationship between the maximum motor torque and maximum torque
necessary for acceleration/deceleration. The maximum motor torque can be operated, using H64, H203, H206,
H209, H212 (safety factor).
4-241
H68 Alarm Data Deletion
Deletes the alarm history and the alarm information maintained in the inverter completely.
The corresponding functions are the KEYPAD panel alarm information, the alarm history and the source of
alarms.
Setting the H68 data to "1" clears all data and automatically returns to "0."
Ｈ６８ＡＬＡＲＭＤＡＴＡ
H70 Reserved 1
H71 Reserved 2
These functions are reserved for makers to adjust the inverter.
Ｈ７０ＭＡＫＥＲ１
Ｈ７１ＭＡＫＥＲ２
Do not change.
Accident and/or injury may result.
H74 PG Detection Circuit Self-diagnosis Selection
Performs self diagnosis of the pulse encoder 2-phase signal input terminals (PA, PB) and the pulse encoder
output terminals (FA, FB). Set the 1000's digit of H104 to 0 (disable PG power break alarm selection) and
E29 (PG pulse output selection) to 7, shut off the inverter power, and connect PA to FA and PB to FB with
external wiring. By setting this function code to "1", a speed pattern generated automatically by the inverter is
output from the pulse encoder output terminals (FA, FB). The speed of this pattern is detected by the pulse
encoder 2-phase signal input terminals (PA, PB), and by comparing with the speed pattern that is output,
diagnosis of the PG detection circuit is accomplished. If the diagnosis result is normal, "COMPLETE OK!"
appears. If not normal "PG CIR ERR" or "A/B PHASE ERR" appears. After diagnosis is completed, the H74
setting automatically returns to "0".
The time required for PG circuit diagnosis is about 12 seconds. While in progress, diagnosis can be canceled
by pressing the key or key.
Ｈ７４ＰＧＳＥＬＦ
Setting 0: No operation
1: Run PG circuit diagnosis
Note: When the PG(SD)/PGo(SD) card (option) is
installed, this function cannot be used. (er6 will result.))
Set the pulse encoder output (FA, FB) in complementary
output (SW7 = 2, SW8 = 2) .
(Refer to switching of each switch in 3.3.3.9.)
Execution is possible with only the control power (R0, T0)
on.
After diagnosis is finished, return the settings of H104 and
E29 to their original values.
After diagnosis is finished, shut off the power of the
inverter (including R0, T0) and remove the external wiring.
4-242
• PG detection circuit Display during self diagnosis

Ｈ７４ＰＧＳＥＬＦ Change the data of the function code with the / keys.
０：ＩＮＡＣＴＩＶ
１：ＡＣＴＩＶＥ
０～１
ＳＴＯＰ＋∧∨ÆＤＡＴＡＳ
ＥＴ
ＰＧＳＥＬＦ－ＣＨＥＣＫ After "STOP+∧∨ÆDATA SET" appears, the FWD/STOP key

operations appear alternately.
Chap. 4
ＦＷＤ→ＳＴＡＲＴ
Start PG detection circuit self diagnosis with key ON.
When 100% appears, PG detection circuit self diagnosis is finished.

ＰＧＳＥＬＦ－ＣＨＥＣＫ
■■■■ ５０％ Forcible stop is possible with STOP key or RESET key ON.
ＳＴＯＰ→ＳＴＯＰ
ＰＧＳＥＬＦ－ＣＨＥＣＫ If the diagnosis result is normal, "COMPLETE OK!" appears.

ＣＯＭＰＬＥＴＥＯＫ！
After about 1.5 seconds, the function code list screen appears.
Ｈ７５ＵⅤＷＰＨＳ The H74 setting automatically returns to "0".

Ｈ７６ＲＳＴＯＦＦ
Ｈ７７Ｆ－ＴＩＭ
Ｈ７８ＭＮＴＩＮＩＴ Æ
<Screen when the result is

abnormal 1>
ＰＧＳＥＬＦ－ＣＨＥＣＫ If the polarity of the detected speed value is reversed, "A/B PHASE
Ａ／ＢＰＨＡＳＥＥＲＲ
ERR" appears.
Move to the function code setting screen with RESET key or STOP
key ON.
<Screen when the result is
abnormal 2>
ＰＧＳＥＬＦ－ＣＨＥＣＫ If the speed detection circuit is abnormal, "PG CIR ERR" appears.
ＰＧＣＩＲＥＲＲ Move to the function code setting screen with RESET key or STOP
key ON.
4-243
H75 Phase Sequence Configuration of Main Circuit Output Wires
The motor wiring is normally connected in a normal phase connection; however, if the wiring is connected in
a reverse phase connection, this function code can be set to reverse phase to make the run command match the
rotation direction.
Ｈ７５ＵＶＷＰＨＳ
Setting 0: UVW normal phase connection

1: UVW reverse phase connection
H76 Main Power Down Detection
The main power break detection function monitors the main power of the inverter (RST AC voltage input).
When set to "1", the monitor functions below operate.
If a main power break is detected while the inverter is stopped, the charge resistance bypass circuit in the
inverter opens. If a brief main power break occurs while the inverter is stopped, charging will take place
through the charge resistance circuit when the power is restored, enabling the suppression of surge current.
Note: If "0" (No main power AC input monitor) is set and the main power is turned off/on quickly while the
inverter is stopped, the charge resistance in the inverter will be bypassed and excessive surge current may
damage the inverter.
When the main power is OFF, a power interruption will be detected and inverter output will not start even if
the DC link bus voltage is above the undervoltage level. During inverter output, a power interruption is
detected based on the DC link bus voltage only.
When a main power break is detected, ________ (underline) will appear in the LED monitor of the display.
However, when DC power is supplied and inverter AC input power is not supplied, such as when a power
regeneration converter is connected, always set to "0" (No main power AC input monitor".
Ｈ７６ＲＳＴＯＦＦ
Setting 0: No main power AC input monitor

1: Main power AC input monitor
H77 Cooling Fan ON/OFF Control Continuation Timer
This sets the condition for the cooling fan ON-OFF function by H06. While the inverter is stopped, if the
detected fan temperature is below a fixed value for the time set with this setting, the cooling fan turns OFF.
Ｈ７７Ｆ－ＴＩＭ
Setting: 0 to 600 sec
4-244
H78 Initialization of Startup Counter/Total Run Time
This function initializes the M1 - M3 start counts and M1 - M3 cumulative run times (clear to zero). When
doing maintenance work on the motor or machine, you can individually initialize the data of each.
Ｈ７８ＭＮＴＩＮＩＴ
1: Initialize M123 "M1 start count"
Chap. 4
4: Initialize M126 "M1 cumulative run time"

H79 Initialization of Cumulative Run Time of Cooling Fan
The data for the initial value setting of the cooling fan aggregate run time can be changed. When the cooling
fan is replaced, set "1". When "1" is set, "0" is written to the aggregate time internally. When replacing the
inverter control board, write down the data of this function code before replacing the board, and then reset the
data after replacement to continue the aggregate run time. The setting automatically reverts to "0" after it is
written.
Ｈ７９ＦＡＮＴ－ＩＮＩ
Setting: 0 to 65535 (units of 10 hours)
H80 Capacitance Measurement of DC Link Bus Capacitor
When the capacitor capacitance measurement method is user mode (1's digit of H104 is 1), this function code
is used. Read and understand the following explanation.
When initial value measurement of the user setting capacitor capacitance is started, the measurement result is
written. When the inverter power is shut off with this setting set to "1", initial value measurement of the user
setting capacitor capacitance starts and the measurement result is written to this code.
User mode capacitor capacitance measurement is performed when the power is shut off if the AND conditions
below are met.
• Inverter is stopped
• Undervoltage alarm has not occurred
• Cooling fan is running (will be forcibly stopped by the inverter when the power is shut off)
Ｈ８０ＣＣ－ＩＮＩＴ
Setting: 0 to 32767
When the capacitor capacitance measurement method is the factory default standard (1's digit of H104 is 0)
Measurement is performed when the power is shut off if all measurement conditions in the table below are ○.
The measurement conditions vary depending on whether or not the predicted life (LIFE) is selected with Y
function selection. The measurement result is shown in M46 "main circuit capacitor capacitance (%)" and
M121 "main circuit capacitor life (elapsed time)". In the M121 elapsed time, the capacitance decrease rate
and capacitor life time obtained by capacitor capacitance measurement are converted to an elapsed time that
overwrites the previous value.
4-245
When the capacitor capacitance measurement method is the user measurement value standard (1's digit of
H104 is 1)
The measurement conditions are different from the factory default standard. Refer to the table below.
Factory default standard

(H104=***0) User measurement value
Measurement condition
standard (H104=***1)
No LIFE assignment LIFE assignment
Gate signal OFF ○ ○ ○
Cooling fan running ○ ○ ○
Not undervoltage ○ ○ ○
Terminal inputs all OFF ○ *1 ○ *1 -
Option card not installed ○ - *2 -
*1 Terminal information after normal open/close processing.
*2 When life information (LIFE) is assigned, measurement is also performed when an option card other than UPAC is
installed.
Measurement will take place under the following conditions, however, the result will not be correct.
• When a breaking unit or other inverter is connected to the P (+), N (-) main circuit terminals
by DC bus connection.
• RS-485 communication is used.
• Power is supplied from the R0, T0 auxiliary power.
By assigning the life prediction (LIFE) signal to one of the function codes of the Y function selection setting
(E15 to E19), a life prediction signal is output to the general-purpose output (Y1 to Y5) when all of the
conditions below are met.
• M46 "main circuit capacitor capacitance (%)" is 85% or lower
• The 10's digit of H104 is 1 (default value)
• Life determination cancel LF-CCL is OFF
4-246
H81 Initialization of Service Life of DC Link Bus Capacitor
The data for the initial value setting of the main circuit capacitor life aggregate time can be changed. When
the main circuit capacitor is replaced, set "1". When "1" is set, "0" is written to the aggregate time internally.
When replacing the inverter control board, write down this function code before replacing the board, and then
reset after replacement to continue the aggregate time. The setting automatically reverts to "0" after it is
written.
Ｈ８１Ｃ－ＴＩＭＥＩＮＩ
Chap. 4

H82 Startup Count for Maintenance
When the total value of M123 "M1 start count" to M125 "M3 start count" becomes larger than this setting, a
maintenance prediction (MNT) signal is output. By setting a start count for machine maintenance, external
notification of maintenance timing is possible. The function code is the same for each motor. When the setting
is "0", the start count stops.
Ｈ８２ＭＮＴＳＴＲＴ
Setting: 0 to 65535
0: No operation
1 to 65535: Set time
H83 Maintenance Interval
This sets the inverter run time for performing machine maintenance. When the total value of M126 "M1
cumulative run time" to M128 "M3 cumulative run time" becomes larger than this setting, a maintenance
prediction (MNT) signal is output. The function code is the same for each motor.
Ｈ８３ＭＮＴＴＩＭＥ

0: No operation
1 to 65535: Set time
4-247
H85-H88 Calendar Clock
This is primarily used to set the date and time in the internal clock of the inverter via the communication
option. The date and time can be displayed regularly on the LCD. The date and time are also used as a time
stamp for detailed alarm information and the support loader trace-back function
The date and time can be easily set using the keyboard from "12. DATE TIME" in the menu of program
mode.
By setting the date and time in H85 to H87 and then setting "1" in H88, the date and time are applied to the
internal clock. The setting of H88 automatically reverts to "0" after the date and time are written.
Ｈ８５Ｙ／ＭＳＥＴ
Ｈ８６Ｄ／ＨＳＥＴ
Ｈ８７Ｍ／ＳＳＥＴ
Setting: 0 to FFFF
Ｈ８８ＷＲ－ＴＩＭＥ
1: Write time
The setting range is January 1, 2000, 00:00:00 to December 31, 2099, 23:59:59.
For example to set April 1, 2011, 13:15:00, write the values below.
Set H85 = 0B04, H86 = 010D, H87 = 0F00 in hexadecimal.
Set H88 = 1 to write the above values to the internal clock.
Valid numbers for each item are shown below.

Year: 00h - 63h, Month: 01h - 0Ch, Day: 01h - 1Fh, Hour: 00h - 17h, Min: 00h - 3Bh, Sec: 00h - 3Bh
* If values other than the above are set and "write time" is performed with H88, the individual values that are out of range
are invalidated and not applied to the clock. Values that are valid are applied to the clock.
H89 Speed Detection Monitor Selection (under V/f control) (Available soon)
In V/f control, the speed detection monitor display method when motor speed detection can be used (internal
PG or PG(SD)) can be selected.
If the setting is "1" and there is a break in the PG line, it will no longer be possible to display the correct motor
speed; however, a PG break alarm will not occur.
Ｈ８９Ｎ－ＭＯＮＳＥＬ
Setting: 0 to 1
0: No display, or speed command value
1: PG detection value
4-248
H90 Overspeed Alarm Detection Level
The detection level of the overspeed alarm (0s) can be set. 100% represents the maximum speed. Disabled
during V/f control.
Ｈ９０ＯＳＬＶＬ
Setting: 100 to 160%
Chap. 4
H94 ASR Feedforward Gain Magnification Setting (Available soon)

H94 switches the ASR1-4 FF (gain) setting. Valid for function codes F63, C42, C52 and C62.
Ｈ９４ＡＳＲＦＦＥＸＴ
Setting: 0 to 2
0: x1 (0.000 to 9.999 s)
1: x10 (0.00 to 99.99 s)
2: x100 (0.00 to 99.99 s)
H99 UP/DOWN S-curve Pattern Selection (Available soon)
H99 defines whether there is S-shape operation of the speed command when the UP/DOWN command is
OFF.
S-shape operation of the speed command when the UP/DOWN command is ON is determined by the S-shape
setting of F67, etc.
When the setting is "1", S-shape operation increases the speed by the width of the S-shape (Un).
When there is S-shape
operation setting by Uｎ
F67, etc.
UP ON OFF UP OFF
ON
S-shape operation when setting = 0 S-shape operation when setting = 1
Ｈ９９Ｕ／ＤＳ－ＣＡＮ
Setting: 0 to 1
0: Cancel S-shape (VG7 compatible)
1: Enable S-shape (VG5 compatible)
H101 PID Command Filter Time Constant
H101 specifies the time constant for the PID command (after H21 switching) filter.
Ｈ１０１ＰＩＤＦＩＬＴ
Setting: 0 to 5000 ms
4-249
H102 Magnetic Pole Position Offset Writing Permission (Available soon)
<ABZ only>
After the encode position offset is read, this enables data writing to function codes o10 "M1 magnetic pole
position offset", A60 "M2 magnetic pole position offset", and A160 "M3 magnetic pole position offset".
Ｈ１０２ＳＭ－ＯＦＳＷＲ
Setting: 0 (disable), 1 (enable)
H103 Protective/Maintenance Function Selection 1
Protection operations can be individually selected.

To enable a protection operation, refer to the table below and set the appropriate digit to "1".
Ｈ１０３ＰＲＯＴＯＰＥ１
Setting: 0000 to 1111

1000's digit: Start delay alarm operation selection (l0c ) [0: Disable, 1: Enable] (default: 0)
100's digit: Grounding fault alarm operation selection (ef ) [0: Disable, 1: Enable] (default: 1)
10's digit: Output open-phase alarm operation selection (0pl ) [0: Disable, 1: Enable] (default: 0)
1's digit: Braking transistor error operation selection (dba ) [0: Disable, 1: Enable] (default: 1)
Braking transistor error (1's digit)

Selects whether errors of the braking transistor for braking resistor drive are detected.
If you are not using a braking resistor and do not want this alarm to occur, set to "0".
Output open-phase (10's digit)

Select whether the output open-phase alarm operates.
Grounding fault (100's digit)

Select whether the grounding fault alarm operates.
Start delay (1000's digit)

Select whether the start delay alarm operates.
4-250
H104 Protective/Maintenance Function Selection 2
Protection operations and main circuit capacitor life determination operations can be individually selected.
Ｈ１０４ＰＲＯＴＯＰＥ２

1000's digit: PG power break alarm (p9 ) operation selection [0: Disable, 1: Enable] (default: 1)
Chap. 4
100's digit: Carrier frequency reduction function selection [0: Disable, 1: Enable] (default: 1)
10's digit: Main circuit capacitor life determination selection [0: Disable, 1: Enable] (default: 1)
1's digit: Main circuit capacitor capacitance measurement selection [0: Disable, 1: Enable] (default: 0)
(0: Factory default standard, 1: User measurement standard)

Main circuit capacitor capacitance measurement selection (1's digit)
Select whether the standard level for determining the life of the main circuit capacitor capacitance is the
factory default standard or the user set standard. Also see the explanation of function code H80.
Main circuit capacitor life determination selection (10's digit)

Select whether decreased main circuit capacitor capacitance is the factor for the life prediction signal (LIFE).
Also see the explanation of function code H80.
Carrier frequency auto reduction selection (100's digit)

This function automatically reduces the carrier frequency before an inverter cooling fan overheating (0h1 )
or inverter internal heating (0h3 ) alarm occurs in order to avoid the alarm. Select the operation of this
function. When the carrier frequency is reduced, motor noise increases.
Note: When a synchronous motor is driven, the inverter carrier frequency is sometimes set higher to prevent
overheating of the permanent magnet and demagnetization of the magnet due to inverter high frequency
output current (excluding our GNF2 model). Carefully check the carrier frequency allowed by the motor
before deciding the carrier frequency (F26) and carrier frequency auto reduction selection (H104) settings. If
you cancel the carrier frequency auto reduction selection function (H104), exercise caution as the carrier
frequency setting may cause a reduction of the unit's continuous rated current (for rated current reduction
characteristics, refer to section 2.1.4). The setting of this digit cannot be changed during operation.
PG power break alarm selection (1000's digit)

Select whether the PG power loss alarm (p9 ) operates.
H105 Protective/Maintenance Function Selection 3 (Available soon)
Protection operations can be individually selected.

Ｈ１０５ＰＲＯＴＯＰＥ３

1000's digit: Not used
1's digit: Not used
4-251
H106 to H111 Light Alarm Object Definition 1 to 6
When an error is detected and the error is a minor error, the light alarm (l-al) display can be shown and
operation can be continued without tripping the inverter.
"1" can be set in bits corresponding to any of the light alarm causes to treat those causes as light alarms and
not have the alarm relay output (30RY) operate.
Ｈ１０６Ｌ－ＡＬＭ１

(0: Heavy alarm, 1: Light alarm)
External alarm [OH2]
NTC thermistor wire break [nrb]
Motor overload [OL1] [OL2] [OL3] (same for M1-M3)
Motor overheat [OH4]
Ｈ１０７Ｌ－ＡＬＭ２

Toggle error [ArF]
Reserved
Network error [Er4]
RS-485 error [Er5]
Ｈ１０８Ｌ－ＡＬＭ３

E-SX error [ArE]
Speed does not match [Er9], start delay [LOC]
DC fan lock [daft]
Mock alarm [Err]
Ｈ１０９Ｌ－ＡＬＭ４

Safety board light alarm [SnF] (Available soon)
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Ｈ１１０Ｌ－ＡＬＭ５

(0: Not light alarm, 1: Light alarm)
Fan overheat prediction [OH], inverter overload prediction [OL]
Life prediction [LiF]
Battery life [BaT]
Motor overheat prediction [MOH], motor overload prediction [MOL]
4-252
Set whether the LED display shows [L-AL] when a light alarm occurs.
Ｈ１１１Ｌ－ＡＬＭ６
Setting: 0 to 1
0: Disable (L-AL not displayed)
1: Enable (L-AL displayed)
Chap. 4
H112 to H118 M1 Magnetic Saturation Extension Coefficients 6-12
The excitation current (current that creates magnetic flux in the induction motor) and magnetic flux are in a
non-linear relationship to maintain the saturation characteristics. When the saturation characteristics are

significant in an application that exceeds a fixed output range of 1:2, set a correction factor.
For normal use, do not change.
(These become function codes that expand the characteristics of P15 to P19.)
Only valid when vector control with speed sensor (induction motor) is selected. Only applies to the M1 motor.
The M2 and M3 motors do not have a function code that is equivalent to this function code.
Ｈ１１２Ｍ１－ＳＡＴ６
Ｈ１１３Ｍ１－ＳＡＴ７
Ｈ１１４Ｍ１－ＳＡＴ８
Ｈ１１５Ｍ１－ＳＡＴ９
Ｈ１１６Ｍ１－ＳＡＴ１０
Ｈ１１７Ｍ１－ＳＡＴ１１
Ｈ１１８Ｍ１－ＳＡＴ１２
Setting: 0.0 to 100.0%
H134 Speed Drop Detection Delay Timer
Adds speed drop detection signal and speed setting detection signal conditions to the ON/OFF conditions of
the break release signal (BRK). For details on the brake release signal (BRK), refer to the explanation of 18:
brake release signal (BRK) in function codes E01 - E13 (X terminal function).
Function code H134 sets the time interval from the point that the inverter is running until the speed drop
detection function starts operating.
Ｈ１３４ＤＥＬＡＹＴＩＭ
Setting range: 0.000 to 10.000 s
4-253
H135 Speed Command Detection Level (forward)
H136 Speed Command Detection Level (reverse)
When speed setting 2 (before acceleration/deceleration calculation) rises higher than this setting, the speed
setting detection signal turns ON. This is included in the brake release signal ON (brake release) conditions.
When speed setting 2 (before acceleration/deceleration calculation) or speed setting 3 (after acceleration/
deceleration calculation) drops lower than this setting, the speed setting detection signal turns OFF. This is
included in the brake release signal OFF (brake on) conditions. While running by run forward command, the
H135 level is valid, and while running by run reverse command, the H136 level is valid.
Ｈ１３５ＮＲＥＦＬＥＶＬＦ
Ｈ１３６ＮＲＥＦＬＥＶＬＲ
Setting range: 0.0 to 150.0 r/min
◆Forward running (FWD ON)

ON
OFF
Speed data absolute
0 Hysteresis width value
= 0.5% of max. speed
Setting level H135
◆Reverse running (REV ON)

Speed setting detection signal ON OFF
Speed command detection signal Speed data
absolute value 0
Hysteresis width
Setting level H136
H137 Speed Drop Detection Level
When the absolute value of the detected speed value falls below this setting, the speed drop detection signal
turns ON and the brake release signal turns OFF (brake on).
Ｈ１３７ＮＤＥＣＬＥＶＬ
Setting range: 0.0 to 150.0 r/min
Speed drop detection ON OFF

signal
Absolute value of
0 detected speed value
Hysteresis width
Setting level H137
4-254
H138 Speed Drop Detection Delay Timer
On delay timer for the speed drop detection signal. When the on delay timer is operating, the speed drop
detection signal does not turn ON when the detected speed value is higher than H138 + 1%.
Ｈ１３８ＮＤＥＣＴＩＭＲ
Chap. 4
H140 Start Delay Detection (Detection level)

H141 Start Delay Detection (Detection timer)
When the torque current command value is higher than the level set with this function code, and the actual
speed value or estimated speed value is lower than the speed set with function code F37 "Stop speed" over the
time set in function code H141, the start delay alarm (l0c ) occurs.
Ｈ１４０ＳＲＴＤＬＹＬ
Setting range: 0.0 to 300.0%
Ｈ１４１ＳＲＴＤＬＹＴ

Note: Under vector control without speed sensor, whether the speed is less than the stop speed (F37) is judged
by the estimated speed value. There may be deviations in alarm detection due to error in the estimated speed.
The effect of estimated speed error is greater when the stop speed is low. Be aware of this when using this
function code.
H142 Mock Alarm
During setup, an alarm can be simulated to check the external sequence.

Setting method
Press the and keys simultaneously or the and keys simultaneously, change to any set value, and
then enter with the key. After the mock alarm occurs, the set value automatically reverts to 0 and alarm
reset can be performed.
If the mock alarm has been defined as a "light alarm" in function code H108 "light alarm definition 3", light
alarm (L-ALM) can be assigned to one of the function codes of the Y function selection settings (E15 to E19)
to allow the mock alarm status to be output to a general purpose output (Y1 to Y5). When this is done, the
alarm relay output relay (30RY) does not operate. When defined as a "heavy alarm", the mock alarm status
shows "err".
Alarm data of the mock alarm (alarm history and other information related to the alarm) is recorded in the
same way as alarm data during normal operation, and you can check the data.
To erase the alarm data after you have completed setup, use H68 "delete alarm data" in the same way as when
deleting alarm data of an alarm that occurred during operation.
A mock alarm also occurs if you hold down and at least 3 seconds on the touch panel.
Ｈ１４２ＳＩＭＡＬＭ
1: Mock alarm occurs
4-255
H144 Toggle Data Error Timer
The error detection time for the toggle signal can be set.
Refer to the explanation of 72, 73: toggle signal 1, 2 in X function selection.
Ｈ１４４ＴＧＬＥＲＲＴ
Setting range: 0.01 to 20.00 (sec)
H145 Reverse Run Prevention for Vector Control without Speed Sensor (Lower limit
frequency selection)
To improve speed control characteristics of ultra-low speed under vector control without speed sensor, a
lower limit frequency can be set for the speed command value and estimated speed value (primary estimated
frequency value).
Ｈ１４５Ｌ－ＬＩＭＳＥＬ
0: Disable
1: Enable for FWD polarity operation (enable in start delay during hoisting operation (FWD
command, speed command+))
2: Enable for REV polarity operation (enable in start delay during lowering operation (REV
command, speed command+))
3: Enable for both FWD and REV polarities (enable in start delay of both hoisting and
lowering)
Limiting takes place in the shaded areas shown below. When the estimated speed value (primary estimated
frequency value) is in a shaded area, the speed command is limited by the lower limit frequency.
When enabling this function, set the start characteristic (H09) to 0 (no operation). When using the function with the
speed setting by analog input near 0 (V), deviations in the analog voltage polarity will cause the limiting operation to
become unstable. Take measures such as setting a dead zone (F82). There are restrictions on this function as noted
above. Understand these restrictions before using the function.
4-256
H146 Reverse Run Prevention for Vector Control without Speed Sensor
(Lower limit frequency, FWD)
Set the lower limit frequency when H145 = 1 is set. As a guideline, set the motor slippage frequency.
Ｈ１４６Ｌ－ＬＩＭＦＷＤ
Setting range: 0.000 to 10.000 Hz
Chap. 4
(Lower limit frequency, REV)
Set the lower limit frequency when H145 = 2 is set. As a guideline, set the motor slippage frequency.

Ｈ１４７Ｌ－ＬＩＭＲＥＶ
Setting range: 0.000 to 10.000 Hz
(Estimated primary frequency filter)
Set the primary delay filter time constant for the estimated speed value (primary estimated frequency value).
Use for speed changes under vector control without speed sensor.
Ｈ１４８ＰＲＩ－ＦＦＩＬ
Setting range: 0 to 100 ms
H149 Machine Runaway Detection Speed Setting
During operation (after the machine brake is released), if the speed is higher than the speed command value
(speed setting 4: ASR input) and the speed with a deviation setting applied to the actual speed value, machine
runaway is detected and a speed mismatch alarm (er9 ) is output. A setting of 100% represents the
maximum speed.
This function is invalid when the brake release signal (BRK) is not assigned to the Y function terminal.
The speed mismatch alarms set with function codes E43 to E45 do not occur when the speed command value
(speed setting 4: ASR input) polarity and actual speed value polarity match and the actual speed value is less
than the speed command value. The speed mismatch alarm set with this function is output regardless of the
above underlined conditions.
Ｈ１４９Ｍ－ＳＰＤ
Setting 0.0: Disable

0.1 to 20.0%
Detected value
Command
Speed match width value
Shaded area is alarm range
Speed mismatch alarm conditions Speed mismatch alarm conditions (by E43 - E4)
(machine runaway detection)
Note: The operation of the speed mismatch alarm is defined by the function code E45 operation definition.
4-257
H160 M1 Initial Magnetic Pole Position Detection Mode (Available soon)
Function codes for the synchronous motor. These set the initial magnetic pole position detection method.
Ｈ１６０Ｍ１－ＳＭＩＮＩ
Ｈ１７０Ｍ２－ＳＭＩＮＩ
Ｈ１８０Ｍ３－ＳＭＩＮＩ
Setting 0: IPM (embedded magnet) Motor current drawing method

1: SPM (surface magnet) Motor current drawing method
2: IPM motor alternation method (Available soon)
3: SPM motor alternation method (Available soon)
H161 M1 Pull-in Current Command (Available soon)
Current command value for magnetic pole position detection. Normally there is no need to change the factory
default value.
Ｈ１６１Ｍ１－Ｐ－ＵＰＴ
Ｈ１７１Ｍ２－Ｐ－ＵＰＴ
Ｈ１８１Ｍ３－Ｐ－ＵＰＴ
Setting: 10 to 200% (100% / motor rated current)
H162 M1 Pull-in Frequency (Available soon)
H163 M1 Reference Current for Polarity Discrimination (Available soon)
H164 M1 Alternating Voltage (Available soon)
Used for magnetic pole position detection. Normally there is no need to change the factory default value.
4-258
H201 to H213 Load Adaptive Control Parameter Settings 1 (Available soon)
Parameters used for load compensation control.

For details, refer to the explanation of functions H60 to H66.
Ｈ２０１ＬＤＡＤＰＳＷ
Settings 0: H51, H64, H65 enabled, H202-H213 disabled

1: H51, H64, H65 enabled, H202-H213 disabled
Chap. 4
Set the inertia for M1 motor axis conversion not including the applied load.
For multi-winding systems, or for synchronous driving of a load with multiple motors, divide the total inertia
by the number of windings or the number of motors and set the resulting value. For example, for a

two-winding motor, set 1/2 the value of the total inertia.
H202, H205: Load inertia (hoisting 1, 2); H208, H211: load inertia (lowering 1, 2)
Ｈ２０２ＬＤ－ＪＵＰ１
Ｈ２０５ＬＤ－ＪＵＰ２
Ｈ２０８ＬＤ－ＪＵＰ１
Ｈ２１１ＬＤ－ＪＵＰ２
2
Setting: 0.001 to 50.000 kg•m
H203, H206: Safety factor (hoisting 1, 2); H209, H212: Safety factor (lowering 1, 2)
Ｈ２０３ＳＡＦＥＵＰ１
Ｈ２０６ＳＡＦＥＵＰ２
Ｈ２０９ＳＡＦＥＤＮ１
Ｈ２１２ＳＡＦＥＤＮ２
Setting: 0.5 to 1.20
H204, H207: Machine efficiency (hoisting 1, 2); H210, H213: Machine efficiency (lowering 1, 2)
Set the total efficiency of the machine.
Ｈ２０４Ｍ－ＥＦＵＰ 1
Ｈ２０７Ｍ－ＥＦＵＰ 2
Ｈ２１０Ｍ－ＥＦＤＮ 1
Ｈ２１３Ｍ－ＥＦＤＮ 2
Setting: 0.500 to 1.000
4-259
H214 to H227 Load Adaptive Control Parameter Settings 2 (Available soon)
H214 = 1 enables the multi restriction speed pattern function. For the relation to the H201 - H213 load
compensation control function, refer to the explanation of functions H60 - H66.
Set the torque level of each limit speed point as indicated below.
H215 - H224: Multi limit speed pattern (*)
* H215: Maximum speed, H216: Rated speed, H217: Rated speed × 1.1, H218: Rated speed × 1.2
H219: Rated speed × 1.4, H220: Rated speed × 1.6, H221: Rated speed × 1.8, H222: Rated speed × 2.0
H223: Rated speed × 2.5, H224: Rated speed × 3.0
Ｈ２１５ＭＵＬ－ＮＭＡＸ
Ｈ２１６ＭＵＬ－ＮＲＡＴ
Ｈ２１７ＭＵＬ－Ｌ１．１
Ｈ２１８ＭＵＬ－Ｌ１．２
Ｈ２１９ＭＵＬ－Ｌ１．４
Ｈ２２０ＭＵＬ－Ｌ１．６
Ｈ２２１ＭＵＬ－Ｌ１．８
Ｈ２２２ＭＵＬ－Ｌ２．０
Ｈ２２３ＭＵＬ－Ｌ２．５
Ｈ２２４ＭＵＬ－Ｌ３．０
<Setting notes>
A torque level setting for a limit speed point that exceeds the maximum speed will be invalid.
The settings for T1 to T9 should increase in order from T1 (T1 < T2 < ...T9).
Set the torque level Tnmax for the maximum speed to a smaller value than the torque levels set for the limit
speed points less than the maximum speed.
The multi limit speed pattern (bold line below) is limited to within the rated motor torque pattern (fine line
below).
<Limit pattern graph>
Torque level (%)

100%
Ｔ１[H216]
Ｔ2[H217] Motor rated torque pattern
Ｔ3[H218]
Limit speed pattern
Ｔ4[H219]
Run torque Ｔ5[H220]

for load Ｔ6[H221]
Ｔ7[H222]
Ｔnmax[H215]
Ｔ8[H223]
Ｔ9[H224]
Limit speed Speed [r/min]
4-260
H225: Limit speed discrimination interval (start speed), H226: Limit speed discrimination interval (end
speed)
The limit speed is calculated within the discrimination speed interval. Set with the rated speed 100%.
Ｈ２２５ＬＩＭ ― ＮＳＲＴ
Ｈ２２６ＬＩＭ ― ＮＥＮＴ
Chap. 4
Within the calculation interval, the limit speed is calculated from the torque command that occurs and the
instantaneous value of the acceleration data. When the speed reaches the limit completion speed, the average
value of the calculated results is used as the final limit speed.
Example: When rated speed F04 = 1500 r/min, H225 = 75.0%, H226 = 93.7%, acceleration time F07 = 5 s,
maximum speed F03 = 3000 r/min,
• Discrimination start speed = 1125.0 r/min (1500×0.75)
• Discrimination end speed = 1405.5 r/min (1500×0.937)
• Calculation interval t = (1405.5 - 1125)/3000 × 5 s = 0.935 s
* In this example, operation takes place according to the speed command value. If a torque
restriction is triggered or the detected speed value does not accord with the speed command,
the time t will be different.
• When the discrimination start speed is greater than the discrimination end speed (H225 > H226),
load compensation calculation is performed when the speed set for the discrimination end speed is
reached.
• When the discrimination interval is short or the torque command value varies widely, deviations
occur in the calculation results.
• When there are wide variations in the torque command value, adjust the speed control factor (ASR)
to decrease the variations in the torque command value.
When a speed limit calculation reset signal (NL-RST) is assigned to the digital input signal and turned ON,
the load compensation calculation result is cleared and the limit speed is recalculated the next time
reacceleration occurs in the same direction.
Calculation result clear conditions

The speed command value has dropped to under 50% of the rated speed.
Input the speed limit calculation reset signal (NL-RST) 5 ms or more.
4-261
Each time the polarity of the speed command value changes (hoisting lowering), the limit speed is
calculated when acceleration takes place, regardless of the speed limit calculation reset signal (NL-RST).
H227: Load compensation control definition 3
Ｈ２２７ＬＯＡＤＣＯＮ３
Setting value 0: Separate limit speed calculation for hoisting and lowering
1: A limit speed is calculated when hoisting. When lowering, the speed is limited by the result
of the previous hoisting calculation.
However, when one of the following conditions obtains, limit speed calculation also takes
place when lowering.
1) The first operation after powering on is lowering.
2) A limit speed was not calculated for the previous hoisting operation.
⇒ The previous hoisting took place at a speed under the H226 limit speed
discrimination interval (end speed)
3) Lowering was performed after pre-excitation was stopped (Note 1)
2: A limit speed is calculated when hoisting. When lowering, the speed is limited by the result
of the previous hoisting calculation.
However, when one of the following condition obtains, the lowering speed is limited by the
rated speed.
1) The initial operation after powering on is lowering.
2) A limit speed was not calculated for the previous hoisting operation.
⇒ The previous hoisting took place at a speed under the H226 limit speed
discrimination interval (end speed)
3) Lowering was performed after pre-excitation was stopped (Note 1)
Note 1: If the pre-excitation signal is turned OFF first when switching from pre-excitation operation to
speed control operation (FWD/REV ON), condition (3) will obtain and the previous hoisting limit
speed will be cleared. Use a sequence in which the pre-excitation signal is turned off after the run
command is input, as shown below.
OFF after run command ON (delayed by 5 ms or more)
運転指令がOＮ後にOFF（5ms以上遅らせる）
予備励磁信号(EXIT）
Pre-excitation signal (EXIT) ＯＮＯFF
運転指令(FWD/REV)
Run command (FWD/REV) ＯFF ＯＮ
H228 Load Inertia Magnification Setting
Change the multiplier setting of "load inertia" of H51, H52, H127, H202, H205, H208, H211
Ｈ２２８ＩＮＲＴ１０
Setting: 0 x 1 (0.001 to 50.000 kg•m2)

1 x10 (0.01 to 500.00 kg• m2)
2 x100 (0.1 to 5,000.0 kg• m2)
4-262
H322, H325 Notch Filters 1 and 2 (Resonance frequency)
H323, H326 Notch Filters 1 and 2 (Attenuation level)
H324, H327 Notch Filters 1 and 2 (Frequency range)
Set this to dampen resonance in the mechanical system. A maximum of 2 resonance points can be dampened.
Ｈ３２２ＮＦ１－ＦＲＱ
Chap. 4
Ｈ３２５ＮＦ２－ＦＲＱ
Setting: 10 to 2,000 Hz
The notch filter frequency is limited internally based on the setting of F26 "carrier frequency". Carrier

frequencies and corresponding notch filter setting ranges are shown below. If the setting exceeds the upper
limit, the upper limit is applied.
2 kHz, 5 kHz, 10 kHz, 11 kHz : 10 to 2000 Hz
4 kHz, 7 kHz, 8 kHz, 9 kHz, 15 kHz : 10 to 1500 Hz
3 kHz, 6 kHz, 12 kHz, 13 kHz, 14 kHz : 10 to 1000 Hz
Ｈ３２３ＮＦ１－ＡＴＴ
Ｈ３２６ＮＦ２－ＡＴＴ
Setting: 0 to 40 dB
Ｈ３２４ＮＦ１－ＷＩＤ
Ｈ３２７ＮＦ２－ＷＩＤ
Setting: 0 to 3
Setting method
Set a notch filter frequency, attenuation, and width appropriate for the resonance point in the machine.
Four increments are available for the width setting. A larger setting allows a wider frequency band to be
covered. Normally a setting of "2" is recommended.
Gain
Set
attenuation
Set width
0
Set resonance frequency Frequency
Machine resonance point
• Setting an attenuation that is too large may cause unstable control. Do not set higher than necessary.
4-263
4.3.6 A codes (Alternative Motor Functions)
A codes are motor parameters that become available when motor M2 or M3 is selected. These codes are used
when a single FRENIC-VG drives two or three motors while switching them.
Any of M1 to M3 can select vector control or V/f control.
A01 to A61 M2 Drive Control
A101 to M3 Drive Control

A161
To select M2 or M3, use F79 (Motor Selection) and terminal input signals M-CH2 and M-CH3.
See the individual descriptions and check in Menu #4 "I/O checking" that
M2 or M3 is selected. indicates "selected". Check that M2 or M3 is １５００
indicated. □ＰＡＲＡ１□Ｍ１□ＪＯＧ
□ＰＡＲＡ２■Ｍ２
A01 to A61 for M2 are functionally equivalent to A101 to A161 for M3 □ＰＡＲＡ３□Ｍ３
except that codes differ by one hundred. Those codes are functionally □ＰＡＲＡ４
equivalent to P codes (M1).
There are no P02-equivalent code for M2 and M3, so M2 and M3 motor parameters cannot be set
automatically. For FRENIC-VG dedicated motors or VG series conventional motors, this manual provides
motor parameters. Set them manually. For other motors, perform auto-tuning.
Auto-tuning initiated by H01 applies to the currently selected motor.
Function codes to be configured for IM under vector control

The table below lists the function codes to be configured for IM when vector control is selected. Configure
them sequentially from the top of the table. (For details, refer to P02 (M1 Motor Selection).
Function codes
M1 M2 M3 Name
P01 A01 A101 Drive control
P02 A02 A102 Motor selection
F04 A03 A103 Rated speed
F05 A04 A104 Rated voltage
P03 A05 A105 Rated capacity
P04 A06 A106 Rated current
P05 A07 A107 No. of poles
P06 A08 A108 %R1
P07 A09 A109 %X
P08 A10 A110 Magnetic flux weakening current
P09 A11 A111 Torque current
P10, P11 A12, A13 A112, 113 Slip frequency of motor for driving and braking
P12-P14 A14-A16 A114-A116 Iron loss factors 1-3
P15-P19 A17-A21 A117-A121 Magnetic saturation factors 1-5
P20 A22 A122 Secondary time constant
P21 A23 A123 Induced voltage factor
P22-P24 A24-A26 A124-A126 R2 correction factors 1-3
P25 A27 A127 Exciting current correction factor
P26, P27 A28, A29 A128, A129 ACR P-gain, Integral constant
P28 A30 A130 Pulse resolution
P30 A31 A131 Thermistor selection
F10 A32 A132 Electronic thermal overload protection
(Select motor characteristics)
H01 H01 H01 Auto-tuning
Note 1: FRENIC-VG dedicated motors are the same as the VG7 or VG5 standard motors in shape and
electrical constants (motor parameters).
4-264
Function codes to be configured for PMSM under vector control

The table below lists the function codes to be configured for PMSM when vector control is selected.
Configure them sequentially from the top of the table.
Function codes
M1 M2 M3 Name
Chap. 4
F03 A06 A106 Maximum speed

P06 A08 A108 %R1
P07 A09 A109 %X
P08 A10 A110 d-axis current
P09 A11 A111 q-axis current
P21 A23 A123 Induced voltage factor
P26, P27 A28, A29 A128, A129 ACR P-gain, Integral constant
P28 A30 A130 Pulse resolution
F10 A32 A132 Electronic thermal overload protection
P33 A53 A153 Maximum voltage Limit
o09 A59 A159 Absolute signal input definition
o10 A60 A160 Magnetic pole position offset
o11 A61 A161 Salient pole rate (%Xq/%Xd)
P42 A62 A162 q-axis induction magnetic saturation coefficient
P43 A63 A163 Magnetic flux limiting value
P44 A64 A164 Overcurrent protection level
P45-P51 A65-A71 A165-A171 Torque correction gain 1 to 7
4-265
Function codes to be configured for IM under V/f control
The table below lists the function codes to be configured for IM when V/f control is selected. Configure them
sequentially from the top of the table.
Function codes
M1 M2 M3 Name
F03 A04 A104 Maximum speed
P06 A08 A108 %R1
P07 A09 A109 %X
P08 A10 A110 Magnetic flux weakening current
P33 A53 A153 Maximum voltage Limit
P34 A54 A154 Slip compensation
P35 A55 A155 Torque boost
Electronic thermal overload protection
F10 A32 A132
H01 Auto-tuning
H02 Full save function
4-266
4.3.7 o codes (Option Functions)

OPC-VG1-DIA, DIB
Use this option to specify the digital speed command, torque limiter value, torque command, and torque
current command. When you install two option cards, you use hardware switches to distinguish them as DIA
and DIB. See the control option section for more details.
o01 DIA Function Selection
Chap. 4
o02 DIB Function Selection
Select the data format for the digital speed command, torque limiter value, torque command, and torque
current command.

ｏ０１ＤＩＡＦＵＮＣ
ｏ０２ＤＩＢＦＵＮＣ
1) See the function description of the function code F01 "Speed setting N1" to use for the speed command.
2) See the function description of the function code F42 "Torque limiter value selection" to use for the torque
limiter value.
3) See the function description of the function code H41 "Torque command selection" to use for the torque
command.
4) See the function description of the function code H42 "Torque current command selection" to use for the
torque current command.
Set value: 0 or 1
0: Binary
1: BCD
o03 DIA BCD Input Speed Setting
o04 DIB BCD Input Speed Setting
Specify BCD data for setting the maximum speed of DIA and DIB inputs. Use when you want to enter
"machine operation speed" directly to specify input data.
ｏ０３ＢＣＤＣＭＮＤＡ
ｏ０４ＢＣＤＣＭＮＤＢ

OPC-VG1-PG/PGo
Use this option for the following applications.
1) Place the switch in the PD position to use position control (orientation) through pulse calculation.
2) Set the switch to LD to detect the line speed.
3) Place the switch in the PR position to use the pulse train synchronous operation.
4) Place the switch in the SD position to use for speed detection.
The model of the PG interface option varies according to the difference in the electric specification.
OPC-VG1-PG: 5V line driver
OPC-VG1-PGo: Open collector, voltage output
4-267
o05 PG (PD) Option Setting (Feedback pulse)
Switches the source of the position detection signal between the integrated PG and the optional PG interface
card. Use for synchronous operation and the position control for orientation.
ｏ０５ P L S F E D S L
Data setting range: 0 (Integrated PG (15, 12V complementary output))

(PG interface card OPC-VG1-PMPG for PMSM drive)
1 (PG interface card OPC-VG1-PG (PD) (5V line driver output))
2 (High-resolution serial PG interface card OPC-VG1-SPGT) (Available soon)
When function code P01, A01, A101 (M1/M2/M3 Drive Control) = 3 (Vector control of PMSM) and the PG
interface card OPC-VG1-PMPG for PMSM drive is mounted, setting o05 at "0" enables signals to the
OPC-VG1-PMPG.
o06 PG (PD) Option Setting (Digital line speed detection definition, PG pulses)
o07 PG (PD) Option Setting (Digital line speed detection definition, Detection
pulse correction 1)
o08 PG (PD) Option Setting (Digital line speed detection definition, Detection
pulse correction 2)
Specify to use the PG (LD) option for line speed control. A PG disconnection activates a protective function
(p9 alarm).
The pulse correction is for speed detection. Speed=(Correction 1/Correction 2)×Input pulse
ｏ０６ＬＳ－ＰＧＤＥＦ
ｏ０７ＬＳ－ＰＬＳＣＰ１
ｏ０８ＬＳ－ＰＬＳＣＰ２
Data setting range: o06 = 100 to 60,000 (P/R)

o07, o08 = 1 to 9,999
4-268
o09 M1 Absolute Signal Input Definition
A59 M2 ABS Signal Input Definition
A159 M3 ABS Signal Input Definition
These function codes are exclusive to PMSM. They select the interface system of encoder ABS signals.
ｏ０９Ｍ１－ＡＢＳＤＥＦ
Chap. 4
Ａ５９Ｍ２－ＡＢＳＤＥＦ
Ａ１５９Ｍ３－ＡＢＳＤＥＦ
Data setting range: 0 (1 bit (terminal: F0). Z-phase interface (Available soon))

1 (3 bits (terminals: F0, F1 and F2). U-/V-/W-phase interface)
2 (4 bits (terminals: F0, F1, F2 and F3). Gray code interface)
3 to 5 (Not used.)
6 (SPGT 17-bit serial interface)
7 to 16 (Not used.)
o10 M1 Magnetic Pole Position Offset
A60 M2 Magnetic Pole Position Offset
A160 M3 Magnetic Pole Position Offset
These function codes are exclusive to PMSM. They define an offset value relative to the encoder reference
position and actual motor magnetic pole position.
ｏ１０Ｍ１－ＳＭＯＦＳ
Ａ６０Ｍ２－ＳＭＯＦＳ
Ａ１６０Ｍ３－ＳＭＯＦＳ
Data setting range: 0.0 to 359.9 CCW

Enter the offset value printed on the corresponding motor test report or adjust the magnetic pole position
according to the adjustment procedure.
o11 M1 Salient Pole Rate (%Xq/%Xd)
A61 M2 Salient Pole Ratio (%Xq/%Xd)
A161 M3 Salient Pole Ratio (%Xq/%Xd)
These function codes are exclusive to PMSM. They specify the difference in reactance due to the difference
in magnetic resistance on the q axis and the d axis in terms of the ratio of the q axis value/d axis value.
ｏ１１Ｍ１－Ｘｑ／Ｘｄ
Ａ６１Ｍ２－Ｘｑ／Ｘｄ
Ａ１６１Ｍ３－Ｘｑ／Ｘｄ

To drive an SPM motor, set 1,000.
It is necessary to calculate the salient pole ratio from the design value of each motor. When the design value is
unknown, contact your Fuji Electric representative.
4-269
o12 PG (PR) Pulse-train Option Setting (Command pulse)
Select a pulse output source from the PG (PR) option and internal speed data.
ｏ１２ＰＬＳＲＥＦＳＬ
Data setting range: 0 (PG (PR) option)

1 (Internal speed command)
For details, see the control block diagram given in Section 4.1.5.
o13 PG (PR) Pulse-train Option Setting (Pulse train input form)
Select the input form of the signal supplied to the PG (PR) option.
ｏ１３ＰＬＳＳＴＡＴＥ
Data setting range: 0 (90° phase difference between phases A and B)

1 (Phase A: Command pulse, Phase B: Command code (sign))
2 (Phase A: Forward pulse, Phase B: Reverse pulse)
This pulse configuration choice takes effect only against the pulse train command (PG (PR)).
Line speed detection (PG (LD)) with 90° phase difference only can be received.
o14 PG (PR) Pulse-train Option Setting (Command pulse correction 1)
o15 PG (PR) Pulse-train Option Setting (Command pulse correction 2)
Set when you install the PG (PR) option card to conduct synchronized operation. You can change the position
command data entered into the pulse train card to change the speed ratio between the master motor and the
slave motor.
ｏ１４ＰＬＳＣＯＲＲ１
ｏ１５ＰＬＳＣＯＲＲ２

Internal data = Input pulse× (Pulse correction 1/Pulse correction 2)
o16 PG (PR) Pulse-train Option Setting (APR gain 1)
You can specify a data to improve the position control response in pulse train operation. You can also reduce
the steady-state deviation in the steady-state operation. Since too large setting may present a motor hunting,
increase gradually from a small value to adjust.
ｏ１６ＡＰＲ－Ｐ－ＧＡＩＮ
4-270
o17 PG (PR) Pulse-train Option Setting (Feedforward gain 1)
The setting can reduce the steady-state deviation. The setting of 1.0 provides the smallest deviation. You do
not have to change from 0.0 in general.
ｏ１７Ｆ／ＦＧＡＩＮ
Chap. 4
o18 PG (PR) Pulse-train Option Setting (Overdeviation width)

The difference (deviation) between the internal position command and actual motor revolutions exceeds 10
folds of this setting, an "excessive deviation alarm (d0 )" is caused, letting the motor coast to stop.
ｏ１８ＤＥＶＯＶＥＲＷ
o19 PG (PR) Pulse-train Option Setting (Zero deviation width)
When the current position of the motor comes into this range of a reference position, the inverter provides the
"zero deviation" signal. You can use the zero deviation signal to detect that the motor locates almost at the
target position. The inverter provides the zero deviation signal on the DO to which you can assign a function.
ｏ１９ＤＥＶＺＥＲＯＷ
o20 APR Gain 2 (Available soon)
o21 F/F Gain 2 (Available soon)
o20 and o21 are functionally equivalent to o16 (APR Gain 1) and o17 (F/F Gain 1), respectively.
ｏ２０ＡＰＲＧＡＩＮ２
ｏ２１Ｆ／ＦＧＡＩＮ２
4-271
o22 Position Control Gain Switching (Available soon)
o22 specifies a factor that switches between gain 1 (o16, o17) and gain 2 (o20, o21) of the APR and F/F in a
position control system.
Switching the gain can reduce noise or vibration at the time of a stop under position control.
ｏ２２ＧＡＩＮＳＥＬ

1 (Positional deviation (x 10))
2 (Detected speed (10,000/maximum speed))
3 (Speed command (10,000/maximum speed))
When o22 = 0 (Disable), o16 (APR Gain 1) and o17 (F/F Gain 1) take effect.
o23 Position Control Gain Switching Level (Available soon)
o24 Position Control Gain Switching Time (Available soon)
If the detected value of a factor selected by o22 drops below the switching level specified by o23, the APR
and F/F gains are switched from 1 to 2 in accordance with the switching time specified by o24. The hysteresis
width is 1% of the maximum speed (Setting: 10,000).
ｏ２３ＳＥＬＬＶＬ

Speed
In gain switching, the function codes are o23: Gain

selected as follows. switching level Time
APR gain F/F gain

Switching level or above o16 o17 APR gain 2 APR gain 1 APR gain 2
Switching level or below o20 o21 F/F gain 2 F/F gain 1 F/F gain 2
o24: Gain
switching time
4-272
o29 Link Option Configuration

(Continue-to-run signal processing in case of alarm) (Available soon)
o29 specifies LK-D signal processing to be followed if LK-D (Continue to run at the time of communications
link error) is assigned to an X terminal and a communications link error (heavy alarm or light alarm) occurs.
When o29 = 1 or 2 and the communications controller power supply (that was shut down with LK-D being
ON) is recovered after LK-D is turned OFF, the inverter prevents a communications link error (er4 ) from
occurring.
If no LK-D is assigned to an X terminal, the processing for LK-D being OFF applies.
Chap. 4
ｏ２９ＬＫ－ＤＯＰＥ

1 (Communications error processing 1)
For errors that occurred with LK-D ON: Continue to run for both heavy and light
alarms.
For errors that occurred with LK-D OFF: Follow o30 for light alarm, Immediately trip
with er4 for heavy alarm.
2 (Communications error processing 2)
For errors that occurred with LK-D ON: Continue to run for both heavy and light
alarms.
For errors that occurred with LK-D OFF: Follow o30 for both heavy and light alarms.
o30 Link Option Configuration (Communications error processing)
o30 specifies error processing to be performed if a communications link error occurs.
ｏ３０ＭＯＤＥＯＮＥＲ

0 (Immediately trip with er4 .)
1 (Continue to run for the time specified by o31 and then trip with er4 .)
2 (If a communications error has persisted for the time specified by o31, trip with er4 .)
3 (Continue to run even if a communications error occurs. Removing the error factor
automatically restores the run command transferred via the communication link.)
o31 Link Option Configuration (Timer)
If a communications link error occurs and persists during the period specified by o31, the inverter causes an
alarm.
ｏ３１ＴＩＭＥＲＴＬ
4-273
o32 Link Option Configuration (Link format selection)
o32 specifies the link format to be used by a link option.
ｏ３２ＦＯＲＭＡＴＳＥＬ

0 (Link format 1)
1 (Link format 2)
2 (Link format 3)
3 (Link format 4)
4 (Link format 5)
OPC-VG1-TBSI
Using this option can connect two or more inverters via the high-speed serial communications link, enabling
multiwinding motors to be driven.
o33 Multiplex System (Control mode)
o33 selects whether or not to use a high-speed serial communications terminal block OPC-VG1-TBS1 as a
component of the multiwinding system or multiplex system
Refer to MT-CCL (Cancel multiplex system) in the description of E01 to E13 (Terminal X Function).
ｏ３３ＭＷＳＡＣＴＩＶＥ
Data setting range: 0 (Disable (single motor operation))

1 (Multiwinding system
2 (Multiplex system 1)
3 (Multiplex system 2)
4 (Reserved 1)
5 (Reserved 2)
o34 Multiplex System (No. of slave stations)
Specifies the number of slave stations for the multiplex system.
ｏ３４ＭＷＳＳＬＡＶＥＳ
o50 Multiplex System (Station number assignment)
o50 assigns the station number of the multiplex system (High-speed serial communications terminal block
OPC-VG1-TBS1).
ｏ５０ＭＷＳＳＴ－ＮＯ
Data setting range: 0 (Master)

1 to 5 (Slave)
4-274
4.3.8 L codes (Lift Functions)
L01 Password Data 1
L02 Password Data 2
Handle the password with care. If you set the password by mistake, you cannot refer to or change the function code.
Chap. 4
The person who is responsible for specifying the password must manage the password carefully.
You can specify an 8-digit password by combining L01 and L02. You can use the password to restrict the
change and the reference to the function codes. When you specify a non-zero value to either L01 or L02, the

restriction by password will become effective.
Password setting procedure
Change the current value to an arbitrary value by pressing the and keys or and keys
simultaneously, and then press the key to establish it.
L ０１ＰＡＳＳＷＯＲＤ１
L ０２ＰＡＳＳＷＯＲＤ２
Setting range: 0 to 9,999
4-275
Setting password
When you set non-zero data to L01 or L02 and open the program menu, you will not view "1. Set data" and "2.
Check data", but "3. Operation monitor" and the rest. See the figure right below.
Usual program menu screen Program menu screen
(password is not specified or is disabled) when password is enabled
To disable password (ex. password: L01=10, L02=20)
０ /
０ /
１０
ＳＴＯＰ CANNOT SET N CANNOT SET N
２０００／０１／０１
１２：３４：５６
ＡＡ
Press or key once on the Set the LED monitor to the

operation mode screen, "A" is password data set to L01 and press
displayed at the lower right .
corner on the LCD monitor.
１０ /
２００
CANNOT SET N CANNOT SET N ＳＴＯＰ
２０００／０１／０１
１２：３４：５６
ＢＢ
When "B" is displayed at the The display will return to the

lower right corner on the LCD operation monitor screen, if the data
monitor, set the LED monitor to entered at "A" conforms to the
the password data set to L02 password data set by L01 and the
and press . data entered at "B" conforms to the
password data set by L02.
You will view the following screen if
the data do not conform to the data.
２０
CANNOT SET N
You will see this screen if

the data entered at "A"
and/or "B" are wrong.
Note: Canceling password described above will become ineffective after you turn off the inverter
4-276
To enable password again after disabled
０ /
００
ＳＴＯＰ CANNOT SET N CANNOT SET N
２０００／０１／０１
１２：３４：５６
ＡＡ
Press or key once on the Check if "0" appears on Check if "0" appears on
operation mode screen, "A" is the LED monitor press . the LED monitor press
displayed at the lower right .
Chap. 4
corner on the LCD monitor.
００

CANNOT SET N ＳＴＯＰ
２０００／０１／０１
１２：３４：５６
Ａ
Press when "A" is displayed

again at the lower right corner
on the LCD monitor.
4-277
L03 Lift Rated Speed
This function code is necessary to calculate the estimated travel distance on deceleration.
L ０３ＬＩＦＴ－ＢＡＳＥ
Setting range: 0.0 to 999.9 (m/min)

About the estimated travel distance on deceleration
You can display an estimated travel distance from the deceleration start point to the stopping point to check
the consistency of the decelerating pattern.
The estimated travel distance on deceleration is an addition of travel distance on deceleration from the lift
operation speed to the creep speed and that from the creep speed to the zero speed and does not include the
travel distance by the constant operation at the creep speed (L1, L2, L3 in the graph below).
The estimated travel distance on deceleration appears on the "Option monitor 3, 4" on the LED monitor of the
KEYPAD panel.
This function is effective when L04=1 or 2.
Option monitor 3: Travel distance from the operation speed 1 after deceleration operation.
Option monitor 4: Travel distance from the operation speed 2 after deceleration operation.
Function data codes used for the estimated travel distance on deceleration.
L04＝1 L04＝2
Description
Code Name Code Name
Lift rated speed L03 Lift rated speed ← ←
Operation speed 1 C09 Multistep speed 5 ← ←
Operation speed 2 C11 Multistep speed 7 C10 Multistep speed 6
Creep speed C07 Multistep speed 3 ← ←
Deceleration time from operation speed 1 F08 Deceleration time 1 ← ←
Deceleration time from operation speed 2 C47 Deceleration time 2 ← ←
Deceleration time from creep speed C36 Deceleration time JOG ← ←
S-curve setting on decelerating from
L10 S-curve 6 ← ←
operation speed 1
operation speed 2
S-curve setting on reaching creep speed L07 S-curve 3 ← ←
creep speed
S-curve setting on reaching zero speed L06 S-curve 2 ← ←
Delay time by the speed reference agreement Multistep speed reference
C20 ← ←
timer agreement timer
4-278
L04 Preset S-curve Pattern
Specifies the application of S-curve setting and the multistep speed.
L ０４Ｓ－ＣＵＲＶＥ
0: FRENIC-VG standard (VG7S-compatible) multistep speed and S-curve setting
15 steps of multistep speed (C05 to C19)
Chap. 4
S-curve applied to four sections (F67 to F70)
1: Lift application compatible with VG3N and VG5N

S-curve applied to eight sections (L05 to L12)
2: FRENIC-VG (VG7S-compatible) lift application original mode
S-curve applied to ten sections (L05 to L14)
L05 to L14 S-curve Patterns 1 to 10
Ｌ０５Ｓ－ＣＲＶＳＥＴ１
-
Ｌ 1 ４Ｓ－ＣＲＶＳＥ１０
Setting range: 0 to 50 (%)
Introduction to an operation example in each mode

(A) FRENIC-VG standard (VG7S-compatible) multistep speed and S-curve setting
Since this operation mode uses the standard multistep speed and the S-curve, see the description of the
individual function codes.
(B) Lift application compatible with VG3N and VG5N
Set ON/OFF to the terminal functions [SS1], [SS2], and [SS4] to switch the multistep speed as described in the
following table.
Terminal function Multistep speed setting

SS4 SS2 SS1 Code Name Description
OFF OFF OFF －－ External speed setting
OFF OFF ON C05 Multistep speed 1 Zero speed
OFF ON OFF C06 Multistep speed 2 Inching speed
OFF ON ON C07 Multistep speed 3 Creep speed
ON OFF OFF C08 Multistep speed 4 Maintenance operation speed
ON OFF ON C09 Multistep speed 5 Operation speed 7
ON ON OFF C10 Multistep speed 6 Zero speed
ON ON ON C11 Multistep speed 7 Operation speed 2
4-279
The following table shows how the acceleration/deceleration times are assigned to the multistep speed.
Speed Acceleration Deceleration

Code Name Description Code Name Code Name
C06 Multistep speed 2 Inching speed F07 Acceleration time 1 F08 Deceleration time 1
C07 Multistep speed 3 Creep speed C35 Acceleration time JOG C36 Deceleration time JOG
Maintenance
C08 Multistep speed 4 F07 Acceleration time 1 F08 Deceleration time 1
operation speed
C09 Multistep speed 5 Operation speed 1 F07 Acceleration time 1 F08 Deceleration time 1
C11 Multistep speed 7 Operation speed 2 C46 Acceleration time 2 C47 Deceleration time 2
The following table shows how S-curve setting is applied to the multistep speed.
S curve setting
Application
Code Name
L05 S-curve 1 Acceleration start side from Zero speed
L06 S-curve 2 Deceleration end side to Zero speed
L07 S-curve 3 Acceleration end side to Creep speed
L08 S-curve 4 Deceleration start side from Creep speed
Acceleration end side to Operation speed 1, Maintenance operation speed, or
L09 S-curve 5
Inching speed
Deceleration start side from Operation speed 1, Maintenance operation speed,
L10 S-curve 6
or Inching speed
L11 S-curve 7 Acceleration end side to Operation speed 2
L12 S-curve 8 Deceleration start side from Operation speed 2
4-280
(1) Operation speed 1
Chap. 4
4-281
(3) Maintenance operation speed
(4) Inching speed
4-282
(C) FRENIC-VG (VG7S-compatible) lift application original mode

Set ON/OFF to the terminal functions [SS1], [SS2], and [SS4] to switch the multistep speed as described in
the following table.
Terminal function Multistep speed setting

SS4 SS2 SS1 Code Name Description
OFF OFF OFF －－ Zero speed
OFF OFF ON C05 Multistep speed 1 Emergency lift speed
OFF ON OFF C06 Multistep speed 2 Inching speed
Chap. 4
OFF ON ON C07 Multistep speed 3 Creep speed
ON OFF OFF C08 Multistep speed 4 Maintenance operation speed
ON OFF ON C09 Multistep speed 5 Operation speed 1

ON ON OFF C10 Multistep speed 6 Operation speed 2
ON ON ON C11 Multistep speed 7 Operation speed 3
The following table shows how the acceleration/deceleration times are assigned to the multistep speed.
Speed Acceleration Deceleration

Code Name Description Code Name Code Name
C05 Multistep speed 1 Emergency lift speed C56 Acceleration time 3 C57 Deceleration time 3
C06 Multistep speed 2 Inching speed F07 Acceleration time 1 F08 Deceleration time 1
C07 Multistep speed 3 Creep speed C35 Acceleration time JOG C36 Deceleration time JOG
Maintenance operation
C08 Multistep speed 4 F07 Acceleration time 1 F08 Deceleration time 1
speed
C09 Multistep speed 5 Operation speed 1 F07 Acceleration time 1 F08 Deceleration time 1
The following table shows how S-curve setting is applied to the multistep speed.
S curve setting
Application
Code Name
L05 S-curve 1 Acceleration start side from Zero speed
L06 S-curve 2 Deceleration end side to Zero speed
L07 S-curve 3 Acceleration end side to Creep speed
L08 S-curve 4 Deceleration start side from Creep speed
Acceleration end side to Operation speed 1, Maintenance operation speed, or
L09 S-curve 5
Inching speed
Deceleration start side from Operation speed 1, Maintenance operation speed, or
L10 S-curve 6
Inching speed
L11 S-curve 7 Acceleration end side to Operation speed 2
L12 S-curve 8 Deceleration start side from Operation speed 2
L13 S-curve 9 Acceleration end side to Operation speed 3 or Emergency lift speed
L14 S-curve 10 Deceleration start side from Operation speed 3 or Emergency lift speed
4-283
4-284
Chap. 4
(4) Emergency lift speed
4-285
(5) Maintenance operation speed
(6) Inching speed
4-286
How to calculate acceleration/deceleration times and travel distance
Chap. 4
[Description of symbols]
Nmax (r/min): Maximum motor speed

N1 (r/min): Speed reference before acceleration (after deceleration)

N2 (r/min): Speed reference after acceleration (before deceleration)
S1 (%): S-curve portion at the beginning of acceleration (at the end of deceleration)
S2 (%): S-curve portion at the end of acceleration (at the beginning of deceleration)
T (s): Acceleration (deceleration) reference time (time from zero to Nmax (Nmax to 0))
Vmax (m/min): Elevation speed at the maximum motor speed (Maximum elevation speed)
t (s): Acceleration (deceleration) time
L (m): Travel distance
L15 Reserved for Particular Manufacturers
This is a function code for adjustment by the manufacturer.
L １５ＭＡＫＥＲ
4-287
FRENIC- VG
5
Chapter 5
USING STANDARD RS-485
This chapter describes the use of standard RS-485 communications ports and provides an overview of the
FRENIC-VG Loader.
Contents
5.1 Standard RS-485 Communications Ports ............................................................................................ 5-1

5.1.1 RS-485 common specifications................................................................................................... 5-2
5.1.2 Terminal specifications for RS-485 communications.................................................................. 5-3
5.1.3 Connection method ..................................................................................................................... 5-4
5.1.4 Communications support devices................................................................................................ 5-6
5.1.4.1 Converters .................................................................................................................................. 5-6
5.1.4.2 Cables......................................................................................................................................... 5-7
5.1.5 Link functions ............................................................................................................................. 5-7
5.1.5.1 Link command permission selection.......................................................................................... 5-7
5.1.5.2 Link edit permission selection.................................................................................................... 5-8
5.1.5.3 S range option priority ............................................................................................................... 5-8
5.1.6 Referencing and changing data ................................................................................................... 5-9
5.1.6.1 Write restrictions for function codes .......................................................................................... 5-9
5.1.6.2 Negative response and error response ...................................................................................... 5-10
5.1.6.3 No response.............................................................................................................................. 5-10
5.1.7 RS-485 function codes .............................................................................................................. 5-11
5.1.7.1 Response interval time (H39)................................................................................................... 5-11
5.1.7.2 Disconnection detection time (H38)......................................................................................... 5-12
5.1.7.3 Character timeouts ................................................................................................................... 5-12
5.1.7.4 Timeouts on the master side..................................................................................................... 5-12
5.1.8 Host side procedures ................................................................................................................. 5-13
5.1.8.1 Read procedure ........................................................................................................................ 5-13
5.1.8.2 Write procedure........................................................................................................................ 5-14
5.1.9 RAS........................................................................................................................................... 5-15
5.1.9.1 Communication errors.............................................................................................................. 5-15
5.1.10 Communication error measures................................................................................................. 5-18
5.2 Fuji General-purpose Communications............................................................................................. 5-19
5.2.1 Message format ......................................................................................................................... 5-19
5.2.2 Transmission frame ................................................................................................................... 5-19
5.2.3 Standard frame .......................................................................................................................... 5-20
5.2.4 Option frame ............................................................................................................................. 5-23
5.2.5 Negative response frame ........................................................................................................... 5-27
5.2.6 Field descriptions ...................................................................................................................... 5-28
5.2.6.1 Data field.................................................................................................................................. 5-28
5.2.6.2 Sum-check field ....................................................................................................................... 5-29
5.2.7 Communication examples ......................................................................................................... 5-29
5.2.7.1 Standard frame ......................................................................................................................... 5-29
5.2.7.2 Option frame ............................................................................................................................ 5-30
5.2.7.3 ASCII code table ...................................................................................................................... 5-31
5.2.7.4 Program example ..................................................................................................................... 5-32
5.3 Modbus RTU..................................................................................................................................... 5-33
5.3.1 Message format ......................................................................................................................... 5-33
5.3.2 Transmission frame ................................................................................................................... 5-34
5.3.2.1 Reading function codes ............................................................................................................ 5-35
5.3.2.2 Writing single function codes................................................................................................... 5-36
5.3.2.3 Writing multiple function codes............................................................................................... 5-37
5.3.2.4 Maintenance code..................................................................................................................... 5-38
5.3.2.5 Error response .......................................................................................................................... 5-39
5.3.3 Error checking........................................................................................................................... 5-40
5.3.3.1 CRC-16 .................................................................................................................................... 5-40
5.3.3.2 CRC-16 algorithm.................................................................................................................... 5-41
5.3.3.3 CRC-16 calculation example ................................................................................................... 5-42
5.3.3.4 Calculating frame length .......................................................................................................... 5-43
5.3.4 Communication examples ......................................................................................................... 5-44
5.3.4.1 Reading .................................................................................................................................... 5-44
5.4 FRENIC-VG Loader Overview ........................................................................................................ 5-45
5.4.1 Specifications ............................................................................................................................ 5-45
5.5 Connection ........................................................................................................................................ 5-46
5.5.1 USB connection ........................................................................................................................ 5-46
5.5.1.1 RS-485 connection ................................................................................................................... 5-46
5.5.2 Function overview..................................................................................................................... 5-47
5.5.2.1 Setting function codes .............................................................................................................. 5-47
5.5.2.2 Trace back ................................................................................................................................ 5-47
5.1 Standard RS-485 Communications Ports

The FRENIC-VG has standard 1-channel RS-485 communications ports. The RS-485 communications
ports are assigned in the control terminal block, enabling easy multi-drop connection.
RS-485 enables the following communications functions.
(1) Communication through Modbus RTU / Fuji general-purpose inverter protocol

The FRENIC-VG can be connected to a host (master) device such as a PC, PLC, or display/operation
device. Through the interface, you can execute run/stop commands, monitor the running status, and
change the function code data.
Chap.5
(2) Connection to FRENIC-VG Loader
The FRENIC-VG Loader can be installed on a PC to enable connection between FRENIC-VG and

RS-485. Through the interface, you can use the various functions of the FRENIC-VG Loader such as
editing the function code data, tracing the running data in real time, and tracing back the running data
from the time when an alarm occurs. Multi-drop connection through RS-485 enables you to access up to
31 FRENIC-VG inverters with one FRENIC-VG Loader.
The FRENIC-VG Loader can also be connected to the built-in USB port of the FRENIC-VG. However,
in this case it would be a one-to-one connection.
• The RJ-45 connector for the keypad is intended solely for communication using the
keypad, and cannot be used for RS-485 communication.
• Do not connect the inverter to a PC LAN port, Ethernet hub, or telephone line. Doing so
may result in damage to the inverter or connected device.
The application can be used when a run command is executed and a break in communication is detected
or an alarm occurs. If a communication error occurs during operation, it is possible to issue an er5 alarm
(RS-485 alarm) after the application starts up. At this time, the inverter output cuts off and the motor
idles.
5-1
5.1.1 RS-485 common specifications
Items Specifications
Protocol SX protocol Modbus RTU Fuji general-purpose inverter

(For FRENIC-VG Loader) protocol
Compliance Loader dedicated protocol (Not Modicon Modbus RTU-compliant Fuji general-purpose inverter
disclosed) protocol
Protocol Function code H40 = "1" Function code H40 = "2" Function code H40 = "0"
selection
Messaging Command message RTU (Remote Terminal Unit) mode Polling/Selecting/Broadcast

system only
ASCII mode not yet supported
Query/Broadcast message
Electrical EIA RS-485

specifications,
Transmission 2,400 4,800 9,600 19,200 38,400 bps
speed
Synchronization Asynchronous start-stop system (UART)
Transmission Half-duplex
mode
Transmission Direct link to inverter 1:N (1 ≤ N ≤ 31)

type
Transmission HEX ASCII 7 bits or 8 bits

character format
Data length 8 bits (fixed) (Note 3) 8 bits (fixed) (Note 2) H35 data length setting
7 or 8 bits selectable
Stop bit 1 bit (fixed) (Note 3) 2 bits 1 bit (Note 2) H37 stop bit setting
(Note 2) 1 or 2 bits selectable
Parity Even (fixed) (Note 3) None Even Odd H36 parity setting
None, Even, or Odd selectable
Error checking Sum-check CRC-16 Sum-check

(1 byte BCC) Generator polynomial; (2 byte BCC)
X16+X15+X2+1
Logical station 1-255; logical station 0; Broadcast 99; Broadcast (Note 1)

selection 1-247; logical station 1-31; logical station
Frame length Variable length Variable length Normal transmission:

16 bytes (fixed)
High-speed transmission:
8 or 12 bytes (fixed)
Max. transfer Write:16 words Write:16 words 1 word

data (1 message)
Read: 99 words Read: 99 words
Disconnection Communication disconnection time (TimeOut) can be set with function code H38. Operates only during
detection time operation through 485.
Cable length Non-isolated: Max. 10 m

Isolated: Max. 500 m
* For isolation, use a commercially-available 485/485 isolating device (repeater), and a 485/232C isolated
converter.
* Inverters generate noise. Use a converter with superior noise resistance.
Recommended converters: KS-485PTI, KS-10PTI, USB-485I RJ45-T4P (System Sacom Sales Corporation)
(Note 1) For Broadcast, only communications command codes (S codes) are enabled. Other function codes are disabled.
(Note 2) With RTU protocol, H37 stop bit setting is not required because the stop bit is selected automatically in accordance with
the parity selection status (H36 parity setting).
(Note 3) With SX protocol, it is not necessary to change the H35-H37 settings because the data length, stop bit, and parity are fixed.
5-2
5.1.2 Terminal specifications for RS-485 communications

The FRENIC-VG has terminals for RS-485 communications on the control circuit terminal block.
Signal name Function Remarks
DX - RS-485 data (-) Built-in terminating resistor: 112Ω

Open/close by SW4*
DX + RS-485 data (+)
*For details about SW4, refer to Chapter 3, Section 3.3.3.9 "Setting up the slide switches."
As there is no earth terminal for the shield, the shield wire must be earthed on the host device side.
Chap.5
5-3
5.1.3 Connection method
(1) Multi-drop connection using the RS-485 communications port
Host equipment Host equipment

USB or RS-232C RS-485
(4-wire)
SD OUT- OUT+ IN- IN+
Terminating
resistor
USB - RS-485 converter Shield
(112 Ω) FRENIC-VG series
or
Inverter 1
RS-232C - RS-485 converter
commercially-available DX＋ Station No. 01
DX－
(2-wire) (2-wire)
Using the built-in

FRENIC-VG series
terminating resistor
Inverter 2
DX＋
DX－ Station No. 02
(2-wire)
Up to 31
inverters
FRENIC-VG series
Inverter n
DX＋ Station No. n

DX－
(2-wire)
Switching terminating
resistors
SW4
Figure 5.1 Multi-drop Connection Diagram (Connecting to the Terminal Block)
Use cables and converters meeting the specifications for proper connection to the
RS-485 port. (Refer to Section 5.1.4 "Communications support devices.")
The shield must be earthed on the host device side.
5-4
(2) Connection with a 4-wire type host device

Although the cables used with the converter are 2-wire types, some host devices use 4-wire type cables.
When connecting to such a host device, it is necessary to change to a 2-wire type connection by
connecting the driver output on the host device side with the receiver input using transition wiring.
Driver Driver
Driver Driver
enable enable
Chap.5
Receiver Receiver

enable enable
Receiver Receiver
Transition
wiring
4-wire type host device FRENIC series (2-wire type)
(master)
Fig 5.2 Connection with a 4-wire type host device
• The driver circuit on the host device side requires a function to change the output to high
impedance (driver enable: OFF). Always check that products using the RS-485 protocol
have this function.
• The output of the driver circuit on the host device side should be changed to high
impedance (driver enable: OFF), except during transmission.
• During host device transmission, disable the host device receiver circuit (receiver
enable: OFF) so that you don’t receive back the data that you sent. If it is not possible to
disable the host device receiver circuit, program the system to discard the data you sent.
5-5
5.1.4 Communications support devices
This section describes the devices required for connecting the inverter to a PC having no RS-485
interface or for connecting two or more inverters in multi-drop network.
5.1.4.1 Converters
Usually PCs are not equipped with an RS-485 communications port. Therefore, it is necessary to use an
RS-232C–RS-485 converter or a USB–RS-485 converter. To run the loader correctly, use a converter
satisfying the recommended specifications given below. If you use a converter other than a recommended
one, the loader may not operate properly.
Recommended converter specifications

Auto-switching by monitoring of send/receive data status at the PC
Send/receive switching:
(RS-232C)
Electric isolation: Electrically isolated from the RS-485 port
Fail-safe: Fail-safe facility*
Other requirements: Superior noise immunity
* The fail-safe facility refers to a feature that ensures the RS-485 receiver's output at "High" logic
even if the RS-485 receiver's input is opened or short-circuited or all the RS-485 drivers are
inactive. Refer to Figure 5.3 Communications Level Conversion.
Recommended converter
System Sacom Sales Corporation: KS-485PTI (RS-232C - RS-485 converter)

: USB-485I RJ45-T4P (USB - RS-485 converter)
Send/receive switching system

The RS-485 communications system of the inverter acts in half-duplex mode (2-wire) so the converter
must feature a send/receive switching circuit. Generally, the switching system may be either one of the
following.
(1) Auto-switching by monitoring of send/receive data
(2) Switching by RS-232C control signal of RTS or DTR (hardware flow control system)
Computer
Driver Driver
Receiver input Receiver input
Level conversion
Driver Driver
RS-232C Send/receive enable enable
送受信切換
switching
Receiver output
Receiver output
Driver
enable Driver
enable
Receiver RS-485 Receiver
converter
RS-232C－RS-485 変換器 FRENIC-VG (2-wire type)
FRENIC-VG
Figure 5.3 Communications Level Conversion
5-6
5.1.4.2 Cables
To ensure the reliability of connection, use twisted pair shield cables for long distance transmission AWG
16 to 26.
Recommended cable manufacturer: FURUKAWA Electric Co., LTD

AWM2789 Cable for long distance connection
Type (Product code): DC23225-2PB
5.1.5 Link functions
Chap.5
Communications functions such as RS-485 are called link functions. Command data (S range) is used to
access the inverter from the host via a link function to issue start, stop, and speed/torque setting
commands. Function code H30 and the "24: Link run selection signal [LE]" X function are used to switch

between (REM/LOC/COM) enabling the command data (S range) and enabling commands issued from
the actual terminal block and keypad. Refer to Chapter 4, Section 4.1 "Block Diagrams for Control
Logic" for more details.
Function code H29 and the "23: Allow link edit command [WE-LK]" X function are used to control
writing to function codes (F, E, C, P, H, A, o, L, U) via the link function. Refer to Chapter 4, Section 4.1
"Block Diagrams for Control Logic" for more details.
5.1.5.1 Link command permission selection

Link switching
You can switch modes as shown below by assigning “24: Link run selection signal [LE]” to the X
function input terminal.
Link run selection signal [LE] assignment Input terminal Status
Not assigned - Link command allowed mode
Assigned ON
OFF Link command disallowed mode
In link command disallowed mode, writing command data and run operation data via the link function is
enabled, but the data is not reflected in the actual run operation. It is possible to set up the data in advance
in link command disallowed mode, and then switch to link command allowed mode to reflect the data in
the actual run operation.
• The run operation may start when the [LE] terminal is switched from OFF to ON.
5-7
Link commands
In link command allowed mode, you can use function code H30 (link function) to link (COM) the
command data and the run operation command, and switch between Remote and Local. At this time,
REM (Remote: run operation via terminal block) or LOC (Local: run operation via keypad) is displayed.
Link command allowed mode Link command disallowed

H30 data
Command data (S01-S05, S10-S12) Run operation command (FWD, REV) mode
0 Disallow link (REM/LOC) Disallow link (REM/LOC) Disallow link (REM/LOC)
1 Allow link (COM) Disallow link (REM/LOC)
2 Disallow link (REM/LOC) Allow link (COM)
3 Allow link (COM) Allow link (COM)
These functions enable a flexible system structure, with run commands issued via the terminal block and
speed commands issued via RS-485.
5.1.5.2 Link edit permission selection

Link edit switching
You can write protect the function codes (F, E, C, P, H, A, o, L, U) as shown below by assigning “23:
Allow link edit command [WE-LK]” to the X function input terminal.
Allow link edit command assignment Input terminal Status
Assigned - Link edit allowed mode

(Function code write enabled)
Not assigned ON
OFF Link edit disallowed mode

(Function code write protected)
Link edit
You can use function code H29 (allow link edit command) to control writing to function codes (F, E, C, P,
H, A, o, L, U) in the link edit allowed mode.
H29 data Link edit allowed mode Link edit disallowed mode
0 Function code (F, E, C, P, H, A, o, L, U) write enabled Function code (F, E, C, P, H, A, o, L, U) write

protected
1 Function code (F, E, C, P, H, A, o, L, U) write protected
5.1.5.3 S range option priority

If the system has field options (T link, field bus, SX, SI (UPAC), etc.), writing to the S range (run
operation command, command data) via RS-485 is disabled and the options are given priority. However,
reading and writing function code data via RS-485 is constantly enabled.
5-8
5.1.6 Referencing and changing data

If the system does not have field options, writing to the S range (run operation command, command data)
via RS-485 constantly enabled.
Additionally, refer to the communications address, 485 No. in Chapter 4, Section 4.2 "Function Code
Tables" for details on referencing and changing function codes. Take note of restrictions such as data
ranges and disabled changes during operation.
5.1.6.1 Write restrictions for function codes

Writing to (selecting) function codes (F, E, C, P, H, A, o, L, U) is subject to the following restrictions.
(1) Writing to volatile memory
Chap.5
In order to enable a high-speed writing response when writing via RS-485, the system uses volatile
memory (RAM: Random Access Memory, memory that is discarded when the system is switched OFF).
If you need to keep the data after the system is switched OFF, issue the H02 [Save All] function code to

write the data to non-volatile memory.
Writing using function code H02 takes about 2 seconds. Do not attempt to perform another write
operation while the system is writing data to the memory.
(2) Writing via RS-485 disabled mode

You will receive a negative response if you attempt to write to any of the following function codes.
Code Name Reason

P02 M1 mode selection Other codes are automatically updated when P02 is changed. Updates are generally
written to non-volatile memory. For P02 only, however, updates are written to volatile
memory (discarded when system switched OFF), resulting in inconsistent codes when
the system is switched OFF and ON again.
Only change P02 via the keypad. However, writing is enabled when using
FRENIC-VG Loader software (SX protocol).
H31 Station address If changed, communications operations are disabled
H34
to (UART setting) RS-485 hardware settings
H37
H40 Protocol selection If changed, communications operations are disabled
(3) Continuous writing disabled mode

When using ModBus RTU, you can continuously write 16 pieces of data. When doing so, do not include
the following codes in the continuous write group. If you attempt to write with these codes in the group,
the system will return a negative response. Fuji general-purpose inverter protocol and ModBus RTU can
be written individually.
Code Name Reason

H02 Save all function
H03 Data initialization
H68 Alarm data deletion
Cooling fan cumulative run
H79 Internal data is updated at the same time as operation is performed.
time default setting
This updated data is overwritten by continuously written data.
Main circuit condenser
H80
capacity default setting
Main circuit condenser
H81 cumulative lifetime default
setting
5-9
(4) Data protection
Writing via RS-485 is not restricted by function code F00 [Protect Data]. This code only protects data in
the case of keypad operation.
Writing via RS-485 is restricted by function code H29 [Protect Link Function] and the [WE-LK] X
function (Refer to section 5.1.5.2).
However, writing to H29 is enabled even in link edit disallowed mode.
5.1.6.2 Negative response and error response

If you attempt to perform the write operation when the communication data contains an error or the
inverter is not ready, the system will return a negative response and the write operation will not be
performed. You can check the error details with function code M26 or the keypad maintenance screen.
For details, refer to the section on type [34] communication error codes in Chapter 4, Section 4.2
"Function Code Tables."
Additionally, Modbus RTU protocol uses special codes (subcodes) for error responses. For details, refer
to the section on Modbus RTU.
5.1.6.3 No response
If the hardware on the inverter side detects a parity error or framing error, or the software detects a
sum-check error or CRC error because the communication data is physically damaged, the system will
return no response. You can check the reason for no response with function code M26 or the keypad I/O
check.
If the character interval of the data on the host side is greater than 20 ms due to a host hardware error, the
inverter will return no response. At this time, the communication data will be reset.
5-10
5.1.7 RS-485 function codes
Function code Data setting Remarks
Specify station number when connecting to

inverter
0 to 255 No response returned when Broadcast is
RS-485 setting selected
H31 1 to 247: RTU
(station address)
1 to 31: Fuji general-purpose 0: Broadcast when RTU selected
99: Broadcast when Fuji general-purpose
selected
0; Forced stop
1; Stop after fixed time
RS-485 setting
Chap.5
H32 2; Stop after error continues longer than
(error measure selection)
operation time RAS
3; Continue operation
RS-485 setting

H33 0.01 to 20.00 s
(timer time)
0; 38,400 bps
1; 19,200 bps
RS-485 setting
H34 2; 9,600 bps
(transmission rate)
3; 4,800 bps
4; 2,400 bps
RS-485 setting 0; 8 bit

H35 Default communications setting
(data length selection) 1; 7 bit
0; None
RS-485 setting
H36 1; Even
(parity bit selection)
2; Odd
RS-485 setting 0; 2 bit

H37
(stop bit selection) 1; 1 bit
RS-485 communication 0.1 to 60.0 s

H38
downtime 0.0; disabled
H39 Response interval time 0.00 to 1.00 s
0; Fuji general-purpose
H40 RS-485 protocol selection 1; SX protocol (loader protocol) Protocol switching
2; Modbus RTU
5.1.7.1 Response interval time (H39)

Set the time until the inverter returns a response when a request is received from an upper level device
such as a computer. This function enables you to match the timing by setting the response interval time,
even if the computer processes slowly.
Master (PC, etc.) Request Request

FRENIC-VG Response 1 Response 2
T1 T1
T1 = response interval time + Td (inverter operation delay time; 0-30 ms).

Use the H39 code to set the time within the range of 0.00-1.00 s.
5-11
5.1.7.2 Disconnection detection time (H38)
If communication from the master (PLC, PC) during RS-485 linked operation (S06: operation command
FWD, REV) exceeds the specified time, an RS-485 communication error (er5) is immediately generated.
When performing non-fixed cycle communications, disable this function (setting: “ 0 ” ). When
performing fixed cycle communications, set H38 to a longer time than the cycle time before using the
disconnection detection function.
5.1.7.3 Character timeouts

The receiving interval of transmissions is monitored with a fixed timer. If the character interval of the
data sent from the master exceeds the timer time, this function determines that the operation is not fixed
or that there has been a disconnection. The function operates with a fixed timer of 20 ms based on the
slowest communication speed of 2400 bps, allowing for a character interval of 5 ms to 4.6 ms (12-11
bit/2400). Be aware that, if the character interval exceeds this time, communications on the inverter side
will be reset.
To inverter
Data from master →
STA PAR STP STA PAR STP
1 character Character interval (within 20 ms)
STA: Standard bit

PAR: Parity
STP: Stop bit
5.1.7.4 Timeouts on the master side

Specify the time allowed before determining that the master side (PLC, PC) will timeout if the response
from the inverter is interrupted. The specified time common to Fuji inverters (G，C，E，VG) is 500 ms or
more. Always set the timout for the master device to this time or longer. The response is normally
returned within the internal process time (about 1 ms) + the interval timer time (H39 setting). Therefore,
the timeout for the master device can be set to a little longer than the interval timer time. However, the
actual timeout time should be set to 500 ms or more to allow for multiple connections to other types of
devices (G/E series).
5-12
5.1.8 Host side procedures

Please follow the flow chart for each frame transmission procedure.
For both reading and writing, always confirm the response before sending the next frame. If there is no
response from the inverter after a certain time, execute a timeout and retry. (If you attempt to start a retry
before a timeout, the request frame will not be received properly.)
Retry
When executing a retry, either use a standard frame to resend the data that was sent before no response
was received or execute polling (M26) to enable the error details to be read, and then check that the
Chap.5
response was normal. (When checking the response, you will need to determine whether a further timeout
is necessary.)
If the response is normal, this indicates that some kind of temporary transmission error such as noise

occurred, and normal communications should be possible thereafter. (If there is frequent reoccurrence of
this phenomenon, it is necessary to investigate further to determine whether there is an error.)
If there is again no response, execute further retries. If the number of retries exceeds the preset value
(normally about 3 times), there may be a problem with the hardware or the software of an upper level
device. As there is no response from the specified station, it will be necessary to abort and investigate
further.
5.1.8.1 Read procedure
Start
Request frame sent
Transmission error detected
Response frame received?

No
Yes
No
Normal (ACK) response?
Yes Yes Change to correct format and

Format error?
resend.
No
Yes Change to correct command and
Command error?
resend.
No
Yes Change to correct function code
Function code error?
and resend.
No
Normal finish Abort
5-13
5.1.8.2 Write procedure
Start
Request frame sent
Transmission error detected
Response frame received?

No
Yes
No
Normal (ACK) response?
Yes Yes Change to correct format and resend.

Format error?
No
Yes Change to correct command and
Command error?
resend.
No
Yes Operation via this communication is
Link priority?
disabled during link option connection.
No
Yes Change to correct function code and
Function code error?
resend.
No
Yes Written to write-disabled function
Write disabled?
code (cannot be changed during
No
operation, etc.)
Yes Change to correct data range and

Data error?
resend.
No
Yes Resend after writing completes.
Error during writing?
No
Normal finish Abort
5-14
5.1.9 RAS
5.1.9.1 Communication errors
Depending on the usage environment, noise generated by the inverter may prevent normal
communications or cause equipment such as instrumentation on the master and converters to malfunction.
The following measures may be effective in such cases. Please also refer to the appendix on electrical
noise.
(1) Measures on side receiving noise

Isolated Deletes common mode noise exceeding the specified operating voltage range of the
converter: receiver, such as with long wiring layouts. However, the isolated converter itself may
Chap.5
malfunction as a result of noise so it is necessary to use a converter with strong noise
immunity.
Twisted pair The shield protects against static induction noise. Make sure to earth one side.

shield wire:
The twisting protects against electromagnetic induction noise. Where possible, use wires with a short
twist pitch. When using long wiring layouts where crosstalk could be a problem, consider using separate
shields for sending and receiving.
Effect of shield
Signal wire The shield acts as an antenna, picking up noise.
If the circiut is looped between the shield and
Shield not fixed
the ground and the earth is not close, the
Bad example electrical potential may differ, resulting in noise
Shield earthed on both sides from the flow of current through the loop.
Magnetic Additionally, noise may be caused by variations
flux in the magnetic flux in the loop.
Good example Shield earthed on one side In section X in the diagram, the effect of static
induction can be completely eradicated.
Effect of twist
Changes (augmentation) to magnetic lines
Twisted wire
If there is a uniform magnetic flux downwards as you look at the page and it changes (augmentation), electromotive
forces are generated in the direction of the arrows in the diagram.The strength of electromotive forces (A) to (D) is the
same, and the directions are as shown. On line Tx+, (B) and (C) move in opposite directions and therefore cancel each
other out. This is the same for (A) and (D) and, therefore, normal mode noise due to electromagnetic inductance does
not occur. However, it may not be possible to completely suppress noise due to conditions such as a non-uniform twist
pitch. If the lines are parallel, normal mode noise will occur.
Terminating To suppress ringing due to signal reverberation, position terminating resistors with
resistor: resistance equivalent to the cable impedance (100 Ω) at both ends of the wiring.
Separate wiring: Do not bundle power wires (input: R, S, T; output: U, V, W) with RS-485
communication wires. Separating the wiring can help to suppress inductance
noise.
5-15
Change earth: Do not use a common earth for instrumentation and the inverter. Noise may
propagate from the earth wire. Additionally, use thick earth wires.
Isolated power Noise may propagate from the power supply of instrumentation.
supply: To isolate the wiring from the power supply of the inverter, it is recommended to
change the power wiring, or use an isolated transformer (TRAFY) for the power
supply or a noise-suppressing transformer.
Filtering: To cut ringing and high-frequency noise, create a (low pass filter) LPF by
connecting a condenser in parallel at the signal input/output terminal.
Effect of filtering
This method separates ringing due to signal reverberation and normal mode noise from the normal
signal. Generally, the former is a higher frequency than the signal and so can be separated with a
LPF.
Normal mode noise
Ringing
Signal
Inverter or master device or converter

Receive terminal
Condenser
(about 0.01-0.001 μF)
Terminating resistor (100 Ω)
Add inductance Insert inductance components such as choke coils in series in the signal circuit, or
components: pass the cable through a ferrite core ring. This will help to keep the impedance of
the signal lines high to counteract high frequency noise.
Adding inductance components

Ferrite core
Master Inverter
Pass through or wind 2-3 times
CAUTION
When filtering and adding inductance components, with fast communication speeds the signal waveform may
become irregular, causing transmission errors. If this happens, use function code H34 to slow down the
communication speed.
Normal signal Irregular waveform
5-16
(2) Measures on side generating noise

Carrier frequency: It is possible to lower the noise level by lowering the setting of function code F26
[Motor operation noise (carrier frequency)]. However, be aware that lowering the
carrier frequency can result in higher levels of noise from other sources.
Equipment: It is possible to contain noise (radiation/inductance) by passing the power wires
through a metal duct or using a metal control panel.
Isolated power It is possible to curb the propagation of noise (conductance) by using an isolated
supply: transformer for the inverter power supply.
(3) Measures to lower noise level
Chap.5
Consider using a zero-phase reactor (9.6.5) and an EMC filter (9.6.2). Normally, you should consider measure (3) if
measures (1) and (2) do not lower the noise to the allowable level for the equipment.
5-17
5.1.10 Communication error measures
When executing run commands or applying command data via RS-485, it is possible to continue running
the inverter without tripping the alarm, even if there is a transmission error, by implementing the following
measures. The following examples show communication alarms (keypad displays er5) generated when
operating the inverter from the master side.
(a) H32 = 0; Forced stop (Forced stop: idling stop during alarm)
Error reset
Error
Transmission status Good Good
Keypad display Normal Er5
Run command
O O
Speed setting
(b) H32 = 1; Idling stop after set time elapses following transmission error
(Operation stops after continuing for timer set time, H33: timer time = 5.00 s)
Error reset
Error
伝送状態
Keypad display
KEYPAD表示 Normal Er5
Run command
運転指令
ON ON
Speed速度設定
setting 5.0(s)
(c) H32 = 2; Operation continues if cause of transmission error is resolved within timer time set in (b)
above. (Operation stops after error continues beyond timer set time, H33: timer time = 5.00 s)
Error
伝送状態status
Transmission Good Good
Keypad display
KEYPAD表示 Normal
Run command
運転指令
ON
速度設定
Speed setting 5.00(s)
(d) H32 = 3; Operation continues even after transmission error occurs (continued operation).
Error
伝送状態
Keypad display
KEYPAD表示 Normal
Run command
運転指令
ON
Speed速度設定
setting 5.00(s)
5-18
5.2 Fuji General-purpose Communications

5.2.1 Message format
Polling/selecting is used for the response message format. The inverter is in a constant standby state,
waiting for either selecting (write request) or polling (read request) from the host (PC, PLC).
The inverter receives a request frame with the same station address from the host while in the standby
state. If the frame is received normally, the request is processed and a positive response frame (in the case
of polling, the data is returned with the response) is returned. If the frame is not received normally, a
negative response frame is returned. In the case of a broadcast (all-station selecting), no response is
returned.
Chap.5
Request frame
Host Read request
Inverter Response + data

Response frame
Request frame
Host Write request + data

Inverter Response
Response frame
Request frame
Host Write request + data
Inverter
Explanation: Broadcast (all-station selecting)

If the station number (station address) of a frame is set to “99”, it is processed by all inverters as a
broadcast. By using a broadcast, you can execute run commands and frequency commands for all
inverters simultaneously. (This is enabled only for S codes with standard frames, and a to f and m
commands with W, E, and option frames.)
5.2.2 Transmission frame

There are two types of transmission frame: a standard frame which allows you to use all communications
functions, and an option frame which allows you to perform high speed communications but is restricted
to monitoring and sending commands to the inverter.
With both the standard frame and option frame, all constituent characters (including BCC) of the frame
are displayed as ASCII characters. The table below shows the transmission frame length for each of these
frame types.
Frame type Frame length
Standard frame Selecting Request 16 byte
Response 16 byte
Polling Request 16 byte
Response 16 byte
Option frame Selecting Request 12 byte
Response 8 byte
Polling Request 8 byte
Response 12 byte
5-19
5.2.3 Standard frame
Request frame [Host J Inverter]
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 12 13 14 15
SOH Station No. ENQ Command Type Function code No. SP Data ETX BCC
1 2 1 1 1 2 1 4 1 2 (byte)
BCC target
Values
Byte Field Hexadecimal Description
ASCII format
format
0 SOH SOH 01H Transmission begins
1 Station No. '0' - '3', '9' 30H - 33H, 39H Inverter station address (Decimal: tens place)
2 '0' - '9' 30H - 39H Inverter station address (Decimal: ones place)
3 ENQ ENQ 05H Transmission frame
4 Command Request command

'R' 52H Polling (read)
'W' 57H Selecting (write)
'A' 41H High speed response selecting (write) - Note 1
'E' 45H Alarm reset
5 Type Function code type

'F' 46H Basic function
'E' 45H Terminal function
'C' 43H Control function
'P' 50H Motor 1
'H' 48H High level function
'A' 41H Motor 2, 3
'L' 4CH Elevator data
'U' 55H User function
'o' 6FH Option
'S' 53H Command data
'M' 4DH Monitor data
6 Function code '0' - '9' 30H - 39H Function code No. (Decimal: tens place)
No.
7 '0' - '9' 30H - 39H Function code No. (Decimal: ones place)
8 SP ' ' 20H Unused (fixed space)
9 Data '0' - '9', 'A' - 'F' 30H - 39H, 41H - 46H 1st character (Hexadecimal: thousands place)
10 '0' - '9', 'A' - 'F' 30H - 39H, 41H - 46H 2nd character (Hexadecimal: hundreds place)
11 '0' - '9', 'A' - 'F' 30H - 39H, 41H - 46H 3rd character (Hexadecimal: tens place)
12 '0' - '9', 'A' - 'F' 30H - 39H, 41H - 46H 4th character (Hexadecimal: ones place)
13 ETX ETX 03H Transmission ends
14 BCC '0' - '9', 'A' - 'F' 30H - 39H, 41H - 46H Sum-check 1 (Hexadecimal: tens place)
15 '0' - '9', 'A' - 'F' 30H - 39H, 41H - 46H Sum-check 2 (Hexadecimal: ones place)
Note 1: FRENIC-VG returns a response when the request is received, regardless of the write type.
With FRENIC-VG, both normal selecting (W) and high speed response selecting (A) are the same operation.
5-20
ACK response frame [Inverter J Host]
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 12 13 14 15
SOH Station No. ACK Command Type Function code No. SP Data ETX BCC
1 2 1 1 1 2 1 4 1 2 (byte)
BCC target
Values
Byte Field Hexadecimal Description
ASCII format
format
Chap.5
3 ACK ACK 06H Transmission frame

Positive response: No receiving error or request logic error

4 Command Request command answer back
'R' 52H Polling (read)
'A' 41H High speed response selecting (write)
'E' 45H Alarm reset
5 Type Function code type

'P' 50H Motor 1
'A' 41H Motor 2, 3
'o' 6FH Option
No.
8 SP Unused
9 Data '0' - '9', 'A' - 'F' 30H - 39H, 41H - 46H 1st character (Hexadecimal: thousands place)
5-21
NAK response frame [Inverter J Host]
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 12 13 14 15
SOH Station No. NAK Command Type Function code No. SP Data ETX BCC
1 2 1 1 1 2 1 4 1 2 (byte)
BCC target
Values
Byte Field Description
ASCII format Hexadecimal format
3 NAK NAK 15H Transmission frame

Negative response: Request logic error
4 Command - Note Request command answer back

1 'R' 52H Polling (read)
'A' 41H High speed response selecting (write)
'E' 45H Alarm reset
5 Type - Note 1 Function code type

'P' 50H Motor 1
'A' 41H Motor 2, 3
'o' 6FH Option
No. - Note 1
8 SP ' ' 20H Unused (fixed space)
9 Data ' ' 20H Unused (fixed space)
10 ' ' 20H Unused (fixed space)
11 '4', '5' 34H, 35H Communication error code 1 (Hexadecimal: tens place)
12 '0' - '9', 'A' - 'F' 30H - 39H, 41H - 46H Communication error code 2 (Hexadecimal: ones place)
Note 1: Space (' ' = 20H) is specified for transmission format errors and transmission command errors.
5-22
5.2.4 Option frame
Selecting request frame [Host J Inverter]
0 1 2 3 4 5 8 9 10 11
SOH Station No. ENQ Command Data ETX BCC
1 2 1 1 4 1 2 (byte)
BCC target
Values
Chap.5

3 ENQ ENQ 05H Transmission request

'a' 61H Speed setting 1 (S01)
'b' 62H Torque command (S02)
'c' 63H Torque current command (S03)
'd' 64H Magnetic flux command (S04)
'e' 65H Orientation position command (S05)
'f' 66H Run command (S06)
'm' 6DH Reset command: All "0"

st
5 Data '0' - '9', 'A' - 'F' 30H - 39H, 41H - 46H 1 character (Hexadecimal: thousands place)
5-23
Selecting response frame [Inverter J Host]
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
SOH Station No. ACK/NAK Command ETX BCC
1 2 1 1 1 2 (byte)
BCC target
Values
3 ACK/NAK Transmission response
ACK 06H Positive response: No receiving error or request logic error
NAK 15H Negative response: Request logic error

'a' 61H Speed setting 1 (S01)
'b' 62H Torque command (S02)
'c' 63H Torque current command (S03)
'd' 64H Magnetic flux command (S04)
'e' 65H Orientation position command (S05)
'f' 66H Run command (S06)
'm' 6DH Reset command: All "0"
5-24
Polling request frame [Host J Inverter]
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
SOH Station No. ENQ Command ETX BCC
1 2 1 1 1 2 (byte)
BCC target
Values
Chap.5
3 ENQ ENQ 05H Transmission request

'g' 67H Speed detection value (M06)
'h' 68H Torque command monitor (M07)
'i' 69H Torque current monitor (M08)
'j' 6AH Output frequency monitor (M09)
'k' 6BH Run status monitor (M14)
5-25
Polling response frame [Inverter J Host]
0 1 2 3 4 5 8 9 10 11
ACK/NA
SOH Station No. Command Data ETX BCC
K
1 2 1 1 4 1 2 (byte)
BCC target
Values
3 ACK/NAK Transmission response
ACK 06H Positive response: No receiving error or request logic error

NAK 15H Negative response: Request logic error

'g' 67H Speed detection value (M06)
'h' 68H Torque command monitor (M07)
'i' 69H Torque current monitor (M08)
'j' 6AH Output frequency monitor (M09)
'k' 6BH Run status monitor (M14)
st
5 Data '0' - '9', 'A' - 'F' 30H - 39H, 41H - 46H 1 character (Hexadecimal: thousands place)
5-26
5.2.5 Negative response frame

In cases where the length of the response frame varies according to the command type, if the command
type character is determined properly, the frame length designated for that command is generally used for
the response.
No. Frame/command type Cause of error Negative response Error code (M26)
frame
1 Standard frame ENQ not detected in Standard frame Format error

Option frame designated position (Length: 16 bytes) [74]
2 Non-designated command Non-designated command Standard frame Command error

(not R, W, A, E, a-k, m) (Length: 16 bytes)
Chap.5
[75]
detected
3 Selecting command (a-f, ETX not detected in Option frame Format error
m) designated position (Length: 8 bytes) [74]

4 Polling command ETX not detected in Option frame Format error
(g-k) designated position (Length: 12 bytes) [74]
Note: If a negative response such as a format error or command error is returned with a standard frame as in No. 1 & 2,
the contents of the command type, function code type, and function code number fields are not specified.
5-27
5.2.6 Field descriptions
5.2.6.1 Data field
8 9 10 11 12
Standard frame
st nd rd th
SP additional data 1 character 2 character 3 character 4 character
Option frame 5 6 7 8
st nd rd th
1 character 2 character 3 character 4 character
Except for some special cases, the length of all data is 16 bits. In the data field of a transmission frame,
the data format is hexadecimal (0000H-FFFFH), and each digit is expressed as an ASCII code.
Additionally, for negative integer data (signed data), two’s complement is used to represent the negative
data.
Notes: ・Use alphabetical capitals for hexadecimal A-F.

・For polling, set all request frame data fields to zero (‘0’) before sending.
・For selecting, ACK response frame data field contents are not specified.
Example: Function code S01 (speed setting 1): 500 r/min (Max. speed: 1500 r/min)
1) Calculate the default in accordance with the S01 data format (±20,000/max. speed).
Data = 500r/min × ±20,000/1500r/min (CW: +, CCW: -)

= ±6666.6
≈ ±6667
2) Convert the data to hexadecimal. (negative data: two’s complement)

Data = 6667 (CW)
= 1A0BH
Data = -6667 (CCW)
= 0 - 6667 = 65536 - 6667 = 58869

= E5F5H
3) Set the data.
Position Default (CW) Default (CCW)

st
1 character ASCII ‘1’ ASCII ‘E’
2nd character ASCII ‘A’ ASCII ‘5’
rd
3 character ASCII ‘0’ ASCII ‘F’
th
4 character ASCII ‘B’ ASCII ‘5’
5-28
5.2.6.2 Sum-check field

This field contains data used to check for errors in the transmission frame when sending data. The data is
calculated by adding all fields except for the S0H and sum-check fields in 1 byte increments. The lowest
1 byte of data is expressed as an ASCII code.
Example: Sum result = 0123H
Position Default
Sum-check 1 ASCII ‘2’
Sum-check 2 ASCII ‘3’
Chap.5
5.2.7 Communication examples
This section illustrates representative communication examples. (In all cases, the station number is 12.)

5.2.7.1 Standard frame
(1) S01: Selecting speed setting 1 (write)
300r/min command × 20000 / max. speed: 1500 = 4000d = 0FA0H
Request frame (Host J Inverter)
SOH 1 2 ENQ W S 0 1 SP 0 F A 0 ETX 7 D
ACK response frame (Inverter J Host)
SOH 1 2 ACK W S 0 1 SP 0 F A 0 ETX 7 E
NAK response frame (Inverter J Host)...........................Link priority error
SOH 1 2 NAK W S 0 1 SP 0 0 4 C ETX 7 D
(2) M09: Polling output frequency (read)
SOH 1 2 ENQ R M 0 9 SP 0 0 0 0 ETX 5 3
ACK response frame (Inverter J Host)...........................30.00 Hz (0BB8H J 3000d J 30.00)
SOH 1 2 ACK R M 0 9 SP 0 B B 8 ETX 8 0
5-29
5.2.7.2 Option frame
(1) Selecting run command (write)
Request frame (Host J Inverter) .....................................FWD command
SOH 1 2 ENQ f 0 0 0 1 ETX 9 2
ACK response frame (Inverter J Host)
SOH 1 2 ACK f ETX D 2
NAK response frame (Inverter J Host)...........................Cause of error confirmed to be “M26: Send

error process code”
SOH 1 2 NAK f ETX E 1
(2) Polling torque command value (read)
SOH 1 2 ENQ h ETX D 3
ACK response frame (Inverter J Host)...........................85.00% (2134H J 8500d J 85.00)
SOH 1 2 ACK h 2 1 3 4 ETX 9 E
(3) Selecting run command with broadcast (write)
Request frame (Host J Inverter) .....................................REV command
SOH 9 9 ENQ f 0 0 0 2 ETX A 2
Broadcast returns no response.
5-30
5.2.7.3 ASCII code table
10H place
00H 10H 20H 30H 40H 50H 60H 70H 80H Note 1
01H place
0H NUL DLE SP 0 @ P ‘ p E1
1H SOH DC1 ! 1 A Q a q H1
2H STX DC2 " 2 B R b r H2
3H ETX DC3 # 3 C S c s H3
4H EOT DC4 $ 4 D T d t H4
5H ENQ NAK % 5 E U e u H5
Chap.5
6H ACK SYN & 6 F V f v A1
7H BEL ETB ‘ 7 G W g w o1

8H BS CAN ( 8 H X h x o2
9H HT EM ) 9 I Y i y U1
AH LF SUB * : J Z j z SF
BH VT ESC + ; K [ k { -
CH FF FS , < L ＼ l | -
DH CR GS - = M ] m } -
EH SO RS . > N ^ n ~ -
FH SI US / ? O _ o DEL -
Shaded codes are used with this communication.

Example: For "0," ASCII code is "30H." For "1," ASCII code is "31H."
Note 1: Codes after "80H" are unique codes specified by Fuji Electric.
For settings, use binary.
5-31
5.2.7.4 Program example
This program is written in Microsoft QuickBASIC (MS-DOS QBasic), and runs in accordance with Fuji
general-purpose inverter protocol.
100 'FGI-Bus Sample Program(MS-DOS QBasic)

110 '
120 OPEN "COM1:38400,E,8,1" FOR RANDOM AS #1 'ComPort:BaudRate,Parity,DataBits,StopBits
130 soh$ = CHR$(1) 'FunctionCode H34, H36, H35, H37
140 etx$ = CHR$(3)
150 enq$ = CHR$(5)
160 ack$ = CHR$(6)
170 nak$ = CHR$(&H15)
180 esc$ = CHR$(&H1B)
190 CLS
200 '
1000 PRINT "Select Operation 1:Read,2:Write"
1010 key$ = INKEY$
1020 IF key$ = "1" THEN 2000
1030 IF key$ = "2" THEN 3000
1040 GOTO 1010
1050 '
2000 '==== Read(F03) ==== 'Refarence User's Manual 6-19
2010 cmd$ = soh$ 'SOH
2020 cmd$ = cmd$ + "01" 'Address(01 - 31) FunctionCode: H31
2030 cmd$ = cmd$ + enq$ 'ENQ
2040 cmd$ = cmd$ + "R" 'Command(R,W,A,E)
2050 cmd$ = cmd$ + "F03" 'Code(F00...)
2060 cmd$ = cmd$ + " 0000" 'Data(0000 - FFFF)
2070 cmd$ = cmd$ + etx$ 'ETX
2080 GOTO 4000
2090 '
3000 '==== Write(F03:1500r/m) ==== 'Refarence User's Manual 6-19
3010 cmd$ = soh$ 'SOH
3020 cmd$ = cmd$ + "01" 'Address(01 - 31) FunctionCode: H31
3030 cmd$ = cmd$ + enq$ 'ENQ
3040 cmd$ = cmd$ + "W" 'Command(R,W,A,E)
3050 cmd$ = cmd$ + "F03" 'Code(F00...)
3060 cmd$ = cmd$ + " 05DC" 'Data(0000 - FFFF)
3070 cmd$ = cmd$ + etx$ 'ETX
3080 '
4000 '==== Send ====
4010 buf$ = cmd$
4020 GOSUB calcbcc
4030 cmd$ = cmd$ + bcc$ 'Add BCC
4040 '
4050 PRINT #1, cmd$ 'Send
4060 '
5000 '==== Receive ====
5010 recv$ = INPUT$(1, #1) 'Receive
5020 IF recv$ = soh$ THEN answer$ = ""
5030 answer$ = answer$ + recv$
5040 IF recv$ <> etx$ THEN 5010
5050 answer$ = answer$ + INPUT$(2, #1)
5060 PRINT "Received Data:"; answer$
5070 '
5080 PRINT "Hit any key (ESC -> End)"
5090 key$ = INKEY$
5100 IF key$ = "" THEN 5090
5110 IF key$ <> esc$ THEN 1000
5120 CLOSE #1
5130 END
5140 '
6000 calcbcc:
6010 b=0
6020 c=2
6030 char$ = MID$(buf$, c, 1)
6040 b = b + ASC(char$) 'Add
6050 c=c+1
6060 IF char$ <> etx$ THEN 6030
6070 b = b AND &HFF
6080 bin = INT(b / 16)
6090 GOSUB bintoasc 'BCC1(8bit High)Character
6100 bcc$ = ascii$
6110 bin = b MOD 16
6120 GOSUB bintoasc 'BCC2(8bit Low)Character
6130 bcc$ = bcc$ + ascii$ 'BCC1+2(Character)
6140 RETURN
6150 '
7000 bintoasc: 'Digit"0 - 15" to Character"0 - F"
7010 IF bin < 10 THEN ascii$ = CHR$(ASC("0") + bin) ELSE ascii$ = CHR$(ASC("A") + bin - 10)
7020 RETURN
5-32
5.3 Modbus RTU
5.3 Modbus RTU

This communications protocol was created overseas. Where possible, English text is used alongside the
Japanese.
5.3.1 Message format

The normal format for sending RTU messages is as follows.
1. Query Host Query message
Chap.5
Inverter Response
2. Broadcast Host Broadcast message

Inverter (No response)
The inverter receives a message with the same station address from the host while in the standby state. If
the message is received normally, the request is processed and a normal response is returned. If the
message is not received normally, an error response is returned. In the case of a broadcast, no response is
returned. There are four types of message: Query, Normal response, Error response, and Broadcast.
Query
The host sends a message to a single inverter.
Normal response
After the query from the host is received, the request is processed and a normal response is returned.
Error response
An error response is returned if the inverter receives the query but the requested function cannot be
activated. A message indicating the reason why the requested function cannot be activated is sent with the
error response. However, in the case of a CRC error or physical sending error, no response is returned.
Broadcast
The master uses a “0” address to send a message to all slaves. All slaves that receive the broadcast
message activate the requested function. This process ends with the time out on the master side.
5-33
5.3.2 Transmission frame
The transmission frame is as follows.
1 byte 1 byte max. 203 bytes 2 bytes
Station address FC (function code) Information Error check
(1) Station address (station number)

Station addresses 0 to 247 are selectable with a 1 byte length.
Selecting a“0”address selects all slave stations and, therefore, the message will be a broadcast message.
(2) FC (function code)

Function codes are defined with values of 0 to 255 with a length of 1 byte, as shown below. The shaded
sections indicate codes used with FRENIC-VG. Do not use “unused” function codes. Doing so will
result in an error response being returned.
FC Description
0 to 2 Unused
3 Read function code Data size: max. 99
4 to 5 Unused
6 Write function code Data: 1
7 Unused
8 Maintenance code
9 to 15 Unused
16 Continuously write function code Data size: max. 16
17 to 127 Unused
128 to 255 Reserved for Exception Response
(3) Information
Information fields contain all information items (function code, byte count, data size, data, etc.). For
details on information fields for each message type (broadcast, query, normal response, error response),
refer to Section 5.3.2.1 “Reading function codes”, Section 5.3.2.2 “Writing single function codes”, and
Section 5.3.2.3 “Writing multiple function codes”.
(4) Error check

Error check fields contain data 2 bytes in length for the CRC-16 check method.
Because information fields vary in length, it is necessary to calculate the frame length required to
calculate the CRC-16 code from the FC and byte count data.
5-34
5.3 Modbus RTU
5.3.2.1 Reading function codes

Query
1 byte 1 byte 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes
Station No. 03 Function code Read data size (max. 99) Error check
Normal response
1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 2 to 198 bytes 2 bytes
Station No. 03 Byte count Read data size (max. 198) Error check
Chap.5
Hi, Lo, Hi, Lo, Hi, Lo,…
Setting “Query”
This request cannot be used with broadcasts. Station number “0” cannot be used.

FC = 03
Function codes are 2 bytes in length and composed of an identification code and a number (Ex. “F40” =
F + 40). The Hi side corresponds to identification codes F, E-, L. The Lo side corresponds to the number.
The setting data range is 0-9, 11 (F-L, U) on the Hi side, and 0-99 on the Lo side. For example, the setting
data for F20 is “0014h”.
Identification Identification
Setting Name Setting Name
code code
0 F Basic function 30 E1 Terminal function 1
1 E Terminal function 31 H1 High level function 1
2 C Control function 32 H2 High level function 2
3 P Motor 1 function 33 H3 High level function 3
4 H High level function 34 H4 High level function 4
5 A Motor 2 function 35 H5 High level function 5
6 o Option function 36 A1 Motor 3 function
7 S Command/function data 37 o1 Option function 1
8 M Monitor data 38 o2 Option function 2
9 L Elevator function 39 U1 User function 1
11 U User function SF
41 M1 Monitor data function 1
42 M2 Monitor data function 2
The length of read data is 2 bytes. The setting range is 1-99 (words). Make sure to set read data so that it
does not exceed the upper limit offset 99 of the function code. Otherwise, an error response will be
returned.
Interpreting “Normal response”

The byte count data range is 2-198. A byte count is twice the size of read data (1-99) for a query.
In the response, read data is listed in the order of Hi bytes and then Lo bytes for each word of data, and
each word of data is listed in the order of the function code (address) requested with the query, and then
the address +1, +2, etc. Missing function codes (F09, etc.) will be returned as “0000”.
5-35
5.3.2.2 Writing single function codes
Query
Station No. 06 Function code Write data Error check
Hi Lo
Normal response
Station No. 06 Function code Write data Error check
Hi Lo
Setting “Query”
Broadcasts can be used if the address is “0”. In this case, the broadcast request is processed by all
inverters and no response is returned.
FC = 06
Function codes are 2 bytes in length and composed of an identification code and a number.
For details on identification codes, refer to the table in Section 5.3.2.1. The length of read data fields is
fixed at 2 bytes.

A normal response uses the same frame as a query.
5-36
5.3 Modbus RTU
5.3.2.3 Writing multiple function codes

Query
1 byte 1 byte 2 bytes 2 bytes 1 byte 2 to 32 bytes 2 bytes
Station No. 16 Function code Write data size Byte count Write data Error check
Hi, Lo, Hi, Lo,…
Normal response
Station No. 16 Function code Write data size Error check
Chap.5
Setting “Query”

Broadcasts can be used if the address is “0”. In this case, the broadcast request is processed by all
inverters and no response is returned.
FC = 16
Function codes are 2 bytes in length and composed of an identification code and a number.
For details on identification codes, refer to the table in Section 5.3.2.1. The length of read data fields is
fixed at 2 bytes.
The setting range is 1-16. If you set a value of 17 or more, an error response will be returned. The byte
count is 1 byte in length. The setting range is 2-32. Set the byte count to twice the size of the write data.
The first 2 bytes of write data should be set to a Lo code (function code requested by the query), and
subsequent data should be Hi codes set in ascending order (address +1, address +2, etc).

The returned function code and write data size values are the same as for the query.
5-37
5.3.2.4 Maintenance code
This function is used to check communication line connections (hardware).
Query
Station No. 08 Diagnosis code 00 00 Data Error check
Normal response
Station No. 08 Diagnosis code 00 00 Data Error check
Setting “Query”
Broadcasts cannot be used for this query.
FC = 08
Diagnosis codes should be 2 bytes in length and fixed as 0x0000. If you set the data to a value other than
0x0000, an error response will be returned. The data should be 2 bytes in length. The content of the data
can be set arbitrarily.

A normal response is the same as a query.
5-38
5.3 Modbus RTU
5.3.2.5 Error response

If an incorrect query is received, the query is not processed and an error response is returned.
Error response
1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 2 bytes
Station No. Exception function Sub code Error check
Interpreting “Error response”

This is the same as for a station number request. The exception function adds 128 to the FC of the query
Chap.5
message.
For example, if FC = 3, then exception function = 3 + 128 = 131 (83H). The subcode indicates the reason

for the exception, as shown in the table below.
Sub code Item Details M26 Keypad
1 Incorrect FC FC other than 3, 6, 8, 16 received 75 01
2 Incorrect address Incorrect function Range exceeded or non-existent code (F81, etc.) 78 02
code received
Incorrect data size Attempted to write more than 16W of data
Diagnosis code error Diagnosis code setting is not “0”

(maintenance code)
3 Incorrect data Data range error Write data range exceeds writable range 80 03
7 NAK Link priority Attempted to write command data or run 76 07

command data with field option (T link, SX,
etc.) applied
Write disabled (1) Change during operation disabled 79

(2) Write disabled (Read only, M range)
(3) Link function edit allowed mode
(4) Write via RS-485 disabled
(H31, H34-37, H40, P02)
(5) F04, F05, P03-P27
(M1 motor parameter protected)
5-39
5.3.3 Error checking
5.3.3.1 CRC-16
When sending data, CRC data is used to check for errors in the transmission frame.
CRC is the most effective system for error checking. At the sending side, the CRC value is calculated and
added to the last level of the frame. Then, at the receiving side, the CRC value is calculated again in the
same way based on the received data. The two CRC values are then cross-checked.
Simplified steps for calculating CRC

z Convert the data to a polynomial (Ex. 1100 0000 0010 0001 → X15+X14+X5+1) and then
divide this polynomial by a generating polynomial (17 bit; X16 X15+X2+1). The remainder (16
bit) is the CRC value.
z Add the “remainder” to the last level of the data, disregarding the quotient, and send the
message.
z The recipient divides the received message (with the CRC value added) by the generating
polynomial. If the “remainder” is zero, the message has been received without errors.
CRC-16
A generating polynomial is expressed as factors of X such as “X3+X2+X”, rather than binary codes such
as “1110”.
Although any kind of generating polynomial can be used, some standard types are defined and proposed
for optimal error detection.
For RTU, the“X16+X15+X2+1”generating polynomial, which corresponds to“1 1000 0000 0000 0101”
in binary code, is used. The CRC that is generated with this polynomial is known as “CRC-16”.
5-40
5.3 Modbus RTU
5.3.3.2 CRC-16 algorithm

The following diagram shows the CRC-16 calculation algorithm. Please also refer to the calculation
example in Section 5.3.3.3.
START
Default
初期設定
Remainder
余り R ← R "FFFF"
“FFFF”
Generating polynomial P “A001”
生成多項式 P ← "A001"
Data length counter n 0
ﾃﾞｰﾀ長ｶｳﾝﾀ n ← 0
Data length calc. N Data length

ﾃﾞｰﾀ長計算　N←ﾃﾞｰﾀ長
Chap.5
n == N？
No
n++

A = n番目の送信ﾊﾞｲﾄを
Specify last byte of word data as:
A = nth sent byte
ﾜｰﾄﾞﾃﾞｰﾀの下位ﾊﾞｲﾄに設定
Top byte is “00”
上位ﾊﾞｲﾄは"00"
Shift Count ← 0
Yes
No Shift Count == 0？
Yes
n == 1？ Yes
Yes CRC DATA ← CRC DATA XOR P

No
CRC DATA ← CRC DATA XOR A
CRC DATA ← A XOR R
Shift Count == 8？
No
Shift Count++ Yes
CRCDATA
CRC DATA >>
>> 11bitｼﾌﾄ
bit shift No
Bitｼﾌﾄ
Bit shift ｷｬﾘｰ有り？
Carry?
Add CRCCRC
DATA to last level of
DATAを
sent frame
送信ﾌﾚｰﾑ最終段に付加
END
CRC DATA is 1 word of memory. It is updated in the calculation process and finally added to the sent
frame as a check code.
When the message is received, the same algorithm is used. The CRC calculated at the receiving side must
then be cross-checked with the CRC that was sent.
5-41
5.3.3.3 CRC-16 calculation example
The following is an example of read data that is sent:
Station number: 1, FC = 03, function code P49 (P = code 03, 49 = 31 Hex), read data size: 20 items, G.P
(generating polynomial): 1010 0000 0000 0001.
Address FC Function code Read data size
01 03 03 31 00 14
N PROCESS 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Flag
1 Initial data R="FFFF" 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 1st data byte 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
3 CRC = No.1 X or No.2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0
4 Shift >> 2 (up to flag=1) 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
5 CRC = No.4 X or G.P 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0
6 Shift >> 2 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
7 CRC = No.6 X or G.P 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0
8 Shift >> 2 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
9 CRC = No.8 X or G.P 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0
10 Shift >> 2 (8 shift end) 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
11 CRC = No.10 X or G.P 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0
12 2nd data byte 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
13 CRC = No.11 X or No.12 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1
14 Shift >> 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1
15 CRC = No.14 X or G.P 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1
16 Shift >> 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1
17 CRC = No.16 X or G.P 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0
18 Shift >> 2 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
19 CRC = No.18 X or G.P 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0
20 Shift >> 2 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
21 CRC = No.20 X or G.P 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
22 Shift >> 2 (8 shift end) 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
23 3rd data byte 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
24 CRC = No.22 X or No.23 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1
25 Shift >> 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1
26 CRC = No.25 X or G.P 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
27 Shift >> 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1
28 CRC = No.27 X or G.P 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1
29 Shift >> 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1
30 CRC = No.29 X or G.P 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0
31 4th data byte 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1
32 CRC = No.30 X or No.31 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1
33 Shift >> 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1
34 CRC = No.33 X or G.P 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1
5-42
5.3 Modbus RTU
N PROCESS 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Flag
35 Shift >> 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1
36 CRC = No.35 X or G.P 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
37 Shift >> 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
38 CRC = No.37 X or G.P 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1
39 Shift >> 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1
40 CRC = No.37 X or G.P 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0
41 Shift >> 3 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1
42 CRC = No.41 X or G.P 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1
43 Shift >> 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1
Chap.5
44 CRC = No.43 X or G.P 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0
45 5th data byte 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
46 CRC = No.44 X or No.45 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0

47 Shift >> 5 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1
48 CRC = No.47 X or G.P 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0
49 Shift >> 3 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0
50 6th data byte 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0
51 CRC = No.49 X or No.50 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0
52 Shift >> 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1
53 CRC = No.52 X or G.P 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1
54 Shift >> 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1
55 CRC = No.54 X or G.P 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0
56 Shift >> 2 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1
57 CRC = No.56 X or G.P 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0
58 Shift >> 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0
Send CRC 4 E 1 4
Following the above calculation, the sent data is as follows.
Address FC Function code Read data size CRC check
01 03 03 31 00 14 14 4E
5.3.3.4 Calculating frame length

In order to calculate CRC-16, it is necessary to know the message length, which is variable. The lengths
of all message types can be determined from the table below.
Length of query broadcast Length of response message

FC Name
message excluding CRC code excluding CRC code
3 Read function code 6 bytes 3 + 3rd byte
6 Write single function code 6 bytes 6 bytes
8 Maintenance code 6 bytes 6 bytes
16 Write multiple function codes 7 + 7th byte 6 bytes
128-255 Exception function Unused 3 bytes
Note: 7th and 3rd denote the byte count value for the information field.
5-43
5.3.4 Communication examples
This section illustrates representative communication examples. (In all cases, the station number is 5.)
5.3.4.1 Reading
(1) M06: Read speed detection value.
Query (Host J Inverter)
05 03 08 06 00 01 67 EF
Normal response (Inverter J Host)
05 03 02 27 10 53 B8
Speed detection value: 2710H J 10000d
Max. speed
10000× = 750 (r/min)
20000
(Max. speed: 1500r/min)
(2) S01: Write 400r/min to speed setting 1. (Max. speed: 1500r/min)

20000
400 (r/min) × 1500 = 5333d = 14D5H
Query (Host J Inverter)
05 06 07 01 14 D5 16 65
Normal response (Inverter J Host)
05 06 07 01 14 D5 16 65
5-44
5.4 FRENIC-VG Loader Overview
5.4 FRENIC-VG Loader Overview

FRENIC-VG Loader is a software tool that supports the operation of the inverter via a USB link. It
allows you to remotely run or stop the inverter, edit, set, or manage the function codes, monitor
operation data, as well as monitor information such as the running status and alarm history.
With non-standard series inverters such as special order-made inverters, FRENIC-VG Loader
may not be able to display some function codes normally.
For details, refer to the FRENIC-VG Loader Instruction Manual.
5.4.1 Specifications
Chap.5
Item Specifications Remarks
Name Inverter support loader

(FRENIC-VG Loader)

Supported inverter FRN-VG1S
No. of inverters USB: 1 inverter only

connectable RS-485: max. 31 inverters
Recommended cables USB: USB Mini B (5-pin), 5 m or less

RS-485: Shielded twisted pair
OS Microsoft Windows XP (Japanese version) 32-bit version only

Microsoft Windows Vista (Japanese version)
Microsoft Windows 7 (Japanese version)
Operating environment
Memory 512 MB or more RAM 1 GB or more recommended
Hard disk 25 MB or more free space
Serial ports USB

RS-232C (conversion to RS-485
communication required to connect inverters)
Monitor 1024 x 768 or higher
COM ports COM1 to COM255
Transmission rate USB: 12 (Mbps) fixed 38400 bps or more

RS-485: recommended
Transmission specifications
38400，19200，9600，4800，2400 (bps)
Character length 8 bits Fixed
Stop bit length 1 bit Fixed
Parity Even Fixed

No. of retries None or 1 to 10 No. of retries before detecting
communications error
Timeout setting 100 ms, 300 ms, 500 ms, 1.0 s to 1.5 s to 1.9 s,
2.0 to 9.0 s, 0 to 60.0 s
5-45
5.5 Connection
5.5.1 USB connection
The inverter is equipped with a USB port, enabling direct connection to a computer which is also
equipped with a USB port. FRENIC-VG Loader software can be used by connecting a single inverter to a
single computer.
USB Mini B connector

FRENIC-VG
PC
USB A connector USB cable
5 m or less
5.5.1.1 RS-485 connection

The inverter's control circuit terminal block is equipped with an RS-485 terminal. An RS-485 converter is
required for connection to a computer. FRENIC-VG Loader software can be used by connecting up to 31
inverters to a single computer.
For details on connection, refer to Section 5.1.3 "Connection method."
For details on RS-485 converters, refer to Section 5.1.4 "RS-485 Communications support devices."
5-46
5.5 Connection
5.5.2 Function overview

5.5.2.1 Setting function codes
You can set, edit, and check the setting of the inverter’s function code data. In “Function code edit”, you
can list and edit function code details such as the function code No., name, setting value, setting range,
and factory default.
Chap.5
5.5.2.2 Trace back
Trace back uses waveform information to monitor the running status of inverters when an alarm occurs.
• Sampling time: Current (500 μs or less), no current (1 to 200 ms)

• Display data size: Analog: 8 channels, digital: 16 channels
• Data selection size: Analog: 32 items, digital: 211 items
• Data amount: 1100 points/channel (before trigger: 1000 points, after trigger: 100 points)
5-47
FRENIC- VG
6
Chapter 6
CONTROL OPTIONS
This chapter describes the FRENIC-VG’s control options.
Contents
6.1 Common Specifications ...................................................................................................................... 6-1

6.1.1 Specifications table ..................................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1.2 Inspecting options after delivery ................................................................................................. 6-3
6.1.2.1 Inspecting options ...................................................................................................................... 6-3
6.1.2.2 Operating environment............................................................................................................... 6-4
6.1.3 Storing options ............................................................................................................................ 6-5
6.1.3.1 Temporary storage...................................................................................................................... 6-5
6.1.3.2 Long-term storage ...................................................................................................................... 6-5
6.1.4 Installing internal options (OPC-VG1-□□) .............................................................................. 6-6
6.1.4.1 Removing the front cover........................................................................................................... 6-6
6.1.4.2 Installing a digital 8-bit communications option card ................................................................ 6-7
6.1.4.3 Installing a digital 8-bit option card ........................................................................................... 6-9
6.1.4.4 Installing a digital 16-bit option card ....................................................................................... 6-11
6.2 PG Interface Expansion Card............................................................................................................ 6-12
6.2.1 Product overview....................................................................................................................... 6-12
6.2.2 Model and specifications........................................................................................................... 6-13
6.2.2.1 Model ....................................................................................................................................... 6-13
6.2.2.2 Specifications ........................................................................................................................... 6-14
6.2.3 External dimension diagram...................................................................................................... 6-18
6.2.4 Basic connection diagram ......................................................................................................... 6-19
6.2.4.1 Terminal connections ............................................................................................................... 6-19
6.2.4.2 Wiring ...................................................................................................................................... 6-20
6.2.4.3 Speed control............................................................................................................................ 6-21
6.2.4.4 Line speed control .................................................................................................................... 6-22
6.2.4.5 Pulse train operation and synchronized operation.................................................................... 6-23
6.2.5 Synchronized operation............................................................................................................. 6-25
6.2.5.1 Synchronized operation system architecture ............................................................................ 6-25
6.2.5.2 Synchronized operation method............................................................................................... 6-27
6.2.5.3 Function codes ......................................................................................................................... 6-29
6.2.6 Check functions......................................................................................................................... 6-34
6.2.6.2 I/O check .................................................................................................................................. 6-34
6.2.7 Protective functionality ............................................................................................................. 6-34
6.3 Synchronous Motor Drive PG Interface Card ................................................................................... 6-35
6.3.2.1 Model ....................................................................................................................................... 6-36
6.3.2.2 Specifications ........................................................................................................................... 6-37
6.3.2.3 Using the card in combination with a Fuji motor..................................................................... 6-38
6.3.3 External dimension diagram...................................................................................................... 6-39
6.3.4.1 Line driver type ........................................................................................................................ 6-41
6.3.4.2 Open collector output type ....................................................................................................... 6-42
6.3.4.3 Connection Diagram for Fuji servos ........................................................................................ 6-43
6.3.5 Function codes .......................................................................................................................... 6-44
6.3.5.1 Synchronous motor drive PG interface card function codes .................................................... 6-44
6.3.5.2 Motor parameters ..................................................................................................................... 6-44
6.3.6 Check functions......................................................................................................................... 6-45
6.3.7 Protective functionality ............................................................................................................. 6-45
6.4 T-Link Interface Card........................................................................................................................ 6-46
6.4.2.1 Inverter type ............................................................................................................................. 6-47
6.4.2.2 Specifications ........................................................................................................................... 6-47
6.4.3 External dimensions .................................................................................................................. 6-49
6.4.3.1 Terminal function ..................................................................................................................... 6-49
6.4.5 Function code ............................................................................................................................ 6-52
6.4.6 Protective operation................................................................................................................... 6-54
6.4.7 Data allocation addresses .......................................................................................................... 6-57
6.4.7.2 Occupied area........................................................................................................................... 6-57
6.4.7.3 Allocated Address .................................................................................................................... 6-57
6.4.8 Transmission format.................................................................................................................. 6-59
6.4.8.1 Data format (FRENIC-VG ⇒ MICREX) .............................................................................. 6-59
6.4.8.2 Data format (MICREX ⇒ FRENIC-VG) .............................................................................. 6-60
6.4.9 Link function............................................................................................................................. 6-62
6.4.9.1 Link command permission selection........................................................................................ 6-62
6.4.9.2 Link edit permission selection.................................................................................................. 6-63
6.4.9.3 Data transmission example....................................................................................................... 6-63
6.5 SX Bus Interface Card ...................................................................................................................... 6-66
6.5.2.1 Inverter type ............................................................................................................................. 6-66
6.5.2.2 Specifications ........................................................................................................................... 6-67
6.5.3 External Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 6-69
6.5.5 Function code ............................................................................................................................ 6-73
6.5.5.1 Function code........................................................................................................................... 6-75
6.5.6 Protective operation................................................................................................................... 6-79
6.5.7 Data allocation addresses .......................................................................................................... 6-83
6.5.7.2 Area occupied and data allocation addresses ........................................................................... 6-83
6.5.8 Transmission format.................................................................................................................. 6-89
6.5.8.1 Data Format (FRENIC-VG ⇒ MICREX-SX) ......................................................................... 6-89
6.5.8.2 Data format (MICREX-SX ⇒ FRENIC-VG).......................................................................... 6-95
6.5.9 Link function........................................................................................................................... 6-103
6.5.10 Data transmission example...................................................................................................... 6-103
6.5.11 System configuration definition .............................................................................................. 6-106
6.5.11.1 Programming support tool expert (D300win) ........................................................................ 6-106
6.5.11.2 Application program examples .............................................................................................. 6-110
6.5.12 Multiple option application examples ..................................................................................... 6-112
6.5.12.1 Installed with T-Link interface card ....................................................................................... 6-112
6.5.12.2 Installed with high-speed serial communication-capable terminal table ..................................... 6-113
6.6 High-Speed Serial Communication-Capable Terminal Table.......................................................... 6-114
6.6.1 Product overview..................................................................................................................... 6-114
6.6.1.1 Multi-winding motor drive..................................................................................................... 6-114
6.6.2 Model and specifications......................................................................................................... 6-115
6.6.2.1 Model ..................................................................................................................................... 6-115
6.6.2.2 Specifications ......................................................................................................................... 6-115
6.6.3 External dimensions ................................................................................................................ 6-118
6.6.4 Basic connection diagram ....................................................................................................... 6-119
6.6.4.1 Connecting optical fiber cable................................................................................................ 6-119
6.6.4.2 Basic connection diagram of entire system ............................................................................ 6-121
6.6.5 Function code setting .............................................................................................................. 6-122
6.6.5.1 Number of units setting.......................................................................................................... 6-122
6.6.5.2 Switching multi- and single-motor drive................................................................................ 6-123
6.6.6 Preparation for operation......................................................................................................... 6-124
6.6.6.1 Operation................................................................................................................................ 6-124
6.6.7 Protective Function ................................................................................................................. 6-131
6.6.7.1 Inter-inverter link error (erb ).............................................................................................. 6-131
6.6.7.2 Operation procedure error (er6 ) ......................................................................................... 6-132
6.6.7.3 Process in Protective Operation ............................................................................................. 6-132
6.7 CC-Link Interface Card................................................................................................................... 6-133
6.7.2.1 Model ..................................................................................................................................... 6-134
6.7.2.2 Specifications ......................................................................................................................... 6-134
6.7.3 External dimension drawing.................................................................................................... 6-138
6.7.5 Function code .......................................................................................................................... 6-140
6.7.5.1 Standard function code........................................................................................................... 6-140
6.7.5.2 Communication dedicated function codes ............................................................................. 6-140
6.7.5.3 Option dedicated function codes ............................................................................................ 6-141
6.7.6 Protection operation ................................................................................................................ 6-142
6.7.6.1 Light alarm and heavy alarm.................................................................................................. 6-142
6.7.6.2 Protection Operation Function Codes .................................................................................... 6-144
6.7.7 Applicable format list.............................................................................................................. 6-147
6.7.8 VG7 compatible mode with 1 station occupied (o32=0） ...................................................... 6-148
6.7.8.1 Remote I/O signal in the VG7 compatible mode ................................................................... 6-148
6.7.8.2 Remote register in VG7 compatible mode (o32=0) ............................................................... 6-150
6.7.8.3 Monitor code/command code (o32=0) in VG7 compatible mode.......................................... 6-151
6.7.9 1 X mode with 1 station occupied (o32=0）........................................................................... 6-153
6.7.9.3 Monitor code/command code (o32=1 to 4)............................................................................ 6-156
6.7.12 8 X mode with 1 station occupied (o32=4) ............................................................................. 6-162
6.7.13 Link function........................................................................................................................... 6-165
6.7.13.1 Link command permission selection...................................................................................... 6-165
6.7.13.2 Link edition permission selection .......................................................................................... 6-166
6.7.14 Setting-up procedure ............................................................................................................... 6-167
6.7.15 Application program examples ............................................................................................... 6-167
6.7.15.1 System configuration ............................................................................................................. 6-167
6.7.15.2 Master unit outline ................................................................................................................. 6-167
6.8 17-bit High Resolution ABS Interface Card.................................................................................... 6-168
6.8.2.1 Model ..................................................................................................................................... 6-168
6.8.2.2 Specifications ......................................................................................................................... 6-169
6.8.4 Connection .............................................................................................................................. 6-172
6.8.4.1 Connector and terminal specifications ................................................................................... 6-172
6.8.4.2 Basic connection diagram ...................................................................................................... 6-173
6.8.5 Function code .......................................................................................................................... 6-175
6.8.5.1 Function codes related to motor control................................................................................. 6-175
6.8.6 Protective functions................................................................................................................. 6-178
6.8.6.1 Alarm display list ................................................................................................................... 6-178
6.8.6.2 Actions to be taken for alarms................................................................................................ 6-178
6.8.7 Check function ........................................................................................................................ 6-178
6.8.7.1 Option mounting check .......................................................................................................... 6-178
6.8.8 Related option ......................................................................................................................... 6-179
6.9 F/V Converter (available soon) ....................................................................................................... 6-183
6.9.2.1 Model ..................................................................................................................................... 6-183
6.9.2.2 Specifications ......................................................................................................................... 6-184
6.9.3 External dimensions ................................................................................................................ 6-185
6.9.4 Internal block diagram ............................................................................................................ 6-186
6.9.5 Adjustment method ................................................................................................................. 6-187
6.10 Synchro Interface (available soon).................................................................................................. 6-191
6.10.2.1 Model ..................................................................................................................................... 6-191
6.10.2.2 Specifications ......................................................................................................................... 6-192
6.10.3 External dimension diagram.................................................................................................... 6-193
6.10.4 Internal block diagram ............................................................................................................ 6-193
6.10.5 Adjustment method ................................................................................................................. 6-194
6.10.5.1 Description of adjustment locations ....................................................................................... 6-194
6.10.5.2 Installing and adjusting the synchro interface ........................................................................ 6-195
6.11 DI Interface Card............................................................................................................................. 6-196
6.11.2.1 Model ..................................................................................................................................... 6-197
6.11.2.2 Specifications ......................................................................................................................... 6-198
6.11.5 Function codes ........................................................................................................................ 6-202
6.11.5.1 Data latch function ................................................................................................................. 6-202
6.11.5.2 Selecting binary or BCD input ............................................................................................... 6-203
6.11.5.3 Controlled variable input........................................................................................................ 6-204
6.11.6 Check functions....................................................................................................................... 6-206
6.11.6.1 Option installation check........................................................................................................ 6-206
6.11.6.2 I/O check ................................................................................................................................ 6-206
6.12 DIO Expansion Card ....................................................................................................................... 6-207
6.12.2 Models and specifications ....................................................................................................... 6-208
6.12.2.1 Models.................................................................................................................................... 6-208
6.12.2.2 Specifications ......................................................................................................................... 6-209
6.12.3 Dimensions.............................................................................................................................. 6-212
6.12.4 Basic schematic diagrams ....................................................................................................... 6-213
6.12.4.1 Basic schematic diagram (DIOA) .......................................................................................... 6-213
6.12.4.2 Basic schematic diagram (DIOB) .......................................................................................... 6-214
6.12.5 Function codes ........................................................................................................................ 6-215
6.12.5.1 DIOA selected ........................................................................................................................ 6-215
6.12.5.2 DIOB selected ........................................................................................................................ 6-217
6.12.6 Check function ........................................................................................................................ 6-218
6.12.6.1 Mounting check on optional cards ......................................................................................... 6-218
6.12.6.2 I/O check ................................................................................................................................ 6-218
6.13 AIO Expansion Card ....................................................................................................................... 6-219
6.13.2 Models and specifications ....................................................................................................... 6-220
6.13.2.1 Models.................................................................................................................................... 6-220
6.13.2.2 Specifications ......................................................................................................................... 6-221
6.13.3 Dimensions.............................................................................................................................. 6-223
6.13.3.1 Specifications ......................................................................................................................... 6-224
6.13.4 Function codes ........................................................................................................................ 6-225
6.13.5 Check function ........................................................................................................................ 6-226
6.14 Optional PG Changeover Card (available soon) ............................................................................. 6-227
6.14.2.1 Model ..................................................................................................................................... 6-227
6.14.2.2 Specifications ......................................................................................................................... 6-227
6.14.3 Dimensions.............................................................................................................................. 6-228
6.14.4 Installation method.................................................................................................................. 6-228
6.14.5 Basic schematic diagram ......................................................................................................... 6-229
6.14.6 Operation method.................................................................................................................... 6-231
6.15 E-SX Bus Interface Card................................................................................................................. 6-232
6.15.2.1 Model ..................................................................................................................................... 6-232
6.15.2.2 Specifications ......................................................................................................................... 6-233
6.15.3 External dimension drawings .................................................................................................. 6-235
6.15.4 Basic connections.................................................................................................................... 6-236
6.15.5 Related function codes ............................................................................................................ 6-238
6.15.6 Protective operations ............................................................................................................... 6-239
6.15.6.1 Light alarms and heavy alarms in E-SX bus communication (er4 ).................................... 6-239
6.15.6.2 E-SX related alarms (are, arf ) ........................................................................................ 6-242
6.15.6.3 Other inverter alarms.............................................................................................................. 6-242
6.15.7 Data addresses (IQ area) ......................................................................................................... 6-243
6.15.7.1 Supported formats .................................................................................................................. 6-243
6.15.7.2 Input/output data address assignments ................................................................................... 6-243
6.15.8 Format details.......................................................................................................................... 6-244
6.15.8.1 I area (MICREX-SX ← FRENIC-VG) ................................................................................ 6-244
6.15.8.2 Q area (MICREX-SX → FRENIC-VG) .............................................................................. 6-246
6.15.9 Data transmission examples .................................................................................................... 6-247
6.15.10 Synchronization of E-SX bus tact cycle and inverter control cycle ........................................ 6-249
6.15.10.1 Conditions required for tact synchronization.................................................................. 6-249
6.15.10.2 Checking the tact synchronization status........................................................................ 6-249
6.15.10.3 Action when synchronization is lost (are ) .................................................................. 6-249
6.15.11 Support tool interface .............................................................................................................. 6-250
6.15.11.1 Configuration definition method .................................................................................... 6-250
6.15.11.2 Compatible versions of the SPH3000MM and support tool ........................................... 6-250

6.1.1 Specifications table
Table 6.1.1
Switch-accessible See
Category Name Model Specifications
functions section
F/V converter (*1) OPC-VG1-FV F/V converter 6.9
Synchro interface (*1) OPC-VG1-SN Dancer control synchro interface circuit 6.10
Analog cards
Aio expansion card OPC-VG1-AIO 2 [Ai] + 2 [Ao] expansion card 6.13
Ai expansion card OPC-VG1-AI 2 [Ai] expansion card -
16-bit Di binary or BCD 4-digit + sign
Di interface card OPC-VG1-DI speed command, torque command, and 6.11
torque current command configuration
When using the DIOA setting:
Function selection Di × 4-bit + function 6.12
Chap. 6
selection Do × 8-bit expansion
Dio expansion card OPC-VG1-DIO
When using the DIOB setting (*1):
UPAC I/O expansion 6.12
CONTROL OPTIONS
Di × 16-bit + Do × 10-bit
T-link interface card OPC-VG1-TL T-link interface card 6.4
CC-Link interface card OPC-VG1-CCL CC-Link-compliant card 6.7
OPC-VG1-PG(SD)
Digital 8-bit +5 V line driver type encoder interface
OPC-VG1-PG(LD) (A, B, Z signals) (500 kHz)
(A and B ports OPC-VG1-PG
only) OPC-VG1-PG(PR) Motor speed, line speed, position
command, position detection
OPC-VG1-PG(PD)
6.2
OPC-VG1-PGo(SD)
PG interface card
Open collector type encoder interface
OPC-VG1-PGo(LD) (A, B, Z signals)
OPC-VG1-PGo
OPC-VG1-PGo(PR) Motor speed, line speed, position
command, position detection
OPC-VG1-PGo(PD)
17-bit high-resolution ABS encoder

OPC-VG1-SPGT 6.8
interface
OPC-VG1-PMPG +5 V line driver output A, B,

Synchronous motor drive magnetic pole
6.3
PMPG interface card OPC-VG1-PMPGo Open collector output positions
(max. 4-bit)
SX bus interface card OPC-VG1-SX SX bus interface card 6.5
Digital 16-bit
(D port only) E-SX bus interface card OPC-VG1-ESX E-SX bus interface card 6.15
Safety card (*1)
Functional safety card OPC-VG1-SAFE Safety standard-compliant card -
(E port only)
Multiplex systems such as
Control circuit High-speed serial
multi-winding motor drive systems (2
terminal (F port communications-compatible OPC-VG1-TBSI 6.6
windings or more) and inductively
only) terminal block
coupled systems (*1)
F/V converter MCA-VG1-FV F/V converter 6.9
Standalone options Synchro interface MCA-VG1-SN Dancer control synchro interface circuit 6.10
(*1)
PG/NTC signal switch (2-signal
PG signal switch MCA-VG1-CPG 6.14
switch)
WPS-VG1-STR Windows CD-ROM (free edition) -
Loaders Inverter support loader
WPS-VG1-PCL Windows CD-ROM (paid edition) -
(*1) Available soon
6-1
The following table indicates which control options can be used in combination:
Table 6.1.2
Max. no. of options installed

CN Port Category
Pattern 1 Pattern 2 Pattern 3 Pattern 4
3 A Digital 8-bit 1 1 1 1
2 B Digital 8-bit 1 1 0 0
10 D Digital 16-bit 1 0 0 1
16 E Safety cards 0 0 1 1
1 F Control circuit terminals 1 1 1 1
Constraints when an OPC control option is installed

Table 6.1.3 indicates which options can be used simultaneously.
OK: Can be used simultaneously. NG: Cannot be used simultaneously.
Table 6.1.3
PG/ PMPG/
AIO DI DIO TL CCL SPGT ESX SX TBSI
PGo PMPGo
VG1-AIO NG
VG1-DI OK OK
VG1-DIO OK OK OK
VG1-TL OK OK OK NG
VG1-CCL OK OK OK NG NG
VG1-PG/PGo OK OK OK OK OK OK(*2)
VG1-PMPG/ OK OK OK
OK OK OK NG
PMPGo
VG1-SPGT NG(*1) OK OK OK OK OK NG NG
VG1-ESX OK OK OK NG NG OK OK OK NG
VG1-SX OK OK OK OK NG OK OK OK NG NG
VG1-TBSI OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK NG
*1) Contact your Fuji sales representative if you need to use this combination of options.
*2) The following constraints apply to use of the PG interface card (OPC-VG1-PG/PGo):
VG1-PG/PGo(SD) VG1-PG/PGo(LD) VG1-PG/PGo(PR) VG1-PG/PGo(PD)

VG1-PG/PGo(SD) NG
VG1-PG/PGo(LD) OK NG
VG1-PG/PGo(PR) OK NG NG
VG1-PG/PGo(PD) OK NG NG NG
6-2
6.1.2 Inspecting options after delivery

6.1.2.1 Inspecting options
• Do not use products with damaged or missing parts.

Doing so may result in bodily injury or damage.
Once you receive the product you ordered, check the following items:
(1) Verify that the product you received is in fact the product you ordered. Check the type/model
printed on the option.
Example type/model: OPC-VG1-TL
Option name TL → T-link interface
Chap. 6
Host inverter name VG1 → FRENIC-VG
(2) Check the product for damage sustained during shipment.
CONTROL OPTIONS
(3) Verify that all accessories are included in the packaging.
Table 6.1.4 Accessories
Option model Screws/spacers Other (power supply harnesses, optical cables, plugs and housings)
OPC-VG1-FV, SN, ±15 V use (CN12 connections)
AIO
OPC-VG1-DI ±24 V use (CN24 and CN25 connections)
Sumitomo 3M Limited
Plug: 10120-3000PE, Housing: 10320-52A0-008
OPC-VG1-DIO ±24 V use (CN24 and CN25 connections)
Screws (M3): 3 Sumitomo 3M Limited
Spacers: 3 Plug: 10136-3000PE, Housing: 10336-52A0-008
OPC-VG1-TL, CCL
OPC-VG1-PG/PGo
OPC-VG1-PMPG/ Sumitomo 3M Limited
PMPGo Plug: 10120-3000PE, Housing: 10320-52A0-008
OPC-VG1-SPGT
Screws (M3): 2
OPC-VG1-SX, ESX
Spacers: 4
OPC-VG1-TBSI Plastic optical cable (5 m, 1 per card)
MCA-VG1-FV, SN,
CPG
WPS-VG1-STR, PCL
6-3
6.1.2.2 Operating environment
Options are designed for use in the same operating environment as the FRENIC-VG.
Table 6.1.5 Operating Environment
Item Specifications
Location Indoors
Ambient -10 to +50°C
temperature
Relative humidity 5% to 95% (non-condensing)
Atmosphere Avoid exposure to dust, direct sunlight, corrosive gases, oil mist, steam, and water
droplets. Avoid exposure to excessive salt content. Avoid use in environments where
abrupt changes in temperature may cause condensation or freezing.
Elevation 1000 m or less
Oscillation 55 kW or less (200 V circuits), 75 kW or more (200 V circuits),
75 kW or less (400 V circuits) 90 kW or more (400 V circuits)
3 mm Greater than or 3 mm Greater than or
(max. amplitude) equal to 2 Hz and (max. amplitude) equal to 2 Hz and
less than 9 Hz less than 9 Hz
Greater than or Greater than or
9.8m/s2 equal to 9 Hz and 2m/s2 equal to 9 Hz and
Greater than or Greater than or
2m/s2 equal to 20 Hz and 1m/s2 equal to 55 Hz and
Greater than or
1m/s2 equal to 55 Hz and
less than 200 Hz
Note: Use of options in an operating environment that does not satisfy these conditions may result in decreased
performance and service life or equipment failure.
6-4
6.1.3 Storing options

6.1.3.1 Temporary storage
Options should be stored in an environment that satisfies the conditions listed in Table 6.1.6.
Table 6.1.6 Storage Environment
Item Specifications
Ambient
-10 to +50°C
temperature
Avoid use in environments where abrupt changes in temperature
Storage temperature
-25 to +70°C may cause condensation or freezing.
(Note 1)
Relative humidity 5 to 95% (Note 2)
Avoid exposure to dust, direct sunlight, corrosive gases, flammable gas, oil mist, steam,
Atmosphere
water droplets and oscillation. Avoid exposure to excessive salt content.
Chap. 6
(Note 1): Storage temperatures assume short-term exposure as during shipment.
(Note 2): Condensation or freezing may occur in locations where there are significant changes in temperature, even if the humidity
satisfies the specifications. Avoid storage in such locations.
CONTROL OPTIONS
(1) Do not place options directly on the floor. Instead, store on a table or shelf.
(2) If the storage environment does not satisfy the conditions listed in Table 6.1.6, wrap the option in a
vinyl sheet, polyethylene film designed for packaging use, or other material.
(3) If exposure to humidity is a concern, place a desiccant (silica gel, etc.) inside the packaging and
then wrap as described in (2) above.
6.1.3.2 Long-term storage

The method used to store options for an extended period of no use after purchase varies greatly with the
storage environment. If the device must be stored under precisely controlled conditions, consult the
company from which you purchased the product or your nearest Fuji sales office with information about
the specific specifications.
Generally speaking, the following storage practices should be observed:

(1) Options should be stored in an environment that meets the temporary storage conditions.
(2) Options should be packaged carefully to prevent the incursion of humidity and foreign matter.
Enclose a desiccant (silica gel, etc.) in the packaging. See JIS Z 0301 (damp-proof packaging
methods) for the quantity of desiccant to use. Aim for a relative humidity of 70% or less inside the
packaging.
When the option is to be installed in the FRENIC-VG and then left unused in a device or control panel for
a period of time, particularly at a location where construction work is being carried out, the device is
likely to be exposed to humidity and dust. In such situations, remove the entire FRENIC-VG inverter and
store it in an environment that satisfies the conditions listed in Table 6.1.6.
6-5
6.1.4 Installing internal options (OPC-VG1-□□)
6.1.4.1 Removing the front cover
• Inappropriate installation or removal of the product may cause damage to the product.
• Shut off the inverter’s input power supply and verify that the charge lamp (CHARGE) has gone out before
installing or removing options. When external control circuits are powered by separate power supplies, the
inverter’s 30A, 30B, 30C, Y5A, and Y5C control terminals may be energized, even when all inverter main
circuits, control, and auxiliary power supplies are off (open). To avoid electric shock, ensure that all external
power supplies are off (open).
Remove the inverter’s front cover as shown in the following figures. Note that the method for removing
the cover depends on which inverter model (capacity) you are using.
FRN22VG1S-2J/4J (22 kW) or lower FRN30VG1S-2J/4J (30 kW) or greater
As shown in Figure 6.1.1, loosen the one mounting (1) As shown in Figure 6.1.2, remove the mounting
screw on the front cover at location (a) and grip the screws on the front cover at location (b) (the
top of the cover to remove it. number of screws varies with the inverter’s
capacity) and remove the front cover.
(2) Open the keypad case.
Keypad case
Control printed
circuit board
Figure 6.1.1 Removing the Front Cover Figure 6.1.2 Removing the Front Cover
FRN22VG1S-2J/4J (22 kW) or lower FRN30VG1S-2J/4J (30 kW) or greater
6-6
6.1.4.2 Installing a digital 8-bit communications option card

The following options (“communications option cards”) are connected to either the CN2 (lower) or CN3
(upper) connector on the control printed circuit board.
• When not using the communications option card at the same time as a digital
Options
16-bit option (OPC-VG1-SX, etc.), follow “Installation method 1” below.
OPC-VG1-TL
OPC-VG1-CCL • When using the communications option card at the same time as a digital
16-bit option (OPC-VG1-SX, etc.), follow “Installation method 2” below.
Installation method 1 (when not using the option at the same time as a digital 16-bit
option card)
(When connecting the card to CN2 (When connecting the card to CN3
[the lower connector]) [the upper connector])
Chap. 6
(1) Attach the three included spacers (d) to the (1) Attach the three included spacers (d) to the
three option mounting fixtures (a) through (c) three option mounting fixtures (a) through (c)
on the control printed circuit board. on the control printed circuit board.
CONTROL OPTIONS
(2) Install the communications option card so that (2) Install the communications option card so that
connector CN1 (on the back of the connector CN1 (on the back of the
communications option card) connects to communications option card) connects to
connector CN2 on the control printed circuit connector CN3 on the control printed circuit
board. board.
(3) Tighten the three included screws (e) to secure (3) Tighten the three included screws (e) to secure
the communications option card in place. the communications option card in place.
(4) Referring to Figures 6.1.1 and 6.1.2, (4) Referring to Figures 6.1.1 and 6.1.2,
“Removing the Front Cover,” reverse the “Removing the Front Cover,” reverse the
procedure to reattach the front cover. procedure to reattach the front cover.
e Digital 8-bit communications e

option card
d d
CN2 CN3
a c
c
a
Control printed
b circuit board
Figure 6.1.3 Installing a Communications Figure 6.1.4 Installing a Communications

Option Card (Connected to CN2) Option Card (Connected to CN3)
6-7
Installation method 2 (when using the option at the same time as a digital 16-bit
option card)
The dimensions of the spacers included with communications option cards and those included with digital 16-bit
option cards differ slightly. See the following diagram when determining which spacers to use. Use of the wrong
spacers may damage the product.
Spacers included with

13.0
11.4
communications option Spacers included with digital
cards 16-bit option cards
(Unit: mm)
(When connecting to CN2 (When connecting to CN3

(1) Install the digital 16-bit option, connecting it to (1) Install the digital 16-bit option, connecting it to
the CN10 connector on the control printed the CN10 connector on the control printed
circuit board. circuit board.
(2) Attach the two screws (a) included with the (2) Attach the two screws (a) included with the
digital 16-bit option to mounting holes ① and ② digital 16-bit option to mounting holes ① and ②
on the digital 16-bit option, and attach four on the digital 16-bit option, and attach four
spacers (b) to holes ③ through ⑥. spacers (b) to holes ③ through ⑥.
(3) Attach one spacer (d) included with the (3) Attach one spacer (d) included with the
communications option card to the option communications option card to the option
mounting fixture (c) on the control printed circuit mounting fixture (c) on the control printed circuit
board. board.
(4) Install the communications option card so that (4) Install the communications option card so that
connector CN1 (on the back of the connector CN1 (on the back of the
communications option card) connects to communications option card) connects to
connector CN2 on the control printed circuit connector CN3 on the control printed circuit
board. board.
(5) Tighten the three included screws (e) to secure (5) Tighten the three included screws (e) to secure
the communications option card in place. the communications option card in place.
(6) Referring to Figures 6.1.1 and 6.1.2, “Removing (6) Referring to Figures 6.1.1 and 6.1.2, “Removing
the Front Cover,” reverse the procedure to the Front Cover,” reverse the procedure to
reattach the front cover. reattach the front cover.
e Digital 8-bit communications e
option card
d
d
b
b
b
③ ③
①
④ Digital 16-bit a ④ ⑥
① ⑥ ⑤
⑤ option
a ② (OPC-VG1-SX) ②
CN3
CN2 c
c
CN10
CN10
Control printed
circuit board
Figure 6.1.5 Installing a Communications Figure 6.1.6 Installing a Communications

Option Card (Connected to CN2) Option Card (Connected to CN3)
6-8
6.1.4.3 Installing a digital 8-bit option card

The following options (“digital option card”) can be connected to either the CN2 (lower) or CN3 (upper)
connector on the control printed circuit board. However, the OPC-VG1-SPGT must be connected to CN2
(the lower connector).
• When not using the digital option card at the same time as a digital
Options 16-bit option (OPC-VG1-SX, etc.), follow “Installation method 1”
OPC-VG1-PG/PGo
below.
OPC-VG1-PMPG/
• When using the digital option card at the same time as a digital 16-bit
PMPGo
OPC-VG1-SPGT option (OPC-VG1-SX, etc.), follow “Installation method 2” below.
Installation method 1 (when not using the option at the same time as a digital 16-bit
option card)
Chap. 6
(1) Attach the three included spacers (d) to the (1) Attach the three included spacers (d) to the
CONTROL OPTIONS
three option mounting fixtures (a) through (c) on three option mounting fixtures (a) through (c) on
the control printed circuit board. the control printed circuit board.
(2) Install the digital option card so that connector (2) Install the digital option card so that connector
CN1 (on the back of the digital option card) CN1 (on the back of the digital option card)
connects to connector CN2 on the control connects to connector CN3 on the control
printed circuit board. printed circuit board.
(3) Connect the power supply harness running (3) Connect the power supply harness running
from the top of the digital option card to CN24 from the top of the digital option card to CN25
on the control printed circuit board. For on the control printed circuit board.
OPC-VG1-SPGT, connect the harness to
(4) Tighten the three included screws (e) to secure
CN12.
the digital option card in place.
(5) Referring to Figures 6.1.1 and 6.1.2, “Removing
the Front Cover,” reverse the procedure to
(5) Referring to Figures 6.1.1 and 6.1.2, “Removing reattach the front cover.
reattach the front cover.
e Digital 8-bit option e
card
Power supply
harness Power
supply
harness
d d
CN25
CN2 CN3
a
c c
b
CN24
a Control printed
b circuit board
Figure 6.1.7 Installing a Digital Option Card Figure 6.1.8 Installing a Digital Option Card
(Connected to CN2) (Connected to CN3)
6-9
Installation method 2 (when using the option at the same time as a digital 16-bit
option card)
The dimensions of the spacers included with digital option cards and those included with digital 16-bit option
cards differ slightly. See the following diagram when determining which spacers to use. Use of the wrong spacers
may damage the product.
Spacers included with digital

13.0
11.4
Spacers included with
digital option cards 16-bit option cards
(Unit: mm)

(1) Install the digital 16-bit option, connecting it to (1) Install the digital 16-bit option, connecting it to
the CN10 connector on the control printed the CN10 connector on the control printed
circuit board. circuit board.
(2) Attach the two screws (a) included with the (2) Attach the two screws (a) included with the
digital 16-bit option to mounting holes ① and ② digital 16-bit option to mounting holes ① and ②
on the digital 16-bit option, and attach four on the digital 16-bit option, and attach four
spacers (b) to holes ③ through ⑥. spacers (b) to holes ③ through ⑥.
(3) Attach one spacer (d) included with the digital (3) Attach one spacer (d) included with the digital
option card to the option mounting fixture (c) on option card to the option mounting fixture (c) on
the control printed circuit board. the control printed circuit board.
(4) Install the digital option card so that connector (4) Install the digital option card so that connector
CN1 (on the back of the digital option card) CN1 (on the back of the digital option card)
connects to connector CN2 on the control connects to connector CN3 on the control
printed circuit board. printed circuit board.
(5) Connect the power supply harness running (5) Connect the power supply harness running
from the top of the digital option card to CN24 from the top of the digital option card to CN25
on the control printed circuit board. For on the control printed circuit board.
OPC-VG1-SPGT, connect the harness to
CN12.
(7) Referring to Figures 6.1.1 and 6.1.2, “Removing
(7) Referring to Figures 6.1.1 and 6.1.2, “Removing reattach the front cover.
reattach the front cover.
6-10
e Digital 8-bit option e

Power supply card
harness
Power d
d supply
b harness b
b
③ ③
① ① ④
④ ⑥ a ⑥
⑤ ⑤
a Digital 16-bit ②
②
option CN3
CN2 CN25 c
c
g
CN10 CN10
Chap. 6
CN24 Control printed
circuit board
Figure 6.1.9 Installing a Digital Option Card Figure 6.1.10 Installing a Digital Option
CONTROL OPTIONS
(Connected to CN2) Card (Connected to CN3)
6.1.4.4 Installing a digital 16-bit option card

Install the digital 16-bit option card by following steps (1) and (2) in “Installation method 2 (when using
the option at the same time as a digital 16-bit option card)” in “6.1.4.2 Installing a digital 8-bit
communications option card.”
6-11
6.2 PG Interface Expansion Card
6.2.1 Product overview
The PG interface expansion card is used when performing speed control using an
interface such as a line driver output type encoder, or when performing
synchronized operation or rotational positioning (orientation) of multiple motors.
Since the FRENIC-VG’s built-in PG interface generates 15 V and 12 V
complementary (totem pole, push-pull) output, the built-in PG interface function
is used when performing speed control with PG feedback using a normal
FRENIC-VG standard motor.
(1) Principal applications

• When interfacing with a PG that is not supported by the built-in PG interface,
for example a 5 V line driver output type PG interface
• When you wish to detect the line speed using a PG installed on the line
• When you wish to drive the motor using pulse train commands or perform
synchronized operation (*1)
• When you wish to perform orientation (rotational positioning) (requires separate UPAC option) (*1)
To provide separate support for applications such as this one, switches SW1 and SW2 on the PG
interface expansion card can be set to SD, LD, PR, or PD (from the top in order).
(*1) Available soon
(2) Hardware
Since the interface uses photocoupler insulation, PG wiring may be up to 50 m long with line driver
signals and a small wiring voltage drop.
(3) Broken wire detection function

The broken wire detection function can be used when using SD motor speed detection. When a
broken wire is detected, the inverter will display alarm p9, and the interruption of inverter output
will cause the motor to perform a free-run stop. However, this function is not available when using
the open collector/voltage output model (OPC-VG1-PGo). The FRENIC-VG ships with PG broken
wire detection cancelation functionality in its standard configuration.
(4) PG interface expansion card function codes

PG interface expansion card codes (o05 to 08 and o12 to 19) are used for pulse compensation and
other functionality when performing position and line control.
(5) PG frequency division output

As with the built-in PG, when performing speed control with the optional PG set to SD, the FA and
FB built-in terminal blocks can be used to generate open collector output and complementary output
by dividing the pulse signal frequency.
(6) Input format selection

When using the PG interface expansion card to perform speed detection (SD, LD), input signals are
fixed to two signals (A- and B-phase) with a 90° phase difference. When receiving a pulse train
(PR), you can select from three signal types using function codes (o13: pulse train input format
selection).
6-12
6.2.2 Model and specifications

6.2.2.1 Model
• There are two models for the PG interface expansion card, reflecting differences in the external
equipment output interface:
OPC-VG1-PG: Line driver signals
OPC-VG1-PGo: Open collector/voltage output
Exercise care that you do not specify the wrong model when purchasing one of the cards.
The model for the FRENIC-VG’s PG option reflects differences in the external equipment output
interface (line driver output versus open collector output/voltage output). Since the interface type cannot
be selected with switches, it is necessary to determine which interface you require before purchase
(OPC-VG1-PG, OPC-VG1-PGo).
Chap. 6
Applications can be changed after purchase using hardware switches on the PG interface expansion card
(SW1, SW2).
CONTROL OPTIONS
Model format:
OPC-VG1-PG□(□□)
PD (pulse detection): For pulse detection
LD (line speed detection): For line speed detection
PR (pulse reference): For pulse command input
SD (speed detection): For motor speed detection
None: Line driver output model (provides PG broken wire detection

function when SD is selected)
o: Open collector output and voltage output model (no PG broken
wire detection function)
PG: Pulse generator interface expansion card

VG1 → FRENIC-VG inverter
Accessories
Spacers: 3
Screws (M3): 3
SW1 and SW2 settings

For example, to perform speed control for a motor that includes a line driver output type encoder, you
would order the OPC-VG1-PG and select SD with the switches as the speed control application. To
perform synchronized operation based on received pulse trains, set the switches to PR.
Table 6.2.1 Option Switch Settings
Function SW1 SW2

PD OFF OFF
LD ON OFF
PR OFF ON (Factory default)
SD ON ON
6-13
6.2.2.2 Specifications
• Failure to set the switches on the PG interface expansion card (SW1, SW2) correctly will prevent
the system from operating properly. Read information about the settings below and be sure to set the
switches correctly.
• When performing rotational positioning, set the switches to PG (PD). Use of the card in this
configuration requires the separate UPAC option.
Table 6.2.2 Hardware specifications
Item Specifications
Model OPC-VG1-PG OPC-VG1-PGo
Line driver output (recommended Open collector output
Signal type AM26LS31PC or equivalent) Voltage output
SW1 and SW2 on the PG interface expansion card are used to switch modes as follows:
Mode switching
(SW1, SW2) = (OFF, OFF) : (ON, OFF) : (OFF, ON) : (ON, ON) = PD : LD : PR : SD
Motor speed detection (SD), Line speed detection (LD), Pulse detection (PD), Pulse command
Applications
input (PR)
The PG interface expansion card uses a 5 V power supply.
[PGP] terminal: +5 V ±5%, 250 mA
PG power [PGM] terminal: Common
supply Includes an overcurrent protection function.
Internal photocoupler insulation (connected to [PGM] and [CM] on the inverter’s control Pt
board; isolated from [M])
[PA], [*PA], [PB], [*PB], [PZ], [*PZ] [PA], [PB], [PZ]
Signal pins Photocoupler insulation Photocoupler insulation
([*PA], [*PB], and [*PZ] are not used.)
Line driver output type Open collector output type
Connect a 5 V power supply to [PGP] and Built-in 5 V pull-up, sink current: 8 mA
[PGM]. Other 5 V power supplies cannot be max./circuit
Connections (see used. Since a balanced circuit is used, it is (Can be used when connected to the
basic connection necessary to use twisted-pair shielded cable for FRENIC-VG’s [FA] and [FB] terminals.)
diagram) wiring. Voltage output type
L level voltage detection: 0 V to 2 V or less
H level voltage detection: 4 V to 15 V
Can select from 3 types using the o13 function code (pulse train input format selection).
2 signals (A- and B-phase) with 90° phase difference
Input format
A-phase: Command pulse; B-phase: Command code
A-phase: Run forward pulse; B-phase: Run reverse pulse
Open collector output or complementary output can be generated by dividing the frequency of
Pulse output the input pulse with the inverter’s built-in [FA], [FB], and [CM] terminals.
Max. output frequency: 100 kHz; 15 mA max., 1.5 mA min., 27 V max./circuit
Max. input pulse 500 kHz, duty: 50 ±10% 100 kHz, duty: 50 ±10%
frequency
Approx. 50 m 10 m or less
Allowable Shorter wiring lengths are required when there Keep wiring runs as short as possible to avoid
wiring length is a high voltage drop. For wiring runs of 50 m the effects of noise.
or greater, use an insulation converter as
described in “6.2.4.2 Wiring.”
24 V
Power supply Supplied from the inverter’s printed circuit board. Connect the power supply harness to CN24 or
CN25 on the inverter.
6-14
Input signal format (run reverse signals * omitted)
2 signals with a 90° phase difference
OFF
MODE
Run forward Run reverse
PD
PR
SD
LD
OFF
ON
Input A pulse
1
2
Input B pulse
SW1
Command pulse, command code
Input A pulse
Input B pulse
t1 t2 OPC-VG1-PG
t1,t2>4us
Run forward pulse, run reverse pulse

Chap. 6
Input A pulse
Terminal block Power supply

Input B pulse harness
t3
t3>4us
CONTROL OPTIONS
Figure 6.2.1 Figure 6.2.2
Software specifications
(1) Speed control specifications
Specifications are the same as when the built-in PG interface is used.

OFF
MODE
PD
PR
SD
LD
OFF
ON
1
2
Figure 6.2.3
Table 6.2.3
Item Speed control specifications

Card type (setting) OPC-VG1-PG□(SD)
Motor control method Vector control for IM with speed sensor
1:1500 (min. speed: base speed, 1.0 to 1,500 r/min. with 4P
Speed control Control range conversion, using 1024 P/R)
Vector control with 1:6 (constant torque region:constant output region)
speed sensor Speed control Analog setting: ±0.1% of max. speed
accuracy Digital setting: ±0.005% max. speed
When the PG interface expansion option is installed and set to SD, the
PG interface functionality
built-in PG function is disabled, and the PG option takes priority.
Broken wire detection function Yes
Output can be generated by dividing the frequency of PG interface
Frequency division output
expansion card pulses input from the standard [FA] and [FB] terminals.
6-15
(2) Line speed control specifications
OFF This configuration is used when controlling the line speed of a winding device using
MODE
PD
PR
SD
a PG installed on the line, rather than motor speed control.
LD
OFF
ON 1
2
Figure 6.2.4
Table 6.2.4
Item Line speed control specifications

Card type (setting) OPC-VG1-PG□(LD)
Vector control with speed sensor (induction motor, line speed control)
Control method
Line speed control is built into the standard configuration.
1:1500 (min. speed: base speed, 1.0 to 1,500 r/min. with 4P
Line speed Control range conversion, using 1024P/R)
Vector control with 1:6 (constant torque region:constant output region)
speed sensor Speed control Analog setting: ±0.1% of max. speed
accuracy Digital setting: ±0.005% max. speed
With the PG interface expansion card installed and the LD setting
active:
Function code H53 = 2: Line speed detection enabled
PG interface functionality
Function code H53 = 3: High selector (line speed detection, motor
speed detection using built-in PG)
The encoder pulse count can be set using the o06 function code.
Pulse compensation Compensation can be performed using the o07 and 08 function codes.
Broken wire detection function None
The speed can be set for 15 speed stages in m/min. (function codes
C05 to C21).
Application functionality
Line speed detection (±max. speed/±10 V) output can be generated for
AO output.
Output can be generated by dividing the frequency of standard built-in
Frequency division output
PG interface input (line PG is not output).
6-16
(3) Pulse train and synchronous drive specifications
OFF Operation conforms to pulse train input.
MODE
PD
PR
SD
Master/slave synchronized operation is possible.
LD
OFF
ON 1
2
Figure 6.2.5
Table 6.2.5
Item Pulse train and synchronous drive specifications

Card format (setting) OPC-VG1-PG□(PR)
Broken wire detection function None
Function Ships standard with a built-in synchronous drive function.
Supports cascading connections (see Figure 6.2.6).
Synchronous No. of When using open collector output from a pulse oscillator or insulated pulse
Chap. 6
drive synchronous units amp and connecting the devices in parallel, the number of units connectable
connectable depends on the requirement of 8 mA of sink current per circuit. For example,
if the output maximum rating for the devices is 25 mA, up to 3 can be
connected (24 mA = 3 8 mA).
CONTROL OPTIONS
0 to ±30,000 r/min.
Valid setting
range However, the input pulse frequency cannot exceed 500 kHz (OPC-VG1-PG)
Speed or 100 kHz (OPC-VG1-PGo).
control ±0.005% of maximum speed
Speed control
(Accuracy relative to steady-state deviation due to temperature fluctuations
accuracy
or load.)
10 Hz
Position response
Response is adjusted using the APR gain and ASR gain.
Synchronous Within ±2 pulses (F/F gain is set to 1.0 during steady-state or transient
Position
accuracy (see operation)
control
following figure) When F/F gain ≠ 1.0, steady-state or transient deviations may occur.
Within ±1 pulse
Lock accuracy
Opposing torque can be 150%.
FRENIC-VG FRENIC-VG FRENIC-VG

Slave 1 Slave 2 Slave 3
Built-in Built-in Built-in

PG (PR) PG (PR) PG (PR)
PG PG PG
Figure 6.2.6
6-17
6.2.3 External dimension diagram
VG1 VG1
(Unit: mm)
Figure 6.2.7 OPC-VG1-PG Outline Drawing Figure 6.2.8 OPC-VG1-PGo Outline Drawing
6-18
6.2.4 Basic connection diagram

Refer to “6.1.4 Installing Built-in Options (OPC-VG1-□□)” before performing wiring or connection
work.
• Performing connection work in an inappropriate manner may result in electric shock, fire, or other damage.
Qualified electricians should carry out wiring. When touching electrical circuits, for example when performing
connection work after the unit has been energized, shut off the power supply’s circuit breaker to prevent
electric shock.
• The smoothing capacitor remains charged even when the circuit breaker is shut off and will cause an electric
shock when touched. Verify that the inverter’s charge lamp (“CHARGE”) has turned off and use a tester or
other instrument to verify that the inverter’s DC voltage has fallen to a safe level.
Chap. 6
• Do not use products with damaged or missing parts. Doing so may result in bodily injury or damage.
• Failure to set the switches on the PG interface expansion card (SW1, SW2) correctly will prevent the system
CONTROL OPTIONS
from operating properly. Read information about the settings below and be sure to set the switches correctly.
6.2.4.1 Terminal connections

The PG interface expansion card’s connection terminals use a wire size of 16 to 26 AWG. When using
the connection terminals with stripped wires, strip to a length of 6 mm. When using crimp contacts, use a
rod-shaped terminal with vinyl insulation. Insert the wire so that it is held in place on the top of the
terminal block’s fixture and tighten the screw to hold it in place.
Tightening torque
Wiring AWG: 16-26
0.22 to 0.25N•m
6(mm)
Figure 6.2.9 End of Wire at the PG Interface Figure 6.2.10 Connecting a Wire to the PG
Expansion Card’s Connection Terminal Interface Expansion Card’s Terminal
6-19
6.2.4.2 Wiring
Wiring between the PG interface expansion card and a pulse generator, PG, or other device
• Use shielded wire for PG interface expansion card wiring. Wiring length is subject to constraints
depending on the interface type (see table below).
• Connect the shielded wire’s housing to the external device or the motor’s earth terminal and leave
open at the inverter.
• To prevent malfunctions due to noise on PG interface expansion card wiring, leave as much distance
as possible between wiring and the inverter’s main circuit wiring and other power lines (10 cm or
more) and never place wiring in the same conduit as power lines.
Table 6.2.6
Wiring length
External interface Application
guideline
Use when connecting a line driver output type encoder. The 50 m
figure for wiring length is a guideline based on the assumption that
Line driver type Within 50 m
measures have been taken to limit the voltage drop, for example by
using thicker signal wires for power lines (PGP, PGM).
Open collector output Can be used when connecting the master device’s [FA] and [FB]
type open collector outputs to [PA] and [PB] on the slave PGo (PR).
Use when connecting a voltage output device or a device that uses
Within 10 m an external power supply. It is necessary to exercise caution
Voltage output type concerning the maximum voltage of 15 V and threshold values. (L
level voltage detection: 0 V to 2 V; H level voltage detection: 4 V
to 15 V)
Recommended insulation converters (insulated amps)

• When the wiring length will be 50 m or greater with a line driver type device (combination of motor
PG and FRENIC-VG), use an insulation converter. The insulated amp type and manufacturer are as
follows:
SHC-205P05D (Faith, Inc.): 200 V power supply input
SHC-105P05D (Faith, Inc.): 100 V power supply input
• When connecting multiple FRENIC-VG units in parallel to the slave device using open collector type
signaling, the maximum number of slave devices is one. When connecting two or more devices, use
an insulated amp. The insulated amp type and manufacturer are as follows:
SHC-205C24C (Faith, Inc.): 200 V power supply input
SHC-105C24C (Faith, Inc.): 100 V power supply input
6-20
6.2.4.3 Speed control

This connection example illustrates how to drive a motor (a Fuji
OFF
servomotor, etc.) to which a line driver output type encoder or open
MODE
collector or complementary type encoder.
PD
PR
SD
LD
OFF
ON
Since the speed is detected and calculated based on received pulses, 1
the PG interface expansion card must be set to SD. Since frequency 2
division output can be generated using FA and FB, this approach can
Figure 6.2.11
be used with a digital speedometer or other instrument.
When using a complementary output type encoder that supports 15 V
and 12 V output, use the inverter’s PGP and PGM terminals. In this
configuration, the common line is connected to the PG interface
expansion card.
Chap. 6
Line driver type Open collector output and complementary output type
Main power supply Main power supply
3-phase power MOTOR 3-phase power MOTOR
supply FRENIC-VG supply FRENIC-VG
50/60Hz 50/60Hz
U U U U
L1/R L1/R
V V V V
L2/S M L2/S M
CONTROL OPTIONS
W W W W
L3/T L3/T
NTC thermistor NTC thermistor
[TH1] [TH1]
[THC] [THC]
OPC-VG1-PGo(SD)
[PGP] [PGP]
OPC-VG1-PG(SD)
[PGM] [PGM]
[PA] [PA] PG
PG
[*PA] [PB]
[PB]
[*PB]
E E
[FA] [FA]
E Open collector output E Open collector output
[FB] [FB]
(frequency division) (frequency division)
[CM] [CM]
Note: As a rule, shielded wires are earthed. However, if excessive induced noise from external sources affects the
system, the effects of such noise can be reduced by connecting shielded wires to 0 V.
6-21
6.2.4.4 Line speed control
This connection example illustrates how to

Direction of line PE
perform speed control after installing a line Winding
operation
driver output type encoder on a system’s
Gears
winding line. Since motor speed feedback
and line speed feedback can be detected NTC thermistor
MOTOR
simultaneously, it is possible to prevent a
M PG
runaway operation scenario resulting from a
SS,E
E
cause such as a paper tear on the line. When
using the PG interface expansion card in an
application such as this one, it must be set to
W
V
U
LD.
[PGM]
[PGP]
[*PA]
[*PB]
[PA]
[PB]
[PGM]
[PA]
[PB]
[PGP]
[THC]
[TH1]
FRENIC-VG
OPC-VG1-PG(LD)
OFF
MODE
PD
PR
SD
LD
L1/R
L2/S
L3/T
OFF
E
ON
1 Main power supply

3-phase power supply
2 50/60Hz
Figure 6.2.14
Figure 6.2.15
6-22
6.2.4.5 Pulse train operation and synchronized operation
• When using the FRENIC-VG’s [FA] and [FB] open collector outputs to perform master/slave synchronized
operation, separate open collector wiring from power lines and keep wiring runs as short as possible. When
using long-distance wiring, it is recommended to provide a separate converter to convert the signals into line
driver signals.
When using the PG interface expansion card in this application, set switch SW1 to PR.
OFF
MODE
PD
PR
SD
LD
OFF
ON
1
2
Figure 6.2.16
Chap. 6
(1) Line driver output
CONTROL OPTIONS
FRENIC-VG MOTOR
The PG interface expansion card operates by 1500 U U
Main power supply L1/R
receiving pulse commands from an external 3-phase power
L2/S
V V
M
supply W W
pulse generator or PG. 50/60Hz L3/T
NTC thermistor
[TH1]
Since the FRENIC-VG receiving these [PA] [THC]
OPC-VG1-PG(PR)
[*PA]
signals can generate open collector output [PB]
[PGP]
[PGM]
[*PB] PG
([FA] and [FB]), the pulse signals can be [PA]
[PGP]
5 V power [PB]
passed to the next FRENIC-VG. In this way, supply [PGM]
[FA] SS,E E
Entry into
multiple FRENIC-VG units can be driven synchronized [FB]
Pulse generator or operation [CM]
synchronously.
Open collector
line driver PG [SYC] output
E
[CM]
(2) Open collector output

Figure 6.2.17
Open collector output can be used when MOTOR
FRENIC-VG
driving multiple FRENIC-VG units 1500 U U
Main power supply L1/R
synchronously. The open collector output 3-phase power
supply L2/S
V V
M
W W
50/60Hz
([FA] and [FB]) generated by the master L3/T
NTC thermistor
Master FRENIC-VG open [TH1]
FRENIC-VG is connected to the slave collector output 5V
OPC-VG1-PGo(PR)
Zero-phase ferrite [THC]

ring ACL-40B x 1
FRENIC-VG’s PG interface expansion card. [FA]

(4 turns)
[PGP]
[PA] [PGM]
The slave operates by receiving these pulse [FB] [PA]
PG
commands. [PB] [PB]

[CM] [FA] SS,E E
[PGM]
Since the FRENIC-VG receiving these Position the zero-phase
[FB]
ferrite ring as close to [CM] Open collector
signals can generate open collector output the PGo card as
possible.
[SYC]
E
output
[CM]
([FA] and [FB]), the pulse signals can be Entry into synchronized
operation
passed to the next FRENIC-VG. In this way, Figure 6.2.18

multiple FRENIC-VG units can be driven
synchronously.
It is recommended to install a zero-phase
ferrite ring (ACL-40B) as shown in the figure
to the right in order to ensure a noise margin,
among other benefits.
6-23
Precautions
The OPC-VG1-PGo (open Keep wiring as short as possible (SHC-205C05D)
Master FRENIC-VG
collector type) is not suited to use Open collector output ACPOWER
AC 200/220V
Insulation
in applications characterized by a converter
OUTPUTB OUTPUTA
A 【 PA 】
OPC-VG1-PG (PR)
INPUT B INPUT A
【 FA 】
challenging noise environment in + A 【 *PA 】
which signals are routed alongside 【 FB 】

- COM
motor power lines or where wiring + B 【 PB】
【 CM】
- B 【 *PB】
is run over long distances, 【 PGM】
reducing the noise margin.

Figure 6.2.19
In such applications, it is recommended to use the architecture shown in the figure to the right, which
utilizes the OPC-VG1-PG (line driver type).
Recommended insulation converter: SHC-205C05D (Faith, Inc.)
6-24
6.2.5 Synchronized operation

6.2.5.1 Synchronized operation system architecture
Systems for synchronously operating motors with a FRENIC-VG utilize master/slave connections,
cascading connections, or pulse train commands from a PLC or other external transmitter.
(1) Master/slave connections
• When using a master/slave connection, up to one FRENIC-VG can be connected in parallel to the slave side of
the system (8 mA sink current/1 circuit). Use a cascading connection if you need to connect two or more
FRENIC-VG units as slaves.
• When the direction of rotation for slave motors will be opposite that of the master, use the IVS contact instead
of the REV contact.
Chap. 6
This technique allows open collector pulse output from one
FRENIC-VG
FRENIC-VG (the master) to be passed to PG card input of another 1500
Master
FRENIC-VG (the slave) that you wish to operate synchronously.
CONTROL OPTIONS
Up to one FRENIC-VG can be connected in this way, as shown
below.
Table 6.2.7 FA and FB terminal open
collector output
Master open collector output [FA], [FB], Slave OPC-VG1-PGo [PA], OPC-VG1-PGo
and [CM] terminals [PB], and [CM] terminals
15 mA max. per circuit 8 mA max. per circuit FRENIC-VG
1500
When using master/slave synchronized operation, the slave’s

synchronized operation speed is obtained by multiplying the
master’s speed by the pulse compensation factor (function codes
o14 and 15). Max. 1 slave
Change the slave motor’s direction of rotation with each slave unit’s Figure 6.2.20
[IVS] contact (forward operation/reverse operation). The [REV]
contact cannot be used in this configuration.
Table 6.2.8
Master’s direction of
Slave [IVS] Slave’s direction of rotation
rotation
Forward OFF Same as master
Forward ON Opposite of master
Reverse OFF Same as master
Reverse ON Opposite of master
(2) Cascading connections
• When using a cascading connection, set function code E29 (PG pulse output selection) to 9 for slave units
(slave 1, 2, etc., but not the master) in order to avoid a delay between the master and the final slave unit.
6-25
This connection method is used when Master
connecting two or more slave units in a FRENIC-VG

master/slave connection. 1500
The description in (1) above applies

between the master and the first slave unit,
but function code E29 must be set
between the first and second slave units. FA and FB terminal open
collector output
This setting is needed so that pulse train
OPC-VG7-PGo
FA and FB terminal open
commands from the master are passed as collector output
pulse train signals to slave 2 without FRENIC-VG FRENIC-VG
1500 1500
being subject to software processing by
slave 1.
OPC-VG7-PGo
Table 6.2.9
Function Slave 1
Name Setting Slave 2
code Figure 6.2.21
9: PG (PR)
PG pulse Generates open collector

output output for position
E29
command pulse input
selection
without other
modification.
(3) Pulse transmitter
• In pulse train operation using a pulse transmitter, the number of slave units that can be connected is determined
by the transmitter’s current capacity (8 mA sink current/circuit).
• When the direction of rotation for slave motors will be opposite that of the master, the direction is determined
by the [IVS] contact and the pulse input format. Set function code o13 (pulse train input format selection)
according to the pulse format.
Pulse transmitter
This technique drives the master FRENIC-VG with pulse commands using a (PLC, etc.)
PLC or other pulse transmitter.

As illustrated below, the maximum number of units connectable is
determined by the current capacity of the master pulse transmitter.
Table 6.2.10
Slave OPC-VG1-PGo FRENIC-VG FRENIC-VG FRENIC-VG

Master pulse transmitter [PA], [PB], and [CM] 1500 1500 1500
terminals
Current capacity per 8 mA max. per circuit
circuit
16 mA or greater 2 units
24 mA or greater 3 units
The number of slave units depends on the transmitter’s drive current capacity.
x mA or greater Whole number of
units given by (x / 8)
Figure 6.2.22
6-26
The direction of rotation for slave motors is determined by [IVS] and the pulse input format.
Table 6.2.11
(1) (2) (3) IVS Slave direction of operation

B-phase high A-phase input B-phase, 90° advance OFF Forward
B-phase high A-phase input B-phase, 90° advance ON Reverse
B-phase low B-phase input B-phase, 90° delay OFF Reverse
B-phase low B-phase input B-phase, 90° delay ON Forward
Pulse input format

(1) Command pulse/command code
(2) Forward run pulse/reverse run pulse
(3) Two signals with a 90° phase difference
Chap. 6
Select the pulse input format with function code o13.
CONTROL OPTIONS
6.2.5.2 Synchronized operation method
• Manipulate the [FWD] terminal and [SYC] (the contact input terminal) simultaneously during pulse train
operation.
• When [FWD] turns on with a delay after [SYC] turns on while a pulse train continues to be input, the motor
may accelerate to its maximum speed in order to eliminate the accumulated deviations.
Risk of bodily injury
• Operating the motor with an incorrect allocation of the function selection input function code’s data may result
in bodily injury or equipment damage. Re-check allocation prior to operation.
Risk of equipment damage
Synchronized operation signal [SYC]

During pulse train operation, allocate one of the contacts X1 to X14 to 27 (SYC) for the slave motor and
manipulate [SYC] together with the [FWD] signal.
Table 6.2.12
Function code Function name Pulse train function

E01 to E13 X1 to X14 function In order to perform position control operation, allocate the synchronized
selection operation instruction ([SYC]: 27) to one of the contact input terminals
listed to the left.
6-27
(1) Master/slave synchronized operation
• When performing master/slave operation, use of an F/F gain other than 1.0 will cause a steady-state deviation
to remain between the master and slave. Steady-state deviations can be reduced with the APR gain and F/F
gain, but adjustments made using the F/F gain may cause overshoot.
In order to perform synchronized operation with a master/slave connection, maintain the [FWD] terminal
and contact input signal [SYC] in the “on” state at all times. Doing so will cause the slave unit to operate
in synchronization with the master unit, allowing the slave unit to be stopped in the servo-lock state by
stopping the master.
• Change the slave motor’s direction of rotation with [IVS]. Do not use the [REV] terminal.
Pulse train input
from the master unit
[FWD] (slave) ON States

ON States
[SYC] (slave)
Slave speed
Servo-lock state
t1 t2
Amount of deviation
(Between master and
slave)
Figure 6.2.23
Slave acceleration and deceleration times

The slave motor’s acceleration (t1) and deceleration (t2) times will lag slightly behind the master. As
illustrated in the above figure, the slave will operate while maintaining a pulse deviation (steady-state
deviation) relative to the master.
Steady-state deviation
Master speed
The slave motor will operate while
maintaining a steady deviation relative to the
master. This deviation will be eliminated
when the motor stops, and the motor will
Slave speed
enter the servo-lock state when a deviation of
zero is reached.
This steady-state deviation is the difference This area indicates the The steady-state
steady-state deviation that
is maintained during deviation is eliminated
between the number of command pulses from constant-speed operation. when the slave stops.
the master during constant-speed operation
Figure 6.2.24
and the number of position detection pulses
for the slave.
The steady-state deviation can be adjusted
with the APR gain and F/F gain. For more
information, see the section on PG interface
expansion card function codes.
6-28
(2) Pulse train operation using a pulse transmitter
• During pulse train operation, function code acceleration and deceleration time settings are disabled. Perform
frequency control with the pulse transmitter. Starting operation while a high-frequency pulse train command
has been given may cause the motor to accelerate rapidly.
Risk of bodily injury
Start and stop operation by simultaneously manipulating the [FWD] terminal and the contact input [SYC].
Turning [FWD] on alone will trigger operation with another speed command.
The acceleration and deceleration times cannot be controlled by the FRENIC-VG. Instead, perform
frequency control with the pulse transmitter.
Times t1 (S) and t2 (S) in Figure 6.2.25 cannot be controlled by the inverter.
Chap. 6
Pulse train input
[SYC]
CONTROL OPTIONS
[FWD]
t1 t2
Motor speed
Figure 6.2.25
6.2.5.3 Function codes
• Incorrect use of function code data may result in a hazardous state. Consequently, re-check data after finishing
setting and writing data.
Risk of accident
• Suddenly setting a high gain value with ASR (gain and integration time) function codes or otherwise failing to
write appropriate data may cause the motor to exhibit hunting behavior, causing damage to the motor and
device as well as bodily injury.
• Risk of bodily injury
• Changing data for function code o17 (F/F gain 1) may cause an overshoot if the speed changes abruptly. When
connecting the PG interface expansion card to devices that do not deal well with an overshoot, set this function
code to 0.0.
Risk of equipment damage
6-29
Table 6.2.13 lists function codes related to pulse train operation. See the control block diagrams in
Chapter 4 for more information.
Table 6.2.13
Parameter name
No. Setting range Setting description
Name Keypad display
Command pulse 0: PG (PR) option
o12 PLS REF SL 0，1
selection 1: Internal speed command
0: Two signals with a 90° phase difference between
the A- and B-phases
Pulse train input
o13 PLS STATE SL 0 to 2 1: A-phase command pulse, B-phase command code
format selection
2: A-phase run forward pulse, B-phase run reverse
pulse
Command pulse
o14 PLS CORR 1 1 to 9999
compensation 1 Allows the command pulse count ratio to be
Command pulse changed.
o15 PLS CORR 2 1 to 9999
compensation 2
o16 APR gain 1 APR-P-GAIN 0.1 to 999.9[times] Position controller gain
o17 F/F gain 1 F/F GAIN 0.0 to 1.5[times] Feed forward gain
Deviation overrun Allows 10 to 655,350 pulses to be set (10 x the
o18 DEV OVER W 1 to 65535[pulse]
width setting).
o19 Deviation zero width DEV XERO W 1 to 1000[pulse] Sets 1 to 1,000 pulses.
Sets the time constant for the primary delay filter
F64 ASR1 input filter ASR1-IN 0.000 to 5.000[s]
relative to the speed setting.
(1) Command pulse selection (o12)

Set to 0 when performing position control using pulses input to the PG (PR) option. Normally, the slave
setting is 0.
By contrast, set to 1 at the master when you wish to send the same pulse to the slave while triggering
pulse oscillation with an internal speed command and using pulse train operation for the master based on
that signal.
[About o12 = 1 operation]

Internal speed commands ([12] input and multi-stage speed commands, etc.) are converted into pulse
signals (oscillations), and those pulse signals are converted back into speed commands as part of position
control and enabled with [SYC]. To synchronize operation with other inverters, converted pulse signals
are output as-is and received by the PGo (PR) option.
Analog [12] Pulse
FRENIC-VG FRENIC-VG
Multi-stage speed commands
master slave
commands, etc.
Built-in PG
Speed commands Oscillation PGo (PR) Reception
outputs [FA]
circuit option circuit
and [FB]
Position Position Other speed

control control
commands
[SYC] Speed Speed [SYC]

control control
Built-in PG Built-in PG
[PA] and [PB] [PA] and [PB]
Synchronized
PG IM IM PG
operation
Figure 6.2.26
Precautions
When internal speed commands are used to generate oscillation with a pulse train using the o12 = 1
technique, processing is performed to correct the remainder portion of each pulse. For example, when using
a 1024p/r encoder, conversion of a 1,500 r/min. command into a pulse generates 25.6 kHz pulse output
6-30
without any problem. However, a speed command of 1,000 r/min. yields a pulse of 17.06666… kHz due to
the remainder in the division operation. Remainders are corrected one by one. This correction processing
causes a slight amount of speed fluctuation, but smoothing by the speed command filter prevents it from
becoming a problem. Additionally, since synchronization accuracy is maintained by means of remainder
correction processing, the problem of missing pulses (positional shifts) does not occur.
(2) Pulse train input format selection (o13)

Set to reflect the pulse format that will be input to the A- and B-phases. Set to 0 when using a
master/slave connection.
(3) Command pulse compensation 1, 2 (o14, o15)

Position command data being input to the pulse train card can be changed with command pulse
compensation 1 and 2. This functionality can be used to change the ratio of the speeds of the master
motor and slave motor during synchronized operation.
Chap. 6
Command pulse compensation 1 α
Position command pulse = (Command pulse input from external source) × ×
Command pulse compensation 2 4
α: Input format constant Command pulse/command code or run forward/run reverse pulse: α=1
CONTROL OPTIONS
Two signals with a 90° phase difference: α=4
[Example]
In synchronized operation with a master/slave connection with a slave that uses gears, assume that the
gear ratio is a:b and that the input pulse is transformed into b:a by command pulse compensation (b =
command pulse compensation 1; a = command pulse compensation 2).
b α
Position command pulse = (Command pulse input from external source) × ×
a 4
If the gear ratio is 1:3, the actual settings would be as follows:
Table 6.2.14
Command pulse 900 300 ・・・ 30 3

compensation 1
Command pulse 300 100 ・・・ 10 1
compensation 2
Master
FRENIC-VG
PG
PE
I/F
Synchronized
operation
Slave
FRENIC-VG
M
Gear ratio a:b
θ* (Speed ratio b:a)
Pulse PGo PG
PE
command Card I/F Pulse
detection
θ
Figure 6.2.27
6-31
(4) APR gain 1 (o16)
By adjusting the APR gain, it is possible to improve speed response during pulse train operation.
Additionally, it is possible to reduce the steady-state speed deviation during constant-speed operation.
However, since use of an excessively large APR gain setting carries the risk of causing the motor to
exhibit hunting behavior, it is recommended to start the adjustment process with a small value and then
gradually increase it.
Pulse train
step input
(a) APR = Low to optimal value (b) APR = Somewhat high (c) APR = High
Figure 6.2.28
To improve the ASR response during pulse train operation, write 0 (s) to the ASR input filters. Setting the
filters to large values may cause the motor to hunt.
(5) F/F gain 1 (o17)

The steady-state deviation can be reduced with the F/F gain value. The deviation is minimized with a
setting of 1.0, but the F/F gain should be set to 0.0 when used in combination with machinery that does
not do well with an overshoot.
The following figure illustrates the speed response when using step input consisting of position command
pulses. With an F/F gain of 0.0 and an optimal APR gain setting, no overshoot occurs (a). However, a
steady-state deviation is maintained during machinery operation.
By contrast, the steady-state deviation decreases to almost zero when the F/F gain is 1.0. However, an
overshoot occurs (b) in order to eliminate the deviation that has accumulated by the time the target speed
is reached. Additionally, the motor may accelerate to its maximum speed at this time. Consequently, a
setting of 0.0 should be used in order to avoid overshoot.
Pulse train
step input
Same area
Elimination of
Deviation deviation
(a) When F/F = 0.0 (b) When F/F = 1.0
Figure 6.2.29
6-32
The following equation describes the relationship between the F/F gain and the APR gain:
| 1 − GFF |
| Steady - state deviation | = × α × (input frequency)
GAPR
GFF: F/F gain, GAPR: APR gain,
α: Input format constant (α = 4 if 90° phase difference; otherwise, α = 1)
(6) Deviation overrun alarm width (o18)

Deviation
A deviation overrun occurs when the overrun
-655350 +655350
difference between the internal
command position and the actual
amount of motor rotation (i.e., the ON
deviation) is equal to or greater than Amount of

OFF deviation
this setting, causing the motor to [pulses]
perform a free-run stop. The keypad 0
LED will display "d0," and the LCD
Chap. 6
will display alarm information related Figure 6.2.30
to the deviation overrun.
Deviation overrun alarms can be canceled by turning off the position control [SYC] and inputting the
CONTROL OPTIONS
[RST] signal (see Figure 6.2.31).
Deviation overruns occur when the
[SYC] ON
motor fails to track position
[FWD]
commands. Although the initial value OFF
(factory setting) is 65,535 pulses
(internally the setting is multiplied by ON
10), it should be set to about 2 times [RST]
OFF
the position deviation that occurs
during normal operation. If the ON
Deviation
function code APR gain and F/F gain
overrun
settings have not been configured with OFF
optimal values, the motor may exhibit Figure 6.2.31
hunting behavior.
If that occurs, this value must be set again so that a deviation overrun alarm occurs immediately and the
motor performs a free-run stop. Note that using a setting that is too low may cause the alarm to be
triggered during acceleration and deceleration.
(7) Deviation zero width (o19)

The synchronization control complete Zero
signal is output when the motor’s deviation
current position falls within the range -20 +20
defined by this setting from the target
position. This functionality allows
ON
detection of the fact that the motor has
Amount of
almost reached the target position. The
OFF deviation
magnitude of this setting does not [pulses]
affect the positioning system. The 0
synchronization control complete
signal is assigned by allocating 27
[SY-C] to an output selected with the
Figure 6.2.32
Y1 to Y5 functions.
Figure 6.2.32 illustrates the [SY-C] output state when the value 20 is allocated to the deviation zero
width.
6-33
6.2.6 Check functions
6.2.6.1 Optional equipment check
You can check on the keypad whether the PG interface expansion card is set to SD, LD, PR, or PD.
From the Operating Mode screen, go to the Program Menu screen ＯＰＴＩＯＮ
and select “4. I/O check.” Use the and keys to switch ＯＰＡ：ＶＧ１－ＰＧ（ＳＤ）
ＯＰＢ：ＶＧ１－ＰＧ（ＰＤ）
screens and check the setting on screen 9 as shown in the figure to ＯＰＣ：
the right. ∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥＳＨＩＦＴ９
For more information, see the section on keypad operation.
The figure to the right illustrates the screen that would be
displayed when two PG interface expansion cards are installed and
set to PG (PD) and PG (SD).
6.2.6.2 I/O check

You can check the PG interface expansion card’s digital input status on the inverter’s keypad.
From the Operating Mode screen, go to the Program Menu screen and select “4. I/O check.” Use the
and keys to switch screens and check the setting on screen 15 as shown in the figure below.
ＳＤ＝±×××××Ｐ／ｓ Inverter and PG (SD) signal input information

ＬＤ＝±×××××Ｐ／ｓ PG (LD) signal input information
ＰＲ＝±×××××Ｐ／ｓ PG (PR) signal input information
ＰＤ＝±×××××Ｐ／ｓ PG (PD) signal input information
6.2.7 Protective functionality

When the inverter’s protective functionality operates, the inverter immediately displays an alarm, displays
the alarm name on the keypad’s LED, and allows the motor to free-run. When this functionality operates,
resume operation after clearing the cause of the malfunction. Avoid automatically resetting the alarm, for
example with an external sequence. Table 6.2.15 lists alarms related to the PG interface expansion card.
For more information about other alarms, see “Protective Operation” in the inverter’s operating manual.
Table 6.2.15 List of Alarm Protective Functions
Alarm display 30X Alarm cause

This position deviation overrun error occurs when the load causes the motor startup to
lag relative to the pulse train command, creating a position deviation that exceeds a
d0 Operation
previously set value. The threshold is set with function code o18 (deviation overrun
width).
A broken wire was detected due to an interruption in a PG signal when line driver
p9 Operation
operation (OPC-VG1-PG) was selected while using the SD setting.
6-34
6.3 Synchronous Motor Drive PG Interface Card

Using this option allows the FRENIC-VG to drive a synchronous motor. When
detecting magnetic pole positions using only the Z-phase, use the OPC-VG1-PG
(SD) option. Synchronous motors offer advantages over induction motors in the
form of their smaller size and lower energy consumption. Used in combination
with this option, the FRENIC-VG can drive not only Fuji motors (GNF2 series
motors, ES motors, and AC servomotors), but any synchronous motor with a
compatible encoder interface. However, it cannot be used with motors that utilize
serial encoders such as Fuji’s FALDIC α dedicated motor. Choose the
OPC-VG1-PMPG for line driver output or the OPC-VG1-PMPGo for open
collector output.
Chap. 6
(1) Maximum rotational speed of 30,000 r/min.
The synchronous motor drive PG interface card can generate output at up to 800 Hz when using a
CONTROL OPTIONS
carrier frequency of 10 kHz, allowing it to drive a motor at up to 30,000 rpm with a 2P motor
conversion. However, in fact the encoder’s input frequency is limited to 100 kHz. For example,
using a 256P/R encoder, the card can drive a motor at up to 100 kHz / 256 × 60 = 23,438 r/min.
(2) Magnetic pole position interface
The card can drive a motor with an encoder interface that satisfies the following specifications:
1) Synchronous motors that output magnetic pole positions using 4-bit Gray codes
2) Synchronous motors that output magnetic pole positions using 3-bit codes (U-, V-, and W-phase)
(3) Broken wire detection function
The card can use the broken wire detection function. When a broken wire is detected, the inverter
will display alarm p9 and shut off its output, causing the motor to perform a free-run stop.
However, this function cannot be used with the open collector output model (OPC-VG1-PMPGo).
The FRENIC-VG’s PG broken wire detection cancelation function can be used in the standard
configuration.
(4) Synchronous motor, ES motor, and AC servomotor drive
The synchronous motor drive PG interface card can drive Fuji synchronous motors (GNF2), ES
motors (GRK2), and AC servomotors (GRH). The user need only set several motor parameters.
When driving GRK series motors, choose the PMPGo card, since the included encoder generates
open collector output. In this application, be sure to attach a zero-phase ferrite ring to counteract
line noise.
(5) Small-capacity motor drive
The FRENIC-VG line starts with inverters rated for 0.75 kW in a 200 V circuit. However, these
inverters can also drive 0.2 kW and 0.4 kW synchronous motors. The user need only set several
motor parameters.
(6) IPM and SPM motor drive
Synchronous motors are classified as either internal permanent magnet (IPM) or surface permanent
magnet (SPM) devices, depending on the method with which the magnetic poles are incorporated
into the motor. The FRENIC-VG can drive both types. In particular, it is possible to set the salient
pole ratio using function codes. This capability allows the motor’s reluctance torque (torque that
takes advantage of differences in magnetic resistance) to be used, increasing efficiency.
6-35
6.3.2.1 Model
• There are two models for the synchronous motor drive PG interface card, reflecting differences in the external
equipment output interface:
OPC-VG1-PMPG: Line driver signals
OPC-VG1-PMPGo: Open collector/voltage output
Exercise care that you do not specify the wrong model when purchasing one of the cards.
The model for the FRENIC-VG’s PG option reflects differences in the external equipment output
interface (line driver output versus open collector output/voltage output). Since the interface type cannot
be selected with switches, it is necessary to determine which interface you require before purchase
(OPC-VG1-PMPG or OPC-VG1-PMPGo).
Model format:
OPC-VG1-PMPG□
None: Line driver model

o: Open collector model
Option name: PMPG → Permanent magnet synchronous motor

drive with PG synchronized drive option
VG1 → FRENIC-VG inverter
Accessories
Plug (Model: 20-pin 10120-3000PE by Sumitomo 3M Limited)
Housing (cover) (Model: 20-pin 10320-52A0-008 by Sumitomo 3M Limited)
Spacers: 3
Screws (M3): 3
6-36
Table 6.3.1 Hardware Specifications
Item Specifications
Model OPC-VG1-PMPG OPC-VG1-PMPGo
Line driver output Open collector output
Signal type
(recommended AM26LS31PC or equivalent)
The synchronous motor drive PG interface card uses a 5 V power supply.
[PGP] pin: +5 V ±5%, 250 mA, [PGM] pin: Common, Includes an overcurrent protection function.
Internal photocoupler insulation
PG power supply (connected to [PGM] and [CM] on the inverter’s control Pt board; isolated from [M])
The inverter’s PG power supply (+15 V, +12 V) can
also be used to power the motor encoder. Connect
after checking the motor encoder’s specifications.
Speed detection incremental signals: Speed detection incremental signals:
[PA], [*PA], [PB], [*PB] [PA], [PB]
Input signal
Chap. 6
Magnetic pole position detection absolute signals: Magnetic pole position detection absolute signals:
terminals
[F0], [*F0], [F1], [*F1], [F2], [*F2], [F3], [*F3] [F0], [F1], [F2], [F3]
Photocoupler insulation Photocoupler insulation
Broken wire Yes No
CONTROL OPTIONS
detection function
Supply the 5 V power supply from [PGP] and Built-in 5 V pull-up; sink current: approx. 11
[PGM]. Since a balanced circuit is used, it is mA/circuit
Connections
necessary to use twisted-pair shielded cable for
wiring.
Maximum input 100 kHz; duty: 50 ±10%
pulse frequency
Approx. 50 m 10 m or less
Allowable wiring Shorter wiring lengths are required when there is a Keep wiring runs as short as possible to avoid the
length high voltage drop. effects of noise. Be sure to connect a zero-phase
ferrite ring.
24V
Power supply Supplied from the inverter’s printed circuit board. Connect the power supply harness to CN24 or CN25 on
the inverter.
Table 6.3.2 Software Specifications
Item Specifications
Vector control for PMSM with speed sensor
Motor control method When function code P01 (M1 control method selection), A01 (M2 control method selection),
or A101 (M3 control method selection) = 3
Control
1:1500 (min. speed: base speed, 1.5 to 1,500 r/min. with 4P conversion, using 1024P/R)
Speed control range
Vector control with Speed
Analog setting: ±0.1% of max. speed
speed sensor control
accuracy Digital setting: ±0.005% of max. speed
When the PMPG option is installed and function code P01 (M1 control method selection), A01
PG interface functionality (M2 control method selection), or A101 (M3 control method selection) = 3, the built-in PG
interface is disabled, and the PMPG option takes priority.
Broken wire detection function Yes
Frequency division output No
Configured with function code o09 (ABS signal input definition).
Magnetic pole position detection
o09 = 1: 3-bit detection; [F0] [F1] [F2] : U-/V-/W-phase detection
function
o09 = 2: 4-bit detection; [F0] [F1] [F2] [F3]: Gray code detection
6-37
6.3.2.3 Using the card in combination with a Fuji motor
Table 6.3.3 GRK-type ES Motors
Motor type GRK2200M GRK2400M GRK2750M GRK2151A GRK2221A GRK2301A GRK2371A

FRENIC-VG model FRN0.75VG1S-2J FRN1.5VG1S-2J FRN2.2VG1S-2J FRN3.7VG1S-2J
Rated output (kW) 0.2 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.0 3.7
Rated torque (N･m) 0.955 1.91 3.58 7.16 10.5 14.3 17.7
Rated rotational speed 2000
(r/min.)
Max. rotational speed 2500
(r/min.)
Max. torque (N･m) 1.43 2.87 5.38 10.8 15.8 21.5 26.5
Rated current (A) 1.2 2.3 4.0 8.6 13.0 17.2 21.0
Max. current (A) 2.0 3.6 6.0 13.0 19.5 25.8 31.5
* Contact Fuji if you wish to use the card with a motor with a rating of less than 0.2 kW.
* Contact Fuji for more information about how to configure the FRENIC-VG with motor parameters.
* Choose the OPC-VG1-PMPGo since these motors use 1000P/R pulse encoders and open collector output.
* The encoder interface provides A-, B-, Z-, 1- (U-), 2- (V-), and 3- (W-)phase terminals, which should be connected for U, V, and
W 3-bit magnetic pole position detection. The Z-phase need not be connected.
Table 6.3.4 GRH-type ES Motors
Motor type GRH.30BG GRH.50BG GRH1.1BG GRH1.5BG GRH1.8BG GRH2.7BG

FRENIC-VG model FRN0.75VG1S-2J FRN1.5VG1S-2J FRN2.2VG1S-2J FRN3.7VG1S-2J FRN5.5VG1S-2J
Rated output (kW) 0.3 0.5 1.1 1.5 1.8 2.7
Rated torque (N･m) 0.955 1.59 3.50 4.77 6.88 10.3
Rated rotational speed 3000 2500
(r/min.)
Max. rotational speed 3000 2500
(r/min.)
Max. torque (N･m) 2.86 5.73 11.5 15.7 18.0 26.3
Rated current (A) 1.9 2.7 5.4 7.0 8.3 13
Max. current (A) 5.7 8.1 16.2 21.0 21.7 33.2
* Contact Fuji for more information about how to configure the FRENIC-VG with motor parameters.
* Choose the OPC-VG1-PMPG since these motors use 2000P/R pulse encoders and line driver output.
* The encoder interface provides A-, B-, Z-, 1- (U-), 2- (V-), and 3- (W-)phase terminals, which should be connected for U, V, and
W 3-bit magnetic pole position detection. The Z-phase need not be connected.
6-38
Chap. 6
(Unit: mm)
CONTROL OPTIONS
Figure 6.3.1 OPC-VG1-PMPG/PMPGo Outline Diagram
Accessories
12.0
10.0
22.0 18.0
10120
3M
12.7
39.0
22.0
23.8
Pin no. 1
9.1
7.5
1.27
Pin no. 11
11.43
17.6 33.3 12.7
15°
Model: 10120-3000PE Model: 10320-52A0-008

Specifications: 20-pin from Specifications: 20-pin from
Sumitomo 3M Limited Sumitomo 3M Limited
Figure 6.3.2 Plug Figure 6.3.3 Housing
*Plug and housing are included with the product.
6-39
Refer to “6.1.4 Installing Built-in Options (OPC-VG1-□□)” before performing wiring or connection
work.
electric shock.
• The smoothing capacitor remains charged even when the circuit breaker is shut off and will cause an electric
Table 6.3.5 Terminal Function Descriptions
Pin no. Name Function Pin no. Name Function

1 - 11 -
2 *PA A-phase reverse 12 *F1 Magnetic pole position *F1
3 PA A-phase 13 F1 Magnetic pole position F1
4 *PB B-phase reverse 14 *F2 Magnetic pole position *F2
5 PB B-phase 15 F2 Magnetic pole position F2
6 - 16 -
7 *F0 Magnetic pole position *F0 17 *F3 Magnetic pole position *F3
8 F0 Magnetic pole position F0 18 F3 Magnetic pole position F3
9 PGP 5 V PG power supply 19 PGM 0 V PG common
10 PGM 0 V PG common 20 PGP 5 V PG power supply
11 13 15 17 19
12 14 16 18 20
1 3 5 7 9
2 4 6 8 10
Viewed from the plug’s soldered terminal

Figure 6.3.4
6-40
6.3.4.1 Line driver type

Choose the OPC-VG1-PMPG when using a line driver output type motor encoder. The following figure
illustrates wiring connections used when detecting magnetic pole positions using 4-bit Gray codes and
3-phase U, V, and W signals (GNF2 series and GRH series motors).
Additionally, the OPC-VG1-PG (SD) option can also be used when detecting magnetic pole positions
with the Z-phase alone.
4-bit Gray code interface 3-phase (U, V, W) interface
Main power Main power

supply supply
3-phase
FRENIC-VG MOTOR 3-phase
FRENIC-VG MOTOR
power supply power supply
50/60Hz 50/60Hz
U U U U
L1/R L1/R
V V V V
L2/S
W W
SM L2/S
W W
SM
L3/T L3/T
Chap. 6
[PGP] [PGP]
[PGM] [PGM]
[PA] [PA]
CONTROL OPTIONS
[*PA] [*PA]
[PB] [PB]
OPC-VG1-PMPG
OPC-VG1-PMPG
[*PB] [*PB]
[F0] [F0]
U PG
[*F0]
PG [*F0]
*U
V
[F1] [F1]
*V
[*F1] [*F1]
W
[F2] [F2]
*W
[*F2] [*F2]
[F3] [F3] E
[F3] and [*F3]
[*F3] [*F3]
unconnected
E
E E E E
Figure 6.3.5
6-41
6.3.4.2 Open collector output type
Choose the OPC-VG1-PMPGo when using an open collector output type motor encoder. The following
figure illustrates wiring connections used when detecting magnetic pole positions using 3-phase U, V, and
W signals (GRK-type ES motors).
Since open collector connections offer low resistance to noise, use as short a wiring run as possible and
connect zero-phase ferrite rings on the primary and secondary sides of the inverter.
Figure 6.3.6
Precautions
(1) Read over the motor specifications carefully before connecting the power supply to the motor
encoder.
(2) The synchronous motor drive PG interface card provides a 5 V power supply. The inverter’s
encoder power supply can also be used to provide a 15 V or 12 V power source.
(3) The OPC-VG1-PGo option can also be used when detecting magnetic pole positions with the
Z-phase alone.
6-42
6.3.4.3 Connection Diagram for Fuji servos

Change the shielding connection used for PG wiring from the motor’s E terminal to the inverter’s PGM
terminal in order to secure a noise margin to protect against improper operation of encoder signals.
Additionally, connecting shielding to the motor’s E terminal is an effective way to reduce radiated noise.
Encoder output cables with

0.3 (m) connectors
FRENIC-VG MOTOR
GRH1.1BG-N000
CN2
3 1
[PA] A A
2 2
[*PA] *A *A
5 3
[PB] B B
4 4
[*PB] *B *B
5
Z Z
6
*Z *Z
8 7
OPC-VG1-PMPG
[F0] 1 1
7 8
[*F0]
Chap. 6
*1 *1
Encoder
13 9
[F1] 2 2
12 10
[*F1] *2 *2
15 11
[F2] 3 3
14 12
[*F2] *3 *3
18
CONTROL OPTIONS
[F3]
17
[*F3]
20 14
[PGP] +5V +5V
19 13
[PGM] 0V 0V
10 15
[PGM] Shielding Floating
shielding
E E
Figure 6.3.7
Precautions
• The encoder’s shielding (15-pin) is not connected to the motor’s earth (E) terminal.
6-43
6.3.5 Function codes
Risk of accident
6.3.5.1 Synchronous motor drive PG interface card function codes

The following function codes can be used when the PMPG option or PMPGo option is installed:
Table 6.3.6
Parameter name Setting

No. Setting description
Name Keypad display range
M1 ABS Signal input Set according to the motor encoder’s

o09
definition specifications. Defines the operating interface for
detecting magnetic pole positions.
M2 ABS Signal input
A59 0: 1-bit (terminal: F0)
definition
Z-phase interface (available soon)
A159 M3 ABS Signal input
1: 3-bit (terminals: F0, F1, F2)
definition ABS DEF 0 to 16 U-/V-/W-phase interface
2: 4-bit (terminals: F0, F1, F2, F3)
Gray code interface
3 to 5: Reserved
7 to 16: Reserved
M1 Magnetic pole
o10 position detection
offset Set when you wish to compensate for divergence
M2 Magnetic pole from the true value after aligning magnetic pole
0.0 to
A60 position detection SM-OFS positions.
359.9
offset 0.0 to 359.9 (0.0° to 359.9° moving
M3 Magnetic pole counterclockwise)
A160 position detection
offset
M1 Salient pole ratio
o11
(%Xq/%Xd)
Set when driving an IPM motor. This setting is
M2 Salient pole ratio 1.000 to
A61 Xq/Xd used to control the IPM motor’s reluctance torque.
(%Xq/%Xd) 3.000
Set to 1.000 when driving an SPM motor.
M3 Salient pole ratio
A161
(%Xq/%Xd)
6.3.5.2 Motor parameters

Motor parameters must be set to reflect the motors being used (M1 to M3). For more information, see the
description of P codes and A codes in Chapter 4.
6-44

6.3.6.1 Optional equipment check
You can check on the keypad whether the PMPG/PMPGo option is installed.
From the Operating Mode screen, go to the Program Menu screen
ＯＰＴＩＯＮ
and select “4. I/O check.” Use the and keys to switch Ａ：ＶＧ１－ＰＭＰＧ
screens and check the setting on screen 9 as shown in the figure to Ｂ：
the right. Ｃ：
The figure to the right illustrates the screen that would be
displayed when the PMPG/PMPGo card is installed.
Chap. 6
6.3.7 Protective functionality
When the inverter’s protective functionality operates, the inverter immediately displays an alarm, displays
CONTROL OPTIONS
the alarm name on the keypad’s LED, and allows the motor to free-run. When this functionality operates,
resume operation after clearing the cause of the malfunction. Avoid automatically resetting the alarm, for
example with an external sequence. Table 6.3.7 lists alarms related to the synchronous motor drive PG
interface card. For more information about other alarms, see “Protective Operation” in the inverter’s
operating manual.
Table 6.3.7 List of Alarm Protective Functions
Alarm display 30X Alarm cause

When the PMPG card is installed and the PG signal is interrupted, or when wiring
p9 Operation
has been corrected erroneously
6-45
6.4 T-Link Interface Card
Use this option to control FRENIC-VG using the Fuji programmable logic
controller MICREX-SX (T-Link module).
Main Usage
Using this option, you can:
• Input signals to start or stop operation, etc.: FWD, REV, X1 - X9, X11 - X14,
RST
• Set the speed commands: 16-bit binary data
• Monitor the operation status (bit data)
Running forward, running reverse, during DC braking or pre-exciting,
inverter shutdown, braking, DC link bus voltage established, torque
limiting, output current limiting, during acceleration, during deceleration,
alarm relay output, remote/local, write error from T-link, and data writing
in progress
• Monitor motor speed; 16-bit binary data
• Monitor the operation status (word data)
(Speed command, output frequency, torque command, output current, output voltage, cumulative run
time, etc.)
• Reference and change function codes
Function code which can be changed during operation using the touch panel ⇒ Can be changed (and
checked) during operation
Function code which cannot be changed during operation using the touch panel ⇒ Cannot be changed
(but can be checked) during operation
• Monitor that the upper-level device and inverter are interoperating normally using the toggle monitor
control.
Function codes which can be accessed using this option are limited. For details, refer to "4.2 Function
Code List" in Chapter 4.
6-46

6.4.2.1 Inverter type
Model elements: OPC-VG1-TL
Name of equipped inverter VG1 → FRENIC-VG
Option name: TL → T-Link interface card
Accessories
Spacer x 3
M3 screw x 3
Chap. 6
• The system will not operate correctly if the switches (RSW1 and RSW2) on this option are not set properly.
CONTROL OPTIONS
Read the instruction below and set them accordingly.
• Be sure to power off the inverter before setting the switches (RSW1 and RSW2) on this option.
Item Specifications
Name T-Link Interface Card
Transmission specifications T-Link slave, I/O transmission
Transmission speed 500 kbps
Selected by the function code o32 "Transmission format selection"
Total of 16 words (8 words + 8 words): 8 words for MICREX → FRENIC-VG and
Number of words occupied
8 words for FRENIC-VG → MICREX
in transmission
Total of 8 words (4 words + 4 words): 4 words for MICREX → FRENIC-VG and
4 words for FRENIC-VG → MICREX
Terminal TX+, TX-, SD
Address setting, 99W space
Rotary switches
4W+4W: Up to 12 cards can be connected.
RSW1 and RSW2
8W+8W: Up to 6 cards can be connected.
Rotary switches RSW1, 2

Set the station address using the rotary switches RSW1 and RSW2 on the option board.
RSW1: Upper (x10)
RSW2: Lower (x1)

RSW1 RSW2
Figure 6.4.1
* When two or more cards are used, do not allocate the same station address to multiple stations.
* The factory default is RSW1=0 and RSW2=0 (address = 00).
6-47
Item Specifications
Data update interval 4 ms
Run command Running forward/reverse alarm reset, X1-X14 commands
Speed
Oper 16-bit binary data, setting resolution 0.005% (against the highest speed)
command
ation
Operation state Operating, braking, torque limiting, alarm relay output signals, etc.
output Motor speed, torque current command, etc.
You can reference and change the 255 functions assigned to the link numbers in the
Function code
function code list.
Optional function code o30 - o32 (Displayed on the touch panel when this option is installed)
er4 : Network failure (T-Link error)
Protective Function * Light alarm: o30 and o31 can be used to control the er4 alarm.
* Heavy alarm: Momentary alarm
* Light alarm: E.g., Signal noise. If the noise is not frequent, the er4 alarm can be controlled by o30 and o31 to
continue operation.
* Heavy alarm: Fatal failure such as power down on MICREX, disconnection of communication, and hardware
failure.
6-48
6.4.3 External dimensions
3-Φ3.6
5 40 5
5
EP-4201-
5
CN1
4
MADE IN JAPAN
80
3
125
Chap. 6
2
RSW1 RSW2
DATE
RSW2
CONTROL OPTIONS
40
NO
T1 T2 SD
MOS
TB11
PTR1
OPC-VG1 TB11
-TL
50
3-M3
Tightening torque (Unit: mm)

0.49N•m
Figure 6.4.2
6.4.3.1 Terminal function

(1) Terminal arrangement
Terminal TB11 T1 T2 SD
(2) Terminal description

Table 6.4.3
Terminal symbol Name Description

T1
T2 T-Link cable For T-Link cable
SD connection terminal connection
(shielded)
* All terminals are open upon shipment.
6-49
Refer to "6.1.4 Installing Internal Options (OPC-VG1-□□)" before connecting the cables.
• Incorrect cabling may cause a disaster such as electrical shock or fire. Only a qualified person should perform
cabling. Before touching the power supply circuit (e.g., for cabling after power on), be sure to turn off (i.e.,
open) the circuit breaker to prevent electrical shock.
• Note that the smoothing capacitor is charged after turning off (i.e., opening) the circuit breaker and touching it
causes an electrical shock. Ensure that the charge lamp (CHARGE) of the inverter has gone off and that the DC
voltage of the inverter has lowered to a safety level using a tester.
• Do not use the product that is damaged or lacking parts to prevent an injury or damage.
• Incorrect handling in installation/removal jobs could result in a broken product.
The basic connection diagram is shown on the next page. When connecting the cables, observe the
following precautions.
[Notes on connection]
(1) Use either of the following cables as a T-Link communications cable.
• Furukawa Electric twisted pair cable
CPEV-SB 0.9 dia. x 1 pair
• Furukawa Electric twisted pair cable
KPEV-SB 0.5 mm2 x 1 pair
Refer to the document of MICREX for the cable specifications.
(2) Connect the terminal resistor 100 Ω supplied with the T-Link master to the both ends of the T-Link.
(3) Bes sure to connect the T-Link cable without going over the same line twice as shown in the basic
connection diagram (Figure 6.4.3).
Correct transmission cannot be performed if the cable branches.
(4) To prevent an error due to noises, keep the T-Link cable apart from the main circuit cables of the
inverter and other power cables as apart as possible (30 cm or more) and never put it in the same
duct.
6-50
Basic Connection Diagram
Thermal relay
Transformer
FU FU
FV FV FM
FW FW
Braking resistor (optional)

(G) 2
(CM)
1
Ｐ DB (THR)
Molded Case Circuit DC reactor
Breaker (MCCB) (optional)
or Electro-
Earth Leakage Main circuit
magnetic
Circuit Breaker contactor G ground Ｐ１Ｐ（＋）ＤＢＮ（－）
terminal G ground
(ELCB) (MC) terminal
Ｆ
U
L1/R U
Ｒ V M
L2/S C V
W ３～
L3/T W
Inverter unit
Chap. 6
R0 FRENIC-VG
T0
R1
T1
Control circuit NTC

TH1 thermistor
[TH1]
THC
CONTROL OPTIONS
[THC]
PGP
(PGP)
PGM
(PGM) P
PA G
(PA)
PB
(PB)
SS.E
E
30C
30B Batch alarm output

(30A,30B,30C)
30 30A
Terminal resistor MICREX
T-Link
master
T1
T2
SD
I/O
terminal
T1
T2
SD
Station
address 20
I/O
OPC-VG1-TL terminal
Terminal resistor T1
T2
T1 SD
T2
SD
Station
Station address 10
address 50
T-Link Cable
Figure 6.4.3
6-51
6.4.5 Function code
• Incorrect function code data may result in a dangerous situation. After setting and writing the data, check it
again.
By installing the T-Link interface card, the dedicated funciton codes of o29 to o32 will be available.
Table 6.4.4
Function code name Available

No. Description
Name Touch panel display scope
0 Invalid
Operation Operation 1
continuation 1 (ON: Continue operation, OFF: Immediately
o29 LK-D OPE
signal operation er4 for heavy Available
alarm) soon
upon alarm
Operation 2 (ON: Continue operation, OFF:
2
Follow o30 for heavy alarm)
Immediately force operation to stop upon
0 communication error (light alarm) occurrence
(er4 alarm: coast to stop).
After a communication error (light alarm)
occurs, continue operation for the timer time (run
command from the previous communication is
held in the communication error state). Force
operation to stop after the timer time (er4
1 alarm: coast to stop).
If the communication recovers during the timer
time, the command received in communication is
run. But, operation is forced to stop it the error
persists after the timer time.
Error processing After a communication error (light alarm)
o30 after detection of MODE ON ER occurs, continue operation for the timer time (run
transmission failure command from the previous communication is
held in the communication error state). Force
2 operation to stop if the communication error
persists after the timer time.
If the communication recovers during the timer
time, the command received in communication is
run.
No alarm (er4 ) even when a communication
error (light alarm) occurs.
The run command from the previous
3 communication is held in the communication
error state.
If the communication recovers, the command
received in communication is run.
Operation time Operation time timer value [s] for a
0.01 to
o31 after detection of TIMER TL communication error (light alarm) is effective
20.00s
transmission failure when o30=1 or 2.
0: Format 1
(Standard format 4 W + 4 W)
0, 1
Transmission format 4W/8W 1: Format 2
o32 (FRENIC-VG format 8 W + 8 W)
selection SEL
For CC-Link option.
2 to 4
Not used for T-Link option.
6-52
Select the alarm operation upon occurrence of an

inter-inverter link communication error (er4 )
and toggle error (arf ).
Light alarm target 0000 to
H107 L-ALM 2 er4 and arf represent the number of hundreds
definition 2 1111
and the number of units, respectively.
0 in the corresponding decimal place: Alarm
occurrence, 1: Light alarm (l-al )
Select the command when each of the X11 to
E10 X14 bits is 1.
Select X11 - X14 X11to X14
| *1 To perform toggle monitoring with the X
function. FUNC
E13 terminal bits, set TGL1 and TGL2 for two of the
terminals.
*1 For the details, refer to Chapter 4, Section 4.3 "Details of Function Codes."
Chap. 6
CONTROL OPTIONS
6-53
6.4.6 Protective operation
6.4.6.1 Light and heavy alarms
Failures of the he T-Link interface card are classified into light and heavy alarms depending on the
severity level.
Upon occurrence of this failure, the inverter outputs er4 "network error" and the motor coasts to stop.
Table 6.4.5
Item Light alarm Heavy alarm

Disconnection of T-Link option hardware
communication line failure (damage, failure)
Cause Noise on communication line
MICREX (PLC) Duplicated address (setting
power off error of RSW1 and RSW 2)
Resolve the cause (or wait for communication recovery) and Remove the hardware failure
Reset method
give a reset command (touch panel, RST, or remote reset). and reset the power supply.
Alarms can be controlled with the
o29=0 Momentary er4 alarm
function codes o30 and o31.
Failure LK-D: ON: Continue operation for light and heavy alarms.
state o29=1 LK-D: OFF: Follow the function codes
Available soon
LK-D: OFF : Momentary er4 alarm
control o30 and o31.
LK-D: ON: Continue operation for light and heavy alarms.
o29=2
LK-D: OFF: Follow the function codes o30 and o31 for light and heavy alarms.
Note: "Give a reset command" means supplying a reset input to the inverter in one of the following methods.
* Touch panel key input

* Assign the failure reset RST with the X function selection and digitally input the command.
* Input the reset command via the communication line.
For a heavy alarm, the CPU may also require reset depending on the CPU state of MICREX.
You can check the communication error code for light and heavy alarms on the communication state screen of
the maintenance information on the touch panel. To access this screen, press the key to return to the menu
screen, and move the arrow on the left edge of the screen to "5. Maintenance" using the / key, then press
the key. Press the key three times to show the screen below.
ＮＲＫ＝×××××
ＮＲＲ＝××××× ×× -: No communication error
ＮＲＯ＝××××× ×× 1: Light alarm *1
ＮＲＬ＝××××× ×× 2: Heavy alarm
Figure 6.4.4
*1 When o30=0, a heavy alarm may be displayed as a light alarm depending on the timing.
This does not occur when o30=1 or 2, or o31=0.10 or higher.
6-54
6.4.6.2 Protective operation function code

The following explains how to control the er4 alarm when a light alarm occurs while an operation
command is given from MICREX via the T-Link.
[Operation Description]
The following describes an example of operation when operation and speed commands are given from
MICREX and a communication error occurs during operation.
*1 During this period of time, if communication recovers and new settings are not sent, commands (for
operation or speed, or both) received upon error occurrence are held.
(1) When function code o30 = 0
Chap. 6
CONTROL OPTIONS
Figure 6.4.5
(2) When the function code o30 = 1 and o31 = 5.0 (when a communication error occurs, the motor
coasts to stop in five seconds.)
Figure 6.4.6
6-55
(3) When the function code o30 = 2 and o31 = 5.0
(the communication error persists in five seconds after its occurrence and the er4 alarm occurs)
Figure 6.4.7
(4) When the function code o30 = 2 and o31 = 5.0 (a communication error occurs and the
communication recovers in five seconds)
Figure 6.4.8
Figure 6.4.9
6-56
6.4.7 Data allocation addresses

6.4.7.1 Transmission format
One the following two transmission formats can be selected by the function code o32 "Transmission
format selection".
(1) o32=0 (format 1, standard format: number of words occupied 4W+4W)
(2) o32=1 (format 2, FRENIC-VG format: number of words occupied 8W+8W)
6.4.7.2 Occupied area

As shown in the figure below, within the input/output relay area, contiguous eight or sixteen words are
occupied, and the two digits of the address (WB00** in the figure) are set by the rotary switches RSW1
and RSW2 on the option card.
Chap. 6
Note: The bit address allocation is different between the Fuji programmable logic controllers MICREX-F
and MICREX-SX as shown below.
MICREX-F: LSB bit is shown as F and MSB bit is shown as 0.
CONTROL OPTIONS
MICREX-SX: LSB bit is shown as 0 and MSB bit is shown as F.
Address (MSB) (LSB)

0 1･･････E F
WB0000
～～
～～
WB00**
(MICREX-F ⇐ inverter) data
I/O relay area

(Four or eight words)
Eight words One word
or
Sixteen words (MICREX-F ⇒ inverter) data
(Four or eight words)
～～
WB0099 ～～
Figure 6.4.10 MICREX-F Area
6.4.7.3 Allocated Address

(1) Format 1 (Standard format 4 W + 4 W)
(MSB) (LSB)
0 1･･･ 7 8 ･･･E F
WB00** + 0 Operation state (refer to * 6.4.8.1 (1))
WB00** + 1 Motor speed (M06) INV
⇓
WB00** + 2 Polling function code address Empty (Fixed to 0)
MICREX
WB00** + 3 Polling function code data
WB00** + 4 Operation command/Di/RESET input (S06)
WB00** + 5 Speed command (S01) MICREX
Selecting function code address Polling function code address ⇓
WB00** + 6 INV
Selecting function code data
WB00** + 7
Top Offset
Address
Figure 6.4.11
6-57
(2) Format 2 (FRENIC-VG format 8W+8W)
(MSB) (LSB)
0 1･･･ 7 8 ･･･E F
WB00** + 0 Polling function code (1) Polling function code (2)
WB00** + 2 Polling function code (1) data
WB00** + 3 Polling function code (2) data INV
⇓
WB00** + 4 Polling function code (3) data MICREX
WB00** + 5 Polling function code (4) data
WB00** + 6 Motor speed (M06)
WB00** + 7 Operation state (refer to * 6.4.8.1 (1))
WB00** + 8 Selecting function code (1) Selecting function code (2)
WB00** + 9 Selecting function code (3) Selecting function code (4)
WB00** + 10 Selecting function code (1) data
WB00** + 11 Selecting function code (2) data MICREX
⇓
WB00** + 12 Selecting function code (3) data INV
WB00** + 13 Selecting function code (4) data

Top Offset (MSB) (LSB)
Address 0 1･･･ 7 8 ･･･E F
Figure 6.4.12
6-58
6.4.8 Transmission format

6.4.8.1 Data format (FRENIC-VG ⇒ MICREX)
(1) Operate state (1 for all ON)
(MSB) (LSB)
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
BUSY
FWD
ERR
DEC
ACC
NUV
ALM
BRK
REV
EXT
INT
RL
TL
IL
-
-
FWD : Running forward TL : Torque limiting RL : Communication selection
REV : Running reverse (1: H30=2 or 3)
EXT : DC braking or pre-exciting IL : Current limiting
INT : Inverter shutdown ACC : Accelerating
BRK : Braking DEC : Decelerating ERR : Function code access error
Chap. 6
NUV : DC link bus voltage ALM : Batch failure BUSY : Writing function code
• ERR is cleared to "0" when selecting (writing) and polling (reading) of the function code has been
done correctly. If any of selecting or polling is not performed correctly, ERR is set to "1". The error
CONTROL OPTIONS
cause in this case can be checked with the function code M26 (see the table below). When ERR is set
to "1", resolve the cause and perform selecting or polling again. If the operation is successful, both of
ERR and M26 are cleared to "0".
M26 value Write/read error

78 Access to unused function code
79 Writing to a read-only function code
Writing to a function code (during operation) which cannot be
changed during operation
Writing to a function code which cannot be changed with
FWD/REV ON.
80 Writing out-of-range data
BUSY is set to "1" while writing (processing) data. When writing consecutive data, wait for BUSY to
be cleared to "0" and write the next data. A writing request made while this bit is set to "1" is ignored.
(2) Motor speed
(MSB) (LSB)
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
Motor speed (decimal) x 20000 / maximum speed => 16-bit data
The maximum speed is set with the function code. Obtain a r/min value by calculating backward
using the above formula. If data is negative (complement of 2), it is a reverse speed command.
6-59
(3) Polling function code address and data
Format 1
Polling function code address Empty (Fixed to 0)

Polling function code data
"Polling function code address" (eight bits) stores the link number corresponding to the function
code requested for polling from MICREX. Its data is stored in "Polling function code data". Refer to
"Function Code List" for the link numbers.
Format 2
Polling function code (1) Polling function code (2)

Polling function code (1) data
⇓
"Polling function code (1) to (4)" (eight bits each) store the link number corresponding to the
function code requested for polling from MICREX. Their data are stored in "Polling function code
(1) to (4) data".
6.4.8.2 Data format (MICREX ⇒ FRENIC-VG)
(1) Operation command/Di/RESET input (1 for all ON)
(MSB) (LSB)
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
FWD
REV
RST
X14
X13
X12
X11
X9
X8
X7
X6
X5
X4
X3
X2
X1
FWD and REV are available when the link command is permitted as instructed in "6.3.9.1 Link
Command Permission Selection". X1 to X14 and RST are always available.
(2) Speed command
(MSB) (LSB)
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
Speed command (decimal) x 20000 / maximum speed => 16-bit data
The above is the same as the motor speed. The maximum speed is set with the function code.
Provide the speed value as 16-bit data of the value calculated above. (Handle negative data as a
complement of 2.)
6-60
(3) Polling and selecting function code address and selecting function code data
Format 1
(MSB) (LSB)
0 1 7 8 E F
Selecting function code address Polling function code address
Selecting function code data
Write the function code data using the "selecting function code address" (8 bits) and "selecting
function code data" (16 bits) above. Also, specify the link number corresponding to the function
code number requested for polling using the "polling function code address" (8 bits).
Format 2
(MSB) (LSB)
0 1 7 8 E F
Chap. 6
Selecting function code (1) Selecting function code (2)
Selecting function code (1) data
CONTROL OPTIONS
⇓
"Selecting function code (1) to (4)" (eight bits each) store the link number corresponding to the
function code selected by MICREX. Write the data to "Selecting function code (1) to (4) data".
Note: Upon selecting, be sure to write the link number and data together.
Use the "polling function code (1) to (4)" (8 bits) to specify the link number corresponding to the
function code number requested for polling.
Selecting is available when editing links is permitted in "6.4.9.2 Link Edit Permission Selection".
Pay attention to writing limitation including changing not available during operation.
6-61
6.4.9 Link function
Use the function code H30 and X function "24: Link Operation Selection [LE]" to switch the command
data (S area) target (REM/LOC/COM). Also refer to the control block diagram in Chapter 4.
Use the function code H29 and X function "23: Link Edit Permission Command [WE-LK]" to control
writing of the function codes (F, E, C, P, H, A, o, U) from the link. Also refer to the control block
diagram in Chapter 4.

Link Switch
By assigning "24: Link Operation Selection [LE]" to the X function input terminal, the mode is switched
as shown below.
Table 6.4.6
Link operation selection signal Corresponding

Status
assignment input terminal
Not assigned -
Link command permission mode
ON
Assigned
OFF Link command prohibition mode
In the link command prohibition mode, command data and operation data can be written from a link but
the data will not be reflected. You can set data in advance in the link command prohibition mode, and
then switch to the link command permission mode to reflect the data.
Link Command
In the link command permission mode, use the function code H30 (link function) to switch the command
data and operation command between link (COM) and remote/local. REM (remote: terminal table) and
LOC (local: touch panel) are shown here.
Table 6.4.7
Link command permission mode

Link command
H30 value Command data Operation command prohibition mode
(S01 to S05, S08 to S12) (FWD and REV)
0 Link prohibited (REM/LOC) Link prohibited (REM/LOC)
1 Link permitted (COM) Link prohibited (REM/LOC) Link prohibited
2 Link prohibited (REM/LOC) Link permitted (COM) (REM/LOC)
3 Link permitted (COM) Link permitted (COM)
This functionality allows for flexible system construction where you can give operation commands from
terminal table and speed command via communication.
6-62
6.4.9.2 Link edit permission selection
Link Edit Switch

By assigning "23: Link Edit Permission Command [WE-LK]" to the X function input terminal, you can
protect the function code (F, E, C, P, H, A, o, U) from being written as shown below.
Table 6.4.8
Link edit permission command Corresponding

Status
assignment input terminal
Not assigned - Link edit permission mode
ON (F to U can be written)
Assigned Link edit prohibition mode
OFF
(F to U cannot be written)
Link Edit
Chap. 6
With the function code H29, you can control writing to the function code (F, E, C, P, H, A, o, U) in the
link edit permission mode.
CONTROL OPTIONS
Table 6.4.9
H29 data Link edit permission mode Link edit prohibition mode
0 Code (F, E, C, P, H, A, o, U) can be written
Code (F, E, C, P, H, A, o, U) cannot be written
1 Code (F, E, C, P, H, A, o, U) cannot be written
6.4.9.3 Data transmission example

The following explains a data transmission example using the transmission format.
(1) Speed setting

From MICREX, give commands to run forward (FWD) at 785 r/min.
(Condition: Function code H30 "Link Operation"=3, maximum speed 1500 r/min, T-Link station
address: 10, 8+8 words)
Give S06 the forward running command (FWD: ON) and S01 the speed command.
WB18 0 6 0 1 Function code S06, S01 selecting (link No. 06h, 01h)
19 0 0 0 0 Selecting dummy data
20 0 0 0 1 Function code S06 FWD: ON
21 2 8 E 3 Function code 01 Speed setting 785/1500×20000＝10467＝28E3 (h)
↓ After acceleration completes
WB16 2 8 E 3 Monitor the motor speed.
6-63
(2) Torque command monitor
Monitor the torque command value from MICREX.
(Condition: T-Link station address: 24, 8+8 words)
WB38 1 0 0 0 Torque command value monitor (link No. 10h)

39 0 0 0 0
↓ After read completes
When the link number requesting polling is returned to this area, reading
WB24 1 0 0 0
is completed.
25 0 0 0 0 Torque command value monitor data
26 1 3 8 8 1388 (h) × 100 (%) / 10000＝50 (%)
27 0 0 0 0
28 0 0 0 0 ↓
29 0 0 0 0 From the above, the torque command value is "50% of drive".
(3) Function code data setting

Set the function code S08 "Acceleration time" to 30.5 seconds from MICREX.
(Condition: T-Link station address: 58, 4+4 words)
WB62 0 0 0 0 Function code S08 selecting (Link No. 08h)
63 0 0 0 0 131 (h) ＝305,305×0.1s＝30.5s
64 0 8 0 8
65 0 1 3 1 Poll the function code S08 to confirm setting completion.
↓After writing
completes
WB58 * * * * Poll the function code S08.
59 * * * * 131 (h) ＝305,305×0.1s＝30.5s
60 0 8 0 0 (Data is correctly set.)
61 0 1 3 1
6-64
(4) Toggle monitor

Monitor data toggling between MICREX and the inverter. This example set the X12 terminal to
TGL1 and X13 terminal to TGL2.(*1)
Set E11=72 (TGL1), E12=73 (TGL2), H30=3, H144=0.10 (100 ms) in advance.
This sets
transmission toggle (MICREX→VG1): %QW254.0.10.13 bit 11= TGL1 and bit 12= TGL2.
The inverter monitors the toggle pattern sent from MICREX while the operation command is ON,
and generates the toggle error arf if the toggle signal cannot be received within the time specified
with H144.
*1 For the details of the toggle, refer to E01 to E13 toggle signal explanation in Chapter 4, Section 4.3
"Details of Function Codes."
*2 By setting the inverter function code H107, the inverter can continue operation with l-al display. Refer
Chap. 6
to the description of H107 in Chapter 4, Section 4.3 "Details of Function Codes."
%QW254.0.10.13 * 0 0 0 Send 0→1→2→3→0 to *・・・(toggle pattern)
CONTROL OPTIONS
↓ After sending toggle
%QW254.0.10.13 * 0 0 1 Operation command (FWD)=ON
Note: If the network error er4 (light and heavy alarm 1) occurs while sending the toggle pattern,
the toggle error arf may occur after the communication recovers. To avoid the toggle error
arf, stop sending the toggle pattern while the network error er4 is occurring.
6-65
6.5 SX Bus Interface Card
Use this option to control FRENIC-VG using the Fuji programmable
logic controller MICREX-SX via the SX bus.
Main Usage
Using this option, you can:
Input signals to start or stop operation, etc.: FWD, REV, X1 - X9,
X11 - X14, RST
Set the speed commands: 16-bit binary data
Monitor the operation status (bit data)
Running forward, running reverse, during DC braking or
pre-exciting, inverter shutdown, braking, DC link bus voltage
established, torque limiting, output current limiting, during
acceleration, during deceleration, alarm relay output, remote/local,
write error from T-link, and data writing in progress
Monitor motor speed; 16-bit binary data
Monitor the operation status (word data)
time, etc.)
Reference and change function codes
Monitor that the upper-level device and inverter are interoperating normally using the toggle monitor
control.
Function codes which can be accessed using this option are limited. For details, refer to "4.2 Function
Code List" in Chapter 4.

6.5.2.1 Inverter type
Model elements: OPC-VG1-SX
Option name: SX→SX bus interface card
Accessories
Spacer x4
M3 screw x2
6-66
x The system will not operate correctly if the switches (RSW1 and RSW2) on this option are not set properly.
Read the instruction below and set them accordingly.
x Be sure to power off the inverter before setting the switches (RSW1 and RSW2) on this option.
Item Specifications
Name SX Bus Interface Option
Transmission specifications SX-bus slave, I/O transmission
Transmission speed 25 Mbps
Selected by the function code U11 "Transmission format selection"
U11=0: Standard format (16 words 8W+8W)
Chap. 6
Number of words occupied
U11=1: UPAC compatible format (51 words 29W+22W)
in transmission
U11=2: Monitoring format (16 words 4W+12W)
U11=3: Standard format 2 (set by 485No) (16 words 8W+8W)
CONTROL OPTIONS
Terminal/bus cable IN, OUT/SX bus dedicated cable *NP1C-P3(0.3 m) to NP1C-25(25 m)
Rotary switches RSW1, 2 Station address setting. You can assign any station address from 1 to 238.
Status display LED RUN, Displays the status of the self station (operation and error) with LEDs.
ERR
(1) Rotary switches RSW1 and RSW2

Set the station address using the rotary switches RSW1 and RSW2 on the option board. In the
hexadecimal display, "RSW1" represents the upper 4 bits and "RSW2" represents the lower 4 bits. For the
SX bus station address, read it in decimal values.
Example) Station address 194 is C2(h) and set RSW1=C and RSW2=2.
* Set the same SX bus station address set in the MICREX-SX

2 2
system definition. Since the address assigned by MICREX-SX
BCD
BCD
3 456
3 456
is used as the actual SX bus station address, it may be

different from the setting value of this rotary switch.
(You can check the address with the function code U13 "SX
Figure 6.5.1 bus station address monitor".)
* When two or more cards are used, do not allocate the same SX
bus station address to multiple stations.
* The factory default is RSW1=0 and RSW2=0 (address = 00).
* The RSW1 and RSW2 settings are recognized upon "power

on" and "reset" of the SX bus (MICREX-SX).
* When RSW1=0 and RSW2=0 (station address＝00) are set,

communication is only possible when there is no degenerate
system start-up. (If there is degenerate system start-up,
MICREX-SX will encounter a heavy alarm and the address
specified in the system definition of MICREX-SX is used.)
* Even while the SX bus communication is established, and if a

slave with an address duplicated with another slave on the SX
bus is connected, the slave which has already established
communication does not encounter an error and continues
operation.
6-67
2) Status display LED RUN, ERR
The RUN and ERR LEDs on the option board display the status of the self station (operation and error).
Since the option itself determines the status as a slave, the status may be different from RUN and ALM
shown on the CPU of MICREX-SX.
Table 6.5.2 LED Display

RUN ERR LED States RUN ERR
ON Link established Error (light or heavy alarm) is
(Light alarm if ERR is on) occurring
Flashing Initial wait status −
Inverter power OFF
OFF SX bus power OFF Link established
Figure 6.5.2 self station being reset SX bus power OFF
(Heavy alarm if ERR is ON) Inverter being reset
Item Specifications
Data update interval Note
Min. 400 μs
Run command Running forward/reverse alarm reset, X1-X14 commands
Speed
Oper 16-bit binary data
command
ation
Operation state Bit data for operating, braking, torque limiting, alarm relay output signals, etc.
output Word data for motor speed, torque current command, etc.
You can reference and change the 255 functions assigned to the link numbers in the
function code list.
Function code
You can reference and change the function code with 485No. if the standard format 2
transmission format is selected.
Optional function code o30, o31, U01 - 11, U13, U60 - 64
er4 : Network failure (SX bus error)
Light alarm*1: o30 and o31 can be used to control the er4 alarm.
Heavy alarm *2: Momentary alarm
Protective Function arf : Toggle error
Monitors the 2-bit signals for the toggle signal 1 [TGL1] and toggle signal 2 [TGL2]
sent from PLC, and generates this error if these the specified change pattern cannot be
received within the time specified by H144. *3
*1 Light alarm: E.g., Signal noise. If the noise is not frequent, the er4 alarm can be controlled by o30 and o31 to
continue operation.
*2 Heavy alarm: Fatal failure such as hardware failure.
*3 For the details of the toggle signals and toggle error, refer to TGL1 and TGL2 in E01 to E13 toggle signal
explanation in "4.3 Function Code Details".
Note: The data update frequency depends on the carrier frequency setting, MICREX-SX SX bus tact frequency, and
application program task frequency.
6-68
6.5.3 External Dimensions
Chap. 6
CONTROL OPTIONS
(Unit: mm)
Figure 6.5.3 Option Print Board External Dimensions
Connectors CN2, CN3
2 2
A B DE
A B DE
3 5
3 5
6
* FG terminal connection is not necessary. Do not connect it.

Refer to "6.1.4 Installing internal options (OPC-VG1- )"
before connecting the cables.
* This option print board does not include the SX bus cable
(dedicated) and terminating connector. Prepare a cable for the
bus connection distance. If the option is used at both ends of
the SX bus, connect the terminating connector to one of the
connector end. The terminating connector is supplied with the
CPU module of MICREX-SX.
Figure 6.5.4
6-69
Refer to "6.1.4 Installing internal options (OPC-VG1- )" before connecting the cables.
Incorrect cabling may cause a disaster such as electrical shock or fire. Only a qualified person should perform
Note that the smoothing capacitor is charged after turning off (i.e., opening) the circuit breaker and touching it
Since the SX bus is powered from the PLC power supply module, ensure that the MICREX-SX and inverter
power supplies are off when installing or removing this option.
Do not use the product that is damaged or lacking parts to prevent an injury or damage.
Incorrect handling in installation/removal jobs could result in a broken product.
The basic connection diagram is shown on the next page. When connecting the cables, observe the
[Notes on connection]
(1) Be sure to use SX-bus dedicated cables.
Model: NP1C-P3 (0.3 m) to NP1C-25 (25 m)
Refer to the manual of MICREX-SX (hardware) for the cable specifications.
(2) Before proceeding with connection, make sure that both the MICREX-SX and the inverter are
powered OFF.
(3) Put the terminating connectors (that come with the CPU module of the MICREX-SX) in both ends
of the SX bus.
(4) To prevent an error due to noises, keep the SX bus cable apart from the main circuit cables of the
inverter and other power cables as apart as possible (30 cm or more) and never put it in the same
duct.
(5) One end of the SX-bus cable should be connected with the OUT connector on the base board, and
the other end, with the IN connector. The OUT-OUT or IN-IN connection does not enable
communication and the system does not operate. Route SX-bus cables so that the bending radius is
at least 50 mm.
6-70
Chap. 6
CONTROL OPTIONS
Figure 6.5.5
6-71
Basic Connection Diagram
Figure 6.5.6
6-72
6.5.5 Function code
Incorrect function code data may result in a dangerous situation. After setting and writing the data, check it
again.
In addition to the standard function code, you can set the optional dedicated function codes o30, o31,
U01- 11, U13, U60 - 64.
Table 6.5.4
Function code name Setting

No. Description
H30 LINK FUNC 0 to 3 3: Set the operation command and command data valid via
Link function
SX.
Chap. 6
Immediately force operation to stop upon communication
0 error (light alarm) occurrence
(er4 alarm: coast to stop).
After a communication error (light alarm) occurs, continue
CONTROL OPTIONS
operation for the timer time (run command from the previous
communication is held in the communication error state).
Force operation to stop after the timer time (er4 alarm:
1
coast to stop).
If the communication recovers during the timer time, the
command received in communication is run. But, operation is
Error processing forced to stop it the error persists after the timer time.
o30 *1 after detection of MODE ON ER After a communication error (light alarm) occurs, continue
transmission failure operation for the timer time (run command from the previous
communication is held in the communication error state).
2
Force operation to stop if the communication error persists
after the timer time. If the communication recovers during the
timer time, the command received in communication is run.
No alarm (er4 ) even when a communication error (light
alarm) occurs.
The run command from the previous communication is held
3
in the communication error state.
If the communication recovers, the command received in
communication is run.
Operation time Operation time timer value [s] for a communication error
0.01 -
o31 *1 after detection of TIMER TL (light alarm) is effective when
20.00s
transmission failure o30=1 or 2.
Universal -32768 You can read and write data as universal data via
U01 - 10 USER P01 - 10
data to 32767 communication without affecting the inverter.
Standard format selection
0
Occupied words: 16 words (8W+8W)
UPAC compatible format selection
1
SX transmission
U11 USER P11 Monitoring format selection
format selection 2
Standard format 2 (485No) selection
3
4-15 Reserved
You can check the SX bus station address of the self station
SX bus station
U13 USER P13 1 to 238 assigned by MICREX-SX in the system configuration
address monitor
definition with this function code. Read-only
U-Ai/ Defines U61 - U63 as the user function codes or universal Ai

0
U60 pulse data USER P60 monitor.
monitor selection 1 Defines U61 to U63 as pulse data monitor.
6-73
Function code name Setting
No. Description
When U-Ai1 is selected:

U-Ai1/ Universal Ai1(±16384/±10V) can be monitored.
Pulse train position -32768 to
U61 USER P61 When pulse data is selected:
command 32767
monitor Pulse train position command (PG(PR) input) data can be
monitored.
-32768 to
U62 Position detection USER P62 When pulse data is selected:
32767
monitor Position detection (internal or PG(PD) input) data can be
monitored.
Position detection -32768 to
U63 USER P63 When pulse data is selected:
(Z-phase input) 32767
monitor Position detection (PG(PD) Z-phase input) data can be
monitored.
-32768 to
U64 USER function USER P64 If U-Ai is not defined, it acts as the user function code to read
32767
code and write data as universal data without affecting the inverter
operation.
Select the alarm operation upon occurrence of a SX bus error
(er4 ) and toggle error (arf ).
Light alarm target 0000 to er4 and arf represent the number of hundreds and the
H107 L-ALM 2
definition 2 1111 number of units, respectively.
0 in the corresponding decimal place: Alarm occurrence, 1:
Light alarm (l-al )
E10 Select the command when each of the X11 to X14 bits is 1.
Select X11 - X14 X11 ~ X14
| *2 To perform toggle monitoring with the X terminal bits, set
function. FUNC
E13 TGL1 and TGL2 for two of the terminals.
Only available when the standard format 2 is used. Sets the
o160 Function code 0000h -
function code continuously monitored by the function code
*3 monitor (1) setting FFFFh
monitor (1) with 485No.
Only available when the standard format 2 is used. Sets the
o161 Function code 0000h -
function code continuously monitored by the function code
*3 monitor (2) setting FFFFh
monitor (2) with 485No.
*1 For the details of o30 and o31, refer to "6.5.6.2 Protective operation function code".
*2 For the details, refer to "4.3 Function Code Details".
*3 For the details of o160 and o161, refer to "6.5.8.1 (4) 2 Function code monitor".
*4 For the details of user function code, refer to "6.5.5.1 Function code".
For other function codes, refer to Chapter 4.
6-74
6.5.5.1 Function code
U01 - U10 USER P01 - 10
You can read and write data as universal data via communication without affecting the inverter.
You can read values set with the keypad of the inverter (local) from MICREX-SX (remote), or check
values set with the MICREX-SX with the keypad. The set value does not affect the inverter operation at
all.
U11 SX transmission format
Select the transmission format used to communicate on the SX bus. Be sure to select the same format as
specified in the CPU system configuration definition.
Chap. 6
Setting range 0: Standard format (specified with the link No.) (8W+8W)
1: UPAC compatible format (29W+22W)
2: Monitoring format (4W+12W)
CONTROL OPTIONS
3: Standard format 2 (specified with 485No) (8W+8W)
4 - 15: Reserved
Note: When the T-Link interface option is also installed, the transmission format is fixed to the
monitoring format and the U11 value is automatically changed to "2". However, be sure to set
U11=2 for safety.
U13 SX bus station address monitor
You can check the SX bus station address of the self station assigned by MICREX-SX in the system
configuration definition with this function code. (read-only). Be sure that the address is same as the one
set with the rotary switches RSW1 and RSW2.
Note: This function code displays the station address in decimal. When configuring the station address
with the station address switches, assign it in hexadecimal.
6-75
U60 U-Ai/pulse data monitor selection
Select whether the function codes U61 - U63 can monitor the U-Ai (universal Ai) or pulse data. U64 is
excluded from pulse data monitoring.
The default value is U60=0 and the U-Ai function is not selected, and U61 to U64 all act as the user
function codes. When U61 to U64 are set for monitoring (rather than as the user function codes), do not
write data to them.
1 When U60=0
U-Ai function is U61 U62 U63 U64

selected
Not selected User function code User function code User function code User function code
Selected U-Ai1 monitor U-Ai2 monitor U-Ai3 monitor U-Ai4 monitor
2 When U60=1
U-Ai function is
U61 U62 U63 U64
selected
Not selected Pulse train position Position detection Position detection User function code
command (PG(PR) (internal or PG(PD) (PG(PD) Z-phase
Selected input) monitor input) monitor input) monitor U-Ai4 monitor
When the U-Ai function is selected, the universal Ai (U-AI) is selected with Ai function selection
(E49-E52).
U-Ai3 and U-Ai4 are only valid when OPC-VG1-AIO or OPC-VG1-AI is installed.
6-76
U61 - U63 U-Ai/pulse data monitor
U64 USER function code/U-Ai4
Data selected by the setting of the function code U60 and Ai function selection is allocated.
Specifications of each data are explained below.
1 USER function code

Similar to U01 to U10, you can read and write data as universal data via communication without
affecting the inverter.
2 U-Ai (universal Ai)

You can read the analog quantity of a signal input to the Ai terminal of the inverter via the SX bus.
When using this function, set the corresponding Ai terminal function to U-AI using the function codes
E49-E52. This input data is simply provided to check existence of a signal via the SX bus, and does
Chap. 6
not affect the inverter operation at all.
Note: If you change the Ai terminal function to other than U-AI while U-Ai is used, U61 to U64 hold
the values before change.
CONTROL OPTIONS
3 Pulse data
You can monitor pulse data when controlling synchronization and position with the pulse train.
Block Diagram Related to Pulse Data

Internal speed Command pulse selection
command
Ⅶ o12
Transmission =1 Pulse train position

circuit command PG(PR) input
U61
=0 Reception
OPC-VG1-PG(PR) circuit
Feedback pulse selection Pulse train input

o13
o05 form selection
OPC-VG1-PMPG
PMPG
prioritized =0 Reception
Standard integrated circuit
=1
OPC-VG1-PG(PD) Position detection
internal or PG(PD) input U62
=2
17-bit serial OPC-VG1-SPGT Position detection
U63
PG(PD) Z-phase input
Note: Detection of the Z-phase standard position is enabled only when the OPC-VG1-PG(PD)
option is installed. If this PG is selected while this option is not installed or the o05
feedback pulse is selected, the monitor data of U62 and U63 cannot be referenced.
Figure 6.5.7
6-77
*How to obtain pulse data
The PG pulse data is incremented in B-phase forward (running forward) and decremented in A-phase
forward (running backward). Therefore, obtain the difference of data sampled this time and last time for
the t (ms) task, and add it for every t (ms) to calculate the pulse count value. As the pulse count value is
obtained by multiplying the encoder value by four, the formula is "4×encoder pulse count／revolution".
When PG encoder runs forward When PG encoder runs reverse
t: period t: period
(SX task period) (SX task period)
32767
32767
0
T 0 T
-32768 -32768
Figure 6.5.8
*How to detect Z phase

The PG pulse can be obtained as mentioned above. However, with differences of the U62 "Position
detection (internal or PG(PD) input monitor" and U63 "Position detection (Z-phase input) (PG(PD)
monitor" within a task as PG_CNT and PG_CNT_Z respectively, the added data within the task period
(tms) is cleared to 0 by hardware Z-phase detection as shown in the figure below. By comparing each
memory within the next task, Z phase is detected if they do not match.
When PG_CNT≠PG_CNT_Z, Z
phase is recognized by software.
Task
t: period (ms)
PG_CNT When PG_CNT≠PG_CNT_Z,
PG_CNT_Z Z phase is detected
0
Encoder Z phase
Figure 6.5.9
Note: Detection of the Z-phase standard position is enabled only when the OPC-VG1-PG(PD) option is
installed. If this PG is selected while this option is not installed or the o05 feedback pulse is
selected, the monitor data of U63 cannot be referenced.
6-78
6.5.6 Protective operation

6.5.6.1 Light and heavy alarms
The SX bus option can encounter light and heavy alarms depending on the failure level.
Upon occurrence of this failure, the inverter outputs er4 "network error" and the motor coasts to stop.
Table 6.5.5
Item Light alarm Heavy alarm 1 Heavy alarm 2

ERR (ON) ERR (ON)
Card LED States Undefined
RUN (ON) RUN (ON)
Communication data error All masters go down Option hardware failure
due to noises on the Disconnection Option installation failure
Cause communication line, etc. detected
SX bus power down
Chap. 6
Resolve the cause (or wait for communication recovery) Resolve the alarm cause and
Reset method *1 and give a reset command (keypad, RST, or remote power cycle the inverter.
reset).
Alarm is only detected while operation commands are
CONTROL OPTIONS
given via the SX bus.
Failure state control Alarms can be controlled
with the function codes o30 An er4 alarm immediately occurs upon heavy alarm.
and o31.
Communication error
code displayed on 1 2 3
keypad *2
Alarm
1 (hex) 2 (hex) 4 (hex)
sub code *3
*1 "Give a reset command" means supplying a reset input to the inverter in one of the following methods.
* Keypad key input

* Assign the failure reset RST with the X function selection and digitally input the command.
* Input the reset command via the communication line.
For a heavy alarm, the CPU may also require reset depending on the CPU state of MICREX-SX.
*2 You can check the communication error code for light and heavy alarms on the communication state screen of
the maintenance information on the keypad. To access this screen, press the key to return to the menu
screen, and move the arrow on the left edge of the screen to "5. Maintenance" using the / key, then press
the key. Press the key three times to show the screen below. Note that this error code displays the first
cause for er4. Since every heavy alarm 1 is preceded with a light alarm, this code shows the light alarm even
for a heavy alarm 1 when o30=0.
ＮＲＫ = ×××××
ＮＲＲ = ××××× ×× -: No communication error
ＮＲＯ = ××××× ×× 1: Light alarm
ＮＲＬ = ××××× ×× 2: Heavy alarm 1
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥＳＨＩＦＴ４ 3: Heavy alarm 2
Figure 6.5.10
6-79
*3 You can check the er4 alarm sub code on the alarm history selection of the alarm information on the keypad.
To access this screen, press the key to return to the menu screen, and move the arrow on the left edge of the
screen to "7. Alarm information" using the / key, then press the key. On the latest and last three alarm
history item screen, select an item you are interested in, press the key, and then press the key once to
show the screen below. Note that this error code displays the first cause for er4. Since every heavy alarm 1 is
preceded with a light alarm, this code shows the light alarm even for a heavy alarm 1 when o30=0.
ＳＵＢ = ×××× 1: Light alarm

ＡＬ = Ｅｒ４ＡＬ = ××× 2: Heavy alarm 1
ＡＬ = ××× ＡＬ = ××× 4: Heavy alarm 2
Figure 6.5.11 Alarm Subcode Confirmation Screen
6-80
6.5.6.2 Protective operation function code

The following explains how to control the er4 alarm when a light alarm occurs while an operation
command is given from MICREX-SX via the SX bus.
[Operation Description]
The following describes an example of operation when operation and speed commands are given from
MICREX-SX and a communication error occurs during operation.
*1 During this period of time, if communication recovers and new commands or settings are not sent,
commands (for operation or speed, or both) received upon error occurrence are held.
Chap. 6
CONTROL OPTIONS
Figure 6.5.12
(2) When the function code o30 = 1 and o31 = 5.0 (when a communication error occurs, the motor
coasts to stop in five seconds.)
Figure 6.5.13
6-81
(3) When the function code o30 = 2 and o31 = 5.0
(the communication error persists in five seconds after its occurrence and the er4 alarm occurs)
Figure 6.5.14
(4) When the function code o30 = 2 and o31 = 5.0 (a communication error occurs and the
communication recovers in five seconds)
Figure 6.5.15
Figure 6.5.16
6-82
6.5.7 Data allocation addresses

6.5.7.1 Transmission format
One the following four transmission formats can be selected by the function code U11 "SX bus
transmission format selection".
(1) Standard format (U11=0)

This is the basic format which allows for monitoring of the motor speed and operation status as well
as read and write of four function codes for each (specified by the link No.).
(2) UPAC compatible format (U11=1)

This format provides the control variables which can be used for the UPAC option card
(OPC-VG1-UPAC) as fixed frame. Two function codes can be read and written for each.
(3) Monitoring format (U11=2)
Chap. 6
This format is dedicated for monitoring and eight function codes can be read, but not be written.
(4) Standard format 2 (U11=3)
CONTROL OPTIONS
This is the basic format which allows for monitoring of the motor speed and operation status as well
as read and write of two function codes for each (specified by the 485No).
6.5.7.2 Area occupied and data allocation addresses

(1) Standard format (specified by link No.)
When the standard format is selected (U11=0), as shown in the figure below, out of the I/Q area of
the MICREX-SX, 16 words are used for each FRENIC-VG, with the lower 8 words are used for
read and upper 8 words are used for write.
(MSB) (LSB)
15 14 ・・・・・・ 1 0
～～
～～
(MICREX-SX ← FRENIC-VG) data

(8 words)
MICREX-SX
16 words
I/Q area
(MICREX-SX → FRENIC-VG) data
(8 words)
～～
～～
Figure 6.5.17
6-83
(MSB) (LSB)
15 14 … 8 7 … 10
%IW***．0 Polling function code (1) Polling function code (2)
%IW***．2 Polling function code (1) data FRENIC-VG
%IW***．3 Polling function code (2) data ⇓
%IW***．4 Polling function code (3) data MICREX-SX
%IW***．5 Polling function code (4) data
%IW***．6 Motor speed (M06)
%IW***．7 Operation state (refer to * 6.5.8.1 (1))
%QW***．8 Selecting function code (1) Selecting function code (2)
%QW***．9 Selecting function code (3) Selecting function code (4)
%QW***．10 Selecting function code (1) data MICREX-SX
%QW***．11 Selecting function code (2) data ⇓
%QW***．12 Selecting function code (3) data FRENIC-VG
%QW***．13 Selecting function code (4) data
%QW***．14 Polling function code (1) Polling function code (2)
Note: *** represents the SX bus station address set by "RSW1" and "RSW2".
Figure 6.5.18
(2) UPAC compatible format

When the UPAC compatible format is selected (U11=1), as shown in the figure below, out of the I/Q
area of the MICREX-SX, 51 words are used for each FRENIC-VG, with the lower 29 words are
used for read and upper 22 words are used for write.
(MSB) (LSB)
15 14 ・・・・・・ 1 0
～～
～～

(22 words)
MICREX-SX
51 words
I/Q area
(29 words)
～～
～～
Figure 6.5.19
6-84
(MSB) (LSB)
15 14 … … 10
%IW***．0 Speed setting 4/Frequency command monitor
%IW***．1 Torque command 2
%IW***．2 Torque current command (final)
%IW***．3 Magnetic flux command (final)
%IW***．4 Actual speed (detected)
%IW***．5 Control data (CW) (Standard ＋DIOA, 16 bits)
%IW***．6 Operation status (SW)
%IW***．7 Speed setting 1/Frequency command (for V/f)
%IW***．8 Line speed input
%IW***．9 Pulse train position command (PG (PR))
FRENIC-VG
%IW***．10 Position detection (internal or PG (PD))
⇓
%IW***．11 Position detection (PG (PD) Z-phase input) MICREX-SX
%IW***．12 Position command
%IW***．13 VG DI (DIOB option: 16 bits)
Chap. 6
%IW***．14 FRENIC-VG Ai (Ai1)
%IW***．15 FRENIC-VG Ai (Ai2)
%IW***．16 VG Ai (AIO/AI option, Ai3)
%IW***．17 VG Ai (AIO/AI option, Ai4)
CONTROL OPTIONS
%IW***．18 Polling function code 1 address
%IW***．19 Polling function code 1 data
%IW***．20 Polling function code 2 address
%IW***．21 Polling function code 2 data
Figure 6.5.20
6-85
(MSB) (LSB)
15 14 … …10
%QW***．22 Speed setting 1/Frequency command (for V/f)
%QW***．23 Torque command 1
%QW***．24 Torque current command
%QW***．25 Magnetic flux command
%QW***．26 Control data (CW)
%QW***．27 VG DO1 (standard＋DIOA: 13 bits)
%QW***．28 Acceleration time
%QW***．29 Deceleration time
%QW***．30 Torque limiting value level 1
%QW***．31 Torque limiting value level 2
%QW***．32 Speed setting 4/Frequency command (for V/f)
%QW***．33 Torque command 2
%QW***．34 Torque bias
%QW***．35 Speed supplement command MICREX-SX
%QW***．36 Actual speed (simulated) ⇓
%QW***．37 Selecting function code 1 address FRENIC-VG
%QW***．38 Selecting function code 1 data
%QW***．39 Selecting function code 2 address
%QW***．40 Selecting function code 2 data
%QW***．41 Polling function code 1 address
%QW***．42 Polling function code 2 address
%QW***．43 VG DO2 (DIOB option: 10 bits)
%QW***．44 FRENIC-VG AO (AO1)
%QW***．47 FRENIC-VG AO (AIO option, AO4)
%QW***．48 FRENIC-VG AO (AIO option, AO5)
%QW***．49 Dynamic SW1
%QW***．50 Dynamic SW2
Refer to "6.5.8 Transmission Format" for the transmission format.
Figure 6.5.21
6-86
(3) Monitoring format

When the monitoring format is selected (U11=2), as shown in the figure below, out of the I/Q area
of the MICREX-SX, 16 words are used for each FRENIC-VG, with the lower 4 words are used for
read and upper 12 words are used for write.
(MSB) (LSB)
15 14 ・・・・・・ 1 0
～～
～～

(12 words)
MICREX-SX
16 words
I/Q area
Chap. 6
(4 words)
～～
～～
CONTROL OPTIONS
Figure 6.5.22
(MSB) (LSB)
15 14 … 8 7 …10
FRENIC-VG
⇓
MICREX-SX
MICREX-SX
⇓
%QW***．14 Polling function code (5) Polling function code (6) FRENIC-VG
Figure 6.5.23
6-87
(4) Standard format 2 (specified with 485No)
When the standard format 2 is selected (U11=3), as shown in the figure below, out of the I/Q area of
MICREX-SX, 16 words are used for each FRENIC-VG, with the lower 8 words are used for read
and upper 8 words are used for write.
(MSB) (LSB)
15 14 ・・・・・・ 1 0
～～
～～

(8 words)
MICREX-SX
16 words
I/Q area
(8 words)
～～
～～
Figure 6.5.24
(MSB) (LSB)
15 14 … 8 7 …10
%IW***．0 Polling function code 485No (1)
%IW***．1 Polling function code 485No (2)
FRENIC-VG
⇓
%IW***．4 Function code monitor (1)
MICREX-SX
%IW***．5 Function code monitor (2)
%IW***．6 Motor speed (M06)
%IW***．7 Operation state (refer to * 6.5.8.1 (1))
%QW***．8 Selecting function code 485No (1)
%QW***．9 Selecting function code 485No (2)
%QW***．10 Selecting function code (1) data MICREX-SX
%QW***．11 Selecting function code (2) data ⇓
%QW***．12 Speed command (S01) FRENIC-VG
%QW***．13 Operation command/Di/RESET input (S06)
%QW***．14 Polling function code 485No (1)
%QW***．15 Polling function code 485No (2)
Figure 6.5.25
6-88
6.5.8 Transmission format

6.5.8.1 Data Format (FRENIC-VG ⇒ MICREX-SX)
(1) When standard format (specified by link No.) is selected
1 Operate state (1 for all ON)
(MSB) (LSB)
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
BUSY
FWD
ERR
DEC
ACC
NUV
ALM
BRK
REV
EXT
INT
RL
TL
IL
-
-
REV : Running reverse (1: H30 = 2 or 3)
EXT : DC braking or pre-exciting IL : Current limiting
INT : Inverter shutdown ACC : Accelerating
Chap. 6
NUV : DC link bus voltage ALM : Batch failure BUSY : Writing function code
CONTROL OPTIONS
ERR is cleared to "0" when selecting (writing) and polling (reading) of the function code has been
done correctly. If any of selecting or polling is not performed correctly, ERR is set to "1". The error
cause in this case can be checked with the function code M26 (see the table below). When ERR is
set to "1", resolve the cause and perform selecting or polling again. If the operation is successful,
both of ERR and M26 are cleared to "0".
M26 value Write/read error
78 Access to unused function code
79 Writing to a read-only function code
Writing to a function code (during operation) which cannot be
changed during operation
Writing to a function code which cannot be changed with
FWD/REV ON.
80 Writing out-of-range data
*1 If multiple errors occur simultaneously, the following priority is applied to the M26 error cause.
Selecting (2) > Selecting (1) > Polling (2) > Polling (1)
(For example, if selecting (2) and polling (1) are faulty, the cause for the selecting (2) error is stored in
M26.)
BUSY is set to "1" while writing (processing) data. When writing consecutive data, wait for BUSY
to be cleared to "0" and write the next data. A writing request made while this bit is set to "1" is
ignored.
2 Motor speed
(MSB) (LSB)
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Motor speed (decimal) x 20000 / maximum speed ⇒ 16-bit data
The maximum speed is set with the inverter function code F03. Obtain a r/min value by calculating
backward using the above formula. If data is negative (complement of 2), it is a reverse speed
command.
6-89
3 Polling function code address and data
(MSB) (LSB)
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
⇓
function code requested for polling from MICREX-SX. Their data are stored in "Polling function
code (1) to (4) data".
(2) When UPAC compatible format is selected

1 Speed setting 4/frequency command monitor, actual speed (detected), speed setting 1/frequency
command (for V/f), line speed input
(MSB) (LSB)
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Motor speed (decimal) x 20000 / maximum speed ⇒ 16-bit data
The maximum speed is set with the function code. Obtain a r/min value by calculating backward
using the above formula. If data is negative (complement of 2), it is a reverse speed command.
2 Torque command 2, torque current command (final)
(MSB) (LSB)
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Torque command data
Torque command 2 data, torque current command data: 0.01%/1d (100% = rated toque)
3 Magnetic flux command (final)
(MSB) (LSB)
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Magnetic flux command data
Magnetic flux command data: 0.01%/1d
6-90
4 Control data (CW) (Standard ＋DIOA, 16 bits)
(MSB) (LSB)
15 87 0
0) FWD (Running forward command)

1) REV (Running reverse command)
2) X1
3) X2
4) X3
5) X4
6) X5
7) X6 0: OFF,
8) X7 1: ON
9) X8
Chap. 6
10) X9
11) X11
12) X12
13) X13
CONTROL OPTIONS
14) X14
15) RST (RESET command)
5 Operation status (SW)

Refer to the operation status of the standard format.
6 Pulse train position command (PG (PR)), position detection (internal or PG (PD)), position
detection (Z-phase input) (PG (PD))
Refer to the explanation of U61 - U63 in "6.4.5.1 Function Code".
7 Position command (available soon)
8 VG DI (DIOB option: 16 bits)
(MSB) (LSB)
15 87 0
0) X21
1) X22
2) X23
3) X24
4) X25
5) X26
6) X27
7) X28 0: OFF, 1: ON
8) X29
9) X30
10) X31
11) X32
12) X33
13) X34
14) X35
15) X36
6-91
9 VG Ai (Ai1), VG Ai (Ai2), VG Ai (AIO/AI option, Ai3), VG Ai (AIO/AI option, Ai4)
(MSB) (LSB)
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
VG Ai data
VG Ai data: ±10 V = ±4000 h (±16384d)
Polling function code address and data
(MSB) (LSB)
15 14 1 0
Polling function code 1 address
Polling function code 1 data
Polling function code 2 data
"Polling function code 1, 2 address" (16 bits each) store the link number corresponding to the
code 1, 2 data".
Note:
6 The PG option (OPC-VG1-PG/PGo) is necessary to reference data for the pulse train position
command and position detection (excluding internal data).
8 The DIO option (OPC-VG1-DIO) is necessary to reference data for the VG DI (DIOB option: 16
bits).
9 The AIO option (OPC-VG1-AIO) or AI option (OPC-VG1-AI) is necessary to reference data for
VG Ai (AIO/AI option, Ai3) / (AIO/AI option, Ai4).
To enable this data, you need to assign the corresponding Ai terminal functions to the universal Ai
(U-AI) using the function codes E49 to E52. If they are not assigned, the value will be 0.
When using Ai2, set the SW3 on the control board to the V side.
(For the switch, refer to "3.3.3.9 Switch Operation".)
6-92
(3) When monitoring format is selected

(MSB) (LSB)
15 14 8 7 1 0
⇓
Chap. 6
code (1) to (8) data".
CONTROL OPTIONS
6-93
(4) When standard format 2 (specified with 485No) is selected
(MSB) (LSB)
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Polling function code 485No (1)
"Polling function code 485No (1) to (2)" (16 bits each) store the 485No corresponding to the
function code requested for polling from MICREX-SX. The corresponding link numbers are stored
in "Polling function code (1) to (2) data".
2 Function code monitor

(MSB) (LSB)
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Function code monitor (1)
"Function code monitor (1), (2)" are the constant monitor of the function code. Set the target
function code 485No with the function code o160 for "Function code monitor (1)" and o161 for
"Function code monitor (2)".
3 Motor speed
Refer to the motor speed of the standard format.
4 Operation status
Refer to the operation status of the standard format.
6-94
6.5.8.2 Data format (MICREX-SX ⇒ FRENIC-VG)

(1) When standard format is selected
1 Selecting function code address and selecting function code data
(MSB) (LSB)
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
⇓
"Selecting function code (1) to (4)" (eight bits each) store the link number corresponding to the
function code selected by MICREX-SX. Write the data to "Selecting function code (1) to (4) data".
Chap. 6
Note that writing to the function code with this selecting function is done per the tact period of
MICREX-SX.
Note 1) Upon selecting, be sure to write the link number and data together.
CONTROL OPTIONS
Note 2) If multiple selecting errors occur simultaneously with the selecting function codes (1) to (4),
the following priority is applied to the function code M26 error cause.
Selecting function code (4) > (3) > (2) > (1)
2 Polling function code address
(MSB) (LSB)
15 14 8 7 1 0
6-95
(2) When UPAC compatible format is selected
1 Control data (CW)
(MSB) (LSB)
15 87 0
0) FWD (Running forward command)

1) REV (Running reverse command)
2) X1
3) X2
4) X3
5) X4
6) X5
7) X6 0: OFF,
8) X7 1: ON
9) X8
10) X9
11) X11
12) X12
13) X13
14) X14
15) RST (RESET command)
・ FWD, REV and X1 to X14 are available when the link command is permitted as instructed in
"6.4.9.1 Link Command Permission Selection". RST is always available.
・ Note that the operation command (FWD/REV) specifications are different from when the UPAC
option is used as shown below (available soon for the UPAC option).
・ The AND condition of the operation commands defined in the UPAC option specifications is
invalidated (deleted) for the SX bus option (when the UPAC compatible format is selected)
(available soon for the UPAC option).
When UPAC option is applied
Terminal table Operation

Touch panel Operation AND
command
Link (S06) command OFF
ON
Control data: FWD/REV Dynamic SW

(Command from UPAC)
When SX option (UPAC compatible format) is applied
Terminal table
Operation Operation
Touch panel
command OFF command
Link (S06)
ON
Control data: FWD/REV Dynamic SW

(Command from SX)
Figure 6.5.26
6-96
2 Speed setting 1/frequency command (for V/f), speed setting 4/frequency command (for V/f), speed
supplement command, actual speed (simulated)
(MSB) (LSB)
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Speed command (decimal) x 20000 / maximum speed ⇒ 16-bit data
The above is the same as the motor speed. The maximum speed is set with the function code.
Provide the speed value as 16-bit data of the value calculated above. (Handle negative data as a
complement of 2.)
3 Torque command 1, torque command 2, torque current command, torque limiting level 1, torque
limiting level 2, torque bias
Chap. 6
(MSB) (LSB)
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
CONTROL OPTIONS
Torque command data
Torque command data: 0.01%/1d (100% = rated toque)
4 Magnetic flux command
(MSB) (LSB)
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Magnetic flux command data
Magnetic flux command data: 0.01%/1d
6-97
5 VG DO1 (standard＋DIOA: 13 bits)
(MSB) (LSB)
15 87 0
0) Y1
1) Y2
2) Y3
3) Y4
4) Y5A
5) Unused
6) Unused
7) Unused
0: OFF, 1: ON
8) Y11
9) Y12
10) Y13
11) Y14
12) Y15
13) Y16
14) Y17
15) Y18
6 Acceleration time, deceleration time
(MSB) (LSB)
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Acceleration (deceleration) time data
Acceleration (deceleration) time data: 0.1s/1d
7 Selecting function code address and selecting function code data
(MSB) (LSB)
15 14 1 0
Selecting function code 1 address
Selecting function code 1 data
Selecting function code 2 address
Selecting function code 2 data
"Selecting function code 1, 2 address" (16 bits each) write the link number corresponding to the
function code selected by MICREX-SX. Write the data to "Selecting function code 1, 2 data".
Note: Upon selecting, be sure to write the link number and data together.
Writing from this frame to the S code is prohibited. For a command equivalent to the S code,
give commands from each dedicated frame.
6-98
(MSB) (LSB)
15 14 1 0
Use the "polling function code 1, 2 address" (16 bits) to specify the link number corresponding to
the function code number requested for polling.
9 VG DO2 (DIOB option: 10 bits)
(MSB) (LSB)
15 87 0
Chap. 6
0) Y21
1) Y22
CONTROL OPTIONS
2) Y23
3) Y24
4) Y25
5) Y26
6) Y27
7) Y28
0: OFF, 1: ON
8) Y29
9) Y30
10) Unused
11) Unused
12) Unused
13) Unused
14) Unused
15) Unused
VG AO (AO1), VG AO (AO2), VG AO (AO3), VG AO (AIO option, AO4), VG AO (AIO option,

AO5)
(MSB) (LSB)
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
FRENIC-VG Ao data
VG Ao data: ±10V=±4000h(±16384d)
6-99
⑪ Dynamic SW1
(MSB) (LSB)
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
SW16 SW15 SW14 SW13 SW12 SW11 SW10 SW9 SW8 SW7 SW6 SW5 SW4 SW3 SW2 SW1
Dynamic SW2
(MSB) (LSB)
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
- - - - - SW27 SW26 SW25 SW24 SW23 SW22 SW21 SW20 SW19 SW18 SW17
Each bit value indicates the dynamic switch number. The dynamic switch for each control variable
is as shown below.
1: Enabled (Dynamic switch is enabled and the control variable data is reflected.)
0: Disabled (Dynamic switch is disabled and the control variable data is not reflected.)
Note:
Note that the definition of the dynamic switch is different from the UPAC option.
By default, all dynamic switches are set to 0 (disabled). When the control variable
(MICREX-SX→VG) is enabled in the UPAC compatible format, be sure to enable the
corresponding dynamic switch.
・ Refer to the UPAC SW shown in the control block diagram in Chapter 4 for the position of
each dynamic switch.
SW1: Speed setting 1/Frequency command (for V/f) SW15: Actual speed (simulated)
SW2 : Torque command 1 SW16: Selecting function code 1 address
SW3 : Torque current command SW17: Selecting function code 1 data
SW4 : Magnetic flux command SW18: Selecting function code 2 address
SW5 : Control data (CW) SW19: Selecting function code 2 data
SW6 : FRENIC-VG DO1(standard + DIOA: 13 bits) SW20: Polling function code 1 address
SW7 : Acceleration time SW21: Polling function code 2 address
SW8 : Deceleration time SW22: FRENIC-VG DO2(DIOB option: 10 bits)
SW9 : Torque limiting value level 1 SW23: FRENIC-VG AO(AO1)
SW10 Torque limiting value level 2 SW24: FRENIC-VG AO(AO2)
SW11 Speed setting 4/Frequency command (for V/f) SW25: FRENIC-VG AO(AO3)
SW12 : Torque command 2 SW26: FRENIC-VG AO(AIO option AO4)
SW13: Torque bias SW27: FRENIC-VG AO(AIO option AO5)
SW14: Speed supplement command
6-100
The relationship between the dynamic switch setting, link function selection (function code H30),
and link operation selection (digital input LE) is shown below.
Table 6.5.6
Dynamic SW status
Link operation Operation Other
H30 value Command data
selection LE command/control input SW6 to 8, 16 to
SW1 to 4, 9 to 15
SW5 27
0 － Fixed to off
ON Can be switched Fixed to off
1
OFF
ON Fixed to off Can be switched Can be switched
2
OFF Fixed to off
ON Can be switched Can be switched
3
OFF Fixed to off Fixed to off
Chap. 6
Note:
5 The DIO option (OPC-VG1-DIO) is necessary to reference data Y11-Y18 for the FRENIC-VG
CONTROL OPTIONS
DO1 (standard + DIOA: 13 bits). This command is effective without regard to the status of the
function code H30 and link operation selection LE.
9 The DIO option (OPC-VG1-DIO) is necessary to reference data for the FRENIC-VG DO2
(DIOB option: 10 bits). This command is effective without regard to the status of the function
code H30 and link operation selection LE.
AIO option (OPC-VG1-AIO) is necessary to reference data for the FRENIC-VG AO (AIO
option, AO4) / (AIO option, AO5). To output this command to the AO terminal, you need to
assign the corresponding AO terminal functions to the universal AO (U-A0) using the function
codes E69 to E73. This command is effective without regard to the status of the function code
H30 and link operation selection LE.
6-101
(3) When monitoring format is selected
(MSB) (LSB)
15 14 8 7 1 0
(4) When standard format 2 (specified with 485No) is selected

1 Selecting function code 485No, selecting function code data
(MSB) (LSB)
15 14 1 0
Selecting function code 485No (1)
"Selecting function code 485No (1), (2)" (16 bits each) write the 485No. corresponding to the
function code selected by MICREX-SX. Write the data to "Selecting function code (1), (2) data".
Note 1) Upon selecting, be sure to write the 485No. and data together.
Note 2) When writing data "0" to the function code F00 (485No.=0000h), first write data other than
0 or write to a function code other than F00, then write to F00.
Note 3) When the same function code is set to the selecting function codes (1) and (2), the selecting
function code (2) takes precedence.
2 Speed command (S01)

Refer to "(2) Speed command" in Section 6.3.8.2 of the T-Link interface.
3 Operation command/Di/RESET input (S06)

Refer to "(1) Operation command/Di/RESET input" in Section 6.3.8.2 of the T-Link interface.
4 Polling function code 485No
(MSB) (LSB)
15 14 1 0
Use the "polling function code 485No (1), (2)" (16 bits) to specify the 485No. corresponding to the
6-102
6.5.9 Link function

Refer to "6.3.9 Link function" of the T-Link interface.
When both of the SX bus interface card and T-Link interface card are installed, the link function
targets communication via the T-Link.
When only the SX bus interface card is installed and the monitoring format is selected, the link
function targets communication from the integrated RS-485.
6.5.10 Data transmission example

The following explains a data transmission example using the transmission format.
(1) Speed setting
Chap. 6
From MICREX-SX, give commands to run forward (FWD) at 750r/min.
(Condition: Function code U11 "SX transmission format selection"= 0, H30 "Link operation"=3,
maximum speed 1500 r/min, SX bus station address: 10)
CONTROL OPTIONS
%QW10.8 0 6 0 1 Function code S06, S01 selecting (link No. 06h, 01h)
%QW10.9 0 0 0 0 Selecting dummy data
%QW10.10 0 0 0 1 Function code S06 FWD=ON
%QW10.11 2 7 1 0 Function code S01 Speed setting 750/1500*20000=10000=2710(h)
↓ After acceleration completes
%IW10.6 2 7 1 0 Monitor the motor speed.

Monitor the torque command value from MICREX-SX.
(Condition: Function code U11 "SX transmission format selection"= 0, SX bus station address: 10)
%QW10.14 1 0 0 0 Torque command monitor (link No. 10h)

%QW10.15 0 0 0 0
↓ After read completes
%IW10.0 1 0 0 0 When the link number requesting polling is returned to this area, reading is completed.
%IW10.1 0 0 0 0 Torque command value monitor data

%IW10.2 1 3 8 8 1388(h)×100(%)/ 10000 = 50(%)
%IW10.3 0 0 0 0 ↓
%IW10.4 0 0 0 0 From the above, the torque command value is "50% of drive".
%IW10.5 0 0 0 0
6-103
From MICREX-SX, set the function code S08 "Acceleration time" to 30.5s.
%QW10.8 0 8 0 0 Function code S08 selecting (Link No. 08h)

%QW10.9 0 0 0 0
%QW10.10 0 1 3 1 30.5=305 x 0.1s=305=131(h)
%QW10.11 0 0 0 0
%QW10.12 0 0 0 0
%QW10.13 0 0 0 0
%QW10.14 0 8 0 0 Poll the function code S08 to confirm setting completion.
↓ After writing completes
%IW10.0 0 8 0 0 Poll the function code S08.

%IW10.1 0 0 0 0
%IW10.2 0 1 3 1 131(h)=305×0.1s=30.5s (Data is correctly set.)
%IW10.3 0 0 0 0
%IW10.4 0 0 0 0
%IW10.5 0 0 0 0
6-104
(4) Toggle monitoring

Monitor data toggling between MICREX-SX and the inverter. This example set the X12 terminal to
TGL1 and X13 terminal to TGL2.(*1)
Set E11=72 (TGL1), E12=73 (TGL2), H30=3, H144=0.10 (100 ms) in advance.
This sets transmission toggle (MICREX-SX→VG1): %QW254.0.10.13 bit 11= TGL1 and bit 12=
TGL2.
The inverter monitors the toggle pattern sent from MICREX-SX while the operation command is
ON, and generates the toggle error arf if the toggle signal cannot be received within the time
specified with H144.
*1 For the details of the toggle, refer to E01 to E13 toggle signal explanation in "4.3 Function Code
Details".
Chap. 6
*2 By setting the inverter function code H107, the inverter can continue operation with l-al
display. Refer to the description of H107 in "4.3 Function Code Details".
*3 The tact period for an application which sends toggle patterns on the MICREX-SX side should
CONTROL OPTIONS
be 1 ms or longer.
%QW254.0.10.13 * 0 0 0 Send 0→1→2→3→0 to *…(toggle pattern)
↓ After sending toggle
%QW254.0.10.13 * 0 0 1 Operation command (FWD)=ON

⇒ arf does not occur if the sent toggle is correct.
Note: If the network error er4 (light and heavy alarm 1) occurs while sending the toggle pattern and
keeps the operation, the toggle error arf may occur after the communication recovers. To avoid
the toggle error arf, stop sending the toggle pattern while the network error er4 is occurring.
6-105
6.5.11 System configuration definition
For the MICREX-SX series, you need to use the programming support tool Expert (D300win) to
construct the system, configure the entire system for operation, set operation, and set individual modules.
The following describes how to configure the system definition of the inverter, which is connected to the
SX bus as a slave module. For configuration of the PC, memory, program, and other individual modules
than the inverter, refer to each user's manual of the corresponding MICREX-SX series product.
6.5.11.1 Programming support tool expert (D300win)

D300win is program creation system software for the MICREX-SX series. Note that you must use
particular versions of D300win to configure the system definition of FRENIC-VG. Use a version shown
below (or later). Screenshots may differ depending on the version used.
Expert (D300win) Version

V3 series: 3.0.0.0 or later
V2 series: 2.2.2.0 or later
Note: If you have a (registered) version of

D300win which does not support
FRENIC-VG, contact our sales D300win version
personnel to upgrade it. You can
check the current version of
D300win by choosing [Information]
from the [Help] menu.
Figure 6.5.27
Note
When configuring the system definition including VG1, set the SX bas tact to 1 ms or longer.
6-106
[1] System definition window

In system definition, you construct the system using the SX bus, configure the entire system for operation,
configure operation, and configure individual modules. Double-click the [System_Definition] icon in the
[Physical Hardware] configuration subtree to open the system configuration definition screen.
System Configuration Definition Tree
Chap. 6
CONTROL OPTIONS
Figure 6.5.28
[2] Adding a module
If the transmission format settings are different, a heavy alarm occurs and communication is not available. Be
sure to check the following for the correct settings.
For the MICREX-SX series, it is necessary to register all the modules (including the inverter) to use in the
system configuration definition of the PC system.
To add the module (inverter), right-click the base module on the system configuration definition tree, and
select [Insert] to open the [Module insert] dialog box.
Module attribute: Individual module

Module type: Select the inverter.
Set the SX bus

station address.
Select the transmission format of FRENIC-VG. Set each item and click the [OK] button.
Figure 6.5.29
6-107
(1) Transmission format selection
In the [Summary Specifications] list box, select the transmission format of FRENIC-VG. For the
detailed specifications of each transmission format, refer to the function code U11 "SX transmission
format selection".
Standard format 1 and 2 ⇒ VG7: FRN VG7(S)

(for the latest version,
VG1/VG7 (STD1): FRENIC-VG (S1))
UPAC compatible format ⇒ VG7S/UPAC: FRN VG7 (U)
VG1/VG7 (UPAC): FRENIC-VG (U))
Monitoring format ⇒ VG7S/MONITOR: FRN VG7 (M)
VG1/VG7 (MONITOR): FRENIC-VG (M))
Note: Be sure to select the same format as the function code U11. If the settings are different, the
heavy alarm "Device configuration error" occurs and communication will not be available.
(2) I/O group setting

Allocate the module (inverter) in the MICREX-SX CPU. Incorrect allocation of the I/O group
disables input/output control from the CPU.
Right-click the CPU on the system configuration definition tree, and select [Properties] to open the
[Module Properties] dialog box.
Click the parameter and the [I/O Group Setting] tab to open the [I/O Group Setting] dialog box.
Note: In a multi-processor system, if an individual CPU module has a different control target,
configure the I/O group for an individual CPU.
Clicking the [Standard Setting]

button switches between input
and output.
Figure 6.5.30
6-108
[3] Degenerate setting

The SX bus option supports the degenerate and degenerate system start-up operations. Each operation has
restrictions including the degenerated condition and system settings. For the details, refer to the user's
manual (reference) of each MICREX-SX series product.
The following explains the degenerate setting and degenerate system start-up setting. These settings are
not required if the degenerate setting and degenerate system start-up operations are not necessary.
(1) Degenerate Setting

With the degenerate setting enabled, even when an inverter error occurs and the inverter stops, other
normal module can continue operation.
Open the [CPU Parameter] dialog box, and click the [Degenerate Setting] tab.
Chap. 6
CONTROL OPTIONS
Select the inverter from the I/O list and click the
[>>] button to register degenerate setting.
Figure 6.5.31
(2) Degenerate System Start-up Setting

With the degenerate system start-up setting enabled, when the SX bus system launches with the
inverter powered off, the system will start up after the configuration check standby time, excluding
the inverter, in a light alarm state.
In the [System Properties] dialog box, click the [Degenerate System Start-up Operation Definition] tab.
Select the degenerate system start-up operation mode

with the option button, and then select the degenerate
start-up station address from the list box.
Figure 6.5.32
6-109
6.5.11.2 Application program examples
The following explains a data transmission example using the MICREX-SX application program.
(1) Speed setting

From MICREX-SX, give commands to run forward (FWD) at 750r/min.
(Condition: Function code U11 "SX transmission format selection"= 0, H30 "Link Operation"=3,
maximum speed 1500r/min, SX bus station address: 10)
Figure 6.5.33

Monitor the torque command value from MICREX-SX.
Figure 6.5.34
6-110

From MICREX-SX, set the function code S08 "Acceleration time" to 30.5s.
Chap. 6
CONTROL OPTIONS
Figure 6.5.35
6-111
6.5.12 Multiple option application examples
6.5.12.1 Installed with T-Link interface card
The following shows an example where the T-Link interface card (OPC-VG1-TL) and SX bus interface
card (OPC-VG1-SX).
Connection example
SX bus only for data monitor
(Fixed to monitoring format)
Terminating MICREX-SX
12W connector
4W
1500 1500 1500
SX bus cable
OPC-VG1 OPC-VG1 OPC-VG1

-SX OPC-VG1 -SX OPC-VG1 -SX OPC-VG1
-TL -TL -TL
T1,T2 T1,T2 T1,T2

IN OUT IN OUT IN OUT
Terminating
4W(8W) Terminating resistor
connector
MICREX-SX
T-Link cable
4W(8W)
Terminating
MICREX-SX (T-Link module)
resistor
Figure 6.5.36
Features
You can construct the command system (T-Link) and monitoring system (SX bus) with
separate link systems. While giving command via the T-Link, you can perform high-speed
data monitoring via the SX bus.
Detailed specifications
(1) The transmission format of the SX bus is fixed to the monitoring format and dedicated to
monitoring.
You need to configure the monitoring format with transmission format selection (U11) and system
configuration definition.
(2) The link function (link command switch, link edit switch, etc.) is enabled for the T-Link.
(3) The communication error monitoring target is the T-Link, and communication errors occurring on
the SX bus will not be detected.
(4) For the detailed specifications of the T-Link, refer to "6.3 T-Link Interface".
6-112
6.5.12.2 Installed with high-speed serial communication-capable terminal table

The following shows an example where the high-speed serial communication-capable terminal table
(OPC-VG1-TBSI) and SX bus interface card (OPC-VG1-SX) are installed simultaneously to drive the
multi-winding motor.
Connection example
MICREX-SX
Terminating
connector
FRENIC-VG (Master) FRENIC-VG (Slave)
Chap. 6
1500 1500
SX bus cable
CONTROL OPTIONS
OPC-VG1 OPC-VG1
-SX OPC-VG1 Optical fiber -SX OPC-VG1
-TBSI cable -TBSI
RX TX
TX RX
IN OUT IN OUT
Terminating
connector
PG M M PG
Single-winding motor
Two-winding motor
Figure 6.5.37
Features
You can link with a multi-winding motor drive system which can drive a high-capacity motor via the SX
bus, to implement wire-saving, high-speed, and high-performance control.
If the SX bus option is also installed on the slave side, single-winding motors can be individually driven
by switching the drive motors.
Detailed specifications
(1) While driving a multi-winding motor, if a control command is input via the SX bus to the slave
inverter, the data will not be reflected. The motor operates according to commands given to the
master inverter.
(2) Refer to the "6.6 High-Speed Serial Communication-Capable Terminal Table" for the detailed
specifications of the multi-winding motor drive system card.
6-113
6.6 High-Speed Serial Communication-Capable Terminal
Table
6.6.1.1 Multi-winding motor drive
(1) Overview
By connecting multiple FRENIC-VGs with the high-speed serial communication-capable terminal
table via optical fiber cables, you can drive an induction motor (hereafter referred to as "motor")
with 2 to 6 turns of multiple turns (hereafter referred to as "multi-winding").
The command to specify how much current each winding of the motor should bear is given in a
moment from the master inverter to each slave inverter, via the high-speed serial communication
(optical link) of this optical fiber cable. By controlling the current for each winding with this
command (feedback control), each inverter can drive the multi-winding motor.
The maximum capacity of the FRENIC-VG unit is 630 kW. To drive a 1200 kW motor, three 400
kW inverters or two 630 kW inverters can be connected.
(2) Sensorless control (available soon)

You can also vector-control a multi-winding motor with no PG sensor.
(3) Wire saving

A single inverter is specified as the master and others as slaves by setting the function codes. The
master inverter gives operation and speed commands, as with the standard product, and connects the
motor encoder for feedback (not required for sensorless control).
On the contrary, the slave inverter only controls the current and does not require operation and
speed command connection. It only requires the main circuit wiring, external alarm output, and
optical fiber cable.
(4) Multi-winding motor drive/single-winding (standard) motor drive switching

After driving a single multi-winding motor with multiple inverters, if each inverter needs to drive
individual motor (hereafter referred to as "single-winding motor") at 1-to-1 correspondence, you can
switch multi-winding and single-winding motor driving with a digital input signal.
Since the motor constants for up to three motors can be preset in each inverter, the motor constants
used can also be switched with the digital input signal at the same time the motor drive is switched.
However, if you are using the PG or NTC signal, switch these signals externally. Our optional
product MCA-VG1-CPG is the dedicated option for this external switching. Switch the secondary
power lines using an electromagnetic contactor.
6-114
6.6 High-Speed Serial Communication-Capable Terminal Table

6.6.2.1 Model
Model elements: OPC-VG1-TBSI

Name of equipped inverter VG1 -> FRENIC-VG
Option name: TBSI -> High-speed serial
communication-capable terminal table
Accessories
Plastic optical fiber cable (with connector) x1, 5 m
Chap. 6
CONTROL OPTIONS
・ The system will not operate correctly if the function code setting is not correct. Read the instruction below and
set them accordingly.
Table 6.6.1 Communication Specifications
Item Specifications
Data transmission Loopback method
method Asynchronous serial communication using plastic optical fiber
Transmission rate 2.5 Mbps
Hardware: parity, framing, overrun
Error check method
Software: BCC, timeout monitoring
When using the plastic optical fiber cable: 5m (0 to 70°C)/Inter-inverter
Transmission distance
(Contact us if a cable longer than 5m is required.)
Table 6.6.2 Plastic Optical Fiber Cable Specifications
Item Min. Max. Unit Remarks

Storage temperature -40 +75 °C
range
Tension 50 N 30 minutes or less
Short-time bending 10 － mm Will stop operation within one hour and the inter-inverter link
radius error erb occurs.
Long-time bending 35 － mm If bent for 35mm or less for a long period of time, the
radius inter-inverter link error erb may occur. Curvature should be
kept 35 mm or more.
Tensile strength － 1 N
(long time)
Flexibility － 1000 Times Bend for 90 degrees on 10 mm mandrel (core bar, main axis)
Shock － 0.5 kg Shock test is in accordance with MIL-1678, Mothod2030,
Procefurel.
Guaranteed minimum 10 m Minimum guaranteed value due to transmission loss (0 to
distance 70°C)
Weight 4.6 g/m
6-115
Item Specifications
Applicable motor capacity HD/LD/MD specifications (up to 630 kW x 6-winding available)
Motor control method Vector control with speed sensor, Vector control without speed sensor
(available soon)
(Note: V/f control and synchronous motor control not available)
Maximum output 120 Hz
frequency
Speed Control scope 1:1500 (vector control), 1:250 (sensorless control)
control
Control accuracy ±0.005% of maximum speed (digital), ±0.1% (analog, 25±10°C)
Setting resolution 0.005% of maximum speed
The following restriction is applied.
Control function
・The monitor function of the slave unit is restricted.
System definition is configured using the function code o33 "Multi-system
control method".
0: High-speed serial communication not used, single-winding drive (factory
setting)
Multi-winding/single-winding 1: High-speed serial communication used, multi-winding drive
switching
2, 3: Multi-system 1, 2 (available soon)
When the function code o33 is set to 1 "Multi-winding system",
multi-winding and single-winding can be dynamically switched using the
digital input signal MT-CCL.
The inverter station address is set using the function code o50 "Multi-system
Station address setting station address setting".
For example, set the master to "0", slave 1 to "1", and slave 2 to "2".
The number of optically linked slaves is set using the function code o34
Slave count setting "Multi-system slave count setting". For example, when four inverters are
linked, the number of slaves is "3".
All unit batch alarm mode: Touch panel alarm mode

All unit batch alarm output: 30x output
Protective function
occurrence process All unit batch inverter output shutdown
However, all units should coast to stop with an external sequence upon 30x
operation.
Protective
function Communication Due to a communication error of the optical fiber cable or setting error of a
alarm function related function code, the inter-inverter link error erb or operation
Operation procedure
alarm function procedure alarm operation er6 occurs.
Protective function By giving the reset command to any of the units optically linked, all units
cancellation process will be batch reset.
Multi-winding motor specifications

Common-mode current is applied to the Un
X kW U2
common-mode windings. FRENIC-VG-n Motor
モータ U1
This drives a motor with capacity of the summed nX kW Wn

X kW
number of inverters. FRENIC-VG-2 W2
W1
Vn
For example, by using four (n=4) 200 kW V2
FRENIC-VG-1 V1
inverters to drive a four-winding motor, up to
800 kW output is available. Figure 6.6.1
6-116
The relationship between the number of windings and the number of motor poles is as listed below
because the former should be a divisor of the latter.
Table 6.6.4
Number of
4P 6P 8P 12P
windings (n)
2 ○ ○ ○ ○
3 - ○ - ○
4 ○ - ○ ○
5 - - - -
6 - ○ - ○
Chap. 6
CONTROL OPTIONS
6-117
(Unit: mm)
Figure 6.6.2 External Dimensions of Option
Figure 6.6.3 Plastic Optical Fiber Cable (Accessory)
6-118
・ Incorrect cabling may cause a disaster such as electrical shock or fire. Only a qualified person should perform
・ Note that the smoothing capacitor is charged after turning off (i.e., opening) the circuit breaker and touching it
・ Do not use the product that is damaged or lacking parts to prevent an injury or damage.
・ Incorrect handling in installation/removal jobs could result in a broken product.
Chap. 6
6.6.4.1 Connecting optical fiber cable
CONTROL OPTIONS
・ The cable may be pinched by the surface cover. To protect the cable, it is required to attach a fixing jig to guide
the route or spiral tube around the cable.
・ If the plastic optical fiber is bent with curvature of 35 mm or less for a long period of time, the inter-interval
link error "erb" may occur to generate an alarm, causing the inverter output shutdown and leaving the motor
to coast to stop. Keep the curvature 35 mm or more.
・ The plastic optical fiber allows a strong light (e.g., flashlight) to pass. A strong light may cause the
inter-interval link error "erb" to generate an alarm.
Use the supplied optical fiber cable to connect the inverter and the high-speed serial
communication-capable terminal table. Note that the colors of the plugs at the ends of the cable are
different; light gray and dark gray. Be sure to match the colors of the plug and connector when connecting
them. Connect the inverters in a daisy-chain method. For example, when connecting three inverters (1, 2,
and 3), use three cables to connect them in a loop in such a way: 1→2→3→1.
Table 6.6.5 Optical Connectors of High-Speed Serial Communication-Capable Terminal Table
Part number Name Color Overview

T-1528 TX Light gray Transmitter (optical communication)
R-2528 RX Dark gray Receiver (optical communication )
6-119
Figure 6.6.4
6-120
6.6.4.2 Basic connection diagram of entire system
・ For safety, design the external circuit so that all inverter units should coast to stop when an alarm occurs (30x
operation).
A connection example is shown below.
Chap. 6
CONTROL OPTIONS
Figure 6.6.5
Special notices
(1) For safety, make sure that all inverter units Master Slave 1 Slave n Master
マスタスレーブ1 スレーブn マスタ
should coast to stop when an alarm occurs 30A 30A 30A RYA
30 30 30 RDY
(30x operation). Coast to stop command 30C 30C 30C RYC
should be input to the contact BX.

(2) Make sure that FWD and REV are available
Slave n
only when all inverter units are ready for スレーブn
RYA
operation (RDY). This example shows an RDY
RYC
example where the operation ready signal is
assigned to the relay output.
FWD REV
(3) The reset command (RST) to the master
inverter unit can cancel alarms of all inverter FTX VFX VRX
units.
Figure 6.6.6
Note
(1) The DC reactor (DCR) is optional for 55 kW or lower and included for 75 kW or higher.
(2) Braking resistor (DBR) is optional.
6-121
6.6.5 Function code setting
・ Incorrect function code data may result in a dangerous situation. After setting and writing the data, check it
again.
Failure to observe this precaution could cause an accident.
Table 6.6.6
Parameter name Setting

No. Description
Name keypad display range
0: High-speed serial communication not used,

single-winding drive (factory setting)
Multi-system control 1: High-speed serial communication used,
o33 MUL MTD 0 to 5
method multi-winding drive
2: Multi-system 1
3: Multi-system 2
Multi-system slave When the multi-system is enabled, set the
o34 MWS SLAVES 1 to 5
count number of slave units (excluding the master).
Multi-system station 0: Master
o50 MWS ST-NO 0 to 5
address setting 1 - 5: Slave
6.6.5.1 Number of units setting

Set the number of slave inverter units connected via the optical fiber cable using the function code. Note
that this is not the number of all inverters including the master.
Table 6.6.7 Number of Units and Function Code
Item Function o34 value Remarks

1 1 master + 1 slave = System with total of 2 units
2 1 master + 2 slaves = System with total of 3 units
Function code Multi-system
o34 slave count
Setting example
(1) 2-unit system
Set o34=1 for all systems. Master Slave 1
(2) 4-unit system

Set o34=3 for all systems.
Note: Set the multi-system station addresses
(o50) in the order connected to the master.
<Bad setting example>
Master Slave 1 Slave 2 Slave 3
Master (o50=0), slave 1 (o50=2)
Slave 2 (o50=1), slave 3 (o50=3)
* Bad setting is underlined.
Figure 6.6.7
When the o34 setting is not correct, the system may not operate with no alarm indication. Check the
setting again.
6-122
6.6.5.2 Switching multi- and single-motor drive
You can cancel the multi-winding motor Optical communication

光通信
drive and switch to the normal [FWD]

【FWD】
TBSI(MWS) TBSI(MWS)
single-winding motor drive using the FRENIC-VG FRENIC-VG
[MT-CCL]
【MT-CCL】
external digital input signal MT-CCL. slave
スレーブ master
マスタ
[MC]
【CM】
Figure 6.6.8 shows a simple connection
example to switch between the Switch
切替
two-winding and single-winding motor
drive. In this case, the slave inverter unit PG PG
does not need the operation command as
well as the PG and NTC signal feedback. Two
2巻線 Switch
Single-
単巻線
-winding 切替 winding
モータモータ
When switching the motors, it is also motor motor
required to switch the PG and NTC
Chap. 6
signals in addition to the secondary power
line.
If switching is also required for the slave, Figure 6.6.8
CONTROL OPTIONS
you need to manipulate the MT-CCL
signal.
Table 6.6.8 Multi-Winding/Single-Winding Switching Specifications
Item Function Setting Remarks

0: Disabled Be sure to set to "1" when driving the
(single-winding drive) multi-winding motor.
1: Multi-winding system
Function code Multi-system
2: Multi-system 1
o33 control method
3: Multi-system 2
4: Reserved 1
5: Reserved 2
With function code o33=1 "Multi-winding
system enabled"
Digital Multi-system Set value 57
Contact ON (closed): Single-winding drive
input signal cancellation MT-CCL
(multi-winding cancelled)
Contact OFF (open): Multi-winding drive
6-123
6.6.6 Preparation for operation
・ After installation, cabling, and switch setting have been done, check the following before powering on the
inverter:
(1) Cabling is correct.
(2) No wire dust or screw is left.
(3) Screws and terminals are not loose.
(4) Wire of the press-fit terminal does not contact other terminals.
Refer to Chapter 3 "Preparation and Test Run" for preparation.
6.6.6.1 Operation
(1) Power on
If any one of the inverter units within a multi-winding system is not powered on and operation is started, the
inter-inverter link error "erb" occurs. However, no alarm will be indicated until you start operation (FWD,
REV).
It is not required to power on the inverters simultaneously or power them on in a particular sequence.
Since no alarm will be indicated until you start operation (FWD, REV), you can power them on in an
arbitrary order.
(2) Setting before operation
Some function code settings need to be the same between the master and slave(s). If they differ, normal operation
is not possible.
Set the following function codes to the same values for the master and slave(s) before operation. While
they are set to the same values at factory, you need to check them again.
Table 6.6.9
Codes set to be same Function Remarks

F03 - F05, P, A all codes Motor constant Be sure to set them correctly.
F36 30Ry mode Required to design a failure sequence externally.
F80 Current rating Be sure to set them correctly.
switching
H04, H05 Retry operation You do not need to set them if the retry operation is not
enabled.
o33 and o34 Multi-winding Be sure to set them correctly.
dedicated code
6-124
(3) Operation method
・ Give the operation and speed commands to the master only.

・ Connect the PG and NTC feedback signals to the master only.
(PG connection is not necessary for sensorless operation.)
・ If the feedback is supplied to the slave(s) only, correct operation is not possible.
(3)-1 Operation and command input

Give the commands (speed, torque,
torque limiting) to the master inverter
unit only. Optically linked slave
inverter units can be considered as
hardware which only controls current.
Chap. 6
The operation method and command
input method are the same as the
standard product.
CONTROL OPTIONS
Figure 6.6.9
6-125
(3)-2 I/O function
You can use the master in the same way as the standard product.
The functionality of the slave is restricted as listed below.
Table 6.6.10
Available functions for multi-winding slave

Terminal symbol Remarks
(Functions not listed are unavailable.）
Coast to stop command BX Causes all units of the system to coast to stop.
Error reset RST Resets all units of the system.
External alarm THR
Motor M2 selection M-CH2
Motor M3 selection M-CH3
DI Keypad edit permission command WE-KP

Universal DI U-DI
Short voltage cancel LU-CCL
Multi-system cancel MT-CCL
Causes all units of the system to coast to stop.
Safety function input terminal EN1, EN2 However, output shutdown by hardware is done only
for units which have detected the signal.
Functions with the operation information from the
Operating RUN
master.
Operation preparation completed RDY
Motor M2 selected SW-2
Output with alarm information from the master
Alarm contents AL1 - 4
added.
Cooling fan operating FAN
Universal DO U-DO
Cooling fin overheat prediction INV-OH
Life prediction LIFE
Inverter overload prediction INV-OL
DB overload prediction DB-OL
DO Transmission error LK-ERR
Multi-system communication established MTS
Multi-system cancel response MEC-AB
Multi-system self station failure AL-SF
Batch alarm ALM
Light alarm L-ALM
Maintenance prediction MNT
Braking transistor error DBAL
DC fan lock signal DCFL
73 input command PRT-73F
Y terminal test output ON Y-ON
Y terminal test output OFF Y-OFF
AI All invalidated
Torque current command Outputs the torque current command from the
IT-REF±
(torque ammeter, swing in both directions) master.
Torque current command
IT-REF+
(torque ammeter, swing in one direction)
AO Motor current I-AC
Motor voltage V-AC
DC intermediate voltage VDC
+10, -10V test P10, N10
(Note) 0 display for A0, unless otherwise noted.

6-126
(3)-3 Keypad function

You can use the master in the same way as the standard product.
Only the functions listed below are available for the slave. Functions not listed are disabled (0 is displayed).
Table 6.6.11 LED Monitor
Name Remarks
Output frequency command value Displays the primary square frequency command value from the master.
Torque current command value Displays the torque current command value from the master.
Calculated torque value Displays the calculated torque value for a single slave.
Detected output current value Displays the detected current value for a single slave.
Detected output voltage value Displays the detected voltage value for a single slave.
Detected DC intermediate voltage Displays the detected intermediate voltage value for a single slave.
value
Calculated magnetic flux value Displays the calculated magnetic flux value for a single slave.
Chap. 6
Table 6.6.12 Operation Status Monitor
CONTROL OPTIONS
Name Remarks
Output frequency command value Displays the primary square frequency command value from the master.
Detected output current value Displays the detected current value for a single slave.
Detected output voltage value Displays the detected voltage value for a single slave.
Table 6.6.13 Alarm Information
Name Remarks
Output frequency at an alarm Displays the primary square frequency command value from the master.
occurrence command value
Detected output current value at an Displays the detected current value for a single slave.
alarm occurrence
Detected output voltage value at an Displays the detected voltage value for a single slave.
alarm occurrence
Accumulated operation time upon Single slave
alarm occurrence
Motor output command value upon Outputs the value multiplied by the number of inverters.
alarm occurrence
Inverter temperature upon alarm Displays the internal temperature of a single slave.
occurrence
Cooling fin temperature upon alarm Cooling fin temperature of a single slave
occurrence
Communication status upon alarm
occurrence (four points)
* In addition, I/O check, maintenance information, load rate measurement, I/O status upon alarm, alarm history, and copy
functions are all enabled.
6-127
(3)-4 Function code (F - U)
You can use the master in the same
0: Setting is disabled.
way as the standard product. The 1: Setting is enabled (and must be the same as the master).
functionality of the slave is 2: Setting is enabled (and does not need to be the same as the master).
restricted as listed below. Refer to 3: Setting is enabled (and setting specific to multi-winding is necessary).
the following table to confirm the

restrictions on the slave. In
particular, make sure to set the
codes indicated as "1" to the same
values between the master and
slave.
Table 6.6.14 F00 to F85 on Slave
Code Class Code Class Code Class Code Class Code Class Code Class Code Class Code Class
F00 2 F11 0 F24 0 F42 0 F51 2 F60 2 F69 0 F80 1
F01 0 F12 0 F26 0 F43 0 F52 2 F61 0 F70 0 F81 0
F02 2 F14 0 F27 0 F44 0 F53 2 F62 0 F73 0 F82 0
F03 1 F17 0 F36 1 F45 0 F54 2 F63 0 F74 0 F83 0
F04 1 F18 0 F37 0 F46 0 F55 2 F64 0 F75 0 F84 2
F05 1 F20 0 F38 0 F47 0 F56 2 F65 0 F76 0 F85 0
F07 0 F21 0 F39 0 F48 0 F57 2 F66 0 F77 0
F08 0 F22 0 F40 0 F49 0 F58 2 F67 0 F78 0
F10 0 F23 0 F41 0 F50 0 F59 2 F68 0 F79 2
Table 6.6.15 E01 to E118 on Slave
E01 2 E14 2 E27 2 E40 0 E53 0 E66 0 E79 2 E106 0
E02 2 E15 2 E28 2 E41 0 E54 0 E67 0 E80 2 E107 0
E03 2 E16 2 E29 0 E42 0 E55 0 E68 0 E81 2 E108 0
E04 2 E17 2 E30 0 E43 0 E56 0 E69 2 E82 2 E109 0
E05 2 E18 2 E31 0 E44 0 E57 0 E70 2 E83 2 E110 0
E06 2 E19 2 E32 0 E45 0 E58 0 E71 2 E84 2 E114 0
E07 2 E20 2 E33 0 E46 0 E59 0 E72 2 E90 0 E115 0
E08 2 E21 2 E34 0 E47 0 E60 0 E73 2 E91 0 E116 0
E09 2 E22 2 E35 2 E48 0 E61 0 E74 2 E101 0 E117 0
E10 2 E23 2 E36 2 E49 0 E62 0 E75 2 E102 0 E118 0
E11 2 E24 2 E37 2 E50 0 E63 0 E76 2 E103 0
E12 2 E25 2 E38 0 E51 0 E64 0 E77 2 E104 0
E13 2 E26 2 E39 0 E52 0 E65 0 E78 2 E105 0
Note: For E01 - E13, E15 - E27, and E69 - E73, only the functions listed in Table 6.6.10 are available.
* C01 - C73: All 0
* P01 to P27: 1, P28 to P58: 0
6-128
Table 6.6.16 H01 to H227 on Slave
H01 0 H20 0 H36 2 H53 0 H74 0 H90 0 H118 1
H02 2 H21 0 H37 2 H55 0 H75 0 H142 2
H03 2 H22 0 H38 2 H56 0 H76 2 H149 0
H04 1 H23 0 H39 2 H57 0 H77 2 H105 2
H05 1 H24 0 H40 2 H58 0 H78 2 H106 2
H06 2 H25 0 H41 0 H60 0 H79 2 H107 2
H08 0 H26 0 H42 0 H61 0 H80 2 H108 2
H09 0 H27 0 H43 0 H62 0 H81 2 H109 2
H10 0 H28 0 H44 0 H63 0 H82 2 H110 2
H11 0 H29 2 H46 0 H64 0 H83 2 H111 2
H13 0 H30 1 H47 0 H65 0 H84 2 H112 1
H14 0 H31 2 H48 0 H66 0 H85 2 H113 1
Chap. 6
H15 0 H32 2 H49 0 H67 0 H86 2 H114 1
H16 0 H33 2 H50 0 H68 2 H87 2 H115 1
H17 0 H34 2 H51 0 H70 0 H88 2 H116 1
H19 0 H35 2 H52 0 H71 0 H117 1
CONTROL OPTIONS
＊ H201 - H227: All 0
＊ A01 - A29，A32 - A34: 1，A30，A31，A51，A71 - A74: 0
A101 - A129，A132 - A134: 1，A130，A131，A151，A171 - A174: 0
Table 6.6.17 o01 to o50 on Slave
o01 0 o04 0 o07 0 o13 0 o16 0 o19 0 o32 2 o50 3
o02 0 o05 0 o08 0 o14 0 o17 0 o30 2 o33 3
o03 0 o06 0 o12 0 o15 0 o18 0 o31 2 o34 3
＊ L01- L15: All 0
＊ U code: All 2
(3)-5 Function code (S: Command data)

You can use the master in the same way as the standard product. The functionality of the slave is
restricted to S06 "Operation command 1" and S07 "Universal DO". However, the functions listed in
Table 6.6.10 are only available.
6-129
(3)-6 Function code (M: Monitor)
You can use the master in the same way as the 0: Data becomes 0.
standard product. The functionality of the slave 1: Data is valid.
2: Data is valid (shows data specific to multi-winding)
is restricted as listed below. Refer to the
following table to confirm the restrictions on the
slave.
Table 6.6.18 M01 to M222 on Slave
M01 0 M22 0 M43 1 M65 1 M86 1 M114 0 M139 1 M162 0
M02 0 M23 1 M44 1 M66 1 M91 1 M115 1 M140 1 M163 0
M03 1 M24 1 M45 1 M67 1 M92 1 M116 1 M141 1 M164 0
M04 0 M25 1 M46 1 M68 1 M93 1 M119 1 M142 1 M165 0
M05 1 M26 1 M47 1 M69 1 M94 1 M120 1 M143 1 M166 1
M06 1 M27 0 M48 1 M70 1 M95 1 M121 1 M144 1 M167 1
M07 1 M28 0 M49 0 M71 1 M96 1 M123 1 M147 0 M168 1
M08 1 M29 1 M50 0 M72 1 M100 1 M124 1 M148 1 M169 1
M09 1 M30 0 M51 0 M73 1 M101 1 M125 1 M149 1 M170 1
M10 2 M31 1 M52 1 M74 1 M102 0 M126 1 M150 1 M171 1
M11 1 M32 1 M53 1 M75 1 M103 1 M127 1 M151 1 M172 1
M12 1 M33 1 M54 1 M76 0 M104 1 M128 1 M152 1 M177 0
M13 1 M34 1 M55 1 M77 1 M105 1 M129 1 M153 1 M178 0
M14 1 M35 1 M56 1 M78 0 M106 0 M130 0 M154 1 M179 0
M15 1 M36 2 M57 1 M79 1 M107 0 M132 1 M155 1 M180 0
M16 1 M37 1 M58 1 M80 1 M108 0 M133 1 M156 1 M185 0
M17 1 M38 1 M59 1 M81 1 M109 0 M134 1 M157 1 M186 1
M18 1 M39 1 M60 1 M82 1 M110 0 M135 1 M158 1 M221 0
M19 1 M40 1 M62 1 M83 1 M111 1 M136 1 M159 1 M222 0
M20 1 M41 1 M63 1 M84 1 M112 0 M137 1 M160 1
M21 1 M42 1 M64 1 M85 1 M113 0 M138 1 M161 0
6-130
6.6.7 Protective Function
・ In a multi-system with two or more inverter units, if any one of the inverter enters an alarm state due to some
reason, continuing operation with the remaining unit(s) may not be able to provide sufficient torque and normal
operation of the system may not be possible. To prevent this situation, the multi-system puts all inverters linked
via the high-speed serial communication-capable terminal table in the alarm state in a moment (within several
milliseconds). You also need to design a sequence to stop all the inverters using 30X (Batch alarm output).
・ After the inverter protective function has acted and the cause has been removed, giving the alarm reset signal
with the operation command ON (closed) will start the inverters. To prevent an injury, check that the operation
command is OFF (open) before giving the alarm reset signal.
・ If the optical cable connecting the inverters get broken during operation, correct operation becomes impossible
and the inverters are forced to enter the alarm state (inter-inverter link error erb ). The motors will coast to
stop. This alarm does not act while the inverter is stopped.
Chap. 6
CONTROL OPTIONS
6.6.7.1 Inter-inverter link error (erb )
If the optical cable connecting the inverters get broken or comes off from the connector during operation,
the inverters are forced to enter the alarm state with the inter-inverter link error erb , and the motors will
coast to stop.
erb can occur if a related function code is not set correctly.
While the alarm cause is not resolved, giving the reset command (from the keypad, terminal block, or
communication system) does not cancel the alarm state. Be sure to resolve the cause before resetting the
system.
Troubleshooting erb
erb can be caused by the following reasons:
(1) The optical cable is not connected or inserted to the connector incompletely.
(2) The optical cable is bent with curvature of 35 mm or less.
(3) The colors of the optical cable plugs and the connectors of the print board (light gray and dark gray)
do not match.
(4) Optical cable connection does not form a loop. Be sure that signals from the master are looped back.
(5) Multi-system station address o50 settings are duplicated.
(6) The operation command (FWD/REV) was input before the optical link communication is
established.
(7) Strong light (e.g., flashlight) is applied to the optical fiber.
If the alarm erb cannot be cancelled after checking and removing these causes, the optical cable and/or
optical link option print board may be faulty. Contact your local sales office or service center.
6-131
6.6.7.2 Operation procedure error (er6 )
The operation procedure error (er6 ) can occur in the following cases:
(1) The multi-system station address o50 value is greater than the number of slave o34 value.
(2) The motor control method is set to other than vector control.
6.6.7.3 Process in Protective Operation

(1) Batch alarm process
When the master inverter unit enters the alarm state, the alarm is indicated on all stations via the
optical link, the 30X operation is executed, and the inverters are shut down.
* "o" (other station) is shown for alarm indication on the slave inverters.
Example: Inter-Inverter Link Error (erb )
Master inverter unit alarm indication : er6
Slave inverter unit alarm indication : oer6
When a slave inverter unit enters the alarm state, the alarm is indicated on all stations via the optical
link, the 30X operation is executed, and the inverters are shut down.
* "o" (other station) is shown for alarm indication on the master inverter.
Example: Inter-Inverter Link Error (erb )
Master inverter unit alarm indication : oer6
Slave inverter unit alarm indication : er6
(2) Reset process

When giving the reset command from the master, all stations are batch reset if the alarm cause has
been removed.
When giving the reset command from a slave, all stations are batch reset if the alarm cause has been
removed.
Table 6.6.19 Reset Target
Master alarm state Slave alarm state Reset target

Reset command from master Valid Valid All units
Reset command from slave Valid Valid All units
(3) Disabling disconnection detection

The slave inverter unit does not require feedback of the PG and NTC signals. Therefore, on an
inverter configured as a slave in a multi-system, PG and NTC disconnection detection is disabled.
6-132
6.7 CC-Link Interface Card

This card is used for a CC-Link master (Mitsubishi Electric PLC, etc.) to
control FRENIC-VG via CC-Link.
CC-Link is an abbreviation of Control & Communication Link developed by
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation as a next generation FA field network. The
CC-Link system connects input/output units, special function units (e.g.,
inverter), etc., via dedicated cables, allowing the CPU for PLC to control such
units. The CC-Link system can achieve wire-saving and high-speed data
communications.
Chap. 6
Major application
This card is available for the following.
CONTROL OPTIONS
・ Applicable for CC-Link Ver. 1.10 and Ver. 2.00
・ Supports new FRENIC-VG mode and existing FRENIC5000VG7 compatible mode
・ Input of signals for operation, stop, etc.；FWD, REV, X1 to X9, X11 to X14, RST
・ Setting of speed commands; 16-bit binary data
・ Monitoring running status (bit data)
Running forward, running reverse, with speed, speed match, arrival at speed, speed detection,
operation preparation completed, alarm relay output, during monitoring, speed setting completed,
command code execution completed, alarm state, remote station ready
・ Monitoring motor speed; 16-bit binary data
・ Monitoring running status (Word data)
Speed command, output frequency, torque command value, output current, output voltage,
cumulative run time, etc.
・ Reference/change of function codes
6-133
6.7.2.1 Model
Model content: OPC-VG1-CCL

Mounted inverter name VG1 -> FRENIC-VG
Option name: CCL -> CC-Link interface card
Accessories
Spacers: 3
Screws (M3): 3
・Incorrect setting of the switches (RSW1, 2, 3) on the option prevents the system from running normally. Fully
understand the following settings to set them correctly.
・When setting the switches (RSW1, 2, 3) on the option, turn OFF the power supply to the inverter.
Item Specifications
Name CC-Link Interface Card
Station type Remote device station
Number of units connectable Up to 42 units, which can be shared with other models*1
Number of stations occupied 1 station occupied (all Ver. 1, Ver. 2)
Terminal block for Five terminal blocks (M3 X 5 screws)
connection
Connection cable CC-Link dedicated cable, and cable applicable for CC-Link Ver. 1.10
* The recommended CC-Link cable is FANC-110SBH made by Kuramo Electric
Co., Ltd.
For details, refer to CC-Link Catalog or Mitsubishi Electric Corporation FA
Equipment Technical Information Service MELFANS website
(http://www.nagoya.melco.co.jp/). For details about wiring for CC-Link, refer to
the CC-Link Master User's Manual or CC-Link Cable Wiring Manual published by
the CC-Link Partner Association.
The CC-Link Cable Wiring Manual is available as a free download from the
CC-Link Partner Association's website (http://www.cc-link.org/jp/material/).
Rotary switch RSW1, 2 Station address setting. Addresses 1 to 64 can be specified.
Rotary switch RSW3 Transmission speed (baud rate) can be specified: 10 M, 5 M, 2.5 M, 625 K, 156
Kbps
LED status indicators L.RUN:..... Lights when the communications card is normally receiving refresh
data.
It goes off if data transmission is interrupted for a certain period of
time.
L.ERR: ..... Lights when a communication error occurs in this station.
The LED blinks when the rotary switch is operated while the power is
turned ON.
SD:............ Lights during data transmission.
RD: ........... Lights during data reception.
6-134
*1 Number of units connectable Since the number of stations occupied differs depending on the use of a
different unit (remote I/O station or remote device station) or use of different profiles, both the
formulae must be satisfied.
Formula 1: (1xa) + (2xb) + (3xc) + (4xd) 64
a: Number with 1 station occupied, b: Number with 2 stations occupied, c: Number with 3
stations occupied, d: Number with 4 stations occupied
Formula 2: (16xA) + (54xB) + (88xC) 2304
A: Remote I/O station................................................................................ Max. 64 units

B: Remote device station........................................................................... Max. 42 units
C: Local station, standby master station, intelligent device station ........... Max. 26 units
Rotary switch RSW1, 2

Before turning on the power supply to the inverter, specify inverter station addresses
Chap. 6
in the range of 1 to 64.
Note 1: Do not change station address settings when the
×10 ×1
inverter power is ON. If a station address is changed
CONTROL OPTIONS
when the power is ON, the station address after the
change is not available to provide data communications.
RSW1 RSW2 Note 2: If a station address is double assigned or is set out of
STATION No. the allowable range, normal communications cannot be
carried out. (L.ERR LED lights.）
Figure 6.7.2
Note 3: Specify consecutive station addresses in connection
order. (If station addresses are not specified
consecutively, specify a "reserved station address" for
each skipped station address.)
Transmission baud rate setting switch RSW3

Before turning on the power supply to the inverter, specify transmission baud rate in
the range of 0 to 4.
Figure 6.7.1 Table 6.7.2 Baud rate specification
Number Baud rate

0 156 Kbps（Factory default）
RSW3 1 625 Kbps

2 2.5 Mbps
B.RATE
3 5 Mbps
Figure 6.7.3 4 10 Mbps
5-9 Setting error (L.ERR LED lights)
LED status indicators

The link status of CC-Link can be checked with four LEDs.
6-135
Table 6.7.3 LED status indicator specifications
Status
Operation Status
L.RUN L.ERR SD RD
● ○ ★ ● Normal communications
Normally communicating. But sometimes a CRC error occurs
● ★ ★ ●
due to electrical noise.
Received data contains a CRC error, so the communications
● ★ ○ ●
card cannot respond.
● ○ ○ ● Data destined for this station does not come.
Responding to polling. But refresh data received contains a
○ ★ ★ ●
CRC error.
○ ★ ○ ● Data destined for this station contains a CRC error.
No data destined for this station. Or data destined for this
○ ○ ○ ●
station cannot be received due to electrical noise.
○ ● ○ ●○ Baud rate, station address incorrectly specified.
★
(0.8-second
● ★ ● Baud rate or station address changed before completion.
intervals)
○ ○ ★ ● Link has not been started up.

Data cannot be received due to wire break, power down,
○ ○ ○ ○
hardware reset in progress, er3 power area failure
●: ON, ○: OFF, ★: Blinking (It may seem to be ON depending on the current transmission baud rate.)
Note 1: If LED lights due to a pattern other than the above, it can be assumed hardware error has occurred. Contact
us.
6-136
Terminal block Table 6.7.4 Terminal Block Specifications
ID Color
FG SLD DG DB DA
Terminal of
Description Remarks
Name Wire
Figure 6.7.4 Sheath
DA Blue
DB White For communication data
DG Yellow
For connecting shielded SLD and FG are
SLD Metallic
wire of cable connected within the
FG - For earth card.
Table 6.7.5 Software specifications
Chap. 6
Item Specifications
CC-Link version Ver. 1.10 and Ver. 2.00 (Selectable with function code o32)
Run forward and reverse commands, Alarm reset command, X1 to X9 and X11 to X13
Run command
CONTROL OPTIONS
commands
Operation
Speed command 16-bit binary data

Bit data for running, braking, torque limiting, alarm relay output signal, etc.
Running status output
Word data for motor speed, torque current command, etc.
VG1 mode (Ver. 1/Ver. 2): All function codes can be referred to or changed.
Function code VG7 compatible mode (Ver. 1): 255 types of function codes assigned to link Nos. in the
function code list can be referred to or changed.
Option function code o30, o31, o32 .....................................The factory default is “0”.
er4 : Network error (CC-Link error)
* Light alarm: Communications link error
Protective functions (Function codes o30 and o31 are available to control the er4 alarm.)
* Heavy alarm: Option card error, CC-Link version error
(The stop method can be selected with function code o30 or o31.)
* Light alarm: If signal noise or others do not occur frequently, er4 alarm function codes o30 and o31 are available for
control.
* Heavy alarm: Fatal failure, such as hardware failure
6-137
6.7.3 External dimension drawing
17
Tightening
torque
0.4 N·m
(Unit: mm)
Figure 6.7.5 Option PCB Outline Drawing
6-138

Refer to “6.1.4 Installing internal options (OPC-VG1-□□)”, and then perform wiring and connecting jobs.
・ Incorrect handling in connecting wires could cause an accident such as electric shock or fire. Qualified
electricians should carry out connecting wires. If connecting wires, for example, after the power is turned ON
requires any touching of an electric circuit, turn OFF (open) the breaker on the power supply side to prevent
electric shock.
・ Since the smoothing condenser has been charged although the breaker is turned OFF (open), touching of an
electric circuit causes an electric shock. Turn OFF the charge lamp (CHARGE) of the inverter, and confirm,
with a tester, etc., that the DC voltage of the inverter has been reduced to the safety voltage.
・ Do not use the product that is damaged or lacking parts. Doing so could cause injury or damage.
Chap. 6
・ Incorrect handling in installation/removal could result in a broken product.
The basic connection diagram is shown below. When connecting the communications card, observe the
CONTROL OPTIONS
[Connecting precautions]
(1) Use dedicated cables (refer to 6. 7.2.2 “Specifications") for CC-Link connection.
Be sure not to use soldered cables, which could cause disconnection or wire break.
(2) Use terminating registers that came with the PLC.
(3) For the maximum number of communications cards, refer to the number of units connectable in 6.
7.2.2 “Specifications".
When an inverter is connected
CC-Link master FRENIC-VG

R U
Power supply S V M
T W ３～
CC-Link dedicated cable OPC-VG1-CCL

DA DA G
DB DB
DG DG
SLD SLD
FG FG
Figure 6.7.6 Inverter connection diagram (1 unit)
When two or more inverters are connected
For the number of inverters connectable, refer to Section 6.7.2.2 "Specifications."
FRENIC-VG invertor FRENIC-VG invertor

CC-Link master OPC-VG1-CCL OPC-VG1-CCL
DA DA DA
Terminating DB DB DB Terminating
register DG DG DG register
CC-Link CC-Link
SLD dedicated cable SLD dedicated cable SLD
FG FG FG
Figure 6.7.7 Inverter Connection Diagram (Two or More Inverters)
6-139
6.7.5 Function code
・ Configuring the function codes wrongly may lead to dangerous conditions. When data has been set or written,
be sure to confirm the data again.
6.7.5.1 Standard function code

Standard function codes accessible from CC-Link differ depending on profile selection (o32). They are as
shown in Table 6.7.6.
Note 1: When function codes are written via CC-Link, they are all written into volatile memory (RAM:
data in memory is erased by turning off the power supply). Turning OFF the control power to the inverter
therefore erases written data. Execute function code H02 "Save All Function", if necessary, to write data
into non-volatile memory (EEPROM: data in memory is not erased even by turning OFF the power
supply).
Table 6.7.6 Standard Function Codes Accessible from CC-Link
Profile selection (o32) Accessible standard function code

VG7 compatible mode (o32=0） Only the function codes corresponding to link No *1 in the function code
list can be referred to and changed.
VG1 mode (o32=1 to 4) Function codes (almost all function codes *2) corresponding to 485No *1
in the function code list can be referred to and changed.
*1 For 485No and link No, refer to Chapter 4, Section 4.2 “Function Code Tables."
*2 Excepting for writing H01 and P02, all function codes are accessible.
6.7.5.2 Communication dedicated function codes

Common data formats (S code and M code) are available as communication dedicated specifications.
Excepting standard function codes, command/monitor related data is defined. For details on the
communication dedicated function codes, refer to Chapter 4. However, when the following
communication dedicated codes are written via CC-Link, the restrictions shown in Table 6.7.7 are applied.
(They can be read.)
Table 6.7.7 Restrictions on Writing of Communication Dedicated Function Codes
Profile selection (o32) Restrictions on Writing of Communication Dedicated Function Codes

VG7 compatible mode (o32=0） No data can be written into S01 speed command or S06 operation
command 1.
VG1 mode (o32=1 to 4) Restrictions on writing are not applied.
However, if speed command by writing S01/S06, operation command,
remote output, speed command by remote register, and operation command
are carried out simultaneously, priority is given to the remote output and
remote register.
6-140
6.7.5.3 Option dedicated function codes

Reloading the CC-Link card can operate o30 to o32 not only as standard function codes but also as option
dedicated function codes.
Table 6.7.8 Option Dedicated Function Codes
Function code name

No. Keypad Setting range Description
Name
display
If a failure occurs, and remains unsolved even after
Light the operation continues for the time of the timer
alarm (o31), the motor coasts to stop with er4 alarm
0 generated.
Heavy If a failure occurs, immediate coast to a stop. Then
alarm er4 alarm is generated.
If a failure occurs, and remains unsolved even after
Light
Chap. 6
the operation continues for the time of the timer
alarm
1 (o31), the er4 alarm is generated after stoppage.
Heavy If a failure occurs, er4 alarm is generated after
Operation when an alarm deceleration to stop.
o30 error occurs MODE ON ER
CONTROL OPTIONS
Note 1 If a failure occurs, and remains unsolved even after
the operation continues for the time of the timer
Light
(o31), er4 is displayed after stoppage (without
alarm
2 alarm relay output). The motor restarts after
returning to communications.
alarm deceleration to stop.
Light
When a failure occurs, er4 alarm is not generated.
alarm
3
alarm deceleration to stop.
Operation time
0.01 to 0.10 to Timer value for operation continuation time upon light alarm
o31 when an error TIMER TL
20.00s (enabled with o30=0, 1 ,2)
occurs
VG7 compatible mode with 1 station occupied (CC-Link
0
Ver. 1)
1 1 X mode with 1 station occupied (CC-Link Ver. 1)
Format selection
o32 FORMAT SEL
Note 2 2 2 X mode with 1 station occupied (CC-Link Ver. 2)
Note 1: For details on o30 and o31, refer to 6.7.6 “Protection operation."
Note 2: If the o32 value has been changed, the inverter power must be turned ON again to reflect the change content upon the
operation.
6-141
6.7.6 Protection operation
6.7.6.1 Light alarm and heavy alarm
Light alarm or heavy alarm is generated in the CC-Link card, depending on an error level. Occurrence of
such an error makes the inverter generate er4 "Network error" alarm, resulting in coast to stop or
deceleration to stop.
Table 6.7.9 Light Alarm and Heavy Alarm

Light alarm
Item Heavy alarm (in case of option error)
(operation in case of CC-Link error)
・Master down, wire break detection
・Option card hardware error
Cause of the error ・Communication data error (Noise applied to
・Defective installation of option card
communications line, etc.)
Perform resetting after removal of alarm cause After the inverter power is turned OFF, remove
Reset method Note 2 (automatic release after returning to communications). the alarm cause, and then turn ON the inverter
Note 1: power.
・ Only in CC-Link operation mode (refer to “6.7.13
Function code o30 or o31 is available to control
Link Function"), error is detected
Alarm output control the alarm output method when an error is
・ Function code o30 or o31 is available to control the
detected.
alarm output method when an error is detected.
Communications error
2 3
code Note 5
Table 6.7.10 Operation in Case of Light Alarm (CC-Link Error)

When an error occurs in Communication error remains after the time
When communications error is removed
o30 communications line specified by o31
setting Operation Alarm relay Operation Alarm relay Operation Alarm relay
Display Display Display
status output status output status output
Operation Normal Immediately Stop status er4 Output
0 Not output Coast to a stop Output
continues display er4 lights continues continues continues
Decelerate to
Operation Normal After stop After stop Stop status er4 Output
1 Not output stop
continues display er4 lights output continues continues continues
Note 3
Decelerate to
Operation Normal After stop Restart Normal
2 Not output stop Not output Not output
continues display er4 lights Note 3 display
Note 3, Note 4
Operation Normal
3 Not output ← ← ← ← ← ←
continues display
Table 6.7.11 Operation in Case of Heavy Alarm (Option Error)

Communication error remains after the
When an option error occurs When the option error is removed
o30 time specified by o31
setting Operation Alarm relay Operation Alarm relay Operation Alarm relay
Display Display Display
status output status output status output
Immediate
Immediately Stop status er4 Output
0 Coast to a stop output ← ← ←
er4 lights continues continues continues
Decelerate to
After stop After stop Stop status er4 Output
1 stop ← ← ←
er4 lights output continues continues continues
Note 3
Decelerate to
2 stop ← ← ←
Note 3
Decelerate to
3 stop ← ← ←
Note 3
Note 1: "Perform resetting" means reset input by one of the following methods.
* Entry by _ key on the keypad
* Error reset [RST] is assigned by selecting X function to set the applicable X terminal to ON (assigned to X8 by factory
default).
* Entry of reset command from communications
6-142
Note 2: In case of light alarm (o30=0/1), resetting can be performed unless alarm cause has been removed completely. In case of the
light alarm (o30=2) or heavy alarm, however, resetting cannot be done until the cause has completely been removed.
Note 3: With o30=1, 2, or 3: For deceleration to stop, the motor stops with the time of deceleration (F08, C47, C57, or C67)
specified at that time.
With o30=2: For restart, the motor accelerates in the acceleration time (F07, C46, C56, or C66) specified at that time.
Note 4: With o30=2, if an error in communications circuit is removed during deceleration, the motor reaccelerates at that time.
Note 5: Communications error codes for light alarm/heavy alarm can be confirmed on the communications status screen for
maintenance information of the keypad.
ＮＲＫ＝×××××
ＮＲＲ＝××××× ×× -: Without error
ＮＲＯ＝××××× ×× 2: Light alarm (CC-Link error)
ＮＲＬ＝××××× ×× 3: Heavy alarm (Option error)
Figure 6.7.8 Communication Error Codes
Chap. 6
CONTROL OPTIONS
6-143
6.7.6.2 Protection Operation Function Codes
This section describes operation to be performed when communications link errors occur in a state, where
running command or speed command is given via CC-Link, while the inverter is running.
(1) Function code o30=0, o31=5.00 (Communication error continues for 5 or more seconds, and the
motor coasts to stop)
[LK-ERR] Communications status Normal Normal
Batch failure ON
Display Ordinary Er 4 Ordinary
[LES] or Stopped due to ON
[C-D09] communications error
＊1
FWD ON
Command
from master Speed command
5.00s
Run command Operation
Internal operation
of FRENIC-VG Speed command
Speed detection Free run

The motor is accelerated to the command speed
even if a transmission error occurs during Alarm reset
acceleration.
Figure 6.7.9
motor decelerates to stop)
Figure 6.7.10
*1) For the period until the recovery of communications, the command just before the occurrence of the communications error (run
command and/or speed command) is retained.
*2) During DC braking [DCBRK] or pre-exciting [EXITE] in deceleration to stop, alarm relay output is not performed until the stop
of these commands.
6-144
motor decelerates to stop)
[LK-ERR] Communications status Normal Normal
Batch failure
Display Ordinary Er 4 Ordinary
[C-D09] Stopped due to ON
＊1
FWD ON
Command
from master Speed command
5.00s
Run command Operation Stop Operation

Internal operation
Speed command
Chap. 6
of FRENIC-VG
Speed detection
The motor is accelerated to the command speed
even if a transmission error occurs during acceleration.
CONTROL OPTIONS
Figure 6.7.11
(4) Function code o30=2, o31=5.00 (After communication error continues for 5 or more seconds, returns
to communications during deceleration to stop)
Figure 6.7.12
6-145
(5) For function code o30=3 (operation continues)
Figure 6.7.13
6-146
6.7.7 Applicable format list

This option card supports formats shown in Table 6.7.12.
Table 6.7.12 Applicable Format List
Function
Name Initial value Setting Description Reference page
code
VG7 compatible mode with 1 station occupied
0 6-6-148
(CC-Link Ver. 1) *2
o32 Format 1 1 X mode with 1 station occupied (CC-Link Ver. 1) 6-6-153

0
*1 selection 2 2 X mode with 1 station occupied (CC-Link Ver. 2) *3 6-6-159
3 4 X mode with 1 station occupied (CC-Link Ver. 2) *3 6-6-160
4 8 X mode with 1 station occupied (CC-Link Ver. 2) *3 6-6-162
*1 If the o32 value has been changed, the inverter power must be turned ON again to reflect the change content upon the operation.
*2 The program used for the FRENIC5000VG7S series is available.
Chap. 6
*3 When 2 X, 4 X, or 8 X mode of CC-Link Ver. 2 is used, station information at the master station must also be set to 2 X, 4 X, or
8 X, respectively.
CONTROL OPTIONS
6-147
6.7.8 VG7 compatible mode with 1 station occupied (o32=0）
6.7.8.1 Remote I/O signal in the VG7 compatible mode
Table 6.7.13 Remote Output Signal in VG7 Compatible Mode (Master -> FRENIC-VG)
Device No. Signal name Description

RYn0 Run forward OFF: Stop command Simultaneously turning
command ON: Run forward command (counterclockwise viewed from the RYn0 and RYn1 ON is
motor axis direction) functionally equivalent
to a stop command.
RYn1 Run reverse OFF: Stop command
command ON: Run reverse command (counterclockwise viewed from the
motor axis direction)
RYn2 Terminal X1 Multiple speed (SS1/SS2/SS4/SS8) is selectable by combinations Functions to be provided
function of terminals. by factory default are
shown at left. Setting
RYn3 Terminal X2
terminal X function can
function
change the function of
RYn4 Terminal X3 terminal X.
function
RYn5 Terminal X4
function
RYn6 Terminal X5 ASR and acceleration/deceleration (RT1/RT2) can be selected by
function combinations of terminals.
RYn7 Terminal X6
function
RYn8 Terminal X8 Works as error reset (RST) when turned ON.
function
RYn9 Terminal X7 Works as coast to stop command (BX) when turned ON. (output
function shut down on the secondary side)
RYnA Not used. Should be turned OFF.
RYnB
RYnC Monitor command Turning the monitor command (RYnC) ON sets the monitored value to RWrn, turning the
"Monitoring" signal (RXnC) ON. Note 1
RYnD Speed setting Turning the speed setting command (RYnD) ON writes the speed command (RWwn+1) into
command (RAM) the inverter's volatile memory (RAM). Note 2
Upon completion of writing, the speed setting completed signal (RXnD) is turned ON.
RYnE Not used. Should be turned OFF.
RYnF Command code Turning the command code request signal (RYnF) ON executes processing corresponding to
execution request command codes specified in the command code (RWwn+2). Note 3
After execution of those command codes, the "Command code execution completed" signal
(RXnF) is turned ON. If a command code execution error occurs, the response code
(RWrn+2) is set to a value other than "0".
RY(n+1)0 Not used. Should be turned OFF.
|
RY(n+1)9
RY(n+1)A Alarm reset When an inverter alarm is generated, turning the alarm reset request flag ON resets the
request flag inverter, turning the alarm status flag (RX(n+1)A) OFF. Note 4
RY(n+1)B Not used. Should be turned OFF.
|
RY(n+1)F
n: Value determined by a station address
Note 1: While the "Monitor command" (RYnC) is ON, the monitored values are constantly updated.
Note 2: While the "Speed setting" (RYnD) is ON, the value of speed command (RWwn+1) is constantly reflected on the speed.
Note 3: While the command code execution request is ON, the command code is constantly executed. (When reading, the read value
is constantly updated. When writing, the written value is constantly reflected.)
Note 4: When the "Alarm reset request flag" signal (RY(n+1)A) is ON, alarm reset is constantly executed. After the release of the
alarm, this signal should therefore be turned OFF. Alarm reset can be done regardless of operation mode.
6-148
Table 6.7.14 Remote Input Signal in VG7 Compatible Mode (FRENIC-VG -> Master)

RXn0 Running forward OFF: Except running in forward direction (Stopped or Rotating in reverse direction)
ON: Rotating in forward direction
RXn1 Running reverse OFF: Except running in reverse direction (Stopped or Rotating in forward direction)
ON: Rotating in reverse direction
RXn2 Terminal Y1 With speed. Turned ON with (N-EX) Functions to be provided
function by factory default are
RXn3 Terminal Y2 Speed match. Turned ON with (N-AG1).
terminal Y function can
function
change output contents.
RXn4 Terminal Y3 Arrival at speed. Turned ON with (N-AR).
function
RXn5 Terminal Y4 Speed detection 1. Turned ON with (N-DT1)
function
RXn6 Terminal Y5 Operation preparation completed. Turned ON with (RDY).
function
Chap. 6
RXn7 Alarm relay output Inverter's protection function is operated, and the signal is turned
ON when output stops.
RXn8 Not used. -
|
CONTROL OPTIONS
RXnB
RXnC Monitoring The "Monitoring" signal (RXnC) is turned ON when turning the "Monitor command" (RYnC)
ON specifies a monitored value for remote register RWrn (refer to Table 6.7.16). Turning the
"Monitor command" (RYnC) OFF turns this signal OFF.
RXnD Speed setting This signal is turned ON when turning the "Speed setting command" signal (RYnD) ON
completed (RAM) writes a speed command into the inverter's volatile memory (RAM). Turning the "Speed
setting command" signal (RYnD) OFF turns the "Speed setting completed" signal (RXnD)
OFF.
RXnE Not used. -
RXnF Command code This signal is turned ON when turning the "Command code execution request" (RYnF) ON
execution has completed the execution of processing corresponding to the command code (RWwn+2).
completed Turning the "Command code execution request" (RYnF) OFF turns the "Command code
execution completed" signal (RXnF) OFF.
RX(n+1)0 Not used. -
|
RX(n+1)9
RX(n+1)A Alarm state flag This signal is turned ON when an inverter alarm (alarm other than er3 ) is generated.
RX(n+1)B Remote station This signal is turned ON when completing initial data setting places the inverter in the ready
ready status after the inverter has been powered ON or the hardware has been reset. (This signal is
used for interlocking with reading or writing from/to the master unit.) This signal is turned
OFF concurrently when the "Alarm state flag" (RX(n+1)A) is turned ON if the inverter alarm
is generated.
RX(n+1)C Not used. -
|
RX(n+1)F
Note 1: When the condition setting switch of the master unit for "Input data status of data link error station (SW4)" is set to ON,
input data from the data link error station is retained in the status just before the occurrence of the error. Note that this
remains signals, e.g., remote station ready, etc., ON even if an inverter alarm is generated.
Note 2: If an operation command is output from the master when the instruction via communications is disabled (H30=0, 1, or [LE]
instruction OFF), the inverter does not run. However, the input signals "Speed setting completed" and "Command code
execution completed" signal are turned ON. Care must be taken for this. In addition, "I/O check" can be performed on the
keypad to confirm whether input signal is issued from the link (COM), even if the command via communications is disabled.
6-149
6.7.8.2 Remote register in VG7 compatible mode (o32=0)
Table 6.7.15 Remote Register in VG7 Compatible Mode (Master -> FRENIC-VG)
Address Signal name Description Remarks

RWwn+0 Monitor code This signal sets a monitor code to be referred to (refer to Table
6.7.17). After the setting is completed, turning RYnC signal ON
sets the monitor data to RWrn.
RWwn+1 Speed command Specify the speed command. After it is set in this register, turning 0 to ±20000
ON the RYnD described above writes the speed to the inverter. (Nmax with ±20000)
After completion of writing, the RXnD is turned ON. Supporting of writing data
into volatile memory
(RAM) only
RWwn+2 Command code Command codes (refer to Table 6.7.18) are set to execute
operation mode rewrite, function code read, write, reference of
alarm history, alarm reset, etc. After register setting is completed,
turning RYnF ON executes the commands. Completion of
command execution turns RXnF ON.
RWwn+3 Write data Set data to be specified with the commands above (if necessary). All data can be written into
After writing the command codes above and setting this register, volatile memory (RAM)
turn the RYnF ON. If no write data is required, zero "0" should be only. Execute "H02 All Save
written. function", if necessary, to
write data into non-volatile
memory (EEPROM).
Table 6.7.16 Remote Register in VG7 Compatible Mode (Master -> FRENIC-VG)

RWrn+0 Monitored value A monitored value specified with RWwn monitor code is set.
RWrn+1 Motor speed Current motor speed is constantly set. 0 to ±20000
(Nmax with ±20000)
RWrn+2 Response code Response codes corresponding to RWwn+2 command code (refer
to Table 6.7.19) are set. For normal response, "0" is set. If data is
incorrect, the codes are set to a value other than "0".
RWrn+3 Read data If the command code has normally been executed, the response
data for that command (specified by the command code) is
automatically written.
6-150
6.7.8.3 Monitor code/command code (o32=0) in VG7 compatible mode
Table 6.7.17 Monitor Code (o32=0)
Code No. Description Unit Remarks

0000H No monitoring (Fixed to 0) －
0001H Output frequency 0.01 Hz In units of 0.1 Hz
0002H Output current 0.1 A
0003H Output voltage 0.1 V
0004H No monitoring (Fixed to 0) －
0005H Speed setting 1 r/min
0006H Operation speed 1 r/min
0007H Torque command value 0.1%
0008H DC link bus voltage 0.1 V In units of 1 V
0009H
Chap. 6
｜ No monitoring (Fixed to 0)
000DH
000EH Motor output 0.01 kW In units of 0.1 kW
CONTROL OPTIONS
000FH Operation command －
0010H Output terminate status －
0011H Torque current command value 0.1%
0012H Flux command 0.01%
0013H Position detection pulse 1 pulse Quad multiplication of built-in PG
0014H Cumulative run time (Cumulative power-ON
1 hr
time)
0015H
｜ No monitoring (Fixed to 0)
0019H
Detailed description on operation command

b15 b8 b7 b0
RST X14 X13 X12 X11 X9 X8 X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1 REV FWD
Figure 6.7.14
Detailed description on output terminate status

b15 b8 b7 b0
Y18 Y17 Y16 Y15 Y14 Y13 Y12 Y11 - - - Y5A Y4 Y3 Y2 Y1
- : Empty (Fixed to 0)
Figure 6.7.15
6-151
Table 6.7.18 Command Code (o32=0)
Code
Item Description Remarks
number
Operation mode read Note 1 007BH 0000H: Link operation (CC-Link） 0:(LE=ON & H30≠0)
0001H: Terminal command for external 1:(LE=OFF | H30=0) & F02=1
drive 2:(LE=OFF | H30=0) & F02=0
0002H: Keypad operation
Writing of operation mode Note 1 00FBH 0000H: Link operation (CC-Link） 0: LE=ON ・ Assignment of LE to
0001H: Terminal command for external 1: LE=OFF terminal X gives
drive priority to the
terminal.
・ 0 with the power
turned OFF
Reading of alarm history No.1/No.2 0074H Reading of history No. 1/history No.2 L byte: History No.1, H byte: History No.2
Reading of alarm history No.3/No.4 0075H Reading of history No.3/history No.4 L byte: History No.3, H byte: History No.4
Reading of speed command 006DH Read speed command 0 to ±20000 (Max. with ±20000)
Also accessible from remote register
Writing of speed command 00EDH Write speed command
Reading of function code 0000H to Read or write link Nos. 0 to 255 by the For the link No./data format, refer to
0063H combinations with link parameter Chapter 4, Section 2 "Function Code List."
extension setting.
Writing of function code Note 2 0080H to
00E3H
Reset alarm 00FDH 9696H: Reset the alarm. Only during link operation
Link parameter Read 007FH Note 3 For selection of the area accessed by
extension setting reading/writing function codes
Write 00FFH Note 3
0000H : Link Nos. 0 to 99

0001H : Link Nos. 100 to 199
0002H : Link Nos. 200 to 255
Note 1: Link operation selection [LE] is switched by switching the operation mode from CC-Link, as follows.
w
Terminal X [LE] status [LE]
w/o
0 w/o
ON
w
OFF
1
Operation mode[FBH] OPC-VG1-CCL Assignment of

(0 with the power turned OFF) mounted LE to terminal X
Figure 6.7.16 Link Operation Selection [LE] with CC-Link Used
Note 2: Writing a function code sets a value given by adding the offset value of 80H to the link No.
Example: Function code "F03: M1 maximum speed" Link № 51H
The command code for reading the function code is "51H". The function code for writing function code is "D1H", which is
obtained by adding the offset value of 80 H.
Note 3: With code 007F, read the extension code setting. With code 00FF, write extension code setting.
Table 6.7.19 Response Code (o32=0)
Code number Item Description

0000H Normal (No error) Command code execution normally completed
0001H Write mode error ・Function code was written while the inverter was running
・Function code was written while EEPROM was being written.
・Function code was written at the time of transmission error.
・S code was written when upper link was enabled.
・Function code was written in a mode where edition is not permitted.
0002H Function code selection error An inaccessible link No. was set.
0003H Out of setting range Set data is out of changeable range.
6-152
6.7.9 1 X mode with 1 station occupied (o32=0）

6.7.9.1 Remote I/O signal in 1 X mode (o32=1)
Table 6.7.20 Remote Output (Master -> FRENIC-VG)

RYn0 Run forward command OFF: Stop command Simultaneously turning
ON: Run forward command (counterclockwise viewed from RYn0 and RYn1 ON is
the motor axis direction) functionally equivalent
to a stop command.
RYn1 Run reverse command OFF: Stop command
ON: Run reverse command (counterclockwise viewed from
the motor axis direction)
RYn2 Terminal X1 function Multiple speed (SS1/SS2/SS4/SS8) is selectable by Functions to be provided
combinations of terminals. by factory default are
RYn3 Terminal X2 function
RYn4 Terminal X3 function terminal X function can
Chap. 6
RYn5 Terminal X4 function change the function of
terminal X.
RYn6 Terminal X5 function ASR and acceleration/deceleration (RT1/RT2) can be
(Function code E01-E10)
selected by combinations of terminals.
RYn7 Terminal X6 function
CONTROL OPTIONS
RYn8 Terminal X8 function Works as error reset (RST) when turned ON.
RYn9 Terminal X7 function Works as coast to stop command (BX) when turned ON.
(output shut down on the secondary side)
RYnA Terminal X9 function External alarm 0h2 is generated when turned ON.
RYnB Terminal X11 function Command assigned with inverter function code E10
RYnC Monitor command Turning the monitor command (RYnC) ON specifies a monitored value for monitored
values 1 to 6, turning the "Monitoring" signal (RXnC) ON. Note 1
RYnD Speed setting command Turning the speed setting command (RYnD) ON writes the speed command (RWwn+1)
(RAM) into the inverter's volatile memory (RAM). Note 2
Upon completion of writing, the speed setting completed signal (RXnD) is turned ON.
RYnE Not used. -
RYnF Command code Turning the command code request signal (RYnF) ON executes processing
execution request corresponding to command codes specified in command codes 1 to 6. Note 3
After execution of those command codes, the "Command code execution completed"
signal (RXnF) is turned ON. If a command code execution error occurs, the response
code (RWrn+2) is set to a value other than "0".
|
RY(n+1)3
RY(n+1)4 Terminal X12 function Command assigned with inverter function code E11
|
RY(n+1)9
RY(n+1)A Alarm reset When an inverter alarm is generated, turning the alarm reset request flag ON resets the
request flag inverter, turning the alarm status flag (RX(n+1)A) OFF. Note 4
RY(n+1)B Not used. Should be turned OFF.
|
RY(n+1)F
Note 1: While the "Monitor command" (RYnC) is ON, the monitored values are constantly updated.
Note 2: While the "Speed setting" (RYnD) is ON, the value of speed command (RWwn+1) is constantly reflected on the speed.
Note 3: When the command execution request is switched from OFF to ON, the command code is executed only once.
Note 4: When the "Alarm reset request flag" signal (RY(n+1)A) is ON, alarm reset is constantly executed. After the release of the
alarm, this signal should therefore be turned OFF. Alarm reset can be done regardless of operation mode.
6-153
Table 6.7.21 Remote Input (FRENIC-VG->Master)
RXn0 Running forward OFF: Except running in forward direction (Stopped or Rotating in reverse direction)
ON: Rotating in forward direction
RXn1 Running reverse OFF: Except running in reverse direction (Stopped or Rotating in forward direction)
ON: Rotating in reverse direction
RXn2 Terminal Y1 With speed. Turned ON with (N-EX) Functions to be provided
function by factory default are
RXn3 Terminal Y2 Speed match. Turned ON with (N-AG1).
terminal Y function can
function
change output contents.
RXn4 Terminal Y3 Arrival at speed. Turned ON with (N-AR).
function
RXn5 Terminal Y4 Speed detection 1. Turned ON with (N-DT1)
function
RXn6 Terminal Y5 Operation preparation completed. Turned ON with (RDY).
function
RXn7 Alarm relay output Inverter's protection function is operated, and the signal is turned
ON when output stops.
RXn8 Terminal Y11 Status assigned with inverter function E20
function
RXn9 Terminal Y12 Status assigned with inverter function E21
function
RXnA Terminal Y13 Status assigned with inverter function E22
function
RXnB Terminal Y14 Status assigned with inverter function E23
function
RXnC Monitoring The "Monitoring " signal (RYnC) is turned OFF when turning the "Monitor command"
(RYnC) ON specifies a monitored value for monitored values 1 to 6. Turning the "Monitor
command" (RYnC) OFF turns this signal OFF.
RXnD Speed setting This signal is turned ON when turning the "Speed setting command" signal (RYnD) ON
completed (RAM) writes a speed command into the inverter's volatile memory (RAM). Turning the "Speed
setting command" signal (RYnD) OFF turns the "Speed setting completed" signal (RXnD)
OFF.
RXnE Not used. -
RXnF Command code This signal is turned ON when turning the "Command code execution request" (RYnF) ON
Execution has completed the execution of processing corresponding to command codes 1 to 6. Turning
completed the "Command code execution request" (RYnF) OFF turns the "Command code execution
completed" signal (RXnF) OFF.
RX(n+1)0 Not used. -
|
RX(n+1)9
RX(n+1)A Alarm status This signal is turned ON when an inverter alarm (alarm other than er3 ) is generated.
flag
RX(n+1)B Remote station This signal is turned ON when completing initial data setting places the inverter in the ready
ready status after the inverter has been powered ON or the hardware has been reset. (This signal is
used for interlocking with reading or writing from/to the master unit.) This signal is turned
OFF concurrently when the "Alarm state flag" (RX(n+1)A) is turned ON if the inverter alarm
is generated.
RX(n+1)C Not used. -
|
RX(n+1)F
Note 1: When the condition setting switch of the master unit for "Input data status of data link error station (SW4)" is set to ON,
input data from the data link error station is retained in the status just before the occurrence of the error. Note that this
remains signals, e.g., remote station ready, etc., ON even if an inverter alarm is generated.
Note 2: If an operation command is output from the master when the instruction via communications is disabled (H30=0, 1, or
[LE] instruction OFF), the inverter does not run. However, the input signals "Speed setting completed" and "Command
code execution completed" signal are turned ON. Care must be taken for this. In addition, "I/O check" can be performed
on the keypad to confirm whether input signal is issued from the link (COM), even if the command via communications
is disabled.
6-154
6.7.9.2 Remote register signal in 1 X mode (o32=1)
Table 6.7.22 Remote Register in 1 X Mode (Master -> FRENIC-VG)

RWwn+0 Monitor code 2/ Write the codes (listed in Table 6.7.24) of monitor items to be The lower and
Monitor code 1 referred to. After that, turning the RYC ON stores the value of upper bytes correspond
those monitor items into RWrn+0 and RWrn+1. to monitor codes 1 and 2,
respectively.
RWwn+1 Speed command/ Specify the speed command (for speed control) or torque 0 to ±20000
torque command command (for torque control). When the command has been set in (Nmax with ±20000 in the
*1 this register, turning RYnD ON reflects the command on the speed command, and
inverter. Completion of the reflection turns RXnD ON. 0.01%/1d in the torque
command)
Supporting of writing data
into volatile memory
(RAM) only
RWwn+2 Command code 1 Command codes (Table 6.7.25) are set to execute rewriting of
Chap. 6
(485 No. system) operation mode, reading of inverter function codes, writing,
reference of alarm history, alarm reset, etc. After register writing
is completed, turning RYnF ON executes the commands.
Completion of command execution turns RXnF ON.
CONTROL OPTIONS
RWwn+3 Write data If data is to be written with RWwn+2 command code used, set the All data can be written into
data in this register. volatile memory (RAM)
After writing the RWwn+2 command codes and setting this only. Execute "H02 All Save
register, turn the RYnF ON. If no write data is required, zero "0" function", if necessary, to
should be written. write data into non-volatile
memory (EEPROM).
*1 With H41 (torque command selection) = 4 (link enabled), RWwn+1 = torque command value. With H41≠4, RWwn+1 = speed
command value.

RWrn+0 Monitored value 1 When RYnC is turned ON, the monitored value specified with
monitor code 1 is output.
6-155
6.7.9.3 Monitor code/command code (o32=1 to 4)
Table 6.7.24 Monitor Code List (With o32 = 1 to 4)
Code No. Monitor item Unit Remarks
RWr0, RWr4-7: No monitoring (Fixed to 0)
00H －
RWr1: Motor speed
01H Output frequency 0.01 Hz
Rating of less than 75 kW: Unit
of 0.01
02H Output current 0.01 A/0.1 A
Rating of 75 kW or more: Unit of
0.1
03H Output voltage 0.1 V
05H Speed setting 1 r/min
06H Rotating speed 1 r/min
07H Calculated torque 0.1%
08H DC link bus voltage 0.1 V
09H
| No monitoring (Fixed to 0) －
0AH
0BH Output current peak value 0.01 A/0.1 A Rating of less than 75 kW: Unit
of 0.01
0DH Power consumption (input power) 0.01 kW/0.1 kW
0EH Motor output 0.01 kW/0.1 kW 0.1
0FH Operation command －
10H Output terminate status －
11H Motor load (torque current) 0.1%
12H Flux command 0.01%
13H Position pulse 1 pulse
14H Cumulative power-ON time 1 hr
15H
16H
17H Cumulative motor 1 run time 1 hr
18H Motor load factor 0.1%
19H Input watt-hour 1 kWhr
20H Torque command 0.1%
21H Torque current command 0.1%
Rating of less than 75 kW: Unit
of 0.01
22H Motor output 0.01 kW/0.1 kW
0.1
23H
33H
34H PID command value 0.1%
35H PID feedback 0.1%
36H PID deviation 0.1%
Detailed description on operation command

b15 b8 b7 b0
RST X14 X13 X12 X11 X9 X8 X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1 REV FWD
Figure 6.7.17
Detailed description on output terminate status

b15 b8 b7 b0
Y18 Y17 Y16 Y15 Y14 Y13 Y12 Y11 - - - Y5A Y4 Y3 Y2 Y1
- : Empty (Fixed to 0)
Figure 6.7.18
6-156
Table 6.7.25 Command Code List (With o32 = 1 to 4)
Item Code number Description Remarks

Reading of function code 0000H to FF63H Reads or writes data from/to Inverter's function codes should be specified
inverter's function codes. in the format shown in Table 6.7.27.
Writing of function code 0080H to FFE3H Writes data into inverter's function Data cannot be written into function code
codes. H01 or P02.
Reading of operation 007BH 0000H: Link operation (CC-Link) 0000H: [LE]=ON and H30≠0
mode 0001H: Terminal command for 0001H: ([LE]=OFF or H30=0) and F02=1
external drive 0002H: ([LE]=OFF or H30=0) and F02=0
0002H: Keypad operation 0003H: Others
0003H: Others
Writing of operation 00FBH 0000H: Link operation (CC-Link) 0000H: Writing of H30=3, [LE]=ON *1
mode 0001H: Terminal command for 0001H: Writing of H30=0, F02=1
external drive 0002H: Writing of H30=0，F02=1，F01=0
0002H: Keypad operation
Alarm code 0074H Alarm content Reading of latest Lower byte: Latest alarm code
Reading of latest and last and last codes. Higher byte: Last alarm code
Chap. 6
codes
Alarm code 0075H Alarm content Reading of 2nd last Lower byte: 2nd last alarm code
Reading of 2nd last and and 3rd last codes. Higher byte: 3rd last alarm code
3rd last codes
CONTROL OPTIONS
Alarm code 0076H Alarm content Reading of 4th last Lower byte: 4th last alarm code
Reading of 4th last and and 5th last codes. Higher byte: 5th last alarm code
5th last codes
Alarm code 0077H Alarm content Reading of 6th last Lower byte: 6th last alarm code
Reading of 6th last and and 7th last codes. Higher byte: 7th last alarm code
7th last codes
Reading of speed 006DH Reads out the speed command The allowable setting range is from 0 to
command value. (Monitoring of frequency set +/-20000. Specify the ratio of the frequency
via CC-Link) relative to the maximum frequency (defined
by F03 in Hz) being assumed as 20000.
Writing of speed 00EDH Write speed command
command
Clear 00F4H 9696H: Clears alarm history.
alarm history
Function code 00FCH 9696H: H03=1
initialization
Inverter 00FDH 9696H: Clear alarm
reset
*1 Assignment of [LE] to terminal X gives priority to [LE] via terminal X.
Table 6.7.26 Response Code List (With o32 = 1 to 4)
Code number Item Description

00H Normal (No error) Command code execution normally completed
01H Write mode error ・Function code was written while the inverter was running
・Function code was written while E2PROM was being written.
・Function code was written at the time of transmission error.
・S code was written when upper link (loader etc.) was enabled.
・Function code was written in a mode where edition is not permitted.
02H Function code selection error ・Accessed to a nonexistent function code
・Data was written to a read only function code.
03H Out of setting range Set data is out of changeable range.
6-157
Table 6.7.27 Function Code Selection by Command Code (With o32=1 to 4)
(bit 15) (bit 0)
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Function code No. (low-order 2 digits）
0: Read
Identification code (table below) *1
1: Write
00 to 99 (00h to 63h)
*1 Even when a function code No. exceeds 99 (example: E101, etc.) is specified, set low order 2 digits.
(Example: the code No. is E101 -> Identification of function code "E1": 1Eh, function code No.: 01h)
Function code Type Code Group name Remarks

F 00h Fundamental function
E E01 to E99 01h Terminal functions
E1 E100 to E199 1Eh
C 02h Control function
P 03h Motor parameter M1
H H01 to H99 04h High performance function
H1 H100 to H199 1Fh
H2 H200 to H299 20h
A A01 to A99 05h Motor parameters M2 and M3
A1 A100 to A199 24h
o o01 to o99 06h Option function
o1 o100 to o199 25h
S 07h Communication command function
M M01 to M99 08h Communication monitor function Read only
M1 M100 to M199 29h
M2 M200 to M299 2Ah
L 09h Elevator function
U U01 to U99 0Bh User function
U1 U101 to U199 27h
SF 28h Safety function Read only
Function code selection by command codes

・ Example 1: When reading of M126 "Cumulative M1 motor run time" is selected,
identification code M1->29h, function code No. 26->1Ah, write/read bit -> 0 => command code ＝ 291Ah
・ Example 2: S08 "Acceleration time" is specified by writing it
Identification code S->07h, function code No. 7 -> 07h, read/write bit -> 1 Command code = 0787h
6-158

o32=1 Same as the case of 1 X mode with 1 station occupied


RWwn+0 Monitor code 2/ Write the codes (listed in Table 6.7.24) of monitor items to The lower and
Monitor code 1 be referred to. After that, turning the RYC ON stores the upper bytes correspond
value of those monitor items into RWrn+0 and RWrn+1. to monitor codes 1 and 2,
respectively.
RWwn+1 Speed command/ Specify the speed command (for speed control) or torque 0 to ±20000
torque command*1 command (for torque control). When the command has (Nmax with ±20000 in the speed
Chap. 6
been set in this register, turning RYnD ON reflects the command, and 0.01%/1d in the
command on the inverter. Completion of the reflection torque command)
turns RXnD ON. Supporting of writing data into
volatile memory (RAM) only
CONTROL OPTIONS
RWwn+2 Command code 1 Command codes (Table 6.7.25) are set to execute rewriting
(485 No. system) of operation mode, reading of inverter function codes,
writing, reference of alarm history, alarm reset, etc. After
register writing is completed, turning RYnF ON executes
the commands. Completion of command execution turns
RXnF ON.
RWwn+3 Write data If data is to be written with RWwn+2 command code used, All data can be written into
set the data in this register. volatile memory (RAM) only.
After writing the RWwn+2 command codes and setting this Execute "H02 All Save function",
register, turn the RYnF ON. If no write data is required, if necessary, to write data into
zero "0" should be written. non-volatile memory (EEPROM).
RWwn+4 Monitor code 3 Specify the code (listed in Table 6. 7.24) of monitor item to
be referred to. After that, turning the RYnC ON stores the
RWwn+5 Monitor code 4
data of the monitor item into the RWrn+□.
RWwn+6 Monitor code 5 (□ denotes any of the corresponding register numbers 4 to
RWwn+7 Monitor code 6 7.)
*1 With H41 (torque command selection) = 4 (link enabled), RWwn+1 = torque command value. With H41≠4, RWwn+1 = speed
command value.
Table 6.7.29 Remote Register in 2 X Mode (FRENIC-VG->Master)

RWrn+0 Monitored value 1 When RYnC is turned ON, the monitored value specified
with monitor code 1 is output.
RWrn+1 Monitored value 2 When RYnC is turned ON, the monitored value specified
with monitor code 2 is output.
RWrn+2 Response code Response codes corresponding to RWwn+2 command code
(refer to Table 6.7.26) are set. For normal response, "0" is set.
If data is incorrect, the codes are set to a value other than "0".
RWrn+3 Read data If the command code has normally been executed, the
response data for that command (specified by the command
code) is automatically written.
RWrn+4 Monitored value 3 Outputs data of the monitor items specified with monitor Available with 2 X setting
codes 3 to 6 when RYnC is ON.
RWrn+5 Monitored value 4
6-159


RWwn+0 Monitor code 2/ Specify the codes (listed in Table 6.7.24) of monitor items to be The lower and
Monitor code 1 referred to. After that, turning the RYnC ON stores the value of upper bytes correspond
respectively.
RWwn+1 Speed command Specify the speed command (for speed control) or torque 0 to ±20000
command (for torque control). When the command has been set (Nmax with ±20000)
in this register, turning RYnD ON reflects the command on the Supporting of writing data
inverter. Completion of the reflection turns RXnD ON. into volatile memory
(RAM) only
reference of alarm history, alarm reset, etc. After register writing
is completed, turning RYnF ON executes the commands.
Completion of command execution turns RXnF ON.
RWwn+3 Write data If data is to be written with RWwn+2 command code used, set the All data can be written into
data in this register. volatile memory (RAM)
register, turn the RYnF ON. If no write data is required, zero "0" function", if necessary, to
should be written. write data into non-volatile
memory (EEPROM).
RWwn+4 Monitor code 3 Specify the code (refer to Table 6.7.24) of monitor item to be
referred to. After that, turning the RYnC ON stores the data of the
monitor item into the RWrn+□.
RWwn+6 Monitor code 5 (□ denotes any of the corresponding register numbers 4 to 7.)
RWwn+8 Alarm history Specify an alarm code to be read by writing 0000, 0100, 0200, Latest: 0000
0300, 0400, 0500, 0600, 0700, 0800, 0900, or 0A00 into Last: 0100
RWwn+8, corresponding to the latest, 2nd last, 3rd last, 4th last, 2nd last: 0200
5th last, 6th last, 7th last, 8th last, 9th last, or 10th last error, ↓
respectively. 7th last: 0700
(Don't care for the lower 8 bits.) 8th last: 0800
9th last: 0900
The content of the specified alarm code and its related
10th last: 0A00
information are stored in RWr+8, 9, A, B, and C.
For 0Bxx or later, the alarm codes are responses fixed to 0000.
RWwn+9 Not used. Should be set to 0000h.
|
RWwn+B
RWwn+C Torque command Specify the torque command. When the command has been set in
value this register, turning RYnD ON reflects the command on the
inverter. Completion of the reflection turns RXnD ON.
RWwn+D Not used. Should be set to 0000h.
｜
RWwn+F
6-160

RWrn+4 Monitored value 3 Outputs data of the monitor items specified with monitor codes 3
to 6 when RYnC is ON.
Chap. 6
RWrn+8 Alarm code The content of the alarm code specified in RWwn+8 is For the alarm code, refer to
automatically written into the lower 8 bits of RWrn+8. The upper Chapter 4, Section 4.2.4.2,
8 bits of RWwn+8 will be echoed back into the upper 8 bits of Type [14].
RWrn+8.
CONTROL OPTIONS
RWrn+9 Motor speed at the The motor speed with the alarm, specified with RWwn+8, 0 to ±20000
time of latest generated is stored. For alarms other than the latest one, response (Nmax with ±20000)
alarm is given with "0". Supported only for the latest
alarm.
RWrn+A Output current at This register stores the output current applied at the occurrence Rating of less than 75 kW:
the time of latest time of the alarm specified in RWwn+8. "0" is written except for Unit of 0.01 A
alarm. the latest alarm. Rating of 75 kW or more:
Unit of 0.1 A
RWrn+B Output voltage at This register stores the output voltage applied at the occurrence Unit of 0.1 V. "0" except for
the time of latest time of the alarm specified in RWwn+8. "0" is written except for the latest alarm.
alarm. the latest alarm.
RWrn+C Cumulative This register stores the cumulative power-ON time elapsed until Unit: 1 h
power-ON time at the occurrence time of the alarm specified in RWwn+8. "0" is
the latest alarm written except for the latest alarm.
occurrence
RWrn+D Not used. -
|
RWrn+F
6-161
6.7.12 8 X mode with 1 station occupied (o32=4)

Table 6.7.32 Remote Register Signal in 8 X Mode (Master -> FRENIC-VG)

RWwn+0 Monitor code 2/ Specify the codes (listed in Table 6.7.24) of monitor items to be The lower and
Monitor code 1 referred to. After that, turning the RYnC ON stores the value of upper bytes correspond
respectively.
RWwn+1 Speed command Specify the speed command (for speed control) or torque 0 to ±20000
command (for torque control). When the command has been set (Nmax with ±20000)
in this register, turning RYnD ON reflects the command on the Supporting of writing data
inverter. Completion of the reflection turns RXnD ON. into volatile memory
(RAM) only
reference of alarm history, alarm reset, etc. After register
writing is completed, turning RYnF ON executes the
commands. Completion of command execution turns RXnF
ON.
RWwn+3 Write data If data is to be written with RWwn+2 command code used, set All data can be written into
the data in this register. volatile memory (RAM)
register, turn the RYnF ON. If no write data is required, zero function", if necessary, to
"0" should be written. write data into non-volatile
memory (EEPROM).
RWwn+4 Monitor code 3 Specify the code (refer to Table 6.7.24) of monitor item to be
referred to. After that, turning the RYnC ON stores the data of
the monitor item into the RWrn+□.
RWwn+6 Monitor code 5 (”□ denotes any of the corresponding register numbers 4 to 7.)
RWwn+8 Alarm history Specify an alarm code to be read by writing 0000, 0100, 0200, Latest: 0000
0300, 0400, 0500, 0600, 0700, 0800, 0900, or 0A00 into Last: 0100
RWwn+8, corresponding to the latest, 2nd last, 3rd last, 4th 2nd last: 0200
last, 5th last, 6th last, 7th last, 8th last, 9th last, or 10th last ↓
error, respectively. 7th last: 0700
(Don't care for the lower 8 bits.) 8th last: 0800
9th last: 0900
The content of the specified alarm code and its related
information are stored in RWrn+8, 9, A, B, and C. 10th last: 0A00
For 0Bxx or later, the alarm codes are responses fixed to 0000.
RWwn+9 Not used. Should be set to 0000h.
|
RWwn+B
RWwn+C Torque command Specify the torque command. When the command has been set
value in this register, turning RYnD ON reflects the command on the
inverter. Completion of the reflection turns RXnD ON.
RWwn+D Not used. Should be set to 0000h.
|
RWwn+F
RWwn+10 Command code 2 Use these registers in the same way as RWwn+2. After writing
into these registers, turning the RYnF ON executes these
command codes in the order of RWwn+2, 10, 12, 14, 16, and
18. Upon completion of execution of RWwn+18, the RXnF is
turned ON. To nullify the execution of RWwn+10 to 18, FFFFH
should be written into these registers.
6-162

RWwn+11 Write data 2 If data is to be written with RWwn+10, 12, 14, 16, and 18
command codes used, set the data in this register. RWwn+10,
12, 14, 16, and 18 correspond to 11, 13, 15, 17, and 19,
respectively. Set the register corresponding to the command
codes of RWwn+10, 12, 14, 16, and 18, and then turn RYnF
ON. If write codes are unnecessary, "0" should be written.
RWwn+12 Command code 3 Same as command code 2
RWwn+13 Write data 3 Same as write data 2
RWwn+1A Not used. Should be set to 0000h.
Chap. 6
|
RWwn+1F
CONTROL OPTIONS

RWrn+2 Response code Response codes corresponding to RWwn+2 command code
(refer to Table 6.7.26) are set. For normal response, "0" is set. If
data is incorrect, the codes are set to a value other than "0".
RWrn+4 Monitored value 3 Outputs data of the monitor items specified with monitor codes
3 to 6 when RYnC is ON.
RWrn+8 Alarm code The content of the alarm code specified in RWwn+8 is For the alarm code, refer to
automatically written into the lower 8 bits of RWrn+8. The Chapter 4, Section 4.2.4.2,
upper 8 bits of RWwn+8 will be echoed back into the upper 8 Type [14].
bits of RWrn+8.
RWrn+9 Motor speed at the The motor speed with the alarm, specified with RWwn+8, 0 to ±20000
time of latest alarm generated is stored. For alarms other than the latest one, (Nmax with ±20000)
response is given with "0". Supported only for
the latest alarm.
RWrn+A Output current at This register stores the output current applied at the occurrence Rating of less than 75 kW:
the time of latest time of the alarm specified in RWwn+8. "0" is written except Unit of 0.01 A
alarm. for the latest alarm. Rating of 75 kW or more:
Unit of 0.1 A
RWrn+B Output voltage at This register stores the output voltage applied at the occurrence Unit of 0.1 V. "0" except for
the time of latest time of the alarm specified in RWwn+8. "0" is written except the latest alarm.
alarm. for the latest alarm.
RWrn+C Cumulative This register stores the cumulative power-ON time elapsed until Unit: 1 h
power-ON time at the occurrence time of the alarm specified in RWwn+8. "0" is
the latest alarm written except for the latest alarm.
occurrence
RWrn+D Not used. - -
|
RWrn+F
6-163
RWwn+10 Response code 2 Turning the RYnF ON stores the response code (Table 6.7.26) Enabled with 8X setting
corresponding to the command code specified in RWwn+10,
12, 14, 16, and 18. If the command code has normally been
executed, zero (0) is automatically written; if any error has
occurred during processing of the command code, any value
other than zero is written.
RWwn+11 Read data 2 If the command code specified in RWw10, 12, 14, 16, or 18 has
normally been executed, the response data for that command
code is automatically written.
RWwn+12 Response code 3 Same as command code 2
RWwn+13 Read data 3 Same as write data 2
RWwn+1A Not used. -
|
RWwn+1F
6-164
6.7.13 Link function

The availability (REM/LOC/COM) of the command data (S area) is switched by function code H30 "Link
operation" and X function "24: link operation selection [LE]". Be familiar with this together with the
control block (refer to Chapter 4).
Writing the standard function codes (F, E, C, P, H, A, o, U, and L）from a link is controlled by function
code H29 "link function code protection" and X function "23: link edition permission command
[WE-LK]". Be failiar with this together with the control block (refer to Chapter 4).

Performing the operation of the inverter via CC-Link requires switching of the mode to the link command
permission mode to select a command (other than 0) via communications by function code H30 "Link
Chap. 6
operation". (The system configuration is so flexible that switching a value selected for "link operation",
for example, can select an operation command on the terminal block and a speed command through
communications).
CONTROL OPTIONS
Table 6.7.34
Condition Mode
Command code FBH (Operation Link command permission
Not assigned mode) = 0 mode
(Factory default) Command code FBH (Operation Link command no permission
Assignment status of 24: link
operation selection [LE] to function mode) = 1.2 mode
codes E01 to E13 "X function When applicable terminal X is ON Link command permission
selection" mode
Assigned
When applicable terminal X is OFF Link command no permission
mode
Table 6.7.35
Link command permission mode Link command no permission mode

H30 setting Command data Operation command Command data Operation command
(S01 to S05, S08 to S17) (S06) (S01 to S05, S08 to S17) (S06)
0 × × ×
1 ○ × ×
2 × ○ ×
3 ○ ○ ×
O: Command enabled via communications, X: Command disabled via communications (operated by the command from terminal
block or keypad)
Note 1: S code (command data/operation data) can be written even in the link command no permission status.
Note 2: Writing data into function code S08 "Acceleration time"/S09 "Deceleration time" is independent of link command
permission mode and function code H30 "link operation". The data is always overwritten into function code F07/F08
"acceleration/deceleration time".
6-165
6.7.13.2 Link edition permission selection
Confirmation (reading) of function codes via CC-Link is always enabled. For changing (writing) function
codes, however, function code H29 "link function code protection" must be write-enabled (=0) in the link
edition permission mode. (It is put in "link edition permission mode" by factory default.)
Table 6.7.36
Condition Mode
Assignment status of 23: link edition Not assigned (Factory default) Link edition permission mode
permission command [WE-LK] to When applicable terminal X is ON Link edition permission mode
function codes E01 to E13 "X Assigned When applicable terminal X is OFF Link edition no permission
function selection"
mode
Table 6.7.37
H29 setting Link edition permission mode Link edition no permission mode
0 ○ ×
1 × ×
O: Function codes (F, E, C, P, H, A, o, L, and U) are write-enabled, X: Function codes are write-disabled
Note 1: Wiring into S codes (command data, operation data, etc.) is always enabled regardless of this function.
6-166
6.7.14 Setting-up procedure

The following flow shows the initial setting-up procedure for the CC-Link option, using the procedure
given in this chapter.
Start
Acceptance inspection
Mount option
Connect cables
Chap. 6
Set the switches (RSW1 to 3)
CONTROL OPTIONS
Turn ON the inverter power
Configure function codes H29, H30, o30 to o32
Preparation completed
Now the inverter is ready to run via CC-Link.

After the CC-Link master becomes ready, run the master to operate the inverter via CC-Link.
6.7.15 Application program examples

6.7.15.1 System configuration
Station address 1 Station address 2
ＰＬＣ
VG1 VG7S
Power ＣＰＵ CC-Link Input unit
OPC-VG1-CCL
OPC-VG7-CCL
supply Q02CPU master unit QX40 X20

QJ61BT11N
Q61P-A1 X20-X2F
X00 - X1F
Y00 - Y1F
* Installation of termination register

* Installation of termination register CC-Link dedicated cable between DA and DB in the master unit
between DA and DB in the master unit
Figure 6.7.19 System Configuration
6.7.15.2 Master unit outline

This section outlines the CC-Link master unit necessary for execution of application program examples. For
details, refer to Mitsubishi Electric CC-Link System Master Local Unit user's manual (volume on details).
6-167
6.8 17-bit High Resolution ABS Interface Card
This option allows FRENIC-VG to interface with the high resolution serial PG
manufactured by Tamagawa Seiki Co., Ltd.
(1) 17-bit high resolution ABS interface card

Available for induction motor/synchronous motor control PG serial interface
(speed/position feedback)
Available for machine axis serial PG interface (position feedback) (available in the
near future)
For the connectable PG format, refer to Table 6.8.1.
(2) Pulse frequency dividing output

Feedback signals from serial PG are frequency-divided to output pulse signals.
・ This option and some of other options cannot be mounted at the same time. If this option is combined with an
option that cannot be mounted at the same time, operation procedure error er6 is output.

6.8.2.1 Model
Model content: OPC-VG1-SPGT

Mounted inverter name VG1 -> FRENIC-VG
Option name: SPGT -> High resolution serial PG
Interface option
Accessories
Three spacers
Terminating resistance (220 Ω, 1/4 W)
・Do not use the product that is damaged or lacking parts.

Doing so could cause injury or damage.
6-168
Item Specifications
Serial PG manufactured by Tamagawa Seiki Co., Ltd.
Applicable PG model TS5667N253/TS5667N650
(17-bit absolute encoder)
TS5667N253: 3,000 r/min
Allowable revolution speed
TS5667N650: 1,500 r/min
Power is supplied from this option board to PG.
Power supply for PG
Voltage: 5 V ± 5 %, and current: 70 mA, Typ. (during normal operation)
50 m max.
Wire is short when the voltage drop is high.
The following distribution cables have been prepared, but are arranged separately.
WSC-P06P05-W (5 m)
Allowable wire
WSC-P06P10-W (10 m)
length/connection
Chap. 6
WSC-P06P15-W (15 m)
WSC-P06P20-W (20 m)
If a cable required is longer than 20 m, contact us separately.
If the cable is longer than 50 m, the attached terminating resistance must be installed.
CONTROL OPTIONS
Power supply for option The power is supplied from the PCB of the main unit (15 V).
board Connect the power harness to CN12 of the main unit.
5V Line driver A-/B-phase signal output (FA+/-, FB+/-)
Signals obtained by frequency-dividing 17-bit serial data are output. Maximum frequency of
1 MHz.
Note that the frequency dividing rate is "function code E109/E110".
Pulse frequency dividing
*Calculation example of output frequency
output
(E109=1000, E110=32767, P28=32768, Serial PG installation axis frequency = 25 Hz)
When a 17-bit serial encoder is used, the number of PG pulses (P28) is "17 bit-2 bit=32768".
Pulse output (Hz) = (E109/E110) X 25 (Hz) X P28
(1000/32767) X 25(Hz) X 32768 = 25.001 kHz (A-/B-phase output)
6-169
Item Specifications
For induction motor: Vector control with speed sensor
Function codes P01, A01, and A101, "Drive control selection" = "0"
Motor drive control
For synchronous motor: Vector control with speed sensor
Function codes P01, A01, and A101, "Drive control selection" = "3"
1:1500 (minimum speed: Base speed, 1 to 1500 r/min when converted with
4P)
Speed control range 1:6 (Constant torque area: constant output area, with induction motor)
Speed control May not be achieved in a synchronous motor due to electric characteristics of
the motor.
Analog setting: ±0.1% of maximum speed
Speed control accuracy
Digital setting: ±0.005% of maximum speed
10 Hz
Position response
Response is adjusted with APR gain and ASR gain.
Position control
(pulse train synchronous Within encoder ±2 bits (At the time of steady state/ transition, F/F gain =
operation) Position precision setting of 1.0)
(available soon) With F/F gain ≠1.0, steady state/transition deviation occurs.
Lock precision Within encoder ± 2 bits, 150% is allowed for resistance torque.
Specify function codes P01, A01, and A101 with "Drive control selection" =
With the motor
"0 (induction motor)" or "3 (synchronous motor)" are set. When the SPGT
integrated/
option is mounted, SPGT pulse train fed back is automatically selected to
directly connected
disable the integrated PG input PA/PB terminal.
For machine axis pulse The machine axis position can be controlled with signals from serial PG
Serial PG interface
feedback mounted in the machine axis.
function
(available in the near The motor requires an independent PG to detect motor speed/position.
future)
Mounting this option adds the following protection functions to the standard
Serial PG dedicated
functions in connection with the interface with PG.
alarm
Encoder error (et1 ), encoder communication error (ec )
Synchronous operation system
Control *The straight line position control system should be constructed on the
Position control
dedicated function UPAC or SX (PLC) side.
(available soon) Monitor 1-rotation data (17 bits), multi-rotation data (16 bits)
I/O terminal function X function selection/Y function selection
6-170
CN4
CN6
Battery
(Option: Is used for
position control.)
Frequency
dividing output
signal terminal
（CN5）
Chap. 6
CONTROL OPTIONS
CN7(FG)
Serial PG Wiring Connector (CN3)
Figure 6.8.1 Card Outline Drawing
6-171
6.8.4 Connection
Refer to 6.1.4 “Installing internal options (OPC-VG1-□□)”, and then perform wiring and connecting wires.
This option should be mounted at port B (CN2).
・ Incorrect handling in connecting job could cause an accident such as electric shock or fire. Qualified
electricians should carry out connecting wires. If connecting wires, for example, after the power is turned ON
requires any touching of an electric circuit, turn OFF (open) the breaker on the power supply side to prevent
electric shock.
・ Since the smoothing condenser has been charged although the breaker is turned OFF (open), touching an
electric circuit causes an electric shock. Confirm, with a tester, etc., that the charge lamp (CHARGE) of the
inverter is turned OFF and the DC voltage of the inverter has been reduced to the safety voltage.
・ Do not use the product that is damaged or lacking parts. Doing so could cause injury or damage.
・ Incorrect handling in installation/removal could result in a broken produce.
6.8.4.1 Connector and terminal specifications

Connector specifications for serial PG wiring
・Model : 53984-0671 (Molex) (IEEE1394)
Pin No. Signal name Function 5～7mm

1 P5 5 V power supply
2 M GND
3 BAT+ Battery output (+)
4 BAT- Battery output (-)
5 SIG- Serial communication (-)
6 SIG+ Serial communication (+)
Frequency output signal terminal

Applicable wire: AWG24-18 (0.25 to 0.75 mm2） Figure 6.8.2 Connector Layout
Tightening torque: 0.22 to 0.25 N･m
Pin No. Signal name Function

5-7 mm
1 FA+ A-phase differential output (+)
2 FA- A-phase differential output (-)
3 FB+ B-phase differential output (+)
4 FB- B-phase differential output (-)
Figure 6.8.3 Wire Tip Treatment
FG terminal
Recommended wire size: 1.25 mm2
Tightening torque: 0.7 N･m
6-172
6.8.4.2 Basic connection diagram

When motor-integrated or directly-connected high resolution serial PG is used to perform control
Chap. 6
CONTROL OPTIONS
Figure 6.8.4
When high resolution serial PG mounted in the machine axis is used to perform control (available soon)
OPC-VG1-SPGT
Figure 6.8.5
____
Note 1: If the cable is longer than 50 m, install the supplied terminating resistance (220 Ω, 1/4 W) between the encoder terminal SD
and the SD terminal.
6-173
When frequency dividing output pulse of the master axis is used for synchronous operation as a pulse
command (available soon)
Analog [12] FRENIC-VG Pulse command FRENIC-VG

Multi-speed command, and
other speed commands Sending FA+ PA Receiv
circuit FA- *PA ing
SPGT FB+ PG (PR) circuit
PB
[FA][FB] FB- *PB option
PGP Other speed
PGM Position
Position
control
commands
control
[SYC] Speed Speed [SYC]

control control
SPGT SPGT
Synchronous
SPG IM operation IM SPG
Figure 6.8.6
6-174
6.8.5 Function code
・ Configuring the function codes wrongly may lead to dangerous conditions. When data has been set or written,
be sure to confirm the data again.
Mounting this option board can perform driving in combinations with the induction motor or synchronous
motor. In addition, position control can be done. Function code settings in each condition are as follows.
Table 6.8.3
Position control Setting function code

Serial PG
Motor (available in the near
installation position P01, A01, A101 o09, A59, A159 o05
future)
Chap. 6
Motor No -
(including 1-to-1
machine axis) Yes -
Induction
0 -
motor Machine axis
CONTROL OPTIONS
(Motor with standard Yes 2
PG)
Motor No 6 -
(including 1-to-1
Synchronous machine axis) Yes 6 -
3
motor
Machine axis
Yes 0 to 2 2
(Motor with PMPG)
Note: "-" indicates setting is unnecessary (optional).
6.8.5.1 Function codes related to motor control

Motor parameters must be set according to the motor (M1 to 3) in use. For details, refer to the explanation
on P code and A code in Chapter 4.
(1) For induction motor

Set P28 (with M1 selected), A30 (with M2 selected), and A130 (with M3 selected) according to the
maximum speed of the motor.
(2) For synchronous motor

With the following contents, set the codes.
・ Motor parameter (supports the synchronous motor)
・ Magnetic pole position adjustment of synchronous motor
・ Inverter's function codes
6-175
For magnetic pole position adjustment of synchronous motor
When the card is combined with a motor for the first time after the purchase to drive a synchronous motor,
the confirmation, adjustment and setting of the magnetic pole position are required. (Settings differ
depending on the motor.)
Set the magnetic pole position offset value of the applicable motor, or confirm and adjust the magnetic
pole position according to the following procedure. (If the values described in the test report have been
set, confirm the position according to the following procedure,)
If the card was already combined for operation after it had been purchased, if PG is installed later, or if
replacement of PG is required, the confirmation, adjustment and setting must be performed without fail.
・ The adjustment of magnetic pole position must observe the following.

・ If the operation is for the first time after the purchase or after the replacement of the motor, PG, or inverter unit,
the adjustment must be performed without fail.
・ If the operation is performed without adjusting the magnetic pole position (o10, A60, A160) or when settings
significantly deviate from true values, operation in opposite direction or runaway may occur in the worst cases.
Failure to observe this precaution could cause injury.
◆ Pre-setting of parameters
E69 (Ao1 assignment) : 26 (U-phase voltage)
E70 (Ao2 assignment) : 39 (SMP)
E84 (Ao1-5 filter setting) : 0.000s (Filter cancel)
◆ Rotating the motor manually, confirm that the position relationships between Ao1 and Ao2 waveforms
are as shown below.
If waveform is significantly broken, adjust the value of o10 (with M1 selected), A60 (with M2
selected), or A160 (with M3 selected) to achieve the relationships shown in Figure 6.8.7.
Running forward Running reverse
Ao Ao
1 1
(Inductive Time (Inductive Time
voltage) voltage)
Ao Ao
2 2
(Magnetic pole (Magnetic pole
position) position)
Time Time
When the setting of o10 is made larger When the setting of o10 is made smaller
When the setting of o10 is made smaller When the setting of o10 is made larger
Figure 6.8.7 Adjustment of Magnetic Pole Position
6-176
Inverter's function codes
o09 M1 ABS signal input definition
A59 M2 ABS signal input definition
A159 M3 ABS signal input definition
Function code for synchronous motor. It selects an interface system for encoder ABS signal.
ｏ０９Ｍ１－ＡＢＳＤＥＦ
Ａ５９Ｍ２－ＡＢＳＤＥＦ
Ａ１５９Ｍ３－ＡＢＳＤＥＦ
Setting range 0: 1 bit (terminal; F0) Z-phase interface (available in the near future)
1: 3 bits (Terminal; F0, F1, F2) U-/V-/W-phase interface
Chap. 6
2: 4 bits (Terminal; F0, F1, F2, F3) Gray code interface
3-5: Not used.
7-16: Not used.
CONTROL OPTIONS
o10 M1 magnetic pole position offset
A60 M2 magnetic pole position offset
A160 M3 magnetic pole position offset
Function code for synchronous motor. It defines the offset to encoder reference position and actual motor
magnetic pole position.
ｏ１０Ｍ１－ＳＭＯＦＳ
Ａ６０Ｍ２－ＳＭＯＦＳ
Ａ１６０Ｍ３－ＳＭＯＦＳ
Setting range: 0.0 to 359.9/0 to 359.9° CCW direction

Enter the value described in the test report of the applicable motor or make adjustments according to the
magnetic pole position adjustment procedure.
o11 M1 salient pole ratio (%Xq, %Xd)
A61 M2 salient pole ratio (%Xq, %Xd)
A161 M3 salient pole ratio (%Xq, %Xd)
Function code for synchronous motor. It uses a q-axis/d-axis ratio to set a difference in reactance given by
the difference in magnetic resistance between the q-axis and the d-axis of the IPM motor.
ｏ１１Ｍ１－Ｘｑ／Ｘｄ
Ａ６１Ｍ２－Ｘｑ／Ｘｄ
Ａ１６１Ｍ３－Ｘｑ／Ｘｄ
Setting range: 1.000 to 3.000

The value must be calculated based on the setting of each motor. If the value is unknown, contact us. For
the SPM motor, it should be set to 1.000.
6-177
6.8.6 Protective functions
6.8.6.1 Alarm display list
Mounting this option card adds the standard protection functions as well as the following protection
functions.
Related
Item Content Display
code
Encoder error 1 ABS encoder position detection data error. (Serial communications are carried et1
out normally.)
As an alarm release method, resupply the power.
Encoder The operation is performed when serial communications with the ABS ec
communications error encoder cannot be established.
The operation is performed when communications cannot be established
between the option card and the inverter.
Operation procedure The operation is performed when two or more communications options are er6
error mounted.
With SPGT mounted, installing SPGT on the A-port side (CN3 side) activates
the operation.
6.8.6.2 Actions to be taken for alarms
Item Possible cause Action to be taken
Data received from the encoder is

Use shielded wire to prevent being affected by noise.
Eet1 wrong.
The encoder has been broken. Replace the encoder.
Communications with the encoder ・Visually check the encoder cable and check the disconnection status.
are interrupted. ・Check the encoder model.
・Check that the encoder terminating resistance (220Ω, 1/4W) has been installed.
Disconnection or poor connection of
ec ・Check that the option card power connector is connected appropriately.
encoder cable
・Insert the ferrite core.
Inappropriate installation of the

・Check the installation of the option card and the length of the spacer.
option card
Combinations of options that cannot

・Remove option cards, if any, that cannot be mounted at the same time.
be mounted at the same time.
er6
SPGT is mounted on the A-port side ・Check and correct the mounting place of SPGT.
(CN3 side). ・Mount SPGT on the B-port side (CN2 side).
6.8.7 Check function

6.8.7.1 Option mounting check
Checking for mounting of the SPGT option can be checked on the ＯＰＴＩＯＮ
Ａ：
keypad. Ｂ：ＶＧ１－ＳＰＧＴ
Move from the operation mode screen to the program menu screen, Ｃ：
and select "4. I/O check" with the / key to switch the screen.
As shown at right, screen 9 is available to check for mounting of it.
For details, refer to the keypad operation procedure.
If the SPGT card has been mounted, the screen is displayed as shown at right.
6-178
6.8.8 Related option

■ Distribution cable (Product to be arranged independently)
Length and model
Terminal treatment on the

L [mm] Model Remarks
PG side
5,000+500 Unfastened leads
WSC-P06P05-W
(Illustration A)
WSC-P06P05-E Connector (Illustration B)
+1,000
10,000 Unfastened leads
WSC-P06P10-W
(Illustration A)
+1,500
15,000 Unfastened leads
WSC-P06P15-W
(Illustration A)
- -
Chap. 6
20,000+2,000 Unfastened leads
WSC-P06P20-W
(Illustration A)
+2,000
50,000 WSC-P06P50 Connector (Illustration B) Handled as a special-purpose item.
CONTROL OPTIONS
When an applicable serial PG is incorporated into our motor, PG wire can support either unfastened leads
(terminal block) or connector.
(Illustration A)
Inverter side Encoder side
Connector model
Connector on the inverter side
Plug housing main unit 54180-0619
Plug shell cover 58299-0626
Plug shell body 58300-0626
Plug mold cover (A) 54181-0615
Plug mold cover (B) 54182-0605
Cable clamp 58303-0000
Clamp screw 59832-0009
Manufactured by Molex
Figure 6.8.8 Cable for Encoder Connection
6-179
Green
Pin No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Case
Green Sky
① Red Black Orange Orange/white Sky blue Protection tube
blue/white
② White Black Yellow Brown Red Blue
※1 ※2
Signal name P5 M5 BAT+ BAT－ SIG+ SIG－
For green, either 1) or 2) is applicable.

※1： Connect the negative logic side of the communications signal.
※2： Connect the positive logic side of the communications signal.
(Illustration B)
Connector model
Connector on the Connector on the motor
inverter side side
Plug housing main unit 54180-0619 Cap housing 1-172332-9
Plug shell cover 58299-0626 Socket 170361-1
Plug shell body 58300-0626 Cover (X2) 316455-1
Plug mold cover (A) 54181-0615 Screw (X2) XPB M2.6×10
Plug mold cover (B) 54182-0605 Nut (X2) M2.6
Cable clamp 58303-0000 Manufactured by Tyco Electronics

Green
Option card side 1 2 3 4 5 6 Shell
Motor side 7 8 1 2 5 4 3
Orange/
Green ① Red Black Orange Blue/white Blue Shield
white
② White Black Yellow Brown Blue Red Shield
*1 *2
Signal name P5 M5 BAT+ BAT- SIG+ SIG－ FG
*1: Connect the negative logic side of the communications signal.

*2: Connect the positive logic side of the communications signal.
* When you prepare cables, the following electric wires are recommended.
Recommended electric wires
When the cable length is 10 m or less: RMCV-SB-A-AWG#25/2P+AWG#23/2C or AWG#23/3P
When the cable length is more than 10 m and less than or equal to 50 m: RMCV-SB-A AWG#25/2P+AWG#17/2C or the
equivalent
6-180
Connector kit
・Connector on the inverter side
Model: WSK-P06P-M
Outline drawing
Unit: mm
42.5 (maximum)
Chap. 6
Component parts
Plug housing main unit 54180-0619
Plug shell cover 58299-0626
CONTROL OPTIONS
Plug shell body 58300-0626
Plug mold cover (A) 54181-0615
Plug mold cover (B) 54182-0605
Cable clamp 58303-0000
* The connector manufacturer's models are subject to change without notice.
・Connector on the motor side

Model: WSK-P09P-D
Outline drawing
Unit: mm
Component parts
Cap 172161-9
Cap cover 316455-1
170365-1 (Unfastened status)
Socket
170361-1 (Concatenate)
170366-1 (Unfastened status)
Socket
170362-1 (Concatenate)
Manufactured by Tyco Electronics
* The connector manufacturer's models are subject to change without notice.
6-181
■ Wiring connection diagram with option cables used
____
Note 1: If the cable is longer than 50 m, install the supplied terminating resistance (220Ω, 1/4W) between the encoder terminal SD
and the SD terminal.
6-182
6.9 F/V Converter (available soon)

OPC-VG1-FV is one of the FRENIC-VG analog interface option OPC series
products. A single unit of the FRENIC-VG analog interface option OPC series
product can be installed in a single FRENIC-VG inverter unit.
OPC-VG1-FV converts frequency signals into voltage signals. It is used to
detect a signal (e.g., line speed) by a pulse encoder and convert it into an
analog signal.
MCA-VG1-FV is an optional unit containing OPC-VG1-FV for separate
installation.
MCA-VG1-FV can be used in combination with other model (FRENIC series
Chap. 6
inverter).
CONTROL OPTIONS
• The switches and volumes inside the option have been adjusted at the factory. Never touch a volume or switch
other than those used for adjustment by the user.
• Install the MCA (separate installation) type with the connection terminal side down, near the inverter, and
connect the cables so that no noise will be applied to signals.
The MCA (separate installation) type requires a separate power supply (±15 V DC), which is not supplied from
FRENIC-VG. Prepare a stabilized power supply (±15 V) separately.

6.9.2.1 Model
Model elements: MCA/OPC-VG1-FV
Installation method, OPC → Integrated,

MCA → Separate installation
Option name; FV → FV converter
OPC type accessories

Spacer x 3
M3 screw x 3
Power supply harness (for ±15V power supply) x 1
6-183
• The MCA (separate installation) type requires a separate power supply (±15V), which is not supplied from
FRENIC-VG. Prepare a stabilized power supply (±15V) separately.

Table 6.9.1 General Specifications
Specifications
Item
OPC-VG1-FV MCA-VG1-FV
P: ＋15.0 VDC ±2.0 V Approx. 65 mA
Voltage and Supplied from the motherboard printed board
(Supplied from the control printed board CN12)
required power
supply N: -15.0 VDC ±2.0 V Approx. 35 mA Supplied from an external source (±15V) to the
(Supplied from the control printed board CN12) motherboard
Frequency 5 kHz to 40 kHz Internally switched
input
Table 6.9.2 I/O Terminal Specifications
Terminal Usage I/O scope quantity Remarks

Voltage pulse
A-phase pulse MAX 5 V to 15 V square SC1: 1-2
(Complementary)
S1 (Refer to the basic wave 3-4 switching Input
input
S7 connection diagram Impedance
for connection of MAX 5 V square wave
S6(M) SC1: 5-6 10 kΩ
each terminal.) Positive phase/negative phase Line driver input
short-circuit
input
Voltage pulse
B-phase pulse MAX 5 V to 15 V square SC1: 1-2
(Complementary)
S3 (Refer to the basic wave 3-4 switching Input
input
S9 connection diagram Impedance
for connection of MAX 5 V Square wave
S8(M) SC1: 5-6 10 kΩ
each terminal.) Positive phase/negative phase Line driver input
short-circuit
input
0 to + 10 V, MAX 3.4 mA Single polarity, positive output without regard to the
S5 F/V output
RL ≥ 3.0 kΩ PG phase
Double polarity, negative output with A-phase
0 to + 10 V, MAX 3.4 mA delayed (switched by SC3)
S4 F/V output
RL ≥ 3.0 kΩ Polarity switching available.
Refer to "6.9.5 Adjustment Method" for the details.
S10(M)
Reference potential 0V Common to the M terminal of the inverter.
S11(M)
S2 Empty pin
Table 6.9.3 List of Input Terminals on MCA-VG1-FV Motherboard Printed Board
Terminal Usage Level/type Specifications Remarks

S1
S2 Empty pin
S3
Within DC + 15 V ±2.0 V
P15 P
Power Approx. 65 mA
Prepare a separately installed
M supply M 0 VDC
stabilized power supply (±15 V).
voltage
Within -15 ±2.0 VDC Approx. 35
N15 N
mA
6-184
7.5
R3
23
R6
Connector (CN1)
OPC-VG1-FV
195
210
170
Motherboard
Chap. 6
17-M3 R3
6 1.2
50 10 8 33 31
CONTROL OPTIONS
70 95
Unit: mm Unit: mm
Figure 6.9.1 OPC-VG1-FV External Dimensions Figure 6.9.2 MCA-VG1-FV External Dimensions
Terminal Table Arrangement
S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 OPC-VG1-FV side
S6 S7 S8 S9 S10 S11 Terminal table (11-M3)
S1 S2 S3 P15 M N15 Motherboard side

Terminal table (6-M3)
Figure 6.9.3 MCA-VG1-FV Terminal Table Arrangement
6-185
6.9.4 Internal block diagram
VR2 M S2
P N
SC2 VR3
S1 2
1 -1 -1 S5
3 4
S7
2 F-F 5 6
M S11
1 P
S6 M 4 3 P
6 5 M F-F
SC1
SC3 M
S3 1 2
F-F 3 4 VR1
S9 5 6
S4
M
S8 M M S10
Figure 6.9.4 Internal Block Diagram
6-186
6.9.5 Adjustment method
• The switches and volumes inside the option have been adjusted at the factory. Never touch a volume or switch
other than those used for adjustment by the user.
(1) Adjust SC1 to SC3 depending on the input form and usage.
(2) Set VR1 and VR3 as 0 notch.
(3) Adjust VR2 so that the voltage output S4 and S5 become
minimum with the minimum frequency input.
(4) Adjust VR1 and VR3 so that the voltage output S4 and S5
become maximum with the maximum frequency input.
0 10
(5) Repeat (3) and (4) until the settings converge.
Turning each volume clockwise
(For S4, the polarity of the output is reversed depending on the increases the set value.
Chap. 6
A- and B- phases when SC3: 1-2 is shorted.)
Figure 6.9.5
Table 6.9.4
CONTROL OPTIONS
Adjustment Name Adjustment contents
position
Input frequency switching 1-2 side: (Threshold level 5.1 V) VL = 0 to 1 V, VH = 8 to 15 V

SC1 Common to A- and 3-4 side: (Threshold level 2.5 V) VL = 0 to 1 V, VH = 3.5 to 5 V
B-phase pulses 5-6 side: (A, A, etc. for differential input)
1-2 side: Maximum input frequency 5 to 10 kHz
Input frequency division
SC2 3-4 side: Maximum input frequency 10 to 20 kHz
switching
5-6 side: Maximum input frequency 20 to 40 kHz
1-2 side: Double polarity (S4 becomes negative with A-phase delayed)
*Note 1
F/V output polarity
SC3
switching 3-4 side: Single polarity, output polarity is fixed (S4 is positive).
5-6 side: Single polarity, output polarity is fixed (S4 is negative).
VR1 Gain adjustment Adjust the gain against the voltage output S4.
VR2 Bias adjustment Adjust the F/V bias.
VR3 Gain adjustment Adjust the gain against the voltage output S5.
* Refer to Note 1.
Table 6.9.5
Input square wave (voltage pulse input) S4 output
A-phase
A-phase delay Negative polarity
B-phase
A-phase
A-phase
Positive polarity
advance
B-phase
6-187
• Factory setting
SC1 to SC3: 1-2 side.
VR1 to VR3: With the pulse input 0 to 15 V, 0 to 10 kHz, the voltage output (S5) is 0 to +10 V and
voltage output (S4) is 0 to ±10 V, double polarity (A-phase is delayed after B-phase for
negative polarity).
6-188

Refer to Section 6.1.4 "Installing internal options (OPC-VG1-□□)” before performing wiring or
connection work.
• Incorrect cabling may cause a disaster such as electrical shock or fire. Only a qualified person should perform
Note that the smoothing capacitor is charged after turning off (i.e., opening) the circuit breaker and touching it
• Do not use the product that is damaged or lacking parts to prevent an injury or damage.
Chap. 6
• Incorrect handling in installation/removal jobs could result in a broken product.
Install the MCA (separate installation) type with the connection terminal side down, near the inverter, and
connect the cables so that no noise will be applied to signals.
CONTROL OPTIONS
(1) For voltage output PG
OPC-VG1-FV
MCA-VG1-FV
S1 A-phase
S6 0V 5 to 15 V DC power supply
S3 B-phase PG
(provided by user)
S8 0V 0V
S5
S11 *1 SC1: 1-2 or 3-4 shorted
S4 Refer to "6.9.5 Adjustment
S10 *2 Method" for the details.
Figure 6.9.6
(2) For line driver PG
OPC-VG1-FV
MCA-VG1-FV
A-phase
S1
S7 A-phase
S6 0V 5V
DC power supply
B-phase PG
0V (provided by user)
S3
S9 B-phase
S8 0V SC1: 5-6 shorted
Figure 6.9.7
Note: The shielded wire is basically connected to the earth. However, if external induction noises greatly affects the
wire, connect it to 0 V to suppress the noise effect.
6-189
When using output from this printed board (OPC-VG1-FV or MCA-VG1-FV) to control the line speed or
motor speed (whichever prioritized) via FRENIC-VG, connect the voltage output terminal S4 to Ai1 (or
Ai2) and S10 to M (0V) on the inverter, and configure the parameter settings (*3) before use.
*1, *2 Output terminal specifications.
Refer to the "Hardware Specifications I/O Terminal Specifications" when using the option for other
purposes.
*3 Parameter setting example
(When inputting the line speed (F/V output) to Ai1 in controlling the line speed or motor speed
(whichever prioritized))
Refer to H53 in Chapter 4, Section 4.3 "Details of Function Codes" and perform the following
settings:
1. Set E49 "Ai1 FUNC" to "11".
2. Set H53 "N - FB SEL" to "3".
3. If the gain adjustment for line speed is necessary, use E53 "Ai1 GAIN".
(3) Complementary explanation of PG output form
(3)-1 Voltage Output: Circuit to output from the collector side of the transistor earthed via
the emitter.
VCC
Output
0V
Figure 6.9.8 Voltage Output
(3)-2 Line driver: Signals are output in the positive or negative phase. Applied to
high-speed transmission.
0V
Figure 6.9.9 Line Driver Output
(3)-3 Complementary: Constant-voltage output circuit with the emitter follower matched.
Applied to high-speed response and/or long-distance transmission.
VCC
Output
0V
Figure 6.9.10 Complementary Output
6-190
6.10 Synchro Interface (available soon)

The OPC-VG1-SN is an OPC series interface option for the FRENIC-VG. The
OPC series consists of printed circuit board-type control options that are
installed into the inverter unit. One analog interface option OPC series product
can be installed in each inverter unit.
The OPC-VG1-SN, which is used to perform position control using a synchro
transmitter, converts synchro transmitter signals to signals in the range of 0 V
to ±10 V.
The MCA-VG1-SN is a standalone option unit with built-in OPC-VG1-SN
functionality. It can also be used in combination with other models (FRENIC
series inverters).
Chap. 6
CONTROL OPTIONS
• The synchro interface’s internal switches and knobs are pre-adjusted at the factory. Never touch knobs,
switches, or other adjustments other than those designed to be adjusted or set by the user.
• Place the MCA (standalone type) vertically with the connection terminals facing down near the inverter and
connect wiring so as to protect signals from noise. The MCA (standalone type) uses a separate power supply
(±15 V). You will need to provide a stabilized power supply (±15 V DC) since power is not supplied from the
FRENIC-VG.

6.10.2.1 Model
Model format: MCA/OPC-VG1-SN
Installation method: OPC → Internal type,

MCA → Standalone type
Host inverter name: VG1 → FRENIC-VG
Option name: SN → Synchro converter
OPC type accessories

Spacers: 3
Screws (M3): 3
Power supply harness (for ±15 V power supply): 1
6-191
• The MCA (standalone type) uses a separate power supply (±15 V). You will need to provide a
stabilized power supply (±15 V DC) since power is not supplied from the FRENIC-VG.
Table 6.10.1 I/O Terminal Specifications
Pin Application I/O range Remarks

180 VAC to 235 VAC,
UH-V Input capacity: Approx. 4 VA
Synchro synchronous power 50/60 Hz
supply 90 VAC to 121 VAC,
UL-V Input capacity: Approx. 2 VA
50/60 Hz
SY1 to 31 VAC to 78 VAC, 50/60 Approx. 0.3 VA/78 V
Synchro output signals
SY2 Hz (110 V AC max)
Potential auxiliary input Input impedance: Approx. 13 k
S1 -10V to 10V
(position voltage signal input) (10 V max.)
S3 Position meter output -10V to 10V Load impedance: 2.5 kΩ or greater
S4 Position output -10V to 10V
S2 Reference voltage M (0V)
Table 6.10.2 MCA-VG1-SN Motherboard Printed Circuit Board Input Terminals
Pin Application Level/type Specifications Remarks

S1
Unused
S2
pins
S3
Max. +15 VDC ± 2.0 V
P15 P
Approx. 65 mA
Supply Provide a separate stabilized power
M M 0 VDC
voltage supply (±15 V).
Max. +15 VDC ± 2.0 V
N15 N
Approx. 35 mA
6-192
7.5
R3
23
70 R6
Connector (CN1)
OPC-VG1-SN
MCA-
170
195
210
VG1-SN
Motherboard
130
17-M3 1.2
6
Chap. 6
Terminal block 50 10 8 3 3
50 22.6 70 9
11-M3
Unit: mm Unit: mm
CONTROL OPTIONS
Figure 6.10.1 OPC-VG1-SN Figure 6.10.2 MCA-VG1-SN
External Dimensions External Dimensions
■Terminal block layout
UH SY1 S1 S2 OPC-VG1-SN
V UL SY2 S3 S4 terminal block (11-M3)
S1 S2 S3 P15 M N15 Motherboard

terminal block (6-M3)
Figure 6.10.3 MCA-VG1-SN Terminal Block Layout
6.10.4 Internal block diagram
S2
Potential auxiliary input M
(position voltage signal input) CH1
S1
UH Synchronous 3 VR1 VR4 2 3
50/60H 2 -1
rectification
1
UL 1 -1 S3
～＋ M
V CH2
-1
SY1 VR ＋90
R1 R2
S1 3 －90 -1 S4
2 CH3
1 VR2
SY2 SC1
－ 2 1
S3 P M S2
MVR3 2
S2 1 3 N
3
Synchro transmission
Internal block diagram
Figure 6.10.4 Internal Block Diagram
6-193
6.10.5 Adjustment method
• The synchro interface’s internal switches and knobs are pre-adjusted at the factory. Never touch knobs,
switches, or other adjustments other than those designed to be adjusted or set by the user.
6.10.5.1 Description of adjustment locations

Table 6.10.3
Adjustment Name Adjustment description

location
1-2 shorted: Bias voltage (+)
SC1 Bias load switching
2-3 shorted: Bias voltage (-)
Potential auxiliary input Adjusts the potential auxiliary input signal from 0 V to voltage
VR1
signal adjustment input (S1).
Synchro transmitter output Adjusts synchro transmitter output using voltage division.
VR2
adjustment
VR3 Bias adjustment Adjusts the bias voltage (as selected with SC1) (0 V to ±10.7 V).
Position meter output Adjusts position meter output from -10 V to +10 V (gain 0.7 to
VR4
adjustment 1.77).
Adjustment locations
VR3
VR2
SC1
VR1
123
CH3
CH2
CH1
VR4
UH SY1 S1 S2
V UL SY S3 S4
Figure 6.10.5 Adjustment Locations
• Fuji factory adjustment settings

SC1: The unit ships with 1-2 shorted.
VR1: The unit is adjusted to yield a CH1 voltage of -10 V (so that the amp gain is 1) when the
potential auxiliary input signal (S1) is +10 V.
VR2: The unit is adjusted to yield voltage output (S4) of ±10 V DC with input of 78 V AC, assuming
that synchro transmitter output is 78 V AC with an operating angle of ±60°C.
VR3: The unit ships with a 0 notch setting (CH3 voltage: 0 V).
VR4: The unit is adjusted so that voltage output (S5) is the same as voltage output (with an output
stage amp gain of 1).
6-194
6.10.5.2 Installing and adjusting the synchro interface

connection work.
electric shock.
The smoothing capacitor remains charged even when the circuit breaker is shut off and will cause an electric
Chap. 6
Place the MCA (standalone type) vertically with the connection terminals facing down near the inverter and
connect wiring so as to protect signals from noise.
CONTROL OPTIONS
• Install the controlled device so that the synchro transmitter’s output increases as the speed increases.
(The voltage output S4 provides the maximum compensation to increase the speed at positive polarity
[+10 V].) To change the polarity, change the SY1 and SY2 connections.
• When installing the synchro transmitter on a piece of machinery, adjust the angle so that the synchro
output is 0 V at the center of the synchro movable shaft’s maximum span of motion. After adjusting
the configuration with VR2 so that the voltage output (S4) is 10 V DC in the maximum
speed-increasing direction, verify that the voltage output (S4) is -10 V DC (±0.5 V) in the maximum
speed-decreasing direction.
• Refer to the following figures since the speed-increasing direction changes based on the location in
which the synchro transmitter is installed (relative to the inverter). (When performing winding control,
see Figure 6.10.6; when performing rewinding control, see Figure 6.10.7.)
B direction B direction
Inverter Inverter
unit unit
A direction Synchro A direction
Synchro
transmitter transmitter
OPC-VG1-SN OPC-VG1-SN
MCA-VG1-SN MCA-VG1-SN
The A direction is the The B direction is the

speed-increasing position. speed-increasing position.
6-195
6.11 DI Interface Card
The OPC-VG1-DI option allows use of input including speed settings,
torque commands, torque current commands, and torque limits as 16-bit
digital data.
Two DI interface cards may be installed at once by choosing DIA or DIB
with a switch on each card. In this way, it is possible to perform control
with 16-bit digital input for speed settings and torque limits at the same
time.
(1) Photocoupler insulation

The input interface uses photocoupler insulation. Signal wires can be
up to dozens of meters long.
(2) Sink/source
The input interface can be switched between current sink output (“sink”) and current source output
(“source”). Typically, sink interfaces are commonly used in Japan and the U.S. Such interfaces are
characterized by a voltage of 0 V when the signal is active. By contrast, source interfaces are often
used in Europe. In such interfaces, active signals result in a positive voltage. When the PLC
terminal is used with a circuit that manipulates the inverter’s built-in digital input terminals (FWD,
REV, X1 to 9), the OPC-VG1-DI cannot be used. Please contact Fuji for more information.
(3) I/O check function
Regardless of whether DIA or DIB has been selected, the state of each input signal can be checked
on the keypad and via the unit’s communications interfaces (RS-485, T-link, CC-Link, SX bus,
Fieldbus, UPAC, etc.).
(4) Option function codes

Option function codes allow selection of binary input (0000 0000 0000 0000) or BCD input (7999).
Additionally, functionality for holding data values based on contact input is provided to allow
elimination of variation in the lower bits of digital data when signals are relayed via an external A/D
converter.
6-196

6.11.2.1 Model
Model format: OPC-VG1-DI
Host inverter name: VG1 → FRENIC-VG

Option name: DI → Digital input option
Accessories
Flag (type: 20-pin 10120-3000PE by Sumitomo 3M Limited)
Housing (cover) (type: 20-pin 10320-52A0-008 by Sumitomo 3M Limited)
Spacers: 3
Screws (M3): 3
Chap. 6
Power supply harness (for 24 V power supply): 1
[Installation constraints]
(1) Supported option combinations
CONTROL OPTIONS
• Two DI interface cards may be installed at the same time as long as they are set as DIA and DIB.
OPC-VG1-DI OPC-VG1-DI OPC-VG1-DI OPC-VG1-DI

Reserved Reserved
(DIA) (DIB) (DIA) (DIB)
Figure 6.11.1
(2) Unsupported combinations (will result in an operation procedure error)

When two cards are being used at the same time, both cannot be set to either DIA or DIB.
Attempting to use the inverter in this configuration will result in operation procedure error er6.
FRENIC-VG FRENIC-VG
OPC-VG1-DI OPC-VG1-DI OPC-VG1-DI OPC-VG1-DI

(DIA) (DIA) (DIB) (DIB)
Figure 6.11.2
6-197
• Failure to set the switches on the DI interface expansion card (SW1, SW2) correctly will prevent the system
from operating properly. Read information about the settings below and be sure to set the switches correctly.
Table 6.11.1 Hardware specifications
Item Specifications
Name DI interface card
Type OPC-VG1-DI *SW1 is used to switch between the DIA and DIB settings.
No. of 16 contacts (4 bits × 4 digits)
contacts
Ground CM; common ground for all 4 contacts
Input
Photocoupler insulation
SW2 is used to switch between current sink output (sink) and current source output
Circuits
(SOURCE).
Flowing current per circuit: Approx. 3 mA
24 V
Power supply Power is supplied from the inverter’s printed circuit board. Connect the power supply harness
to CN24 or CN25 on the inverter.
(1) Printed circuit board switch

SW1
Figure 6.11.3 illustrates the general position of the switches as seen from
DIB DIA
the top surface of the printed circuit board.
• Use SW2 on the DI interface card’s printed circuit board to select OPC-VG1-DI
between sink and source control input.
SOURCE SINK
• Use SW1 on the card’s printed circuit board to select between the DIA SW2
and DIB settings.
EP-4128-
Table 6.11.2
Connector Power supply
harness
Switch Factory default
SW2 SINK Figure 6.11.3
SW1 DIA
(2) Input circuits

The following figure illustrates the circuit architecture for the SW2 sink and source settings:
M24 P24 P24 M24
Contact Contact
Required contact
capacity: 24 V DC,
CM SINK Required contact
capacity: 24 V DC,
CM SOURCE
approx. 3 mA approx. 3 mA
Figure 6.11.4
6-198
The option supplies a 24 V power supply (P24: 24 V; M24: ground).
Table 6.11.3 Software specifications
Item Specifications
Input data read period Values are read at a period of 1 ms and are locked when 2 consecutive readings agree.
Data latch function Input data hold based on the [DIA] and [DIB] contacts
Speed settings: Input is enabled by setting function code F01 or C25 to 6
(DIA) or 7 (DIB).
Torque commands: Input is enabled by setting function code H41 to 2 (DIA) or
3 (DIB).
Torque current commands: Input is enabled by setting function code H42 to 2 (DIA) or
Applications
3 (DIB).
Torque limit commands: Torque limit level 1 input is enabled by setting function
code F42 to 2 (DIA) or 3 (DIB).
Torque limit commands: Torque limit level 2 input is enabled by setting function
code F43 to 2 (DIA) or 3 (DIB).
Chap. 6
CONTROL OPTIONS
6-199
3-φ3.6
5.0
15.4
1 SW 2
1 5.0
A DIB DIA
OPC-VG1-DI CN1
85
104
EP 4218A
C
SINK SOURCE
PTC
D CN2
1
19
2 SW2
CN2
2 CN3 1
11
12
9.4
5 40
50
■Accessories
12.0
10.0
22.0 18.0
10120
3M
12.7
39.0
22.0
23.8
No. 1 pin
9.1
7.5
1.27
No. 11 pin
11.43
17.6 33.3 12.7
15°
Model: 10120-3000PE Model: 10320-52A0-008

Specifications: 20-pin from Specifications: 20-pin from
Sumitomo 3M Limited Sumitomo 3M Limited
* Plug and housing are included with the product.
6-200

connection work.
electric shock.
The smoothing capacitor remains charged even when the circuit breaker is shut off and will cause an electric
Chap. 6
Inappropriate installation or removal of the product may cause damage to the product.
Table 6.11.4 Terminal Function Descriptions
CONTROL OPTIONS
Function Function
Pin No. Name Pin No. Name
BINARY BCD BINARY BCD
[1] CM [11] CM
[2] DI0 20 = 1 1×100 = 1 [12] DI8 28 = 256 1×102 = 100
1 0 9
[3] DI1 2 =2 2×10 = 2 [13] DI9 2 = 512 2×102 = 200
2 0 10
[4] DI2 2 =4 4×10 = 4 [14] DI10 2 = 1024 4×102 = 400
3 0 11
[5] DI3 2 =8 8×10 = 8 [15] DI11 2 = 2048 8×102 = 800
[6] CM [16] CM
[7] DI4 24 = 16 1×101 = 10 [17] DI12 212 = 4096 1×103 = 1000
5 1 13
[8] DI5 2 = 32 2×10 = 20 [18] DI13 2 = 8192 2×103 = 2000
[9] DI6 26 = 64 4×101 = 40 [19] DI14 214 = 16384 4×103 = 4000
7 1 15
[10] DI7 2 = 128 8×10 = 80 [20] DI15 2 = 32768 Sign (ON: negative)
Main power supply

FRENIC-VG MOTOR
3-phase power
50/60 Hz U U
L1/R
V V
L2/S M
W W
L3/T
NTC thermistor
11 13 15 17 19 [TH1]
Running [THC]
12 14 16 18 20 forward/ MSB
running
1 3 5 7 9 reverse
[20] [PGP]
[19] [PGM]
2 4 6 8 10 [18] [PA]
PG
[17] [PB]
[16] SS,E E
Viewed from the plug’s soldered terminal [15]
[14]
Figure 6.11.7 [13]

[12]
Binary input
BCD input
[11]
OPC-VG1-DI
[10]
[9]
[8]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
0V 0V
[1]
LSB LSB
Note: As a rule, shielded wires are earthed. [P24]

[M24]
However, if excessive induced noise from [P24] CN24

or
external sources affects the system, the [M24] CN25
E
effects of such noise can be reduced by
connecting shielded wires to 0 V.
Figure 6.11.8
6-201
Risk of accident
Installation of the DI interface card allows use of function codes o01 to o04. These function codes are not
normally (when the option had not been installed) displayed on the keypad.
Table 6.11.5
Parameter name
No. Setting range Setting description
Name Keypad display
0: Binary
o01 DIA function selection DIA FUNC 0, 1
1: BCD
0: Binary
o02 DIB function selection DIB FUNC 0, 1
1: BCD
o03 DIA BCD input setting BCD CMND A 99 - 7999
o04 DIB BCD input setting BCD CMND B 99 - 7999
6.11.5.1 Data latch function

DI input data is normally captured internally and applied inside the inverter every 1 ms. A data latch
function can be used when you wish to hold DI input data or reduce variation in lower bits when
capturing input from an external A/D converter.
[Setting method]
Set function codes X1 to X14 corresponding to the desired contact to 55 (DIA) or 56 (DIB) to assign data
latch operation. Then set the contact in question as follows:
On: Normal capture
Off: DI input hold (data is not captured, and the last data value before the contact was turned off)
6-202
6.11.5.2 Selecting binary or BCD input

(1) Example input when o01 and o02 are set to binary input
Values from -32,768 to 32,767 are valid.
Table 6.11.6
(MSB) (LSB)
Converted data
20 19 18 17 15 14 13 12 10 9 8 7 5 4 3 2
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 2
0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 20000
0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 32767
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -32768
1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 -20000
Chap. 6
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 -2
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 -1
CONTROL OPTIONS
(2) Example input when o01 and o02 are set to BCD input
Values from -7,999 to 7,999 are valid.
Table 6.11.7
(MSB) (LSB) Converted data

20 19 18 17 15 14 13 12 10 9 8 7 5 4 3 2
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 2
0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 4620
0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 7999
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 -1
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 -2
1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 -462
1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 -7999
Thousands
Sign Hundreds place Tens place Ones place
place
6-203
6.11.5.3 Controlled variable input
(1) Speed settings
When using DI input to set the speed, set function code F01 or C25 (whichever is to be enabled)
according to the switch state (DIA or DIB). For example, to enable F01 on a card set to DIA, set F01 to 6.
Control inputs [N2/N1] are used to switch between F01 and C25.
Table 6.11.8
When set to binary input Set the maximum speed (F03) to 1,500 r/min.
20000
600 × = 8000(d)
To assign a speed setting of 1500
600 r/min. = 1F40(h)
= Input 0001_1111_ 0100_0000 (B) to the DI card.
20000
− 1000 × = −13333(d)
To assign a speed setting of 1500
-1000 r/min. = CBEB(h)
= Input 1100_1011_ 1100_1011( B) to the DI card.
BCD input is used in applications where the motor speed is converted to the machine speed. For example,
when a motor operating at 1,500 r/min. is connected to a machinery shaft via a 5:1 gear, the machinery
shaft will rotate at 300.0 r/min. DI input of 3,000 while using a BCD setting (o03 or o04) of 3,000 with
these function codes would result in rotation of 300.0 r/min. (1,500 r/min. for the motor).
Table 6.11.9
Set the maximum speed (F03) to 1,500 r/min.

Set the BCD input setting (o03 or o04) to 3,000.
When set to BCD input
(When the motor operates at 1,500 r/min., the machinery shaft will rotate
at 300.0 r/min.)
To set the machinery shaft to a 75.0 = 0750(BCD)
speed of 75.0 r/min.
= Input 0000_0111_0101_0000 (B) to the DI card.
(375 r/min. for the motor)
To set the machinery shaft to a − 300.0 = ( −)3000(BCD)
speed of -300.0 r/min.
= Input 1011_0000_0000_0000(B) to the DI card.
(-1500 r/min. for the motor)
(2) Torque, torque current, and torque limit input

When assigning DI input to torque (torque commands, torque current commands, and torque limits), it is
necessary to define DIA and DIB use with the function codes H41, H42, F42, and F43 according to the
function being used. For more information, see the corresponding sections of Chapter 4.
Table 6.11.10
When set to binary input The torque scale uses the value 10,000 to represent 100%.
10000
70 × = 7000(d)
100
To assign 70% torque
= 1B58(h)
= Input 0001_1011_0101_1000(B) to the DI card.
10000
− 25 × = −2500(d)
100
To assign -25% torque
= F63C(h)
= Input 1111_0110_ 0011_1100( B) to the DI card.
6-204
• When using DI input as the speed setting and torque, install two cards for use as DIA and DIB. When the unit
is configured so that the same DI input is used as both the speed setting and the torque, the torque setting takes
priority.
Example: When the function code F01 (speed setting N1) is set to 6 (DIA) and the function code H41 (torque
command selection) is set to 2 (DIA), the inverter’s internal controlled variable for the speed setting
will be calculated using the torque command formula.
Chap. 6
CONTROL OPTIONS
6-205
6.11.6.1 Option installation check
You can check on the keypad whether the DI interface card is set ＯＰ―Ａ：ＶＧ１－ＤＩＡ
to DIA or DIB. ＯＰ－Ｂ：
ＯＰ－Ｃ：
From the Operating Mode screen, go to the Program Menu
screen and select “4. I/O check.” Use the and keys to ∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥＳＨＩＦＴ９
switch screens and check the screen corresponding to the DI
interface card.
If the card is set to DIA, will change to on the LCD screen, as shown in the sample to the right.
6.11.6.2 I/O check

You can check the DI interface card’s digital input status on the ■ＤＩＡ ■ＢＣＤ □ＢＩＮ
inverter’s keypad. From the Operating Mode screen, go to the Ａ＝×××××
Program Menu screen and select “4. I/O check.” Use the □ＤＩＢ □ＢＣＤ □ＢＩＮ
Ｂ＝×××××
and keys to switch screens and check the screen ∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥＳＨＩＦＴ１８
corresponding to the DI interface card.
Input data is displayed as “XXXXX” in the screenshot to the right.
For example, an indication of “A = 4000” would indicate BCD input of 4000.
6-206
6.12 DIO Expansion Card

The use of optional OPC-VG1-DIO expansion cards makes it possible to add I/O
points, i.e., up to 16 DI points and 10 DO points can be added per optional
expansion card. The use of the OPC-VG1-UPAC as another option (available
soon) will enable user programs to operate these optional I/O points.
(1) Main applications

Use SW2 on the optional expansion card to select DIOA or DIOB.
If DIOA is selected:
If DIOA is selected, four DI points and eight DO points will be available. In that
case, the control functions of the FRENIC-VG will be available as well. These
Chap. 6
control functions include input control functions, such as coast-to-stop command,
multistep speed change, servo lock functions, and output control functions, such
as speed agreement and running functions.
CONTROL OPTIONS
If DIOB is selected:
If DIOB is selected, 16 DI points and 10 DO points will be available. These I/O points are operable
through an UPAC option. That is, these I/O will be operable on user programs written with an UPAC
option.
The I/O control of DIOB cards mounted to other inverters will be possible if a terminal block supporting
high-speed serial communication is mounted in addition to the UPAC option.
(2) Photocoupler insulation

The I/O interface block is photocoupler insulated.
(3) Sink/Source
The I/O interface block allows the section of current sink output (hereinafter referred to as SINK) and
current source output (hereinafter referred to as SOURCE).
The output interface block allows bi-directional power connections.
Interfaces in general often used in Japan and the United States has SINK output. This output is set to 0 V
with signals activated. Interfaces often used in Europe has SOURCE output. This output is set to +V with
signals activated.
OPC-VG1-DIO expansion cards will not be available if a PLC terminal is used for the circuit in control of
the built-in digital input pins (FWD, REV, and X1-9) of the FRENIC-VG. For details, contact your Fuji
Electric representative.
(4) I/O check functions

The selection of either DIOA or DIOB makes it possible to confirm the ON/OFF status of each I/O signal
through the keypad or over communication (RS-485, T Link, CC-Link, SX bus, and UPAC).
(5) Optional function codes

Function codes to allocate FRENIC-VG I/O control functions will be operable if DIOA is selected.
Specifically, the corresponding function codes (E10 to E13 and E20 to E27) will be displayed on the
keypad by selecting DIOA if the option is mounted. Use these functions to allocate functions to four DI
points and eight DO points.
6-207
(6) UPAC function
Optional I/O points will be operable through the program for the UPAC option if DIOB is selected.
Optional I/O points will be operable in the same manner if DIOA is selected. Therefore, up to 20 DI
points and 18 DO points will be operable if two DIO expansion cards as options are used and one of the
expansion cards is set to DIOA and the other one is set to DIOB. This means that the operation of up to
31 DI points and 23 DO points will be available to a single FRENIC-VG unit with consideration of the
number of built-in I/O points.
The two DIO expansion cards mounted cannot be both set to DIOA or DIOB. If such settings are made,
operating procedure alarm er6 will result.
6.12.2 Models and specifications

6.12.2.1 Models
• An UPAC option will be required if an optional DIO expansion card is set to DIOB (16 DI points and 10 DO
points). The standard I/O functions of the FRENIC-VG will be available if the optional DIO expansion card is
set to DIOA.
An optional DIO expansion card for the FRENIC-VG incorporates a hardware switch (SW1), with which
DIOA or DIOB will be selectable according to the application.
Model legend: OPC-VG1-DIO
Name of inverter mounted: VG1→ FRENIC-VG

Name of option: DIO → Digital I/O option
Accessories
Plug (Model: Sumitomo 3M's 10136-3000VE for 36 pins)
Housing (Model: Sumitomo 3M's 10336-52F0-008 for 36 pins)
Spacer: 3
Screw (M3): 3
[Mounting restrictions]
(1) Mountable combinations
• Two optional DIO expansion cards will be mountable if one of them is set to DIOA and the other
one is set to DIOB.
• Use the optional UPAC card as well in the case of making DIOB settings.
Reserved OPC-VG1-UPAC OPC-VG1-UPAC
OPC-VG1-DIO OPC-VG1-DIO OPC-VG1-DIO OPC-VG1-DIO

Reserved Reserved
(DIOA) (DIOB) (DIOA) (DIOB)
Figure 6.12.1
6-208
(2) Combinations not mountable (operating procedure error)

The two DIO expansion cards mounted cannot be both set to DIOA. The two DIO expansion cards
mounted cannot be both set to DIOB, either. If such settings are made, operating procedure error
er6 will result.
FRENIC-VG FRENIC-VG
Reserved Reserved
OPC-VG1-DIO OPC-VG1-DIO OPC-VG1-DIO OPC-VG1-DIO

(DIOA) (DIOA) (DIOB) (DIOB)
Figure 6.12.2
Chap. 6
CONTROL OPTIONS
• The system will not operate normally if settings for the switches (SW1 and SW2) on the optional expansion
cards are wrong. Refer to the following settings and make correct settings.
Specification
Item
DIOA DIOB (dedicated to UPAC)
Name DIO expansion card
Model OPC-VG1-DIO *DIOA or DIOB is selected with SW2.
Number of 4 (X11-X14) 16 (X21-X36)
points
Ground CM: Ground common to all the four points.
Input
Photocoupler-insulated circuit
Circuit SW1 is used to select current sink output (SINK) or current source output (SOURCE).
Rated continuous current per circuit: Approximately 3 mA
Number of 8 (Y11-Y18) 10 (Y21-Y30)
points
Output
Ground CME: Ground common to both two points.

Photocoupler-insulated circuit (50 mA DC max. at 28 V max.)
Circuit
Bi-directional connections possible. (SINK and SOURCE)
24 V
Power supply Power is supplied through the PCB of the FRENIC-VG. Connect the power supply harness to
CN24 or CN25 of the FRENIC-VG.
6-209
(1) PCB switch
Figure 7-41 shows approximate positions of the switches seen from SW2
the front side of the PCB. DIOB DIOA
• Use SW1 on the PCB of the optional expansion card to select

SINK or SOURCE control input. Not control output switching is OPC-VG1-DIO
available.
SOURCE SINK
SW1
• Use SW2 on the PCB of the optional expansion card to select
DIOA or DIOB.
Table 6.12.2 EP-4223-
Switch Factory default Connector Power supply

harness
SW1 SINK
SW2 DIOA
Figure 6.12.3
(2) Input circuit

The respective circuit configurations below show examples of SW1 set to SINK and SOURCE.
In these cases, 24-V power is supplied from the optional expansion card. (P24: 24 V; M24: Ground)
M24 P24 P24 M24
X11 X11
Necessary
contact capacity:
CM SINK Necessary
contact capacity:
CM SOURCE
3 mA at 24 VDC 3 mA at 24 VDC
Figure 6.12.4
6-210
(3) Output circuit

The output interface block allows bi-directional power connections. The CME is common to all contacts
(Y11 to Y30). Therefore, no bi-directional signals can coexist.
Y11 Y11
CME CME
Power supply voltage: 28 V max. Power supply voltage: 28 V max.
Continuous current: 50 mA max. CEM is isolated from CM. Continuous current: 50 mA max. CEM is isolated from CM.
Figure 6.12.5
As shown in Figure 6.12.5, connect a surge-absorbing diode to both ends of the excitation coil when
connecting the control relay.
Chap. 6
Item Specification
Read Data is read at 1-ms cycles and determined if the data consecutively read twice
CONTROL OPTIONS
cycle coincides.
Input data
Function Possible if DIOA is used. See table 6.12.6.
allocation
Refresh Refreshed at 1-ms cycles.
cycle Some output functions may be refreshed at cycles longer than 1 ms.
Output data
Function Possible if DIOA is used. See table 6.12.7.
allocation
6-211
6.12.3 Dimensions
OPC-VG1-DIO
Accessories
17.0
14.0
32.2 18.0
10136
3M
12.7
32.2
39.0
Pin no. 1
23.8
9.1
7.5
1.27
Pin no. 19
21.59
27.8 43.5 12.7
15°
Model: 10136-3000VE Model: 10336-52F0-008

Specifications: Sumitomo 3M's for 36 pins Specifications: Sumitomo 3M's for 36 pins
* The plug and housing are provided with the product.
6-212
6.12.4 Basic schematic diagrams

Refer to 6.1.4 Installing Internal Options (OPC-VG1-□□) and wire and connect the FRENIC-VG.
• Improper connections may result in disasters, such as electric shocks or fires. Qualified electricians should
carry out wiring. Turn OFF the breaker on the power supply side for electric shock prevention in the case of
touching the electric circuit during connection work.
Do not touch the smoothing capacitors soon after the breaker is turned OFF, because the smoothing capacitors
will store charge for a while and an electric shock will be received. Check with a multimeter that the DC
voltage on the inverter is low enough after the CHARGE lamp of the inverter is turned OFF.
• Do not use the product that is damaged or lacking parts. Otherwise, injury and damage may result.
Incorrect handling in installation/removal jobs could cause a failure.
Chap. 6
6.12.4.1 Basic schematic diagram (DIOA)
CONTROL OPTIONS
Table 6.12.4 shows the plug pin arrangement.
Figure 6.12.4
Pin no. Name Function Pin no. Name Function
[1] CM Common (M24) [13] Y11 Control output Y11
[2] X11 Control input X11 [14] Y12 Control output Y12
[3] X12 Control input X12 [15] Y13 Control output Y13
[4] X13 Control input X13 [16] Y14 Control output Y14 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35
[5] X14 Control input X14 [17] Y15 Control output Y15 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17
[6] CM Common (M24) [18] CME Output common 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18
[7]-[12] - Not connected [19]-[30] - Not connected
[31] Y16 Control output Y16 Viewed from the soldered pin side of the plug
[32] Y17 Control output Y17
[33] Y18 Control output Y18 Figure 6.12.8
[34],[35] - Not connected
[36] CME Output common
Main power supply

FRENIC-VG MOTOR
50/60 Hz U U
L1/R
V V
L2/S M
W W
L3/T
NTC thermistor
[TH1]
[THC]
[X11] [2]
[X12] [3] [PGP]
[X13] [4] [PGM]
PG
[X14] [5] [PA]
[1][6] [PB]
OPC-VG1-DIO,SW2=DIOA
[CM]
SS,E E
Y11 [13]
Y12 [14]
Y13 [15]
Y14 [16]
Y15 [17]
Y16 [31]
Y17 [32]
Y18 [33]
Note: The shielded wire should be basically earthed. If [CME]
[18]
strong inductive noise interferes with the [P24]

[M24]
FRENIC-VG, however, the influence of the
[P24] CN24 or
noise may be suppressed by connecting the [M24] CN25
shielded wire to the 0-V line. E
Figure 6.12.9
6-213
6.12.4.2 Basic schematic diagram (DIOB)
Only the use of the OPC-VG1-UPAC as another option (available soon) will make it possible to operate
the I/O points of the DIO expansion card.
Table 6.12.5 shows the plug pin arrangement.
Figure 6.12.5
Pin no. Name Function Pin no. Name Function Main power supply
FRENIC-VG MOTOR
[1] CM Common (M24) [13] Y21 Control output Y21 50/60 Hz U U
L1/R
V V
[2] X21 Control input X21 [14] Y22 Control output Y22 L2/S
W W
M
L3/T
[3] X22 Control input X22 [15] Y23 Control output Y23 [TH1]
NTC thermistor
[CM] [1]
[THC]
[4] X23 Control input X23 [16] Y24 Control output Y24 [X21] [2]
[X22] [3] [PGP]
[5] X24 Control input X24 [17] Y25 Control output Y25 [X23] [4] [PGM]
PG
[X24] [5] [PA]
[6] CM Common (M24) [18] CME Output common
[CM] [6] [PB]
[7] X25 Control input X25 [31] Y26 Control output Y26 [X25] [7] SS,E E
[X26] [8]
[X28] [10]
[9] X27 Control input X27 [33] Y28 Control output Y28 [CM] [19]
[X30] [21]
OPC-VG1-DIO,SW2=DIOB
[11] - Not connected [35] Y30 Control output Y30 [X31] [22]
[X32] [23]
OPC-VG1-UPAC
[12] - Not connected [36] CME Output common [CM] [24]
[X33] [25]
[19] CM Common (M24)
[X34] [26]
[20] X29 Control input X29 [X35] [27]
[X36] [28]
[21] X30 Control input X30
Y21 [13]
[22] X31 Control input X31
Y22 [14]
[23] X32 Control input X32 Y23 [15]

Y24 [16]
[24] CM Common (M24) Y25 [17]
Y26 [31]

Y29 [34]
[18][36]
[28] X36 Control input X36 [CME]
[P24]
[29] - Not connected [M24]
[30] - Not connected [P24] CN24 or

[M24] CN25
19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35
20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 Figure 6.12.10
Viewed from the soldered pin side of the plug
Figure 6.12.11
Note: The shielded wire should be basically earthed. If strong inductive noise interferes with the FRENIC-VG,
however, the influence of the noise may be suppressed by connecting the shielded wire to the 0-V line.
6-214
• A dangerous condition may result if a mistake is made in function code data. Check the data again after the
data is set and entered.
6.12.5.1 DIOA selected

(1) Input
The following functions can be set freely to four digital input pins (X11 to X14).
The functions are set with functions codes E10 through E13.
Table 6.12.6
Set value Function Symbol Set value Function Symbol
0,1,2,3 Multistep speed setting (1 to 15 steps) [SS1, 2, 3 ,4] 31 H41 [Torque command] cancel [H41-CCL]
Chap. 6
4,5 ASR, Acceleration and deceleration selection (4 [RT1, RT2] 32 H42 [Torque current command] cancel [H42-CCL]
steps)
6 Self hold selection [HLD] 33 H43 [Magnetic flux reference] cancel [H43-CCL]
7 Coast-to-stop command [BX] 34 F40 [Torque limiting mode 1] cancel [F40-CCL]
8 Error reset [RST] 35 Torque limiting (level 1 or level 2 selection) [TL2/TL1]
CONTROL OPTIONS
9 External alarm [THR] 36 Bypass [BPS]
10 Jogging operation [JOG] 37,38 Torque bias command 1/2 [TB1, TB2]
11 Speed setting N2/Speed setting N1 [N2/N1] 39 Drooping selection [DROOP]
12 Motor M2 selection [M-CH2] 40 Ai1 zero-hold [ZH-AI1]
13 Motor M3 selection [M-CH3] 41 Ai2 zero-hold [ZH-AI2]
14 DC braking command [DCBRK] 42 Ai3 zero-hold (AIO optional function) [ZH-AI3]
15 ACC/DEC zero-clear command [CLR] 43 Ai4 zero-hold (AIO optional function) [ZH-AI4]
16 UP/DOWN setting creeping speed change [CRP-N2/N1] 44 Ai1 polarity changeover [REV-AI1]
17 UP/DOWN setting UP command [UP] 45 Ai2 polarity changeover [REV-AI2]
18 UP/DOWN setting DOWN command [DOWN] 46 Ai3 polarity changeover (AIO optional [REV-AI3]
function)
19 Keypad editing permit command (data [WE-KP] 47 Ai4 polarity changeover (AIO optional [REV-AI4]
changeable) function)
20 PID control cancel [KP/PID] 48 PID output reverse operation selection [PID-INV]
21 Forward/Reverse operation selection [IVS] 49 PG alarm cancel [PG-CCL]
22 Interlock (52-2) [IL] 50 Undervoltage cancel [LU-CCL]
23 Link editing permit command [WE-LK] 51 Ai torque bias hold [H-TB]
24 Link operation selection [LE] 52 STOP1 (decelerates to stop in normal [STOP1]
controlled stop time)
25 Universal DI [U-DI] 53 STOP2 (decelerates to stop in controlled stop [STOP2]
time 4)
26 Starting characteristic selection [STM] 54 STOP3 (decelerates to stop with maximum [STOP3]
braking torque)
27 Synchronized operation command (PG (PR) [SYC] 55 DIA data latch [DIA]
optional function)
28 Zero-speed lock command [LOCK] 56 DIB data latch [DIB]
29 Pre-excitation command [EXITE] 57 Multiplex system cancel [MT-CCL]
30 Speed command limiting cancel [N-LIM] 58-67 Custom Di1-Di10 [C-DI1-10]
6-215
(2) Output
The following functions can be set freely to eight digital output pins (Y11 to Y18).
The functions are set with functions codes E20 through E27.
Table 6.12.7
Set value Function Symbol Set value Function Symbol
0 Running [RUN] 20 Alarm content [AL2]
1 Speed provided [N-EX] 21 Alarm content [AL4]
2 Speed agreement [N-AG] 22 Alarm content [AL8]
3 Speed equivalence [N-AR] 23 Cooling fan running [FAN]
4 Speed detection 1 [N-DT1] 24 Auto-restart function running [TRY]
5 Speed detection 2 [N-DT2] 25 Universal DO [U-DO]
6 Speed detection 3 [N-DT3] 26 Cooling fin overheat early warning [INV-OH]
7 Undervoltage stopping [LU] 27 Synchronous control completion [SY-C]
8 Torque polarity detection [B/D] 28 Life early warning [LIFE]
(braking/driving)
9 Torque limiting [TL] 29 Acceleration [U-ACC]
10 Torque detection 1 [T-DT1] 30 Deceleration [U-DEC]
11 Torque detection 2 [T-DT2] 31 Inverter overload early warning [INV-OL]
12 Keypad panel operation [KP] 32 Motor overheating early warning [M-OH]
13 Stopping [STOP] 33 Motor overload early warning [M-OL]
14 Operation preparation completion [RDY] 34 DB overload early warning [DB-OL]
15 Magnetic flux detection signal [MF-DT] 35 Transmission error [LK-ERR]
16 Motor M2 selection state [SW-M2] 36 Response load control limiting [ANL]
17 Motor M3 selection state [SW-M3] 37 Response load control calculation [ANC]
18 Brake release signal [BRK] 38 Analog torque bias holding [TBH]
19 Alarm content [AL1] 39-48 Custom Do1-Do10 [C-DO1-10]
* Refer to Chapter 4 for set values, functions, and symbols other than the above.
Function Codes
The following function codes are used to allocate I/O functions.
Table 6.12.8
Parameter name
No. Setting range Description
Name Keypad display
E10 X11 function selection X11 FUNC 0-76
See Chapter 4
E20 Y11 function selection Y11 FUNC 0-81
See Chapter 4
6-216
6.12.5.2 DIOB selected

Only the use of the OPC-VG1-UPAC as another option (available soon) will make it possible to operate
the following functions.
DIOB functions are allocated to control variables (to be specific, global variables allocated to the control
variables) that will be available at the time of selecting a six-unit FRENIC-VG system.
To use DIOB functions, select the corresponding control variables from the list of control variables or
specify the address (%IQ area) of each DIOB function and register the control variable, and check the box
in the system definition.
The optional OPC-VG1-SIU module is required to operate DIOB options INV2 through INV6.
Table 6.12.9
Direction
Type
Area
Chap. 6
Address No Name Data category
CONTROL OPTIONS
%IW1.13 14 INV1 DI control of INV1 (DIOB option; 16 bits) Data category; 26 W The UPAC is in DI
INV12,3,4,5,6→UPAC
control of INV1
%IW2.13 14 INV2 DI control of INV2 (DIOB option; 16 bits) Data category; 26 W
through INV6. Used
%IW3.13 14 INV3 DI control of INV3 (DIOB option; 16 bits) Data category; 26 W by INV1 through
%IW4.13 14 INV4 DI control of INV4 (DIOB option; 16 bits) Data category; 26 W INV6.

%QW1.41 24 INV1 DO control of INV1 (DIOB option; 10 bits) Data category; 27 W UPAC→INV1,2,3,4,5,6 The UPAC is in DO
control of INV1
%QW2.41 24 INV2 DO control of INV2 (DIOB option; 10 bits) Data category; 27 W
through INV6. Used
%QW3.41 24 INV3 DO control of INV3 (DIOB option; 10 bits) Data category; 27 W by INV1 through
%QW4.41 24 INV4 DO control of INV4 (DIOB option; 10 bits) Data category; 27 W INV6.

6-217
6.12.6.1 Mounting check on optional cards
When an optional DIO expansion card is mounted, it will be ＯＰ―Ａ：ＶＧ１－ＤＩＯＡ
possible to check with the keypad whether the optional DIO ＯＰ－Ｂ：
expansion card is set to DIOA or DIOB. ＯＰ－Ｃ：
Go to the Program Menu screen from the Operation Mode ∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥＳＨＩＦＴ９
screen and select “4. I/O CHECK”. Select the screen with the
UP and DOWN keys ( and ) and check the screen
corresponding to the optional DIO expansion card.
For details, refer to the information provided in this manual on
how to operate the keypad.
As shown in the LCD screen example on the right-hand side, the corresponding number will be
highlighted ( → ) if DIOA is set.
6.12.6.2 I/O check

It is possible to check with the keypad of the inverter the digital I/O status of optional DIO expansion
cards. Go to the Program Menu screen from the Operation Mode screen and select “4. I/O CHECK.”
Select the screen with the UP and DOWN keys ( and ) and check the screen corresponding to the
optional DIO expansion card.
The number corresponding to a contact will be highlighted ( → ) if the contact is ON.
Ｒ□×１１Ｃ□×１１Ｘ□２１□２５□２９□３３

□×１２ □×１２ □２２□２６□３０□３４
□×１３ □×１３ □２３□２７□３１□３５
□×１４ □×１４ □２４□２８□３２□３６
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥＳＨＩＦＴ１６ ∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥＳＨＩＦＴ１９
DIOA I/O status DIOB input status
□Ｙ２１ □Ｙ２５ □Ｙ２９

□Ｙ２２ □Ｙ２６ □Ｙ３０
□Ｙ２３ □Ｙ２７
□Ｙ２４ □Ｙ２８
DIOB output status
6-218
6.13 AIO Expansion Card

The FRENIC-VG incorporates six built-in analog I/O points, i.e., one I/O point
each allocated to pin numbers [Ai1], [Ai2], [AO1], [AO2], and [AO3] besides an
input point (speed command input dedicated) dedicated to number 12.
The use of an optional OPC-VG1-AIO expansion card makes it possible to add 2
[Ai] and 2 [AO] points.
(1) Main applications

The OPC-VG1-AIO enables control functions that are the same as those of the
built-in analog I/O of the FRENIC-VG. For example, the available analog input
Chap. 6
functions include auxiliary speed setting 1, torque bias, torque command, and
magnetic flux reference functions and analog output functions include
speedometer, torque meter, torque current meter, and line speed detection
functions.
CONTROL OPTIONS
(2) Covering a shortage of analog I/O points
Apply the OPC-VG1-AIO to a system employing the UPAC (available soon) or control system that uses
the built-in PID control of the inverter if the number of built-in analog I/O points is insufficient.
In the case of using the WPS-VG1-TEN in tension control, for example, the three built-in points of the
FRENIC-VG will be all occupied for line speed, tension setting, and tension detection purposes. This
expansion card will be required if the user wants to add one more point to such a system.
If the system, however, uses the OPC-VG1-SN as an optional synchronous interface for dancer control,
this expansion card cannot be used due to the mounting limits on the analog option. Furthermore, if the
built-in PID control of the inverter is used, the PID command (for process settings) and PID feedback
amount (process amount) will occupy Ai1 and Ai2. This expansion card will be required if the user wants
to add a point, e.g., a PID correction gain, to the system.
6-219
6.13.2 Models and specifications
6.13.2.1 Models
• Only a single optional AIO expansion card can be mounted on the control PCB. The optional AIO expansion
card cannot be mounted if an OPC-VG1-SPGT or other optional (FV or SN) analog card is already mounted.
Model legend: OPC-VG1-AIO

Name of option: AIO → Analog I/O option
Accessories
Spacer: 3
Screw (M3): 3
Power supply harness (±15 V power supply): 1
[Mounting restrictions]
FRENIC-VG
(1) Combinations not mountable Reserved
Reserved
The optional AIO expansion card cannot be mounted if an

OPC-VG1-SN
OPC-VG1-SPGT, OPC-VG1-FV, or other optional (SN) analog card
is already mounted.
Figure 6.13.1
6-220
• The built-in variable resistors (VR1 and VR2) of the optional AIO expansion card are adjusted before shipping.
Never touch the variable resistors.

Item Specification
Name AIO Expansion Card
Model OPC-VG1-AIO
No. of points 2 ([Ai3] and [Ai4])
Ground [M] (internally connected to built-in control terminal [M] of the card)
Input
Input voltage: 0 to ±10 VDC; resolution: 11 bits (signed)

Circuit
Input impedance: 10 kΩ
No. of points 2 ([AO4] and [AO5])
Chap. 6
Output
Ground [M] (internally connected to built-in control terminal [M] of the card)
Output voltage: 0 to ±10 VDC; resolution: 12 bits (signed)
Circuit
Output impedance: 3 kΩ min.
±15 V
CONTROL OPTIONS
Power supply Power is supplied through the PCB of the FRENIC-VG. Connect the power supply
harness to CN12 of the FRENIC-VG.
VR1 and VR2 These variable resistors are adjusted before shipping. Never touch them.

Item Specification
Read cycle 1 ms
Function Set with functional codes E51 and E52.
Input data allocation
Input Bias, gain, filter, increment/decrement limiter, zero-hold, polarity changeover,
processing offset, and dead zone settings are possible individually.
Refresh cycle 1 ms
Function Set with functional codes E72 and E73.
Output data allocation
Output Bias and gain settings are possible individually. Filter settings for all AO functions
processing are possible.
6-221
(1) Input
Two analog input points ([Ai3] and [Ai4]) can be freely set to the following functions.
The functions are set with functions codes E51 through E52. Ai3 takes precedence if the same function is
set to both [Ai3] and [Ai4]. [Ai1] takes precedence if the same function is set to [Ai1] through [Ai4].
Table 6.13.3 Allocation of Input Functions

Set value Function Symbol Scale
0 Input signal shutoff [OFF] －
1 Auxiliary speed setting 1 [AUX-N1] ±10 V/±Nmax
2 Auxiliary speed setting 2 [AUX-N2] ±10 V/±Nmax
3 Torque limiting (level 1) [TL-REF1] ±10 V/±150%
4 Torque limiting (level 2) [TL-REF2] ±10 V/±150%
5 Torque bias [TB-REF] ±10 V/±150%
6 Torque command [T-REF] ±10 V/±150%
7 Torque current command [IT-REF] ±10 V/±150%
8 Creep speed 1 for UP/DOWN setting [CRP-N1] ±10 V/±Nmax
9 Creep speed 2 for UP/DOWN setting [CRP-N2] ±10 V/±Nmax
10 Magnetic flux reference [MF-REF] +10 V/+100%
11 Line speed detection [LINE-N] ±10 V/±Nmax
12 Motor temperature [M-TMP] +10 V/+200°C
13 Speed override [N-OR] ±10 V/±50%
14 Universal AI [U-AI] ±10 V/±4000(h)
15 PID feedback amount [PID-FB] ±10 V/±100%
16 PID command value [PID-REF] ±10 V/±100%
17 PID correction gain [PID-G] ±10 V/±100%
18-24 Custom-AI1-7 [C-AI1-7] ±10 V/±7FFF(h)
* Refer to Chapter 4 for set values and functions other than the above.
(2) Output
Two analog output points ([AO4] and [AO5]) can be freely set to the following functions.
The functions are set with functions codes E72 and E73.
Table 6.13.4 Allocation of Output Functions

Set value Function Symbol Scale
0 Speed detection 1 (Speedometer, single deflection) [N-FB1+] +Nmax/10 V
1 Speed detection 1 (Speedometer, double deflection) [N-FB1±] ±Nmax/±10 V
2 Speed setting 2 (before acceleration and deceleration operation) [N-REF2] ±Nmax/±10 V
3 Speed setting 4 (ASR input) [N-REF4] ±Nmax/±10 V
4 Speed detection 2 (ASR input) [N-FB2±] ±Nmax/±10 V
5 Line speed detection [LINE-N±] ±Nmax/±10 V
6 Torque current command (Torque ammeter, double deflection) [IT-REF±] ±150%/±10 V
7 Torque current command (Torque ammeter, single deflection) [IT-REF+] +150%/+10 V
8 Torque command (Torque meter, double deflection) [T-REF±] ±150%/10 V
9 Torque command (Torque meter, single deflection) [T-REF+] +150%/+10 V
10 Motor current [I-AC] 200%/+10 V
11 Motor voltage [V-AC] 200%/+10 V
12 Power consumption [PWR] 200%/+10 V
13 DC intermediate voltage [V-DC] 800V/+10 V
14 +10 V output test [P10] +10 V equivalent output
15 -10V output test [N10] -10 V equivalent output
30 Universal AO [U-AO] ±4000(h)/±10 V
31-37 Custom-AO1-7 [C-AO1-7] ±4000(h)/±10 V
* Nmax: Maximum speed of motor currently selected (set value of F03 or A06 or A106)
* Refer to Chapter 4 for set values and functions other than the above.
6-222
6.13.3 Dimensions
Chap. 6
See
注2note 2
CONTROL OPTIONS
See
注1note 1
Figure 6.13.2
Note 1: Terminal screw size: M3

Note 2: The variable resistors (VR1 and VR2) are adjusted before shipping. Never make VR1 or VR2 setting
changes.
6-223
connection work.
• Improper connections may result in disasters, such as electric shocks or fires. Qualified electricians should
carry out wiring. Turn OFF the breaker on the power supply side for electric shock prevention in the case of
touching the electric circuit during connection work.
Main power suppluy

50/60 Hz FRENIC-VG MOTOR
L1/R U U
V V
L2/S Ｍ
L3/T W W ～
NTC thermistor
[TH1]
[THC]
[PGP]
[PGM]
PG
[PA]
[PB]
SS,E E
[Ai3]
Analog input 3
[Ai4]
OPC-VG1-AIO
Analog input 4 [M]
[AO4]
Analog output 4
[AO5]
Analog output 5
[M]
[CN2]
[CN12]
E
(G)
Figure 6.13.3
6-224
• A dangerous condition may result if a mistake is made in function code data. Check the data again after the
data is set and entered.
• The keypad will not display any optional function codes of the optional AIO expansion card (i.e., E51, E52,
E55, E56, E59, E60, E63, E64, E67, E68, E72, E73, E77, E78, E82, E83, E103, E104, E107, or E108) unless
the optional AIO expansion card is mounted. These optional function codes will be displayed only after the
optional expansion card is mounted.
Function codes E51, E52, E55, E56, E59, E60, E63, E64, E67, E68, E72, E73, E77, E78, E82, E83, E103,
Chap. 6
E104, E107, and E108 will be operable with this optional expansion card mounted.
The keypad will display these function codes with the optional AIO expansion card mounted. Otherwise,
the keypad will not display the functions.
CONTROL OPTIONS
Table 6.13.5
Parameter name
Name Keypad display
E51 Ai3 function selection Ai3 FUNC 0-27
E52 Ai4 function selection Ai4 FUNC 0-27
E55 Ai3 gain setting GAIN Ai3 -10.000-10.000 (times)
E56 Ai4 gain setting GAIN Ai4 -10.000-10.000 (times)
E59 Ai3 bias setting BIAS Ai3 -100.0-100.0(%)
E60 Ai4 bias setting BIAS Ai4 -100.0-100.0(%)
E63 Ai3 filter setting FILTER Ai3 0.000-0.500(s)
E64 Ai4 filter setting FILTER Ai4 0.000-0.500(s)
E67 Increment/decrement A/D-L-Ai3 0.00-60.00(s)
limiter (Ai3)
E68 Increment/decrement A/D-L-Ai4 0.00-60.00(s)
limiter (Ai4) See Chapter 4
E72 AO4 function selection AO4 FUNC 0-40
E73 AO5 function selection AO5 FUNC 0-40
E77 AO4 gain setting GAIN AO4 -100.00-100.00 (times)
E78 AO5 gain setting GAIN AO5 -100.00-100.00 (times)
E82 AO4 bias setting BIAS AO4 -100.0-100.0(%)
E83 AO5 bias setting BIAS AO5 -100.0-100.0(%)
E84 AO1-5 filter setting FILT AO1-5 0.000-0.500(s)
E103 Ai3 offset Ai3 OFSET -100.00-100.00(%)
E104 Ai4 offset Ai4 OFSET -100.00-100.00(%)
E107 Ai3 dead zone Ai3 BLIND 0.00-10.00(%)
E108 Ai4 dead zone Ai4 BLIND 0.00-10.00(%)
6-225
(1) Optional Module Mounting Check
It is possible to check with the keypad whether the optional AIO expansion card is correctly mounted.
Go to the Program Menu screen from the Operation Mode
ＯＰ―Ａ：ＶＧ１－ＡＩＯ
screen and select “4. I/O CHECK.” ＯＰ－Ｂ：
Select the screen with the UP and DOWN keys ( and ＯＰ－Ｃ：
)
and check the screen corresponding to the optional AIO ∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥＳＨＩＦＴ９
expansion card.
For details, refer to the information provided in this manual on
how to operate the keypad.
As shown in the LCD screen example on the right-hand side,
the corresponding number will be highlighted ( → ) if it is
correctly mounted.
(2) I/O check

It is possible to check with the keypad of the inverter the I/O status of optional AIO expansion cards.
Check with Monitor LED

＜ＬＥＤＭＮＴＲ＞１８
Press the FUNC/DATA key ( ) in the operation mode screen ＡｉＡＤＪＵＳＴＭＥＮＴ
and select the corresponding item. （Ａｉ３）
The 7-segment LED indicator will display the current analog Ｆ／ＤÆＬＥＤＳＨＩＦＴ
input status in percentage.
Analog input gain and bias settings can be made by referring to
the LED indicator.
(The LED indicator will not display any analog output status).
Check with LCD screen

Go to the Program Menu screen from the Operation Mode screen and select “4. I/O CHECK.”
Select the screen with the UP and DOWN keys ( and ) and check the screen corresponding to the
optional AIO expansion card.
The screen will display the input voltages of [Ai3] and [Ai4] and the output voltages of [AO4] and
[AO5].
Ａｉ３＝±××．×Ｖ AIO I/O status 1 (Ai3): "0,0" if not connected.

Ａｉ４＝ ××．×Ｖ AIO I/O status 1 (Ai4): "0,0" if not connected.
ＡＯ４＝±××．×Ｖ AIO I/O status 1 (Ao4)
ＡＯ５＝±××．×Ｖ AIO I/O status 1 (Ao5)
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥＳＨＩＦＴ１４
6-226
6.14 Optional PG Changeover Card (available soon)

This optional card enables a single FRENIC-VG inverter to select and drive two motors provided with
speed sensors alternately.
The motors are selected by switching pulse generator (PG) and NTC thermistor signals.
This optional card does not incorporate a function to switch the U, V, or W output wire to the motors.
Select the wires with a magnetic contactor (MC) or similar device externally. Switching signals can be
output from the FRENIC-VG.
Main Applications
• Multi-winding motor drive
Chap. 6
• Driving of a number of motors with a single inverter.
CONTROL OPTIONS
6.14.2.1 Model
Model legend: MCA-VG1-CPG

Name of option: CPG→PG changeover unit
Item Specification
Name PC Changeover Card
Changeover Selection of either NTC or PG signal with the SEL terminal.
signal
PG signal 15-V complementary output
NTC signal Analog signal at 0 to 10 V
Current 80 mA max. at 24 V
consumption
6-227
6.14.3 Dimensions
質量:1.5kg
Mass: 1.5 kg
Figure 6.14.1 Product Dimensions
TT1 TC1 PA1 PP1 PA PGP TT2 TC2 PA2 PP2

PB1 PM1 THT THC PB PGM P24 SEL PB2 PM2
Screw size: M3
Figure 6.14.2 Terminal Arrangement
6.14.4 Installation method

Mount the PG changeover card (unit) with an M5 bolt each on the upper and lower sides of the unit to a
sturdy structure so that the characters on the label of the unit will be visible on the front side.
• Install the card on metallic or other nonflammable structure.

Otherwise, a fire may result.
• Make sure that no foreign substances, such as lint, paper, wood chips, dust, or scrap metal will penetrate into
the unit.
Otherwise, a fire may result.
6-228
6.14.5 Basic schematic diagram

Refer to 6.1.4 Installing Internal Options (OPC-VG1-□□) and wire and connect the FRENIC-VG.
• Improper connections may result in electric shocks or fires. Qualified electricians should carry out wiring. Turn
OFF the breaker on the power supply side for electric shock prevention in the case of touching the electric
circuit during connection work.
Chap. 6
There are terminal blocks under the lower part of the unit (see figure 6.14.1 and figure 6.14.2). Wire the
terminal blocks with the following items kept on mind.
CONTROL OPTIONS
Make sure that the terminal blocks are wired as shown in figure 6.14.3. Prepare a circuit that switches
over the main circuit wires (U, V, and W) in synchronization with the SEL contacts. Use crimp terminals
with high connection reliability to wire the terminals. Check the following items on completion of wiring
work.
a. Check that the wires are connected correctly.
b. Check that no wires are left unconnected.
c. Check that no terminals or wires are short-circuited or resulting in ground faults.
6-229
Basic Schematic Diagram
Note: The shielded wire should be basically earthed. If strong inductive noise interferes with the FRENIC-VG,
however, the influence of the noise may be suppressed by connecting the shielded wire to the 0 V line.
Figure 6.14.3 Schematic Diagram of Inverter Unit
*1 The above example shows the following allocation of digital input (X1) and transistor output (Y1).
Table 6.14.2
Function code Function name Set value Description Operation
E01 X1 function 12 Motor M2 selection Select motor 2 with the SW turned ON.
selection
E15 Y1 function 16 Motor M2 selection state Turn ON the SEL with the SW turned
selection ON.
*2 Prepare a different circuit so that the main circuit wires will be switched over with the coil (SEL) as shown
below.
Table 6.14.3
SW SEL MC1 MC2 Motor selection
OFF OFF ON OFF 1
ON ON OFF ON 2
*3 Current required by 24-V power supply: 70 mA + Coil (SEL) driving current
Conformable Wire Size

Use wires with a thickness ranging from 0.5 to 1.25 (mm2).
For the wiring of the main circuit terminals (U, V, and W), refer to the Operation Manual and User’s
Manual for this inverter.
6-230
6.14.6 Operation method

The encoder (1) and NTC thermistor (1) will be connected when the SEL terminal of the terminal block
and the 0-V external power supply terminal are open.
The encoder (2) and NTC thermistor (2) will be connected when the SEL terminal of the terminal block
and the 0-V external power supply terminal are closed.
Table 6.14.4
SEL terminal Encoder and NTC thermistor connected

OFF Encoder (1) and NTC thermistor (1)
ON Encoder (2) and NTC thermistor (2)
• No functions are incorporated to change over the motor power wires (U, V, and W). Use a magnetic contactor
Chap. 6
(MC) to change them over externally.
• Never make connection changes while the motor during conduction.
Otherwise, the motor may go out of control or the inverter may malfunction.
CONTROL OPTIONS
• The PG signal common terminal (PGM) and thermistor common terminal (THC) are isolated from each other.
Do not short-circuit them with external wires.
• Do not use more than one unit to change over three or more motors. (The power supply to the PG is not
changed over. Therefore, the current may exceed the PG current capacity limit of the inverter.)
Otherwise, the inverter may be damaged.
6-231
6.15 E-SX Bus Interface Card
This option card is used to control the FRENIC-VG
from the Fuji Programmable Logic Controller
MICREX-SX SPH3000MM via the E-SX bus.
Main uses
The following can be performed from the option card.
Input of run, stop, and other signals: FWD, REV, X1 - X9, X11 - X14, RST
Speed command and torque command settings: 16-bit binary data
Operation status monitor (bit data)
Running forward, running reverse, during DC breaking or during pre-excitation, inverter shutdown,
braking, DC link established, torque limiting, output current limiting, during acceleration, during
deceleration, alarm relay, remote/local, write error from link, data writing (processing) in progress
Motor speed / torque monitor: 16-bit binary data
Operation status monitor (word data)
time, etc.)
Referencing/changing function codes
The tact cycle of the PLC (SPH3000MM) and the control cycle of the inverter can be synchronized
by E-SX bus.*1
Toggle monitor control enables monitoring of whether the mutual functioning of the host device and
inverter is normal.
*1 For synchronization, refer to "6.15.10 Synchronization of E-SX bus tact cycle and inverter control cycle".

6.15.2.1 Model
Model details: OPC-VG1-ESX
Installed inverter name: VG1→FRENIC-VG
Option name: ESX→E-SX bus interface card
Accessories
Spacers: 4
Screws (M3): 2
6-232
If the rotary switches (SW1, 2) on the option are not set correctly, the system will not operate properly. Set as
indicated below, taking care to ensure that all settings are correct.
Set the rotary switches (SW1, 2) on the option with the inverter power OFF.
Item Specifications
Name E-SX Bus Interface Option
Transmission specifications E-SX bus slave, I/O transmission
Transmission speed 100 Mbps
Distance between stations Maximum 100 m
Total extension distance Maximum 1,000 m
Chap. 6
E-SX bus consumption Normal operation: Maximum 6 mA, bypass operation (inverter power OFF):
current Maximum 93 mA
Number of words occupied 16 words (I area 8 words / Q area 8 words)
CONTROL OPTIONS
in transmission
Terminals / bus cable IN, OUT / E-SX bus cable *NU1C-P3 (0.3 m) - NU1C-A0 (100 m)
Rotary switches RSW 1, 2 Station address setting, any station address from 1 to 283 can be assigned.
Status display LED Status of local station (running/error) is indicated by LED
RUN, ERR
(1) Rotary switches SW1, 2

The station address is set with rotary switches SW1 and SW2 on the option board. The display is
hexadecimal, with "SW1" corresponding to the upper 4 bits and "SW2" corresponding to the lower 4 bits.
For the E-SX bus station address, read as a decimal display.
Example: For station address 194, this is C2 (h), and SW1 = C, SW2 = 2 are set.
F012 F012
AB E
AB E
SW1 : Upper 4 bits

CD
CD
3 456
3 456
789 78 9 SW2 : Lower 4 bits
SW1 SW2
Figure 6.15.1 Station Address Setting Switches
* Set the same address as the E-SX bus address set in the MICREX-SX system definitions. The address assigned
from MICREX-SX will be the actual E-SX bus address, so this may differ from the set values of these rotary
switches. (This can be checked in Function Code U13 "SX Bus Address Monitor".)
* When multiple units are used, make sure that duplicate E-SX bus addresses are not set.
* The factory defaults are SW1 = 0, SW2 = 0 (station address 00 (h)). In this case, the station address set in the
"Expert (D300win)" support tool system definitions is set (no degenerate system startup). If there is degenerate
system startup, a heavy alarm will occur on the MICREX-SX.
* SW1 and SW2 settings are detected during "power on" and "reset" of the E-SX bus (MICREX-SX).
6-233
(2) Status display LED RUN, ERR
The status of the local station (running/error) is indicated by the RUN/ERR LED on the option board.
The option determines the status of the local station, which is a slave station, and thus this may differ
from the RUN/ALM status displayed on the MICREX-SX CPU.
Table 6.15.2 LED Display
ERR Status of slave RUN (green) ERR (red)

Initial E-SX bus transmission not received OFF OFF
E-SX bus transmission received Flashing OFF
RUN
Normal ON OFF
Heavy alarm Option hardware error OFF ON
Master down detected ON ON
Light alarm ON ON
Local station setting error (does not match master or
station address outside range)
Communication error detected (missed reception 3
tacts in succession)
Other inverter alarm occurred
Inverter power OFF OFF OFF
(including bypass operation)
Item Specifications
Data update cycle (*1) Minimum 250 μs
Run command Run forward and reverse commands, alarm reset command, X1 to X14 commands
Speed/torque
1-word data
Oper command
ation Bit data of running, braking, torque limiting, alarm relay and other signals
Operation status
output Return speed (1 word), torque output (1 word), current return position (2 words)
(supported in near future)
Option function codes o30, o31, U11 to U13
er4 : Network error (E-SX bus error) (*2)
*Light alarm: er4 alarm action can be set with o30, o31.
*Heavy alarm: Immediate er4 alarm.
arf : Toggle error (*3)
Protective functions The 2-bit signals sent by the PLC, toggle signal 1 TGL1 and toggle signal 2
TGL2, are monitored, and this error occurs if the specified change pattern is
not received before the time set in H144 elapses.
are : E-SX bus tact synchronization error (*4)
Occurs when synchronization of the E-SX tact cycle and inverter control cycle is
lost due to noise or other factors.
*1 The data update cycle depends on the carrier frequency setting, E-SX bus tact cycle of the MICREX-SX, and
task cycle of the application program.
*2 For light and heavy alarms, refer to "6.15.6 Protective operations".
*3 For details on toggle signals and toggle errors, refer to "TGL1" and "TGL2" in the explanation of E01 to E13 in
Chapter 4, Section 4.3 "Details of Function Codes." The toggle pattern for ON/OFF of TGL1 and TGL2 must
be created in the MICREX-SX program.
*4 For E-SX bus tact synchronization errors (are ), refer to Section 6.15.10 "Synchronization of E-SX bus tact
cycle and inverter control cycle."
6-234
6.15.3 External dimension drawings
Chap. 6
CONTROL OPTIONS
(Unit: mm)
Figure 6.15.2 Option Print Board Outline Drawings
E-SX bus cable connections

OPC-VG1-ESX
F0 1 F0 1
2 2
A BCDE
A BCDE
3 45
3 456
78 9 78 9
6
SW1 SW2
ERR
RUN
Connection of the FG terminal is not necessary. Do

not connect. For the installation procedure, refer to
Section 6.1.4 "Installing internal options
IN OUT (OPC-VG1-□□)."
FG OUT
A connector to which the E-SX bus cable is not
connected should be left unconnected. Never
connect a terminating connector.
青
Blue 黄
Yellow
Figure 6.15.3 E-SX Bus Cable Connections
6-235
6.15.4 Basic connections
Perform the wiring and connection work as explained in Section 6.1.4 "Installing internal options
(OPC-VG1-□□)."
Risk of electric shock, fire, and other hazards if improper wiring work is performed. Only a qualified
electrician should make the connections. If it is necessary to touch electrical circuits to make connections after
the power has been connected, switch the power breaker to the OFF (open) position to prevent electric shock.
Even when the breaker is OFF (open), the smoothing capacitor is charged and will cause electric shock if
touched. Make sure the inverter CHARGE lamp is off and use a tester to verify that the DC voltage of the
inverter has fallen to a safe level.
The E-SX bus voltage is supplied from the PLC power module. Before installing or removing this option,
make sure that the MICREX-SX power and inverter power are OFF.
Do not use a product if parts are damaged or missing. Risk of injury and damage.
Improper work when installing or removing the product may cause product damage.
Follow the rules below when making connections.
[Rules for connections]

(1) Use dedicated cables for the E-SX bus.
Model: NU1C-P3 (0.3 m) to NU1C-A0 (100 m)
For cable specifications, refer to the MICREX-SX manual (Hardware).
(2) Before performing work, make sure that both the MICREX-SX and the inverter are powered OFF.
(3) For the E-SX bus cable wiring, the main circuit wires of the inverter should be kept as far away as
possible (at least 30 cm) from other power lines to prevent malfunctioning due to noise. Never
insert in the same duct.
(4) Connect the wiring of the E-SX bus cable from OUT to IN on the SPH3000MM, or from IN to
OUT. Communication is not possible with an OUT-OUT or IN-IN connection, and thus the system
will not operate. Connection of a terminating connector is prohibited. Never connect a terminating
connector.
6-236
Example of basic connections
Power module CPU module

(SPH3000MM)
SX bus
terminating
SX
connector IN
IN
OUT
E-SXBUS0
OUT
Programmable
IN
operation display
OUT
E-SXBUS1
POD
Connection cable
SX bus
MICREX-SX for computer loader
E-SX bus
FRENIC-VG
cable
L1/R U
L2/S V M
L3/T W
~
OPC-VG1-ESX
Chap. 6
Blue
IN
Yellow OUT Programming

support tool
CONTROL OPTIONS
D300win
E-SX bus E(G)
cable
FRENIC-VG
L1/R U
L2/S V M
L3/T W
~
OPC-VG1-ESX
Blue IN
Connection of SX bus
terminating connector OUT
prohibited
E(G)
Figure 6.15.4 Example of Basic Connections
6-237
6.15.5 Related function codes
Incorrect function code data may create a hazardous condition. After setting and writing data, recheck the data.
Risk of an accident
Inverter function codes related to the E-SX bus interface card are described below.
Table 6.15.4 Related Function Codes

Function code name
Name Keypad display
H30 Link function Link function 0 to 3 3: Set run command / command data enable via E-SX.
Immediate forcible stop when communication error occurs
0
(light alarm) (er4 alarm: coast to stop)
Continue operation for timer time after a communication error
(light alarm) occurs (in a communication error state, the previous
run command from communication is held)
1
Forcible stop after timer time (er4 alarm: coast to stop)
If communication recovers within timer time, operates according
to the communication command. If after timer time, forcible stop.
Action when Continue operation for timer time after a communication error
o30 (light alarm) occurs (in a communication error state, the previous
transmission error Link mode
*1 run command from communication is held). If communication
occurs 2
error recovery does not take place within timer time, forcible stop.
If communication recovers within timer time, operates normally
according to the communication command.
No alarm (er4 ) when a communication error (light alarm)
occurs.
In a communication error state, the previous communication
3
command is held
When communication recovers, operates normally according to
the communication command.
Action time when Operation timer value [s] when communication error (light alarm)
o31
transmission Link timer 0.01 to 20.00s occurs.
(*1)
error occurs Enabled when o30 = 1 or 2
Standard format: 2
3
E-SX transmission Number of words occupied: 16 words (8W+8W)
U11 USER P11
format selection Other than Reserved (do not set)
above
Set the carrier frequency (= inverter control cycle).
F26 Carrier frequency Carrier Hz 2 to 15 The SPH3000MM tact cycle and inverter control cycle are only
synchronized when F26 = 4 or 8.
Select the alarm action when an E-SX bus error (er4 ) or toggle
Light alarm 0000 to error (arf ) occurs. The
H107 Light alarm 2 er4 digit is 100, and arf digit is 1.
definition 2 1111
Set applicable digit to 0: alarm occurs or 1: light alarm (l-al )
Select the alarm action when an E-SX bus tact synchronization
Light alarm 0000 to error (are ) occurs.
H108 Light alarm 3
definition 3 1111 Set the "1" digit to 0: are alarm occurs or 1: light alarm
(l-al )
E10 Select the command when each X11 to X14 bit = 1.
X11 to X14 X11 to X14
| *2 To perform toggle monitoring by X terminal bit, set TGL1, TGL2
function selection functions
E13 in either of the two terminals.
E15 Select the Y1 to Y5 and Y11 to Y18 functions.
Y function
| Y function *2 To check the E-SX tact synchronization status, set C-Do10 in
selection
E27 any one of the terminals.*3
Only valid when standard format 2 is used. Use 485No to set the
Function code 0000h to
o160 Lead code 1 function code to be constantly monitored by function code
monitor (1) setting FFFFh
monitor (1).
Only valid when standard format 2 is used. Use 485No to set the
Function code 0000h to
o161 Lead code 2 function code to be constantly monitored by function code
monitor (2) setting FFFFh
monitor (2).
*1 For details on o30 and o31, refer to "6.15.6.1 (2) Action when a light alarm occurs (o30, o31)".
*2 For details, refer to Chapter 4, Section 4.3 "Details of Function Codes."
*3 For E-SX tact synchronization, refer to Section 6.15.10 "Synchronization of E-SX bus tact cycle and inverter control cycle".
6-238
6.15.6 Protective operations

6.15.6.1 Light alarms and heavy alarms in E-SX bus communication (er4 )
(1) Causes of light alarms and heavy alarms (er4 )
Light alarms and heavy alarms are generated on the E-SX bus interface card depending on the alarm level.
When an alarm occurs, the inverter outputs an er4 "network error" and the motor coasts to stop.*1
*1 Inverter function code H107 can be set to display l-al and continue operation when an alarm occurs. Refer to
the explanation of H107 in Chapter 4, Section 4.3 "Details of Function Codes."
Table 6.15.5 Causes of Light Alarms and Heavy Alarms (er4 )
Item Light alarm Heavy alarm 1 Heavy alarm 2

ERR (lit) ERR (lit)
Card LED state Undefined
RUN (lit) RUN (lit)
Normal reception failed 3 All masters down Card hardware failure
Chap. 6
times in succession due to (Cable break, PLC Improper card installation
Cause *2
noise on communication power interrupted)
line or other cause.
Clear alarm cause (auto clear by communication reset) or After clearing the alarm
CONTROL OPTIONS
set H30 = 0, 1 or [LE] = OFF and issue reset command.*3 cause, cycle the inverter
Reset method power off/on (clearing is not
possible until the power is
turned off).
Alarms can be controlled by When a heavy alarm occurs, an er4 alarm is generated
Control of alarm state
function codes o30, o31. immediately.
Communication error
code displayed on 1 2 3
keypad*4
Alarm sub-code
01(hex) 02(hex) 04(hex)
*5
*2 When a light alarm cause occurs and command via E-SX is enabled (H30 = 2, 3 and LE = ON; for details, refer
to the explanation of H30 in Chapter 4, Section 4.3 "Details of Function Codes"), er4 is generated. With heavy
alarm 1, when run command via E-SX is ON, er4 is generated. With heavy alarm 2, er4 is generated
regardless of the settings when the cause occurs.
*3 "Issue a reset command" at light alarm and heavy alarm 1 refers to inverter reset input by any of the following
methods.
＊ Keypad key input

* Assign error reset [RST] by X function selection and input digitally.
* RST bit = 1 in Q area from E-SX communication
Depending on the MICREX-SX CPU state, the CPU may need to be reset as well when heavy alarm 1 occurs.
*4 The communication error code for a light alarm or heavy alarm can be checked in the communication status screen
of the maintenance information on the keypad. Press the key in the operation mode screen of the
communication status screen to change to the menu screen, move the arrow on the left side of the screen to "5.
Maintenance" with the / key, and press the key. Press the key 3 times to display the screen below.
This error code indicates the first factor that caused er4 to occur. A light alarm always occurs before heavy alarm
1 occurs, and thus when o30 = 0, this code shows the light alarm code even when the state is heavy alarm 1.
ＮＲＫ = ×××××
ＮＲＲ = ××××× ×× -: No communication error
ＮＲＯ = ××××× ×× 1: Light alarm
ＮＲＬ = ××××× ×× 2: Heavy alarm1
∧∨ÆＰＡＧＥＳＨＩＦＴ４ 3: Heavy alarm2
Figure 6.15.5 Communication Error (er4 ) Code Screen
6-239
*5 The alarm sub-code of er4 can be checked in alarm history selection in the alarm information of the keypad.
The alarm sub-code screen can be displayed as follows: Press the key in the operation mode screen to change
to the menu screen. Move the arrow at the left side of the screen to "7. Alarm Information" with the / key and
press the key. Select the alarm you want to view in the alarm information selection screen that shows the most
recent alarm and the previous 3 alarms, and press the key. Press the key once. The screen below appears.
This alarm sub-code indicates the first factor that caused er4 to occur. A light alarm always occurs before heavy
alarm 1 occurs, and thus when o30 = 0, this code shows the light alarm code even when the state is heavy alarm 1.
ＳＵＢ = ×××× 1: Light alarm

ＡＬ = Ｅｒ４ＡＬ = ××× 2: Heavy alarm1
ＡＬ = ××× ＡＬ = ××× 4: Heavy alarm2
Figure. 6.15.6 Alarm Sub-Code Screen
(2) Action when light alarm occurs (o30, o31)

This section explains the control methods for er4 alarms by inverter function codes o30, o31 when a
communication error (light alarm state) occurs while a run command is issued from the MICREX-SX via
the E-SX bus.
1) Function code o30 = 0 (immediate coast to stop when communication error (light alarm) occurs)
Figure 6.15.7
2) Function code o30 = 1, o31 = 5.0 (coast to stop after 5 seconds when communication error (light
alarm) occurs)
Figure 6.15.8
6-240
3) Function code o30 = 2, o31 = 5.0

(er4 alarm occurs if communication does not recover within 5 seconds after communication error
(light alarm) occurs)
Chap. 6
Figure 6.15.9
CONTROL OPTIONS
4) Function code o30 = 2, o31 = 5.0 (communication recovers within 5 seconds after communication
error (light alarm) occurs)
Figure 6.15.10
5) Function code o30 = 3 (operation continues)
Figure 6.15.11
*1 During this period, if communication does not recover and a new command and setting are not sent, the
command (run command, speed command, or both) from communication before the communication error
occurred is held.
6-241
6.15.6.2 E-SX related alarms (are, arf )
The causes of E-SX related alarms are and arf are shown in Tables 6.15.6 and 6.15.7.
Table 6.15.6 are Alarm Causes

Item E-SX bus tact synchronization error
ERR (lit)
Card LED state
RUN (lit)
Cause Synchronization of tact cycle and inverter control cycle lost due to noise or other cause.
After clearing the cause of the alarm, issue a reset command.
Reset method
After the alarm is reset, the ERR LED turns off.
Communication error
code displayed on -
keypad
Alarm sub-code
01(hex)
*1
Table 6.15.7 arf Alarm Causes

Item Toggle error
ERR (lit)
Card LED state
RUN (lit)
Normal toggle signal pattern of TGL1 and TGL2 signals not received within time set by
Cause
inverter function code H144.
Reset method
Communication error
code displayed on -
keypad
Alarm sub-code
04(hex)
*1
*1 Alarm sub-codes can be checked as explained in *5 of "6.15.6.1 Light alarms and heavy alarms in E-SX bus
communication".
6.15.6.3 Other inverter alarms

The card treats inverter alarms other than the above as light alarms. The actions indicated in Table 6.15.8
take place.
Table 6.15.8 Actions When Other Alarms Occur
Item Inverter alarm other than an E-SX related alarm

ERR (lit)
Card LED state
RUN (lit)
Reset method
Inverter alarm codes (other than er4 ) can be checked on the E-SX bus light alarm
information tab of alarm diagnosis in the Expert (D300win) support tool. Hexadecimal
values are shown in the following format in Expert (D300win).
Others b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
1 1 Alarm code (M16) (*1)
*1 For details on alarm codes, refer to Chapter 4, Section 4.2.4 "Data Format List."
6-242
6.15.7 Data addresses (IQ area)

6.15.7.1 Supported formats
Function code U11 "SX bus transmission format selection" can be set to 3 to support the transmission
format below.
(1) Standard format 2 (U11 = 3)

Basic format that allows reading/writing of the motor speed, operation status monitor, and two
function codes each (specified in 485No).
6.15.7.2 Input/output data address assignments

(1) Standard format 2
Chap. 6
(*1) bit 15 bit 0
%IWx.x.*.0 Polling function code 485No (1)
CONTROL OPTIONS
%IWx.x.*.1 Polling function code 485No (2)
%IWx.x.*.2 Data of polling function code (1)
%IWx.x.*.3 Data of polling function code (2)
%IWx.x.*.4 Function code monitor (1)
%IWx.x.*.5 Function code monitor (2)
%IWx.x.*.6 Motor speed
BUSY
FWD
NUV
ERR
DEC
ACC
ALM
BRK
REV
EXT
INT
RL
TL
%IWx.x.*.7
IL
-
%QWx.x.*.8 Selecting function code 485No (1)

%QWx.x.*.9 Selecting function code 485No (2)
%QWx.x.*.10 Data of selecting function code (1)
%QWx.x.*.11 Data of selecting function code (2)
%QWx.x.*.12 Speed command FWD
REV
RST
X14
X13
X12
X11
X9
X8
X7
X6
X5
X4
X3
X2
X1
%QWx.x.*.13
%QWx.x.*.14 Polling function code 485No (1)

%QWx.x.*.15 Polling function code 485No (2)
Figure 6.15.12 Standard Format 2
*1 The address structure is as follows.

SX bus station address of Inverter station
Prefix E-SX bus number Word number
PLC address
(%IW, %QW) (0, 1) (0-9)
. (254-247) . . (1-238) .
For address details, refer to the MICREX-SX SPH User's Manual, SPH3000MM (FH302).
6-243
6.15.8 Format details
6.15.8.1 I area (MICREX-SX ← FRENIC-VG)
1 Polling function code address, polling function code data
(MSB) (LSB)
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Data of polling function code (1)
Data of polling function code (2)
The 485No corresponding to the function code in the polling request from the MICREX-SX is
stored in "Polling function code 485No (1), (2)" (16 bits). The data are respectively stored in "Data
of polling function code (1), (2)".
2 Function code monitor

(MSB) (LSB)
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
"Function code monitor (1), (2)" are constant monitors of function codes. Set the 485Nos. of the
function codes to be monitored in function code o160 for "Function code monitor (1)" and o161 for
"Function code monitor (2)".
3 Motor speed
(MSB) (LSB)
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Motor speed (decimal) x 20000 ÷ maximum speed 16 bit data
The maximum speed is the speed set in inverter function code F03. To use r/min units, calculate
the above equation in reverse. When the data is negative (2's complement), the command becomes
a reverse speed command.
6-244
4 Operation status (1 when all are ON)

(MSB) (LSB)
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
BUSY
FWD
ERR
DEC
ACC
NUV
ALM
BRK
REV
EXT
INT
RL
TL
IL
-
-
REV : Running in reverse (1: H30 = 2 or 3)
EXT : DC braking / pre-excitation IL : Current limiting
INT : Inverter shutdown ACC : Accelerating - (FRENIC-VG is always 0)
NUV : DC link voltage established ALM : Alarm relay BUSY : Writing function code
ERR is "0" when function code selecting (writing) and polling (reading) all took place normally. If a selecting or
polling operation was abnormal, ERR becomes "1"*1. The cause of the error can be checked in function code
Chap. 6
M26 (the table below). When this bit is "1", remove the cause of the error as indicated in M26 and perform
selecting/polling. If all finish normally at this time, ERR and M26 automatically change to "0".
Value of Write/read error
CONTROL OPTIONS
M26
78 Accessed unused function code
79 Write to read-only function code
Write while running to function code that cannot be changed while
running
Write to function code that cannot be changed when FWD/REV is
ON
80 Out of range data write
*1 If multiple errors occur simultaneously, the M26 error cause will be shown in the following order of priority:
Selecting (2) > Selecting (1) > Polling (2) > Polling (1).
(For example, if both selecting (2) and polling (1) are errors, the cause of the selecting (2) error will be stored in M26.)
BUSY is "1" during data writing (processing). To successively write data, wait until this bit is "0" before writing
the next data. Data written while this bit is "1" will be disregarded.
6-245
6.15.8.2 Q area (MICREX-SX → FRENIC-VG)
1 Selecting function code 485No, selecting function code data
(MSB) (LSB)
15 14 1 0
Data of selecting function code (1)
Data of selecting function code (2)
The 485No corresponding to the function code for selecting from the MICREX-SX is written to
"Selecting function code 485No (1), (2)" (16 bits). At the same time, write the data respectively to
"Data of selecting function code (1), (2)".
Note 1: When selecting, write the 485No. and data at the same time.
Note 2: Writing to function code F00 (485No. = 0000h) is not possible in this format. If writing is attempted,
a "Write to read-only function code error" will occur and 79 will be written to M26.
Note 3: If the same function code is set in selecting function code (1) and (2), the specification by selecting
function code (2) is given priority.
2 Speed command (S01)

(MSB) (LSB)
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Motor speed (decimal) x 20000 ÷ maximum speed ⇒ 16 bit data
The maximum speed is the speed set in inverter function code F03. To use r/min units, calculate
the above equation in reverse. When the data is negative (2's complement), the command becomes
a reverse speed command.
3 Run command / Di / RESET input (S06)

(MSB) (LSB)
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
FWD
REV
RST
X14
X13
X12
X11
X9
X8
X7
X6
X5
X4
X3
X2
X1
FWD : Run forward command X1-X14 : Terminal input (Di)

REV : Run reverse command RST : Reset alarm
If a link command is allowed, FWD and REV are valid. X1 to X14 and RST are always valid.
For link commands, refer to Section 6.4.9 "Link function."
4 Polling function code 485No

(MSB) (LSB)
15 14 1 0
Specify the 485No corresponding to the polling request function code in "Polling function code
485No (1), (2)" (16 bits).
6-246
6.15.9 Data transmission examples

Examples of data transmission using standard format 2 are described below.
Conditions
Function code U11 "SX transmission format selection" = 3, H30 "Link Operation" = 3, maximum speed:
1500 r/min,
E-SX bus station address: 10, E-SX master station address: 254, E-SX bus used
(1) Speed setting / run command

Issuing run forward (FWD) and 750 r/min speed commands from the MICREX-SX
%QW254.0.10.12 2 7 1 0 750 ÷ 1500 × 20000 = 10000 = 2710(hex)

%QW254.0.10.13 0 0 0 1 FWD = 1
Chap. 6
(2) Method of using function code monitor
Constant monitoring from the MICREX-SX of the calculated torque value M07 and the effective
output current value M11.
CONTROL OPTIONS
Set o160 = 0807 (hex) and o161 = 080B (hex) in advance.
(485No. of M07 is 0807 (hex), 485No. of M11 is 080B (hex))
↓
%IW254.0.10.4 0 7 0 A M07 = 1388 (hex) = 5000 ⇒ 50.00%

%IW254.0.10.5 0 5 B 4 M11 = 05B4 (hex) = 1460 ⇒ 146.0A
(3) Function code data settings

Setting 30.5 s in function code S08 "acceleration time" from the MICREX-SX.
%QW254.0.10.8 0 7 0 8 Selecting of function code S08 (485No. 0708h)

%QW254.0.10.9 0 0 0 0
%QW254.0.10.10 0 1 3 1 30.5 = 305 × 0.1s = 305 = 0131 (hex)
%QW254.0.10.11 0 0 0 0
%QW254.0.10.12 0 0 0 0
%QW254.0.10.13 0 0 0 0
%QW254.0.10.14 0 7 0 8 Polling of function code S08 to confirm completion of setting
↓ After write is completed
%IW254.0.10.0 0 8 0 7 Polling response of function code S08

%IW254.0.10.1 0 0 0 0
%IW254.0.10.2 131 (hex) = 305 × 0.1 s = 30.5 s
0 1 3 1
(Indicates that data was set normally.)
%IW254.0.10.3 0 0 0 0
6-247
(4) Toggle monitor
Performing data toggle monitor between the MICREX-SX and inverter. This example describes
how to set the X12 terminal to TGL1 and the X13 terminal to TGL2.*1
Set E11 = 72 (TGL1), E12 = 73 (TGL2), H30 = 3, and H144 = 0.10 (100 ms) in advance.
As a result,
Transmission toggle (MICREX-SX→VG1): %QW254.0.10.13 bit 11 = TGL1, bit 12 = TGL2
The inverter monitors the toggle pattern sent from the MICREX-SX while the run command is ON,
and if the correct toggle signal is not received within the time set in H144, generates toggle error
arf.
*1 For details on toggling, refer to the E01 to E13 toggle signal section in Chapter 4, Section 4.3 "Details of
Function Codes."
Inverter function code H107 can be set to display l-al and continue operation when an alarm
occurs. Refer to the explanation of H107 in Chapter 4, Section 4.3 "Details of Function Codes."
When F26 "Carrier frequency" is set to a value other than 4 or 8, set the tact cycle of the
application that sends the MICREX-SX transmission toggle to 0.5 ms or higher.
%QW254.0.10.13 * 0 0 0 0 → 1 → 2 → 3 → 0... is sent to * (toggle pattern transmission)
↓ After toggle transmission
%QW254.0.10.13 * 0 0 1 Run command (FWD) = ON
Note: If an er4 E-SX bus communication error (light alarm, heavy alarm 1) occurs during toggle
transmission and toggle transmission is continued, an arf toggle error may occur immediately
after communication recovers normally. To avoid an arf toggle error, stop toggle transmission
when an er4 E-SX bus communication error occurs.
6-248
6.15.10 Synchronization of E-SX bus tact cycle and inverter control

cycle
6.15.10.1 Conditions required for tact synchronization
Connecting the card to the E-SX bus makes it possible to synchronize the E-SX bus tact cycle and the
inverter control cycle. By doing this, the control timing of multiple inverters can be synchronized,
making it easy to implement control that requires high-accuracy timing.
However, the processing that synchronizes the inverter control cycle and the E-SX bus tact cycle
requires that the following conditions (1) and (2) both be satisfied. If either condition is not satisfied, the
tact cycle and inverter control cycle will operate asynchronously. When the conditions are both satisfied,
synchronization is performed automatically after E-SX bus communication is established.
Table 6.15.9 Tact Synchronization Conditions
Synchronization condition
Chap. 6
Condition (1) The E-SX bus tact cycle is one of the following (recommended tact cycles are underlined).*1
0.25 ms，0.5 ms，0.75 ms，1 ms，1.25 ms，1.5 ms，1.75 ms
2 ms，2.5 ms，3 ms，3.5 ms，4 ms，4.5 ms，5 ms，5.5 ms，6 ms
CONTROL OPTIONS
6.5 ms，7 ms，7.5 ms，8 ms，8.5 ms，9 ms，9.5 ms，10 ms
Condition (2) Inverter function code F26 "Carrier Frequency" is set to either of the following frequencies.*2
4 kHz，8 kHz
*1 If the tact cycle is other than a recommended cycle, the control cycle timing will not be the same for multiple
inverters.
*2 When F26 "Carrier Frequency" is set to other than 4 kHz or 8 kHz, set the bus tact cycle to 0.5 ms or more.
6.15.10.2 Checking the tact synchronization status

The tact synchronization status can be checked by the methods indicated in Table 6.15.10.
Table 6.15.10 Tact Synchronization Status
Method Operation
Function of Y terminal C-Do10 Tact synchronizing: C-Do10 = ON *1
Function code M142 Tact synchronizing: M142 bit 0 = 1*2
*1 To assign C-Do10 to the Y terminal, refer to E15 to E27, Y function selection in Chapter 4, Section 4.3 "Details
of Function Codes."
*2 Can be checked in the data confirmation screen of the keypad even if C-Do10 is not assigned to the Y terminal.
6.15.10.3 Action when synchronization is lost (are )

If synchronization is lost due to noise or other cause after the E-SX bus tact cycle and inverter control
cycle are synchronized, the inverter operates as described below.
Table 6.15.11 Action When Synchronization is Lost
Error Operation
Synchronization is lost "are " (alarm sub-code 1) occurs as an E-SX bus tact synchronization
error.*1
Resynchronization is performed automatically, and "are" reset can take place
when resynchronization is completed.
*1 If the tact cycle or inverter function code F26 is changed during synchronization so that the synchronization
conditions are no longer met, synchronization will be lost; however, are will not occur in this case.
Note: Inverter function code H108 can be set to display l-al and continue operation when an alarm occurs. Refer
to the explanation of H108 in Chapter 4, Section 4.3 "Details of Function Codes."
6-249
6.15.11 Support tool interface
6.15.11.1 Configuration definition method
The configuration definition method in the "Expert (D300win)" support tool for the inverter is explained
below.
1 In "E-SX bus" under "CPU" below, select the IN terminal or OUT terminal that connects the inverter,
and right-click to perform "Insert".
2 In the "Module insert" window, select the individual module in "Module attribute type", select the
inverter in "Module group type", and select model "FRN-VG1 (STD1)" in "Outline specification".
3 Parameter settings are not necessary (parameters cannot be set). Press OK.
6.15.11.2 Compatible versions of the SPH3000MM and support tool

(1) Compatible versions of the inverter support tool are as follows.
Expert (D300win) : V3.5.2.36 or later
Standard : V3.0.3.34 or later
(2) Compatible versions of the inverter SPH3000MM are as follows.

Hardware : V20 or later
Firmware : V02 or later
6-250
FRENIC- VG
7
Chapter 7
APPLICATION EXAMPLES
This chapter gives application examples of the FRENIC-VG series of inverters.
Contents
7.1 Large Crane and Overhead Crane ............................................................................................................... 7-1

7.2 Application to Plants................................................................................................................................... 7-1
7.3 Servo Press: Large Size for Automobiles, Small Size for Machines such as Crimping Terminal
Processing Machines................................................................................................................................... 7-2
7.4 Winding Equipment (Paper and Metal)....................................................................................................... 7-2
7.5 Feeding Part of Semiconductor Manufacturing Device, Wire Saw............................................................. 7-3
7.6 Test Equipment for Automobiles................................................................................................................. 7-3
7.7 Shipboard Winch......................................................................................................................................... 7-4
7.8 Flying Shear ................................................................................................................................................ 7-4
7.1 Large Crane and Overhead Crane
7.1 Large Crane and Overhead Crane
High reliability
VG supports your facility with long life service and high reliability.
Chap. 7
The trace back function allows easy fault diagnosis.
System support
The bus system is supported to allow centralized control of elevation, traverse, and trolley, as well as
centralized monitoring of running conditions.
7.2 Application to Plants
Control with high speed and high accuracy

In addition to high speed and high accuracy, VG contributes to stable facility operation with high
reliability and long service life. The trace back function makes diagnosing the cause of problems easy
when an abnormality arises.
System support
Centralized control and monitoring are achieved by supporting various fieldbuses.
7-1
7.3 Servo Press:
Large Size for Automobiles, Small Size for Machines
such as Crimping Terminal Processing Machines
Position control
The press position is controlled based on an instantaneous position command given by the CNC of the
high order.
Control with high responsibility contributes to shortening of the operation cycle.
Precision synchronization control

Large machines are driven with several motors to increase thrust. Precision synchronization control of
several inverters and motors using the high-speed bus system can be applied.
7.4 Winding Equipment (Paper and Metal)
Tension control
Tension-type winding control capability with high accuracy torque control has been improved.
Dancer-type winding control capability by the speed control with high speed response has been
improved.
System support
The controller that calculates winding diameter achieves constant tension control.
7-2
7.5 Feeding Part of Semiconductor Manufacturing Device, Wire Saw
7.5 Feeding Part of Semiconductor Manufacturing Device,

Wire Saw
Smooth torque characteristic

The smooth drive characteristic in which torque ripple is suppressed contributes to machining quality.
System support
Chap. 7
The system has been made simple and highly efficient by connecting and controlling the spindle that
drives wires and the small-capacity servo that drives the traverse axis and winding up and oﬀ axes in
the same bus system.
7.6 Test Equipment for Automobiles
High-speed response control

High-speed rotation and torque control with high response are available for engine and transmission
tests.
System support
The system can be supported in cases such as the vehicle body inertia simulation function for a brake
test apparatus by combining with the controller.
7-3
7.7 Shipboard Winch
High reliability and tension control

Torque is controlled up to extra low speed using the sensorless feature.
Stable drive is maintained against load variation caused by waves.
7.8 Flying Shear
Position control
Position control is performed according to the position command given by the high-order CNC. The
machine cuts the blank while moving at the same speed as the blank.
System support
The system is configured by a controller that calculates synchronous operation among the blank feed
axis, cutter feed axis and cut axis.
7-4
FRENIC- VG
8
Chapter 8
SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT
This chapter describes how to use a range of peripheral equipment and options, FRENIC-VG's
configuration with them, and requirements and precautions for selecting wires and crimp terminals.
Contents
8.1 Configuring the FRENIC-VG ..................................................................................................................... 8-1

8.2 Selecting Wires and Crimp Terminals......................................................................................................... 8-2
8.3 Recommended Wires .................................................................................................................................. 8-6
8.4 Peripheral Equipment................................................................................................................................ 8-18
8.4.1 Molded case circuit breaker or residual-current-operated protective device/earth leakage circuit
breaker/magnetic contactor ............................................................................................................... 8-18
8.4.1.1 Functional overview.................................................................................................................. 8-18
8.4.1.2 Connection example and criteria for selection of circuit breakers ............................................ 8-20
8.4.2 Surge killer for L-load....................................................................................................................... 8-25
8.4.3 Arrester ............................................................................................................................................. 8-26
8.4.4 Surge absorber................................................................................................................................... 8-27
8.4.5 Filter capacitor for radio noise reduction .......................................................................................... 8-28
8.5 Peripheral Equipment Options .................................................................................................................. 8-29
8.5.1 Braking resistors (DBRs) and braking units...................................................................................... 8-29
8.5.1.1 Braking resistors (DBRs) .......................................................................................................... 8-29
8.5.1.2 Braking units ............................................................................................................................. 8-29
8.5.1.3 Specifications and connection example..................................................................................... 8-30
8.5.1.4 External dimensions .................................................................................................................. 8-41
8.5.2 Power regenerative PWM converters (RHC series) .......................................................................... 8-44
8.5.2.1 Features ..................................................................................................................................... 8-44
8.5.2.2 Specifications ............................................................................................................................ 8-45
8.5.2.3 Function specifications.............................................................................................................. 8-47
8.5.2.4 Converter configuration ............................................................................................................ 8-51
8.5.2.5 Basic connection diagrams........................................................................................................ 8-53
8.5.2.6 External dimensions .................................................................................................................. 8-55
8.5.2.7 Generated loss ........................................................................................................................... 8-63
8.5.3 DC reactor (DCR) ............................................................................................................................. 8-65
8.5.4 AC reactor (ACR) ............................................................................................................................. 8-70
8.5.5 Surge suppression unit (SSU) ........................................................................................................... 8-75
8.5.6 Output circuit filter (OFL)................................................................................................................. 8-76
8.5.7 Radio noise reducing zero phase reactor (ACL) ............................................................................... 8-80
8.5.8 External cooling attachment.............................................................................................................. 8-81
8.6 Battery....................................................................................................................................................... 8-83
8.6.1 Overview of battery........................................................................................................................... 8-83
8.6.2 Installing battery ............................................................................................................................... 8-84
8.6.2.1 Installing battery (for 22 kW or lower) ..................................................................................... 8-84
8.6.2.2 Installing battery (for 30 kW or higher) .................................................................................... 8-85
8.6.3 Replacing battery .............................................................................................................................. 8-86
8.6.4 Sending battery via air transport ....................................................................................................... 8-86
8.1 Configuring the FRENIC-MEGA
8.1 Configuring the FRENIC-VG

This section lists the names and features of peripheral equipment and options for the FRENIC-VG series
of inverters and includes a configuration example for reference.
Chap. 8
Figure 8.1 Quick Overview of Options
8-1
8.2 Selecting Wires and Crimp Terminals
This section contains information needed to select wires for connecting the inverter to commercial power
lines, motor or any of the optional/peripheral equipment. The level of electric noise issued from the
inverter or received by the inverter from external sources may vary depending upon wiring and routing.
For more information about wiring and noise, refer to Appendix A “Advantageous Use of Inverters (Notes
on electrical noise)” and the Fuji Electric technical information "Engineering Design of Panels."
Select wires that satisfy the following requirements:

• Sufficient capacity to flow the rated average current (allowable current capacity).
• Protective coordination with an MCCB or RCD/ELCB with overcurrent protection in the overcurrent
zone.
• Voltage loss due to the wiring length is within the allowable range.
• Suitable for the type and size of terminals of the optional equipment to be used.
Recommended wires are listed below. Use these wires unless otherwise specified.
600 V class of vinyl-insulated wires (IV wires)

Use this class of wire for the power circuits. This class of wire is hard to twist, so using it for the control
signal circuits is not recommended. Maximum surrounding temperature for this wire is 60°C.
600 V grade heat-resistant PVC insulated wires or 600 V polyethylene insulated wires
(HIV wires)
As wires in this class are smaller in diameter and more flexible than IV wires and can be used at a higher
surrounding temperature (75°C), they can be used for both of the main power and control signal circuits.
To use this class of wire for the control circuits, you need to correctly twist the wires and keep the wiring
length for equipment being connected as short as possible.
600 V cross-linked polyethylene-insulated wires

Use this class of wire mainly for power and grounding circuits. These wires are smaller in diameter and
more flexible than those of the IV and HIV classes of wires, meaning that these wires can be used to
save on space and increase operation efficiency of your power system, even in high temperature
environments. Maximum surrounding temperature for this wire is 90°C. The (Boardlex) wire range
available from Furukawa Electric Co., Ltd. satisfies these requirements.
Shielded-Twisted cables for internal wiring of electronic/electric equipment

Use this category of cables for the control circuits of the inverter so as to prevent the signal lines from
being affected by noise from external sources, including the power input/output lines of the inverter
themselves. Even if the signal lines are inside the power control panel, always use this category of cables
when the length of wiring is longer than normal. Cables satisfying these requirements are the Furukawa's
BEAMEX S shielded cables of the XEBV and XEWV ranges.
8-2
Currents Flowing through Inverter Terminals

Table 8.1 summarizes average (effective) electric currents flowing across the terminals of each inverter
model for ease of reference when selecting peripheral equipment, options and electric wires for each
inverter--including supplied power voltage and applicable motor rating.
Table 8.1 Currents Flowing through Inverter

HD (High Duty) mode: Heavy duty load applications
LD (Low Duty) mode: Light duty load applications
50 Hz, 200 V 60 Hz, 220 V
Specifications
Nominal
Power Input RMS current (A) DC link Input RMS current (A) DC link
applied
supply Inverter type bus bus
motor DC reactor (DCR) DC reactor (DCR)
voltage current current
(kW)
w/ DCR w/o DCR (A) w/ DCR w/o DCR (A)
0.75 FRN0.75VG1□-2J 3.2 5.3 4 3 4.9 3.7
1.5 FRN1.5VG1□-2J 6.1 9.5 7.5 5.6 8.7 6.9
2.2 FRN2.2VG1□-2J 8.9 13.2 11 8.1 12 10
3.7 FRN3.7VG1□-2J 15 22.2 18.4 13.6 20 16.7
5.5 FRN5.5VG1□-2J 21.1 31.5 25.9 19 28.4 23.3
HD
7.5 FRN7.5VG1□-2J 28.8 42.7 35.3 26 38.5 31.9
11 FRN11VG1□-2J 42.2 60.7 51.7 38 54.7 46.6
15 FRN15VG1□-2J 57.6 80.1 70.6 52 72.2 63.7
Chap. 8
18.5 FRN18.5VG1□-2J 71 97 87 64 87.4 78.4
22 FRN22VG1□-2J 84.4 112 103 76 101 93.1
Three- 30 HD 114 151 140 103 136 126
phase FRN30VG1□-2J
LD 138 185 169 124 167 152

200V
37
HD 138 185 169 124 167 152
FRN37VG1□-2J
LD 167 225 205 150 203 184
45
HD 167 225 205 150 203 184
FRN45VG1□-2J
LD 203 270 249 183 243 224
55
HD 203 270 249 183 243 224
FRN55VG1□-2J
LD 282 345 254 311
75
HD 282 345 254 311
FRN75VG1□-2J
LD 334 - 409 301 - 368
90
HD 334 409 301 368
FRN90VG1□-2J
110 LD 410 502 369 452
Note: □ in the inverter model represents an alphabet.

□
S (Basic type)
• Inverter efficiency is calculated using values suitable for each inverter model. The input route mean square (RMS) current is
calculated according to the following conditions:
[22 kW or below] Power supply capacity 500 kVA, Power supply impedance 5%
[30 kW or above] Power supply capacity and power supply impedance which are calculated using values matching the inverter
capacity recommended by Fuji Electric.
• The input RMS current listed in the above table will vary in inverse proportion to the power supply voltage, such as 230 VAC.
8-3
Table 8.1 Currents Flowing through Inverter (continued)
MD (Medium Duty) mode: Medium duty load applications
50 Hz, 400 V 60 Hz, 440 V
Specifications
Nominal
Power Input RMS current (A) DC link Input RMS current (A) DC link
applied
supply Inverter type bus bus
voltage current current
(kW)
w/ DCR w/o DCR (A) w/ DCR w/o DCR (A)
3.7 FRN3.7VG1□-4J 7.5 13 9.2 6.9 11.8 8.5

5.5 FRN5.5VG1□-4J 10.6 17.3 13 9.6 15.7 11.8
7.5 FRN7.5VG1□-4J 14.4 23.2 17.7 13 21 16
11 FRN11VG1□-4J HD 21.1 33 25.9 19 29.8 23.3
15 FRN15VG1□-4J 28.8 43.8 35.3 26 39.5 31.9
18.5 FRN18.5VG1□-4J 35.5 52.3 43.5 32 47.1 39.2
22 FRN22VG1□-4J 42.2 60.6 51.7 38 54.6 46.6
30 HD 57 77.9 69.9 51.4 70.2 63
FRN30VG1□-4J
LD 68.5 94.3 83.9 61.8 85 75.7
37
HD 68.5 94.3 83.9 61.8 85 75.7
FRN37VG1□-4J
LD 83.2 114 102 75 103 91.9
45
HD 83.2 114 102 75 103 91.9
FRN45VG1□-4J
LD 102 140 125 91.9 126 113
55
HD 102 140 125 91.9 126 113
FRN55VG1□-4J
LD 138 169 124 152
75
HD 138 169 124 152
Three- FRN75VG1□-4J
phase LD 164 201 148 181
400 V 90
HD 164 201 148 181
FRN90VG1□-4J
MD/LD 201 246 181 222
110
HD 201 246 181 222
FRN110VG1□-4J
MD/LD 238 292 214 263
132
HD 238 292 214 263
FRN132VG1□-4J
MD/LD 286 350 258 315
160
HD 286 - 350 258 - 315
FRN160VG1□-4J
MD/LD 357 437 321 394
200
HD 357 437 321 394
FRN200VG1□-4J
MD/LD 390 478 351 430
220
HD 390 478 351 430
250 FRN220VG1□-4J MD 443 543 399 489
LD 500 613 450 552
280
HD 500 613 450 552
315 FRN280VG1□-4J MD 559 685 503 617
355 LD 628 770 565 693

□
S (Basic type)
8-4
Table 8.1 Currents Flowing through Inverter (continued)

50 Hz, 400 V 60 Hz, 440 V
Specifications
Nominal
Power Input RMS current (A) Input RMS current (A)
applied
supply Inverter type DC link bus DC link bus
voltage current (A) current (A)
(kW)
w/ DCR w/o DCR w/ DCR w/o DCR
315 HD 559 685 503 617

355 FRN315VG1□-4J MD 628 770 565 693
400 LD 705 864 635 778
355 HD 628 770 565 693
400 FRN355VG1□-4J MD 705 864 635 778
450 LD 789 967 710 870
Three-
phase 400 HD 705 - 864 635 - 778
400 V
450 FRN400VG1□-4J MD 789 967 710 870
LD 881 1080 793 972
500
HD 881 1080 793 972
FRN500VG1□-4J
LD 1115 1367 1004 1230
630
HD 1115 1367 1004 1230
FRN630VG1□-4J
710 LD 1256 1539 1130 1385
Chap. 8
□
S (Basic type)

8-5
8.3 Recommended Wires
The following tables list the recommended wires according to the internal temperature of your power
control panel.
If the internal temperature of your power control panel is 50°C or below
Table 8.2 Wire Size (for main circuit power input and inverter output)
Recommended wires
Main circuit power inputs Inverter output
L1/R, L2/S, L3/T U ,V, W
Specifications
Nominal
Power
applied w/ DC reactor (DCR) w/o DC reactor (DCR) HD MD LD
supply Inverter type
motor
voltage Maximum Maximum Maximum Maximum Maximum
(kW) temperature temperature temperature temperature temperature
Current Current Current Current Current
(Note 1) (A) (Note 1) (A) (Note 1) (A) (Note 1) (A) (Note 1) (A)
60°C 75°C 90°C 60°C 75°C 90°C 60°C 75°C 90°C 60°C 75°C 90°C 60°C 75°C 90°C
0.75 FRN0.75VG1□-2J 2.0 2.0 2.0 3.2 2.0 2.0 2.0 5.3 2.0 2.0 2.0 5 - - - - - - - -
1.5 FRN1.5VG1□-2J 2.0 2.0 2.0 6.1 2.0 2.0 2.0 9.5 2.0 2.0 2.0 8 - - - - - - - -
2.2 FRN2.2VG1□-2J 2.0 2.0 2.0 8.9 2.0 2.0 2.0 13.2 2.0 2.0 2.0 11 - - - - - - - -
3.7 FRN3.7VG1□-2J 2.0 2.0 2.0 15.0 5.5 2.0 2.0 22.2 3.5 2.0 2.0 18 - - - - - - - -
5.5 FRN5.5VG1□-2J 5.5 2.0 2.0 21.1 8.0 3.5 3.5 31.5 5.5 3.5 2.0 27 - - - - - - - -
7.5 FRN7.5VG1□-2J 8.0 3.5 2.0 28.8 14 5.5 5.5 42.7 14 5.5 3.5 37 - - - - - - - -
HD 8.0 8.0
11 FRN11VG1□-2J 14 5.5 5.5 42.2 22 14 60.7 14 5.5 49 - - - - - - - -
*3) *3)
8.0 8.0
15 FRN15VG1□-2J 22 14 57.6 38 22 14 80.1 22 14 63 - - - - - - - -
*3) *3)
38 60 38
18.5 FRN18.5VG1□-2J 14 14 71.1 22 14 97.0 14 14 76 - - - - - - - -
*1) *2) *1)
38 60 38 38
Three- 22 FRN22VG1□-2J 22 14 84.4 22 112 22 14 90 - - - - - - - -
*1) *2) *1) *1)
phase
200V 30 HD 60 38 22 114 - 60 38 151 60 38 22 119 - - - - - - - -
FRN30VG1□-2J
LD - - - - - - 38 38 146
37 38 38 138 - 60 38 185 - - - -
HD 100 100 38 38 146 - - - -
FRN37VG1□-2J
LD - - - - - 60 38 180
45 100 60 38 167 - 100 60 225 - - - -
HD - 60 38 180 - - - -
FRN45VG1□-2J
LD - - - - - 100 60 215
55 - 100 60 203 - 100 100 270 - - - -
HD - 100 60 215 - - - -
FRN55VG1□-2J 150 150
LD - - - - - 100 283
75 - *4) 100 282 - - - - - - - - *4)
HD 150 - 150 100 283 - - - -
FRN75VG1□-2J
LD - - - - - 150 150 346
90 - 150 100 334 - - - - - - - -
HD - 150 150 346 - - - -
FRN90VG1□-2J
110 LD - 200 150 410 - - - - - - - - - - - - - 200 150 415
Note 1: Assuming the use of aerial wiring (without rack or duct): 600 V class of vinyl-insulated IV wires for 60°C, 600 V class of
polyethylene-insulated HIV wires for 75°C, and 600 V cross-linked polyethylene insulated wires for 90°C.
Note 2:□ in the inverter model represents an alphabet.
□
S (Basic type)
*4 Use CB150-10 crimp terminals designed for low voltage appliances in JEM1399.
8-6
8.3 Recommended wires
Table 8.2 Wire Size (for main circuit power input and inverter output) (continued)
Recommended wires
Main circuit power input Inverter output
L1/R, L2/S, L3/T U, V, W
Specifications
Nominal
Power
motor
(kW)
temperature Current temperature Current temperature Current temperature Current temperature Current
3.7 FRN3.7VG1□-4J HD 2.0 2.0 2.0 7.5 2.0 2.0 2.0 13.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 9 - - - - - - - -
5.5 FRN5.5VG1□-4J HD 2.0 2.0 2.0 10.6 3.5 2.0 2.0 17.3 2.0 2.0 2.0 13.5 - - - - - - - -
7.5 FRN7.5VG1□-4J HD 2.0 2.0 2.0 14.4 5.5 2.0 2.0 23.2 3.5 2.0 2.0 18.5 - - - - - - - -
8.0
11 FRN11VG1□-4J HD 5.5 2.0 2.0 21.1 3.5 3.5 33 5.5 3.5 2.0 24.5 - - - - - - - -
*1)
8.0 8.0
15 FRN15VG1□-4J HD 3.5 2.0 28.8 14 5.5 5.5 43.8 3.5 3.5 32 - - - - - - - -
*1) *1)
8.0
18.5 FRN18.5VG1□-4J HD 14 5.5 3.5 35.5 22 5.5 52.3 14 5.5 3.5 39 - - - - - - - -
*1)
8.0 8.0
22 FRN22VG1□-4J HD 14 5.5 5.5 42.2 22 14 60.6 14 5.5 45 - - - - - - - -
*1) *1)
30 HD 22 14 8.0 57.0 38 14 14 77.9 22 14 8.0 60 - - - - - - - -
FRN30VG1□-4J
LD - - - - 38 14 14 75
37 38 14 8.0 68.5 60 22 14 94.3 - - - -
HD 38 14 14 75 - - - -
FRN37VG1□-4J
LD - - - - 38 22 14 91
45 38 22 14 83.2 60 38 22 114 - - - -
HD 38 22 14 91 - - - -
FRN45VG1□-4J
LD - - - - 60 38 22 112
55 60 22 22 102 - 38 38 140 - - - -
HD 60 38 22 112 - - - -
FRN55VG1□-4J
LD - - - - - - 60 38 150
Chap. 8
75 38 38 138 - - - - - - - -
HD 100 100 60 38 150 - - - -
FRN75VG1□-4J
LD - - - - - 60 38 176
90 100 60 38 164 - - - - - - - -
HD - 60 38 176 - - - -
FRN90VG1□-4J MD/
- - - - - 100 60 210 - 100 60 210
110 LD - 100 60 201 - - - -

HD - 100 60 210 - - - - - - - -
FRN110VG1□-4J MD/
- - - - - 100 100 253 - 100 100 253
Three- 132 LD - 100 60 238 - - - -
phase HD - 100 100 253 - - - - - - - -
400 V FRN132VG1□-4J MD/
- - - - - 150 100 304 - 150 100 304
160 LD - 150 100 286 - - - -
HD - 150 100 304 - - - - - - - -
FRN160VG1□-4J MD/
- - - - - 200 150 377 - 200 150 377
200 LD - 150 150 357 - - - -
HD - 200 150 377 - - - - - - - -
FRN200VG1□-4J MD/
- - - - - 200 150 415 - 200 150 415
220 LD - 200 150 390 - - - -
HD - 200 150 415 - - - - - - - -
250 FRN220VG1□-4J MD - 250 150 443 - - - - - - - - - 250 200 468 - - - -
LD - - - - - 325 200 520
280 - 250 200 500 - - - - - - - -
HD - 325 200 520 - - - -
315 FRN280VG1□-4J MD - 2x150 250 559 - - - - - - - - - 325 250 585 - - - -
355 LD - 2x200 250 628 - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2x200 325 650
315 HD - 2x150 250 559 - - - - - 325 250 585 - - - - - - - -
355 FRN315VG1□-4J MD - 2x200 250 628 - - - - - - - - - 2x200 325 650 - - - -
400 LD - 2x200 325 705 - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2x250 325 740
355 HD - 2x200 250 628 - - - - - 2x200 325 650 - - - - - - - -
400 FRN355VG1□-4J MD - 2x200 325 705 - - - - - - - - - 2x250 325 740 - - - -
450 LD 2x250 2x200 789 - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2x250 2x200 840
400 HD - 2x200 325 705 - - - - - 2x250 325 740 - - - - - - - -
450 FRN400VG1□-4J MD 2x250 2x200 789 - - - - - - - - - 2x250 2x200 840 - - - -
LD - - - - - 2x325 2x250 960
500 - 2x325 2x200 881 - - - - - - - -
HD - 2x325 2x250 960 - - - -
FRN500VG1□-4J
LD - - - - - 3x325 2x325 1170
630 - 3x325 2x325 1115 - - - - - - - -
HD - 3x325 2x325 1170 ` - - -
FRN630VG1□-4J
710 LD - 4x250 2x325 1256 - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4x325 3x325 1370
□
S (Basic type)
8-7
Table 8.2 Wire Size (for DC reactor, control circuit, and inverter grounding) (continued)
Recommended wires (㎜ 2)
Auxiliary power
Auxiliary input for For inverter
For DC reactor connection input for the control
For control circuit fan power supply grounding
Specifications
Nominal 〔P1,P(+)〕 circuit
Power 〔R1,T1〕〔 G〕
applied 〔R0, T0〕
motor
(kW)
temperature Current temperature temperature temperature temperature
(Note 1) (A) (Note 1) (Note 1) (Note 1) (Note 1)
0.75 FRN0.75VG1□-2J 2.0 2.0 2.0 4.0
1.5 FRN1.5VG1□-2J 2.0 2.0 2.0 7.5

HD 2.0
2.2 FRN2.2VG1□-2J 2.0 2.0 2.0 11.0
3.7 FRN3.7VG1□-2J 3.5 2.0 2.0 18.4
5.5 FRN5.5VG1□-2J HD 5.5 3.5 2.0 25.9 3.5
7.5 FRN7.5VG1□-2J HD 14 5.5 3.5 35.3
8.0 5.5
11 FRN11VG1□-2J HD 22 5.5 51.7
*3) -
38
15 FRN15VG1□-2J HD 14 14 70.6
*1)
8.0
38
18.5 FRN18.5VG1□-2J HD 22 14 87.0
*1)
60
Three- 22 FRN22VG1□-2J HD 22 22 103
*2) 14
phase 1.25 2.0
200V 30 HD - 38 38 140
FRN30VG1□-2J
LD -
37 60 38 169
HD 100
FRN37VG1□-2J
LD
45 - 100 60 205
HD
FRN45VG1□-2J
LD
55 - 100 60 249
HD 22
2.0
FRN55VG1□-2J 150 150
LD (37 kW or above)
75 - *4) *4) 345
HD 150 150
FRN75VG1□-2J
LD
90 - 200 150 409
HD
FRN90VG1□-2J
110 LD - 250 200 502 38
□
S (Basic type)
8-8
Recommended wires (mm2)

Auxiliary power
Specifications
Nominal For control circuit fan power supply grounding
Power 〔P1,P(+)〕 circuit
applied 〔R1,T1〕〔 G〕
supply Inverter type 〔R0, T0〕
motor
voltage Maximum Maximum Maximum Maximum
(kW) Maximum
Current temperature temperature temperature temperature
temperature (Note 1)
(A) (Note 1) (Note 1) (Note 1) (Note 1)
3.7 FRN3.7VG1□-4J HD 2.0 2.0 2.0 9.2
2.0
5.5 FRN5.5VG1□-4J HD 2.0 2.0 2.0 13.0
7.5 FRN7.5VG1□-4J HD 3.5 2.0 2.0 17.7
3.5
11 FRN11VG1□-4J HD 5.5 3.5 2.0 25.9
15 FRN15VG1□-4J HD 14 5.5 3.5 35.3
18.5 FRN18.5VG1□-4J HD 14 5.5 5.5 43.5
5.5
8.0
22 FRN22VG1□-4J HD 22 5.5 51.7
*1)
-
30 HD 38 14 8.0 69.9
FRN30VG1□-4J
LD
37 38 22 14 83.9
HD
FRN37VG1□-4J 8.0
LD
45 60 22 22 102
HD
FRN45VG1□-4J
LD
55 60 38 22 125
HD
FRN55VG1□-4J
LD -
75 60 38 169
Chap. 8
HD 100 14
FRN75VG1□-4J
LD
90 - 100 60 201
HD
FRN90VG1□-4J MD/
110 LD - 100 60 246

HD
FRN110VG1□-4J MD/
132 LD - 150 100 292 22
HD
Three- FRN132VG1□-4J MD/
phase 1.25 2.0
160 LD - 150 150 350
400 V
HD
FRN160VG1□-4J MD/
200 LD - 250 150 437
HD
FRN200VG1□-4J MD/
220 LD - 250 200 478 38
HD
2.0
250 FRN220VG1□-4J MD - 325 250 543 (75 kW or above)
LD
280 - 2x200 250 612
HD
315 FRN280VG1□-4J MD - 2x200 325 685
355 LD - 2x250 2x200 769
315 HD - 2x200 325 685
355 FRN315VG1□-4J MD - 2x250 2x200 769
400 LD - 2x325 2x200 864
60
355 HD - 2x250 2x200 769
400 FRN355VG1□-4J MD - 2x325 2x200 864
450 LD - 2x325 2x250 966
400 HD - 2x325 2x200 864
450 FRN400VG1□-4J MD - 2x325 2x250 966
LD
500 - 3x325 2x325 1079
HD
FRN500VG1□-4J
LD 100
630 - 3x325 3x325 1366
HD
FRN630VG1□-4J
710 LD - 4x325 3x325 1538
Note 2: □ in the inverter model represents an alphabet.
□
S (Basic type)
8-9
Table 8.3 Wire Size (for main circuit power input and inverter output)

〔L1/R, L2/S, L3/T〕〔U, V, W〕
Specifications
Nominal
Power
motor
(kW)
0.75 FRN0.75VG1□-2J 2.0 2.0 2.0 3.2 2.0 2.0 2.0 5.3 2.0 2.0 2.0 5 - - - - - - - -
1.5 FRN1.5VG1□-2J 2.0 2.0 2.0 6.1 2.0 2.0 2.0 9.5 2.0 2.0 2.0 8 - - - - - - - -
HD
2.2 FRN2.2VG1□-2J 2.0 2.0 2.0 8.9 2.0 2.0 2.0 13.2 2.0 2.0 2.0 11 - - - - - - - -
3.7 FRN3.7VG1□-2J 2.0 2.0 2.0 15 3.5 2.0 2.0 22.2 2.0 2.0 2.0 18 - - - - - - - -
5.5 FRN5.5VG1□-2J HD 2.0 2.0 2.0 21.1 5.5 3.5 2.0 31.5 3.5 2.0 2.0 27 - - - - - - - -
7.5 FRN7.5VG1□-2J HD 3.5 2.0 2.0 28.8 8.0 5.5 3.5 42.7 5.5 3.5 3.5 37 - - - - - - - -
8.0 8.0 8.0

11 FRN11VG1□-2J HD 5.5 3.5 42.2 14 5.5 60.7 5.5 5.5 49 - - - - - - - -
*2) *2) *2)
8.0 8.0
15 FRN15VG1□-2J HD 14 5.5 57.6 22 14 14 80.1 14 5.5 63 - - - - - - - -
*2) *2)
8.0 38 8.0
18.5 FRN18.5VG1□-2J HD 14 14 71 22 14 97.0 22 14 76 - - - - - - - -
*2) *1) *2)
38
Three- 22 FRN22VG1□-2J HD 22 14 14 84.4 22 14 112 22 14 14 90 - - - - - - - -
*1)
phase
200V 30 HD 38 22 22 114 60 38 38 151 38 22 22 119 - - - - - - - -
FRN30VG1□-2J
LD - - - - - 60 38 22 146
37 60 38 22 138 60 38 185 - - - -
HD 100 60 38 22 146 - - - -
FRN37VG1□-2J
LD - - - - 100 60 38 180
45 60 38 38 167 100 60 60 225 - - - -
HD 100 60 38 180 - - - -
FRN45VG1□-2J
LD - - - - 100 60 60 215
55 100 60 38 203 - 100 60 270 - - - -
HD 100 60 60 215 - - - -
FRN55VG1□-2J
LD - - - - - - 100 100 283
75 150 100 100 282 - - - - - - - -
HD 150 100 100 283 - - - -
FRN75VG1□-2J *3)
LD - - - - 200 150 100 346

90 - 150 100 334 - - - - - - - -
HD 200 150 100 346 - - - -
FRN90VG1□-2J
110 LD - 150 150 410 - - - - - - - - - - - - 250 150 150 415
□
S (Basic type)
8-10
Table 8.3 Wire Size (for main circuit power input and inverter output) (continued)

〔L1/R, L2/S, L3/T〕〔U, V, W〕
Specifications
Nominal
Power
motor
(kW)
3.7 FRN3.7VG1□-4J HD 2.0 2.0 2.0 7.5 2.0 2.0 2.0 13.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 9 - - - - - - - -
5.5 FRN5.5VG1□-4J HD 2.0 2.0 2.0 10.6 2.0 2.0 2.0 17.3 2.0 2.0 2.0 13.5 - - - - - - - -
7.5 FRN7.5VG1□-4J HD 2.0 2.0 2.0 14.4 3.5 2.0 2.0 23.2 2.0 2.0 2.0 18.5 - - - - - - - -
11 FRN11VG1□-4J HD 2.0 2.0 2.0 21.1 5.5 3.5 2.0 33 3.5 2.0 2.0 24.5 - - - - - - - -
8.0
15 FRN15VG1□-4J HD 3.5 2.0 2.0 28.8 5.5 3.5 43.8 5.5 3.5 2.0 32 - - - - - - - -
*1)
8.0
18.5 FRN18.5VG1□-4J HD 5.5 3.5 3.5 35.5 14 5.5 52.3 5.5 3.5 3.5 39 - - - - - - - -
*1)
8.0 8.0 8.0
22 FRN22VG1□-4J HD 5.5 3.5 42.2 14 5.5 60.6 5.5 3.5 45 - - - - - - - -
*1) *1) *1)
30 HD 14 8.0 5.5 57.0 22 14 8.0 77.9 14 8.0 5.5 60 - - - - - - - -
FRN30VG1□-4J
LD - - - - 22 14 8.0 75
37 14 14 8.0 68.5 38 14 14 94.3 - - - -
HD 22 14 8.0 75 - - - -
FRN37VG1□-4J
LD - - - - 22 14 14 91
45 22 14 14 83.2 38 22 22 114 - - - -
HD 22 14 14 91 - - - -
FRN45VG1□-4J
LD - - - - 38 22 14 112
55 38 22 14 102 60 38 22 140 - - - -
HD 38 22 14 112 - - - -
FRN55VG1□-4J
Chap. 8
LD - - - - 60 38 38 150
75 60 38 22 138 - - - - - - - -
HD 60 38 38 150 - - - -
FRN75VG1□-4J
LD - - - - 60 60 38 176
90 60 38 38 164 - - - - - - - -
HD 60 60 38 176 - - - -
FRN90VG1□-4J MD/

- - - - 100 60 60 210 100 60 60 210
110 LD 100 60 38 201 - - - -
HD 100 60 60 210 - - - - - - - -
FRN110VG1□-4J MD
- - - - 150 100 60 253 150 100 60 253
132 /LD 100 100 60 238 - - - -
Three- HD 150 100 60 253 - - - - - - - -
phase FRN132VG1□-4J MD/
400 V - - - - 150 100 100 304 150 100 100 304
160 LD 150 100 100 286 - - - -
HD 150 100 100 304 - - - - - - - -
FRN160VG1□-4J MD/
- - - - 200 150 100 377 200 150 100 377
200 LD 200 150 100 357 - - - -
HD 200 150 100 377 - - - - - - - -
FRN200VG1□-4J MD/
- - - - 250 150 150 415 250 150 150 415
220 LD 250 150 150 390 - - - -
HD 250 150 150 415 - - - - - - - -
250 FRN220VG1□-4J MD 250 200 150 443 - - - - - - - - 325 200 150 468 - - - -
LD - - - - 325 250 200 520
280 325 200 150 500 - - - - - - - -
HD 325 250 200 520 - - - -
315 FRN280VG1□-4J MD - 250 200 559 - - - - - - - - - 250 200 585 - - - -
355 LD - 325 250 628 - - - - - - - - - - - - - 325 250 650
315 HD - 250 200 559 - - - - - 250 200 585 - - - - - - - -
355 FRN315VG1□-4J MD - 325 250 628 - - - - - - - - - 325 250 650 - - - -
400 LD - 2x150 250 705 - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2x200 325 740
355 HD - 325 250 628 - - - - - 325 250 650 - - - - - - - -
400 FRN355VG1□-4J MD - 2x150 250 705 - - - - - - - - - 2x200 325 740 - - - -
450 LD - 2x200 325 789 - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2x200 2x150 840
400 HD - 2x150 250 705 - - - - - 2x200 325 740 - - - - - - - -
450 FRN400VG1□-4J MD - 2x200 325 789 - - - - - - - - - 2x200 2x150 840 - - - -
LD - - - - - 2x250 2x200 960
500 - 2x250 2x200 881 - - - - - - - -
HD - 2x250 2x200 960 - - - -
FRN500VG1□-4J
LD - - - - - 3x250 2x250 1170
630 - 2x325 2x250 1115 - - - - - - - -
HD - 3x250 2x250 1170 - - - -
FRN630VG1□-4J
710 LD - 3x250 2x325 1256 - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3x325 2x325 1370
□
S (Basic type)
8-11
For braking resistor connection Auxiliary

Auxiliary input
For DC reactor power input
for fan power For inverter
〔P(+),DB〕
For control
connection for the control grounding
Specifications
Nominal circuit supply
Power 〔P1,P(+)〕 circuit
applied HD MD LD 〔R1,T1〕
〔 G〕
supply Inverter type 〔R0, T0〕
motor
voltage
(kW)
Maximum Maximum Maximum Maximum Maximum Maximum Maximum Maximum
Cur- Cur-
temperature temperature Cur- temperature temperature Cur- temperature temperature temperature temperature
(Note 1) rent (Note 1) rent (Note 1) rent (Note 1) rent (Note 1) (Note 1) (Note 1) (Note 1)
(A) (A) (A) (A)
60°C 75°C 90°C 60°C 75°C 90°C 60°C 75°C 90°C 60°C 75°C 90°C 60°C 75°C 90°C 60°C 75°C 90°C 60°C 75°C 90°C 60°C 75°C 90°C
0.75 FRN0.75VG1□-2J 2.0 2.0 2.0 4.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.6 - - - - - - - -
1.5 FRN1.5VG1□-2J 2.0 2.0 2.0 7.5 2.0 2.0 2.0 3.6 - - - - - - - -
HD 2.0
2.2 FRN2.2VG1□-2J 2.0 2.0 2.0 11.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 3.5 - - - - - - - -
3.7 FRN3.7VG1□-2J 2.0 2.0 2.0 18.4 2.0 2.0 2.0 4.1 - - - - - - - -
5.5 FRN5.5VG1□-2J HD 3.5 2.0 2.0 25.9 2.0 2.0 2.0 6.4 - - - - - - - - 3.5
7.5 FRN7.5VG1□-2J HD 5.5 3.5 3.5 35.3 2.0 2.0 2.0 6.1 - - - - - - - -
5.5
11 FRN11VG1□-2J HD 14 5.5 5.5 51.7 2.0 2.0 2.0 9.1 - - - - - - - - -
8.0
15 FRN15VG1□-2J HD 14 14 70.6 2.0 2.0 2.0 11 - - - - - - - -
*2) 8.0
18.5 FRN18.5VG1□-2J HD 22 14 14 87.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 14 - - - - - - - -
38
22 FRN22VG1□-2J HD 22 14 103 2.0 2.0 2.0 15 - - - - - - - -
*1) 14
Three-
phase 30 HD 60 38 22 140 2.0 2.0 2.0 19 - - - - - - - - 1.25 2.0
FRN30VG1□-2J
200V
LD - - - - 2.0 2.0 2.0 19
37 60 38 38 169 - - - -
HD 3.5 2.0 2.0 25 - - - -
FRN37VG1□-2J
LD - - - - 3.5 2.0 2.0 25
45 100 60 38 205 - - - -
HD 3.5 3.5 2.0 30 - - - -
FRN45VG1□-2J
LD 150 - - - - 3.5 3.5 2.0 30
55 100 60 249 - - - -
HD
*3)
5.5 3.5 3.5 37 22
- - - - 2.0
FRN55VG1□-2J (37kW or
150
LD - - - - 5.5 3.5 3.5 37 above)
75 - *3) 100 345 - - - -
HD 150 8.0 5.5 5.5 48 - - - -
FRN75VG1□-2J
LD - - - - 8.0 5.5 5.5 48
90 - 150 150 409 - - - -
HD 14.0 8.0 5.5 61 - - - -
FRN90VG1□-2J
110 LD - 200 150 502 - - - - - - - - 14 8.0 5.5 61 38
□
S (Basic type)
8-12
Auxiliary power
For control circuit fan power supply grounding
Specifications
Nominal 〔P1,P(+)〕 circuit
Power 〔R1,T1〕〔 G〕
applied 〔R0, T0〕
motor
(kW)
temperature Current temperature temperature temperature temperature
(Note 1) (A) (Note 1) (Note 1) (Note 1) (Note 1)
3.7 FRN3.7VG1□-4J HD 2.0 2.0 2.0 9.2
2.0
5.5 FRN5.5VG1□-4J HD 2.0 2.0 2.0 13.0
7.5 FRN7.5VG1□-4J HD 2.0 2.0 2.0 17.7
3.5
11 FRN11VG1□-4J HD 3.5 2.0 2.0 25.9
15 FRN15VG1□-4J HD 5.5 3.5 3.5 35.3
18.5 FRN18.5VG1□-4J HD 8.0 *1) 5.5 3.5 43.5 5.5
22 FRN22VG1□-4J HD 14 5.5 5.5 51.7
30 HD 14 14 8.0 69.9 -
FRN30VG1□-4J
LD
37 22 14 14 83.9
HD 8.0
FRN37VG1□-4J
LD
45 38 22 14 102
HD
FRN45VG1□-4J
LD
55 38 38 22 125
HD
FRN55VG1□-4J
LD
Chap. 8
75 60 38 38 169 14
HD
FRN75VG1□-4J
LD
90 100 60 38 201
HD
FRN90VG1□-4J MD/

110 LD 150 100 60 246
HD
FRN110VG1□-4J MD/
132 LD 150 100 100 292 22
HD
Three- FRN132VG1□-4J MD/
phase 160 LD 200 150 100 350 1.25 2.0
400 V HD
FRN160VG1□-4J MD/
200 LD 250 200 150 437
HD
FRN200VG1□-4J MD/
220 LD 325 200 150 478 38
HD
2.0
250 FRN220VG1□-4J MD - 250 200 543 (75 kW or above)
LD
280 - 325 250 612
HD
315 FRN280VG1□-4J MD - 2x150 250 685
355 LD - 2x200 325 769
315 HD - 2x150 250 685
355 FRN315VG1□-4J MD - 2x200 325 769
400 LD - 2x250 2x200 864
60
355 HD - 2x200 325 769
400 FRN355VG1□-4J MD - 2x250 2x200 864
450 LD - 2x250 2x200 966
400 HD - 2x250 2x200 864
450 FRN400VG1□-4J MD - 2x250 2x200 966
LD
500 - 2x325 2x250 1079
HD
FRN500VG1□-4J
LD 100
630 - 3x325 2x325 1366
HD
FRN630VG1□-4J
710 LD - 4x325 3x325 1538
□
S (Basic type)
8-13
< Wire Size (for DC reactor, braking resistor >
Table 8.4 Wire Size (for braking resistor)
10% ED product 20% ED product

For braking resistor connection For braking resistor connection
Specifications 〔P(+),DB〕〔P(+),DB〕
Nominal
Power
applied HD MD LD HD MD LD
motor
voltage Maximum Maximum Maximum Maximum Maximum Maximum
(kW) Cur- Cur- Cur- Cur- Cur- Cur-
temperature temperature temperature temperature temperature temperature
(Note 1) rent (Note 1) rent (Note 1) rent (Note 1) rent (Note 1) rent (Note 1) rent
(A) (A) (A) (A) (A) (A)
60°C 75°C 90°C 60°C 75°C 90°C 60°C 75°C 90°C 60°C 75°C 90°C 60°C 75°C 90°C 60°C 75°C 90°C
0.75 FRN0.75VG1□-2J HD 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.4 - - - - - - - - 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.9 - - - - - - - -
1.5 FRN1.5VG1□-2J HD 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.9 - - - - - - - - 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.7 - - - - - - - -
2.2 FRN2.2VG1□-2J HD 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.3 - - - - - - - - 2.0 2.0 2.0 3.3 - - - - - - - -
3.7 FRN3.7VG1□-2J HD 2.0 2.0 2.0 3.4 - - - - - - - - 2.0 2.0 2.0 4.8 - - - - - - - -
5.5 FRN5.5VG1□-2J HD 2.0 2.0 2.0 5.1 - - - - - - - - 2.0 2.0 2.0 7.2 - - - - - - - -
7.5 FRN7.5VG1□-2J HD 2.0 2.0 2.0 6.8 - - - - - - - - 2.0 2.0 2.0 9.7 - - - - - - - -
11 FRN11VG1□-2J HD 2.0 2.0 2.0 10.2 - - - - - - - - 2.0 2.0 2.0 14.4 - - - - - - - -
15 FRN15VG1□-2J HD 2.0 2.0 2.0 13.7 - - - - - - - - 3.5 2.0 2.0 19.4 - - - - - - - -
18.5 FRN18.5VG1□-2J HD 3.5 2.0 2.0 17.6 - - - - - - - - 5.5 3.5 2.0 24.8 - - - - - - - -
22 FRN22VG1□-2J HD 3.5 2.0 2.0 20.3 - - - - - - - - 8.0 3.5 2.0 28.7 - - - - - - - -

Three- 30 HD 8.0 3.5 2.0 30.0 - - - - - - - - 14 5.5 3.5 38.7 - - - - - - - -
200V LD - - - - 8.0 3.5 2.0 29.8 - - - - 14 5.5 3.5 38.5
37 - - - - - - - -
HD 14 5.5 3.5 35.1 - - - - 14 8.0 5.5 48.1 - - - -
FRN37VG1□-2J
LD - - - - 8.0 5.5 3.5 34.6 - - - - 14 8.0 5.5 47.4
45 - - - - - - - -
HD 14 5.5 3.5 41.1 - - - - 22 14 8.0 58.1 - - - -
FRN45VG1□-2J
LD - - - - 14 5.5 3.5 40.6 - - - - 22 14 8.0 57.4
55 - - - - - - - -
HD 14 8.0 5.5 50.8 - - - - 38 14 14 71.8 - - - -
FRN55VG1□-2J
LD - - - - 22 8.0 5.5 53.0 - - - - 38 14 14 75.0
75 - - - - - - - -
HD 38 14 8.0 68.5 - - - - 60 22 14 96.8 - - - -
FRN75VG1□-2J
LD - - - - 38 14 8.0 67.1 - - - - 60 22 14 94.9
90 - - - - - - - -
HD 38 22 14 82.2 - - - - 60 38 22 116 - - - -
FRN90VG1□-2J
110 LD - - - - - - - - 38 22 14 81.2 - - - - - - - - 60 38 22 115
□
S (Basic type)
8-14
Table 8.4 Wire Size (for braking resistor) (continued)


Specifications
Nominal 〔P(+),DB〕〔P(+),DB〕
Power
motor
(A) (A) (A) (A) (A) (A)
3.7 FRN3.7VG1□-4J HD 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.7 - - - - - - - - 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.4 - - - - - - - -
5.5 FRN5.5VG1□-4J HD 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.5 - - - - - - - - 2.0 2.0 2.0 3.6 - - - - - - - -
7.5 FRN7.5VG1□-4J HD 2.0 2.0 2.0 3.4 - - - - - - - - 2.0 2.0 2.0 4.8 - - - - - - - -
11 FRN11VG1□-4J HD 2.0 2.0 2.0 5.1 - - - - - - - - 2.0 2.0 2.0 7.2 - - - - - - - -
15 FRN15VG1□-4J HD 2.0 2.0 2.0 6.8 - - - - - - - - 2.0 2.0 2.0 9.7 - - - - - - - -
18.5 FRN18.5VG1□-4J HD 2.0 2.0 2.0 8.8 - - - - - - - - 2.0 2.0 2.0 12.4 - - - - - - - -
22 FRN22VG1□-4J HD 2.0 2.0 2.0 10.2 - - - - - - - - 2.0 2.0 2.0 14.4 - - - - - - - -
30 HD 2.0 2.0 2.0 15.0 - - - - - - - - 3.5 2.0 2.0 19.4 - - - - - - - -
FRN30VG1□-4J
37 LD - - - - 2.0 2.0 2.0 14.9 - - - - 3.5 2.0 2.0 19.2
- - - - - - - -
37 HD 3.5 2.0 2.0 17.6 - - - - 5.5 3.5 2.0 24.8 - - - -
FRN37VG1□-4J
45 LD - - - - 3.5 2.0 2.0 17.3 - - - - 5.5 3.5 2.0 24.5
- - - - - - - -
45 HD 3.5 2.0 2.0 20.5 - - - - 8.0 3.5 2.0 29.0 - - - -
FRN45VG1□-4J
55 LD - - - - 3.5 2.0 2.0 20.3 - - - - 8.0 3.5 2.0 28.7
- - - - - - - -
55 HD 5.5 3.5 2.0 25.2 - - - - 14 5.5 3.5 35.6 - - - -
FRN55VG1□-4J
75 LD - - - - 5.5 3.5 2.0 26.3 - - - - 14 5.5 3.5 37.2
- - - - - - - -
75 HD 8.0 5.5 3.5 34.6 - - - - 14 8.0 5.5 48.9 - - - -
Chap. 8
FRN75VG1□-4J
90 LD - - - - 8.0 5.5 3.5 33.9 - - - - 14 8.0 5.5 47.9
- - - - - - - -
90 HD 14 5.5 3.5 41.6 22 14 8.0 58.8
- - - - - - - -
110 FRN90VG1□-4J MD 14 8.0 5.5 50.8 38 14 14 71.8
- - - -
110 LD 14 5.5 3.5 41.1 - - - - 22 14 8.0 58.2
- - - - - - - -

110 HD 14 8.0 5.5 50.8 38 14 14 71.8
- - - - - - - -
132 FRN110VG1□-4J MD 22 14 8.0 61.7 38 22 14 87.3
- - - -
132 LD 14 8.0 5.5 49.7 - - - - 38 14 14 70.4
- - - - - - - -
132 HD 22 14 8.0 61.7 38 22 14 87.3
- - - - - - - -
Three- 160 FRN132VG1□-4J MD 38 14 14 73.9 60 38 22 104
- - - -
phase 160 LD 22 14 8.0 60.8 - - - - 38 22 14 85.9
400V - - - - - - - -
160 HD 38 14 14 73.9 60 38 22 104
- - - - - - - -
200 FRN160VG1□-4J MD 38 22 14 92.6 100 38 22 131
- - - -
200 LD 38 14 14 73.9 - - - - 60 38 22 104
- - - - - - - -
200 HD 38 22 14 92.6 100 38 22 131
- - - - - - - -
220 FRN200VG1□-4J MD 60 22 22 102 100 38 38 144
- - - -
220 LD 38 22 14 86.8 - - - - 60 38 22 123
- - - - - - - -
220 HD 60 22 22 102 100 38 38 144
- - - - - - - -
250 FRN220VG1□-4J MD 60 38 22 120 100 60 38 170
- - - - - - - -
280 LD 60 22 22 102 100 38 38 145
- - - - - - - -
280 HD 100 38 38 138 150 60 60 195
- - - - - - - -
315 FRN280VG1□-4J MD 100 38 38 147 150 100 60 207
- - - - - - - -
355 LD 100 38 38 139 150 60 60 197
- - - - - - - -
315 HD 100 38 38 147 150 100 60 207
- - - - - - - -
355 FRN315VG1□-4J MD 150 60 38 175 200 100 60 248
- - - - - - - -
400 LD 100 60 38 148 200 100 60 235
- - - - - - - -
355 HD 150 60 38 175 200 100 60 248
- - - - - - - -
400 FRN355VG1□-4J MD 150 60 60 186 200 100 100 263
- - - - - - - -
450 LD 150 60 38 177 200 100 100 250
- - - - - - - -
400 HD 150 60 60 186 200 100 100 263
- - - - - - - -
450 FRN400VG1□-4J MD 150 100 60 228 325 150 100 322
- - - - - - - -
500 LD 150 60 60 186 200 100 100 263
- - - - - - - -
500 HD 200 100 60 240 - - - - 325 150 100 340 - - - -
FRN500VG1□-4J
630 LD - - - - 200 100 60 241 - - - - 325 150 100 341
- - - - - - - -
630 HD 250 150 100 293 - - - - 2x200 200 150 381 - - - -
FRN630VG1□-4J
710 LD - - - - - - - - 250 150 100 278 - - - - - - - - 2x200 200.0 150 394
□
S (Basic type)
8-15

〔P(+),DB〕〔P(+),DB〕
Specifications
Nominal
Power
motor
(A) (A) (A) (A) (A) (A)
0.75 FRN0.75VG1□-2J HD 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.4 - - - - - - - - 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.9 - - - - - - - -
1.5 FRN1.5VG1□-2J HD 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.9 - - - - - - - - 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.7 - - - - - - - -
2.2 FRN2.2VG1□-2J HD 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.3 - - - - - - - - 2.0 2.0 2.0 3.3 - - - - - - - -
3.7 FRN3.7VG1□-2J HD 2.0 2.0 2.0 3.4 - - - - - - - - 2.0 2.0 2.0 4.8 - - - - - - - -
5.5 FRN5.5VG1□-2J HD 2.0 2.0 2.0 5.1 - - - - - - - - 2.0 2.0 2.0 7.2 - - - - - - - -
7.5 FRN7.5VG1□-2J HD 2.0 2.0 2.0 6.8 - - - - - - - - 2.0 2.0 2.0 9.7 - - - - - - - -
11 FRN11VG1□-2J HD 2.0 2.0 2.0 10.2 - - - - - - - - 2.0 2.0 2.0 14.4 - - - - - - - -
15 FRN15VG1□-2J HD 2.0 2.0 2.0 13.7 - - - - - - - - 2.0 2.0 2.0 19.4 - - - - - - - -
18.5 FRN18.5VG1□-2J HD 2.0 2.0 2.0 17.6 - - - - - - - - 3.5 2.0 2.0 24.8 - - - - - - - -
22 FRN22VG1□-2J HD 2.0 2.0 2.0 20.3 - - - - - - - - 3.5 2.0 2.0 28.7 - - - - - - - -

Three- 30 HD 3.5 3.5 2.0 30.0 - - - - - - - - 5.5 3.5 3.5 38.7 - - - - - - - -
200V 37 LD - - - - 3.5 3.5 2.0 29.8 - - - - 5.5 3.5 3.5 38.5
- - - - - - - -
37 HD 5.5 3.5 3.5 35.1 - - - - 8.0 5.5 5.5 48.1 - - - -
FRN37VG1□-2J
45 LD - - - - 5.5 3.5 3.5 34.6 - - - - 8.0 5.5 5.5 47.4
- - - - - - - -
45 HD 8.0 5.5 3.5 41.1 - - - - 14 8.0 5.5 58.1 - - - -
FRN45VG1□-2J
55 LD - - - - 8.0 5.5 3.5 40.6 - - - - 14 8.0 5.5 57.4
- - - - - - - -
55 HD 14 5.5 5.5 50.8 - - - - 14 14 8.0 71.8 - - - -
FRN55VG1□-2J
75 LD - - - - 14 8.0 5.5 53.0 - - - - 22 14 8.0 75.0
- - - - - - - -
75 HD 14 14 8.0 68.5 - - - - 38 22 14 96.8 - - - -
FRN75VG1□-2J
90 LD - - - - 14 14 8.0 67.1 - - - - 38 14 14 94.9
- - - - - - - -
90 HD 22 14 14 82.2 - - - - 38 22 22 116 - - - -
FRN90VG1□-2J
110 LD - - - - - - - - 22 14 14 81.2 - - - - - - - - 38 22 22 115
□
S (Basic type)
8-16


Specifications
Nominal 〔P(+),DB〕〔P(+),DB〕
Power
motor
(A) (A) (A) (A) (A) (A)
3.7 FRN3.7VG1□-4J HD 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.7 - - - - - - - - 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.4 - - - - - - - -
5.5 FRN5.5VG1□-4J HD 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.5 - - - - - - - - 2.0 2.0 2.0 3.6 - - - - - - - -
7.5 FRN7.5VG1□-4J HD 2.0 2.0 2.0 3.4 - - - - - - - - 2.0 2.0 2.0 4.8 - - - - - - - -
11 FRN11VG1□-4J HD 2.0 2.0 2.0 5.1 - - - - - - - - 2.0 2.0 2.0 7.2 - - - - - - - -
15 FRN15VG1□-4J HD 2.0 2.0 2.0 6.8 - - - - - - - - 2.0 2.0 2.0 9.7 - - - - - - - -
18.5 FRN18.5VG1□-4J HD 2.0 2.0 2.0 8.8 - - - - - - - - 2.0 2.0 2.0 12.4 - - - - - - - -
22 FRN22VG1□-4J HD 2.0 2.0 2.0 10.2 - - - - - - - - 2.0 2.0 2.0 14.4 - - - - - - - -
30 HD 2.0 2.0 2.0 15.0 - - - - - - - - 2.0 2.0 2.0 19.4 - - - - - - - -
FRN30VG1□-4J
37 LD - - - - 2.0 2.0 2.0 14.9 - - - - 2.0 2.0 2.0 19.2
- - - - - - - -
37 HD 2.0 2.0 2.0 17.6 - - - - 3.5 2.0 2.0 24.8 - - - -
FRN37VG1□-4J
45 LD - - - - 2.0 2.0 2.0 17.3 - - - - 3.5 2.0 2.0 24.5
- - - - - - - -
45 HD 2.0 2.0 2.0 20.5 - - - - 3.5 3.5 2.0 29.0 - - - -
FRN45VG1□-4J
55 LD - - - - 2.0 2.0 2.0 20.3 - - - - 3.5 2.0 2.0 28.7
- - - - - - - -
55 HD 3.5 2.0 2.0 25.2 - - - - 5.5 3.5 3.5 35.6 - - - -
FRN55VG1□-4J
75 LD - - - - 3.5 2.0 2.0 26.3 - - - - 5.5 3.5 3.5 37.2
- - - - - - - -
75 HD 5.5 3.5 3.5 34.6 - - - - 8.0 5.5 5.5 48.9 - - - -
FRN75VG1□-4J
90 LD - - - - 5.5 3.5 2.0 33.9 - - - - 8.0 5.5 5.5 47.9
Chap. 8
- - - - - - - -
90 HD 8.0 5.5 3.5 41.6 14 8.0 5.5 58.8
- - - - - - - -
110 FRN90VG1□-4J MD 14 5.5 5.5 50.8 14 14 8.0 71.8
- - - - - - - -
110 LD 8.0 5.5 3.5 41.1 14 8.0 5.5 58.2
- - - - - - - -
110 HD 14 5.5 5.5 50.8 14 14 8.0 71.8
- - - - - - - -

132 FRN110VG1□-4J MD 14 8.0 5.5 61.7 22 14 14 87.3
- - - - - - - -
132 LD 8.0 5.5 5.5 49.7 14 14 8.0 70.4
- - - - - - - -
132 HD 14 8.0 5.5 61.7 22 14 14 87.3
- - - - - - - -
Three- 160 FRN132VG1□-4J MD 22 14 8.0 73.9 38 22 14 104
- - - - - - - -
phase 160 LD 14 8.0 5.5 60.8 22 14 14 85.9
400V - - - - - - - -
160 HD 22 14 8.0 73.9 38 22 14 104
- - - - - - - -
200 FRN160VG1□-4J MD 22 14 14 92.6 38 38 22 131
- - - - - - - -
200 LD 22 14 8.0 73.9 38 22 14 104
- - - - - - - -
200 HD 22 14 14 92.6 38 38 22 131
- - - - - - - -
220 FRN200VG1□-4J MD 38 22 14 102 60 38 22 144
- - - - - - - -
220 LD 22 14 14 86.8 38 22 22 123
- - - - - - - -
220 HD 38 22 14 102 60 38 22 144
- - - - - - - -
250 FRN220VG1□-4J MD 38 22 22 120 60 38 38 170
- - - - - - - -
280 LD 38 22 14 102 60 38 22 145
- - - - - - - -
280 HD 60 38 22 138 100 60 38 195
- - - - - - - -
315 FRN280VG1□-4J MD 60 38 22 147 100 60 38 207
- - - - - - - -
355 LD 60 38 22 139 100 60 38 197
- - - - - - - -
315 HD 60 38 22 147 100 60 38 207
- - - - - - - -
355 FRN315VG1□-4J MD 60 60 38 175 150 100 60 248
- - - - - - - -
400 LD 60 38 22 148 100 100 60 235
- - - - - - - -
355 HD 60 60 38 175 150 100 60 248
- - - - - - - -
400 FRN355VG1□-4J MD 100 60 38 186 150 100 60 263
- - - - - - - -
450 LD - - - - 60 60 38 177 150 100 60 250
- - - -
400 HD 100 60 38 186 - - - - 150 100 60 263
- - - - - - - -
450 FRN400VG1□-4J MD - - - - 100 60 60 228 150 150 100 322
- - - -
500 LD - - - - 100 60 38 186 150 100 60 263
- - - - - - - -
500 HD 100 100 60 240 - - - - 200 150 100 340 - - - -
FRN500VG1□-4J
630 LD - - - - 100 100 60 241 - - - - 200 150 100 341
- - - - - - - -
630 HD 150 100 100 293 - - - - 200 150 100 381 - - - -
FRN630VG1□-4J
710 LD - - - - - - - - 150 100 60 278 - - - - - - - - 250 150 150 394
□
S (Basic type)
8-17
8.4 Peripheral Equipment
8.4.1 Molded case circuit breaker or residual-current-operated
protective device/earth leakage circuit breaker/magnetic
contactor
8.4.1.1 Functional overview
MCCBs and RCDs/ELCBs* * With overcurrent protection
Molded Case Circuit Breakers (MCCBs) are designed to protect the power circuits between the power
supply and inverter's main circuit terminals ([L1/R], [L2/S] and [L3/T]) from overload or short-circuit,
which in turn prevents secondary accidents caused by the broken inverter.
Residual-Current-Operated Protective Devices (RCDs)/Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers (ELCBs) function
in the same way as MCCBs.
Built-in overcurrent/overload protective functions protect the inverter itself from failures related to its
input/output lines.
MCs
An MC can be used at both the power input and output sides of the inverter. At each side, the MC works
as described below. Use as needed. When inserted in the output circuit of the inverter, the MC can also
switch the motor drive power supply between the inverter output and commercial power lines.
At the power supply side

Insert an MC in the power supply side of the inverter in order to:
(1) Forcibly cut off the inverter from the power supply (generally, commercial/factory power lines) with
the protective function built into the inverter, or with the external signal input.
(2) Stop the inverter operation in an emergency when the inverter cannot interpret the stop command due
to internal/external circuit failures.
(3) Cut off the inverter from the power supply when the MCCB inserted in the power supply side cannot
cut it off for maintenance or inspection purpose. For the purpose only, it is recommended that you use
an MC capable of turning the MC ON/OFF manually.
Avoid frequent ON/OFF operation of the magnetic contactor (MC) in the input circuit;
otherwise, the inverter failure may result.
The frequency of the MC's ON/OFF should not be more than once per 30 minutes. To assure
10-year or longer service life of the inverter, it should not be more than once per hour.
If frequent start/stop of the motor is required, use FWD/REV terminal signals or the / /
keys on the inverter's keypad.
8-18
At the output side

Insert an MC in the power output side of the inverter in order to:
(1) Prevent externally turned-around current from being applied to the inverter power output terminals
([U], [V], and [W]) unexpectedly. An MC should be used, for example, when a circuit that switches
the motor driving power supply between the inverter output and commercial power lines is connected
to the inverter.
If a magnetic contactor (MC) is inserted in the inverter's output (secondary) circuit for
switching the motor to a commercial power or for any other purposes, it should be switched on
and off when both the inverter and motor are completely stopped. This prevents the contact
point from getting rough due to a switching arc of the MC. The MC should not be equipped
with any main circuit surge killer (Fuji SZ-ZM□, etc.).
Applying a commercial power to the inverter's output circuit breaks the inverter. To avoid it,
interlock the MC on the motor's commercial power line with the one in the inverter output
circuit so that they are not switched ON at the same time.
(2) Drive more than one motor selectively by a single inverter.
(3) Selectively cut off the motor whose thermal overload relay or equivalent devices have been activated.
Chap. 8
Driving the motor using commercial power lines
MCs can also be used to switch the power supply of the motor driven by the inverter to a commercial
power supply.

Select the MC so as to satisfy the rated currents listed in Table 8.1, which are the most critical RMS
currents for using the inverter. (Refer to Table 8.4) For switching the motor drive source between the
inverter output and commercial power lines, use the MC of class AC3 specified by JIS C8325 in the
commercial line side.
8-19
8.4.1.2 Connection example and criteria for selection of circuit breakers
Figure 8.2 shows a connection example for MCCB or RCD/ELCB (with overcurrent protection) and MC
in the inverter input circuit. Table 8.5 lists the rated current for the MCCB and corresponding inverter
models. Table 8.6 lists the applicable grades of RCD/ELCB sensitivity.
Insert an MCCB or RCD/ELCB (with overcurrent protection) recommended for each inverter for its input circuits.
Do not use an MCCB or RCD/ELCB of a higher rating than that recommended.
Doing so could result in a fire.
Molded case circuit breaker

or residual-current-operated protective device/
earth leakage circuit breaker Magnetic contactor
200 to 240 V
* With overcurrent protection
Figure 8.2 External Views of MCCB or RCD/ELCB and MC and Connection Example
8-20
Table 8.5 Rated Current of Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB), Residual-Current-Operated
Protective Device (RCD)/ Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker (ELCB) and Magnetic Contactor (MC)
MCCB, ELCB Magnetic contactor (MC)
Specifications
Nominal
Power Rated current(A)
applied
supply Inverter type For input circuit For output circuit
motor
voltage
(kW) DC reactor (DCR) DC reactor (DCR)
HD LD
w/ DCR w/o DCR w/ DCR w/o DCR
0.75 FRN0.75VG1□-2J 5 10
1.5 FRN1.5VG1□-2J 15 SC-05
10 SC-05
2.2 FRN2.2VG1□-2J 20 SC-05 -
3.7 FRN3.7VG1□-2J 20 30 SC-5-1
5.5 FRN5.5VG1□-2J 30 50 SC-N1 SC-4-0
7.5 FRN7.5VG1□-2J HD 40 75 SC-5-1 SC-N2 SC-N1 -
11 FRN11VG1□-2J 50 100 SC-N1 SC-N2S SC-N1 -
15 FRN15VG1□-2J 75 125 SC-N2 SC-N3 SC-N2 -
18.5 FRN18.5VG1□-2J 150 SC-N4 SC-N2S -
100 SC-N2S
22 FRN22VG1□-2J 175 SC-N5 SC-N3 -
Three- 30 150 200 SC-N4 SC-N7 SC-N4 -
Chap. 8
200V LD - SC-N5
37 175 250 SC-N5
HD SC-N5 -
FRN37VG1□-2J SC-N8
LD - SC-N7
45 200 300 SC-N7

HD SC-N7 -
FRN45VG1□-2J
LD - SC-N8
55 250 350 SC-N8 SC-N11
HD SC-N8 -
FRN55VG1□-2J
LD - SC-N10
75 350
HD SC-N11 -
FRN75VG1□-2J SC-N11
LD - - - SC-N11
90 400
HD SC-N11 -
FRN90VG1□-2J
110 LD 500 SC-N12 - SC-N12

□
S (Basic type)
• Install the MCCB or RCD/ELCB at the input side of the inverter. They cannot be installed at the output side of the inverter.
• The above table lists the rated current of MCCBs and RCD/ELCBs to be used in the power control panel with an internal
temperature of lower than 50°C. The rated current is factored by a correction coefficient of 0.85 as the RCDs'/MCCBs' and
ELCBs' original rated current is specified when using them in a surrounding temperature of 40°C or lower. Select an MCCB
and/or RCD/ELCB suitable for the actual short-circuit breaking capacity needed for your power systems.
• For the selection of the MC type, it is assumed that the 600 V HIV (allowable surrounding temperature: 75°C) wires for the
power input/output of the inverter are used. If an MC type for another class of wires is selected, the wire size suitable for the
terminal size of both the inverter and the MC type should be taken into account.
• Use ELCBs with overcurrent protection.
• To protect your power systems from secondary accidents caused by the broken inverter, use an MCCB and/or RCD/ELCB with
the rated current listed in the above table. Do not use an MCCB or RCD/ELCB with a rating higher than that listed.
8-21
Table 8.5 Rated Current of Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB), Residual-Current-Operated
Protective Device (RCD)/ Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker (ELCB) and Magnetic Contactor (MC)
(continued)
Nominal MCCB, ELCB Magnetic contactor (MC)

Power Rated current(A)
applied Specifi- For input circuit For output circuit
motor cations DC reactor (DCR) DC reactor (DCR)
voltage HD MD LD
(kW) w/ DCR w/o DCR w/ DCR w/o DCR
3.7 FRN3.7VG1□-4 10 20 SC-05
SC-05 -
5.5 FRN5.5VG1□-4 15 30 SC-4-0
SC-05
7.5 FRN7.5VG1□-4 20 40 SC-5-1 SC-05 -
11 FRN11VG1□-4 30 50 SC-4-0 -
HD SC-N1
15 FRN15VG1□-4 60 SC-5-1 SC-5-1 -
40
18.5 FRN18.5VG1□-4 75 SC-N2 SC-N1 -
SC-N1
22 FRN22VG1□-4 50 100 SC-N2S SC-N1 -
30 75 SC-N2 SC-N3 SC-N2 -
FRN30VG1□-4
LD 125 - SC-N2S
37 SC-N2S -
HD SC-N2S -
FRN37VG1□-4 100 SC-N4
LD - SC-N3
45 150
HD SC-N3 -
FRN45VG1□-4 SC-N3
LD - SC-N4
55 125 200 SC-N5
HD SC-N4 -
FRN55VG1□-4
LD - SC-N5
75 175 SC-N4
HD SC-N5 -
FRN75VG1□-4
LD - SC-N7
90 200 SC-N7
HD SC-N7 -
FRN90VG1□-4
MD/LD - SC-N8 SC-N8
110 250
HD SC-N8 - -
FRN110VG1□-4 SC-N8
MD/LD - SC-N8 SC-N8
132 300
HD SC-N8 - -
Three- FRN132VG1□-4
MD/LD - SC-N11 SC-N11
phase 160 350 SC-N11
400V HD SC-N11 - -
FRN160VG1□-4
MD/LD - SC-N12 SC-N12
200
HD SC-N12 - -
FRN200VG1□-4 500
MD/LD SC-N12 - SC-N12 SC-N12
220
HD SC-N12 -
-
250 FRN220VG1□-4 MD SC-N14
-
LD 600 SC-N14
280 - - -
HD SC-N14
-
315 FRN280VG1□-4 MD SC-N14
SC-N14 -
355 LD SC-N14
800 -
315 HD SC-N14
-
355 FRN315VG1□-4 MD SC-N14
-
400 LD 1200 SC-N16 SC-N16
-
355 HD 800 SC-N14 SC-N14
-
400 FRN355VG1□-4 MD SC-N16
-
450 LD 610CM*
SC-N16 -
400 HD SC-N16
1200 -
450 FRN400VG1□-4 MD 610CM*
-
LD 610CM*
500 610CM*
HD 610CM* -
FRN500VG1□-4
LD - - 612CM*
630 1400 612CM*
HD 612CM* -
FRN630VG1□-4
710 LD 1600 616CM* - 616CM*
* 610CM, 612CM and 616CM: Manufactured by Aichi Electric Works Co., Ltd.
□
S (Basic type)
• Install the MCCB or RCD/ELCB at the input side of the inverter. They cannot be installed at the output side of the inverter.
• The above table lists the rated current of MCCBs and RCD/ELCBs to be used in the power control panel with an internal
temperature of lower than 50°C. The rated current is factored by a correction coefficient of 0.85 as the RCDs'/MCCBs' and
ELCBs' original rated current is specified when using them in a surrounding temperature of 40°C or lower. Select an MCCB
and/or RCD/ELCB suitable for the actual short-circuit breaking capacity needed for your power systems.
8-22
• For the selection of the MC type, it is assumed that the 600 V HIV (allowable surrounding temperature: 75°C) wires for the
power input/output of the inverter are used. If an MC type for another class of wires is selected, the wire size suitable for the
terminal size of both the inverter and the MC type should be taken into account.
• Use ELCBs with overcurrent protection.
• To protect your power systems from secondary accidents caused by the broken inverter, use an MCCB and/or RCD/ELCB with
the rated current listed in the above table. Do not use an MCCB or RCD/ELCB with a rating higher than that listed.
Chap. 8
8-23
Table 8.6 lists the relationship between the rated leakage current sensitivity of RCDs/ELCBs (with
overcurrent protection) and wiring length of the inverter output circuits. Note that the sensitivity levels
listed in the table are estimated values based on the results obtained by the test setup in the Fuji laboratory
where each inverter drives a single motor.
Table 8.6 Rated Current Sensitivity of Residual-Current-Operated Protective Devices
(RCDs)/Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers (ELCBs)
Standard Wire distance/current sensitivity
Power supply
application
voltage 10 m 30 m 50 m 100 m 200 m 300 m
motor (kW)
0.75
1.5
2.2 30mA
3.7
5.5
7.5 100 mA
11
15
Three-phase
18.5 200 mA
200V
22
30
37
45
55
75 500 mA
90
110
3.7
5.5
7.5 30 mA
11 100 mA
15
18.5
22 200 mA
30
37
45 500 mA
55
75
90
Three-phase
400V 110
132 1000 mA
160 (Special)
200
220
250
280
315
355 3000 mA
400 (Special)
450
500
630
710
• Values listed above were obtained using Fuji ELCB EG or SG series applied to the test setup.
• The rated current of applicable motor rating indicates values for Fuji standard motor (4 poles, 50 Hz and 200 V three-phase).
• The leakage current is calculated based on grounding of the single wire for 200 V class delta connection and neutral grounding
for 400 V class Y-connection power lines.
• Values listed above are calculated based on the static capacitance to the earth when the 600 V class of vinyl-insulated IV wires
are used in a wiring through metal conduit pipes.
• Wiring length is the total length of wiring between the inverter and motor. If more than one motor is to be connected to a single
inverter, the wiring length should be the total length of wiring between the inverter and motors.
8-24
8.4.2 Surge killer for L-load

A surge killer absorbs surge voltage induced by L-load of an electro magnetic switch or solenoid valve.
Use of a surge killer is effective in preventing the electronic equipment, including inverters, from damage
or malfunctioning caused by such surges.
Install a surge killer near the power coil of the surge source. Connected to the inverter's power source side,
as shown in Figure 8.3, a surge killer absorbs the surge voltage, preventing the electronic equipment, from
damage or malfunctioning. (The maximum capacity is 3.7 kW.)
Refer to the catalog "Fuji Surge Killers/Absorbers (HS118: Japanese edition only)" for details. These
products are available from Fuji Electric Technica Co., Ltd.
Note: Do not use the capacitor in the inverter secondary (output) line.
Chap. 8
Unit: mm
Figure 8.3 Dimensions of Surge Killer and Connection Example
8-25
8.4.3 Arrester
An arrester suppresses surge currents induced by lightning invaded from the power supply lines. Common
use of the grounding wire that is used for electric equipment in the panel, with the arrester, is effective in
preventing electronic equipment from damage or malfunctioning caused by such surges.
Applicable arrester models are CN23232 for three-phase 200 V class series, and CN2324E and CN2324L
for three-phase 400 V class series. (CN233 series with 20 kA of discharging capability is also available.)
Figure 8.4 shows their external dimensions and connection examples. Refer to the catalog "Fuji Surge
Killers/Absorbers (HS118: Japanese edition only)" for details. These products are available from Fuji
Electric Technica Co., Ltd.
z Three-phase (220 VAC) z Three-phase (440 VAC)
* Do not connect wires to the

Unit: mm black screw of the CN2324L
Figure 8.4 Arrester Dimensions and Connection Examples
8-26
8.4.4 Surge absorber

A surge absorber absorbs surges or noises generated by a magnetic contactor (MC) or solenoid valve in
the power system to effectively protect electronic equipment in the panel from malfunctions or
breakdown. Installed parallel to a coil of an MC, solenoid valve, or L load, a surge absorber absorbs a
surge voltage.
The type of surge absorber is S2-A-O and S1-B-O. Figure 8.5 shows their external dimensions.
The surge absorbers are available from Fuji Electric Technica Co., Ltd.
Chap. 8
Unit: mm
Figure 8.5 Surge Absorber Dimensions
8-27
8.4.5 Filter capacitor for radio noise reduction
These capacitors are effective to suppress AM radio band (less than 1 MHz) noises. Using them with
Zero-phase reactors upgrades capability.
Applicable models are NFM25M315KPD1 for 200 V class series inverters and NFM60M315KPD for
400 V class. Use one of them no matter what the inverter capacity. Figure 8.6 shows their external
dimensions. The surge absorbers are available from Fuji Electric Technica Co., Ltd.
Note: Do not use the capacitor in the inverter secondary (output) line.
NFM25M315KPD1 NFM60M315KPD
Figure 8.6 Filtering Capacitors Dimensions
8-28
8.5 Peripheral Equipment Options

8.5.1 Braking resistors (DBRs) and braking units
8.5.1.1 Braking resistors (DBRs)
A braking resistor converts regenerative energy generated from deceleration of the motor to heat for
consumption. Use of a braking resistor results in improved deceleration performance of the inverter.
FRENIC-VG provides 2 types: Standard 10% ED product and 20% ED product.
Refer to Chapter 9, Section 9.2 "Selecting a Braking Resistor."
(1) 10% ED product, 20% ED product

The standard model of a braking resistor integrates a facility that detects the temperature on the heat sink
of the resistor and outputs a digital ON/OFF signal if the temperature exceeds the specified level (as an
overheating warning signal). To ensure that the signal is recognized at one of the digital input terminals of
the FRENIC-VG, assign the external alarm THR to any of terminals [X1] to [X9]. Connect the assigned
terminals to terminals [1] and [2] of the braking resistor. Upon detection of the warning signal, the
inverter simultaneously transfers to Alarm mode, displays alarm 0h2 on the LED monitor and shuts down
its power output.
Chap. 8
２ Terminal [CM]
Braking resistor
Ｇ１ Terminal [X1] to [X9]
ＰＤＢ (External alarm THR)

Ｐ（＋）ＤＢ
Inverter
Figure 8.7 Braking Resistor (Standard Model) and Connection Example
For the specifications and external dimensions of the braking units, refer to [3] and [4] in this Section.
8.5.1.2 Braking units

Add a braking unit to the braking resistor to upgrade the braking capability of inverters with the followings.
HD mode: 75 kW or above (200V series), 200 kW or above (400V series)
LD mode: 75 kW or above (200V series), 200 kW or above (400V series)
MD mode: 200 kW or above (400V series)
Inverters other than above have built-in IGBTs for the braking resistor.
Figure 8.8 Braking Unit
For the specifications and external dimensions of the braking units, refer to [3] and [4] in this Section.
8-29
8.5.1.3 Specifications and connection example
Table 8.7 Generated Loss in Braking Unit
Generated loss (W)

Model
Standard model With fan unit
BU55-2C 50 150
BU90-2C 60 180
BU220-4C 80 240
HD-mode Inverters
Table 8.8(a) Braking Unit/Braking Resistor (Standard ED)
Maximum braking torque Repetitive

Selecting Options Continuous braking
(%) braking
Nominal (converted to 150%
Power (at 100s interval
applied Braking unit Braking resistor Torque torque value)
supply Inverter type Fig or less)
motor
voltage Resistance (N･m) Braking Discharging Duty Average
(kW) Qty. Qty.
Model Model value time capability cycle loss
(units) (units) 50Hz 60Hz
(Ω) (s) (kWs) (%ED) (kW)
0.75 FRN0.75VG1S-2J A DB2.2V-21B 1 30 150 7.16 5.97 10 16.5 10 0.165

1.5 FRN1.5VG1S-2J DB2.2V-21B 1 30 150 14.3 11.9 10 16.5 10 0.165
2.2 FRN2.2VG1S-2J DB2.2V-21B 1 30 150 21.0 17.5 10 16.5 10 0.165
3.7 FRN3.7VG1S-2J DB3.7V-21B 1 24 150 35.3 29.4 10 27.8 10 0.278
5.5 FRN5.5VG1S-2J DB5.5V-21B 1 16 150 52.5 43.8 10 41.3 10 0.413
7.5 FRN7.5VG1S-2J DB7.5V-21B 1 12 150 71.6 59.7 10 56.3 10 0.563
11 FRN11VG1S-2J DB11V-21B 1 8.0 150 105 87.5 10 82.5 10 0.825
Three- －－
15 FRN15VG1S-2J DB15V-21B 1 6.0 150 143 119 10 113 10 1.13
phase
200V 18.5 FRN18.5VG1S-2J DB18.5V-21B 1 4.5 150 177 147 10 139 10 1.39
22 FRN22VG1S-2J DB22V-21B 1 4.0 150 210 175 10 165 10 1.65
30 FRN30VG1S-2J DB30V-21B 1 2.5 150 286 239 10 225 10 2.25
37 FRN37VG1S-2J DB37V-21B 1 2.25 150 353 294 10 278 10 2.78
45 FRN45VG1S-2J DB45V-21B 1 2.0 150 430 358 10 338 10 3.38
55 FRN55VG1S-2J DB55V-21C 1 1.6 150 525 438 10 413 10 4.13
75 FRN75VG1S-2J B BU55-2C 2 DB75V-21C 1 2.4/2 150 716 597 10 563 10 5.63
90 FRN90VG1S-2J BU90-2C 2 DB90V-21C 1 2.0/2 150 859 716 10 675 10 6.75
3.7 FRN3.7VG1S-4J A DB3.7V-41B 1 96 150 35.3 29.4 10 27.8 10 0.278
5.5 FRN5.5VG1S-4J DB5.5V-41B 1 64 150 52.5 43.8 10 41.3 10 0.413
7.5 FRN7.5VG1S-4J DB7.5V-41B 1 48 150 71.6 59.7 10 56.3 10 0.563
11 FRN11VG1S-4J DB11V-41B 1 32 150 105 87.5 10 82.5 10 0.825
15 FRN15VG1S-4J DB15V-41B 1 24 150 143 119 10 113 10 1.13
18.5 FRN18.5VG1S-4J DB18.5V-41B 1 18 150 177 147 10 139 10 1.39
22 FRN22VG1S-4J DB22V-41B 1 16 150 210 175 10 165 10 1.65
30 FRN30VG1S-4J DB30V-41B 1 10 150 286 239 10 225 10 2.25
－－
37 FRN37VG1S-4J DB37V-41B 1 9.0 150 353 294 10 278 10 2.78
45 FRN45VG1S-4J DB45V-41B 1 8.0 150 430 358 10 338 10 3.38
55 FRN55VG1S-4J DB55V-41C 1 6.5 150 525 438 10 413 10 4.13
Three- 75 FRN75VG1S-4J DB75V-41C 1 4.7 150 716 597 10 563 10 5.63
phase
400V 90 FRN90VG1S-4J DB90V-41C 1 3.9 150 859 716 10 675 10 6.75
110 FRN110VG1S-4J DB110V-41C 1 3.2 150 1050 875 10 825 10 8.25
132 FRN132VG1S-4J DB132V-41C 1 2.6 150 1261 1050 10 990 10 9.90
160 FRN160VG1S-4J C DB160V-41C 1 2.2 150 1528 1273 10 1200 10 12.0
200 FRN200VG1S-4J D BU220-4C 2 DB200V-41C 1 3.5/2 150 1910 1592 10 1500 10 15.0
220 FRN220VG1S-4J BU220-4C 2 DB220V-41C 1 3.2/2 150 2101 1751 10 1650 10 16.5
280 FRN280VG1S-4J E BU220-4C 2 DB160V-41C 2 2.2/2 150 2674 2228 10 2100 10 21.0
315 FRN315VG1S-4J BU220-4C 2 DB160V-41C 2 2.2/2 150 3008 2507 10 2363 10 23.6
355 FRN355VG1S-4J F BU220-4C 3 DB132V-41C 3 2.6/3 150 3390 2825 10 2663 10 26.6
400 FRN400VG1S-4J BU220-4C 3 DB132V-41C 3 2.6/3 150 3820 3183 10 3000 10 30.0
500 FRN500VG1S-4J G BU220-4C 4 DB132V-41C 4 2.6/4 150 4775 3979 10 3750 10 37.5
630 FRN630VG1S-4J H BU220-4C 4 DB160V-41C 4 2.2/4 150 6016 5013 10 4725 10 47.3
Note: • Refer to notes on and procedure of selection.

For DB160V-41C - DB220V-41C, two braking resistors are used per one unit.
Example) For the model: DB160V-41C, quantity: 2, four braking resistors are used.
8-30
MD-mode Inverters
Table 8.8(b) Braking Unit/Braking Resistor (Standard 10%ED)
Maximum braking torque Repetitive

Selecting Options Continuous braking
(%) braking
(converted to 150%
Nominal (at 100s interval
Power Braking unit Braking resistor torque value)
applied Torque or less)
supply Inverter type Fig (N･m)
motor Discharg-
voltage Resistance Braking Duty Average
(kW) Qty. Qty. ing
Model Model value time cycle loss
(units) (units) 50Hz 60Hz capacity
(Ω) (s) (%ED) (kW)
(kWs)
110 FRN90VG1S-4J A DB110V-41C 1 3.2 150 1050 875 10 825 10 8.25

132 FRN110VG1S-4J DB132V-41C 1 2.6 150 1261 1050 10 990 10 9.90
- -
160 FRN132VG1S-4J C DB160V-41C 1 2.2 150 1528 1273 10 1200 10 12.0
200 FRN160VG1S-4J DB200V-41C 1 3.5/2 150 1910 1592 10 1500 10 15.0
Three-
phase
400V 250 FRN220VG1S-4J I BU220-4C 2 DB132V-41C 2 2.6/2 150 2388 1990 10 1875 10 18.8
400 FRN355VG1S-4J BU220-4C 3 DB132V-41C 3 2.6/3 150 3820 3183 10 3000 10 30.0

Chap. 8
LD-mode Inverters
Table 8.8(c) Braking Unit/Braking Resistor (Standard 10%ED)

Maximum braking torque Continuous
Selecting Options Repetitive
(%) braking
braking
(converted to
Nominal (at 100s interval
Power Braking unit Braking resistor 150% torque
applied Torque or less)
supply Inverter type Fig value)
motor (N･m)
voltage Discharg-
(kW) Resistance Braking Duty Average
Qty. Qty. ing
Model Model value time cycle loss
(units) (units) 50Hz 60Hz capacity
(Ω) (s) (%ED) (kW)
(kWs)
37 FRN30VG1S-2J A DB30V-21B 1 2.5 110 259 216 10 204 10 2.25
45 FRN37VG1S-2J DB37V-21B 1 2.25 110 315 263 10 248 10 2.78
Three- - -
55 FRN45VG1S-2J DB45V-21B 1 2.0 110 385 321 10 303 10 3.38
phase
200V 75 FRN55VG1S-2J DB55V-21C 1 1.6 110 525 438 10 413 10 4.13
110 FRN90VG1S-2J BU90-2C 2 DB90V-21C 1 2.0/2 110 770 642 10 605 10 6.75
37 FRN30VG1S-4J A DB30V-41B 1 10 110 259 216 10 204 10 2.25
45 FRN37VG1S-4J DB37V-41B 1 9.0 110 315 263 10 248 10 2.78
55 FRN45VG1S-4J DB45V-41B 1 8.0 110 385 321 10 303 10 3.38
75 FRN55VG1S-4J DB55V-41C 1 6.5 110 525 438 10 413 10 4.13
90 FRN75VG1S-4J - - DB75V-41C 1 4.7 110 630 525 10 495 10 5.63
110 FRN90VG1S-4J DB90V-41C 1 3.9 110 770 642 10 605 10 6.75
132 FRN110VG1S-4J DB110V-41C 1 3.2 110 924 770 10 726 10 8.25
phase 200 FRN160VG1S-4J C DB160V-41C 1 2.2 110 1401 1167 10 1100 10 12.0
400V 220 FRN200VG1S-4J D BU220-4C 2 DB200V-41C 1 3.5/2 110 1541 1284 10 1210 10 15.0
280 FRN220VG1S-4J BU220-4C 2 DB220V-41C 1 3.2/2 110 1961 1634 10 1540 10 16.5
400 FRN315VG1S-4J BU220-4C 2 DB160V-41C 2 2.2/2 110 2801 2334 10 2200 10 23.6
500 FRN400VG1S-4J BU220-4C 3 DB132V-41C 3 2.6/3 110 3501 2918 10 2750 10 30.0
710 FRN630VG1S-4J H BU220-4C 4 DB160V-41C 4 2.2/4 110 4972 4143 10 3905 10 47.3

8-31
HD-mode Inverters
Table 8.9(a) Braking Unit/Braking Resistor (20%ED)
Maximum
Selecting Options braking torque Continuous braking Repetitive braking
(%) (converted to 150% (at 100s interval or
Nominal
Power torque value) less)
applied
supply Inverter type Fig Braking unit Braking resistor Torque
motor
voltage (N･m)
(kW) Discharging Duty Average
Qty. Resistance Braking
Model Model Qty.(units) capability cycle loss
(units) value(Ω) 50Hz 60Hz time(s) (kWs) (%ED) (kW)
0.75 FRN0.75VG1S-2J A DB2.2V-22B 1 30 150 7.16 5.97 20 33.0 20 0.330

1.5 FRN1.5VG1S-2J DB2.2V-22B 1 30 150 14.3 11.9 20 33.0 20 0.330
2.2 FRN2.2VG1S-2J DB2.2V-22B 1 30 150 21.0 17.5 20 33.0 20 0.330
3.7 FRN3.7VG1S-2J DB3.7V-22B 1 24 150 35.3 29.4 20 55.5 20 0.555
5.5 FRN5.5VG1S-2J DB5.5V-22B 1 16 150 52.5 43.8 20 82.5 20 0.825
7.5 FRN7.5VG1S-2J DB7.5V-22B 1 12 150 71.6 59.7 20 113 20 1.13
11 FRN11VG1S-2J DB11V-22B 1 8.0 150 105 87.5 20 165 20 1.65
－－
Three- 15 FRN15VG1S-2J DB15V-22B 1 6.0 150 143 119 20 225 20 2.25
phase
DB18.5V-22
200V 18.5 FRN18.5VG1S-2J 1 4.5 150 177 147 20 278 20 2.78
B
22 FRN22VG1S-2J DB22V-22B 1 4.0 150 210 175 20 330 20 3.30
30 FRN30VG1S-2J DB30V-22C 1 3.0 150 286 239 20 450 20 4.50
37 FRN37VG1S-2J DB37V-22C 1 2.4 150 353 294 20 555 20 5.55
45 FRN45VG1S-2J DB45V-22C 1 2.0 150 430 358 20 675 20 6.75
55 FRN55VG1S-2J DB55V-22C 1 1.6 150 525 438 20 825 20 8.25
90 FRN90VG1S-2J BU90-2C 2 DB45V-22C 2 2.0/2 150 859 716 20 1350 20 13.5
3.7 FRN3.7VG1S-4J A DB3.7V-42B 1 96 150 35.3 29.4 20 55.5 20 0.555

5.5 FRN5.5VG1S-4J DB5.5V-42B 1 64 150 52.5 43.8 20 82.5 20 0.825
7.5 FRN7.5VG1S-4J DB7.5V-42B 1 48 150 71.6 59.7 20 113 20 1.13
11 FRN11VG1S-4J DB11V-42B 1 32 150 105 87.5 20 165 20 1.65
15 FRN15VG1S-4J DB15V-42B 1 24 150 143 119 20 225 20 2.25
DB18.5V-42
18.5 FRN18.5VG1S-4J 1 18 150 177 147 20 278 20 2.78
B
22 FRN22VG1S-4J DB22V-42B 1 16 150 210 175 20 330 20 3.30
30 FRN30VG1S-4J －－ DB30V-42C 1 12 150 286 239 20 450 20 4.50
37 FRN37VG1S-4J DB37V-42C 1 9.0 150 353 294 20 555 20 5.55
45 FRN45VG1S-4J DB45V-42C 1 8.0 150 430 358 20 675 20 6.75
55 FRN55VG1S-4J DB55V-42C 1 6.5 150 525 438 20 825 20 8.25
Three-
phase 75 FRN75VG1S-4J DB75V-42C 1 4.7 150 716 597 20 1125 20 11.3
400V 90 FRN90VG1S-4J DB90V-42C 1 3.9 150 859 716 20 1350 20 13.5
110 FRN110VG1S-4J DB110V-42C 1 3.2 150 1050 875 20 1650 20 16.5
132 FRN132VG1S-4J DB132V-42C 1 2.6 150 1261 1050 20 1980 20 19.8
160 FRN160VG1S-4J DB160V-42C 1 2.2 150 1528 1273 20 2400 20 24.0
220 FRN220VG1S-4J BU220-4C 2 DB220V-42C 1 3.2/2 150 2101 1751 20 3300 20 33.0
280 FRN280VG1S-4J I BU220-4C 2 DB160V-42C 2 2.2/2 150 2674 2228 20 4200 20 42.0
315 FRN315VG1S-4J BU220-4C 2 DB160V-42C 2 2.2/2 150 3008 2507 20 4725 20 47.3
400 FRN400VG1S-4J BU220-4C 3 DB132V-42C 3 2.6/3 150 3820 3183 20 6000 20 60.0
630 FRN630VG1S-4J BU220-4C 4 DB160V-42C 4 2.2/4 150 6016 5013 20 9450 20 94.6
Note) • This option is built to order.

• The braking unit requires the fan unit (BU-F).
For DB200V-42C and DB220V-42C, two braking resistors are used per one unit.
Example) For the model: DB200V-42C, quantity: 1, two braking resistors are used.
8-32
MD-mode Inverters
Table 8.9(b) Braking Unit/Braking Resistor (20%ED)
Maximum braking Continuous braking Repetitive braking
Selecting Options
Nomin torque (%) (converted to 150% (at 100s interval or
Power al torque value) less)
Braking unit Braking resistor Torque
supply applied Inverter type Fig
voltage motor (N･m) Braking Discharging Duty Average
Qty. Qty. Resistance
(kW) Model Model time capability cycle loss
(units) (units) value(Ω) 50Hz 60Hz (s) (kWs) (%ED) (kW)
110 FRN90VG1S-4J A DB110V-42C 1 3.2 150 1050 875 20 1650 20 16.5

132 FRN110VG1S-4J DB132V-42C 1 2.6 150 1261 1050 20 1980 20 19.8
- -
160 FRN132VG1S-4J DB160V-42C 1 2.2 150 1528 1273 20 2400 20 24.0
200 FRN160VG1S-4J C DB200V-42C 1 3.5/2 150 1910 1592 20 3000 20 30.0
Three- 220 FRN200VG1S-4J D BU220-4C 2 DB220V-42C 1 3.2/2 150 2101 1751 20 3300 20 33.0
phase
400V 250 FRN220VG1S-4J I BU220-4C 2 DB132V-42C 2 2.6/2 150 2388 1990 20 3750 20 37.5
315 FRN280VG1S-4J BU220-4C 2 DB160V-42C 2 2.2/2 150 3008 2507 20 4725 20 47.3
400 FRN355VG1S-4J BU220-4C 3 DB132V-42C 3 2.6/3 150 3820 3183 20 6000 20 60.0
LD-mode Inverters
Table 8.9(c) Braking Unit/Braking Resistor (20%ED)
Maximum braking
Chap. 8
Selecting Options Continuous braking Repetitive braking
torque(%) (converted to 150% (at 100s interval or
Nominal
Power torque value) less)
applied Braking unit Braking resistor Torque
supply Inverter type Fig
motor (N･m)
voltage Braking Discharging Duty
(kW) Qty. Qty. Resistance Average
Model Model value time capability cycle
(units) (units) loss (kW)

(Ω) 50Hz 60Hz (s) (kWs) (%ED)
37 FRN30VG1S-2J A DB30V-22C 1 3.0 110 259 216 20 407 20 4.50
45 FRN37VG1S-2J DB37V-22C 1 2.4 110 315 263 20 495 20 5.55

- -
phase
200V 75 FRN55VG1S-2J DB55V-22C 1 1.6 110 525 438 20 825 20 8.25
110 FRN90VG1S-2J BU90-2C 2 DB45V-22C 2 2.0/2 110 770 642 20 1210 20 13.5
37 FRN30VG1S-4J A DB30V-42C 1 12 110 259 216 20 407 20 4.50
45 FRN37VG1S-4J DB37V-42C 1 9.0 110 315 263 20 495 20 5.55
55 FRN45VG1S-4J DB45V-42C 1 8.0 110 385 321 20 605 20 6.75
75 FRN55VG1S-4J DB55V-42C 1 6.5 110 525 438 20 825 20 8.25
90 FRN75VG1S-4J - - DB75V-42C 1 4.7 110 630 525 20 990 20 11.3
110 FRN90VG1S-4J DB90V-42C 1 3.9 110 770 642 20 1210 20 13.5
132 FRN110VG1S-4J DB110V-42C 1 3.2 110 924 770 20 1452 20 16.5
160 FRN132VG1S-4J DB132V-42C 1 2.6 110 1120 934 20 1760 20 19.8

Three-
phase 200 FRN160VG1S-4J DB160V-42C 1 2.2 110 1401 1167 20 2200 20 24.0
400V
280 FRN220VG1S-4J BU220-4C 2 DB220V-42C 1 3.2/2 110 1961 1634 20 3080 20 33.0
355 FRN280VG1S-4J I BU220-4C 2 DB160V-42C 2 2.2/2 110 2486 2072 20 3905 20 47.3
450 FRN355VG1S-4J BU220-4C 3 DB132V-42C 3 2.6/3 110 3151 2626 20 4950 20 53.3
500 FRN400VG1S-4J BU220-4C 3 DB132V-42C 3 2.6/3 110 3501 2918 20 5500 20 60.0
710 FRN630VG1S-4J BU220-4C 4 DB160V-42C 4 2.2/4 110 4972 4143 20 7810 20 94.6
Note) • This option is built to order.

• The braking unit requires the fan unit (BU-F).
For DB200V-42C and DB220V-42C, two braking resistors are used per one unit.
Example) For the model: DB200V-42C, quantity: 1, two braking resistors are used.
8-33
<Connection example>
Braking unit
FRENIC-VG (master) Braking resistor
P(+) P(+) P(+)R P
N(-) N(-) DB DB
THR ２１
１２
CM
i１ SW1
G 1 ・
i２ 2
o１ 3
o２ G
Braking unit
(slave)
P(+) P(+)R P
N(-) DB DB
２ G
１
SW1
i１ 1
i２ 2
o１ 3 ・
o２ G
Note 1: When using the 20%ED braking resistor (DB□□□V-□2C), the braking unit requires
the fan unit (BU-F).
8-34
Braking resistor
FRENIC-VG
P(+) P
N(-)
DB Ｌ
THR １
CM ２
G G
DB
１
２
Chap. 8
Note 1: For DB160V-41C and DB200V-42C, two braking resistors are used per one unit.
Note 2: When using the 20%ED braking resistor (DB□□□V-□2C), the braking unit requires the fan unit (BU-F).

Braking resistor
Braking unit
FRENIC-VG (master)
P(+) P(+) P(+)R P
N(-) N(-) DB DB
THR ２１
１２
CM
i１ SW1
G 1 ・ G
i２ 2
o１ 3
o２ G
Braking unit
(slave)
P(+) P(+)R P
N(-) DB DB
２１
１
２
SW1
i１ 1
i２ 2 G
o１ 3 ・
o２ G
Note 1: For DB200V-41C, DV220V-41C, DB200V-42C and DB220-42C, two braking resistors are used per one
unit.
Note 2: When using the 20% ED braking resistor (DB□□□V-□2C), the braking unit requires the fan unit (BU-F).
8-35
Braking resistor
Braking unit
FRENIC-VG (master)
P(+) P(+) P(+)R P
N(-) N(-) DB Ｌ
THR ２１
１２
CM
i１ SW1
G 1 ・ G
i２ 2
o１ 3
o２ G
DB
１
２
G
Braking resistor
Braking unit
(slave)
P(+) P(+)R P
N(-) DB Ｌ
２１
１
２
SW1
i１ 1 G
i２ 2
o１ 3 ・
o２ G
DB
１
２
G
Note 1: For DB160V-41C, two braking resistors are used per one unit.
8-36
Braking unit
P(+) P(+) P(+)R P
N(-) N(-) DB DB
THR ２１
１
CM ２
i１ SW1
G 1 ・ G
i２ 2
o１ 3
o２ G
Braking unit Braking resistor

(slave)
P(+) P(+)R P
N(-) DB DB
２１
１
２
SW1
i１ 1 G
i２ 2
o１ 3 ・
o２ G
Braking unit Braking resistor
Chap. 8
(slave)
P(+) P(+)R P
N(-) DB DB
２１

１
２
SW1
i１ 1 G
i２ 2
o１ 3 ・
o２ G
8-37
Braking unit
P(+) P(+) P(+)R P
N(-) N(-) DB DB
THR ２１
１２
CM
i１ SW1
G 1 ・ G
i２ 2
o１ 3
o２ G
Braking unit
(slave) Braking resistor
P(+) P(+)R P
N(-) DB DB
２１
１
２
SW1
i１ 1 G
i２ 2
o１ 3 ・
o２ G
Braking unit
P(+) P(+)R P
N(-) DB DB
２１
１
２
SW1
i１ 1 G
i２ 2
o１ 3 ・
o２ G
Braking unit
P(+) P(+)R P
N(-) DB DB
２１
１
２
SW1
i１ 1 G
i２ 2
o１ 3 ・
o２ G
8-38
Chap. 8
Note 1: For DB160V-41C, two braking resistors are used per one unit.
Example) For the model: DB160V-41C, quantity: 4, eight braking resistors are used.
8-39
Braking unit
P(+) P(+) P(+)R P
N(-) N(-) DB DB
THR ２１
１２
CM
i１ SW1
G 1 ・ G
i２ 2
o１ 3
o２ G
Braking unit
P(+) P(+)R P
N(-) DB DB
２１
１
２
SW1
i１ 1 G
i２ 2
o１ 3 ・
o２ G
8-40
8.5.1.4 External dimensions

Braking resistors, 10% ED models
Figure A Figure B
200V series (10% ED product)

Dimensions (mm) Approx.
Model Fig weight
W W1 H H1 H2 D D1 C (kg)
DB2.2V-21B 330 298 242 210 165 140 1.6 8 4
DB3.7V-21B 400 368 280 248 203 140 1.6 8 5
DB5.5V-21B 400 368 280 248 203 140 1.6 8 5
DB7.5V-21B 400 368 480 448 377 140 1.6 10 6
DB11V-21B 400 368 480 448 377 140 1.6 10 7
DB15V-21B A 400 368 660 628 557 140 1.6 10 10
Chap. 8
DB18.5V-21B 400 368 660 628 557 140 1.6 10 10
DB22V-21B 400 368 660 628 557 240 1.6 10 13
DB30V-21B 400 368 660 628 557 240 1.6 10 18
DB37V-21B 405 368 750 718 647 240 1.6 10 22

DB45V-21B 405 368 750 718 647 340 1.6 10 26
DB55V-21C 450 420 440 430 250 283 - 12 35
DB75V-21C B 600 570 440 430 250 283 - 12 33
DB90V-21C 700 670 440 430 250 293 - 12 43
400V series (10% ED product)

Model Fig weight
DB3.7V-41B 420 388 280 248 203 140 1.6 8 5
DB5.5V-41B 420 388 480 448 377 140 1.6 10 7
DB7.5V-41B 420 388 480 448 377 140 1.6 10 7
DB11V-41B 420 388 480 448 377 140 1.6 10 8
DB15V-41B 420 388 660 628 557 140 1.6 10 11
A
DB18.5V-41B 420 388 660 628 557 140 1.6 10 11
DB22V-41B 420 388 660 628 557 240 1.6 10 14
DB30V-41B 420 388 660 628 557 240 1.6 10 19
DB37V-41B 425 388 750 718 647 240 1.6 10 21
DB45V-41B 425 388 750 718 647 340 1.6 10 26
DB55V-41C 550 520 440 430 250 283 - 12 26
DB75V-41C 550 520 440 430 250 283 - 12 30
DB90V-41C 650 620 440 430 250 283 - 12 41
DB110V-41C 750 720 440 430 250 283 - 12 57
B
DB132V-41C 750 720 440 430 250 283 - 12 43
*DB160V-41C 600 570 440 430 250 283 - 12 74
*DB200V-41C 725 695 440 430 250 283 - 12 50(x2)
*DB220V-41C 725 695 440 430 250 283 - 12 51(x2)
* For DB160V-41C - DB220V-41C, two resistors of the same shape are used in a pair, and enough space for them should be
considered.
When this model is ordered, a set of two resistors will be shipped.
8-41
Braking resistor 20% ED product
Figure A Figure B
200 V series (20% ED product)

Dimension (mm) Approx.
Model Fig weight
DB2.2V-22B 400 368 280 248 203 140 1.6 8 5
DB3.7V-22B 400 368 480 448 377 140 1.6 10 6
DB5.5V-22B 400 368 480 448 377 140 1.6 10 7
DB7.5V-22B 400 368 660 628 557 140 1.6 10 10
A
DB11V-22B 400 368 660 628 557 240 1.6 10 13
DB15V-22B 405 368 750 718 647 240 1.6 10 22
DB18.5V-22B 405 368 750 718 647 240 1.6 10 22
DB22V-22B 405 368 750 718 647 340 1.6 10 26
DB30V-22C 450 420 440 430 250 283 - 12 26
DB37V-22C 550 520 440 430 250 283 - 12 41
B
DB45V-22C 650 620 440 430 250 283 - 12 36
DB55V-22C 700 670 440 430 250 283 - 12 43
400 V series (20% ED product)

Dimensions(mm) Approx.
Model Fig weight
DB3.7V-42B 420 388 480 448 377 140 1.6 10 8
DB5.5V-42B 420 388 660 628 557 140 1.6 10 11
DB7.5V-42B 420 388 660 628 557 140 1.6 10 11
DB11V-42B A 420 388 660 628 557 240 1.6 10 14
DB15V-42B 420 388 750 718 647 240 1.6 10 21
DB18.5V-42B 420 388 750 718 647 240 1.6 10 21
DB22V-42B 420 388 750 718 647 340 1.6 10 26
DB30V-42C 600 570 440 430 250 283 - 12 24
DB37V-42C 700 670 440 430 250 283 - 12 32
DB45V-42C 700 670 440 430 250 283 - 12 34
DB55V-42C 750 720 440 430 250 283 - 12 45
DB75V-42C 550 520 440 430 250 483 - 12 68
DB90V-42C B 650 620 440 430 250 483 - 12 65
DB110V-42C 700 670 440 430 250 483 - 12 82
DB132V-42C 700 670 440 430 250 483 - 12 86
DB160V-42C 700 670 440 430 250 483 - 12 100
*DB200V-42C 700 670 440 430 250 483 - 12 85(x2)
*DB220V-42C 700 670 440 430 250 483 - 12 83(x2)
* For DB200V-42C and DB220V-42, two resistors of the same shape are used in a pair, and enough space for them should be
considered.
When this model is ordered, a set of two resistors will be shipped.
8-42
Braking unit

Voltage Model
W W1 H H1 H2 D weight (kg)
BU55-2C 230 130 240 225 210 6

200V series 160
BU90-2C 250 150 370 355 340 9
400V series BU220-4C 250 150 450 435 420 160 13
Fan units for braking units

Using this option improves the duty cycle [%ED] of a model using the external braking unit from 10%ED
to 30%ED.
Fan unit
Dimensions(mm)
Model
W1 H1 D1 ℓ (fan power supply line)
BU-F 149 44 76 320
Chap. 8
Braking unit + fan unit

Dimensions(mm)
Voltage Model
W2 W3 W4 H2 H3 H4 D2 D3 D4
BU55-2C+BU-F 230 47.5 240 270

200V series 135 30 160 1.2 64
BU90-2C+BU-F 250 57.5 370 400
400V series BU220-4C+BU-F 250 135 57.5 450 30 480 160 1.2 64
8-43
8.5.2 Power regenerative PWM converters (RHC series)
8.5.2.1 Features
Conforms to harmonics suppressing guideline

Since this product converts the power supply current into
sine waves by PWM control to greatly reduce the
harmonics current, the conversion coefficient defined in the
"Guideline of Harmonics Reduction for Consumers who has
High or Ultra-High Voltage Power Receiving Facilities" can
be reduced to "0" (i.e., no harmonics occur) when used in
combination with inverters.
Can reduce power supply facilities capacity
By flowing current with the same phase as the power
supply phase voltage by power factor control, operation
with the power factor of approximately 1 can be achieved.
This results in smaller power supply transformer capacity
and equipment size, compared with the standard inverter.
Comparison of input
Greatly improves braking ability current waveform
In highly frequent acceleration/deceleration operation and <Without PWM <With PWM converter>
converter>
elevator operation, regenerated energy is all returned to the
power supply to save power in regeneration.
Also, there will be no trouble with the power supply system
because the current waveform in regeneration is sine wave.
Continuous regeneration rating 100%

1-minute regeneration rating
150% (CT specification)
120% (VT specification)
Rich protective and maintenance functionality

・Troubleshooting is made easier by the trace bag (option).
Past alarm details (for the last 10 alarms) by the
segment LEDs can be retrieved. This allows for easy
alarm cause analysis and measure planning.
Upon a momentary power failure, the gate is shut
down to ensure quick restart after the power comes
back.
Predictive signals for overload, fin over temperature,
and life, alarms can be generated before the converter
slips.
Networking capability
・MICREX-SX, F series, and CC-Link master devices can
be (optionally) connected. RS-485 is equipped by
standard.
8-44
(1) Standard specifications
200 V series
Item Standard specifications
200 V series
Model RHC□□□-2C
7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90
Applicable inverter capacity (kW) 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90
Continuous capacity (kW) 8.8 13 18 22 26 36 44 53 65 88 103
CT application
Output
Overload rating 150% of continuous rating for 1 minute

Voltage 200V DC320-355V (variable according to input power supply voltage) (*3)
Required power supply capacity (kVA) 9.5 14 19 24 29 38 47 57 70 93 111
Carrier frequency Standard 15kHz Standard 10kHz
Applicable inverter capacity(kW) 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110
Continuous capacity (kW) 13 18 22 26 36 44 53 65 88 103 126
VT application
Output

Voltage200V DC320-355V (variable according to input power supply voltage) (*3)
Required power supply capacity (kVA) 14 19 24 29 38 47 57 70 93 111 136
Number of phases, voltage, and

Input power
3-phase 3-wire, 200-220V 50Hz, 220-230V 50Hz(*1), 200-230V 60Hz

supply
frequency
Chap. 8
Voltage and frequency fluctuation Voltage: -15 to +10%, frequency: ±5%, Voltage imbalance: within 2% (*4)
400 V series

Item Standard specifications
400V series
Model RHC□□□-4C
7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 280 315 355 400 500 630
Applicable inverter capacity(kW) 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 280 315 355 400 500 630
Continuous capacity (kW) 8.8 13 18 22 26 36 44 53 65 88 103 126 150 182 227 247 314 353 400 448 560 705
Output
CT application

Required power supply capacity
9.5 14 19 24 29 38 47 57 70 93 111 136 161 196 244 267 341 383 433 488 610 762
(kVA)
Standard
6kHz
Applicable inverter capacity(kW) 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 280 315 355 400 500
Continuous capacity (kW) 13 18 22 26 36 44 53 65 88 103 126 150 182 227 247 314 353 400 448 560
VT application
Output

Required power supply capacity
14 19 24 29 38 47 57 70 93 111 136 161 196 244 267 341 383 433 488 610
(kVA)
Number of phases, voltage, and

Input power
3-phase 3-wire, , 380-440V 50Hz, 380-460V 60Hz(*2)

frequency
supply
Voltage and frequency fluctuation Voltage: -15 to +10%, frequency: ±5%, Voltage imbalance: within 2% (*4)
(*1) 220-230V/50Hz model can be manufactured for a separate order.

(*2) When the power supply voltage is 380-398V/50Hz or 380-430V/60Hz, tap switching is required inside the converter. If the power
supply voltage is lower than 400V, the capacity must be reduced.
(*3) The output voltage is approximately DC320/640V for the power supply voltage of 200/400V, DC343/686V for 220/440V, and
DC355/710V for 230/460V.
(*4) Inter-phase voltage imbalance ratio [%] = (Maximum voltage [V] - minimum voltage [V]) / 3-phase average voltage * 67
8-45
(2) Common specifications
Item Specifications
Control method AVR constant control with DC ACR minor
Starts rectification when the converter is powered ON after connection. Starts boosting when it receives a run signal
Running/Stopping (terminals [RUN] and [CM] short-circuited or a run command via the communications link). After that, the converter is
ready to run.
Running status signal Running, power running, regenerative operation, ready-to-run, alarm output (for any alarm), etc.
CT: 150% of overload rating for 1 min
CT/VT switching VT: 120% of overload rating for 1 min
Control (CT model only: 500 kW or above)
Carrier frequency Fixed to high carrier frequency
Input power factor 0.99 or above (at full load) (*1)
Input harmonics current Conversion coefficient can be Ki=0 according to the harmonics suppressing guideline by METI.
Restart after momentary Shields the gate when the voltage level reaches the undervoltage level if a momentary power failure occurs, and the
power failure converter can automatically restart after the power recovers.
Power limiting control Controls the power not to exceed the preset limit value.
AC fuse blown, AC overvoltage, AC undervoltage, AC overcurrent, AC input current error, input phase loss,
Alarm
synchronous power supply frequency error, DC fuse blown, DC overvoltage, DC undervoltage, charge circuit fault,
display (Protective
heat sink overheat, external alarm, converter internal overheat, overload, memory error, keypad communications error,
functions)
CPU error, network device error, operation procedure error, A/D converter error, optical network error, IPM error
Saves and displays the most recent 10 alarms.
Alarm history
Indication Saves and displays the detailed information of the trip cause for the previous alarm.
Monitor Displays input power, input current in RMS, input voltage in RMS, DC link bus voltage and power supply frequency.
Load factor Allows the user to measure the load factor with the keypad.
Language Allows the user to specify or refer to function codes in any of the three languages--Japanese, English or Chinese.
Charging lamp Lights when the DC link bus capacitor is charged.
(*1) When the power supply voltage is 420V(210V) or higher and the operating load is 50% or higher, the power supply's power factor is
reduced to approximately 0.095 (during regenerative operation only).
8-46
8.5.2.3 Function specifications

(1) Terminal functions
Classi-
Symbol Name Specifications
fication
L1/R, L2/S, L3/T Main circuit power inputs Connects with the three-phase input power lines through a dedicated reactor.
Main circuit
P(+), N( ) Converter outputs Connects with the power input terminals P(+) and N(-) on an inverter.
E(G) Grounding Grounding terminal for the converter's chassis (or casing).
Auxiliary power input for For a backup of the control circuit power supply, connect the power lines same as that of the main
R0, T0
the control circuit power input.
Synchronous power input Voltage detection terminals for the internal control of the converter. Connect with the power supply
detection
R1, S1, T1
Voltage
for voltage detection side of the dedicated reactor or filter.

Inputs for control
R2, T2 Detection terminal for AC fuse blown.
monitoring
RUN Run command Short-circuiting terminals [RUN] and [CM] runs the converter; opening them stops the converter.
When the converter stops due to an alarm, removing the alarm factor and short-circuiting the
RST Reset alarm command
Input signal
terminals [RST] and [CM] cancels the protective function, restarting the converter.
General-purpose transistor 0: Enable external alarm trip THR 1: Cancel current limiter LMT-CCL
X1
input 2: 73 answerback 73ANS 3: Switch current limiter I-LIM4: Option D IOPT-DI
CM Digital input common Common terminal for digital input signals.
PLC PLC signal power Connects to PLC output signal power supply. (Rated voltage: 24 VDC (22 to 27 VDC)
Outputs a signal when the converter protective function acts and the converter stops in an alarm
30A, 30B, 30C Batch output alarm state.
(Contact: 1C, on error, 30A-30C: ON) (Contact capacity: AC250V 50mAmax)
Chap. 8
Y1, Y2, Y3, General-purpose transistor 0: Converter running RUN 1: Converter ready to run RDY
Y11-Y18 output 2: Power supply current limiting IL 3: Lifetime alarm LIFE
4: Heat sink overheat early warning PRE-OH 5: Overload early warning PRE-OL
CME Digital output common
6: Power running DRV 7: Regenerating REG 8: Current limiting early warning CUR
9: Restarting after momentary power failure U-RES
10: Synchronizing power supply frequency SY-HZ 11: Alarm content 1 AL1

Output signal
Y5A, Y5C Relay output 12: Alarm content 2 AL2 13: Alarm content 4 AL4 14: Option DO OPT-DO
* Mounting the OPC-VG7-DIOA option makes 8 points of DO extended functions available. (DI
functions are not available.)
0: Input power PWR 1: Input current in RMS I-AC 2: Input voltage in RMS V-AC
3: DC link bus voltage V-DC 4: Power supply frequency FREQ
General-purpose analog
A01, A04, A05 5: +10 V test P106: -10 V test N10
output
* Mounting the OPC-VG7-DIOA option makes 2 points of DO extended functions available. (DI
functions are not available.)
M Analog output common Common terminal for analog output signal.
Charging resistor input
73A, 73C Control output for the input relay of the external charging resistor (73).
relay outputs
(2) Communications specifications

Item Specifications
Monitoring the running information, running status and function code data, and controlling (selecting) the terminals
General communication
[RUN], [RST] and [X1].
specifications
* Writing to function codes is not possible.
Communicating with a PC or PLC. (The converter supports the Fuji general-purpose inverter protocol and Modbus RTU
Communications specifications
RS-485 (standard)
protocol.)
Mounting the OPC-VG7-TL option enables communication with a T-Link module of MICREX-F or MICREX-SX via a
T-Link (option)
T-Link network.
SX-bus (option) Mounting the OPC-VG7-SX option enables communication with a MICREX-SX via an SX bus network.
CC-Link (option) Mounting the OPC-VG7-CCL option enables communication with a CC-Link master.
Mounting the OPC-RHC-TR option enables tracing back of the running status data of the converter.
Traceback Hardware
WPS-LD-TR software is required.
(option)
Software Installing the WPS-RHC-TR software enables collecting of traceback data on the PC.
Optical communication The OPC-VG7-SI allows for load balancing control of a concurrent multi-processing system.
(option) This supports capacity of up to 2400kW.
8-47
(3) Function settings
Function code Name
F00 Data protection
F01 High frequency filter selection
F02 Restart upon momentary power failure (operation selection)
F03 Current rating switching
F04 LED monitor, item selection
F05 LCD monitor, item selection
F06 LCD monitor, language selection
F07 LCD monitor, contrast control
F08 Carrier frequency
E01 Terminal [X1] function
E02-13 Terminal [Y1], [Y2], [Y3,], [Y5], [Y11] to [Y18] function
E14 I/O function normal open/closed
E15 RHC overload early warning level
E16 Cooling fan ON/OFF control
E17 Under current limiting (Hysteresis width)
E18-20 A01, A04 and A05, function selection
E21-23 A01, A04 and A05, gain setting
E24-26 A01, A04 and A05, bias setting
E27 A01, A04 and A05, filter setting
H01 Station address
H02 Communications error processing
H03 Timer
H04 Baud rate
H05 Data length
H06 Parity bits
H07 Stop bits
H08 No-response error detection time
H09 Response interval
H10 Protocol selection
H11 TL transmission format
H12 Parallel system
H13 Number of slave stations in parallel system
H14 Clear alarm data
H15,16 Power supply current limiter (driving 1/2)
H17,18 Power supply current limiter (braking 1/2)
H19,20 Current limiting early warning (level/timer)
S01 Operation method
S02,03 Power supply current limiting (driving/braking)
M09 Power supply frequency
M10 Input power
M11 Input current in RMS
M12 Input voltage in RMS
M13 Run command
M14 Running status
M15 Output terminals [Y1] to [Y18]
8-48
(4) Protective functions

Item Indication Protective specifications Remarks
AC fuse blown ACF Stops the converter output if the AC fuse (R-/T-phase only) is blown.
AC overvoltage AOV Stops the converter output upon detection of an AC overvoltage condition.
AC undervoltage ALV Stops the converter output upon detection of an AC undervoltage condition.
Stops the converter output if the peak value of the input current exceeds the
AC overcurrent AOC
overcurrent level.
Stops the converter output upon detection of the excessive deviation of the
AC input current error ACE
AC reactor from the AC input.
Input phase loss LPV Stops the converter output upon detection of an input phase loss.
After the MC for charging circuit (73) is turned on, the converter checks the
Synchronous power power frequency. If it detects a power frequency error, this function stops
FrE
frequency error the converter output. An error during converter running (e.g., momentary
power failure) triggers no alarm.
DC fuse blown dCF Stops the converter output if the DC fuse (P side) is blown. 18.5 kW or above
Stops the converter output upon detection of a DC overvoltage condition.
200 V class series: 400 V ±3 V
DC overvoltage dOV If a power failure continues for a long time and the control power source is
400 V class series: 800 V ±5 V
shut down, this alarm is automatically reset.
200 V class series: Stops at 185 V,
Stops the converter output upon detection of a DC undervoltage condition.
restarts at 208 V.
DC undervoltage dLV If a power failure continues for a long time and the control power source is
400V class series: Stops at 371V,
shut down, this alarm is automatically reset.
restarts at 417V.
Condition: 73ANS (Answerback from
Charging circuit fault PbF Stops the converter output upon detection of a heat sink overheat.
73) is assigned to terminal [X1].
Heat sink overheat OH1 Stops the converter output upon receipt of an external signal THR.
Chap. 8
Stops the converter output upon detection of an internal overheat of the THR (Enable external alarm trip) is
External alarm OH2
converter. assigned to terminal [X1].
Converter internal Stops the converter output with the inverse-time characteristics due to the
OH3
overheat input current.

Converter overload OLU Stops the converter output upon detection of a heat sink overheat. Activate at 105%, 150% for 1 min
Stops the converter output if a data writing error or any other memory error
Memory error Er1
occurs (when the checksums of the EEPROM and RAM do not match).
Displays "er2 " upon detection of a wire break in initial communication
Keypad
Er2 with the keypad.
This does not affect the converter operation.
CPU error Er3 Activated if a CPU error occurs.
Stops the converter output if a fatal error (including no power supply Applies to T-Link, SX-bus, and
Network device error Er4
connection) occurs in the master unit in the network. CC-Link devices.
Operation procedure Stops the converter output upon detection of an error in the operation
Er6
error procedure.
Stops the converter output upon detection of a failure in the A/D converter
A/D converter error Er8
circuit.
Stops the converter output upon detection of an optical cable break or a fatal
Optical network error Erb
error in the optical option.
Activated when the IPM's self-diagnosis function works due to an
IPM error IPE 15 kW or below
overcurrent or overheat.
8-49
(5) Required structure and environment
Item Required structure, environment and standards Remarks
Structure Mounting in a panel or mounting for external cooling
Enclosure IP00
Cooling system Forced air cooling
Structure
Installation Vertical installation
Coating color Munsell 5Y3/0.5, eggshell
Maintainability Structure designed for easy parts replacement
Site location Shall be free from corrosive gases, flammable gases, dusts, and direct sunlight.
Surrounding -10 to 500°C
temperature
Relative humidity 5 to 95% RH (No condensation)
Altitude 3,000 m max. (For use in an altitude between 1,001 m to 3,000 m, the output current should
Environment be derated.)
Vibration 2 to 9 Hz: Amplitude = 3 mm, 9 to 20 Hz: 9.8 m/s2, 20 to 55 Hz: 2 m/s2 (9 to 55 Hz: 2 m/s2
for 90 kW or above), 55 to 200 Hz: 1 m/s2
Storage -20 to 55°C
temperature
Storage humidity 5 to 95%RH
8-50
8.5.2.4 Converter configuration

(1) CT mode
Charging Charging circuit box
Power supply
Applic Power supply Filtering Filter circuit

PWM circuit Boosting reactor Filtering resistor Filtering reactor
voltage
able contactor capacitor contactor

converter contactor Charger resistor Fuse
motor
type
[kW]
(73) Qty. (52) Qty. (CU) Qty. (R0) Qty. (F) Qty. (Lr) Qty. (Lf) Qty. (Lf) Qty. (Cf) Qty. (6F) Qty.
7.5 RHC7.5-2C SC-5-1 1 CU7.5-2C 1 (80W 7.5Ω) (3) (CR2LS-50/UL) (2) LR2-7.5C 1 GRZG80 0.42Ω 3 LFC2-7.5C 1 CF2-7.5C 1
11 RHC11-2C SC-N1 1 CU11-2C 1 (HF5C5504) (CR2LS-75/UL) (2) LR2-15C 1 GRZG150 0.2Ω 3 LFC2-15C 1 CF2-15C 1
15 RHC15-2C SC-N2 1 CU15-2C 1 (CR2LS-100/UL) (2)
18.5 RHC18.5-2 SC-N3 1 CU18.5-2C 1 (GRZG120 2Ω) (3) LR2-22C 1 GRZG200 0.13Ω 3 LFC2-22C 1 CF2-22C 1
C
22 RHC22-2C CU22-2C 1 (CR2L-150/UL) (2)

200V series
30 RHC30-2C SC-N4 1 - - CU30-2C 1 (CR2L-200/UL) (2) LR2-37C 1 GRZG400 0.1Ω 3 LFC2-37C 1 CF2-37C 1
37 RHC37-2C SC-N5 1 CU45-2C 1 (CR2L-260/UL) (2)
45 RHC45-2C SC-N7 1 LR2-55C 1 LFC2-55C 1 CF2-55C 1
75 RHC75-2C SC-N11 1 CU75-2C 1 LR2-75C 1 LFC2-75C 1 CF2-75C 1
90 RHC90-2C CU90-2C 1 (GRZG400 1Ω) (3) (A50P600-4) (2) LR2-110C 1 GRZG400 0.12Ω 6 LFC2-110C 1 CF2-110C 1
[2 parallel]
7.5 RHC7.5-4C SC-05 1 CU7.5-4C 1 (TK50B 30ΩJ) (3) (CR6L-30/UL) (2) LR4-7.5C 1 GRZG80 1.74Ω 3 LFC4-7.5C 1 CF4-7.5C 1
11 RHC11-4C SC-4-0 1 CU15-4C 1 (HF5B0416) (CR6L-50/UL) (2) LR4-15C 1 GRZG150 0.79Ω 3 LFC4-15C 1 CF4-15C 1
15 RHC15-4C SC-5-1 1
18.5 RHC18.5-4 SC-N1 1 CU18.5-4C 1 (80W 7.5Ω) (3) LR4-22C 1 GRZG200 0.53Ω 3 LFC4-22C 1 CF4-22C 1
C (HF5C5504)
22 RHC22-4C CU22-4C 1 (CR6L-75/UL) (2)
30 RHC30-4C SC-N2 1 CU30-4C 1 (CR6L-100/UL) (2) LR4-37C 1 GRZG400 0.38Ω 3 LFC4-37C 1 CF4-37C 1
Chap. 8
37 RHC37-4C SC-N2S 1 CU45-4C 1 (CR6L-150/UL) (2)
45 RHC45-4C SC-N3 1 - - LR4-55C 1 GRZG400 0.26Ω 3 LFC4-55C 1 CF4-55C 1
75 RHC75-4C SC-N5 1 CU75-4C 1 LR4-75C 1 GRZG400 0.38Ω 3 LFC4-75C 1 CF4-75C 1

400V series
110 RHC110-4C SC-N8 1 CU110-4C 1 (GRZG120 2Ω) (3) [2 parallel]
132 RHC132-4C CU132-4C 1 (A50P400-4) (2) LR4-160C 1 RF4-160C 1 LFC4-160C 1 CF4-160C 1
160 RHC160-4C SC-N11 1 CU160-4C 1 (A50P600-4) (2)
200 RHC200-4C SC-N12 1 CU200-4C 1 (GRZG400 1Ω) (3) LR4-220C 1 RF4-220C 1 LFC4-220C 1 CF4-220C 1
220 RHC220-4C 1 CU220-4C 1 (A70QS800-4) (2)
280 RHC280-4C SC-N3 1 SC-N14 1 GRZG400 1Ω 6 A70QS800-4 2 LR4-280C 1 RF4-280C 1 LFC4-280C 1 CF4-280C 1 SC-N4 1
[2 parallel]
315 RHC315-4C A70P1600-4TA 2 LR4-315C 1 RR4-315C 1 LFC4-315C 1 CF4-315C 1
355 RHC355-4C LR4-355C 1 RR4-355C 1 LFC4-355C 1 CF4-355C 1
400 RHC400-4C SC-N16 1 LR4-400C 1 RR4-400C 1 LFC4-400C 1 CF4-400C 1
500 RHC500-4C SC-N11 3 LR4-500C 1 RR4-500C 1 LFC4-500C 1 CF4-500C 1(*2)
630 RHC630-4C SC-N12 3 A70P2000-4T 2 LR4-630C 1 RR4-630C 1 LFC4-630C 1 CF4-630C 1(*2) SC-N7 1
(*1) The charging box (CU) contains a combination of a charging resistor (R0) and a fuse (F). If no CU is used, it is necessary to prepare the charging resistor
(R0) and fuse (F) at your end.
(*2) The filtering capacitor consists of two pieces of capacitors. For an order of quantity "1," two pieces of capacitors are to be delivered.
8-51
(2) VT mode
Charging Charging circuit box (*1)
Power supply
Applic Power supply Filtering Filter circuit

PWM circuit Boosting reactor Filtering resistor Filtering reactor
voltage
able contactor capacitor contactor

converter contactor Charger resistor Fuse
motor
type
[kW] Qty. Qty. Qty. Qty. Qty. Qty. Qty. Qty. Qty. Qty.
(73) (52) (CU) (R0) (F) (Lr) (Lf) (Lf) (Cf) (6F)
11 RHC7.5-2C SC-N1 1 CU7.5-2C 1 (80W 7.5Ω) (3) (CR2LS-50/UL) (2) LR2-15C 1 GRZG150 0.2Ω 3 LFC2-15C 1 CF2-15C 1
15 RHC11-2C SC-N2 1 CU11-2C 1 (HF5C5504) (CR2LS-75/UL) (2)
18.5 RHC15-2C SC-N3 1 CU15-2C 1 (CR2LS-100/UL) (2) LR2-22C 1 GRZG200 0.13Ω 3 LFC2-22C 1 CF2-22C 1
22 RHC18.5-2 CU18.5-2C 1 (GRZG120 2Ω) (3)

C
200V series
- -
45 RHC37-2C SC-N7 1 CU45-2C 1 (CR2L-260/UL) (2) LR2-55C 1 LFC2-55C 1 CF2-55C 1
55 RHC45-2C SC-N8 1
75 RHC55-2C SC-N11 1 CU55-2C 1 (CR2L-400/UL) (2) LR2-75C 1 LFC2-75C 1 CF2-75C 1
90 RHC75-2C CU75-2C 1 LR2-110C 1 GRZG400 0.12Ω 6 LFC2-110C 1 CF2-110C 1

[2 parallel]
110 RHC90-2C SC-N12 1 CU90-2C 1 (GRZG400 1Ω) (3) (A50P600-4) (2)
11 RHC7.5-4C SC-4-0 1 CU7.5-4C 1 (TK50B 30ΩJ) (3) (CR6L-30/UL) (2) LR4-15C 1 GRZG150 0.79Ω 3 LFC4-15C 1 CF4-15C 1
15 RHC11-4C SC-5-1 1 CU15-4C 1 (HF5B0416) (CR6L-50/UL) (2)
18.5 RHC15-4C SC-N1 1 LR4-22C 1 GRZG200 0.53Ω 3 LFC4-22C 1 CF4-22C 1
22 RHC18.5-4 CU18.5-4C 1 (80W 7.5Ω) (3)

C (HF5C5504)
37 RHC30-4C SC-N2S 1 CU30-4C 1 (CR6L-100/UL) (2)
55 RHC45-4C SC-N4 1
- -
400V series
90 RHC75-4C SC-N7 1 CU75-4C 1 LR4-110C 1 GRZG400 0.53Ω 6 LFC4-110C 1 CF4-110C 1
110 RHC90-4C SC-N8 1 CU90-4C 1 (CR6L-300/UL) (2) [2 parallel]
132 RHC110-4C CU110-4C 1 (GRZG120 2Ω) (3) LR4-160C 1 RF4-160C 1 LFC4-160C 1 CF4-160C 1
160 RHC132-4C SC-N11 1 CU132-4C 1 (A50P400-4) (2)
200 RHC160-4C SC-N12 1 CU160-4C 1 (A50P600-4) (2) LR4-220C 1 RF4-220C 1 LFC4-220C 1 CF4-220C 1
220 RHC200-4C CU200-4C 1 (GRZG400 1Ω) (3)
280 RHC220-4C SC-N14 1 CU220-4C 1 (A70QS800-4) (2) LR4-280C 1 RF4-280C 1 LFC4-280C 1 CF4-280C 1
315 RHC280-4C SC-N3 1 SC-N14 1 GRZG400 1Ω 6 A70QS800-4 2 LR4-315C 1 RR4-315C 1 LFC4-315C 1 CF4-315C 1 SC-N4 1
[2 parallel]
355 RHC315-4C A70P1600-4TA 2 LR4-355C 1 RR4-355C 1 LFC4-355C 1 CF4-355C 1
400 RHC355-4C SC-N16 1 LR4-400C 1 RR4-400C 1 LFC4-400C 1 CF4-400C 1
500 RHC400-4C SC-N11 3 LR4-500C 1 RR4-400C 1 LFC4-500C 1 CF4-500C 1(*2)
(*1) The charging box (CU) contains a combination of a charging resistor (R0) and a fuse (F). If no CU is used, it is necessary to prepare the charging resistor
(R0) and fuse (F) at your end.
(*2) The filtering capacitor consists of two pieces of capacitors. For an order of quantity "1," two pieces of capacitors are to be delivered.
8-52
8.5.2.5 Basic connection diagrams

RHC7.5-2C to RHC90-2C (Applicable inverters: FRN0.75VG1S-2J to FRN90VG1S-2J)
RHC7.5-4C to RHC220-4C (Applicable inverters: FRN3.7VG1S-4J to FRN220VG1S-4J)
Charger circuit box
R0
11
12 Convertoer Inverter
MC Lf Lr 13
F 4
1 L1/R P(+) P(+) U
Power voltage
2 5 M
L2/S V
３～
3 6
L3/T N(-) N(-) W
73 R2 R2
Rf T2 i R0 (*5)
T2 cd
j T0 FX
Cf
e R1 FWD
f T1 (*4)
G c
R1 Y5A CM
S1 Y5C d
T1 30A (*6) 13
R0 30B X9(THR) 12
T0 30C CM 11
e MC or 73 73A 30A
f 73C a 30B
(*2) i j RUN
(*3) RUN b 30C
RST
Preparation
For MC Operation FX CM
operation E(G) G
Max. 220 V a
b 73 Stop
(*1)
Chap. 8
RUN
MC RUN FX 73

Symbol Part name Whe n ch arg e r circu it bo x is no t use d
R0
Lr Boosting reactor
Convertor
Lf Filtering reactor
Cf Filtering capacitor Lr F
L1/R
Rf Filtering resistor
L2/S
R0 Charger resistor F
L3/T
F AC fuse 73
R2
73 Magnetic contactor for T2
charging circuit
(*1) For the 400 V class power supply, connect a stepdown transformer to limit the voltage of the sequence circuit to
220 V or below.
Be sure to connect the auxiliary power input terminals R0 and T0 of the PWM converter to the main power
input lines via B contacts of magnetic contactors of the charging circuit (73 or MC). Note that when applied to
an ungrounded power supply, an insulated transformer is required. For the details, refer to the "PWM Converter
Instruction Manual" (INR-HF51746□).
(*2) For FRN37VG1S-2J or FRN75VG1S-2J, be sure to connect the fan power input terminals R1 and T1 of the
inverter to the main power input lines without going through the MC's B contacts or 73.
(*3) For the fan power supply switching connectors, change "CN R" to the NC side and "CN W" to the FAN side.
(*4) Construct a sequence in which a run command is given to the inverter after the PWM converter becomes ready
to run.
(*5) Assign the external alarm THR to any of terminals [X1] to [X9] on the inverter.
(*6) Wiring for terminals L1/R, L2/S, L3/T, R2, T2, R1, S1, and T1 should match with the phase sequence.
(*7) Remove the short-circuit bar or DC reactor connected to the P1, P(+) terminal of the inverter unit.
8-53
RHC280-4C to RHC400-4C (Applicable inverters: FRN280VG1S-4J to FRN630VG1S-4J)
R0 73
Convertor Inverter
L Lr
52 f F
Power voltage
L1/R P(+) P(+) U

M
L2/S V
３～
F
L3/T N(-) N(-) W
6F R2 g R1 e (*5)
T2 h T1 (*4)
Rf Y5A e f
FX
Y5C f FWD
Cf 30A (*7)
R1 30B X9(THR) CM
S1 30C CM
T1 30A 13
R0 a 30B 12
T0 b 30C 11
g 52 c 73A
h (*2) d 73C
RUN i R0
(*3) RUN
RST j T0
i j
CM E(G) G
Preparation
For RDY RDY 52A 52 Operat FX
Max.
operation ion Symbol Part name
a c
220 V b d Lr Boosting reactor
52 52T Stop
(*1) 52T Lf Filtering reactor
6F RUN
(*6) Cf Filtering capacitor
RDY 73 52A 52 52T RUN 6F FX Rf Filtering resistor
R0 Charger resistor
F AC fuse
Magnetic contactor for charging
73
circuit
Magnetic contactor for power
52
supply
Magnetic contactor for filtering
6F
circuit
(*1) Connect a stepdown transformer to limit the voltage of the sequence circuit to 220 V or below.
(*2) Be sure to connect the auxiliary power input terminals R0 and T0 of the PWM converter to the main power input
lines via B contacts of magnetic contactors of the power supply circuit (52). Note that when applied to an
ungrounded power supply, an insulated transformer is required. For the details, refer to the "PWM Converter
Instruction Manual" (INR-HF51746□).
(*3) Be sure to connect the fan power input terminals R1 and T1 of the inverter to the main power input lines without
going through the MC's B contacts or 73.
(*4) For the fan power supply switching connectors, change "CN R" to the NC side and "CN W" to the FAN side.
(*5) Construct a sequence in which a run command is given to the inverter after the PWM converter becomes ready
to run.
(*6) Set the timer 52T at 1 sec.
(*7) Assign the external alarm THR to any of terminals [X1] to [X9] on the inverter.
(*8) Wiring for terminals L1/R, L2/S, L3/T, R2, T2, R1, S1, and T1 should match with the phase sequence.
(*9) Remove the short-circuit bar or DC reactor connected to the P1, P(+) terminal of the inverter unit.
8-54
8.5.2.6 External dimensions

<PWM converter>
Chap. 8

PWM converter type Fig
W W1 H H1 D D1 n B C weight (kg)
RHC7.5-2C A 250 226 380 358 245 125 2 10 10 12.5
RHC11-2C
RHC15-2C
RHC18.5-2C B 340 240 480 460 255 145 2 10 10 24
RHC22-2C
200V series RHC30-2C B 340 240 550 530 255 145 2 10 10 29
RHC37-2C B 375 275 615 595 270 145 2 10 10 36
RHC45-2C B 375 275 740 720 270 145 2 10 10 42
RHC55-2C B 375 275 740 720 270 145 2 10 10 44
RHC75-2C C 530 430 750 720 285 145 2 15 15 70
RHC90-2C C 680 580 880 850 360 220 3 15 15 115
RHC7.5-4C A 250 226 380 358 245 125 2 10 10 12.5
RHC11-4C
RHC15-4C
RHC18.5-4C B 340 240 480 460 255 145 2 10 10 24
RHC22-4C
RHC30-4C B 340 240 550 530 255 145 2 10 10 29
RHC37-4C B 375 275 550 530 270 145 2 10 10 34
RHC45-4C B 375 275 675 655 270 145 2 10 10 38
RHC55-4C B 375 275 675 655 270 145 2 10 10 39
RHC75-4C B 375 275 740 720 270 145 2 10 10 48
RHC90-4C C 530 430 740 710 315 175 2 15 15 70
400V series
RHC110-4C
RHC132-4C C 530 430 1000 970 360 220 2 15 15 100
RHC160-4C
RHC200-4C C 680 580 1000 970 360 220 3 15 15 140
RHC220-4C
RHC280-4C C 680 580 1400 1370 450 285 3 15 15 320
RHC315-4C
RHC355-4C C 880 780 1400 1370 450 285 4 15 15 410
RHC400-4C
RHC500-4C D 999 900 1550 1520 500 313.2 4 15 15 525
RHC630-4C
8-55
< Boosting reactor >
Boosting reactor model Fig weight
W W1 H D D1 D2 K M
(kg)
LR2-7.5C A 180 75 205 105 85 95 7 M5 12
LR2-15C B 195 75 215 131 110 130 7 M8 18
LR2-22C C 240 80 340 215 180 145 10 M8 33
200 V Series LR2-37C C 285 95 420 240 205 150 12 M10 50
LR2-55C C 285 95 420 250 215 160 12 M12 58
LR2-75C C 330 110 440 255 220 165 12 M12 70
LR2-110C C 345 115 500 280 245 185 12 M12 100
LR4-7.5C B 180 75 205 105 85 90 7 M4 12
LR4-15C A 195 75 215 131 110 120 7 M5 18
LR4-22C C 240 80 340 215 180 120 10 M6 33
LR4-37C C 285 95 405 240 205 130 12 M8 50
LR4-55C C 285 95 415 250 215 145 12 M10 58
LR4-75C C 330 110 440 255 220 150 12 M10 70
LR4-110C C 345 115 490 280 245 170 12 M12 100
400 V Series LR4-160C C 380 125 550 300 260 185 15 M12 140
LR4-220C C 450 150 620 330 290 230 15 M12 200
LR4-280C C 480 160 740 330 290 240 15 M16 250
LR4-315C C 480 160 760 340 300 250 15 M16 270
LR4-355C C 480 160 830 355 315 255 15 M16 310
LR4-400C C 480 160 890 380 330 260 19 M16 340
LR4-500C C 525 175 960 410 360 290 19 M16 420
LR4-630C D 600 200 64 440 390 290 19 4×M12 450
Note 1: CF4-500C to CF4-630C require two capacitors. (Figures above are for one capacitor.)
8-56
< Filtering reactor >
Filtering reactor model Fig weight
W W1 H D D1 D2 K M
(kg)
Chap. 8
LFC2-7.5C B 125 40 100 85 67 85 6 M5 2.2
LFC2-15C B 125 40 100 93 75 90 6 M8 2.5
LFC2-22C B 125 40 100 93 75 105 6 M8 3.0
200V series LFC2-37C B 150 60 115 103 85 125 6 M10 5.0
LFC2-55C B 175 60 145 110 90 140 6 M12 8.0

LFC2-75C B 195 80 200 120 100 150 7 M12 13
LFC2-110C C 255 85 230 118 95 165 7 M12 20
LFC4-7.5C A 125 40 100 85 67 75 6 M4 2.2
LFC4-15C A 125 40 100 93 75 90 6 M5 2.5
LFC4-22C A 125 40 100 93 75 95 6 M6 3.0
LFC4-37C B 150 60 115 108 90 110 6 M8 5.0
LFC4-55C B 175 60 145 110 90 120 6 M10 8.0
LFC4-75C B 195 80 200 113 93 130 7 M10 12
LFC4-110C C 255 85 220 113 90 145 7 M12 19
400V series LFC4-160C C 255 85 245 137 110 150 7 M12 22
LFC4-220C D 300 100 320 210 180 170 10 M12 35
LFC4-280C D 330 110 320 230 195 195 12 M16 43
LFC4-315C D 315 105 365 230 195 200 12 M16 48
LFC4-355C D 315 105 395 235 200 210 12 M16 53
LFC4-400C D 345 115 420 235 200 235 12 M16 60
LFC4-500C D 345 115 480 240 205 240 12 M16 72
LFC4-630C E 435 145 550 295 255 205 15 4×M12 175
8-57
<Filtering capacitor>
Filtering capacitor model Fig weight
W W1 H H1 D D1 E F J
(kg)
CF2-7.5C A 165 150 185 - 70 40 30 7 M5 1.9
CF2-15C A 205 190 245 - 70 40 30 7 M5 3.5
CF2-22C A 280 265 215 - 90 55 30 7 M5 5.5
200V series CF2-37C A 280 265 235 - 90 55 30 7 M5 6.0
CF2-55C A 280 265 340 - 90 55 80 7 M6 8.5
CF2-75C A 280 265 235 - 90 55 30 7 M5 6.0
CF2-110C A 280 265 340 - 90 55 80 7 M8 8.5
CF4-7.5C A 165 150 135 - 70 40 30 7 M5 1.3
CF4-15C A 165 150 215 - 70 40 30 7 M5 2.3
CF4-22C A 205 190 185 - 70 40 30 7 M5 2.5
CF4-37C A 205 190 205 - 70 40 30 7 M5 2.9
CF4-55C A 205 190 245 - 70 40 30 7 M5 3.5
CF4-75C A 205 190 205 - 70 40 30 7 M5 2.9
CF4-110C A 205 190 245 - 70 40 30 7 M5 3.5
400V series CF4-160C A 280 265 260 - 90 55 80 7 M6 6.0
CF4-220C B 435 400 310 125 100 - 80 15x20 length hole M12 13.0
8-58
< Filtering resistor >
Filtering resistor model Fig weight
W W1 W2 H1 H2 D D1 D2 C
(kg)
GRZG80 0.42Ω A 167 148 115 22 32 33 26 6 5.5 0.19
GRZG150 0.2Ω A 247 228 195 22 40 33 26 6 8.2 0.30
200V series GRZG200 0.13Ω A 306 287 254 22 40 33 26 6 8.2 0.35
Chap. 8
GRZG400 0.1Ω A 411 385 330 40 46 47 40 9.5 8.2 0.85
GRZG400 0.12Ω A 411 385 330 40 46 47 40 9.5 8.2 0.85
GRZG80 1.74Ω A 167 148 115 22 32 33 26 6 5.5 0.19
GRZG150 0.79Ω A 247 228 195 22 32 33 26 6 5.5 0.3

GRZG200 0.53Ω A 306 287 254 22 32 33 26 6 5.5 0.35
GRZG400 0.38Ω A 411 385 330 40 46 47 40 9.5 8.2 0.85
GRZG400 0.26Ω A 411 385 330 40 46 47 40 9.5 8.2 0.85
GRZG400 0.53Ω A 411 385 330 40 46 47 40 9.5 8.2 0.85
RF4-160C B 400 370 - 240 55 470 460 320 - 22
400V series
RF4-220C 25
RF4-280C C 655 625 - 240 55 470 460 320 - 31
RF4-315C 35
RF4-355C 36
RF4-400C 38
RF4-500C 41
RF4-630C C 655 625 - 440 55 530 520 320 - 70
8-59
< Charging box >
The charging box contains a combination of a charging resistor and a fuse, which is essential in the
configuration of the RHC-C series of PWM converters. Using this charging box eases mounting and
wiring jobs.
Capacity range
200 V series: 7.5 kW to 90 kW in 10 types, 400 V series:7.5 kW to 220 kW in 14 types, Total 24 types
As for 400 V class series with a capacity of 280 to 400 kW, the charging resistor and the fuse are
separately provided as before.
Fuse model Mounting bolt weight
W W1 H H1 H2 H3 4 D D1 C
(kg)
CU7.5-2C 270 170 300 285 270 7.5 15 100 2.4 6 M5 6
CU11-2C
CU15-2C
CU18.5-2C
CU22-2C
200V series
CU30-2C 300 200 310 295 280 7.5 15 110 2.4 6 M5 7
CU45-2C 330 230 310 295 280 7.5 15 130 2.4 6 M5 8
CU55-2C
CU75-2C 430 330 560 536 510 12 25 150 3.2 10 M8 17
CU90-2C 20
CU7.5-4C 270 170 300 285 270 7.5 15 100 2.4 6 M5 5.5
CU15-4C
CU18.5-4C 6
CU22-4C
CU30-4C 300 200 310 295 280 7.5 15 110 2.4 6 M5 7
CU45-4C
CU55-4C
400V series
CU75-4C 330 230 310 295 280 7.5 15 130 2.4 6 M5 8
CU90-4C
CU110-4C
CU132-4C 430 330 560 536 510 12 25 150 3.2 10 M8 18
CU160-4C
CU200-4C 20
CU220-4C
8-60
<Charger resistor>
Charger resistor model Fig weight
W W1 W2 H1 H2 D D1 D2 C (kg)
GRZG120 2Ω A 217 198 165 22 32 33 22 6 5.5 0.25

GRZG400 1Ω A 411 385 330 40 39 47 40 9.5 5.5 0.85
Chap. 8
TK50B 30ΩJ (HF5B0416) B - - - - - - - - - 0.15
80W 7.5Ω (HF5C5504) C - - - - - - - - - 0.19
8-61
<fuse>
Fuse model Fig weight
W W1 W2 H D D1 G E
(kg)
CR2LS-50/UL A 56 42 26 18.5 17.5 12 2 6.5x8.5 0.03
CR2LS-75/UL
CR2LS-100/UL
CR2L-150/UL A 80 58 29.5 30.5 27 20 3 9x11 0.10
200V series
CR2L-200/UL A 85 60 30 33.5 30 25 3.2 11x13 0.13
CR2L-260/UL
CR2L-400/UL A 95 70 31 42 37 30 4 11x13 0.22
A50P600-4 B 113.5 81.75 56.4 - 50.8 38.1 6.4 10.3x18.2 0.60
CR6L-30/UL A 76 62 47 18.5 17.5 12 2 6.5x8.5 0.04
CR6L-50/UL
CR6L-75/UL A 95 70 40 34 30 25 3.2 11x13 0.15
CR6L-100/U
CR6L-150/UL
CR6L-200/UL A 107 82 43 42 37 30 4 11x13 0.25
400V series
CR6L-300/UL
A50P400-4 B 110 78.6 53.1 - 38.1 25.4 6.4 10.3x18.4 0.30
A50P600-4 B 113.5 81.75 56.4 - 50.8 38.1 6.4 10.3x18.2 0.60
A70QS800-4 B 180.2 129.4 72.2 - 63.5 50.8 9.5 13.5x18.3 1.1
A70P1600-4T C - - - - - - - - 8.0
A70P2000-4 C - - - - - - - - 8.0
8-62
8.5.2.7 Generated loss

(1) In CT mode
Main unit Boosting reactor Filtering reactor < Filtering resistor >
Generated Generated Generated Generated
Model Model Model Model Qty.
loss (W) loss (W) loss (W) loss (W)
RHC7.5-2C 400 LR2-7.5C 95 LFC2-7.5C 10 GRZG80 0.42Ω 3 16
RHC11-2C 500
LR2-15C 150 LFC2-15C 19 GRZG150 0.2Ω 3 48
RHC15-2C 650
RHC18.5-2C 700
LR2-22C 230 LFC2-22C 26 GRZG200 0.13Ω 3 68
RHC22-2C 800
RHC30-2C 1000
LR2-37C 330 LFC2-37C 32 GRZG400 0.1Ω 3 107
RHC37-2C 1350
RHC45-2C 1500
LR2-55C 450 LFC2-55C 43 GRZG400 0.1Ω 3 240
RHC55-2C 1750
RHC75-2C 2050 LR2-75C 520 LFC2-75C 74 GRZG400 0.1Ω 3 137
GRZG400 0.12Ω
RHC90-2C 2450 LR2-110C 720 LFC2-110C 115 6 374
(2 parallel)
RHC7.5-4C 400 LR4-7.5C 90 LFC4-7.5C 9 GRZG80 1.74Ω 3 15
RHC11-4C 500
LR4-15C 160 LFC4-15C 20 GRZG150 0.79Ω 3 48
RHC15-4C 600
Chap. 8
RHC18.5-4C 650
LR4-22C 230 LFC4-22C 22 GRZG200 0.53Ω 3 70
RHC22-4C 900
RHC30-4C 1200
LR4-37C 350 LFC4-37C 36 GRZG400 0.38Ω 3 86

RHC37-4C 1550
RHC45-4C 1800
LR4-55C 490 LFC4-55C 43 GRZG400 0.26Ω 3 130
RHC55-4C 2050
RHC90-4C 2600 GRZG400 0.53Ω
LR4-110C 710 LFC4-110C 90 6 405
RHC110-4C 3050 (2 parallel)
RHC132-4C 3500
LR4-160C 1000 LFC4-160C 160 RF4-160C 1 568
RHC160-4C 4150
RHC200-4C 5100 1
LR4-220C 1240 LFC4-220C 200 RF4-220C 751
RHC220-4C 5600
RHC280-4C 7100 LR4-280C 1430 LFC4-280C 220 RF4-280C 1 1027
RHC315-4C 8000 LR4-315C 1660 LFC4-315C 260 RF4-315C 1 1154
RHC355-4C 8900 LR4-355C 1910 LFC4-355C 300 RF4-355C 1 1286
RHC400-4C 10100 LR4-400C 2160 LFC4-400C 350 RF4-400C 1 1454
RHC500-4C 10000 LR4-500C 2470 LFC4-500C 450 RF4-500C 1 5463
RHC630-4C 12400 LR4-630C 2300 LFC4-630C 510 RF4-630C 1 4722
8-63
(2) In VT mode
Main unit Boosting reactor Filtering reactor < Filtering resistor >
Generated Generated Generated Generated
Model Model Model Model Qty.
loss (W) loss (W) loss (W) loss (W)
RHC7.5-2C 450
LR2-15C 150 LFC2-15C 19 GRZG150 0.2Ω 3 48
RHC11-2C 550
RHC15-2C 650
LR2-22C 230 LFC2-22C 26 GRZG200 0.13Ω 3 68
RHC18.5-2C 750
RHC22-2C 850
LR2-37C 330 LFC2-37C 32 GRZG400 0.1Ω 3 107
RHC30-2C 1200
RHC37-2C 1500
LR2-55C 450 LFC2-55C 43 GRZG400 0.1Ω 3 240
RHC45-2C 1600
RHC75-2C 2300 GRZG400 0.12Ω
LR2-110C 720 LFC2-110C 115 6 374
RHC7.5-4C 400
LR4-15C 160 LFC4-15C 20 GRZG150 0.79Ω 3 48
RHC11-4C 500
RHC15-4C 600
LR4-22C 230 LFC4-22C 22 GRZG200 0.53Ω 3 70
RHC18.5-4C 600
RHC22-4C 950
LR4-37C 350 LFC4-37C 36 GRZG400 0.38Ω 3 86
RHC30-4C 1200
RHC37-4C 1450
LR4-55C 490 LFC4-55C 43 GRZG400 0.26Ω 3 130
RHC45-4C 1750
RHC75-4C 1950 GRZG400 0.53Ω
LR4-110C 710 LFC4-110C 90 6 405
RHC110-4C 2900
LR4-160C 1000 LFC4-160C 160 RF4-160C 1 568
RHC132-4C 3250
RHC160-4C 4100
LR4-220C 1240 LFC4-220C 200 RF4-220C 1 751
RHC200-4C 4400
RHC220-4C 5600 LR4-280C 1430 LFC4-280C 220 RF4-280C 1 1027
RHC280-4C 6250 LR4-315C 1660 LFC4-315C 260 RF4-315C 1 1154
RHC315-4C 7000 LR4-355C 1910 LFC4-355C 300 RF4-355C 1 1286
RHC355-4C 8050 LR4-400C 2160 LFC4-400C 350 RF4-400C 1 1454
RHC400-4C 8950 LR4-500C 2470 LFC4-500C 450 RF4-500C 1 1821
* The generated loss for the filtering resistor above represent the value for all quantities.
8-64
8.5.3 DC reactor (DCR)

A DCR is mainly used for power supply matching and for input power factor correction (for reducing
harmonic components).
For power supply matching

・ Use a DCR when the capacity of a power supply transformer exceeds 500 kVA and is 10 times or more
the rated inverter capacity. In this case, the percent reactance of the power supply decreases, and
harmonic components and their peak value increase. These factors may break rectifiers or capacitors
in the converter section of inverter, or decrease the capacitance of the capacitor (which can shorten the
inverter's service life).
・ Also use a DCR when there are thyristor-driven loads or when phase-advancing capacitors are being
turned ON/OFF.
・ Use a DCR when the interphase voltage unbalance ratio of the inverter power supply exceeds 2%.
Max. voltage (V) - Min. voltage ( V)

Interphase voltage unbalance (%) = × 67
For input power factor correction (for suppressing harmonics)
Chap. 8
Generally a capacitor is used to improve the power factor of the load, however, it cannot be used in a
system that includes an inverter. Using a DCR increases the reactance of inverter's power supply so as to
decrease harmonic components on the power supply lines and improve the power factor of inverter. Using

a DCR improves the input power factor to approximately 86% to 95%.
<HD class product: 55 kW or lower, LD class product: 45 kW or lower>

・ At the time of shipping, a jumper bar is connected across terminals P1 and P (+) on the
terminal block. Remove the jumper bar when connecting a DCR.
・ If a DCR is not going to be used, do not remove the jumper bar.
<HD class product: 75 kW or higher, LD class product: 55 kW or higher, MD class product >
・ At the time of shipping, a jumper bar is not connected across terminals P1 and P (+) on the
terminal block. Be sure to connect the (supplied) DC reactor.
Figure 8.9 External View of a DC Reactor (DCR) and Connection Example
8-65
Table 8.10 DC reactor (DCR)
Power Nominal Rated

applicable Specifi- Inductance Generated
supply Inverter type Reactor model current
motor cations (mH) loss (W)
voltage (A)
(kW)
0.75 FRN0.75VG1□-2J DCR2-0.75 5 7 2.8
1.5 FRN1.5VG1□-2J DCR2-1.5 8 4 4.6
2.2 FRN2.2VG1□-2J DCR2-2.2 11 3 6.7
3.7 FRN3.7VG1□-2J DCR2-3.7 18 1.7 8.8
5.5 FRN5.5VG1□-2J DCR2-5.5 25 1.2 14
HD
7.5 FRN7.5VG1□-2J DCR2-7.5 34 0.8 16
11 FRN11VG1□-2J DCR2-11 50 0.6 27
15 FRN15VG1□-2J DCR2-15 67 0.4 27
18.5 FRN18.5VG1□-2J DCR2-18.5 81 0.35 29
22 FRN22VG1□-2J DCR2-22A 98 0.3 38
30 HD DCR2-30B 136 0.23 37
FRN30VG1□-2J DCR2-37B 167 0.19 47
LD
DCR2-37C 175 0.119 63
Three- 37
DCR2-37B 167 0.19 47
phase HD
200V DCR2-37C 175 0.119 63
FRN37VG1□-2J
DCR2-45B 203 0.16 52
LD
DCR2-45C 213 0.1 68
45
DCR2-45B 203 0.16 52
HD
DCR2-45C 213 0.1 68
FRN45VG1□-2J
DCR2-55B 244 0.13 55
LD
DCR2-55C 256 0.08 75
55
DCR2-55B 244 0.13 55
HD
FRN55VG1□-2J DCR2-55C 256 0.08 75
LD
75 DCR2-75C 358 0.05 96
HD
FRN75VG1□-2J
LD
90 DCR2-90C 431 0.042 100
HD
FRN90VG1□-2J
110 LD DCR2-110C 552 0.034 126
Note 1: Generated losses listed in the above table are approximate values that are calculated according to the following conditions:
・The power supply is three-phase 200 V/400 V 50 Hz with 0% interphase voltage unbalance ratio.
・The power supply capacity uses the larger of either 500 kVA or 10 times the rated capacity of the inverter.
・The motor is a 4-pole standard model at full load (100%).
・An AC reactor (ACR) is not connected.
Note 2: □ in the inverter model represents an alphabet. 。
□
S (Basic type)
8-66
Table 8.10 DC reactor (DCR) (continued)

Power Nominal Rated
Specifi- Inductance Generated
supply applied Inverter type Reactor model current
cations (mH) loss (W)
voltage motor (kW) (A)
3.7 FRN3.7VG1□-4J DCR4-3.7 9 7 8.1
5.5 FRN5.5VG1□-4J DCR4-5.5 13 4 10
7.5 FRN7.5VG1□-4J DCR4-7.5 18 3.5 15
11 FRN11VG1□-4J DCR4-11 25 2.2 21
HD
15 FRN15VG1□-4J DCR4-15 34 1.8 28
18.5 FRN18.5VG1□-4J DCR4-18.5 41 1.4 29
22 FRN22VG1□-4J DCR4-22A 49 1.2 35
30 DCR4-30B 71 0.86 35
FRN30VG1□-4J DCR4-37B 88 0.70 40
LD
DCR4-37C 88 0.483 63
37
DCR4-37B 88 0.70 40
HD
DCR4-37C 88 0.483 63
FRN37VG1□-4J
DCR4-45B 107 0.58 44
LD
DCR4-45C 107 0.4 69
45
DCR4-45B 107 0.58 44
HD
DCR4-45C 107 0.4 69
FRN45VG1□-4J
DCR4-55B 131 0.47 55
LD
DCR4-55C 131 0.324 78
55
DCR4-55B 131 0.47 55
HD
FRN55VG1□-4J DCR4-55C 131 0.324 78
LD DCR4-75C 178 0.23 97
75
HD DCR4-75C 178 0.23 97
FRN75VG1□-4J
LD
Chap. 8
90 DCR4-90C 214 0.2 111
HD
FRN90VG1□-4J
MD/LD
Three- 110 DCR4-110C 261 0.166 122
HD
400 V MD/LD
132 DCR4-132C 313 0.148 159

HD
FRN132VG1□-4J
MD/LD
160 DCR4-160C 380 0.122 185
HD
FRN160VG1□-4J
MD/LD
200 DCR4-200C 475 0.098 218
HD
FRN200VG1□-4J
MD/LD
220 DCR4-220C 524 0.087 231
HD
250 FRN220VG1□-4J MD DCR4-250C 589 0.077 249
LD
280 DCR4-280C 649 0.069 270
HD
315 FRN280VG1□-4J MD DCR4-315C 739 0.061 285
355 LD DCR4-355C 833 0.054 308
315 HD DCR4-315C 739 0.061 285
355 FRN315VG1□-4J MD DCR4-355C 833 0.054 308
400 LD DCR4-400C 938 0.048 323
355 HD DCR4-355C 833 0.054 308
400 FRN355VG1□-4J MD DCR4-400C 938 0.048 323
450 LD DCR4-450C 1056 0.043 338
400 HD DCR4-400C 938 0.048 323
450 FRN400VG1□-4J MD DCR4-450C 1056 0.043 338
LD
500 DCR4-500C 1173 0.039 384
HD
FRN500VG1□-4J
LD
630 DCR-630C 1477 0.031 620
HD
FRN630VG1□-4J
710 LD DCR-710C 1666 0.028 600

□
S (Basic type)
・An AC reactor (ACR) is not connected.
8-67
Figure A Terminal table Figure B Figure C
(for J screw) 2-terminal
4-mounting hole
(for J screw)
(for G screw)
2-terminal
(for J screw)
4-mounting
hole
4-mounting hole (for G 2-terminal
4-mounting hole screw) (for J screw)
(for G screw) (for G screw)
Figure D Figure E Figure F

2-terminal
(for J screw) 2-terminal
(for J screw)
4-mounting
hole
(for G
4-mounting hole screw)
(for G screw)
Table 8.11 DC Reactors (DCRs) External Dimensions

Nominal Dimensions Approx.
Power supply applied Specifi-
Inverter type Reactor model weight
voltage motor cations Fig W W1 D D1 D2 G H H1 J
(kW)
(kg)
0.75 FRN0.75VG1□-2J DCR2-0.75 66 56 90 72 20 M4(5.2×8) 94 - M4 1.4
1.5 FRN1.5VG1□-2J DCR2-1.5 66 56 90 72 20 M4(5.2×8) 94 - M4 1.6
2.2 FRN2.2VG1□-2J DCR2-2.2 86 71 100 80 10 M5(6×9) 110 - M4 1.8
3.7 FRN3.7VG1□-2J DCR2-3.7 86 71 100 80 20 M5(6×9) 110 - M4 2.6
5.5 FRN5.5VG1□-2J DCR2-5.5 111 95 100 80 20 M6(7×11) 130 - M5 3.6
HD A
7.5 FRN7.5VG1□-2J DCR2-7.5 111 95 100 80 23 M6(7×11) 130 - M5 3.8
11 FRN11VG1□-2J DCR2-11 111 95 100 80 24 M6(7×11) 137 - M6 4.3
15 FRN15VG1□-2J DCR2-15 146124120 96 15 M6(7×11) 180 - M8 5.9
18.5 FRN18.5VG1□-2J DCR2-18.5 146124120 96 25 M6(7×11) 180 - M8 7.4
22 FRN22VG1□-2J DCR2-22A 146124120 96 25 M6(7×11) 180 - M8 7.5
30 HD DCR2-30B 152 90 156116115 M6(Φ8) 130190 M10 12
B
FRN30VG1□-2J DCR2-37B 171110151110115 M6(Φ8) 150200 M10 14
LD
DCR2-37C C 210185101 81 125 M6(7×13) 125 - M10 7.4
37
DCR2-37B B 171110151110115 M6(Φ8) 150200 M10 14
Three-phase 200V HD
DCR2-37C C 210185101 81 125 M6(7×13) 125 - M10 7.4
FRN37VG1□-2J
DCR2-45B B 171110166125120 M6(Φ8) 150200 M10 16
LD
DCR2-45C C 210185106 86 135 M6(7×13) 125 - M12 8.4
45
DCR2-45B B 171110166125120 M6(Φ8) 150200 M10 16
HD
DCR2-45C C 210185106 86 135 M6(7×13) 125 - M12 8.4
FRN45VG1□-2J
DCR2-55B D 190160131 90 100 M6(Φ8) 210250 M12 16
LD
DCR2-55C C 255225 96 76 140 M6(7×13) 145 - M12 11
55
DCR2-55B D 190160131 90 100 M6(Φ8) 210250 M12 16
HD
FRN55VG1□-2J DCR2-55C 255225 96 76 140 M6(7×13) 145 - M12 11
LD
75 DCR2-75C 255225106 86 145 M6(7×13) 145 - M12 12
HD
FRN75VG1□-2J C
LD
90 DCR2-90C 255225116 96 155 M6(7×13) 145 - M12 14
HD
FRN90VG1□-2J
110 LD DCR2-110C 300265116 90 185 M8(10×18) 160 - M12 17
Note : □ in the inverter model represents an alphabet.

□
S (Basic type)
8-68
Table 8.11 DC Reactors (DCRs) External Dimensions (continued)

Nominal Dimensions Approx.
Power supply applied Specifi-
voltage motor cations Fig W W1 D D1 D2 G H H1 J
(kW)
(kg)
3.7 FRN3.7VG1□-4J DCR4-3.7 86 71 100 80 20 M5(6×9) 110 - M4 2.6
5.5 FRN5.5VG1□-4J DCR4-5.5 86 71 100 80 20 M5(6×9) 110 - M4 2.6
7.5 FRN7.5VG1□-4J DCR4-7.5 111 95 100 80 24 M6(7×11) 130 - M5 4.2
11 FRN11VG1□-4J DCR4-11 111 95 100 80 24 M6(7×11) 130 - M5 4.3
HD A
15 FRN15VG1□-4J DCR4-15 146124120 96 15 M6(7×11) 168 - M5 5.9
18.5 FRN18.5VG1□-4J DCR4-18.5 146124120 96 25 M6(7×11) 171 - M6 7.2
22 FRN22VG1□-4J DCR4-22A 146124120 96 25 M6(7×11) 171 - M6 7.2
30 DCR4-30B 152 90 157115100 M6(Φ8) 130190 M8 13
FRN30VG1□-4J DCR4-37B B 171110150110100 M6(Φ8) 150200 M8 15
LD
DCR4-37C C 210185101 81 105 M6(7×13) 125 - M8 7.4
37
DCR4-37B B 171110150110100 M6(Φ8) 150200 M8 15
HD
DCR4-37C C 210185101 81 105 M6(7×13) 125 - M8 7.4
FRN37VG1□-4J
DCR4-45B B 171110165125110 M6(Φ8) 150210 M8 18
LD
DCR4-45C C 210185106 86 120 M6(7×13) 125 - M8 8.4
45
DCR4-45B B 171110165125110 M6(Φ8) 150210 M8 18
HD
DCR4-45C C 210185106 86 120 M6(7×13) 125 - M8 8.4
FRN45VG1□-4J
DCR4-55B B 171110170130110 M6(Φ8) 150210 M8 20
LD
DCR4-55C C 255225 96 76 120 M6(7×13) 145 - M10 11
55
DCR4-55B B 171110170130110 M6(Φ8) 150210 M8 20
HD
FRN55VG1□-4J DCR4-55C 255225 96 76 120 M6(7×13) 145 - M10 11
Chap. 8
LD DCR4-75C 255225106 86 125 M6(7×13) 145 - M10 13
75
HD DCR4-75C 255225106 86 125 M6(7×13) 145 - M10 13
FRN75VG1□-4J
LD
90 DCR4-90C 255225116 96 140 M6(7×13) 145 - M12 15
HD

FRN90VG1□-4J
MD/LD
110 DCR4-110C 300265116 90 175 M8(10×18) 155 - M12 19
HD
Three-phase 400V FRN110VG1□-4J
MD/LD
132 DCR4-132C 300265126100180 M8(10×18) 160 - M12 22
HD
FRN132VG1□-4J
MD/LD C
160 DCR4-160C 350310131103180M10(12×22) 190 - M12 26
HD
FRN160VG1□-4J
MD/LD
200 DCR4-200C 350310141113185M10(12×22) 190 - M12 30
HD
FRN200VG1□-4J
MD/LD
220 DCR4-220C 350310146118200M10(12×22) 190 - M12 33
HD
250 FRN220VG1□-4J MD DCR4-250C 350310161133210M10(12×22) 190 - M12 35
LD
280 DCR4-280C 350310161133210M10(12×22) 190 - M16 37
HD
315 FRN280VG1□-4J MD DCR4-315C 400345146118200M10(12×22) 225 - M16 40
355 LD DCR4-355C E 400345156128200M10(12×22) 225 - 4×M12 49
315 HD DCR4-315C C 400345146118200M10(12×22) 225 - M16 40
355 FRN315VG1□-4J MD DCR4-355C 400345156128200M10(12×22) 225 - 4×M12 49
400 LD DCR4-400C 445385145117213M10(12×22) 245 - 4×M12 52
355 HD DCR4-355C 400345156128200M10(12×22) 225 - 4×M12 49
400 FRN355VG1□-4J MD DCR4-400C 445385145117213M10(12×22) 245 - 4×M12 52
450 LD DCR4-450C E 440385150122215M10(12×22) 245 - 4×M12 62
400 HD DCR4-400C 445385145117213M10(12×22) 245 - 4×M12 52
450 FRN400VG1□-4J MD DCR4-450C 440385150122215M10(12×22) 245 - 4×M12 62
LD
500 DCR4-500C 445390165137220M10(12×22) 245 - 4×M12 72
HD
FRN500VG1□-4J
LD
630 DCR-630C 285145203170195M12(14×20) 480 - 2×M12 75
HD F
FRN630VG1□-4J
710 LD DCR-710C 340160295255225 M12(Φ15) 480 - 4×M12 95

□
S (Basic type)
8-69
8.5.4 AC reactor (ACR)
Use an ACR when the converter part of the inverter should supply very stable DC power, for example, in
DC link bus operation (shared PN operation). Generally, ACRs are used for correction of voltage
waveform and power factor or for power supply matching, but not for suppressing harmonic components
in the power lines. For suppressing harmonic components, use a DCR.
For power supply matching

・ Also use a DCR when there are thyristor-driven loads or when phase-advancing capacitors are being
turned ON/OFF.
・ Use a DCR when the interphase voltage unbalance ratio of the inverter power supply exceeds 2%.
Max. voltage (V) - Min. voltage ( V)

Interphase voltage unbalance (%) = × 67
・When connecting multiple inverters to DC mother line
P1 P(+) DB
AC reactor Electromagnetic
(ACR) contactor (MC)
Molded case U X T1 L1
circuit breaker Ｍ
V Y T2 L2 ３～
(MCCB)
or W Z T3 L3
Earth leakage
circuit breaker
(ELCB) N(-) FRENIC-VG
Max. 2 m Max. 2 m
P1 P(+) N(-) DB
AC reactor Electromagnetic
(ACR) contactor (MC)
U X T1 L1
Ｍ
V Y T2 L2
３～
W Z T3 L3
FRENIC-VG
Note 1) Be sure to connect the AC rector when connecting to the DC mother line.
Note 2) When connecting to the DC mother line, use inverters of the same model and capacity.
8-70
Molded case circuit

breaker
(MCCB)
or AC reactor Electromagnetic Inverter
Earth leakage circuit (ACR) contactor (MC)
breaker
(ELCB) T1 L1
U X L1/R
T2 L2
V Y L2/S
T3 L3
W Z L3/T
Figure 8.10 External View of AC Reactor (ACR) and Connection Example
Table 8.12 AC Reactor (ACR)
Power Nominal Rated Reactance Winding

applied Specifi- Reactor (mΩ/phase) Generated
supply Inverter type current resistor
motor cations model loss (W)
voltage (A) 50Hz 60Hz (mΩ)
(kW)
0.75 FRN0.75VG1□-2J ACR2-0.75A 5 493 592 - 12
1.5 FRN1.5VG1□-2J ACR2-1.5A 8 295 354 - 14
2.2 FRN2.2VG1□-2J ACR2-2.2A 11 213 256 - 16
Chap. 8
3.7 FRN3.7VG1□-2J ACR2-3.7A 17 218 153 - 23
5.5 FRN5.5VG1□-2J ACR2-5.5A 25 87.7 105 - 27
HD
7.5 FRN7.5VG1□-2J ACR2-7.5A 33 65 78 - 30

11 FRN11VG1□-2J ACR2-11A 46 45.5 54.7 - 37
15 FRN15VG1□-2J ACR2-15A 59 34.8 41.8 - 43
18.5 FRN18.5VG1□-2J ACR2-18.5A 74 28.6 34.3 - 51
22 FRN22VG1□-2J ACR2-22A 87 24 28.8 - 57
Three-
phase 30 HD ACR2-37 200 10.8 13 0.5 28.6
200V FRN30VG1□-2J
LD
37 ACR2-37 200 10.8 13 0.5 40.8
HD
FRN37VG1□-2J
LD
45 ACR2-55 270 7.5 9 0.375 47.1
HD
FRN45VG1□-2J
LD
55 ACR2-55 270 7.5 9 0.375 66.1
HD
FRN55VG1□-2J
LD
75 ACR2-75 390 5.45 6.54 0.25 55.1
HD
FRN75VG1□-2J
LD
90 ACR2-90 450 4.73 5.67 0.198 61.5
HD
FRN90VG1□-2J
110 LD ACR2-110 500 4.25 5.1 0.18 83.4

□
S (Basic type)
8-71
Table 8.12 AC Reactor (ACR) (continued)
Power Nominal Reactance Winding
Specifi- Reactor Rated (mΩ/phase) Generated
supply applied Inverter type resistor
cations model current(A) loss (W)
voltage motor (kW) 50 Hz 60 Hz (mΩ)
3.7 FRN3.7VG1□-4J ACR4-3.7A 9 512 615 - 17
5.5 FRN5.5VG1□-4J ACR4-5.5A 13 349 418 - 22
7.5 FRN7.5VG1□-4J ACR4-7.5A 18 256 307 - 27
11 FRN11VG1□-4J HD ACR4-11A 24 183 219 - 40
15 FRN15VG1□-4J ACR4-15A 30 139 167 - 46
ACR4-18.5
18.5 FRN18.5VG1□-4J 39 114 137 - 57
A
22 FRN22VG1□-4J ACR4-22A 45 95.8 115 - 62
30 HD ACR4-37 100 41.7 50 2.73 38.9
FRN30VG1□-4J
LD
37 ACR4-37 100 41.7 50 2.73 55.7
HD
FRN37VG1□-4J
LD
45 ACR4-55 135 30.8 37 1.61 50.2
HD
FRN45VG1□-4J
LD
55 ACR4-55 135 30.8 37 1.61 70.7
HD
FRN55VG1□-4J
LD
75 ACR4-75 * 160 25.8 31 1.16 65.3
HD
FRN75VG1□-4J
LD
90 ACR4-110 250 16.7 20 0.523 42.2
HD
FRN90VG1□-4J
MD/LD
110 ACR4-110 250 16.7 20 0.523 60.3
HD
FRN110VG1□-4J
MD/LD
132 ACR4-132 * 270 20.8 25 0.741 119
Three- HD
FRN132VG1□-4J
phase MD/LD
160 ACR4-220 561 10 12 0.236 56.4
400V HD
FRN160VG1□-4J
MD/LD
200 ACR4-220 561 10 12 0.236 90.4
HD
FRN200VG1□-4J
MD/LD
220 ACR4-220 561 10 12 0.236 107
HD
250 FRN220VG1□-4J MD 96.4
LD ACR4-280 825 6.67 8 0.144
280 108
HD
315 FRN280VG1□-4J MD 194
ACR4-355 825 6.67 8 0.144
355 LD 245
315 HD 194
ACR4-355 825 6.67 8 0.144
355 FRN315VG1□-4J MD 245
400 LD ACR4-450 950 6.67 8 0.136 380
355 HD ACR4-355 * 825 6.67 8 0.144 245
400 FRN355VG1□-4J MD 380
ACR4-450 950 6.67 8 0.136
450 LD 473
400 HD 380
ACR4-450 950 6.67 8 0.136
450 FRN400VG1□-4J MD 473
LD
500 ACR4-530 1100 5.75 6.9 0.0824 340
HD
FRN500VG1□-4J
LD
630 ACR4-630 1300 4.87 5.84 0.0713 422
HD
FRN630VG1□-4J
710 LD - - - - - -
* Cool the fan (for 3m/s or more).

Note 1: □ in the inverter model represents an alphabet. 。
□
S (Basic type)
8-72
Figure A Figure B Figure C

Terminal table (for J screw)
6-terminal 6-terminal
hole (for J hole (for J
screw) screw)
4-mounting hole 4-mounting hole 4-mounting hole

(for G screw) (for G screw) (for G screw)
Figure D Figure E
6-terminal
(for J screw)
4-mounting 2-terminal
(for J screw)
hole
(for G
screw)
4-mounting
hole
(for G
screw)
Table 8.13 AC Reactors (ACRs) External Dimensions
Power Nominal Dimensions(mm) Approx.
Chap. 8
applied Specifi- Reactor
supply Inverter type weight
motor cations model Fig W W1 D D1 D2 G H J
voltage (kg)
(kW)
0.75 FRN0.75VG1□-2J ACR2-0.75A 120 40 100 75 20 M5(6×10) 115 M4 1.9
1.5 FRN1.5VG1□-2J ACR2-1.5A 120 40 100 75 20 M5(6×10) 115 M4 2.0

2.2 FRN2.2VG1□-2J ACR2-2.2A A 120 40 100 75 20 M5(6×10) 115 M4 2.0
3.7 FRN3.7VG1□-2J ACR2-3.7A 125 40 100 75 25 M5(6×10) 125 M4 2.4
5.5 FRN5.5VG1□-2J ACR2-5.5A 125 40 115 90 25 M5(6×10) 125 M4 3.1
HD
7.5 FRN7.5VG1□-2J ACR2-7.5A 125 40 115 90 106 M5(6×10) 95 M5 3.1
11 FRN11VG1□-2J ACR2-11A 125 40 125 100 106 M5(6×10) 95 M6 3.7
15 FRN15VG1□-2J ACR2-15A 180 60 110 85 106 M6(7×11) 115 M6 4.8
18.5 FRN18.5VG1□-2J ACR2-18.5A 180 60 110 85 109 M6(7×11) 115 M6 5.1
B
22 FRN22VG1□-2J ACR2-22A 180 60 110 85 109 M6(7×11) 115 M6 5.1
Three-
phase 30 HD ACR2-37 190 60 120 90 172 M6(7×11) 190 M8 11
FRN30VG1□-2J
200V LD
37 ACR2-37 190 60 120 90 172 M6(7×11) 190 M8 11
HD
FRN37VG1□-2J
LD
45 ACR2-55 190 60 120 90 200 M6(7×11) 190 M12 13
HD
FRN45VG1□-2J
LD
55 ACR2-55 190 60 120 90 200 M6(7×11) 190 M12 13
HD
FRN55VG1□-2J
LD C
75 ACR2-75 250 100 120 90 200 M8(9×14) 250 M12 25
HD
FRN75VG1□-2J
LD M10(12×20
90 ACR2-90 285 190 158 120 190 ) 210 M12 26
HD
FRN90VG1□-2J
110 LD ACR2-110 280 150 138 110 200 M8(10×20) 270 M12 30
8-73
Table 8.13 AC Reactors (ACRs) External Dimensions (continued)
Power Nominal Dimensions(mm) Approx.

supply applied
Specifi-
voltage motor W W1 D D1 D2 G H J
cations Fig
(kW) (kg)
3.7 FRN3.7VG1□-4J ACR4-3.7A 125 40 100 75 106 M5(6×10) 95 M4 2.4
5.5 FRN5.5VG1□-4J ACR4-5.5A 125 40 115 90 106 M5(6×10) 95 M5 3.1
7.5 FRN7.5VG1□-4J ACR4-7.5A 125 40 115 90 106 M5(6×10) 95 M5 3.7
11 FRN11VG1□-4J HD ACR4-11A 180 60 110 85 106 M6(7×11) 115 M6 4.3
15 FRN15VG1□-4J ACR4-15A 180 60 110 85 106 M6(7×11) 137 M6 5.4
B
18.5 FRN18.5VG1□-4J ACR4-18.5A 180 60 110 85 106 M6(7×11) 137 M6 5.7
22 FRN22VG1□-4J ACR4-22A 180 60 110 85 106 M6(7×11) 137 M6 5.9
30 HD
FRN30VG1□-4J
LD ACR4-37 190 60 120 90 172 M6(7×11) 190 M8 12
37
HD
FRN37VG1□-4J
LD
45 ACR4-55 190 60 120 90 200 M6(7×11) 190 M10 14
HD
FRN45VG1□-4J
LD
55 ACR4-55 190 60 120 90 200 M6(7×11) 190 M10 14
HD
FRN55VG1□-4J
LD
75 ACR4-75 190 60 126 90 157 M6(7×10) 190 M10 16
HD
FRN75VG1□-4J
LD
90 ACR4-110 250 100 136 105 202 M8(9.5×18) 245 M12 24
HD
FRN90VG1□-4J
MD/LD
110 ACR4-110 250 100 136 105 202 M8(9.5×18) 245 M12 24
HD
FRN110VG1□-4J
MD/LD
132 ACR4-132 250 100 146 115 207 M8(10x16) 250 M12 32
HD
Three- FRN132VG1□-4J
MD/LD C
phase 160 ACR4-220 320 120 150 110 240 M10(12×20) 300 M12 40
400V HD
FRN160VG1□-4J
MD/LD
200 ACR4-220 320 120 150 110 240 M10(12×20) 300 M12 40
HD
FRN200VG1□-4J
MD/LD
220 ACR4-220 320 120 150 110 240 M10(12×20) 300 M12 40
HD
250 FRN220VG1□-4J MD
LD ACR4-280 380 130 150 110 260 M10(12×20) 300 M12 52
280
HD
ACR4-355 380 130 150 110 260 M10(12×20) 300 M12 52
355 LD
315 HD
ACR4-355 380 130 150 110 260 M10(12×20) 300 M12 52
400 LD ACR4-450 D 460 155 290 230 200 M12(Φ15) 490 4×M12 95
355 HD ACR4-355 C 380 130 150 110 260 M10(12×20) 300 M12 52
ACR4-450 460 155 290 230 200 M12(Φ15) 490 4×M12 95
450 LD
D
400 HD
ACR4-450 460 155 290 230 200 M12(Φ15) 490 4×M12 95
LD
500 ACR4-530 480 155 420 370 - M12(15×25) 380 4×M12 100
HD
FRN500VG1□-4J E
LD
630 ACR4-630 510 170 420 370 - M12(15×25) 390 4×M12 110
HD
FRN630VG1□-4J
710 LD - - - - - - - - - - -
8-74
8.5.5 Surge suppression unit (SSU)
Chap. 8
8-75
8.5.6 Output circuit filter (OFL)
Insert an OFL in the inverter power output circuit to:
・Suppress the surge voltage at motor terminal

This protects the motor from insulation damage caused by the application of high voltage surge
currents from the 400 V class series of inverters.
・Suppress leakage current (due to higher harmonic components) from the inverter output lines
This reduces the leakage current when the motor is connected by long power feed lines. (Keep the
length of the power feed line less than 400 m.)
・ Minimize radiation and/or induction noise issued from the inverter output lines
An OFL is an effective noise suppression device for long wiring applications at plants.
Inverter Output circuit filter (OFL)
U U X Motor
V V Y M
W W Z
Figure 8.11 External View of Output Circuit Filter (OFL) and Connection
8-76
Table 8.14 Output Circuit Filter (OFL)
OFL-□□□-4A
Inverter
Nominal Carrier Maximum
Power Rated input
applied Specifi- Filter Overload frequency output Generated
supply Inverter type current power
motor cations model resistance tolerance frequency loss (W)
voltage (A) supply
(kW) (kHz) (Hz)
voltage
3.7 FRN3.7VG1□-4J OFL-3.7-4A 9 210
5.5 FRN5.5VG1□-4J
OFL-7.5-4A 18 190
7.5 FRN7.5VG1□-4J
11 FRN11VG1□-4J HD
OFL-15-4A 30 320
15 FRN15VG1□-4J
18.5 FRN18.5VG1□-4J
OFL-22-4A 45 350
22 FRN22VG1□-4J
2-15kHz
30 HD OFL-30-4A 60 570
FRN30VG1□-4J
LD
37 OFL-37-4A 75 610
HD
FRN37VG1□-4J
LD
45 OFL-45-4A 91 810
HD
FRN45VG1□-4J
LD
55 OFL-55-4A 112 910
HD
FRN55VG1□-4J
LD
75 OFL-75-4A 150 1200
HD
FRN75VG1□-4J
LD
90 OFL-90-4A 176 1360
HD
Chap. 8
FRN90VG1□-4J
MD/LD
110 OFL-110-4A 210 1410
HD
FRN110VG1□-4J HD model
MD/LD
132 OFL-132-4A 253 150%-1min 1800
HD Three- 400Hz

Three-p 200%-3s
FRN132VG1□-4J phase
hase MD/LD MD model
160 OFL-160-4A 304 380-480V 2210
400V HD 150%-1min
50/60Hz
FRN160VG1□-4J LD model
MD/LD 120%-1min
200 OFL-200-4A 377 2520
HD
FRN200VG1□-4J
MD/LD
220 OFL-220-4A 415 2590
HD 2-10kHz
LD OFL-280-4A 520 3570
280
HD
315 FRN280VG1□-4J MD OFL-315-4A 585 3290
355 LD OFL-355-4A 650 3320
315 HD OFL-315-4A 585 3290
355 FRN315VG1□-4J MD OFL-355-4A 650 3320
400 LD OFL-400-4A 740 3390
355 HD OFL-355-4A 650 3320
400 FRN355VG1□-4J MD OFL-400-4A 740 3390
450 LD OFL-450-4A 840 3390
400 HD OFL-400-4A 740 3390
450 FRN400VG1□-4J MD OFL-450-4A 840 3390
LD
500 OFL-500-4A 960 4250
HD
FRN500VG1□-4J 2-6kHz
LD
630 OFL-630-4A 1170 120Hz 4700
FRN630VG1□-4J HD
Note : □ in the inverter model represents an alphabet. 。

□
S (Basic type)
8-77
Table 8.15 Output Circuit Filter (OFL) Dimensions
OFL-□□□-4A
Filter (for 22 kW or below) Reactor (for 30 kW or above)
Resistor and Capacitor (for 30 kW or above)
8-78
Nominal Dimensions(mm) Approx.

Power
applied Specifi-
supply Inverter type Filter type Fig Grounding Terminal Mounting weight
motor cations A B C D E F G
voltage screw H screw J screw K (kg)
(kW)
3.7 FRN3.7VG1□-4J OFL-3.7-4A A 220 225 220 200 115 - - M4 M4 M5 14
5.5 FRN5.5VG1□-4J
OFL-7.5-4A 290 290 230 260 160 - - M5 M5 M6 22
7.5 FRN7.5VG1□-4J
11 FRN11VG1□-4J HD B
OFL-15-4A 330 275 310 300 145 - - M6 M6 M8 35
15 FRN15VG1□-4J
18.5 FRN18.5VG1□-4J
OFL-22-4A 330 300 330 300 170 - - M6 M6 M8 45
22 FRN22VG1□-4J
30 HD OFL-30-4A C/F 210 175 210 70 140 90 160 - M5 M6 12
FRN30VG1□-4J
LD
37 OFL-37-4A 220 190 220 75 150 95 160 - M5 M6 15
HD
FRN37VG1□-4J
LD D/F
45 OFL-45-4A 220 195 265 70 155 140 160 - M6 M8 17
HD
FRN45VG1□-4J
LD
55 OFL-55-4A 260 200 275 85 160 150 160 - M6 M8 22
HD
FRN55VG1□-4J
LD
75 OFL-75-4A 260 210 290 85 170 150 233 - M8 M10 25
HD
FRN75VG1□-4J
LD
90 OFL-90-4A 260 210 290 85 170 155 233 - M8 M10 28
HD
FRN90VG1□-4J
MD/LD
110 OFL-110-4A 300 230 330 100 190 170 233 - M8 M10 38
HD
FRN110VG1□-4J
MD/LD
Chap. 8
132 OFL-132-4A 300 240 340 100 200 170 233 - M10 M10 42
Three- HD
FRN132VG1□-4J
phase MD/LD
400V 160 OFL-160-4A 300 240 340 100 200 180 233 - M10 M10 48
HD
FRN160VG1□-4J
MD/LD

200 OFL-200-4A 320 270 350 105 220 190 333 - M10 M12 60
HD
FRN200VG1□-4J
MD/LD
220 OFL-220-4A 340 300 390 115 250 190 333 - M10 M12 70
HD
LD OFL-280-4A 350 300 430 115 250 200 333 - M10 M12 78
280
HD
315 FRN280VG1□-4J MD OFL-315-4A E/G 440 275 450 150 230 170 - - M12 M12 90
355 LD OFL-355-4A 440 290 480 150 245 175 - - M12 M12 100
315 HD OFL-315-4A 440 275 450 150 230 170 - - M12 M12 90
355 FRN315VG1□-4J MD OFL-355-4A 440 290 480 150 245 175 - - M12 M12 100
400 LD OFL-400-4A 440 295 510 150 240 175 - - M12 M12 110
355 HD OFL-355-4A 440 290 480 150 245 175 - - M12 M12 100
400 FRN355VG1□-4J MD OFL-400-4A 440 295 510 150 240 175 - - M12 M12 110
450 LD OFL-450-4A 440 325 470 150 270 195 - - M12 M12 125
400 HD OFL-400-4A 440 295 510 150 240 175 - - M12 M12 110
450 FRN400VG1□-4J MD OFL-450-4A 440 325 470 150 270 195 - - M12 M12 125
LD
500 OFL-500-4A 440 335 500 150 280 210 - - M12 M12 145
HD
FRN500VG1□-4J
LD
630 OFL-630-4A 480 355 560 150 280 245 - - M12 M12 170
FRN630VG1□-4J HD
Note that the OFL-***-4A models have no restrictions on carrier frequency.
8-79
8.5.7 Radio noise reducing zero phase reactor (ACL)
An ACL is used to reduce radio frequency noise emitted by the inverter.
An ACL suppresses the outflow of high frequency harmonics caused by switching operation for the
power supply lines inside the inverter. Pass the power supply lines together through the ACL.
If wiring length between the inverter and motor is less than 20 m, insert an ACL to the power supply
lines; if it is more than 20 m, insert it to the power output lines of the inverter.
Wire size is determined depending upon the ACL size (I.D.) and installation requirements.
MCCB 0-phase (without installation feet) (with installation feet)

or Contactor reactor Inverter
ELCB
Power
supply Motor
Figure 8.12 Dimensions of Zero-phase Reactor for Reducing Radio Noise (ACL) and
Connection Example
Table 8.16 Zero-phase Reactors for Reducing Radio Noise (ACL)
Installation requirements
Zero-phase reactor type Number of Wire size (mm2)
Qty.
turns
1 4 2.0, 3.5, 5.5
ACL-40B
2 2 8, 14
1 4 8, 14
ACL-74B 2 2 22, 38, 60, 5.5×2, 8×2, 14×2, 22×2
4 1 100, 150, 200, 250, 325, 38×2, 60×2, 100×2, 150×2
F200160 4 1 200×2, 250×2, 325×2, 325×3
F200160PB 4 1 200×2, 250×2, 325×2, 325×3
The selected wires are for use with 3-phase input/output lines (3 wires).
Note: Use the insulated wire of 75°C, 600 V, HIV-insulated.
8-80
8.5.8 External cooling attachment

This attachment is used to allow the inverter cooling fins to protrude out of the panel.
PBVG7-7.5(FRN0.75VG1S-2J to FRN7.5VG1S-2J,FRN3.7VG1S-4J to FRN7.5VG1S-4J)
Chap. 8
Unit：[mm]
Figure 8.13 External Cooling Attachment External Dimensions
8-81
PB-F1-30(FRN11VG1S-2J to FRN22VG1S-2J,FRN11VG1S-4J to FRN22VG1S-4J)
Panel installation side
4×M8 screws
: Attachment mounting hole
: Mounting hole
: Inverter external dimensions
Panel processing diagram
Unit：mm
Figure 8.13 External Cooling Attachment External Dimensions (continued)
8-82
8.6 Battery
8.6 Battery
8.6.1 Overview of battery
Used to retain the trace back memory and calendar when the inverter is not powered.
・22kW or lower: Option

・30kW or higher: Standard
Model OPK-BP
Voltage/capacity 3.6 V/1100 mAh
Type Lithium Thionyl Chloride(Li-SOCl2) battery
Life 5 years (with ambient temperature of 60°C and inverter powered off)
Unit: mm
1 2
Φ17 55 31
Chap. 8
Figure 8.14 Overview of battery

Safety Precautions
This battery contains lithium (dangerous substance) and thionyl chloride (very dangerous substance) to provide
high energy. If you use it in a wrong way, the battery may be deformed, liquid inside the battery may leak, or heat
generation, explosion, fire, and/or stimulative/corrosive gas generation may occur, resulting in a injury or device
failure. Be sure to observe the following precautions:
• Do not swallow the battery.
• Do not apply excessive force to the positive terminal.
• Do not drop the battery.
• Do not short-circuit the battery.
• Do not charge the battery.
• Do not force the battery to discharge.
• Do not heat the battery.
• Do not throw the battery into fire.
• Do not disassemble the battery.
• Do not deform the battery.
• Insert the battery into the inverter in the correct direction.
• Do not allow liquid from the battery to touch your skin.
• Do not leave a damaged battery in the inverter.
Keep the battery where it is not exposed to the direct sunlight, high temperature/humidity, and/or rain drop.
This battery belongs to the "primary battery class", which must be discarded in accordance with the defined
method (law).
8-83
8.6.2 Installing battery
Be sure to operate the inverter with the battery installed.

Afire or an accident might occur.
Refer to "3.4.4.12 Setting Date/Time" for how to adjust the clock.
8.6.2.1 Installing battery (for 22 kW or lower)

c Remove the outer cover.
d Install the battery as shown in the figure. e Connect the battery cable to the connector
CN7 on the control printed board.
CN7
Figure 8.15 Battery Installed (22kW or lower)
8-84
8.6 Battery
8.6.2.2 Installing battery (for 30 kW or higher)

c Remove the front cover. d Remove the touch panel case.
Open the touch panel case and disconnect the
connectors CN5 and CN8 from the control
printed board.
e Install the battery as shown in the figure. f Connect the battery cable to the connector
CN7 on the control printed board.
Chap. 8
CN5
CN7
CN8
Figure 8.16 Battery Installed (30kW or higher)
8-85
8.6.3 Replacing battery
Reverse the installation procedure to remove the battery, and then install the new battery.
Be sure to operate the inverter with the battery installed.

Afire or an accident might occur.
Refer to "3.4.4.12 Setting Date/Time" for how to adjust the clock.
8.6.4 Sending battery via air transport

The International Air Transport Association (IATA) issued the new revision (Edition 44) of handling
manual for dangerous substance and "Rules for Lithium and Lithium-Ion Batteries" was revised. This
battery belongs to the category of non-dangerous substances (with lithium contents 1.0G or less,
non-Class 9), and sending it via air transport is permitted up to 24 batteries in a single package. When
sending more than 24 batteries, a package specified by the rule is required. Contact us or our distributor
for the details. (As of 2011 April)
8-86
FRENIC- VG
9
Chapter 9
SELECTING OPTIMAL MOTOR AND
INVERTER CAPACITIES
This chapter provides you with information about the inverter output torque characteristics, selection
procedure, and equations for calculating capacities to help you select optimal motor and inverter models. It
also helps you select braking resistors and inverter mode (HD, MD, or LD).
Contents
9.1 Selecting Motor and Inverter Capacities..................................................................................................... 9-1

9.1.1 Motor output torque characteristics..................................................................................................... 9-1
9.1.2 Selection procedure............................................................................................................................. 9-3
9.1.3 Equations for selections ...................................................................................................................... 9-7
9.1.3.1 Load torque during constant speed running ................................................................................ 9-7
[ 1 ] General equation ......................................................................................................................... 9-7
[ 2 ] Obtaining the required force F .................................................................................................... 9-7
9.1.3.2 Acceleration and deceleration time calculation........................................................................... 9-9
[ 1 ] Calculation of moment of inertia................................................................................................. 9-9
[ 2 ] Calculation of the acceleration time .......................................................................................... 9-11
[ 3 ] Calculation of the deceleration time.......................................................................................... 9-12
[ 4 ] Calculating non-linear acceleration/deceleration time .............................................................. 9-12
9.1.3.3 Heat energy calculation of braking resistor............................................................................... 9-14
[ 1 ] Calculation of regenerative energy............................................................................................ 9-14
9.1.3.4 Calculating the RMS rating of the motor .................................................................................. 9-15
9.2 Selecting a Braking Resistor ..................................................................................................................... 9-16
9.2.1 Selection procedure........................................................................................................................... 9-16
9.2.2 Notes on selection ............................................................................................................................. 9-16
9.3 Selecting an Inverter Drive Mode (HD/MD/LD)...................................................................................... 9-17
9.3.1 Precaution in making the selection.................................................................................................... 9-17
9.3.2 Guideline for selecting inverter drive mode and capacity................................................................. 9-18
9.1 Selecting Motor and Inverter Capacities

First select a motor and then inverter as follows:
(1) Key point for selecting a motor: Determine what kind of load machine is to be used, calculate its
moment of inertia, and then select the appropriate motor capacity.
(2) Key point for selecting an inverter: Taking into account the operation requirements (e.g.,
acceleration time, deceleration time, and frequency in operation) of the load machine to be driven
by the motor selected in (1) above, calculate the acceleration/deceleration/braking torque.
This section describes the selection procedure for (1) and (2) above. First, it explains the output torque
characteristics obtained by using the motor driven by the FRENIC-VG.
9.1.1 Motor output torque characteristics

Figure 9.1 shows the output torque characteristics of motors exclusive to the FRENIC-VG. The output
torque is classified into the following quadrants by speed and torque-applied direction.
(Speed) (Torque)
• First quadrant: + + ....... Driving in forward rotation
• Second quadrant: − + ..... Braking in reverse rotation
• Third quadrant: − − ..... Driving in reverse rotation
• Fourth quadrant: + − ..... Braking in forward rotation
In the figure below, the speed rate (%) is expressed assuming the base speed as 100%, and the torque
Chap. 9
rate (%), assuming the continuous rated torque as 100%.
SELECTING OPTIMAL MOTOR AND INVERTER CAPACITIES

Output torque (%)
Speed 200 (%)
Figure 9.1 Output Torque Characteristics (HD mode)
9-1
(1) Allowable continuous driving torque (Curve (a) in the 1st and 3rd quadrants)
Curve (a) shows the output torque available continuously in the driving mode. In the domain below the
base speed (100%) in the speed control range (0 to 200%), the rated output torque (100%) is obtained.
In the domain above the base speed (100%), the constant output is obtained so that the output torque is
in inverse proportion to the speed.
In particular, at very low speeds below the speed control range, due to the restriction on the inverter
internal temperature rise, the allowable torque drops to 80% for the converted inverter output
frequency of less than 0.1 Hz. When driving an induction motor (IM) with the frequency of less than
0.1 Hz, the inverter can drive the motor continuously, taking into account the motor slip in practice.
However, when driving a permanent magnet synchronous motor (PMSM) with less than 0.1 Hz, the
synchronous speed applies so that it is necessary to take the torque loss into account.
(2) Maximum driving torque in a short time (Curve (b) in the 1st and 3rd quadrants)
Curve (b) shows the output torque allowed for a short time (60 seconds) in the driving mode. In
general, this torque applies to acceleration and deceleration. The torque is 150% of the rated
continuous torque.
In particular, at very low speeds below the speed control range, due to the restriction on the inverter
internal temperature rise, the allowable torque drops to 100% for the converted inverter output
frequency of less than 0.1 Hz.
(3) Starting torque (Around speed zero (0) in the 1st and 3rd quadrants)
The torque at around the speed zero (0) applies as starting torque. Although the continuous output
torque is 80%, the starting torque becomes as high as 150% because the curve passes the very low
speed range in a short period (30 seconds or less).
(4) Braking torque (2nd and 4th quadrants)

The 2nd and 4th quadrants are the braking mode range. Curve (c) shows the braking torque available
in the rated continuous current range of the inverter; curve (d) is the braking torque available for
60-second rated current. In the very low speed range, the torque drops to 80% just as in the driving
mode.
The time rating of the braking torque is dominantly determined by another condition--the energy
processing time rating of an optional braking resistor or braking unit since the kinetic energy of
mechanical load is regenerated in the braking mode.
For the time rating of the braking resistor, this manual and the associated catalogs list the allowable
values (kW) in terms of the average discharging loss and the allowable values (kWs) in terms of the
discharging capability that can be discharged at one time.
For braking-related values to be applied to the standard combination of the inverter and braking
resistor or braking unit, refer to Chapter 8, Section 8.5.1.1 "Braking resistors (DBRs) and
braking units."
9-2
9.1.2 Selection procedure

Figure 9.2 shows the general selection procedure for optimal inverters. Items numbered (1) through
(5) are described on the following pages.
You may easily select inverter capacity if there are no restrictions on acceleration and deceleration
times. If "there are any restrictions on acceleration or deceleration time" or "acceleration and
deceleration are frequent," then the selection procedure is more complex.
Chap. 9
Figure 9.2 Selection Procedure
9-3
(1) Calculating the load torque during constant speed running (For detailed calculation, refer
to Section 9.1.3.1)
The "load torque during constant speed running" refers to the torque required for rotating the load at
the constant speed and converted to motor shaft. It can be calculated in consideration of the reducer
rate (ηG).
Driving mode
"Load torque during constant speed running" = Actual load torque (τL) ÷ Reducer rate (ηG)
Braking mode
"Load torque during constant speed running" = Actual load torque (τL) x Reducer rate (ηG)
The above calculation is requisite for selecting capacities for all loads.
First calculate the load torque of the motor during constant speed running and then select a tentative
capacity so that the continuous rated torque of the motor during constant speed running becomes
higher than the load torque. To perform capacity selection efficiently, it is necessary to match the rated
speeds (base speeds) of the motor and load each other. To do this, select an appropriate reducer
(mechanical transmission) ratio and the number of motor poles.
If there is no restriction on acceleration or deceleration time and the load is not a lift load, the tentative
capacity can apply as a defined capacity.
(2) Calculating the acceleration time (For detailed calculation, refer to Section 9.1.3.2)
When there are some specified requirements for the acceleration time, calculate it according to the
following procedure:
1) Calculate the moment of inertia for the load and motor
If the moment of inertia is large, the motor cannot accelerate easily, requiring longer acceleration
time. Calculate the moment of inertia for the load, referring to Section 9.1.3.2, "Acceleration and
deceleration time calculation." For the motor, refer to the related motor catalogs.
2) Calculate the minimum acceleration torque (See Figure 9.3)
The acceleration torque is the difference between the "motor output torque allowed for one minute"
explained in Section 9.1.1 (2) and the "load torque during constant speed running" calculated in the
above (1). Calculate the minimum acceleration torque for the whole range of speed.
At speeds higher than the motor rated speed, the output torque drops in inverse proportion to the
speed.
3) Calculate the acceleration time
Assign the value calculated above to the equation (9.15) in Section 9.1.3.2, "Acceleration and
deceleration time calculation" to calculate the acceleration time. If the calculated acceleration time
is longer than the expected time, select the inverter and motor having one class larger capacity and
calculate it again.
Figure 9.3 Example Study of Minimum Acceleration Torque
9-4
(3) Deceleration time (For detailed calculation, refer to Section 9.1.3.2)

To calculate the deceleration time, check the motor deceleration torque characteristics for the whole
range of speed in the same way as for the acceleration time.
1) Calculate the moment of inertia for the load and motor
Same as for the acceleration time. If the moment of inertia is large, the deceleration time increases.
2) Calculate the minimum deceleration torque (See Figures 9.4 and 9.5.)
If the load torque is a positive value, Figure 9.4 applies.
If the load is a braking load of a lift, etc. and the load torque is a negative value, Figure 9.5 applies.
In this case, be careful with the minimum value of the braking torque that decreases due to energy
regeneration.
3) Calculate the deceleration time
Assign the value calculated above to the equation (9.16) to calculate the deceleration time in the
same way as for the acceleration time. If the calculated deceleration time is longer than the
requested time, select the inverter and motor having one class larger capacity and calculate it again.
Chap. 9
Figure 9.4 Example Study of Minimum Figure 9.5 Example Study of Minimum

Deceleration Torque (1) Deceleration Torque (2)
(4) Braking resistor rating (For detailed calculation, refer to Section 9.1.3.3)
Braking resistor rating is classified into two types according to the braking periodic duty cycle.
1) When the periodic duty cycle is 100 sec or less:
Calculate the average loss to determine rated values.
2) When the periodic duty cycle exceeds 100 sec:
The allowable braking energy depends on the maximum regenerative braking capacity. The
allowable values are listed in Chapter 8, Section 8.5.1.1 "Braking resistors (DBRs) and braking
units."
(5) Motor RMS current (For detailed calculation, refer to Section 9.1.3.4)
In metal processing machine and materials handling machines requiring positioning control, highly
frequent running for a short time is repeated. In this case, calculate the maximum equivalent RMS
current value (effective value of current) not to exceed the allowable value (rated current) for the
motor.
9-5
(6) Notes for examining inverter capacity
• When selecting an inverter for driving a FRENIC-VG dedicated motor, ensure that the root mean
square of the motor torque is lower than 100% of the rated torque.
• When selecting a general-purpose motor, ensure that the root mean square of the motor current is
lower than the motor rated current for effective motor cooling. In this case, select an inverter so that
the root mean square of the current is lower than the inverter rated current.
9-6
9.1.3 Equations for selections

9.1.3.1 Load torque during constant speed running
[ 1 ] General equation
The frictional force acting on a horizontally moved load must be calculated. Calculation for driving a
load along a straight line with the motor is shown below.
Where the force to move a load linearly at constant speed υ (m/s) is F (N) and the motor speed for
driving this is NM (r/min), the required motor output torque τM (N·m) is as follows:
60 • υ F
τM = • ( N • m) (9.1)
2 π • NM ηG
where, ηG is Reduction-gear efficiency.

When the inverter brakes the motor, efficiency works inversely, so the required motor torque should
be calculated as follows:
60 • υ
τM = • F• η ( N • m) (9.2)
G
2 π • NM
(60·υ) / (2π·NM) in the above equation is an equivalent turning radius corresponding to speed
υ (m/s) around the motor shaft.
The value F (N) in the above equations depends on the load type.
Chap. 9
[ 2 ] Obtaining the required force F
Moving a load horizontally

A simplified mechanical configuration is assumed as shown in Figure 9.6. If the mass of the carrier
table is W0 (kg), the load is W (kg), and the friction coefficient of the ball screw is μ, then the friction
force F (N) is expressed as follows, which is equal to a required force for driving the load:
F = ( W0 + W) • g • μ ( N) (9.3)
2
where, g is the gravity acceleration (≈ 9.8 (m/s )).
Then, the driving torque around the motor shaft is expressed as follows:
60 • υ ( W0 + W) • g • μ
τM = • ( N • m) (9.4)
2 π • NM ηG
Figure 9.6 Moving a Load Horizontally
9-7
Vertical Lift Load
A simplified mechanical configuration is assumed as shown in Figure 9.7. If the mass of the cage is W0
(kg), the load is W (kg), and the balance weight is WB (kg), then the forces F (N) required for lifting the
load up and down are expressed as follows:
F = (W0 + W − WB ) • g (N) (For lifting up) (9.5)
F = (W0 − W − WB ) • g (N) (For lifting down) (9.6)
Assuming the maximum load is Wmax, the mass of the balance weight WB (kg) is generally obtained
with the expression WB = WO + Wmax /2. Depending on the mass of load W (kg), the values of F (N)
may be negative in both cases of lifting up and down, which means the lift is in braking mode. So, be
careful in motor and inverter selection.
For calculation of the required output torque τ around the motor shaft, apply the expression (9.1) or
(9.2) depending on the driving or braking mode of the lift, that is, apply the expression (9.1) if the
value of F (N) is positive, and the (9.2) if negative.
Reduction-gear
Motor
Cage
W0 (kg)
NM (r/min)
Load
W (kg)
Balance weight
WB (kg)
Figure 9.7 Vertical Lift Load
Inclined Lift Load

Although the mechanical configuration of an inclined lift load is similar to that of a vertical lift load,
unignorable friction force in the inclined lift makes a difference; in an inclined lift load, there is a
distinct difference between the expression to calculate the lift force F (N) for lifting up and that for
lifting down.
If the incline angle is θ, and the friction coefficient is μ, as shown in the Figure 9.8, the driving force F
(N) is expressed as follows:
F = ((W0 + W) (sinθ + μ • cosθ ) − WB ) • g (N) (For lifting up) (9.7)
F = ((WB − (W0 + W) (sinθ + μ • cosθ )) • g (N) (For lifting down) (9.8)
The braking mode applies to both lifting up and down as in the vertical lift load. And the calculation of
the required output torque τ around the motor shaft is the same as in the vertical lift load; apply the
expression (9.1) if the value of F (N) is positive, and the (9.2) if negative.
Reduction-gear
Carrier
W0 (kg) Motor
Load
W (kg)
NM (r/min)
Balance weight
WB (kg)
Figure 9.8 Inclined Lift Load
9-8
9.1.3.2 Acceleration and deceleration time calculation

When an object whose moment of inertia is J (kg·m2) rotates at the speed N (r/min), it has the
following kinetic energy:
J 2π • N 2
E= •( ) (J ) (9.9)
2 60
To accelerate the above rotational object, the kinetic energy will be increased; to decelerate the object,
the kinetic energy must be discharged. The torque required for acceleration and deceleration can be
expressed as follows:
2π dN
τ=J • ( ) ( N • m) (9.10)
60 dt
This way, the mechanical moment of inertia is an important element in the acceleration and
deceleration. First, calculation method of moment of inertia is described, then those for acceleration
and deceleration time are explained.
[ 1 ] Calculation of moment of inertia

For an object that rotates around the shaft, virtually divide the object into small segments and square
the distance from the shaft to each segment. Then, sum the squares of the distances and the masses of
the segments to calculate the moment of inertia.
J = ∑ ( Wi • ri 2 ) (kg • m 2 ) (9.11)
The following describes equations to calculate moment of inertia having different shaped loads or load
systems.
Chap. 9
(1) Hollow cylinder and solid cylinder
The common shape of a rotating body is hollow cylinder. The moment of inertia J (kg⋅m2) around the

hollow cylinder center axis can be calculated as follows, where the outer and inner diameters are D1
and D2 [m] and total mass is W [kg] in Figure 9.9.
W • (D12 + D2 2 )
J= (kg • m 2 ) (9.12)
8
For a similar shape, a solid cylinder, calculate the moment of inertia as D2 is 0.
Figure 9.9 Hollow Cylinder
(2) For a general rotating body

Table 9.1 lists the calculation equations of moment of inertia of various rotating bodies including the
above cylindrical rotating body.
9-9
Table 9.1 Moment of Inertia of Various Rotating Bodies
Mass: W (kg) Mass: W (kg)

Shape Shape
Moment of inertia: Moment of inertia:
J (kg·m2) J (kg·m2)
Hollow cylinder π 2 2
W= • (D1 − D 2 ) • L • ρ W =A •B•L•ρ
4
1 2 2
J= • W • (D1 + D 2 )
8 1 2 2
Ja = • W • (L + A )
12
Sphere π 3 1 1
W= •D •ρ Jb = 2
• W • (L +
2
•A )
6 12 4
1 2
J c ≈ W • (L0 2 + L0 • L+ •L )
1 3
2
J= •W• D
10
Cone π 2 π 2
W= •D •L•ρ W= •D •L•ρ
12 4
3 2
J= •W•D
40 1 2 3 2
Ja = • W • (L + •D )
12 4
W =A •B•L•ρ 1 3
Rectangular prism J b = • W • (L2 + 2
•D )
3 16
1
Jc ≈ W • (L02 + L0 • L+ • L2 )
1 2 2 3
J= • W • (A + B )
12
Square cone (Pyramid, 1 1

W= •A •B•L•ρ W= •A •B•L•ρ
rectangular base) 3 3
1 2 2 1 1
J= • W • (A + B ) Jb = 2
• W • (L +
2
•A )
20 10 4
3 3
Jc ≈ W• (L02 + • L0 • L+ • L2 )
2 5
Triangular prism W=
3 2
•A •L•ρ
4
1 2 π 2
J= •W •A W= •D •L•ρ
3 12
Tetrahedron with an W=
3 2
•A •L•ρ
equilateral triangular 12
1 2 3 2
base Jb = • W • (L + •D )
10 8
1 3 3
J= •W •A
2 Jc ≈ W• (L02 + • L0 • L + • L2 )
5 2 5
Main metal density (at 20°C) ρ(kg/m3) Iron: 7860, Copper: 8940, Aluminum: 2700
9-10
(3) For a load running horizontally

Assume a carrier table driven by a motor as shown in Figure 9.6. If the table speed is υ (m/s) when the
motor speed is NM (r/min), then an equivalent distance from the shaft is equal to 60·υ / (2π·NM) (m).
The moment of inertia of the table and load to the shaft is calculated as follows:
60 • υ 2
J=( ) • ( W0 + W) (kg • m 2 ) (9.13)
2 π • NM
(4) For a vertical or inclined lift load

The moment of inertia J (kg·m2) of the loads connected with a rope as shown in Figures 9.7 and 9.8 is
calculated with the following equation using the mass of all moving objects, although the motion
directions of those loads are different.
60 • υ 2
J=( ) • (W0 + W + WB ) (kg • m 2 ) (9.14)
2 π • NM
[ 2 ] Calculation of the acceleration time

Figure 9.10 shows a general load model. Assume that a motor drives a load via a reduction-gear with
efficiency ηG. The time required to accelerate this load in stop state to a speed of NM (r/min) is
calculated with the following equation:
J1 + J2 ηG 2π • ( NM − 0)
t ACC = • (s) (9.15)
τM − τL ηG 60
Chap. 9
where,
J1: Motor shaft moment of inertia (kg·m2)
J2: Load shaft moment of inertia converted to motor shaft (kg·m2)

τM: Minimum motor output torque in driving motor (N·m)
τL: Maximum load torque converted to motor shaft (N·m)
ηG: Reduction-gear efficiency.
As clarified in the above equation, the equivalent moment of inertia becomes (J1 + J2/ηG) by
considering the reduction-gear efficiency.
Figure 9.10 Load Model Including Reduction-gear
9-11
[ 3 ] Calculation of the deceleration time
In a load system shown in Figure 9.10, the time needed to stop the motor rotating at a speed of NM
(r/min) is calculated with the following equation:
J1 + J 2 • ηG 2π • (0 − N M )
t DEC = • (s) (9.16)
τM − τL • η G
60
where,
J1: Motor shaft moment of inertia (kg·m2)
J2: Load shaft moment of inertia converted to motor shaft (kg·m2)
τM: Minimum motor output torque in braking (or decelerating) motor (N·m)
τL: Maximum load torque converted to motor shaft (N·m)
ηG: Reduction-gear efficiency
In the above equation, generally output torque τM is negative and load torque τL is positive. So,
deceleration time becomes shorter. However, in the case of a lift load, τL may become a negative value
in the braking mode so that the deceleration time becomes longer.
For lift applications, calculate the deceleration time using the negative value of τL (maximum
load torque converted to motor shaft).
[ 4 ] Calculating non-linear acceleration/deceleration time

In applications requiring frequent acceleration/deceleration, the inverter can accelerate/decelerate the
motor in the shortest time utilizing all torque margins. The inverter in a vector control mode can easily
perform this type of operation.
Torque/Power
Speed
Figure 9.11 An Example of Driving Characteristics with a Constant Output Range
In this case, the acceleration/deceleration vs. speed curve will form a non-linear figure, and the
acceleration/deceleration time cannot be calculated by a single expression.
Generally, the acceleration/deceleration time is obtained by calculating the acceleration/deceleration
time of ΔN that is a difference of speed N broken into small parts, and then integrating it to obtain the
total acceleration/deceleration time from start to end. Because the smaller ΔN provides higher
accuracy, this numerical calculation needs an aid of a computer program.
The following is a guide for the numerical calculation method using a computer program.
Figure 9.11 illustrates an example of driving characteristics with a constant output range. In the figure,
the range under N0 is of constant torque characteristics, and the range between N0 and N1 is of a
constant output with the non-linear acceleration/deceleration characteristics.
9-12
[4-1] Calculating non-linear acceleration time

The expression (9.17) gives an acceleration time ΔtACC within a ΔN speed thread.
J１ + J２ / ηG 2π • Δ N
ΔtACC = • (s) (9.17)
τM - τL / ηG 60
Before proceeding this calculation, obtain the motor shaft moment of inertia J１, the load shaft moment
of inertia converted to motor shaft J２, maximum load torque converted to motor shaft τＬ, and the
reduction-gear efficiency ηＧ. Apply the maximum motor output torque τＭ according to an actual
speed thread ΔN as follows.
[τＭ in N ≤ N0] Constant output torque range
60 • PO
τＭ = (N•m) (9.18)
2π • N0
[τＭ in N0 ≤N ≤ N1] Constant output power range

(The motor output torque is inversely proportional to the motor speed)
60 • PO
τＭ = (N•m) (9.19)
2π • N
If the result obtained by the above calculation does not satisfy the target value, select an inverter with
one rank higher capacity.
[4-2] Calculating non-linear deceleration time
Chap. 9
Use the following expression to obtain the non-linear deceleration time as well as for the acceleration
time shown in [4-1].

J1 + J2 • ηG 2π • Δ N
ΔtDEC = τM - τL• ηG
• (s) (9.20)
60
In this expression, both τＭ, and ΔN are generally negative values so that the load torque τL serves to
assist the deceleration operation. For a lift load, however, the load torque τL is a negative value in some
modes. In this case, the τＭ, and τL will take polarity opposite to each other and the τL will serve to
prevent the deceleration operation of the lift.
9-13
9.1.3.3 Heat energy calculation of braking resistor
If the inverter brakes the motor, the kinetic energy of mechanical load is converted to electric energy to
be regenerated into the inverter circuit. This regenerative energy is generally consumed in so-called
braking resistors as heat. The following explains the braking resistor rating.
[ 1 ] Calculation of regenerative energy

In the inverter operation, the regenerative energy sources include the kinetic energy of a moving object
and the potential energy of a lift.
(1) Kinetic energy of a moving object

When an object with moment of inertia J (kg·m2) rotates at a speed N2 (r/min), its kinetic energy is as
follows:
J 2π • N 2 2
E= •( ) (J = Ws) (9.21)
2 60
1
≈ • J • N2
2
(J) (9.21)'
182.4
When this object is decelerated to a speed N1 (r/min), the output energy is as follows:
J ⎡⎛ 2π • N 2 ⎞2 ⎛ 2π • N1 ⎞2 ⎤
E= • ⎢⎜ ⎟ −⎜ ⎟ ⎥ (J) (9.22)
2 ⎢⎣⎝ 60 ⎠ ⎝ 60 ⎠ ⎥⎦
1 2
≈ • J • ( N2 − N1 ) ( J )
2
(9.22)'
182.4
The energy regenerated to the inverter as shown in Figure 9.11 is calculated from the reduction-gear
efficiency ηG and motor efficiency ηM as follows:
E≈ 1
182.4
• ( J1 + J 2 • ηG ) • ηM • ( N2 2 − N1 2 ) (J ) (9.23)
(2) Potential energy of a lift

When an object whose mass is W (kg) falls from the height h2 (m) to the height h1 (m), the output
energy is as follows:
E = W • g • (h２ - h１) (J=Ws) (9.24)
g ≈ 9.8065 (m/s2)
The energy regenerated to the inverter is calculated from the reduction-gear efficiency ηG and motor
efficiency ηM as follows:
E = W • g • (h２ - h１) • ηG • ηM (J) (9.25)
9-14
9.1.3.4 Calculating the RMS rating of the motor

In the case of a load which is repeatedly and very frequently driven by a motor, the motor current
fluctuates largely and enters the short-time rating range of the motor repeatedly. Therefore, you have
to review the allowable thermal rating of the motor. The heat value is assumed to be approximately
proportional to the square of the motor current. The temperature of the forced cooling fan type of
FRENIC-VG dedicated motors rises in proportion to the heat value.
If an inverter drives a motor in duty cycles that are much shorter than the thermal time constant of the
motor, calculate the "equivalent RMS current" as mentioned below, and select the motor so that this
RMS current will not exceed the rated current of the motor.
Chap. 9
Figure 9.12 Sample of the Repetitive Operation
First, calculate the required torque of each part based on the speed pattern. Then using the
torque-current curve of the motor, convert the torque to the motor current. The "equivalent RMS
current, Ieq" can be finally calculated by the following equation:
I1 2 • t1 + I2 2 • t 2 + I3 2 • t 3 + I4 2 • t 4 + I5 2 • t 5
Ieq = (A) (9.26)
t1 + t 2 + t 3 + t 4 + t 5 + t 6
The torque-current curve for the dedicated motor is not available for actual calculation. Therefore,
calculate the motor current I from the load torque τ1 using the following equation (9.27). Then,
calculate the equivalent current Ieq:
2
⎛ τ ⎞
I = ⎜⎜ 1 × I t100 ⎟⎟ + Im100 2 (A) (9.27)
⎝ 100 ⎠
Where, τ1 is the load torque (%), It100 is the torque current (P09; M1 torque current), and Im100 is
exciting current (P08; M1 exciting current).
• For the function code data of P08 and P09, refer to Chapter 12 "Replacement Information."
• When using the 2nd motor, refer to the torque current and exciting current of A codes instead of
those of P codes.
9-15
9.2 Selecting a Braking Resistor
9.2.1 Selection procedure
Depending on the cyclic period, the following requirements must be satisfied.
c If the cyclic period is 100 s or less: Requirements 1) and 3) below
d If the cyclic period exceeds 100 s: Requirements 1) and 2) below
1) The maximum braking torque should not exceed values listed in the tables given in Chapter 8,
Section 8.5.1 "Braking resistors (DBRs) and braking units." To use the maximum braking torque
exceeding values in those tables, select the braking resistor having one class larger capacity.
2) The discharge energy for a single braking action should not exceed the discharging capability
(kWs) listed in the tables given in Chapter 8, Section 8.5.1 "Braking resistors (DBRs) and braking
units." For detailed calculation, refer to Section 9.1.3.3 "Heat energy calculation of braking
resistor."
3) The average loss that is calculated by dividing the discharge energy by the cyclic period must not
exceed the average allowable loss (kW) listed in the tables given in Chapter 8, Section 8.5.1
"Braking resistors (DBRs) and braking units."
9.2.2 Notes on selection

The braking time T1, cyclic period T0, and duty cycle %ED are converted under deceleration braking
conditions based on the rated torque as shown below. However, you do not need to consider these
values when selecting the braking resistor capacity.
Figure 9.13 Duty Cycle
T1
Duty cycle %ED = × 100 (%)
T0
9-16
9.3 Selecting an Inverter Drive Mode (HD/MD/LD)
9.3 Selecting an Inverter Drive Mode (HD/MD/LD)
9.3.1 Precaution in making the selection

The FRENIC-VG series of inverters is available in three different drive modes--HD (High Duty: for
heavy duty load applications) , MD (Medium Duty: for medium duty load applications), and LD (Low
Duty: for light duty load applications), which can be switched on site. The HD mode can drive a motor
with the same capacity as the inverter; the MD mode, with one rank higher capacity than the inverter;
the LD mode, with one or two ranks higher capacity than the inverter.
The LD mode is available in inverters of 30 kW or above, and the MD mode, in the 400 V class series
of inverters of 90 to 400 kW.
Select the inverter drive mode appropriate to the user application, considering the motor capacity,
overload characteristics, and HD/MD/LD mode referring to Section 9.3.2 "Guideline for selecting
inverter drive mode and capacity."
HD mode designed for heavy duty load applications
Apply to general-purpose equipment where the inverter’s load current in normal operations is less than
the rated current of the HD-mode inverter, and the load current in overcurrent operation is less than
150% of the rated current of the HD-mode inverter for 1 minute and 200% for 3 seconds.
The rated current of the HD mode inverter is based on a motor with the same capacity as the inverter.
Inverter running with the intermittent load rating is also possible as described below.
Intermittent load rating in the HD mode
Satisfying the following conditions enables inverter running with overload torque 164 to 200%
(depending upon the capacity) for 10 seconds or below.
1) The root-mean-square current in cycle operation is 80% or less of the inverter rated current.
2) The carrier frequency is 10 or 6 kHz (depending upon the capacity) or below.
Chap. 9
MD mode designed for medium duty load applications
Apply to equipment where the inverter’s load current in normal operations is less than the rated current
of the MD-mode inverter, and the load current in overcurrent operation is less than 150% of the rated

current of the MD-mode inverter for 1 minute.
The rated current of the MD-mode inverter is based on a motor with one rank higher capacity than the
inverter.
LD mode designed for light duty load applications

Apply to variable load equipment such as fans, pumps, and centrifugal machines where the inverter’s
load current in normal operations is less than the rated current of the LD-mode inverter, and the load
current in overcurrent operation is less than 120% of the rated current of the LD-mode inverter for 1
minute.
The rated current of the LD-mode inverter is based on a motor with one or two ranks higher capacity
than the inverter.
Replacement information for replacing the FRENIC5000VG7S (HT mode) with the
FRENIC-VG series
The FRENIC-VG does not support the HT mode. When replacing the HT-mode FRENIC5000VG7S
with the FRENIC-VG, therefore, use the inverter with one rank higher capacity. Note that only when
the 200 V class series of inverters of 7.5 to 22 kW or the 400 V class series of inverters of 18.5 to 22
kW runs with the carrier frequency of 10 kHz or below, the FRENIC5000VG7S can be replaced with
the FRENIC-VG with the same capacity.
9-17
9.3.2 Guideline for selecting inverter drive mode and capacity
Table 9.2 lists the differences between HD, MD, and LD modes.
If MD-/LD-mode inverters of 30 kW or above satisfy the requirements of the overload capability and
functionality in your application, you can select the inverter with one or two ranks lower capacity than
that of the motor rating.
Table 9.2 Differences between HD, MD, and LD modes
Function HD mode MD mode LD mode Remarks

Application Heavy duty load Medium duty load Light duty load ⎯
Capacity 200 V All capacities Not available 30 to 90 kW
range (corresponding to
37-110 kW motors)
400 V All capacities 90 to 400 kW 30 to 630 kW
(corresponding to (corresponding to 37
110 to 450 kW to 710 kW motors)
motors)
Function code data F80 = 0, F80 = 3 F80 = 1
setting (Factory default)
(Switching between ⎯
HD, MD, and LD
modes)
Continuous current Rated current based Rated current based Rated current based The MD-/LD-mode
rating level (inverter on a motor with the on a motor with one on a motor with one inverter brings out the
rated current level) same capacity as the rank higher capacity or two ranks higher continuous current
inverter. than the inverter. capacity than the rating level which
inverter. enables the inverter to
drive a motor with one
Overload capability 150% for 1 min. 150% for 1 min. 120% for 1 min. or two ranks higher
200% for 3 s, relative to the rated relative to the rated capacity, but its
relative to the rated current of MD-mode current of LD-mode overload capability (%)
current of HD-mode inverters inverters against the continuous
inverters current level decreases.
For the rated current
level, refer to Chapter 2
"SPECIFICATIONS."
Motor sound Setting range: Setting range: Setting range: In the MD/LD mode, a
(Carrier frequency) 2 to 15 kHz 2 to 4 kHz 2 to 10 kHz value out of the range, if
(0.75 to 55 kW) (90 to 400 kW) (30 to 55 kW) specified, automatically
changes to the
2 to 10 kHz 2 to 5 kHz maximum value
(75 to 400 kW) (75 to 500 kW) allowable in the MD/LD
2 to 5 kHz 2 kHz mode.
(500, 630 kW) (630 kW)
The MD-/LD-mode inverters have no restrictions on the output frequency range.

The MD-/LD-mode inverters have no restrictions on the setting range of function codes whose data
(e.g., DC braking level) is based on the rated current.
A DC reactor (DCR) is provided as standard for the FRENIC-VG of 75 kW or above. To use the
inverter in the MD or LD mode, specify the MD-/LD-mode inverter when placing an order, and the
FRENIC-VG comes with the DCR suitable for the motor capacity to be applied in the MD or LD mode.
If the MD-/LD-mode inverter is not specified, the FRENIC-VG comes with the DCR suitable for the
motor capacity to be applied in the HD mode. Applying the DCR to be applied in the HD mode to the
MD-/LD-mode inverters may flow the current exceeding the DCR rated current.
If an order for the LD-mode inverter of 55 kW is placed, the inverter comes with the DCR suitable for
75 kW as standard.
Each rated current in the HD, MD and LD modes is used as a base for displaying or specifying the
electric current data in percent (%) of the rated current with function codes or for outputting or
displaying it by analog output or communications monitor.
9-18
FRENIC- VG
10
Chapter 10
ABOUT MOTORS
This chapter details vector motors that can be connected to the FRENIC-VG series of inverters.
Contents
10.1 Vibration and Noise .................................................................................................................................. 10-1

10.2 Acceleration Vibration Value .................................................................................................................... 10-2
10.3 Allowable Radial Load at Motor Shaft Extension .................................................................................... 10-3
10.4 Allowable Thrust Load ............................................................................................................................. 10-5
10.5 List of Special Combinations .................................................................................................................... 10-6
10.5.1 Combination list of 380V series........................................................................................................ 10-6
10.5.2 Combination list of low base speed series......................................................................................... 10-7
10.1 Vibration and Noise
10.1 Vibration and Noise

For the specifications and the external dimensions of the dedicated motors, refer to Chapter 2, Section
2.4 "Dedicated Motor Specifications."
Dedicated No. Motor type Vibration level (μm) Noise level (dB (A)) *3
applicable of
motor Base speed Maximum speed *2 Base speed Maximum speed
poles MVK__
(kW) 1500 r/min 3600 r/min 1500 r/min 3600 r/min
0.75 8095A
1.5 8097A 56 60
2.2 8107A
3.7 8115A 58 62
5.5 8133A
Max. 7 60 64
7.5 8135A
Max. 5
11 8165A
68 72
15 8167A
18.5 8184A
73
22 8185A
71
30 8187A
Max. 7 73
37 8207A
45 8208A Max. 5 Max. 7 71 73
4
55 9224A
75 9254A
90 9256A
110 9284A
132 9286A
Chap. 10
160 528KA
200 528LA
*1 Max. 15 *1 *1
220 531FA
250 531GA
ABOUT MOTORS
280 531HA
300 535GA
315 535GA
355 535HA
400 535JA
*1 Contact your Fuji Electric representative for individual values.

*2 3000 r/min for 30 to 45 kW, 2400 r/min for 55 to 75 kW, 2000 r/min for 90 to 220 kW
*3 Values measured 1 m away from the motor to the direction of the terminal box
10-1
10.2 Acceleration Vibration Value
Dedicated Motor type Acceleration

No.
applicable vibration value,
of
motor MVK__ acceptable
poles
(kW) (m/s2)
0.75 8095A
1.5 8097A
2.2 8107A
3.7 8115A
5.5 8133A
7.5 8135A
11 8165A
15 8167A
18.5 8184A
22 8185A
30 8187A
37 8207A
45 8208A
4 Max. 7
55 9224A
75 9254A
90 9256A
110 9284A
132 9286A
160 528KA
200 528LA
220 531FA
250 531GA
280 531HA
300 535GA
315 535GA
355 535HA
400 535JA
Note: If the actual vibration exceeds values listed above, any separate anti-vibration measure is
required.
10-2
10.3 Allowable Radial Load at Motor Shaft Extension
10.3 Allowable Radial Load at Motor Shaft Extension

[Loaded point]
The maximum allowable value of radial load applied by the belt
is shown in the figures below. The data is classified by the frame
number and the rotation speed. If the point which is decided by
the radial load FA (kN) acting on the motor shaft and the length
L (mm) from the stepped joint at shaft end to the center of the
pulley (the distance to the FA load points) is within a curve, the
motor can be operated by that pulley. Refer to the technical
leaflet of the induction motor for the details.
Chap. 10
ABOUT MOTORS
10-3
Note: Contact your Fuji Electric representative individually for motors whose frame number exceeds
200L (55 kW or above).
10-4
10.4 Allowable Thrust Load
10.4 Allowable Thrust Load

Unit: kN (kgf)
Horizontal use IM B3(F11), IM B5(L51) Vertical use IM V5(F12), IM V1(L52) Vertical use IM V6(F13), IM V3(L53)
Frame Type
Direction of thrust: FS Direction of thrust: FU Direction of thrust: FS Direction of thrust: FU Direction of thrust: FS Direction of thrust: FU
number MVK__
2 poles 4 poles 6 poles 2 poles 4 poles 6 poles 2 poles 4 poles 6 poles 2 poles 4 poles 6 poles 2 poles 4 poles 6 poles 2 poles 4 poles 6 poles
8095A 0.3 0.45 0.55 0.4 0.6 0.7 0.25 0.4 0.5 0.45 0.65 0.75 0.4 0.55 0.65 0.3 0.5 0.6
90L
8097A ( 30) ( 45) ( 55) ( 40) ( 60) ( 70) ( 25) ( 40) ( 50) ( 45) ( 65) ( 75) ( 40) ( 55) ( 65) ( 30) ( 50) ( 60)
0.65 0.8 0.55 0.65 0.6 0.7 0.6 0.6 0.5 0.6 0.75 0.85
100L 8107A ― ― ― ― ― ―
( 65) ( 80) ( 55) ( 65) ( 60) ( 70) ( 60) ( 60) ( 50) ( 60) ( 75) ( 85)
0.65 0.9 1.1 0.6 0.75 0.95 0.6 0.8 1 0.65 0.85 1 0.55 0.7 0.85 0.75 1 1.2
112M 8115A
( 65) ( 90) (110) ( 60) ( 75) ( 95) ( 60) ( 80) (100) ( 65) ( 85) (100) ( 55) ( 70) ( 85) ( 75) (100) (120)
1 0.75 1 1.7 0.9 0.65 1.1 1.2
132S 8133A
(100) 1.4 1.7 ( 75) 1 1.2 (100) 1.3 (170) ( 90) 1.1 1.4 ( 65) 0.9 (110) (120) 1.5 1.9
(140) (170) (100) (120) (130) 1.6 (110) (140) ( 90) 1 (150) (190)
132M 8135A ― ― ― ― ― ―
(160) (100)
1.8 2.2 1.9 1.6 2 1.4 1.7
160M 8165A
1.3 (180) (220) 1.2 1.5 (190) 1.1 (160) (200) 1.5 1.8 2.2 1 (140) (170) 1.6 2.1 2.5
(130) 1.7 2.1 (120) (150) 1.8 (110) 1.5 1.8 (150) (180) (220) (100) 1.3 1.5 (160) (210) (250)
160L 8167A
(170) (210) (180) (150) (180) (130) (150)
8184A
180M 2 2.7 3.3 1.9 2.3 2.8 1.8 2.3 2.9 2.2 2.7 3.4 2 2.6 2.4 3.2 3.9
8185A
(200) (280) (340) (190) (230) (290) (180) (230) (300) (220) (280) (350) 1.6 (200) (270) (240) (330) (400)
180L 8187A
(160)
1.9 3.8 4.5 2 3.2 3.7 1.5 3.2 3.8 2.6 4 4.8 2.7 3 2.5 4.6 5.6
8207A
(190) (390) (460) (200) (330) (380) (150) (330) (390) (270) (410) (490) (280) (310) (250) (470) (570)
200L
1.2 5.4 6.5 1.2 5.4 6.5 0.4 4.4 5.3 0.4 4.4 5.3
8208A
(120) (550) (-) (120) (550) (-) ( 40) (445) (-) 2.3 6.9 8.2 ( 40) (445) (-) 2.3 6.9 8.2
1.1 5.2 6.2 1.1 5.2 6.2 0.3 4.1 4.8 (230) (700) (-) 0.3 4.1 4.8 (230) (700) (-)
225S 9224A
(110) (535) (630) (110) (535) (630) ( 30) (415) (490) ( 30) (415) (490)
1 6.4 7.6 1 6.4 7.6 4.9 5.6 8.4 10.3 4.9 5.6 8.4 10.3
250S 9254A ― ― ― ―
(100) (650) (770) (100) (650) (770) (500) (570) (860) (1050) (500) (570) (860) (1050)
0.9 6.2 7.3 0.9 6.2 7.3 4.5 5.1 8.5 10.4 4.5 5.1 8.5 10.4
Chap. 10
250M 9256A ― ― ― ―
( 90) (630) (740) ( 90) (630) (740) (460) (520) (870) (1060) (460) (520) (870) (1060)
0.8 5.9 6.9 0.8 5.9 6.9 3.7 4.2 9.2 10.8 3.7 4.2 9.2 10.8
280S 9284A ― ― ― ―
( 80) (600) (700) ( 80) (600) (700) (380) (430) (940) (1100) (380) (430) (940) (1100)
0.7 5.7 6.7 0.7 5.7 6.7 3.1 3.8 9.3 10.9 3.1 3.8 9.3 10.9
280M 9286A ― ― ― ―
ABOUT MOTORS
( 70) (580) (680) ( 70) (580) (680) (320) (390) (950) (1110) (320) (390) (950) (1110)
528KA *Contact Fuji individually *Contact Fuji individually *Contact Fuji individually
528LA
531FA
531GA
―
531HA
535GA
535HA
535JA
Mounting
method and
the direction
of thrust
Note 1: The above-mentioned figures whose frame number is 250S or above show the allowable thrust (axial) load of
the motor for direct connection.
Note 2: The above-mentioned allowable thrust (axial) load is calculated on the assumption that the motor would bear
the radial load through the normal sized half-coupling.
10-5
10.5 List of Special Combinations
10.5.1 Combination list of 380V series
Type 4-pole non-standard special motor 4-pole standard motor

Base speed Base speed: 1,500 (r/min),
1500
(r/min) Max. speed: 1,500 (r/min)
Max. load
150 150
torque (%)
Model Model Potential
Model and Max. speed max. speed
item Motor Inverter Nmax (r/min) Motor Inverter Nmax (r/min)
*2
3.7 MVK8115A FRN3.7VG1S-4J MVK8115A FRN3.7VG1S-4J 3300

11 MVK8165A FRN11VG1S-4J MVK8165A FRN11VG1S-4J 1600
3600
18.5 MVK8184A FRN22VG1S-4J MVK8184A FRN18.5VG1S-4J 2750
Output (kW)

2400
132 MVK9286A *1 FRN160VG1S-4J MVK9286A FRN132VG1S-4J 1500
2000
160 MVK528KA *1 FRN200VG1S-4J MVK528KA FRN160VG1S-4J 1500
200 MVK528LA *1 FRN220VG1S-4J MVK528LA FRN200VG1S-4J 1500
220 MVK531FA *1 FRN280VG1S-4J MVK531FA FRN220VG1S-4J 1500
*1 The electric characteristics of the motor are the same as those of the standard motor. The frame size of the inverter
is one frame larger.
*2 The maximum speed at which the 150% overload rating torque is obtained with 380 V input is specified. If a 150%
overload constant is necessary at a larger speed, select the inverter of a larger capacity.
10-6
10.5 List of Special Combinations
10.5.2 Combination list of low base speed series

200V class
No. of poles,
standard/ 6-pole non-standard special motor 4-pole standard motor
non-standard
Base speed 500 (r/min) 650 (r/min) 750 (r/min) 850 (r/min) 1,000 (r/min) 1,000 (r/min)
Max. speed 2,000 (r/min) 2,000 (r/min) 1,800 (r/min) 1,700 (r/min) 2,000 (r/min) 2,400 (r/min) 3,000 (r/min) 3,600 (r/min)
MVK8115A MVK8107A MVK8097A MVK8097A
0.75
FRN1.5VG1S-2J FRN1.5VG1S-2J FRN0.75VG1S-2J FRN1.5VG1S-2J
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
FRN11VG1S-2J FRN11VG1S-2J FRN7.5VG1S-2J FRN11VG1S-2J
11
FRN15VG1S-2J FRN15VG1S-2J FRN15VG1S-2J FRN18.5VG1S-2J
Output (kW)

15
FRN22VG1S-2J FRN18.5VG1S-2J FRN18.5VG1S-2J FRN22VG1S-2J
MVK9256A MVK9221A MVK8187A MVK81855A MVK8187A
18.5
FRN30VG1S-2J FRN30VG1S-2J FRN22VG1S-2J FRN22VG1S-2J FRN30VG1S-2J
22
Chap. 10
30
37
FRN55VG1S-2J FRN55VG1S-2J FRN45VG1S-2J FRN45VG1S-2J
MVK528KA MVK9284A MVK9250A MVK9224A
ABOUT MOTORS
45
MVK528LA MVK9286A MVK9256A MVK9250A
55
MVK528LA MVK9284A MVK9256A
75
FRN90VG1S-2J FRN90VG1S-2J FRN90VG1S-2J
10-7
400V class
No. of poles,
standard/ 6-pole non-standard special motor 4-pole standard motor
non-standard
Base speed 500 (r/min) 650 (r/min) 750 (r/min) 850 (r/min) 1,000 (r/min) 1,000 (r/min)
Max. speed 2,000 (r/min) 2,000 (r/min) 1,800 (r/min) 1,700 (r/min) 2,000 (r/min) 2,400 (r/min) 3,000 (r/min) 3,600 (r/min)
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
MVK8185A MVK8167 MVK8165A MVK8165A
7.5
FRN11VG1S-4J FRN11VG1S-4J FRN7.5VG1S-4J FRN11VG1S-4J
MVK8187A MVK8184 MVK8167A MVK8184A
11
FRN15VG1S-4J FRN15VG1S-4J FRN11VG1S-4J FRN18.5VG1S-4J

15
FRN22VG1S-4J FRN18.5VG1S-4J FRN18.5VG1S-4J FRN22VG1S-4J
18.5
Output(kW)
22
FRN37VG1S-4J FRN30VG1S-4J FRN30VG1SJ FRN30VG1S-4J FRN37VG1S-4J
30
37
MVK528KA MVK9284A MVK9250A MVK9224A
45
MVK528LA MVK9286A MVK9256A MVK9250A
55
MVK531GA MVK528LA MVK9284A MVK9256A
75
MVK531HA MVK531GA MVK9286A MVK9284A
90
FR132VG1S-4J FRN110VG1S-4J FRN110VG1S-4J FRN110VG1S-4J
MVK531HA MVK528KA MVK9286A

110
MVK531HA MVK528LA MVK528KA

132
MVK528LA
160
FRN200VG1S-4J
*1
200
*1 Contact your Fuji Electric representative.
10-8
FRENIC- VG
11
Chapter 11
OPERATION DATA
This chapter provides the characteristics data of the FRENIC-VG series of inverters running.
Contents
11.1 Frequency Response Characteristics......................................................................................................... 11-1

11.2 Rotational Fluctuation Measurement Sample ........................................................................................... 11-1
11.3 Current Distortion Characteristics............................................................................................................. 11-2
11.4 Torque Ripple............................................................................................................................................ 11-2
11.5 Impact Load Characteristics...................................................................................................................... 11-3
11.6 Speed-torque Characteristics (Vector control with speed sensor) ............................................................. 11-3
11.7 Torque Control Accuracy (Vector control with speed sensor)................................................................... 11-4
11.8 Deceleration/Acceleration via Zero Speed (Vector control with speed sensor) ....................................... 11-4
11.1 Frequency Response Characteristics
11.1 Frequency Response Characteristics
Inverter: FRN7.5VG1S-2J
11.2 Rotational Fluctuation Measurement Sample
Chap. 11
OPERATION DATA
Inverter: FRN37VG1S-4J
Motor: MVK8207A, 37 kW, 1500/3000 r/min
Test condition: Motor alone
11-1
11.3 Current Distortion Characteristics
Conventional models (FRENIC5000VG7S)
f f x 3 times f x 5 times f x 7 times f: Output frequency (Hz)
FRENIC-VG
f f x 3 times f x 5 times f x 7 times f: Output frequency (Hz)
Inverter: FRN7.5VG1S-2J
Test condition: Motor alone
11.4 Torque Ripple

Conventional models (FRENIC5000VG7S)
FRENIC-VG
Torque ripple components P-P 100%: Rated torque

1 time 2 times 6 times
FRENIC-VG 0.068% 0.307% 0.907%
Conventional models
0.720% 0.364% 0.911%
(FRENIC5000VG7S)
Motor: MVK6207A-C, 37 kW, 1500/3000 rpm
Test condition: Motor constraint
11-2
11.5 Impact load characteristics
11.5 Impact Load Characteristics
Actual speed
Torque current
command value
Motor current
Apply load Release load

(100%) (0%)
FRN37VG1S-4J running at 500 r/min
Test condition: Running at 500 r/min
11.6 Speed-torque Characteristics (Vector control with
Chap. 11
speed sensor)
OPERATION DATA
11-3
11.7 Torque Control Accuracy (Vector control with speed
sensor)
Axial torque (%)
Axial torque 100%

235.61 (N·m)
24.03 (kg·m)
Axial torque -100%

-235.61 (N·m)
-24.03 (kg·m)
Torque command value (%)
11.8 Deceleration/Acceleration via Zero Speed

(Vector control with speed sensor)
Torque
100%
Rated speed
1500 r/min
Actual speed
Motor current
500 ms
11-4
FRENIC- VG
12
Chapter 12
REPLACEMENT DATA
When replacing the former inverters (VG, VG3, VG5) with FRENIC-VG, refer to this section.
Contents
12.1 Classification of Replacement........................................................................................................... 12-1

12.2 External Dimensions Comparison..................................................................................................... 12-2
12.2.1 Replacing VG7S........................................................................................................................ 12-2
12.2.2 Replacing VG5S........................................................................................................................ 12-4
12.2.3 Replacing VG3.......................................................................................................................... 12-5
12.3 Terminal Size .................................................................................................................................... 12-6
12.3.1 Replacing VG7S........................................................................................................................ 12-6
12.3.2 Replacing VG5S........................................................................................................................ 12-8
12.3.3 Replacing VG3........................................................................................................................ 12-10
12.4 Terminal Symbol............................................................................................................................. 12-12
12.4.1 Replacing VG7S...................................................................................................................... 12-12
12.4.2 Replacing VG5S...................................................................................................................... 12-13
12.4.3 Replacing VG3........................................................................................................................ 12-16
12.5 Function Codes ............................................................................................................................... 12-19
12.5.1 Replacing VG7S...................................................................................................................... 12-19
12.5.2 Replacing VG5S...................................................................................................................... 12-20
12.5.3 Replacing VG3........................................................................................................................ 12-25
12.6 Motor Parameters .................................................................................................................12-30
12.6.1 Replacing VG7S...................................................................................................................... 12-30
12.6.2 Replacing VG5S...................................................................................................................... 12-33
12.6.3 Replacing VG3........................................................................................................................ 12-35
12.7 Protective Functions........................................................................................................................ 12-37
12.7.1 Replacing VG7S...................................................................................................................... 12-37
12.7.2 Replacing VG5S...................................................................................................................... 12-38
12.7.3 Replacing VG3........................................................................................................................ 12-39
12.8 Options............................................................................................................................................ 12-40
12.8.1 Replacing VG7S...................................................................................................................... 12-40
12.8.2 Replacing VG5S...................................................................................................................... 12-41
12.8.3 Replacing VG3........................................................................................................................ 12-42
12.1 Classification of Replacement
12.1 Classification of Replacement

Inverter Motor Possibility
VG3/VG3N VG3
Possible
⇒ FRENIC-VG ⇒ FRENIC-VG
VG5
VG5S/VG5N
A: Both inverter and motor are ⇒ FRENIC-VG (Same Possible
⇒ FRENIC-VG
replaced. product)
VG7
VG7
⇒ FRENIC-VG (Same Possible
⇒ FRENIC-VG
product)
VG3/VG3N
VG3 Possible (Note 1)
⇒ FRENIC-VG
B: Only the inverter is VG5S/VG5N

VG5 Possible
replaced. ⇒ FRENIC-VG
VG7
VG7 Possible
⇒ FRENIC-VG
VG3
VG3 Impossible (Note 2)
⇒ FRENIC-VG
VG5
C: Only the motor is replaced. VG5 ⇒ FRENIC-VG (Same Possible
product)
VG7
VG7 Possible
⇒ FRENIC-VG
Note 1: The rated current of VG and VG3 is bigger than that of VG5, VG7. For this reason, the inverter in one-rank upper grade is
required if only the inverter is changed from VG or VG3.
Note 2: For VG and VG3, the maximum output voltage, to which the stable current control is possible, is lower than that of VG5
and VG7. Therefore, if these inverters are combined with VG5 or VG7 motors, the characteristics (torque accuracy or
motor wow) at around the base speed or at higher speed will deteriorate.
Note 3: When substituting from FRENIC5000VG (old model of VG3), contact us.
Chap. 12
REPLACEMENT DATA
12-1
12.2 External Dimensions Comparison
12.2.1 Replacing VG7S
200V series
FRENIC5000 VG7S FRENIC-VG
Installation Installation
External dimensions External dimensions
dimensions Mounting Rough dimensions Mounting
Rough
mass mass
Capacity W H D W1 H1 method W H D W1 H1 method
(kg) (kg)
(kW) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
0.75
1.5
2.2
205 300 181 278 8 205 300 181 278 6
3.7
245
5.5
245
7.5
11
250 380 226 358 12.5 400 378
15 10
Wall type 250 226 Wall type
18.5 240 460
480 255 25 400 378
22 340 240 460 10.5
30 550 255 240 530 30 320 550 255 240 530 25
37 615 595 37 615 595 32
45 375 270 275 46 355 270 275 42
740 740
55 720 48 720 43
75 530 750 285 430 70 530 750 285 430 62
90 680 880 360 580 850 115 680 880 360 580 850 105
Larger than VG7
An adapter is required for replacement.
The control panel containing VG3 should be modified.
12-2
400V series
External dimensions Rough External dimensions Rough
dimensions Mounting dimensions Mounting
mass mass
(kg) (kg)
3.7
5.5 205 300 181 278 8 205 300 181 278 6
7.5 245
11 245
250 380 226 358 12.5 400 378
15
250 226 10
18.5
340 480 255 240 460 25 400 378
22
30 340 255 240 530 30 25
550 320 550 255 240 530
37 530 35 26
275
45 655 40 615 595 31
375 675 270
55 655 41 355 675 270 275 655 33
275
75 720 50 720 42
90 740 Wall type 740 Wall type 62
315 710 72 315 710
110 64
530 430 530 430
132 94
100
160 98
1000 360 970
200 1000 360 970 129
140 680 580
220 140
250 680 580 150 - - - - - -
280
320 680 580 245
315
1400 450 1370 1400 440 1370
355
880 780 410 880 780 330
400
500
1000 1550 500 900 1520 525 1000 1550 500 900 1520 555
630
Larger than VG7
Chap. 12
REPLACEMENT DATA
12-3
200V series
mass mass
(kg) (kg)
0.75 10
1.5 10
2.2 10
205 350 245 183 328 205 300 181 278 6
3.7 10
5.5 11
245
7.5 11
11 255 440 233 418 17
15 Wall type 25 10
255 250 400 226 378 Wall type
18.5 320 480 298 458 25
22 25 10.5
30 340 550 240 530 36 320 550 255 240 530 25
37 615 255 275 595 45 615 595 32
375
45 275 730 58 355 270 275 42
740
55 750 270 430 720 60 720 43
530
75 285 430 720 76 530 750 285 430 62
90 680 880 360 580 860 Floor type 141 680 880 360 580 850 105
400V series
mass mass
(kg) (kg)
3.7 10
5.5 205 350 245 183 328 205 300 181 278 6
11
7.5
11 245
255 440 233 418 17
15
250 400 226 378 10
18.5
320 480 298 458 25
22
255
30 340 240 530 Wall type 35 25
550 320 550 255 240 530
37 375 530 36 Wall type 26
275
45 375 655 43 615 595 31
675
55 645 53 355 675 270 275 655 33
430
75 270 710 60 720 42
90 740 740 62
530 315 710 86 315 710
110 64
430 530 430
132 116 94
970
160 121 98
1000 360 1000 360 970
200 173 129
680 580 980 Floor type 680 580
220 173 140
Larger than VG5
12-4
12.2.3 Replacing VG3

200V series
FRENIC5000 VG3 FRENIC-VG
mass mass
(kg) (kg)
0.75
1.5
14
2.2 255 440 155 425
205 300 181 278 6
3.7
5.5 16
245
7.5 280 480 180 465 20
11 480 255 220 460 24
320 Wall type
15 520 220 500 27 10
250 400 226 378 Wall type
18.5
340 550 240 530 30
22 10.5
30 375 615 275 596 40 320 550 255 240 530 25
37 615 595 32
390 800 290 775 53
45 355 270 275 42
740
55 540 750 270 440 720 70 720 43
75 850 880 - 750 855 Floor type 130 530 750 285 430 62
90 - - - - - - - 680 880 360 580 850 105
400V series
mass mass
(kg) (kg)
3.7
440 425 20
5.5 280 180 205 300 181 278 6
7.5 480 465 22
11 245
15 320 520 220 500 27
255 250 400 226 378 10
18.5
22 340 550 240 530 Wall type 30
Chap. 12
30 615 596 35 25
320 550 255 240 530
37 375 275 26
675 656 43 Wall type
45 615 595 31
55 355 675 270 275 655 33
85
75 880 325 850 720 42
530 430
REPLACEMENT DATA
90 95 740 62
315 710
110 340 1020 105 64
530 430
132 680 - 580 135 94
1050
160 - 1025 Floor type 98
850 750 170 1000 360 970
200 - 129
680 580
220 - - - - - - - 140
Larger than VG3
12-5
12.3 Terminal Size
Main circuit terminal (200V series)
Terminal size and arrangement Terminal size and arrangement
Input DC link Output GRD* APS* Input DC link Output GRD* APS*
Capacity LI/R, L2/S, DB, P1, P(+), U, V, W G R0, T0 LI/R, L2/S, DB, P1, P(+), U, V, W G R0, T0
(kW) L3/T N(-)) L3/T N(-)
0.75
1.5 M5 M5 M5 M5
2.2
M5 M5 M5 M5
3.7
5.5 M5 M5 M5 M5
M4 M3.5
7.5
11
15
M6 M6 M6 M6 M6 M6 M6 M6
18.5
22
LI/R, L2/S, P1, P(+), DB, U, V, W G R0, T0 LI/R, L2/S, DB, P1, P(+), U, V, W G R0, T0
L3/T N(-) L3/T N(-)
30 M8 M8 M8 M8 M8 M8
37 M8 M4 M8 M3.5
45 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10
55
LI/R, L2/S, P1, P(+), U, V, W G R0, T0 LI/R, L2/S, P1, P(+), U, V, W G R0, T0
L3/T N(-) L3/T N(-)
75
M12 M12 M12 M10 M4 M12 M12 M12 M10 M3.5
90
*GRD: Ground
*APS: Auxiliary power supply
Replacing
12-6
12.3 Terminal Size

Capacity LI/R, L2/S, DB, P1, P(+), U, V, W G R0, T0 L1/R, L2/S, DB, P1, P(+), U, V, W G R0, T0
(kW) L3/T N(-)) L3/T N(-)
3.7
5.5 M5 M5 M5 M5 M5 M5 M5 M5
7.5
11 M4 M3.5
15
M6 M6 M6 M6 M6 M6 M6 M6
18.5
22
R, S, T P1, P(+), DB, U, V, W E(G) R0, T0 L1/R, L2/S, DB, P1, P(+), U, V, W G R0, T0
N(-) L3/T N(-)
30
37
M8 M8 M8 M8 M8 M8 M8 M8 M3.5
45
55 M4
75
90 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M8 M3.5
110
LI/R, L2/S, P1, P(+), U, V, W G R0, T0 L1/R, L2/S, DB, P1, P(+), U, V, W G R0, T0
L3/T N(-) L3/T N(-)
132
M12 M12 M12 M10 M4 M12 M12 M12 M10 M3.5
160
LI/R, L2/S, P1, P(+), U, V, W G R0, T0 L1/R, L2/S, P1, P(+), U, V, W G R0, T0
L3/T N(-) L3/T N(-)
200
M12 M12 M12 M10 M3.5
220
250 - - - - -
280
315 M12 M12 M12 M10 M4
355
M12 M12 M12 M10 M3.5
400
500
630
*GRD: Ground
Chap. 12
REPLACEMENT DATA
12-7
Capacity R, S, T P1, P(+), DB, U, V, W E(G) R0, T0 LI/R, L2/S, DB, P1, P(+), U, V, W G R0, T0
(kW) N(-) L3/T N(-))
0.75
1.5
2.2
M5 M5 M5 M5 M5 M5 M5 M5
3.7
5.5
M4 M3.5
7.5
11 M6 M6 M6 M6
15
M6 M6 M6 M6
18.5 M8 M8 M8 M8
22
R, S, T P1, P(+), DB, U, V, W E(G) R0, T0 LI/R, L2/S, DB, P1, P(+), U, V, W G R0, T0
N(-) L3/T N(-)
30 M8 M8 M8
M8 M8 M8
37 M8 M4 M8 M3.5
45 M10 M10 M10
M10 M10 M10
55
R, S, T P1, P(+), U, V, W E(G) R0, T0 LI/R, L2/S, P1, P(+), U, V, W G R0, T0
N(-) L3/T N(-)
75 M10 M10 M10 M8
M4 M12 M12 M12 M10 M3.5
90 M12 M12 M12 M10
*GRD: Ground
12-8
12.3 Terminal Size

Capacity R, S, T P1, P(+), DB, U, V, W E(G) R0, T0 L1/R, L2/S, DB, P1, P(+), U, V, W G R0, T0
(kW) N(-) L3/T N(-)
3.7
5.5 M5 M5 M5 M5 M5 M5 M5 M5
7.5
11 M4 M3.5
M6 M6 M6 M6
15
M6 M6 M6 M6
18.5
M8 M8 M8 M8
22
R, S, T P1, P(+), DB, U, V, W E(G) R0, T0 L1/R, L2/S, DB, P1, P(+), U, V, W G R0, T0
N(-) L3/T N(-)
30
37
M8 M8 M8 M8 M4 M8 M8 M8 M8 M3.5
45
55
R, S, T DB, P1, P(+), U, V, W E(G) R0, T0 L1/R, L2/S, DB, P1, P(+), U, V, W G R0, T0
N(-) L3/T N(-)
75 M10
90 M10 M10 M10 M10 M8
M10 M10 M8
110 (No DB
132 terminal) M4 M3.5
160 M12 M12 M12 M12 M10
M12 (No DB M12 M10
terminal)
R, S, T P1, P(+), U, V, W E(G) R0, T0 L1/R, L2/S, P1, P(+), U, V, W G R0, T0
N(-) L3/T N(-)
200
M12 M12 M12 M10 M4 M12 M12 M12 M10 M3.5
220
*GRD: Ground
Control circuit terminal (Common to 200V series and 400V series)
Common to all capacities M3 Common to all capacities M3
Chap. 12
REPLACEMENT DATA
12-9
Main circuit terminal (200V series）
Input Output DC link GRD* APS* Input DC link Output GRD* APS*
Capacity R, S, T U, V, W DB, P E(G) R0, T0 L1/R, L2/S, DB, P1, P(+), U, V, W G R0, T0
(kW) L3/T N(-)
0.75
1.5
2.2
M5 M5 M5 M5 M5 M5 M5 M5
3.7
5.5 M4 M3.5
7.5
11 M6 M6 M6
15 M6 M6 M6 M6 M6
M8 M8 M8
18.5
R, S, T U, V, W DB, P1, P E(G) R0, T0
22 M8 M8 M8 M6 M4 M6 M6 M6 M6 M3.5
L1/R, L2/S, DB, P1, P(+),
R, S, T U, V, W DB, P1, P E(G) R0, T0 L3/T N(-) U, V, W G R0, T0
30 M8 M8 M8 M8 M8 M8
37 M8 M4 M8 M3.5
45 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10
55
Input/Output DC link GRD* APS* Input DC link Output GRD* APS*
R, U, S, V, T, W N, P1, P E(G) R0, T0 L1/R, L2/S, P1, P(+), U, V, W G R0, T0
L3/T N(-)
75
M12 M12 M12 M10 M4 M12 M12 M12 M10 M3.5
90
*GRD: Ground
12-10
12.3 Terminal Size

Input Output DC link GRD* APS* Input DC link Output GRD* APS*
Capacity R, S, T U, V, W DB, P E(G) R0, T0 L1/R, L2/S, DB, P1, P(+), U, V, W G R0, T0
(kW) L3/T N(-)
3.7
M4 M4 M4 M4
5.5 M5 M5 M5 M5
7.5
M5 M5 M5 M5 M4 M3.5
11
15 M6 M6 M6 M6
M6 M6 M6 M6
18.5
R, S, T U, V, W DB, P1, P E(G) R0, T0
22 M6 M6 M6 M6 M4 M6 M6 M6 M6 M3.5
R, S, T P1, P(+), U, V, W E(G) R0, T0 L1/R, L2/S, DB, P1, P(+), U, V, W G R0, T0
DB, N(-) L3/T N(-)
30
37 M8 M8 M8
M8 M8 M8
45
55 M8 M4 M8 M3.5
75
M10 M10 M10
90 M10 M10 M10
110
Input/Output DC link GRD* APS*
R, U, S, V, T, W N, P1, P E(G) R0, T0 L1/R, L2/S, DB, P1, P(+), U, V, W G R0, T0
L3/T N(-)
132
M12
160 M12 M12 M10 M4
200 M12 M12 M12 M10 M3.5
(No DB
220 - - - - terminal)
*GRD: Ground
Control circuit terminal (Common to 200V series and 400V series)
Common to all capacities M3 Common to all capacities M3
Chap. 12
REPLACEMENT DATA
12-11
12.4 Terminal Symbol

Since the terminal symbols for FRENIC-VG are the same as those for VG7S (excepting for I/O of
RS-485 communications), the same connections as the terminal connections of VG7S are available.
Cat- FRENIC5000 VG7S FRENIC-VG

ego- Terminal Terminal
ry Terminal name Terminal name
symbol symbol
Communications
RX(+), RX(-), I/O of RS-485 communications

TX(+), TX(-), DX(+), DX(-) I/O of RS-485 communications
SD (Dedicated connector)
12-12

symbol symbol
R, S, T Power input L1/R, L2/S, L3/T Power input
U, V, W Inverter output U, V, W Inverter output
Main circuit
P1, P(+) Connects a DC REACTOR P1, P(+) Connects a DC REACTOR

P(+), N(-) Connects a braking unit P(+), N(-) Connects a braking unit
P(+), DB Connects an external braking resistor P(+), DB Connects an external braking resistor
E(G) To ground the inverter G To ground the inverter
R0, T0 Auxiliary control power supply R0, T0 Auxiliary control power supply
13 Power supply for potentiometer 13 Power supply for potentiometer
12 Voltage input for speed setting 12 Voltage input for speed setting
11 Analog input common 11 Analog input common
Ai1 Analog input 1 Ai1 Analog input 1
[AOFF] Input signal off [OFF] Input signal off
[AAS1] Auxiliary speed setting 1 [AUX-N1] Auxiliary speed setting 1
[AAS2] Auxiliary speed setting 2 [AUX-N2] Auxiliary speed setting 2
[ATL1] Torque limiter (level 1) [TL-REF1] Torque limiter (level 1)
Analog input
[ATL2] Torque limiter (level 2) [TL-REF2] Torque limiter (level 2)

[ATBS] Torque bias [TB-REF] Torque bias
[ATS] Torque command (before limit) [T-REF] Torque command (before limit)
[ATCS] Torque current command [IT-REF] Torque current command
[AJSS1] Creep speed 1 [CRP-N1] Creep speed 1
[AJSS2] Creep speed 2 [CRP-N2] Creep speed 2
[AFLUX] Magnetic-flux command [MF-REF] Magnetic-flux command
[ASFB] Speed feedback [LINE-N] Line speed detection
[AMTMP] Motor temperature [M-TMP] Motor temperature
[ASOR] Speed override [N-OR] Speed override
M Analog input common M Analog input common
FWD Forward operation ⋅ stop command FWD Forward operation ⋅ stop command
Chap. 12
REV Reverse operation ⋅ stop command REV Reverse operation ⋅ stop command
X1 Digital input 1 X1 Digital input 1
REPLACEMENT DATA

X6 Digital input 6
X7 Digital input 7
X8 Digital input 8
Digital input
X9 Digital input 9
[COPC] Operation command switch over
[CSRM] Speed setting value switch over [N2/N1] Speed setting N2/N1
[CMCS] Coast-to-stop command [BX] Coast-to-stop command
[CPEX] Pre-exciting command [EXITE] Pre-exciting command
[CHLD] Operation signal hold [HLD] Operation signal hold
[CSR1] Multistep speed selection 1 [SS1] Multistep speed selection 1
[CUP] ACC command in UP/DOWN setter [UP] UP command in UP/DOWN setting
[CDOWN] DEC command in UP/DOWN setter [DOWN] DOWN command in UP/DOWN setting
12-13
symbol symbol
[CCLR] Zero clear command in UP/DOWN setter [CLR] ACC/DEC zero clear command
[CJSC] Creep switch [CRP-N2/N1] Creep speed switching in UP/DOWN setting
[CSUC] ACC/DEC ⋅ UP/DOWN switch [N2/N1] Speed setting N2/N1
[CSRL] Speed reference limiter [N-LIM] Speed command cancel
[CSTC] Speed control/Torque limiter switch [H41-CCL] H41[torque command] cancel
[CTL] Torque limiter [F40-CCl] F40 [torque limiter mode] cancel
[CADT] ACC/DEC time selection [RT1][RT2] ASR, ACC/DEC selection
[CADB] ACC/DEC time bypass [BPS] Bypass
[CTB1] Torque bias command 1 [TB1] Torque bias command 1
[CDRP] Droop function [DROOP] Droop selection
[CPI] ASR PI switch [RT1][RT2] ASR,ACC/DEC selection
[CPPI] ASR P/PI switch [RT1][RT2] ASR,ACC/DEC selection
[CAI1Z] Ai1-ACC/DEC zero hold [ZH-Ai1] Ai1 zero hold
[CAI2Z] Ai2-ACC/DEC zero hold [ZH-Ai2] Ai2 zero hold
[CSAD] Analog/Digital switch (speed) [N2/N1] Speed setting N2/N1
[CTAD] Analog/Digital switch (torque) [H41-CCL] H41[torque command]cancel
[CDILS] Di card input latch signal (speed) [DIA] DiA card input latch signal
[CDILT] Di card input latch signal (torque) [DIB] DiB card input latch signal
T-Link enable Operation selection through link,
[CTEN] [LE], [WE-LK]
Write enable command through link
[CTDI] DI command for transmission [U-DI] Universal DI
RS485 enable Operation selection through link,
[CREN] [LE], [WE-LK]
Write enable command through link
RST Alarm reset [RST] Alarm reset
THR External alarm [THR] External alarm
− PLC PLC signal power supply
CM Digital input common CM Digital input common
Ao1 Analog output 1 Ao1 Analog output 1
Speedometer (one-way deflection) Speed detection (Speedometer, one-way
[BSM1] [N-FB1+]
deflection)
Speedometer (two-way deflection) Speed detection (Speedometer, two-way
[BSM2] [N-FB1±]
deflection)
Speed setting 0 Speed setting2 (before ACC/DEC
[BSR0] [N-REF2]
calculation)
[BSR1] Speed setting 1 [N-REF4] Speed setting 4 (ASR input)
Analog output
[BSR2] Speed setting 2 [N-REF4] Speed setting 4 (ASR input)

[BSR] Speed setting [N-REF4] Speed setting 4 (ASR input)
[BSFB] Speed feedback [N-FB2±] Speed detection (ASR input)
Torque ammeter (two-way deflection) Torque current command (torque ammeter,
[BTC1] [IT-REF±]
two-way deflection)
Torque ammeter (one-way deflection) Torque current command (torque ammeter,
[BTC2] [IT-REF+]
one-way deflection)
Torque meter (two-way deflection) Torque command (torque meter, two-way
[BTM1] [T-REF±]
deflection)
Torque meter (one-way deflection) Torque command (torque meter, one-way
[BTM2] [T-REF+]
deflection)
Torque command output Torque command (torque meter, two-way
[BTR] [T-REF±]
deflection)
] [BMC Effective detected value of motor current [I-AC] Motor current
12-14

symbol symbol
[BMV] Effective detected value of motor voltage [V-AC] Motor voltage
[BMTMP] Motor temperature detected value [TMP-M] Motor temperature
[BVDC] Main circuit DC voltage [V-DC] DC link circuit voltage
M Analog output common M Analog output common
Y1 Digital output 1 Y1 Digital output 1
− Y4 Digital output 4
[DVDC] Establishment of main circuit DC voltage [RDY] Ready for operation
[DRUN] Running [RUN] Running
[DACC] Accelerating [U-ACC] Accelerating
[DDEC] Decelerating [U-DEC] Decelerating
[DNZS] Speed existence [N-EX] Speed existence
[DSAR] Arrival at the preset speed [N-AR] Arrival at the preset speed
[DSAG] Speed agreement [N-AG1] Speed agreement
Transistor output
[DSD1] Speed detection [N-DT1] Speed detection 1

[DTLM] Torque limiting [TL] Torque limiting
[DTD] Torque detection [T-DT1] Torque detection
[DOL] Inverter overload early warning [INV-OL] Inverter overload early warning
Motor temperature overheat early Motor temperature overheat early warning
[DMOH] [M-OH]
warning
[DMOL] Motor overload early warning [M-OL] Motor overload early warning
[DBRS] Brake release signal [BRK] Brake release signal
[DBRK] Braking [B/D] Torque polarity detection
[DTDO] DO for transmission [U-DO] Universal DO
[DTER] Transmission error [LK-ERR] Transmission error
[DSYN] Synchronizing [SY-C] Synchronization control completion
CME Digital output common CME Digital output common
Chap. 12
RYA, RYC Relay output Y5A, Y5C Relay output
output
Communi- Relay
30A, 30B, 30C Alarm output for any fault 30A, 30B, 30C Alarm output for any fault
cation
DXA,DXB RS-485 communication input/output DX(+),DX(-) RS-485 communication input/output

REPLACEMENT DATA
PA, PB Pulse generator 2-phase signal input PA, PB Pulse generator 2-phase signal input
detection
PGP, PGM Pulse generator power supply PGP, PGM Pulse generator power supply
Speed
FA, FB Pulse generator output FA, FB Pulse generator output

CM Common to pulse generator output CM Common to pulse generator output
Connects a motor thermistor
Temperature
detection
TH1 Connects a motor thermistor TH1 (Motor temperature can be detected with
NTC, PTC thermistors)
THC Common to motor thermistor THC Common to motor thermistor
P24 Power supply to option (24V) −
Option power
M24 Common terminal to 24V −

supply
Please utilize the power supply on the

P15 Power supply for option (+15V) −
market.
(M) Common terminal to ±15V −
N15 Power supply to option (-15V) −
12-15
Cat- FRENIC5000 VG3 FRENIC-VG
symbol symbol
R, S, T Power input L1/R, L2/S, L3/T Power input
U, V, W Inverter output U, V, W Inverter output
P, DB Connects an external braking resistor P(+), DB Connects an external braking resistor
Main circuit
P, N Connects a braking unit P(+), N(-) Connects a braking unit

P, P1 Connects a DC REACTOR P(+), P1 Connects a DC REACTOR
P, N1 Connects a backup condenser P(+), N(-) Connects a backup condenser
E(G) To ground the inverter G To ground the inverter
R0, T0 Auxiliary control power supply R0, T0 Auxiliary control power supply
11 Common to analog input 11 Common to analog input
13 Power supply for potentiometer 13 Power supply for potentiometer
12 Speed setting voltage input 12 Speed setting voltage input
M Common to analog input M Common to analog input
[AV2] Auxiliary speed setting 2 [AUX-N1] Auxiliary speed setting 1
[AV3] Auxiliary speed setting 3 [AUX-N2] Auxiliary speed setting 2
Torque limiter value 1 / Torque bias
[ATL1] [TL-REF1] Torque limiter (level 1)
command value 1
Analog input

[ATL2] [TL-REF2] Torque limiter (level 2)
command value 2
[ATL3] − −
command value 3
[ATL4] Torque limiter value 4 − −
[ATIN] Torque command input [T-REF] Torque command (before limit)
[ATR] Torque command
[AFAI] Magnetic-flux command input [MF-REF] Magnetic-flux command
[ANFI] Speed feedback input [LINE-N] Speed override
[ANJF] [CRP-N1] Creep speed 1
Creep setting value in UP/DOWN setter
[CRP-N2] Creep speed 2
[ATM] Motor temperature input [M-TMP] Motor temperature
V1 Voltage input for auxiliary speed setting [AUX-N1] Auxiliary speed setting 1
CM Digital input common CM Digital input common
FWD Forward operation ⋅ stop command FWD Forward operation ⋅ stop command
REV Reverse operation ⋅ stop command REV Reverse operation ⋅ stop command
Digital input

X6 Digital input 6
X7 Digital input 7
X8 Digital input 8
X9 Digital input 9
[CNR1] Multistep speed setting selection 1 [SS1] Multistep speed setting selection 1
[CUP] ACC command in UP/DOWN setter [UP] UP command in UP/DOWN setting
a
l
12-16

symbol symbol
DEC command in UP/DOWN setter DOWN command in UP/DOWN
[CDWN] [DOWN]
setting
[CCLR] Clear command in UP/DOWN setter [CLR] ACC/DEC zero clear command
[CBSS] Soft start ⋅ stop bypass [BPS] Bypass
[CRT] Soft start ⋅ stop time switch [RT1] ASR,ACC/DEC selection
[CNL] Reverse rotation lock command H08 Reverse rotation lock
[CPI] ASR PI switch [RT1][RT2] ASR,ACC/DEC selection
[CPPI] ASR P/PI switch [RT1][RT2] ASR,ACC/DEC selection
[CSTC] Speed control/Torque control switch [H41-CCL] H41 [Torque command] cancel
[CDRP] Droop function [DROOP] Droop selection
[CTL] Torque limiter [F40-CCL] F40 (Torque limiter mode) cancel
[CPOS] Simplified position control command − −
RST Alarm reset [RST] Alarm reset
THR External alarm [THR] External alarm
EXT Pre-exciting command [EXITE] Pre-exciting command
− PLC PLC signal power supply
Ao Analog output Ao1 Analog output 1
Ao2 Analog output 2
Ao3 Analog output 3
[BNF0] Speed feedback output 0 [N-FB1+] Speedometer one-way deflection
[BNR0] Speed setting 0 [N-REF2] Speed setting 2
[BT0] Torque command output 0 [T-REF±] Torque meter two-way deflection
[BT1] Torque command output 1 [T-REF±] Torque meter two-way deflection
[BIT] Torque current command [IT-REF±] Torque ammeter two-way deflection
[BNR] Speed setting [N-REF4] Speed setting 4
[BNA] Speed feedback [N-FB2±] Speed detection
Chap. 12
[BNAB] Speed feedback absolute value [N-FB1+] Speedometer one-way deflection
Analog output
[BTAB] Torque command output absolute value [T-REF+] Torque meter one-way deflection
Torque current command output absolute Torque ammeter one-way deflection
[BITAB] [IT-REF+]
value
[BIM] Motor current detected value [I-AC] Motor current
REPLACEMENT DATA
Torque current command (torque

LM For load meter [IT-REF±]
ammeter two-way deflection)
Torque current command (torque
[IT-REF+]
ammeter one-way deflection)
Torque command (torque meter
[T-REF±]
two-way deflection)
Torque command (torque meter
[T-REF+]
one-way deflection)
Speed detection (speedometer
SM For speedometer [N-FB1+]
one-way deflection)
Speed detection (speedometer
[N-FB1±]
two-way deflection)
M Common to analog output M Common to analog output
Transistor
output

12-17
symbol symbol
− Y4 Digital output 4
Establishment of link voltage
[DUV] [RDY] Ready for operation
(undervoltage)
[DZS] Speed existence (zero speed) [N-EX] Speed existence
[DSAR] Arrival at the preset speed [N-AR] Arrival at the preset speed
[DSAG] Speed agreement [N-AG] Speed agreement
[DSDA] Arbitrary speed (absolute value) [N-DT1] Speed detection 1
[DSDP] Arbitrary speed (with polarity) [N-DT2] Speed detection 2
[DTLM] Torque limiting [TL] Torque limiting
[DTDT] Torque detection [T-DT1] Torque detection 1
Transistor output
[DAX] Inverter running [RUN] Inverter running

[DACC] Accelerating [U-ACC] Accelerating
[DDEC] Decelerating [U-DEC] Decelerating
[DOL] Inverter overload early warning [INV-OL] Inverter overload early warning
Motor temperature overheat early warning Motor temperature overheat early
[DOLM] [M-OH]
warning
[DTY4] Transmission data Y4 [U-DO] Universal DO
[DTY5] Transmission data Y5
[DTFT] Transmission data error [LK-ERR] Transmission error
CME Digital output common CME Digital output common
30A, 30B, Alarm output for any fault Alarm output for any fault
Relay output
30A, 30B, 30C

30C
30A, 30B, Alarm output for any fault Alarm output for any fault
30A, 30B, 30C
30C
PA, PB Pulse generator 2-phase signal input PA, PB Pulse generator 2-phase signal input
detection
Speed
Pulse generator power supply

PGP, PGM PGP, PGM Pulse generator power supply
Connects motor thermistor

Temperature
(Motor temperature can be detected

detection
THT Connects motor thermistor TH1

with the NTC and the PTC
thermistors).
THC Common to motor thermistor THC Common to motor thermistor
Option power
M24 For +24V common −

supply
Please utilize the power supply on the

market.
(M) For ±15V common −
N15 Power supply for option (15V) −
12-18
12.5 Function Codes
12.5 Function Codes

Since the function codes for FRENIC-VG are compatible with those for VG7S, settings for VG7S are
available for the settings for the same function codes of FRENIC-VG.
Note that VG7S uses different function codes only for No. 3 parameters dedicated for V/f control, as
shown below.
(For the settings for function codes, refer to Chapter 4.)

Function Function
Name Name
Codes Codes
- - A101 M3 control system (*1)
A35 M3 motor rated capacity A102 M3 motor rated capacity
A36 M3 motor rated current A103 M3 motor rated current
A37 M3 rated voltage A104 M3 rated voltage
A38 M3 highest output voltage A153 M3 highest output voltage
A39 M3 rated speed A105 M3 rated speed
A40 M3 maximum speed A106 M3 maximum speed
A41 M3 motor pole A107 M3 motor pole
A42 M3 %R1 A108 M3 %R1
A43 M3 %X A109 M3 %X
A44 M3 exciting current A110 M3 exciting current
A45 M3 slip compensation amount A154 M3 slip compensation amount
A46 M3 torque boost (*2) A155 M3 torque boost (*2)
A47 M3 thermistor selection A131 M3 thermistor selection
A48 M3 electronic thermal (operation selection) A132 M3 electronic thermal (operation selection)
A49 M3 electronic thermal (operation level) A133 M3 electronic thermal (operation level)
A50 M3 electronic thermal (thermal time constant) A134 M3 electronic thermal (thermal time constant)
(*1) The V/f control is performed when the function code A101 is set to "5".
(*2) When the inverter capacity is 22 kW or less with the torque boos set to 2.0 to 20.0, make the settings according to the
Chap. 12
conversion table below.
Torque boost conversion table

Remarks
A46 P35, A55, A155
REPLACEMENT DATA
2.0 2.0
4.0 3.0 Substitute according to the following calculation formula.
6.0 4.0 * Calculation formula
▪ VG7 A46 = 2.0 to 20.0
8.0 5.0
VG1 setting = (100 X [A46 for VG7] + 200)÷200
10.0 6.0
12.0 7.0 The boost amount is calculated by the following formula.
14.0 8.0 ▪ VG7 boost amount [%]
16.0 9.0 Boost amount [%] = (10% ÷ (20.2 - 2.0)) X ([P35] - 2.0))
▪ VG1 boost amount [V]
18.0 10.0
Boost amount [%] = (20% ÷ (20.2 - 2.0)) X ([P35] - 2.0))
20.0 11.0
*100% rated voltage
(Equivalent to 10% of rated (Equivalent to 10% of rated
voltage) voltage)
12-19
Function Codes Name Function Codes Name
01 Speed setting F01 Speed setting N1
02 Operation method F02 Operation method
03 Max. speed F03 M1 max. speed
04 Acceleration time 1 F07 Acceleration time 1
05 Deceleration time 1 F08 Deceleration time 1
06 S-curve acceleration/deceleration 1 F67 to F70 S-curve acceleration/deceleration 1
07 Multistep speed 1 C05 Multistep speed 1
08 Multistep speed 2 C06 Multistep speed 2
Multistep speed 3 Multistep speed 3
09 C07
10 C08
11 Multistep speed 6 / Creep speed 1 C09 Multistep speed 6 / Creep speed 1
12 Multistep speed 7 / Creep speed 2 C10/C18 Multistep speed 7 / Creep speed 2
13 C11/C19
14 ASR1 (P gain) F61 ASR1-P(Gain)
15 (I gain) F62 ASR1-I (Constant of integration)
16 Constant on filtering (Speed setting) F64 ASR1 input filter
17 (Speed detection) F65 ASR1 detection filter
18 Torque limiter (Method selection) F40,41 Torque limiter mode
19 (Limiter value selection) F42,43 Torque limiter value selection
20 Torque limiter (Level 1) F44 Torque limiter (Level 1)
21 (Level 2) F45 (Level 2)
22 Motor electronic thermal (Select) F10 M1 motor electronic thermal (Select)

23 (Level) F11 (Level)
24 Restart after momentary power failure F14 Restart after momentary power failure
(Operation selection)
25 DC brake (Time) F22 DC brake (Braking time)
26 (Level) F21 (Operation level)
27 Pre-excitation (Time) F74 Pre-excitation time

30 Function block (31-44) selection −
31 Droop control H28 Droop control
32 Filtering time constant (ASR output) F66 ASR1 output filter
33 Acceleration time 2 C46 Acceleration time 2
34 Deceleration time 2 C47 Deceleration time 2
35 S-curve acceleration/deceleration 2 C48, C49 S-curve acceleration/deceleration 2
36 Ratio setting F17 Gain (Speed setting signal 12)
37 ASR2 (P gain) C40 ASR2-P (Gain)
38 (I gain) C41 ASR2-I (Constant of integration)
39 ASR1, 2 switching characteristic C70 ASR switching time
40 Torque bias (Level 1) F47 Torque bias T1
41 (Level 2) F48 Torque bias T2
42 Selection between torque control and H41, H42 Torque command and torque current command
torque current control (Select) selection
43 Magnetic-flux command (Select) H43 Magnetic-flux command selection
44 Magnetic-flux command at light load F73 Magnetic-flux level at light load
51 ASR tuning (Action selection) H46 Observer type selection
52 (Operation selection) H01 Tuning operation selection
12-20
12.5 Function Codes

53 Observer data (Compensation gain) H47, H48 Observer settings (Compensation gain)
54 (Integration time) H49, H50 (Integration time)
(Load inertia) (Load inertia)
55 H51, H52
61 Motor overheat protection (temp.) E30 Motor overheat protection (temp.)
62 Motor overheat early warning (temp.) E31 Motor overheat early warning (temp.)
63 Inverter overload early warning (Level) E33 Inverter overload early warning
64 Motor overload early warning (Level) E34 Motor overload early warning
65 Zero speed detection (Level) F37 Stop speed
66 Speed detection (Level 1) E39 Speed detection level 1
67 (Level 2) E40 Speed detection level 2
(Level 3)
68 E41 Speed detection level 3
69 Speed detection method E38 Speed detection method
70 Speed equivalence (Detection range) E42 Speed equivalence (Detection range)
71 Speed agreement (Detection range) E43 Speed agreement (Detection range)
72 (Off delay timer) E44 (Off delay timer)
73 Torque detection (Level) E46 Torque detection level 1

74 Timer for continuous operation F39 Stop speed (Zero speed holding time)
81 Auto-restart (Times) H04 Auto-restart (Times)
82 (Interval) H05 (Interval)
83 Speed bias setting F18 Bias (Speed setting signal 12)

84 Speed limiter (Method selection) F76 Speed limiter (Method selection)
85 Speed limiter (Level 1) F77 Speed limiter level 1
86 (Level 2) F78 Speed limiter level 2
87 Creep selection (Setting selection) C73 Creep speed switching (on UP/DOWN control)
88 Operation method changeover switch − Function selection Di [IVS]
89 Speed feedback (Signal selection) H53 Line speed feedback selection
90 Suppressing function H57 Overvoltage suppressing function
91 Operation method selection H11 Automatic operation OFF function
92 Torque command monitor F51 Torque command monitor (Polarity selection)
Chap. 12
93 Language F58 LCD monitor (Language selection)
94 LCD brightness adjustment F59 LCD monitor (Contrast adjustment)
95 LED monitor selection F55 LED monitor (Display selection)
96 Display of load speed (Coefficient 1) F52 LED monitor (Display coefficient A)
REPLACEMENT DATA
97 (Coefficient 2) F53 LED monitor (Display coefficient B)

98 LCD monitor selection F57 LCD monitor (Display selection)
99 Motor sound selection F26 Motor sound (Carrier freq.)
100 Data initialization H03 Data initialization
101 All save H02 All save
111 Selection of X1 to X5 (X1, X2) E01, E02 Selection of X1 function, Selection of X2
functions (X3, X4) function
112 (X5) E03, E04 Selection of X3 function, Selection of X4
function
113 E05 X5 function selection
114 Timer for multistep speed reference C20 Timer for multistep speed reference agreement
agreement
115 Y1 to Y3, RY function (Y1, Y2) E15, E16 Y1 function selection, Y2 function selection
selection (Y3, RY)
116 E17, E19 Y3 function selection, Y5 function selection
12-21
117 Ai1, Ai2 function selection E49, E50 Ai1 function selection, Ai2 function selection
118 Increment/decrement limiter (Ai1) E65 Increment/decrement limiter (Ai1)
119 (Ai2) E66 Increment/decrement limiter (Ai2)
120 Offset setting (12) F18 Bias (Speed setting signal 12)
121 (Ai1) E57 Ai1 bias setting
(Ai2)
122 E58 Ai2 bias setting
123 Gain setting (12) F17 Gain (Speed setting signal 12)
124 (Ai1) E53 Ai1 gain setting
(Ai2)
125 E54 Ai2 gain setting
126 AO1 to AO3 function selection E69 to E71 AO1 function selection, AO2 function selection,
AO3 function selection
127 Bias adjustment (AO1) E79 AO1 bias setting
128 (AO2) E80 AO2 bias setting
(AO3)
129 E81 AO3 bias setting
130 Gain adjustment (AO1) E74 AO1 gain setting
131 (AO2) E75 AO2 gain setting
(AO3)
132 E76 AO3 gain setting
133 Filter selection (AO1, AO2, AO3) E84 AO1-5 filter setting
141 Operation command selection H30 Serial link
142 Control input through transmission S06 Operation method 1(through communication)
143 Speed command through transmission S01 Speed command
Action on T-Link error T-Link option setting
144 (Mode) o30 (Action on transmission error)
145 (Action time) o31 (Action time on transmission error)
146 Standard built-in RS-485 address H31 RS-485 (Station address)
Action on RS-485 error Action on RS-485 error Operation
147 (Mode) H32 (Mode select on error)
148 (Action time) H33 (Timer operating time)
149 (No response error detection time) H38 (No response error detection time)
(Response interval) (Response interval)
150 H39
151 X11 to X14 function (X11, X12) E10, E11 X11 function selection, X12 function selection
selection (X13, X14)
152 E12, E13 X13 function selection, X14 function selection
153 Y11 to Y13 function (Y11, Y12) E20, E21 Y11 function selection, Y12 function selection
selection (Y13)
154 E22 Y13 function selection
155 Function selection of OPCII-VG5-DI o01, o02 DIA function selection, DIB function selection
156 BCD input speed o03, o04 DIA BCD input setting, DIB BCD input setting
157 Command pulse correction 1 o14 Command pulse correction 1
158 Command pulse correction 2 o15 Command pulse correction 2
159 APR gain o16 APR gain
160 F/F gain o17 F/F gain
161 Deviation excess range o18 Deviation excess range
162 Deviation zero range o19 Deviation zero range
171 Motor selection (*1) P02 M1 motor selection
172 PG pulse number P28 M1-PG pulse number
173 NTC thermistor selection P30 M1 thermistor selection
12-22
12.5 Function Codes

174 Motor ratings (Capacity) P03 M1 rated capacity
175 (Voltage) F05 M1 rated voltage
176 (Current) P04 M1 rated current
177 (Base speed) F04 M1 rated speed
178 (No. of pole) P05 M1 number of pole
179 Overload capability −
180 Auto-tuning of motor characteristic −
(Protection)
181 H01 Tuning operation selection
(Operation)
182 Motor characteristic (%R1) P06 M1-%R1
183 (%X) P07 M1-%X
184 (Exciting current) P08 M1 exciting current
185 (Torque current ) P09 M1 torque current
186 (Slip on driving) P10 M1 slip on driving
187 (Slip on braking) P11 M1 slip on braking
188 (Iron loss coefficient 1) P12 M1 iron loss coefficient 1
189 (Iron loss coefficient 2) P13 M1 iron loss coefficient 2
(Iron loss coefficient 3)
190 P14 M1 iron loss coefficient 3
(Magnetic saturation coefficient 1)
191 P15 M1 magnetic saturation coefficient 1
(Secondary time constant)
196 P20 M1 secondary time constant
(Induced voltage coefficient )
197 P21 M1 induced voltage coefficient
200 Data protection F00 Data protection
(*1) If "other" is specified in VG5 motor selection [171], calculate with the following formula.
VG1 Function Codes Name Conversion formula

P06 M1-%R1 ▪ For 200V system
[182]×135÷[175]×√3
Chap. 12
▪ For 400V system
[182]×270÷[175]×√3
P07 M1-%X ▪ For 200V system
[183]×135÷[175]×√3×fbase÷50
(fbase=[177]×[178]÷120)
REPLACEMENT DATA
▪ For 400V system

[183]×270÷[175]×√3×fbase÷50
(fbase=[177]×[178]÷120)
P08 M1 exciting current [184]÷√2
P09 M1 torque current [185]÷√2
P21 M1 inductive voltage [197]×fbase÷50×√3÷√2
(fbase=[177]×[178]÷120)
Function codes for VG5 are put in brackets.
12-23
(*2) If the inverter is broken, and the motor constant cannot be confirmed, notify our sales office of the following contents.
Item Details
Inverter ▪ TYPE Notify us of the descriptive contents of the name plate.
▪ SER. No.
ROM No ROM seal are affixed to the CUP board of the control PCB.
▪ System code The system code seal is affixed to the back face of the control
(VG5--) terminal block. (See the photo below)
2 digits at the end = 00 (standard item)
01 to 99 (special item)
Motor ▪ Product model (TYPE) Notify us of the descriptive contents of the name plate.
▪ Number of poles (POLES)
▪ Capacity (OUTPUT)
▪ Frequency (Hz)
▪ Voltage (VOLT)
▪ Current (AMP)
▪ Number of revolutions (RPM)
▪ Production No. (SER No.)
Outline drawing
12-24
12.5 Function Codes

01 Motor rotating speed detection value display − LED MONITOR
02 Motor rotating speed setting value display − LED MONITOR
03 Load speed detection value display − LED MONITOR
04 Torque current reference value display − LED MONITOR
05 Torque reference value display − LED MONITOR
06 Motor output display − LED MONITOR
07 Inverter output current display − LED MONITOR
08 Motor temperature display − LED MONITOR
09 Input signal (1) display − LCD monitor
0A Input signal (2) display − LCD monitor
0B Output signal display − LCD monitor
0C Operation mode display − LCD monitor
0D Soft switch (1) display − LCD monitor
0E Soft switch (2) display − LCD monitor
0F Magnetic-flux quantity − LED MONITOR
10 Protection of setting data (11-3F) −
11 Acceleration time 1 F07 Acceleration time 1
12 Deceleration time 1 F08 Deceleration time 1
13 S-curve applied range F67 S-curve acceleration start side 1
F68 S-curve acceleration end side 1
F69 S-curve deceleration start side 1
F70 S-curve deceleration end side 1
14 Multistep speed setting value 1 C05 Multistep speed 1
19 Acceleration time 2 C46 Acceleration time 2
1A Deceleration time 2 C47 Deceleration time 2
Chap. 12
1B Speed reference input gain F17 Gain (Speed setting signal 12)
20 ASR P (1) F61 ASR1 P
21 ASR I (1) F62 ASR1 I
22 Speed setting constant on filtering (1) F64 ASR1 input filter
23 Speed detection constant on filtering (1) F65 ASR1 detection filter
REPLACEMENT DATA
24 ASR P (2) C40 ASR2 P

25 ASR I (2) C41 ASR2 I
26 Speed setting constant on filtering (2) C43 ASR2 input filter
27 Speed detection constant on filtering (2) C44 ASR2 detection filter
28 Droop quantity H28 Droop control
29 ASR time constant of P changeover switch C70 ASR switching time
2A Torque limiter value 1/Torque bias command value 1 F44 Torque limiter value (Level 1)
2B Torque limiter value 2/Torque bias command value 2 F45 Torque limiter value (Level 2)
2C Torque limiter value 3/Torque bias command value 3 −
2D Torque limiter value 4 −
2E Magnetic-flux command level H44 Magnetic-flux command value
2F Magnetic-flux command level at light load F73 Magnetic-flux level at light load
30 Zero speed detection level F37 Stop speed
31 Arbitrary speed detection level E39 Speed detection level 1
12-25
(Absolute value)
32 Arbitrary speed detection level (With polarity) E40 Speed detection level 2
33 Speed equivalence detection level E42 Speed equivalence
34 Speed agreement detection level E43 Speed agreement
35 Torque detection level E46 Torque detection level 1
36 Overload early warning detection level E33 Inverter overload early warning
37 Motor overheat early warning detection level E31 Motor overheat early warning
38 − Adjustment is possible through
Output calibration coefficient of load meter E69 to 71, by allocating the
torque meter into AO1 to 3.
39 − Adjustment is possible through
Output calibration coefficient of speedometer E69 to 71, by allocating the
speedometer into AO1 to 3.
3A Stop position by the simplified position control −
40 First fault − LED MONITOR
41 Second fault − LED MONITOR
42 Fault condition − LCD MONITOR
43 Speed setting value at the occurrence of fault. − LCD MONITOR
44 Speed detection value at the occurrence of fault. − LCD MONITOR
45 Torque current reference value at the occurrence of − LCD MONITOR
fault.
46 Motor current value (U-phase) at the occurrence of − LCD MONITOR
fault.
47 Motor current value (W-phase) at the occurrence of − LCD MONITOR
fault.
48 Operation mode (LED display) at the occurrence of − LCD MONITOR
fault.
49 Operation mode (HEX display) at the occurrence of − LCD MONITOR
fault.
4A Soft switch 1 (LED display) at the occurrence of − LCD MONITOR
fault.
4B Soft switch 2 (LED display) at the occurrence of − LCD MONITOR
fault.
4C Soft switch (HEX display) at the occurrence of fault. − LCD MONITOR
4D Last fault (First fault) − LCD MONITOR
4E Fault before last (First fault) − LCD MONITOR
4F Fault before and before last (First fault) − LCD MONITOR
50 Protection of setting data (51-8F) −
51 Max. speed of motor F03 M1 max. speed
52 Base speed of motor F04 M1 rated speed
53 DC brake using/not using. F22 DC brake (Braking time)
54
55 DC braking time F22 DC brake (Braking time)
56
57 Speed setting limiter value (Upper limit) F77 Speed limiter level 1
58 Definition of the operation method (1) −
59 H11 Automatic operation OFF
Definition of the operation method (2)
function
5A Definition of the Speed setting method (1) F01 Speed setting N1
5B − Possible through function
Definition of forward･reverse command
selection DI [IVS].
5C F52,53 LED monitor (Display
Calibration coefficient of load speed
coefficient)
12-26
12.5 Function Codes

5D Definition of the speed detection area H53 Line speed feedback selection
5E Definition of the Speed setting method (2) C25 Speed setting N2
5F Creep setting of U/D setter C73 Creep speed switching
60 Definition of the torque limiter method F40 Torque limiter mode
61 Definition of the torque limiter value 1/Torque bias F42 Torque limiter value (Level 1)
reference value 1. selection
62 Definition of the torque limiter value 2/Torque bias F43 Torque limiter value (Level 2)
reference value 2. selection
63 Definition of the torque limiter value 3/Torque bias −
reference value 3.
64 Definition of the torque limiter value 4. −
65 In use/not in use of external Ai for the torque H41
Torque reference selection
reference.
66 H43 Magnetic-flux command
Definition of the magnetic-flux reference value.
selection
70 − Possible through function
LM terminal definition
selection from AO1 to 3.
71 − Possible through function
SM terminal definition
selection from AO1 to 3.
72 DI definition (X1 to X4, X6, X7) E01 to E04 X1 to X4 function selection
73 DI definition (X5) E05 X5 function selection
74 DO definition (Y1 to Y5) E15 to E18 Y1 to Y4 function selection
75 DO definition (RY) E19 Y5 function selection
76 AI definition (Ai1) E49 Ai1 function selection
77 AI definition (Ai2) E50 Ai2 function selection
78 AO definition (AO1) E69 AO1 function selection
79 AO definition (AO2, AO3) E70, E71 A02, A03 function selection
7A No. of motor poles, specification for the pulse P28
No. of PG pulses
generator
7B − Possible through function
V1 enabled/disabled
selection Ai [OFF].
80 Calibration coefficient of BCD input for speed o03, o04
DI BCD input setting.
setting
81 Definition of the initial setting value of UP/DOWN F01, C25
Chap. 12
Speed setting N1, N2
setter.
82 Enabled/disabled of transmission data H30 Serial link
83 Transmission ID code −
84
−
REPLACEMENT DATA
85 Possible through AO function

AO adjustment
selection [P10], [N10].
86 AI1 filter E61 Ai1 filter
87 AI2 filter E62 Ai2 filter
88 12 offset adjustment value −
89 12 gain adjustment value F17 Gain (Speed setting signal 12)
8A V1 offset adjustment value −
8B V1 gain adjustment value −
8C AI1 offset adjustment value E57 AI1 bias setting
8D AI1 gain adjustment value E53 AI1 gain setting
8E AI2 offset adjustment value E58 AI2 bias setting
8F AI2 gain adjustment value E54 AI2 gain setting
90 Display of the transmitted and written DI data S06 Operation method 1
91 Transmission speed setting mode selection H30 Serial link
92 Transmission speed setting S01 Speed command
12-27
93 Transmission speed setting bias −
94 Transmission torque command mode selection H41 Torque command selection
95 Transmission torque command S02 Torque command
96 General purpose DO S07 Universal DO
97 Trace data mode −
98, 99
9A Confirmation of data saving condition −
9B ALL SAVE function H02 All save
For Motor constant setting value (non-disclosure) P01 to P30 Motor code (*1)
manufacturer
12-28
12.5 Function Codes
(*1) Using "Excepting V63 standard motor" requires the confirmation of the motor constant.
Notify our sales office of the following contents.
Item Details
Inverter ▪ TYPE Notify us of the descriptive contents of the name plate.
▪ SER. No.
ROM No ROM seal are affixed to the IC2 and IC3 of the control PCB.
▪ System code The system code seal is affixed to the back face of the control
(VG3□-□□□□-□□) terminal block. (See the photo below)
2 digits at the end = 00 (standard item)
01 to 99 (special item)
Motor ▪ Product model (TYPE) Notify us of the descriptive contents of the name plate.
▪ Number of poles (POLES)
▪ Capacity (OUTPUT)
▪ Frequency (Hz)
▪ Voltage (VOLT)
▪ Current (AMP)
▪ Number of revolutions (RPM)
▪ Production No. (SER No.)
Chap. 12
Outline drawing
REPLACEMENT DATA
12-29
200V series
Motor parameters
Motor specification VG7S code No.
F03 F04 F05 P03 P04 P05 P06 P07 P08 P09 P10 P11 P12 P13 P14 P15 P16 P17 P18 P19 P20 P21 P22 P23 P24 P25 H51
12.6.1
FRENIC-VG code No.
%R1 %X
2
Type
[A]
[A]
[%]
[%]
[%]
[Hz]
[Hz]
[kW]
[%] [%]
Speed
co-ef*. 1
co-ef*. 3
Voltage[V]
Current[A]
co-ef*. [V]
constant [s]
Load inertia
No. of poles
No. of poles
co-ef*. 1 [%]
co-ef*. 2 [%]
co-ef*. 3 [%]
co-ef*. 4 [%]
co-ef*. 5 [%]
R2 correction
R2 correction
Capacity[kW]
Rated capacity
Torque current
Slip on driving
Secondary time
Slip On braking
Induced voltage
Rated current [A]

correction co-ef*.
Rated voltage [V]

Iron loss co-ef*. 1
Iron loss co-ef*. 2
Iron loss co-ef*. 3
Max. speed [r/min]

Rated speed [r/min]
Pre-exciting current
Magnetic saturation
Magnetic saturation
Magnetic saturation
Magnetic saturation
Magnetic saturation
(Rated/Max.)[r/min]
R2 correctionco-ef*.
MVK6096
0.75 4 1500/3600 188 4.3 1500 1500 188 0.75 4.3 4 4.34 9.07 3.21 2.92 1.320 1.185 7.60 7.60 10.00 93.0 85.8 72.6 60.0 47.6 0.108 149 1.360 1.480 1.000 0.000 0.009
MVK6095A
MVK6097
1.5 4 1500/3600 188 7.0 1500 1500 188 1.5 7.0 4 7.06 14.76 3.21 5.83 2.640 2.370 3.80 3.80 5.00 93.0 85.8 72.6 60.0 47.6 0.108 149 1.360 1.480 1.000 0.000 0.009
MVK8097A
MVK6107
2.2 4 1500/3600 188 11 1500 1500 188 2.2 11 4 8.27 12.95 3.81 9.75 2.622 3.059 3.00 4.00 1.00 85.2 73.7 59.1 47.6 37.4 0.051 140 2.530 1.133 1.000 0.000 0.009
MVK8107A
Replacing VG7S
MVK6115
3.7 4 1500/3600 188 18 1500 1500 188 3.7 18 4 6.86 12.69 8.11 15.69 2.500 2.370 3.00 2.95 2.50 88.4 80.1 66.4 54.1 43.0 0.084 146 0.899 1.320 1.000 0.022 0.016
12.6 Motor Parameters
MVK8115A
MVK6133
5.5 4 1500/3600 188 30 1500 1500 188 5.5 30 4 6.05 13.44 12.98 21.92 1.490 1.440 3.00 2.50 3.00 88.3 79.5 66.0 54.1 43.0 0.090 149 1.925 1.985 1.000 0.026 0.030
MVK8133A
MVK6135
7.5 4 1500/3600 188 37 1500 1500 188 7.5 37 4 6.70 12.45 15.62 30.66 1.771 1.871 2.32 1.76 3.00 85.3 70.7 53.8 43.7 34.4 0.070 155 0.900 0.900 1.000 0.000 0.038
MVK8135A
MVK6165
11 4 1500/3600 188 50 1500 1500 188 11 50 4 4.26 11.64 24.79 40.30 0.988 0.824 4.53 1.88 0.22 84.9 75.0 61.6 50.0 39.4 0.087 175 0.900 2.343 1.000 0.000 0.085
12-30
MVK8165A
MVK6167
15 4 1500/3600 188 65 1500 1500 188 15 65 4 4.47 12.25 26.99 53.96 1.067 1.067 0.00 1.50 1.00 88.7 80.7 67.2 55.2 44.0 0.133 160 1.689 1.689 1.000 0.000 0.120
MVK8167A
MVK6184
18.5 4 1500/3600 188 74 1500 1500 188 18.5 74 4 3.22 10.68 30.58 72.83 0.934 0.931 3.50 0.50 0.50 90.7 83.2 69.5 56.8 44.4 0.240 160 1.465 1.803 1.000 0.097 0.210
MVK8184A
MVK6185
22 4 1500/3600 188 90 1500 1500 188 22 90 4 3.59 11.78 34.17 83.43 0.606 0.855 1.30 0.77 2.00 91.1 83.2 69.1 56.8 44.6 0.387 160 4.000 2.200 1.000 0.089 0.230
MVK8185A
MVK6206 30 4 1500/3000 188 116 1500 1500 188 30 116 4 2.53 12.13 53.42 108.1 0.606 0.648 2.50 3.50 5.00 84.4 74.0 59.5 48.9 38.0 0.173 166 2.268 2.078 1.000 0.000 0.340
MVK8187A 30 4 1500/3000 188 116 1500 1500 188 30 116 4 2.43 12.32 39.95 106.0 0.915 1.015 3.00 0.00 0.00 88.2 81.9 70.1 58.4 46.7 0.385 166 1.818 1.737 1.000 0.000 0.340
MVK6207
37 4 1500/3000 188 143 1500 1500 188 37 143 4 2.47 14.69 60.09 133.2 0.497 0.536 1.80 3.00 5.00 85.4 75.7 62.3 50.5 39.9 0.184 168 3.200 2.560 1.000 0.180 0.410
MVK8207A
MVK6208
45 4 1500/3000 188 170 1500 1500 188 45 170 4 2.73 15.26 56.71 169.7 0.947 0.901 1.00 0.00 0.15 89.2 81.6 67.6 56.2 43.4 0.295 164 1.229 1.813 1.000 0.178 0.470
MVK8208A
MVK9250 55 4 1500/2400 185 216 1500 1500 185 55 216 4 2.08 12.36 66.22 197.9 0.621 0.595 3.00 0.83 0.21 91.5 83.8 70.6 57.8 45.6 0.413 168 1.615 1.753 1.000 0.000 0.800
MVK9224A 55 4 1500/2400 180 225 1500 1500 180 55 225 4 2.04 14.42 72.66 202.3 0.742 0.742 3.00 0.00 0.00 89.3 83.3 71.4 59.5 47.6 0.544 167 1.000 1.000 1.000 0.000 0.530
MVK9252 75 4 1500/2400 183 276 1500 1500 183 75 276 4 1.70 15.29 99.34 261.6 0.638 0.665 2.00 2.00 0.00 90.4 83.0 68.4 57.4 46.4 0.409 165 1.856 1.785 1.000 0.091 0.950
MVK9254A 75 4 1500/2400 183 299 1500 1500 183 75 299 4 2.00 16.41 89.26 272.1 0.597 0.647 3.00 0.00 0.00 89.3 83.3 71.4 59.5 47.6 0.555 163 1.849 1.784 1.000 0.000 0.880
MVK9280 90 4 1500/2000 183 345 1500 1500 183 90 345 4 2.28 20.12 89.3 332.3 0.669 0.546 0.00 5.00 0.00 91.1 85.1 70.9 59.2 48.7 0.490 181 1.331 1.428 1.000 0.000 1.370
MVK9256A 90 4 1500/2000 185 362 1500 1500 185 90 362 4 1.72 14.10 124.40 321.7 0.680 0.680 3.00 0.00 0.00 89.3 83.3 71.4 59.5 47.6 0.549 172 1.000 1.000 1.000 0.000 1.030
*co-ef.: coefficient
Note : The above table shows the setting values of FRENIC-VG.
12-30
400 V series (1)
Motor parameters
FRENIC-VG code No.
%R1 %X
2
Type
[A]
[A]
[%]
[%]
[%]
[%] [%]
Speed
[r/min]
co-ef*. 3
Voltage[V]
Current[A]
co-ef*. [V]
constant [s]
Load inertia
Load inertia
No. of poles
No. of poles
co-ef*. 1 [%]
co-ef*. 2 [%]
co-ef*. 3 [%]
co-ef*. 4 [%]
co-ef*. 5 [%]
(Rated/Max.)
R2 correction
Capacity[kW]
Torque current
Secondary time
Induced voltage
Rated current [A]

correction co-ef*.
Rated voltage [V]

Iron loss co-ef*. 1
Iron loss co-ef*. 2
Iron loss co-ef*. 3
Max. speed [r/min]

Rated speed [r/min]
Magnetic saturation
Magnetic saturation
Magnetic saturation
Magnetic saturation
Magnetic saturation
Slip on driving [Hz]
Rated capacity [kW]

Slip On braking [Hz]

MVK6115
3.7 4 1500/3600 376 9 1500 1500 376 3.7 9 4 6.86 13.94 3.93 7.78 2.510 2.340 2.35 2.55 1.20 90.5 82.4 68.7 57.0 45.3 0.104 294 0.880 1.440 1.000 0.028 0.016
M8115A
MVK6133
5.5 4 1500/3600 376 15 1500 1500 376 5.5 15 4 5.50 12.78 7.15 10.74 1.311 1.370 2.00 5.00 7.00 88.0 79.2 65.6 53.6 42.2 0.078 299 2.361 1.985 1.000 0.019 0.030
MVK8133A
MVK6135
7.5 4 1500/3600 376 18.5 1500 1500 376 7.5 18.5 4 4.37 13.72 7.81 15.33 1.465 1.686 7.61 2.00 1.00 85.9 76.9 63.4 51.6 40.5 0.064 310 1.607 1.427 1.000 0.000 0.037
MVK8135A
MVK6165
11 4 1500/3600 376 25.0 1500 1500 376 11 25 4 4.27 11.67 12.39 20.15 0.988 0.824 4.53 1.88 0.22 84.9 75.0 61.6 50.0 39.4 0.087 348 0.910 2.343 1.000 0.000 0.085
MVK8165A
MVK6167
15 4 1500/3600 376 31.7 1500 1500 376 15 31.7 4 4.48 13.69 14.47 28.63 1.290 1.269 1.00 0.50 1.00 88.7 81.7 67.2 55.2 44.0 0.133 306 1.090 1.318 1.000 0.027 0.110
MVK8167A
MVK6184
18.5 4 1500/3600 376 37 1500 1500 376 18.5 37 4 2.66 12.45 14.02 36.06 0.882 0.882 1.00 3.00 3.00 92.5 84.3 70.3 57.1 45.1 0.295 321 1.825 1.825 1.000 0.018 0.210
MVK8184A
MVK6185
22 4 1500/3600 376 45 1500 1500 376 22 45 4 3.61 14.06 16.81 41.72 0.903 0.891 1.50 1.50 3.00 91.1 83.2 69.1 56.5 44.6 0.387 320 1.357 1.673 1.000 0.037 0.230
MVK8185A
12-31
MVK6206 30 4 1500/3000 376 58 1500 1500 376 30 58 4 2.55 12.16 25.74 52.52 0.666 0.648 2.50 3.50 9.50 84.4 74.0 59.5 48.9 38.0 0.173 331 2.268 2.078 1.000 0.070 0.340
MVK8187A 30 4 1500/3000 376 58 1500 1500 376 30 58 4 2.43 12.32 19.97 53.0 0.915 1.015 3.00 0.00 0.00 88.2 81.9 70.1 58.4 46.7 0.385 332 1.818 1.737 1.000 0.000 0.340
MVK6207
37 4 1500/3000 376 71 1500 1500 376 37 71 4 2.49 14.11 30.07 65.54 0.497 0.498 1.79 1.80 5.00 85.4 75.7 62.3 50.5 39.9 0.184 336 3.200 3.064 1.000 0.095 0.410
MVK8207A
MVK6208
45 4 1500/3000 376 85 1500 1500 376 45 85 4 2.73 15.30 28.36 84.85 0.947 0.937 0.50 1.50 1.85 89.2 81.6 67.6 56.2 43.4 0.295 328 1.229 1.502 1.000 0.089 0.470
MVK8208A
MVK9250 55 4 1500/2400 376 108 1500 1500 376 55 108 4 2.05 12.20 33.11 98.98 0.621 0.595 3.00 0.83 0.21 91.5 83.8 70.6 57.8 45.6 0.413 336 1.615 1.753 1.000 0.000 0.800
MVK9224A 55 4 1500/2400 365 111 1500 1500 365 55 111 4 1.99 13.96 37.76 99.0 0.721 0.721 3.00 0.00 0.00 89.3 83.3 71.4 59.5 47.6 0.531 339 1.000 1.000 1.000 0.000 0.530
MVK9252 75 4 1500/2400 365 138 1500 1500 365 75 138 4 1.71 15.39 49.67 130.8 0.638 0.665 2.00 2.00 0.00 90.4 83.0 68.4 57.4 46.4 0.409 330 1.856 1.785 1.000 0.091 0.950
MVK9254A 75 4 1500/2400 365 149 1500 1500 365 75 149 4 1.77 16.39 44.04 135.0 0.714 0.714 3.00 0.00 0.00 89.3 83.3 71.4 59.5 47.6 0.627 339 1.000 1.000 1.000 0.000 0.880
MVK9280 90 4 1500/2000 370 173 1500 1500 370 90 173 4 2.23 18.47 44.37 164.1 0.685 0.647 0.00 2.00 0.00 90.7 83.7 69.0 57.1 44.9 0.590 348 1.093 1.212 1.000 0.163 1.370
MVK9256A 90 4 1500/2000 370 179 1500 1500 370 90 179 4 1.51 13.93 62.28 159.2 0.600 0.600 3.00 0.00 0.00 89.3 83.3 71.4 59.5 47.6 0.621 345 1.000 1.000 1.000 0.000 1.030
MVK9282 110 4 1500/3000 375 206 1500 1500 375 110 206 4 2.14 16.83 53.03 195.8 0.557 0.606 0.44 0.00 0.00 90.1 82.6 67.7 56.3 44.2 0.577 350 1.488 1.172 1.000 0.090 1.600
MVK9284A 110 4 1500/2000 370 212 1500 1500 370 110 212 4 1.66 15.39 59.73 192.9 0.579 0.579 3.00 0.00 0.00 89.3 83.3 71.4 59.5 47.6 0.824 346 1.000 1.000 1.000 0.000 1.540
MVK9310 132 4 1500/3000 375 248 1500 1500 375 132 248 4 1.56 17.21 62.05 237.3 0.481 0.531 0.00 0.39 0.00 90.1 81.2 67.7 56.2 45.9 0.689 336 1.468 1.424 1.000 0.000 2.680
MVK9286A 132 4 1500/2000 375 247 1500 1500 375 132 247 4 1.57 15.65 68.05 237.4 0.592 0.592 3.00 0.00 0.00 89.3 83.3 71.4 59.5 47.6 0.876 351 1.000 1.000 1.000 0.000 1.770
REPLACEMENT DATA Cahp. 12 12-31

400 V series (2)
Motor parameters
FRENIC-VG code No.
%R1 %X
2
Type
[A]
[A]
[%]
[%]
[%]
[%] [%]
Speed
[r/min]
co-ef*. 1
co-ef*. 3
Voltage[V]
Current[A]
co-ef*. [V]
constant [s]
Load inertia
No. of poles
No. of poles
co-ef*. 1 [%]
co-ef*. 2 [%]
co-ef*. 3 [%]
co-ef*. 4 [%]
co-ef*. 5 [%]
(Rated/Max.)
R2 correction
R2 correction
Capacity[kW]
Torque current
Secondary time
Induced voltage
Rated current [A]

correction co-ef*.
Rated voltage [V]

Iron loss co-ef*. 1
Iron loss co-ef*. 2
Iron loss co-ef*. 3
Max. speed [r/min]

Rated speed [r/min]
Magnetic saturation
Magnetic saturation
Magnetic saturation
Magnetic saturation
Magnetic saturation
Rated capacity [kW]


MVK9312 160 4 1500/2400 375 297 1500 1500 375 160 297 4 1.15 17.47 70.71 286.3 0.518 0.518 0.00 0.00 0.00 91.0 84.3 71.8 59.1 47.7 1.127 330 1.496 1.496 1.000 0.000 3.220
MVK931LA 160 4 1500/2000 375 297 1500 1500 375 160 297 4 1.36 16.71 76.07 287.2 0.594 0.594 3.00 0.00 0.00 89.3 83.3 71.4 59.5 47.6 0.948 351 1.000 1.000 1.000 0.000 2.970
MVK528JA 160 4 1500/2000 370 300 1500 1500 370 160 300 4 1.35 18.03 71.69 284.7 0.640 0.640 2.26 0.00 0.00 93.8 87.5 75.0 62.5 50.0 0.906 340 1.000 1.000 1.000 0.000 -
MVK9316 200 4 1500/2400 375 369 1500 1500 375 200 369 4 1.15 14.98 107.7 341.5 0.470 0.441 0.00 2.50 0.00 93.8 87.6 74.8 60.6 48.2 1.026 342 1.175 1.358 1.000 0.104 3.900
MVK931MA 200 4 1500/2000 375 376 1500 1500 375 200 376 4 1.17 13.73 121.00 357.0 0.492 0.492 3.00 0.00 0.00 89.3 83.3 71.4 59.5 47.6 0.894 353 1.000 1.000 1.000 0.000 3.290
MVK528LA 200 4 1500/2000 375 375 1500 1500 375 200 375 4 1.27 16.82 106.1 351.8 0.615 0.615 2.20 0.00 0.00 93.7 87.5 75.0 62.5 50.0 0.785 343 1.000 1.000 1.000 0.000 -
MVK9318 220 4 1500/2000 370 409 1500 1500 370 220 409 4 1.63 14.54 98.64 385.3 0.447 0.458 1.00 1.00 0.00 95.1 88.5 75.0 63.1 51.3 1.758 361 1.535 1.513 1.000 0.078 4.260
MVK931NA 220 4 1500/2000 380 409 1500 1500 380 220 409 4 1.05 13.27 130.40 388.2 0.473 0.473 3.00 0.00 0.00 89.3 83.3 71.4 59.5 47.6 0.935 359 1.000 1.000 1.000 0.000 3.660
MVK531FA 220 4 1500/2000 375 415 1500 1500 375 220 415 4 1.08 14.90 135.0 383.0 0.508 0.508 2.41 0.00 0.00 93.7 87.5 75.0 62.5 50.0 0.820 344 1.000 1.000 1.000 0.000 -
12-32
12-32
200V series
Motor parameters
12.6.2
Motor specification VG5S code No. 03 177 175 174 176 178 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 C03 C04 - C14
FRENIC-VG code No. F03 F04 F05 P03 P04 P05 P06 P07 P08 P09 P10 P11 P12 P13 P14 P15 P16 P17 P18 P19 P20 P21 P22 P23 P24 P25
%R1 %X
2
Type
[A]
[A]
[%]
[%]
[%]
[%] [%]
[r/min]
co-ef*. 1
co-ef*. 3
Voltage[V]
Current[A]
co-ef*. [V]
constant [s]
No. of poles
No. of poles
co-ef*. 1 [%]
co-ef*. 2 [%]
co-ef*. 3 [%]
co-ef*. 4 [%]
co-ef*. 5 [%]
R2 correction
R2 correction
Capacity[kW]
Torque current
Secondary time
Induced voltage
Rated current [A]

correction co-ef*.
Rated voltage [V]

Iron loss co-ef*. 1
Iron loss co-ef*. 2
Iron loss co-ef*. 3
Max. speed [r/min]

Rated speed [r/min]
Magnetic saturation
Magnetic saturation
Magnetic saturation
Magnetic saturation
Magnetic saturation
Speed (Rated/Max.)
Rated capacity [kW]


MVK6096 0.75 4 1500/3600 188 4.3 1500 1500 188 0.75 4.3 4 4.34 9.07 3.21 2.92 1.320 1.185 7.60 7.60 10.00 93.0 85.8 72.6 60.0 47.6 0.108 149 1.360 1.480 1.000 0.000
MVK6097 1.5 4 1500/3600 188 7.0 1500 1500 188 1.5 7.0 4 7.06 14.76 3.21 5.83 2.640 2.370 3.80 3.80 5.00 93.0 85.8 72.6 60.0 47.6 0.108 149 1.360 1.480 1.000 0.000
MVK6107 2.2 4 1500/3600 188 11 1500 1500 188 2.2 11 4 8.27 12.95 3.81 9.75 2.622 3.059 3.00 4.00 1.00 85.2 73.7 59.1 47.6 37.4 0.051 140 2.530 1.133 1.000 0.000
MVK6115 3.7 4 1500/3600 188 18 1500 1500 188 3.7 18 4 6.86 12.69 8.11 15.69 2.500 2.370 3.00 2.95 2.50 88.4 80.1 66.4 54.1 43.0 0.084 146 0.899 1.320 1.000 0.022
Replacing VG5S
MVK6133 5.5 4 1500/3600 188 30 1500 1500 188 5.5 30 4 6.05 13.44 12.98 21.92 1.490 1.440 3.00 2.50 3.00 88.3 79.5 66.0 54.1 43.0 0.090 149 1.925 1.985 1.000 0.026
MVK6135 7.5 4 1500/3600 188 37 1500 1500 188 7.5 37 4 6.70 12.45 15.62 30.66 1.771 1.871 2.32 1.76 3.00 85.3 70.7 53.8 43.7 34.4 0.070 155 0.900 0.900 1.000 0.000
MVK6165 11 4 1500/3600 188 50 1500 1500 188 11 50 4 4.26 11.64 24.79 40.30 0.988 0.824 4.53 1.88 0.22 84.9 75.0 61.6 50.0 39.4 0.087 175 0.900 2.343 1.000 0.000
MVK6167 15 4 1500/3600 188 65 1500 1500 188 15 65 4 4.47 12.25 26.99 53.96 1.067 1.067 0.00 1.50 1.00 88.7 80.7 67.2 55.2 44.0 0.133 160 1.689 1.689 1.000 0.000
12-33
MVK6184 18.5 4 1500/3600 188 74 1500 1500 188 18.5 74 4 3.22 10.68 30.58 72.83 0.934 0.931 3.50 0.50 0.50 90.7 83.2 69.5 56.8 44.4 0.240 160 1.465 1.803 1.000 0.097
MVK6185 22 4 1500/3600 188 90 1500 1500 188 22 90 4 3.59 11.78 34.17 83.43 0.606 0.855 1.30 0.77 2.00 91.1 83.2 69.1 56.8 44.6 0.387 160 4.000 2.200 1.000 0.089
MVK6206 30 4 1500/3000 188 116 1500 1500 188 30 116 4 2.53 12.13 53.42 108.1 0.606 0.648 2.50 3.50 5.00 84.4 74.0 59.5 48.9 38.0 0.173 166 2.268 2.078 1.000 0.000
MVK6207 37 4 1500/3000 188 143 1500 1500 188 37 143 4 2.47 14.69 60.09 133.2 0.497 0.536 1.80 3.00 5.00 85.4 75.7 62.3 50.5 39.9 0.184 168 3.200 2.560 1.000 0.180
MVK6208 45 4 1500/3000 188 170 1500 1500 188 45 170 4 2.73 15.26 56.71 169.7 0.947 0.901 1.00 0.00 0.15 89.2 81.6 67.6 56.2 43.4 0.295 164 1.229 1.813 1.000 0.178
MVK9250 55 4 1500/2400 185 216 1500 1500 185 55 216 4 2.08 12.36 66.22 197.9 0.621 0.595 3.00 0.83 0.21 91.5 83.8 70.6 57.8 45.6 0.413 168 1.615 1.753 1.000 0.000
MVK9252 75 4 1500/2400 183 276 1500 1500 183 75 276 4 1.70 15.29 99.34 261.6 0.638 0.665 2.00 2.00 0.00 90.4 83.0 68.4 57.4 46.4 0.409 165 1.856 1.785 1.000 0.091
MVK9280 90 4 1500/2000 183 345 1500 1500 183 90 345 4 2.28 20.12 89.3 332.3 0.669 0.546 0.00 5.00 0.00 91.1 85.1 70.9 59.2 48.7 0.490 181 1.331 1.428 1.000 0.000

400 V series
Motor parameters
Motor specification VG5S code No. 03 177 175 174 176 178 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 C03 C04 - C14
FRENIC-VG code No. F03 F04 F05 P03 P04 P05 P06 P07 P08 P09 P10 P11 P12 P13 P14 P15 P16 P17 P18 P19 P20 P21 P22 P23 P24 P25
%R1 %X
2
Type
[A]
[A]
[%]
[%]
[%]
[%] [%]
Speed
[r/min]
co-ef*. 1
co-ef*. 3
Voltage[V]
Current[A]
co-ef*. [V]
constant [s]
No. of poles
No. of poles
co-ef*. 1 [%]
co-ef*. 2 [%]
co-ef*. 3 [%]
co-ef*. 4 [%]
co-ef*. 5 [%]
(Rated/Max.)
R2 correction
R2 correction
Capacity[kW]
Torque current
Secondary time
Induced voltage
Rated current [A]

correction co-ef*.
Rated voltage [V]

Iron loss co-ef*. 1
Iron loss co-ef*. 2
Iron loss co-ef*. 3
Max. speed [r/min]

Rated speed [r/min]
Magnetic saturation
Magnetic saturation
Magnetic saturation
Magnetic saturation
Magnetic saturation
Rated capacity [kW]


MVK6115 3.7 4 1500/3600 376 9 1500 1500 376 3.7 9 4 6.86 13.94 3.93 7.78 2.510 2.340 2.35 2.55 1.20 90.5 82.4 68.7 57.0 45.3 0.104 294 0.880 1.440 1.000 0.028
MVK6133 5.5 4 1500/3600 376 15 1500 1500 376 5.5 15 4 5.50 12.78 7.15 10.74 1.311 1.370 2.00 5.00 7.00 88.0 79.2 65.6 53.6 42.2 0.078 299 2.361 1.985 1.000 0.019
MVK6135 7.5 4 1500/3600 376 18.5 1500 1500 376 7.5 18.5 4 4.37 13.72 7.81 15.33 1.465 1.686 7.61 2.00 1.00 85.9 76.9 63.4 51.6 40.5 0.064 310 1.607 1.427 1.000 0.000
MVK6165 11 4 1500/3600 376 25.0 1500 1500 376 11 25 4 4.27 11.67 12.39 20.15 0.988 0.824 4.53 1.88 0.22 84.9 75.0 61.6 50.0 39.4 0.087 348 0.910 2.343 1.000 0.000
MVK6167 15 4 1500/3600 376 31.7 1500 1500 376 15 31.7 4 4.48 13.69 14.47 28.63 1.290 1.269 1.00 0.50 1.00 88.7 81.7 67.2 55.2 44.0 0.133 306 1.090 1.318 1.000 0.027
MVK6184 18.5 4 1500/3600 376 37 1500 1500 376 18.5 37 4 2.66 12.45 14.02 36.06 0.882 0.882 1.00 3.00 3.00 92.5 84.3 70.3 57.1 45.1 0.295 321 1.825 1.825 1.000 0.018
MVK6185 22 4 1500/3600 376 45 1500 1500 376 22 45 4 3.61 14.06 16.81 41.72 0.903 0.891 1.50 1.50 3.00 91.1 83.2 69.1 56.5 44.6 0.387 320 1.357 1.673 1.000 0.037
MVK6206 30 4 1500/3000 376 58 1500 1500 376 30 58 4 2.55 12.16 25.74 52.52 0.666 0.648 2.50 3.50 9.50 84.4 74.0 59.5 48.9 38.0 0.173 331 2.268 2.078 1.000 0.070
12-34
MVK6207 37 4 1500/3000 376 71 1500 1500 376 37 71 4 2.49 14.11 30.07 65.54 0.497 0.498 1.79 1.80 5.00 85.4 75.7 62.3 50.5 39.9 0.184 336 3.200 3.064 1.000 0.095
MVK6208 45 4 1500/3000 376 85 1500 1500 376 45 85 4 2.73 15.30 28.36 84.85 0.947 0.937 0.50 1.50 1.85 89.2 81.6 67.6 56.2 43.4 0.295 328 1.229 1.502 1.000 0.089
MVK9250 55 4 1500/2400 376 108 1500 1500 376 55 108 4 2.05 12.20 33.11 98.98 0.621 0.595 3.00 0.83 0.21 91.5 83.8 70.6 57.8 45.6 0.413 336 1.615 1.753 1.000 0.000
MVK9252 75 4 1500/2400 365 138 1500 1500 365 75 138 4 1.71 15.39 49.67 130.8 0.638 0.665 2.00 2.00 0.00 90.4 83.0 68.4 57.4 46.4 0.409 330 1.856 1.785 1.000 0.091
MVK9280 90 4 1500/2000 370 173 1500 1500 370 90 173 4 2.23 18.47 44.37 164.1 0.685 0.647 0.00 2.00 0.00 90.7 83.7 69.0 57.1 44.9 0.590 348 1.093 1.212 1.000 0.163
MVK9282 110 4 1500/3000 375 206 1500 1500 375 110 206 4 2.14 16.83 53.03 195.8 0.557 0.606 0.44 0.00 0.00 90.1 82.6 67.7 56.3 44.2 0.577 350 1.488 1.172 1.000 0.090
MVK9310 132 4 1500/3000 375 248 1500 1500 375 132 248 4 1.56 17.21 62.05 237.3 0.481 0.531 0.00 0.39 0.00 90.1 81.2 67.7 56.2 45.9 0.689 336 1.468 1.424 1.000 0.000
MVK9312 160 4 1500/2400 375 297 1500 1500 375 160 297 4 1.15 17.47 70.71 286.3 0.518 0.518 0.00 0.00 0.00 91.0 84.3 71.8 59.1 47.7 1.127 330 1.496 1.496 1.000 0.000
MVK9316 200 4 1500/2400 375 369 1500 1500 375 200 369 4 1.15 14.98 107.7 341.5 0.470 0.441 0.00 2.50 0.00 93.8 87.6 74.8 60.6 48.2 1.026 342 1.175 1.358 1.000 0.104
MVK9318 220 4 1500/2000 370 409 1500 1500 370 220 409 4 1.63 14.54 98.64 385.3 0.447 0.458 1.00 1.00 0.00 95.1 88.5 75.0 63.1 51.3 1.758 361 1.535 1.513 1.000 0.078
12-34
200 V series
Motor parameters
12.6.3
Motor specification FRENIC-VG code No. F03 F04 F05 P03 P04 P05 P06 P07 P08 P09 P10 P11 P12 P13 P14 P15 P16 P17 P18 P19 P20 P21 P22 P23 P24 P25
%R1 %X
2
Type
[A]
[A]
[%]
[%]
[%]
[%] [%]
Speed
co-ef*. 1
co-ef*. 3
Voltage[V]
Current[A]
co-ef*. [V]
constant [s]
No. of poles
No. of poles
co-ef*. 1 [%]
co-ef*. 2 [%]
co-ef*. 3 [%]
co-ef*. 4 [%]
co-ef*. 5 [%]
R2 correction
R2 correction
Capacity[kW]
Torque current
Secondary time
Induced voltage
Rated current [A]

correction co-ef*.
Rated voltage [V]

Iron loss co-ef*. 1
Iron loss co-ef*. 2
Iron loss co-ef*. 3
Max. speed [r/min]

Rated speed [r/min]
Magnetic saturation
Magnetic saturation
Magnetic saturation
Magnetic saturation
Magnetic saturation
(Rated/Max.)[r/min]
Rated capacity [kW]

MVK6096 0.75 4 1500/3600 160 4.0 1500 1500 160 0.75 5.4 4 4.62 9.16 2.65 4.55 2.360 2.560 2.30 1.90 0.10 94.1 87.8 74.9 62.7 50.2 0.152 96 1.000 1.000 1.000 0.000
MVK6097 1.5 4 1500/3600 160 8.0 1500 1500 160 1.5 9.8 4 8.36 16.59 2.65 9.09 4.700 5.100 2.30 1.90 0.10 94.1 87.8 74.9 62.7 50.2 0.152 96 1.000 1.000 1.000 0.000
MVK6107 2.2 4 1500/3600 160 12.5 1500 1500 160 2.2 12.2 4 7.82 13.73 4.15 11.00 3.340 3.600 4.80 0.00 0.10 93.7 87.1 74.1 60.8 47.8 0.096 116 1.000 1.000 1.000 0.000
MVK6115 3.7 4 1500/3600 160 20 1500 1500 160 3.7 19.9 4 7.06 14.40 7.25 18.60 2.540 3.440 0.00 0.00 0.10 89.4 80.4 66.7 54.5 42.7 0.172 115 1.000 1.000 1.000 0.000
Replacing VG3
MVK6133 5.5 4 1500/3600 160 31 1500 1500 160 5.5 30.2 4 4.88 13.44 14.93 26.10 1.680 2.200 0.00 0.00 0.00 87.1 77.6 63.5 51.8 40.8 0.200 122 1.000 1.000 1.000 0.000
MVK6135 7.5 4 1500/3600 160 41 1500 1500 160 7.5 41.8 4 4.96 13.75 18.90 37.30 1.960 2.000 0.00 0.00 0.00 82.8 72.3 58.6 48.0 38.3 0.220 120 1.000 1.000 1.000 0.000
MVK6165 11 4 1500/3600 160 58 1500 1500 160 11 54.7 4 3.80 13.99 24.00 49.10 1.320 1.500 0.00 0.00 0.00 77.6 79.6 65.9 53.7 43.1 0.320 130 1.000 1.000 1.000 0.000
MVK6167 15 4 1500/3600 160 74 1500 1500 160 15 70.5 4 3.17 13.21 28.20 64.60 1.320 1.520 0.00 0.00 0.00 91.0 83.1 69.0 56.9 45.1 0.336 135 1.000 1.000 1.000 0.000
MVK6185 18.5 4 1500/3600 160 90 1500 1500 160 18.5 89.6 4 2.63 13.94 36.80 81.70 0.820 0.940 0.00 0.00 0.00 89.4 80.0 62.7 50.2 40.0 0.364 131 1.000 1.000 1.000 0.000
12-35
MVK6187 22 4 1500/3600 160 106 1500 1500 160 22 104.3 4 2.49 13.21 45.70 93.80 0.780 1.000 0.00 0.00 0.00 89.4 81.2 67.5 50.2 43.9 0.384 136 1.000 1.000 1.000 0.000
MVK6205 30 4 1500/3000 160 142 1500 1500 160 30 140.6 4 2.59 15.06 51.20 130.9 0.800 0.940 0.00 0.00 0.00 89.8 80.4 65.9 53.7 42.4 0.568 133 1.000 1.000 1.000 0.000
MVK6206 37 4 1500/3000 160 177 1500 1500 160 37 164.5 4 2.46 14.03 51.10 156.3 0.720 0.940 0.00 0.00 0.00 90.6 80.4 65.9 54.1 43.1 0.484 137 1.000 1.000 1.000 0.000
MVK6207 45 4 1500/3000 160 203 1500 1500 160 45 195.6 4 2.50 16.36 54.40 187.9 0.960 1.100 0.00 0.00 0.00 91.4 82.7 69.0 57.3 45.5 0.732 138 1.000 1.000 1.000 0.000

400 V series
Motor parameters
Motor specification FRENIC-VG code No. F03 F04 F05 P03 P04 P05 P06 P07 P08 P09 P10 P11 P12 P13 P14 P15 P16 P17 P18 P19 P20 P21 P22 P23 P24 P25
%R1 %X
2
Type
[A]
[A]
[%]
[%]
[%]
[%] [%]
Speed
co-ef*. 1
co-ef*. 3
Voltage[V]
Current[A]
co-ef*. [V]
constant [s]
No. of poles
No. of poles
co-ef*. 1 [%]
co-ef*. 2 [%]
co-ef*. 3 [%]
co-ef*. 4 [%]
co-ef*. 5 [%]
R2 correction
R2 correction
Capacity[kW]
Torque current
Secondary time
Induced voltage
Rated current [A]

correction co-ef*.
Rated voltage [V]

Iron loss co-ef*. 1
Iron loss co-ef*. 2
Iron loss co-ef*. 3
Max. speed [r/min]

Rated speed [r/min]
Magnetic saturation
Magnetic saturation
Magnetic saturation
Magnetic saturation
Magnetic saturation
(Rated/Max.)[r/min]
Rated capacity [kW]

MVK6115 3.7 4 1500/3600 320 10 1500 1500 320 3.7 10 4 7.07 14.40 3.62 9.30 2.540 3.280 0.00 0.00 0.00 89.4 80.4 66.7 54.5 42.7 0.172 230 1.000 1.000 1.000 0.000
MVK6133 5.5 4 1500/3600 320 15.5 1500 1500 320 5.5 15.1 4 4.89 13.44 7.50 13.10 1.680 1.880 0.00 0.00 0.00 87.1 77.6 63.5 51.8 40.8 0.200 242 1.000 1.000 1.000 0.000
MVK6135 7.5 4 1500/3600 320 20.5 1500 1500 320 7.5 20.3 4 4.84 13.35 9.30 18.00 1.960 2.000 0.00 0.00 0.00 86.7 76.1 60.8 49.4 38.4 0.224 241 1.000 1.000 1.000 0.000
MVK6165 11 4 1500/3600 320 29 1500 1500 320 11 27.4 4 3.79 14.03 12.00 24.60 1.320 1.420 0.00 0.00 0.00 88.6 79.6 65.9 53.7 43.1 0.320 258 1.000 1.000 1.000 0.000
MVK6167 15 4 1500/3600 320 37 1500 1500 320 15 35.3 4 3.17 13.24 14.10 32.30 1.200 1.400 0.00 0.00 0.00 91.0 83.1 69.0 56.9 45.1 0.336 268 1.000 1.000 1.000 0.000
MVK6185 18.5 4 1500/3600 320 45 1500 1500 320 18.5 44.5 4 2.60 13.86 18.10 39.00 0.940 0.960 1.10 3.10 1.70 91.4 83.1 68.6 56.1 45.9 0.412 274 1.000 1.000 1.000 0.000
MVK6187 22 4 1500/3600 320 53 1500 1500 320 22 53.2 4 2.52 13.46 19.90 47.60 0.960 1.000 2.20 1.60 0.70 92.9 85.1 71.4 58.8 46.7 0.412 267 1.000 1.000 1.000 0.000
MVK6205 30 4 1500/3000 320 71 1500 1500 320 30 70.3 4 2.57 15.08 25.60 65.50 0.800 0.940 0.00 0.00 0.00 89.8 80.4 65.9 53.7 42.4 0.568 265 1.000 1.000 1.000 0.000
MVK6206 37 4 1500/3000 320 89 1500 1500 320 37 78.4 4 2.35 13.38 25.20 74.30 0.740 0.860 0.00 0.00 0.00 90.6 80.8 67.5 52.5 40.8 0.460 288 1.000 1.000 1.000 0.000
12-36
MVK6207 45 4 1500/3000 320 102 1500 1500 320 45 97.8 4 2.49 16.38 27.20 94.00 0.840 1.100 0.00 0.00 0.00 91.4 82.7 69.0 57.3 45.5 0.732 277 1.000 1.000 1.000 0.000
MVK5256 75 4 1500/2400 320 170 1500 1500 320 75 170 4 1.73 14.88 47.38 162.8 0.840 0.960 0.00 0.00 0.00 92.6 85.2 72.3 60.5 48.4 0.576 266 1.000 1.000 1.000 0.000
12-36

− dbA Braking transistor error
dbH DB resistor overheat dbH Braking resistor overheat
dcF DC fuse blown dcF DC fuse blown
dO Excessive position deviation dO Excessive position deviation
EF Ground fault EF Ground fault
− EC Encoder communications error
Er1 Memory error Er1 Memory error
Er2 KEYPAD panel communication error Er2 KEYPAD panel communication error
Er3 CPU error Er3 CPU error
Er4 Network error Er4 Network error
Er5 RS-485 communication error Er5 RS-485 communication error
Er6 Operation procedure error Er6 Operation procedure error
Er7 Output wiring error Er7 Output wiring error
Er8 A/D converter error Er8 A/D converter error
Er9 Speed disagreement Er9 Speed disagreement
ErA UPAC error ErA UPAC error
Erb Inter-inverter communication error Erb Inter-inverter communication error
− Err Mock alarm
− Et1 Encoder error
IPE IPM error −
Lin Input phase loss Lin Input phase loss
LU Undervoltage LU Undervoltage
nrb NTC thermistor disconnection nrb NTC thermistor disconnection
OC Overcurrent OC Overcurrent
OH1 Overheating at heat sink OH1 Overheating at heat sink
OH2 External alarm OH2 External alarm
Cahp. 12
OH3 Inverter internal overheat OH3 Inverter internal overheat
OH4 Motor overheat OH4 Motor overheat
OL1 Motor 1 overload OL1 Motor 1 overload
REPLACEMENT DATA

OLU Inverter unit overload OLU Inverter unit overload
− OPL Output phase loss detection
OS Overspeed OS Overspeed
OU Overvoltage OU Overvoltage
PbF Charging circuit error PbF Charging circuit error
− ECF Security circuit error
P9 PG disconnection P9 PG disconnection
− dFA DC fan lock
− ErH Hardware error
12-37
− dbH Braking resistor overheat
dcF DC fuse blown dcF DC fuse blown
− dO Excessive position deviation
Er1 Memory error Er1 Memory error
Er2 KEYPAD panel communication error Er2 KEYPAD panel communication error
Er3 CPU error Er3 CPU error
Er4 T-Link communication error Er4 Network error
Er5 RS485 communication error Er5 RS485 communication error
Er6 Operation procedure error Er6 Operation procedure error
Er7 Output wiring error Er7 Output wiring error
Er8 A/D converter error Er8 A/D converter error
− Er9 Speed disagreement
− ErA UPAC error
− Erb Inter-inverter communication error
− Err Mock alarm
− −
− Lin Input phase loss
nrb NTC thermistor disconnection nrb NTC thermistor disconnection
OH3 Inverter internal overheat OH3 Inverter internal overheat
OL Motor overload OL1 Motor 1 overload
− OL2 Motor 2 overload
OLU Inverter unit overload OLU Inverter unit overload
PbF Charging circuit error PbF Charging circuit error
P9 PG disconnection P9 PG disconnection
− dFA DC fan lock
12-38

− dbH Braking resistor overheat
dCF DC fuse blown dcF DC fuse blown
− dO Excessive position deviation
Rf Memory error Er1 Memory error
− Er2 KEYPAD panel communication error
− Er3 CPU error
OPF T-Link communication error Er4 Network error
− Er5 RS485 communication error
− Er6 Operation procedure error
− Er7 Output wiring error
CF Current detection circuit error −
− Er8 A/D converter error
− Er9 Speed disagreement
− ErA UPAC error
− Erb Inter-inverter communication error
− Err Mock alarm
− IPE IPM error
− Lin Input phase loss
rb NTC thermistor disconnection nrb NTC thermistor disconnection
− OH3 Inverter internal overheat
Cahp. 12
REPLACEMENT DATA
OL Inverter overload OLU Inverter overload

− PbF Charging circuit error
− P9 PG disconnection
− dFA DC fan lock
12-39
12.8 Options
Name FRENIC5000 VG7S option Alternative FRENIC-VG option
Synchro. interface OPC-VG7-SN OPC-VG1-SN (Available soon)
F/V converter OPC-VG7-FV OPC-VG1-FV (Available soon)
Aio expansion card OPC-VG7-AIO OPC-VG1-AIO
Di interface card OPC-VG7-DI OPC-VG1-DI
DIO expansion card OPC-VG7-DIO OPC-VG1-DIO
RG interface expansion card OPC-VG7-PG OPC-VG1-PG
OPC-VG7-PGo OPC-VG1-PGo
T-Link interface card OPC-VG7-TL OPC-VG1-TL
Highspeed serial card OPC-VG7-SI OPC-VG1-TBSI
OPC-VG7-SIU OPC-VG1-SIU (Available soon)
RS485 expansion card OPC-VG7-RS Built-in.
CC-Link interface card OPC-VG7-CCL OPC-VG1-CCL
For synchronous motor driving OPC-VG7-PMPG OPC-VG1-PMPG
PG card OPC-VG7-PMPGo OPC-VG1-PMPGo
UPAC OPC-VG7-UPAC OPC-VG1-UPAC (Available soon)
SX bus interface card OPC-VG7-SX OPC-VG1-SX
PROFIBUS-DP OPC-VG7-PDP OPC-VG1-PDP (Available soon)
DeviceNet OPC-VG7-DEV OPC-VG1-DEV (Available soon)
Synchro. interface MCA-VG7-SN MCA-VG1-SN (Available soon)
F/V converter MCA-VG7-FV MCA-VG1-FV (Available soon)
Dancer controller MCAII-PU MCAII-PU (Available soon)
PG switcher MCAII-VG7-CPG MCAII-VG1-CPG (Available soon)
Braking unit Depends on the capacity Depends on the capacity
(Built-in for 55 kW or less of 200V
series, and for 160 kW or less of
400V series)
Braking resistor Depends on the capacity Depends on the capacity
AC reactor Depends on the capacity Depends on the capacity
DC REACTOR Depends on the capacity Depends on the capacity
(Provided as standard for units of
more than 75 kW)
Ferrite ring for reducing radio noise. ACL-40B, ACL-74B
Zero-phase reactor
KEYPAD panel CBIII-10R-2S Extension cable for extension
extension cable CBIII-10R-1C operation
CBIII-10R-2C CB-ϒS
12-40
12.8 Options

Name FRENIC5000 VG5S option Alternative FRENIC-VG option
Adder OPCII-VG3-AD
I/V, V/I converter OPCII-VG3-IV
Comparator OPCII-VG3-CP
Isolation converter OPCII-VG3-IA
F/V converter OPCII-VG3-FV OPC-VG1-FV (Available soon)
Synchro. interface OPCII-VG3-SN OPC-VG1-SN (Available soon)
Di interface OPCII-VG5-DIN OPC-VG1-DI (DIA, DIB)
OPCII-VG5-DIT OPC-VG1-DI (DIA, DIB)
DIO expansion card OPCII-VG5-DIO OPC-VG1-DIO (DIOA)
T-Link interface card OPCII-VG5-TL OPC-VG1-TL
PG interface card OPCII-VG5-PG1 Built-in.
OPCII-VG5-PG2 OPC-VG1-PG
Pulse train interface card OPCII-VG5-PTI OPC-VG1-PG
Adder MCAII-VG3-AD
I/V, V/I converter MCAII-VG3-IV
Comparator MCAII-VG3-CP
Isolation converter MCAII-VG3-IA
F/V converter MCAII-VG3-FV MCA-VG1-FV (Available in the
near future)
Synchro. interface MCAII-VG5-SN MCA-VG1-SN (Available in the
near future)
Dancer controller MCAII-PU
Relay unit MCAII-RY
PG switcher MCAII-VG5-CPG MCA-VG1-CPG (Available in the
near future)
400V series)
Cahp. 12
more than 75 kW)
REPLACEMENT DATA
Ferrite ring for reducing radio noise. ACL-40B, ACL-74B

Zero-phase reactor
KEYPAD panel CBIII-10R-2S Extension cable for extension
extension cable CBIII-10R-1C operation
CBIII-10R-2C CB-ϒS
12-41
Name FRENIC5000 VG3 option Alternative FRENIC-VG option
Adder OPCII-VG3-AD
I/V, V/I converter OPCII-VG3-IV
Comparator OPCII-VG3-CP
Isolation converter OPCII-VG3-IA
F/V converter OPCII-VG3-FV OPC-VG1-FV (Available in the
near future)
Synchro. interface OPCII-VG3-SN OPC-VG1-SN (Available in the
near future)
Di interface OPCII-VG3-DI OPC-VG1-DI(DIA, DIB)
AO interface OPCII-VG3-AO OPC-VG1-AIO
T-Link interface card OPCII-VG3-T2 OPC-VG1-TL
OPCII-VG3-TL
Adder MCAII-VG3-AD
I/V, V/I converter MCAII-VG3-IV
Comparator MCAII-VG3-CP
Isolation converter MCAII-VG3-IA
F/V converter MCAII-VG3-FV MCA-VG1-FV (Available in the
near future)
Synchro. interface MCAII-VG5-SN MCA-VG1-SN (Available in the
near future)
Dancer controller MCAII-PU
Relay unit MCAII-RY
Ground fault detection unit MCAII-GFD-1 For the output circuit, the ground
MCAII-GFD-2 fault detection function is included
as standard.
400V series)
more than 75 kW)
Ferrite ring for reducing radio noise. ACL-10A
Zero-phase reactor
12-42
FRENIC- VG
13
Chapter 13
TROUBLESHOOTING
This chapter describes troubleshooting procedures to be followed when the inverter malfunctions or detects
an alarm or a light alarm condition. In this chapter, first check whether any alarm code or the "light alarm"
indication (l-al) is displayed or not, and then proceed to the troubleshooting items.
Contents
13.1 Protective Functions.................................................................................................................................. 13-1

13.2 Before Proceeding with Troubleshooting.................................................................................................. 13-2
13.3 If an alarm code appears on the LED monitor .......................................................................................... 13-3
13.3.1 List of alarm codes ............................................................................................................................ 13-3
13.3.2 Possible causes of alarms, checks and measures............................................................................... 13-5
[ 1 ] dba Braking transistor error ................................................................................................... 13-5
[ 2 ] dbh Braking resistor overheated............................................................................................. 13-5
[ 3 ] dcf Fuse blown ...................................................................................................................... 13-5
[ 4 ] dfa DC fan locked ................................................................................................................. 13-6
[ 5 ] d0 Excessive positioning deviation......................................................................................... 13-6
[ 6 ] ef Ground fault....................................................................................................................... 13-6
[ 7 ] er1 Memory error .................................................................................................................. 13-7
[ 8 ] er2 Keypad communications error ........................................................................................ 13-7
[ 9 ] er3 CPU error ........................................................................................................................ 13-8
[ 10 ] er4 Network error.................................................................................................................. 13-8
[ 11 ] er5 RS-485 communications error ........................................................................................ 13-9
[ 12 ] er6 Operation error.............................................................................................................. 13-10
[ 13 ] er7 Output wiring fault........................................................................................................ 13-11
[ 14 ] er8 A/D converter error ....................................................................................................... 13-11
[ 15 ] er9 Speed mismatch ............................................................................................................ 13-12
[ 16 ] erb Inter-inverter communications link error ...................................................................... 13-13
[ 17 ] erh Hardware error .............................................................................................................. 13-13
[ 18 ] err Mock alarm ................................................................................................................... 13-13
[ 19 ] lin Power supply phase loss................................................................................................ 13-14
[ 20 ] loc Start delay ..................................................................................................................... 13-14
[ 21 ] lu Undervoltage.................................................................................................................... 13-15
[ 22 ] nrb NTC thermistor wire break error................................................................................... 13-16
[ 23 ] 0c Overcurrent ...................................................................................................................... 13-16
[ 24 ] 0h1 Heat sink overheat......................................................................................................... 13-18
[ 25 ] 0h2 External alarm ............................................................................................................... 13-18
[ 26 ] 0h3 Inverter internal overheat .............................................................................................. 13-19
[ 27 ] 0h4 Motor overheat (PTC/NTC thermistor)......................................................................... 13-19
[ 28 ] 0ln Overload of motor 1 through 3...................................................................................... 13-20
[ 29 ] 0lu Inverter overload ........................................................................................................... 13-21
[ 30 ] 0pl Output phase loss .......................................................................................................... 13-22
[ 31 ] 05 Overspeed ........................................................................................................................ 13-22
[ 32 ] 0u Overvoltage...................................................................................................................... 13-23
[ 33 ] p9 PG wire break .................................................................................................................. 13-24
[ 34 ] pbf Charger circuit fault ...................................................................................................... 13-25
13.4 If the "Light Alarm" Indication (l-al) Appears on the LED Monitor....................................................... 13-26
13.5 If Neither an Alarm Code Nor "Light Alarm" Indication (l-al) Appears on the LED Monitor.......... 13-27
13.5.1 Abnormal motor operation .............................................................................................................. 13-27
[ 1 ] The motor does not rotate........................................................................................................ 13-27
[ 2 ] The motor rotates, but the speed does not change................................................................... 13-29
[ 3 ] The motor runs in the opposite direction to the command. ..................................................... 13-31
[ 4 ] Speed fluctuation or current oscillation (e.g., hunting) occurs during running at constant
speed. ..................................................................................................................................... 13-31
[ 5 ] Grating sound is heard from the motor or the motor sound fluctuates. ................................... 13-32
[ 6 ] The motor does not accelerate or decelerate within the specified time. .................................. 13-32
[ 7 ] The motor does not restart even after the power recovers from a momentary power failure. . 13-33
[ 8 ] The motor abnormally heats up............................................................................................... 13-34
[ 9 ] The motor does not run as expected. ....................................................................................... 13-34
[ 10 ] When the motor accelerates or decelerates, the speed is not stable......................................... 13-34
[ 11 ] The motor stalls during acceleration. ...................................................................................... 13-35
[ 12 ] When the T-Link communications option is in use, neither a run command nor a speed
command takes effect............................................................................................................. 13-35
[ 13 ] When the SX-bus communications option is in use, neither a run command nor a speed
[ 14 ] When the CC-Link communications option is in use, neither a run command nor a speed
[ 15 ] _ _ _ _ (under bar) appears...................................................................................................... 13-37
13.5.2 Problems with inverter settings ....................................................................................................... 13-38
[ 1 ] Nothing appears on the monitors............................................................................................. 13-38
[ 2 ] The desired function code does not appear.............................................................................. 13-38
[ 3 ] Data of function codes cannot be changed from the keypad. .................................................. 13-39
[ 4 ] Data of function codes cannot be changed via the communications link. ............................... 13-39

The FRENIC-VG series of inverters has various protective functions as listed below to prevent the system
from going down and reduce system downtime. The protective functions marked with an asterisk (*) in the
table are disabled by default. Enable them according to your needs.
The protective functions include, for example, the "heavy alarm" detection function which, upon detection of
an abnormal state, displays the alarm code and causes the inverter to trip, the "light alarm" detection function
which displays the alarm code but lets the inverter continue the current operation, and other warning signal
output functions.
If any problem arises, understand the protective functions listed below and follow the procedures given in
Section 13.2 and onwards for troubleshooting.
Protective function Description

This function detects an abnormal state, displays the corresponding alarm code, and
causes the inverter to trip. The "heavy alarm" codes are check-marked in the "Heavy
alarm" object column in Table 13.1. For details of each alarm code, see the
"Heavy alarm" detection corresponding item in the troubleshooting.
The inverter retains the latest and the last 10 alarm codes (see Section 3.4.4.9) and the
latest and the last three pieces of alarm information (see Section 3.4.4.8). It can also
display them.
This function detects an abnormal state categorized as a "light alarm," displays l-al
and lets the inverter continue the current operation without tripping.
It is possible to define which abnormal states should be categorized as a "light alarm"
"Light alarm" detection* using function codes H81 and H82. The "light alarm" codes are check-marked in the
"Light alarm" object column in Table 13.1.
For instructions on how to check and release light alarms, see Section 3.4.3.5
"Monitoring light alarms, How to remove the current light alarm."
When the torque command exceeds the torque limiter level (F44, F45) during
Stall prevention acceleration/ deceleration or constant speed running, this function limits the motor
torque generated in order to avoid an overcurrent trip.
Automatic lowering of Before the inverter trips due to an abnormal surrounding temperature or output current,
carrier frequency this function automatically lowers the carrier frequency to avoid a trip.
When the inverter output current has exceeded the specified level, this function issues
Motor overload early
the "Motor overload early warning" signal OL before the thermal overload protection
warning*
function causes the inverter to trip for motor protection.
When the inverter has stopped because of a trip, this function allows the inverter to
Auto-reset* automatically reset and restart itself. (The number of retries and the latency between
stop and reset can be specified.)
This function protects the inverter from a surge voltage invaded between main circuit Chap. 13
Surge protection
power lines and the ground.
TROUBLESHOOTING
13-1
13.2 Before Proceeding with Troubleshooting
• If any of the protective functions has been activated, first remove the cause. Then, after checking that the all run
commands are set to OFF, release the alarm. If the alarm is released while any run commands are set to ON, the
inverter may supply the power to the motor, running the motor.
Injury may occur.
• Even if the inverter has interrupted power to the motor, if the voltage is applied to the main circuit input terminals
L1/R, L2/S and L3/T, voltage may be output to inverter output terminals U, V, and W.
• Turn OFF the power and wait at least five minutes for inverters with a capacity of 22 kW or below, or at
least ten minutes for inverters with a capacity of 30 kW or above. Make sure that the LED monitor and
charging lamp are turned OFF. Further, make sure, using a multimeter or a similar instrument, that the DC link bus
voltage between the terminals P (+) and N (-) has dropped to the safe level (+25 VDC or below).
Electric shock may occur.
Follow the procedure below to solve problems.

(1) First, check that the inverter is correctly wired, referring to Chapter 2, Section 2.3.1 "Wiring of main
circuit terminals and grounding terminals."
(2) Check whether an alarm code or the "light alarm" indication (l-al) is displayed on the LED monitor.
z If an alarm code appears on the LED monitor Go to Section 13.3.
z If the "light alarm" indication (l-al) appears on the LED monitor Go to Section 13.4.
z If neither an alarm code nor "light alarm" indication (l-al) appears on the LED monitor
Abnormal motor operation Go to Section 13.5.1.
[1] The motor does not rotate.
[2] The motor rotates, but the speed does not change.
[3] The motor runs in the opposite direction to the command.
[4] Speed fluctuation or current oscillation (e.g., hunting) occurs during running at constant
speed.
[5] Grating sound is heard from the motor or the motor sound fluctuates.
[6] The motor does not accelerate or decelerate within the specified time.
[7] The motor does not restart even after the power recovers from a momentary power failure.
[8] The motor abnormally heats up.
[9] The motor does not run as expected.
[ 10 ] When the motor accelerates or decelerates, the speed is not stable.
[ 11 ] The motor stalls during acceleration.
[ 12 ] When the T-Link communications option is in use, neither a run command nor a speed
command takes effect.
[ 13 ] When the SX-bus communications option is in use, neither a run command nor a speed
[ 14 ] When the CC-Link communications option is in use, neither a run command nor a speed
[ 15 ] _ _ _ _ (under bars) appears.
Problems with inverter settings Go to Section 13.5.2.

[1] Nothing appears on the monitors.
[2] The desired function code does not appear.
[3] Data of function codes cannot be changed from the keypad.
[4] Data of function codes cannot be changed via the communications link.
If any problems persist after the above recovery procedure, contact your Fuji Electric representative.
13-2
13.3 If an alarm code appears on the LED monitor

13.3.1 List of alarm codes
If the inverter detects an alarm, check whether any alarm code appears on the 7-segment LED monitor of the
keypad.
As listed below, some alarm codes are followed by alarm sub codes that denote the detailed error causes. For
alarm codes not followed by alarm sub codes, "--" is written in the table below.
* For the alarm sub code checking procedure, refer to Chapter 3, Section 3.4.4.8 "Reading alarm
information--Menu #7 "ALM INF."
* For alarm codes followed by alarm sub codes listed as "For particular manufacturers," inform your Fuji
Electric representative of the alarm sub code also when contacting or asking him/her to repair the inverter.
Table 13.1 Abnormal States Detectable ("Heavy Alarm" and "Light Alarm" Objects)
"Heavy "Light
Alarm Retry Alarm sub Detailed error cause * Ref.
Error cause alarm" alarm"
code objects objects objects code * page
dba Braking transistor broken √ -- -- -- -- 13-5
dbh Braking resistor overheated √ -- √ -- -- 13-5
dcf DC fuse blown √ -- -- -- -- 13-5
dfa DC fan locked √ √ -- -- -- 13-6
d0 Excessive positioning deviation √ -- -- -- -- 13-6
For particular
ec PG communication error √ -- -- 0001 to 2000 manufacturers * --
ENABLE circuit (safety stop circuit)
ecf √ √ -- -- -- --
failure
ef Ground fault √ -- -- -- -- 13-6
For particular
er1 Memory error √ -- -- 0001 to 0008 manufacturers * 13-7
0001 Wire break detected
er2 Keypad communications error √ -- -- Wire break detected 13-7
0002 (during keypad
operation)
For particular
er3 CPU error √ -- -- 0001 to 0008 manufacturers * 13-8
See the related
er4 Network error √ √ -- 0001 to 0004 13-8
option manual.
Communications
0001 error (timeout)
er5 RS-485 communications error √ √ -- Communications 13-9
0002 error (transmission
error)
Option mounting
0001 Chap. 13
error
er6 Operation error √ -- -- 0002 Auto-tuning failed 13-10
For particular
0008 manufacturers *
Output wiring fault
0001
TROUBLESHOOTING
during tuning
Speed not arrived
er7 Output wiring fault √ -- -- 0002 during tuning with 13-11
the motor running
For particular
0004 to 0008 manufacturers *
For particular
er8 A/D converter error √ -- -- 0001 to 0004 13-11
manufacturers *
0001 Motor 1 speed not
agreed
Motor 2 speed not
0002 agreed
er9 Speed not agreed √ √ -- 13-12
Motor 3 speed not
0003 agreed
Machine runaway
0004 detected (by H149)
13-3
Table 13.1 Abnormal States Detectable ("Heavy Alarm" and "Light Alarm" Objects) (Continued)
"Heavy "Light
Retry Alarm sub Ref.
Code Name alarm" alarm" Detailed error cause *
objects code * page
objects objects
See the related
era UPAC error √ -- -- 0001 to 0004 --
option manual.
Inter-inverter communications link
erb √ √ -- -- -- 13-13
error
For particular
erh Hardware error √ -- -- 0001 to 1000 13-13
manufacturers *
err Mock alarm √ √ -- -- -- 13-13
et1 PG failure √ -- -- -- -- --
lin Power supply phase loss √ -- -- -- -- 13-14
loc Start delay √ √ -- -- -- 13-14
lu Undervoltage √ -- -- -- -- 13-15
nrb NTC thermistor wire break error √ √ -- -- -- 13-16
For particular
0001 to 0004
manufacturers *
0c Overcurrent √ -- √ Demagnetizing 13-16
0100 limit current for
PMSM
Protection by
0001 to 0008
thermistor
0h1 Heat sink overheat √ -- √ 13-18
For particular
0010 to 0200
manufacturers *
Protection by THR
0h2 External alarm √ √ -- 0001 13-18
signal
Protection by
0001 to 0008
thermistor
0h3 Inverter internal overheat √ -- √ 13-19
For particular
0010
manufacturers *
0h4 Motor overheat √ √ √ -- -- 13-19
0l1 Motor 1 overload √ √ √ -- --
0l2 Motor 2 overload √ √ √ -- -- 13-20
0l3 Motor 3 overload √ √ √ -- --
For particular
0lu Inverter overload √ -- √ 0001 to 0002 13-21
manufacturers *
Loss of one or more
0001
phases
0pl Output phase loss √ -- -- 13-22
Loss of two or more
0002
phases
0s Overspeed √ -- -- -- -- 13-22
For particular
0u Overvoltage √ -- -- 0001 13-23
manufacturers *
Wire break detected
0001 (inverter unit, PA
and PB)
Wire break detected
p9 PG wire break √ -- -- 0002 13-24
(option)
Power shutdown
0003 detected (inverter
unit)
For particular
pbf Charger circuit fault √ -- -- 0001 to 0002 13-25
manufacturers *
13-4
13.3.2 Possible causes of alarms, checks and measures

[ 1 ] dba Braking transistor error
Problem A braking transistor error is detected.

(1) The braking transistor is Check whether resistance of the braking resistor is correct or there is a
broken. misconnection of the resistor.
Î Ask your Fuji Electric representative to repair the inverter.
[ 2 ] dbh Braking resistor overheated

Problem The electronic thermal protection for the braking resistor has been activated.

(1) Braking load is too heavy. Reconsider the relationship between the estimated braking load and the real
one.
Î Lower the real braking load.
Î Review the selection of the braking resistor and increase the braking
capability (Modification of related function code data (E35, E36, E37)
is also required.)
(2) Specified deceleration time Recalculate the deceleration torque and time needed for the load currently
is too short. applied, based on a moment of inertia for the load and the deceleration time.
Î Increase the deceleration time (F08, C36, C47, C57, C67).
Î Review the selection of the braking resistor and increase the braking
capability. (Modification of related function code data (E35, E36, E37)
is also required.)
(3) Incorrect setting of function Recheck the specifications of the braking resistor.
code data (E35, E36, E37). Î Review data of function codes E35, E36 and E37, then modify them.
[ 3 ] dcf Fuse blown

Problem The fuse inside the inverter blew. (Applicable to the inverters of 75 kW or above (200 V class
series) and those of 90 kW or above (400 V class series))
If the fuse has blown, the internal elements may be broken. NEVER turn the power ON to prevent
the secondary damage. Contact your Fuji Electric representative.

Chap. 13
(1) The fuse blew due to Check whether there has been any excess surge or noise coming from
short-circuiting inside the outside.
inverter. Î Take measures against surges and noise.
TROUBLESHOOTING
(2) The fuse blew due to ground Disconnect the wiring from the output terminals [U], [V] and [W] and
faults that have occurred at perform a Megger test for the inverter and the motor.
the inverter output lines. Î Remove the grounded parts (including replacement of the wires, relay
terminals and motor).
Î Ask your Fuji Electric representative to repair the inverter or the motor.
(3) Miswiring of main circuit Check the wiring.
power lines and output Î Ask your Fuji Electric representative to repair the inverter.
lines.
13-5
[ 4 ] dfa DC fan locked
Problem The DC fan has stopped. (Applicable to the inverters of 45 kW or above (200 V class series) and
those of 75 kW or above (400 V class series))
(1) The service life of the DC The DC fan has stopped although the main power is ON.
fan has expired or the DC (Check the DC fan state with the cooling fan ON/OFF control disabled with
fan is defective. H06 = 0.)
Î Replace the DC fan.
Î Disable the DC fan locked signal output (treat it as a light alarm) to keep
the inverter running by setting "1" to the hundreds digit of H108 (Light
alarm object definition) to "1" (H108 = 1).
If the DC fan has stopped, replace the fan immediately and revert the
data of H108 to the factory default. Leaving the DC fan stopped causes
an inverter internal overheat trip or a local temperature rise that shortens
the service life of electrolytic capacitors and other electronic devices on
the printed circuit boards in the inverter unit, in the worst case, it results
in a broken inverter unit.
[ 5 ] d0 Excessive positioning deviation

Problem An excessive positioning deviation has occurred.

(1) Wrong wiring to the motor. Check the wiring to the motor.
Î Connect the inverter output terminals U, V, and W to the motor input
terminals U, V, and W, respectively.
It is also possible to use H75 (Phase sequence configuration of main
circuit output wires).
(2) The motor cannot rotate Î Check whether the brake is applied.
mechanically.
(3) Output torque too small. Î Increase the torque limiter value (F44, F45).
(4) Deviation override width Î Review the deviation override width (o18).
too small.
(5) Insufficient gain in Î Readjust the positioning loop gain (o16).
positioning control system.
(6) The acceleration/ Î Increase the acceleration/deceleration time.
deceleration by pulse train
command is too rapid.
[ 6 ] ef Ground fault
Problem A ground fault current flew from the output terminal of the inverter.

(1) Inverter output terminal(s) Disconnect the wiring from the output terminals [U], [V] and [W] and
grounded (ground fault). perform a Megger test for the inverter and the motor.
Î Remove the grounded parts (including replacement of the wires, relay
(2) The setting of the motor Check whether an extremely small motor rated current is set relative to the
rated current (P04, A03, inverter rated current.
A103) is small relative to Î Check the setting of the motor rated current (P04, A03, A103).
the inverter rated current. Î Disable the ground fault detection by setting "0" to the hundreds digit of
H103 (Protection/maintenance function 1).
13-6
[ 7 ] er1 Memory error

Problem Error occurred in writing data to the memory in the inverter.

(1) When writing data Initialize the function code data by setting H03 to "1." After initialization,
(especially initializing or check if pressing the key releases the alarm.
copying data), the inverter Î Revert the initialized function code data to their previous customized
was shut down so that the settings (See Note below), then restart the operation.
voltage to the control PCB
has dropped.
(2) Inverter affected by strong Check if appropriate noise control measures have been implemented (e.g.,
electrical noise when correct grounding and routing of control and main circuit wires). Also,
writing data (especially perform the same check as described in (1) above.
initializing or copying data). Î Implement noise control measures. Revert the initialized function code
data to their previous customized settings (See Note below), then restart
the operation.
(3) Control circuit failure. Initialize the function code data by setting H03 to "1," then reset the alarm
[Sub code: 0001 to 0008] by pressing the key and check that the alarm goes on.
Î The control PCB (on which the CPU is mounted) is defective and needs
to be replaced.
Ask your Fuji Electric representative to repair the inverter.
Inform the representative of the alarm sub code displayed.
(4) Highly-frequent rewriting to Function code data has been frequently changed.
the non-volatile memory Î The non-volatile memory needs to be replaced.
has reached the limit of the Ask your Fuji Electric representative to repair the inverter.
electronic device (approx. Inform the representative of the alarm sub code displayed.
1,000,000 times). Î Decrease the frequency of rewriting. Decrease the frequency of full save
[Sub code: 0001 to 0008] operations.
Note: Function code data can be easily reverted to the previously customized settings by using the backup
data copied in the keypad memory with Menu #10 "DATA COPY" in Programming mode. (Refer to Chapter
3, Section 3.4.4.10 "Copying data")
[ 8 ] er2 Keypad communications error

Problem A communications error occurred between the keypad and the inverter.

(1) Broken communications Check continuity of the cable, contacts and connections.
cable or poor contact. Î Re-insert the connector firmly. Chap. 13
[Sub code: 0001] Î Replace the cable.
(2) Connecting many control Check the mounting condition of the front cover.
wires hinders the front cover Î Use wires of the recommended size (0.75 mm2) for wiring.
TROUBLESHOOTING
from being mounted, lifting Î Change the wiring layout inside the unit so that the front cover can be
the keypad. mounted firmly.
[Sub code: 0001]
electrical noise. correct grounding and routing of communication cables and main circuit
[Sub code: 0002] wires).
Î Implement noise control measures.
(4) A keypad failure occurred. Replace the keypad with another one and check whether a keypad
communications error (er2 ) occurs.
Î Replace the keypad.
(5) A keypad designed for any Check whether the connected keypad is a multi-function keypad designed
other series of inverters is for FRENIC-Mini/-Eco/-Multi/-MEGA/-Lift.
connected. Î Replace the keypad with the one designed for the FRENIC-VG.
13-7
[ 9 ] er3 CPU error
Problem A CPU error (e.g. erratic CPU operation) occurred.

(1) Inverter affected by strong Check if appropriate noise control measures have been implemented (e.g.
electrical noise. correct grounding and routing of signal wires, communications cables, and
main circuit wires).
(2) Short circuit on the printed Check the printed circuit board(s) for short circuits, accumulation of dust or
circuit board(s). dirt.
[Sub code: 0001 to 0008] Î Ask your Fuji Electric representative to repair the inverter.
To remove the er3 CPU error, turn the power to the inverter OFF and then ON. The error cannot
be removed by pressing the key.
[ 10 ] er4 Network error

Problem The connected option card detected an error.
c For T-Link option
(1) The power to the MICREX Check the power to the MICREX IO terminal.
IO terminal is OFF. Î Turn ON the power to the MICREX IO terminal and reset the inverter
alarm state.
(2) T-Link address double Check the T-Link address.
assigned. Î Set a new T-Link address.
(3) Wrong wiring. Check that:
• The T-Link network has a terminating resistor at each end.
• The specified cable is used.
• There is no wire break.
• The wiring length is within the range of the specification.
• The shielded wires are properly treated.
• The SD terminal of the T-Link is not connected to a frame ground (FG).
• A crimp terminal is used for connection.
• The signal lines are not wired in parallel with the power lines.
d For SX-bus option

(1) The SX-bus power is shut Check the power to the SX-bus and the status of the PLC's CPU module.
down or the PLC's CPU Î Turn ON the power to the SX-bus, recover the PLC's CPU module, and
module is down. reset the inverter alarm state.
(2) An error has occurred at any Check the detailed RAS information on the PLC's CPU module to find a
other station. faulty station.
Î Recover the faulty station and reset the inverter alarm state.
13-8

• The SX-bus network has a terminating connector at each end.
• A dedicated cable is used.
• Connection to the IN and OUT connector is proper.
• The total extension length of the SX bus cable does not exceed 25 m. The
number of devices connected in succession does not exceed 10.
• The SX bus cable is not bent with the bend radius of 50 mm or below.
Î Correct wiring.
e For CC-Link option

(1) The power to the PLC is Check the power to the PLC and the status of the PLC's CPU module.
shut down or the PLC's CPU Î Turn ON the power to the PLC, recover the PLC's CPU module, and
module is down. reset the inverter alarm state.
(2) An error has occurred at any Check the detailed RAS information on the PLC's CPU module to find a
other station. faulty station.
Î Recover the faulty station and reset the inverter alarm state.
• The CC-Link network has a terminating resistor at each end.
• A dedicated cable is used.
• Connection to the terminal block is proper.
• The maximum cable length of the CC-link cable, inter-station cable
length, and the number of devices connected are as specified.
Î Correct wiring.
[ 11 ] er5 RS-485 communications error

Problem A communications error occurred during RS-485 communication.

(1) Communications conditions Compare the settings of function codes H32 to H40 with those of the host
of the inverter do not match equipment. Chap. 13
that of the host equipment. Î Correct any settings that differ.
[Sub code: 0002]
(2) Even though no-response Check the host equipment.
TROUBLESHOOTING
error detection time (H38) Î Change the settings of host equipment software or disable the
has been set, no-response error detection (H38 = 0).
communication is not
performed within the
specified cycle.
[Sub code: 0001]
(3) The host equipment did not Check the host equipment (e.g., PLCs and host computers).
operate due to defective Î Remove the cause of the equipment error.
software, settings, or
defective hardware.
[Sub code: 0002]
13-9
(4) The RS-485 converter did Check the RS-485 converter (e.g., check for poor contact or incorrect
not operate due to incorrect connections).
connections and settings, or Î Change the various RS-485 converter settings, reconnect the wires, or
defective hardware. replace hardware with recommended devices as appropriate.
(5) Broken communications Check the continuity of the cables, contacts and connections.
cable or poor contact. Î Replace the cable.
electrical noise. correct grounding and routing of communications cables and main circuit
wires).
Check if decreasing the baud rate (H34) down to 2400 bps causes no alarm.
Î Implement noise reduction measures on the host side.
Î Replace the RS-485 converter with a recommended insulated one.
Î Keep the inverter running, using any proper communications error
processing (H32).
(7) Terminating resistor not Check that the inverter serves as a terminating device in the network.
properly configured. Î Configure the terminating resistor switch (SW4) for RS-485
communication correctly. (To use the inverter as a terminating device,
turn the switch to the ON position.)
(8) Response interval does not Check whether the specified response interval (H39) matches the
match the send/receive specification of the actual converter.
switching time of the Î Match the response interval (H39) with the specification of the
RS-232C−RS-485 converter.
converter.
[ 12 ] er6 Operation error

Problem An incorrect operation was attempted.

(1) Restrictions on mounting of Check the model of option(s) mounted.
option(s) not observed. Î Check the restrictions on mounting of the option(s).
[Sub code: 0001] (This error cannot be shown as mounting status of control options on the
OPTION pages of the LCD monitor in Menu #4 "I/O CHECK.")
Check whether the configurations of the customizing switches (SW) on the
two option boards are the same.
Î Change the SW configuration.
(2) Auto-tuning not performed Check whether tuning started with digital input BX, STOP1, STOP2 or
in accordance with correct STOP3 being ON.
procedure. Î With all of BX, STOP1, STOP2 and STOP3 being OFF, start tuning.
[Sub code: 0002] Check whether tuning started with digital input EN1 or EN2 being opened.
Î With each of EN1 and EN2 being short-circuited with PS, start tuning.
Check whether 20 seconds or more have elapsed after writing to H01 until
the key is pressed.
Î Press the key within 20 seconds after writing to H01.
Î Before writing to H01, make sure that F02 = 0 and H30 = 0 or 1.
(3) PG detection circuit Check whether the PG (SD)/PGo (SD) card is mounted.
self-diagnosis function Î Remove the PG (SD)/PGo (SD) card, then perform the self-diagnosis
performed with the PG function of the PG detection circuit (H74).
(SD)/PGo (SD) card being
mounted.
13-10

(4) The multiplex system Î Review the settings of o50 and o34.
station number of the optical
link option (specified by
o50) is greater than the
setting of o34 (Number of
slaves).
(5) Motor drive control other Î Change the motor drive control to the vector control.
than the vector control (e.g.,
V/f control) is selected with
an optical link option being
used.
[ 13 ] er7 Output wiring fault

Problem Auto-tuning failed.

(1) A phase was missing (There Î Properly connect the motor to the inverter.
was a phase loss) in the
connection between the
inverter and the motor.
[Sub code: 0001]
(2) A tuning operation Check that the brake can be released.
involving motor rotation Î Specify the tuning that does not involve the motor rotation (H01 = 2 or
(H01 = 4) was attempted 3).
while the brake was applied Î Release the brake before tuning that involves the motor rotation (H01 =
to the motor. 4).
[Sub code: 0002]
[ 14 ] er8 A/D converter error

Problem An error occurred in the A/D converter circuit.
(1) Inverter affected by strong Check if appropriate noise control measures have been implemented (e.g.
electrical noise. correct grounding and routing of signal wires, communications cables, and
Chap. 13
(2) Short circuit on the printed Check the printed circuit board(s) for short circuits, accumulation of dust or
circuit board(s). dirt.
[Sub code: 0001 to 0004] Check for dew condensation in the inverter unit.
Check whether foreign materials have gotten into the inverter unit.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Î Fix the printed circuit board(s).

13-11
[ 15 ] er9 Speed mismatch
Problem An excessive deviation has occurred between the speed command and the detected speed.

(1) Incorrect setting of function Check the data of the following function codes; P05, A07 and A107 (Motor,
code data. No. of poles), P28, A30 and A130 (Feedback encoder pulse count/rev), and
[Sub code: 0001 to 0003] P29, A51 and A151 (Feedback pulse correction factor 1).
Î Specify motor parameters in accordance with the motor and PG.
Î Review the data of the following function codes.
• E43 (Speed agreement, Detection width)
• E44 (Speed agreement, Off-delay timer)
• E45 (Speed agreement, Alarm)
(2) Overload. Measure the inverter output current.
[Sub code: 0001 to 0003] Î Reduce the load.
Î Increase the inverter capacity.
Check whether any mechanical brake is working.
Î Release the mechanical brake.
(3) Mismatch between function Check the motor parameters.
code settings and the motor Î Perform auto-tuning, using H01.
characteristics.
[Sub code: 0001 to 0003]
(4) Wrong wiring between the Check the wiring between the PG and the inverter.
pulse generator (PG) and Î Correct the wiring.
the inverter. (Refer to Chapter 3, Section 3.5.2 "Mounting direction of a pulse
[Sub code: 0001 to 0003] generator (PG) and PG signals.")
Check that the relationships between the PG feedback signal and the run
command are as follows:
• For the FWD command: the B phase pulse is in the High level at rising
edge of the A phase pulse
• For the REV command: the B phase pulse is in the Low level at rising
Î If the relationship is wrong, interchange the A and B phase wires.
Î Note that if the digital input signal IVS ("Switch normal/inverse
operation") is active, the above operation is reversed.
[Sub code: 0001 to 0003] Î Connect the inverter output terminals U, V, and W to the motor input
Under vector control Check the setting of the torque limiter level (F44, F45).
with/without speed sensor Î Change the F44 or F45 data to an appropriate value. If no torque limiter
(6) The motor speed does not is required, disable the torque limiter (F40 = 0).
rise due to the torque limiter
operation.
[Sub code: 0001 to 0003]
(7) During running of the motor Check the wiring to the motor.
(after the mechanical brake Î Connect the inverter output terminals U, V, and W to the motor input
is released), the deviation terminals U, V, and W, respectively.
between the speed
command (Reference speed
4, ASR input) and the actual
speed exceeds the setting of
H149.
[Sub code: 0008]
13-12
[ 16 ] erb Inter-inverter communications link error

Problem A communications link error occurred between optical link options.

(1) The optical cable is Î Connect the optical cable fully.
disconnected or inserted
poorly into the connector.
(2) The optical cable is bundled Î Increase the bend radius to more than 35 mm.
or bent with the bend radius
of 35 mm or less.
(3) The colors (gray and dark Î Match the colors of the connection plugs with those of the connectors on
blue) of the connection the printed circuit board.
plugs of the optical link
cable do not match those of
the connectors on the
printed circuit board.
(4) The optical cable Î Review the connection of the optical cable to form an optical loop.
connection does not form an
optical loop.
(5) The same hardware station Î Review the setting of o50.
number is double assigned
by o50.
(6) The slave station is not Î Review the setting of the slave stations (o50).
sequentially numbered by
o50 relative to the master
station number.
(7) A run command Î Do not enter a run command until the establishment of the optical
(FWD/REV) has entered communications link.
before the establishment of
the optical communications
link.
(8) The optical cable or Î Do not expose the optical cable or the connectors to intense light.
connectors on the inverter
were exposed to intense
light (e.g., direct sunlight or
strobe light).
[ 17 ] erh Hardware error Chap. 13

Problem The LSI on the power supply printed circuit board (PCB) malfunctions.

(1) The control circuit PCB or The control circuit PCB or power supply PCB (including the gate PCB)
TROUBLESHOOTING
power supply PCB is needs to be replaced.

defective. Î Ask your Fuji Electric representative to repair the inverter.
[ 18 ] err Mock alarm

Problem The LED displays err.

(1) The + keys were held Î To escape from this alarm state, press the key.
down for more than 5
seconds.
13-13
[ 19 ] lin Power supply phase loss
Problem Input phase loss occurred, or interphase voltage unbalance rate was large.

(1) Breaks in wiring to the main Measure the input voltage.
power input terminals. Î Repair or replace the main circuit power input wires or input devices
(MCCB, MC, etc.).
(2) The screws on the main Check if the screws on the main power input terminals have become loose.
power input terminals are Î Tighten the terminal screws to the recommended torque.
loosely tightened.
(3) Interphase voltage Measure the input voltage.
unbalance between three Î Connect an AC reactor (ACR) to lower the voltage unbalance between
phases was too large. input phases.
(4) Overload cyclically Correct the load.
occurred. Î Increase the inverter capacity.
(5) Single-phase voltage was Î Connect the inverter to the three-phase voltage power supply.
input to the three-phase (The FRENIC-VG is a three-phase inverter.)
input inverter.
[ 20 ] loc Start delay

Problem At the startup, an excessive deviation has occurred between the speed command and the detected
speed.
(1) Incorrect setting of function Check the data of the following function codes; P05, A07 and A107 (Motor,
code data. No. of poles), P28, A30 and A130 (Feedback encoder pulse count/rev), and
P29, A51 and A151 (Feedback pulse correction factor 1).
Î Specify motor parameters in accordance with the motor and PG.
Î Review the data of the following function codes.
• H140 (Start delay, Detection level)
• H141 (Start delay, Detection timer)
Î Reduce the load.
Check whether any mechanical brake is working.
(3) Mismatch between function Check the motor parameters.
code settings and the motor Î Perform auto-tuning, using H01.
characteristics.
(4) Wrong wiring between the Check the wiring between the PG and the inverter.
pulse generator (PG) and Î Correct the wiring.
the inverter. (Refer to Chapter 3, Section 3.5.2 "Mounting direction of a pulse
generator (PG) and PG signals.")
Check that the relationships between the PG feedback signal and the run
command are as follows:
• For the FWD command: the B phase pulse is in the High level at rising
• For the REV command: the B phase pulse is in the Low level at rising
Î If the relationship is wrong, interchange the A and B phase wires.
Î Note that if the digital input signal IVS ("Switch normal/inverse
operation") is active, the above operation is reversed.
13-14

Î Connect the inverter output terminals U, V, and W to the motor input
Under vector control Check the setting of the torque limiter level (F44, F45).
with/without speed sensor Î Change the F44 or F45 data to an appropriate value. If no torque limiter
(6) The motor speed does not is required, disable the torque limiter (F40 = 0).
rise due to the torque limiter
operation.
(7) During running of the motor Check the wiring to the motor.
(after the mechanical brake Î Connect the inverter output terminals U, V, and W to the motor input
is released), the reference terminals U, V, and W, respectively.
torque current (F44, F45)
exceeds the specified level
(H140) and the actual speed
drops below the specified
stop speed (F37), and then
the state is kept for the
specified duration (H141).
[ 21 ] lu Undervoltage
Problem DC link bus voltage has dropped below the undervoltage detection level.

(1) A momentary power failure Î Release the alarm.
occurred. Î To restart running the motor without treating this condition as an alarm,
set F14 to "3," "4," or "5," depending on the load type.
(2) The power to the inverter Check if the power to the inverter was switched back to ON while the
was switched back to ON control power was still alive. (Check whether the LEDs on the keypad
too soon (when F14 = 1). light.)
Î Turn the power ON again after all LEDs on the keypad go off.
(3) The power supply voltage Measure the input voltage.
does not reach the inverter's Î Increase the voltage to within the specified range.
specification range.
(4) Peripheral equipment for the Measure the input voltage to find which peripheral equipment
power circuit malfunctioned or which connection is incorrect. Chap. 13
malfunctioned, or the Î Replace any faulty peripheral equipment, or correct any incorrect
connection is incorrect. connections.
(5) Any other load(s) connected Measure the input voltage and check the voltage fluctuation.
TROUBLESHOOTING
to the same power supply Î Reconsider the power supply system configuration.
has required a large starting
current, causing a temporary
voltage drop.
(6) Insufficient capacity of the Measure the output current.
power supply transformer Î Reduce the load.
increases load, causing a Î Reconsider the capacity of the power supply transformer.
voltage drop.
13-15
(7) No power is supplied to the Measure the input voltage of the auxiliary power supply.
auxiliary control power Î Insert various circuit breakers or magnetic contactor (MC).
input terminals R0 and T0. Î Check for voltage drop, connection failure, poor contact and other
Fan power supply switching problems, then take measures against them.
connectors CN W and CN R
are set as follows.
CN W (white): [FAN]
position
CN R (red): [NC]
position
(Refer to Chapter 3, Section
3.3.3.7 "Switching
connectors.")
[ 22 ] nrb NTC thermistor wire break error

Problem A wire break is found in the NTC thermistor detection circuit.
Note: A negative temperature coefficient (NTC) thermistor is used to protect the motor from
overheat, and under vector control, to compensate for the temperature in the motor parameters.
A dedicated motor (VG motor) for Fuji vector control has a built-in NTC thermistor.

(1) The NTC thermistor cable is Check whether the motor cable is broken.
broken. Î Replace the motor cable.
(2) The temperature around the Measure the temperature around the motor.
motor is extremely low Î Reconsider the use environment of the motor.
(lower than -30°C).
(3) The NTC thermistor is Measure the resistance of the NTC thermistor (including a spare
broken. thermistor).
Î Connect a spare thermistor to the motor.
Î If the spare thermistor is also broken, replace the motor.
[ 23 ] 0c Overcurrent
Problem The inverter momentary output current exceeded the overcurrent level.

(1) The inverter output lines Disconnect the wiring from the inverter output terminals ([U], [V] and [W])
were short-circuited. and measure the interphase resistance of the motor wiring. Check if the
resistance is too low.
Î Remove the short-circuited part (including replacement of the wires,
relay terminals and motor).
(2) Ground faults have occurred Disconnect the wiring from the output terminals [U], [V] and [W] and
at the inverter output lines. perform a Megger test for the inverter and the motor.
Î Remove the grounded parts (including replacement of the wires, relay
13-16

(3) Overload. Measure the motor current with a measuring device to trace the current
trend. Then, use this data to judge if the trend is over the calculated load
value for your system design.
Î If the load is too heavy, reduce it or increase the inverter capacity.
Trace the current trend and check if there are any sudden changes in the
current.
Î If there are any sudden changes, make the load fluctuation smaller or
increase the inverter capacity.
Î Under V/f control
Enable overcurrent limiting (H58 = 1).
Under V/f control Check whether decreasing the torque boost (P35, A55, A155) decreases the
(4) Excessive torque boost output current but does not stall the motor.
specified (in the case of Î If no stall occurs, decrease the torque boost (P35, A55, A155).
manual torque boost)
Under V/f control Check that the motor generates enough torque required during
(5) The acceleration/ acceleration/deceleration. That torque is calculated from the moment of
deceleration time was too inertia for the load and the acceleration/deceleration time.
short. Î Increase the acceleration/deceleration time (F07, F08, C46, C47, C56,
C57, C66, C67).
Î Review the braking method.
(6) Malfunction caused by Check if noise control measures are appropriate (e.g., correct grounding and
noise. routing of control and main circuit wires).
Î Implement noise control measures. For details, refer to the FRENIC-VG
User's Manual, "Appendix A."
Î Enable the Auto-reset (H04).
Î Connect a surge absorber to magnetic contactor's coils or other
solenoids (if any) causing noise.
Under vector control Check the motor sound (carrier frequency) specified by F26.
with/without speed sensor Î Increase the setting of F26.
(7) The carrier frequency is low. (Note that increasing the carrier frequency excessively may cause other
devices to malfunction due to noise generated from the inverter.)
Under vector control Check whether it happens during auto-tuning.
with/without speed sensor Î Increase the exciting current (P08, A10, A110) and then perform
(8) Exciting current was too auto-tuning.
small during auto-tuning.
Chap. 13
Under vector control with speed Check the function code setting (P28, A30, A130).
sensor Î Match the function code settings with the PG specifications.
(9) Mismatch between the PG's
pulse resolution and the
TROUBLESHOOTING
function code setting.

Under vector control with speed Check the wiring between the PG and the inverter for the phase sequence,
sensor wire breaks, shielding and twisting.
(10)Wrong wiring of the PG. Î Correct the wiring.
Under vector control with speed Check whether the inverter internal control circuit (PG input circuit) is
sensor faulty, using the self-diagnosis function of the PG detection circuit (H74).
(11) PG defective. Î If the result is "Normal," replace the PG; if it is "Abnormal," contact
your Fuji Electric representative.
Check the PG waveform using an oscilloscope.
Î Replace the PG.
13-17
[ 24 ] 0h1 Heat sink overheat
Problem Temperature around heat sink has risen abnormally.

(1) The surrounding Measure the temperature around the inverter.
temperature exceeded the Î Lower the temperature around the inverter (e.g., ventilate the panel
range of the inverter where the inverter is mounted).
specification.
[Sub code: 0001 to 0008]
(2) Ventilation path is blocked. Check if there is sufficient clearance around the inverter.
[Sub code: 0001 to 0008] Î Change the mounting place to ensure the clearance.
Check if the heat sink is not clogged.
Î Clean the heat sink.
(For the cleaning procedure, contact your Fuji Electric representative.)
(3) Cooling fan's airflow Check the cumulative run time of the cooling fan. Refer to Chapter 3,
volume decreased due to the Section 3.4.4.6 "Reading maintenance information – Menu #5
service life expired or MAINTENANCE."
failure. Î Replace the cooling fan.
[Sub code: 0001 to 0008] (Contact your Fuji Electric representative.)
[Sub code: 0010 to 0200]
Visually check whether the cooling fan rotates normally.
Î Replace the cooling fan.
(Contact your Fuji Electric representative.)
(4) Overload. Measure the output current.
[Sub code: 0001 to 0008] Î Reduce the load (Use the heat sink overheat early warning INV-OH
(E15 through E27) or the inverter overload early warning INV-OL (E15
through E27) to reduce the load before the overload protection is
activated.).
Î Decrease the data of F26 (Motor sound, Carrier frequency).
[ 25 ] 0h2 External alarm

Problem External alarm was inputted (THR).
(when the "Enable external alarm trip" THR has been assigned to any of digital input terminals)
(1) An alarm function of Check the operation of external equipment.
external equipment was Î Remove the cause of the alarm that occurred.
activated.
(2) Wrong connection or poor Check if the external alarm signal wiring is correctly connected to the
contact in external alarm terminal to which the "Enable external alarm trip" terminal command THR
signal wiring. has been assigned (Any of E01 through E09 should be set to "9.").
Î Connect the external alarm signal wire correctly.
(3) Incorrect setting of function Check whether the normal/negative logic of the external signal matches that
code data. of the THR command specified by E14.
Î Ensure the matching of the normal/negative logic.
(4) The surrounding Measure the temperature around the braking resistor.
temperature exceeded the Î Lower the temperature (e.g., ventilate the inverter).
range of the braking resistor
specification.
(5) The capacity of the braking Reconsider the capacity and %ED of the braking resistor.
resistor is insufficient. Î Review the braking resistor.
13-18
[ 26 ] 0h3 Inverter internal overheat

Problem Temperature inside the inverter has exceeded the allowable limit.

(1) The surrounding Measure the surrounding temperature.
temperature exceeded the Î Lower the temperature around the inverter (e.g., ventilate the panel
inverter's specification where the inverter is mounted).
limit.
[Sub code: 0001 to 0008]
(2) Temperature detection Î Ask your Fuji Electric representative to repair the inverter.
circuit failure (Thermistor Inform the representative of the alarm sub code displayed.
wire break).
[Sub code: 0010]
[ 27 ] 0h4 Motor overheat (PTC/NTC thermistor)

Problem Temperature of the motor has risen abnormally.

(1) The temperature around the Measure the temperature around the motor.
motor exceeded the range of Î Lower the temperature.
the motor specification.
(2) Cooling system for the Check if the cooling system of the motor is operating normally.
motor defective. Î Repair or replace the cooling system of the motor.
Î Reduce the load. (e.g. Use the motor overload early warning (E34) to
reduce the load before the overload protection is activated.)
Î Lower the temperature around the motor.
(4) The activation level (E32) Check the PTC thermistor specifications and recalculate the detection
of the PTC thermistor for voltage.
motor overheat protection Î Modify the data of function code E32.
was set inadequately.
(5) The activation level (E30) Check the data of function code E30 (Motor overheat protection,
of the NTC thermistor for Temperature).
motor overheat protection Î When a motor exclusive to vector control is used, set E30 to 150°C
was set inadequately. (Factory default).
Î When the motor temperature is entered via any of analog input terminals
[Ai1] to [Ai4], set E30 to the protection level matching the motor Chap. 13
specification.
(6) Settings for the PTC/NTC Check the setting of the thermistor mode selection (function code P30, A31,
thermistor are improper. A131).
Î Change the data of P30, A31 or A131 in accordance with the thermistor
TROUBLESHOOTING
used.
(7) NTC thermistor model Check the NTC thermistor model (characteristics).
(characteristics) improper. Î Use the NTC thermistor incorporated in a motor exclusive to vector
control.
Under V/f control Check whether decreasing the torque boost (function code P35, A55, A155)
(8) Excessive torque boost does not stall the motor.
specified. (P35, A55, A155) Î If no stall occurs, decrease the data of P35, A55 or A155.
Under V/f control Check whether the motor rated speed (F04, A05, A105) and the rated
(9) The V/f pattern did not voltage (F05, A04, A104) match the values on the motor's nameplate.
match the motor. Î Match the function code data with the values on the motor's nameplate.
13-19
(10)Incorrect setting of function Although no PTC thermistor is used, the thermistor mode is enabled
code data. (function code P30, A31, A131).
Î Set the data of P30, A31 or A131 to "0" (Disable).
(11) The input voltage of the Check the input voltage of the motor cooling fan.
motor cooling fan is out of Î Review the power supply system.
the range of the
specification.
(12)The air passage of the motor Check the air passage of the motor cooling fan.
cooling fan is clogged. Î Clear the clog.
(13)Mismatch of motor For exclusive motors for the FRENIC-VG: Check whether the data of
parameters function code P02 matches the connected motor.
Î Correct the data of P02.
For other motors:
Î Perform auto-tuning.
[ 28 ] 0ln Overload of motor 1 through 3

Problem Electronic thermal protection for motor 1, 2, or 3 activated.
0l1 Motor 1 overload
(1) The electronic thermal Check the motor characteristics.
characteristics do not match Î Reconsider the data of function codes F10, F12, A32, A34, A132 and
the motor overload A134.
characteristics. Î Use an external thermal relay.
(2) The activation level for the Check the continuous allowable current of the motor.
electronic thermal Î Reconsider and change the data of function code F11, A33 or A133.
protection was not
appropriate.
(3) The specified acceleration/ Recalculate the acceleration/deceleration torque and time needed for the
deceleration time was too load, based on the moment of inertia for the load and the
short. acceleration/deceleration time.
Î Increase the acceleration/ deceleration time (F07, F08, C46, C47, C56,
C57, C66, C67).
Î Reduce the load (e.g. Use the motor overload early warning (E34) to
reduce the load before the overload protection is activated.).
Under V/f control Check whether decreasing the torque boost (P35, A55, A155) does not stall
(5) Excessive torque boost the motor.
specified Î If no stall occurs, decrease the data of P35, A55 or A155.
Under vector control Check whether the actual speed overshoots or undershoots the commanded
with/without speed sensor one.
(6) The control constants of the Î Readjust the ASR (ASR gain, constant of integration, etc.).
automatic speed regulator
(ASR) are inadequate.
13-20
[ 29 ] 0lu Inverter overload

Problem Electronic thermal overload protection for inverter activated.

(1) The surrounding Measure the temperature around the inverter.
temperature exceeded the Î Lower the temperature (e.g., ventilate the panel where the inverter is
range of the inverter mounted).
specification.
(2) Excessive torque boost Check whether decreasing the torque boost (P35, A55, A155) does not stall
specified. the motor.
Î If no stall occurs, decrease the torque boost (P35, A55, A155).
(3) The specified acceleration/ Recalculate the acceleration/deceleration torque and time needed for the
deceleration time was too load, based on the moment of inertia for the load and the
short. acceleration/deceleration time.
Î Increase the acceleration/deceleration time (F07, C35, C46, C56, C66).
(4) Overload. Measure the load factor to see that it does not exceed 100%. (Refer to
Chapter 3, Section 3.4.4.7 "Measuring load factor -- Menu #6 "LOAD
FCTR."
Î Reduce the load (e.g., Use the overload early warning (E33) and reduce
the load before the overload protection is activated.).
Î Decrease the motor sound (Carrier frequency) (F26).
(5) Ventilation paths are Check if there is sufficient clearance around the inverter.
blocked. Î Change the mounting place to ensure the clearance.
(For details, refer to Chapter 3, Section 3.3.2 "Installing the Inverter."
Check if the heat sink is not clogged.
Î Clean the heat sink.
(6) Cooling fan's airflow Check the cumulative run time of the cooling fan.
volume decreased due to the Î Replace the cooling fan.
service life expired or (Contact your Fuji Electric representative.)
failure.
Visually check that the cooling fan rotates normally.
Î Replace the cooling fan.
(Contact your Fuji Electric representative.)
(7) The wires to the motor are Measure the leakage current.
too long, causing a large Î Insert an output circuit filter (OFL).
leakage current from them.
Under vector control Check whether the reference speed is fluctuating. Chap. 13
with/without speed sensor Î Increase the ASR input filter setting (F64, C43, C53, C63).
(8) Reference speed fluctuating
Under vector control Check whether the actual speed overshoots or undershoots the commanded
TROUBLESHOOTING
with/without speed sensor one.

(9) The control constants of the Î Readjust the ASR (ASR gain, constant of integration, etc.).
(10) Wrong wiring to the PG. Check the wiring to the PG.
13-21
(12) The magnetic pole position Check the magnetic pole position.
of the permanent magnet Î Adjust the magnetic pole position (o10, A60, A160).
synchronous motor (Refer to Chapter 3, Section 3.5.3.3 "Vector control for PMSM with
(PMSM) is out of place. speed sensor and magnetic pole position sensor," Adjusting the
magnetic pole position.")
[ 30 ] 0pl Output phase loss

Problem Output phase loss occurred.

(1) Inverter output wires are Measure the output current.
broken. Î Replace the output wires.
(2) The motor winding is Measure the output current.
broken. Î Replace the motor.
(3) The inverter output Check if any screws on those terminals have become loose.
terminals or motor input Î Tighten the terminal screws to the recommended torque.
terminals are weakly
tightened.
(4) A single-phase motor has Î Single-phase motors cannot be used. (The FRENIC-VG is a drive for
been connected. three-phase motors.)
[ 31 ] 05 Overspeed
Problem The motor rotates in an excessive speed (when Motor speed ≥ Maximum speed setting ×
H90÷100)
Under vector control Check the maximum speed setting (function code F03, A06, A106).
with/without speed sensor Î Modify the data of F03, A06 or A106 in accordance with the machinery.
(1) Incorrect setting of function Check the setting of the speed limiter (F76 to F78).
code data. Î Enable the speed limiter (F76 to F78).
Under vector control Check whether the actual speed overshoots the commanded one in higher
with/without speed sensor speed operation.
(2) Insufficient gain of the Î Increase the ASR gain (F61).
speed controller (ASR). (Depending on the situations, reconsider the setting of the filter
constants or the integral time.)
Under vector control Check the setting of the overspeed alarm detection level (H90, Factory
with/without speed sensor default 120%).
(3) The overspeed alarm Î Set the data of H90, taking into account the maximum allowable speed
detection level is not for the machinery.
appropriate.
Under vector control with speed Check whether appropriate noise control measures have been implemented
sensor (e.g., correct grounding and routing of signal wires and main circuit wires).
(4) Noises superimposed on the Î Implement noise control measures. For details, refer to the FRENIC-VG
PG wire. User's Manual, "Appendix A."
Under vector control Check whether the droop gain is appropriate.
with/without speed sensor Î Decrease the droop gain (H28).
(5) Droop gain too large.
13-22

Under vector control For motors exclusive to the FRENIC-VG: Check whether the setting of
with/without speed sensor function code P02 matches the connected motor.
(6) The motor parameters do Î Correct the data of P02.
not match the connected For other motors:
motor. Î Perform auto-tuning.
Under vector control without Check the inverter output circuit.
speed sensor Î Correct the wiring.
(7) Breaks in the inverter output
circuit.
Under vector control with speed Measure the PG waveform.
sensor Î Replace the PG.
(8) PG waveform abnormal.
Under vector control with speed Check the function code setting (P28, A30, A130).
sensor Î Match the function code settings with the PG specifications.
(9) Mismatch between the PG's
pulse resolution and the
function code setting.
(10)The magnetic pole position Check the magnetic pole position.
[ 32 ] 0u Overvoltage
Problem The DC link bus voltage exceeded the overvoltage detection level.

(1) The power supply voltage Measure the input voltage.
exceeded the range of the Î Decrease the voltage to within the specified range.
inverter specification.
(2) A surge current entered the In the same power line, if a phase-advancing capacitor is turned ON/OFF or
input power supply. a thyristor converter is activated, a surge (momentary large increase in the
voltage or current) may be caused in the input power.
Î Install a DC reactor.
(3) The deceleration time was Recalculate the deceleration torque based on the moment of inertia of the Chap. 13
too short for the moment of load and the deceleration time.
inertia of the load. Î Increase the deceleration time (F08, C36, C47, C57, C67).
Î Consider the use of a braking resistor or PWM converter (RHC-C).
Î Decrease the moment of inertia of the load.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Î Enable the overvoltage trip prevention (H57).

Î Select the power limit function (F40 = 2).
Î Under vector control with speed sensor
Enable the torque limiter (F40 to F45).
(4) The acceleration time was Check if an overvoltage alarm occurs after rapid acceleration.
too short. Î Increase the acceleration time (F07, C35, C46, C56, C66).
Î Select the S-curve acceleration/deceleration (F67 to F70).
Î Decrease the moment of inertia of the load.
(5) Braking load was too heavy. Compare the braking torque of the load with that of the inverter.
13-23
(6) Malfunction caused by Check if the DC link bus voltage was below the protective level when the
noise. overvoltage alarm occurred.
Î Implement noise control measures. For details, refer to the FRENIC-VG
User's Manual, "Appendix A."
Î Enable the auto-reset (H04).
Î Connect a surge absorber to magnetic contactor's coils or other
solenoids (if any) causing noise.
(7) The inverter output lines Disconnect the wiring from the inverter output terminals ([U], [V] and [W])
were short-circuited. and measure the interphase resistance of the motor wiring. Check if the
resistance is too low.
Î Remove the short-circuited part (including replacement of the wires,
relay terminals and motor).
(8) Wrong connection of the Check the connection.
braking resistor. Î Correct the connection.
(9) Large, rapid decrease of the Check whether the inverter runs at the time of rapid decrease of the load.
load. Î Consider the use of a braking resistor or PWM converter (RHC-C).
[ 33 ] p9 PG wire break
Problem The pulse generator (PG) wire has been broken somewhere in the circuit.

(1) Wire break between the Check whether the PG is correctly connected to the option or any wire is
pulse generator (PG) and the broken.
option. Î Check whether the PG is connected correctly. Or, tighten up the related
terminal screws.
Î Check whether any joint or connecting part bites the wire sheath.
Î Replace the wire.
(2) Connection failure of Check the output wiring of the speed/magnetic pole position sensor for poor
speed/magnetic pole contact or the phase sequence of the AB phases and UVW phases.
position sensor. Î Connect the speed/magnetic pole position sensor to the feedback input
(3) Motor rotation direction and card correctly.
sensor output not matched. Check the motor wiring for poor contact or the phase sequence.
Î Connect the inverter with the motor correctly.
(4) Connection failure of option Check whether the connector of the option card engages with that of the
card(s) inverter unit.
Î Mount the option card on the inverter unit correctly.
(5) PG related circuit affected Check if appropriate noise control measures have been implemented (e.g.,
by strong electrical noise. correct grounding and routing of signal wires, communication cables, and
Î Separate the signal wires from the main power wires as far as possible.
(6) Motor drive control Check the motor drive control currently selected.
wrongly selected. Î If no PG is mounted, select the vector control without speed sensor.
(7) Mismatch between the PG Check the PG power voltage (rated) and the output voltage setting of
power voltage (rated) and terminal [PGP] (switchable with SW6).
the output voltage setting of Î Set SW6 properly.
terminal [PGP]. For details, refer to Chapter 3, Section 3.3.3.9 "Setting up the slide
switches."
(8) PG wires small in size. Check whether the PG wires satisfy the recommended wire size.
Î Replace the wires with the recommended one.
13-24

(9) PG waveform abnormal. Check whether the inverter internal control circuit (PG input circuit) is
faulty, using the self-diagnosis function of the PG detection circuit (H74).
Î If the result is "Normal," replace the PG; if it is "Abnormal," contact
your Fuji Electric representative.
Check the PG waveform using an oscilloscope.
Î Replace the PG.
[ 34 ] pbf Charger circuit fault

Problem The magnetic contactor for short-circuiting the charging resistor failed to work. (For 200 V class
series of 37 kW or above and those of 75 kW or above)
(1) No control power was Check that, in normal connection of the main circuit (not a connection via
supplied to the magnetic the DC link bus), the connector (CN R) on the power printed circuit board
contactor (MC) intended for (power PCB) is not inserted to NC .
short-circuiting the charging Î Insert the connector (CN R) to FAN .
resistor. For details, refer to Chapter 3, Section 3.3.3.6 "Switching connectors,
Fan power supply switching connectors."
(MCCB, MC, etc.).
Chap. 13
TROUBLESHOOTING
13-25
13.4 If the "Light Alarm" Indication (l-al) Appears on the
LED Monitor
If the inverter detects a minor abnormal state "light alarm," it can continue the current operation without
tripping while displaying the "light alarm" indication l-al on the LED monitor. In addition to the
indication l-al, the inverter blinks the KEYPAD CONTROL LED and outputs the "light alarm" signal
L-ALM to a general-purpose digital output terminal to alert the peripheral equipment to the occurrence of a
light alarm. (To use the L-ALM, it is necessary to assign the signal to any of the digital output terminals by
setting any of function codes E15 through E19 to "57.")
Function codes H106 through H110 specify which alarms should be categorized as "light alarm." The
available "light alarm" codes are check-marked in the "Light alarm" object column in Table 13.1.
For the "light alarm" factors and the alarm removal procedure, refer to Chapter 3, Section 3.4.3.5
"Monitoring light alarms."
13-26
13.5 If Neither an Alarm Code Nor "Light Alarm" Indication (l-al) Appears on the LED Monitor
13.5 If Neither an Alarm Code Nor "Light Alarm" Indication

(l-al) Appears on the LED Monitor
13.5.1 Abnormal motor operation
[ 1 ] The motor does not rotate.
(1) No power supplied to the Check the input voltage and interphase voltage unbalance.
inverter. Î Turn ON a molded case circuit breaker (MCCB), a residual-current-
operated protective device (RCD)/earth leakage circuit breaker (ELCB)
(with overcurrent protection) or a magnetic contactor (MC).
Î Check for voltage drop, phase loss, poor connections, or poor contacts,
and fix them if necessary.
Î If only the auxiliary control power input is supplied, also supply the
main power to the inverter.
(2) No run forward/reverse Check the input status of the forward/reverse command with Menu #4 "I/O
command was inputted, or CHECK" using the keypad.
both the commands were Î Input a run command.
inputted simultaneously Î Set either the forward or reverse operation command to off if both
(external signal operation). commands are being inputted.
Î Correct the run command source. (Set the data of F02 to "1.")
Î Connect the external circuit wires to control circuit terminals [FWD]
and [REV] correctly.
Î Make sure that the sink/source slide switch (SW1) on the control printed
circuit board (control PCB) is properly configured. (Refer to Chapter 3,
Section 3.3.3.9 "Setting up the slide switches.")
(3) A run command with higher Referring to the run command block diagram given in the FRENIC-VG
priority than the one User's Manual, Chapter 4, check the higher priority run command using
attempted was active, and Menu #2 "DATA CHECK" and Menu #4 "I/O CHECK" with the keypad.
the run command was Î Correct wrong setting of function code H30 (Communications link
stopped. Or, a speed function, Mode selection) or cancel the higher priority run command.
command was active.
(4) No analog speed command Check whether the analog speed command is correctly inputted, using
input. Menu #4 "I/O CHECK" on the keypad.
Î Connect the external circuit wires to terminals [13], [12], [11], [Ai1] and
[Ai2] correctly.
Î Inspect the external speed command potentiometers, signal converters, Chap. 13
switches and relay contacts. Replace any ones that are faulty.
Under V/f control Check that a speed command has been entered correctly, using Menu #4
(5) The reference speed was "I/O CHECK" on the keypad.
TROUBLESHOOTING
below the starting or stop Î Set the reference speed at the same or higher than the starting speed
speed. (F23).
Î Reconsider the starting speed (F23), and if necessary, change it to the
lower value.
Î Inspect the external speed command potentiometers, signal converters,
switches and relay contacts. Replace any ones that are faulty.
[Ai2] correctly.
13-27
(6) A run command with higher Referring to the run command block diagram given in the FRENIC-VG
priority than the one User's Manual, Chapter 4, check the higher priority run command using
attempted was active. Menu #2 "DATA CHECK" and Menu #4 "I/O CHECK" with the keypad.
Î Correct the wrong setting of function codes (e.g., cancel the higher
priority run command).
Î Correct wrong setting of function code H30 (Communications link
function, Mode selection) or cancel the higher priority run command.
(7) The speed limiter settings Check the data of function codes F76 (Speed limiter mode), F77 and F78
were made incorrectly. (Speed limiter levels 1 and 2).
Î Correct the data of F76 through F78.
(8) The coast-to-stop command Check the data of function codes E01 through E09 and the input signal
was effective. status of X terminals, using Menu #4 "I/O CHECK" on the keypad.
Î Release the coast-to-stop command setting.
Check the input signal status of terminal [EN], using Menu #4 "I/O
CHECK" on the keypad.
Î Short-circuit the terminal [EN] with terminal [PS].
(9) No input on [EN1] or Check the input status of the EN terminal, using Menu #4 "I/O CHECK" on
[EN2]. the keypad.
Î Short-circuit each of [EN1] and [EN2] with [PS]. (Refer to Chapter 3,
Section 3.3.3.8 "Detailed functions of control circuit terminals."
(10) Broken wires, incorrect Check the wiring and the motor. (Measure the output current).
connection or poor contact Î Repair the wires to the motor, or replace them.
with the motor. Or the motor Î Repair the motor or replace it.
defective.
(11) Overload Measure the output current.
Î Reduce the load (In winter, the load tends to increase.)
Î Increase the inverter and motor capacities.
Check whether any mechanical brake is activated.
Î Release the mechanical brake, if any.
(12) Torque generated by the Check that the motor switching signal (selecting motor 1, 2 or 3) is correct
motor was insufficient. using Menu #4 "I/O CHECK" on the keypad and that the data of function
codes matches each motor.
Î Correct the motor switching signal.
Î Modify the function code data to match the connected motor.
Under V/f control Check whether the reference speed is below the slip-compensated speed of
(13) Torque generated by the the motor (Function codes P10 and P11 for M1, A12 and A13 for M2, and
motor was insufficient. A112 and A113 for M3).
Î Change the reference speed so that it becomes higher than the
slip-compensated speed of the motor.
Check whether increasing the toque boost (Function code P35, A55, A155)
starts rotating the motor.
Î Increase the data of P35, A55 or A155.
Check the data of function code F04, A05 or A105.
Î Change the V/f pattern setting to match each motor.
(14) Wrong connection or poor Check the wiring between the main circuit terminals P1 and P(+).
contact of DC reactor Inverters of 55 kW in LD mode and inverters of 75 kW or above come with
(DCR) a DCR as standard. Without connection of a DCR, these inverters cannot
run.
Î Connect a jumper bar or DCR correctly. Repair or replace wires to the
DCR.
13-28

(15) No reference speed setting Check the reference speed setting made on the keypad.
(keypad operation). Î Modify the reference speed setting by pressing [↑] key.
(16) The inverter could not Check which operation mode the inverter is in, using the keypad.
accept any run commands Î Shift the operation mode to Running mode and enter a run command.
from the keypad since it was
in Programming mode.
Under vector control with speed Check whether the setting of function code P05, A07 or A107 (No. of poles)
sensor matches the number of poles of the actual motor.
(17) Incorrect setting of the Î Set the data of P05, A07 or A107 to the correct number of poles.
number of poles of the
motor
Under vector control with speed Check the motor wiring (phase sequence) and the polarity of the PG.
sensor Î Correct the wiring.
(18) Wrong wiring between the
motor and pulse generator
(PG).
Under vector control Check whether the torque limiter level (Function code F44, F45) is set to
with/without speed sensor zero (0).
(19) Incorrect setting of the Î Modify the data of F44 or F45 to the appropriate value.
torque limiter level.
Under vector control Check whether the torque command of terminal [Ai1]/[Ai2] is zero (0)
with/without speed sensor under torque control mode.
(20) Incorrect setting of the Î Modify the torque command to the appropriate value.
torque command.
Under vector control with speed Check whether the setting of function code P28, A30 or A130 matches the
sensor pulse resolution of the actual PG..
(21) Mismatch between the PG's Î Modify the data of P28, A30 or A130 to the appropriate value.
pulse resolution and the Check whether the voltage setting of terminal [PGP] (SW6) matches the
function code setting. voltage specification of the actual PG.
Î Set SW6 to the appropriate position.
(22) The magnetic pole position Check the magnetic pole position.
Chap. 13
[ 2 ] The motor rotates, but the speed does not change.

TROUBLESHOOTING
(1) The setting of the maximum Check the data of function code F03, A06 or A106 (Maximum speed).
speed was too low. Î Modify the data of F03, A06 or A106 to the appropriate value.
(2) The setting of the speed Check the setting of the speed limiter (F76 to F78).
limiter was too low. Î Modify the data of F76 to F78 to the appropriate value.
(3) The reference speed (analog Check whether the reference speed has been entered correctly, using Menu
setting) did not change. #4 "I/O CHECK" on the keypad.
Î Increase the reference speed.
Î Inspect the external speed command potentiometers, signal converters,
switches, and relay contacts. Replace any ones that are faulty.
[Ai2] correctly.
13-29
(4) The external circuit wiring Check whether the reference speed has been entered correctly, using Menu
to terminals [X1] to [X9] or #4 "I/O CHECK" on the keypad.
signal assignment to those Î Connect the external circuit wires to terminals [X1] through [X9].
terminals is wrong. Î Correct the data of E01 to E14.
Î Correct the data of C05 to C21 (Multistep speed settings).
(5) A reference speed (e.g., Referring to the speed command block diagram given in the FRENIC-VG
multistep speed or via User's Manual, Chapter 4, check the data of the relevant function codes and
communications link) with what speed commands are being received, using Menu #2 "DATA CHECK"
higher priority than the one and Menu #4 "I/O CHECK" with the keypad.
attempted was active and Î Correct any incorrect data of function codes (e.g. cancel the higher
the reference speed was too priority reference speed).
low.
(6) The acceleration or Check the settings of the acceleration time and deceleration time (function
deceleration time was too codes F07, F08, C35, C36, C46, C47, C56, C57, C66 and C67).
long or too short. Î Change the acceleration/deceleration time to match the load.
Î Reduce the load.
Check whether any mechanical brake is activated.
Under V/f control If auto-torque boost (Function code P35, A55, A155) is enabled, check
(8) Function code settings do whether the data of P03, P04, P06, P07 and P08 for M1, A02, A03, A08,
not agree with the motor A09 and A10 for M2, A102, A103, A108, A109 and A110 for M3 matches
characteristics. the parameters of the motor.
Î Perform auto-tuning of the inverter for the motor to be used.
Under V/f control Decrease the value of the torque boost (Function code P35, A55, A155),
(9) The output frequency does then run the motor again and check if the speed increases.
not increase due to the Î Adjust the value of the torque boost (P35, A55, A155).
current limiter operation. Check the data of function codes F04, A05 and A105 to ensure that the V/f
pattern setting is right.
Î Match the V/f pattern setting with the motor ratings.
(10) The motor speed does not Check whether the data of torque limiter related function codes F40 through
increase due to the torque F45 is correctly configured and the TL2/TL1 terminal command ("Select
limiter operation. torque limiter level") is correct.
Î Correct the data of F44 or F45 or enter the F40-CCL terminal command
("Cancel F40 (Torque limiter mode 1)").
(11) Incorrect settings of bias Check the data of function codes F17, F18 and E53 to E60.
and gain for analog input. Î Correct the bias and gain settings.
(12) The reference speed did not Check whether modifying the reference speed setting from the keypad
change. (Keypad operation) changes the reference speed.
Î Modify the reference speed setting by pressing the [↑] and [↓] keys.
Under vector control with speed Check the wiring between the PG and the inverter for the phase sequence,
sensor wire breaks, shielding and twisting.
(13) Wrong wiring of the PG. Î Correct the wiring.
Under vector control with speed Check the phase sequence (U, V, and W) of the main circuit wires between
sensor the inverter and the motor.
(14) Wrong wiring between the Î Connect the inverter output terminals U, V, and W to the motor input
inverter and the motor. terminals U, V, and W, respectively.
13-30

Under vector control For exclusive motors for the FRENIC-VG: Check whether the data of
with/without speed sensor function code P02 matches the specification of the connected motor.
(15) Function code settings do Î Correct the data of P02.
not agree with the motor For other motors:
characteristics. Î Perform auto-tuning.
[ 3 ] The motor runs in the opposite direction to the command.

Under V/f control Check the wiring to the motor.
Under vector control without Î Connect the inverter output terminals U, V, and W to the motor input
speed sensor terminals U, V, and W, respectively.
(1) Wrong wiring to the motor.
(2) The rotation direction The rotation direction of IEC-compliant motors is opposite to that of
specification of the motor is incompliant motors.
opposite to that of the Î Switch the FWD/REV signal setting.
inverter.
(3) Incorrect setting of speed Check the data of the speed command related function codes, referring to
command related function the speed command block diagram given in the FRENIC-VG User's
code data. Manual, Chapter 4.
Î Correct the data of the related function codes.
Under vector control with speed Check the wiring to the motor.
sensor Î Correct the wiring. (Refer to Chapter 3, Section 3.5.2 "Mounting
(4) Wrong wiring of the PG. direction of a pulse generator (PG) and PG signals.")
[ 4 ] Speed fluctuation or current oscillation (e.g., hunting) occurs during

running at constant speed.
(1) The analog speed command Check the signal status for the speed command with Menu #4 "I/O
fluctuates. CHECK" using the keypad.
Î Increase the filter constants (F83, E61 to E64) for the speed command.
Î Take measures to keep the speed command constant.
(2) An external potentiometer is Check that there is no noise on the control signal wires connecting to
used for speed setting. external sources. Chap. 13
Î Isolate the control signal wires from the main circuit wires as far as
possible.
Î Use shielded or twisted wires for control signals.
Check whether the external speed command potentiometer is
TROUBLESHOOTING
malfunctioning due to noise from the inverter.

Î Connect a capacitor to the output terminal of the potentiometer or set a
ferrite core on the signal wire. (Refer to Chapter 2.)
(3) Speed switching or Check whether the relay signal for switching the speed command is
multistep speed command chattering.
was enabled. Î If the relay contact is defective, replace the relay.
(4) The wiring length between Check whether auto-torque boost is enabled (P35, A55, A155).
the inverter and the motor is Î Perform auto-tuning.
too long. Î Under V/f control, disable the automatic control system (select manual
torque boost), then check that the motor vibration stops.
Î Make the output wires as short as possible.
13-31
(5) The machinery is hunting Once disable all the automatic control systems (speed control, auto torque
due to vibration caused by boost, current limiter, torque limiter and droop control), then check that the
low rigidity of the load. Or motor vibration comes to a stop.
the current is irregularly Î Under vector control with/without speed sensor, readjust the speed
oscillating due to special control system. (F61 through F66, C40 through C45, C50 through C55)
motor parameters. Î Disable the automatic control system(s) causing the vibration.
(6) Function code settings do For exclusive motors for the FRENIC-VG: Check whether the setting of
not agree with the motor function code P02 matches the specification of the connected motor.
characteristics. Î Correct the data of P02.
For other motors:
Î Perform auto-tuning.
(7) Load is fluctuating. Under vector control with/without speed sensor
Check whether automatic speed regulator (ASR) is properly configured.
(F61 through F66, C40 through C45, C50 through C55)
Î Readjust the ASR setting.
[ 5 ] Grating sound is heard from the motor or the motor sound fluctuates.
(1) The specified carrier Check the data of function code F26 (Motor sound (Carrier frequency)).
frequency is too low. Î Increase the data of F26.
(2) The surrounding Measure the temperature inside the panel where the inverter is mounted.
temperature of the inverter Î If it is over 40°C, lower it by improving the ventilation.
was too high. Î Lower the temperature of the inverter by reducing the load.
(3) Resonance with the load. Check the machinery mounting accuracy or check whether there is
resonance with the mounting base.
Î Disconnect the motor from the machinery and run it alone to find where
the resonance comes from. Upon locating the cause, improve the
characteristics of the source of the resonance.
Î Adjust the jump speed (C01 through C04) to avoid continuous running
in the frequency range causing resonance.
Î Specify the observer (H47 through H52, H125 through H127) to
suppress vibration. (Depending on the characteristics of the load, this
may take no effect.)
Î Decrease the P gain of the auto speed regulator (ASR). (F61, C40, C50,
C60)
[ 6 ] The motor does not accelerate or decelerate within the specified time.
(1) The inverter runs the motor Check the data of function codes F67 through F70 (S-curve acceleration/
with S-curve acceleration/ deceleration pattern).
deceleration. Î Select the linear pattern (F67 through F70 = 0).
Î Decrease the acceleration/deceleration time (F07, F08, C46, C47, C56,
C57, C66, C67).
Under V/f control Check whether the acceleration time and torque boost are properly
(2) The current limiting specified.
operation prevented the Î Increase the data of F07, C35, C46, C56 or C66 (acceleration time).
output frequency from Î Decrease the torque boost (P35, A55, A155) and restart the inverter to
increasing (during check that the speed increases.
acceleration).
13-32

Î Reduce the load.
Under V/f control Check that increasing the torque boost (P35, A55, A155) starts the motor.
(4) Torque generated by the Î Increase the value of the torque boost (P35, A55, A155).
motor was insufficient.
(5) An external potentiometer is Check that there is no noise on the control signal wires connecting to
used for frequency setting. external sources.
Î Isolate the control signal wires from the main circuit wires as far as
possible.
Î Use shielded or twisted wires for control signals.
Check whether the external speed command potentiometer is
malfunctioning due to noise from the inverter.
Î Connect a capacitor to the output terminal of the potentiometer or set a
ferrite core on the signal wire. (Refer to Chapter 3, Section 3.3.3.8.)
(6) Motor torque generated is Check whether data of torque limiter related function codes (F40 through
limited by the torque limiter. F45) is correctly configured and the TL2/TL1 terminal command ("Select
torque limiter level 2/1") is correct.
Î Correct the data of F40 through F45 or reset them to the factory defaults.
Check whether the speed command potentiometer is malfunctioning due to
noise from the inverter.
Î Set the TL2/TL1 correctly.
Î Increase the acceleration/deceleration time (F07, F08, C35, C36, C46,
C47, C56, C57, C66, C67).
(7) The specified acceleration Check the terminal commands RT1 and RT2 for acceleration/deceleration
or deceleration time was times.
incorrect. Î Correct the RT1 and RT2 settings.
[ 7 ] The motor does not restart even after the power recovers from a
momentary power failure.
(1) The data of function code Check if an undervoltage trip (lu ) occurs.
F14 is either "0," "1," or "2." Î Change the data of F14 (Restart mode after momentary power failure,
Mode selection) to "3," "4," or "5."
(2) The run command remains Check the input signal with Menu #4 "I/O CHECK" using the keypad.
Chap. 13
OFF even after the power Î Check the power recovery sequence with an external circuit. If
has been restored. necessary, consider the use of a relay that can keep the run command
ON.
In 3-wire operation, the power to the control printed circuit board (control
TROUBLESHOOTING
PCB) has been shut down once because of a long momentary power failure
time, or the HOLD signal ("Enable 3-wire operation") has been turned OFF
once.
Î Change the design or the setting so that a run command can be issued
again within 2 seconds after the power has been restored.
13-33
[ 8 ] The motor abnormally heats up.
(1) Airflow volume of the Visually check whether the cooling fan rotates normally.
motor's cooling fan Î Ask your Fuji Electric representative to repair the motor's cooling fan.
decreased due to the service
life expired or failure
Under V/f control Check whether decreasing the torque boost (P35, A55, A155) decreases the
(2) Excessive torque boost output current but does not stall the motor.
specified. Î If no stall occurs, decrease the torque boost (P35, A55, A155).
Under V/f control Check the running speed of the inverter.
(3) Continuous running in Î Change the speed setting or replace the motor with an exclusive motor
extremely slow speed. for inverters (motor with separately powered cooling fan).
Î Reduce the load.
Î Increase the inverter capacity and motor capacity.
Under vector control For exclusive motors for the FRENIC-VG: Check whether the setting of
(6) Motor defective. Check whether the inverter output voltages (U, V and W) are well-balanced.
Î Repair or replace the motor.
[ 9 ] The motor does not run as expected.

(1) Incorrect setting of function Check that function codes are correctly configured and no unnecessary
code data. configuration has been done.
Î Configure all the function codes correctly.
Make a note of function code data currently configured and then initialize
all function code data using H03.
Î After the above process, reconfigure function codes one by one,
checking the running status of the motor.
(2) Under torque control, the Check the setting of the automatic operation OFF function (H11).
inverter keeps output Î Set the data of H11 to "2" ("Coast to a stop when a run command is
although the run command turned OFF") or "4" ("Coast to a stop when a run command is turned
is OFF. OFF" under torque control).
[ 10 ] When the motor accelerates or decelerates, the speed is not stable.

Under vector control Check whether the automatic speed regulator (ASR) is properly adjusted
with/without speed sensor under speed control.
(1) The control constants of the Î Readjust the ASR (F61 to F66, C40 to C45, C50 to C55).
13-34
[ 11 ] The motor stalls during acceleration.

Under vector control For exclusive motors for the FRENIC-VG: Check whether the setting of
Under V/f control Check the data of F07, C35, C46, C56 or C66 (acceleration time).
(2) The specified acceleration Î Increase the acceleration time.
time is too short.
Under V/f control Measure the inverter output current.
(3) The moment of inertia of the Î Decrease the moment of inertia of the load.
load is large. Î Increase the inverter capacity.
Under V/f control Check the terminal voltage of the motor.
(4) Large voltage drop on wires. Î Use larger size wires between the inverter and motor or make the wiring
distance shorter.
Under V/f control Measure the output current.
(5) The torque of the load is Î Decrease the torque of the load.
large. Î Increase the inverter capacity.
Under V/f control Check that increasing the torque boost (P35, A55, A155) starts the motor.
(6) Torque generated by the Î Increase the value of the torque boost (P35, A55, A155).
motor was insufficient.
[ 12 ] When the T-Link communications option is in use, neither a run command

nor a speed command takes effect.
(1) Incorrect setting of the Check whether the setting of the communications link operation is correct
communications link (H30).
operation (H30). Î Correct the data of H30.
Î Check the status of the X terminal to which the LE command ("Enable
communications link") is assigned.
(2) Incorrect setting of the Check whether the setting of the transmission format is correct (o32).
transmission format (o32). Î Correct the data of o32 (4W + 4W or 8W + 8W).
(3) Incorrect setting of the link Check the current setting of the link number (that should be configured in Chap. 13
number. hexadecimal).
Î Review the function code list.
(4) Data not written to the I/O Check the data held in the I/O relay area, using the MICREX loader.
TROUBLESHOOTING
relay area as assigned. Î Investigate writing into the I/O relay area.
13-35
[ 13 ] When the SX-bus communications option is in use, neither a run
command nor a speed command takes effect.
(2) Terminal command LE is Check the status of the X terminal to which the LE command ("Enable
assigned to an X terminal, communications link") is assigned.
but the terminal is OFF. Î Turn the corresponding X terminal ON.
(3) Incorrect setting of the Check whether the transmission format selected by U11 is identical with the
transmission format (U11). one selected in the system configuration definition.
Î Correct the setting of the transmission format.
(4) Incorrect setting of the link Check the current setting of the link number (that should be configured in
(5) Data not written to the I/O Check the data in application programs, using the SX loader.
relay area as assigned. Î Investigate writing into the I/O memory area.
[ 14 ] When the CC-Link communications option is in use, neither a run

command nor a speed command takes effect.
(2) Terminal command LE is Check the status of the X terminal to which the LE command ("Enable
assigned to an X terminal, communications link") is assigned.
but the terminal is OFF. Î Turn the corresponding X terminal ON.
(3) Incorrect setting of the Check whether the transmission format selected by o32 is identical with the
transmission format (o32). one selected in the system configuration definition.
Î Correct the setting of the transmission format.
(4) Incorrect setting of the link Check the current setting of the link number (that should be configured in
(5) Data not written to the I/O Check the data in application programs, using the PLC loader.
memory area as assigned. Î Investigate writing into the I/O memory area.
13-36
[ 15 ] _ _ _ _ (under bar) appears.

Problem Although you pressed the or key or entered a run forward command FWD or a run reverse
command REV, the motor did not start and an under bar ( _ _ _ _ ) appeared on the LED monitor.

(1) The DC link bus voltage Select Menu #5 "MAINTENANCE" in Programming mode on the keypad
was low. and check the DC link bus voltage which should be 200 VDC or below for
three-phase 200 V class series, and 400 VDC or below for three-phase 400
V class series.
Î Connect the inverter to a power supply that meets its input
specifications.
(2) The main power is not ON, Check whether the main power is turned ON.
while the auxiliary input Î Turn the main power ON.
power to the control circuit
Check whether the short bar is removed from terminals P1 and P(+) or
is supplied.
check the short bar for poor contact.
Î Mount a short bar or DC reactor (DCR) between terminals P1 and P(+).
Or tighten the fixing screw further.
(3) Although power is supplied Check the connection to the main power and check if the H76 data is set to
not via the commercial "1" (factory default).
power line but via the DC Î Correct the data of H76.
link bus, the main power
down detection is enabled
(H76 = 1).
(MCCB, MC, etc.).
Chap. 13
TROUBLESHOOTING
13-37
13.5.2 Problems with inverter settings
[ 1 ] Nothing appears on the monitors.
(1) No power (neither main Check the input voltage and interphase voltage unbalance.
power nor auxiliary control Î Turn ON a molded case circuit breaker (MCCB), a residual-current-
power) supplied to the operated protective device (RCD)/earth leakage circuit breaker (ELCB)
inverter. (with overcurrent protection) or a magnetic contactor (MC).
Î Check for voltage drop, phase loss, poor connections, or poor contacts
and fix them if necessary.
(2) The power for the control Check if the jumper bar has been removed from terminals P1 and P(+) or if
PCB did not reach a there is a poor contact between the jumper bar and those terminals.
sufficiently high level. Î Mount a jumper bar or a DC reactor between terminals P1 and
P(+). For poor contact, tighten up the screws.
(3) The keypad was not Check whether the keypad is properly connected to the inverter.
properly connected to the Î Remove the keypad, put it back, and see whether the problem recurs.
inverter. Î Replace the keypad with another one and check whether the problem
recurs.
When running the inverter remotely, ensure that the extension cable is
securely connected both to the keypad and to the inverter.
Î Disconnect the cable, reconnect it, and see whether the problem recurs.
Î Replace the keypad with another one and check whether the problem
per recurs.
[ 2 ] The desired function code does not appear.

Possible Causes Check and Measures
(1) The function code is not Check whether the function code is located in a different directory.
located in the current Î Display the function codes in the directory, referring to Chapter 3,
directory. Section 3.4.4 "Programming Mode."
If o codes do not appear, check whether an option board is mounted.
Î Display the function codes in the directory, referring to Chapter 3,
Section 3.4.4 "Programming Mode."
Note: No o codes appear unless an option board is mounted.
13-38
[ 3 ] Data of function codes cannot be changed from the keypad.

(1) An attempt was made to Check if the inverter is running with Menu #3 "OPR MNTR" using the
change function code data keypad and then confirm whether the data of the function codes can be
that cannot be changed changed when the motor is running, referring to the function code tables.
when the inverter is Î Stop the motor and then change the data of the function codes.
running.
(2) The data of the function Check the data of function code F00 (Data Protection).
codes is protected. Î Change the data of F00 from "Enable data protection" (F00 = 1) to
"Disable data protection" (F00 = 0).
(3) The WE-KP terminal Check the data of function codes E01 through E09 and the input signal
command ("Enable data status with Menu #4 "I/O CHECK" using the keypad.
change with keypad") is not Î Input a WE-KP command through a digital input terminal.
entered, though it has been
assigned to a digital input
terminal.
(4) The key was not pressed. Check whether you have pressed the key after changing the function
code data.
Î Press the key after changing the function code data.
Î Check that "STORING…" is displayed on the LCD monitor.
(5) The data of function codes Either one of the FWD and REV terminal commands is turned ON.
F02 and E01 through E09 Î Turn OFF both FWD and REV.
cannot be changed.
[ 4 ] Data of function codes cannot be changed via the communications link.

(1) An attempt was made to Check if the inverter is running with Menu #3 "OPR MNTR" using the
change function code data keypad and then confirm whether the data of the function codes can be
that cannot be changed changed when the motor is running, referring to the function code tables.
when the inverter is Î Stop the motor and then change the data of the function codes.
running.
(2) The data of the function Check the data of function code F00 (Data Protection).
codes is protected. Î Change the data of F00 from "Enable data protection" (F00 = 1) to
"Disable data protection" (F00 = 0).
(3) The WE-LK terminal Check the data of function codes E01 through E09 and the input signal
command ("Enable data status with Menu #4 "I/O CHECK" using the keypad.
Chap. 13
change via communications Î Input a WE-LK command through a digital input terminal.
link") is not entered, though
it has been assigned to a
digital input terminal.
TROUBLESHOOTING
(4) The "Full save function" Check that the "Full save function" was executed (H02 = 1).
(H02) was not executed. Î If data of function codes is changed via the communications link,
execute the "Full save function"; otherwise, turning the power OFF
loses the changed data.
(5) The data of function code Either one of the FWD and REV terminal commands is turned ON.
F02 cannot be changed. Î Turn OFF both FWD and REV.
13-39
Appendices
Contents
App. A Advantageous Use of Inverters (Notes on electrical noise) ..................................................... A-1

A.1 Effect of inverters on other devices ......................................................................................... A-1
A.2 Noise........................................................................................................................................ A-2
A.3 Noise prevention...................................................................................................................... A-4
App. B Japanese Guideline for Suppressing Harmonics by Customers Receiving High Voltage or
Special High Voltage ............................................................................................................. A-12
B.1 Application to general-purpose inverters............................................................................... A-12
B.2 Compliance to the harmonic suppression for customers receiving high voltage or
special high voltage ............................................................................................................... A-13
App. C Effect on Insulation of General-purpose Motors Driven with 400 V Class Inverters ............ A-18
C.1 Generating mechanism of surge voltages .............................................................................. A-18
C.2 Effect of surge voltages.......................................................................................................... A-19
C.3 Countermeasures against surge voltages................................................................................ A-19
C.4 Regarding existing equipment ............................................................................................... A-20
App. D Inverter Generating Loss ....................................................................................................... A-21
App. E Conversion from SI Units ...................................................................................................... A-23
App. F Allowable Current of Insulated Wires ................................................................................... A-25
App. A Advantageous Use of Inverters (Notes on electrical noise)
App. A Advantageous Use of Inverters (Notes on electrical

noise)
- Disclaimer: This document provides you with a summary of the Technical Document of the Japan
Electrical Manufacturers' Association (JEMA) (December 2008). It is intended to apply to the domestic
market only. It is only for reference for the foreign market. -
A.1 Effect of inverters on other devices

Inverters have been and are rapidly expanding its application fields. This paper describes the effect
that inverters have on electronic devices already installed or on devices installed in the same system
as inverters, as well as introducing noise prevention measures. (Refer to Section A.3 [3], "Noise
prevention examples" for details.)
[1] Effect on AM radios
Phenomenon If an inverter operates, AM radios may pick up noise radiated from the inverter.
(An inverter has almost no effect on FM radios or television sets.)
Probable cause Radios may receive noise radiated from the inverter.
Countermeasures Inserting a noise filter on the power supply side of the inverter is effective.
[2] Effect on telephones
Phenomenon If an inverter operates, nearby telephones may pick up noise radiated from the
inverter in conversation so that it may be difficult to hear.
Probable cause A high-frequency leakage current radiated from the inverter and motors enters
shielded telephone cables, causing noise.
Countermeasures It is effective to commonly connect the grounding terminals of the motors and
return the common grounding line to the grounding terminal of the inverter.
[3] Effect on pressure sensors
App.
Phenomenon If an inverter operates, pressure sensors may malfunction.
Probable cause Noise may penetrate through a grounding wire into the signal line.
Countermeasures It is effective to install a noise filter on the power supply side of the inverter or
to separate the control circuit wirings from the I/O wires and grounding wires.
[4] Effect on position detectors (pulse encoders)
Phenomenon If an inverter operates, pulse encoders may cause a malfunction that shifts the
stop position of a machine.
Probable cause Erroneous pulses are liable to occur when the signal lines of the PG and power
lines are bundled together.
Countermeasures The influence of induction noise and radiation noise can be reduced by
separating the PG signal lines and power lines. Providing noise filters at the
input and output terminals is also an effective measure.
[5] Effect on proximity switches
Phenomenon If an inverter operates, proximity switches (capacitance-type) may malfunction.
Probable cause The capacitance-type proximity switches may provide inferior noise immunity.
Countermeasures It is effective to connect a filter to the input terminals of the inverter or
implement grounding wiring with a capacitor on the 0 V side of the proximity
switches. The proximity switches can be replaced with superior noise immunity
types such as magnetic types.
A-1
A.2 Noise
This section gives a summary of noises generated in inverters and their effects on devices subject to
noise.
[1] Inverter noise

Figure A.1 shows an outline of the inverter configuration. The inverter converts AC to DC
(rectification) in a converter unit, and converts DC to AC (inversion) with 3-phase variable voltage
and variable frequency. The conversion (inversion) is performed by PWM implemented by
switching six transistors (IGBT: Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor, etc), and is used for variable
speed motor control.
Switching noise is generated by high-speed on/off switching of the six transistors. At each
high-speed on/off switching, noise current (i) flows to the ground through stray capacitance (C) of
the inverter, I/O wire and motor. The amount of the noise current is expressed as follows:
i = C·dv/dt
It is related to the stray capacitance (C) and dv/dt (switching speed of the transistors). Further, this
noise current is related to the carrier frequency since the noise current flows each time the transistors
are switched on or off.
In addition to the main circuit of the inverter, the DC-to-DC switching power regulator (DC/DC
converter), which is the power source for the control circuit of the inverter, may be a noise source in
the same principles as stated above.
The frequency band of this noise over the range of several tens of MHz may affect communications
devices such as AM radios, plant radios, and telephones.
Figure A.1 Outline of Inverter Configuration
A-2
[2] Types of noise

Noise generated in an inverter is propagated through the main circuit wiring to the power supply and
the motor so as to affect a wide range of applications from the power supply transformer to the
motor. The various propagation routes are shown in Figure A.2. According to those routes, noises
are roughly classified into three types--conduction noise, induction noise, and radiation noise.
Conduction noise propagates through routes 1) to 3), induction noise through route 4), and radiation
noise through route 5). Details are described below.
Figure A.2 Noise Propagation Routes
(1) Conduction noise

Noise generated in an inverter may propagate through the conductor and power supply so as to affect
peripheral devices of the inverter (Figure A.3). This noise is called "conduction noise." Some
conduction noises will propagate through the main circuit . If the ground wires are connected to a
common ground, conduction noise will propagate through route . As shown in route , some
conduction noises will propagate through signal lines or shielded wires.
App.
Figure A.3 Conduction Noise
(2) Induction noise

When wires or signal lines of peripheral devices are brought close to the wires on the input and
output sides of the inverter through which noise current is flowing, noise will be induced into those
wires and signal lines of the devices by electromagnetic induction (Figure A.4) or electrostatic
induction (Figure A.5). This is called "induction noise" .
Figure A.4 Electromagnetic Induced Noise
A-3
Figure A.5 Electrostatic Induced Noise
(3) Radiation noise

Noise generated in an inverter may be radiated through the air from main circuit wires or grounding
wires (that act as antennas) at the input and output sides of the inverter so as to affect peripheral
devices or broadcasting and radio-communications. This noise is called "radiation noise" as
shown below. Not only wires but motor frames or control system panels containing inverters may
also act as antennas.
Figure A.6 Radiation Noise
A.3 Noise prevention

The more noise prevention is strengthened, the more effective. However, with the use of appropriate
measures, noise problems may be resolved easily. It is necessary to implement economical noise
prevention according to the noise level and the equipment conditions.
[1] Noise prevention prior to installation
Before installing an inverter in your control panel or installing an inverter panel, you need to
consider noise prevention. Once noise problems occur, it will cost additional materials and time for
solving them.
Noise prevention prior to installation includes:
1) Separating the wiring of main circuits and control circuits
2) Putting main circuit wiring into a metal conduit pipe
3) Using shielded wires or twisted shielded wires for control circuits.
4) Implementing appropriate grounding work and grounding wiring.
These noise prevention measures can avoid most noise problems.
A-4
[2] Implementation of noise prevention measures

There are two types of noise prevention measures--one for noise propagation routes and the other for
noise receiving sides.
The basic measures for lessening the effect of noise at the receiving side include:
1) Separating the main circuit wiring from the control circuit wiring, avoiding noise effect.
The basic measures for lessening the effect of noise at the generating side include:
2) Inserting a noise filter that reduces the noise level.
3) Applying a metal conduit pipe or metal control panel that will confine noise, and
4) Applying an insulated transformer for the power supply that cuts off the noise propagation route.
Table A.1 lists the noise prevention measures, their purposes, and targeted propagation routes.
Table A.1 Noise Prevention Measures
Goal of noise prevention

Conduction route
measures
Make it
Noise prevention method more Cutoff
Reduce Conduc- Induc- Radia-
difficult noise Confine
noise tion tion tion
to conduc- noise
level noise noise noise
receive tion
noise
Separate main circuit
Y Y
from control circuit
Minimize wiring distance Y Y Y Y
Avoid parallel and
Y Y
bundled wiring
Wiring and Use appropriate
installation Y Y Y Y
grounding
Use shielded wire and
Y Y Y
twisted shielded wire
App.
Use shielded cable in
Y Y
main circuit
Use metal conduit pipe Y Y Y
Appropriate arrangement
Control Y Y Y
of devices in panel
panel
Metal control panel Y Y Y
Anti-noise Line filter Y Y Y Y

device Insulation transformer Y Y Y
Use a passive capacitor
Y Y Y
Measures at for control circuit
noise Use ferrite core for
receiving Y Y Y
control circuit
sides
Line filter Y Y
Separate power supply
Y Y Y
systems
Others
Lower the carrier
Y Y Y Y
frequency
Y: Effective, Blank: Not effective
A-5
What follows is noise prevention measures for the inverter drive configuration.
(1) Wiring and grounding
As shown in Figure A.7, separate the main circuit wiring from control circuit wiring as far as
possible regardless of being located inside or outside the system control panel containing an inverter.
Use shielded wires and twisted shielded wires that will block out extraneous noises, and minimize
the wiring distance. Also avoid bundled wiring of the main circuit and control circuit or parallel
wiring.
Control circuit wiring Main circuit wiring
Control
circuit wiring
Figure A.7 Separate Wiring
For the main circuit wiring, use a metal conduit pipe and connect its wires to the ground to prevent
noise propagation (refer to Figure A.8).
The shield (braided wire) of a shielded wire, in principle, should be connected to the base (common)
side of the signal line at only one point to avoid the loop formation resulting from a multi-point
connection (refer to Figure A.9).
The grounding is effective not only to reduce the risk of electrical shocks due to leakage current, but
also to block noise penetration and radiation. Corresponding to the main circuit voltage, the
grounding work should be Class C (300 to 600 VAC, grounding resistance: 10Ω or less) and Class D
(300 VAC or less, grounding resistance: 100Ω or less). Each ground wire is to be provided with its
own ground or separately wired to a grounding point.
Connection terminals
Inverter Inverter
(Common) (Common)
a) When communication b) When communication
terminals are not used terminals are used
Figure A.8 Grounding of Metal Conduit Pipe Figure A.9 Treatment of Braided Wire of
Shielded Wire
(2) Control panel

The system control panel containing an inverter is generally made of metal, which can shield noise
radiated from the inverter itself.
When installing other electronic devices such as a programmable logic controller in the same control
panel, be careful with the layout of each device. If necessary, arrange shield plates between the
inverter and peripheral devices.
A-6
(3) Anti-noise devices

To reduce the noise propagated through the electrical circuits and the noise radiated from the main
circuit wiring to the air, a line filter and insulation transformer should be used (refer to Figure A.10).
Line filters are available in these types--the simplified type such as a capacitive filter to be connected
in parallel to the power supply line and an inductive filter to be connected in series to the power
supply line and the orthodox type such as an LC filter to meet noise regulations. Use them according
to the targeted effect for reducing noise.
Insulation transformers include common insulated transformers, and shielded transformers. These
transformers have different effectiveness in blocking noise propagation.
Inverter
Inverter Inverter
Power Power
supply supply
Power supply
(a) Capacitive filter (b) Inductive filter (c) Input LC filter

(zero-phase reactor)
Figure A.10 Various Filters and their Connection
(4) Noise prevention measures at the receiving side

It is important to strengthen the noise immunity of those electronic devices installed in the same
control panel as the inverter or located near an inverter. Line filters, shielded or twisted shielded
wires are used to block the penetration of noise in the control circuit wirings of these devices. The
following treatments are also implemented.
1) Lower the circuit impedance by connecting capacitors or resistors to the input and output
App.
terminals of the signal circuit in parallel.
2) Increase the circuit impedance for noise by inserting choke coils in series in the signal circuit or
passing signal lines through ferrite core beads. It is also effective to widen the signal base lines (0
V line) or grounding lines.
(5) Other
The level of generating/propagating noise will change with the carrier frequency of the inverter. The
higher the carrier frequency, the higher the noise level.
In an inverter whose carrier frequency can be changed, lowering the carrier frequency can reduce the
generation of electrical noise and result in a good balance with the audible noise of the motor under
driving conditions.
A-7
[3] Noise prevention examples
Table A.2 lists examples of the measures to prevent noise generated by a running inverter.
Table A.2 Examples of Noise Prevention Measures
Target
No. Phenomena Noise prevention measures
device Notes
1 AM When operating an inverter, 1) Install an LC filter at the 1) The radiation
radio noise enters into an AM power supply side of the noise of the wiring
radio broadcast (500 to 1500 inverter. (In some cases, a can be reduced.
kHz). capacitive filter may be
used as a simple method.)
2) Install a metal conduit
wiring between the motor 2) The conduction
and inverter. noise to the power
supply side can be
reduced.
Note: Sufficient
Input
LC filter
improvement may
<Possible cause> not be expected in
The AM radio may receive narrow regions such
noise radiated from wires at as between
the power supply and output mountains.
sides of the inverter.
Note: Minimize the distance
between the input LC filter and
inverter as short as possible
(within 1 m).
2 AM When operating an inverter, 1) Install inductive filters at 1) The radiation
radio noise enters into an AM radio the input and output sides noise of the wiring
broadcast (500 to 1500 kHz). of the inverter. can be reduced.
<Possible cause> The number of turns of

The AM radio may receive the zero-phase reactor (or
noise radiated from the power ferrite ring) should be as
line at the power supply side large as possible. In
of the inverter. addition, wiring between
the inverter and the
zero-phase reactor (or
ferrite ring) should be as
short as possible. (within
1 m)
2) When further
improvement is necessary,
install LC filters.
Input Output
LC filter LC filter
A-8
Table A.2 Continued
Target
device Notes
3 Tele- When driving a ventilation 1) Connect the ground 1) The effect of the
phone fan with an inverter, noise terminals of the motors in inductive filter
(in a enters a telephone in a private a common connection. and LC filter may
common residence at a distance of Return to the inverter not be expected
private 40m. panel, and insert a 1 μF because of sound
residence capacitor between the frequency
at a input terminal of the component.
distance inverter and ground. 2) In the case of a
of 40 m) V-connection
power supply
transformer in a
200V system, it is
necessary to
connect
capacitors as
shown in the
<Possible cause> following figure,
A high-frequency leakage because of
current from the inverter and different
motor flowed to grounded potentials to
part of the telephone cable ground.
shield. During the current's
return trip, it flowed through
a grounded pole transformer,
and noise entered the
telephone by electrostatic
induction.
App.
4 Photo- A photoelectric relay 1) As a temporary measure, 1) The wiring is
electric malfunctioned when the Insert a 0.1 μF capacitor separated by more
relay inverter runs the motor. between the 0 V terminal than 30 cm.
[The inverter and motor are of the power supply 2) When separation
installed in the same place circuit in the detection is impossible,
(for overhead traveling)] unit of the overhead signals can be
photoelectric relay and the received and sent
overhead frame. with dry contacts
etc.
3) Do not wire
low-current signal
Overhead
panel lines and power
lines in parallel.
2) As a permanent measure,
move the 24 V power
supply from the ground to
<Possible cause> the overhead unit so that
It is considered that induction signals are sent to the
noise entered the ground side with relay
photoelectric relay since the contacts in the ceiling part.
inverter's input power supply
line and the photoelectric
relay's wiring are in parallel
separated by approximately
25 mm over a distance of 30
to 40 m. Due to conditions of
the installation, these lines
cannot be separated.
A-9
Table A.2 Continued
Target
device Notes
5 Photo- A photoelectric relay 1) Insert a 0.1 μF capacitor 1) If a low-current
electric malfunctioned when the between the output circuit at the
relay inverter was operated. common terminal of the malfunctioning
amplifier of the side is observed,
photoelectric relay and the measures
the frame. may be simple
and economical.
<Possible cause>
Although the inverter and
photoelectric relay are
separated by a sufficient
distance but the power
supplies share a common
connection, it is considered
that conduction noise entered
through the power supply line
into the photoelectric relay.
6 Prox- A proximity switch 1) Install an LC filter at the 1) Noise generated
imity malfunctioned. output side of the inverter. in the inverter
switch 2) Install a capacitive filter can be reduced.
(capaci- at the input side of the 2) The switch is
tance inverter. superseded by a
type) 3) Ground the 0 V (common proximity switch
mode) line of the DC of superior noise
power supply of the immunity (such
proximity switch through as a magnetic
<Possible cause> a capacitor to the box type).
It is considered that the body of the machine.
capacitance type proximity
switch is susceptible to
conduction and radiation
noise because of its low Output
LC filter
noise immunity.
A-10
Table A.2 Continued
Target
device Notes
7 Pressure A pressure sensor 1) Install an LC filter on 1) The shielded parts
sensor malfunctioned. the input side of the of shield wires for
inverter. sensor signals are
2) Connect the shield of connected to a
the shielded wire of the common point in
pressure sensor to the 0 the system.
V line (common mode) 2) Conduction noise
of the pressure sensor, from the inverter
changing the original can be reduced.
connection.
<Possible cause>
The pressure sensor may
malfunction due to noise that
came from the box body Input LC filter
through the shielded wire.
8 Position Erroneous-pulse outputs from 1) Install an LC filter and a 1) This is an

detector a pulse converter caused a capacitive filter at the example of a
(pulse shift in the stop position of a input side of the inverter. measure where
encoder) crane. 2) Install an LC filter at the the power line and
output side of the inverter. signal line cannot
be separated.
2) Induction noise
Input Output
LC filter LC filter
and radiation
App.
noise at the
output side of the
inverter can be
<Possible cause> reduced.
Erroneous pulses may be
outputted by induction noise
since the power line of the
motor and the signal line of
the PG are bundled together.
9 Program The PLC program 1) Install a capacitive filter 1) Total conduction
mable malfunctions. and an LC filter on the noise and
logic input side of the inverter. induction noise in
controller 2) Install an LC filter on the the electric line
(PLC) output side of the inverter. can be reduced.
3) Lower the carrier
frequency of the inverter.
<Possible cause> Input

LC filter
Output
LC filter
Since the power supply
system is the same for the
PLC (programmable logic
controller) and inverter, it is
considered that noise enters
the PLC through the power
supply.
A-11
App. B Japanese Guideline for Suppressing Harmonics by
Customers Receiving High Voltage or Special High
Voltage
- Disclaimer: This document provides you with a translated summary of the Guideline of the Ministry of
Economy, Trade and Industry. It is intended to apply to the domestic market only. It is only for reference
for the foreign market. -
Agency of Natural Resource and Energy of Japan published the following two guidelines for
suppressing harmonic noise in September 1994.
(1) Guideline for suppressing harmonics in home electric and general-purpose appliances
(2) Guideline for suppressing harmonics by customers receiving high voltage or special high voltage
Assuming that electronic devices generating high harmonics will be increasing, these guidelines are
to establish regulations for preventing high frequency noise interference on devices sharing the
power source. These guidelines should be applied to all devices that are used on the commercial
power lines and generate harmonic current. This section gives a description limited to
general-purpose inverters.
B.1 Application to general-purpose inverters

[1] Guideline for suppressing harmonics in home electric and general-purpose
appliances
Our three-phase, 200 V class series inverters of 3.7 kW or less (FRENIC-MEGA series) were the
products of which were restricted by the "Guideline for Suppressing Harmonics in Home Electric
and General-purpose Appliances" (established in September 1994 and revised in October 1999)
issued by the Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry.
The above restriction, however, was lifted when the Guideline was revised in January 2004. Since
then, the inverter makers have individually imposed voluntary restrictions on the harmonics of their
products.
We, as before, recommend that you connect a reactor (for suppressing harmonics) to your inverter.
[2] Guideline for suppressing harmonics by customers receiving high voltage or special
high voltage
Unlike other guidelines, this guideline is not applied to the equipment itself such as a
general-purpose inverter, but is applied to each large-scale electric power consumer for total amount
of harmonics. The consumer should calculate the harmonics generated from each piece of equipment
currently used on the power source transformed and fed from the high or special high voltage source.
(1) Scope of regulation
In principle, the guideline applies to the customers that meet the following two conditions:
- The customer receives high voltage or special high voltage.
- The "equivalent capacity" of the converter load exceeds the standard value for the receiving
voltage (50 kVA at a receiving voltage of 6.6 kV).
Appendix B.2 [1] "Calculation of equivalent capacity (Pi)" gives you some supplemental
information with regard to estimation for the equivalent capacity of an inverter according to the
guideline.
A-12
App. B Japanese Guideline for Suppressing Harmonics for Customers Receiving High Voltage or Special High Voltage
(2) Regulation
The level (calculated value) of the harmonic current that flows from the customer's receiving point
out to the system is subjected to the regulation. The regulation value is proportional to the contract
demand. The regulation values specified in the guideline are shown in Table B.1.
Appendix B.2 gives you some supplemental information with regard to estimation for the equivalent
capacity of the inverter for compliance to "Japanese guideline for suppressing harmonics by
customers receiving high voltage or special high voltage."
Table B.1 Upper Limits of Harmonic Outflow Current per kW of Contract Demand (mA/kW)
Receiving 5th 7th 11th 13th 17th 19th 23rd Over

voltage 25th
6.6 kV 3.5 2.5 1.6 1.3 1.0 0.90 0.76 0.70

22 kV 1.8 1.3 0.82 0.69 0.53 0.47 0.39 0.36
(3) When the regulation applied

The guideline has been applied. As the application, the estimation for "Voltage distortion factor"
required as the indispensable conditions when entering into the consumer's contract of electric power
is already expired.
B.2 Compliance to the harmonic suppression for customers receiving

high voltage or special high voltage
When calculating the required matters related to inverters according to the guideline, follow the
terms listed below. The following descriptions are based on "Technical document for suppressing
harmonics" (JEAG 9702-1995) published by the Japan Electrical Manufacturer's Association
(JEMA).
[1] Calculation of equivalent capacity (Pi)
App.
The equivalent capacity (Pi) may be calculated using the equation of (input rated capacity) x
(conversion factor). However, catalogs of conventional inverters do not contain input rated
capacities, so a description of the input rated capacity is shown below:
(1) "Inverter rated capacity" corresponding to "Pi"
- In the guideline, the conversion factor of a 6-pulse converter is used as reference conversion
factor 1. It is, therefore, necessary to express the rated input capacity of inverters in a value
including harmonic component current equivalent to conversion factor 1.
- Calculate the input fundamental current I1 from the kW rating and efficiency of the load motor, as
well as the efficiency of the inverter. Then, calculate the input rated capacity as shown below:
Input rated capacity = 3 × (power supply voltage) × I1 × 1.0228/1000 (kVA )
where 1.0228 is the 6-pulse converter's value of (effective current)/(fundamental current).

- When a general-purpose motor or inverter motor is used, the appropriate value shown in Table
B.2 can be used. Select a value based on the kW rating of the motor used, irrespective of the
inverter type.
The input rated capacity shown above is for the dedicated use in the equation to calculate
capacity of the inverters, following the guideline. Note that the capacity cannot be applied
to the reference for selection of the equipment or wires to be used in the inverter input
circuits.
For selection of capacity for the peripheral equipment, refer to the catalogs or technical
documents issued from their manufacturers.
A-13
Table B.2 "Input Rated Capacities" of General-purpose Inverters Determined
by the Applicable Motor Ratings
Applicable motor
0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5
rating (kW)
Pi 200 V 0.57 0.97 1.95 2.81 4.61 6.77 9.07 13.1 17.6 21.8
(kVA) 400 V 0.57 0.97 1.95 2.81 4.61 6.77 9.07 13.1 17.6 21.8
Applicable motor
22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160
rating (kW)
Pi 200 V 25.9 34.7 42.8 52.1 63.7 87.2 104 127

(kVA) 400 V 25.9 34.7 42.8 52.1 63.7 87.2 104 127 153 183
Applicable motor
200 220 250 280 315 355 400 450 500 630
rating (kW)
Pi 200 V
(kVA) 400 V 229 252 286 319 359 405 456 512 570 718
(2) Values of "Ki (conversion factor)"

Depending on whether an optional ACR (AC reactor) or DCR (DC reactor) is used, apply the
appropriate conversion factor specified in the appendix to the guideline. The values of the
conversion factor are listed in Table B.3.
Table B.3 "Conversion Factors Ki" for General-purpose Inverters Determined by Reactors
Circuit Circuit type Conversion Main applications

category factor Ki
w/o reactor K31=3.4 • General-purpose

inverters
w/- reactor (ACR) K32=1.8 • Elevators
3-phase bridge
3 (capacitor w/- reactor (DCR) K33=1.8 • Refrigerators, air
smoothing) conditioning
systems
w/- reactors (ACR and DCR) K34=1.4 • Other general
appliances
Some models are equipped with a reactor as a standard accessory.
[2] Calculation of Harmonic Current

(1) Value of "input fundamental current"
- When you calculate the amount of harmonics according to Table 2 in Appendix of the Guideline, you
have to previously know the input fundamental current.
- Apply the appropriate value shown in Table B.4 based on the kW rating of the motor,
irrespective of the inverter type or whether a reactor is used.
If the input voltage is different, calculate the input fundamental current in inverse
proportion to the voltage.
A-14
Table B.4 "Input Fundamental Currents" of General-purpose Inverters

Determined by the Applicable Motor Ratings
Applicable motor
0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5
rating (kW)
Input 200 V 1.62 2.74 5.50 7.92 13.0 19.1 25.6 36.9 49.8 61.4
fundamental
current (A) 400 V 0.81 1.37 2.75 3.96 6.50 9.55 12.8 18.5 24.9 30.7
6.6 kV converted
49 83 167 240 394 579 776 1121 1509 1860
value (mA)
Applicable motor
22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160
rating (kW)
Input 200 V 73.1 98.0 121 147 180 245 293 357
fundamental
current (A) 400 V 36.6 49.0 60.4 73.5 89.9 123 147 179 216 258
6.6 kV converted
2220 2970 73.5 4450 5450 7450 8910 10850 13090 15640
value (mA)
Applicable motor
200 220 250 280 315 355 400 450 500 630
rating (kW)
Input 200 V
fundamental
current (A) 400 V 323 355 403 450 506 571 643 723 804 1013
6.6 kV converted
19580 21500 24400 27300 30700 34600 39000 43800 48700 61400
value (mA)
App.
(2) Calculation of harmonic current
Usually, calculate the harmonic current according to the Sub-table 3 "Three-phase bridge rectifier
with the smoothing capacitor" in Table 2 of the Guideline's Appendix. Table B.5 lists the contents of
the Sub-table 3.
Table B.5 Generated Harmonic Current (%), 3-phase Bridge Rectifier (Capacitor Smoothing)
Degree 5th 7th 11th 13th 17th 19th 23rd 25th
w/o a reactor 65 41 8.5 7.7 4.3 3.1 2.6 1.8

w/- a reactor (ACR) 38 14.5 7.4 3.4 3.2 1.9 1.7 1.3
w/- a reactor (DCR) 30 13 8.4 5.0 4.7 3.2 3.0 2.2
w/- reactors (ACR and DCR) 28 9.1 7.2 4.1 3.2 2.4 1.6 1.4
- ACR: 3%
- DCR: Accumulated energy equal to 0.08 to 0.15 ms (100% load conversion)
- Smoothing capacitor: Accumulated energy equal to 15 to 30 ms (100% load conversion)
- Load: 100%
Calculate the harmonic current of each degree using the following equation:
Generated nth harmonic current (%)
nth harmonic current (A) = Fundamental current (A) ×
100
A-15
(3) Maximum availability factor
- For a load for elevators, which provides intermittent operation, or a load with a sufficient
designed motor rating, reduce the current by multiplying the equation by the "maximum
availability factor" of the load.
- The "maximum availability factor of an appliance" means the ratio of the capacity of the
harmonic generator in operation at which the availability reaches the maximum, to its total
capacity, and the capacity of the generator in operation is an average for 30 minutes.
- In general, the maximum availability factor is calculated according to this definition, but the
standard values shown in Table B.6 are recommended for inverters for building equipment.
Table B.6 Availability Factors of Inverters, etc. for Building Equipment (Standard Values)
Equipment Inverter capacity Single inverter

type category availability
Air 200 kW or less 0.55
conditioning
system Over 200 kW 0.60
Sanitary pump ⎯⎯⎯ 0.30
Elevator ⎯⎯⎯ 0.25
Refrigerator, 50 kW or less 0.60
freezer
UPS (6-pulse) 200 kVA 0.60
Correction coefficient according to contract demand level

Since the total availability factor decreases if the scale of a building increases, calculating reduced
harmonics with the correction coefficient β defined in Table B.7 is permitted.
Table B.7 Correction Coefficient according to the Building Scale
Contract demand Correction
(kW) coefficient β
300 1.00
500 0.90
1000 0.85
2000 0.80
Note: If the contract demand is between two specified values listed in Table B.7, calculate the value
by interpolation.
Note: The correction coefficient β is to be determined as a matter of consultation between the
customer and electric power company for the customers receiving the electric power over
2000 kW or from the special high voltage lines.
A-16
(4) Degree of harmonics to be calculated

The higher the degree of harmonics, the lower the current flows. This is the property of harmonics
generated by inverters so that the inverters are covered by "The case not causing a special hazard" of
the term (3) in the above Appendix for the 9th or higher degrees of the harmonics.
Therefore, "It is sufficient that the 5th and 7th harmonic currents should be calculated."
[3] Examples of calculation

(1) Equivalent capacity
Input capacity and
Example of loads Conversion factor Equivalent capacity
No. of inverters
[Example 1] 400 V, 3.7 kW, 10 units 4.61 kVA × 10 units K32 = 1.4 4.61 × 10 × 1.4
w/- AC reactor and DC reactor = 64.54 kVA
[Example 2] 400 V, 1.5 kW, 15 units 2.93 kVA × 15 units K34 = 1.8 2.93 × 15 × 1.8
w/- AC reactor = 79.11 kVA
Refer to Table Refer to Table

B.2. B.3.
(2) Harmonic current every degrees

[Example 1] 400 V, 3.7 kW 10 units, w/- AC reactor, and maximum availability: 0.55
Fundamental current
Harmonic current onto 6.6 kV lines (mA)
onto 6.6 kV lines (mA)
5th 7th 11th 13th 17th 19th 23rd 25th

394 × 10 = 3940 (38%) (14.5%) (7.4%) (3.4%) (3.2%) (1.9%) (1.7%) (1.3%)
3940 × 0.55 = 2167
823.5 314.2
Refer to Tables B.4 and
Refer to Table B.5.
B.6.
App.
[Example 2] 400 V，3.7 kW，15 units, w/- AC reactor and DC reactor, and maximum availability: 0.55
Fundamental current
Harmonic current onto 6.6 kV lines (mA)
onto 6.6 kV lines (mA)
5th 7th 11th 13th 17th 19th 23rd 25th

394 × 15 = 5910 (28%) (9.1%) (7.2%) (4.1%) (3.2%) (2.4%) (1.6%) (1.4%)
5910 × 0.55 = 3250.5
910.1 295.8
Refer to Tables B.4 and
Refer to Table B.5.
B.6.
A-17
App. C Effect on Insulation of General-purpose Motors
Driven with 400 V Class Inverters
- Disclaimer: This document provides you with a summary of the Technical Document of the Japan
Electrical Manufacturers' Association (JEMA) (March, 1995). It is intended to apply to the domestic
market only. It is only for reference for the foreign market. -
Preface
When an inverter drives a motor, surge voltages generated by switching the inverter elements are
superimposed on the inverter output voltage and applied to the motor terminals. If the surge voltages
are too high they may have an effect on the motor insulation and some cases have resulted in
damage.
For preventing such cases this document describes the generating mechanism of the surge voltages
and countermeasures against them.
Refer to A.2 [1] "Inverter noise" for details of the principle of inverter operation.
C.1 Generating mechanism of surge voltages

As the inverter rectifies a commercial power source voltage and smoothes into a DC voltage, the
magnitude E of the DC voltage becomes about 2 times that of the source voltage (about 620 V in
case of an input voltage of 440 VAC). The peak value of the output voltage is usually close to this
DC voltage value.
But, as there exists inductance (L) and stray capacitance (C) in wiring between the inverter and the
motor, the voltage variation due to switching the inverter elements causes a surge voltage originating
in LC resonance and results in the addition of high voltage to the motor terminals. (Refer to Figure
C.1)
This voltage sometimes reaches up to about twice that of the inverter DC voltage (620 V x 2 =
approximately 1,200 V) depending on a switching speed of the inverter elements and wiring
conditions.
Figure C.1 Voltage Waveform of Individual Portions
A measured example in Figure C.2 illustrates the relation of a peak value of the motor terminal
voltage with a wiring length between the inverter and the motor.
From this it can be confirmed that the peak value of the motor terminal voltage ascends as the wiring
length increases and becomes saturated at about twice the inverter DC voltage.
The shorter a pulse rise time becomes, the higher the motor terminal voltage rises even in the case of
a short wiring length.
A-18
App. C Effect on Insulation of General-purpose Motors Driven with 400 V Class Inverters
Figure C.2 Measured Example of Wiring Length and Peak Value of Motor Terminal Voltage
C.2 Effect of surge voltages

The surge voltages originating in LC resonance of wiring may be applied to the motor terminals and
depending on their magnitude sometimes cause damage to the motor insulation.
When the motor is driven with a 200 V class inverter, the dielectric strength of the insulation is no
problem since the peak value at the motor terminal voltage increases twice due to the surge voltages
(the DC voltage is only about 300 V).
But in case of a 400 V class inverter, the DC voltage is approximately 600 V and depending on the
wiring length, the surge voltages may greatly increase and sometimes result in damage to the
App.
insulation.
C.3 Countermeasures against surge voltages

When driving a motor with a 400 V class inverter, the following are countermeasures against
damage to the motor insulation by the surge voltages.
[1] Using a surge suppressor unit, SSU

The surge suppressor unit (SSU) is a newly structured unit using circuits based on the
impedance-matching theory of a transmission line. Just connecting the SSU to the surge suppressor
cable of the existing equipment can greatly reduce the surge voltage that results in a motor dielectric
breakdown.
For 50 m of wiring length: SSU 50TA-NS For 100 m of wiring length: SSU 100TA-NS
A-19
[2] Suppressing surge voltages
There are two ways for suppressing the surge voltages, one is to reduce the voltage rise time and
another is to reduce the voltage peak value.
(1) Output reactor
If wiring length is relatively short, the surge voltages can be suppressed by reducing the voltage rise
time (dv/dt) with the installation of an AC reactor on the output side of the inverter. (Refer to Figure
C.3 (1).)
However, if the wiring length becomes long, suppressing the peak voltage due to surge voltage may
be difficult.
(2) Output filter
Installing a filter on the output side of the inverter allows a peak value of the motor terminal voltage
to be reduced. (Refer to Figure C.3 (2).)
(1) Output reactor (2) Output filter
Figure C.3 Method to Suppress Surge Voltage
If the wiring length between the inverter and the motor is comparatively long, the crest
value of the surge voltage can be suppressed by connecting a surge suppressor unit (SSU)
to the motor terminal. For details, refer to Chapter 8, Section 8.5.1.4 "Surge suppression
unit (SSU)."
[3] Using motors with enhanced insulation

Enhanced insulation of a motor winding allows its surge withstanding to be improved.
C.4 Regarding existing equipment

[1] In case of a motor being driven with 400 V class inverter
A survey over the last five years on motor insulation damage due to the surge voltages originating
from switching of inverter elements shows that the damage incidence is 0.013% under the surge
voltage condition of over 1,100 V and most of the damage occurs several months after
commissioning the inverter. Therefore there seems to be little probability of occurrence of motor
insulation damage after a lapse of several months of commissioning.
[2] In case of an existing motor driven using a newly installed 400 V class inverter
We recommend suppressing the surge voltages with the ways shown in Section C.3.
A-20
App. D Inverter Generating Loss
App. D Inverter Generating Loss

The table below lists the inverter generating loss.
zHD specification generating loss

Standard Medium carrier
Power applicable Low carrier (At time of F26 factory High carrier
supply motor Inverter type default setting)
voltage capacity F26 Generating loss Generating loss F26 Generating loss
[kW] [kHz] [W] [W] [kHz] [W]
0.75 FRN0.75VG1S-2J 2 70 95 15 100
1.5 FRN1.5VG1S-2J 2 100 125 15 130
2.2 FRN2.2VG1S-2J 2 130 165 15 170
3.7 FRN3.7VG1S-2J 2 190 245 15 260
5.5 FRN5.5VG1S-2J 2 240 295 15 310
7.5 FRN7.5VG1S-2J 2 300 390 15 415
11 FRN11VG1S-2J 2 450 580 15 620
Three-
15 FRN15VG1S-2J 2 540 670 15 700
phase
200 V 18.5 FRN18.5VG1S-2J 2 660 825 15 860
22 FRN22VG1S-2J 2 790 995 15 1040
30 FRN30VG1S-2J 2 1300 1400 15 1450
37 FRN37VG1S-2J 2 1300 1500 15 1550
45 FRN45VG1S-2J 2 1450 1600 15 1600
55 FRN55VG1S-2J 2 1750 1900 15 1900
75 FRN75VG1S-2J 2 2300 2450 10 2550
90 FRN90VG1S-2J 2 2750 2900 10 3050
3.7 FRN3.7VG1S-4J 2 150 215 15 230
5.5 FRN5.5VG1S-4J 2 170 280 15 300
7.5 FRN7.5VG1S-4J 2 230 375 15 400
11 FRN11VG1S-4J 2 300 480 15 520
15 FRN15VG1S-4J 2 360 560 15 610
App.
18.5 FRN18.5VG1S-4J 2 440 715 15 770
22 FRN22VG1S-4J 2 510 835 15 900
30 FRN30VG1S-4J 2 850 1100 15 1150
37 FRN37VG1S-4J 2 1050 1400 15 1450
45 FRN45VG1S-4J 2 1150 1500 15 1600
55 FRN55VG1S-4J 2 1400 1850 15 1950
Three-
75 FRN75VG1S-4J 2 1750 1950 10 *1 2150
phase
400 V 90 FRN90VG1S-4J 2 2000 2350 10 *1 2600
110 FRN110VG1S-4J 2 2400 2750 10 *1 3050
132 FRN132VG1S-4J 2 2650 3000 10 *1 3300
160 FRN160VG1S-4J 2 3200 3650 10 *1 4000
200 FRN200VG1S-4J 2 4000 4550 10 *1 5000
220 FRN220VG1S-4J 2 4500 5100 10 *1 5600
280 FRN280VG1S-4J 2 5500 6300 10 *1 6900
315 FRN315VG1S-4J 2 6250 7100 10 *1 7800
355 FRN355VG1S-4J 2 6750 7650 10 *1 8450
400 FRN400VG1S-4J 2 7650 8750 10 *1 9650
500 FRN500VG1S-4J 2 9950 10700 5 *1 10700
630 FRN630VG1S-4J 2 12350 13300 5 *1 13300
(*1) If the generating loss set in F26 exceeds the value specified in this table, it is set to the same generating loss as that applied
with the high carrier set regardless of the value in F26.
A-21
zLD specification generating loss
Standard Medium carrier
Power applicable Low carrier (At time of F26 factory High carrier
voltage capacity F26 Generating loss Generating loss F26 Generating loss
[kW] [kHz] [W] [W] [kHz] [W]
37 FRN30VG1S-2J 2 1650 1650 10 *1 1750
45 FRN37VG1S-2J 2 1650 1650 10 *1 1850
Three-
55 FRN45VG1S-2J 2 1850 1850 10 *1 1950
phase
200 V 75 FRN55VG1S-2J 2 2250 2300 10 *1 2400
90 FRN75VG1S-2J 2 2700 2800 5 *1 2800
110 FRN90VG1S-2J 2 3250 3350 5 *1 3350
37 FRN30VG1S-4J 2 1050 1050 10 *1 1250
45 FRN37VG1S-4J 2 1300 1300 10 *1 1550
55 FRN45VG1S-4J 2 1400 1400 10 *1 1700
75 FRN55VG1S-4J 2 2000 2400 5 *1 2400
90 FRN75VG1S-4J 2 2100 2250 5 *1 2250
110 FRN90VG1S-4J 2 2350 2250 5 *1 2250
132 FRN110VG1S-4J 2 2850 3050 5 *1 3050
Three- 160 FRN132VG1S-4J 2 3150 3400 5 *1 3400
phase 200 FRN160VG1S-4J 2 4050 4350 5 *1 4350
400 V 220 FRN200VG1S-4J 2 4400 4750 5 *1 4750
280 FRN220VG1S-4J 2 5850 6200 5 *1 6200
355 FRN280VG1S-4J 2 6750 7300 5 *1 7300
400 FRN315VG1S-4J 2 7800 8350 5 *1 8350
450 FRN355VG1S-4J 2 8450 9100 5 *1 9100
500 FRN400VG1S-4J 2 9600 10350 5 *1 10350
630 FRN500VG1S-4J 2 12050 12950 5 *1 12950
710 FRN630VG1S-4J 2 13500 13500 - -
(*1) If the generating loss set in F26 exceeds the value specified in this table, it is set to the same generating loss as that applied
with the high carrier set regardless of the value in F26.
zMD specification generating loss

Standard Low carrier
Power applicable (At time of F26 factory Medium carrier
voltage capacity Generating loss F26 Generating loss
[kW] [W] [kHz] [W]
110 FRN90VG1S-4J 2250 - -
132 FRN110VG1S-4J 2700 - -
160 FRN132VG1S-4J 3050 - -
200 FRN160VG1S-4J 3900 - -
Three-
220 FRN200VG1S-4J 4250 - -
phase
400 V 250 FRN220VG1S-4J 4850 - -
315 FRN280VG1S-4J 5850 - -
355 FRN315VG1S-4J 6650 - -
400 FRN355VG1S-4J 7250 - -
450 FRN400VG1S-4J 8250 - -
A-22
App. E Conversion from SI Units
App. E Conversion from SI Units

All expressions given in Chapter 3, "SELECTING OPTIMAL MOTOR AND INVERTER
CAPACITIES" are based on SI units (The International System of Units). This section explains how
to convert expressions to other units.
[1] Conversion of units

(1) Force (6) Inertia constant
• 1 (kgf) ≈ 9.8 (N) J (kg·m2) : moment of inertia
• 1 (N) ≈ 0.102 (kgf) GD2 (kg·m2) : flywheel effect
(2) Torque • GD2 = 4 J

• 1 (kgf·m) ≈ 9.8 (N·m) 2
• J = GD
• 1 (N·m) ≈ 0.102 (kgf·m) 4
(7) Pressure and stress
(3) Work and energy
• 1 (mmAq) ≈ 9.8 (Pa) ≈ 9.8 (N/m2)
• 1 (kgf·m) ≈ 9.8 (N·m) = 9.8(J)
= 9.8 (W·s) • 1(Pa) ≈ 1(N/m2) ≈ 0.102 (mmAq)
• 1 (bar) ≈ 100000 (Pa) ≈ 1.02 (kg·cm2)
(4) Power • 1 (kg·cm2) ≈ 98000 (Pa) ≈ 980 (mbar)
• 1 (kgf·m/s) ≈ 9.8 (N·m/s) = 9.8 (J/s) • 1 atmospheric pressure = 1013 (mbar)
= 9.8(W) = 760 (mmHg) = 101300 (Pa)
• 1 (N·m/s) ≈ 1 (J/s) = 1 (W) ≈ 1.033 (kg/cm2)
≈ 0.102 (kgf·m/s)
(5) Rotation speed

2π
• 1 (r/min) = (rad / s) ≈ 0.1047 (rad/s)
60
60
• 1 (rad / s) = (r/min) ≈ 9.549 (r/min)
2π
App.
A-23
[2] Calculation formula
(1) Torque, power, and rotation speed (4) Acceleration torque
2π Driving mode
• P (W) ≈ • N (r/min) • τ (N • m)
60 J (kg • m2) ΔN (r / min)
• τ (N • m) ≈ •
• P ( W ) ≈ 1.026 • N (r/min) • T (kgf • m) 9.55 Δt (s) • ηG
2 ( kg • 2) ΔN ( r / min)
P (W) • T (kgf • m) ≈ GD m •
• τ (N • m) ≈ 9.55 • 375 Δt (s) • ηG
N (r/min)
Braking mode
P (W)
• T (kgf • m) ≈ 0.974 • J (kg • m2) ΔN ( r / min) • ηG
N (r/min) • τ (N • m) ≈ •
9.55 Δt (s)
(2) Kinetic energy 2 ( kg • 2) ΔN ( r / min) • η
1
• T (kgf • m) ≈ GD m • G
• E (J) ≈ 2
• J ( kg • m 2 ) • N 2 [(r/min) ]
375 Δt (s)
182.4
(5) Acceleration time
1 2
• E (J ) ≈ • GD2 ( kg • m2) • N 2 [(r/min) ]
J1 + J 2 / ηG ( kg • m2) ΔN (r / min)
730 • t ACC (s) ≈ •
τ M − τ L / ηG ( N • m ) 9.55
(3) Torque of linear moving load
GD12 + GD 2 2 / ηG (kg • m2) ΔN (r / min)
Driving mode • t ACC (s) ≈ •
T M − T L / ηG (kgf • m) 375
V (m / min)
• τ (N • m) ≈ 0.159 • • F ( N)
N M (r/min) • ηG (6) Deceleration time
V ( m / min) J1 + J 2 • ηG (kg • m2) ΔN (r / min)
• T (kgf • m) ≈ 0.159 • • F ( kgf ) • t DEC (s) ≈ •
N M (r/min) • ηG τM − τL • ηG ( N • m) 9.55
Braking mode GD12 + GD 2 2 • ηG ( kg • m2) ΔN ( r / min)

• t DEC (s) ≈ •
V (m / min) T M − T L • ηG (kgf • m) 375
• τ (N • m) ≈ 0.159 • • F ( N)
N M (r/min) / ηG
V ( m / min)
• T (kgf • m) ≈ 0.159 • • F (kgf )
N M (r/min) / ηG
A-24
App. F Allowable Current of Insulated Wires
App. F Allowable Current of Insulated Wires

The tables below list the allowable current of IV wires, HIV wires, and 600 V cross-linked
polyethylene insulated wires.
IV wires (Maximum allowable temperature: 60°C)
Table F.1 (a) Allowable Current of Insulated Wires
Allow able current Aerial wiring Wiring in the duct (Max. 3 wires in one duct)
Wire size reference value 35°C 40°C 45°C 50°C 55°C 35°C 40°C 45°C 50°C
(mm 2) (up to 30°C) (Io×0.91) (Io×0.82) (Io×0.71) (Io×0.58) (Io×0.40) (Io×0.63) (Io×0.57) (Io×0.49) (Io×0.40)
Io (A) (A) (A) (A) (A) (A) (A) (A) (A) (A)
2.0 27 24 22 19 15 11 17 15 13 10
3.5 37 33 30 26 21 15 23 21 18 14
5.5 49 44 40 34 28 20 30 27 24 19
8.0 61 55 50 43 35 25 38 34 29 24
14 88 80 72 62 51 36 55 50 43 35
22 115 104 94 81 66 47 72 65 56 46
38 162 147 132 115 93 66 102 92 79 64
60 217 197 177 154 125 88 136 123 106 86
100 298 271 244 211 172 122 187 169 146 119
150 395 359 323 280 229 161 248 225 193 158
200 469 426 384 332 272 192 295 267 229 187
250 556 505 455 394 322 227 350 316 272 222
325 650 591 533 461 377 266 409 370 318 260
400 745 677 610 528 432 305 469 424 365 298
500 842 766 690 597 488 345 530 479 412 336
2 x 100 497 452 407 352 288 203 313 283 243 198
2 x 150 658 598 539 467 381 269 414 375 322 263
2 x 200 782 711 641 555 453 320 492 445 383 312
2 x 250 927 843 760 658 537 380 584 528 454 370
2 x 325 1083 985 888 768 628 444 682 617 530 433
2 x 400 1242 1130 1018 881 720 509 782 707 608 496
2 x 500 1403 1276 1150 996 813 575 883 799 687 561
App.
HIV wires (Maximum allowable temperature: 75°C)
Table F.1 (b) Allowable Current of Insulated Wires
Io (A)
( ) ((A)) ((A)) ((A)) ((A)) ((A)) ((A)) ((A)) ((A)) ((A))
2.0 32 31 29 27 24 22 21 20 18 17
3.5 45 42 39 37 33 30 29 27 25 23
5.5 59 56 52 49 44 40 39 36 34 30
8.0 74 70 65 61 55 50 48 45 42 38
14 107 101 95 88 80 72 70 66 61 55
22 140 132 124 115 104 94 92 86 80 72
38 197 186 174 162 147 132 129 121 113 102
60 264 249 234 217 197 177 173 162 151 136
100 363 342 321 298 271 244 238 223 208 187
150 481 454 426 395 359 323 316 296 276 248
200 572 539 506 469 426 384 375 351 328 295
250 678 639 600 556 505 455 444 417 389 350
325 793 747 702 650 591 533 520 487 455 409
400 908 856 804 745 677 610 596 558 521 469
500 1027 968 909 842 766 690 673 631 589 530
2 x 100 606 571 536 497 452 407 397 372 347 313
2 x 150 802 756 710 658 598 539 526 493 460 414
2 x 200 954 899 844 782 711 641 625 586 547 492
2 x 250 1130 1066 1001 927 843 760 741 695 648 584
2 x 325 1321 1245 1169 1083 985 888 866 812 758 682
2 x 400 1515 1428 1341 1242 1130 1018 993 931 869 782
2 x 500 1711 1613 1515 1403 1276 1150 1122 1052 982 883
A-25
600 V Cross-linked Polyethylene Insulated wires (Maximum allowable temperature: 90°C)
Table F.1 (c) Allowable Current of Insulated Wires

Io (A) (A) (A) (A) (A) (A) (A) (A) (A) (A)
2.0 38 36 34 32 31 29 25 24 22 21
3.5 52 49 47 45 42 39 34 33 31 29
5.5 69 66 63 59 56 52 46 44 41 39
8.0 86 82 78 74 70 65 57 54 51 48
14 124 118 113 107 101 95 82 79 74 70
22 162 155 148 140 132 124 108 103 97 92
38 228 218 208 197 186 174 152 145 137 129
60 305 292 279 264 249 234 203 195 184 173
100 420 402 384 363 342 321 280 268 253 238
150 556 533 509 481 454 426 371 355 335 316
200 661 633 605 572 539 506 440 422 398 375
250 783 750 717 678 639 600 522 500 472 444
325 916 877 838 793 747 702 611 585 552 520
400 1050 1005 961 908 856 804 700 670 633 596
500 1187 1136 1086 1027 968 909 791 757 715 673
2 x 100 700 670 641 606 571 536 467 447 422 397
2 x 150 927 888 848 802 756 710 618 592 559 526
2 x 200 1102 1055 1008 954 899 844 735 703 664 625
2 x 250 1307 1251 1195 1130 1066 1001 871 834 787 741
2 x 325 1527 1462 1397 1321 1245 1169 1018 974 920 866
2 x 400 1751 1676 1602 1515 1428 1341 1167 1117 1055 993
2 x 500 1978 1894 1809 1711 1613 1515 1318 1262 1192 1122
A-26
High Performance, Vector Control Inverter
User's Manual
First Edition, July 2012
Fuji Electric Co., Ltd.
The purpose of this manual is to provide accurate information in the handling, setting up and operating of
the FRENIC-VG series of inverters. Please feel free to send your comments regarding any errors or
omissions you may have found, or any suggestions you may have for generally improving the manual.
In no event will Fuji Electric Co., Ltd. be liable for any direct or indirect damages resulting from the
application of the information in this manual.

Frenic-VG User Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Frenic-VG User Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Frenic-VG User Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

High Performance, Vector Control Inverter

Name Material No. Description

Product scope, features, specifications, external

Guideline for Suppressing Harmonics in Home Electric and General-purpose

Japanese Guideline for Suppressing Harmonics by Customers Receiving

This manual contains Chapters 1 through 13 and Appendices.

Chapter 3 PREPARATION AND TEST RUN

Chapter 4 CONTROL AND OPERATION

Chapter 5 USING STANDARD RS-485

Chapter 6 CONTROL OPTIONS

Chapter 7 APPLICATION EXAMPLES

Chapter 8 SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT

Chapter 9 SELECTING OPTIMAL MOTOR AND INVERTER CAPACITIES

Chapter 10 ABOUT MOTORS

Chapter 11 OPERATION DATA

Chapter 3 PREPARATION AND TEST RUN

Chapter 4 CONTROL AND OPERATION

Chapter 5 USING STANDARD RS-485

Chapter 6 CONTROL OPTIONS

Chapter 7 APPLICATION EXAMPLES

Chapter 8 SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT

Chapter 9 SELECTING OPTIMAL MOTOR AND INVERTER CAPACITIES

Chapter 10 ABOUT MOTORS

Chapter 11 OPERATION DATA

Chapter 12 REPLACEMENT DATA

Failure to heed the information indicated by this symbol may lead to

Failure to heed the information indicated by this symbol may lead to

• Install the inverter on a base made of metal or other non-flammable material.

• Do not support the inverter by its front cover during transportation.

• Treat the inverter as an industrial waste when disposing of it.

Speed control mode

Torque control mode

This icon indicates a reference to more detailed information.

1.1 Overview............................................................................................................................................. 1-1

1.1.2 System support

1.1.3 Extensive built-in functionality

1.1.4 Broad capacity and application ranges

z The OPC-VG1-SAFE functional safety option allows safety functionality to be expanded.

z Optional support is available for various open networks.

Speed response of 600 Hz Tracking characteristics with impact load

Reduction of rotational unevenness to 1/3 Speed and torque characteristics

1.2.3 Broad capacity range/flexible application range

1.2.4 User program functionality (option: UPAC)*1

RS-485 (38.4 kbps)

UPAC installed on FRENIC-VG master device only

Dedicated FRENIC-VG motor or

1.2.5 Extensive network support

MICREX-SX with T-Link module

T-Link (500 kbps)

RS-485 (38.4 kbps) RS-485/RS-232C

1.2.6 Available inverter support loader

After being connected to a

The loader operates on

z Built-in observer function for suppressing load oscillation

z Load compensation control function

z Extensive position control functionality

z Built-in braking unit

z Total of 23 I/O contacts

1.2.8 Extensive maintenance and protective functionality

z I/O terminal check function